TECHNICALPart 6

SCOPE OF WORK (ARCHITECTURAL)
OF PIPELINE LAYING & TERMINAL Document No.

B185-000-83-41-SOW-9004
WORKS FOR INDIA - BANGLADESH
Rev No. 0
FRIENDSHIP PIPELINE PROJECT Page 21 of 21
)
SL. ITEM/ NAME OF MANUFACTURER PLACE BRAND NAME
I MPIL STEEL STRUCTURES LIMITED MUMBAI
PENNAR ENGINEERED BUILDING SYSTEM

J HYDRABAD
LTD
K PHENIX CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGIES AHMEDABAD
PKM METAL BUILDINGS COMPANY PRIVATE

L CHENNAI
LIMITED
M SAXENA MARINE TECH (P) LTD NOIDA
N SUPER DISCO ISPAT PVT LTD NEW DELHI
O SUPERTECH (INDIA) PVT LTD NOIDA
15.0 ALUMINIUM COMPOSITE PANEL
15.1 ACP
A 3A COMPOSITES INDIA PVT LTD MUMBAI ALUCOBOND
B ALUBOND DACS INDIA PVT LTD MUMBAI ALUBOND
C EURO PANEL PRODUCTS PVT LTD MUMBAI EUROBOND
D SONIA PLASTICS PVT LTD NEW DELHI HYNADECOR
E VIVA COMPOSITE PANEL (P) LTD MEMBAI VIVA
5.5 Schedule of Rates for Architectural works
- B185-000-83-41-MK-SOR-9540-C
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1 Copyrights EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2400 of 3884

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
REF. DWG. NO. REFERENCE DRAWING TITLE
B185-000-83-41-19001
A B A B PROFILE OF DOORS, A
A
WINDOWS & VENTILATORS
SCALE 1:20
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES & LEVELS IN METRES.
2. FOR EXACT LOCATION/LEVELS REFER GENERAL CIVIL AREA DRG./
PLOT PLAN.
3. ±0.00 INDICATES FINISHED APPROACH ROAD LEVEL NEAR THE
B
+3.00 LVL. +3.00 LVL.
B
BUILDING.
BOB LEVEL BOB LEVEL 4. CO-ORDINATES SHALL BE VERIFIED AT SITE BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION.
5. ALL OUTSIDE SURFACES SHALL BE FINISHED WITH 18MM. THK
PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER ON BRICK SURFACES & 6MM THK PLAIN
GUARD PANTRY CEMENT PLASTER ON R.C.C. SURFACES, EXCEPT SAND FACE
ROOM PLASTER WHEREVER MENTIONED.
+0.30 LVL. +0.30 LVL. 6. ALL INTERNAL WALLS SHALL BE FINISHED WITH 12MM THK PLAIN
C FFL(PLINTH) ±0.00 LVL. FFL(PLINTH) ±0.00 LVL. CEMENT PLASTER ON PERIPHERIAL WALLS & 12MM/15MM THK C
TOP OF APPROCH TOP OF APPROCH PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER ON EITHER SIDE OF INTERNAL WALLS.
ROAD LVL. ROAD LVL.
6MM THK PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER SHALL BE PROVIDED ON R.C.C.
SURFACES.
7. ALL CUTOUTS IN FLOOR, WALLS TO BE KEPT AS PER
REQUIREMENT OF RESPECTIVE DEPARTMENTS.
SECTION B - B ELEVATION-4 8. 1000 WIDE PLINTH PROTECTION WITH BUILDING DRAIN SHALL BE
PROVIDED ALL AROUND THE BUILDING.
D 9. ALL SUNSHADE & ROOF PROJECTIONS SHALL HAVE DRIP MOULD D
GROOVES UNDERNEATH ALL ALONG THE PERIPHERIES.
1 2 B A 10. ALL DOORS, GATES ETC. SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH FACILITY OF

LOCKING THE DOORS.
11.CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK THE ACTUAL OPENING SIZE AT SITE
AND NUMBER OF DOORS/WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS ETC.
BEFORE FABRICATING/PROCURING THE SAME.
E
izLrqr vkjs[k ,oa blesa fufgr fMt+kbu bathfu;LkZ bafM;k fyfeVsM dh LkaifRr gSA ;s ek= m/kkj fn, x, gSa vkSj m/kkjdrkZ us ;g Li"V Lke>kSrk fd;k gS fd u rks mUgsa iqu% eqfnzr fd;kk tk,xk] u udy dh tk,xh] u
LEGEND:
FFL: FINISH FLOOR LEVEL AIR CONDITIONED FALSE FLOORING
m/kkj fn, tk,axs] u iznf'kZr fd, tk,axs vkSj u gh Lkhfer vkSj futh iz;ksx ds vykok budk dksbZ vU; iz;ksx gksxk vkSj ;g iz;ksx m/kkj nsus okys }kjk m/kkjdrkZ dks fyf[kr :i esa nh xbZ Lkgefr Lks gksxk A
FRL: FINISH ROAD LEVEL/

TOP OF APPROCH ROAD LEVEL
+3.00 LVL. +3.00 LVL. *UD; UNDER DECK INSULATION
BOB LEVEL BOB LEVEL
GUARD FALSE CEILING

ROOM
The drawing, design and details given on this format are the property of ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED. They are merely loaned on the borrower's express agreement that
F
they will not be reproduced, copied, exhibited or used, except in the limited way permitted by a written consent given by the lender to the borrower for the intended use.
+0.30 LVL. +0.30 LVL. SCHEDULE OF DOOR & WINDOWS

FFL(PLINTH) ±0.00 LVL. FFL(PLINTH) ±0.00 LVL.
TOP OF APPROCH TOP OF APPROCH
ROAD LVL. ROAD LVL.
G G
SECTION A - A ELEVATION-2
1 2 2 1
H H
+3.00 LVL. +3.00 LVL.

I I
BOB LEVEL BOB LEVEL
+0.30 LVL. +0.30 LVL.

FFL(PLINTH) ±0.00 LVL. FFL(PLINTH) ±0.00 LVL.
J TOP OF APPROCH TOP OF APPROCH J
ROAD LVL. ROAD LVL.
B
ELEVATION-1 ELEVATION-3
K K
ELEVATION-3 ELEVATION-3
B B
L L
TOILET PANTRY
ELEVATION-2
ELEVATION-4
ELEVATION-2
ELEVATION-4
M GUARD
ROOM
OPEN
TERRACE
A A A A
A A
N
N
C 02.05.2019 REVISED & ISSUED FOR TENDER JR MKV RS
B 08.04.2019 ISSUED FOR TENDER JR MKV RS
A 22.10.2018 ISSUED FOR COMMENTS JR MKV RS
REV. DATE REVISIONS BY CHKD APPD PEM/PC
O
1 2 1 2
(A Govt. of India Undertaking)
uqekyhx< fjQkbZujh fyfeVsM] vLkke

ELEVATION-1 ELEVATION-1 NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED,ASSAM
B
इंडिया-बांग्लादेश ÝSaMfÓi INDIA-BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP
ikbiykbZu izkstsDV PIPELINE PROJECT
P NOTE:-
GROUND FLOOR PLAN ROOF PLAN गार्ड हाउस बिल्डिंग GUARD HOUSE BUILDING
P
(TYPICAL)(SV-1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
REFER OVERALL PLOT PLAN (ISSUED BY EWS DEPTT.)FOR EXACT Iyku] ,sfyos'ku vkSj dkV PLAN, ELEVATION & SECTIONS
LOCATION,ORIENTATION &COORDINATES OF GAURD ROOM.
SCALE JOB NO. UNIT DIVN. DEPT. DWG. NO. REV.
Page 2401 of 3884

1:100 B 1 8 5 0 0 0 8 3 4 1 19001 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3-1641-0500 REV.2 A1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B185-030-83-41-19001
B185-010-83-41-19001 CONTROL ROOM(DISPATCH)- PLAN & SECTIONS
B185-010-83-41-19002 CONTROL ROOM(DISPATCH)- ROOF PLAN & SECTION
B185-010-83-41-19003 CONTROL ROOM(DISPATCH)- ELEVATIONS
B185-010-83-41-19004 CONTROL ROOM(DISPATCH)- PROFILE OF DOOR, WINDOWS & VENTILATORS A
A
SCHEDULE OF FINISHING
A-EXTERNAL :- (a)18mm THK. WATER PROOF CEMENT PLASTER FINISHED WITH
WEATHER RESISTANT EXTERIOR ACRYLIC EMULATION PAINT AS/SPECIFIED.
A B C (b) 6MM THK WATER PROOF CEMENT PLASTER UNDERNEATH PROJECTION OF

SUNSHADE,CANOPIES, RCC,GUTTER FINISHED WITH EXTERIOR ACRYLIC
EMULTION PAINT AS SPECIFIED.
PLOT PLAN.
WATER PROOFING:- 4mmh
tkAPPMOD
F
EIDRE
N
IFORCEDB
TIUM
N
IUM
SEMBRANEWATERPROOF
N
IGOVERCCSLABAS/SPEC
F
EID 3. ±0.00 INDICATES FINISHED APPROACH ROAD LEVEL NEAR THE
B
B
BUILDING.
PLASTER:- 4. CO-ORDINATES SHALL BE VERIFIED AT SITE BEFORE
(a) 230 THK. BRICK WALL SHALL HAVE 12 mm THK.PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER 1:4 (1 CEMENT :4
FINE SAND) ON PLUMB SURFACE SIDE AND 15mm THK.PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER1:4 (1 CONSTRUCTION.
CEMENT :4 FINE SAND) ON ROUGH SURFACE SIDE. 5. ALL OUTSIDE SURFACES SHALL BE FINISHED WITH 18MM. THK
(b) ALL BEAMS ,COLUMNS,CEILING,SUNSHADE,CANOPIES AND R.C.C SURFACES SHALL HAVE PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER ON BRICK SURFACES & 6MM THK PLAIN
6MM THK. PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER 1:4(1 CEMENT:4 FINE SAND).
TOP OF SLAB (c) ALL SUNSHADES CANOPIES AND R.C.C. GUTTER PROJECTIONS SHALL HAVE DRIP MOULD CEMENT PLASTER ON R.C.C. SURFACES, EXCEPT SAND FACE
GROOVES UNDERNEATH ALL ALONG PERIPHERY. PLASTER WHEREVER MENTIONED.
B-INTERNAL 6. ALL INTERNAL WALLS SHALL BE FINISHED WITH 12MM THK PLAIN
C ROOM/AREA FLOORING WALLS CEILING CEMENT PLASTER ON PERIPHERIAL WALLS & 12MM/15MM THK C
CONSOLE ROOM FALSE FLOORING WITH CEMENT PLASTER WITH POP PUNNING FINISHED FALSE CEILING -COMBINATION OF GYPSUM PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER ON EITHER SIDE OF INTERNAL WALLS.
HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE WITH PLASTIC EMULSION BOARD & PVC LAMINATED GYPSUM TILE 6MM THK PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER SHALL BE PROVIDED ON R.C.C.
UNDER DECK INSULATION IS PROVIDED
SURFACES.
RACK ROOM, SERVER ROOM FALSE FLOORING WITH CEMENT PLASTER WITH POP PUNNING FINISHED FALSE CEILING -COMBINATION OF GYPSUM 7. ALL CUTOUTS IN FLOOR, WALLS TO BE KEPT AS PER
HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE WITH PLASTIC EMULSION BOARD & PVC LAMINATED GYPSUM TILE
UNDER DECK INSULATION IS PROVIDED REQUIREMENT OF RESPECTIVE DEPARTMENTS.
8. 1000 WIDE PLINTH PROTECTION WITH BUILDING DRAIN SHALL BE
CONSOLE UPS ROOM FALSE FLOORING WITH
HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE
CEMENT PLASTER WITH POP PUNNING FINISHED FALSE CEILING -COMBINATION OF GYPSUM
BOARD & PVC LAMINATED GYPSUM TILE PROVIDED ALL AROUND THE BUILDING.
WITH PLASTIC EMULSION
D ±0.750 LVL. LOBBY ROOM UNDER DECK INSULATION IS PROVIDED 9. ALL SUNSHADE & ROOF PROJECTIONS SHALL HAVE DRIP MOULD D
FFL BATTERY ROOM ACID ALKALI RESISTANT TILE FLOOR ACID RESISTEMT TILE DADO 2500 HIGH & FALSE CEILING -COMBINATION OF GYPSUM GROOVES UNDERNEATH ALL ALONG THE PERIPHERIES.
±0.00 LVL. +0.15 LVL. OIL BOUND DISTEMPER ABOVE BOARD & PVC LAMINATED GYPSUM TILE
UNDER DECK INSULATION IS PROVIDED 10. ALL DOORS, GATES ETC. SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH FACILITY OF
TOP OF APPROCH FFL
LOCKING THE DOORS.
LOBBY & CORRIDOR GRANITE FLOORING CEMENT PLASTER WITH POP PUNNING FINISHED FALSE CEILING -COMBINATION OF GYPSUM
BOARD & PERFORATED GYPSUM TILE 11.CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK THE ACTUAL OPENING SIZE AT SITE
WITH PLASTIC EMULSION
AND NUMBER OF DOORS/WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS ETC.
PACKAGE AC ROOM/ AC PLANT RROM HEAVY DUTY CEMENT CONC. FLOORING CEMENT PLASTER WITH OIL BOUND DISTEMPER CEMENT PLASTER WITH OIL
BOUND DISTEMPER
E
SECTION B - B CLEAN AGENT ROOM HEAVY DUTY CEMENT CONC. FLOORING CEMENT PLASTER WITH OIL BOUND DISTEMPER CEMENT PLASTER WITH OIL
LEGEND:
BOUND DISTEMPER AIR CONDITIONED FALSE FLOORING
FFL: FINISH FLOOR LEVEL
TOILET & PANTRY NON SLIP CERAMIC TILE CERAMIC TILE DADO UP TILL CEILING/FALSE CEILING GYPSUM BOARD FALSE CEILING FRL: FINISH ROAD LEVEL/
STAIRS & ENTRANCE RAMP GRANITE FINISH IN RISER, TREAD & RAMP SERVICE RAMPS FOR EQUIPMENT ENTRY HEAVY DUTY CEMENT CONC. FLOORING
UNDERDECK INSULATION FALSE CEILING

F
SCHEDULE OF DOOR & WINDOWS
G G
H H
I I
RACK CONSOLE UPS BATTERY

CLEAN AGENT ROOM ROOM ROOM ROOM
ROOM
J J
K
AC PLANT K
ROOM
LOBBY
PANTRY JAN. ELECTRICAL
ROOM
TOI. OFFICE
TOI.
L L
N
1 2 3 4 5 6 REV. DATE REVISIONS BY CHKD APPD PEM/PC
O B
O

NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED,ASSAM
GROUND FLOOR PLAN इंडिया-बांग्लादेश ÝSaMfÓi INDIA-BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP
CONTROL ROOM
P
कंट्रोल कक्ष
P
(RECIEVING TERMINAL-PARBATIPUR)
Iyku और काट PLAN, SECTION
Page 2402 of 3884

1:100 B 1 8 5 0 3 0 8 3 4 1 19001 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3-1641-0500 REV.2 A1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B185-000-83-41-19011
A

PLOT PLAN.
A 3. ±0.00 INDICATES FINISHED APPROACH ROAD LEVEL NEAR THE

B
B
BUILDING.
4. CO-ORDINATES SHALL BE VERIFIED AT SITE BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION.
ELEVATION-3 5. ALL OUTSIDE SURFACES SHALL BE FINISHED WITH 18MM. THK
PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER ON BRICK SURFACES & 6MM THK PLAIN
CEMENT PLASTER ON R.C.C. SURFACES, EXCEPT SAND FACE
PLASTER WHEREVER MENTIONED.
6. ALL INTERNAL WALLS SHALL BE FINISHED WITH 12MM THK PLAIN
C C
CEMENT PLASTER ON PERIPHERIAL WALLS & 12MM/15MM THK
PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER ON EITHER SIDE OF INTERNAL WALLS.
C A B C 6MM THK PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER SHALL BE PROVIDED ON R.C.C.

SURFACES.
7. ALL CUTOUTS IN FLOOR, WALLS TO BE KEPT AS PER
REQUIREMENT OF RESPECTIVE DEPARTMENTS.
8. 1000 WIDE PLINTH PROTECTION WITH BUILDING DRAIN SHALL BE
PROVIDED ALL AROUND THE BUILDING.
D 9. ALL SUNSHADE & ROOF PROJECTIONS SHALL HAVE DRIP MOULD D
GROOVES UNDERNEATH ALL ALONG THE PERIPHERIES.

10. ALL DOORS, GATES ETC. SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH FACILITY OF
OPEN
B
LOCKING THE DOORS.
11.CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK THE ACTUAL OPENING SIZE AT SITE
TERRACE AND NUMBER OF DOORS/WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS ETC.
E
LEGEND:
FFL: FINISH FLOOR LEVEL AIR CONDITIONED FALSE FLOORING
FRL: FINISH ROAD LEVEL/

*UD; UNDER DECK INSULATION
+3.95 LVL.
TOS
FALSE CEILING
A
F
TELECOM & SCADA SCHEDULE OF DOOR & WINDOWS

ROOM
+0.45 LVL.
FFL(PLINTH) ±0.00 LVL.
TOP OF APPROCH
ROAD LVL.
G G
A
SECTION A - A
H
1 3 ELEVATION-1 4 5 H
GROUND FLOOR PLAN
I I
A
J J
ELEVATION-3
K K
C
TOIL.
STORE
TELECOM & SCADA
L
ELECT. EQUP ROOM L
ROOM
STAIR
B
M BATTERY
ROOM
LOBBY
A
N
N
C 02.05.2019 REVISED & ISSUED FOR TENDER JR MKV RS
O
A uqekyhx< fjQkbZujh fyfeVsM] vLkke

इंडिया-बांग्लादेश ÝSaMfÓi INDIA-BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP
1 2 3 ELEVATION-1 4 5
P
रिपीटर बिल्डिंग REPEATER BUILDING
P
GROUND FLOOR PLAN SCALE
Iyku] ,sfyos'ku vkSj dkV
JOB NO. UNIT
(TYPICAL)(SV-1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
PLAN, & SECTION
DIVN. DEPT. DWG. NO. REV.
Page 2403 of 3884

1:100 B 1 8 5 0 0 0 8 3 4 1 19011 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3-1641-0500 REV.2 A1
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
eiegat ENGINEERS
1 FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
Ogejl kiPte-gW INDIA LIMITED 6-75-0001 Rev. 6
WWI IETIsre,7,1.A1-070 (A Gov( of (Ado Undertaking) GENERAL Page 1 of 7
cukqctIcil
41114) fq1-9ft
NWP
-11.1-111-1 I du-I I ulll
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
GENERAL
6 20.03.17
REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
PD JS/ JKB
1—
R. SRIVASTAVA
Pb›.
R.NANDA
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
5 15.03.12 PD SD JKB D. MALHOTRA
SPECIFICATION
RENAMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD V.
4 21.03.07 SD JKB ARVIND KUMAR
SPECIFICATION CHATURVEDI
REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD
3 11.03.99 SD MLB SCJ AS
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
2 16.03.94 JS JS AKG AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Rev. Committee Bureau
Prepared Checked
Date Purpose Convenor Chairman
No by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 2404 of 3884

15if4-zA ENGINEERS
Oge.0 lelfAeg INDIA LIMITED FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS 6-75-0001 Rev. 6
I wn 2:12d+R JP0.4)
GENERAL
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials

BS : British Standards
BIS : Bureau of Indian Standards
Structural Standards Committee
Convener: Mr. Rajan ji Srivastava
Members: Mr. J.K. Bhagchandani

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S.K. Naskar
Mr. V.K. Panwar
Mr. Charanjit Singh (Projects)
Mr. Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
Page 2405 of 3884

lafteq „^)
, ENGINEERS
Itgar Weg INDIA LIMITED FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS 6-75-0001 Rev. 6
Govf of India Undeflak,o91
GENERAL Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 DEFINITIONS 4
3.0 CODES & SPECIFICATIONS 4
4.0 MANUFACTURER 4
5.0 CONFLICTS & CONTRADICTIONS 5
6.0 MATERIALS 5
7.0 WORKMANSHIP 5
8.0 PACKAGING, SHIPPING, DELIVERY & STORAGE 6
9.0 SUBMITTALS 6
10.0 MEASUREMENT 7
Page 2406 of 3884

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS 6-75-0001 Rev. 6
i silWr elecntrogJacn-a) A Govt of india Undettakml
GENERAL Page 4 of 7
1.0 GENERAL
This specification establishes and defines various aspects of specifications of Architectural

works such as codes, references, manufacturer, conflicts and contradictions, materials,
workmanship, packaging, shipping, delivery and storage, testing, submittals and measurement
etc. and shall be applicable for all the Architectural specifications.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Contractor
The party which carries out all or part of the design, engineering, procurement, construction,
commissioning or management of the Project. Contractor includes its approved
Manufacturers, Vendors, Suppliers, and subcontractor's. Requirements of this specification
shall be enforced at all levels of the Contractor's design, engineering, procurement,
construction process.
2.2 Subcontractor
The party which is engaged by the "Contractor" and carries out all or part of the design,
engineering, procurement, construction of the system (s).
2.3 Manufacturer/ Supplier/ Vendor
The party which manufactures and/or supplies equipment, materials, technical documents/
drawings and services to perform the duties specified by the "Contractor".
2.4 Shall
Indicates a mandatory requirement.
2.5 Should
Indicates a strong recommendation to comply with the requirements of this document.
3.0 CODES & SPECIFICATIONS
Codes and standards as indicated in the specifications form a part of specifications. When an
edition date is not indicated for a code or standard, the latest edition and addendum or
amendment in force at time of contract award shall apply.
Alternate codes and standards meeting the requirements of the referenced codes and standards
may be used with the approval of the competent authority.
It shall be Contractor's responsibility to be, or to become, knowledgeable of the requirements

of any referenced codes and standards.
4.0 MANUFACTURER
Manufacturers listed for particular item in the specifications are the acceptable Manufacturers
for that particular item. Products by other Manufacturers which are of equal quality and
performance may be considered for approval upon review of information as required and
submitted to the competent authority. However the contractor to ensure that the time schedule
is adhered to in any case.
Product data sheet, specifications, performance data, installation instructions and other
Page 2407 of 3884

ENGINEERS
41gejfitt5legVI, INDIA LIMITED FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS 6-75-0001 Rev. 6
t.,,,,,,araavosm IA Govt o India Undeitak.91
GENERAL Page 5 of 7
recommendations of such listed or approved Manufacturers also form part of the

specifications subject to compliance with other requirements specified.
Materials, installation method and other requirements for execution of any item if required by
Manufacturer's installation instructions, recommendations and requirements shall also form
part of the specifications whether specified or not.
Specifications which are based on one particular manufacturer's product are for reference to
maintain the quality.
5.0 CONFLICTS & CONTRADICTIONS
Specifications, Scope of Work, Schedule of rates and drawings for a particular Tender shall be
read in conjunction with each other. In case of conflicts/ contradictions amongst them, the
clarification shall be obtained from the Engineer-In-Charge whose decision shall be final &
binding. Following procedure shall be followed for the necessary clarification.
A. Item description shall prevail over specifications for item rate tenders when provisions
therein are different from those in specifications. Whenever any requirement is not
covered in item description but are covered in specifications, the specifications shall be
followed in addition to the requirements of item description .No extra payment shall be
made to the Contractor for executing such item as per specification.
B. Whenever drawings call for requirements different from or additional to those in item
description and specification, the decision of the Engineer-In-Charge shall be obtained
in writing. However no extra payment shall be made to the Contractor for executing any
work incorporating requirements additional to those in item description and
specification but covered in applicable drawings or standards attached to the tender.
6.0 MATERIALS
All materials shall be of standard quality conforming to the specifications & IS or equivalent
such as ASTM, BS etc and shall be obtained from the approved Manufacturer.
The Contractor shall get the samples of materials approved by the Engineer-In-Charge before
ordering & procurement. Such approved samples shall be properly marked/ identified as
approved sample and shall be kept as record for future reference. The Contractor shall furnish
necessary test certificates etc. as asked by the Engineer-In-Charge. Further to that he shall get
the materials tested from approved test house if and as asked by the Engineers-In-Charge &
submit the test certificate at his own cost for which no extra payment shall be made to him.
The Engineer-In-Charge shall have the right to reject all or any of the materials intended to be
used and such materials shall be immediately removed from the site by the Contractor at his
own cost without any claim for compensation etc. due to such rejection.
7.0 WORKMANSHIP
Workmanship shall conform to the highest standards of construction practice. All work shall
be executed to the complete satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge in regard to its quality and the
order in which it is carried out.
Workmanship shall be in accordance with relevant codes or in accordance with

Manufacturer's recommendations if not mentioned otherwise.
All works shall be undertaken by qualified Contractor's who have adequate equipment and
skilled workers. All specialized items of work (e.g. Aluminium Doors and Windows,
Page 2408 of 3884

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
o ex tilireg INDIA LIMITED FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS 6-75-0001 Rev. 6
iaakdl riadvedgiTialrid IA Govt of India Undellak,ndi
GENERAL Page 6 of 7
Waterproofing, Underdeck and Overdeck Insulation, Precoated roof sheeting/ cladding, False
ceiling, False Flooring, Partitioning and Panelling, Expansion joint sealing, Fire Check Doors,
Structural Glazing, Aluminium Composite Panels etc.) shall be got executed by the Contractor
only through authorised applicators/ sub contractors of approved manufacturer/ vendor.
All precaution and protection shall be taken during & after completion of work to prevent
damages to work being done and other works. Any damages done shall be rectified.
Work area shall be cleaned after completion of each work and shall be kept clean and
protected till final acceptance by the competent authority.
8.0 PACKAGING, SHIPPING, DELIVERY & STORAGE
All material shall be delivered in Manufacturer's original package bearing the name of the
Manufacturer, product colour and pattern name, identification number and other related
information.
All materials shall be stored, preserved and protected to safeguard against all adverse
environments such as humidity, moisture, rain, dust, dirt, sand, mud, salt air, salt spray and sea
water.
Specific requirement of packaging, shipping, storage and preservation and safety of materials/
items if any as per Manufacturer's recommendation shall also be ensured by Contractor.
Materials damaged in handling and storage shall not be used. In the event that any material for
use deteriorates and become unusable due to inadequate and poor storage they shall be
removed from site as instructed by Engineer-in-charge and replaced at the Contractor's
expenses.
9.0 SUBMITTALS
If not mentioned otherwise, Contractor shall submit the following for various items.
9.1 Samples
Samples for all materials, components, accessories and complete range of finishing/ shades/
colours for verification as well as acceptance of pattern, colour and finish as applicable.
Samples shall be re-submitted until approved. Approved samples shall be retained to serve as
a basis for checking delivery to site and standard for subsequent work.
9.2 Test and BIS Certificates
All applicable tests as per relevant codes & standards shall be conducted by the Contractor at
no extra cost. Test Certificates shall be submitted for review/ approval of the Engineer-in-
charge. If the material/ product is BIS certified/ approved, valid document pertaining to the
same shall be submitted.
9.3 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings indicating large scale details, lay-out, connections, anchoring, fastening,
bracing, finishes etc. as applicable for review/ approval.
9.4 Product Information and Manuals
A. Product information (Technical)

B. Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions
Page 2409 of 3884

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Igar tag& INDIA LIMITED FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS 6-75-0001 Rev. 6

GENERAL
(A Govt of India UnOettaloo91
Page 7 of 7
9.5 List of applicators/ Sub contractors

Contractor shall submit list of authorized applicators/ sub contractors of specialized items of
works for review/ approval before execution of such items.
9.6 Maintenance manuals
10.0 MEASUREMENT
Mode of measurement is generally specified in each Specification. Whenever mode of

measurement is not specified, IS: 1200 shall be applicable.
Page 2410 of 3884

STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
0 el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
51gzif laWg w INDIA LIMITED FOR FLOOR FINISHING 6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Nr, 03,2r.,171Nom.I iA Govt of India Undellakog) Page 1 of 15
TO- t ucbiul
G-1 ct)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
FLOOR FINISHING
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD PKM

6 03.03.15 S CHANDA
SPECIFICATION (Addn GM)
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JKB VK N DUARI
5 06.07.10 GB JS
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JKB
ARVIND V
4 21.03.07 SD
KUMAR CHATURVEDI
SPECIFICATION
REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD SD MLB SCJ AS
3 12.03.99
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JS AKG AS
2 16.03.94 JS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee GM (E) Bureau
Rev. Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved by
Page 2411 of 3884

lI
'i7l ci el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
ligof fdfireg INDIA LIMITED FLOOR FINISHING 6-75-0002 Rev. 6
4417R ofoo, ‘7,1,7,140471 IA Govt of India Undeftakingt
Page 2 of 15
Abbreviations:

BS British Standards
IS • Indian Standards
PVC • Polyvinyl Chloride
Architectural Standards Committee

Convenor : Mr. J.K.Bhagchandani
Members : Mr. Samir Das
Ms. Jyotsna Shridhar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
Mr. R.K. Bhandari (Projects)
Page 2412 of 3884

0 el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
cZS ¢r
INDIA LIMITED FLOOR FINISHING 6-75-0002 Rev. 6
751 1 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 15
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING 4
3.0 CEMENT CONCRETE GRANOLITHIC FLOORING 5
4.0 HEAVY DUTY FLOORING 6
5.0 PRECAST HYDRAULICALLY PRESSED CEMENT TILES 7
6.0 CEMENT PLASTER SKIRTING 8
7.0 PRECAST HYDRAULICALLY PRESSED TERRAZZO TILES 8
8.0 TILE WORK 10
9.0 KOTA STONE FINISH 10
10.0 MARBLE STONE FINISH 12
11.0 PVC FINISH 13
12.0 ACID RESISTANT TILES 14
13.0 EPDXY FLOOR 8.z. WALL COATING SYSTEM 15
14.0 MEASUREMENT AND RATE 15
Page 2413 of 3884

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
Ifg al 056
eive51,0b1.3421,111
INDIA LIMITED
FLOOR FINISHING 6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 15
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for any further information etc. not
covered in this Specification. In case of any contlict/contradiction, provision of this
Specification shall override.
IS: 4971 Recommendations for selection of Industrial floor finishes.

IS: 1237 Specification for Cement concrete flooring tiles.
IS: 2571 Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete flooring.
IS: 4631 Code of practice for laying of epoxy resin floor toppings.
IS: 3462 Code of practice for unbaked flexible PVC flooring.
IS: 5318 Code of practice for laying of flexible PVC sheet and tile flooring.
IS: 3461 Specification for PVC asbestos floor tiles.
IS: 1443 Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring
IS: 5491 Code of practice for laying in situ granolithic concrete floor topping.
IS: 4441 Code of practice for use of silicate type Chemical resistant mortars.
IS: 4443 Code of practice for use of resin type chemical resistant mortar.
IS: 1196 Code of practice for laying Bitumen Mastic Flooring
IS: 13753 Specification for dust pressed Ceramic tiles with water absorption of
E >10%, Group (13111)
1.2 Sub base concrete shall be provided prior to laying the specified floor finish wherever
indicated. Sub base concrete shall be provided on Ground floor slab and suspended floors
(before floor finishing) as per the drawings. The sub base concrete shall be of specified
thickness and shall be provided with zero or required slope as required. Floors in Verandahs,
Courtyards, Kitchens, Baths shall have slope ranging from 1:36 or 1:48 depending upon
locations and as indicated in drawings or as decided by the Engineer-in-charge. Floors in
water closet portions shall have slope of 1:30 or as decided by site-in-charge. On ground floor,
plinth masonry off-set shall be depressed accordingly to allow the base concrete to rest on it.
This base concrete shall normally be 1:3:6 (to achieve the required slope as described above);
however the mix shall be 1:2:4 wherever conduits, raceways, service pipes etc. are to be
embedded/ laid.
2.0 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING

2.1 General
Cement concrete flooring shall consist of a sub-base, a base course and finishing layer of floor
finish.
2.2 Workmanship
2.2.1 Base Course
Base course shall be of cement concrete of specified mix and thickness.
The floor space on which base course is to be laid shall be cleaned, washed and divided into
square/ rectangular or as per designed panels to prevent cracks in the floor finish. No
dimension of the panels shall exceed 2 meters and the area of a panel shall not be more than 2
square meters. Base course shall be laid on alternate panels. The borders of the panels shall
Page 2414 of 3884

0 el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Igaf fai5itg INDIA LIMITED FLOOR FINISHING 6-75-0002 Rev. 6
.1, Wer,i, as] 3,0-73 I
Page 5 of 15
have mitred joints at the corners of the room and intermediate joints shall be in straight line
with panel joints.
The panels shall be bound by glass/PVC/stainless steel strips etc. as specified. These shall be
fixed in position with their top at proper level, giving slope wherever required.
The flooring shall butt against masonry of wall which shall not be plastered. When the base
course is to be laid on hardened base, the sub-base shall be roughened by steel wire brushing
and cleaned. Before laying the base course, neat and thick cement slurry @ 2 kg of cement per
square meter of area shall be brushed into the prepared sub base surface.
Cement concrete shall be placed in position and beaten with wooden plank and finished
smooth. Beating shall cease as soon as surface is found covered with cream of mortar.
Necessary slope shall be provided. The cement concrete mix shall be used within 30 minutes
of its preparation.
2.2.2 Floor Finishing

Finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the completion of base course. The
base course shall be free of excessive moisture before starting the floor finishing. Use of dry
cement, cement sand mixture sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the concrete or absorb
excessive moisture shall not be permitted.
While the concrete is still green, cement @ 2 kg per square meter of floor area shall be mixed
with water to form thick slurry and spread over the surface. The cement slurry shall then be
properly processed and finished smooth without any trowel mark.
The junction of floor with wall plaster, cladding, skirting shall be rounded off uniformly upto
a radius of 25mm unless otherwise mentioned.
2.2.3 Curing
Each finished portion of floor, on completion shall be kept wet with ponding for a minimum
period of 10 days.
3.0 CEMENT CONCRETE GRANOLITHIC FLOORING

3.1 General
Cement concrete granolithic flooring shall consist of a sub-base, a base course and finishing
layer of floor finish.
3.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall in general conform to IS: 5491.
3.2.1 Base Course (Under layer)

Base course shall be of cement concrete of specified mix and thickness.
The floor space on which base course is to be laid shall be cleaned, washed and divided into
square/ rectangular or as per designed panels to prevent cracks in the floor finish. No
dimension of the panels shall exceed 2 meter and the area of a panel shall not be more than 2
square meters. Base course shall be laid on alternate panels. The borders of the panels shall
have mitred joints at the corners of the room and intermediate joints shall be in straight line
with panel joints.
The panels shall be bound by glass/PVC/stainless steel strips etc. as specified. These shall be
fixed in position with their top at proper level, giving slope wherever required.
The flooring shall butt against masonry of wall which shall not be plastered. When the base
course is to be laid on hardened base, the sub-base shall be roughened by steel wire brushing
Page 2415 of 3884

71210 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
ligaf id15ift INDIA LIMITED FLOOR FINISHING 6-75-0002 Rev. 6
,A Go, of Undeft.ngl
Page 6 of 15
and cleaned. Before laying the base course, neat and thick cement slurry @ 2 kg of cement per
square meter of area shall be brushed into the prepared sub base surface.
Cement concrete shall be placed in position and beaten with wooden plank and finished
smooth. Beating shall cease as soon as surface is found covered with cream of mortar.
Necessary slope shall be provided. The cement concrete mix shall be used within 30 minutes
of its preparation.
3.2.2 Floor Finishing

Finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the completion of base course. The
base course shall be free of excessive moisture before starting the floor finishing. Use of dry
cement, cement sand mixture sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the concrete or absorb
excessive moisture shall not be permitted.
While the concrete is still green, cement 4. 2 kg per square meter of floor area shall be mixed
with water to form thick slurry and spread over the surface. The cement slurry shall then be
properly processed and finished smooth without any trowel mark.
3.2.3 Wearing Top Layer

The top layer shall consist of cement mortar of specified mix and thickness finished smooth
with cement slurry. The top layer shall be laid over first layer within 15 minutes of laying the
first layer. The cement and aggregates for the top layer shall be mixed dry. After mixing,
sufficient quantity of washed sand and water shall be added to make the mix plastic but not
flowing. The top and bottom layer shall firmly grip together.
3.2.4 Curing
period of 10 days.
4.0 HEAVY DUTY FLOORING

4.1 General
Heavy duty Flooring shall consist of a sub-base, a base course and a finishing layer of floor
finish.
4.2 Workmanship
4.2.1 Base Course
Base course shall consist of one layer of cement concrete of specified mix and thickness laid
on sub-base in panels in accordance with clause no. 2.2.1.
4.2.2 Floor Finish

Finishing layer shall be of cement, hardener and stone aggregate mix of specified thickness
laid over the base course. Unless otherwise mentioned, one part of approved quality hardener
and four parts of cement by weight shall be mixed dry. This dry mixture shall be mixed with
stone aggregate 6mm nominal size or as otherwise specified in the ratio of I hardener and
cement mixture: 2 stone aggregate by volume. Just enough water shall then be added to the
mix.
The mixture so obtained shall then be laid on the base course within 2 to 4 hours of latter's
laying. It shall be firmly pressed into bottom concrete so as to have a good bond with it. After
the starting of initial setting, the surface shall be finished smooth and true with steel floats
without any float mark.
Page 2416 of 3884

ll~iri~ ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
IfgaT Rii-
eg INDIA LIMITED FINISHING 6-75-0002 Rev. 6
iNtZrl
AledAV,A.3ALTI I IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 7 of 15
4.2.4 Curing
period of 10 days.
5.0 PRECAST HYDRAULICALLY PRESSED CEMENT TILES
5.1 Materials
5.1.1 Cement Concrete Tiles
Cement concrete tiles shall conform to IS: 1237 and shall be factory made of approved shade,
and thickness.
5.1.2 Pigments
Pigments to be admixed with mortar or for grouting the joints shall conform to Table -1 of IS:
2114.
5.1.3 Cement Mortar

Cement mortar shall be of specified mix and thickness.
5.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall in general conform to IS: 1443. The base on which tiles are to be laid shall
be cleaned of all dust, dirt and properly wetted by applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 2
kg of cement per square meter of area without allowing water pools. Cement mortar of
specified thickness shall then be spread over the base for two rows of tiles and 3-5 metres in
length. The mortar shall be laid in slope as per requirements and thickness of mortar shall not
be less than 10mm at any place. The top of the mortar shall be kept rough so that cement
slurry can be absorbed. Laying shall be from centre & proceed outwards in two directions at
900. Cut tiles of uniform sizes shall be laid along periphery, if necessary. Neat cement slurry
of honey like consistency @ 4.4 kg of cement per Square meter shall be spread over the
mortar bed for laying 20 tiles at a time. The tiles shall then be fixed in this grout one after the
other, each tile being gently tapped and properly bedded in line and level. The Joints shall not
exceed 1.5mm in width. After the day's work, the excess cement slurry on top and the joints
shall be cleaned with broom stick and washed before the slurry sets hard. Next day, the joints
shall be filled with the cement grout to match the shade of the tile.
Tiles along the periphery shall be continued under the wall plaster, skirting or dado.
For skirting/dado/risers on the brick masonry wall, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of at
least 15mm while the masonry is being laid. In case of concrete work, the surface shall be
hauled and roughened with wire brushes. The wall surface shall be uniformly and evenly
covered with backing of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand by volume) of specified
thickness. Before hardening of the cushioning mortar, back of each tile shall be covered with
a neat layer of cement slurry @ 4.4 kg of cement per square meter and edges with white
cement with or without pigment to match the shade of tiles and the tiles then shall be pressed
on the backing and tapped.
The tiles shall be corrected to proper planes with joints truly vertical in required pattern and
butt jointed. The fixing shall be done from bottom upward. The top of skirting and dado shall
be truly horizontal.
5.3 Curing, Polishing and Finishing
The day after the tiles are laid all joints shall be cleaned with a wire brush to a depth of 5 mm
and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with white
Page 2417 of 3884

k5-
111a
- eAt
if ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
1ga 16Vieg INDIA LIMITED FLOOR FINISHING 6-75-0002 Rev. 6
I.TR MTMI, JUM-Si IA Govt of Ind. Uneertakog)
Page 8 of 15
cement mixed with pigment to match the shade of the tiles. The same cement slurry then shall
be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat to protect the surface from abrasive
damage and fill the pin holes that may exist on the surface.
The flooring shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it wet with ponding.
Grinding shall be commenced after a minimum period of 7 days when the tiles and the joints
are properly set. Grinding shall be done by machines. First grinding shall be done with
carborundum stones of 60 grade grit fitted in the machine. Water shall be profusely used
during grinding. When the chips show up and the floor has been uniformly rubbed, it shall be
cleaned with water baring all pin holes. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of grey/white
cement mixed with pigments to match with colour of the flooring. This grout shall be kept
moist for a week. Thereafter the second grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of 120
grit. Final grinding shall be done the day after the second grinding with carborundum stone of
320 grit using water in abundance. The floor shall be washed clean with water, oxalic acid
powder shall then be dusted at 33 gms/sq. m. on the surface rubbed with machine fitted
hessian bobs or rubbed hard with woolen rags. The floor shall then be washed clean and dried
with a soft cloth or linen. If any tile is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced
and properly jointed and polished.
6.0 CEMENT PLASTER SKIRTING

6.1 Material
6.2 Workmanship
The surface on which the skirting is to be applied shall be prepared and skirting of specified
thickness shall be laid. The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15mm in masonry
walls. In case of concrete walls, the surface shall be roughened by hacking. Skirting with
specified mortar and to specified thickness shall be laid immediately after the surface is
prepared. It shall be laid along with the border or adjacent panels of floor.
Finishing of skirting shall be done simultaneously with the borders of the adjacent panels of
floor. The cement to be applied in the form of thick slurry for smooth finishing shall be @ 2
kg of cement per litre of water applied over an area of 1 square meter.
7.0 PRECAST HYDRAULICALLY PRESSED TERRAZZO TILES

7.1 Materials
7.1.1 Terrazzo Tiles
Terrazzo tiles shall be of specified thickness, texture and shade and shall generally conform in
all respects to IS: 1237. The tiles shall be factory made with 10mm down size stone
aggregates, white & ordinary cement mix (1 white cement : 6 ordinary cement by volume) and
pigments conforming to IS: 2114. Tablel.
7.1.2 Pigments
Pigments to be mixed with mortar or for grouting the joints shall conform to Table -1 of IS:
2114.
7.1.3 Cement Mortar
7.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall in general conform to IS: 1443. The base on which tiles are to be laid shall
be cleaned of all dust, dirt and properly wetted by applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 2
kg of cement per Square meter of area without allowing water pools. Cement mortar of
Page 2418 of 3884

01 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
Ogar tif5leg
kritrOgt7 ,REPIRI
INDIA LIMITED
Govt et ■ ndo Undertaking)
Page 9 of 15
specified thickness shall then be spread over the base for two rows of tiles and 3-5 metres in
length. The mortar shall be laid in slope as per requirements and thickness of mortar shall not
be less than 10mm at any place. The top of the mortar shall be kept rough so that cement
slurry can be absorbed. Laying shall be from centre & proceed outwards in two directions at
90°. Cut tiles of uniform sizes shall be laid along periphery, if necessary. Neat cement slurry
of honey like consistency @ 4.4 kg of cement per Square meter shall be spread over the
mortar bed for laying required number of tiles at a time. The tiles shall then be fixed in this
grout one after the other, each tile being gently tapped and properly bedded in line and level.
The Joints shall not exceed 1.5mm in width. After the day's work, the excess cement slurry on
top and the joints shall be cleaned and washed before the slurry sets hard. Next day, the joints
shall be filled with the cement grout to match the shade of the tile.
Tiles along the periphery shall be continued under the wall plaster, skirting or dado.
For skirting/dado/risers on the brick masonry wall, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of at
least 12mm while the masonry is being laid. In case of concrete work, the surface shall be
hauled and roughened with wire brushes. The wall surface shall be uniformly and evenly
covered with backing of cement mortar 1:3 (I cement: 3 coarse sand by volume) of specified
thickness. Before hardening of the cushioning mortar, back of each tile shall be covered with
a neat layer of cement slurry @ 4.4 kg of cement per Square meter and edges with white
cement with or without pigment to match the shade of tiles and the tiles then shall be pressed
on the backing and tapped.
For vertical surfaces, the tiles shall be corrected to proper planes with joints truly vertical in
required pattern and butt jointed. The fixing shall be done from bottom upward. The top of
skirting and dado shall be truly horizontal.
7.3 Curing, Polishing and Finishing

and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with grey or
white cement mixed with or without pigment to match the shade of the tiles. The same cement
slurry then shall be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat to protect the surface
from abrasive damage and fill the pin holes that may exist on the surface.
The tiles shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it wet.
Grinding shall be commenced after a minimum period of 7 days when the tiles and the joints
carborundum stones of 60 grade grit fitted in the machine. Water shall be profusely during
grinding. When the chips show up and the floor has been uniformly rubbed, it shall be cleaned
with water baring all pin holes. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of grey/white cement
mixed with pigments to match with colour of the flooring. This grout shall be kept moist for a
week. Thereafter the second grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of 120 grit. Final
grinding shall be done the day after the second grinding with carborundum stone of 320 grit
using water in abundance. The floor shall be washed clean with water, oxalic acid powder
shall then be dusted at 33 gms/sq. m. on the surface rubbed with machine fitted hessian bobs
or rubbed hard with woolen rags. The floor shall then be washed clean and dried with a soft
cloth or linen. If any tile is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced and properly
jointed and polished.
Page 2419 of 3884

r ICIWs
,1771471.751,1lIMN
INDIA LIMITED
(A co, of India Uncle/Ming)
Page 10 of 15
8.0 TILE WORK
8.1 Materials
8.1.1 Tiles
A. Ceramic Tiles
Ceramic tiles shall be of specified size, thickness and approved colour/ design/
texture, of first quality and shall conform to IS 13753.
B. Vitrified Tiles
Vitrified tiles shall be of specified size, thickness and approved colour/ design/
texture, of first quality and shall conform to EN 176.
8.1.2 Pigments
2114.
8.2 Workmanship
The tiles shall be laid over a coating of specified adhesive (as per approved manufacturer's
specifications) laid on base floor/wall plaster. The joints of the tiles shall be cleaned off and
all dust and loose mortar removed. The joints then shall be flush pointed with cement paste
(white cement and pigment conforming to IS: 2114, Table-I) or any other joint fixing
compound as recommended by Tile Manufacturer matching the shade of tiles.
Tiles shall be laid as per desired pattern. Joints shall be uniform kept as thin as possible and in
straight lines. Cut tiles shall be permitted only in unavoidable cases as directed by Engineer-
In- Charge.
The base on which tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned of all dust, dirt and properly wetted by
applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 3 kg of cement per Square meter of area.
For flooring, laying shall be generally from centre & proceed outwards in two directions at
90°
For vertical surfaces, the tiles shall be corrected to proper planes with joints truly vertical in
required pattern and butt jointed. The fixing shall be done from bottom upward. The top of
skirting and dado shall be truly horizontal.
9.0 KOTA STONE FINISH
9.1 Materials
The Kota Stone slabs shall be of selected quality and shade, hard, sound, dense, homogenous
in texture, free from cracks, decay, weathering and flakes. These shall be machine cut to the
requisite size and thickness and chisel dressed.
The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought to site. Before
starting the work, the contractor shall get the samples of slabs approved by Engineer-in-
charge.
9.2 Workmanship
9.2.1 Dressing of Slabs
Each slab shall be machine cut and rubbed to the required size and shape and fine chisel
dressed at all edges to full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be
in full contact with it. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from
chippings giving a plane and smooth surface.
Page 2420 of 3884

Ogar fafreg
1.7T 751,0571
Page 11 of 15
9.2.2 Preparation of Surface
Cement mortar of specified thickness and mix shall be laid over the base after making it
rough, cleaning & wetting thoroughly and applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 2 kg of
cement per square meter of area to receive the mortar. The mortar shall be laid for fixing one
slab at a time.
In case of skirting/ dado/ risers, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 12mm in
masonry walls. In case of concrete surface, the surface shall be hacked and roughened with
wire brushes. The surface shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before
laying kota stone.
9.2.3 Laying
The slab shall be washed clean before laying.
A. Laying in floor
It shall be laid over cement mortar bedding, pressed, and tapped gently to bring it in level. It
shall be then lifted and laid aside. Top surface of the mortar then shall be corrected by adding
fresh mortar at hollows and depressions. The mortar then shall be allowed to harden and
cement slurry of honey like consistency @ 4.4.kg of cement per square meter shall be spread
over the mortar. The edges of the slabs shall be buttered with white cement with pigment
grout to match the shade of the slabs. The slabs shall then be gently placed in position and
tapped with wooden mallets till it is properly bedded in level. The joints shall be as fine as
possible. Surplus cement on the surface of the slab shall be removed. The slabs in flooring
shall continue under the plaster/skirting. The finished surface shall be true to levels and slopes
as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The slabs shall be laid in patterns as per drawings and size. Cut size may be used along
periphery as required. The joints shall be uniform and in perfect line.
B. Laying in skirting/ dado/ risers
The slabs shall be held in position by suitable temporary measure such as wooden/ bamboo
supports, temporary hook etc. as approved by Engineer-In- Charge. The outer face of the slabs
shall be checked for plane and plumb and corrected. The joints shall be as fine as possible and
shall be filled with neat cement paste/ grout with white cement and pigment to match the
colour of the slabs. The joints shall thus be left to harden and then the rear gap between the
slabs and backing surface shall be packed with cement mortar of specified mix and thickness.
Temporary supports shall be removed after the mortar filling in the gap has acquired sufficient
strength. The top line of the skirting/ dado/ risers shall be truly horizontal and joints truly
vertical.
Joints in treads and platforms shall be permitted only at curvature or when width/ length is
more than 0.6/ 2 metres respectively. Number of joints in each direction shall not be more than
one number for every 2 metres length beyond the initial 2 meter length.
9.3 Polishing and Finishing

Grinding/ polishing shall be commenced after a minimum period of 7 days when the stone and
the joints are properly set. Grinding shall be done by machines. Grinding/ polishing shall be
done with carborundum stone of 320 grit using water in abundance. The stone shall be washed
clean with water, oxalic acid powder shall then be dusted at 33 gms/sq. m. on the surface
rubbed with machine fitted hessian bobs or rubbed hard with woolen rags. The surface shall
then be washed clean and dried with a soft cloth or linen & polished with mansion polish. If
any stone is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced and properly jointed and
polished.
Page 2421 of 3884

M ENGINEERS
q_.1 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
ig-ZifiaWeg ',II,INDIA LIMITED
,i27S317 NA., IA Go, of India Undertaking)
Page 12 of 15
10.0 MARBLE STONE FINISH

10.1 Materials
10.1.1 Marble Slabs

The marble slabs shall be of specified size, thickness, type and grade. The marble from which
the slabs are made shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense, homogenous in texture, free
from cracks, decay, weathering and flakes. The sample of marble stone slabs shall be got
approved from the Engineer-in-Charge.
The slabs shall be machine cut to the requisite dimensions. Dimension of slabs shall be
700mm to 2500mm in length and 300 to 1000mm in width as per drawing and as directed by
Engineer-In-Charge.
Tolerance of +3% shall be allowed for the thickness. In respect of length and breadth of slabs,
a tolerance of +2% shall be allowed.
Physical properties of Marble and method of testing shall be as follows:
Physical Property Requirement Method of test
Moisture absorption Maximum 0.4% IS: 1124
After 24 hours by weight
Immersion in cold water
10.1.2 Pigments
2114.
10.2 Workmanship

Preparation of surface shall be done in accordance with clause no. 9.2.2.
10.2.2 Laying
The slab shall be washed clean before laying. Due care shall be taken to match the grains of
slabs which shall be selected judiciously having uniform pattern of veins/ streaks or as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
A. Laying in floor
It shall be laid over cement mortar bedding, pressed, and tapped gently to bring it in level. It
shall be then lifted and laid aside. Top surface of the mortar then shall be corrected by adding
fresh mortar at hollows and depressions. The mortar then shall be allowed to harden and
cement slurry of honey like consistency @ 4.4.kg of cement per square meter shall be spread
over the mortar. The edges of the slabs shall be buttered with white cement with or without
pigment grout to match the shade of the slabs. The slabs shall then be gently placed in position
and tapped with wooden mallets till it is properly bedded in level. The joints shall be as fine as
possible. Surplus cement on the surface of the slab shall be removed. The slabs in flooring
shall continue for not less than 10 mm under the plaster/skirting. The finished surface shall be
true to levels and slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The slabs shall be laid in patterns as per drawings and size. Cut size may be used along
periphery as directed by Engineer-In-Charge. The joints shall be uniform and in perfect line.
B. Laying in skirting/ dado/ risers

The slabs shall be held in position by suitable temporary measure such as wooden/ bamboo
supports, temporary hook etc. as approved by Engineer-In- Charge. The outer face of the slabs
Page 2422 of 3884

‘.5ilfaeJerf ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
NWil
fat sATI. MT.
INDIA LIMITED
■A Go, of ■ ntha Undeffak,^9/
Page 13 of 15
shall be checked for plane and plumb and corrected. The joints shall be as fine as possible and
shall be filled with neat cement paste/ grout with white cement and pigment to match the
colour of the slabs. The joints shall thus be left to harden and then the rear gap between the
slabs and backing surface shall be packed with cement mortar of specified mix and thickness.
Temporary supports shall be removed after the mortar filling in the gap has acquired sufficient
strength. The top line of the skirting/ dado/ risers shall be truly horizontal and joints truly
vertical.
10.3 Curing
The finished surface shall be cured for a minimum period of 7 days.
10.4 Polishing and Finishing

Unevenness at the meeting edges of slabs shall be removed by fine chiseling.
and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with grey or
white cement mixed with or without pigment to match the shade of the stones.
Grinding shall be commenced after a minimum period of 7 days when the stones and the joints
carborundum stones of 60 grade grit fitted in the machine. Water shall be profusely during
grinding. When the chips show up and the floor has been uniformly rubbed, it shall be cleaned
with water baring all pin holes. The second grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of
120 grit. Final grinding/polishing shall done the day after the second grinding with
carborundum stone of 320 grit using water in abundance. The surface shall be washed clean
with water, oxalic acid powder shall then be dusted at 33 gms/sq. m. on the surface rubbed
with machine fitted hessian bobs or rubbed hard with woolen rags. The surface shall then be
washed clean and dried with a soft cloth or linen. If any stone is disturbed or damaged, it shall
be refitted or replaced and properly jointed and polished.
11.0 PVC FINISH
11.1 Material
11.1.1 PVC Roll/ Tiles
PVC Roll/ tiles shall be homogenous, asbestos free, approved texture, colour, pattern and
specified thickness. PVC rolls shall conform to IS: 3462 and PVC tiles shall conform to IS:
3462
11.1.2 Antistatic PVC Roll/Tile
Antistatic P.V.C. roll/ tiles shall conform to B.S.2050, Table-2.
11.1.3 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be neoprene based rubber adhesive of approved make as recommended by

PVC Manufacture.
11.2 Workmanship
The sub floor on which PVC finish is to be laid shall be prepared in accordance with PVC
Manufacturer's recommendation. The sub floor shall be made permanently smooth, firm, free
of cracks and dry. If required, suitable leveling compound of minimum 3 mm thickness shall
be applied over sub floor.
P.V.C. rolls/tiles shall be brought to the temperature of the area in which it is to be laid and
stacked suitably near the site in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
Page 2423 of 3884

oaf 054-"eg
.Hr., 711
Page 14 of 15
Laying of PVC roll/ tile shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.

In case of rolls, minimum possible number of joints shall be provided. Rolls running towards
door openings, niches, or similar shall completely cover these areas. Door openings, niches, or
similar along the side of the roll may be covered by strips.
Tiles shall be laid in any pattern including diagonal formation as directed by Engineer-In-
Charge.
The adhesive shall be applied by spatula to the base floor and back of the PVC roll/tile in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. PVC rolls shall be placed in position from
one end onwards slowly without creation on any air pockets between roll and the base course.
PVC rolls/tiles shall be placed only when the adhesive is set sufficiently for laying. When set
sufficiently for laying, the adhesive will be sticky to the touch but shall not mark the fingers.
After placing, the roll shall be pressed suitably with a wooden roller weighing about 5 kg.
The joint between adjacent rolls shall be thin hairline type.
Laying of PVC tiles shall start from centre and proceed outwards in two right angle direction
till the periphery of the room/area is reached. Fractional tiles of uniform cut sizes may be laid
only along the peripheral border if so required owing to size of the room area.
PVC rolls in flooring shall he continued for skirting without any joints and with 50mm radius
rounded corner at the junction of skirting and flooring.
Any excess adhesive squeezing out of the surface shall he wiped off immediately with a wet
cloth. In case of such excess adhesive becoming hard, it shall be removed with a solution of
one part of commercial Butyle Acetate and three parts of turpentine oil or any other solution
as advised by the manufacturer of the roll.
Necessary earthing system shall be installed in case of antistatic flooring in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation.
After a minimum period of 24 hours after laying the rolls/tiles, the finished floor shall be
cleaned with a wet cloth soaked in warm soap solution of 2 spoons of soft soap powder in 5
litres of warm water or detergent as per approved manufacturer's specifications.
12.0 ACID RESISTANT TILES
12.1 Material
The tiles shall be vitrified tiles of approved size, thickness and colour as per approved
manufacturer's specification and shall be homogeneous. They shall have the following
properties:-
S. No. Property Values Norms

1 Water Absorptions ± 0.5% ASTM C 373
2 Scratch Resistance >6 ASTM C 373
3 Chemical Resistance Unaffected ASTM C 650
4 Abrasion Resistance >100 ASTM C 501
5 Breaking strength 400 kg/sq.cm ASTM C 648
6 Density > 2.0 Gm/CC
12.2 Workmanship
Base and background surface over which the tiles are to be laid shall be prepared as per IS:
4443.
Page 2424 of 3884

falgrarg INDIA LIMITED FINISHING 6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Govt of ■ ntl. Unne/takg)
Page 15 of 15
Tiles shall be fixed on the prepared surface over a bitumen priming layer, bitumen mastic
layer and resin type chemical resistant mortar in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation. The bitumen shall conform to IS: 702 and laying of bitumen mastic shall
conform to IS: 1196.
Joints shall be allowed to set for 24 hours. The floor shall then be washed as per
manufacturer's specifications to totally remove all marks from tile surface.
13.0 EPDXY FLOOR & WALL COATING SYSTEM
13.1 Material
The epoxy floor and wall coating system shall generally consist of the following basic
components of composition and thickness as mentioned in the item descriptions:
13.1.1 Primer Coat
Primer coat shall be suitable for base surface and compatible with successive layers/ coating
over it for specified applications in accordance with the approved manufacturer's
recommendations.
13.1.2 Screed/ Underlayer

The screed/ underlayer (for flooring) shall consist of combination of fillers and hardeners and
shall be suitable and compatible for application of top/ finishing coat over it for specified
application in accordance with the approved manufacturer's recommendations.
13.1.3 Top/ Finishing Coat

Top/ finishing coat shall be applied over screed/ underlayer in case of flooring. For walls/
vertical surfaces, top/ finishing coat shall be applied over primer coat as recommended by
approved manufacturer. Top/ finishing coat shall be suitable for specified application.
13.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
14.0 MEASUREMENT AND RATE
Measurement and rate for flooring for item rate tenders shall be in Square meter in general
unless otherwise mentioned.
Length and breadth shall be measured before laying skirting, dado or wall plaster. No
deduction shall be made nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 sqm. Deductions for ends
of dissimilar materials or other articles embedded shall not be made for areas not exceeding
0.10 sqm.
The flooring done either with strips (in one operation) or without strips (in alternate panels)
shall be treated as same and measured together.
Page 2425 of 3884

1.51a4A At' ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
Igar Elf54-eg W INDIA LIMITED
I atIEW 7I20,1e 3,1071) IA Goof of India Undertaking)
FOR WOOD WORK 6-75-0003 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 8
- a-Wtr CP I 41
1 1 I '1 CO ftft-47f
FOR
WOODWORK
REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD

6 27.03.17 PD JS/ JKB R.SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA
SPECIFICATION
5
15.03.12 PD SD JKB D. MALHOTRA
SPECIFICATION
4
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD V.
21.03.07 SD JKB ARVIND KUMAR
SPECIFICATION CHATURVEDI
3 11.03.99
SD MLB SCJ AS
SPECIFICATION
2 16.03.94 JS JS AKG AS
SPECIFICATION
Rev. Standards Standards
No Committee Bureau
Date Prepared Checked
Purpose Convener Chairman
by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 00 0001 F1 Rev. 0

- - - Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 2426 of 3884

ISiakiel ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
eif Meg INDIA LIMITED WOOD WORK 6-75-0003 Rev. 6
M.5,E.•W.0 IA Govt. of India UnderlakIng)
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:

IS Indian Standards
Convener: Mr. Rajanji Srivastava

Ms. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. V. K. Panwar
Page 2427 of 3884

INDIA LIMITED WOOD WORK 6-75-0003 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 MATERIALS 5
3.0 WOODEN DOOR/ WINDOW FRAME 7
4.0 DOOR SHUTTERS 7
5.0 MEASUREMENT & RATE 8
Page 2428 of 3884

dafaeiel'et ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
EliateUNI10 INDIA LIMITED WOOD WORK 6-75-0003 Rev. 6
A Govt of IndiaUnavtak ■ ogl
Page 4 of 8
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for any further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of any conflict/contradiction, provisions of specification
shall override.
IS 204 Part-1 Specification for Tower bolts

Part-1: Ferrous metals
IS 204 Part-2 Specification for Tower bolts

Part-2: Non- Ferrous metals
IS 205 Specification for non ferrous metal butt hinges
IS 208 Specification for Door handles
IS 303 Specification for plywood for general purposes.
IS 848 Specification for synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic

and amino plastic)
IS 1003 Part-1 Specification for Timber paneled and glazed shutters

Part-1: Door shutters
IS 1003 Part-2 Specification for Timber paneled and glazed shutters

Part 2: Window and Ventilator
IS 1341 Specification for steel butt hinges.
IS 2202 Part-1 Specifications for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type)
Part 1: Plywood face panels.
IS 2202 Part-2 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type)
Part 2: Particle board and hardboard face panels
IS 2209 Specification for mortise locks- (vertical type)
IS 2338 Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials. (Part I
& II)
IS 2835 Specification for flat transparent sheet glass.
IS 3087 Specification for particle boards at wood & other lingno cellulosic
material (medium density) for general purposes.
IS 3097 Specification for veneered particle boards.
IS 3564 Specification for hydraulically regulated door closers.
IS 4021 Specification for timber door, window and ventilator frames.
IS 5437 Specification for figured rolled and wired glass.
IS 6315 Specification for floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for heavy doors.
Page 2429 of 3884

Elf51egw INDIA LIMITED
(+1k71212,1Re 3PCI.1) Govt of India Undertaking)
WOOD WORK 6-75-0003 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 8
2.0 MATERIALS
2.1 Timber
2.1.1 Teakwood
Teakwood shall be second class Indian Teakwood conforming to IS 4021 of good quality,
well seasoned and free from defects such as cracks, dead knots, sapwood etc. No individual
hard and sound knot shall be more than 15 sq.cm . in size and the aggregate area of such knots
shall not exceed 1.5% of the area of the piece. The timber shall be fairly close grained having
not less than 2 growth rings per cm. width in cross section.
2.1.2 Hard Wood
Hard wood shall be first class wood conforming to IS: 4021 of good quality, well seasoned
and free from defects such as dead knots, cracks, sapwood etc. No individual hard and sound
knot shall exceed 6 sq. Cm. in size with no dimension more than 50 mm and the aggregate
area of such knots shall not be more than 1% of the area of the piece. There shall not be less
than 5 growth rings per cm. Width in cross-sections.
2.1.3 Moisture content in timber
The maximum permissible percentage of moisture content for well seasoned timber shall be as
per IS: 287.
2.1.4 Workmanship of wood work
Workmanship for wood and joinery shall be as per IS: 1200 and IS: 4021.
2.1.5 Painting/polishing of wood work
Painting/polishing of wood work shall be in accordance with specification No. 6-75-0007.
2.2 Particle Board
Particle board shall conform to IS: 3097 and shall be three layer flat pressed teakwood based
and of exterior grade (Grade-I), type-1, BWP type, bonded with phenol Formaldehyde
Synthetic resin conforming to IS: 848.
2.3 MDF (Medium density fibre) Board
Medium density fibre board shall conform to IS: 12406 interior grade (EGSB). It shall be
dense, homogenous and manufactured from agrobased lignocelluosic fibres bonded with BWP
type phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin conforming to IS: 848. It shall be categorized as
class 1 for 'Surfaces of very low flame spread' as per IS: 1642.
2.4 Block Board
Block board shall conform to IS: 2202 and shall be made of solid Core block board. Teak
wood beading of minimum 12mm thickness shall be fixed to the exposed edges of the boards.
2.5 Veneers
Veneers shall conform to class-1 of IS: 303 or BS: 476 Part-7.
Page 2430 of 3884

46-awl&
Oge.AliVeg INDIA LIMITED WOOD WORK 6-75-0003 Rev. 6
1.11PRereask,41.3,10.1) IA Govt of India Unden2k , n9)
Page 6 of 8
2.6 Fittings & Fixtures
2.6.1 Hinges
Hinges shall be of Extruded Aluminum Alloy or steel and butt type conforming to IS: 205/ IS:
1341. Size of hinges shall be minimum 125mm long. Maximum spacing of hinges shall not
exceed 600mm c/c.
2.6.2 Overhead Hydraulic Door Closer
Overhead hydraulic door closers shall be of heavy duty type and shall conform to IS: 3564.
2.6.3 Floor Mounted Door Closer
Floor mounted door closers shall be of heavy duty type and hydraulically operated and shall
conform to IS: 6315.
2.6.4 Mortice Lock
Mortice locks shall be of chromium plated brass body and shall have 6 levers and pair of
handles of pressure die cast zinc alloy (satin finished). Mortice locks shall conform to IS:
2209.
2.6.5 Door Handles
Door handles shall be of pressure die cast zinc alloy and shall be chromium plated.
2.6.6 Aldrop
Aldrop shall be 300 mm long and minimum 18mm dia.
2.6.7 Tower Bolts
Tower bolts shall conform to IS: 204.
2.6.8 Door Stopper
Door stoppers shall consist of heavy duty rubber shoes spring loaded type with zinc alloy
pressure die cast chromium plated holders.
2.6.9 Toilet Door Latch
Toilet Door latch shall be with Vacant/occupied indicator.
2.6.10 Coat & Hat Hook
Coat & Hat hooks for Toilet doors shall be of chromium plated brass body or stainless steel.
2.7 Glazing
Glass sheets for glazing shall be i) 4 mm thick plain glass (wt. 7.2 kg/m2) conforming
IS:2835, or ii) 5.5/ 6.0 mm thick toughened glass conforming to IS:5437 as specified.
Glass sheets shall be free from flaws, scratches, cracks, bubbles etc.
Page 2431 of 3884

4arael ft ti . ENGINEERS
slgeAliiii5tegNij INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
6-76-0003 Rev. 6
1.??1e:RMI,61.3,70,0) Govt of India UndeftaloN)
WOOD WORK
Page 7 of 8
3.0 WOODEN DOOR/ WINDOW FRAME
Wooden Door/Window frame shall be made of specified wood and shall be in accordance
with detailed drawings.
The wooden members of the frame shall be planed smooth and accurate to the full dimensions.
Rebates, rounding, moulding etc. shall be done before the members are joined into frames.
Joints in the frame work shall be perfect with square edges and shall be pinned with hard
wood/bamboo pins of 10 to 15 mm dia.
Wood work shall be painted/polished or otherwise treated as specified. All exposed portions
shall be coated with wood primer and concealed surface by bituminous paints as per
specification No. 6-75-0007.
Before any surface treatment is applied, the wood work shall be got approved by the Engineer-
in-charge. The frames shall be fixed to the masonry by 300mm x 25mm x 6mm MS hold fasts
embedded in M-15 grade concrete size of 350mm x 100mm x 100mm in the hole of masonry.
In case of concrete, frames shall be fixed by 12mm dia metallic anchor fasteners.
4.0 DOOR SHUTTERS
Door shutters shall be complete with all operational fittings & fixtures like hinges, overhead
hydraulic door closers, Tower bolts, Locking device, handles, door stopper etc.
4.1 Block Board Flush Shutter
Block board flush shutter shall conform to IS: 2202. The shutter shall be 35mm thick and
shall be made of solid core block board. Teak wood beading of minimum 12mm thickness
fixed to the perimeter of the shutter. The shutter shall be faced on both sides with following
finishes as specified and shall be factory made.
A. 3mm thick commercial type plywood conforming to IS: 303, BS: 476 part-7 finished
with 2 coats of approved quality synthetic enamel paint over primer coat or
B. Approved quality 1mm thick teakwood veneering conforming to IS: 303, BS:476, part 7
C. 1mm thick approved quality lamination of approved shade.
The edges of the shutters shall either be painted with synthetic enamel paint or french
polished.
4.2 Panel Door Shutter
Panel door shutter shall be 35mm thick and shall consist of 100mm x 35mm teakwood stiles &
top rail, 200mm x 35mm bottom rail and 150mm x 35mm lock rail and 12mm thick particle
board infill panels. The infill panels shall be fixed with adhesive and moulded Teakwood
beadings (minimum 12.5mm x 12.5mm size).
The shutter shall be painted with 2 coats of approved shade synthetic enamel paint or
polyurethane paint as specified over approved coat of primer.
4.3 Glazed Wooden Door Shutter
Glazed wooden door shutter shall be 38mm thick and shall consist of 100mm x 38mm
Page 2432 of 3884

slgem fag& INDIA LIMITED
Row, rircoleonown-*0 IA Govt of India UnOeftaking)
WOOD WORK 6-75-0003 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 8
Teakwood stiles and top rail, 200mm x 38mm bottom rail and 150mm x 38mm thick lock rail.
4mm thick plain glass or 5.5mm thick toughened glass panels shall be fixed in the stiles &
rails with neoperene adhesive and 12.5mm x 12.5mm moulded Teakwood beading. All the
wood work shall be painted with 2 coats of approved shade synthetic enamel paint or
polyurethane paint or shall be French polished as specified over a coat of primer.
4.4 Flymesh Door Shutter
Flymesh door shutter shall be 38mm thick and shall consist of 100mm x 38mm Teakwood
stiles and top rail, 200mm x 38mm bottom rail and 150mm x 38mm thick lock rail and net of
SS/ galvanised MS wire gauge of IS gauge designation 856 & dia 0.56mm fixed with
moulded Teakwood beading. The shutter including wiremesh shall be painted with 2 coats of
approved shade synthetic enamel paint or polyurethane paint or French polished as specified
over a coat of primer.
5.0 MEASUREMENT & RATE
For item rate tenders wood work in door/window frames shall be measured in Cu.M.
Door/window shutters shall be measured in Sq.M. Hardware and fittings like locks, tower
bolts, door closer etc. shall be counted in numbers provided. Length and width shall be
measured to the nearest 0.01 M. Area and volume shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01
Sq.M and 0.001 Cu.M
Rate for item rate tenders shall include all materials, labour, erection, protective measures,
transport, conveyance, storage and other incidental expenditures as required for completion of
the items.
Page 2433 of 3884

STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
OWE'? ENGINEERS FOR STEEL/ ALUMINIUM
Ogar laWleg INDIA LIMITED 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
041.2,7 ewerw .➢ .71111A1 IA Govt a IfItha Utidbltaboog)
DOORS, WINDOWS &
VENTILATORS Page 1 of 13
c11 ■)), 1Zg.51-11
FOR STEEL/ALUMINIUM DOORS,
WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

7 04.06.18 LSD R.K.TRIVEDI
SPECIFICATION
6 03.03.14 AG SD JKB S.CHATURVEDI S.CHANDA
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD D
5 03.03.11 GJK SD JKB VK D.
SPECIFICATION MALHOTRA
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD ARVIND V.
4 21.03.07 SD JKB KUMAR CHATURVEDI
SPECIFICATION
REAFIRMED AS STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 2434 of 3884

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS
Ogar 056 INDIA LIMITED STEEL/ ALUMINIUM DOORS, 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
1.11,71 2.1205112 LIRJOilrill I IA Govt of India Undertaking)
WINDOWS & VENTILATORS Page 2 of 13
Abbreviations:
ASTM : American Society for Testing & Materials

IS Indian Standards
Convenor: Mr. Rajanji Srivastava
Members: Mr. Samir Das

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S.K. Naskar
Mr. V.K. Panwar
Mr. Charanjit Singh (Proj.)
Page 2435 of 3884

ENGINEERS
iMeg WINDIA LIMITED STEEL/ ALUMINIUM DOORS, 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
own elimmeenlJognso (A Go. of India UnclenakIng)
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 PRESSED STEEL DOOR/WINDOW FRAME 5
3.0 PRESSED STEEL DOOR SHUTTER 6
4.0 STEEL WINDOWS & VENTILATORS 7
5.0 ALUMINIUM GLAZED DOORS/WINDOWNENTILATORS 8
6.0 ALUMINIUM ROLLING SHUTTER 10 I
7.0 MEASURMENT AND RATE 13
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright Ell_ — All rights reserved
Page 2436 of 3884

ENGINEERS
STEEL/ ALUMINIUM DOORS,
f"-zufWitg INDIA LIMITED
(AG. Indla Undedaiong)
6-75-0004 Rev. 7
Page 4 of 13
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of any conflict/contradiction the provisions of the
specification shall override.
IS 617 : Specifications for aluminium and aluminium alloy ingots & castings
for general engineering purposes.
IS 733 : Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars,rods

& sections for general engineering purposes.
IS 737 : Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet &
strip for general engineering purposes.
IS 1038: Specifications for steel doors, windows and ventilators.
IS 1081: Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel and aluminium)
doors, windows and ventilators.
IS 1285: Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy extruded

round tube & hollow sections for general engineering purposes.
IS 1361: Specifications for steel windows for Industrial buildings.
IS 1948: Specifications for Aluminium doors, windows and ventilators.
IS 2553 Part-1: Safety glass — specification

Part-1: General purposes
IS 2835: Flat transparent sheet glass.
IS 3548: Code of practice for glazing in buildings
IS 3614 Part-1: Specification for fire check doors.

Part-1: Plate metal cover and rolling type
IS 3614 Part-2: Specification for fire check doors.

Part-2: Resistance test & performance criteria
IS 4351: Specifications for steel door frames.
IS 5437: Figured rolled and wired glass.
IS 6248: Specifications for metal rolling shutters and rolling grill.
IS 7452: Specification for hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and
ventilators.
IS - 5 : Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels.
IS - 325 : Three phase induction motors
Page 2437 of 3884

1114aEq ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
s Eit5leg INDIA LIMITED STEED ALUMINIUM DOORS, 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
INRPI eiMIP IA Govt
"India
Undertak.g)
IS - 6248 : Metal Rolling Shutters
IS - 2223 : Dimensions of flange-mounted AC Induction motors
IS - 2253 Designation for type & construction and mounting arrangement of

rotating electrical machines
IS - 2968 : Dimensions of slide rails for electrical motors
IS - 4029 : Guide for testing of three phase induction motors
IS - 4691 Degree of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical

machinery
IS - 4722 : Rotating electrical machines
Method of determination of efficiency of rotating electrical

IS - 4889
machines
IS - 6362 : Designation of methods of cooling of rotating electrical machines
IS — 12436 (1988) Specifications for preformed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and

polyisocyanurate (PIR) foams.
2.0 PRESSED STEEL DOOR/WINDOW FRAME

(Reference Standard No.7-75-0070, 7-75-0071)
Pressed steel door/window frame shall conform to IS: 4351.
The frames shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and profile. The frame shall be
made of 16 SWG galvanized pressed steel profiled as required and filled with concrete. The
frame shall be provided with 3 mm thick MS flat spacer welded to frame at @ 500mm c/c and
at holdfast location. Joints between horizontal and vertical frame members shall be mitred. All
welding shall be finished smooth.
The frame shall be fixed to the masonry by means of 200 mm x 25 mm x 6 mm MS hold fast
welded to the spacers and grouted with M-20 grade concrete in minimum 250 mm x 100 mm
x 100 mm sized hole in the masonry.
In case of concrete, the frames shall be fixed by minimum 100 mm long, 12 mm dia metallic
counter sunk type anchor fasteners through the frame and spacers.
Vertical frame member shall be tied together below floor finish by mean of
20mmx2Ommx3mm MS Angle welded to both faces of frame.
40mmx150mmx3mm thick MS pad shall be welded to frame at all hinges and lock locations.
18 SWG GI mortar guard shall be provided at the back of hinges and lock.
The frame surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil etc. and then
finished with painting or powder coating as specified. The thickness of powder coating shall
be subjected to verification at site (on random basis) as directed by Engineer- in- Charge with
appropriate measuring instruments supplied by contractor.
Page 2438 of 3884

ENGINEERS
Ifgar tialeg INDIA LIMITED STEEL/ ALUMINIUM DOORS, 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
17.11P71 e.le51517 •2151.3.5711 Govt of InOta Untledakingt
3.0 PRESSED STEEL DOOR SHUTTER
(Reference Standard No. 7-75-0070, 7-75-0071)
Pressed steel shutters shall be hollow type with 18 SWG Galvanized pressed steel sheet
welded at meeting of the sheets with pad plate of MS flat 3 mm thick all along perimeter. The
cavity shall be packed with Mineral Wool (48 kg/cum) to fully fit into the cavity without
gaps.
The shutter shall be formed by machine bending of steel sheet in form of hollow box making
an overall thickness of 40mm forming truly square edge in accordance with the shutter profile.
It shall further be braced with 18 SWG GI vertical stiffeners @200 c/c (Spacing to be adjusted
for vision panel and fixed with flush riveting)
3mm thick MS pad plates shall be welded inside at required locations for fixing of hardwares
such as tower bolt, aldrop etc.
2 mm thick 25x25 GI angles (vertical) welded to each shutter shall be provided at the meeting
point of double shutter doors
The frame surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil etc. and then
finished with painting or powder coating as specified. The thickness of powder coating shall
be subjected to verification at site (on random basis) as directed by Engineer- in- Charge with
appropriate measuring instruments supplied by contractor.
The shutters shall be fixed to the door frame by means of 100 mm long heavy duty ball
bearing hinges @ 600mm maximum. Vision panel shall be provided in the shutters in
accordance with project drawings.
Following Hardware shall be provided:

a. Over head hydraulic door closer (heavy duty) for each shutter
b. MS holdfast 200mmx25mmx6mm thick @maximum 600 mm c/c
c. 100 mm long SS 304 grade heavy duty ball bearing hinge @600mm C/C maximum for
each shutter
d. SS 304 grade 16mm dia 250mm long aldrop on both sides.
e. Spring loaded heavy duty door stopper for each shutter
f. SS 304 grade 19 mm dia, long handle on both sides of each shutter
g. 10 mm dia SS 304 Tower bolt (250mm long for 2100mm height & 600mm long for
2500mm height) for each shutter
In case of air tight door shutters, approved quality continuous 'D' Profile EPDM Gasket shall
be provided along frame rebate.
In case of partly glazed door shutter, Glass as specified shall be fixed with glazing clips and
solid drawn 10 mm x 10 mm, MS beading backed with putty and fixed by countersunk screws.
Necessary rebate for fixing the glass shall be provided by arranging the shutter bracing
accordingly.
The overall shutter shall ensure smooth operation, proper sizing and shaping as per drgs.
The shutters shall be provided with locking device, handle and other hardwares as specified.
Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Page 2439 of 3884

ItilfRzie/ ENGINEERS
zir tilateg INDIA LIMITED STEEL/ ALUMINIUM DOORS, 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
liwerr eliRtRaILAIITA) Govt Inda Undertalung)
4.0 STEEL WINDOWS & VENTILATORS
Steel windows, ventilators shall in general conform to IS: 1081, IS: 1038 and IS: 7452.
4.1 Materials
4.1.1 Rolled Steel Section
Rolled steel sections for the fabrication of steel windows, ventilators shall conform to IS:
7452.
4.1.2 Glass panels
Glass panels for glazing purpose shall be as specified. All glass panes shall have properly
squared corners and straight edges. Glass panes shall be as specified.
4.2 Workmanship
The profile and type of windows, ventilators (glazed, partly glazed/1 ouvered, side hung/top
hung/fixed shutter, composite) shall be as per drawings.
The frames shall be constructed of sections cut to size and mitred. Corners shall be welded to
form a fused welded joint. Process of welding shall be flash butt welding. The welded joints
shall be grinded to square and flat edges.
Where larger units are to be formed by coupling individual units, the mullions, transoms shall
be bedded in mastic to ensure weather tightness. Mastic shall be applied liberally to the
channels of the outside frame sections before assembly, and the two units being coupled shall
be drawn together tight with clamps, the mastic being squeezed out and cut off neatly when
the units shall be screwed together tight.
Where fixed glazing units are placed over openable units a push fit weather bar shall be
provided.
Before glazing, all opening parts shall be checked for their operational smoothness. The frame
shall be completely cleaned and bedding putty shall be placed in the rebate before glazing.
Glass then shall be cushioned into the bedding and shall be fronted with front putty in a
manner so as to enable the painting to be done up to the sight line. The back putty oozing out
over the glazing rebate shall be cut offsquare and smoothed down.
For panels exceeding 600 x 300 mm in size, glass shall be secured by special glazing clips
inserted in holes already provided in the steel sections, before applying the front putty.
For glazing of very large areas, rust proof steel beading with mitred corners shall be provided
with screws @ 10 cm. from each corner and @ 20 cm. apart from each other. Putty shall be
provided to the face of the bead in contact with glass, in addition to back putty.
Side hung shutters shall be connected to the frame by means of friction hinges. The handle for
side hung shutters shall be of pressed brass mounted on a steel handle plate welded to the
opening shutter frame and shall not be removable easily after glazing. The handle shall have a
two point nose which shall engage with a brass striking plate on the fixed frame in a slightly
open as well as in a fixed position.
Top hung shutters shall be provided with steel butt hinges welded to the fixed frame after
cutting a slot in it. Top hung casements shall be provided with peg stay of 3 holes of pressed
Page 2440 of 3884

(ÊNGINEERS
/F INDIA LIMITED
$ig elf rigreg 1,NUI STEEL/ ALUMINIUM DOORS, 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
I WM eleTW t731,3021170 IA coot of India Undextaking)
brass; 300 mm long which when closed shall be held tightly by the locking bracket fitted to
the fixed frame or to the window.
Before fixing the frames, the size of the opening shall first be checked and cleaned of all
obstructions. The positions of the unit in the reveal shall be taken off the drawings and shall be
marked on the reveal at the jambs using a plumb line.
In case of fixing with masonry, holes for fixing the lugs/hold fasts shall be cut at required
locations.
In case of concrete or stone, the frames shall be fixed by means of dash fasteners.
In case of masonry, the lugs shall be grouted in the holes with cement concrete, M-15 Grade
when fixing to steel work, mastic shall be applied to the sill of the opening and the unit shall
be placed on it with the jambs and head buttered with mastic and the unit shall be fixed with
special fixing dips or with nuts and bolts.
The windows/ventilators shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and
plumb.
All the steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned free of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil etc. by sand
and shot blasting and then finished with painting by priming with red oxide zinc chromate
primer conforming to IS:2074 and painting conforming to IS:1477 (Part II) or by hot dipped
galvanizing conforming to IS:1477 Part (I). Putty shall also be provided with painting in a
manner so as to seal the putty glass junction. Surfaces not meant for painting shall be cleaned
of any strains of paint.
5.0 ALUMINIUM GLAZED DOORS/WINDOW/VENTILATORS

(Reference Standard No. 7 75 0014, 7 75 0015, 7 75 0016, 7 75 0017)
- - - - - - - -
5.1 General
Aluminium glazed doors/window/ventilators shall be of specified sectional size, dimension

and profile as per drawing. Aluminium glazed doors shall be single shutter or double shutters
or with composite profiles (partly openable shutters, partly fixed glazed portion) as per
drawings.
Aluminium glazed windows shall be side hung/top hung/centre hung/sliding or with

composite profiles (partly openable partly fixed) as per the drawings.
5.2 Materials
All Aluminium sections shall be extruded sections of approved Manufacturers having

aluminium alloy as par IS: 733 and IS: 1285. Aluminium sections shall be anodised as per IS:
7088 or electrostatically powder coated to min. 25 microns as specified. The thickness of
anodizing/ powder coating shall be subjected to verification at site (on random basis) as
directed by Engineer- in- Charge with appropriate measuring instruments supplied by
contractor.
Glass used for glazing shall be of following types or as specified.
A. 5.5 mm thick wired glass conforming to IS: 5437.
B. 6.3 mm thick laminated safety glass conforming to IS: 2553.
C. 5.5 mm thick transparent sheet glass conforming to IS: 2835 (wt.7.2 kg/Esq.)
Page 2441 of 3884

/afitad Fia.1) A- ENGINEERS
$41g fengeg INDIA LIMITED STEED ALUMINIUM DOORS, 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
IA Melee =Mark) (A Govt of India Undertaking) WINDOWS & VENTILATORS Page 9 of 13
5.3 Workmanship
Frames shall be square and flat, the corner of the frame being fabricated to true right angles.
Details of construction of frames, shutters etc. shall be as per drawings.
Side hung window shutters shall be fixed to the frame with pivots, or aluminium alloy friction
hinges. For fixing the hinges, slots shall be cut in the fixed frames and the hinges inserted
inside may be riveted to the frame. The handles for side hung shutters shall be of cast
aluminium conforming to IS designation A-5-M of IS: 617 and shall be mounted on a handle
plate riveted to the opening frames. The handles shall have same finish as that of the window
sections. The handles shall have a two point nose which shall engage with an aluminium
striking plate on the fixed frame. The striking plate shall be finished in the same manner as for
the handle.
In case of top hung shutters aluminium alloy cast hinges and peg stays shall be provided.
Centre hung shutters shall be hung on the two pairs of cup pivots of aluminium alloy of IS
designation NS-4 of IS 737 and IS designation A-5-M of IS:617 or chromium/cadmium plated
brass/bronze cup pivots riveted to the outer and inner frames to permit to swing through an
angle of 85 ° . Cast aluminium (conforming to IS designation A-5-M of IS: 617) or
chromium/cadmium plated bronze spring catches shall be fixed in the centre of the top bar of
the shutter. The spring catch shall be secured to the frame by screwing/riveting to the frame
and shall close into aluminium catch plate riveted/welded to the outside of the outer shutter
frame bar. Aluminium or cadmium plated brass chord pulley wheel in an aluminium bracket
shall be fitted at the sill of the shutter with Aluminium or galvanized/cadmium plated steel
screws.
Sliding windows shall be mounted on suitable two track or three track (as required) peripheral
frame of aluminium alloy.
The door shutters shall be fitted with pivots as specified.
The handles for doors shall be of Aluminium and as per design. The door shutters shall be
provided with locking device, floor spring, door closer and any other hardware as specified.
In case of composite Door/window/ventilator units, the units shall be coupled as per drawing.
Weather bar shall be provided whenever a coupling member is fitted over an external opening
shutter.
Glazing shall be fixed to the extruded sections by means of extruded aluminium beading.
Glass panes shall be provided with EPDM gasket/rubber lining before fixing.
The aluminium frames shall be fixed to the masonry by means of aluminium lugs fixed to the
frame (by counter sunk brass machine screws) and grouted with M-15 grade concrete in the
hole in the masonry as per drawing,
In case of concrete wall, the frames shall be fixed by 96 mm long, 12 mm dia metallic dash
fasteners. Any steel material coming in contact with aluminium shall be galvanized.
The windows/ventilators/doors shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and
plumb.
Page 2442 of 3884

t_111 ENGINEERS
IgZI1ia5:1-eg INDIA LIMITED STEEL/ ALUMINIUM DOORS, 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
WWI eiM17 I A Go, of ina. undertaktng)
6.0 ALUMINIUM ROLLING SHUTTER
6.1 General
This specification covers the requirements of design, fabrication, testing, packing supply and
installation of motorised Aluminium Rolling Shutters (Double Walled Insulated & non-
insulated) and accessories.
The Brackets and hood cover shall conform to IS: 6248. The clear opening dimensions shall
not exceed 5000 mm x 5000 mm.
The motorised rolling shutters shall be gear operated suitable for electrical motor operation
(automatic) as well as manual operation with chain-wheel & hand chain. The rolling shutters
shall be provided with mechanical reduction / bevel gear box for operation either mechanically
or with electrical device.
6.2 Materials and components of Rolling shutter
6.2.1 Shutter curtain
The shutter curtain shall be fabricated using aluminium alloy profiled slats. The surface of
these aluminium alloy shall be micro ribbed with the ends of alternate profiles fitted with end
locks to prevent lateral movements of the laths.
The shutter curtains shall have interlocking aluminium alloy slats with integral bottom lock
plate. Aluminium alloy shall have composition of Magnesium 0.4-0.9 %, Silicon 0.3-0.7 %,
Manganese 0.3% (maximum) and remaining Aluminium. Aluminium Alloy shall have UTS
(Ultimate tensile strength) — 19 Kg/mm2 and Elongation — Min 7%.
The non-insulated shutter curtains shall be of 80mm xl9mm double-walled /skinned slats and
the insulated shutter curtains shall be 80mm xl9mm double-walled / skinned slats with
thermal PUF (Polyurethane Foam) insulation packing (within the walls). The PUF packing
shall be tight enough so as to fill all irregular voids and at joints. The PUF shall be non-toxic
and fire retardant / self-extinguishing. The PUF density shall not be less than 40 kg / cu. meter
and its thermal properties & characteristics shall be in accordance with IS-12436 (1988)
6.2.2 Bracket
The bracket shall be made of mild steel conforming to relevant IS having minimum size of
350 mm x 350 mm x 3 mm thick for clear opening dimensions up to 4000 mm x 4000 mm &
350 mm x 350 mm x 4 mm thick for clear opening dimensions beyond 4000 mm x 4000 mm
and up to 5000 mm x 5000 mm.
6.2.3 Shaft
MS Pipes used for the suspension shaft of the roller shall be heavy duty pipe suitable for
mechanical purposes and shall conform to IS: 1239. Minimum diameter shall be 100mm.
6.2.4 Side-Guides
The side guides shall be joint less (single piece construction) made of aluminium alloy of
minimum 3mm thickness. The guide rails shall be provided with PVC / Rubber / Brush seals
to ensure silent shutter travel & effective sealing. Size shall be of 105mmx43mm.
Page 2443 of 3884

011itze ENGINEERS
oaarielia-ag
I NPR maw tD1 JR1.11
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot India Undertaking)
STEEU ALUMINIUM DOORS,
6-75-0004 Rev. 7
Page 11 of 13
6.2.5 Bottom Profile

Aluminium Bottom bar / locking plate shall be 105mm high having a special non-degradable
neoprene / rubber profile for providing a complete sealing upon closure.
6.2.6 Hood & Side-Motor Cover

The covers shall be made of painted GI sheets not less than 0.8 mm thick. They shall be of
rectangular or cylindrical contour depending on the contour of the bracket / end plate. The
hood cover shall be stiffened with angle or flat stiffeners at top and bottom edges to retain
shape. The hood cover shall be fixed to the bracket plate by means of angle cleats and
supported at the top at suitable intervals for preventing sagging. The hood & motor/actuator
assembly - covering shall be a water-tight arrangement for ensuring no water seeps through to
the internal mechanical & electrical components. Adequate slopes & guide-ways are to be
provided to avoid any water accumulation on the hood-covers.
6.2.7 Painting
All components of rolling shutter except springs and inside of guide channel shall be
thoroughly cleaned with a mild non-corrosive chemical to free the substrate of rust, mill-scale,
dirt, oil, etc.
Aluminium sections shall be electrostatically powder coated (approved colour) to minimum
50 microns. The thickness of powder coating shall be subjected to verification at site (on
random basis) as directed by Engineer- in- Charge with appropriate measuring instruments
supplied by contractor.
All coated surfaces shall be free from flaking / peeling. Each shutter shall be clearly and
legibly marked with the Manufacturer's Name or Trade Mark / Shutter Size / Year of
Manufacture.
6.3 Electrical Operation of Rolling shutter
The rolling shutters shall be operated by electric motor actuators - operating on 415 Volts, 3-
phase or 240 Volts, 1-phase - 50 Hz. AC supply. For each building, 415V, 50 Hz, TPN power
supply shall be provided at single point at Contractor's power distribution board (PDB)/Local
Panel. Termination of incoming supply cable(s) in Contractor's PDB/Local Panel shall be also
taken care by Contractor. All onwards cabling from Contractor's PDB/Local panel onwards
shall be provided by Contractor to feed and control motorised rolling shutters.
All associated electrical components for motor control shall be compatible for working at the
above mentioned voltage profile. The motor shall be of side-mounted type installed in
alignment with the roller shaft inside the shaft-hood or adjacent to the rolling-shutter box. In
either case, the rolling shutter motor & actuator assembly enclosure shall have IP-55 (or
better) ingress protection against water & dust. The rolling shutter motor shall be rated for
intermittent periodic duty (Duty Type — S3) or intermittent periodic duty with starting (Duty
Type — S4). Arrangements shall also be made for emergency manual operation of the rolling
shutter with mechanical reduction-gear, wheel & hand-chain override assembly - in the event
of failure of the electric equipment or electricity.
For buildings in safe area, all electrical equipment's shall be in weatherproof executive with
IP-54 protection for direct drive and IP 44 Protection for indirect drive ingress protection.
For buildings in hazardous are, if specified in Tender/MR, following shall be ensured:

1. For hazardous area buildings, all electrical equipment's such as motor, actuators, push
button control stations, PDB/Local panels etc. shall be flameproof type Exd suitable for
applicable Gas Group and Temperature Class.
Page 2444 of 3884

ENGINEERS
LJI ftWeg INDIA LIMITED STEEL/ ALUMINIUM DOORS, 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
lawn eleaNee5130,1,111 (A Go.
of
ndta Undertakeng)
2. All hazardous area equipment shall have test certificates issued by recognised independent
test house (CIMFR/ERTL/BASEEFA/LCEI/UL/FM/KLP or equivalent). All indigenous
equipment shall conform to Indian standards and shall be certified by recognised testing
agencies. All equipment (indigenous & imported) shall have valid statutory approval (e.g.
PESO/DGMS etc.) as applicable for the specified location. All indigenous flameproof
equipment shall have valid BIS license and marking as required by statutory authorities.
6.3.1 Make of all hazardous area equipment (for hazardous area building) and weatherproof
equipment (for safe area building) shall be approved by owner / Engineer-In-Charge before
selection & order placement. The motor shall be heavy duty type & sturdy - suitable for lifting
shutters weighing up to 600 kilograms. The motors shall have BIS or equivalent approvals &
relevant performance guarantee track records. The motor drive unit for the rolling shutter shall
be complete with Drive-Chain / Gear, Plate-Wheel, Bush, Drive-Sprockets, mounting base-
plates, integrated safety brakes & limit-switches, etc. Ideally all metallic components of the
drive system shall be constructed out of non-corrosive high-grade stainless steel.The motor
speed shall be regulated with gear drives such that the speed of the shutter (during up & down
movement) for indirect drive shall be up to 0.05 m/s .The motor operating time within the
intermittent duty cycle shall be long enough to ensure that the motor does not get heated up
excessively, thereby resulting in tripping and / or damaging of motor windings for up to three
continuous up & down (full height traverse) operation of the rolling shutter.
6.3.2 The motor shall be automatically protected from thermal overload by internal thermal probes /
overload relays. The motor shall be compact and motor operation shall be with minimum of
noise & vibration. Ideally, the motor controls (including motor-starter / over-load protections /
contactors / etc) shall be placed within the motor-actuator enclosure.
6.3.3 The automation of the shutter shall have local control with a directional push button control
station flush-mounted with the wall-surface, with 3 buttons marked UP, DOWN and STOP.
The STOP Button must be of Mushroom-head type with lockable arrangement & push to
release type. All the push-buttons shall be of latching type (single press & release) — without
the need to continuously press the buttons during the traverse time of the shutter. The shutter
traversing shall be prohibited if the STOP button is pressed & locked. The push-button unit
shall have an enclosure with a minimum degree of IP-44 dust & water protection
6.3.4 The vertically moving rolling-shutters shall be safeguarded against dropping or uncontrolled
out of balance movement in the event of failure of a single component in their suspension or
balancing systems. Safeguards against dropping can be achieved by using an anti-drop device
or by other design features incorporated into the rolling-shutter suspension system. These
devices shall be referred to as anti-drop safeguards and shall conform to BS EN standards.
6.4 Installation of rolling shutter
6.4.1 The brackets shall be fixed on the lintel / beam with anchor bolts, rawl plugs and screws, bolts,
washers etc. All fixing / mounting accessories shall be made of stainless steel only. The shafts
along with the spring are then shall be fixed on the brackets. The lath portion (shutters) shall
be laid on ground and the side guide channels shall be bound with it. The shutter shall then be
placed in position and the side-guide channels shall be fixed to the wall (or welded to the
structure) through the plates welded to the guides. These plates and brackets shall be fixed by
means of stainless steel screws, bolts and rawl plugs drilled into the wall (or welded to the
structure).
6.4.2 All necessary control wiring / cabling for the side-motor with the limit switches / controller
panel shall be done with 3 / 5 core X 2.5 sq. mm. PVC insulated multi-stranded Copper
Conductor armoured and flame retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) cables. All power cabling from
Page 2445 of 3884

1511=4Treq ENGINEERS
eir E114eu INDIA LIMITED STEEU ALUMINIUM DOORS, 6-75-0004 Rev. 7
1.1271, eleenktercwww, Govt India Undeftaking)
PDB to the side motor shall be with 3 core X 4 sq. mm (minimum) Cu conductor, FRLS cable
. Only fire rated & PVC insulated cables / wires with multi-stranded copper conductors shall
be used for internal wiring of the motor / actuator / push-button. All cabling & wiring shall be
concealed type with heavy-duty PVC conduits. Works include termination of the incoming
power cable from the owner's Main Power Distribution Board to the motor / actuator /
controller unit & all outgoing power & control cables from the controller panel to individual
electrical components with supply & installation of cable glands & copper lugs of adequate
sizes.
6.4.3 The plates and screws, bolts shall be concealed in plaster for an elegant finish. Groove cutting
in walls for flush mounting of the Push-Button station shall be done and the wall cut-outs shall
be finished with plaster & paint after installation. Fixing should be done accurately so that the
operation of the shutter is easy and smooth. After the completion of installation, the rolling
shutters shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove dust, scales, rust etc. and two coats of self-
etching primer shall be applied & two coats of outer synthetic enamel paint shall be applied
with spray painting.
6.5 Mandatory & commissioning spares
6.5.1 The entire consignment of motorized rolling shutters for the shed / buildings shall be supplied
with the following mandatory spares for each rolling shutter. The cost of these spares shall be
included in the Quoted rate.
1. One set of the complete motor / actuator drive unit (of each rating) — duly assembled
with limit switches, drive-chain / worm-gear, plate-wheels / bush / sprockets & mounting
base-plates.
2. One set of motor controller (PCB / Controlling Unit).
6.5.2 The cost for the above enlisted mandatory & commissioning spares shall be included in the
item rate for the Motorized Rolling Shutter in the tender Bill-of-Quantities and no separate
payments shall be admissible.
Measurement & rates for item rate tender shall be in Sq.M. or Kg. as per item description.
Area shall be measured correct up to two places of decimal. Dimensions shall be measured
correct up to 0.5 cm.
A composite unit of various designations shall be first measured over all as a unit of
predominant designations and measurement for remaining designations shall be deducted from
the overall measurement of the composite unit in order to arrive at the quantities for various
designations. Mullions/Transoms/Coupling bars etc. at the meeting points of various
designations shall be equally distributed to all such designations for measurement and rates.
Rate shall include cost of all materials, specified hardwares, labour, erection, hoisting,
scaffolding, removal of scaffolding, protective measures, conveyance, handling,
loading/unloading, storing etc. required for proper completion of the item of work in
accordance with the specification.
Page 2446 of 3884

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
INDIA LIMITED 6-75-0005 Rev. 6
mar k°
WIPP, eTarRe Jg0571) IA Govt of India Undettakingj
FOR PLASTERING & POINTING
Page 1 of 9
fd-ft411-1
FOR
PLASTERING & POINTING
6 31.05.17
SPECIFICATION
k il JS/ JK R. SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA

5 05.04.12 AM SM JKB D. MALHOTRA
SPECIFICATION
4 21.03.07 SD JKB ARVIND KUMAR V.CHATURVEDI
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED STANDARD
2 16.03.94 JS JS AKG AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Rev. Prepared Checke
Date Purpose Convener Chairman
No by d by
Approved by
Page 2447 of 3884

lam-a-e? ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
4Ig laf51-eg
eiwyremacrOM
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undert*ing)
PLASTERING & POINTING 6-75-0005 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASTM : American Standards of Testing of Materials

IS Indian Standards
Convener : Mr. Rajanji Srivastava
Members : Mr. J.K.Bhagchandani

Ms. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. V. K. Panwar
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2448 of 3884

n
lafRaEg Alh ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
ligelf 251-eg W INDIA LIMITED PLASTERING & POINTING 6-75-0005 Rev. 6
(A Govt of India unoodakm)
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 MATERIALS 4
2.0 WORKMANSHIP 5
3.0 PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER 6
4.0 SAND FACE PLASTER 7
5.0 EXPOSED AGGREGATE 7
6.0 GYPSUM PLASTER 8
7.0 POINTING 8
Page 2449 of 3884

15ilaZieq ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
16151-eg
lam.,
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Ind. Undertaking(
Page 4 of 9
1.0 MATERIALS
1.1 Cement
Cement shall conform to 'Technical Specification for Civil and Structural Works'
1.2 Sand
Sand for plaster and pointing shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed
gravel sand or a combination of any of these and shall conform to IS: 1542. Sand shall be
hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain
any appreciable amount of silt, day bails or pellets. Sand shall not contain harmful impurities
such as iron pyrites, coal particles, lignite, mica shale etc in such form or in quantities as to
affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of the mortar.
The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand shall
not exceed the following limits:
1. Clay, fine silt and fine dust when determined in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 2):
In natural sand or crushed gravel sand & crushed stone sand: Not more than 5% by
mass
2. Organic impurities when determined in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 2):

Colour of the liquid shall be lighter than that indicated by standard specified in IS
2386 (Part-2)
Grading of sand for use in Plaster shall conform to IS 1542 (as below)
IS sieve designation Percentage passing
10mm 100
4.75mm 95 to 100
2.36mm 95 to 100
1.18mm 90 to 100
600 micron 80 to 100
300 micron 20 to 65
150 micron 0 to 50
1.3 Water
Water for plastering and pointing shall conform to ' Technical Specification for Civil and
Structural Works'.
1.4 Cement Mortar
Preparation of cement mortar shall conform to 'Technical Specifications of Civil and

Structural Work' unless otherwise mentioned.
1.5 Cement Mortar with Waterproofing Compound
Waterproof compound shall conform to IS: 2645 of approved make. The compound shall be
well mixed with dry cement in the proportion of 3% by weight or as recommended by
manufacturer. Further procedures for preparation of cement mortar shall be as per clause
No.1.4
Page 2450 of 3884

‘711142.Jtai ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION FOR
e
5llgar 2151 g VP INDIA LIMITED
Page 5 of 9
1.6 Gypsum Plaster
Gypsum plaster (Calcium Sulphate Hemi-hydrate - CaSO4.1/2H20) is obtained as a result of

calcinations of raw Gypsum (Calcium Sulphate Di hydrate - CaSO4.2H20), in an automatic
kettle under controlled temperature conditions. The material shall conform to IS 2542 (Part I)-
1978 (for physical characteristics) and IS 2547 (Part II)-1976 (for chemical characteristics).
2.0 WORKMANSHIP
2.1 Preparation of Background Surface
The surface shall be cleaned of all dust, loose mortar droppings, traces of algae, efflorescence
and other foreign matter by water or by brushing. Smooth surfaces shall be roughened by wire
brushing or hacking for non-hard and hard surfaces respectively. Projections on surfaces shall
be trimmed wherever necessary to get even surfaces. In case of brick/stone masonry, raking of
joints shall be carried out wherever necessary. The masonry shall be allowed to dry out for
sufficient period before carrying out the plaster work. The masonry shall not be soaked but
only damped evenly thereafter before applying the plaster.
In case of concrete work, projecting blurs of mortar formed due to the gaps of joints in
shuttering shall be removed. Such surface shall be scrubbed clean with wire brushes. The
surface shall be pock marked with a pointed tool at spacing of not more than 50 mm centers,
the pocks being made not less than 3 mm deep to ensure a proper key for the plaster. The
surface shall be washed off and cleaned of all oil, grease etc. and well wetted before the
plaster is applied.
2.2 Sequence of Operations
For external plaster, the plastering operations shall be started from the top floor and carried
downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering may be started wherever the building frame,
roofing, and brick work are ready.
The surfaces to be plastered, shall first be prepared as described in 'Preparation of background

surface' in clause no 2.1
The first under layer shall then be applied to ceilings. After the ceiling plaster is complete and
scaffolding for the same removed, plastering on wall shall be started.
After a suitable time interval as detailed under various types of plaster in subsequent paras,
depending upon the type of mortar, the secondary layers if required shall be applied. After a
further suitable time interval as detailed under various type of plaster in subsequent paras, the
finishing coat shall be applied first to the ceiling and then to the walls.
Plastering of cornices, decorative features, etc. shall be completed before the finishing coat is
applied. Unless otherwise specified corners and edges shall be rounded off to a radius of
25mm, such rounding off shall be complete along with the finishing coat to prevent any joint
marks showing out later.
2.3 Scaffolding/Staging
Scaffolding/staging for plastering/pointing shall be as per 'Technical Specification for Civil

and Structural Work'.
2.4 Damage Rectification
Any cracks, damages, any part of work which sound hollow when tapped or found damaged
Page 2451 of 3884

latitadet ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
*Igen Eit5teg W INDIA LIMITED PLASTERING & POINTING 6-75-0005 Rev. 6
MKT, 242.35r2 an .7115,i1 (A Govt of Inda Undertaking)
Page 6 of 9
or defective otherwise shall be cut out in rectangular shape and redone as directed by
Engineer-in-charge.
2.5 Chicken Wire Mesh
150mm wide, closely knit , 20 gauge chicken wire mesh stretched tight and fixed with G.I.
"U" type nails shall be provided at all the brick/stone masonry and RCC joints.
3.0 PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER
3.1 Preparation of Mortars
The mortars of specified mix shall be used as per the specifications of 'Cement Mortar'
described in clause no. 1.4
3.2 Application of Plaster
3.2.1 One Layer Plaster Work
To ensure even, specified thickness, plaster of 150 mm x 150 mm shall be first applied
horizontally and vertically at not more than 2 meter interval over the entire surface to serve as
gauges. The surface of these gauged areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster
surface. The mortar shall be brought to true surface by working with a wooden straight edge
reaching across the gauges with small upward and sideways movements at a time. Finally the
surface shall be finished off true with a trowel or wooden float to obtain a smooth texture.
Excessive trowelling or overworking the float shall be avoided. All corners, arises. angles and
junctions shall be truly vertical/ horizontal and shall be carefully finished. Rounding or
chamfering of corners, arises, junctions etc. shall be carried out with proper templates to the
size required.
In suspending the work, the plaster shall be left. cut clean to line, both horizontally and
vertically. When recommencing the plastering, the edge of the old work shall be scrapped
clean and wetted before plastering the adjoining area. Plastering work shall be closed on the
border of the wall and nearer than 150 mm to any corners or arises and shall not be closed on
the body of the features such as plaster bands, cornices nor at the corners or arises.
3.2.2 Two Layer Plaster Work
3.2.2.1 First or Under Layer
The first or underlayer of the specified thickness shall be applied as described in clause no.
3.2.1. Before the first coat hardens, surface of it shall be beaten up by edges of wooden tapers
and close dents shall be made on the surface. The subsequent coat shall be applied after this
coat has been allowed to set for 3 to 5 days depending upon weather conditions. The surface
shall not be allowed to dry during this period.
3.2.2.2 Second or Finishing Layer
The second layer shall be complete to the specified thickness in the same manner as for first
layer.
3.3 Curing
Curing shall be started 24 hours after finishing the plaster. The plaster shall be kept wet for a
period of 7 days. During this period the plaster shall be suitably protected from all damages at
the contractor's expense by such means as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The date of
Page 2452 of 3884

faelt,ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
Otar V151egW INDIA LIMITED PLASTERING & POINTING 6-75-0005 Rev. 6
WC, OWOROffoaocual) IA GUN of haw underialung)
Page 7 of 9
execution of plastering shall be marked on the plastering to ensure the proper duration of
curing.
4.0 SAND FACE PLASTER
4.1 Preparation of Mortar
The mortar of specified mix shall be used as per the specifications of cement mortar described
in clause no. 1.4.
Sand face plaster shall consist of 13 mm thick (1 cement: 4 coarse sand by volume) underlayer
and 7 mm thick (1 cement:2 coarse sand, granule size 2 to 2.5mm by volume) top layer.
Application of plaster shall be as described in 'two coat plaster work' in clause no. 3.2.2.
The surface of the sand face plaster shall be finished rough with sponge or as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
4.3 Curing
Curing shall be described in clause 3.2
5.0 EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH
The morter of specified mix shall be used as per the specifications of cement mortar described
in clause no. 1.4. White and coloured marble chips shall be of 6 mm to 12mm size out of
Makrana/Ambaji, grade I or Dongri Chittor Brown/Rajnagar/Abu green grade-1 quality as
specified.Marble dust shall be obtained from crushing hard marble stone.
Exposed aggregate finish plaster shall consist of 12mm thick plain cement plaster underlayer
(1 cement: 4 coarse sand by volume) finished rough and 20 mm thick top layer. Underlayer
shall be applied in accordance with 'One layer plaster work' described in clause no. 3.2.1.
Top layer shall be 20 mm thick admixture of white cement and grey cement (mix. ratio 1:1 by
volume) mixed with white/coloured marble chips/pebbles of 6mm to 9mm nominal size as per
item description. Mix ratio shall be 1 cement: 1 marble chips/pebbles by volume. Marble dust
@ 15% by volume shall be added to the admixture. The pebbles to be used shall be well
washed and drained. The admixture shall be thrown wet on to the under layer while it is still
plastic using strong whipping motion at right angles to the face of the wall. One coat of neat
cement slurry @ 2.75 kg cement per square meter of area shall be applied on to the under
layer to receive the top layer. The whole plastering shall be laid in panels of maximum 1.2 M
x 1.2M or as per drawing with 12mm x 20mm grooves in between formed by holding
removable wooden batons of 12mmx x 25mm size over the under layer.
Loose mortar etc. on the top surface shall be cleaned/removed by brushing/washing/spraying

with water jet after initial setting of mortar.
5.3 Curing
Curing shall be as described in Clause no. 3.3
Page 2453 of 3884

t_5-111aeJei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
4fge.e 16712-egV_W INDIA LIMITED PLASTERING & POINTING 6-75-0005 Rev. 6
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 8 of 9
6.0 GYPSUM PLASTER
The powder (gypsum plaster) should be mixed with clean water preferably in clean plastic
buckets to avoid mixing with impurities, ensuring thorough mixing by help of mixing rod so
as to avoid formation of lumps and unmixed residues. The water to plaster ratio should be
maintained as per manufacturer's specification.
Gypsum plaster can be applied in thickness range of 3-25 mm. However, while applying
gypsum plaster in thickness excess of 12-13 mm, it has to be applied in layers of 10mm each.
Similar will be the application process for RCC columns. However, it is not recommended to
go beyond a thickness of 13mm for ceilings.
6.3 Curing
There is no requirement of curing. Gypsum plaster dries in 3 days, after which painting can be
done directly over the finished surface.
7.0 POINTING
Pointing shall be of the type specified such as flush, cut or weather struck, raised and cut etc.
7.1 Preparation of Base Surface
The joints shall be raked to such a depth that the minimum depth of the new mortar measured
from either the sunk surface of the finished pointing or from the edge of the brick shall be less
than 20 mm.
7.2 Mortar
Mortar shall be in accordance with the specifications of cement mortar described in clause no.
1.4
7.3 Application of Mortar and Finishing
The mortar shall be pressed into the raked out joints with a pointing trowel according to the
type of pointing specified. The mortar shall be spread over the corner edges or surfaces of the
masonry. The pointing shall then be finished with the pointed tool. The superfluous mortar
shall be cut off from the edges.
7.4 Flush Pointing
The mortar shall be pressed into joints and shall be finished off flush and leveled. The edges
shall be neatly trimmed with trowel and straight edges.
7.5 Cut or Weather Struck Pointing
The mortar shall first be pressed into joints. The top of the horizontal joints shall then be
neatly pressed back by about 15 mm with the pointing tool so that the joint is sloping from top
to bottom. The vertical joint shall also be similarly pointed. The junctions of vertical joints
with the horizontal joints shall be at true right angles in case of brick & coursed rubble
masonry.
Page 2454 of 3884

latae,ei-
-7)- ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
4igen kiMegW INDIA LIMITED PLASTERING & POINTING 6-75-0005 Rev. 6
ekwea..7.13rw) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 9 of 9
7.6 Raised and Cut Pointing
This type of pointing shall project from the wall facing with its edges cut parallel so as to have
a uniformly raised band about 6 mm and width 10 mm more as directed. The pointing shall be
finished to a smooth but hard surface.
7.7 Curing
Curing shall be as described in clause no. 3.3
The description of each item, unless otherwise mentioned includes wherever necessary all
material, conveyance and delivery, handling, loading/unloading, storing, fabrication, hoisting,
all labour for finishing the work, preparation of background surface, staging/scaffolding,
application, finishing, removal of staging/scaffolding, curing and other incidental charges. The
rate for item rate tenders shall be for all heights and at all heights of work.
8.1 Plastering & Pointing
Thickness of the plaster shall be the minimum thickness at any point on a surface and shall be
exclusive of the key i.e. grooves or open joints in masonry. No extra payment shall be allowed
for extra thickness of plaster done by contractor, drip moulds, rounding of edges etc.
For item rate tenders, all plastering/pointing shall be measured in square meters unless
otherwise specified. Length, breadth and height shall be measured correct to 0.1 meters.
Sotfits of stairs shall be measured as plastering on ceiling. Ceiling with projected beams shall
be measured over beams and plastered side of beam shall be measured and added on ceiling.
Deductions and additions shall be made in the following manner.
a) No deductions shall be made for ends of joists, beams, posts, openings not exceeding
0.5 Sq. M. area and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits etc. of these
openings mortar finish to plaster around ends of joists, beams, posts etc.
b) Deductions for openings exceeding 0.5 Sq. M but not exceeding 3 Sq. M each shall be
made as follows and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits etc. of these
openings.
i) When both faces of wall are plastered with same type of plaster, deduction
shall be made for one face only.
ii) When two faces of wall are plastered with different types of plasters or if one
face is plastered and the other pointed, deduction shall be made from the
plaster or pointing on the side of frame for door, window etc. on which width
of reveals in lesser, but no deduction shall be made on the other side. Where
widths of reveals on both faces of wall are equal, deduction of 50% of area of
opening on each face shall be made.
iii) When only one face is plastered, full deduction shall be made from plaster if
width of reveal on plastered side is lesser. But if widths of reveal on both
sides are equal or more on un-plastered side, no deduction shall be made.
c) In case of openings of area above 3 Sq. M each, deduction shall be made for openings
but jambs, soffits, and sills shall be measured.
Page 2455 of 3884

0 el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
6-75-0006 Rev. 6
fe154-eg INDIA LIMITED
IneR elev. MiJain-R. IA Gout of India Undenakmg)
FOR ROOF TREATMENT
Page 1 of 9
Ucl k
41 11-14) 1-1
FOR
ROOF TREATMENT
.i________
.
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD ..e....••
I\LP)4
22.01.18 6 " Js /SD RS R NANDA
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JKB VK D MALHOTRA
5 15.05.12 MKV SM
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD v
CHATURVEDI
SPECIFICATION
REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD SCJ AS
3 10.03.99 SD MLB
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD AKG AS
2 16.03.94 SPECIFICATION
JS JS
1 27.09.91 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SD SD AKG RNS
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Page 2456 of 3884

51g-ar 215tag INDIA LIMITED
ore, srosal ROOF TREATMENT 6-75-0006 Rev. 6
IA G. of Ind. Underta.ngl
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:

IS Indian Standards
EN European Standards
MPa Mega Pascal
Members: Mr. Samir Das

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S.K. Naskar
Mr. V.K. Panwar
Page 2457 of 3884

Sul
` Pei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
*.fg 'Meg INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertalong)
ROOF TREATMENT 6-75-0006 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARD 4
2.0 POLYURETHANE (PU) WATERPROOF COATING (TWO COMPONENTS) 4
3.0 POLYURETHANE (PU) WATERPROOF COATING (SINGLE COMPONENT) 5
4.0 PLOYMER MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOF WATER PROOFING 6
5.0 ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) 7
6.0 GUARANTEE 9

Page 2458 of 3884

fzg-ar faiitg.
■ Artn efecrqr
INDIA LIMITED
in Govt of India Unde ■ tak.91
Page 4 of 9
1.0 REFERENCE CODES & SPECIFICATIONS

1. ASTM D5 Standard Test Method for Penetration of Bituminous Materials
2. ASTM D36 Standard Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ball
Apparatus)
3. ASTM D41 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp-
proofing, and Waterproofing
4. ASTM D146 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Bitumen- Saturated
Felts and Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing
5. ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
6. ASTM D751 Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics
7. ASTM C836 Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid- Applied
Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing
Course
8. ASTM C898 Standard Guide for Use of High Solids Content, Cold Liquid- Applied
Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with Separate Wearing Course
9. ASTM D1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for
Ice Dam Protection
10. ASTM D4637 Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof
(Typel) Membrane (Type I—Non-reinforced)
11. EN 13956 Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Plastic and rubber sheets for roof
waterproofing. Definitions and characteristics
12. IS 3384 Bitumen primer for use in waterproofing and damp-proofing
2.0 POLYURETHANE (PU) WATERPROOF COATING (TWO COMPONENTS)
2.1 Material
PU waterproof coating shall consist of 2 pack clear or pigmented Aliphatic Polyurethane

confirming to ASTM C836 using Polyether Polyols (Polyester or Castor oil based Polyols are
not acceptable) with Iso-cynorate for rendering flame resistant characteristic. The 2 pack
system consisting of pigment and the solvent (Xylene or Toulene, no filter) shall be mixed in
definite ratio by weight strictly as per approved Manufacturers specification for preparing the
coating for application. The coating shall have minimum tensile strength of 7 MPA (after 4
weeks at ambient temperature) and perfectly smooth, dust free glossy finish. It should also
have a very low water absorption rate (0.5 % maximum at ambient temperature after 7 days).
The material shall be used within its shelf life.
2.2 Workmanship
The roof surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush and all foreign matter etc. shall
be removed. Well defined cracks on the surface shall be cut to "V" section, cleaned and filled
up with a paste of 2 component Polyurethane based crack filling compound and white cement
in a ratio of 1:2. The finished surface shall be perfectly dry and any dampness should be
allowed to evaporate. Potholes or depressions shall be filled up after removing weak cement
concrete or cement plaster etc. with PCC(1 cement :1.2 coarse sand :3.5 stone aggregate of
6mm & down size by volume,) laid over a coat of neat cement slurry 02.75 Kg of cement per
Sq.M of area, wherever required thus preparing smooth and properly sloped surface. Slope
and leveling of the existing surface shall be checked and if necessary. adequate slope shall be
provided by laying PCC laid over neat cement slurry as above for effective roof drainage.
Page 2459 of 3884

INDIA LIMITED ROOF TREATMENT 6-75-0006 Rev. 6
IA Go. of India Uncleftaking)
Page 5 of 9
2.2.2 Primer Coat
It shall consist of 2 packs of Polyurethane mixed in the ratio as per Manufacturer's

specification. A single coat of this primer shall be applied by brush over the prepared bed as
an adhesion coat.
The primer shall be allowed to dry for a minimum of 8 hours time before the successive
finishing coats of PU are applied.
2.2.3 Finishing Coat
The finishing coats shall consist of three successive pigmented sealing coats each of 2 packs
of Polyurethane mixed in the ratio as per Manufacturer's specification. Application shall be
with brush to a smooth and even finish. Minimum covering capacity shall be 160 Gms/ Sq.M
per coat to give a total dry film thickness of 1.5mm ± 0.1mm.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry for minimum 12 hours before applying next coat. Care shall
be taken for quick application after mixing the 2 pack primer in view of short pot life of the
mix and shall be fully consumed within the stipulated period as per Manufacturer's
specification (maximum 60 minutes at 30 deg C)
The PU coating shall be continued up the parapets or walls for a minimum of 150mm over the
finished roof surface. It shall be continued into rain water pipes by at least 100mm.
2.2.4 Protective Layer
The final coat of PU, when tacky, shall be sprinkled with 300 micron layer of clean sand. Over
this, plain cement concrete (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size
by volume) of 50mm minimum thickness mixed with cement based polymer modified
waterproofing compound shall be provided. The PCC layer shall be laid in panels of max.
1200 mm X 1200 mm size and shall be reinforced with 24 SWG chicken wire mesh (20mm x
20mm). Proper shuttering, tamping, curing etc shall be done. The top surface shall be finished
smooth in slope. Dummy square joints @ 300mm x 300mm shall be marked on the top surface
by pressing rope over finished surface. The joints between panels shall be raked out neatly
(after stipulated curing period) to a minimum 6mm X 6mm V groove and filled up with an
approved quality elastomeric compound or polysulphide sealant. Drain outlet shall be
provided for all spouts or rain water pipes by suitable rounding, filling and sloping and by
providing minimum 450 mm x 450mm khurras (rain water collecting pit, leveled down by
minimum 25mm from adjacent areas) in cement concrete (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone
aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume) at all drainage outlets..At the junction of the roof
and parapet or any other vertical surfaces, a fillet of 75mm radius shall be formed in cement
concrete (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume).
3.0 POLYURETHANE (PU) WATERPROOF COATING (SINGLE COMPONENT)
3.1 Material:
The material shall consist of a single component, high solid content (minimum 80%), highly
viscous liquid containing urethane polymers conforming to ASTM C 836. This single
component coating shall cure by reaction with atmospheric moisture to give a continuous film
The cured coating shall have minimum tensile strength of 3MPA after 4 weeks of drying.
The material shall be used within its shelf life.
Page 2460 of 3884

taleg
I aire'n Fe2141,613,72Fil
INDIA LIMITED ROOF TREATMENT 6-75-0006 Rev. 6
(A Go. of India Under1A1l91
Page 6 of 9
3.2 Workmanship
3.2.1 Preparation of surface
Preparation of surface shall be as described in Clause 2.2.1.
3.2.2 Primer coat
Urethane primer shall be applied on the perfectly dry prepared bed with a brush in a single
coat with primer coverage as per approved manufacturer manufacturer's specification.
The primer shall be allowed to dry for a minimum of 2 hours before applying the successive
finishing coats. If the drying time exceeds 48 hours, re-priming shall be done.
3.2.3 Finishing coats
The finishing coat shall consist of one priming coat and two layers of PU coating, applied with
minimum coverage at 1.8 Kg per Sq. M. to give a total dry film thickness of 1.5mm.
Care shall be taken for quick application and the pack shall be consumed within the stipulated
period as per manufacturer's specification. Any skin formed on top of the opened pack shall
be removed before using the contents.
The water proof coating shall be continued up the parapet or walls for a minimum of 150mm
over the finished roof surface. It shall be continued into rain water pipes by at least 100mm.
Protective layer shall be as described in Clause 2.2.4.
4.0 POLYMER MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOF WATER PROOFING
4.1 Material
Bituminous membrane for waterproofing shall be 4mm thick prefabricated polymer (APP-
atactic polypropylene) modified and shall be reinforced with nonwoven Polyester and shall
have following properties. Test methods of all these properties shall be as per relevant ASTM
codes.
S. No. Material Properties Testing

Standards
1 Thickness 4mm ASTM D751
2 Penetration at 25deg. C, 100g, 5 seconds 25+_5mm ASTM D5
3 Softening point 110 to 155 deg C ASTM D36
4 Low Temp. Flexibility -2 deg C to -10 deg C ASTM D1970
5 Tensile strength ASTM D146
a. Longitudinal > 500 N/ 5cm
b. Transverse > 450 N/ 5cm
6 Elongation ASTM D146
a. Longitudinal > 40%
b. Transverse > 40%
7. Water absorption 0.12% max. ASTM D570
Page 2461 of 3884

ei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
*igen 001tg
Mann r1rala5LA3cA I
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl of India Undertaktngf
Page 7 of 9
4.2 Workmanship
4.2.2 Primer coat
One coat of bituminous solvent based primer of approved quality and conforming to IS: 3384
or ASTM D41 shall be cold applied @ 0.2-0.4 litre/Sq M over the entire area to be
waterproofed including vertical surfaces. The primer shall be allowed to be dry for minimum
24 hours.
4.2.3 Fixing of APP Membrane
APP polymer modified bituminous membrane shall be laid over the primer coat by torch
welding. The membrane shall be properly pressed during laying to remove any entrapped air.
The joints should be sealed properly with necessary side laps of 100mm and end laps of
150mm.
The membrane shall be continued along the vertical surfaces up to a minimum height of
300mm. Suitable fillet of 75mm radius shall be formed in cement concrete (1 cement :2 coarse
sand :4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume) at the junction of horizontal or
vertical surfaces. The continued membrane shall be terminated in minimum 20mm x 10mm
chase to be provided in the vertical surface and shall be sealed with approved polyurethane
sealant.
The plain cement concrete layer shall be provided directly over membrane without sprinkling
of clean sand.
Protective layer shall be as described in Clause 2.2.4. Thickness of PCC layer shall be
minimum 35mm.
5.0 ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) ROOF WATER PROOFING
5.1 Material
The EPDM membrane for waterproofing shall be a single-ply synthetic rubber membrane
made of Ethylene Propylene Diene Terpolymer mixed with carbon, oil, curing agents and
processing acids, calendared into large sheets and vulcanized. The membrane shall be 1.5mm
thick and shall have the following properties.
The EPDM standard membrane shall be a 100% cured unreinforced EPDM roofing membrane
made of a synthetic rubber Ethylene, Propylene, Diene Terpolymer. The sheet shall be made
of two plies of standard compound and shall be factory-assembled into large, fully vulcanized
seamless membranes. The membrane can be supplied in the following dimensions:
Specific weight 1170 kg/m 3;

Length 15.25 m; 30.5 m; 45.75 m; 61.00 in;
Width 2.28 in; 3.05 in; 5.08 in; 6.10 in;
7.62 m; 9.15 m; 12.20 m; 15.25 m
Dimension of the membrane will be chosen in view of the dimensions, complexity of the roof,
the application method chosen and the experience of the installer.
Page 2462 of 3884

$11gar Mreg
i+112R
INDIA LIMITED
,q ROOF TREATMENT 6-75-0006 Rev. 6
G. of India Undeltakingi
Page 8 of 9
The membrane complies with the following characteristics when tested in accordance with EN
13956 & ASTM D-4637 (Type I)
Tensile strength (both directions) >= 8 N/mm2

Elongation at break >= 300%
Tear Resistance >= 40 N
Static loading >= 25 kg (on soft and hard support)
Dynamic indentation >= 300 mm (hard support)
>= 2000 mm (soft support)
Cold fold ability <= -45°C
Resistance to static loading > 25 Kg
(EPS & concrete)
Resistance to impact EPS > 15 mm
Resistance to impact concrete > 10 mm
Joint peel resistance > 25 N/50mm
Joint shear resistance > 200 N/50mm
5.2 Workmanship
5.2.2 Fixing of EPDM Membrane
EPDM membrane must always be fully adhered to the substrate i.e. the below surface, by
applying suitably approved bonding adhesive for fixing the membrane. Membrane shall be
firstly positioned on the substrate for about 30minutes. Then half of the membrane shall be
folded back and bonding adhesive shall be then applied to the underside of the folded
membrane and also to the substrate that has to be covered. Let both the surfaces dry until
adhesive no longer sticks, roll back the membrane onto the substrate and sweep with soft
brush or as advised by engineer in charge. Similarly repeat with other half of the membrane.
EPDM membrane shall preferably be laid in with a single sheet on the roof but if there is a
need to splice to adjoining EPDM membrane them it shall be noted that no space shall be left
in between adjacent EPDM membranes. However a slight over lap of max. 100mm is
permissible and this joint will be sealed with the help of self adhesive splice tape from the
same vendor and underside of membrane shall be suitably fixed to other membrane using
bonding adhesive and shall be suitably pressed with roller. Contractor to make sure that no air
bubbles are trapped inside, during this process. All the corners and insertions of pipes etc shall
be treated with Form Flash, water block sealant and lap sealant
The membrane shall be continued and fixed using bonding adhesive along the vertical
surfaces up to a minimum height of 300mm. Suitable fillet of 75mm radius shall be formed in
cement concrete (1 cement :2 coarse sand :4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume)
at the junction of horizontal or vertical surfaces. The continued membrane shall be terminated
in minimum 20mm x 1 Omm chase to be provided in the vertical surface and shall be sealed
with approved polyurethane sealant.
Contractor to properly seal all rain water outlets incorporating clamp ring / Insert piece/
Scupper as per the detail applicable for the particular junction or as instructed by engineer in
charge. The membrane must be restrained using 'Base Tie-in' where change in roof slope
angles exceeds 15°.
The membrane shall be continued along the vertical surfaces up to a minimum height of
300mm. Suitable fillet of 75mm radius shall be formed in cement concrete (1 cement :2 coarse
Page 2463 of 3884

dol ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
0?en mac'
IMMO ereove dodgem)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gout of India Undertaking)
Page 9 of 9
sand :4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume) at the junction of horizontal/ vertical
surfaces. The membrane will be secured with a termination bar, used in conjunction with
water repellent sealant Water Block between the membrane and the substrate under
compression behind the termination bar, mechanically fixed at maximum 200 mm centers
using appropriate fasteners. A bead of Lap Sealant is applied along the top edge of the
termination bar. The EPDM membrane will be mechanically fastened using an appropriate
fastening system. A proprietary flashing is secured to the vertical face above the membrane
termination. The counter flashing will cover the top of the fastening system by a minimum of
100 mm. The vertical membrane shall be provided with acrylic coating. This coating shall be
shall be sprayed in one coat or roller applied in two coats after two weeks of the installation.
The complete installation procedure shall be done by applicator approved by the EPDM
vendor/company.
The plain cement concrete layer shall be provided directly over membrane without sprinkling
of clean sand.
6.0 GUARANTEE
A Guarantee of minimum 10 years shall be provided against the performance of the finished
waterproofing system.
The finished work shall be measured in Sq.M of area in case of item rate tenders.
Page 2464 of 3884

ENGINEERS WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
INDIA LIMITED DISTEMPERING, PAINTING & 6-75-0007 Rev. 6
(Ow-,16151eg,
OM (A Govt of India Undertaking)
POLISHING Page 1 of 15
t711-9-
*YR- 1-111Pin 1-1 fir
FOR
WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
DISTEMPERING, PAINTING AND
POLISHING
6 25.08.17
7
1 0" JS/ J114°..- RAJAN
SRIVASTAVA
11*-11/4
.;N
R. NANDA
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JKB D MALHOTRA
5 09.04.12 TS JS
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD ARVIND KUMAR
V.
4 21.03.07 SD JKB
CHATURVEDI
SPECIFICATION
3 10.03.99 REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SD MLB SCJ AS
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD AKG AS

2 16.03.94 JS JS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Date Purpose
by by
Convenor Chairman
No
Approved by
Page 2465 of 3884

0 ENGINEERS WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
fg-zir lageg
(am,/
INDIA LIMITED
f A Govt of India Undeftalong)
DISTEMPERING, PAINTING & 6-75-0007 Rev. 6
Abbreviations:

IS Indian Standards
Convenor : Mr. Rajanji Srivastava
Members : Mr. J.K. Bhagchandani

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. V. K. Panwar
Page 2466 of 3884

elgez ',Rift INDIA LIMITED DISTEMPERING, PAINTING & 6-75-0007 Rev. 6
Govt of India Undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 WHITEWASHING 5
3.0 COLOURWASHING 6
4.0 DRY DISTEMPERING 7
5.0 OIL BOUND DISTEMPERING 8
6.0 WATERPROOF CEMENT PAINT 9
7.0 PLASTIC EMULSION PAINT 10
8.0 ACRYLIC COPOLYMER AGGREGATE FINISH 11
9.0 ACRYLIC BASED EXTERIOR EMULSION PAINT 11
10.0 PAINTING OF WOOD WORK 12
11.0 PAINTING OF STEEL AND OTHER METAL SURFACE 14
12.0 ALLOWABLE VOC CONTENT 15
Page 2467 of 3884

ei WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
51gar EtMeg
NIRn 21E9W
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goat of India Undertaking)
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of conflict/contradictions provisions of the specification
shall override.
IS 6278 Code of practice for white washing and colour washing.
IS 2395 Code of practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces.
IS 712 Specification for building limes.
IS 55 Specification for Ultramarine blue for paints.
IS 63 Specification for whiting for paint and putty.
IS 427 Distemper (dry), colour as required.
IS 428 Distemper (Oil Bound), colour as required.
IS 5411 Specification for plastic Emulsion paint for interior use.
IS 2338 Part-1 : Code of practice for finishing of wood, and wood based materials.
Part-1 : Operations & workmanship
IS 2338 Part-2 : Code of practice for finishing of wood, and wood based materials.
Part-2 : Schedule
IS 5410 Cement paint, colour as required.
IS 2524 Part-1 : Code of practice for painting non ferrous metals in buildings.
Part-1 : Pretreatment
IS 2524 Part-2 : Code of practice for painting non ferrous metals in buildings.
Part-2 : Painting
IS 1477 Part-1 : Code of practice for painting ferrous metals in buildings.

Part-1 : Pretreatment
IS 1477 Part-2 : Code of practice for painting ferrous metals in buildings.

Part-1 : Painting
IS 384 Brushes, paints and varnishes, flat.
IS 486 Brushes, sash, tool, for paints and varnishes.
IS 110 Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler enamels for use over primers.
IS 426 Paste filler for colour coats.
IS 345 Wood filler, transparent liquid.
IS 3585 Ready mixed paint, aluminium brushing priming water resistant for
wood work.
Page 2468 of 3884

101 ei ENGINEERS WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
Ogen INDIA LIMITED DISTEMPERING, PAINTING & 6-75-0007 Rev. 6
MR?, efecnirdaJadswo IA Govt of India Undeltaking)
IS 110 Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler for enamels for use over
primers.
IS 106 Ready mixed paint, brushing, priming for enamels, for use on metals.
IS 2395 Part-1 : Painting of concrete, masonry & plastered surface, code of practice
Part-1 : Operations and workmanship
IS 2395 Part-2 : Painting of concrete, masonry & plastered surface, code of practice
Part-2 : Schedule
All materials required for the execution of painting work shall be obtained direct from
approved manufacturers and shall be brought to the site in makers drums, bags etc. with seals
unbroken.
In case of ready mixed paints, thinning if necessary, the brand of thinner shall be as per
recommendations of the manufacturer.
Paint shall be applied by brushing or spraying. The brushing operations are to be adjusted to
the spreading capacity advised by the manufacturer. During painting, every time after the paint
has been worked out of the brush bristles, the bristles shall be opened up by striking the brush
suitably.
Spray machine used may be of high pressure type or low pressure depending on the nature and
location of work. After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned of paint and shall be
hung in a thinner if intended to be used afterwards. The spray guns shall be cleaned
thoroughly after every break in work. The paint containers, when not used shall be kept close
and free from air.
After the finishing of work, the adjacent surfaces not intended to be washed/
distempered/painted/polished shall be thoroughly cleaned of all paint patches and shall be
finished in accordance with surface finishing of such surfaces.
2.0 WHITE WASHING
White washing in general shall conform to IS 6278.
2.1 Workmanship
2.1.1 Scaffolding
Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected in such a way that as far as possible no
part of scaffolding shall rest against the surface to be white/ colour washed. For white washing
of ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.
2.1.2 Preparation of Surfaces
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, dust, mortar dropping and other foreign
matter before white wash is to be applied. Surfaces already white/colour washed shall be
broomed down to remove all dust, dirt, loose scales of lime wash or other foreign matters.
All damaged portions of the surface plaster shall be removed to full depth of plaster in
rectangular patches and plastered again after raking the joints in masonry properly. Such
portions shall be wetted and allowed to dry before any operation.
Page 2469 of 3884

*fge..il EtMeg
ow?, elecnte 031JOIM
INDIA LIMITED
All holes, cracks, patches etc. not exceeding 0.1 sq. m. in area shall be made good with
material similar to that of the surface. Surfaces affected by efflorescence, moss, fungi, algae,
lichen etc. shall be treated in accordance with IS: 2395.
2.1.3 Preparation of White Wash
The fat lime conforming to IS: 712 shall be slaked at site and shall be mixed and stirred with
about 5 litres of water for 1 kg. of unslaked lime to make thin cream. This shall be allowed to
stand for a period of 24 hours and then shall be screened through a clean coarse cloth. 4 kg of
gum dissolved in hot water shall be added to each cubic metre of lime cream. Approved
quality ultramarine blue conforming to IS 55 @ 3 gram per kg. of lime shall also be added to
the solution. The whole solution shall be stirred thoroughly before use.
2.1.4 Application
White wash shall be applied with "MOONJ" brush to the specified number of coats. The
operation for each coat shall consist of stroke of the brush from the top to down wards,
another from the down to upwards over the first stroke, similarly one stroke horizontally from
right and another stroke from the left. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next coat is
applied. The white washing on ceiling should be done prior to that on walls.
2.1.5 Protective measures
Surfaces of doors, windows, floors etc. which are not to be white washed shall be protected
from being splashed upon. Such surfaces shall be cleaned of white wash splashed if any.
3.0 COLOUR WASHING
3.1 Workmanship
3.1.1 Scaffolding
Surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, dust, mortar dropping and other foreign matter
before white wash is to be applied. Surfaces already white/colour washed shall be broomed
down to remove all dust, dirt, loose scales of lime wash or other foreign matters.
All damaged portions of the surface plaster shall be removed to full depth of plaster in
rectangular patches and plastered again after raking the joints in masonry properly. Such
portions shall be wetted and allowed to dry before any operation.
All holes, cracks, patches etc. not exceeding 0.1 sq. m. in area shall be made good with
material similar to that of the surface. Surfaces affected by efflorescence, moss, fungi, algae,
lichen etc. shall be treated in accordance with IS: 2395.
3.1.3 Preparation of Colour Wash
Sufficient quantity of colour wash enough for the complete job shall be prepared in one
operation to avoid any difference in colour. The basic white wash solution shall be prepared in
accordance with clause 2.1.3. Mineral colours of approved shade and quality not affected by
lime shall be added to the white wash solution in proportions as directed by Engg.in-charge.
Page 2470 of 3884

eiENGINEERS WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
meg INDIA LIMITED
Solid lumps etc. in the colour powder shall be ground to fine powder, sieved and mixed evenly
and thoroughly to the white wash solution.
3.1.4 Application of Colour Wash
Colour wash shall be applied with "MOONJ" brush to the specified number of coats. The
3.1.5 Protective Measure
4.0 DRY DISTEMPERING
4.1 Workmanship
4.1.1 Scaffolding
The surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from dust, dirt, grease, mortar droppings, other
foreign matter and shall be made smooth by sand papering.
In case of distempering over existing distempered surface, the existing distempering shall be
scraped by steel scrapers leaving a clean surface.
All nails shall be removed. Pitting in plaster shall be made good with plaster-of-paris mixed
with dry distemper of colour to be used. The surface then shall be rubbed down again with a
fine grade sand paper and made smooth. A coat of distemper shall be applied over the patches.
The surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular coat of distemper is allowed.
The surface affected by moss, fungus, algae, efflorescence shall be treated in accordance with
IS: 2395.
4.1.3 Priming Coat
A priming coat of whiting conforming to IS 63 shall be applied over the prepared surface. The
priming coat shall be prepared by mixing 2.5 kg. of whiting and one litre of glue solution
(prepared by mixing 250 gm. glue conforming to IS: 852 with boiling water) together and
placing it in a covered vessel with enough water to cover the mixture which shall be left to
cool until it becomes a jelly.
Priming coat shall be applied with "MOONJ" brush to the specified number of coats. The
Page 2471 of 3884

**gel' tifileg INDIA LIMITED DISTEMPERING, PAINTING & 6-75-0007 Rev. 6
(wen rie4n2O71.30;1.0 (A Goof of India Undertaking)
4.1.4 Preparation of Distemper
The dry distemper of approved shade and quality conforming to IS: 427 shall be stirred slowly
in clean warm water using 0.6 litres of water per kg. of distemper. It shall be allowed to settle
for at least 30 minutes before applying. The mixture shall be well stirred before and during use
to maintain an even consistency.
4.1.5 Application of Distemper
After the priming coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered
and dusted off avoiding rubbing off of the priming coat. Prepared distemper shall then be
applied in minimum two coats with proper distemper brushes in horizontal strokes
immediately followed by vertical ones which together shall constitute one coat. The
subsequent coats shall be applied only after the previous coat has dried. The finished surface
shall be even and uniform without patches, marks, distemper drops etc. The application of a
coat in each room shall be finished in one operation. After each day's work, brushes shall be
thoroughly washed in hot water and hung down to dry.
5.0 OIL BOUND DISTEMPERING
5.1 Workmanship
5.1.1 Scaffolding
Same as in clause no. 2.1.1
Preparation of surface shall in general be in accordance with clause no. 4.1.2 except that any
unevenness shall be made good by applying putty made of plaster of Paris mixed with water
including filling up the undulation and then sand papering the same after it is dry.
5.1.3 Primer Coat
The primer coat shall be alkali resistant primer or distemper primer and shall be of the same
manufacture as oil bound distemper.
If the wall surface plaster has not dried completely, alkali resistant primer otherwise distemper
primer shall be applied. The mixture of alkali resistant primer shall be prepared as per
approved manufacturer's instructions.
The application of primer coat shall be in accordance with 2.1.4
5.1.4 Preparation of Oil Bound Distemper
The distemper shall conform to IS: 428 and shall be diluted with water or any other prescribed
thinner recommended by the manufacturer.
5.1.5 Application of Distemper
Page 2472 of 3884

10I 4 ENGINEERS WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
iElOteg
4ige.J1 INDIA LIMITED DISTEMPERING, PAINTING & 6-75-0007 Rev. 6
p an) (A Govt of India Underfalong)
After the primer coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered
and dusted off avoiding rubbing off of the primer coat. Minimum two coats of distemper shall
be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed by immediate vertical strokes which
together shall constitute one coat. The subsequent coats shall be applied after at least 24 hours
between consecutive coats to permit proper drying of the preceding coat. The finished surface
shall be even and uniform without patches, brush marks drops etc. Application of a coat in
each room shall be finished in one operation. 14 cm double bristled distemper brushes shall be
used. After each day's work brushes shall be thoroughly washed in hot water with soap
solution and hung down to dry.
5.1.6 Protective Measures
Same as in clause no. 2.1.5
6.0 WATERPROOF CEMENT PAINT
6.1 Workmanship
6.1.1 Scaffolding
Same as in clause 2.1.1
Preparation of surface shall be in accordance with clause no. 2.1.2. The surface so prepared
shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water before the paint is applied.
6.1.3 Preparation of Paint
Waterproof cement paint of approved make shall be mixed with water and stirred to obtain a
thick paste which shall then be diluted to brushable consistency. The proportion of mixture
shall be as per manufacturer's recommendation. The paint shall be mixed in such quantity
which can be used up within an hour of mixing to avoid setting and thickening of the paint.
6.1.4 Application of Paint
The surface shall be treated with minimum two coats of waterproof cement paint. No less than
24 hours shall be allowed between two coats and subsequent coats shall be applied only after
the preceding coat has become hard to resist marking by subsequent brushing.
The finished surface shall be even and uniform in shade without patches, brush marks, paint
drops etc. Cement paints shall be applied with a brush with relatively short stiff hog or fibre
bristles.
6.1.5 Curing
Curing shall be started after the paint has hardened. Curing shall be done by sprinkling with
water two or three times a day. This shall be done between coats and for at least two days
following the final coat.
Same as in clause in 2.1.5
Page 2473 of 3884

31 ENGINEERS WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
&11 INDIA LIMITED DISTEMPERING, PAINTING & 6-75-0007 Rev. 6
awn riemeAs(JA(AA) (A Gov( W Inda Undeddong)
7.0 PLASTIC EMULSION PAINTING
7.1 Workmanship
7.1.1 Scaffolding
Same as in clause 5.1.2 under specification of oil bound distempering.
7.1.3 Preparation of Paint
Plastic emulsion paint shall conform to IS 5411 (Part-1) and shall be of approved shade.
Preparation of paint shall be as per manufacturer's instructions.
7.1.4 Application of Paint
The paint mix shall be continuously stirred while applying for maintaining uniform
consistency. Number of coats shall be as specified. The painting shall be laid evenly and
smoothly by means of crossing and laying off. The crossing and laying off consists of
covering the area with paint, brushing the surface hard at first, then brushing alternately in
opposite direction 2 to 3 times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to
the same. In this process, no brush marks, no hair marks no clogging of paint puddles shall be
permitted. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat. The paint shall
be applied by means of brush or roller.
Before starting painting with plastic emulsion paint, the prepared surface shall be treated with
two coats of primer consisting of cement, primer, whiting and plastic emulsion paint shall start
only after the preceding coat has become sufficiently hard to resist brush marking. Subsequent
coats of plastic emulsion paint shall also be started after the preceding coat is dried by
evaporation of water content.
The surface on finishing shall present a flat, velvety smooth finish, even and uniform shade
without patches, marks, paint drops etc.
7.1.5 Precautions
A. Brushes shall be quickly washed in water immediately after use and kept immersed in
water during break periods to prevent the paint from hardening on the brush. Old
brushes, if used shall be completely dried of turpentine/oil paints by washing in warm
soap water.
B. No oil base putties shall be used in filling cracks/holes.
C. Washing of painted surface shall not be done within 3-4 weeks of application.
Page 2474 of 3884

t71 el ENGINEERS WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
Ogem Meg
(OWN riecnre 411JOOM)
INDIA LIMITED
8.0 ACRYLIC COPOLYMER AGGREGATE FINISH
8.1 Material
It shall be an acrylic based textured wall coating consisting of quartz and silica aggregate,
inorganic pigments and other additives to form a crack free, flexible, tough, waterproof
coating.
8.2 Preparation of Surface
The surface to be coated shall be cleaned and all dirt, dust, grease and loose particles shall be
removed. Any old textured surface shall be removed with removing agent as per
manufacturer's instructions.
8.3 Application
Bonding agent and water shall be mixed first. Then the flakes/granules shall be added and
mixed thoroughly and kneaded till no lumps are found. The dough shall be left for 20-30
minutes before starting application. The bonding agent, flakes/granules and water shall be
mixed in different ratios for different finishes as per manufacturer's specifications.
The first application shall be by steel trowel. It shall be smoothened, if the specified finish
requires, by a plastic trowel.
9.0 ACRYLIC BASED EXTERIOR EMULSION PAINT
9.1 Material
It shall be an acrylic based wall coating for exterior surfaces consisting of pure acrylic resin
and additives to form a crack free, flexible, tough, alkali resistant, UV resistant waterproof
coating.
The surface to be coated shall be cleaned and all dirt, dust, grease and loose particles shall be
removed. Any old paint shall be removed with removing agent as per manufacturer's
instructions. The surface affected by moss, fungus, algae, efflorescence shall be treated in
accordance with IS: 2395.
9.3 Application
A primer coat of similar shade shall be applied as per manufacturer's specifications. The paint
shall be stirred to a uniform consistency. Two coats shall be applied over the primer coat by
brush or roller. Each coat shall be applied after the previous coat has dried completely. The
coverage of paint and application shall be strictly as per manufacturer's specifications.
10.0 PAINTING OF WOOD WORK
10.1 Preparation of surface
Preparation of wood surface shall conform to IS: 2338 (Part-1) in general. All woodwork shall
be dry and free from any foreign matter. Nails shall be punched well below the surface. The
surface shall be smoothened off with abrasive paper used across the grain prior to painting,
with the grain prior to the staining. Any knots, resinous or bluish sap wood, cutting out of
which is not justified shall be covered with red lead conforming to IS: 103.
Plywood and block board shall be treated in the same manner as for wood work.
Page 2475 of 3884

%.1i el ENGINEERS WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
Pige-11 tVieg
(WM clecple mt .xamf
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertakeng)
Particle board's surface shall be filled with a thin brushable filler and finished as for solid
wood.
10.2 Priming
Priming shall be in accordance with IS: 2338 (Part I and II). Dirt or any other extraneous
material on the surface shall be removed and the priming shall be applied by brushing.
Priming shall be done on all exposed and unexposed surfaces. Unless specified otherwise all
joinery work intended to be painted shall receive atleast 2 coats of primer. Type of primer
shall be in accordance with Table-1 and Table-2 of IS: 2338 (Part-II).
10.3 Stopping and Filling
Stopping and filling shall be done after priming. Stopping shall be made to the consistency of
stiff paste and shall be used to fill holes and cracks. Filler shall be used to level up slight
irregularities of the surface. Filler shall be applied with a putty knife and subsequently rubbed
down to a level surface with abrasive paper.
The filler coat shall be allowed to fully flatten and harden before subsequent coat is applied.
10.4 Application of Undercoat
Under coat shall be applied after the surface has been primed, stopped and filled, and rubbed
down to a smooth surface. Under coat may be brushed or sprayed. After drying the coat shall
be carefully rubbed down and wiped clean before the next coat is applied.
The type of undercoat shall be depending upon the finishing and in accordance with Table 1
and Table-2 of IS: 2338 (Part II).
10.5 Finishing
The finishing paint shall be as specified and shall be applied either by the brush or by
spraying.
Reference shall be made to the Table-1 and Table-2 of IS: 2338 (Part-II)
10.6 Application of Clear Finishes
For the application of clear finishes, the following procedures shall generally be adopted in
accordance with IS: 2338 (Part-I)
A. Filling
B. Staining
C. Sealing
D. Finishing
10.6.1 Filling
Fillers shall be applied to prevent the excessive penetration of the finish to the surface for
obtaining a smooth finish. Fillers shall be conforming to IS: 345.
Fillers shall be heavily applied to the wood surface by hand, using hessian or jute rag across
the grain. It shall be rubbed when still wet to get better penetration. After 5-10 minutes it shall
Page 2476 of 3884

eielENGINEERS WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
1ge.110151-eg INDIA LIMITED DISTEMPERING, PAINTING & 6-75-0007 Rev. 6
(A Govt of India Undertatoog)
be wiped off by hand across the grain followed by a light wipe with the grain. The filled
surface shall be dried preferably over night and smoothened with abrasive paper.
10.6.2 Staining
10.6.2.1 Spirit Stains
Spirit stains are solutions of spirit soluble dyes in Industrial methylated spirit.
10.6.2.20i1 Stains
Oil stains are solutions of oil soluble dyes in linseed oil, but, usually consist of insoluble,
semi-transparent pigments ground in linseed oil and thinned with turpentine or other solvent.
10.6.2.3Preparation of Wood for Staining
Surface intended for staining shall be kept scrupulously clean and free from greasy finger
marks. It shall be prepared by careful smoothing with fine abrasive paper used in the direction
of the grain. Small cracks/nail holes shall be stopped with plastic wood/fine plaster of Paris.
The stopping shall be rubbed down with fine abrasive paper when hard and touched with a
thinned knotting before staining. In case of oil staining stopping shall be done after staining
using tinted putty or wood filler.
10.6.2.4Application of Stains
Stains shall be applied by brushing and wiping or by spraying. The stain shall be so thinned
that it can be applied fairly, liberally without over staining and over lapping.
10.6.3 Sealing
A suitable sealer shall be applied on the filled and sanded surface to prevent absorption by the
wood of the succeeding coats of finish and to seal stain and filler and thus preclude their
bleeding into the finish coat.
Sealer may be sprayed on taking care not to flood the surface and it shall be allowed to dry
hard. When fully dry the surface shall be sanded taking care not to cut through at corners and
edges. Dust shall be blown off and surface wiped with a clean rag.
10.6.4 Finishing
The stained surface shall be varnished, wax-polished or French polished as required after it is
dried.
10.6.4.1 Varnishing
Varnishing of wood and wood based material shall be in accordance with IS: 2338 (Part-I).
Surfaces to be varnished shall be prepared to produce a smooth, dry and matt surface and all
dust and dirt shall be removed from the surface.
The Varnish shall be applied liberally with a brush and spread evenly over a portion of the
surface with short light strokes to avoid frothing. It shall be allowed to flow out while the next
section is being laid in. Excess Varnish shall be scraped out of the brush and then the first
section be crossed, re- crossed and laid off lightly. The Varnish, once it has begun to set, shall
not be retouched. In case of any mistake, the Varnish shall be removed and the work shall be
started afresh.
Page 2477 of 3884

'fgeziEl51-eg
Riled e1eaN1039070)
INDIA LIMITED
Where two coats of varnish are applied, the first coat shall be a hard drying under coating or
flatting varnish which shall be allowed to dry hard and then be flatted down before applying
the finishing coat. Sufficient time shall be allowed in between two coats.
When flat varnishing is used for finishing, a preparatory coat of hard drying undercoating of
flatting varnish shall first be applied and shall be allowed to harden thoroughly. It shall then
be lightly rubbed down before the flat varnish is applied. On larger areas, the flat varnish shall
be applied rapidly, and the edges of each patch applied shall not be allowed to set, but shall be
followed up whilst in free working conditions.
10.6.4.2French Polish
French polish shall conform to IS :348. Suitable pigments shall be added to get the required
colour.
The surface to be French polished shall be rubbed down to smoothness with sand paper and
shall be well dusted. Pores in the surface shall be filled up with fillers.
A pad of woollen cloth covered by a fine cloth shall be used to apply the finish. The pad shall
be moistened with polish and rubbed hard on the surface in a series of overlapping circles
applying the polish sparingly but uniformly over the entire area to give an even surface. A
trace of linseed oil may be used on the face of the pad for the purpose. The surface shall be
allowed to dry and the remaining coats applied in the same way. To finish off, the pad shall be
covered with a fresh piece of clean fine cloth, slightly damped with methylated spirit and
rubbed lightly and quickly with circular motions. The finished surface shall have a uniform
texture and high gloss.
11.0 PAINTING OF STEEL AND OTHER METAL SURFACE
11.1 General
Reference shall be made to IS :2524 and IS:1447.
The surface, before painting, shall be cleaned of all rust, scale, dirt and other foreign matter
with wire brushes, steel wool, scrappers, sand paper etc. The surface shall then be wiped
finally with mineral turpentine which shall then be removed of grease etc. The surface then
shall be allowed to dry.
In case of GI surface, surface so prepared shall be treated with Mordant solution (5 litre for
about 100 sq.m.) by rubbing the solution generously with brush. After about half an hour, the
surface if required shall be retouched and washed down thoroughly with clean cold water and
allowed to dry.
11.3 Application of Priming and Paints
Approved quality primer and paint in specified numbers of coats shall be applied as per
manufacturer's recommendations either by brushing or spraying. Each subsequent coat shall
be applied only after the preceding coat has dried.
Page 2478 of 3884

0 el ENGINEERS WHITE/ COLOUR WASHING,
Ogem fa51-eu
WWI cNeane 0313,771.11
INDIA LIMITED
12.0 ALLOWABLE VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) CONTENT
The limits of quantity of VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) in different types of paints and
primer shall be as defined in the following parameters:
12.1 Primer
Type of Primer Allowable VOC Content

Pink & Grey primer on wood < 50 gms/ltr
Ready mix red oxide zinc chromate primer < 250 gms/ltr
Water thinnable cement primer on wall -. <50 gms/ltr
12.2 Paints
Type of Paint Allowable VOC Content

Acrylic Emulsion <50 gms/ltr
Plastic Emulsion .• <50 gms/ltr
Acrylic Distemper -. <50 gms/ltr
Synthetic Enamel •. <150 gms/ltr
13.0 MEASUREMENT AND RATE
For item rate tenders, all work shall be measured in areas. Areas shall be worked out to the
nearest 0.01 sq. m and all dimensions to the nearest 0.01 metre.
Deductions shall be made in accordance with Specification no. 6-75-0005.
For item rate tenders, rate shall include the cost of all materials, labour, scaffolding, protective
measures etc. and all works involved in specification. The rate shall also include, if not
mentioned otherwise, conveyance, delivery, handling, unloading, storing etc.
Page 2479 of 3884

ENGINEERS
," STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
Ie.ji Rift V
VP' INDIA LIMITED
ROOFING 6-75-0008 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 10
tS) WITI1
I ct) ftftbl.
FOR
ROOFING
)14* .• U.'GV
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD A.
6 19.02.16 MAHALA 6)/J4jj'''' R. SRIVASTAVA S. CHANDA
SPECIFICATION
5 06.07.10 GB JS JKB N. DUARI
SPECIFICATION
CHATURVEDI
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
2 16.03.94 JS JS AKG AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Rev. Committee
C Bureau
Prepared Checked
No
by by
Approved by
Page 2480 of 3884

Ogzil taw-6-w
"® INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt 01 (Ado UndellaNing)
Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
AS Australian Standards
CGI Corrugated Galvanized Iron
EPDM : Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer
GI Galvanized Iron
IS Indian Standards
MS Mild Steel
SWG : Standard Wire Gauge

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. V.K. Panwar
Page 2481 of 3884

lot ei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
Ogar tif5ieg
eTeoffre to, ,ftro5.0
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undeftalfingf
ROOFING 6 - 75 - 0008 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 CORRUGATED GI SHEET (CGI) ROOFING/CLADDING 4
3.0 ALUMINIUM SHEET ROOFING/ CLADDING 6
4.0 PRECOATED GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET ROOFING/ CLADDING 7
5.0 PRECOATED ZINC ALUMINIUM STEEL SHEET ROOFING/ CLADDING (Trapezoidal,

pierce fixed/ screwed down) 8
6.0 PRECOATED ZINC ALUMINIUM STEEL SHEET ROOFING/ CLADDING (Standing

Seam) 9
7.0 MEASUREMENTS AND RATES 10
Page 2482 of 3884

szlf fet5leg
f' Wen ,lecni,! ■731,TErA
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of lotto Undettalongt
Page 4 of 10
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian/ International Standards for information etc.
not covered in the specification. In case of any conflict/ contradiction, provisions of
specifications shall override.
IS: 277 Galvanised steel sheet (plain & corrugated)

IS: 513 Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips
IS: 730 Hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing.
IS: 737 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet and strip for general
engineering purposes
IS: 1230 Cast iron rainwater pipes & fittings.
IS: 1254 Specification- corrugated aluminium sheet
IS: 2527 Code of practice for fixing rain water gutters and downpipes for
drainage
IS: 2676 Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys sheet and
strip.
IS: 12866 Specification for plastic translucent sheets made from thermosetting
polyester resin (glass fibre reinforced)
IS: 15961 Hot dip aluminium-zinc alloy metallic coated steel strip and sheet
(plain)
IS: 15965 Pre-painted Aluminium Zinc Alloy Metallic. Coated Steel Strip and
Sheet
AS: 1397 Steel sheet and strip—Hot-dip zinc- coated or aluminium/ zinc-coated.
AS: 2728 Prefinished/ prepainted sheet metal products for interior/exterior
building.
AS: 3566 • Self Drilling screws for the building and construction industries
ASTM: A755M: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip
Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior
Exposed Building Products.
ASTM: A792M: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
Roof shall have pitch/ slope as per drawings. Materials shall be supplied by approved
manufacturer. The items supplied shall be free from cracks, chipped edges or corners or other
damages. Storage and safety precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to the accessories.
2.0 CORRUGATED GI SHEET (CGI) ROOFING/CLADDING

2.1 Material
GI sheets shall be of specified thickness and of class-3 galvanised as per IS: 277 and shall be of
approved brand.
2.2 Accessories
All roofing accessories like GI ridges, hips, valleys, flashings, gutters etc. shall be of specified
thickness and of class 3 plain galvanised and shall be bent to the required shape and dimensions
as per drawings without damaging the sheet in the process of bending.
Wind ties of MS flats shall be of specified size, subjected to minimum size of 40mm x 6mm.
Page 2483 of 3884

in ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
$1?-a Eifitft INDIA LIMITED ROOFING 6-75-0008 Rev. 6
,7*519 CA Gov, of India tInclenaMing)
Page 5 of 10
2.3 Workmanship
2.3.1 Spacing of Purlins
One purlin each shall be provided at the ridge and the eaves. Spacing of the purlins shall be as
specified. Purlin shall coincide with the centre line of the end lap. Ridge purlin shall be placed
such that ridges can be placed properly. Portion overhanging the wall support should not be
more than one fourth the purlin spacing.
2.3.2 Finish for Purlins
The top surfaces of the purlins shall be painted before fixing the sheets and the embedded
portion shall be finished with two coats of coal tar.
2.3.3 Laying of Sheets
Sheets shall be laid on the purlins to a true plane with the lines of corrugation truly parallel or
normal to the sides of area to be covered unless otherwise specified. They shall be bent up along
their side edges close to the wall and the junction shall be protected by flashing on projecting
drip course as specified.
2.3.4 Laps
End laps shall be 150 mm for 1:2 slope and 200 mm for flatter ones. Side lap shall be of two
ridges of corrugations on each side.
2.3.5 Cutting of Sheets
Sheets shall be cut according to the dimensions and as specified as per drawings. Sheets shall be
cut with a straight edge and chisel to give a straight finish.
2.3.6 Fixing of Sheets
The sheets shall be fixed to the roof members with J or L polymer coated bolts, polymer cap,
seal washer and thrust washer. The bolts shall be long enough to project at least 12 mm above
the top of their nuts. The grip of J or L hook bolts on the side of purlins shall not be less than 25
mm. There shall be at least three hook bolts placed at the ridges of corrugations in each sheet in
every purlin and their spacing shall not exceed 300 mm. Sheets shall be joined together at side
laps by polymer coated bolts and nuts as specified, each bolt shall be with a polymer cap (grease
filled) seal washer and polymer coated thrust washer. Bolts shall be placed zig-zag on
overlapping Corrugations. The spacing of the beam bolts shall not exceed 600 mm in each of
the staggered rows.
2.3.7 Holes
Holes for all bolts shall be drilled in the ridges of the corrugations from the underside before
placing in position. The holes in the sheet shall be at least 50 mm from the edge. The holes in
the washers shall be of diameter of the hook bolts or the seam bolts. The nuts shall be tightened
from above to give a leak proof roof.
2.3.8 Ridges and Hips
The overlap for ridges and hips on either side of CGI sheet and end legs shall be at least 225
mm. Ridges & hips shall be fixed to the purlins with polymer coated hook bolts, thrust washer
and polymer cap. At least one of the fixing bolts shall pass through the end laps of ridges and
hips on either side. If it is not possible extra hook bolts shall be provided. Each end lap of ridges
and hips shall be joined together by at least galvanised iron seam bolts and GI washers. Ridges
and hips shall fit squarely on the sheets.
2.3.9 Valleys and Flashings
The edge, wherever the roof sheeting or valley gutter is turned up against a wall shall be made
weather proof with flashing. Flashing shall be bent to shape and fixed as specified. Lap over the
sheet shall be min. 150 mm. End laps between flashing sheets shall not be less than 225 mm.
Flashing shall be inserted into brick work or masonry joints to a depth of 50 mm and shall be
filled with cement mortar (1:3). When flashing has to be laid at a slope, it shall be stepped at
Page 2484 of 3884

ll ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
51gar lafi6 INDIA LIMITED ROOFING 6-75-0008 Rev. 6
NrPer everre(111.A/CAA) (A Govt of India Undeftakinm
Page 6 of 10
each course of masonry. The steps shall be cut back at an angle of at least 30°.
Valleys shall be bent to shape and shall have at least 225 mm end lap and projection on either
side under CGI sheet. Valleys shall be fixed to the roof members below with polymer coated GI
bolts, polymer cap, seal washer and polymer coated thrust washer. At least one fixing bolt shall
pass through end laps of the valley piece.
2.3.10 Gutters
The longitudinal edges shall be turned back by 12 mm and beaten to form a rounded edge. The
ends of the sheet at junctions of pieces shall be hooked into each other and beaten flush to avoid
leakage.
Gutters shall be laid to minimum 1:120 slope. Gutters shall be true to line and slope and shall be
supported by brackets as specified.
2.3.11 Wind Ties
Wind ties shall be of 40 mm x 6 mm flat iron section and other size as specified. These shall be
fixed at the two eaves end of the sheet. Fixing shall be done with the same loose bolts which
secure sheets to the purlins. Slot holes shall be cut in the wind ties to allow for temperature
variations.
3.0 ALUMINIUM SHEET ROOFING/ CLADDING

3.1 Material
Aluminium sheets shall conform to IS: 1254. The material of Aluminium sheet shall conform to
alloy 31000-H-4 as specified in IS: 737 having following properties:
Profile: Profiled/corrugated sheet shall be Industrial troughed sheet
Conforming to R-7/ IS: 1254
Thickness: 20SWG (0.91mm) for ROOFING
22 SWG (0.71mm) for CLADDING
(Thickness, tolerances as per IS: 2676-1981)
Recommended purlins spacing: 1.7(max.)
Width: 920mm (overall)
850mm (effective), Tolerance: +/- 10mm
Weight & structural data:
SWG Thickness (mm) Basic wt. Kg/msq.) Moment of Inertia/pitch
20 0.91 2.96 31.733
22 0.71 2.51 24.779
Finish: Plain mill or stucco embossed finish.
3.2 Accessories
The material for accessories like ridge, north light, apron etc. shall be of Aluminium alloy
31000/H2 conforming to IS: 737. The thickness of sheet shall be 20 SWG (0.91 mm).
3.3 Laying
Sheets shall, wherever possible be laid from the end of the building away from the prevailing
wind so that exposed edges face down wind. End lap shall be 150mm on roofs and 100mm on
sides. If the roof slope is less than 15 degrees, end lap shall be increased to 230 mm. Overlap of
sheets shall be minimum 150mm. Care shall be taken to match profiles and maintain alignment
of profiles while overlapping the sheets.
3.4 Fixing
For inserting the fasteners, holes shall be made with drill machine, punching is not permissible.
Page 2485 of 3884

k31 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
5fgar tafReg INDIA LIMITED ROOFING 6-75-0008 Rev. 6
1.11771 ert.re ■7710701.0 IA Govl of India UndeOalung)
Page 7 of 10
All drills shall be done on the crown of troughs. Aluminium alloy (grade 64430/WP of IS: 737)
8mm hook/cranks bolts and 6mm seam bolts shall be used for fastening the sheets to the purlins.
Aluminium washers, thrust washers and caps shall be used with hook/cranks/seem bolts.
i) Aluminium alloy roofing bolts:
Materials Grade 64430/WP of IS: 737
Size 8.1mm dia
ii) Aluminium nuts:
Materials Grade 64430/WP of IS: 737
Size Hexagonal in shape with outer dia 12.5mm, inner bore dia
9mm & length 1 Omm.
iii) Aluminium washers:
Materials Grade 31000/H2 of IS: 737
Size Thickness 2mm & outer dia 25mm
iv) Thrust washers:
Materials EPDM
Size Outer dia 30mm, inner bore 9mm & thickness 3mm.
v) Polymer caps:
Materials •. EPDM
Size Suiting the size of bolts.
Hook/crank bolts shall be provided @ 3 pitch c/c (maximum). Seam bolts shall be used in side
overlap @ 380mm to 400mm c/c.
4.0 PRECOATED GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET ROOFING/ CLADDING

4.1 Material
The base metal of the roofing shall be Cold Rolled Steel Sheet conforming to IS: 513. It shall
be galvanized by Hot-dip process as per IS: 277. The bottom unexposed surface shall then be
coated with alkyd backer coat of minimum 5 microns over a 5 micron coat of primer. Top
exposed surface shall have primer of minimum 5 microns followed by Regular Modified
Polyester top coat of minimum 20 microns of specified colour.
4.2 Properties
The precoated galvanized steel sheets shall meet the following performance standards:
Pencil Hardness H-2H

Bending Test 2-4 T
Impact Resistance No crack or peeling of the paint film on drop of a 500
gms mass from 600mm height
Salt Spray Test 750 hours (Exposed top side)
QUV — Wealterometer Test 1000 hours
Humidity Test 1000 hours
Temperature Resistance 100 deg C for 24 hours
Fire Performance Class-I
4.3 Profile
The profiles shall have a depth of not less than 28 mm at a pitch of 195 to 255mm (with
intermediate stiffening ribs). Overall total coated thickness shall be 0.65mm having base metal
thickness of minimum 0.60mm. Minimum weight (supply width) shall be 5.80 Kg/ Sq.M.
4.4 Accessories
All roofing accessories like ridge, flashing, north light curves etc. shall be fabricated out of the
Page 2486 of 3884

k31 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
$fgar ofire-,
iren eierVIZ M.1,717.0
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of incha Undedakingf
Page 8 of 10
approved pre-coated sheet as per drawing. Metallic self drilling self tapping fasteners for fixing
shall be corrosion proof, hot dipped zinc coated with neoprene washer. Sealants shall be neutral
cure type and cold setting variety.
5.0 PRECOATED ZINC ALUMINIUM STEEL SHEET ROOFING/ CLADDING

(Trapezoidal, pierce fixed/ screwed down)
5.1 Material
The base metal of the roofing shall be Cold Rolled Steel (high tensile with minimum yield
strength 550MPa) Sheet conforming to IS: 513. It shall be coated with Al-Zn alloy (55%
aluminium, 43.5% Zinc, 1.5% Si)/ zincalume by Hot-dip process as per IS: 15961/ AS: 1397
(Class AZ150, having minimum 150g/sq.m. on both sides)/ ASTM: A792M. The bottom
unexposed surface shall be coated with alkyd backer/ polyester of minimum 5 microns over a
nominal 5 micron coat of primer. Top exposed surface shall have nominal 20 microns Super
Durable Polyester (over nominal 5 micron polyester primer) paint system of approved colour
conforming to IS: 15965 Class 3/ AS: 2728 type 4/ ASTM: A755M. The sheet shall have total
paint coating thickness of 35 microns. The paint system should have stable Super Durable
Polyester resin, inorganic pigments for colour durability (with higher solar reflectance
technology) with no lead contents.
The sheets shall have branding at backer coat at regular interval mentioning name of
manufacture, product thickness, coating mass, standard, date etc.
5.2 Properties
The precoated zinc aluminium steel sheets shall meet the following performance standards:
Pencil Hardness Min. HB
T-Bending Test 6T
Impact Resistance Min. 10J
QUV (resistance to colour change/ chalking) 2000 hours
5.3 Profile
The profiles shall have a depth of not less than 28 mm at a pitch of 195 to 255mm (with
intermediate ribs/ subtle square flutes). The minimum thickness of the sheet shall be as under:-
(a) Base metal thickness 0.45 mm
(b) Total coated (Al-Zn alloy) and painted thickness (finished) : 0.52 mm
Roof Sheet profile should have the flexibility for fixing the items like Skylight, Turbovents, Pipe
Openings of Specified dimensions from Roof Area provided at the locations specified in the
drawings.
5.4 Accessories
All roofing accessories like ridge, flashing, north light curves, facia, etc, shall be fabricated out
of the same precoated sheet as the roofing sheeting. Metallic self-drilling self-tapping fasteners
for fixing shall be mechanically plated with Zn-Sb alloy coating with min of 25 micron coating
meeting or hot dipped with Zinc coating with 40 micron coating performance standard as per
AS:3566:2002 class III having EPDM washers. Sealants shall be natural cure type and cold
setting variety.
5.5 Workmanship/ Installation
The sheet shall be fixed to Purlins/ Girts with self-drilling polymer coated Class III & Class IV
Fasteners (Zinc and Tin Coated compatible fasteners) with EPDM washer all as per
manufacturer's specifications, including, flashing, ridge, copings for all edges, caps, corners,
Page 2487 of 3884

ei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
51gzir 015teg INDIA LIMITED ROOFING 6-75-0008 Rev. 6
I MBA 24,751,151,..0 (A Govt of India Uncleftakog)
Page 9 of 10
overlapping and sealing the joints with approved silicone sealant to make the joints to be dust
proof and leak proof. The fixing shall be done taking all safety precautions using best safety
equipments like scissor lift, boom-lift, safety belt, safety helmet and safety etc.
6.0 PRECOATED ZINC ALUMINIUM STEEL SHEET ROOFING/ CLADDING (Standing

Seam)
6.1 Material (Roofing)
The base metal of the roofing shall be Cold Rolled Steel (high tensile with minimum yield
strength 300MPa) Sheet conforming to IS: 513. It shall be coated with Al-Zn alloy (55%
aluminium, 43.5% Zinc, 1.5% Si)/ zincalume by Hot-dip process as per IS: 15961/ AS: 1397
(Class AZ150, having minimum 150g/sq. m. on both sides)/ ASTM: A792M. The bottom
unexposed surface shall be coated with alkyd backer/ polyester of minimum 5 microns over a
nominal 5 micron coat of primer. Top exposed surface shall nominal 20 microns Super Durable
Polyester over nominal 5 micron polyester primer paint system of approved colour conforming
to IS: 15965 Class 3/ AS: 2728 type 4/ ASTM: A755M. The sheet shall have total paint coating
thickness of 35 microns. The paint system should have stable Super Durable Polyester resin,
inorganic pigments for colour durability with higher solar reflectance technology with no lead
contents.
The sheets shall have branding at backer coat at regular interval mentioning name of
manufacture, product thickness, coating mass, standard, date etc.
6.2 Properties
The precoated zinc aluminium steel sheets shall meet the following performance standards:
Pencil Hardness Min. HB
T-Bending Test 5 T Max
Impact Resistance Min 10 J
QUV (resistance to colour change/ chalking) 2000 hours
6.3 Profile for Roof Sheeting
The roofing sheeting shall be factory pre-punched profiled sheets with standing seam not less
than 50mm deep (75 mm minimum including seam) and pitch (of major corrugations) not more
than 600mm. The minimum thickness of the sheet shall be as under:-
(a) Base metal thickness 0.55 mm
(b) Total coated (Al-Zn alloy) and painted thickness (finished) : 0.62 mm
Roof Sheet profile should have the flexibility for fixing the items like Skylight, Turbovents,
Pipe Openings of Specified dimensions from Roof Area provided at the locations specified in
the Drawings.
6.4 Accessories
Same as described under clause 5.4 above
63 Workmanship/ Installation
Specially designed roof clips (designed to move freely in both directions to take care of thermal
expansion and contraction) shall be used to hold the roof panels to the supporting structural
member. The supporting structural member (purlins) shall be factory pre-punched as per design
requirements. Panel side laps shall be field-seamed by roof runner seaming machine which is
self-propelled and portable electrical lock-seaming machine. The machine field forms the final
180 degrees of a 360 degree double-lock standing seam, all side lap sealant shall be factory
applied as per approved manufacturer's recommendations. The panel end lap shall be joined by
Page 2488 of 3884

51gar iiifireg INDIA LIMITED ROOFING 6-75-0008 Rev. 6
11117A Aed,r2 dna:rem, IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 10 of 10
means of a two piece clamped connection consisting of a bottom reinforcing plate and top panel
strap. Manufacturers recommended specially designed ridge capping, flashing; trims, gutter and
down pipe shall be used for fixing the roof system which shall be approved by concerned
authority. Fastener shall be used for fixing the roof system as per manufacturer's
recommendation. The fixing shall be done taking all safety precautions using best safety
equipments like scissor lift, boom-lift, safety belt, safety helmet and safety etc.
6.6 Cladding
Material, Properties, Profile for cladding etc. shall be same as described under clause 5.0 above.
7.0 MEASUREMENTS AND RATES

Measurements and rates as mentioned here is applicable for item rate tender only.
7.1 Measurement
a) Measurements shall be taken in square metres for the finished work in superficial area
in the general plane of the roof. Laps along ends and side edges shall not be measured.
The overlaps of sheets over valley pieces and under the ridge, hip and flashing piece
shall be included in the measurement. Measurement for ridges, hips, valleys and gutters
shall be taken for the finished work in length along their centre line. No laps for these
shall be measured. All measurements shall be made correct up to two places of decimal.
No deductions shall be made for openings in roof for chimneys, skylights etc. for area
upto 0.40 sq.m No extra shall be allowed for extra labour in cutting or wastage. For
openings exceeding 0.40 Sq.M deductions shall be made for full opening. Cuttings
across corrugations shall be measured flat.
b) Roofs with curved sheets shall be measured and paid for separately.
c) No additions shall be made for laps cut through.
d) Cutting required to be done in position shall be measured separately.
e) Openings or recesses involving cutting not exceeding 1M girth shall be classified as
hole, notches and shall be enumerated according to the following:
i) Those not exceeding 0.01 sq.m.
ii) Those exceeding 0.01 sq.m. but not exceeding 0.04 sq.m.
iii) Those exceeding 0.04 sq.m.
7.2 Rates
The roofing rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations.
The rate shall also include the cost of provision, erection and removal of scaffolding, benching,
ladders, templates and tools required for the proper execution and erection, the cost of fixing
purlins shall not be included in the rate. The rate for flashing shall include the cost of mortar for
fixing apart from the other labour and material required. The rate for gutters shall include cost
of all labour and material, all specials such as angles, junctions, drop ends or funnel shaped
connecting pieces, stop ends etc. flat iron brackets and bolts and nuts required for fixing latter to
the roof members.
Page 2489 of 3884

*or gel ENONEERS FOR SANITARY FITTINGS AND
dgen faittg W INDIA MUM 6-75-0009 Rev. 6
MR?, relPFM ,A39.1 tA Go. unch....o) FIXTURES Page 1 of 6
fritri1. 34 N-Km-rAs<
ftft -ZE
FOR
SANITARY FITTINGS & FIXTURES
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD R. SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA

6 22.11.17
SPECIFICATION
5 03.04.12 RH RG JKB D MALHOTRA
SPECIFICATION
CHATURVEDI
SPECIFICATION
3 09.03.99 REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SD MLB SCJ

2 16.03.94 JS JS AKG AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Rev. Prepare Checked
No d by by
Approved by
Page 2490 of 3884

ofAzegthENGINEERs STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Og41 faRegkiir INDIA
(km
umrrED
ONIVIRPRINVISCIXIM iA
a Oldie Undelial"))
SANITARY FITTINGS AND
FIXTURES
6-75-0009 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
IS Indian Standards
Convenor : Mr. Rajanji Srivastava
Members : Mr. Samir Das

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. V. K. Panwar
Page 2491 of 3884

ENGINEERs STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
faRegWINDIA UMITED SANITARY FITTINGS AND 6-75-0009 Rev. 6
"4". "1",""A", IA GOA 01 WAN UMINti1019)
FIXTURES Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 04
2.0 SANITARY FITTINGS 04
3.0 INDIAN TYPE WATER CLOSET 04
4.0 WASH DOWN TYPE WATER CLOSET 05
5.0 URINALS 05
6.0 WASH BASINS 05
7.0 WASH BASINS (COUNTER TOP) 06
8.0 RATES 06
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright Ell.— All rights reserved
Page 2492 of 3884

ISR-zieliooNGINEERs STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
dgell faRtelP INDIA UMITED SANITARY FITTINGS AND 6-75-0009 Rev. 6

'"""^m UGo.t asile Undeotalor0
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for any further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of any conflict/contradiction provisions of specification
shall override.
IS :2556 Part 1-17 Specification for Vitreous Sanitary appliances (Vitreous-

China, Part 1-9, 14-17).
1S :774 Specification for Flushing Cistern for Water Closets and Urinals
(other than plastic cisterns).
IS : 775 Specification for cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and
sinks
IS :781 Specification for Cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop
valves for water services.
IS :2064 Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of

Sanitary appliances.
IS :2548 Part-1 Specification for Plastic Seats and Covers for water closets
Part-1 : Thermoset seats and covers
IS :2548 Part-2 Specification for Plastic Seats and Covers for water closets
Part-1 : Thermoplastic seats and covers
IS :2326 Specification for automatic flushing cistern for urinals (other than
plastic cisterns)
IS :7231 Specification for plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals
IS :9758 Specification for flush valves and fittings for water closets and
urinals
2.0 SANITARY FITTINGS
All glazed earthenware shall be of approved make, colour and of one piece construction. All
metallic fixtures like taps, stop cocks, soap holders etc. shall be CP brass or Stainless Steel of
approved make. All wall fittings shall be fixed with nylon sleeve and CP brass screws and
washers.
Sensor operated urinals and wash basins shall be complete with all required parts such as
sensor mechanism, batteries, etc.
3.0 INDIAN TYPE WATER CLOSET
Squatting Pan shall be Orissa Pan type conforming to IS: 2556. The closet shall be fixed in the
floor with 150 mm thick sand cushion and shall be connected with 100 mm dia 'S' or 'P' trap.
The closet shall also be fitted with syphonic type flushing cistern, conforming to IS: 774, 15
mm dia. PVC inlet with brass union, PVC ball valves, handle, telescopic 32 mm dia chrome
plated flushing pipe with union etc. The cistern shall have water efficient dual flush
mechanism and shall be compliant to the norms laid down by National Building Code.
Page 2493 of 3884

ofazeigh, ENGINEas STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
SANITARY FITTINGS AND
r eftweaufmou OF INDIA
Og tam LIMITED 6-75-0009 Rev. 6
a Goa of Oka Undeetakogl FIXTURES Page 5 of 6
The cistern shall be fixed on MS brackets. All exposed metallic surface shall be painted with
two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality over a coat of primer.
4.0 WASH DOWN TYPE WATER CLOSET
Wash down water closet shall conform to IS: 2556 Part-II. Water Closet shall be of one piece
construction. This shall be fixed with plastic seat and cover as per IS:2548 of approved make,
fixed with CP brass hinges and rubber buffers and an integral 100 mm dia 'S' or 'P' trap with
anti-syphonage vent horn.
Cistern shall be integral with closet or separate as specified.
In case of separate cisterns, a low level cistern conforming to IS: 774 with 15mm dia PVC
inlet pipe and brass union with wiped solder joint, internal overflow arrangement, 40 mm dia
CP brass flushing pipe. The cistern shall have water efficient dual flush mechanism and shall
be compliant to the norms laid down by National Building Code. CI or MS supporting
brackets shall be fixed with the water closet. The closet shall be fixed firmly in the floor with
matching cement mortar. All exposed metallic surfaces shall be painted with two coats of
synthetic enamel paint of approved quality over a coat of primer. The clearance between top of
pan and bottom of cistern shall not exceed 300 mm.
5.0 URINALS (Half stall type)
Half stall type urinal shall conform to IS: 2556 Part VI. Urinals shall be of single piece
construction with integral flushing box rim. These shall be mounted on walls. The flushing
inlet pipe shall be of CP brass, 15 mm dia and waste pipe shall be of GI/ PTMT, 32 mm dia,
750 mm length. The pipes shall be embedded in wall. Necessary unions and CP bottle trap
shall be provided in the waste line.
Rawl plugs with CP brass screws shall be used for fixing the urinal. Fixing shall ensure that no
liquid is left over in the pan after flushing.
Urinals shall be connected to automatic flushing cisterns either individually, or in groups.

Cistern inlet shall be 15 mm dia PVC pipe with brass union. Outlet pipe from cistern shall be
25mm CP brass main, with 15 mm CP distributor pipe of sufficient lengths to reach each
bowl. Where individual cisterns are provided the outlet shall be of 15 mm CP brass. The
cistern shall have water efficient flush mechanism and shall be compliant to the norms laid
down by National Building Code.
6.0 WASH BASINS
Wash basin shall be flat back wash basin conforming to IS: 2556 Part-IV. Wash basins shall
be of one piece construction including a combined overflow and it shall be so designed as to
facilitate cleaning of the overflow. This shall be fitted on CI or MS brackets. Brackets shall
conform to IS: 775. The brackets shall be given two coats of synthetic enamel paint over a
coat of primer.
The wall side shall be fixed well flushed with the plaster or wall and the joint if any, shall be
properly stopped with an elastomeric sealant. One CP brass pillar cock, PVC connecting pipe
with brass union, a CP brass bottle trap with union, CP brass chain and rubber PVC stopper,
2mm dia GI/ CPVC/ PTMT waste pipe shall also be supplied and fitted with the wash basin
and embedded in the wall. The pillar cock shall be water efficient low flow fixture and shall
have low flow rates with auto-stop facility, wherever specified, compliant to the norms laid
Page 2494 of 3884

toz) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED SANITARY FITTINGS AND 6-75-0009 Rev. 6
town torfortioloofoxo IA Govt of India Uncleflakingi
down by the National Building Code. The top of rim of the wash basin shall be fixed at 800
mm above finished floor level, unless otherwise specified.
7.0 WASH BASIN (Counter Top)
Counter top wash basins shall be oval or round shaped counter top type with anti-splash rim
conforming to IS: 2556 Part-IV. Wash basins shall be of one piece construction and it shall be
so designed as to facilitate cleaning of the overflow. Wash basin shall be fixed over stone or
other material. Cut-out in counter top shall be made to suit the fixing of the wash basin neatly.
Each wash basin shall be provided with 15mm dia. CP pillar cock of approved make, rubber
plug with CP brass chain, 32mm CP Waste fitting of standard pattern with 32mm dia. G.I./
CPVC/ PTMT pipe, CP Brass bottle trap, CP Brass 15mm dia stop cock etc. complete with all
related accessories, fittings and fixtures. The pillar cock shall be water efficient low flow
fixture and shall have low flow rates with auto-stop facility, wherever specified, compliant to
the norms laid down by the National Building Code. This shall be fitted on CI or MS brackets.
Brackets shall conform to IS: 775. The brackets shall be given two coats of synthetic enamel
paint over a coat of approved make primer. The sides of the rim of the washbasin & its bottom
shall be fixed with sealant of approved make to the granite/marble stone slab.
8.0 RATE (Applicable for item rate tender only)
The rate shall include all fixtures, fittings, accessories, fixing, making inlet and outlet
connections, breaking and making good the damaged walls & floors, testing of all
connections, etc. all complete.
Page 2495 of 3884

ft ENGINEERS
tIlfaeleiiii FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
Oge.if laWleg VW INDIA LIMITED UNDERDECK INSULATION & 6-75-0010 Rev. 6
.471,, c-wanet1513c10,711 (A Govt of India Undertaking(
PARTITIONING Page 1 of 11
6 1 .11C1 DV, 61114 ZlUF,

4 1

FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
UNDERDECK INSULATION &
PARTITIONING

AL
6 22.03.17 AM R. SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA
SPECIFICATION
5 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
23.11.11 GB JS/SD JKB D. MALHOTRA
SPECIFICATION
21.03.07 SD JKB ARVIND KUMAR V. CHATURVEDI
SPECIFICATION
3 09.03.99 REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD
SD MLB SCJ AS
SPECIFICATION
16.03.94 JS JS AKG AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Rev. Prepared Committee Bureau
Date Purpose
Checked
No by Convenor Chairman
by
Approved by
Page 2496 of 3884

011aelei ft ENGINEERS FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
ligar idf5reg INDIA LIMITED UNDERDECK INSULATION & 6-75-0010 Rev. 6
,..- --,e...") (A Govt of India Unaertak.9)
Abbreviations:

CISCA : Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
CRCA : Cold Rolled Close Annealed
GI : Galvanized Iron
IS Indian Standards
MS : Mild Steel
NRC : Noise Reduction Coefficients
PVC : Polyvinyl Chloride
RCC : Reinforced Cement Concrete

Ms. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. V. K. Panwar
Page 2497 of 3884

.39faq..i MI
L ENGINEERS FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
51gar W INDIA LIMITED UNDERDECK INSULATION & 6-75-0010 Rev. 6
riroxt ,M3‘10.11 (A Govt of Undo Undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 FALSE CEILING GRID SYSTEMS 4
2.0 FALSE CEILING TILES .5
3.0 ALUMINIUM PANEL FALSE CEILING 6
4.0 UNDERDECK INSULATION (Phenolic Foam) 7
5.0 UNDERDECK INSULATION (Polyisocyanurate Foam) 8
6.0 CAVITY (FALSE) FLOORING 8
7.0 PARTITIONING & PANELLING 10
8.0 MEASUREMENT AND RATES .11
Page 2498 of 3884

ka4..le-iMi. ENGINEERS FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
4 en acs INDIA LIMITED
1.1e. 12,1517 ,1.JVCD,R) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
UNDERDECK INSULATION & 6-75-0010 Rev. 6
1.0 FALSE CEILING GRID SYSTEMS
1.1 GI Grid System (For Mineral Fibre False Ceiling)
All grid frame work shall be made of special sections, power pressed from MS sheets and
galvanized with zinc coating of 120 gms./sq.m. (both sides inclusive) as per IS: 277.
1.1.1 Material
A. Main Runner
Main runner shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel and 'T' shaped of 24 mm x 38mm
size and 0.33mm thickness with double rotary stitching, with baked polyester coating
(min. 25 microns) on the cap of the flange.
B. Cross Runner
Cross runner shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel and -r shaped of 24 mm x 38mm
size , 0.33mm thickness, 1200mm long and 24 mm x 38mm size , 0.33mm thickness,
600mm long with double rotary stitching, with baked polyester coating (min. 25
microns) on the cap of the flange.
C. Perimeter Section
Material shall be same as runners. Sections shall be of size 24mm x 24mm x 0.40mm
thickness fixed with the help of rawl plugs @450mm c/c with 25mm long dry wall
screws @ 230mm interval. Exposed areas of all the metallic members shall be baked
polyester coating (min. 25 microns).
1.1.2 Erection
Main Runners shall be placed at the spacing of max.1200 mm c/c. Cross runners shall be fixed
@ maximum 600mm c/c to obtain a grid of 600mm x 600mm: The grid shall be suspended
from the ceiling using GI slotted cleats (of size 25mm x 35mm x 1.6mm) fixed to ceiling with
dash fasteners (12.5mm dia., minimum 50mm long) and suspended with 4mm GI adjustable
rods with Galvanized steel clips of required size. Additional runners shall be provided
wherever required (such as along cut-outs for lighting/ A.C. fittings). The overall grid system
shall be rigid by self locking joints, in accordance with false ceiling patterns, perfectly levelled
and aligned at required height as per drawings.
1.2 GI Grid System (For Gypsum Board False Ceiling)
All grid frame work shall be made of special sections, power pressed from MS sheets and
galvanized with zinc coating of 120 gms./ sq.m. (both sides inclusive) as per IS: 277.
1.2.1 Material and Workmanship
A. Main Runners
GI channel main runners shall be 0.9 mm thick, of size 45 mm and with two flanges
of 15 mm each. The runners shall be suspended from the ceiling @ 1200 mm with 25
mm x 10mm x 0.5 mm GI angle hanger bolted to the channel and fixed to the ceiling
(by means of bolting to GI cleat fixed to the ceiling with anchor fastener).
B. Cross Runners
GI channel shaped cross runners shall be 0.5 mm thick having a knurled web of
minimum 50 mm and two flanges of minimum 25 mm each with lips of minimum 10
mm. The cross runners shall be fixed to the main runners in perpendicular direction at
450 mm C/C with the help of connecting clips made out of minimum 2.6 mm dia. GI
wire of required length at every junction.
C. Perimeter Section/ Wall Channels

Wall channels shall be made of 0.5 mm thick GI of size 27 mm, one flange 20 mm
Page 2499 of 3884

109fae.leiM, ENGINEERS FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
Ogeg faRegV15 INDIA LIMITED UNDERDECK INSULATION & 6-75-0010 Rev. 6
(A Govt of India Undenak.9)
and the other 30 mm. Wall channels shall be fixed to peripheral walls with the help of
rawl plugs @ 450 mm c/c with 25mm long dry wall screws @ 230mm interval.
The overall grid system shall be rigid, in accordance with false ceiling pattern, perfectly
levelled and aligned at desirable height.
1.2.2 Erection
The specification for erection shall be the same as stated above in clause 1.1.2
1.3 Aluminium Grid System (For Particle Board False Ceiling)

Aluminium grid system for supporting false ceiling tiles shall be perfectly levelled, aligned at
desired height and in accordance with the false ceiling pattern as per drawings.
1.3.1 Material
A. Main Runner
Main Runners shall be of extruded anodized (25 micron) aluminium Tee sections of
25 mm x 35 mm size, 2.5mm thick.
B. Cross Runner
Cross Runners shall be of extruded anodized (25 micron) aluminium Tee sections of
25 mm x 25 mm size, 2.5mm thick.
C. Perimeter Section
Perimeter sections shall be of extruded anodized (25 micron) aluminium angle
sections of required size.
1.3.2 Erection
The grid system shall be assembled by interlocking the main and cross runners @ 600 mm
maximum both ways by means of Aluminium angle cleats. The Aluminium grid system shall
be suspended from the ceiling by means of 6 mm dia MS hooks. The MS hooks shall be fixed
to main runners @ 1200 mm maximum. Fixing of hooks to main runners shall be with 3 mm
thick MS flat clamps with leveling nut. The MS hooks shall be suspended from the ceiling by
slotting in 25 mm x 25mm x 3 thick MS angle, fixed to the stab by anchor fasteners.
2.0 FALSE CEILING TILES

The tiles shall be placed in position over the supporting grid system in accordance with
Manufacturer's recommendations. The finished false ceiling shall be perfectly levelled and
aligned, at desired height as per drawings.
Necessary Electrical & AC and other fixtures shall be provided as per drawing and in co-
ordination with relevant construction activities.
2.1 Mineral Fibre Tiles

Mineral fibre false ceiling tiles shall be with durable tegular edging having NRC value of
minimum 0.50, Light reflectance value of minimum 80%,K value of 0.052 to 0.057 w/m deg.
C and fire performance conforming to class I as per BS : 476.The tiles shall be of 600 mm x
600 mm size. The tiles shall have fissured or granulated texture on the front side as specified.
Back side shall be provided with protective coating.
2.2 Particle board tiles

Particle board tiles shall be made of teakwood particle board conforming to IS: 3087 (3 layer
flat pressed particle board bonded with BWP type phenol Formaldehyde Synthetic resin and
as per IS: 848, categorized as class- I for ' Surface of very low flame spread ' as per IS: 1642,
treated with antifungal chemicals).
The tiles shall either be painted or laminated as specified. Lamination shall be 0.5 mm thick
Page 2500 of 3884

101 eJ ENGINEERS FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
t151-eg
#1,271 a9,7115.1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undenalong)
and of approved quality, shade and texture fixed by hot press method and shall conform to BS
476, Part -7. The tiles shall be painted at the bottom surface (Facing the floor ) with two coats
of approved colour acrylic emulsion paint ( of approved make ) after sanding off the surface
with 120 grit sand paper and applying particle board primer. The other surfaces shall be
painted with 2 coats of linseed oil varnish. Tile sizes shall be 600mm x 600 mm x 12 mm and
all four edges of the tiles shall be painted with a coat of approved quality primer.
2.3 Gypsum Board Tiles

Gypsum board shall conform to IS: 2095 Part-1. The Gypsum boards used for false ceiling
shall have following properties:
i) Thermal Conductivity - 0.16 W/mk
ii) Thermal Resistance.
a) For 9.5 mm thick board - 0.06 Sq.M K/W
b) For 12.5 mm thick board - 0.08 Sq.M K/W
c) For 15 mm thick board - 0.09 Sq.MK/W
iii) Fire Propagation
a) Fire Propagation - Not exceeding 12 and a sub index not
Index of performance exceeding 6 (when each side is tested
separately to BS 476, Part -6)
b) Surface spread of flame - Class 1 (both sides) as per test to BS 476
Part -7).
Gypsum boards shall be of specified thickness and of specified finish (painted with Plastic
Emulsion paint/ Laminated with 0.5mm thick lamination etc.). The Gypsum board shall be
screw fixed to the under side of false ceiling grid system with 12.5mm dia dry wall screw @
230 mm C/C by drilling machine, Joints in the board shall be finished flush with fillers,
finisher and primer as per manufacturer's recommendation to give a seamless finish.
3.0 ALUMINIUM PANEL FALSE CEILING SYSTEM

3.1 General
Aluminium panel false ceiling system shall be installed by approved agency and shall be
perfectly levelled, aligned at desired height and in accordance with the false ceiling pattern as
per drawings. The system shall be with demountable areas to give access to service
installation.
3.2 Codes and Standards
Applicable requirements of the following codes, standards and references shall be complied
with.
ASTM C 635: Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
ASTM C 636: Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.
CISCA: The Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
Acoustical ceilings: Use and Practice
All applicable state and municipal codes, laws and regulations regarding flammability and
smoke generation of interior finishes.
3.3 Material
All materials utilized for suspended ceilings shall be non-combustible or fire-rated to comply
with all applicable codes and standards.
Page 2501 of 3884

dalRef& ENGNEERS FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
Ogeji lafAegW} INDIA LIMITED UNDERDECK INSULATION & 6-75-0010 Rev. 6
loiEret rwane an,rimi) (A Govt of India Undertalon9)
3.4 False Ceiling System (84C Type)

The System shall be standard product of approved Manufacturer and shall conform to
following and approved Manufacturer's specification. The system shall be perfectly levelled,
aligned at desired height and in accordance with the false ceiling pattern as per drawings. The
system shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
A. Ceiling Panels:
Ceiling panels shall be 84mm wide, 12.5mm deep panels of approved colour, roll
formed out of 0.5mm thick aluminium alloy 3105/3005/5052 (as per ASTM 209M),
with 24mm wide flange to close off the 16mm joint between the panels (module
100mm). Finishing of the panels shall be as specified.
B. Suspension System:
The suspension system shall be in accordance with approved Manufacturer's standard
specification consisting of carrier, hanger, threaded rod, perimeter profile etc.
The system also includes providing perimeter angles and slit openings for fixing supply/return
air grill, lighting fixtures, AC diffusers etc.
Reference shall be made to EIL standard no. 7-75-0042 for further details of the system.
3.5 False Ceiling System (Tray Type)

The System shall be standard product of approved Manufacturer and shall conform to
following and approved Manufacturer's specification. The system shall be perfectly levelled,
aligned at desired height and in accordance with the false ceiling pattern as per drawings. The
system shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
A. Ceiling Panels:
Ceiling panels shall be minimum 0 7mm thick and of aluminium alloy AA
3105/3005/3003/5052 (as per ASTM 209M). Finishing of the panels shall be as
specified. The panels shall be square edged, perforated or non-perforated and of
following sizes as per drawings.
a) 254/ 305mm x 1264mm.
b) 600mm x 600mm
B. Suspension System:
The suspension system shall be in accordance with approved Manufacturer's standard
specification consisting of main runner profiles, hanger, perimeter profile etc.
The system also includes providing perimeter angles and slit openings for fixing supply/return
air grill, lighting fixtures, AC diffusers etc.
4.0 UNDERDECK INSULATION (Phenolic Foam)

4.1 Material
Underdeck insulation shall be of phenolic foam rigid slab of 25mm thickness and approx.
1000mm x 500mm size as specified and shall conform to IS: 13204. It shall have density of 32
kg / M3 and K Value 0.016 KCal/hr MEC as per BS 4370, Part 2. The insulation shall be
classified as ' Non Combustible ' as per BS 476, part 5 and ' Class I' for surface spread of
flame as per BS 476, part 7. It shall be prelaminated on both sides with kraft paper.
4.2 Workmanship
The entire soffit of slab and beams shall be thoroughly cleaned. Bituminous primer or zinc
chromate primer shall be applied evenly @ 0.5 kg/m 2 over the entire surface. Hot bitumen or
CPRX adhesive shall then be applied on the insulation panel @ 1.5 kg/Sq.M. The panels shall
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
Page 2502 of 3884

GI ei
` ENGINEERS et FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
6-75-0010 Rev. 6
lelI5VegW INDIA LIMITED UNDERDECK INSULATION &
laden rlecrwl ANJWISA) IA Govt of India Undertakm
be pressed in position and further secured by dash fasteners and washers @ 250mm c/c all
around.
The underdeck insulation shall be fixed only after all fixtures like hooks, clamps, cleats etc.
for light fixtures, ducts etc. have been fixed in the ceiling.
5.0 UNDERDECK INSULATION (Polyisocyanurate Foam)

5.1 Material
Polyisocyanurate foam (PIR) shall be rigid slabs of size 1000 x 500mm and thickness of
30mm conforming to IS: 12436 having density not less than 32 kg./Cu.M., thermal
conductivity (K- value) not more than 0.023 w/mk measured at 10 deg. C. The slabs shall be
covered on one side with glass fibre tissue/ Aluminium foil having 50mm overlap. The
insulation shall be classified as 'Non Combustible' as per BS 476, part 5 and 'Class I' for
surface spread of flame as per BS 476, part 7.
5.2 Workmanship
First, holes in R.C.C. slab/ beam shall be drilled and nylon rawl plugs of size 8 x 25mm shall
be inserted (5 nos. for each slab- One each at 4 corners and one at center). Entire R.C.0
surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt and loose particles by wire brushing. Then
a coat of bituminous primer @ 0.5 Litres/ Sq.M. shall be applied to bare R.C.C. surface and
allowed it to dry. After the primer has dried, cold adhesive CPRX shall be applied on R.C.C.
surface and to the two surface of each PIR panel and shall be pressed in position. The PIR
panels shall be secured in position with the help of G.I. screws (No. 8 x 75mm long) fixed into
rawl plugs and G.I washers. Facing side of the panels shall be the one covered with fibre
tissue/ Aluminium foil. The overlaps shall be covered with approved quality sealing
compound (MAS-94 or equivalent). Chicken wire mesh 24G x 19mm shall then be fixed to
G.I screws and tightened with lacing wire.
The underdeck insulation shall be fixed only after all fixtures like hooks, clamps, cleats etc.
for light fixtures, ducts etc. have been fixed in the ceiling.
6.0 FALSE (RAISED ACCESS) FLOORING

False floor system shall consist of modular, removable, filled with cementitious compound,
welded steel panels supported on all four edges by structural steel members bolted onto
adjustable height pedestal assemblies forming a modular grid pattern.
It is mandatory that all components of the false flooring system are sourced from same
manufacturer.
False floor understructure shall be installed to support the panels and shall be suitable to
achieve a minimum finished cavity height of 600-1000mm from the existing floor level. The
system shall ensure speedy assembly and removal for relocation and maintenance. The system
shall also ensure easy adjustment of levelling (±25mm) and accurate alignment of panels in
the vertical direction.
False floor understructure shall consist of Base plate, pedestals, pedestal head assembly,
stringers and necessary fittings, fixtures and accessories.
6.1 Material
A. Pedestal Base Assembly
Powder coated pedestal assembly shall consist of a formed hot dip galvanized (60-80
micron) mild steel base plate with not less than 150mm x 150mm x 4 mm of bearing
area, mechanically riveted to a 32mm dia. of 2 mm thick CRCA steel pedestal
designed to engage the head assembly.
B. Pedestal Head Assembly
Zinc electroplated CRCA steel pedestal head assembly shall consist of 90mm x 90mm
x 4 mm thick profiled head, mechanically riveted to a 19 mm dia. threaded bright rod,
Page 2503 of 3884

01 ei ENGINEERS FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
Ogen 051-egW INDIA LIMITED
1.1ren riemle
3.041) (A Govt of India undertaking)
fixed to pedestal by specially designed zinc electroplated steel forged adjusting nut for
leveling, locking and changing the height setting.
C. Stringers
Stringers shall be of hot dip galvanized (60-80 microns) steel, minimum 20mm x
32mm x 1.20mm thick CRCA steel.
D. Floor Panels
Floor panels shall be 600mm x 600mm size, minimum 35 mm thick powder coated
(40-60 micron) CRCA steel cementitious core panel (with hemispherical and reverse
cones) and 1 mm thick epoxy painted CRCA steel sheet on top. Top sheet shall be
finished with 2mm thick high pressure laminate or 2mm thick conductive PVC or as
per project specification. The inner empty core shall be injected with light weight fire
retardant non combustible cementitious compound. All edges of the panels shall have
conductive PVC trims.
Floor panels shall be capable of supporting following loading conditions when tested
as per CISCA test procedure.
i. Concentrated load of 675 Kg. with maximum allowable deflection of 2.5mm
and a factor of safety of 2.5.
ii. Uniform load of 2025 Kg/ Square meter.
Fire rating of floor panels shall be class 0 & class 1 conforming to BS 476-part-6 (Fire
propagation) and BS 476-part-7 (Surface spread of flame).
E. Accessories
All accessories such as outlet boxes and grommets as required, Panel lifters (at least
one for each building, one number for every 500 Square meter of access floor area)
etc. shall be provided in accordance with approved Manufacturer's recommendations.
6.2 Workmanship
The base floor and cavity between false flooring and base floor shall be properly cleaned and
made dust free and dry. The base cement concrete floor shall be treated with one component
polyurethane based coating.
Installation of false floor shall be coordinated with other agencies to maintain the integrity of
the installed system. All traffic on access floor shall be controlled by false floor installer. No
traffic but that of false floor installers shall be permitted on any floor area for 24 hours to
allow the pedestal adhesive to set and ensure alignment of the system is achieved. False floor
panels shall not be removed for 72 hours after their installation. Installation of the whole
system shall be done by approved agency in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommendations and as specified here-in.
False flooring pattern shall be as per approved drawing.
Pedestal base assembly shall be fixed to the base floor by fixing base plates to the base floor
by minimum 50mm x 8mm anchor fasteners (4 nos. for each plate).
The pedestal stud locations shall ensure the grid work as per flooring pattern which in general
shall be of 600 mm x 600 mm dimension. The length of the pedestal studs shall be such that
clear cavity between false flooring and base flooring is of desired depth. Additional pedestals
as needed to support panels where floor is disrupted by columns, walls and cutouts shall be
provided. Perimeter pedestal studs shall be provided along the periphery. Pedestal assemblies
including pedestal heads shall be weld-free construction, corrosive resistant and shall provide
an adjustment range of ±25mm from the specified finished floor heights.
The threaded bright rod with the top head attachments shall be inserted into the studs and shall
be adjusted to obtain proper level of the finished floor panels by means of the adjustment nut.
The nut shall provide location lugs to engage the pedestal base assembly, such that deliberate
Page 2504 of 3884

ellA ENGINEERS FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
ligar 25-eg W.INDIA LIMITED UNDERDECK INSULATION & 6-75-0010 Rev. 6
1411E7f eteaeCn JVCRI) (A Govt of India Undertaiont
action is required to change the height setting. Threaded rod shall provide a specially designed
anti-rotation device, such that when the head assembly is engaged in the base assembly, the
head cannot freely rotate.
The pedestal head shall have an anti vibration PVC cap for panel and stringer location.
Stringers shall support each edge of panel. The stringers shall have counter sunk holes at both
ends to accommodate bolting of M6 machine screws to the pedestal head assembly. Stringers
shall be individually and rigidly fastened to the pedestal with one machine screw for each end
of stringer. Bolts shall provide positive electrical contact between the stringers and pedestals.
Stringer grid shall ensure maximum lateral stability in all directions. All the field cut panels
shall be installed with an appropriate PVC end cap specially designed to accommodate the
stinger and arrest Panel beam movement and will ensure the integrity and stability of the
system.
Floor panels shall be placed over the stringer channels and bolted to pedestal head. All four
edges of panels shall be finished with black conductive 5mm wide PVC edge beadings. These
edge beadings are glued and sealed in place to avoid detachment. Floor panels which are field
cut (at ends, Console/ Rack location etc.) shall be marked with positional numbering on the
underneath and the adjoining wall. The finished floor panels shall be perfectly levelled and
aligned without any gaps in between the panels. Each individual panel shall be removable for
the purpose of maintenance of the cavity. Panel shall be easily removed by one person with a
lifting device and shall be fully transferable and totally inter changeable and replaceable in
any of the 4 directions at 90 degrees increments, except where cut for special conditions.
Understructure shall be aligned such that all uncut panels are interchangeable and fit snugly
but do not bind when placed in alternate positions.
Necessary cut-outs shall be made in the panels for cable routing, control panel fixation etc. as
per drawing.
Necessary ramps, slopes, steps etc. shall be also provided for as per drawing with raised
access floor components as per approved manufacturer recommendations..
Around a control panel/rack, the residual space left out shall be filled up with cut panels of
uniform size as required to fully close the gap between the adjacent full panel and the control
panel base channel. In this case the part floor panel shall extend upto the full width of the base
channel and the cut size shall be determined accordingly. An additional structural steel
framework shall be provided along the cut out on which the edge of the floor panel shall rest
and over which the base channel of control panel shall be placed.
After completion of the floor and association services, tests shall be arranged to demonstrate
that the floor is electrically continuous and fully earth bonded. Points chosen for testing
shall include randomly selected pedestals, stringers tops and bottoms of panels, etc.
7.0 PARTITIONING & PANELLING

7.1 MS Frame
MS frame for Partitioning & Panelling shall consist of horizontal & vertical members of
18SWG 52mm X 38mm MS sections. The members shall be welded to each other at
maximum 600mm c/c both ways. The frame shall be fixed to the floor/ceiling/wall with GI
roulette plug, screw and washers & 300mm maximum c/c. The members shall be provided
with one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer.
The frame-work arrangement shall be in accordance with the pattern for partition including
doors/windows etc.
7.2 GI Framework and fixing of Gypsum Board for Partitions/ Panelling

GI frame for Partitioning & Panelling shall consist of following special power pressed/ roll
form G.I. sheet (with zinc coating of 120 gms./sq.m.-both sides inclusive):
Page 2505 of 3884

laRetC-
roft ENGINEERS FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
Igar 25I-egW INDIA LIMITED
WWI t,ecnre 051,PRIFA) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
a. 0.5mm thick x 50mm wide floor and ceiling channels with equal flanges of 32mm,
fixed with dash fastener of 12.5 mm dia meter 50 mm length or suitable anchor
fastener or metal screws with nylon plugs (@ spacing of approx.. 450mm c/c)
b. 0.5mm thick x 48mm wide studs of unequal flanges of 34mm and 36mm each fixed
vertically within flanges of floor and ceiling channels and placed at a spacing of 610
mm centre to centre by 6 mm dia bolts and nut. Studs shall be fixed at both ends of
partition fixed flush to wall with suitable anchor fastener or metal screws with nylon
plugs at spacing of 450 mm centre to centre.
c. The boards shall be fixed on both sides of the frame work by 25 mm long dry wall
screws on studs, floor and ceiling channels at the spacing of 300 mm centre to centre.
d. The joints shall be staggered to avoid through cracks along with a provision of 99mm
wide M.S. fixing channel at the horizontal joints of two boards, fixed to the studs
using metal to metal flat head screws.
e. The jointing and finishing of the boards shall be done using recommended jointing
compound, jointing tape, angle beads at corners (25 mm x 25 mm x 0.5 mm), joint
finisher and two coats of primer suitable for board as per manufacture's specification.
The frame-work arrangement shall be in accordance with the pattern for partition including
doors/windows etc.
7.3 Gypsum Board Partitioning & Panelling

Gypsum boards for partitioning & panelling shall be 12.5mm thick and same as specified in
clause no. 2.3.
Number of Gypsum board layers (single skin or double skin) shall be as specified and with
finishing (painting or lamination) as specified.
Frame work along the edges shall be concealed with partition/panel boards. Necessary cutouts
for electrical, AC, return air etc. and other fixtures shall be provided in the boards. Glazing if
any shall be fixed with putty and wooden beadings.
8.0 MEASUREMENT AND RATES
For item rate tenders, False ceiling/ flooring, Insulation, Partition and Panelling shall be
measured in Sq.M. correct upto two places of decimal. Dimensions shall be measured correct
upto 0.01M.
No deduction shall be done for cut outs for fixtures, cables etc. upto 0.18 Sq.M in area. No
extra shall be paid for providing such cutouts.
Rate for item rate tenders shall include all materials, labour, transport, conveyance, erection,
storage, other incidental expenditures involved in carrying out the items.
Page 2506 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR 6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Rift
Iaaen riedneadJadral)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt al India Undertaking)
FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS Page 1 of 9
Wqr-41, Rg5rchtli
"FRIR
TiRW rcir1411
FOR
FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS, WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD RajanT-

1 06.01.16 AM SD/JK
Srivastava
S.0 anda
SPECIFICATION
0 01.02.12 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION AM SM JKB OM
Standards Standards
Date Purpose Committee Bureau
No by by
Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Page 2507 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
ligar Rift INDIA LIMITED 6-75-0011 Rev. 1
vIrvniV as „MOM (A Govt of Indta Undertaking) FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
Abbreviations:

BS EN : British standards & European Standards
CBRI : Central Building Research Institute
EN : European Standards
FD : Fire Check Door
FW : Fire Check Window
FP : Fire Check Partition
GI : Galvanized Iron
IS : Indian Standard
NABL : National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories
SS . : Stainless Steel
UL : Underwriters Laboratories
Standards Committee

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S.K. Naskar
Mr. V.K. Panwar
Page 2508 of 3884

a(zieial111,_ ENGINEERS FOR
Igar QCs■
w INDIA LIMITED
rirovels JoarsO IA Govt of India Undenaking) FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
DOORS WINDOWS &
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 CODES 4
3.0 TESTING & CERTIFICATION 4
4.0 MATERIALS 5
5.0 FIRE & SMOKE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT/ FIRE RATED DOORS (FDs) 5
6.0 FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT / FIRE RATED WINDOWS (FWs) &
PARTITIONS (FPs) 8
7.0 INSTALLATION 9
8.0 DELIVERABLES BY THE CONTRACTOR 9
9.0 GUARANTEE 9
10.0 MEASUREMENT 9
Page 2509 of 3884

ENGINEERS
lear Eaeg Wren eleane Jc15w)
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
DOORS WINDOWS &
1.0 GENERAL
The Fire & smoke Check/ Fire resistant/ Fire rated Doors (hereinafter termed as FD),
Windows (hereinafter termed as FW) and Partitions (hereinafter termed as FP) shall not
collapse during the rated period of fire and shall provide safe access to the escape route and
Exit.
The FD, FW & FPs shall meet the specified requirement of fire resistance i.e. stability and
integrity.
2.0 CODES
The components and complete system of FD, FW and FPs shall conform to following codes as
applicable. In case of similar codes of different organizations (IS, BS, EN, BS-EN etc.),
conformity with any of the similar codes is acceptable.
BS:476, Part-4 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Non-combustibility test
for materials
BS:476, Part-7 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of test to
determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of products.
BS:476, Part-20 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method for
determination of the fire resistance of elements of construction
(general principles).
BS:476, Part-22 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method for
determination of the fire resistance of non-load bearing elements of
construction.
BS:6206 Specification for impact performance requirements for flat safety glass
and safety plastics for use in buildings.
EN:12600 Specification for impact performance requirements for flat safety glass
and safety plastics for use in buildings.
BS EN 410 Glass in building. Determination of luminous and solar characteristics
of glazing
BS EN 1363-1 Fire resistance tests. General requirements
BS EN 1363-2 Fire resistance tests. Alternative and additional procedures
BS EN 1364-1 Fire resistance tests for non-load bearing elements. Walls
BS EN 1634-1 Fire resistance and smoke control tests for door and shutter assemblies,
openable windows and elements of building hardware. Fire resistance
test for door and shutter assemblies and openable windows
BS EN 13501-2 Fire classification of construction products and building elements.
Classification using data from fire resistance tests, excluding ventilation
services
IS:12777 Method for Classification of Flame Spread of Products.
IS:3614, Part 2 Metallic and Non Metallic Fire Check Doors, Resistance Test and
Performance Criteria
3.0 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
The FD, FW & FPs shall be UL listed or in accordance with valid fire test certificate or test
report appropriate to the type and size of FD/FW/FPs from Central Building Research
Institute, India (CBRI) or NABL accredited state or central government Laboratories or
renowned National/International Test House/ Laboratories.
Page 2510 of 3884

dafaeJtq ENGINEERS FOR
51gar 2154-e-g INDIA LIMITED 6-75-0011 Rev. 1
MKT, e.rmI00JAecA 1 IA Govt of India Undertaking) FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
Test or Evaluation report etc. done by the Manufacturer himself shall not be considered for
this purpose.
The Contractor shall furnish prototype test certificate or test report (not older than 5 years)
from these laboratories.
The certification/ report shall include complete description of the components, dimensions and
hardware of FD, FW and FPs.
4.0 MATERIALS
All Materials shall conform to applicable IS or BS or EN or BS EN or ASTM standards and

shall be subjected to approval by Engineer-In-charge. Necessary documentation/ Test
certificates shall be furnished by the Contractor for such approval. The FD, FW & FPs shall be
fabricated only after approval of materials.
4.1 Glass
The thickness, size, brand and make of glass panels in glazed FD, FW and FPs shall be in
accordance with prototype test certificate or test report (refer clause 3.0) and shall be clear,
toughened, inter-layered having fire rating of minimum 120 minutes with respect to stability
and integrity. Glass shall have following properties:
Category EW120
(in accordance with BS EN 13501-2 tested as per BS EN 1363-1,
BS EN 1363-2, BS EN 1634 -1 or BS 476, part 22)
Note:
Other categories of Glass having fire rating of minimum 120
minutes with respect to stability and integrity are also acceptable.
Impact resistance Minimum 2B2 category
(in accordance with EN 12600)
Light transmission ratio Minimum 85%
(In accordance with BS EN 410).
Approved Manufacturers of the glass:
1. Saint Gobain (Brand - Contrflam Door lite / Contraflam Lite)

2. Interver (Brand - Pyroguard)
3. Glaverbel (Brand - Pyrobelite)
Glass of Vision Panels in Doors shall be as per test certificate or test report or above
specification of glass.
5.0 FIRE & SMOKE CHECK / FIRE RESISTANT/ FIRE RATED DOORS (FDs)
FDs shall be of proprietary design and construction complete with Door frame, Shutter, hinges
and Hardware.
Materials, sizes, dimensions and profiles of various components shall be in accordance with
prototype test report or test certificate.
The Doors shall not allow passage of hot gases or the flames through the rebate or the gap
between the door frame and shutter for the duration of fire rating.
Page 2511 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
ogar taleglaileateleaneandoes.1)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking) FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
DOORS WINDOWS &
Each FD shall be provided with a small metal identification plate in suitable location
indicating Fire rating, name of the Manufacturer, date of installation and name/ approval of
Test house/Laboratory.
5.1 Fire & Smoke Check Wooden Door
A. Fire Rating
Unless otherwise specified, the complete assembly of Doors shall be of 120 minutes fire rating
for stability and integrity (tested in accordance with BS: 476, Part-22 and IS: 3614, Part- 2).
B. Frame
Door frame shall be of requisite profile made out of Hardwood and shall be fitted with
intumescent fire seals all in accordance with the test certificate or report.
C. Shutter
Shutters shall be non-metallic and asbestos free type. They shall be composed of approved
quality Calcium Silicate boards (Material class: Non- combustible as per BS: 476, Part 4 or IS:
3614, Part 2) on both sides with Mineral wool insulation (density 48 Kg/ Cu. M.) in between
all as per the test report or test certificate.
The shutter composition shall have teak wood lipping around the periphery fitted with
intumescent fire seal in PVC casing as per the test report or test certificate.
D. Finishing
The Door frames shall be finished with approved quality fire resistant paint including primer
in desired colour to provide class I surface (surface spread of flame) conforming to BS: 476
part 7 or IS: 12777.
The Door shutters shall be faced with 4mm thick polished teak veneer of approved make and
colour & texture on both sides.
5.2 Fire & Smoke Check Steel Door
A. Fire Rating
Unless otherwise specified, the complete assembly of Doors shall be of 120 minutes fire rating
for stability and integrity (tested in accordance with BS: 476, Part-22 and IS: 3614, Part-2).
B. Frame
Door frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.6mm thick galvanized steel sheet pressed to
requisite profile as indicated in the test certificate or report. They shall be provided with
stiffeners for hardware/ lock mounting and other accessories.
C. Shutter
Shutter frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.2mm thick galvanized steel sheet pressed to
requisite profile with infill of mineral wool or any other proprietary insulation as indicated in
the test certificate or report.
Page 2512 of 3884

101 ENGINEERS
el
FOR
Igar 2P-ag INDIA LIMITED
oiren elrage mown-4V FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
(A Govt of India Undenaking)
DOORS WINDOWS &

They shall be provided with stiffeners for hardware/ lock mounting and other accessories.
D. Finishing
The Door frames and shutters shall be finished with powder coating (70 microns) in desired
colour.
5.3 Fire & Smoke Check Glazed Door
The doors shall be fully glazed type with required glass, Door & Shutter frame (stiles and
rails) and Hardware.
A. Fire Rating
Unless otherwise specified, The complete assembly of Doors shall be of 120 minutes fire
rating for stability and integrity tested in accordance with either BS:476, Part-22 and IS:
3614, Part-2 or BS EN / EN 1634-1.
B. Door Frame & Shutter frame (stiles & rails)
Door & shutter frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.6mm thick galvanized steel
sheet pressed to requisite profile & size with Insulation across the door frame (both jambs
and the head) and in the hollow space of door and shutter frames as indicated in the test
certificate or report. They shall be provided with stiffeners for hardware/ lock mounting
and other accessories.
C. Glass Panels in shutter
The glass panes shall be held in position with glazing bead, glazing tape, Calcium Silicate
blocks etc. in accordance with prototype test certificate or test report.
Size of glass panels shall not exceed the dimensions indicated in the test certificate/ report.
Each Glass shall carry a non-removable marking with the name of the product & the
manufacturer inscribed on it.
D. Finishing
The door & shutter frame, other metallic components shall be finished with powder
coating (70 micron) in desired colour.
5.4 Hardware & Vision Panel for FDs
FDs of all type shall be provided with Hardware and vision panel (wherever applicable).
Hardware shall be same as tested and indicated in the test certificate / report or UL listed.
Vision panels shall be of dimensions as indicated in the test certificate or report.
Each FD shall be provided with following Hardware as a minimum.
S. No Hardware Nos
1. SS 304 grade double ball bearing hinges. (Or hinges as indicated in As
test certificate or report). required
2. "push to open" horizontal panic bar - single / double leaf panic exit 1 No.
devices
Page 2513 of 3884

di ENGINEERS
lt FOR
054--cg W INDIA LIMITED 6-75-0011 Rev. 1
I011211tneofien10irdsvii IA Govt of India Undertaking) FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
3. Openable locks/ trims for horizontal Panic Bars to operate panic bar 1 No.
from outside with necessary screws as required. The lock and handle
should be an amalgamated single motion piece from the same
manufacturer as that of Panic Bar. This hardware shall be installed in
selective doors as per approved layout.
4. Heavy duty door closer 1 No.
5. SS 304 grade twin rubber heavy duty Door Stopper with SS screws 1 No.
6. SS 304 grade minimum 300mm long concealed flush bolt (in inactive 2 Nos.
shutter of double shutter Doors)
For internal fire doors opening to the rooms adjoining corridor (defined as escape route), the
doors need not have panic bar assembly and shall have the following Hardware as a minimum.
However any internal door placed directly on the escape route exclusive of any adjoining
room shall be provided with panic bar as specified above.
S. No Hardware Nos.
1. SS 304 grade double ball bearing hinges. (Or hinges as indicated in test As
certificate or report) required
2. Heavy duty door closer 1 No.
3. Heavy duty mortice lock (with D type handle on both face) in SS finish 1 No.
along with necessary screws
4. SS 304 grade, finish twin rubber heavy duty Door Stopper with SS 1 No.
screws
6.0 FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT/ FIRE RATED WINDOWS (FWs) & PARTITIONS
(FPs)
FWs & FPs shall be fixed, fully glazed with steel frame and shall be of proprietary design and
construction.
Materials, sizes, dimensions and profiles of various components shall be in accordance with
prototype test report.
Overall dimension of FWs & FPs shall not exceed the overall size as indicated in test
certificate or report.
A. Fire Rating
Unless otherwise specified, The complete assembly of Doors shall be of 120 minutes fire
rating for stability and integrity tested in accordance with either BS:476, Part-22 and IS:
3614, Part-2 or BS EN/ EN 1364-1.
B. Frame
Window & Partition frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.6mm thick galvanized
steel sheet pressed to requisite profile & size with Insulation across the frame and in the
hollow space of frames as indicated in the test certificate or report.
C. Glass Panels in Windows & Partitions
The glass panes shall be held in position with glazing bead, glazing tape, Calcium Silicate
blocks etc. in accordance with prototype test certificate or test report.
Page 2514 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
lg-ar iMeu
■ Nren rwmrras3vmwn
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt India Undertaking) FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
DOORS WINDOWS &
Size of glass panels shall not exceed the dimensions indicated in the test certificate or
report.
Each Glass shall carry a non-removable marking with the name of the product & the
manufacturer inscribed on it.
D. Finishing
The door & shutter frame, other metallic components shall be finished with powder
coating (70 micron) in desired colour.
7.0 INSTALLATION
Shop drawings of the doors, windows and partitions in accordance with test certificate or report
shall be prepared and submitted for approval by the Engineer-In-Charge.
The shop drawings shall include all details of construction, anchoring, connections, fastenings
etc.
The FD/ FW/ FPs shall be installed in accordance with the approved drawings.
Installation of FDs shall ensure proper operation of the doors.
8.0 DELIVERABLES BY THE CONTRACTOR
Following documentation/ drawings shall be furnished by the Contractor.
1. Prototype Test Certificate/ report (Refer clause 3.0).

2. Shop drawings
3. Specification/ Manufacturer's literature, Test certificates and other documentation for
materials and items intended to be used.
4. Certificate indicating that design and installation of Doors and hardware as per the test
reports submitted.
5. Manufacturer's Guarantee.
9.0 GUARANTEE
The FD/FW/FPs including all hardware shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months from the
date of installation against any manufacturing defect.
In case of any such defect within the guarantee period, the defected part shall be replaced by the
Contractor.
10.0 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of the FD/FW/FPs opening shall be in Sq. M. measuring the actual area
including the frames. The rate shall include complete assembly consisting of Frame, Shutter,
Hardware, Accessories and sealant etc. including installation.
Page 2515 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
■ (A Govt of India Undertaking) VENTILATORS Page 1 of 11
Tfrat cii\3),
T'aft4-T
FOR
UPVC DOORS, WINDOWS &
VENTILATORS
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD )(t MKv

1 10.03.17 JK R. SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA
SPECIFICATION
0 07.11.11 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION MKV SM JKB DM
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved by
Page 2516 of 3884

ENGINEERS
51g-ar Elf5i-eu INDIA LIMITED FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS & 6-75-0013 Rev. 1
WW1 vIrave=3‘10.0 IA Govt of Indo undenaking)
Abbreviations:
BIS Bureau of Indian Standards

EPDM Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (rubber)
IGBC Indian Green Building Council
IS Indian Standards
NBC National Building Code of India
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
SHGC Solar Heat Gain Coefficient
UPVC Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride
VOC Volatile Organic Compound
Architectural Standards Committee

Ms. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. V. K. Panwar
Page 2517 of 3884

101 ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
$1gZJI 215ieg 6-75-0013 Rev. 1
IA Govt of Intim
undenaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 CODES & SPECIFICATIONS 4
3.0 TERMINOLOGY .5
4.0 MATERIALS 6
5.0 CONSTRUCTION 7
6.0 UPVC DOORS/WINDOWS/VENTILATORS FRAME 7
7.0 UPVC DOOR SHUTTER 7
8.0 UPVC WINDOWS & VENTILATORS 9
9.0 WORKMANSHIP 10
10.0 OTHER REQUIREMENTS 11
11.0 MEASUREMENT 11
Page 2518 of 3884

ENGINEERS
Z7f tifiegN10 INDIA LIMITED FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS & 6-75-0013 Rev. 1
I .W271 e9ERIRE,151 0:117.1)
VENTILATORS
Page 4 of 11
1.0 GENERAL
This standard specification lays down the requirements for types, sizes, construction,
workmanship and methods for testing of UPVC profiled paneled door and windows used in
buildings .
The profile extrusions used in manufacturing of the door and windows covered in this
standard are UPVC sections.
2.0 CODES & SPECIFICATIONS
Latest revisions of Codes, Specifications and other documents shall be referred to wherever
mentioned or otherwise applicable. Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards
for further information etc. not covered in the specification. In case of any
conflict/contradiction the provisions of the specification shall override.
IS: 4020 Door shutters- Methods of test
IS: 4020 (Part 2):1998 Measurement of dimensions and squareness (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 3):1998 Measurement of general flatness (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 5):1998 Impact indentation test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 7):1998 Edge loading test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 8):1998 Shock resistance test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 9):1998 Buckling test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 10):1998 Slamming test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Parts 11):1998 Misuse test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 16):1998 Screw withdrawal test (third revision)
IS 4669: 1968 Method of test of polyvinyl chloride resins
IS 4905: 1968 Method of random sampling
IS 4985: 2000 Specification for UPVC pipes for potable water

supplies (third revision)
IS 6307: 1985 Specification for rigid PVC sheets (first revision)
IS 10428: 1983 Glossary of terms relating to doors
IS 13360 Plastics- Methods of Testing
IS 13360 (Part 3/ Sec 1): 1995 Part 3: Physical and dimensional properties- Sec 1:
determination of density and relative density of non-cellular
plastics.
IS 13360 (Part 5/ Sec 2): 1996 Part 5: Mechanical properties- Sec 2: Determination of tensile
properties- Test conditions for moulding and extrusion
plastics.
Page 2519 of 3884

OWE.? ENGINEERS
Ogen lalaft INDIA LIMITED FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS & 6-75-0013 Rev. 1
(.11E7f 21242E 4,3PC1571)
VENTILATORS
IA Govt of lotto Undertaking)
Page 5 of 11
IS 13360 (Part 5/ Sec 4): 1996 Part 5: Mechanical properties- Sec 4: Determination of Izod
impact strength.
IS 13360 (Part 5/ Sec 24): 1999 Part 5: Mechanical properties- Sec 24: Determination of
impact resistance by the free fall dart method-Instrument
puncture test.
IS 13360 (Part 6/ Sec 17): 1997 Part 6: Thermal properties- Sec 17: Determination of
temperature of defection under load- Plastics and ebonite.
3.0 TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given in IS 10428, and the following shall
apply.
3.1 Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC)

A compound based on a polymer (resin) prepared by the polymerization of vinyl chloride as
essentially the sole monomer (vinyl chloride content not less than 99 percent)
3.2 Compound
An intimate admixture of a polymer with all the materials necessary for the finished product.
3.3. Rework Material

A plastic from a processor's own production that has been reground, palletized, or solvated
after having been previously processed by moulding or extrusion.
3.4 Extrusion
A process in which heated or unheated plastic is forced through a shaping orifice (a die) in one
continuously formed shape, as in film, sheet, rod or tubing.
3.5 Fabrication
The manufacture of plastic products from moulded parts, rods, tubes, sheeting, extrusions or
other forms by appropriate operations such as punching, cutting, drilling and tapping including
fastening plastic parts together or to other parts by mechanical devices, adhesives, heat sealing
or other means.
3.6 Blister
An imperfection, a rounded elevation of the surface of a plastic, with boundaries that may be
more or less sharply defined, somewhat resembling in shape a blister on a human skin.
3.7 Pit
An imperfection, a small carter in the surface of the plastic, with its width of approximately in
the same order of magnitude as its depth.
3.8 Shrink Mark

An imperfection or a depression in the surface of a moulded material, where it has retracted
from the mould.
4.0 MATERIALS
4.1 Type
The material from which the profile is produced shall substantially consist of UPVC to which
may be added to those additives that are needed to facilitate manufacture of sound and durable
profile of good surface finish, mechanical strength and opacity under conditions of use. None
of the additives shall be used separately or together in quantities sufficient to constitute
Page 2520 of 3884

OA ENGINEERS
5 He INDIA LIMITED FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS & 6-75-0013 Rev. 1
(men eRasreanJvcrra) (A Govf of India UnOettaking)
a toxic, organoleptic or microbial growth hazard, or materially to impair the fabrication or

welding properties of the profile or to impair its chemical and physical or mechanical
properties (in particular long term mechanical strength and impact strength) as defined in this
standard. The additives to be used shall be selected from IS 10148 and shall be uniformly
dispersed.
The monomer content (VCM content) in the resin shall be within the limit specified in 3.3.1of
IS 10151 when tested in accordance with the Annex A of IS 10151. The composition shall be
based on PVC resin having a K-value of 64 or greater when tested in accordance with IS 4669.
When tested in accordance with IS 13360 (Part 5), the UPVC compound in the extruded
sections shall have following properties:
(a) Tensile strength and tensile modulus not less than 38MPa and 200MPa, respectively
(when tested as per IS: 13360 Part 5/ Sec. 2).
(b) The Izod impact strength of notch specimen not less than 107 Joules/ metre when
tested as per IS: 13360 Part 5/ Sec. 4).
(c) The deflection temperature of the notch specimen not less than 65°C (when tested as
per IS: 13360 Part 5/ Sec. 17).
When tested in accordance with IS: 6307, the average of burn of the UPVC compound shall
not exceed 100mm and the average time of burn shall not exceed 10 sec.
The specimens of the UPVC compound in extruded sections after 6 months and 1 year of
weathering shall maintain uniform colour and be free of any visual surface or structural
changes such as peeling, chipping, cracking, flaking and pitting.
NOTE: Weathering requirements are to reflect performance of a typical extrusion

system profile representing a specific UPVC compound and a specific extrusion
technology. The lengthy outdoor weatherability testing shall be performed
concurrently with development of new applications. Completion of weatherability
testing prior to the use of a product is however not required. The manufacturer shall
perform weatherability test when a change is made in either compounding or
extrusion technique.
4.2 Rework Material
The manufacture shall use only its own clean rework material of the same compound and the
extruded profiles produced shall meet all the requirements of this specification.
5.0 CONSTRUCTION
5.1 Manufacturing of UPVC Profile Sections

Appropriate amount of PVC resin and other ingredients are blended in a high intensity mixer
using standard blending procedures. UPVC sections shall be manufactured by extruding the
PVC Compound at appropriate temperature and pressure through a die of the required size and
shape of the profile section.
5.2 Thickness and size of Profile Sections

The wall thickness of the profile sections shall be minimum 2mm for the stiles, top rail,
middle rail, bottom rail, shutter frames in case of doors, and for outer frames,
mullions/transoms in case of windows.
The shutter infill panel shall have minimum wall thickness of 1mm.
Page 2521 of 3884

.31faeielM ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
kii4eU W INDIA LIMITED FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS & 6-75-0013 Rev. 1
1.11177 2:124517 ,1513P41.1) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
The size used shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and profile as per drawing.
6.0 UPVC DOORS/ WINDOWS/ VENTILATORS FRAME
UPVC door/window/ventilator frame shall confirm to IS: 10151
The door frames shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and profile. The frame shall be
also be reinforced at the corners with special polymeric/ steel reinforcements of suitable
dimensions. The corner joints shall be mitre cut and welded or joined by means of concealed
cleats with necessary screws and fittings. A tie rod shall be provided at the bottom of the door
frame.
The window and ventilator frames shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and profile.
The entire frame shall be steel or polymeric reinforced at required locations to increase the
structural integrity as well as for fitting of hardwares such as hinges etc. The steel/ polymeric
reinforcement is inserted into the hollow profile upto the required depth by using a specific
length of steel/ polymeric rod. The corner, transom/mullion joints shall be mitre cut and fusion
welded.
The frame used for door, windows and ventilators shall be free from all sharp edges and burls.
Frames shall be fixed to the masonry by means of 300mm x 25mm x 6mm PVC hold fasts
screwed to the frame and grouted with M-20 grade concrete in a minimum 350mm x 100mm x
100mm sized hole in the masonry.
7.0 UPVC DOOR SHUTTER
7.1 Fabrication of UPVC Door Shutter
The UPVC door shutter shall be manufactured from extruded UPVC profile sections of stiles,
rails and panel inserts. Shutter frames (top rails, bottom rails and stiles) shall be mitre cut and
joined at the corners with 'IL" shaped polymeric corner reinforcements of suitable dimensions
and shall be fitted with counter sunk fully threaded parallel shank steel screws. The infill
panels shall be made out of seamless one piece multi-chambered PVC extruded sections of
required length and width, joined by tongue and groove jointing. Other hardware locations
shall be reinforced with polymeric reinforcements of suitable dimension. Middle rails shall be
made out of PVC extruded sections. Various steel/ polymeric reinforcement are required to be
inserted in the profile sections at appropriate places for strengthening the corners of shutter
frames and for fitting hardwares such as hinges, aldrops, tower bolts, handles etc. A nail of
min. 2mm dia is fixed on the steel/ polymeric reinforcement inside the hollow plastic section.
The steel/ polymeric reinforcement is then inserted into the hollow profile upto the required
depth. On all the corners of the framing section 'IL,' shaped steel/ polymeric reinforcements are
inserted. Corner reinforcements of minimum overall dimensions of 100mm x 200mm (for
24mm thick shutter), 100mm x 225mm (for 37mm thick shutter) and 125mm x 210mm (for
30mm thick shutter) shall be used.
Various sections are required to be jointed at respective male-female locks together and
screws are to be applied to each joint. Door outer frame sections should be miter cut to
required lengths and widths simultaneously at 45 degree cutting, and fusion welded.
The screws to be used shall be of minimum size 19 x 8mm counter sunk type, fully threaded
of parallel shank steel. The exact location where the screws are required to be fixed shall be
marked on the in-fill panel and the door shutter frames. Then the pilot holes shall be drilled at
the marked points on the door shutter and the door shutter frames. All the four corners of the
shutter shall be fixed with 4 screws (2 nos. at each side of the `1_,' shaped reinforcement. The
screws shall be fixed at a minimum distance of 20mm from each edge.
Page 2522 of 3884

doiReieift ENGINEERS
EPegW INDIA LIMITED FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS & 6-75-0013 Rev. 1
lartiret 2:1VamennJvassil
A Govt of India Undertaking)
7.2 Sizes and Types
Sizes of UPVC profile door shutters shall conform to the specific requirements indicated in
drawings.
The nominal thickness of the door shutters shall be 24mm, 30mm and 37mm corresponding to
each of the size designations. For the non-modular sizes the thickness of the door shall not be
less the thickness specified for the nearest higher modular size. The thickness of the door
shutter shall be as agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser but not less than 37mm.
The tolerance on the thickness of door shutters shall be ± lmm
7.3 Location of Fittings and Accessories
The UPVC door shutters shall be fixed to UPVC or mild steel (see IS: 4351), or wooden (see
IS: 4021) door frame with three anodized aluminium/stainless steel hinges of required size.
The thickness of hinges shall be minimum 2mm. Appropriate marking of holes on the door
shutters as well as on the door frames shall be made where hardware such as hinges, handles,
towerbolts, aldrops and mortice locks are to be fixed. Pre-drilling of pilot hole of 3mm shall
be made on the frame prior to fixing of hinges at 100mm below the top and 100mm above the
bottom. The remaining hinge shall be placed at one third distance between top and bottom
hinges.
7.4 Finish
The surface of shutters shall be smooth, straight and free from any visual defects such as pin
holes, blistering, colour bolts, cracking, pitting, shrink mark etc. The profile shall be uniform
in colour as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser. Defective spots shall be
duly repaired and finished to make them non-noticeable. All the four edges of door shutters
shall be square and free from twist and wrap.
7.5 Test
Necessary test certificates as per this clause shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge for
approval along with necessary relevant documentation before procurement of material at site.
7.5.1 Test Requirements for UPVC Profiles used for Door Shutters
When tested in accordance with IS: 13360, Annex B, D, E (as applicable) the profiles shall
have following properties:
(a) Dimensional Stability: the shrinkage in the profile shall be less than 3 percent
(b) Impact Resistance: The impact on profile shall neither result in cracking nor in
development of holes, split or shatter
(c) Extrusion Quality: The profile shall not flake or disintegrate. A surface attack not
exceeding 25 percent shall be considered as adequately fused and of satisfactory quality.
(d) Density: the density of UPVC profiles used for door shutters shall be between 1.40 and
1.46
(e) Sulphated Ash Content: The sulphated ash content in the profile shall not exceed 11
percent.
7.5.2 Test Requirements for UPVC Door Shutters
When tested in accordance with IS: 4020 (Parts 2,3,5,7,8,9,10,11,16- as applicable) the door
shutters shall comply to following properties:
(a) Dimensions and Squareness: The length and width of door shutters shall be within
tolerance of ± 3mm of the normal size. The tolerance on thickness of different
components of door shutters (stiles and rails) shall be ± 1 mm. The thickness of door
Page 2523 of 3884

4ailazielM INDIA
ENGINEERS
LIMITED FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
lelf5teg 6-75-0013 Rev. 1
I WTI eiEWIE,7113,10$70 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
shutter shall be uniform throughout with a permissible variation of not more than 0.8mm
when measured between any two points. The door shutter shall not deviate from
squareness of its adjacent edges at all the four corners by more than 1mm on a length of
500mm.
(b) General Flatness: Cupping and warping in door shutters shall not exceed 1.5mm.
(c) Impact Indentation: The depth of indentation in door shutter shall not be more than
0.2mm
(d) Slamming: There shall be no visible damage caused in any part of the shutter after
successive slamming actions.
(e) Misuse: There shall not be any permanent deformation of the fixing or any part of the
door hindering its normal working after the test.
(f) Edge Loading: The deflection of the edge at the maximum load shall not be more than
10mm. the residual deflection after removal of load from the edge of door shall not be
more than 1mm, failing which the test may be repeated on the other edge in reverse
direction. There shall also not be any lateral buckling greater than 5mm during loaded
condition and residual lateral buckling in the door after removal of the load shall not be
more than lmm.
(g) Shock Resistance: There shall be no visible damage or permanent deterioration of the
shutter either after the soft and light body impact testing or after the soft and heavy body
impact testing.
(h) Screw Withdrawal Resistance: There shall be no visible damage or permanent
deterioration of the shutter either after the soft and light body impact testing or after the
soft and heavy body impact testing.
(i) Buckling: The shutter shall not show any deterioration and the residual shall not be more
than 10mm after 15mins. of unloading. The internal deflection under a load of 400N (40
Kgf) should not be more than 100mm.
8.0 UPVC WINDOWS & VENTILATORS
8.1 Fabrication of UPVC Windows and Ventilators
The window and ventilators sections shall be of hollow, multi chambered with steel
reinforcement with an outer wall of 2 mm thickness
The window and ventilator outer frames shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and
profile. The entire frame shall be steel reinforced to increase the structural integrity. These
reinforcements shall be secured to UPVC profiles at a maximum of 100 mm from the ends and
at a maximum of 400mm centers. The screws used for securing the reinforcements shall be
self-tapping type.
UPVC windows shall be fabricated with fusion welded corners. The mullions of transoms
shall be either fusion welded or mechanically jointed with adequate sealing so as to prevent
any ingress of water or air in the reinforcement chamber. The windows shall conform to the
strength requirements based on the wind load. The reinforcement provided shall be either mild
steel with corrosion resistant coating, stainless steel or extruded aluminium; and shall be
installed within 6 mm to 50 mm of the face of the weld. The minimum wall thickness of the
mild steel reinforcement shall be 1.2 mm. A minimum overlap of 5mm shall be provided on
frames and mullions to ensure effective seal between the sash and frame.
The corner, transom/ mullion joints shall be mitre cut and fusion welded. The frame used for
windows and ventilators shall be free from all sharp edges and burls. The window unit shall be
designed such that water does not pass through reinforcement chamber.
All outer frames of the window and ventilator exposed to external façade shall be provided
with drainage slots with a minimum 5mm wide and 30mm long. All outer frames, transom,
mullions shall be provided with weather seals.
Page 2524 of 3884

ENGINEERS
leaf Eitileg INDIA UMITED FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS & 6-75-0013 Rev. 1
(NW, 2i2417 4513,1,7.1) Govt of InOta undertakm)
8.2 Installation and Fixing
Frames shall be fixed to the masonry by means of 300mm x 25mmx6mm PVC hold fasts
(screwed to the frame) or 8mm x 100mm long fasteners and grouted with M-20 grade concrete
in a minimum 350mm x 100mm x 100mm sized hole in the masonry
8.3 Hardware and Fittings
All hardware including its fittings shall be of material resistant to atmospheric corrosion. The
hardware shall be fixed through the reinforcement and the screw shall penetrate the
reinforcement by at least 2mm.
Openable type window shall be provided with cockspur handles where as the top hung type
window shall be provided with espagnolette handles with all necessary locking arrangement,
fittings and other hardware required for the proper operation of the windows. The handles
shall be made up of zinc and shall be of the powder coated type or as per the coating listed in
the bid/ instructed by the company. The colour, finish and texture of the handles shall be of
the same finish of the window.
The openable windows shall be provided with traid friction stays made up of high quality
stainless steel and nylon components. It shall be fitted to window with a weather-seal. The
side hung friction stays shall open the window at 90° angle and the top hung windows to a
maximum angle of 85°. These shall be fixed to window section using stainless steel rivets.
The meeting points of frame and shutters shall be provided with EPDM Gasket (interlocking
type with male and female profiles) all round to ensure full water and air-tightness.
8.4 Glass Panels
Glass panels for glazing purpose shall be float glass of specified thickness or 6.3mm thick
laminated glass conforming to IS:2553 or 6mm toughened glass as specified in item
description, and shall have properly square corners and straight edges.
9.0 WORKMANSHIP
The profile and type of door, windows, ventilators (glazed, partly glazed/louvered, side
hung/top hung/fixed shutter, composite) shall be as per drawings.
The frame shall be fabricated to true right angles.
The frame shall be constructed of sections cut to size and mitred and fusion welded.
The side hung and top hung windows shall be fixed to outer frame with necessary hardware
and fittings as specified.
The handles and other hardware (hinges, towerbolts, aldrops and mortice lock) for doors shall
be of stainless steel and for windows shall be of stainless steel or zinc as approved by the
company.
In case of composite Door/window/ventilator units, the units shall be coupled as per drawing.
Weather bar shall be provided where ever coupling member is fitted over an external opening.
Drainage slots in all sections exposed to outside conditions shall be provided.
Glazing shall be bonded to the extruded sections using adhesive tape and then concealed with
proper beading. Glass panes shall be provided with EPDM gasket/ rubber lining before fixing.
The outer frames of door and windows shall be fixed to masonry by means of PVC holdfasts
Page 2525 of 3884

lou ENGINEERS
ligar W INDIA LIMITED FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS & 6-75-0013 Rev. 1
(WTI 2121.2 Jt1,1541) IA Govt of India Undettaking)
and grouted with M-20 grade concrete hole in the masonry as per drawing. The windows/
ventilators/doors shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and plumb.
10.0 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
UPVC material used for making of doors, windows and ventilators shall have recyclable
content.
Silicon sealant shall be provided in between gaps of walls and frame to prevent heat gain and
loss so as to reduce air conditioning requirement within the building. The sealant and
adhesives used in windows shall have low VOC contents.
The window or ventilator when casted in the wall shall be capable to keep away the
environmental pollutants, like sand, dust, smoke and noise. It should be suitably strengthened
to withstand strong winds without producing whistling and rattling sound. The windows shall
able to achieve U-value ratings as prescribed by IGBC.
11.0 MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
Measurement & rates for item rate tender shall be on Sq.M basis as per item description.
Area shall be measured correct upto two places of decimal. Dimensions shall be measured
correct upto 0.5 cm.
A composite unit of various designations shall be first measured overall as a unit of

predominant designations and measurement for remaining designations shall be deducted from
the overall measurement of the composite unit in order to arrive at the quantities for various
designations. Mullions/Transoms/Coupling bars -etc. at the meeting points of various
designations shall be equally distributed to all such designations for measurement and rates.
Rates shall include costs of all materials, specified hardware, labour, erection, hoisting,
scaffolding, removal of scaffolding, protective measures, conveyance, handling, loading/
unloading, storing etc. required for the proper completion of the item of work in accordance
with the specification.
Page 2526 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS SKIRTING DETAIL
ter n s
(keen eiroverb7,1•Cnri)
INDIA LIMITED
(WITH BRICK WALL) 7-75-0002 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
BRICK WALL BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER CEMENT PLASTER
GROOVE IN PLASTER
12 THICK CEMENT
MORTAR
TILE ADHESIVE (1 CEMENT : 3 SAND) z
0
(AS PER ITEM DESCRIPTION)

TILE SKIRTING
STONE SKIRTING
U
LA
Lai
RECESSED BRICK CI
RECESSED BRICK WALL AS REQUIRED C•I
I
WALL AS REQUIRED
STONE FLOOR FINISH
TILE FLOOR FINISH — FLOOR BASE
FLOOR BASE ta
CEMENT MORTAR — a_
TILE ADHESIVE — (1 CEMENT: 4 SAND)
FINISHED
FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL
FLOOR LEVEL
......
• . ' •
• • .
. „
SECTION A—A SECTION A—A

(TILE FLOORING–FLUSH SKIRTING) (STONE FLOORING–RAISED SKIRTING)
BRICK WALL RECESSED BRICK

WALL AS REQUIRED
STONE FLOOR FINISH —
FLOOR BASE
CEMENT MORTAR —
(1 CEMENT: 4 SAND)
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
SKIRTING
PLAN SECTION A—A

NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM (STONE FLOORING–FLUSH SKIRTING)
5 07.11.16 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD Dow' JS/J RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. KAMA
4 25.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKB D.IIALHOTRA
Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau

No. by by
Approved by
Format No R-n0-0001-F4 RAV Convrinht Fll - All rintits rasarvari
Page 2527 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ki
r--Riaelei ENGINEERS SKIRTING DETAIL
Ift41014teg
larleff clecrAl =awns°
INDIA LIMITED (WITH R.C.C. COLUMN) 7-75-0003 Rev. 5
Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 1
RCC COLUMN
CEMENT PLASTER
TILE ADHESIVE
TILE SKIRTING 0
1-7
C•1
0
TILE SKIRTING
Id
RCC COLUMN TILE FLOOR FINISH
FLOOR BASE
Id
TILE ADHESIVE a.
= •
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
•
• .
.•
• 4 ..• : . A • • .g
• A.
CHAMFER OF TILES • • •
AT 45' ANGLE
PLAN SECTION B-B

(TILE SKIRTING)
RCC COLUMN
CEMENT PLASTER
111 1/4.74.....:* 1 1
• . .
• •
12 THICK CEMENT
MORTAR
(1 CEMENT : 3 SAND) • 0
STONE SKIRTING
C)
STONE SKIRTING
0
RCC COLUMN
Id
STONE FLOOR FINISH
FLOOR BASE
I •
CEMENT MORTAR a.
(1 CEMENT: 4 SAND)
In
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
•
CHAMFER OF STONE •• 4 . • :
AT 45' ANGLE
PLAN SECTION A-A

(STONE SKIRTING)
07.11.16
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM

L
RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA
Imo'
R. PUMA
4 25.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED ok SD JKB D.MALIIOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn 13-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Convrinht Fll - All rinhts reserved
Page 2528 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ei ENGINEERS DADO DETAIL
ligar klf5teg
elecPle 051.340,41)
INDIA LIMITED (WITH BRICK WALL AND RCC COLUMN) 7-75-0004 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
BRICK WALL/RCC
COLUMN
CEMENT PLASTER
12 THICK
CEMENT MORTAR
(1 CEMENT : 3 SAND)/
TILE ADHESIVE FOR TILES
STONE/TILE DADO
PERDRAWING
STONE/TILE
FLOORING
FLOOR BASE
CEMENT MORTAR -
(1 CEM : 4 SAND)/
TILE ADHESIVE FOR
TILES
FINISHED
FLO VE
SECTION A-A
CHAMFER OF TILES/STONE
AT 45* ANGLE
/1/
CHAMFER OF TILES/STONE
AT 45* ANGLE
RCC COLUMN
BRICK WALL
STONE/TILE DADO
or"
PLAN PLAN
(DADO ON BRICK WALL) (DADO ON RCC COLUMN)

IrY
5 07.11.16 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD Dio4v* RAJANJISRI
VBIRVA R. PANDA
25.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK

4 SO JKB D.MALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat No R-00-0001-F4 Rev n ennvrinht Fll - All rinhts reserved
Page 2529 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS 4ol STEEL DOOR
Ifgar Of51e-G w INDIA LIMITED IA Govt of India Undertaking)
HOLLOW TYPE SINGLE SHUTTER 7-75-0006 Rev. 5
1 .t ,ecn,em 3q3.1)
Page 1 of 1
40x40x6 MS ANGLE
DOOR FRAME
150 LONG MS BUTT HINGE
18 GAUGE MS SHEET
WITHOUT JOINT ON BOTH FACES
35x35x16 GAUGE MS SHEET
FABRICATED STIFFNERS
0 200 C/C (MAX.)
r
, ZZZZZZZZZ rIZZ,VZ, V.1
35x35x5 MS
ANGLE SHUTTER FRAME
50x6 MS FLAT
CEMENT PLASTER
25x6x300 LONG MS HOLD FAST
EMBEDDED IN M-20 CONCRETE BRICK WALL/
BLOCK SIZE 350x100x100 R.C.C.
SECTIONAL PLAN 1-1 R.C.C. LINTEL
CEMENT PLASTER
40x40x6
50x6 MS FLAT MS ANGLE DOOR
35x35x5 MS ANGLE FRAME
SHUTTER FRAME
MS TOWER BOLT
r7F-11-jr MS HOLD FAST

•••- ■ 150 LONG MS BUTT
0
0
HINGE
O
an E
O
MASON RY O PE NI NG 2 100TO
O
co
2090TO2490
EQ. 1 600(max. )1 600 (max. )
35x35x16 GAUGE
MS SHEET
FABRICATED STIFFNERS
0 200 C/C (MAX.)
MORTICE LOCK
WITH HANDLE
18 GAUGE
MS SHEET
WITHOUT JOINT
H 35x35x5 MS ANGLE
SHUTTER FRAME ON BOTH SIDES
jr.J FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL 35x35x5
MS ANGLE
j.IL1L 1L SHUTTER FRAME
12 TO 15
6 GAP 25x6 MS FLAT
25x6 MS FLAT U)
1 730 TO 1180 TIE AT BOTTOM
T MASONRY OPENING TIE AT BOTTOM OF DOOR FRAME
750 TO 1200 OF DOOR FRAME
ELEVATION SECTION 2-2

NOTE: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
5 10.11.16 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD Dielo✓ /.1334/RAJANJISTAVA R.--....
PrANDA
4 25.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKB D.MALHOIRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn 8-n0-000l-F4 RPV 0 Convrinht Fll - All riohts rasPrvar
Page 2530 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS STEEL DOOR
INDIA LIMITED HOLLOW TYPE DOUBLE SHUTTER 7-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
25x6x300 LONG MS HOLD FAST
EMBEDDED IN M-20 CONCRETE
SIZE 350x100x100
40x40x6
MS ANGLE FRAME
150 LONG MS BUTT HINGE
35x35x5 MS
ANGLE DOOR FRAME
18 GAUGE MS 2
SHEET WITHOUT
JOINT ON BOTH FACES
35x35x16 GAUGE MS
SHEET FABRICATED STIFFNERS
0 200 C/C (MAX.)
50X6 M.S. FLAT
25x45x3 THICK MS ANGLE
(VERTICAL) WELDED TO ONE BRICK WALL -
SHUTTER FOR BEADING AT
MEETING POINT
CEMENT PLASTER
SECTIONAL PLAN 1-1
50X6 M.S. FLAT

40x40X6 THK.
MS TOWER BOLT
M.S.ANGLE FRAME
H
z1-1- -11- -11 In -11- -I
dr MS HOLD FAST
I 1 "1 ■ 't
I it r
150 LONG MS BUTT
O
ig I II HINGE
N
0
I—0°
O 35x35x16 GAUGE MS SHEET
cn 0 •>
0 FABRICATED STIFFNERS
40
FN. )i 0 200 C/C (MAX.)
0 O
MS DOOR HANDLE
O
O La 0
0
a. go
0
>- 18 GAUGE MS SHEET

MS FABRICATED ALDROP WITHOUT JOINT ON
,...,
■-• BOTH FACES
< 0 35x35x5 MS ANGLE
M0 SHUTTER FRAME
CO FINISHED
—< FLOOR LEVEL FINISHED
a
12 TO 15
1-0--/-25x6 THICK MS
1180 TO 2480 6 GAP FLAT TIE AT BOTTOM
MASONRY OPENING L_ __I OF DOOR FRAME
1200 TO 2500
SECTION 2-2
ELEVATION
5 10.11.16 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD DK '1.4". JS/J3 RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA
4 25.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKR D.I1AUIOIRA
No by by
Approved by
Format Nn n-nn_0001-F4 RPV n Convrinht Fli - All rinhts maarvprl
Page 2531 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS WOODEN FLUSH DOOR
fitg5MOINDIA LIMITED 7-75-0011 Rev. 5
Gn, UrIder1,411,/
(WITH PRESSED STEEL FRAME)
Page 1 of 1
10 DIA.x250 LONG 25x3 THICK M.S. FLAT .C.C. BEAM/

ALUMINIUM TOWER BOLT SPACER ®500 C/C R.C.C. LINTEL
MAXIMUM
M.S. HOLD FAST LINTEL LEVEL
12X10 GROOVE IN
PLASTER FILLED
WITH SEALANT
CAVITY FILLED WITH
CONCRETE OR PHENOLIC
FOAM
I 1 1 11 11 111E l:1" TEAK WOOD LIPPING
VISION PANEL WITH 4mm V''
THK. GLASS WITH 15x15
TEAK WOOD BEADING
(AS PER REQUIREMENT)
35 THICK FLUSH
DOOR SHUTTER
rn (AS PER ITEM/
SPECIFICATION)
(Di a)
.S.HINGE
ALDROP/ MORTICE LOCK

(AS PER REQUIREMENT)
CT, —200x3 PLASTIC KICK PLATES

FIXED WITH STEEL SCREWS
L-
r
(AS REQUIRED)
FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL
• 1
1_12mm M.S. SQUARE BAR (TIE) WELDED
TO BOTH E DS OF FRAME
780 TO 980 - T12mm M.S. SQUARE BAR (TIE) WELDED
TO BOTH ENDS OF FRAME
11 LEGEND :
SEALANT C (M.S. BUTT
HINGE) A.16 GAUGE PRESSED STEEL FRAME
FINISHED WITH SYNTHETIC ENAMEL
PAINT (OVER RED-OXIDE ZINC
CHROMATE PRIMER)/ ELECTROSTATIC
POWDER COATING/PU COATING
35 THICK FLUSH DOOR (OVER EPDXY PRIMER) AS PER TENDER
SHUTTER (AS PER ITEMS.
ITEM/SPECIFICATION)
TEAK WOOD LIPPING B. 25x6-300 LONG M.S. HOLDFAST ®
CAVITY FILLED WITH CONCRETE MAXIMUM 600 C/C WELDED TO FRAME
OR PHENOLIC FOAM SPACER (D).
D (M.S.FLAT SPACER) C.150 LONG M.S. BUTT HINGE ®
APRESSED STEEL FRAME) MAXIMUM 600 C/C SCREWED TO
FRAME AND SHUTTER.
BM.S. HOLD FAST)
12X10 GROOVE IN PLASTER D. 50x6 THICK M.S. FLAT SPACER
60 FILLED WITH POLYSULPHID WELDED TO FRAME AT HOLD FAST
SEALANT LOCATIONS.
SECTION 1-1 E. 40x3-150 LONG M.S PAD WELDED TO
FRAME AT ALL HINGE & LOCK
LOCATIONS.
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.
2. FOR SHUTTER FINISH REFER TO DRAWINGS/TENDER ITEM
3. DOOR CLOSER Et DOOR STOPPER SHALL BE PROVIDED AS/TENDER ITEM
stOV. ‘, /1.
5 19.10.15 REVISED Et ISSUED AS STANDARD BABITA GJK JK RAJA NJI S AVA S. CHANDA
4 31.08.10 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SANDHYA GB/JS JKB N. DUARI
No . by by
Approved by
Format Nn 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 RPV C.onvrioht Eli - All riohts resprvpri
Page 2532 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ei
ENGINEERS WOODEN FLUSH DOOR
Zigar 5leg INDIA LIMITED (WITH WOODEN FRAME) 7-75-0012 Rev. 5
lomewaxemJklam) Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 1
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER 25x6 MS HOLD FAST
BUTT HINGES EMBEDDED IN M-20 CONCRETE
BLOCK SIZE 350x100x100
TEAK WOOD LIPPING
50
—35 THICK FLUSH DOOR

SHUTTER
WOODEN FRAME
OUT OF 65x125
SECTIONAL PLAN 1-1

R.C.C. LINTEL
CEMENT
PLASTER
WOODEN
DOOR FRAME WOODEN FRAME
TOWER BOLT OUT OF 65x125
-e—o-
0
--o-
rr HOLD FAST
TEAK WOOD LIPPING
BUTT HINGE
0 600 MAXIMUM
4 THICK PLAIN GLASS
VISION PANEL WITH 35 THK.FLUSH
TEAK WOOD BEADING DOOR SHUTTER
_CAS PER DOOR PROFILE
)--
DRAWING)
0
cm 0
0 0
)—
I MORTICE LOCK WITH

HANDLE/ALDROP PLASTIC KICK
0
0 35 THICK FLUSH PLATE (ONLY FOR
0 DOOR SHUTTER TOILET DOOR)
0
I FINISHED FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
0
0
• •
780 TO 11804

2. DOOR HARDWARE SHALL BE AS/SPECIFICATION
11/`2‘"--
5 14.09.16 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD DK,Pbt lJS/14"--- RAJANA SRIVASTAVA L MAMA
4 12.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SO JKO D. IIALNOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No R-00-0001-F4 RAV Convrinht Fll - All rinhts rasarvar
Page 2533 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS WOODEN GLAZED DOOR
DOUBLE SHUTTER
Page 1 of 1
WOODEN DOOR FRAME
TOWER BOLT
TEAK WOOD TOP RAIL
0
0 MS HOLD FAST
csi
TEAK WOOD
STYLE
RCC LINTEL
GLASS AS PER
2090 TO 2490
- -< SPECIFICATIONS
DOOR HANDLE 10
CEMENT PLASTER
WOODEN FRAME
ALDROP OUT OF 125x65
BUTT HINGE
TEAK WOOD 100x38 TEAK WOOD
LOCK RAIL
TOP RAIL
TEAK WOOD
8 BOTTOM RAIL
, FINISHE
• FLOOR LDEVEL GLASS AS PER
SPECIFICATION
EQ EQ
1480TO29
4
ELEVATION
CI 50 4154
BUTT HINGE
GLASS AS PER 150X38 TEAK WOOD
SPECIFICATION
LOCK RAIL
TEAK WOOD TEAK WOOD BEADING

BEADING
100x38 TEAK WOOD
STYLE
WOODEN FRAME
OUT OF 125x65
4 4 )
MS HOLD FAST EMBEDDED GLASS AS PER

IN CONCRETE BLOCK 350x100x100 SPECIFICATION
SECTIONAL PLAN 2-2

GLASS AS PER
SPECIFICATION 200x38 TEAK WOOD
TEAK WOOD MEETING BOTTOM RAIL
STYLE 100X38
TEAK WOOD
BEADING
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
SECTIONAL PLAN 3-3 SECTION 1 -1

5 21.11.16 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD R. PANDA
4 09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK JKB D.IIALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn R-nn-n0r1 -F4 RPV () CnnvrinhT Fll - All rinhts rAsAn/Pel
Page 2534 of 3884

STANDARD No.
(fru ENGINEERS
111-ZIT f8fIlft
tauten eiecorkt am30ens0
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goo. of India Undertaking)
GLAZED ALUMINIUM DOOR 7-75-0014 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
R.C.C. LINTEL/
BEAM
CEMENT PLASTER
F F F4 101.60x44.45x2.5
Fes_
—4c17 ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAME
(SECTION No.20102)
,, ..._ ALUMINIUM GLAZING CLIP

* (SECTION NO.19377)
GLASS
F F
OPENABLE SHUTTER
SECTION 4-4
• 1 1 1 DOOR HANDLE
1 ALUMINIUM GLAZING CLIP
i
1 (SECTION NO.19377)
F i F
101.60x44.45x2.5
a ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAME
(SECTION No.20102)
PIVOT 50x44.50x2.5
6 GAP PIVOT ALUMINIUM SHUTTER FRAME
ALUMINIUM BOTTOM RAIL (SECTION No.19554)
ELEVATION
(F—FIXED GLAZING)
(SECTION NO.19584)
ALUMINIUM GLAZING CLIP
(SECTION NO.19377)
101.60x44.45x2.5
ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAME GLASS
(SECTION NO.20102)
50x44.50x2.5 ALUMINIUM
SHUTTER FRAME
SECTION 5-5
RUBBER/EPDM GASKET
(SECTION No.19554)
PIVOT
100x44.45x2
GLASS
47.62X44.45X2.8 ALUMINIUM ALUMINIUM LOCK RAIL
SHUTTER FRAME (SECTION No.19564)
(SECTION No.19502)
SECTION 2-2
BRICK WALL/R.C.C. COLUMN
CEMENT PLASTER ALUMINIUM GLAZING CLIP
(SECTION NO.19377)
101.50x44.50x2.5 ALUMINIUM DOOR
FRAME (SECTION No.20102) FIXED WITH
ALUMINIUM LUGS/ANCHOR FASTENER
— ALUMINIUM GLAZING CLIP (SECTION NO.19377) SECTION 6-6
- GLASS
GLASS
ALUMINIUM GLAZING CLIP
(SECTION NO.19377)
GLASS
150x44.45x3.10
ALUMINIUM BOTTOM RAIL
101.60X44.45X2.5 (SECTION No.19584)
ALUMINIUM FRAME
(SECTION NO.20057)
SECTION 1 -1 SECTION 3-3 FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. 11/
2. SECTION 7-7
THESCIONDGAT S.PERINTOXUDALMINSECTOF
"JINDAL ALUMINIUM LTD." AND ARE INDICATED FOR REFERENCE. EQUIVALANT SECTIONS
OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS CAN ALSO BE USED.
3. FOR FINISHING OF ALUMINIUM SECTION (ANODISED/POWDER COATING) REFER BID/TENDER.
4. RUBBER/EPDM GASKET SHALL BE USED FOR FIXING OF GLASS.
5. HARDWARE SHALL BE AS PER BID/TENDER.
olei■
5 21.03.17 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD DK JS/JK RAJANN SRIVASTAVA
4 27.03.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD DK SD JKR D. MAUIOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No R-(10-11001-F4 ROW Cnnvrinht F11 - All rinhts rAsprvAr
Page 2535 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS GLAZED ALUMINIUM WINDOW
IA Govt. of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 1
RCC BEAM/
LINTEL
CEMENT
F --It PLASTER
4 SECTION 20919
■
,,
—'414ev
SECTION 19428
4._
1 r"i 0
GLASS
F SH SH
SECTION 1 -1
L.
<e— —
0 GLASS
....,
J
ELEVATION SECTION 19428
(F—FIXED GLAZING)
(SH —SIDE HUNG SHUTTER) SECTION 20916
SECTION 20899
SECTION 20916 SECTION 19428
SECTION 20899
SECTION 19428
GLASS GLASS
SECTION 2-2
GLASS
INSIDE SECTION 19428

SECTION 20919
SECTION 6-6 SECTION 7-7 CEMENT
BRICK WALL GLASS
CEMENT PLASTER SECTION 19428 BRICK WALL — .75.=
SECTION 20919 SECTION 20916
SECTION 19428 GLASS — SECTION 3-3
GLASS
MASS
SECTION 19428
SECTION 20916
SECTION 8-8 SECTION 9-9 SECTION 20899

23.00 SECTION 19428
GLASS
O
O O in
0!
I 30.5 f
SECTION 4-4
oi GLASS
SECTION 20899
f 63.00
SECTION. SECTION.
40.60 f j
SECTION.
40.00
SECTION. SECTION 19428

NO.-20916 NO-20919 NO.-20899 NO.-19428
NOTE: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
2. THE SECTION DESIGNATION NOS. PERTAIN TO EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SECTION 20919
SECTIONS OF "JINDAL ALUMINIUM LTD." AND ARE INDICATED FOR
REFERENCE. EQUIVALANT SECTIONS OF OTHER APPROVED CEMENT
MANUFACTURERS CAN ALSO BE USED. BPR
LAICSKTEW
R
3. FOR FINISHING OF ALUMINIUM SECTION (ANODISED/POWDER WALL
COATING REFER BID/TENDER.
5
4
5. HARDWARE AND GLASS SHALL BE AS PER BID/TENDER.
21.03.17
27.03.12
REVISED, ISSUED AS STANDARD
DOe)"'v'
DK
Of
s>
SD
RAJANJI Sk—
arnA
JKB
frlIANDA
D. IIALHOTRA
No. by by
Approved by
Frwmat Nn R-00-00111-F4 RAV Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rnspninr
Page 2536 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ei
ENGINEERS ALUMINIUM SLIDING WINDOW
Ifta 251-eg INDIA LIMITED 7-75-0016 Rev. 1
I .1TeR riecnle Al
i 3q9,i1 (A Govt of India Undestalungf (2 TRACK TYPE)
Page 1 of 1
RCC BEAM/
LINTEL
■ ."
CEMENT
PLASTER
FRAME TOP
SECTION 20681
LOCKING HANDLE
SW SW 1-n SHUTTER TOP
SECTION 20844
4
ELEVATION GLASS
(SW—SLIDING WINDOW)
SHUTTER INTERLOCK
SECTION 20845
SECTION 1 -1
SECTION 4-4
GLASS
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER
FRAME SIDE CEMENT
SECTION 20681 PLASTER
SHUTTER SIDE
SECTION 20846 BRICK WALL
SHUTTER
BOTTOM SECTION
20844
FRAME
BOTTOM SECTION
20619
CEMENT
■
PLASTER
BRICK WALL
— GLASS
SHUTTER S DE
SECTION 20846
SECTION 3-3 SECTION 5-5 SECTION 2-2

NOTE: 1. THE SECTION DESIGNATION NOS. PERTAIN TO EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SECTIONS OF "JINDAL
ALUMINIUM LTD." AND ARE INDICATED FOR REFERENCE. EQUIVALENT SECTIONS OF OTHER
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS CAN ALSO BE USED.
1 19.02.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STATNDARD 4141-5K R.NANDA
0 26.03.13 ISSUED AS STATNDARD DK SD JKB D.MALNOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn R-Ml-On01-F4 RPV Convrinht Fit - All rinhts rpsprverl
Page 2537 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ei r ENGINEERS ALUMINIUM SLIDING WINDOW
Igarttitg INDIA LIMITED 7-75-0017 Rev. 1
(tT ,A
A eiecnte 0513g0•1) Govt of IndiaUndertaking) (3 TRACK TYPE)
Page 1 of 1
RCC BEAM/ •
LINTEL
16
%tr.: •
CEMENT •
■
-
■
\ zz/ PLASTER
FRAME TOP
--<5k .— SECTION 20621
SW SW LOCKING HANDLE
SHUTTER TOP
\ % SECTION 20844
\ /
1)
ELEVAT ON
(SW—SLIDING WINDOW)
SHUTTER INTERLOCK GLASS

SECTION 20845
SECTION 1 - 1
SECTION 4-4
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER GLASS
FRAME SIDE
SECTION 20621
SHUTTER SIDE
SECTION 20846 CEMENT
GLASS PLASTER
BRICK WALL
SHUTTER
BOTTOM SECTION
20844
FRAME
m
BOTTOM SECTION
20620
CEMENT
T
PLASTER
BRICK WALL
GLASS
SHUTTER SIDE
SECTION 20846
SECTION 3-3 SECTION 5-5 SECTION 2-2

NOTE: 1. THE SECTION DESIGNATION NOS. PERTAIN TO EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SECTIONS OF "JINDAL
ALUMINIUM LTD." AND ARE INDICATED FOR REFERENCE. EQUIVALENT SECTIONS OF OTHER
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS CAN ALSO BE USED.
1 19.02.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STATNDARD CrIK SD RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R.NANDA
0 26.03.13 ISSUED AS STATNDARD DK SD JKB D.MALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Frrmat Nn R-On-n0111-F4 RPv Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhtg rAservpri
Page 2538 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS STEEL WINDOWS/VENTILATOR
1f4a 014— l e
l•fnent efronventawrail
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undetlatong) (WITH LOUVERS) 7-75-0031 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
R.C.C. LINTEL/
R.C.C. BEAM
CEMENT
PLASTER
••
WINDOW/VENTILATOR
FRAME F7D
18 GAUGE MS
SHEET LOUVERS
SASH BAR T2
WINDOW/VENTILATOR
FRAME F7D
CEMENT II GLASS AS
PLASTER SPECIFIED
BRICK WALL
VERTICAL SECTION VERTICAL SECTION

LOUVERED WINDOW/VENTILATOR LOUVERED & GLAZED
WINDOW/VENTILATOR
NOTE : ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
fat-
5 12.09.16 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD Dweie JS/JK RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA
4 12.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED OK so JKO D. MALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No A-on-norm -F4 Ray (I Convrinht Ell - All rinhts ragarvar
Page 2539 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS STEEL WINDOWS
ligarfarkg INDIA LIMITED 7-75-0032 Rev. 5
wren 4513UMR IA Govt. of India Undertaking) FITTINGS AND FIXTURES
Page 1 of 1
STEEL FRAME
T
3 THICK MS FLAT
CUT/BENT TO SHAPE
NYLON WASHER 0
8 DIA MS BOLT 3 THICK BRASS—T

STRIKNGPLAE
—N—
DETAIL OF MS HINGE DETAIL AT A-A
3 THICK 10 PROJECTED STEEL FRAME

BRASS STRIKING PLATE
RIVETED TO WINDOW 4 DIA PIN
FRAME TO HOLD THE
HANDLE IN POSITION
10 DIA MS FIXING SCREW
3 THICK BRASS 3 THICK MS
STRIKING PLATE FABRICATED HANDLE
11 ROUND OR PVC WASHER

SQUARE HOLE
DETAIL OF HANDLE
73 ; so TO WE
30
2 THICK MS
4) rp- -+- Ri
FABRICATED STAY 8 DIA PIN
1 B
75
I 65
300
65 75
DETAIL OF PEG STAY

2. FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS REFERENCE SHALL BE MADE TO IS:1038.
/ 14)1
5 12.09.16 REAFFIRMED k ISSUED AS STANDARD ,„ette, ism RAJAIMI SRIVASTAVA R. HAMM
4 23.04.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD DR SD JKt D. MALHOTRA

Date Purpose by by Convenor Chairman
No.
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 RAN/ 0 Convrinht Fll - All rinhts MISR rVI:Ki
Page 2540 of 3884

STANDARD No
® ENGINEERS PIPE HANDRAIL
J
EllAtg INDIA LIMITED
IN
(A GOA am
oo undenkongi WITH SQUARE UP RIGHT TYPE
7-75-0036 Rev 6
Page 1 of 1
40x5 MS FLAT NOSING
TREAD FINISH
25x6, 250 LONG MS LUG WELDED

TO NOSING FLAT 0 MIN. 500 &
EMBEDDED IN RCC STEP
—CEMENT MORTAR
32 0 N.B. (MEDIUM)
MS PIPE WELDED TO —12 THICK CEMENT PLASTER
BALUSTERS
25x25 MS SQUARE BAR

BALUSTERS OVER EACH STEP
SECTION A-A
(FOR CAST IN—SITU CONCRETE TREAD)
NOSING
CEMENT MORTAR
— KOTA/GRANITE/MARBLE STONE
FINISH
65
TREAD FINISH
CEMENT MORTAR 1,5
50x50x100 POCKET FOR RCC

FIXING MS FLAT SHOE • 10
FILLED WITH CEMENT „ o • MINIMUM '
CONCRETE (1:3:6)
40x40x6 THK. MS FLAT

SHOE WELDED AT BOTTOM
OF BALUSTER & INSERTED 50
IN RCC STEP
SECTION A --A
12 THICK CEMENT PLASTER (FOR STONE FINISHED TREAD)
DETAIL OF HANDRAIL

2. RISER, TREAD AND SKIRTING SHALL BE OF SAME FIN H
4s A\t.
).MtAj t
S OL01.19 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD SO R. IC
5 07.03.14 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD 7S SD JKS S. OWN%
Rev Date Purpose Prepared Checked Skis Committee Stds Bureau

No by by Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Fnrrnat Nn R-00-00111-F4 Rev 0 Drinvrinht FII - All nnhtc resented
Page 2541 of 3884
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS FALSE CEILING DETAIL
IA Govt of India Undertaking) WITH ALUMINIUM GRID
Page 1 of 1
RCC SLAB
25x25x3 THICK
MS ANGLE FIXED
TO ROOF WITH
ANCHOR FASTENERS
@ 1200 C/C MAX.
6 DIA M S HANGER CEMENT

@1200 C/C BOTHWAYS PLASTER
BRICK WALL
10 110
LEVELING NUT
3 THICK MS
FLAT CLAMP
MS NUT WITH RETURN AIR GRILL

MMI 25 LONG BOLT
/ 11111111 10111
ALUMINIUM MAIN TEE
25 x 35 x 2.5 THICK
ALUMINIUM ANGLES
CEILING TILES
AS SPECIFIED
SECTION AT 1-1
Epp MAIN TEE ® 600 C/C

CROSS TEE @ 600 C/C
CEILING TILE
AS SPECIFIED
!PA
AI A V /
ALUMINIUM CROSS
RETURN AIR SLIT TEE 25x25
COVERED WITH
GRILL AS/SECTION 1-1
PLAN (PART) SECTION AT 2-2

(ELECTRICAL, A/C FIXTURE LOCATIONS SHALL BE AS PER DETAIL DRAWING)
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.
I.
Is 1.4 - OLD
5 02.03.16 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD K ifilk/J B RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA S. CH NDA
4 31.08.10 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SANDHYA GB/JS JKB N. DUARI

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn a_nn_onni-Ftt RPV n norwrinht Fll - All rinhts raaarvari
Page 2542 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS ALUMINIUM PANEL FALSE
IA Govt. of India Undertaking) CEILING (84C SYSTEM)
Page 1 of 1
GALVANISED STEEL
MAIN RUNNER OF
WIRE HANGER WITH HEIGHT
ALUMINIUM ALLOY SHEET
ADJUSTMENT CLIP OF SPRING
(U SHAPED)
STEEL AT 1200-1300 C/C
(TO BE FIXED TO ROOF
BY J HOOK & RAWL PLUG) CEMENT
PLASTER
SUSPENSION CLIP RETURN

AT 1200-1300 C/C AIR GRILL
ALUMINIUM ANGLE
CLEAT SCREWED TO
MAIN RUNNER —ALUMINIUM ANGLES
SECTION 1-1 28-32
I, 15 23-28
PERFORATED/NON
PERFORATED ALUMINIUM ALLOY
CEILING PANEL (ELETROSTATICALLY
POWDER OATED/STOVE OMs
ENAMELLED)
84
SECTION SECTION
(MAIN RUNNER) (PANEL)
MAIN RUNNER
CEILING PANEL
116
84 T
DETAIL AT '0'
ISOMETRIC VEIW
WALL
RETURN AIR SLIT

COVERED WITH
GRILL AS/SECTION 1-1
MAIN RUNNER
CEILING PANEL
1200-1300 I 1200-1300
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN (PART)

5 02.03.16 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SD/J RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA S. ANDA


No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn Ft-nn-nnni-F4 RPV n nonvrinht Fll - All rinhte mqprvpri
Page 2543 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS ALUMINIUM PANEL FALSE
$1ftl 0141 eg
Rivnefromen513,10511) IA Govt. of India Undertakindt , CEILING (TRAY TYPE)
Page 1 of 2
26 SWG GI
MAIN RUNNER ROOF SLAB
44
G I CEILING
,
HANGER (SLOTTED) FIXED TO
CEILING I WALL r /
A
H
CEMENT
) PLASTER / /
t
GI SUSPENSION
ANGLE
R ETURN / /
AIR GRILL
/ /
if SI
ALUMINIUM ALLOY
ALUMINIUM
CEILING PANEL ANGLES
ALUMINIUM
SECTION 1-1 HOLD ON HANGER
(HANGING/SUSPENSION ARRANGEMENT CAN VARY FROM VENDOR TO VENDOR)
ALUMINIUM ALLOY
CEILING PANEL
MAIN RUNNER
SIZE : 254/305x1264
OR AS/DRAWING
LIGHTING FIXTURE/DIFFUSER RETURN —

AIR SLIT COVERED
WITH GRILL AS PER
SECTION 1-1

(LINEAR PANEL)
5 02.03.16 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD "'SD/J RAJANJI AVA S. CHANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No R-00-0001-F4 RPV 0 Convrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvpri
Page 2544 of 3884

STANDARD No.
((ro) ENGINEERS ALUMINIUM PANEL FALSE
Ifear Elf5teg
(rte c'- ,e ebl3TIV41)
INDIA LIMITED
,,Go■ft. of lodilJnertakiN),, CEILING (TRAY TYPE)
7-75-0043 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 2
RAWL PLUG
'J' HOOK
GI ROD HANGER
AT 1200 C/C
HOLD ON CLAMP WITH WALL

CLIP AT 1200 C/C
CEMENT
PLASTER
RETURN
—CLIP IN PROFILE AIR GRILL
AT 600mm C/C
I'll
ALUMINIUM ALLOY ALUMINIUM ANGLES
CEILING PANEL
SECTION 1-1
(HANGING/SUSPENSION ARRANGEMENT CAN VARY FROM VENDOR TO VENDOR)
— MAIN RUNNER
ALUMINIUM ALLOY RETURN AIR SLIT
CEILING PANEL 600 COVERED WITH
f 17C • LfMLnn
JILL
• (TTY.) (KILL AS/StC. I ,
1 ii II 11 1
1 - II 11 ii 1
1 11 ii ii 1
1 II II II 1
0
.., iii I -ti I
II II
,.. N/11
1 i/.1 II 0 1
II 1 II 1, 1, II
ii ii 11 11
11 1 ii ii ii II
II II iiII II ,,\ 1, 11 II II II
II II II II II I I, I, II II II 1
,
LIGHTING FIXTURE/DIFFUSER

(600mm X 600mm PANELS)
41_
5 02.03.16 REVISED Et ISSUED AS STANDARD 4/4-CK )(CfSD/JK8 RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA S. CHANDA
4 31.08.10 REVISED 11 ISSUED AS STANDARD SANDHYA GB/JS JKB N. DUARI

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn s_nn_nnni-F4 RPV Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhfc rpeprvprl
Page 2545 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FALSE FLOORING 7-75-0049 Rev. 1
11.7 F17.Te .1 ,3,-E,F) ) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 3
MIN. 1mm THK. CRCA STEEL PVC GASKET FOR AIR

SHEET EPDXY PAINTED) PVC CONDUCTIVE LEAKAGE PREVENTION
FINISH D ON TOP AS PER EDGE TRIM FOR EDGE
PVC CONDUCTIVE TENDER ITEM/ SPECIFICATIONS PROTECTION MIN. 1mm THK. CRCA STEEL
EDGE TRIM FOR EDGE SHEET (EPDXY PAINTED)
PROTECTION FINISHED ON TOP AS PER
MIN. 20x32x1.20mm TENDER ITEM/ SPECIFICATIONS
THK., G.I. STRINGER
•
PVC GASKET FOR Al

LEAKAGE PREVENTION
MIN. 35mm THK. (EXCL.
FINISH) CRCA POWDER
OATED140-60 MICRON
STEEL CEMENTITIOUS
CORE PANEL
45X6(M6) SCREW FOR
16 9/1 ,74/W. • • W
——
e" • WW./..
PVC CAP FOR STRINGER

LOCKING STRINGER Et PANEL LOCATION
45X6(M6) SCREW FOR ON PEDESTAL HEAD
LOCKING STRINGER MIN. 20x32x1.20mm THK., 90X90X4mm THK. CRCA
ON PEDESTAL HEAD G.I. STRINGER, HOT DIP PEDESTAL HEAD (ZINC ELECTRO
GALVANIZED (60-80 MICRON) PLATED) MECHANICALLY
RIVETED TO STUD
PVC CAP FOR STRINGE ZINC ELECTRO PLATED FORGED
Et PANEL LOCATION NUTS FOR LEVELING AND LOCKING 19mm. DIA., 90mm
OVER PEDESTAL HEAD LONG THREADED CD
BRIGHT M.S. ROD CD
STUD CD
90X90X4mm THK. CRCA
PEDESTAL HEAD (ZINC ELECTRO a
PLATED) MECHANICALLY 32mm. DIA., 2mm. THK. CRCA CD
RIVETED TO STUD PEDESTAL (ELECTRICAL RESISTANT 0
WELDED) MECHANICALLY REDUCED TO
19mm. DIA., 90mm LONG FOUR RIBS AT TOP FOR STRENGTHENING
THREADED BRIGHT M.S. ROD STUD E TO ACCOMMODATE PEDESTAL 150X150X4mm THK.
HEAD ASSEMBLY M.S. BASE PLATE,
HOT DIP GALVANIZED
ZINC ELECTRO PLATED FORGED ANCHOR FASTENERS FOR (60-80 MICRON)
NUTS FOR LEVELING AND LOCKING FIXING OF BASE PLATE IN
FLOOR SLAB
■
32mm. DIA., 2mm. THK. CRCA FINISHED FLOOR
PEDESTAL (ELECTRICAL RESISTANT :z.4 SENIP
AA am I.
WELDED) MECHANICALLY REDUCED TO EARTHING CONNECTION •
FOUR RIBS AT TOP FOR STRENGTHENING FOR EVERY 300 SQ.M. a A • • • •
Et TO ACCOMMODATE PEDESTAL 4 • a • A
HEAD ASSEMBLY 150X150X4mm THK.
M.S. BASE PLATE, TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH
HOT DIP GALVANIZED
(60-80 MICRON) PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY
ANCHOR
FASTENERS
FOR FIXING OF
BASE PLATE IN
FLOOR SLAB
• 19 • 44-
SECTION A-A
95 (MIN.)
ISOMETRIC VIEW OF
PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY
600 600 PVC CAP OVER
PEDESTAL HEAD
LOCATION OF
GI STRINGER
BASE PLATE
PEDESTAL
TOP VIEW OF CAP FOR PEDESTAL HEAD

NOTE:-
1. VARIOUS COMPONENTS' DIMENSIONS, SHAPES ETC. MAY VARY SLIGHTLY
FROM VENDOR TO VENDOR. HOWEVER THE SYSTEM SHALL HAVE THE
AO-
LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY AS PER ITEM DESCRIPTION a SPECIFICATIONS.
2. THE BASE FLOOR AND WALL PORTION UNDERNEATH THE FALSE FLOOR
PART GRID PLAN (PEDESTALS) SHALL BE PROVIDED ONE COMPONENT POLYURETHANE COATING.
1 26.05.16 REVISED Et ISSUED AS STANDARD RAJANJ, SRIVASTAVA NANDA
0 08.04.11 ISSUED AS STANDARD GEETA JS/SD JKB D. MALHOTRA

No. by by
A. 'roved b
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 RPV Cnnvrioht Fll - All rinhts rosorvod
Page 2546 of 3884
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
f=4-af faWeg INDIA LIMITED FALSE FLOORING 7-75-0049 Rev. 1
(1,1 , ;gal 7-1 ) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 3
CONSOLE/ RACK
FALSE FLOOR PANEL FALSE FLOOR PANEL
CONSOLE/ CK BASE
EVI1IIrA11111reAKNI∎ M.S. CH N EL FRAME
moolcdbminalIiiilrAr!FA ■119A■NVIIIIrm
•
OX SECTION MADE
FROM 2 NOS. M.S.
ANGLES 75X75X6 THK.
OR EQUIVALENT
HOLLOW SECTION
MC 100 COLUMN PEDESTAL

STUD
FINISHED
FLOORING
AS/ SIZE OF CONSOLE/ RACK

SECTION B-B •
• AS/ SIZE OF CONSOLE/RACK MC-100 COLUMN STUD

• @ SPACING OF
2000 (MAXIMUM)
— 1--BOX SECTION MADE

FROM 2 NOS. M.S.
ANGLES 75X75X6 THK. PERIMETER P DESTAL STUDS
OR EQUIVALENT
HOLLOW SECTION
O
O
O
MASONRY
CD WALL
.0
PEDESTAL
CEMENT
PLASTER
-• •
-- f 150
600 600 600 600 1254 100 12 51

NOS. 12 DIA.
ANCHOR FASTENERS
PART PLAN OF FALSE FLOORING MC-100

COLUMN STUD
4E1) 4ED 150X150X6 THK.

M.S. BASE PLATE
+ 50 + 150+
DETAIL
kr---;_-
1 26.05.16 REVISED a ISSUED AS STANDARD DK JS/JKB RAJANJ, IVASIAVA R. NANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn s-on-0001-F4 Rev (-) Cnnvrinht Eli - All rinhts rPsPrvPel
Page 2547 of 3884
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
fgarfdlifl
°1 eg INDIA LIMITED FALSE FLOORING 7-75-0049 Rev. 1
411e- eirkIrle 0513,11,1) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 3
ri
094
SECTION D-D
85-90 12mm THICK PLASTER
MASONRY WALL
STRINGER
MINIMUM 35mm THICK

(EXCL. FINISHING MATERIAL)
STEEL CEMENTITIOUS CORE PANEL
Ln
PEDESTAL PERIMETER
STUD PEDESTAL STUD
• WITH PERIMETER
CAP
PERIMETER PVC CAP
TOP VIEW OF PERIMETER PVC CAP DETAIL OF JUNCTION WITH WALL
FINISH AS/
MIN. 35mm THK. (EXCL. FINISH) TENDER ITEM/
STEEL CEMENTITIOUS CORE PANEL 600 SPECICATIONS
t
41I ■ 111 ■Ai 4111 ■4111■Alicia
SECTION C-C LIGHT WEIGHT REVERSE
—CEMENTITIOUS CONES
INFILL
600
PVC CONDUCTIVE EDGE TRIM FOR

EDGE PROTECTION OF PANEL
10mm DIA MUMMITATink FINISH AS/
LIGHT WEIGHT
CEMENTITIOUS
HOLES
TENDER ITEM/ INFILL
CONES 4) 0 4) 0 41 <I :;O SPECIFICATIONS
MIN. 35mm THK. (EXCL.

4) 4) 0 0 0 0 0 FINISH) CRCA POWDER
COATED (40-60 MICRON)
O 0 4) 4) 4) 0 4) 0 e O
O
STEEL CEMENTITIOUS
CORE PANEL FINISHED
ON TOP AS PER TENDER
ITEM/ SPECICATIONS
4) 4D 0 0 0 0 MIN. 1mm THK. CRCA STEEL
SHEET (EPDXY PAINTED)
REVERSE 40 0 40 4) 0 0 DETAIL YO
CONES
II\ A\ Ink
leCOMMEE,
PLAN OF FALSE FLOOR PANEL

( UPSIDE DOWN )
,k
1 26.05.16 REVISED Et ISSUED AS STANDARD JS/J RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrrnat Nn 8-00-0001-F4 RPV 0 Cnnvrinht Fil - All rinhts cpsprvpri
Page 2548 of 3884
STANDARD No.
STEEL GATE 7-75-0054 Rev. 5
datirge WitS
MTED e (FOR ENTRANCES UPTO 6.0M WIDTH)
Sheet 1 of 2
SPACE 40x80x3.2MM MS 32x32x2.6MM MS 80x40x3.2MM MS RECTANGULAR

FOR LOGO RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SQUARE HOLLOW HOLLOW SECTION MEMBERS
SECTION (OUTER FRAME) SECTION MEMBERS
ELEVATION SECTION '1-1'
\ /
40x80x3.2MM
/ MS RECTANGULAR
75x10MM THICK MS FLAT —I-
\ / STOPPER EMBEDED IN HOLLOW SECTION
\ / CEMENT CONCRETE (1:2:4) (OUTER FRAME)
32x32x2.6MM MS
—80x40x3.2MM MS 40x80x3.2MM MS SQUARE HOLLOW
RECTANGULAR HOLLOW RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTION MEMBERS
SECTION MEMBERS SECTION (OUTER FRAME) 40x80x3.2MM
EQ EQ MS RECTANGULAR
11=1=11=11-
AI
I • • =
HOLLOW SECTION
DETAIL '2'
RCC COLUMN
PLAN AT 'A'
OUTER FRAME
100
R.C.C. COLUMN \\\\\\\
,.
OUTER FRAME
\\ ' \\\
-\ 80x40x3.2MM
\\. \
2 NOS. 6 THK. M.S.FLATS \\ MS RECTANGULAR
WELDED TO INSERT PLATE FABRICATED HOLLOW SECTION
FABRICATED HOLLOW MS HINGE ASSEMBLY MEMBERS
CYLINDER MADE OF
5MM THK. M.S PLATE WITH 75MM WIDE, 6MM
20MM INTERNAL DIA. FIXED THK. MS FLAT CLAMP
2 NOS. 6MM THK.
TO SHUTTER M.S.FLATS WELDEE ° 75MM DIA. 25MM
M.S HOLD FAST, TO FRAME THK. M.S. WHEEL
25x6x200MM LONG
DETAIL '3'
75x50MM, 8 THK
M.S INSERT PLATE
NOTE:
ALL STEEL MEMBERS SHALL CONFORM TO
RELEVANT B.I.S. CODES AS APPLICABLE.
DETAIL AT '4'
5 20.02.17 UPDATED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
i-7i,"
DK
49)--
JS/JKB RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA
4 20.03.12 REVISED, ISSUED AS STANDARD SUMEDHA SM JKB D. MALHOTRA
No. by by
Approved by
Page 2549 of 3884

STANDARD No.
STEEL GATE
argeMINIED 7-75-0054 Rev. 5
(FOR ENTRANCES UPTO 6.0M WIDTH)
Sheet 2 of 2
32x32x2.6MM MS SQUARE 40x80x3.2MM MS RECTANGULAR

HOLLOW SECTION MEMBERS HOLLOW SECTION (OUTER FRAME)
350 375
Wial ■Ird
•••. \ .\\
\ 2\
\ z // / /. / ,/ //
.11
/ A / ../A / // //A •:.••
/ .///// . / //////// / / / '//. . /
.0 / / 4
r',/
./ / /1
// //' A \ \.,, ,
/ ,/
//
e/, /,' /".
/ /,
• / /iii/// // //A \ iii„„,.
v
//
/1
,/ /,,,
7 ,/ ,/ A': /ii / //// // '
/1
el.
)/ / '///// ///// // ///// , \7 /////// /// /iii k ' 112
\ ■ "4
1.
O .1 / /
/
// .2://// .. 22 // A/ //A2 ■
/• •:, , , ;/../.22.,;:. .
1\,
,,-/
P•40, ' / //'
, 17;,N,/
/:/1 /1 1.4 1 4 in p Ii, ,,,,.... 7 :.
/
/ ' el
V
..: //, // // // // .// /// // // /
1 /
/
1t l 111
. :1•• / / A /iii ll
V, '1'
/1 r• .1 0111 112, 0 ,,,,,,,y
// • // ..........
..,
,1,..
/ /I //
// % //'
/,
ilk, 4 \,/,, • //
// / 1 $1 ill L.„ ,. ia„,
0 , '/.' . 1 • 4, x0 , . ,.. ''‘ \ ■\ &''''
1900 1000
6 100 40 (TYP.) 7
spacing 80x40x3.2MM MS RECTANGULAR 40x80x3.2MM MS RECTANGULAR
DETAIL AT '5' HOLLOW SECTION MEMBERS HOLLOW SECTION (OUTER FRAME)
RCC COLUMN
0x80x3.2MM MS
40x80x3.2MM MS RECTANGULAR RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION (OUTER FRAME) HOLLOW SECTION
(OUTER FRAME)
80x40x3.2MM MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION MEMBERS
32x32x2.6MM MS SQUARE
HOLLOW SECTION MEMBERS
WELDED TO FRAME & MS SQ. BAR
5MM WIDE 6MM THICK
MS CLAMP
25X25MM MS SQ. BAR WELDED 75MM DIA 25MM THICK MS
TO FRAME & 20 DIA ROUND BAR WHEEL WITH BALL BEARING
AT BOTTOM 20 DIA MS BOLT
50x50x5OMM MS SECTION 50x50x6MM MS TEE BENT
WITH 22 DIA X 20 DEEP TO SHAPE
SLOT FOR MOVING PIVOT
DETAIL AT '6' DETAIL AT '7'
40x40x6MM MS
ANGLE FOR
LOCKING
ARRANGEMENT
12 DIA HOLE
FOR LOCK
NOTE:
ALL STEEL MEMBERS SHALL CONFORM TO
RELEVANT B.I.S. CODES AS APPLICABLE.
DETAIL AT '8'
5 20.02.17 UPDATED & ISSUED AS STANDARD Dk JS/JKB RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA

4 20.03.1 2 REVISED, ISSUED AS STANDARD SUMEDHA SM JKB D. MALHOTRA
No. by by
Approved by
Page 2550 of 3884

STANDARD No.
0`11Relei ENGINEERS ORISSA PAN W.C.
Ogar faOleg ;fru INDIA LIMITED
MUT eirane• E1573,10.1)
)
(A Govt of India Undertaking) (FIXING DETAIL)

7-75-0060 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 2
/1,
DADO
DOOR CISTERN
BRACKET
(AS/ITEM DESCRIPTION)
BIB COCK
O FLUSH PIPE
O
FINISHED FLOOR
FLOOR FINISH ORISSA PAN WC LEVEL
SUNK BY
MINIMUM 10MM
FILLED UP MATERIAL
AS/ITEM DESCRIPTION
SLOPE TO MAIN HOLE
. • ' • . • . •
. v
„ •.
—.a a ' • ,* • .
CUT OUT IN WALL
SECTION A—A (FOR GROUND FLOOR)

(REFER SHEET 2 OF 2 FOR SECTION A—A APPLICABLE TO UPPER FLOORS WITH SUNK SLAB)
r BIB COCK
150
4%
6' 0
C====
S 0
O
10fr ORISSA PAN W
O
10MM DROP CISTERN

IN FLOOR
A STOP COCK
1200 MINIMUM
1
PLAN
NOTE: REFER SHEET 2 OF 2.
114
5 07.11.16 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD. Dict"Y‘,°' JI sop RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA
4 09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED OK SD JKB D.MALHOTRA

Convenor Chairman
No. by by
Approved by
Page 2551 of 3884
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS ORISSA PAN W.C.
/Z4Z11 01:11 g INDIA LIMITED 7-75-0060 Rev. 5
Wren efeamennJodsn) IA Gov) of India Undertaking) (FIXING DETAIL)
Page 2 of 2
BRACKET
BIB COCK
FLUSH PIPE
FINISHED FLOOR
FLOOR FINISH — ORISSA PAN WC LEVEL
SUNK BY
MINIMUM 10MM VERTICAL PIPE
FILLED UP
MATERIAL AS PER
ITEM DESCRIPTION
CUT—OUT IN RCC
BEAM FOR PIPE
PENETRATION
SECTION A-A
(FOR UPPER FLOOR WITH SUNK SLAB)
(REFER SHEET 1 OF 2 FOR SECTION A—A APPUCABLE TO GROUND FLOOR)
NOTES:
2. ALL FLOOR FINISH LEVEL INSIDE THE W.C. CUBICLE SHALL
BE 10 TO 15MM LOWER THAN OUTSIDE.
3. PROVISION FOR NECCESSARY CUT—OUT IN THE R.C.C. STRUCTURAL
BEAM SHALL BE KEPT (FOR DISPOSAL PIPE PENETRATION). THE LOCATION
ANGLE, GRADIENT ETC. OF THE CUT—OUT SHALL BE AS PER SITE REQUIREMENTS.
4. REFER RELEVANT ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ACTUAL SIZE OF THE CUBICLE.
5 07.11.16 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD /JO RAJANJI ASTAVA R. NANDA
4 09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKB D.NIALHOTRA

Convenor Chairman
No. by by
Approved by
Page 2552 of 3884
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
feDI EUROPEAN TYPE WC
7-75-0062 Rev. 5
$iitaf 201-eg INDIA LIMITED (FIXING DETAIL)
laireK efeavIvrdnagasain (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 2
DADO
TOILET PAPER
HOLDER
CISTERN
EUROPEAN
TYPE WC
DOOR BIB COCK BRACKET

0 FLUSH PIPE WITH

0
BEND COMPLETE
FLOOR FINISH
SUNK BY S OR P TRAP
MINIMUM 10MM.
FLOOR TRAP SLOPE TO MAIN HOLE

COVERED WITH
GRATING
BRICK WALL
FILLED UP MATERIAL AS PER ITEM DESCRIPTION — CUT OUT IN WALL
SECTION A—A (FOR GROUND FLOOR

(REFER SHEET 2 OF 2 FOR SECTION A—A APPLICABLE TO UPPER FLOORS ITH SUNK SLAB)
FLOOR TRAP COVERED
WITH GRATING
SLOPE
BIB COCK
V0
4 0
e 200
(AS/ARCH. 'DRAWINGS)
10MM DROP
IN FLOOR EUROPEAN In
TYPE WC
CISTERN
STOP COCK
1300 MINIMUM
PLAN
NOTE: REFER SHEET 2 OF 2.
5 07.11.16 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD JS/JKB AVA R. NANDA
4 09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKB D.MAL/101RA

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat No A-00-0001-F4 RIAV Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rPS440/Pri
Page 2553 of 3884

STANDARD No.
n~ie ENGINEERS EUROPEAN TYPE WC
7-75-0062 Rev. 5
lzgar Rift INDIA LIMITED
eiravran3denan IA Govt of India Undertaking)
(FIXING DETAIL)
Page 2 of 2
TOILET PAPER
HOLDER
CISTERN
I I VERTICAL PIPE
EUROPEAN I I
I I
TYPE WC I
DOOR I I
I I
BIB COCK BRACKET

FLUSH PIPE WITH

BEND COMPLETE
FLOOR FINISH
SUNK BY S OR P TRAP
MINIMUM 10MM.
FLOOR TRAP
COVERED WITH
GRATING CUT OUT IN RCC
BEAM FOR PIPE
RCC BEAM PENETRATION
N
FILLED UP MATERIAL AS PER ITEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION A-A
(FOR UPPER FLOOR WITH SUNK SLAB)
(REFER SHEET 1 OF 2 FOR SECTION A—A APPLICABLE TO GROUND FLOOR)
NOTES:
2. ALL FLOOR FINISH LEVEL INSIDE THE W.C. CUBICLE SHALL
BE 10 TO 15MM LOWER THAN OUTSIDE.
3. PROVISION FOR NECCESSARY CUT—OUT IN THE R.C.C. STRUCTURAL
BEAM SHALL BE KEPT (FOR DISPOSAL PIPE PENETRATION). THE LOCATION
ANGLE, GRADIENT ETC. OF THE CUT—OUT SHALL BE AS PER SITE REQUIREMENTS.
4. REFER RELEVANT ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ACTUAL SIZE OF THE CUBICLE.
5 07.11.16 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD DoO"'" JS/J RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. MAMBA
4 09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKB D.11AUCTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No A-00-0001-F4 RAV 0 Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpaprvarl
Page 2554 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ei ENGINEERS 7-75-0063 Rev. 5
5fgar fa5teg INDIA LIMITED URINALS FIXING DETAIL
=awn-
i➢eR rrecme 4U (A Goof of India Undertaking(
Page 1 of 1
CISTERN CISTERN (MOUNTED ON

WALL OR CONCEALED
TYPE)
FLUSH PIPE
CONCEALED TYPE
(CONNECTED TO
CISTERN OR O.H.
TANK)
TILES/WALL
FNISH
SENSOR
(APPLICABLE IF
SPECIFIED IN
TENDER ITEM)
URINAL PARTITION
(ALL EDGES
ROUNDED OFF)
SPREADER
LAT BACK
RINAL
i
9 LIIM OTTLE
RAP 1144
ij BOTTLE
TRAP
ro
OP OF
LATFORM
GRATING
L=
LOOR LEVEL URINAL
CI CX/ A TInkl
II TRAP
SIDE ELEVA ION

4
URINAL PARTITION (ALL EDGES ROUNDED OFF)
WASTE PIPE
9
0. 0,
11
0
0
co
EQ. EQ.
600 URINAL
(MINIMUM)
100 RAISED
PLATFORM
PLAN URINAL TRAP
NOTES:
2. THIS STANDARD IS INDICATIVE. TYPE AND NO. OF URINAL FIXTURES, FLUSHING ARRANGENT ETC.
SHALL BE AS PER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS & TENDER ITEM.
3. SENSORS SHOWN SHALL BE PROVIDED ONLY IN CASE THE SAME E SPECIFIED IN T DER ITEM.
5 01.12.16 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD RAJAHS A—
STAVA R. HANDS
4 09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKI DMALINDIRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2555 of 3884

STANDARD No.
Or-Pei& Erf ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED WASH BASIN FIXING DETAIL
) 7-75-0064 Rev. 5
afge.a EPterg
Wen rirame c151,1,10.9) (A Goo. of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 2
550
M NIMUM
DADO AS PER TENDER
ITEM / ARCH. DRAWINGS
0
MIRROR
0
GLASS SHELF
600MMx120MMx6MM THK
0
In FIXED BY 'D' OR 'F'
BRACKETS
SOAP CONTAINER
TOWEL RAIL
0
0 MANUALLY OPERATED
a)
PILLAR COCK OR
BATTERY OPERATED
FAUCET WITH SENSOR
0
BOTTLE TRAP
co
WASTE PIPE
EMBEDED IN WALL
GRATING
ELEVATION FLOOR TRAP
MS BRACKETS
IT A PA TAM W/
FLOOR TRAP
BELOW
WASH BASIN
TOWEL RAIL
PLAN
(FOR WALL HUNG TYPE WASH BASIN)
NOTES:-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES.
2. THE SIZE OF MIRROR SHOWN IS INDICATIVE. ACTUAL SIZE
SHALL BE AS PER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS/ ITEMS DESCRIPTION.
3. THE ARRANGEMENT AND DETAIL OF WASH BASIN SHOWN (HERE AND IN SHEET-2) IS
TYPICAL. FOR 2 OR MORE WASH BASIN, REFER RELEVANT ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
(FOR LOCATION & CONFIGURATION) WHICH SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH
THIS STANDARD.
4. LOCATION & TOWEL RAIL IS INDICATIVE. REFER RELEVANT ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING OR
EXACT LOCATION.
5 21.11.16 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD MLT JS/JKB RAJAMJI ASTAVA R. NANDA
4 09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JK8 D.MALMOTRA
Rev. Prepared Chedced Stds. Committee Std.. Bureau

Date Purpose Convenor Chalet an
No. bY by Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - AI rights reamed
Page 2556 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS WASH BASIN FIXING DETAIL 7-75-0064 Rev. 5
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeitakingi
Page 2 of 2
1
550 DADO AS PER
TENDER ITEM /
ARCH DRAWINGS
•
0 MIRROR
0
o
co
SOAP CONTAINER
600
POLISHED STONE TO
COUNTER + FACIA
0 •
0 OVER R.C.C. SLAB
O
co
R.C.C. SLAB
0
o
co
BOTTLE TRA
•
MANUALLY OPERATED PILLAR
ELEVATION COCK OR BATTERY OPERATED
FAUCET WITH SENSOR
SECTION
AS PER ARCH. DRAWING
0
Ih
MIRRO
0
0 ROUND TYPE COUNTER TOP
WASH BASIN FITTED NEATLY IN
STONE COUNTER TOP AND RCC
SLAB UNDERNEATH.
(CUT NEATLY FOR EXACT SIZE
AND SHAPE OF WASIN BASIN).
TOWEL RAIL
PLAN
(FOR COUNTER TOP TYPE WASH BASIN)
NOTES:— REFER SHEET-1.
5 21.11.16 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD MLT JS/JKi RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. BANDA
4 09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKB D.IAALHOTRA

No. by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - AN rights reserved
Page 2557 of 3884
STANDARD No.
ENGINEE16 PLINTH PROTECTION
Otar 0151--e-g INDIA LIMITED 7-75-0065 Rev. 5
RireFleleMle ,613,1043) IA Govt of India Undertaking) (WITH BUILDING DRAIN)
Page 1 of 2
ROAD
BUILDING
0
0
0
ce BUILDING DRAIN
(TO BE CONNECTED TO MAIN STORM
WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM AT
SUITABLE LOCATION AS PER STORM
I
WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM DRAWING)
ROAD
1 1 i n
KEY PLAN
C/C OF COLUMNS
BUILDING DRAIN
(SLOPE 1:500)
COVERED WITH M.S.
GRATING
0
0
te) RWP EMBEDDED
IN CONCRETE
STRUCTURAL COLUMN
0 0
0 0
it)
EXTERNAL FACE
OF WALL
—RCC COLUMN RCC COLUMN
DRAIN BUILDING DRAIN

(SLOPE 1:500)
COVERED WITH M.S.
GRATING
45'
0 RWP EMBEDDED
0 IN CONCRETE
rn
RCC COLUMN
EXTERNAL FACE
OF WALL
PLAN (CASE 1, X<600)

NOTE: REFER SHEET 2 OF 2 FOR NOTES & DETAILS
5 09.11.16 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD 6/9IS/JKB RAJANJI SRNASTAVA R.NANDA
4 25.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKB D.MALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No R-nn-nnni-F4 RPV n Convrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsarvAr
Page 2558 of 3884

STANDARD No.
0`10.1t4 ENGINEERS PLINTH PROTECTION
ligar 0151eg INDIA LIMITED 7-75-0065 Rev. 5
(oeff eivonvemanassn (A Goof of India Undertaking) (WITH BUILDING DRAIN)
Page 2 of 2
RCC COLUMN FACE LINE

II RAIN WATER PIPE
II M.S. GRATING COVER
II 15 THICK PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER
WITH NEAT CEMENT FINISH
900 M101111AU
Ir) II P
1 Ox1 0 FINISHED GROUND LEVEL
GROOVE I I
O
O
BRICK WORK
M20 CONC.
RAMMED EARTH
75 230 250 230 7

—RAMMED EARTH
PCC 1:2:4
SECTION A-A
600 MAX. (ONE PIECE)
137 r YiT P !CALL

0)(6 MS FLAT 40x6 MS FLAT
035 C/C
M.S. GRATING DETAIL

15THK CEMENT PLASTER
PCC (1:2:4)
40x6 MS FLAT
40x6 THICK MS
FLAT 0 35 C/C
15THK CEMENT PLASTER

50x50x6 MS ANGLE
PCC POCKET (1:3:6)
BRICK WALL
10 DIA MS BAR LUG
0 500 C/C WELDED
TO ANGLE AND
DETAIL EMBEDDED IN PCC DETAIL 0
(1:3:6)
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
2. WIDTH OF THE PLINTH PROTECTION SHALL BE MINIMUM 900mm AND X+300 MAXIMUM UNLESS OTHERWISE
MENTIONED IN BUILDING DRAWING.
3. PLINTH PROTECTION ALONG ANY PARTICULAR SIDE OF THE BUILDING SHALL BE OF CONSTANT WIDTH FOLLOWING
THE EXTERNAL WALL AUGNEMENT IF NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED/INDICATED IN BUILDING DRAWING.
4. M.S. DRAIN COVER GRATING SHALL BE PROVIDED OVER BUILDING DRAIN AT ALL APPROACHES UNLESS OTHERWISE
MENTIONED/INDICATED IN BUILDING DRAWING.
AL
5 09.11.16 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD AIS/JKI\15P-'" RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA LNANDA
4 25.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKO DJAALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 - 00 -0001 - F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2559 of 3884

STANDARD No.
101 e..1ENGINEERS WOODEN PANEL DOOR
Oge.ji EVleg INDIA LIMITED 7-75-0066 Rev. 5
1.14WR eleMIt' ,151,1,1(7.4) (A Goo of India Undedaking) (TOILET DOOR)
Page 1 of 1
RCC LINTEL
CEMENT PLASTER 10
A
L 750 TO 1000
f C
C
A
L
B
0
lN
— F0
P8
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
M
(gt
H
A
BRICK WORK
SECTIONAL PLAN 1 —1 CEMENT
LEGEND:
A: WOODEN FRAME OUT OF 125x65 H: TOILET DOOR LATCH
B: TEAK WOOD STYLE 100x35 J: TOWER BOLT
C: TEAK WOOD TOP RAIL 100x35 K: DOOR HANDLE
D: TEAK WOOD BOTTOM RAIL 200x35 L: COAT AND HAT HOOK
E: 12 THK. PARTICLE BOARD/MARINE PLY (INTERNAL SIDE OF THE DOOR)
INFILL PANEL WITH SPECIFIED FACING. M: ACRYLIC KICK PLATE 200X3 THICK.
F: 150 LONG BUTT HINGES N: TEAK WOOD LOCK RAIL 150x35
0 MAX. 600 C/C. P: TEAK WOOD BEADING
G: MS HOLD FAST
EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
BLOCK 350x100x100
al
5 21.11.16 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD iFspme RAJAN.II SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA
4 09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED DK SO JKU DAIALNOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No Ft - no - nom - Fa RAV n Convrinht Fit - All rinhts nAsAn/AvI
Page 2560 of 3884
STANDARD No.
Offaae? ENGINEERS ROOF DRAINAGE
gat Oft INDIA LIMITED IA Govt of India Undertaking)
AND WATERPROOFING
7-75-0068 REV. 5
Page 1 of 3
RCC GUTTER
WATER PROOFING TREATMENT AS
PER SPECIFICATION
RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB
—RCC/BRICK PARAPET WALL 2
SLOPE SLOPE
••■
115 THK BRICK

FILLER WALL
RAIN WATER PIPE
EXTERNAL BRICK WALL
Av
SECTION
RCC FACIA
RCC GUTTER
RCC/BRICK PARAPET WALL
w
0_
0
tri
RAIN WATER PIPE

EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
ti (LOCATIONS AS PER RIDGE LINE
ARCHITECTURAL BUILDING
DRAWINGS)
SLOPE
(1:80 TO 100)
w w
0-
0
SLOPE O
PART TERRACE PLAN

NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
2. SECTION A-A INDICATES RCC BEAM INSIDE ON ONE SIDE AND FLUSH OUTSIDE ON OTHER SIDE. THE LOCATION OF BEAM SHALL BE AS PER
ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS.
11;
5 07.05.17 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD VK/DK JK . RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA
4 20.02.12 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKB D. MALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2561 of 3884

STANDARD No.
laaziek ENGINEERS ROOF DRAINAGE
Ifgat faffieg
1e1fmtmemietski40+41
d INDIA LIMITED
AND WATERPROOFING
7-75-0068 REV. 5
Page 2 of 3
CINDER CONCRETE LAID TO

SLOPE AND TOPPED WITH WATER
PROOFING TREATMENT AND
PROTECTIVE LAYER AS PER ITEM
DESCRIPTION/SPECIFICATIONS
RCC/BRICK PARAPET WALL
RCC COLUMN
PROTECTIVE LAYER OF
CEMENT CONCRETE WITH CEMENT PLASTER
- .— CEMENT PLASTER CHICKEN MESH OR TILES
AS/SPECIFICATION 0
PARAPET H EIGH T
WATER PROOFING 10X20 GROOVE FILLED

— 10X20 GROOVE FILLED <>- TREATMENT AS PER WITH PU SEALANT
WITH PU SEALANT SPECIFICATION PUTTY
PUTTY
CEMENT CONCRETE AS PER
SPECIFICATION LAID TO SLOPE WATER PROOFING
WATER PROOFING TREATMENT TURNED
TREATMENT TURNED 0
TOP OF RCC SLAB INTO GROOVE tN
INTO GROOVE
12 THICK CEMENT 0
12 THICK rn
CEMENT PLASTER PLASTER
RCC GUTTER RCC GUTTER
MINIMU M 500
RAIN WATER RAIN WATER
MINIMUM500
PIPE COVER PIPE COVER

— RAIN WATER
RAIN WATER RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB
PIPE SOCKET PIPE SOCKET
RCC BEAM (FLUSH INSIDE)
EXTERNAL WALL
DRIP COURSE DRIP COURSE

RAIN WATER PIPE
EMBEDDED IN CEMENT
CONCRETE
(AS/ARCH. (AS/ARCH.
DRAWINGS) 300 COLUMN 300 DRAWINGS)
DETAIL-1 DETAIL-2
RAIN WATER PIPE

EMBEDDED IN CEMENT
CONCRETE
CEMENT PLASTER
RCC COLUMN
GROOVE
IN PLASTER
300
RCC GUTTER
ABOVE EXTERNAL WALL
SECTIONAL PLAN C-C

NOTE: REFER SHEET 1 OF 1
5 07.03.17 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JK RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Page 2562 of 3884

STANDARD No.
kilf-aeitik ENGINEERS ROOF DRAINAGE
ligaf offleg
etrage emdrisn.r)
INDIA LIMITED
AND WATERPROOFING 7-75-0068 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 3
RCC PARAPET WALL

12 THICK CEMENT PLASTER
10x20 GROOVE FILLED WITH PU
SEALANT PUTTY
WATER PROOFING TREATMENT
TURNED INTO GROOVE
PROTECTIVE LAYER AS PER

MO RE THAN 45 0
ITEM DESCRIPTION/SPECIFICATIONS
0 WATER PROOFING
TREATMENT AS PER
TENDER ON RCC SLAB
TOP OF RCC SLAB
0
0 0 <1
p /9'
CEMENT CONCRETE AS
PER SPECIFICATION LAID
TO SLOPE
RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB
P 75x75 CEMENT CONCRETE FILLET
RCC BEAM
EXTERNAL WALL
EXTERNAL FINISH
SECTION B-B
(PARAPET HEIGHT MORE THAN 450)
RCC PARAPET WALL

CONTINUED TO PARAPET TOP
p
PROTECTIVE LAYER AS PER
450OR LESS
p
ITEM DESCRIPTION/SPECIFICATIONS
p
p
p AS PER TENDER ON RCC SLAB
p TOP OF RCC SLAB
• 6W
p
CEMENT CONCRETE AS
PER SPECIFICATION LAID
TO SLOPE
RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB
75x75 CEMENT CONCRETE FILLET
RCC BEAM
EXTERNAL WALL
EXTERNAL FINISH
SECTION B-B
(PARAPET HEIGHT UP TO 450)
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM Al
5 07.03.17 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD VILVK/C2 JKB RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. NANDA
Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau

Rev.
No. by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2563 of 3884

STANDARD No.
I*
eiENGINEERS STEEL DOOR
tsar fal51-eg INDIA LIMITED
iatreff eivcovecof Jo-m.0 (A Govt of India Undertaking)
(PRESSED STEEL) 7-75-0070 Rev. 5
SINGLE SHUTTER Page 1 of 1
R.C.C. BEAM
R.C.C. LINTE
12X10 GROOVE IN
PLASTER FILLED WITH
POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT
CEMENT PLASTER
SHUTTER L
3 THICK MS FLAT
CONTINUOUS ALONG H
VISION PANEL
2090 TO 2490
II 18 SWG GI 'Z' Q
SECTION FIXED
TO FRAME C
EPDM GASKET
ALL AROUND THE
GLASS
GLASS
SECTION 3-3
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
20X20X3 MS ANGLE
880 TO 1180 WELDED TO BOTH
FACES OF FRAME
ELEVATION SECTION 1 -1
12X10 GROOVE IN
PLASTER FILLED WITH
L BRICK WORK
0
r0
cc (W91
J EMENT
14+. R
PLASTER
F
SECTION 2-2
LEGEND :
A: OVER HEAD HYDRAULIC DOOR CLOSER (HEAVY DUTY). J: 18 SWG GI VERTICAL STIFFNER 0 200 C/C
B. MS HOLD FAST 200x25x6 THICK 0 MAXIMUM 600 C/C (SPACING TO BE ADJUSTED FOR VISION PANEL).
WELDED TO FRAME SPACER (L) . K: SPRING LOADED HEAVY DUTY DOOR STOPPER.
C: 40 THICK (OVER ALL) 18 SWG GALVANIZED PRESSED L: 3 THICK MS FLAT SPACER WELDED TO FRAME
STEEL SHUTTER FILLED WITH MINERAL WOOL (48Kg/cum). AT 0 500 C/C.
D: 16 SWG GALVANIZED PRESSED STEEL FRAME OUT OF M: 40x150x3 THICK MS PAD WELDED TO FRAME
AT ALL HINGE & LOCK LOCATIONS.
125X60 PROFILE FILLLED WITH CONCRETE (REBATE N: SS 304 GRADE 19 DIA, 200 LONG HANDLE
DIMENSION TO BE SUITABLY ADJUSTED FOR ON BOTH SIDES.
ACCOMODATING GASKET FOR AIR TIGHT DOOR). 0: 18 SWG GI MORTAR GUARD AT THE BACK OF
E: VISION PANEL (AS/PROJECT DRAWING). HINGES & LOCK.
F: 100 LONG SS 304 GRADE HEAVY DUTY BALL BEARING P: 10 DIA SS 304 TOWER BOLT (250 LONG FOR
HINGE 0 600 C/C MAXIMUM. 2100 HT. & 600 LONG FOR 2500 HT.).
G: SS 304 GRADE 16 DIA 250 LONG ALDROP ON BOTH Q: 'D' PROFILE EPDM GASKET ALONG FRAME REBATE
SIDES. (FOR AIR TIGHT DOOR ONLY).
H: 3 THICK MS FLAT CONTINUOUS ALONG PERIMETER R: INSULATION AS PER ITEM DESCRIPTION.
OF SHUTTER.
5 24.04.17 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD l# JKH RAJNIJI SRIVASTAVA R. NNIDA
4 09.04.12 REVISED & REISSUED DK SD JKI D. MALNOTRA

No. by by
A roved b
Fnrrnat Net R-00-0001-F4 RAV n Cnnvrinht FII - All rinhts rPsArvArl
Page 2564 of 3884

STANDARD No.
IA~ei ENGINEERS STEEL DOOR
ligar 2151eg INDIA LIMITED (PRESSED STEEL) 7-75-0071 Rev. 5
1411- as13o2r.1) (A Govf of (Ôa Undertaking)
DOUBLE SHUTTER Page 1 of 1
A
B
C
S
Q
2090 TO2490
C
N
F
R
H S
J
DETAIL X
-< FINISHED
K (14413...J.EVE L
Cs1
1180 TO 1980
ELEVATION 12X10 GROOVE IN

PLASTER FILLED WITH
ice 0
wz
ce
=i
CEMENT
Q+-+- PLASTER
SECTION 1 -1
LEGEND :
A: OVER HEAD HYDRAULIC DOOR CLOSER (HEAVY DUTY). K: SPRING LOADED HEAVY DUTY DOOR STOPPER.
B: MS HOLDFAST 200x25x6 THICK 0 MAXIMUM 600 C/C L: 3 THICK MS FLAT SPACER WELDED TO FRAME
WELDED TO FRAME SPACER (L). AT 0 500 C/C.
C: 40 THICK (OVER ALL) 18 SWG GALVANIZED PRESSED M: 40x150x3 THICK MS PAD WELDED TO FRAME
STEEL SHUTTER FILLED WITH MINERAL WOOL (48Kg/cum). AT ALL HINGE & LOCK LOCATIONS.
D: 16 SWG GALVANIZED PRESSED STEEL FRAME OUT OF N: SS 304 GRADE 19 DIA, 200 LONG HANDLE
125X60 PROFILE FILLLED WITH CONCRETE (REBATE ON BOTH SIDES.
DIMENSION TO BE SUITABLY ADJUSTED FOR ACCOMODATING 0 : 18 SWG GI MORTAR GUARD AT THE BACK OF
GASKET FOR AIR TIGHT DOOR). HINGES & LOCK.
E: VISION PANEL (AS/PROJECT DRAWING). P: 10 DIA SS 304 TOWER BOLT (250 LONG FOR
F: 100 LONG SS 304 GRADE HEAVY DUTY BALL BEARING 2100 HT. & 600 LONG FOR HT.). noo
HINGE 0 600 C/C MAXIMUM. Q: 'D. PROFILE EPDM GASKET ALONG FRAME REBATE
(FOR AIR TIGHT DOOR ONLY).
G: SS 304 GRADE 16 DIA 300 LONG ALDROP ON BOTH SIDES.
H: 3 THICK MS FLAT CONTINUOUS ALONG PERIMETER OF R: INSULATION AS PER ITEM DESCRIPTION.
OF SHUTTER.
J: 18 SWG GI VERTICAL STIFFNER 0 200 C/C
S: 2 THICK 25X25 GI ANGLE (VERTICAL) EACH
WELDED TO ONE SHUTTER.
(SPACING TO BE ADJUSTED FOR VISION PANEL).
2. FOR OTHER DETAILS REFER STANDARD NO. 7-75-0070.
/
% I MP-
2I
5 24.04.17 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD • JS/J RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R. RAMA

No. by by
A ..roved b
Format No R-00-00O1-F4 RAV () ennvrinht Fll - All rinhts resarvari
Page 2565 of 3884

STANDARD No.
101 ENGINEERS METAL SHEET
ligar Mieg INDIA LIMITED 7-75-0091 Rev. 1
IA Govt of India Undertaking) (FLASHING DETAIL)
Page 1 of 2
DETAIL—A
DETAIL—C
ALUMINIUM OR MS
LOUVERED VENTILATOR
OR BIRD WIREMESH
TURBO/AIR DRIVEN
ROOF EXTRACTOR
RANSLUCENT SHEET
METAL SHEET ROOFING
DETAIL—B STEEL TRUSS/PORTAL

AS/STRUCTURE
METAL SHEET
LOUVERS
DETAIL—D METAL SHEET

CLADDING
METAL SHEET
LOUVERS
APPROACH
FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL ROAD
TYPICAL SECTION
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
RIDGE PIECE
PLAIN SHEET RIDGE PIECE
METAL
SHEET ROOFING
PLAIN SHEET
CORNER PIECE
STEEL PURLIN (MINIMUM 200x200)
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
STEEL TRUSS (GABLE END)
PORTAL
CORNER PIECE
DETAIL-A FLASHING DETAIL
(RIDGE FLASHING DETAIL) (ROOF AND GABLE END CLADDING)
NOTES:
2. THIS STANDARD INDICATES VARIOUS ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES AND FLASHING DETAILS OF SHEDS.
PROVISION OF FEATURES (ROOF MONITOR, ROOF EXTRACTOR, TRANSLUCENT SHEET, LOUVERS) AND THEIR
SIZES, LOCATION ETC SHALL BE AS PER PROJECT DRAWINGS.
3. MATERIAL, THICKNESS AND OTHER DETAILS OF ROOFING, CLADDING, ACCESORIES (RIDGE FLASHING, CORNER
PIECE, EAVES PIECE, APRON PIECE AND OTHER FLASHING) AND BIRD MESH SHALL BE AS PER PROJECT
SPECIFICATION.
1 19.02.18 REVISED & REISSUED AS STATNDARD /14"61:1x /SD RAJANJI JAVA

L R.NANDA
0 17.01.13 ISSUED AS STATNDARD AK so JKB D.MALHOTRA
No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn n-nn-nnn1-F4 Rev n rntivrinht Fil - All rinhts rpst.rvur1
Page 2566 of 3884

STANDARD No.
el ENGINEERS METAL SHEET
2151-eg INDIA LIMITED (FLASHING DETAIL)
7-75-0091 Rev. 1
iairen eirave 'WON ,A
Govl of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 2
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
STEEL PURLIN
40 x 6 MS
FLAT WIND TIE
PLAIN SHEET
EAVES PIECE
STEEL TRUSS/
z
PORTAL 5 STEEL TRUSS/
STEEL COLUMN 0 PORTAL
STEEL PURLIN STEEL COLUMN
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
DETAIL—B (ALTERNATIVE-1) DETAIL—B (ALTERNATIVE-2)

EAVES FLASHING DETAIL
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
40 x 6 MS
FLAT WIND TIE
—EXTENDED ROOF SHEETING/CRIMP CURVE METAL SHEET

CLADDING
STEEL PURLIN
ALUMINIUM OR MS LOUVERED
VENTILATOR OR BIRD WIREMESH
STRUCTURAL MEMBER PLAIN SHEET

FLASHING CORNER PIECE
(IANIMUM 20004
75 (MINIMUM)
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
CORNER PIECE FLASHING DETAIL

(SIDE AND GABLE END CLADDING)
DETAIL—C
VA
METAL SHEET METAL SHEET
CLADDING CLADDING
PLAIN SHEET
75( M INIM UM
FLASHING
II
L METAL SHEET
ROOFING
PLAIN SHEET
APRON PIECE
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
STEEL PURLIN
STEEL TRUSS/
1/1— PORTAL
FLASH NG DETAIL DETAIL—D

(VERTICAL CLADDING AND ROOF) (APRON FLASHING DETAIL)
REVISED & REISSUED AS STATNDARD RAJANJI ORKSTAVA R.NANDA

1 19.02.18 JS
JKD D.MALHOTRA
0 17.01.13 ISSUED AS STATNDARD AK SD

Rev.
No. by by
Approved by
Fnrrnat Nn 11-00-0001-F4 Rev n Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvirtri
Page 2567 of 3884

STANDARD No.
k31 ENGINEERS STAINLESS STEEL TUBULAR
fzdzir NR-e-g INDIA LIMITED 7-75-0093 Rev. 0
(PPP erecoremdfriFil) (A Govt of India Undertaking) HANDRAIL
Page 1 of 4
REFER DETAIL—A
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
oi REFER DETAIL—B
Eli
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
0
18 DIA SS PIPE
FLOOR FINISH
AS/SPECIFICATION FINISHED FLOOR
20 DIA SS BARS
WELDED TO VERTICAL
POST
100 DIA X6 4.
THICK SS INSERT 4
PLATE
REFER DETAIL—C
SECTION A-A
200
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
TJ 14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
32 DIA SS PIPE
FOR VERTICAL POST
z i 18 DIA SS PIPE
N HANDRAIL
0
0 _
Ln
N
N
FINISHED FLOOR
ELEVATION
C P - f4
100 DIA X 6 THICK
SS PLATE
STAINLESS STEEL (SS) HANDRAIL FIXED ON SIDE OF SLAB

0 02.11.15 ISSUED AS STANDARD RD c,...y.VA P' I/J RAJANJI SR VA S. CHANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 RPV Corwrinht Fll - All rinhts rasprvpri
Page 2568 of 3884

STANDARD No.
Ill ei ENGINEERS STAINLESS STEEL TUBULAR
fg-ar Elf51-eg
vttwir viecnie to JUMP)
INDIA LIMITED
HANDRAIL
7-75-0093 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 4
REF DETAIL—A
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
32 DIA SS PIPE
FOR VERTICAL POST REF DETAIL—B
WELDED TO THE
BASE PLATE
FLOOR FINISH REF DETAIL—D

AS/SPECIFICATION FINISHED FLOOR
! rAr■ VZ.•F./Z.///: Kr/."1 IZA
12 THK GROOVE
100
SECTION B—B
1200 50 DIA SS PIPE

HANDRAIL
14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
1 OC
32 DIA SS PIPE FOR
VERTICAL POST
a 18 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
0
0
0
FINISHED FLOOR
Page 2569 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ei ENGINEERS STAINLESS STEEL TUBULAR
Weg
Wren eleaxedaJi.antn
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India UndeitakingI HANDRAIL
7-75-0093 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 4
50 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL HANDRAIL
50x8 THICK
STAINLESS STEEL
PLATE BALUSTER ON
EVERY THIRD STEP
0
0
18 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL INTERMEDIATE
PIPE
FLOOR FINISH AS
PER SPECIFICATION
2 NOS. HILTI BOLTS
SECTION C-C
50 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL PIPE HANDRAIL
WELDED JOINTS
50 X 8 THICK
STAINLESS STEEL
PLATE BALUSTER ON
EVERY THIRD STEP
18 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL INTERMEDIATE
PIPE
STAIR FINISH AS
PER SPECIFICATION
NOSING
50X50X6 SS ANGLE
STAINLESS STEEL PLATE

BOLTS FOUR NOS.
MATERIAL GRADE SS 316
ELEVATION
STAINLESS STEEL (SS) HANDRAIL FOR STAIRS
0 02.11.15 ISSUED AS STANDARD RD c_01 SD/J1e4 RAJANJI SRIVA AVA S. CHANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn 8-00-0001-F4 RPV 0 Convriatit FIt - All rights rpsprvPri
Page 2570 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS STAINLESS STEEL TUBULAR
IA Govt of India Undertaking) HANDRAIL
Page 4 of 4
32 DIA SS PIPE
ICI
VERTICAL POST
50 DIA SS PIPE 41) 80 DIA X 8 THICK SS
PLATE
6 THICK SS SADDLE FINISHED FLOOR
PLATE
mralrereaggrm
14 DIA SS
BAR CONNECTOR
EOM I= 4 NOS HILTI BOLTS
50 DIA x 6 THICK
CAP PLATE
DETAIL A DETAIL D
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST 50 DIA SS PIPE
18 DIA SS PIPE 6 THICK SS SADDLE
RAILING PLATE
14 DIA SS 14 DIA SS BAR
BAR WELDED CONNECTOR
TO SS PIPE
DETAIL B SECTION D-D
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
20 DIA SS BARS
100 DIA X 6 THICK
CIRCULAR SS
INSERT PLATE
80 DIA X 8 THICK SS
CL OF INSERT PLATE PLATE
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
4 NOS HILTI HSL BOLTS
DETAIL C SECTION E-E
(TYPICAL DETAILS)
0 02.11.15 ISSUED AS STANDARD RD )),g1:0/J RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA S. CHANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 RPV Convrinht RI - All rinhts rpsprvpd
Page 2571 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS STAIRCASE RAILING 7-75-0094 Rev. 0
INDIA LIMITED (WITH SS MEMBER Et GLASS PANEL)
I NUT R135li, c15T.3,117M) IA Govt. of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 1
11.5 THK (WITH TWO 5 THK
GLASS LAYERS) LAMINATED GLASS
900
50 DIA, 1.5 THK SS PIPE HANDRAIL
(MAXIMUM)
FIXED TO TOP ADAPTER
SS GLASS LINK
SS TOP ADAPTER
TOP ADAPTER
(INDICATIVE VIEW)
70 x 0 SS FLAT
BAR BALUSTER
70 x 10 SS FLAT
BAR BALUSTER
SS GLASS LINK
LAMINATED GLASS
GLASS LINK
ELEVATION (INDICATIVE VIEW)
75
50 DIA, 1.5 THK SS PIPE HANDRAIL (WITH END CAP)
FIXED TO TOP ADAPTER WITH SS GRUB SCREW
SS TOP ADAPTER FIXED TO

FLAT BAR WITH SS GRUB SCREW
19 DIA SS WALL MOUNTING
HANDRAIL BRACKET
70 x 10 SS FLAT BAR BALUSTER
100 LONG, M10 SS FASTENE
SS GLASS LINK WALL
11.5 THK (WITH TWO CEMENT PLASTER /

5 THK GLASS LAYERS) WALL FINISH
LAMINATED GLASS
DETAIL OF GRAB RAIL

(ALONG WALL)
12 THK SS BASE PLATE 11.5 THK (WITH TWO
WITH 2 THK SS BASE COVER 5 THK GLASS LAYERS)
FLOOR FINISH LAMINATED GLASS
70 x 10 SS FLAT BAR BALUSTER

100 LONG, M10 SS FASTENER
RCC SLAB / STEP 12 THK SS BASE PLATE
WITH 2 THK SS BASE COVER
A
RCC SLAB / STEP
SECTION A-A 3 NOS - M10 SS FASTENER
NOTE : 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRE
2. SS - STAINLESS STEEL (GRADE-304)
3. ALL SS MEMBERS/FITTING SHALL BE OF SATIN FINISH. BASE PLATE DETAIL (PLAN)
4. IN PLACE OF TOP ADAPTER Et GRUB SCREW, WELDING USING SUITABLE SS MEMBER IS ACCEPTABLE IF SPE IFIED.
wt/
0 04.06.18 ISSUED AS STANDARD MLT SD RS R K TRIVEDI
No. by by
Approved by
Page 2572 of 3884

CHECK LIST FOR ………. DOCUMENT No.
Page 1 of 2
DEPARTMENT :
ACTIVITY/DELIVERABLE :
DOCUMENT TITLE :
DOCUMENT NO./REV.:
SR. Tick Mark as per

CHECK/ CONTROL POINTS
NO. Legend
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Format No. 3-0000-0006 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2573 of 3884

CHECK LIST FOR ………. DOCUMENT No.
Page 2 of 2
SR. Tick Mark as per

CHECK/ CONTROL POINTS
NO. Legend
23
24
25
26
27
28
Any other observation/comment (attach additional sheet, if required):
Date : Name & Signature of Checker
Notes:
1. (*)These are mandatory check point. Other points can be checked based on need
and judicious discretion depending on the importance of activity / deliverables.
2. Performer can use this checklist as guide purpose.
3. Performance will attach the blank checklist along with the deliverable(s).
4. Checker will attach filled in checklist along with document for approval.
Legend :
√ : Check carried out and found OK

√C : Check carried out and see comments
√ NA : Check carried out and found not applicable
Format No. 3-0000-0006 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2574 of 3884

STANDARD No.
(LM
/gar faReg
=1,) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED TOILET CUBICLES DETAILS 7-75-0095 Rev. 0
own efrosirm513,RD.1) (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 1
S.S. "U" PROFILE

18MM THICK END FRONT PANEL
S.S. "H" PROFILE
S.S. TOP RAIL
S.S. KNOB
18MM THICK CENTER-
FRONT PANEL
S.S. LOCK INDICATOR
FLOOR —
FINISH
a•-
I. !
v. t-..i.....-.1.4: .7 PA: . v. . ‘
i :Et. :s., :: • ..
11/4/
S.S. LEG
RCC BEAM—
SEC. X VERTICAL P PE — ELEVATION DOOR
RCC SUNK SLAB
CUT OUT IN WALL —
FOR PIPE PENETRATION

RCC SUNK SLAB
FILLED UP S S "U" PROFILE
MATERIAL AS PER
TENDER ITEM WALL
LEDGE WALL
12MM THICK COMPACT LAMINATED

BOARD (DIVIDER PANEL)
S.S. HANDLE
COAT HOOK
DOOR — 18MM THICK COMPACT
LAMINATED BOARD
18MM THICK COMPACT LAMINATED
BOARD (END FRONT PANEL)
S.S. TOP RAIL

S.S. LOCK
PLAN S.S. "H" PROFILE
S.S. LEG
NOTES:-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MIWMETRES.
2. THIS STANDARD IS INDICATIVE AND TYPICAL CONSIDERING 3N0. OF LEGEND:
W.C. CUBICLES. REFER RELVANT ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING FOR S.S. = STAINLESS STEEL
EXACT NO. AND SIZES OF CUBICLES AND THEIR CONFIGRATION.
3. W.C. SEAT SHOWN IS INDIICATIVE, EXACT TYPE OF SEAT
(FLOOR MOUNTED OR WALL MOUNTED) SHALL BE AS PER TENDER ITEM.
4. ALL S.S. FITTINGS/FIXTURES SHALL BE OF GRADE SS-316.
5. R.C.C. SUNK SLAB SHOWN IN SEC. X—X AND ELEVATION IS APPLICABLE
FOR FIRST & HIGHER FLOORS ONLY (AND NOT FOR GROUND FLOOR).
0 09.12.16 ISSUED AS STANDARD

k,I
DKr' OA S/J RAJANJIRI
T-WiT
STAVA R. NANDA

Date Purpose Convenor Cadman
No. bY by Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Coovrioht EL - Al dahts reserved
Page 2575 of 3884

STANDARD No.
010a6 ENGINEERS TOILET FOR DIFFERENTLY
Iftifem-eg INDIA LIMITED ABLED PERSONS 7-75-0096 REV. 0
etratte er3Th-R) ( A Govt of Inds Undertaking)
Page 1 of 1
TILES DADO AS/ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
MIRROR PREFERABLY WITH

15° TILT FROM TOP
TOILET PAPER HOLDER
WALL MOUNTED GRAB RAIL
PILLAR COCK
PER
SPECIFICATIONS
TOWEL RAIL
NON SLIP FLOOR SURFACE WITHOUT LEVEL

DIFFERENCE AS/ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
P
SECTION A-A
2200
(MIN.)
FLOOR TRAP
40MM 0 GRAB RAIL
BIB COCK / HEALTH FAUCET
rs.,,_
WALL MOUNTED GRAB RAIL
250
r1/441 Ary
. 44
,
A' 47 AMR%
„_ MA I MJ
IP
47,
TOWEL RAIL
El MINAM .14,
MR 150 C r
MEIMIN
/
11-:0
11M EllVIII
%
/
O
/
rif
1,1
r
/
ME
H/
/
/H o
/./&
/../1
.2H
amp
,1111 I
L
ANG
I.
/
/ 44_1 AV AV A
ALTERNATIVE 1
900 DROP DOWN RAIL
DOOR POSITION
LIGHT WEIGHT NON SLIP FLOOR SURFACE

DOOR SHUTTER PLAN WITHOUT LEVEL DIFFERENCE
AS/ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
NOTES:-
2. LOCATION OF WINDOW/VENTILATOR/EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE AS/ARCHITECTURE
DRAWING OF THE JOB.
3. THIS STANDARD SHALL BE READ CONJUNCTION WITH ARCHITECTURE STD. NO.
7-75-0062, 7-75-0064 (FOR PIPE CONNECTIONS, DISPOSAL ARRANGEMENTS ETC.).
4. THIS STANDARD SHOWS MINIMUM MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS OF TOILET FOR DIFFERENTLY ABLED PERSONS.
REFER RELEVANT ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING FOR EXACT SIZES AND EXTENT OF FACILITIES.
5. WC CISTERN SHALL HAVE PUSH BUTTON TYPE FLUSHING SYSTEM.
6. COAT HOOK SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE DOOR FROM INSIDE AT 1200MM FROM FLOOR LEVEL.
0 19.05.17 ISSUED AS STANDARD DOW RAJAKI 'SUVA fr)41 . '7NANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Page 2576 of 3884

STANDARD No .
k31 ENGINEERS RAMP DETAIL 7-75-0097 Rev. 0

tioveg
I aireer elETN7 attandte)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt. o India Undertaking)
( FOR WHEEL CHAIR USERS )
Page 1 of 2
50 DIA, 1.5 THK SS GRAB RAIL
1500 ♦300,
0
ul
RAMP LANDING
RAMP WIDTH
APPROACH PLATFORM PLATFORM BUILDING

0 RAMP UP ENTRANCE Z
PLATFORM
c60.450 (MAXIMUM)
(FINISHED LEVEL) V(FINISHED LEVEL)
900 — SS HANDRAIL
0
0 (MAXIMUM) SS BALUSTER
5000 (MAXIMUM) 1500 BUILDING
RAMP ENTRY (AS REQUIRED FOR DIFFERENCE IN LEVEL, SLOPE 1:12) MAIN ENTRY
KERB RAMP
(SLOPE 1:12)
APPROACH ROAD
V(APPROACH ROAD LEVEL)
INDICATIVE PLAN. (FOR DIFFERENCE IN LEVEL UPTO 450 MM)

1800 5000 (MAXIMUM) 1500
( AS REQUIRED FOR DIFFERENCE IN LEVEL, SLOPE 1:12 )
k V 300
RAMP WIDTH
EQ A EQ I EQ A EQ
1 MID LANDING LANDING BUILDING
A
0 PLATFORM PLATFORM ENTRANCE
0
Lr)
PLATFORM I
c60.750 (MAXIMUM)
V(FINISHED LEVEL)
T
•._
7 Af
11/4
_ RAMP WI DTH
■ I k__ _1.
SS HANDRAIL
SS BALUSTER
0
0
RAMP UP
RAMP
° BUILDING
MAIN ENTRY
APPROACH PLATFORM
0.000
1•1111• ■■•• 'F'(APPROACH ROA LEVEL)
[t
0
300
AS REQUIRED FOR DIFFERENCE IN LEVEL
( SLOPE 1:12)
RAMP ENTRY
5000 (MAXIMUM)
0.000
1-'(APPROACH ROAD LEVEL)
APPROACH ROAD
INDICATIVE PLAN (FOR DIFFERENCE IN LEVEL 451 TO 750 MM)
NOTE :
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM 4. THE RAMP ARRANGEMENT IS INDICATIVE.
2. SS - STAINLESS STEEL (GRADE-304) THE ARRANGEMENT SHALL BE AS PER ARCHITECTURAL
3. ALL SS MEMBERS/FITTING SHALL BE OF SATIN FINISH. DWG. BUT RAILING, LANDING DETAILS SHALL BE AS PER
THIS STANDARD.
ki■le:fr— • 14*5b1- . AL.-----_

0 04.06.18 ISSUED AS STANDARD MLT SD RS R K kAiti
TFfN
EDI
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2577 of 3884

STANDARD No.
el ENGINEERS RAMP DETAIL 7-75-0097 Rev. 0
INDIA LIMITED ( FOR WHEEL CHAIR USERS )
I 4.1T2er FIETISIF *maw's-a) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 2
50 DIA, 1.5 THK SS PIPE HANDRAIL (WITH END CAP)

FIXED TO TOP ADAPTER WITH SS GRUB SCREW
75
50 DIA, 1.5 THK SS PIPE GRAB RAIL
19 DIA SS HANDRAIL BRACKET TO SUPPORT GRAB RAIL

0
to
Lt1
N. 16 DIA, 1.5 THK SS PIPERAIL FIXED WITH SS ROD HOLDER
50 DIA, 1.5 THK SS PIPE BALUSTER (® 900 MAXIMUM)
12 THK SS BASE PLATE WITH 2 THK SS BASE COVER
FLOOR FINISH (NON SLIP TYPE)
100 LONG, M10 SS FASTENER FOR FIXING BASE PLATE

RCC SLAB / RAMP
SECTION A-A
16 DIA, 1.5 THK PIPERAIL 50 DIA, 1.5 THK
SS PIPE HANDRAIL
SS ROD HOLDER
SS TOP ADAPTER
ROD HOLDER TOP ADAPTER

(INDICATIVE VIEW) (INDICATIVE VIEW)
75

(WITH END CAP) FIXED TO TOP
ADAPTER WITH SS GRUB SCREW
50 DIA, 1.5 THK
SS PIPE BALUSTER
50 DIA, 1.5 THK SS PIPE GRAB RAIL
12 THK SS BASE PLATE (WITH END CAP) FIXED TO TOP
WITH 2 THK SS BASE COVER ADAPTER WITH SS GRUB SCREW
RCC SLAB / RAMP

19 DIA SS WALL MOUNTING
3 NOS - M10 SS FASTENER HANDRAIL BRACKET
100 LONG, M10 SS FASTENER
4 1,40 SIDE WALL
CEMENT PLASTER / WALL FINISH
BASE PLATE DETAIL (PLAN) DETAIL OF GRAB RAIL

NOTE : (ALONG WALL)
5. IN PLACE OF TOP ADAPTER GRUB SCREW, WELDING
USING SUITABLE SS MEMBER IS ACCEPTABLE IF SPECIFIED.
0 04.06.18 ISSUED AS STANDARD

)411- • k k/tf
MLT SD RS R K TRIVEDI
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL -All rights reserved
Page 2578 of 3884

B185-030-17-44-00001
PLANT NORTH REF. DWG. NO. REFERENCE DRAWING TITLE
- LAY-OUT PLAN PARBATIPUR DEPOT ALONG WITH PROPOSED LAND ON THE WEST SIDE
B185-030-83-41-10002 P/L EQUIPMENT LAYOUT
11
0°
N NOTES :-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS, LEVELS & CO-ORDINATES ARE IN INCHES.
2. ALL ROADS ARE 4.0M WIDE INCLUDING BERM UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
TRUE NORTH
"
'-7
12
LEGENDS :-
ROAD
8"
Exis
8"
15'-
4'- -0"
32'-
Wa ting p
14 57'
5"
55'- y Tr ass
1
9" ack eng 847 PROPOSED FACILITIES

T er '-7"
8"
Pro ank-1 Rai (UNDER JOB NO. B185)

8'-
72'- pose l
10
8"
Tan 0"X H d Ø
51'-
45'-
k 6, 60'-0 11"
500 " T Par
MT Pro ank-2 bat
9"
72'- pose ipur 20'-
44'-
Tan 0"X H d Ø To S Wa 0" Hei
6"
9"
45'- ll (1 g
0" t ht Bou
8'-
k 6, 60'-0
"
51'-
11"
9'-0
aye
r
8"
500 "
pu
Ta 4'-0 hick nda

dpu
15'-
Hydrant Line MT Pro nk-3 sec " W ) ry

aj
50'- 72'- pose r i d

urity e so
Tan 0"X H d Ø
0"
n
ligh il for
Di
k 6, 60'-0 45'- 3'-0 t po cab

500 11" "W st, C le tr
0"
" Tan
10'- ide R CTV ench
'-
To
Hydrant Line
MT Pro k-4
151
.
10"
72'- pose 0" R C.C pos &

21'-
. C . Dra t etc
Tan 0"X H d Ø 6'-0 .
10"
D
C
ur
out
O
A 45'- " He . p i n .
R k 6, 60'-0 11"
ight ath wa
32'-
Pum
ip
"
3.06 p Hous
0
500
3
10. x2.4 e
" Tan
-
00m
Bun y
12'-
LP
Oil Seperator 9m
Pro k-5
at
TANK NO-10 MT dW
Sum
72'- pose all
rb
CLASS- II ps
Pro 230'-0"
550
Tan 0"X H d Ø
0"
HSD
Con posed
10.
36m '-0"
Pa
"
k 6, 60'-0
4.2
0
7m
"
45'-
& O struct Land
3'-0
10'-
JOC 500 11"
-2
1'-
6"Ø " Tan

LP
m
L MT Pr k-6 ther ion o for

22
3"Ø riser with

Tan TANK NO-11
2.
72'- opose
6.1 blank flange
U/G k # 9
12
0m
MS. Tank CLASS- II
Rec f Co
"
4"Ø
40
Clas
4'-0
Pump House
H
Lan
0"
900
HSD
Tan 0"X H d Ø eivi ntro
s-I 35.
TC
3.08x2.45m 36m
dA n Fac l Room
DI
11'-
25.
k 6, 60'-0 rea g
0"
6m
Ditc
MP
'-0
-1
5'-0
L 500 ilitie
"
40'-
h± " =3
10'-0
18.9m
LP
"
PTZ
"
Y 5'-0
10"
"
3 s.
THICK
8'-0 MT
BR
ICK
16'-0 65'-0
= 0 ,145.
WA
LL
" "
10"
10" THICK
LL
3'-4
BR
WA
"
ICK
No.- 1 Tank # 1
5"
WA
LL 6'-0
ICK
6'-1 "
Tan
0"
"
BR
Fixed
Mova 5" 5'-0
10 ble 3'-4
"
THICK
U/G k # 8
16mm Gate mm thi Gate
"
10"
10"
LL
(SKO)
900
dia (Rod ck M. 8'-0
WA
"
310 .76 6
@ 4"c net) S. Pla
10"
/c. te
BRICK
Deta
i
1.6m
acre 9 sft.
mt
MS. Tank
10'-0
Class- II il D
"
THICK
9.4
'-0"
m
"
0"
13'-8
raw
12'-
TANK # 12
m Clas
R.C
10"
10"
Gu
in
Bun High
THICK
.68
g of
"
4'-6
BR DO
'-5"
ICK WN
WA ST
11 s-I Oil
22'-0
"
LL SID REAM
E
6'-6"
.17 Sep
10"
dW CLASS- II
17
an
arato
m
.C.
5'-0" Y
r
300
(Mad wide
all
.
e by M.S.
rw
10mm swive
Z ST
Tank # 2 1.6m High Bund thick l gate
PO HSD
MS
PT shee 4'-6"
Cul '-0"
t) (One wide
Da
Ma mova 2 nos
Wall
de
76'-
by 16 ble & gate
(HSD)
155
mm one
CL 21'-
dia fixed
rod
@ 4"
12
c/c)
.00
m
HT
Roo Meetr
ing
Hyd
ran
t Lin
e
Class-II
9.4 Pro 11" '- 0" 4" vert
3.7 m
3m
x3.4
5m JO
LubCL
4m
Tank # 3
74'-8
" p
App osed
'-0"
Con e (SKO) Tan
tain
U/G k # 7
roxi Tan
6. oo rat a
122
5. 1m m or
e
R ne v
er
Class- II
e K
9.4
El 50 era va
'-10
St . Kv tor
at
G 400
4 MS. Tank
& en K
152
"
m
mat k F
a s a
m
13 x
G 250
G
Clas
9. Ro tio ub
90
13'-1
s-I Hydrant Line
7
9 o n
"
e= 1 arm
5.
5. 08m m
e
m x
0"
Tank # 4 78'-
7"
Exis
= 2 ,13,57 Area 2'-6"
Proposed 5
99
(HSD) m 8"
82'-
.5
55'-
Class-II Tank # 13
wal ting P
12
P
PUM
MS
18. 11'-10"x9'-9"
HSD P
2
PUM
9 .4 44m
.61
01A
4m JOCL
acre .29 sft
RPH
e
P
PUM
HSD
ous
74'-
1B
l. B
SKO P
PUM
7"
pH
HS
7"
Td
K-1
Exis
1
D
-SM 01
Tank # 5
"
Pum
-10
SK
-10
PUM
Pum
4.57 p Hou
P
JOC
MS PUM
6
O SKO P
.
PUM
m CE
HSD P
-PA 00-1
(SKO) X3.0 se
PUM
.
HSD P
epo
MS
65'-
g
N-B
t
5m
L PO
-BK
t Bo (Cen ing Ra
52'-
in
Class- II
41 N
9'-1
Filli 0"
n 9.4 CL Fire Hydrant Line
ild
(JO g She
E
030 -TT-
G
CL d 4m
GN
2"
13'-
'-
)
79
Bu
L 30-
28 SI
und tral il W 1"
L 030
30-
x RE
C0
"
d
.0
"
Tank # 6 Proposed
oco ay Tra
ie
6'-7
L
C0
9'-0
(HSD)
ary
or
C
26'-
36 M
Tank # 15
L
In Door
75 CU
Oil Separator
St
Class-II
44m
HSD SKO MS
mot 3" Pro

m
ive Wck
POCL
"
4
9'-11"
Proposed
87'-10
9. E
18.
Fac posed
7"
C
HS
No.- 1 D Filling Shed Tank # 14 Fire P

FI
SK
6.02m ump Hous
O
xH-12.19m
19'-
"
18.
OF
(POCL)
orks
"
MS
44m MPL
59'-10
4
x3.66 e
11 App ilities / Land f

Filli
58'-0"
m
1
2000 MT
"
ng
39'-
1"
-10
ho
(MP Shed
0"
9'-0
L)
INGR
p)
37'-11"
e
-00
ous
59'-
529
35'-6"
MS P
Out Door 13'-

PUM
'-6"
31'-5"
Darwan Gumti
Lub
roxi o
BU EATE
Fire P
F
Prover
HSD P
PUM
pH
S,
Tank
mat ire Po r Fire
-MR
'-7"
11'-
T Fire Hydrant Line Godown ond 1"
P
Pum
PUM
HSD
8'-
R.
14.76m
PumMPL
21'-7"
P
9.58m C.C
PUM
SKO
112
L 030
No.-2 Out Door In Door
4.57 p Hous
X3.0 e
19'-
e= 7 nd. Figh
m
5m
x6.58 55'-
ILD
Bund Wall Deep 8"
79
7'-4"
m
9'-0"
C
3.58x Tube Well 8"
11'-9"
7
5.
No.-3 PTZ , ting
REP
= 1 299.
22'-11" 3.58m
0" No.- 2
02m
MPL MPL 59'-9" 74'-7"

POCL Drain Line
"
Lube Lube
Lube Security
"
Drain 2'-0" Wide
2
14.
.77
4
Container Container
6'-7
No.- 2
Container
acre 0 sft.
S,T Room
17'-
6.85 X 6.85m PTZ
29'-
6"
.
106'-7"
93'- Vac
0" ant
Main Gate
Culvert
DITCH
1000'-0" Lan
3"
d
'-
145
Main Road Parbatipur to Sayedpur
"
'-9
164

INDO-BANGLA FRIENDSHIP
PIPELINE PROJECT
OVERALL PLOT PLAN
BPC'S RECEIPT TERMINAL
1:500 B 1 8 5 0 3 0 1 7 4 4 0 0 0 0 1 A
Page 2579 of 3884

3-1641-0500 REV.2 A0-1189 x 841
DATA SHEET FOR DATA SHEET NO.
WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR B185-000-17-44-DS-1621
(FOR FRESH WATER SERVICE) Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
PROJECT EPCM FOR IBFPL PROJECT IN CLIENT M/S NRL

BANGLADESH
PLANT DT/RT JOB NO B185 UNIT NO 000
GENERAL
CODES UL/FM/VdS
LOCATION OUTDOOR
TYPE STAND POST TYPE (FIXED), SINGLE BARREL
NOZZLE TYPE AQUA FOG FOAM DIFFUSER TYPE WITH PICK UP-TUBE.
OPERATING CONDITIONS
FLUID HANDLED WATER / FOAM SOLUTION.
TEMPERATURE AMBIENT
PRESSURE MAX. 10.5 KG/CM2g
MIN. 7.0 KG/CM2g
DESIGN FEATURES
MONITOR BODY OPERATION TYPE MANUAL OPERATED.
MOVEMENT HORIZONTALLY- 340°; VERTICALLY- 135° (+90°, -45°).
INLET CONNECTION BASE FLANGE SIZE 100MM (4") NB, AS PER PMS
OUTLET CONNECTION EXTERNAL THREADS AS PER IS: 2643 (PART I).
NOZZLE TYPE AQUA FOG / FOAM BARREL
CONNECTION THREADED, FEMALE.
SIZE 75 MM
FINISH YELLOW EPOXY PAINTED
PERFORMANCE OPERATING PRESSURE 7.0 KG/CM2g
FLOW RATE 750US GPM (2839 LPM).
WATER/FOAM MIN. DISCHARGE
As per EIL Spec 6-66-0027
RANGE
MATERIALS
NOZZLE SS 316
SWIVEL JOINT/WORM WHEEL & GEAR SS 316
BODY / ELBOW / BEND SS 316
WATER / FOAM BARREL SS 316
LOCKS OF HORIZONTAL & VERTICAL ROTATION SS 304
HANDLE SS 316
PICK UP TUBE PVC BRAIDED, 3M LONG, WITH SS 316 STRAINER.
DRAIN VALVE CONFORMING TO IS: 778, CLASS-2.
TEST & INSPECTION
DIMENSION & WORKMANSHIP YES.
HYDROSTATIC TEST AND FUNCTIONAL TEST
YES AT 23 KG/CM2g FOR 5 MINUTES, WITHOUT ANY LEAKAGE.
FOR HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL MOVEMENT
DISCHARGE CAPACITY AND HORIZONTAL /
AS PER STD. SPEC. 6-66-0027
VERTICAL THROW TEST
PAINTING
3 COATS OF ANTI-COROSIVE FIRE RED PAINT AS PER IS: 2932 AND
CONFORMING TO SHADE NO. 536 OF IS: 5, OVER 2 COATS OF RED
BODY (ABOVE GROUND)
OXIDE ZINC CHROMATE PRIMER OR SINGLE COAT OF ALUMINIUM
PAINT.
NOTES:
1. NOZZLE SHALL BE AQUA FOG FOAM DIFFUSERTYPE, WITH FOAM PICK UP TUBE.
2. FOR DETAILED SPECIFICATION, REFER EIL SPEC. NO. 6-66-0027.
3. IN CASE OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN DATA GIVEN HERE WITH DATA GIVEN IN THE STD. SPEC. NO. 6-65-0027,
DATA SHEET SHALL BE GIVEN PREFERENCE.
0 06.03.19 ISSUED FOR BIDS/ENGG. SJ JKU SKN

NO DATE REVISION BY CHK APP
ENGINEERS INDIA LTD WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR DATA SHT. NO. REV.
NEW DELHI AQUA FOG TYPE B185-000-17-44-DS-1621 0
(FOR FRESH WATER SERVICE)
Format No. 6-66-0027-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2580 of 3884

DATA SHEET FOR DATA SHEET NO.
STAND POST TYPE FIRE HYDRANT B185-000-17-44-DS-1622
Page 1 of 1
BANGLADESH
GENERAL
CODES EIL SPEC. 6-66-0012 AND IS: 5290.
LOCATION OUTDOOR
TYPE WET BARREL, VERTICAL STAND POST, WITH TYPE-A LANDING

VALVES AS PER IS: 5290, DOUBLE HEADED (2 VALVES PER
HYDRANT POST) WITHOUT PUMPER CONNECTION
FLUID HANDLED FRESH WATER
TEMPERATURE AMBIENT
PRESSURE MAX. 18 KG/CM2g
MIN. 7.0 KG/CM2g
FLOW RATE 900 lpm PER VALVE @ 7 KG/CM2g
HEIGHT OF HORIZONTAL ARMS 1200
DESIGN FEATURES
VERTICAL POST DIAMETER. 100 MM
HORIZONTAL HYDRANT ARM DIAMETER. 75 MM
HOSE CONNECTOR COUPLING INSTANTANEOUS, FEMALE, 63 MM AS PER IS: 903.
VALVE TYPE A, IS: 5290, 75 MM SIZE (2 VALVES PER HYDRANT POST)
MATERIALS
HYDRANT VERTICAL POST AND ARMS AS PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION CLASS
FLANGE BASE AS PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION CLASS
ARM ANSI B 16.5, S.O., FF, 150# (ASTM A-105).
LANDING VALVES SS 304 (IS:5290, TYPE-A)
HOSE CONNECTOR SS-304
CAP SS-304
CHAIN SS-304
TEST & INSPECTION
DIMENSION & WORKMANSHIP YES
HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE 21KG/CM2.G
FLOW YES, 900 lpm PER VALVE @ 7 KG/CM2g
PAINTING
VALVES, STAND POST & ITS ARMS OUTSIDE THE VALVE TOP EXCEPT THE FACE OF FLANGE AND THE
INSTANTANEOUS OUTLET SHALL BE PAINTED LUMINIOUS
YELLOW AS PER IS: 5. THE OUTSIDE OF INSTANTANEOUS OUTLET
SHALL BE HIGHLY POLISHED. THE HANDWHEEL SHALL BE
PAINTED BLACK. PAINTS SHALL CONFORM TO IS: 2932.
INTERNAL 3 COATS OF CHLORINATED RUBBER BASED RESIN PAINT OR
SURFACE ZINC CHROMATE PAINT, OVER 2 COATS OF RED OXIDE ZINC
CHROMATE PRIMER OR SINGLE COAT OF ALUMINIUM PAINT.
NOTES:
1. FOR DETAILED SPECIFICATION, REFER EIL SPEC. NO. 6-66-0012
DATA SHEET SHALL GOVERN.
0 06.03.19 ISSUED WITH BIDS/ENGG. SJ JKU SKN

NO DATE REVISION BY CHK. APP.
ENGINEERS INDIA LTD. STAND POST TYPE FIRE DATA SHT. NO. REV
NEW DELHI HYDRANT B185-000-17-44-DS-1622 0
DOUBLE HEADED
(FOR FRESH WATER SERVICE)
Page 2581 of 3884

DATA SHEET DATA SHEET NO.
FOR B185-000-17-44-DS-1623
HOSE CABINET Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1

BANGLADESH
GENERAL
LOCATION OUTDOOR
TYPE TYPE-II
MECHANICAL DATA
DELIVERY HOSE SIZE 63MM
LENGTH OF HOSE 15M
MATERIALS
BODY 18 GAUGE M.S. SHEET
DOORS M.S. FRAME WITH GLASS COVER
HAMMER MILD STEEL
CHAIN GI
UNIVERSAL BRANCE PIPE SS-304, CONFORMING TO IS:2871
END COUPLING/JET NOZZLE/BRANCH PIPE SS-304, CONFORMING TO IS:903
DELIVERY HOSE REINFORCED RUBBER LINED (TYBE-B), CONFORMING TO IS:636
STANDARD HANDLE TYPE LOCKS MAKE-GODREJ, MORTISE OR EQUIVALENT
PAINTING
OUTSIDE HOSE CABINET EXTERIOR SURFACE SAHLL BE PAINTED
LUMINOUS YELLOW COLOUR CONFORMING TO IS: 5. THE PAINT
SHALL CONFORM TO IS: 2932.
INSIDE WHITE PAINT
UNIT WEIGHT
EMPTY *
TOTAL *
NOTES:
1. * TO BE FILLED BY VENDOR.
2. FOR DETAILED SPECIFICATION, REFER EIL SPEC. NO. 6-66-0047.
3. TYPE-II HOSE CABINET SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH TWO TYPE 'B' DELIVERY HOSES WITH END COUPLINGS, ONE JET
NOZZLES WITH BRANCH PIPE AND ONE UNIVERSAL BRANCH PIPE, SELF SUPPORTING TYPE, NECESSARY HANGERS
AND BRACKET FOR HOSE, NOZZLE AND BRANCH PIPE WITH DOUBLE PANEL GLASS DOOR.

REV. DATE REVISION BY CHK APP.
ENGINEERS INDIA LTD HOSE CABINET B185-000-17-44-1623 0
NEW DELHI
Page 2582 of 3884

FOR LANDING VALVE B185-000-17-44-DS-1624
Page 1 of 1
BANGLADESH
PLANT DT/RT JOB NO B185 UNIT NO. 000
GENERAL
CODES EIL SPEC. 6-66-0035 AND IS: 5290.
LOCATION OUTDOOR
TYPE TYPE-A
TEMPERATURE AMBIENT
PRESSURE MAX. 18 KG/CM2g
MIN. 7.0 KG/CM2g
FLOW RATE 900 lpm PER VALVE @ 7 KG/CM2g
HEIGHT OF HORIZONTAL ARMS 1200
DESIGN FEATURES
VERTICAL POST DIAMETER. 100 MM
HORIZONTAL HYDRANT ARM DIAMETER. 75 MM
HOSE CONNECTOR COUPLING INSTANTANEOUS, FEMALE, 63 MM AS PER IS: 903.
VALVE TYPE A, IS: 5290, 75 MM SIZE
MATERIALS
HYDRANT VERTICAL POST AND ARMS AS PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION CLASS
FLANGE BASE AS PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION CLASS
ARM ANSI B 16.5, S.O., FF, 150# (ASTM A-105).
LANDING VALVES SS 304 (IS:5290, TYPE-A)
HOSE CONNECTOR SS-304
CAP SS-304
CHAIN SS-304
TEST & INSPECTION
DIMENSION & WORKMANSHIP YES
HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE 21KG/CM2.G
FLOW YES, 900 lpm PER VALVE @ 7 KG/CM2g
PAINTING
VALVES, STAND POST & ITS ARMS OUTSIDE THE VALVE TOP EXCEPT THE FACE OF FLANGE AND THE
INSTANTANEOUS OUTLET SHALL BE PAINTED LUMINIOUS
YELLOW AS PER IS: 5. THE OUTSIDE OF INSTANTANEOUS OUTLET
SHALL BE HIGHLY POLISHED. THE HANDWHEEL SHALL BE
PAINTED BLACK. PAINTS SHALL CONFORM TO IS: 2932.
INTERNAL 3 COATS OF CHLORINATED RUBBER BASED RESIN PAINT OR
SURFACE ZINC CHROMATE PAINT, OVER 2 COATS OF RED OXIDE ZINC
CHROMATE PRIMER OR SINGLE COAT OF ALUMINIUM PAINT.
NOTES:
1. FOR DETAILED SPECIFICATION, REFER EIL SPEC. NO. 6-66-0035
DATA SHEET SHALL GOVERN.

NO DATE REVISION BY CHK. APP.
ENGINEERS INDIA LTD. LANDING VALVE B185-000-17- 0
NEW DELHI (FOR FRESH WATER SERVICE) 44-1624
Page 2583 of 3884

FOR B185-000-17-44-DS-1625
FIRST AID HOSE REEL Rev. 0
(FOR FRESH WATER SERVICE) Page 1 of 1

BANGLADESH
GENERAL
CODES IS: 884,
LOCATION OUTDOOR / INDOOR
TYPE SWINGING TYPE (WALL MOUNTED)
TEMPERATURE AMBIENT
PRESSURE MAX. 18.0 KG/CM2g
MIN. 7.0 KG/CM2g
DESIGN FEATURES
BODY OPERATION TYPE MANUAL.
MOVEMENT SWINGING (1800 ) WALL MOUNTING TYPE
INLET CONNECTION SIZE 3/4" (20mm)
OUTLET CONNECTION THREADS AS PER IS: 2643 (PART I).
PERFORMANCE NOZZEL PRESSURE 7.0 KG/CM2g.
FLOW RATE SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 24 lpm.
MIN. DISCHARGE SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 6m AT 7 KG/CM2g.
RANGE
MATERIALS
HUB M.S. IS: 513
SIDES M.S. IS: 513
SUPPORT FRAME M.S. IS: 513
SWIVEL JOINT SS-304
HOSE REEL TUBING BRAIDED RUBBER
STRAIGHT JET TYPE NOZZLE WITH BRANCH PIPE SS 304
AND COUPLING.
STOP VALVE IS: 778
TEST & INSPECTION
DIMENSION & WORKMANSHIP AS PER IS: 884
PERFORMANCE TEST AS PER IS: 884
HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE FOR HOSE 7 KG/CM2g FOR 5 MINUTES WITHOUT ANY LEAKAGE.
BURSTING PRESSURE FOR HOSE 30 KG/CM2g.
PAINTING
BODY (ABOVE GROUND) FIRE RED PAINT AS PER IS: 2932 (CONFORMING TO SHADE NO.
536 OF IS: 5), OVER 2 COATS OF RED OXIDE ZINC CHROMATE
PRIMER OR SINGLE COAT OF ALUMINIUM PAINT & SHALL BE
SUITABILITY FOR CORROSSIVE ENVIORNMENT.
NOTES:
1 . FOR DETAILED SPECIFICATION, REFER EIL SPEC. NO. 6-66-0018.
DATA SHEET SHALL BE GIVEN PREFERENCE.

REV. DATE REVISION BY CHK APP.
ENGINEERS INDIA LTD FIRST AID HOSE REEL B185-000-17- 0
NEW DELHI (FOR FRESH WATER SERVICE) 44-1625
Page 2584 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK & SUPPLY
(STATIC AND MACHINERY B185-000-80-43-SOW-9540
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 1
Page 1 of 13

(STATIC AND MACHINERY EQUIPMENT)
PIPELINE LAYING AND TERMINAL WORKS

FOR PART C
(Tender No. B185-000-83-41-MK-T-9540)
PROJECT : PIPELINE LAYING AND TERMINAL WORKS

FOR PART C
CLIENT : M/s NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED (NRL)
CONSULTANT : ENGINEERS INDIA LTD.
JOB NO. : B185
1 09.09.2019 REVISED & REISSUED WITH TENDER NJB/MKA RRS NK
0 23.08.2019 ISSUED WITH TENDER NJB/MKA RRS NK
Rev. Prepared Approved

Date Purpose Checked by
No by By
Format No. EIL-5241-1924 Rev.1 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2585 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 2 of 13
INDEX
SL. No. PART EQUIPMENT TYPE

1. M1 PACKAGED EQUIPMENT
2. M2 ROTATING EQUIPMENT
Page 2586 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 3 of 13
PART M1
(PACKAGED ITEMS)
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK AND SUPPLY FOR PACKAGED ITEMS
1.1 For items/packages/equipment under contractor’s scope of work & supply

Items listed under cl. No. 4.1 shall be supplied by the contractor.
a. The Design, engineering, manufacture, procurement of materials and bought out

components, fabrication, assembly at shop, inspection, testing at manufacturer's
works, painting at shop, packing, supply , including supply of all commissioning
spares, special tools and tackles if any, first fill of oil and lubricants, erection
material & documentation; complete site work including transportation from client's
store to work site, storage & handling at work site, assembly at site, erection,
installation, testing, touch-up painting, pre-commissioning, commissioning,
performance guarantee test run, handing over to client shall be in scope of
contractor, but not limited to the following:
b. All bought out items shall be procured from Owner/EIL approved vendors,
inspection at sub vendor's works.
c. Inspection and Testing at works shall be as per vendor’s approved QAP. Contractor
shall have to submit approved QAP and test certificates.
d. Surface preparation, protective coating and painting-Primer & Finish (Including
touch up at site) as per specification for field and shop painting attached with
tender.
e. Preparation and submission of drawings and documents as per Vendor Data
Requirement (B185-000-80-43-VDR-9540).
f. Spares required for two years’ normal operation and maintenance as
recommended by the OEM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) shall be listed by the
Contractor and quoted separately with item wise price list as per commercial part of
tender.
g. Supply of special tools and tackles (if any)
h. First fill of lubricants & consumables required for equipment during erection and
commissioning and subsequent filling (if required) upto handing over of equipment
to Client shall be supplied by the Contractor.
i. Earth connection.
j. Statutory approvals, if any.
k. Any item / component / facility not specifically mentioned but required as per good
engineering practice within package battery limit for safe, continuous, trouble free
operation of the plant is deemed to have been specified and shall be included in the
scope of Contractor, without any commercial implication to Owner.
Page 2587 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 4 of 13
l. Packages shall be procured by Contractor as a “Complete Package” only from

approved Vendor List. Procurement of individual equipment of the package by
breaking the “package” shall not be allowed.
m. All the materials in the contractor's scope of supply shall be procured from the
EIL/Owner's approved vendors. All necessary inspection and test certificates as per
enclosed specs. & applicable codes/ standards shall be arranged by the contractor
for these materials. Any subsequent test required during execution of work shall
also be arranged by the contractor.
1.2 For items/packages/equipment outside the contractor’s scope of supply (i.e. free
issue items):
Items listed in cl. no. 4.2 shall be issued as free issue materials by the owner. The
erection, installation, testing and commissioning of the above said items shall be in
the scope of the contractor. The intent of this specification is to specify detailed scope
of work, scope of supply and services for installation and commissioning as specified
below.
a. Unloading of the equipments/ packages, on receipt of same at site, from trucks/

trailers, transportation to Owner’s stores/ stockyard, stacking them properly in
stores/stockyard, labeling/tagging of the material.
b. Lifting & handling of Equipment / Packages at owner’s store.
c. Transportation of Equipment / Packages from owner’s store to site of installation,

Storage at work site.
d. Minor chipping of foundation (if required).
e. Placing, leveling, aligning, fixing and grouting (including supply of grouting
material) of Equipment / Skids on the foundations.
f. Installation of interconnecting piping, hook-up/connection of the
Equipment/Packages with the existing plant piping and control system. Field joints,
if any, in the loose supplied items shall also be in erection contractor’s scope.
g. Erection Equipments required for installation and commissioning of all items and
components at all elevations including arrangement and installation of temporary
scaffolding.
h. All labour, materials, facilities and supplies required during installation, testing and
commissioning.
i. In addition to the above, contractor may be called upon by Engineer-in-Charge to
do other jobs like rectification of defects etc. in the said packages, clean up of job
sites of all surplus material, debris, scrap & erection equipments etc.
2.0 ERECTION
2.1 Complete erection of packages / equipment & piping works etc. under supervision of
respective package / equipment supplier as per EIL standard specification no.6-76-0001.
The overall coordination shall be Contractor’s responsibility.
2.2 Equipment shall be erected with proper orientation on foundation.
Page 2588 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 5 of 13
2.3 Contractor shall install base plates, erect equipment, level and properly align with
necessary shims and wedges, wherever applicable.
2.4 Leveling and plumbness shall be approved by EIL and shall be checked using suitable
instruments as to be decided by Engineer-in-Charge before grouting / fixing. Finishing of
the foundation shall be carried out, wherever applicable.
2.5 Equipment shall be firmly bolted down to foundations, wherever applicable.
3.0 EXCLUSIONS
Following are excluded from Contractor’s scope:-
Civil Foundation
4.0 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES
The schedule of quantities is as given below. Dimensions and weights are approximate
only. Final data along with equipment manufacturer’s drawings will be furnished during
erection of equipment to the successful contractor.
4.1 Items under contractor’s scope of work & supply:
4.1.1 CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK:

Scope of Work & supply of chain pulley blocks with geared trolley:
Following listed Chain Pulley Blocks with geared trolleys shall be supplied by Contractor
as per attached EIL Std. Specification for Chain Pulley Block (6-61-0015) & SOR
document no. B185-000-83-41-MK-T-9540.
Chain Pulley Block shall be procured from EIL approved Vendor list attached elsewhere
in tender document.
Contractor’s Scope of work & supply for Chain Pulley Blocks are as follows:
Equipment to be Monorail
Capacity Area
Sl. maintained/ Height of beam TENDER
Nos. (SWL) classificatio
No. Handled lift (m) Size PART NO.
(Tons) n
(Location)
Basket filter
1. 1 (@ BPC RT) 3 7 * Hazardous C
Scrapper trap shed
2. 1 (@ BPC RT) 3 4 * Hazardous C
Note 1 – (*) Beam size for Chain pulley blocks with geared trolley shall be provided to successful
bidder during detail engineering stage..
Note-2-Height of lift may undergo minor changes of ±1.0 meter during detailed engineering, for
which no price implication will be entertained.
Page 2589 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 6 of 13
4.2 Packages/ Equipment to be erected: (Free issue item/ equipment)
4.2.1 BASKET FILTER(s):

Contractor’s Scope of work for Basket Filters are as follows:
Erection, Installation & commissioning of following Basket filters (Free issue by Owner):
Approx. TENDER PART

Sl. Basket filter Approx.Size NO.
Qty Weight Remarks
No Tag no. (DxL) (m)
(Each)
030-GN-BK- Installation @ RT
2. 101A/B
2 0.6 X 2.2 1 TON Parbatipur
C
Final GAD’s of filters shall be provided to successful contractor post award

during detail engineering.
4.2.2 SUMP TANK (UG) : (Free issue item/ equipment)
Contractor’s Scope of work for SUMP TANK (UG) are as follows:
Erection & Installation of following SUMP TANK (UG):
SUMP
QTY. POSITION SUPPORT OUTSIDE
TL TO OVERALL UNIT TENDER
S. NO TANK
(Nos.) TYPE DIA.(mm)
TL LENGTH ERECTION PART NO.
ITEM NO. (mm) (mm) WT. (Kg)
1. 030-TT- Horizont SADDLE 6600

00-101
1
al
2200 7700 18000 C
Final GAD’s of Sump Tank shall be provided to successful contractor post

award during detail engineering.
Notes:
1. For elevation of equipment from grade, refer to equipment layout attached elsewhere
in Tender.
2. Erection of columns/ vessels includes pipe davit (supplied loose by others).
3. Concrete & pedestal support shall be available inside the RCC -PIT.
Page 2590 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 7 of 13
5.0 LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
CONTRACTOR shall carry out all works strictly in accordance with the drawings/
documents/ specifications indicated in subsequent paragraphs.
S.No. Documents Doc. Number

1. Technical Check list B185-000-80-43-CL-9540
2. Letter of waiver B185-000-80-43-LW-9540
3. Job Specification ( Static & Machinery Equipment) B185-000-80-43-SP-9540
4. Vendor Data Requirement B185-000-80-43-VDR-9540
5. Standard Specification for CP block 6-61-0015
6. Specification for quality management system
6-78-0001
requirements from bidders.
7. Specification for documentation requirements from
6-78-0002
contractors.
8. Specification for documentation requirements from
6-78-0003
suppliers.
9. Standard specification for Health, Safety and
6-82-0001
Environment management at construction sites
10. Standard Specification for erection of equipment &
6-76-0001
Machinery
11. Instructions to vendor for site performance
7-76-0103
guarantee requirements for package units.
12. Schedule of Rates. Refer SOR of package
equipment & Static Equipment.
13. Vendor List (Static & Machinery Equipment) B185-000-80-43-VL-9540
Page 2591 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 8 of 13
PART M2
(ROTATING EQUIPMENT)
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK:

Contractor shall carry out erection and commissioning of the Rotating Equipment as listed
below in Table, which shall be given to the Contractor by the Purchaser as Free Issue Material
(FIM).
Sr. QTY QTY

EQPT. Type Item No. Service Unit
No. OP. SB
Tender part no. Part-C

Vertical Centrifugal Receipt Station at
1 030-PA-SM-101 SUMP TANK (UNDER GROUND) 1 0
Pump Parbatipur
DG Sets
Receipt Station at
2 (Envisage, refer ---- DG Set 1 0
Parbatipur
electrical specification)
Contractor shall carry out all activities as per the specification, datasheets, codes and
standards etc. as attached or as referred in the tender.
2.0 Schedule of Quantity (SOQ)
Sl. Item No./ Quantity (Working/ Type of Type Envisaged / Envisaged Envisaged /
No. Description Standby) Equip of Tentative / / Tentative Tentative /
Driver Estimated / Estimated
No. of units Estimated Overall
x Total Total Dimensions(L
Weight each weight x W x H)
equipment (kgs) (mm)(♠ ♦)
[(Main Eqpt.
+ Coupling +
Baseplate) +
(driver) +
Aux. Eqpt.
(Seal
plan/Piping)]
(kgs)
Tender part no. Part-C
1 030-PA-SM-101 Pump-Cent. E. 1.0 m x 1.0 m x
3000
1W Vert.(SPP) Motor 1 x 3000 3.2 m
2 ---- 1W (Envisage, refer
electrical 8000 4.0 m x 3.5 m x
specification) DG Sets ---- 1 x 8000 3.0 m
3.0 ERECTION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT:

3.1 The Contractor shall carefully study the vendor drawings, manuals and other data before
start of the job to ensure correct erection, alignment, pre-commissioning and commissioning.
3.2 Contractor shall carry out the erection of rotating equipment [all Equipment as per Schedule
of quantities] at the specified location on the properly designed & cast foundation as per
tender document.
3.3 However, there are some specific requirements w.r.t above which may be noted as under:
DG Engine or DG Sets:
Contractor shall carry out the following in addition to erection of the main equipment:
Page 2592 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 9 of 13
• Erection of Diesel-Day tank of each Diesel Engine at the designated location in addition
to erection of the Main Fire-Water Pump skid.
• Erection of Electrical & Instrumentation items i.e. Local Control Panel, Battery &
Charger etc. in addition to erection skid.
• Hooking-up of interconnecting Fuel piping between Diesel Day-tank and Engine skid as
per equipment manufacturer’s recommendation.
3.4 Contractor shall carry out the inter-connections at all interface points such as main process
and all utility connections.
3.5 The contractor shall use the proper specified/supplied handling equipment / lifting tools and
manufacturer recommended / safe handling procedure for erection of the equipment and
their driver and auxiliaries / accessories.
3.6 Temporary piping required for flushing, chemical cleaning, blowing shall be fabricated and
erected by the contractor. If not supplied by the vendor, temporary strainer for flushing shall
be arranged by contractor.
3.7 The contractor shall ensure that the lifting tools /accessories are attached to the equipment
at the place where ever it has been recommended by the manufacturer. In case the
manufacturer has not recommended the place of attaching the lifting tools / accessories on
the equipment, the contractor shall decide the place such that there is no damage is
occurred to the equipment or any part of that.
3.8 In case the equipment are received in knocked down condition, the various parts shall be
assembled as per manufacturer’s instructions. On the basis of the part list provided and the
handling procedures with the equipment, the Contractor shall make suitable arrangements
to move the assemblies and sub-assemblies to the site. All parts of the equipment shall be
thoroughly cleaned with solvents to remove protective compounds if any, before assembly.
3.9 The alignment between the driver and the driven equipment of the complete train shall be
rechecked and corrected as per the recommendations of the equipment manufacturers.
3.10 Contractor shall carry out the inter-connections at all interface points such as main process
and all utility connections, as per respective vendor drawings. All the piping i.e. either main
or auxiliary (for utilities) shall be cleaned (steam / water flushing) and then complete
connections shall be made. Hydro-test shall be carried out for all site fabricated piping.
3.11 Contractor shall ensure the presence of equipment manufacturer (Vendor) at site for
supervision of pre-commissioning and commissioning for all Rotating Equipment. Contractor
shall also ensure that equipment manufacturer (Vendor) checks the correctness of erection
of all rotating equipment prior to pre-commissioning.
3.12 Grouting shall be done by Contractor Grout material shall be supplied by the contractor. The
type of grout material shall be referred from vendor’s GA drawing/final documentation.
3.13 The contractor shall arrange for removal of all scrap and debris generated during erection
activities from the site before handing over the equipment for commissioning activities.
4.0 PRE-COMMISSIONING AND COMMISSIONING OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT
4.1 Contractor shall carry out the pre-commissioning and commissioning activity at site for all
Rotating Equipment. The Contractor shall arrange a team of skilled labor for the pre-
commissioning and commissioning of all equipment.
Page 2593 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 10 of 13
4.2 Contractor shall provide consumables, lubricants etc. required for start up, commissioning of
all equipment at site. The contractor shall carryout initial charge (for flushing/cleaning of
systems) of the lubricants. All the oil systems shall be run, flushed and the oils changed by
fresh charge. A consolidated list for all equipment shall be provided indicating type of
lubricant, grease, oil etc. giving specifications, quantities & brand name etc as
recommended by equipment OEMs.
4.3 C.W., Lube Oil, seal oil and all other auxiliary systems shall be run / operated at rated
pressures and the leaks shall be checked and corrected.
4.4 All strainers shall be installed after their cleanliness checked.
4.5 If some defects are noticed during commissioning and are attributed to Contractor, the
Contractor shall arrange to rectify to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
4.6 The Contractor will return all the unused material/items identifying as per the packing list to
client.
4.7 Unless indicated to the contract, all the rotating equipment will be subjected to trial runs for a
continuous operation of 72 hours. In case of motor driven rotating equipment, motors shall
be decoupled and turned over for testing and no load running of motors. After the no load
runs of motors are satisfactorily completed, the Contractor shall recouple the motors to the
rotating equipment and recheck the alignment. The trial run of the rotating equipment shall
be started only after the above is completed. Contractor shall provide, as part of his work,
necessary skilled personnel (excluding the operating personnel) for conducting the trial runs
round the clock during the trial runs period. Final inspection of bearing etc. shall be carried
out by the Contractor after the Machinery had gone through the trial run and defects if any,
shall be made good for rendering the rotating equipment ready for start-up. Defects due to
Contractor's fault noticed during trial runs shall be rectified by him.
5.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY/WORK

Contractor’s scope of supply shall include, but not limited to the following, for
each free issue equipment supplied by owner:
 All Consumables and material required for erection of the equipment such as welding
material, shims, grouting material etc.,
 All consumables required for pre-commissioning, commissioning, testing,
 First-fill of all equipment (consumables for first-fill to be provided by Purchaser/Owner),
 All tools & tackles for erection, lifting & handling of rotating equipment.

CONTRACTOR shall carry out all works strictly in accordance with the drawings/
documents/ specifications indicated in subsequent paragraphs.
Sl. Description Document No.

No.
1.0 Scope of Work / Supply
1.1 Scope of Supply / Work B185-000-80-43-SOW-9540
2.0 Job Specifications

2.1 Job Specification B185-000-80-43-SP-9540
Page 2594 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 11 of 13
Sl. Description Document No.

No.
3.0 Standard Specifications

3.1 Standard Specification for erection of equipment 6-76-0001
and machinery
3.2 Specification for Quality Management system 6-78-0001
requirements from Bidders
3.3 Specification for Documentation requirement 6-78-0002
from Contractors
4.0 Schedule Of Rates

4.1 Schedule of Rates (Rotating Equipment) Refer SOR
Page 2595 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
TECHNICAL CHECKLIST
(STATIC & MACHINERY B185-000-80-43-CL-9540
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 1 of 5
TECHNICAL CHECK LIST

(STATIC & MACHINERY EQUIPMENT)

FOR
PART C
(Tender No. B185-000-83-41-MK-T-9540)

FOR PART C
JOB NO. : B185
0 23.08.2019 ISSUED WITH TENDER NB RRS RRS

Rev. Prepared Checked Approved
Date Purpose
No by by by
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2596 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
TECHNICAL CHECKLIST
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 2 of 5
Contractor to note that contractor’s quotation shall be evaluated (technically) based on

contractor’s reply/confirmation to this technical checklist only. Contractor’s offer shall be
considered incomplete and may not be considered for technical evaluation by purchaser
if duly filled-in, signed & stamped check list is not submitted along with bid. Contractor is
required to give categorical reply to each point of this technical checklist, so that contractor’s
offer can be properly evaluated.
Contractor's reply "Not Confirmed" is not warranted and may lead to technical rejection of their
bid. However, Contractor may provide certain clarification, incase absolutely necessary, without
deviating to bid requirement. Written confirmation shall have precedence over any clarification
whatsoever.
Sl. Description Contractor’s CLARIFICATION
No. answer (If Any)
(Confirmed / Not
Confirmed)
1. Please note that this is a “Zero deviation” bid.

Hence any deviation to the Tender specification
is not acceptable. Contractor to submit all their
clarification during the PRE-BID query stage.
No further deviation/ clarifications shall be
allowed in the technical offer. Contractor to
confirm that there is no technical deviation in
their offer w.r.t. the Tender/ agreements in
PRE-BID query reply.
2. Confirm that the contractor has quoted for the
total scope of supply & services as per Tender
specification and attachments. Any deviation
to this requirement may lead to the bid
being considered as incomplete and liable
for rejection.
3. Contractor to confirm categorical compliance to
all clauses of Specifications, Data Sheets and
other requirements of bid document.
4. Contractor to note that data sheet,

Specifications and other technical details
submitted with bid shall be retained for
information only.
Contractor’s documents/ drawings shall be

reviewed as per the “Vendor Data
Requirement” during post order stage for
compliance with bid specification requirement.
Confirm compliance.
5. Contractor to note that, if any comment arises
during detail engineering from EIL/Client (as
per contract), same shall be incorporated by
contractor without any time and price
implication and approval of vendor’s
documents/drawings during detail engineering
are subject to final approval from EIL/Client.
Confirm compliance.
Page 2597 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
TECHNICAL CHECKLIST
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 3 of 5
Sl. Description Contractor’s CLARIFICATION

No. answer (If Any)
(Confirmed / Not
Confirmed)
6. Confirm that Special Tools and Tackles as

required for normal operation and maintenance
have been included by the contractor within the
lump sum price of the main equipment. List
shall be furnished during detailed
engineering stage. (applicable for CP block)
7. Confirm that commissioning spares have
been quoted and price of the same is included
in the lumpsum price of the main
equipment. (applicable for CP block)
8. Contractor to confirm that in case during
commissioning, additional spares is required
over and above the quoted commissioning
spares, and then the same shall be supplied by
contractor without any commercial implication/
i.e. free of charge. (applicable for CP block)
9. Contractor to confirm that list of recommended
spares for two (2) years’ normal operation &
maintenance with itemized price along with
quantity as per format attached shall be
furnished along with the bid. Owner shall order
these spares separately.
Also confirm that contractor has furnished list

of recommended two years’ spares along with
the bid as per format attached as Annexure- 1
of this document.
10. Confirm that the Inspection & Testing
requirements as specified in Tender shall be
complied.
11. Confirm that all Drawings / Data required to be
submitted with bid as per “Vendor Data
Requirement (Doc. No. B185-000-80-43-VDR-
9540) have been included in the Contractor’s
proposal.
___________ _________________________________
Contractor’s Seal Signature of Authorized Representative
Page 2598 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
TECHNICAL CHECKLIST
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 4 of 5
Annexure-1
Format for List of Two years recommended Spares (applicable for CP
block, IF ANY)
S. No. Tag No. TWO YEARS SPARES Quantity
1.
Notes:
1. Contractor shall submit duly filled-up and signed copy of this Annexure-1 along with their
offer.
______________________ ___________________________________
Contractor’s Seal with date Signature of Authorised Representative
Page 2599 of 3884

JOB SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT No.
(STATIC AND MACHINERY B185-000-80-43-SP-9540
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 1 of 6
JOB SPECIFICATION

FOR PART C
(Tender No. B185-000-83-41-ME-T-9540)

FOR PART C
JOB NO. : B185
0 23.08.2019 Issued with Tender NJB/MKA RRS NK

Date Purpose
No by by By
Page 2600 of 3884
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 2 of 6
INDEX
SL. No. PART EQUIPMENT TYPE

1. M1 PACKAGED EQUIPMENT
2. M2 ROTATING EQUIPMENT
Page 2601 of 3884
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 3 of 6
PART M1
(PACKAGED EQUIPMENT)
1. General considerations:
Specific requirements and guidelines pertaining to individual equipment and system

are listed in subsequent sections; however, the following general considerations have
to be kept in view for all items formulating their specifications and procurement
engineering activities:
- Standardization of components wherever feasible.
- Couplings, gears and exposed rotating parts shall be provided with adequate
guards of non-sparking type, Drive belts, if used, shall be antistatic type.
- Electrical, Instrumentation and controls wherever applicable for the equipment and
packages, shall be engineered as per the respective sections, described in the Bid
package.
- Painting specifications, Painting shall be done as per painting specification

attached elsewhere in the Tender Document for all piping/equipment.
- All equipment, electrical, instrumentation and controls shall be suitable for

installation as per respective electrical area classifications specified elsewhere in
bid package.
- All equipment/packages supplied shall be complete in every respect, ready for

installation and operation. It is not intent of Client to specify every piece of
equipment / item, therefore any item not specifically mentioned in this specification
but required as per good engineering practice and safe and trouble free operation
of the system shall be deemed to have been specified by the Client and shall be
included in contractor's scope of supply &services.
- “Vendor” shall be read as “Bidder” till placement of order.
2. CONFLICT
In the event of conflict between various documents forming a part of this tender, the
following order of precedence shall prevail:
- Scope of work & Supply.

- Job specification
- Equipment data sheets.
- Enclosed EIL standard specification.
- National/international codes/standards.
- Vendor’s standards.
Page 2602 of 3884
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 4 of 6
3. INSPECTION & TESTING
a) The Inspection and testing shall be carried out at Vendor’s/sub -Vendor’s works by Client/
his authorized inspection agency as per the applicable codes and standards and the
approved Quality Assurance Plan (QAP).
b) QAPs (Quality Assurance Plans) shall be drawn by Vendor/sub-Vendor after award of

order and shall be submitted for EIL/Client’s review before taking up fabrication/assembly.
QAPs shall clearly mark the hold points due to Client. Acceptance/rejection criteria shall
be clearly defined. Any or all the tests may, at the Client’s option, be witnessed by the
Client or it’s authorized representative. However, such Inspections & Testing witnessed by
Client/Client’s authorized representative shall be regarded as check-up and in no way
absolve the main Vendor of his responsibility.
c) Inspection shall be carried by Client / their authorised representative.
4. SPARE PARTS
4.1. Recommended Spares
Vendor shall furnish list of recommended spares for two (2) years normal operation and
maintenance of each equipment with itemized price list along with the Bid.
4.2. Commissioning Spares
Vendor shall supply adequate quantity of commissioning spares so as to ensure that

commissioning of the system is not hampered for shortage of commissioning spares.
Vendor shall include the cost of the commissioning spares in the lump sum quoted price.
If any spare, over and above the supplied commissioning spares is required during
commissioning, the same shall be supplied by Vendor without any price or time
implication. In case during commissioning any spare is used from recommended spares
for 2 (two) years operation and maintenance, the same shall be replaced free of cost
within a reasonable period of time. All spares parts shall be wrapped and packaged so
that they are preserved in original as-new condition, under normal conditions of storage to
be anticipated in India, and shall be properly tagged and coded so that later identification
for intended equipment usage will be facilitated. The two years’ “recommended spares”
and “commissioning spares” shall be packaged separately and clearly marked as “Spare
Parts” and “Commissioning Spares” respectively.
5. SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES
The Vendor shall provide a set of new and unused special tools and tackles, if required
for day to day operation and maintenance of the offered equipment / system. The list of
such tools and tackles shall be furnished along with the bid. Vendor shall include the
cost of the special tools and tackles in lump sum quoted price in main equipment.
6. HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT
6.1. Vendor shall comply the requirements of Health safety and environment (HSE) as per
following documents attached during site work.
6.2. Standard specification for Health, Safety and Environment management at construction
sites (6-82-0001).
Page 2603 of 3884
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 5 of 6
PART M2
(ROTATING EQUIPMENT)
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification along-with EIL standard specification (6-76-0001) defines the minimum requirements
w.r.t mechanical erection and pre-commissioning work related to Rotating Equipment referred to in this
tender document. All works and clauses of this document shall be applicable to all three Parts as above
unless specifically mentioned otherwise.
The term Rotating Equipment covers all Driven equipments along with their respective drivers including
accessories and auxiliary systems as required for the driver/driven equipment covered in this tender
document.
2.0 APPLICABLE DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES:
2.1 The following Standard Specifications Enclosed in the tender document shall be referred for additional
requirements:
Sl. Standard
Standard Specification Description
No. Specification No.
1. Std. Spec. for erection of equipment and machinery 6-76-0001
2. Std. Spec. for Quality Management system requirements
6-78-0001
from Bidders
3. Std. Spec. for Documentation requirement from Contractors 6-78-0002
4. Std. Spec. for Documentation requirement from Suppliers 6-78-0003
2.2 The Owner will provide the following documents, which shall be followed for mechanical erection of
Rotating Equipment.
(a). General Arrangement drawings with outline dimensions including layout and foundation details.
(b). Manufacturer's instruction manuals/erection drawings as available from them.
3.0 PREPARATION FOR MECHANICAL ERECTION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT:
3.1 For large and critical equipment vendor’s representatives shall be present at site on the equipment arrival
dates. He shall help the Engineer-in-Charge at site and the Mechanical Contractor to identify the
boxes/packing(s) received with respect to the packing list. He shall help in identifying every item as per the
packing list sent by the vendor. The entire material shall be issued to the Contractor by the Engineer-in-
Charge. The Contractor will return all the unused material/items identifying as per the packing list to
Engineer-in-Charge to store at the Owner’s Stores.
3.2 The Contractor shall carefully study the vendor drawings, manuals and other data before start of the job to
ensure correct erection, alignment and commissioning.
3.3 In case any of the Rotating Equipment is received in knocked down condition, the various parts shall be
assembled as per the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge and as per manufacturer’s instructions. All
parts of the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned with solvents to remove protective compounds if any,
before assembly.
3.4 All protective and safety guards shall be installed and all foundation bolts shall be checked before starting
the trial runs.
4.0 PRECOMMISSIONING WORK:
4.1 All the piping i.e. either main or auxiliary (for utilities) shall be cleaned, flushed and then connections
completed or manpower as required for this purpose shall be provided by the Contractor depending on the
contract / P.O. All site fabricated piping shall be hydrotested.
4.2 Very initial charge of the lubricants shall be done by the contractor. All the oil systems are run, flushed and
the oils are changed by other fresh charge. Lubricants shall always be supplied by the Owner, including the
initial charge.
4.3 Lube Oil and all other auxiliary systems shall be run / operated at rated pressures and the leaks shall be
checked and corrected.
Page 2604 of 3884
EQUIPMENT) Rev. 0
Page 6 of 6
4.4 All temporary strainers shall be installed and their cleanliness checked.
5.0 HANDING OVER FOR COMMISSIONING:
5.1 After the mechanical completion while handing over to the client or to the commissioning agency, the
Contractor shall provide a list of construction defects, rectified by them. The Owner or commissioning
agency will check the Contractor’s work before taking over.
5.2 The Contractor shall also provide a team of skilled labour to client or to the commissioning agency during
their commissioning period if requisitioned by them.
5.3 If some defects are noticed during commissioning and are attributed to Contractor, the Contractor shall
arrange to rectify same to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 2605 of 3884
Document No.
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS B185-000-80-43-VDR-9540
FOR Rev. 0
SME Page 1 of 2
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS

FOR
SME
0 26-AUG-2019 ISSUED WITH TENDER NJB- RRS RRS

Rev. Date Purpose Prepared by Checked by Approved by
No.
Format No. EIL-1642-1924 Rev.1 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2606 of 3884

Document No.
FOR Rev. 0
SME Page 2 of 2
The following drawings/documents marked " " shall be furnished by the bidder.
POST ORDER
S. WITH WITH
N DESCRIPTION FOR FOR DATA REMARKS
BID
O. REVIEW RECORD BOOK
(FINAL)
1. Document Control Index
2. Filled in Data Sheet & GA Drawing
3. List of commissioning spares
4. List of Special Tools & Tackles, if any
5. Installation, operation & maintenance manuals
containing all certified drawings & documents
6. Quality Assurance Plan
7. Utility Consumption figures
8. List of recommended spare parts for 2(two)
years normal operation and maintenance (with
itemized price)
9. Filled in Technical check list & letter of waiver
10. Test Certificates as per approved QAP @
Notes :
1. "TICK" denotes applicability.
2. Post order, drawing / document review shall commence only after approval of Document Control Index (DCI).
3. All post order documents shall be submitted / approved through EIL eDMS portal.
4. Final documentation shall be submitted in hard copy (Six prints) and soft ( two CDs/DVDs ) in addition to
submission through EIL eDMS.
5. Refer - 6-78-0001: Specification for quality management system from Bidders.
6. Refer - 6-78-0002: Specification for documentation requirements from Contractors.
7. Refer - 6-78-0003: Specification for documentation requirement from Suppliers.
8. All drawings & documents shall be submitted in A4 or A3 paper sizes. Documents in higher paper size shall
be submitted in exceptional circumstances or as indicated in the MR/Tender.
9. Post order- The schedule of drawing / data submission shall be mutually agreed between EIL & the bidder /
contractor / supplier during finalization of Document Control Index (DCI).
10. "@" indicates submission of documents to Inspection Agency.
11. Bill of Material shall form part of the respective drawing.
12. Also refer other department's VDR :-
13. Electrical
Page 2607 of 3884

ei ENGINEERS FOR
Ogeir EVreg INDIA LIMITED
CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK
6-61-0015 Rev. 5
RAM 217.17 MI JVMSI (A Govt of India Undenak.n9) Page 1 of 6
. r.
■11•711011-q -q71§11' KIM IzR

1-111ch i ci

CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK
CliktiolA0- J
Ml e-4. 1\frjr
5 14/12/16 REVISED AND REISSUED AK PB
' KC PLC/ RN
4 01/08/12 REVISED AND REISSUED SPC PB AKN DM
3 01/06/10 REVISED AND REISSUED SPC PB MK/DM ND
2 31/07/06 REVISED AND REISSUED PPP AK SMA VJN
1 10/04/99 REVISED AND REISSUED YKS MST NN AS

ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RCPC
0 22/06/90 GVGC NN KNP
(RECOMPOSED IN AUGUST 1995)
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 2608 of 3884

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0015 Rev. 5
(A Goof of India Undertaking)
CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
QA : Quality Assurance
Machinery Equipment Standards Committee
Convenor : Mr. R.K. Trivedi
Members: Mr. P. Bhattacharjee

Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anukul Mandal
Mr. Shishupal Choudhary
Mr. R. R. Shrivastava
Mr. J.S. Duggal
Mr. K.C. Paikar
Mr. A. Natarajan
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
Page 2609 of 3884

$50-zeMENGINEIRS
- INDIA UNITED
g.artaiileg w FOR 6-61-0015 Rev. 5
1.41414 PRO4 ....10wiso IA Go. of InOn Undettaiung)
Contents
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS 4
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 4
4.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING 5
5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING 6
6.0 PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION 6
7.0 SPARE PARTS 6
Page 2610 of 3884

00z:1E4M, ENGINEERS
ligar tagteg W.INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0015 Rev. 5
warn *wow,.
„memo 0, Goo 01 ,o0o UNIerta.g)
1.0 GENERAL
This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the manufacturer shall
design, manufacture, test and supply the Chain Pulley Block with or without trolley.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1 This standard is based on following Indian Standard, and the standards referred therein,
which shall be deemed to be part of this standard.
IS - 3832 Hand operated Chain Pulley Blocks- Specification.
Latest revision of the above-mentioned standard as on the date of enquiry shall be applicable.
2.2 Other international standards may also be acceptable subject to their being equivalent or
superior with prior approval of purchaser.
2.3 For provisions not covered by the above codes & standards, applicable engineering practices
& norms shall govern.
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Technical requirements of Chain Pulley Block shall be as per Indian standards referred in
clause 2.1 above, subject to the following additions, deletions and modifications:
3.1 Addition / Deletion / Modification to IS 3832: 2005 (Reaffirmed 2015)
i) Clause no. 4.2.1 (Modification): Mechanism class 2 shall be considered for design of
chain pulley Block unless otherwise specified in the data sheet.
ii) Clause no. 5.0 (Addition): Chain Pulley Block shall be detachable type suitable for
mounting on geared trolleys of the same ratings/capacities, unless otherwise specified
in job specification/data sheet.
iii) Clause no. 5.1 (Addition): The frame shall be built from steel plates with
bolted/welded construction.
iv) Clause no. 5.2 (Addition): All gears shall be machine cut.
v) Clause no. 5.5 (Modification): Only anti friction bearing shall be used. Bearing shall
have L 10 life of minimum 25000 hrs. Bearings shall be of SKF/FAG/ NTN make only.
vi) Clause no. 5.6 (Modification): The block shall be provided with adequate facilities for
lubrication and same shall be clearly indicated in the maintenance manual.
vii) Clause no. 5.7.1(Addition): Hook(s) (top -if applicable and bottom) shall be provided
with safety latches to prevent accidental unhooking unless otherwise stated.
viii) Clause no. 5.7.1.2 (Modification): First line to be modified as "Bottom hook shall be
provided with thrust bearing to enable it to rotate freely under load so as to prevent
twisting of the load chain.
Page 2611 of 3884

051Weift
. ENGINEERS
4fgeg WegViifII IA ED FOR 6-61-0015 Rev. 5
MR, PRIEDers.,1121., IA Go. d loft Undertalung
ix) Clause no. 5.10.3 (Modification): The length of hand chain shall be such that the
lowest point of the suspended loop shall be 400 mm (maximum) above operating
level.
x) Clause no. 5.11 (Addition): The trolley for the chain pulley block shall be geared type,
fabricated construction, 4 wheeled, driven by hand chain and shall have provision for
mounting the chain pulley block. Trolley shall be designed to suit the suitable
monorail beam size and the hoisting capacity.
xi) Clause no. 11.1 (Addition): Following shall also be marked on Chain Pulley block:
a) Tag number.
b) "Non Sparking Type" on chain pulley block suitable for hazardous area
classification.
3.2 For offshore applications, load, hand and trolley chains shall be galvanized.
3.3 Special Requirements for Hazardous Area Chain Pulley Block
The materials for non-lubricated rubbing parts shall be of non-sparking type (non- ferrous).
The suggested materials for such components are as follows:
Part/Component Material of Construction
A Lifting Mechanism
Ratchet wheel, chain guides Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze (IS -

305)/ High Tensile Brass (IS - 304)
Hand chain wheel Solid construction of Aluminium Bronze/ High

Tensile Brass (IS- 304)/ Phosphor Bronze (IS-
28)
Load chain wheel Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze (IS -

305)/ High Tensile Brass (IS - 304)
Hook (Top & bottom) Bronze coated Forged Steel / bronze coated
Forged alloy Steel/Forged Stainless Steel.
B Trolley Mechanism
Hand chain wheel guides Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze (IS-

305)/ High Tensile Brass (IS-304)/ Phosphor
Bronze (IS-28)
Hand chain wheel Solid construction of Aluminium Bronze (IS-

305)/ High Tensile Brass (IS-304)/ Phosphor
Bronze (IS-28)
Ungeared and geared wheels Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze (IS -

305)/ High Tensile Brass (IS - 304) or tyre of
Aluminium Bronze (IS-305)/ High Tensile
Brass (IS-304) shrunk fitted on core wheel of
C55Mn75.
4.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING
4.1 Equipment shall be subjected to stagewise expediting, inspection and testing at

vendor's/subvendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall
Page 2612 of 3884

5ittaziel-IkENONEERS
Og taiReg W INDIA LIMITED
A2W701AAP.) (A Go. d MO. Undettaidow
FOR
CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK
6-61-0015 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 6
submit Quality Assurance (QA) procedures before commencement of fabrication. Approved

QA procedures shall form the basis for equipment inspection.
4.2 Testing at Works
4.2.1 Vendor shall perform operational Proof Test, as a minimum, necessary to ensure that the
material and workmanship conform to the requirement of Clause 9.2 of IS- 3832.
4.2.2 The trolley (if applicable) shall be tested for smooth operation under loaded condition.
4.2.3 Certificate of test and examination shall be issued with all the chain pulley blocks as
specified in clause 10.2 of IS — 3832.
4.2.4 Any or all the tests, at purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by purchaser/its authorized
inspection agency. However, such inspection shall be regarded as check-up and in no way
absolve the vendor of his responsibility.
5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING
5.1 Surface preparation and painting shall be done as per vendor's standard painting suitable for
corrosive industrial environment, unless otherwise specified in the Job Specification.
5.2 Stainless steel surfaces, both inside and outside, shall be pickled and passivated.
5.3 Machined and bearing surfaces shall be protected with varnish or thick coat of grease.
6.0 PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION
6.1 All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment shall
be properly packed to provide adequate protection during shipment. All assemblies shall be
properly match marked for site erection.
6.2 Attachments, spare parts of the equipment and small items shall be packed separately in
wooden-cases. Each item shall be appropriately tagged with identification of main
equipment, item denomination and reference number of the respective assembly drawing
6.3 Detailed packing list in water-proof envelope shall be inserted in the package together with
equipment.
6.4 Each equipment shall have an identification plate giving salient equipment data, make, year
of manufacture, equipment number, name of manufacturer etc.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
7.1 Vendor shall submit recommended list of spare parts with recommended quantities and
itemised prices for first two years of operation of the equipment. Proper coding and
referencing of spare parts shall be done so that later identification with appropriate equipment
will be facilitated.
7.2 Recommended spares and their quantities shall take into account related factors of equipment
reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost of parts and
availability of vendor's service facilities around the proposed location of equipment.
Page 2613 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
ligar tif5teg
AT 1 JW.11
INDIA LIMITED
& MACHINERY
(Men eve:me (A Govt of India Undeltaking) Page 1 of 22
34t-chi v4- 4* mrtwr

t°,' RR*" iPaqr
FOR
ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT &
MACHINERY
4 30.03.2019 Reaffirmed & Reissued
3 21.01.2013 Revised & Reissued
2 03.09.2008 Revised & Reissued DM PKR AA VC
1 30.05.2008 Revised & Reissued DM PKR AA VC
0 25.04.2001 Issued as Standard Specification DM AM MR MI

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 2614 of 3884

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
oaem tmeg INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4

tneforefoiJoudit (A Govt of India Undenaking)
MACHINERY Page 2 of 22
Abbreviations:
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

EC Erection Contractor
EIC Engineer-in-charge
ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
GAD General Arrangement Drawing
IS Indian Standard
NDT Non Destructive Testing
SS Stainless Steel
General Engineering Standards Committee
Convenor : Ms R Priyamvada
Members : Mr BR Bhogal (Elect.)

Mr Rajan Srivastava (Strl.)
Mr RB Bhutda (EWS)
Mr Amrendra Kumar (Piping)
Ms NP Guha (Projects)
Mr Amit Prakash (FEM)
Mr KJ Harinarayanan (SME)
Mr VK Tonger (Process-1)
Mr Satyabrata Biswas (Process-2)
Page 2615 of 3884

~umotzl~I ENGINEERS
Oge.II Eiffleg INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
INV?,Man a% aqam) (A Goof of Ind(0 Undertaking) MACHINERY Page 3 of 22
CONTENTS
1.0 SPECIFICATION FOR ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY 4
2.0 ERECTION OF COLUMNS, TANKS, VESSELS AND DRUMS ETC. 5
3.0 ERECTION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 8
4.0 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER EQUIPMENT 10
5.0 ERECTION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT 16
6.0 EQUIPMENT GROUTING 19
7.0 REFERENCE EIL STANDARDS/ SPECIFICATIONS 22
Page 2616 of 3884

ENGINEERS
5Igar fafas
Wired virottentlatorn)
INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
IA Govt at India Undertalong)
1.0 SPECIFICATION FOR ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY
1.1 Scope
This specification covers technical requirements for erection of all static and rotating
equipment by erection contractor at site. This specification is applicable for all the erection
tenders operated by EIL.
1.2 General
1.2.1 All necessary handling equipments, tools, tackles and precision instruments for carrying out
the works as specified shall be provided by the Erection Contractor (EC) at his cost. EC must
provide all tools and gauges for erection and alignment. Special tools, if any, received as part
of machinery, will be given to EC for erection purposes, which shall be returned in good
condition after use. Suitable deductions will be made by the Engineer-in-Charge (EIC) in case
of loss or damage of the special tools. The value of such loss or damage will be decided by
the EIC and EC shall be bound by such a decision.
1.2.2 Equipment Manufacturer's recommendations regarding preservation during storage at site and
detailed specifications for the installation alongwith layout drawings, general
arrangement/equipment outline drawings and sub-assembly drawings of the various equipment
and machinery will be provided to EC during the performance of work. The requirements
stipulated in these shall be fulfilled by EC in addition to what is stated in this specification.
Erection shall be carried out as per the instructions and supervision of Machinery
manufacturer's representative, wherever such supervisory services are applicable.
1.2.3 All the items of work covered in the tender shall be carried out as per this Specification and
other details to be furnished to EC. However, EIC reserves the right to give
additional/alternative specifications and instructions, at any time, for execution of any
particular work and EC shall execute such works in accordance with such
additional/alternative specifications and instructions of the EIC. Such a step taken by the EIC
shall not constitute a breach of the contract.
1.3 Preparation for Erection
1.3.1 EC shall be responsible for organising the lifting of the equipment in the proper sequence, so
that orderly progress of the work is ensured and access routes for erecting the other equipment
are kept open.
Rigging procedure for all the major lifts (above 10 MT) and at maximum crane capacity shall
be submitted by EC for the approval of EIC. However, approval to rigging procedure
proposed by EC shall not relieve EC from his responsibility in following the proper
lifting/erection methods on ensuring orderly.
1.3.2 Orientation of all foundations, elevations, length and disposition of anchor bolts and diameter
of holes in the supports saddles shall be checked by EC, well in advance. Minor rectifications
including chipping of foundations as the case may be, shall be carried out by EC after
obtaining prior approval of EIC. EC shall also be provided with the necessary structural
drawings and piping layouts etc. wherever required for reference. EC shall crosscheck such
piping and structural drawings with actual construction at site and in case of any mismatch
inform the EIC before taking up the erection.
Page 2617 of 3884

O eliazie ENGINEERS
Ogell acs® INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
(A Govt of India Undenak.n9)
1.3.3 During the performance of the work, EC shall keep structures, materials or equipments
adequately braced by guys, struts or otherwise approved means which shall be supplied and
installed by EC as required till the installation work is satisfactorily completed. Such guys,
shoring, bracing, strutting, planking supports etc. shall not interfere with the work of other
agencies and shall not damage or cause distortion to other works executed by him or other
agencies.
2.0 ERECTION OF COLUMNS, TANKS, VESSELS AND DRUMS ETC.
2.1 Scope of work of Erection Contractor
(a) Preparation of erection scheme and rigging procedure and obtaining its approval from
EIC wherever necessary.
(b) Withdrawal of equipments from Owner's storage point, checking and reporting its
conditions, transporting the same to EC's stores of work site including unloading etc.
(c) Erection on foundations furnished by Owner including aligning, levelling and grouting.
(d) Assembly and fixing of demisters, grids, internal distributors and other internal fittings in
Columns, Vessels etc.
(e) Filling of Columns, Reactors, Vessels/ Drums etc. with Raschig rings, supporting
elements, sand, concrete etc. as required.
(f) Welding of washers for equipments, erection of pipe davit & minor welding of their parts
as per specifications and instruction of EIC.
(g) Assembly & erection of Agitator (Mixer) along with drive unit (Motor) including all
accessories for vessels/drums/reactors (wherever indicated) as per specification drawings
& instructions of EIC.
(h) Flushing, cleaning and drying of Columns, Vessels/Drums etc.
(i) Completing the equipments in all respects for commissioning the plant as per drawings,
specifications & instructions of EIC.
(j) Any modification in the erected Columns, Reactors, Vessels/Drums to the complete
satisfaction of EIC.
2.2 General Conditions of Erection
2.2.1 Unless otherwise specified Columns, Vessels, Drums etc. will be generally supplied to the
Erection Contractor in single piece and EC will not be required to carry out any assembly or
welding. In case column is supplied in multiple pieces and erection of the equipment is not
possible in single piece, EC shall be responsible for lifting the pieces, for aligning, welding
and hydrotest etc. in vertical position under the supervision of column Supplier (Fabricator).
However, EIC shall be responsible for coordination between Erection Contractor &
Fabricator. The schedule of quantities (SOQ) for equipment erection enclosed with the tender
document outlines details of each equipment such as diameter, overall height, type of support
(saddle/skirt/leg/bracket), position (horizontal or vertical) and approximate erection weight
etc. However the erection elevation and location of equipment shall be as per the piping
layout drawing enclosed with the tender.
Page 2618 of 3884

ENGINEERS
farieg INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
I Men soeove P1130115'A) (A Govt 01 Ind. unowtasungi MACHINERY Page 6 of 22
2.2.2 Rigging procedures and erection schemes for all the heavy lifts weighing 10 MT & above
shall be prepared by EC and got approved by EIC. Approval by EIC shall not relieve EC of
his responsibilities. The details to be submitted will include the location of equipment from
where it will be lifted, location of crane(s), details of crane(s) (like configuration, boom
length, operating radius, boom point elevation, clearance underside the boom and the
equipment, lifting capacity, counter weights to be deployed, holds on any neighbouring
foundations, structures, equipments etc.), the load chart of the crane(s), design of the lifting
tackles like spreader beam, D-shackles, wire rope slings etc. Unless the erection scheme and
rigging procedures are approved by EIC, erection of such equipments shall not be undertaken
in any case by EC.
2.2.3 Before starting the erection of Columns, Vessels etc., top surface of the foundations is to be
cleared/chipped, roughened to obtain proper bond, while grouting. Also the sleeves are to be
cleaned before erecting the equipments. Line (orientation) and levels are to be marked on all
the foundations to facilitate checking of alignment.
EC shall also check the correct elevation and orientation of civil, structural foundations, before
proceeding with the erection work. Discrepancy, if any, shall be brought to the notice of EIC.
However, minor rectifications and chipping of foundations upto a thickness of 15 mm in
foundation height shall be carried out at no extra cost, by the EC. EC shall be responsible for
supply of levelling plates, (if required) and shall carry out levelling of equipment under the
directions of EIC.
2.2.4 While handling, transporting or erecting the equipments, care shall be taken not to damage the
nozzles, instrument connections, structural clips etc. EC shall also take care of the orientation
of the nozzles and other connections of the equipments while erecting the same and ensure
compliance with the drawings and specifications supplied. Discrepancy, if any, in the
number/orientation of the nozzles, cleats etc. should be brought to the notice of the EIC before
actual erection is started.
2.2.5 Verticality of the Columns, ReactorsNessels shall be checked with theodolites. After erection
the equipment shall be levelled and properly aligned with necessary shims and wedges
supplied by EC, at his cost. After the level, alignment and verticality etc. are checked and
approved by EIC, EC shall carry out grouting.
2.2.6 EC shall produce recent test certificates of the slings which they will be using for erection
work. However, retesting of the slings shall be done at site by EC at his cost, as and when
required by EIC. The weights of test loads shall be as per IS-807. The test loads shall be
supplied by EC at his cost. Tested slings will be punched for test loads and date of testing as
directed by EIC.
2.2.7 EC shall also carry out the assembly, erection, levelling and alignment of all types of weir
plates, baffles, distributors, collectors, spray nozzles, demisters, grids and other internal
fittings etc. Work shall be carried out as per manufacturer's standards/specifications which
shall be made available to EC at the time of erection. Raschig rings, molecular sieves, intalax
saddles packing and other types of tower packings such as sand, catalyst etc. and SS wire
mesh shall be loaded into sections of Vessels, Columns as per specifications and drawings.
Details for internals to be installed by EC shall be as per separate schedule of quantities
enclosed with the tender document. All packings except clay and lime stone shall be washed
with water before filling. Bottom layers, if required, shall be arranged as directed and random
filling shall be done afterwards with equipment filled with water. Installation of packings,
shall be done only after flushing and cleaning of ColumnsNessels and completed to the
satisfaction of EIC.
Page 2619 of 3884

ENGINEERS
Oge..11 taPeg INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
(A Govt of main Untiertakong)
2.2.8 EC shall carry out minor welding for attachment of prefabricated pipe davit parts such as rain
covers, handles etc. with pipe davit, during or after erection of the same as per the
manufacturer's specifications, at no extra cost to the Owner.
2.2.9 EC shall execute erection of wooden pillow for saddle support for cold horizontal vessels
wherever necessary as indicated on the drawings/ EIL STD 7-12-0003 and as per the
instructions of EIC.
2.2.10 EC shall execute assembly & erection of agitator/mixer along with drive unit including all
accessories as per supplier's instructions, specification drawings & instructions of EIC.
2.3 Flushing & Cleaning of Columns, Vessels, Drums etc.
2.3.1 After the erection, alignment and grouting of these equipments are complete, flushing and
cleaning shall be carried out by EC as per specifications and instructions of EIC.
2.3.2 After flushing, cleaning and draining, equipments shall be dried by compressed air at the
pressure and for duration decided by the EIC. The Vessel interior shall be thoroughly
inspected to the complete satisfaction of EIC before it is finally boxed up. Boxing up of
manholes and handholes shall be leak proof. All joints which need remaking, shall be remade.
Compressed air for drying shall be arranged by EC.
2.4 Inspection and Acceptance Limits for Level and Alignment
2.4.1 Co-ordinates of foundations/supporting structures/mounting holes etc. shall be checked with

respect to the plot plans by EC.
2.4.2 Before equipments are placed on foundations, orientations shall be checked with respect to
piping drawings.
2.4.3 When equipments are firmly bolted down but prior to grouting, verticality of all the Columns,
vertical vessels etc. shall be checked by using theodolite. Tolerances for equipment after
erection shall be as per EIL Standard 7-12-0001. The allowable deviation from plumb line
shall be 1 mm per metre height, subject to maximum of 15 mm unless otherwise stated on the
drawings.
2.4.4 Horizontal Vessels shall be checked for level across machined face of nozzle flanges with
precision level.
2.5 Additional requirements for Underground buried vessels
2.5.1 Underground vessels for operating temp upto 60°C
The vessels shall be supplied at site with one coat of inorganic zinc silicate primer duly
applied on its external surfaces as per Spec. 6-79-0020. All other works such as application of
coaltar enamel, as per EIL Spec. 6-79-0020 and wrapping and coating as per EIL Spec. 6-79-
0011 shall be carried out by EC. This shall include necessary materials, tools and tackles to
complete the Job in all respect as per the instructions of EIC.
2.5.2 Underground Vessels for operating temp. Above 60°C and upto 300°C
The vessels shall be supplied at site with one coat of inorganic zinc silicate primer as per Spec.
6-79-0020 duly applied on its external surfaces. EC shall be required to carryout touch-up and
repair of outside primer before erection of equipment.
Page 2620 of 3884

Ion ei STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS
5sar iftWeg INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
lairen 2.121151eanJW,
A, (A Govt of India Undertaking)
2.5.3 EC shall do the necessary excavation, backfilling and removal of surplus earth at the site as
per the directions of the EIC. EC's rate shall include the excavation, blast cleaning, painting,
wrapping by kraft paper, placing and fixing of Vessels, backfilling and removal of excess
earth.
3.0 ERECTION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
3.1 Scope of Work of Erection Contractor
The scope of EC shall consist of withdrawal and transportation of equipments and accessories
from Owner's stores to site, assembly of loose supplied components/parts erection of
equipment on foundations, levelling, aligning and grouting, preparation of equipments for trial
runs and hand over in fit condition for the start up of the plant as per instructions of EIC.
3.2 Details of Owner Supplied Equipments
Equipments to be erected shall be supplied by the owner. Equipments may be supplied in any
of the following conditions.
- Single equipment such as filter, static mixer, silencer etc.

- Skid mounted equipment, fully assembled.
- Skid mounted equipment with some items supplied loose or as subassemblies involving
interconnections also.
System comprising of many equipments, skids with interconnected piping & hook up.
3.3 Technical Requirements
3.3.1 All equipment/machinery erection shall be done by experienced fitters. For this purpose EC
shall employ an experienced erection supervisor and crew who have done similar jobs.
3.3.2 EC shall study the layout drawings, for the machineries and equipments with their auxiliaries,
controls defining scope of supply.
3.3.3 Equipments shall be checked for any damages as a result of transport, handling and defects, if
any, shall be reported to the EIC. Rectification of defects shall be carried out in accordance
with approved procedure.
3.3.4 Correct procedures for handling of equipment & installation on the foundation shall be
followed as given in the manufacturer's manual. In case of non-availability of such
procedures, EC shall develop & submit handling procedures for all equipment weighing more
than 10 metric tonnes. The handling procedure shall be approved by the EIC.
3.3.5 EC shall check the correctness of equipment foundations or supporting structures as per the
drawings. Equipment/Skid foot print dimensions shall be verified to match with the
foundation. Minor chipping of foundation, pockets if required shall be carried out by EC.
3.3.6 All accessories like pressure gauges, seal oil, cooling water & Lube oil headers etc., shall be
tagged and separately kept in Contractor's stores till erection. All flanged connections and
openings shall be kept blanked with dummies, plugs to prevent entry of foreign particles.
3.3.7 Equipments shall be installed on the foundations in proper sequence. Incase the equipments
are delivered in subassemblies, EC shall do the assembly work as per manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3.8 Equipments shall be installed in the correct orientation and alignment.
Page 2621 of 3884

ENGINEERS
51g-ar tal
eg INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
(1W! oteavl J,WFA (A Govt of lode undenak.9) MACHINERY Page 9 of 22
3.3.9 After installation and levelling the equipment shall be grouted with the specified grouting
applied to the baseplate and support.
3.3.10 EC shall remove all the packing and protective devices used during transport and handling
from the equipment such as shock absorbent materials from machined faces, blocking of shafts
or rolling bearings & restraining devices from instruments, safety devices and protective
equipments.
3.3.11 After the grouting is set & cured, the foundation bolts shall be checked to make sure that they
are in straight and vertical position and properly tightened. Shims, if used, shall be on either
side of the foundation bolts.
3.3.12 Desiccant, catalyst where supplied loose shall be loaded on to the respective vessels in
specified quantities as per the suppliers instructions.
3.3.13 Internals, where supplied loose shall be assembled as per the drawings and manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3.14 Unless otherwise specified, all the instruments such as pressure gauges, sight glasses
temperature recorders etc. including instrument panels, if any, supplied along with the
equipment with necessary connections, shall be installed by EC as part of Equipment erection.
3.3.15 Equipments shall be checked for final cleanliness before boxing up.
3.3.16 Any interconnected piping & ducting shall be properly installed and supported. EC shall
connect the gas, steam, air, utility piping, instruments, oil piping etc. as per manufacturer's
drawings, specifications and instructions of the EIC.
3.3.17 Safety devices shall be correctly installed.
3.3.18 Ladders, platforms, walkways shall be correctly installed with handrails, and flooring shall be
properly secured.
3.3.19 Field welding, where specified shall be in accordance with the specified procedures and NDT
tests where specified shall be carried out. Results of NDT tests shall be recorded.
3.3.20 Equipment alignment & couplings shall comply with tolerances specified in manufacturer's
drawings and manuals. Provisions of dowel pins or similar arrangements for retaining the
alignment shall be carried out.
3.3.21 After the piping has been connected, the alignment shall be checked by EC again, to ensure
that piping connections do not induce any undue stresses on the Equipments. After making
necessary corrections on the piping, if any, realignment shall be done by EC to ensure that no
undue stresses are induced on the equipment.
3.3.22 Painting, insulation & fireproofing where specified shall be carried out in accordance with the
applicable specifications attached in the tender document.
3.3.23 Any alterations, deviations made during equipment erection with respect to manufacturer's
drawings or instructions shall be duly recorded and approval shall be taken from the EIC.
3.3.24 Any special tools, tackles supplied along with the equipment and used during installation shall
be returned to the stores through the EIC.
3.3.25 Any protection of the equipment after installation, if required shall be carried out in
accordance of the instructions of the EIC.
Page 2622 of 3884

ENGINEERS
5'fg-ar5fi
tlfiljeg INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
(011Tet rIronr4,3r10,711 IA Gov. of India Undertaking)
3.4 Trial Runs
3.4.1 Wherever specified, Machinery & Equipment erected & installed by EC under the supervision
of Machinery/Equipment supplier shall be subjected to trial runs in accordance with clause 5.4
of this specification. Job specific trial run procedure, if specified, supersedes the trial run
procedure as described in clause 5.4.
3.5 System Start-up
During this phase of work, EC shall provide as part of his work necessary skilled personnel as
per requirement of EIC. Any defects noticed in the Equipment shall be made good by EC at
his cost if such defects are attributable to him.
4.0 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER EQUIPMENT
This section covers the minimum requirements for erection of the following equipment by the
EC.
Deaerator
Trays/ Tower Internals and Tower Packings
Separators and Internals
Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers
Double Pipe Exchangers
Electric Heaters
Plate Exchangers
Plate Fin Exchangers
Sulphur Recovery Unit Equipment like Combustion Chambers, Waste Heat Boilers,
Sulphur Condensers, Incinerators, Burners, Etc.
Waste Heat Recovery Units
Desalters
Vacuum Ejectors
Ejector Condensers
4.1.1 Preparation of erection scheme and rigging procedure and obtaining its approval from EIC
wherever necessary.
4.1.2 Withdrawal of equipment from Owner's storage point, checking and reporting its conditions,
transporting the same to EC's stores and work site including unloading etc.
4.1.3 Preparation of foundation by chipping & installation of base plates for foundations. Minor
rectifications & chipping of foundations up to a thickness of 15 mm due to error in foundation
height, shall be carried out by the EC at no extra cost
4.1.4 Before starting the erection, top surface of the foundations are to be
cleaned/chipped/roughened to obtain proper bond while grouting. Line (Orientation) & Levels
are also to be marked on the respective foundations prior to erection to facilitate checking of
alignment.
4.1.5 Supply of necessary shims, levelling plates, wedges, sliding base plate.
4.1.6 Erection on foundations furnished by Owner including aligning, levelling and grouting.
Page 2623 of 3884

ENGINEERS
tzar wes INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
IA GoM of India Undeftak.o9)
4.1.7 Assembly and fixing of trays, tower internals (distributor, bed limiter, support plate, chimney
trays, vapour distributor etc.), demisters, grids, internal distributors and other internal fittings
in columns, vessels etc.
4.1.8 Installation of transformers on desalters and their electrical connection to electrode grid etc.
4.1.9 Welding of chimney trays, lattice girders, beams etc. wherever required.
4.1.10 Carrying out minor adjustments, modifications, seal welding of seal plates etc. wherever
necessary during installation.
4.1.11 Checking of installed trays & tower internals and filling of installation formats as referred in
6-14-0016.
4.1.12 Filling of columns, vessels/drums etc. with Raschig rings/Pall rings/ Structured packing, as
required.
4.1.13 Welding of washers for equipment, erection of pipe davit & minor welding of their parts as
per specifications and instruction of EIC.
4.1.14 Hydrotesting of shell and tube heat exchangers if the time gap between last hydrotest is more
than six months or in case it is found to be necessary by EIC. Procedure is given in para 4.3 &
4.4 below. EC to note that any equipment which are refractory lined at shop shall not be
hydrotested.
4.1.15 Flushing, cleaning and drying of equipment using compressed air and blinding to prevent
ingress of rain, dust etc.
4.1.16 Installation of refractory lining, brick lining, ceramic boards etc., as per specifications,
recommendations of manufacturer and instructions of EIC.
4.1.17 Mounting of instruments like safety valves, rupture disks, sight glasses etc as required.
4.1.18 Completing the equipment in all respects for the commissioning of the plant as per drawings,
specifications & instructions of EIC.
4.1.19 Any modification in the equipment to the complete satisfaction of EIC.
4.1.20 In addition to the above EC may be called upon to do other jobs like rectification of defects
etc. as per instructions of EIC.
4.2.1 All carbon steel components of trays/tower internals shall be cleaned to remove rust
preventive coating.
4.2.2 All welding shall be done by qualified welders only. The electrodes/filler material to be used
shall be compatible with the metallurgy of component and shall be used only after prior
approval of EIC.
4.2.3 A proposed Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) shall be submitted to EIL/ Owner's
Inspector for his approval. On approval, a Procedure Qualification Test (PQT) shall be
conducted which shall be witnessed by EIL/Owner's Inspector. On acceptance of all tests as
per ASME Section IX, a final WPS along with Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) shall be
submitted. Production welding shall start only after approval of final WPS/PQR and
Page 2624 of 3884

ENGINEERS
Zlf fai
(017,, ewc.,,..3.4,m)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govi of Indo Undertak.9)
MACHINERY
6-76-0001 Rev. 4
Page 12 of 22
qualification of welders as per ASME Section IX. EIL/Owner's Inspector may accept
previously qualified WPS/PQR at his sole discretion.
4.2.4 Lattice girders wherever provided for supporting tray & tower internals have been designed in
such a way that various components pass through column manway. Components/parts of
lattice girders are to be welded inside the column as per respective drawings. EC shall also
ensure that all parts of lattice girder are properly welded & levelness of the lattice girder shall
be checked before & after the welding. The limits of levelness as mentioned in GA drawings
shall be adhered to.
4.2.5 The rigging procedure shall include the following as a minimum:
Location of equipment from where it will be lifted, location of crane(s), details of crane(s)
(like configuration, boom length, operating radius, boom point elevation, clearance underside
the boom and the equipment, lifting capacity, counter weights to be deployed, holds on any
neighbouring foundations, structures, equipment etc.), the load chart of the crane(s), design of
the lifting tackles like spreader beam, D-shackles, wire rope slings etc. Unless the erection
scheme and rigging procedures are approved by the EIC, erection of equipment shall not be
undertaken in any case by the EC.
4.2.6 While handling, transporting or erecting the equipment, care shall be taken not to damage the
nozzles, instrument connections, structural clips, refractory lining etc. EC shall also take care
of the orientation of the nozzles and other connections of the equipment while erecting the
same and ensure compliance with the drawings and specifications supplied. Discrepancy, if
any, in the number/orientation of the nozzles, cleats etc. should be brought to the notice of the
EIC before actual erection is started.
4.2.7 After erection, the equipment shall be levelled and properly aligned with necessary shims and
wedges supplied by EC, at his cost. After the level, alignment and verticality etc. are checked
and approved by EIC, EC shall carry out grouting.
4.2.8 EC shall produce recent test certificates of the slings which they will be using for erection
work. However, retesting of the slings shall be done at site by the EC at his cost, as and when
required by the EIC. The weights of test loads shall be as per IS-807. The test loads shall be
supplied by EC at his cost. Tested slings will be punched for test loads and date of testing as
directed by EIC.
4.2.9 EC shall also carry out the assembly, erection, levelling and alignment of all types of weir
plates, baffles, distributors, collectors, spray nozzles, demisters, grids and other internal
fittings etc. Work shall be carried out as per manufacturer's standards/specifications which
shall be made available to EC at the time of erection. Raschig rings/Pall rings/Structured
packing, molecular sieves, intalox saddles packing and other types of tower packing such as
sand, catalyst etc. and SS wire mesh shall be loaded into sections of vessels, columns as per
specifications and drawings. Details for internals to be installed by EC shall be as per separate
schedule of quantities enclosed with the tender document. All packing except clay and lime
stone shall be washed with water before filling. Bottom layers, if required, shall be arranged as
directed and random filling shall be done afterwards with equipment filled with water.
Installation of packing, shall be done only after flushing and cleaning of columns/vessels and
completed to the satisfaction of EIC.
4.2.10 EC shall carry out minor welding for attachment of prefabricated pipe davit parts such as rain
covers, handles etc. with pipe davit, during or after erection of the same as per the
manufacturer's specifications, at no extra cost to the Owner.
4.2.11 EC shall install base plate over the sliding end foundation before erection of shell and tube
exchangers.
Page 2625 of 3884

ENGINEERS
tifgleg
if INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
lailEref 2.11,151?af1aOilsA0 (A Gout of India Uncle!taking) MACHINERY Page 13 of 22
4.2.12 Levelling and plumbness shall be approved by EIC and shall be checked using theodolite
before grouting and final finishing of the foundations. The record of the same shall be
maintained.
4.2.13 EC to ensure that shell and tube exchangers shall be firmly bolted down to foundations at the
fixed end. Further EC to ensure that foundation bolts at the sliding saddle end are at the centre
of slotted holes & nuts at sliding end are only hand tightened. Projected bolt threads shall be
properly protected by application of grease etc. to avoid rusting and for facilitating free
movement of nuts.
4.2.14 EC shall ensure that no equipment is subjected to any corrosion during any stage during his
period of work till handling over to EIC/Client.
4.2.15 Instruments, as required, shall be mounted by EC. On instructions of EIC, EC shall also
remove and hand over the instruments to EIC for calibrations. During this period, EC shall
cover all openings to protect the equipment.
4.2.16 Before transportation to site, EC shall check and report to EIC on the condition of equipment,
specifically highlighting the nitrogen pressure indicated in the nitrogen gauges and the absence
of blinds on any of the nozzles.
4.2.17 In case the shell and tube exchangers are to be stacked, but have been stored as single shells at
the store, then EC shall erect the bottom most shell, then erect other shell(s) sequentially using
the nozzle gaskets/bolting and saddle bolting supplied by owner. Additional shims, if
necessary, shall be supplied by EC. If the exchangers do not have interconnecting nozzles,
then nozzle elevations shall be maintained as per piping GAD.
4.2.18 All equipment, consumable and other accessories required for completion of the job shall be
arranged by the EC. This would include but not limited to cranes, tools and tackles,
manpower etc; machinery for cutting, grinding , drilling etc. of base plates; instruments like
dumpy level, plumb lines, Engineer's levels, precision levels, theodolite, straight edges etc. for
checking the alignment/erection accuracy, hydrostatic testing pumps, potable water for
hydrotesting, necessary materials including making the arrangements for hydro-testing, hoses,
compressed air supply, pressure gauge, sealing taps, blinds, shims and wedges for alignment
etc.
4.2.19 EC shall execute the erection of wooden pillows for saddle supports for cold equipment as
indicated in schedule of quantities, EIL standard 7-12-002 and instructions of EIC.
4.2.20 For bought out items like plate exchangers, plate fin exchangers, electric heater, etc. vendor's
instructions shall be followed.
4.2.21 For erection of piping of ejector system, EC shall follow relevant erection specification of
piping for the project.
4.2.22 EC shall check the health of the equipment refractory lined at shop on receipt and shall report
any defect or damage in the same to EIC. During installation all precautions shall be taken to
avoid any damage to refractory lining. Any damage to refractory during erection shall be
repaired by EC at his own cost without loss of time.
4.2.23 Wherever equipment with refractory are bolted or welded at the girth joints, the gaps between
the refractory shall be suitably filled with ceramic fiber of suitable grade as given in the
drawings or other relevant documents of the equipment.
4.2.24 Refer section 1.0 (General) for additional requirements.
Page 2626 of 3884

'e--1 ENGINEERS
ligar taws INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
1.41WIriecnW an3vm.rr (A Goof of India Undeftaktog)
4.3 Hydrotesting of Shell and Tube Exchangers including Condensers
4.3.1 These shall hydrotested at site using potable water. Hydrotesting of both shell and tube sides
shall be carried out as per procedure given below or as per instructions of EIC. For
exchangers fitted with SS bellow or SS part, potable water with max. 25 ppm chlorides shall
be used for hydrotesting.
4.3.2 Suitable pump set, piping, test pressure gauges and other instruments, water-hoses, temporary
gaskets, metallic blinds, bolts, nuts, consumable and other temporary arrangements and
equipment for testing shall be provided by the EC at his cost. Test pressure gauges shall be
calibrated by the EC and got approved from EIC.
4.3.3 Stacked exchangers shall be hydrotested in stacked conditions.
4.3.4 Test pressure shall be as indicated in the name plates mounted on each exchangers. Duration
of hydrotest shall be at least one hour. Test pressures and duration of hydrotest may be
reduced by EIC. Minimum test water temperature shall be 20°C.
4.3.5 Any defects noticed during hydrotesting shall be repaired by EC as per the procedure
approved by EIC. Cost for rectifying defects, not attributable to the EC shall be paid
separately.
4.3.6 No equipment shall in general form part of the piping loop during hydrotesting and shall be
blinded off, except when instructed otherwise by EIC.
4.3.7 EC to take adequate care during pressurising & depressurising the equipment. EC shall also
take care of any instruction given regarding hydrotest in the exchanger drawing.
4.4 Hydrotesting Procedure
4.4.1 Shell side & tube side shall be hydrotested separately, unless specified otherwise. If both sides
are to be tested together, a warning plate would be fixed to the exchanger, and the instructions
given therein are to be followed.
4.4.2 The side, shell or tube which ever to be tested at higher pressure shall be taken first.
4.4.3 During hydrotest all gasket joints should be checked for any leakage. In case of leakage from
any gasket joint, bolting at that joint shall be further tightened following proper tightening
sequence (bolts should not be overtightened or tightened by hammering). In case it is not
possible to stop leakage by bolt tightening, drain the water in exchanger & replace gasket at
that joint by new gasket (gasket will be supplied by owner). After replacing gasket exchanger
must be again hydrotested with same procedure to ensure leak tightness.
4.4.4 In case of floating head heat exchangers, if it is found during hydrotest that the pressure is
dropping, while the external gasketed joints are not leaking, this could be due to floating head
gasket joint leakage. This shall be further investigated, by removing shell cover &
pressurising tube side to check the floating head gasket joint leakage. In case of leakage
observed at floating head flange joint, replace floating head gasket by new gasket. After
replacing gasket exchanger must be again hydrotested first on tube side & then on shell side
with same procedure to ensure leak tightness of gasket joints.
In case of heat exchangers with shell side hydrotest pressure higher than tube side, it is
possible that above procedure (with tube side hydrotest to detect floating head gasket leakage)
may not help. Absence of leakage during this test is not conclusive in such a case, as the shell
side pressure was dropping during hydrotest. In such a case, floating head gasket shall in any
case be replaced and then equipment retested to ensure leak tightness.
Page 2627 of 3884

ENGINEERS
faz.ir Wes INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
IA Goof of Ind Undertalco9)
4.4.5 When hydrotested as per above procedure after floating head gasket replacement, if it is
observed that test pressure is still dropping, this could mean leakage from tube to tubesheet
joint. For such cases matter shall be reported to EIC for further investigations/instructions.
4.5 Flushing & Cleaning
4.5.1 After the erection, alignment and grouting of these equipment are complete, and after
hydrotest if any, flushing and cleaning shall be carried out by EC as per specifications and
instructions of the EIC.
4.5.2 After flushing, cleaning and draining, equipment shall be dried by compressed air at the
pressure and for duration decided by EIC. The equipment interior shall be thoroughly
inspected to the complete satisfaction of EIC before it is finally boxed up. Boxing up of
manholes and handholes shall be leak proof. All joints which need remaking, shall be remade.
Compressed air for drying shall be arranged by EC at his cost.
4.6 Inspection and Acceptance Limits for Level & Alignment
4.6.1 Co-ordinates of foundations/supporting structures/mounting holes etc. shall be checked with

respect to the plot plans by EC.
4.6.2 Before equipment are placed on foundations, orientations shall be checked with respect to
piping drawings.
4.6.3 When equipment are firmly bolted down but prior to grouting, verticality of all equipment
shall be checked by using theodolite. Tolerances for equipment after erection shall be as per
EIL Standard 7-12-0001. The allowable deviation from plumb line shall be 1 mm per metre
height, subject to maximum of 6 mm.
4.6.4 Horizontal equipment shall be checked for level across machined face of nozzle flanges with
precision level.
4.6.5 Difference in elevation of centerline from one end to the other end shall not be more than 1
mm per meter and limited to ± 3 mm maximum. Further elevation difference shall be such as
to ensure complete draining of equipment.
4.6.6 Survey of column inside and checking the levelness of support rings, location of bolting bars
to ensure that the same are as per column drawings and within tolerances specified in standard
7-14-0001. In case these are not within permissible tolerances, the same shall be reported to
EIC for necessary rectification/modification.
4.7 Safety, Health & Environment
EC shall install an exhaust fan for exhaling welding/ cutting fumes etc. and to maintain
adequate oxygen level, before any work is started inside confined spaces (i.e. columns).
Adequate ventilation shall be maintained at all times. Gas/LPG cylinders shall not be taken
inside confined space. When a worker/supervisor enters a confined space, it shall be
mandatory to have a second man as standby. Safety belts shall be worn while entering
columns, if there is a danger of falling. All ladders/stair cases shall be in place before any item
is offered to owner's inspectors. Rope ladders/scaffolding shall be provided inside the column
in case tower internals are not easily approachable from column manhole. Low voltage (24 V)
lamps equipped with guards shall be used to prevent accidental contact with bulb. All
electrical connections shall be through ELCB's and proper earthing shall be ensured. Acids
and other materials used for pickling shall be disposed off to a designated place as directed by
owner/EIL. All statutory Regulations and owner's safety, health and environment requirements
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright Ell_ — All rights reserved
Page 2628 of 3884

ENGINEERS
Ogar Riles INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
tame, viraneMIJWRI) IA Govt of Indo UnOeftak,o9)
shall be complied with. Inspection aids for carrying out the inspection of internals shall also be
provided.
5.0 ERECTION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT
The scope of work shall consist of transportation of Rotating Equipments and accessories from
Owner's stores to site, assembly of sub-assemblies/parts, erection of Rotating Equipments on
foundations, levelling, aligning and grouting, preparation of Rotating Equipments for trial
runs, carrying out no load/trial runs, return of any unused material to the owners stores and
hand over in fit condition for the start- up of the Plant, as per instructions of EIC.
Defects due to EC's fault noticed during trial runs shall be rectified by him. Schedule of
Quantities, indicate estimated numbers, dimensions and weights of the Rotating Equipments.
The actual data on dimensions and weights will be in the vendor data manuals.
The term 'Rotating Equipment' includes all pumps, compressors, steam & gas turbines, fans
and blowers, diesel engine/steam turbine/gas turbine generator sets along with drivers
accessories & auxiliary systems.
5.2.1 All Rotating Equipment erection shall be done by experienced fitters. For this purpose EC
shall employ experienced and suitably qualified erection supervisor and crew who have done
similar jobs.
5.2.2 The Rotating Equipment manufacturer's instructions as available regarding installation and
trial runs will be passed on to EC during the course of work. The requirements prescribed
therein shall be met in addition to what is stated in this specification. Erection shall be carried
out as per instructions of the Rotating Equipment manufacturer's representative and under
their supervision whenever the manufacturer is present at site. In all other cases instructions
of the EIC, regarding procedure/sequence of erection shall be binding on EC.
5.2.3 For all Rotating Equipment, EC shall follow the proper sequence for assembly and erection.
For Rotating Equipment received along with driver in coupled condition, the coupling bolts
shall be dismantled by EC, and alignment shall be rechecked. Realignment, if required, shall
be done before recoupling.
Where drivers and couplings are provided separately, drilling and tapping of holes in the base
plates for fixing drivers, fixing of couplings on shafts, after enlarging the pilot bores to the
correct size with key way etc. and dowelling including provision of dowel pins, alignment
screws, jack-up screws or similar arrangements for retaining the alignment shall be carried out
by EC as part of erection work. Shims & wedges as required for alignment shall be supplied
by EC.
5.2.4 Process and utility (such as cooling water, steam flushing, quenching, lubricating oil, sealing
etc.) connections connected with rotating equipment and its auxiliaries shall be fabricated
and/or installed by EC from materials supplied by the Owner as per drawings, specifications
and instructions of the EIC.
5.2.5 Piping and accessories supplied with the rotating equipment such as seal oil/Gas system,
cooling water system & Lube oil system etc. shall be tagged separately and kept in EC's stores
till erection. All flanged connections and openings shall be kept blanked with dummies/plugs
to prevent entry of foreign matter.
Page 2629 of 3884

ENGINEERS
ge.ff fd5reg INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
INTM ereV12 MIJWIM)
A GoA of Intim Und.ftak..3) MACHINERY Page 17 of 22
5.2.6 The local mounted instruments such as pressure gauges, sight glasses, temperature gauges etc.
and Local instrument panels, if any, with necessary connections, shall be installed by EC as
part of rotating equipment erection.
5.2.7 After initial alignment, the Rotating Equipments shall be properly grouted. Grouting shall be
carried out as per this specification. Wherever grout holes are provides in the base plates,
grout shall be filled through them also.
Epoxy grout where recommended by the rotating equipment manufacturer, shall be provided
by EC and shall be as specified in this standard.
5.2.8 Alignment between the Driver and driven equipment shall be done without connecting the
equipment nozzles to respective piping. After completion of alignment, the equipment shall
be connected to Piping. After the piping has been connected, the alignment shall be re-
checked by EC, to ensure that piping connections do not induce any undue stresses on the
Rotating Equipments. After making necessary corrections on the piping, if any, re-alignment
shall be done by EC and he will ensure that no undue stresses are induced on the Rotating
Equipment.
5.3 Special Instructions
EC in addition to general instructions for erection as out lined in para 5.2 above, shall also
follow the following special instructions.
5.3.1 Pumps
Depending upon the size of equipment, Pump train will be supplied for erection in any of the
following modes :
(a) Pumps with drivers and accessories fully assembled on a common skid (Base plate).
(b) Pumps mounted on base plate and couplings and driver supplied loose in separate packs.
(c) Various major components such as pump, drivers, couplings, gear boxes & base plates
auxiliary systems like lube, seal flush equipment in separate packs.
5.3.2 Reciprocating Type Compressors
5.3.2.1 Reciprocating compressors may be supplied for erection in knocked down condition in
multiple packaged subassemblies such as frame assembly, distance pieces, fly wheels, cylinder
block assemblies, valve assemblies etc. and other accessories such as, drivers, couplings, gear
boxes (if any), control panels, gauge boards, coolers, lube oil systems, cooling water systems,
etc. would be in separate packages.
Besides the above there would be other packages for loose supplied items such as instruments,
pre-fabricated piping, and piping/tubing in commercial lengths.
Lifting devices for erection shall be arranged by EC depending on the weight of packages and
elevation of installation.
5.3.2.2 In case of Rotating Equipments received in knocked down condition, the various parts shall be
assembled as per instructions of the EIC and as per manufacturer's instructions. All parts of
the Compressor shall be thoroughly cleaned with solvents to remove protective compounds if
any, before assembly.
Page 2630 of 3884

t_711 eiei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Self tifiteg INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
(A Govt of India Undertaking(
5.3.2.3 The compressor, driver and other accessories shall be erected on their respective foundations
and the compressor, couplings, gear box and driver shall be aligned and grouted as per the
manufacturer's instructions and instructions of EIC and the manufacturers supervisor (when
present). There-after all process and utility, drain & vent connections shall be completed as
per the relevant drawings/instructions of equipment manufacturer and advice of EIC.
5.3.2.4 Final alignment shall be done after all the piping connections such as water, steam, drains and
connection to coolers etc. are made. Tolerances for alignment shall be maintained as
specified in the Manufacturer's Instruction Manual. To ensure that piping connections do not
induce any undue stresses on the Rotating Equipment, the alignment shall be checked once
again by EC after the piping has been connected. Any correction necessary for proper
alignment shall be done by EC.
5.3.2.5 EC shall carefully study the vendor drawings, manuals and other data before start of the job to
ensure correct erection, alignment and commissioning.
5.3.3 Centrifugal Compressors & Expanders
5.3.3.1 Centrifugal Compressors are supplied for erection in multiple packages such as,
Compressor casings
Drivers (Electrical motors, Steam/Gas turbines - • )
{ • : Steam/Gas turbines would be further supplied in multiple packages}
Base plates (or skids)
Lube oil/control oil systems
Sealing systems
- Air filters (for gas turbines & compressors for air service)
Temporary strainers
- Couplings
- Gear boxes
- Coolers
- Gauge boards
- Control panels
- Lube & Seal Oil tanks
Fire systems (for gas turbines)
Condensers (for steam turbines)
- Condensate systems (for steam turbines)
- Loose supply items
Pre-fabricated & Commercial lengths piping, tubing.
Other miscellaneous packages
5.3.3.2 Other requirements shall be same as defined in para's 5.3.2.2 to 5.3.2.5 above.
5.4 Trial Runs of Machinery
5.4.1 Any construction defects shall be intimated to EIC before start-up. All protective and safety
guards shall be installed and rotating equipment shall be checked for free movement by
manual barring over. All foundation bolts and alignment shall be checked before starting the
trial runs, if damaged, rotating equipment may have to be opened and repaired as directed by
EIC. Prior to carrying out the trial runs, the rotating equipment will be subjected to necessary
checks by the EIC and the trial runs shall be commenced only after the approval of the EIC.
Page 2631 of 3884

ENGINEERS
tifajes
Ogt11 2122151? 0,10,E1.4) INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India undettalangj
MACHINERY
6-76-0001 Rev. 4
Page 19 of 22
5.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, all the rotating equipment will be subjected to trial runs for a
continuous operation of 72 hours. In case of motor driven rotating equipments, motors shall
be decoupled and turned over to other agencies doing electrical work for testing and no load
running of motors. After the no load runs of motors are satisfactorily completed, EC shall
recouple the motors to the rotating equipment and recheck the alignment. The trial run of the
rotating equipment shall be started only after the above is completed. EC shall provide, as part
of his work, necessary skilled personnel (excluding the operating personnel) for conducting
the trial runs round the clock during the trial runs period. The duration of trial run may be
extended if it is considered necessary in the opinion of EIC and EC shall provide personnel for
such extended period also. Final inspection of bearing etc. shall be carried out by EC after the
Machinery had gone through the trial run and defects, if any, shall be made good for rendering
the rotating equipment ready for start up.
5.4.3 During the trial runs, readings of bearing temperature, cooling water inlet and outlet
temperatures, lube oil inlet/outlet temperature and pressure, rotating equipment discharge
pressure and temperature, starting in current, no load/full load current etc. shall be recorded,
wherever necessary, by EC. Trial reports shall be prepared in the approved proforma by EC
containing all the above details and submitted to the EIC as part of completion documents.
5.4.4 EC shall also provide necessary improvised fencing and watch & ward personnel as safety
measures during trial runs.
5.5 System Start up

During start-up, EC shall provide necessary skilled personnel as per requirement of EIC, to
rectify defects noticed in the rotating equipment, if such defects are attributed to him.
6.0 EQUIPMENT GROUTING

All anchor bolt sleeves/pockets and space under Base plates/machine base frames/shoe plates,
etc. shall be grouted with either free flow non shrink cementitious or epoxy grout as per the
following categorisation:
Sr.
Type of Grout Application
No.
1 Non shrink All static and rotating equipments, unless covered in 2)
cementitious grout below, viz Static equipments like tall columns, vertical silo,
blender etc. and horizontal vessel, drum, sphere, bullets,
filter, heat exchangers, coolers etc. and other similar
equipments, steel stack/chimney, furnace etc.
Low frequency, medium frequency, high frequency rotating

machines like compressors (centrifugal, reciprocating,
diaphram, screw, gear type etc.). Induced draft fan, forced
draft fan, air blowers, pumps (centrifugal, reciprocating,
diaphram, gear type etc.), expanders, turbine, generator,
diesel generator, air coolers (fin fan cooler) and other
similar equipment.
Machine like screen vibrator, extractor, centrifuge

pulverizer, dryer, drop hammer, ball mill, crushers, bagging
machine and general workshop equipment.
2 Epoxy grout Specifically if requested by the Machine Vendor.
Page 2632 of 3884

laraeitziENGINEERS
5sai fifieg INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
NTT etenke 9513.4.) (A Govt ol India Undedaking)
6.1 Grout (Material)
All material used for grout shall be in EC's scope. Only approved grout material shall be
used. EC shall submit details of grout materials for prior approval of EIC.
6.1.1 Non-Shrink Grout
Non-shrink grout shall be premix type of cementitious (cement pregraded fibre and additive)
non-shrink, ready to use grout in dry powder form. It shall have free flow property when
mixed with required quantity of water. It shall have initial setting time of 30 minutes.
It shall have the following features:
Non corrosive to anchor bolts, base plate/saddle/frame, sliding plate.

Not harmful to concrete and reinforcing steel.
Non toxic
Frost, oil and fire resistant
Require normal curing
Suitable to use under restraints and grout thickness required
Expansive to counteract initial shrinkage
Ensure high early strength without surface crack.
- Suitable for temperature of above 0 deg.0 to 200 deg.C.
- Maximum flow distance is compatible to the dimensions of base plate/ saddle/frame.
It should be resisted to the chemicals, gases etc. being handled in equipment/machines.
It should have the following physical properties:
- Min. Compressive strength at 3 days 25 N/mm2

7 days 30 N/mm2
28 days 40 N/mm2
- Min. Tensile strength at 28 days 3.5 N/mm2
- Min. Bond strength at 7 days 12 N/mm2
- Max. Onstrained Expansion in 2 hours 4%
- Min. Density 2000 kg/m3
6.1.2 Epoxy Grout
Epoxy grout shall consist of epoxy resin base, hardener and filler component like graded and
blended aggregate. Components of epoxy grout shall be of desired grade and mixed in
proportion recommended by manufacturer such that it is injectable under base
plate/frame/saddle etc., has low viscosity to meet the flow distances according to dimensions
of base plate saddle/frame, it is suitable for the desired thickness, it is homogenous, free from
segregation, attains high early and high final strength. It shall have minimum Pot life of 30
minutes. It shall have all the features as specified in clause 6.1.1 except for expansive
properties.
It should have the following physical properties :
- Min. compressive strength at 1 day 75 N/mm2

7 days 85 N/mm2
- Min. Flexural strength 7 days 25 N/mm2
Page 2633 of 3884

ei ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT &
5'fgar lagieG INDIA LIMITED 6-76-0001 Rev. 4
(A Govt of India Unclertak.N)
6.2 Grouting (Placement)
6.2.1 Surface Preparation
Prior to positioning of equipment/machine etc. over concrete pedestal, foundation, slab, beam,
etc. all laitance & loose material shall be removed by wire brushing & chipping. The bearing
concrete surface shall be sufficiently levelled, hacked with flat chisels to make it rough, clean
(using compressed air). Additional chipping, if required, to suit level of base plate and/or
minimum thickness of grout shall also be done. In case of use of cementitious grout surface
shall be thoroughly wet. All pockets for anchor bolts shall also be similarly cleaned. Any
excess water shall be removed. In case of use of epoxy grout, it shall be ensured that
surface/pocket to receive grout is totally dry. After erection, alignment/plumbing of
equipment/machine in required level, orientation and plumb and installation of sliding plate.
Forms shall be constructed around and joints made tight to prevent leakage of the grout.
6.2.2 Preparation of Grout
6.2.2.1 In case of premix type of grout water shall be added in required quantity as specified by
supplier and/or EIC. Any specific instruction of manufacturer will be strictly followed.
6.2.2.2 In case of epoxy grout required quantity of all constituents shall be mixed in proportion
recommended by manufacturer/supplier and/or EIC. All specific requirements of
manufacturer/ supplier shall be strictly followed.
6.2.2.3 Required quantity of grout shall be made considering initial setting/pot life of grout. Any
grout not used within initial setting time/pot life shall be rejected and in no case used for
grouting.
6.2.3 Placement of Grout
6.2.3.1 Placing of grout shall be taken up only after level, orientation, alignment of
equipment/machine has been approved by EIC and anchor bolts are placed in pocket.
6.2.3.2 In case of epoxy grout EC shall give details of grouting scheme and get approval of EIC.
6.2.3.3 The grout mixture shall be poured/injected continuously (without interruption till completion)
by grouting pump/injecting gun from one side of base plate and spread uniformly with flexible
steel strip and rammed with rods till the space is filled solidly and grout mixture carried to the
other side of base plate and fill all pockets. Any specific requirement of manufacturer/
supplier shall be strictly followed. Epoxy grout shall be done by or under supervision of
manufacturer/supplier and/or agency having adequate experience in this field as per direction
of EIC.
Total work shall be done under supervision and direction of EIC and care shall be taken that
alignment of equipment/machine is not disturbed.
6.2.3.4 Grout mixture shall be allowed to harden for a period of minimum 7 days or as required by
manufacturer/supplier of grout and/or as decided by EIC. At the end of this period, the
shims/edges/pack plate may be removed and anchor bolts tightened uniformly. Alignment of
equipment/machine shall be rechecked and if found correct, the voids left by the removal of
shims/wedges/pack plate (if removed) must be filled up with a similar mixture of grout. In
case after checking, serious misalignment is indicated, the grout shall be removed completely
and fresh grouting is done after making appropriate correction of alignment.
6.2.3.5 Minimum thickness of grout shall be 25mm for all types of grout and maximum thickness
shall be 40mm for non-shrink grout. For epoxy grout the maximum thickness shall be as per
manufacturer's recommendation and/or as specified in drawing.
Page 2634 of 3884

ENGINEERS
faajeg
larre'er to i'aMaq,IAI
INDIA LIMITED
to Govt of India Undertaking)
MACHINERY
6-76-0001 Rev. 4
Page 22 of 22
7.0 REFERENCE EIL STANDARDS/ SPECIFICATIONS
6-14-0003 Installation Procedure for Trays & Tower Internals

6-14-0011 Specification for Packing the Column
6-14-0016 Standard Specification for Review of Site Installation of Column
Internals.
6-79-0011 Standard Specification for Corrosion Protection Tape Coating for
Underground Steel Piping.
6-79-0020 Standard Specification for Surface Preparation and Protective Coating
(New Construction)
7-12-0001 Vessel Tolerances.
7-12-0002 Support for Horizontal Vessel
7-12-0003 Wooden Pillow for Saddle Support
7-12-0004 Skirt Base Details
7-12-0024 Lifting Lug Top Head Type
7-14-0001 Construction Tolerance for Welded Supports for Tray / Tower
Internals
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL—All rights reserved
Page 2635 of 3884

INSTRUCTIONS TO VENDOR STANDARD No.
ei ENGINEERS FOR SITE PERFORMANCE 7-76-0103 Rev. 2
faReg INDIA LIMITED GUARANTEE REQUIREMENTS
(A Govt of India Undeftak.9)
FOR PACKAGE UNITS Page 1 of 5
v-+-Tir-za ipt04140
dilia Nowou .4zrR w.To-
39-alr
INSTRUCTIONS TO VENDOR FOR

SITE PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
REQUIREMENTS
FOR PACKAGE UNITS
041 k.
2 30.03.2019 Reaffirmed & Reissued
S PPP RP RKT
1 30.05.2008 Revised & Reissued SMA PKR AA VC
0 10.11.2003 ISSUED AS STANDARD PKR PM VC SKG

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 2636 of 3884

el ENGINEERS FOR SITE PERFORMANCE
51gar El5leg INDIA LIMITED 7-76-0103 Rev. 2
(A Govt of India Undertaking) GUARANTEE REQUIREMENTS
Abbreviations:
LSTK Lumpsum Turnkey
PG Performance Guarantee
General Engg. Standards Committee
Convenor : Ms R Priyamvada (Convenor)
Members : Mr BR Bhogal (Elect.)

Mr Rajan Srivastava (Strl.)
Mr RB Bhutda (EWS)
Mr Amrendra Kumar (Piping)
Ms NP Guha (Projects)
Mr Amit Prakash (FEM)
Mr KJ Harinarayanan (SME)
Mr VK Tonger (Process-1)
Mr Satyabrata Biswas (Process-2)
Page 2637 of 3884

el ENGINEERS FOR SITE PERFORMANCE
51gea 0151eg INDIA LIMITED 7-76-0103 Rev. 2
I+IRrta fZ 261300.1) IA Govt of Incite Undertaking) GUARANTEE REQUIREMENTS
CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION 4
2.0 PURPOSE 4
3.0 SCOPE 4
4.0 DEFINITIONS 4
5.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TESTING AT SITE 4
6.0 SITE PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TEST PROFORMA 5
7.0 ATTACHMENTS 5
Format No. 8-00-0001-F2 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — iklirights reserved
Page 2638 of 3884

ei ENGINEERS FOR SITE PERFORMANCE
Oge,11fifil-
eg INDIA LIMITED 7-76-0103 Rev. 2
Govt of India Undeflalongt GUARANTEE REQUIREMENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION
As a part of engineering services, EIL procures different types of Package Units for various
Projects, for and on behalf of the Owner/Purchaser. The vendor is required to design, engineer,
manufacture/ procure, inspect, test and supply to site, and also in many cases construct/erect,
commission and Performance test the Package Units before handing over the same to
Owner/Purchaser, based on Process and Technical requirements defined in the Inquiry/Order
document.
2.0 PURPOSE
This document provides instructions to Vendor for Site Performance Guarantee (PG)
Requirements for Package Units and shall form a part of the contract, wherever site
performance guarantee test is specified in the Inquiry/Order document. The aim is to provide
clarity to the Vendor as well as the Commissioning team on site performance guarantee
parameters, their measurements during PG Test, and the acceptance of the Package Unit by the
Owner/Purchaser after the successful PG Test.
3.0 SCOPE
The requirements of this standard are applicable for all Package Units including LSTK Bid
Packages, which require Performance Guarantee Test, after installation and commissioning of
the unit at site.
4.0 DEFINITIONS
4.1 "Vendor" means the person(s), company, organization from whom EIL procures
products/services as a part of services rendered to the Owner/Purchaser. "Contractor",
"Supplier" are considered synonymous to "Vendor".
4.2 "Owner" means the person(s), company, organization to whom EIL is rendering services for the
Project.
4.3 "Purchaser" means the person(s), company, organization which awards order for the Package
Unit on the Vendor.
5.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TESTING AT SITE
5.1 General
5.1.1 The overall performance testing of the completely assembled/erected Package unit as a whole
shall be carried out at site to establish the performance guarantee parameters specified in
Inquiry/Order document. In addition, certain critical equipment/sub-packages may also be
performance tested at site if so specified in Inquiry/Order document. The duration of site
performance guarantee run shall be as defined in the Inquiry/order document.
The measured parameters, where necessary, shall be adjusted to account for the variation in
ambient/operating conditions actually prevailing at site during performance testing, before
comparing it with the guaranteed value.
5.1.2 Performance test shall be carried out as per relevant Codes, Standards and Specifications. The
Vendor shall submit the following during detail engineering and the same shall be subject to
Owner/Purchaser's approval:
Page 2639 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR SITE PERFORMANCE
fge..11 INDIA LIMITED 7-76-0103 Rev. 2
1.1Wn eirtizrU (A Gov) of India Undertaking) GUARANTEE REQUIREMENTS
- Detailed Test procedure including measurement tolerances, if applicable, calculations/

correction curves for changes in ambient/ operating conditions, and complete test layout,
etc.
- Site Performance Guarantee Test Proforma completed in line with enclosed format 7-76-
0103-F1.
Vendor shall list out parameters to be measured and corresponding installed instrument
type and tag no. to be used for measurements. Any instrument/measurement device,
(required for testing) not installed at site, shall be arranged by vendor. Vendor shall
furnish list of such instruments alongwith instrument details.
Log sheets indicating all parameters that are to be recorded.
Method of computation of test results including interpretation of test results.
5.2 Test Instruments
All necessary test instruments required for measuring the performance guarantee parameters
shall be arranged by the vendor free of charge. These instruments shall be tested & calibrated
from reputed test houses like National Physical Laboratories (NPL), Institute for Design of
Electrical Measuring Instruments (IDEMI), Electronics Regional Test Laboratories (ERTL) or
any other test house approved by the Owner. All test instruments shall have valid calibration
reports. The Vendor shall furnish calibration certificates before putting them to use and also,
wherever applicable, after completion of the PG test.
5.3 Performance Guarantee Parameters
Guarantee performance parameters shall be as defined in the Process/Mechanical data sheets,

Specification, etc. included in the Inquiry/Order document.
5.4 Repair/Rectification/Modification
5.4.1 In case the unit fails to meet the guaranteed parameters, the Vendor shall carryout, necessary
repair, rectification and modification within the time frame defined in the contract or as
mutually agreed with the Owner/Purchaser, at his own risk and cost to establish the guaranteed
parameters in the final performance test. All costs involved for above activities i.e. supply of
manpower, materials, consumables and machines etc. shall be to Vendor's account.
5.4.2 Inspite of repair/rectification, incase the guaranteed performance parameters are not met,
penalty/rejection as defined in the contract document for shortfall from guaranteed performance
parameters shall be applied.
6.0 SITE PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TEST PROFORMA
Typical Proforma shown in enclosed Format 7-76-0103-F1, shall be used for assessment of
Performance guarantee parameters during site PG test.
7.0 ATTACHMENTS
Format No. 7-76-0103-F1 SITE PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

TEST PROFORMA.
Page 2640 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
Page 2641 of 3884

01)
SITEPERFORMANCE GUARANTEETEST PROFORMA
cC
a)
4-,
a)
Value (Actual at site)
TEST PERIOD:
..—
E
1...
a)
a)
0
61
0.1
Measuring Guaranteed Permissible MeasuredValue Value after Deviation Remarks
4:
...--.
Unit (2) * Value (3) * Tolerance (4) * at site (5) correction for (6) w.r.t.- (3) (Acceptable-Y/N)
site conditions (7)
(6)
"a,
:.-c--,
c)
G.
e)
a)
a)
0 a)
* TO BEFILLED-UP AND/OR DEVELOPED BY VENDOR&SUBMITTEDALONGWITH PERFORMANCETEST PROCEDURE.

Format No. 7-76-0103-F1Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All r ights reserved
Page 2642 of 3884
DOCUMENTNo.
SITE PERFORMANCE GUARANTEETEST PROFORMA
Ca
CNI
IL
a)
O
Ca
OBSERVATIONS:
eq.;
CONCLUSIONS :
as
8 .°1z
E
E
$21
▪CJ
as
0
-
on
01)
0 0 a)
Copy : Engineer-In-Charge.
FormatNo. 7-76-0103-F1Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

FORMAT FOR LETTER OF WAIVER
(TO BE SUBMITTED ON THE LETTERHEAD OF CONTRACTOR)
TITLE OF WORKS/SUPPLY :
TENDER NO. B185-000-83-41-MK-T-9540
We ……………………………………….(*) hereby agree to fully comply with, abide by and

accept without variations, deviation or reservation all technical, commercial and other
conditions of the Bidding Document and its Technical & Commercial Amendments,
issued by EIL.
We confirm that during detailed engineering, we will review and recommend the
required Special tools & tackles and Commissioning spares, wherever specified in the
enquiry document and supply the same without any additional cost and time
implication to Purchaser.
We further hereby waive, withdraw and abandon any and all assumptions, deviations,
variations, objections or reservations whatsoever hereto set out, give or indicated in
our offer, clarifications, correspondence, communications, or otherwise with a view
that the price bid and price implication (if any) submitted may be treated to conform
to, in all respects, with the terms and conditions of the said Bidding Document including
all Technical and Commercial Amendments.
**
For and on behalf of
Authorised Signatory
Date :
*Here fill in the name of Contractor
** The Letter of Waiver must be signed by the person(s) authorized to sign.
Page 2643 of 3884

VENDOR LIST DOCUMENT No.
STATIC & MACHINERY EQUIPMENT B185-000-80-43-VL-9540
Rev. 0
Page 1 of 3
VENDOR LIST

FOR PART C
(Tender No. B185-000-83-41-MK-T-9540)

FOR PART C
JOB NO. : B185
0 23.08.2019 ISSUED WITH TENDER NB RRS RRS

Rev.
Date Purpose Prepared by Checked by Approved by
No
Page 2644 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SUB-VENDOR LIST
Rev. 0
Page 2 of 3
VENDOR LIST
1.1 CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK (HAZARDOUS AREA APPLICATION)
HERCULES HOISTS LTD [RAIGAD]
W.H.BRADY &CO.LTD
GENERAL NOTES
1.0 CONTRACTOR shall necessarily procure all the material / equipment forming permanent part
of the unit / plant from OWNER / PMC approved vendors only. This shall include sub-ordered
items / components also. The “Approved Vendors” shall be item specific.
2.0 OWNER / PMC approved vendor list for the various items is enclosed in this section.
3.0 CONTRACTOR may procure material from any of OWNER / PMC approved vendors.
However, current validity, holiday status and range of approval as per EIL enlistment letter,
workload, stability and solvency need to be verified by the CONTRACTOR with vendor before
placement of order. CONTRACTOR is also required to ensure that equipment qualification
criteria, specified elsewhere in the bid document, are also simultaneously met.
Page 2645 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SUB-VENDOR LIST
Rev. 0
Page 3 of 3
4.0 Vendors on OWNER / PMC holiday list shall not be considered for ordering. CONTRACTOR
shall comply with this requirement without any time or cost implication to the OWNER. If a
vendor is put on OWNER / PMC’s holiday list subsequent to CONTRACTOR placing an order,
it shall be CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to ensure quality work and timely supply from the
vendor.
5.0 CONTRACTOR shall make an independent assessment of capability of all the vendors for
timely deliveries of material / equipment. Any delays in deliveries by vendor(s) shall not be a
cause of schedule and cost implication.
6.0 At any stage of the project, if it comes to the notice of OWNER / PMC that CONTRACTOR has
procured material / equipment, intentionally or unintentionally whatsoever, from an unapproved
vendor and / or items not falling in approved range of vendor(s), the same shall be rejected fort
with and CONTRACTOR shall be liable to replace such material / plant / machinery without
any schedule and cost implication to the OWNER.
7.0 List of vendors appearing anywhere else in the contract document in case of duplication of the
items at two or more places shall not be considered by CONTRACTOR and shall be
superseded by the vendor list enclosed herewith. And if in this vendor list also, items seems to
be duplicated / repeated then CONTRACTOR shall get clarified the issue by OWNER / PMC
before proceeding ahead for procurement activity.
8.0 It is understood that should the name of vendor be changed due to change in their company or
corporate shareholding, OWNER may accept such vendors under its new name with prior
approval.
Any such approval shall however, not absolve the CONTRACTOR from any of his obligations
under the contract; neither shall any such approval signify nominations or instruction to use
such a vendor. All approved vendors are deemed to have been freely chosen by the
CONTRACTOR at his own risk.
Page 2646 of 3884

SCOPE OF WORK FOR DOCUMENT No.
PIPELINE LAYING AND
B185-000-81-41-SOW-4020 Rev.1
TERMINAL WORKS
(STRUCTURE-UG CIVIL) Page 1 of 15
NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED (NRL)
INDIA BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP PIPELINE PROJECT
SCOPE OF WORK
FOR
(STRUCTURE-UG CIVIL)
TENDER No. - B185-000-83-41-MK-T-9540
1 26.08.2019 RE-ISSUED FOR TENDER AR AR VG
0 02.05.2019 ISSUED FOR TENDER AR AR VG

Date Purpose
No by by by
Page 2647 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING AND
TERMINAL WORKS B185-000-81-41-SOW-4020 Rev.1
(STRUCTURE) Page 2 of 11
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK/SUPPLY ................................................................................................................... 3

2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY ................................................................................................................................ 7
2.1 OWNER SCOPE OF SUPPLY ........................................................................................................................... 7
2.2 CONTRACTOR SCOPE OF SUPPLY ................................................................................................................. 7
3.0 SCHEDULE OF RATES ........................................................................................................................... 7
4.0 LIST OF ATTACHMENTS: ........................................................................................................................ 7
4.1 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: .................................................................................................................. 7
4.2 STANDARDS: .................................................................................................................................................. 8
4.3 LIST OF INSPECTION TEST PLANS .......................................................................................................... 10
4.4 LIST OF DRAWING ........................................................................................................................................ 10
4.5 LIST OF DATASHEETS ................................................................................................................................. 10
4.6 LIST OF JOB SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................................. 11
Page 2648 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING AND
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK/SUPPLY
The detailed scope of work for SV-04, SV-05 & RT (Parbatipur) works shall be, in general, but
not limited to the following,
1) Cutting of trees of all sizes and girths, clearing of bushes, grass, vegetable growth,
etc., grubbing of roots, filling of hollows with approved earth, transportation and
disposing the unserviceable materials beyond plant boundary at suitable location to
be decided by the Contractor and stacking the serviceable materials within plant
boundary etc. all complete as per specification, drawings, documents and directions
of Engineer-in-Charge.
2) Earthwork in excavation & filling with approved earth for general site grading works
including stripping and clearing of cutting/filling area, loading, transportation,
unloading and spreading of earth in layers, watering, rolling, clearing and stripping at
filling areas, uprooting of vegetation, roots and disposal of the shrubs, bushes, roots
etc., all complete as per standards, specifications, drawings, documents and direction
of Engineer-in-charge.
3) Earthwork in excavation including dewatering in all kinds of soil excluding soft rock,
hard rock for RCC Pavements, storm water drains, ERC/IRC for street lighting,
Box/pipe culverts, Manholes, UG Pits etc. all complete as per specification, drawings,
documents and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
4) Earthwork in excavation for all U/G Civil works such as RCC pavement, Storm water
drains, Box/Pipe Culverts, Manholes, UG Pits etc. including backfilling and disposal
of surplus earth as directed by Engineer in charge.
5) Earthwork in back filling for storm water drains, ERC for street lighting, pipe culverts,
Manholes, UG Pits etc. all complete as per specification, drawings, documents and
directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
6) Earthwork in excavation and filling for road embankments with approved borrow earth
including transportation, watering, rolling, compacting, dressing etc. all complete as
per specification, drawings, documents and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
7) Backfilling with selected available approved earth at all depths and disposal of surplus
earth and debris.
8) Earthwork in filling under roads with approved borrow earth including transportation,
watering, rolling, compacting, dressing etc. all complete as per specification,
drawings, documents and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
9) Supply and laying of WBM (Water Bound Macadam) for construction of roads as per
drawings, documents, specification and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 2649 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING AND
10) Providing and laying 50mm thick bituminous macadam on roads

11) Providing and laying 25mm thick premix bituminous carpet.
12) Construction of RCC Pipe Sleepers.
13) Construction of interlocking Paver block footpath as per drawings, documents,
specification and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
14) Construction of RCC storm water drains connecting to the main storm water drain
nearest discharge point as per drawings, specifications and directions of Engineer-
in-Charge.
15) Construction of Chain link fencing with gate as per drawings, specifications and
16) Supplying & laying of PVC pipes for SCRC/ ERC/ IRC embedded in M-20 grade
concrete.
17) Supply and fixing of medium duty CI manhole frames & covers as per IS: 1726.
18) Construction of RCC Pavements including supplying & laying of dry lean concrete
(DLC of grade M15) and HDPE film below pavements and all other related civil
works.
19) Providing and laying of construction joints, expansion joints, sealing joints etc. in the
pavements.
20) Supplying, laying and jointing of UPVC pipes for A/G and U/G drinking water line as
per drawings, specifications and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
21) Providing and laying drinking/raw water lines at RT Parbatipur (connection from
existing drinking water network) with all fittings and accessories including earthwork
in excavation in all types of soils for pipe and valve pits, backfilling with approved
available/ borrow earth etc. all complete
22) Providing building plumbing for drinking water lines, building drainage and sanitary
waste collection system for toilet blocks of building as per drawings, documents,
specification and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
23) Supplying, laying and jointing of above ground approved quality UPVC pipes to be
used for soil and waste discharge application inside buildings confirming to IS:
13592 (Type-B) and fittings confirming to IS: 14735.
24) Supplying, laying and jointing of underground approved quality UPVC pipes to be
used for soil and waste discharge application inside buildings confirming to IS:
13592 (Type-B) and fittings confirming to IS: 14735. For RT Parbatipur, All soil &
waste discharge line shall be connected to the existing sewer network inside the
plant/Terminal.
25) Supplying, laying and jointing of underground approved quality UPVC pipes to be
used for soil and waste discharge or rain water application outside buildings
confirming to IS: 15328 and fittings confirming to IS: 14735.
Page 2650 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING AND
26) Supplying and laying of U/G piping for OWS/CRWS/SS system in process units.
27) Supply & Laying of all underground/ above ground or embedded in walls, piping and
fittings for drinking water system as per specifications and directions of Engineer in
charge.
28) Preparation of internal building plumbing and sanitary piping layouts, based on
Architectural drawings attached with the bid document, as per International
plumbing code/ BIS and getting the same approved from Owner/ EIL. Bidder to
quote accordingly as no separate payment shall be made for the same.
29) Construction of brick masonry Gully trap chamber, Inspection chamber and
Manholes etc.
30) Supply and installation of Floor/ Nahani traps.
31) Construction of Valve Pit.
32) Supplying & laying underground RCC pipes with socket and spigot ends conforming
to IS: 458.
33) Supply, fabrication & erection of Electro forged HDG (Hot dip galvanized) steel
grating on drain, catch basin etc.
34) Construction & erection of precast cover slab on drains.
35) Supply and fixing of heavy duty CI manhole frames & covers as per IS: 1726.
36) Supply and installation of chequered plate cover for clean out pit etc.
37) Supply, fabrication and installation of funnels, cleanout plugs etc.
38) Supply and installation of MS rungs for manholes, valve pit etc
39) Construction of RCC neutralization pit with all necessary civil and piping works.
40) Construction of electrical, instrumentation and street lighting cable road crossings
including earthwork in excavation, backfilling, disposal, etc all complete as per
standards, specifications, drawings and direction of Engineer-in-Charge as per
direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
41) Providing RR masonry pitching for embankment slopes protection for roads,
elevated ungraded areas and other places as per site requirement including
earthwork in excavation, backfilling, disposal, etc. all complete as per standards,
specifications, drawings and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
42) Supply and installation HDPE water storage tank of required capacity with fitting and
accessories and installation of the same at roof the building and connecting it with
laid drinking water line/ network etc. all complete.
43) Supplying and fixing of float valve in drinking water over head tanks.
44) Supplying and fixing gun metal globe valve conforming to IS: 778.
45) Construction of storm water pipe culverts and box culverts as per drawings,
specifications and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 2651 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING AND
46) Design, Engineering, Supply of all materials, installation, fabrication, testing and
commissioning, Dump test, performance guarantee of total flooding centralized
Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System for RT Control Room Building as per EIL
job specification no. B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 attached with the bid document &
NFPA-2001 (latest edition).
47) Providing Firewater piping Network System including connection from the existing
Firewater network: Supplying, fabrication and erection of required size C.S. pipes
(AA97A class as per PMS, to be laid above ground and underground), Isolation/
Drain/ Vent valves (Carbon Steel as per VMS), bends, elbows, flanges, gaskets, nut
and bolts etc., as required, providing fire fighting accessories (a) Stand post type
‘Firewater Hydrants (double headed without pumper connection and isolation valve
at stand post)’ as per OISD requirements, providing anti-corrosive tape coating for
underground fire water piping and painting on aboveground pipes etc., including
supply of all consumables, tools, machinery required all complete as per drawings,
standards, specifications and direction of Engineer-in-charge.
48) Supply and installation of fire extinguishers as per OISD-141, specification and data
sheets.
49) Supply and installation of fire hose cabinets with all accessories as per datasheets
and standards specifications.
50) Hose cabinets are to be located besides each hydrant as per datasheets and
standards specifications.
51) Supply and installation of Fire Hose reel as per datasheets and standards
specifications.
52) Supply and installation of Landing valve as per datasheets and standards
specifications.
53) Supply and installation of first aid firefighting equipment’s/ extinguishers as per
OISD including supply of related brackets, nuts, bolts, rain shed (for outdoor
installation) transportation to site including supply of all related material etc. all
complete as per standards, specifications, drawings, codes and direction of
Engineer-in-charge.
54) Providing Draining system/ arrangements a t various loops/ section of Firewater
system shall be provided.
55) Plain Cement Concrete works of various grades in Pavements, drains, Box/pipe
culverts, manholes etc. all complete as per drawings, documents, specification and
56) Reinforced Cement Concrete works of various grades in Pavements, drains, Box/pipe
culverts, manholes etc. all complete as per drawings, documents, specification and
Page 2652 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING AND
57) Centering and shuttering for RCC works.

58) Supply, cutting, bending, binding, laying in position Reinforcement bars in R.C.C.
work.
59) Disposal area for unserviceable material outside the plant boundary limit and
serviceable materials within plant boundary limit to be arranged by the contractor.
60) Micro-grading of the area as directions of Engineers-in-Charge.
Any other Civil (U/G Piping), not specifically mentioned herein, but required for the
satisfactory and successful completion of the project as per directions of the
Engineer-in-Charge shall also be in the scope of the contractor.
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
2.1 Owner Scope of Supply
NIL
2.2 Contractor Scope of Supply
All materials (consumable / non-consumable) required for execution of Civil works (UG
Civil) under this contract shall be in the scope of contractor.
3.0 SCHEDULE OF RATES
Refer document number B185-000-81-41-MK-SOR-9540-C
4.0 LIST OF ATTACHMENTS:
4.1 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS:
Specification
S. No. Title Rev.
No.
Standard specification for earthwork for
1. 6-65-0006 4
underground piping.
2. 6-65-0010 Standard specification for compound wall 6
3. 6-65-0011 Standard specification for barbed wire fencing. 5
4. 6-65-0013 Standard specification for chain link fencing. 3

Standard specification for classification of soil
5. 6-65-0016 4
for earth work in site grading
Standard specification for site grading & rock
6. 6-65-0017 5
cutting for site grading
Page 2653 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING AND
Standard specification for road & flexible

7. 6-65-0018 7
pavements (upto WBM layer).
8. 6-65-0019 Standard specification for concrete pavement. 4
Standard specification for flexible pavements
9. 6-65-0020 3
with bitumen premix carpet.
Standard specification for pipe culverts &
10. 6-65-0021 4
ERC/ IRC crossing.
Standard specification for underground and
11. 6-65-0027 above ground G.I. pipeline system (water 5
services)
Standard specification for fabrication and
12. 6-65-0030 5
laying of underground piping.
Standard specification for misc. civil &
13. 6-65-0035 structural works for U/G piping & other civil 3
works
Standard specification for underground C.I.
14. 6-65-0036 4
piping system.
Standard specification for underground sewer
15. 6-65-0042 4
system pre cast R.C.C. pipes.
Standard specification for random rubber
16. 6-65-0050 4
pitching.
Standard specification for plumbing & building
17. 6-65-0053 4
drainage.
Standard specification for erection of tube
18. 6-65-0055 4
well.
Standard specification for portable fire
19. 6-66-0004 1
extinguisher
Standard specification for stand post type fire
20. 6-66-0012 4
hydrant (with or without pumper connection)
21. 6-66-0018 Standard specification for first aid hose reel 4
Standard specification for water cum foam
22. 6-66-0027 monitor single barrel type (fixed and variable 5
flow
23. 6-66-0035 Standard specification for landing valve 4
24. 6-66-0047 Standard specification for hose cabinet 4

Standard specification for 50 kg. & 75
25. 6-66-0061 4
kg. capacity dry chemical powder extinguisher.
26. 6-66-0074 Standard specification for fire hydrant system 3
6-82-0001 Standard specification for health, safety &
27. environment (HSE) management at 8
construction sites
6-78-0002 Specification for documentation requirements
28. 1
from contractors
4.2 STANDARDS:
S.No. Standard No. Title Rev.

1. Abbreviations, legends and equipment
7-65-0001 4
symbols.
Page 2654 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING AND
2.
7-65-0006 Cable crossings under road (PVC pipes). 4
3.
7-65-0008 Pipe sleeve detail. 4
4.
7-65-0009 Cable crossings under road (RCC pipes). 4
5.
7-65-0010 Road curves and crossing. 5
6.
7-65-0011 Cross section of road 0
7. Standard sections of brick storm water
7-65-0101 6
drains.
8. Concrete trapezoidal storm water drain
7-65-0102 4
(height (H) < 3.0 m)
9.
7-65-0103 Pipe culvert for storm water drainage. 4
10.
7-65-0104 Box culvert type I, II, III and IV. 5
11.
7-65-0106 Box culvert type V & VI. 5
12. Valve pit (RCC) type-V for dia 2" to dia 6"
7-65-0207 3
valve
13. Valve pit (RCC) type-VI for Ø 8" to Ø 16"
7-65-0208 3
valve
14. Details of rungs for manholes, valve pits,
7-65-0211 4
tanks, etc.
15.
7-65-0212 Standard miscellaneous details for manholes. 4
16.
7-65-0213 Conc. bedding and encasement for pipes. 5
17.
7-65-0214 Gully trap chamber. 5
18.
7-65-0215 Inspection chamber. 4
19.
7-65-0216 Septic tank type I, II, III & IV. 5
20.
7-65-0217 Details of soak pit. 5
21.
7-65-0219 Vents for manholes. 4
22.
7-65-0221 Valve pit type – II for dia 4" to dia 6" valve 5
23.
7-65-0222 Valve pit type-III for dia 8" to dia 16" 5
24. Chequered plate details (for masonry valve
7-65-0224 2
pit type-I, type-II, type-III & type-IV)
25. Manhole type-1 (sanitary waste system) for
7-65-0251 6
depth ≤ 1m (ø ≤ 300)
7-65-0252 6
depth ≤ 2m (ø ≤ 500)
7-65-0253 6
depth ≤ 6m (ø ≤ 1000)
28.
7-65-0310 Detail of neutralisation pit. 4
29.
7-65-0391 Brick Masonry Compound Wall 6
Page 2655 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING AND
30. Standard detail of chain link fencing (with

7-65-0400 4
conc. post)
31.
7-65-0404 RCC pavement details. 4
32.
7-65-0405 Paver brick footpath. 3
33.
7-65-0420 Installation details of fire water hydrant 4
Installation details of water or water cum
34.
7-65-0421 foam monitor, long range foam / water 3
monitor
35.
7-65-0428 Concrete sliding sleeper precast type-1B 3
36.
37.
38.
39. Detail of rain water harvesting (catchment
7-65-0445 3
area ~ 5 ha)
40.
7-65-0448 Upflow anaerobic filter 3
4.3 LIST OF INSPECTION TEST PLANS
S.No Standard No. Title Rev. Pages

Inspection & Test Plans (ITPs) for Civil,
1. 6-82-3100 Structural & Architectural Works (Item 1 64
rate contracts)
4.4 LIST OF DRAWING

S.No Drawing No. Description Rev.
1. B185-030-17-44- Overall Plot Plan -
00001 (RT - Parbatipur)
2. B185-030-83-41- Control Room – RT (Plan, Elevation & -
19001 Section)
4.5 LIST OF DATASHEETS

S.No Drawing No. Description Rev.
1. B185-000-17-44-DS-1623 Data Sheet For Hose Cabinet -
2. B185-000-17-44-DS-1622 Data Sheet For Stand Post Type Fire -
Hydrant
3. B185-000-17-44-DS-1625 Data Sheet For First Aid Hose Reel -
(For Sea Water Service)
4. B185-000-17-44-DS-1624 Data Sheet For Landing Valve -
5. B185-000-17-44-DS-1621 Water Cum Foam Monitor -
Page 2656 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING AND
4.6 LIST OF JOB SPECIFICATIONS
S.No Document No. Description Rev.

1. B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Specification for Clean Agent System -
2. B185-010-81-41-VDR- Vendor Data Requirements – Clean -
8160 Agent System
3. B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Approved Vendor List
(Annexure-II)
4. B185-000-83-41-SP-10 Piping Material Specification (PMS) -
Page 2657 of 3884

dòlfkie1MENGINEERS No.
Eck_ New INDIA LIMITED FOR EARTHWORK FOR 6-65-0006 Rev. 4
UNDER GROUND PIPING
Govt of India Undeltaking)
Page 1 of 7
1-fgri-ra. trectrr el -pr chief
lch 1
-491RT
FOR EARTHWORK
FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING
4 14 03 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD

AVM AJS RS RKT
SPECIFICATION
3 23 05 11 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPEC ALOK RKS RBB DM
Standards Standards
Rev. Prepared Checked Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght EIL — All nghts reserved
Page 2658 of 3884

401 ei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
5fgar Elf5leg INDIA IJMITED
IA Goof of indfa Undertalong)
EARTHWORK FOR UNDER 6-65-0006 Rev. 4
GROUND PIPING
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
IS India Standard
U/G : Underground
Members: Mr. Anurag Sinha

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Mr. Charanjeet Singh (Projects)
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All nghts reserved
Page 2659 of 3884

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
elfltialeg INDIA LIMITED EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
Govt (Ada UndeffaA.91
eRADA(151.3AMA) (A 6-65-0006 Rev. 4
GROUND PIPING
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS 4
3.0 MATERIAL 4
4.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION FOR TRENCHES / PITS FOR PIPELINES 4
5.0 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION 6
6.0 TRANSPORTATION OF SURPLUS EARTH 7
7.0 PAYMENT 7
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 2660 of 3884

0 el , ENGINEERs STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
lita Mieg P---- INDIA LIMITED
Wen eiVtIOU,151,Arovot
EARTHWORK FOR UNDER 6-65-0006 Rev. 4
(A Govt Winds Unttlettaking)
GROUND PIPING
Page 4 of 7
1.0 SCOPE
This specification deals with earthwork in trenches and pits (for valves, manholes, catch pits
etc.) for underground piping.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS
IS: 783 Code of practice for laying of RCC pipes.
IS: 1200 (Part-I) Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works.
IS: 3764 Excavation work — code of safety.
NOTE:- Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 MATERIAL
All workmanship and materials shall conform to the provisions of IS: 1200 (Part-1) and IS:
3764.
4.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION FOR TRENCHES / PITS FOR PIPELINES
4.1 Excavation
Plant, machinery and equipments for excavation shall be selected and deployed to provide
optimum mechanization in excavation of trenches and pits. The selection for excavation and
earth movement machinery etc. shall take into account type of materials to be excavated,
method of excavation, prevailing weather conditions and type of transport to be used.
The excavation of area of cut shall be so timed that the bottom level is not exposed to the
deteriorating influence of the weather for longer duration.
Excavation and earth moving equipment shall be deployed such that minimum damage is
caused to the natural sub-soil structure of exposed formations.
The monitoring of soil deformations, ground water levels during and possibly after
construction work shall be taken into consideration.
In the event, when excavation works are carried out in the vicinity of structures of any
importance, the above monitoring shall be carried out within a distance, from the edge of the
excavation of 5 to 15 times the excavation depth, depending upon the subsoil conditions and
the stability of the neighboring structures.
4.2 Trenching work shall be carried out in all classes of soil including soft rock and excluding
hard rock and shall be for all depths.
4.3 The trench shall be cut true to the line and level as per drawings.
4.4 If the trench is excavated below the required level than that indicated in the drawing, the extra
depth shall be filled with concrete 1:5:10 or approved equivalent materials, as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, at no extra cost to the owner.
4.5 In case of pressure piping, the trench shall be excavated generally as to provide a cover of
1000 mm or dia of pipe whichever is more. In case of gravity sewers/ pipes, the trench shall
be excavated to conform to invert levels as per drawings. However in certain cases, the pipes
may run at shallower levels or at deeper levels depending upon drawing, site condition etc.
Page 2661 of 3884

0 el
ENGNEERs STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
/fga 'Meg INDIA LIMITED EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
laden cnraxed51.3ninn) IA G0A of Ind. Undenalong) 6-65-0006 Rev. 4
GROUND PIPING
Page 5 of 7
No rebate for lesser excavations, nor extra payment due to deeper excavations, shall be
admissible in those cases where pipeline laying rates are inclusive of earthwork items. The
rates quoted shall be deemed to cover all works connected with trenching, whether trenches
are with single pipeline or have multiple pipelines in common trenches including road cutting
and making good the same.
4.6 The width of the trench shall be sufficient to give free working space of personnel,
equipment, supports and ancillaries on each side of the pipe. The free working space shall
conform to IS: 783. Generally it shall not be less than 150 mm on either side or 1/3 dia of
outer diameter of the pipe, whichever is greater.
4.7 When pipelines are running parallel, whether the trenching shall be individual or common,
shall be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge and such decision shall be final and binding on
the contractor. No extra shall be payable for common excavations.
4.8 All earthwork involved in excavations of all types of manholes, catch pits, valve chambers,
inspection chambers, chambers for instrumentation tapping etc., which are coming on the
alignment of U/G piping or as defined by drawing as a part of U/G piping work, shall be paid
extra under Earth work in excavation, back filling and removal of surplus earth etc. under
relevant clauses of the SOR.
4.9 Aspects such as variations in the soil conditions and the geological structure, depth of
excavation, the existence of ground water and surface water, the type and extent of
excavation, the topography of site, the proximity of items such as roads, buildings and buried
services, construction traffic and activities near the excavation eg. Stock piling shall be taken
into account when determining whether the sides of excavation should be free standing,
sloping or temporary supported.
Suitable drainage and / or dewatering system like Well Point method / Bore well method etc.
shall be provided to prevent or limit ingress of surface or sub surface water into excavation.
Serviceable materials intended for reuse should be used as soon as possible after excavation
otherwise they should be stock piled at a location beyond 1.5m from the top edge of the
excavation or beyond a distance equal to the depth of the excavation whichever is higher at a
location approved by the Engineer-in-charge. If excavated serviceable material is not possible
to be stacked within the limits specified above, due to some constraint, it shall be stacked
away at a location approved by Engineer-in-Charge and paid separately under relevant item.
Areas used for temporary stockpiling of excavated material shall be kept clean and orderly,
with excavated material kept by the side of road to avoid traffic movement. Excavated areas
shall be restored to their original condition before completion of works.
All types of shoring and strutting, wherever necessary, shall be adopted to with hold the face
of earth or cutting in slope, as per site requirements and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Supports shall be maintained such that the integrity of the sides of the excavation is not
impaired.
4.10 Any obstacle encountered during excavation shall be reported immediately to the Engineer-
in-Charge and shall be dealt with as instructed.
4.11 The contractor shall maintain all excavated trenches and pits, in a dry and trim condition.
4.12 Necessary barricading and protection of slopes against slips due to traffic movement shall be
provided to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge. Necessary warning flags and lights shall
be provided to caution traffic in the areas where trenches and/ or pits are provided.
Page 2662 of 3884

_ii ,0-1 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
fgeir tatateg INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indta Undertaking)
EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
6-65-0006 Rev. 4
GROUND PIPING
Page 6 of 7
4.13 In case of road cutting, all road material i.e. metal etc., shall be taken out carefully and kept
separately for reuse and road work shall be redone up to the original level, as it was prior to
cutting the road, with the excavated road materials after laying and testing of the pipeline,
within 10 days from the date of starting this work, at the cost of the contractor. The contractor
shall provide suitable warning signs and barricades to prevent accidents.
Contractor shall also provide reasonable bye pass at his own cost when a road is cut for laying
pipeline. Tankage dykes cut due to laying of the pipes, shall be redone conforming to the
original specifications, by the Contractor at his own cost. Secondary dykes, to take care of
any eventuality during construction, shall be provided by the Contractor at his own cost.
4.14 Dewatering shall be done in advance of the installation of the pipe to allow adequate
inspection of padding of the bottom, if required. Dewatering shall be continued throughout
during installation and backfilling.
The trench shall follow the gradient of pipeline as specified in the drawing. The contractor
shall keep the trench in good condition, until the pipe is laid and tested. No extra claim shall
be entertained due to its caving or setting down, either before or after the pipe is laid.
In case, pipe is lowered in caved trench and backfilled before being inspected by the
Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall re-excavate the trench for inspection and backfill it
at his own cost.
5.0 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
Backfilling
Trenches shall be back filled with suitable materials which should be compacted to the same
degree or better as the surrounding soils.
5.1 The soil used should be selected and approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Suitable material can
be extracted from available excavated material. The soil should be free from rubbish, grass,
organic matter, stones, building waste and Black Cotton Soil etc. It should be free from clods
and hard lumps. In case good soil is not available from excavated material for back filling,
trench shall be filled back with locally available coarse sand upto 30 cm. thick above the pipe
and rest of trench shall be filled back with excavated soil upto required level.'
5.2 The filling should commence only after approval of Engineer-in-Charge is obtained and after
the structures or pipes to be buried are tested and approved. Otherwise, if required, contractor
shall uncover buried portion and refill at his own cost.
Temporary excavation supports should be removed as back filling and compaction proceeds,
such that unacceptable movement of the supported ground does not occur.
Voids caused by extracted supports should be filled and compacted.
5.3 Filling should be done in layers. Each layer should be not more than 15 cm thick when loose
and should be well rammed, with necessary watering, to obtain at least 90% of maximum
laboratory dry density.
Compaction trials should be carried out on each soil type to be placed in backfill, in order to
confirm the type of machine and number of passes required to obtain optimum compaction
for given soil moisture contents. These trials should also be used to determine the variability
of the proposed fill material for different weather conditions.
Page 2663 of 3884

4 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
eff ieltAeg
oiren vtivtatre.A3tArtA,
INDIA LIMITED EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
6-65-0006 Rev. 4
f A Govt of India UndertaloV
GROUND PIPING
Page 7 of 7
5.4 Care must be exercised to protect cables, pipes, joints, and other features from damage due to
backfilling and consolidation.
5.5 Filling should extend up to the level of original ground surface or as per drawing or as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The finished surface should be properly trimmed and
dressed. The adjoining area should be cleaned and no heaps of surplus earth should be left
out.
6.0 TRANSPORTATION OF SURPLUS EARTH
Unserviceable materials and serviceable materials not intended for re-use shall be removed
from the work site and disposed off at a location as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
The surplus earth is generated due to pipe laying, valve chambers, and manhole construction
etc. Surplus earth is also generated due to voids in the back filled volume of earth. The
removal of surplus earth shall include excavation, loading, transportation, dumping, stacking
or spreading, as per the directions of Engineer-in-charge.
7.0 PAYMENT
7.1 Unless specifically stated in the schedule of rates, no separate payment for earthwork in
excavation, backfilling, transportation, dewatering etc. shall be admissible and the payment
for the same is deemed to have been included in the relevant items of the contract.
7.2 In case payment for earthwork is specified separately in the Schedule of Rates, the payment
shall be based on the actual quantity of excavation, backfilling and transportation done, taking
into consideration the slopes authorised by the Engineer-in-Charge for excavation, volume of
backfilling calculated on the basis of excavation reduced by the volume of pipes.
7.3 In cases where hard rock excavation is involved, the matter shall be referred to Engineer-in-
Charge, before proceeding with the work.
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All nghts reserved
Page 2664 of 3884

of
`lf-Airelift, ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
elgeir Niles W INDIA UMITED COMPOUND WALL 6-65-0010 Rev. 6
10127f 21RXIAZ 01.3,105A, Govt o India undenakm
Page 1 of 8
miqui claR rzR 1-Him -ftwr

COMPOUND WALL

6 19 07 19
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JAY
5 01.08 12 RC RBB DM
SPECIFICATION KUMAR
4 26 12 07 GAURAV AKM NK VC
SPECIFICATION
3 02 06 97 AMIT PCS MMK ASONI
SPECIFICATION
2 05 06 92 REVISED AND ISSUED GPSB SM RPB RNS
1 22 02 91 UPDATED & ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION BAWA PCS MMK/RPB RNS

Standards Standards
Prepared
Date Purpose Checked by Convenor Chairman
No by
Approved by
Page 2665 of 3884

dafR aft ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
*Igen tillileGNIV INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0010 Rev. 6
(A Gout a/ India Undeitak.n9) COMPOUND WALL
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
GI Galvanized Iron
LSTK : Lump Sum Turnkey
M : Meter
mm Millimeter
MS Mild Steel

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Mr. Ravindra Kumar (Const.)
Page 2666 of 3884

dataeleift ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
Ogee kiMcg Mar INDIA LIMITED
(WV,eixasw atqJcfow) (A Govt of Incla Undertalong) COMPOUND WALL 6-65-0010 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 REFERENCE EIL SPECIFICATIONS / STANDARDS 4
4.0 MATERIALS 5
5.0 EARTHWORK 5
6.0 PLAIN AND REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE 5
7.0 BRICK / STONE MASONRY WORKS 5
8.0 CEMENT PLASTER AND POINTING 5
9.0 DPC 5
10.0 CONCERTINA WITH BARBED WIRE FOR ANTICLIMBING DEVICE OVER
COMPOUND WALL 6
11.0 PAYMENT 7
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
Page 2667 of 3884

darazitilift ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
51gem 0151-egvellirINDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking) COMPOUND WALL 6-65-0010 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 8
1.0 SCOPE
This specification specifies the requirements of compound wall for security purposes.

IS: 278 Specification for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing
IS: 280 Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering purposes
IS: 383 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete
IS: 456 Plain and Reinforced Concrete - Code of Practice
IS: 800 Code of practice for general construction in steel
IS: 814 Covered electrodes for Manual Metal Arc Welding of Carbon and Carbon
Manganese Steel Specification
IS: 816 Codes of Practice for use of Metal Arc Welding for General Construction in
mild steel
IS: 1597 Code of Practice for construction of Stone masonry
IS: 2062 Steel for general structural purposes - Specification
IS: 2212 Code of Practice for Brickwork
IS: 2250 Code of Practice for preparation and use of masonry mortar
NOTE: - Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 REFERENCE EIL SPECIFICATIONS / STANDARDS
Following standard specification shall be enclosed as part of the job

specifications.
Technical Specifications - Civil and Structural Works

General Scope 6-68-0001

Material 6-68-0002

Earth work 6-68-0003

Plain & Reinforcement Cement Concrete 6-68-0004

Structural Steel Works 6-68-0006

Brick Masonry 6-68-0009

Stone Masonry 6-68-0010
Page 2668 of 3884

afaelel. ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
Ogem EffiegNIV INDIA LIMITED
(A Gout of India Undertalang) COMPOUND WALL 6-65-0010 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 8

Miscellaneous Items 6-68-0013
Standard specification for barbed wire fencing. 6-65-0011
Specification for Plastering and Pointing 6-75-0005
Brick Masonry Compound Wall 7-65-0391
Random Rubble Stone Masonry Compound Wall 7-65-0392
Standard specification for surface preparation and

protective coating (new construction) 6-79-0020
4.0 MATERIALS
4.1 Materials for Civil Works
Refer Technical Specification Civil & Structural works - Materials - Spec. No. 6-68-0002.
4.2 Miscellaneous
All other materials not specified, but required to complete the work shall be of approved
type, make as per relevant Indian Standard Specification (if applicable) and shall be
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before Procurement.
5.0 EARTHWORK
Refer Technical spec. Civil & Strl works - Earth work Specification No. 6-68-0003.
6.0 PLAIN AND REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE
6.1 Refer Technical spec. Civil & Structural work - Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete
Specification No. 6-68-004.
Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete work shall confirm to Indian Standard for Plain and
Reinforced Concrete-Code of practice (Fourth Revision), IS 456.
7.0 BRICK / STONE MASONRY WORKS
Refer Technical spec. Standard specification - civil & structural works - brick masonry 6-68-
0009 and Standard specification - civil & structural works - stone masonry 6-68-0009.
8.0 CEMENT PLASTER AND POINTING
Refer Technical spec. Plastering and Pointing Specification No. 6-75-0005.
9.0 DPC
Refer Technical spec. Civil and Structural Works Miscellaneous Items Specification No. 6-
68-0013
Page 2669 of 3884

t391ae.itgift ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
5 en Weg W LIMITED
INDIA 6-65-0010 Rev. 6
ff.aoo..0 (A GM of Inelfa uncienak.ng) COMPOUND WALL
Page 6 of 8
10.0 CONCERTINA WITH BARBED WIRE FOR ANTICLIMBING DEVICE OVER

COMPOUND WALL
10.1 Structural Steel Posts for Anti climbing Device
10.1.1 Structural steel shall conform to IS : 2062 grade E250.
10.1.2 Structural steel work shall be fabricated and erected as shown in the drawings, Fabrication
and Erection shall conform to IS: 800.
10.1.3 All materials used for fabrication shall be of new and unused stock and shall be free from
twist, kinks, buckles or any defects. Maker's test certificate shall be made available to the
Engineer-in-Charge when called for.
10.1.4 Electrodes for welding shall conform to IS: 814. Welding shall be carried out as shown in
the relevant drawing and shall conform to IS: 816.
10.1.5 The Engineer-in-Charge reserves the right to test at any time any welding and the cost of
tests shall be borne by the contractor.
10.1.6 All materials tools and plants required for fabrication shall be provided by the contractor
and the rates quoted shall make the allowance for the same.
10.1.7 M.S. angle posts shall be installed on top pilasters as line posts and corner posts.
10.1.8 Changes in direction where the angle of deflection exceeds 20° shall be considered corner
and corner angle post shall be installed.
10..1.9 Painting shall not commence till it has been inspected by Engineer-in-Charge.
10.1.10 All loose scales, dirt, rust etc. shall be removed by short blasting / mechanical or power
tool cleaning or with steel wire brushes (before applying a priming coat) as per Painting
Specification no. 6-79-0020
10.1.11 All Primers and paints used shall be supplied as per Painting specification no. 6-79-0020
and of approved manufacturer.
10.1.12 The surface after applying primer shall be made absolutely dry before applying paint.
10.1.13 Two coats of specified thickness of approved paint over a priming coat (suitable for
temperature range of -1 to 60° C, in corrosive environment — offsite areas) shall be applied
as per Painting Specification.
10.1.14 Each coat shall be allowed to dry for sufficient time as per manufacturer's directions.
10.2 Barbed Wire for Anti climbing Device
10.2.1 Barbed wire shall conform to IS: 278. The galvanized barbed wire shall be manufactured
from galvanized mild steel wire conforming to IS: 280. The coating on the wire shall be
smooth and relatively free of lumps, globes or points, wires with excessive roughness,
blisters and Sal ammoniac spots shall be rejected. A galvanized steel barbed wire of Type
A-1 IS: 278 shall be made from two strands of galvanized, twisted 2.5 mm steel wire with 4
points of barbs. Each barb shall have two turns tightening around both line wires making
Page 2670 of 3884

etelift ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
*Igen laPeg NW INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0010 Rev. 6
CA Govt of India Undertaking) COMPOUND WALL
Page 7 of 8
altogether four complete turns. The barbs shall be so finished that four points are set and
looked at right angles to each other.
10.2.2 Bracing of the rows of barbed wire shall be as shown in EIL standard drawing.
10.2.3 All miscellaneous material, the staples, straining bolts etc. shall be galvanized. Minimum
length of staples shall be 40 mm.
10.2.4 The fencing shall be plump, taut, true to line and complete in all respects.
10.2.5 The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13 mm and not more than 18 mm.
10.3 Concertina wire for safety
10.3.1 Concertina wire shall conform to IS: 278. The galvanized barbed wire shall be manufactured
from galvanized mild steel wire conforming to IS: 280. The coating on the wire shall be
smooth and relatively free of lumps, globes or points, wires with excessive roughness,
blisters and Sal ammoniac spots shall be rejected. Diameter of the wire: 2.56mm, Blade
thickens: 0.53mm, Blade length: 12.60mm, Blade width: 12.73mm, Avg. blade spacing
25.00mm, diameter of ring 610 mm, Spacing of each ring / coil: 150mm.
11.0 PAYMENT
11.1 Earthwork
No separate payment shall be made for clearing, stripping and disposal of material obtained
from clearing. This shall be considered as part of work in areas of cutting and filling work
and the rates quoted under the respective items of:-
i) Earthwork in excavation/cutting and
ii) Earthwork in filling (both with available earth & earth excavated from approved
borrow areas) shall be inclusive of clearing and stripping.
Payment for filling shall be made on cubic meter basis of the volume calculated. The rate
shall include clearing, stripping, compaction of original ground, transportation of earth,
watering, consolidating, testing etc. complete.
11.2 Structural Steel
The payment shall be made on weight of the installed structural steel work. The weight
shall be calculated on the basis of IS hand book. The rate shall include supply of all
necessary materials and labour for fabrication, cutting, drilling holes, aligning, fixing barbed
wires, keeping the post in proper position while concreting, including painting etc. complete
as per drawings and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
11.3 Concertina with Barbed Wire Fencing
Payment for barbed wire & concertina shall be made on running meter basis. The rate shall
include supplying and fixing necessary G.I. staples, clips, pins, straining bolts etc.
tensioning the barbed wire etc. and all materials, labour etc. required to complete the job.
11.4 The payment for Brick Masonry, Stone Masonry, Plastering, Pointing, DPC & coping shall
be done as per the payment clauses of their respective specifications i.e. for brick masonry
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright Ell — All rights reserved
Page 2671 of 3884

laRe_lelift ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
liffflegWINDIA LIMITED
Govt cA Inds Undertaking) COMPOUND WALL 6-65-0010 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 8
as per specification number 6-68-009, for stone masonry as per specification number 6-68-
0010, for plastering & pointing as per specification number 6-75-0005, for coping as per
specification number 6-68-0004, for DPC as per specification number 6-68-0013.
11.5 The payment clause 11.0 is not applicable in case of LSTK Jobs
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght EIL — All rights reserved
Page 2672 of 3884

'0_1 1 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
4R ZJI 'Meg INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0011 Rev. 5
I iiRR ARIA? Z15130Mill IA Govt of India Undertaking)
FOR BARBED WIRE FENCING
Page 1 of 6
64145 am EFR:ri tg 411l1ch 149.4r

BARBED WIRE FENCING

5 04 07 19 AVM AJS RS RKT
SPECIFICATION
4 28 05 12 JKU RKS RBB DM
SPECIFICATION
3 21 08 06 PPC UCJ VDS VJN
SPECIFICATION
2 01 09 98 RC PCS MMK AS
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND ISSUED AND STANDARD
1 08 01 92 RLT SM RPB RNS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
No by by
Approved by
Page 2673 of 3884

- ENGINEERS
ak STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
sigen faoregw INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0011 Rev. 5
eiWerE MAW. Govt India Undertalang) BARBED WIRE FENCING
Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
GI Galvanized Iron
IS Indian Standard
LSTK Lump Sum Turn Key
MS Mild Steel
RCC Reinforced Cement Concrete
Structural Standards Committee:

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2674 of 3884

4611 faelel ft
Oges 00:fagW INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0011 Rev. 5
INRSTeature =aria. (A Govt of India Undettaking) BARBED WIRE FENCING
Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 REFERENCE EIL SPECIFICATIONS / STANDARDS 4
4.0 MATERIALS 4
5.0 EARTHWORK 4
7.0 BARBED WIRE FENCING WITH R.C.C. POSTS 5
8.0 BARBED WIRE FENCING WITH M.S. ANGLE POSTS 5
9.0 PAYMENT 6
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght EIL —All nghts reserved
Page 2675 of 3884

511fReleiaft
- ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
O]ge_ji lat5GS W INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0011 Rev. 5
(WA( AteStom3AWA, (AGouto ndia undertalong) BARBED WIRE FENCING
Page 4 of 6
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes and defines the material and construction requirements for
Barbed Wire Fencing.
IS : 278 Specification for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing

IS : 383 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for
concrete
IS : 456 Plain and Reinforced Concrete — Code of Practice
IS : 800 Code of practice for general construction in steel
IS : 2062 Steel for general structural purposes — Specification
IS : 2074 Ready mixed paint drying, red oxide zinc chrome, priming
Specification
IS : 2933 Enamel, Synthetic, Exterior (a) Undercoating (b) Finishing
3.0 REFERENCE EIL SPECIFICATIONS / STANDARDS
Standard Specification — Civil and Structural Works


Material 6-68-0002



Specification for Plastering and Pointing 6-75-0005
Details of Barbed Wire Fencing (with concrete post) 7-65-0402
Details of Barbed Wire Fencing (with angle iron post) 7-65-0403
4.0 MATERIALS
4.1 Materials for Civil Works
Refer Standard Specification for Civil & Strl. works — Materials, Spec. No. 6-68-0002.
4.2 Miscellaneous
All other materials not specified, but required to complete the work shall be of approved
type, make as per relevant Indian Standard Specification (if applicable) and shall be
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before Procurement.
5.0 EARTHWORK
Refer Standard Specification for Civil & Strl. works - Earth work, Spec. No. 6-68-0003.
Page 2676 of 3884

Onfar.. t .(ft
"- ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
4igariagregW INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0011 Rev. 5
A GoA of lode Unciertalungt BARBED WIRE FENCING
Page 5 of 6
Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete work shall confirm to Indian Standard for Plain and
Reinforced Concrete-Code of practice (Fourth Revision), IS 456:2000.
7.0 BARBED WIRE FENCING WITH R.C.C. POSTS
7.1 Cement Concrete in Precast Post/Struts
7.1.1 Plain Cement Concrete shall be grade M20 suitable for severe exposure condition and
Reinforced Cement Concrete shall be of grade M30 suitable for severe exposure condition
conforming to IS 456:2000 with 20 mm and down size crushed stone aggregates
conforming to IS : 383.
7.1.2 The work shall be carried out as per IS:456 in all respects.
7.1.3 Necessary moulds shall be provided for casting the concrete posts and the same shall be
smooth finished with 1:3 cement sand mortar as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.1.4 The concrete shall be cured for a minimum period of 14 days.
7.1.5 Payment for this item shall be made on cubic metre basis and the rate shall include labour,
materials, mixing, placing, leaving pockets, fixing barbed wires, inserts in concrete posts
while casting as shown in the drawing or as per the directions of Engineer-in-Charge,
keeping the concrete posts in proper position while concreting, scaffolding, shuttering, all
moulds, curing etc. complete including handling & transportation from precasting yards to
place of fixing, preparation of precasting yard etc. but excluding cost of reinforcement.
7.2 Barbed Wire for Fencing
7.2.1 Barbed wire shall conform to IS : 278. The coating on the wire shall be smooth and
relatively free of lumps, globes or points. Wires with excessive roughness, blisters,
salammoniac spots shall be rejected. A galvanized steel barbed wire of Type A-1 IS:278
shall be made from two strands of galvanised, twisted 2.5 mm steel wire with 4 points of
barbs. Each barb shall have two turns tightening around both line wires making altogether
four complete turns. The barbs shall be so finished that four points are set and looked at
right angles to each other.
7.2.2 Bracing of the rows of barbed wire shall be as shown in drawing.
7.2.3 All miscellaneous material like staples, straining bolt etc. shall be galvanised. Minimum
length of staples shall be 50 mm.
7.2.4 The fencing shall be plumb, taut, true to line and complete in all respects.
7.2.5 The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13 mm and not more than 18 mm.
7.2.6 Payment for barbed wire shall be made on running metre basis of two ply, four points
barbed wire fixed in position. The rate shall include supplying and fixing necessary GI
staple, clips, straining bolts painting, tensioning the barbed wire and all materials, labour
etc. required to complete the job.
8.0 BARBED WIRE FENCING WITH M.S. ANGLE POSTS
8.1 M.S. Angle Posts & Struts

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright El L — All rights reserved
Page 2677 of 3884

kJI el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
$1geff tlfReg INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0011 Rev. 5
1.11,2MRIMIstEl,f7Pr., (A Govt of InOo Undefta.ogi BARBED WIRE FENCING
Page 6 of 6
8.1.1 Structural steel work shall conform to latest edition of IS : 2062 or equivalent. Barbed wire
fencing shall be as per 5.2 above.
8.1.2 Structural steel work shall be fabricated and erected as shown in the drawings. Fabrication
and erection shall conform to IS : 800.
8.1.3 All materials used for fabrication shall be of new and unused stock and shall be free from
twist, kinks, buckles, or any other defects. Maker's test certificate shall be made available
to the Engineer-in-Charge when called for.
8.1.4 All materials, tools and plants required for fabrication shall be provided by the contractor
and the rates quoted shall make the allowance for the same.
8.1.5 Changes in direction where the angle of deflection exceeds 20 shall be considered corner
post.
8.1.6 Painting shall not commence till it has been inspected by Engineer-in- Charge.
8.1.7 All the paints used shall be synthetic enamel conforming to IS :2933 and of approved
manufacturer.
8.1.8 All loose scales, dirt, rust etc. shall be removed with steel wire brushes before applying a
coat of red oxide primer conforming to IS : 2074.
8.1.9 The surface after applying primer shall be made absolutely dry before applying paint.
8.1.10 Two coats of approved synthetic enamel paint over a coat of red oxide primer shall be
applied unless otherwise specified.
8.1.11 Each coat shall be allowed to dry for sufficient time as per manufacturer's directions.
9.0 PAYMENT
9.1 The payment shall be made on weight of the installed structural steel work. The weight
shall be calculated on the basis of IS hand book. The rate shall include supply of all
necessary materials and labour for fabrication, cutting, drilling holes, aligning, fixing
barbed wires, keeping the post in proper position while concreting, including painting etc.
complete as per drawings and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
9.2 The payment clause(s) as described in this standard specification shall not be referred/
applicable for LSTK Jobs.
Page 2678 of 3884

fgeTr fdal
eg INDIA LIMITED CHAIN LINK FENCING 6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Q`fe,gncf5Leio•tr (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 7
49. Prick) .4FR:irr iiiich 14-1411

CHAIN LINK FENCING

3 24.06.13 RBT RKS DM
SPECIFICATION
2 19.02.08 MANAS PPC /RKS NK VC
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Date Purpose Checked
No by Convenor Chairman
by
Approved by
Page 2679 of 3884

27f tcg INDIA LIMITED CHAIN LINK FENCING 6-65-0013 Rev. 3
,I 'U IA Govt of Intha UndeftakmOl
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
c/c center to center
GI Galvanized Iron
IS Indian Standard
LSTK : Lump Sum Turnkey Contract
mm Millimeter
M Meter
MS Mild Steel
MT Metric Ton
General Civil Standards Committee
Convener: Mr. R.B. Bhutda
Members: Mr. Vipan Goel

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Rajan ji Srivastava (Structural)
Mr. Harish Chandra (Piping)
Mr. B. R. Bhogal (Electrical)
Mr. Praveen Goel (Environment)
Mr. S. Mukherjee (Construction)
Mr. V S Chhaya (Projects)
Page 2680 of 3884

5fgareTFmrtfa&
og,zn-
INDIA LIMITED CHAIN LINK FENCING 6-65-0013 Rev. 3
41r, To Govt of Ind. Undertaking)
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 REFERENCE OF EIL SPECIFICATIONS / STANDARDS 4
4.0 EARTHWORK FOR CIVIL WORKS 4
5.0 CEMENT CONCRETE FOR FOUNDATION & SILL 4
6.0 CEMENT CONCRETE IN PRECAST POSTS/STRUTS 4
7.0 REINFORCEMENT 5
8.0 CHAIN LINK FENCING 5
9.0 PAYMENT 7
Page 2681 of 3884

$gar fafireg
INR elegge ,TP415A
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl of India Undettang) CHAIN LINK FENCING 6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 7
1.0 SCOPE
This specification specifies the requirements of chain link fence for security purposes. The
height of the fence shall be approximately 2.00M to the top of the chain link fencing at the
posts and approximately 2.5M in vertical height at the top line of barbed wire attached to
the cranked tops of the posts.

IS : 278 Specification for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing
IS : 383 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for
concrete
IS : 456 Plain and Reinforced Concrete — Code of Practice
IS : 2721 Specification for Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fencing
3.0 REFERENCE OF EIL SPECIFICATIONS / STANDARDS

Following standard specification shall be enclosed as part of the job
specifications.


Material 6-68-0002



Standard detail of chain link fencing (with conc. Post) 7-65-0400
4.0 EARTHWORK FOR CIVIL WORKS
Refer specification No. 6-68-0003
5.0 CEMENT CONCRETE FOR FOUNDATION & SILL
5.1 Refer specification No. 6-68-0004.
6.0 CEMENT CONCRETE IN PRECAST POSTS/STRUTS

(Straining posts, intermediate posts and struts)
6.1 Pre Cast Cement concrete shall be of M25 grade for moderate environment exposure
condition and M30 grade for severe environment exposure condition with 20mm and
down size crushed stone aggregates conforming to IS : 383.
6.2 The work shall be carried out as per IS : 456 in all respects.
6.3 Necessary moulds shall be provided for casting the concrete posts and the same shall be
Page 2682 of 3884

101 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
1=g-ar tlfgrdg INDIA LIMITED
25-2,7,7=37'45,i) (A Govt of Indo Undertaking) CHAIN LINK FENCING 6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 7
6.3 Necessary moulds shall be provided for casting the concrete posts and the same shall be
7.0 REINFORCEMENT
7.1 Refer specification No. 6-68-0004
8.0 CHAIN LINK FENCING
8.1 Materials
8.1.1 Chain Link Fencing
The material requirement shall conform to IS : 2721 latest edition. The chain link
fencing shall be woven from 3.15mm dia wire with mesh size of 50mm. The mesh wire
shall not vary from the specified dia by more than + 0.05mm.
8.1.2 Galvanized Wires
8.1.2.1 All steel wires shall be hot dipped galvanized wire and dia of the wire shall be 3.15mm.
over the galvanized coating.
8.1.2.2 The line wire shall be 4.0mm dia MS.
8.1.2.3 The stirrup wire for securing the line wires to the concrete intermediate posts shall be
3.15mm diameter MS.
8.1.2.4 The tying wire for securing the chain link fencing to the line wire shall be 2.50mm
diameter MS.
8.1.2.5 Hair pin staples for fastening down the bottom of galvanized chain link fencing to the
concrete sill shall be of 3.15mm wire. The ends shall be bent outwards to secure
anchorage.
8.1.3 Cleats for eye bolts shall be of uniform size and shall consists of MS angle of 75 x 50 x
6mm.
8.1.4 Eye Bolt Strainers
8.1.4.1 The eye bolt strainer shall consist of bolts with welded eye sufficiently threaded and
fitted with a nut and waster.
8.1.4.2 Two-way eye bolt strainer shall have suitable ring nuts, fitted after wires have been
strained on one side.
8.1.5 Stretcher bar shall consist of MS flats 25mm x 4.75mm. They shall be secured to the
cleats by steel bolts.
8.1.6 Droppers for barbed wire shall be of M.S not less than 25mm x 4.75mm thick with
38mm x 4.85mm half round staples for fastening the barbed wire to them.
Page 2683 of 3884

ENGINEERS ED STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
12-err 254-es
Icnen rirm■
rtm3PCM11
INDIA LIMIT
IA Govt ol India Undellaking) CHAIN LINK FENCING 6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 7
8.1.7 Barbed Wire
8.1.7.1 Barbed wire shall conform to IS :278. The galvanized barbed wire shall be
manufactured from galvanized MS wire conforming to IS:280. The coating on the wire
shall be smooth and relatively free of lumps, globes or points, wires with excessive
roughness, blisters, Sal ammoniac spots shall be rejected. A galvanized steel barbed
wire of Type A-1 IS:278 shall be made from two strands of galvanised, twisted 2.5 mm
steel wire with 4 points of barbs. Each barb shall have two turns tightening around both
line wires making altogether four complete turns. The barbs shall be so finished that
four points are set and looked at right angles to each other.
8.1.7.2 Bracing of the rows of barbed wire shall be as shown in EIL Standard drawing.
8.1.7.3 The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13mm and not more than 18mm.
8.2 Erection
8.2.1 Straining posts shall be provided at all ends and corners of fences, at changes in
direction or acute variations in level and at intervals not exceeding 60m on straight
lengths of fence. Intermediate posts shall be spaced at regular intervals not exceeding
3M.
8.2.2 Struts shall be fitted to all straining posts behind the chain link fabric in the direction of
the line of fence.
8.2.3 Fixing chain link fencing
8.2.3.1 There shall be four evenly spaced rows of line wire. The top wire shall be doubled,
making five line wires in all. The bottom wire shall be close to the ground.
8.2.3.2 Each line wire shall be strained tightly by means of eyebolt strainers or winders at each
straining point.
8.2.3.3 Each line wire shall be secured to each intermediate post by a wire stirrup passed
through a hole in the posts and secured to the line wire by three complete turns on each
side of the post.
8.2.3.4 The chain link fencing shall be strained between each pair of straining posts and secured
to each straining post by means of a Stretcher bar. One of the top line wires shall be
threaded through the appropriate adjacent rows of mesh, care being taken that no meshes
in the rows are bypassed by the line wire except where deviation is necessary at the
straining posts. The second top line wire shall be strained in front of the fencing. The
fencing shall be attached to the top and bottom line wire by wire ties spaced 150mm
apart and to the other line wires by wire ties spaced 450mm apart.
8.2.3.5 The bottom of the fencing shall be treated as follows:
Continuous concrete sill 230mm wide x 300mm high for full length between post shall
be cast with the top 25mm above G.L. and 25mm below the chain link fencing. Hair pin
staples shall be threaded through the bottom row of mesh at 0.75 m c/c and set in the sill
to a depth of 150mm.
8.2.4 Fixing barbed wires for Anticlimbing device.
Page 2684 of 3884

lgzrr fagrdg
tvecnre- a513913,
+1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking) CHAIN LINK FENCING 6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 7
8.2.4.1 Three lines of barbed wire shall be provided as shown in drg. The wires shall be
attached by eye bolts to the cranked tops of the straining posts. On concrete intermediate
posts they shall be secured to cranked tops with stirrup wires. The barbed wire shall be
fitted with one droper at the centre of each bay, secured to the wires so that they cannot
be bunched together.
9.0 PAYMENT
9.1 Earthwork
Payment for earthwork shall be made on cubic meter basis
9.2 Cement Concrete (Cast-in-Situ and Pre-cast)
Payment shall be made on cubic meter basis and the rate shall include labour, materials,
mixing placing, leaving pockets, fixing chain link fencing, line wires, barbed wires inserts
in concrete post while casting as shown in the drawing or as per the directions of
Engineer-in-Charge, keeping the concrete post in the proper position while concreting,
scaffolding, all moulds, curing etc. complete including handling & transportation from
pre-casting yards to place of fixing, preparation of pre-casting yards etc. but excluding
cost of reinforcement.
9.3 Reinforcement
Payment for reinforcement shall be made on MT basis including transportation of steel

to site of work, straightening, cleaning, cutting, bending to required shapes and lengths,
placing, binding with soft annealed wire as per drawings, specifications and instruction
of Engineer-in-Charge.
9.4 Chain Link Fencing
Payment for chain link fencing shall be made on running meter basis for bottom 2.0
meter height of the total height including supply of chain link fencing in 1.9 meter width
roll, fixing in position true to line and as per drawing. The rate shall also include
supplying and fixing necessary galvanized line wires, stirrup wires, tying wires, hair pin
staples for fixing the fence in conc sill, etc. tensioning the line wire and fencing, all
materials and labour etc. required to complete the job as per drawings and direction of
Engineer-in-Charge.
9.5 Barbed Wire Fencing
Payment for barbed wire shall be made on running meter basis. The rate shall included
supply and fixing necessary dropers, straining bolts tensioning the barbed wire etc. and
all materials and labour etc. required to complete the job.
9.6 The payment clause(s) as described in this standard specification shall not be referred
/applicable for LSTK Jobs.
Page 2685 of 3884

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
ENGINEERS
oge.ir EigtegW_IIINDIA LIMITED CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL FOR 6-65-0016 Rev. 4
1.41271e.froffeo,NOrto) f A Govt of India undertaiong) EARTHWORK IN SITE GRADING Page 1 of 6
ai41 flida (4414)1 rot)

Hivich feT4r
FOR CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL
FOR EARTHWORK IN SITE GRADING

4 AVM AJS RS
14 03.19 SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght Ell — All nghts reserved
Page 2686 of 3884

daraexiga ENONEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
51g_o tiiIRegyr INDIA LIMITED CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL FOR 6-65-0016 Rev. 4

EARTHWORK IN SITE GRADING Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
gm/cc : Gram Per Cubic Centimeter

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copynght EIL — All nghts reserved
Page 2687 of 3884

Alk
- ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
0?es Etieg NIFINDIA LIMITED CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL FOR 6-65-0016 Rev. 4
-3""" '"G°°' U'd."") EARTHWORK IN SITE GRADING Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 ORDINARY SOIL 4
3.0 SOFT ROCK 4

4.0 HARD ROCK 4
5.0 FILLING SOIL 5

6.0 METHOD OF FILLING / FIELD DENSITY FOR SOIL COMPACTION 5
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 2688 of 3884

filk
- ENGINEERS
Ifgeff laPieg W INDIA LIMITED CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL FOR 6-65-0016 Rev. 4
fAG04°,,,..und,w-g) EARTHWORK IN SITE GRADING Page 4 of 6
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers classification of soil for earthwork in excavation and filling for site
grading work. Method of field density for soil compaction, using soft rock and hard rock, is
also explained.
2.0 ORDINARY SOIL
2.1 Soft Soil / Loose Soil
Generally any soil which yields to the ordinary application of pick and shovel, or to phawra,
rake or other ordinary digging implements such as:
Sand, gravel, loam, clay, mud, black cotton soil
Vegetables or organic soil, turf, peats, soft shale or loose moorum
Mud concrete below ground level
Any mixture of soil mentioned above.
2.2 Hard/ Dense Soil
Generally any soil, which requires close application of picks or jumpers or scarifier and
rippers to loosen the same, such as:
i) Stiff heavy clay, hard shale or compact moorum requiring grafting tool and/ or pick
and shovel
ii) Shingle and river or nallah bed boulders
iii) Soling of roads, paths etc. and hard core
iv) Macadam surface of any description (water bound, grouted tarmac etc.)
v) Lime concrete, stone masonry in lime or cement mortar below ground level
vi) Soft conglomerate when the stone can be detached from the matrix with picks and
shovels
3.0 SOFT ROCK
This is fissured / disintegrated rocky strata, boulders (volume less than 0.4 m3 and more than
0.028 M3) and also which cannot be quarried/ excavated by using above manual tools but can
be quarried/ excavated manually by using crow bars is classified as soft rock. Soft rock shall
include all kinds of stiff and stratified rock, such as shales, thinly bedded philites, laterite hard
conglomerate, lime stone, sand stone and unreinforced cement concrete below ground level.
Soft rock may be quarried or split with crow bar or picks and can also be excavated by rippers,
dozers and other mechanical equipment, but without the aid of blasting. If required, light
blasting may be restored to, for loosening the materials, but this will not, in any way entitle the
material to be classified as "Hard Rock".
4.0 HARD ROCK
4.1 Hard Rock (Not Requiring Blasting)
This shall include all types of hard and compact rock, having closely spaced fissures or joints,
on account of which blasting is not considered necessary.
Page 2689 of 3884

afaeleid4-
Ilk ENGINEERS
ial5ftWif INDIA LIMITED CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL FOR 6-65-0016 Rev. 4
°I Und'") EARTHWORK IN SITE GRADING Page 5 of 6
4.2 Hard Rock (Requiring General Blasting)
This shall include all types of hard and compact rock occurring in unfissured masses or similar
foundations, boulders (volume more than 0.4m3) for excavation in which blasting is
considered necessary such as quartzite, granite, basalt stones, reinforced cement concrete
(reinforcement to be cut through but not separated from concrete) below ground level and the
like.
4.3 Hard Rock (Requiring Controlled Blasting)
This type of excavation becomes necessary when excavation is done in formations, mentioned
in Clause 4.2, in the vicinity of existing foundations/ structures. Mode of blasting shall be
decided by Engineer-in-Charge, keeping in view the sensitivity of structures.
4.4 Hard Rock (Blasting Prohibited)
Hard rock requiring blasting as described in clause 4.2 above, but when blasting is prohibited
for any reason and excavation has to be carried out by chiseling, splitter or any other agreed
method.
The use of excavation shall not be considered as a reason for classification under hard rock
requiring blasting unless clearly found necessary in the opinion of Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0 FILLING SOIL
5.1 Ordinary soil used for filling shall meet requirements of clause 4 of Standard Spec. No. 6-65-
0017, for Site Grading.
5.2 Use of soft rock for filling shall be determined based on compaction test of filling material.
Well graded soft rock with sufficient fines should make a good filling material. This shall be
tested in field for compaction and then density of compacted soils shall be determined. Test
patches shall be made in field using this material and number of passes of rollers determined
for each patch. A minimum of 3 test patches of 10m x 10m shall be made. Density of
compaction shall be determined in each patch. A density of 1.90 gm/cc or more shall be
acceptable.
5.3 Use of hard rock with soft rock and soil for filling shall be determined based on compaction
test of rock material to be used for filling. Test patches shall be made as in case of soft rocks
and number of rolls shall be determined for each test patch. Density of material in all test
patches shall be found, which should not be less than 2.0 gm/cc.
5.4 The decision of Engineer-in-Charge with regard to suitability of such materials shall be final.
6.0 METHOD OF FILLING / FIELD DENSITY FOR SOIL COMPACTION
6.1 Filling With Soft Rock/ Hard Rock Soil
The earth for filling shall be rock soil mass, available from cutting areas. Filling shall be done
in loose thickness of 400 mm. Voids shall be filled with smaller size material to ensure well
graded and compacted fill. Watering, ramming and compacting with rollers or other suitable
means as approved by Engineer-in-Charge shall be done to achieve at least 90% maximum dry
density. Stones used in fill material shall not exceed 150 mm in size.
Page 2690 of 3884

OfIdelei ENGINEERS
5igeg tiPteg INDIA LIMITED CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL FOR 6-65-0016 Rev. 4
'A G" Ofin'
" Unde"") EARTHWORK IN SITE GRADING Page 6 of 6
6.2 Field Testing for Density
Each layer shall be tested in field for density and accepted by the Engineer-in-Charge, subject
to achieving the required density, before laying the next layer. In the event, if it is not possible
to conduct compaction test due to presence of stones, the compaction shall be determined at
site by excavating a pit of size 0.5m x 0.5m x 0.3m (depth) in compacted area. The excavated
soil shall be weighed. The pit shall be filled with water after laying a thin polythene sheet and
weight of water so filled shall be determined. Alternatively, sand can also be used for filling
the pit for determining the density.
Density of filled material shall be equal to the weight of soil / weight of water
This shall not be less than 1.90 gm/cc for soft rock and 2.0gm/cc for hard rock fill area. One
test per 4000 m2 compacted area shall be done for every layer of filling. Number of tests can
be increased due to variation in quality of fill material and / or at the discretion of Engineer-in-
Charge.
Page 2691 of 3884

00- 111A ENGINEERS
i OP46-, INDIA LIMITED FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
e-,Od,
( 4O, 1)73vd) (A Govt of India Undertaking) CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
Page 1 of 12
•
(-11 d x.115 +1 WziF
*Bid wadd4i coid
Trr-i-w *Mr
FOR SITE GRADING
AND ROCK CUTTING
FOR SITE GRADING
5 24.09.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RBT I)(S RBB DM
4 23.05.11 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. ALOK RKS RBB VK DM
3 16.02.06 REViSLD & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC SIKC NK VDS VJN
2 25.06.99 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC PKT PCS MMK A SONI
Standards GM Standards
Committee (Engg) Bureau
No by by
Approved by
I ormat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0

Page 2692 of 3884

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
fg-ar id5reg
rtecwaTaxgr.1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Unclettalong)
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK 6-65-0017 Rev. 5
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING Page 2 of 12
Abbreviations:
DGMS Director General of Mines Safety
gm/cc Gram Per Cubic Centimeter
IS Indian Standard
NGL Natural Grade Level

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. V S Chhhaya (Projects)
rormat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved
Page 2693 of 3884

$2ZIT faiAeg
Z INDIA LIMITED FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK 6-65-0017 Rev. 5
J44 IA Govt Al India Undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 GENERAL 4
4.0 MATERIAL FOR EARTHWORK 4
5.0 CUTTING TREES 4
6.0 CLEARING AND STRIPPING 5
7.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION / CUTTING 5
8.0 EARTHWORK IN FILLING 6
9.0 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EARTH 7
10.0 EXCAVATION IN ROCK 8
F-ormat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 2694 of 3884

ei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
$1g-elf legreg INDIA LIMITED FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK 6-65-0017 Rev. 5
,t-twt riecv,ent3tros.0 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE
This specification and the method of measurements described thereon are applicable for earthwork
involved in Site Grading & Rock Cutting.

IS:2720 Part IV Methods of tests for soils.
IS:2720 Part V Methods of tests for soils-Part 5 :Determination of liquid & plastic limit.
IS:2720 Part VII Methods of tests for soils Part-VII :Determination of water content — Dry
Density Relation using Light Compaction.
6-65-0016 Std. specification for classification of soil for earthwork in site grading.
3.0 GENERAL
3.1 CONTRACTOR shall maintain adequate drainage facilities at SITE at all times during the execution
of work. Additional ditches, drains & such other temporary means to achieve this, over and above
what is shown in the drawings, shall be provided and maintained by CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
3.2 Adequate dewatering facilities like dewatering pumps and piping etc. shall also be provided by the
CONTRACTOR for this work, including dewatering during excavation etc. as required, at his own
cost.
4.0 MATERIAL FOR EARTHWORK

4.1 Only soil considered suitable by the Engineer-in-charge shall be deployed for the construction and
that considered unsuitable shall be disposed off, as directed by Engineer-in-charge, at his own cost
and no claim for compensation will be entertained.
4.2 The CONTRACTOR shall give the samples of soil he proposes to use for filling, along with the
following characteristics of the samples, to Engineer-in-charge for approval, prior to collection and
use. The tests for these characteristics shall be done in a laboratory / test house as approved by
Engineer-in-charge.
i. Mechanical analysis or grain size analysis as per IS: 2720 Part IV.
ii. Liquid limit as per IS: 2720 Part V.
iii. Plastic limit as per IS: 2720 Part V.
iv. Moisture density relationship as per IS: 2720 Part VII.
4.3 The soil used for filling shall be free from boulders, lumps, tree roots, rubbish or any organic
deleterious matter.
4.4 Soil having plasticity index less than 20 shall be used for filling purpose.
4.5 Soil having laboratory maximum dry density of less than 1.5 gms/cc shall not be used.
4.6 Care shall be taken to see that unsuitable waste material is disposed off in such a manner that there is
no likelihood of its getting mixed with the material, proposed to be used, for filling.
4.7 The work shall be so planned and executed that the best available soil are reserved for the top
portion of Embankments.
5.0 CUTTING TREES

5.1 All trees having girth above 30 cms, which are not marked for preservation, shall be cut down and
their roots dug up to a depth of 1 metre from the existing ground level.
Page 2695 of 3884

eg
Ogarfett54-
tenen
w' INDIA LIMITED
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
Page 5 of 12
5.2 All holes or hollows produced by digging up roots shall be carefully filled with approved soil,
including all leads and lifts, rammed and compacted to obtain 90% of maximum laboratory dry
density of soil and levelled as directed.
5.3 All uprooted trees shall be stacked or disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
5.4 Payment
Cutting of trees above 30 cms girth shall be paid per number. The rate quoted shall include cutting,
uprooting removing the trees within plant boundary as directed, including filling holes or hollows
produced by removal of roots etc. as per specifications.
6.0 CLEARING AND STRIPPING
6.1 All the areas, including depressions, where filling or cutting is to be carried out shall be cleared and
stripped completely of bushes, roots, vegetation, plantation trees, shrubs, trees upto 30 cms girth,
organic and other objectionable materials. All these shall be completely uprooted and virgin soil
exposed and not merely scrapped at the surface. The roots of trees of girth upto 30 cms shall be
removed to a minimum depth of 1M below existing ground level and holes, hollows filled up with
selected approved available soil within all leads and lifts and compacted to obtain 90% of laboratory
dry density of soil as per IS: 2720, Part VII and leveled as directed by Engineer-in-charge. All soft
patches must be worked out to remove soft soil and selected approved earth must be filled back and
the areas (areas coming under filling) compacted to obtain 90% of maximum laboratory dry density of
soil, as per IS: 2720 Part VII. The depth of stripping shall be generally 50 to 150 mm as decided by
Engineer-in-Charge.
6.2 Material obtained from clearing shall be stacked or disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-charge
within a lead as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
6.3 Payment
No separate payment shall be made for clearing, stripping and disposal of materials obtained from
clearing. This shall be considered as part of cutting work in areas of cutting and filling work in areas
of filling and the rates quoted under the respective items of
i. Earthwork in Excavation/ Cutting

ii Earthwork in filling (both with available earth & earth obtained from approved borrow areas),
shall be inclusive of clearing and stripping with all operations described above in clause no.6 in
respective areas of cutting and filling.
No separate payment shall be made for clearing, stripping and disposal of materials obtained from
clearing of borrow areas for earth. This shall be considered as part of filling work in area of filling and
the rate quoted under the respective items.
7.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION / CUTTING

7.1 After clearing and stripping of areas as specified above in clause No.6, spot levels at intervals and
pattern as decided by the Engineer-in-charge, shall be taken jointly by CONTRACTOR and Engineer-
in-charge. Excavation / cutting shall commence only after the levels are signed by the contractor as a
token of his acceptance.
7.2 Excavation/ cutting shall be carried out strictly as per the instruction of Engineer-in-charge.
7.3 If the contractor excavates/ cuts beyond the required level, additional quantity of earthwork shall not
be paid for. The excavation taken below the specified level shall be made good by filling with
approved material, to the required compaction, at Contractor's cost.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved
Page 2696 of 3884

5fgarrem201--e-g
A2E1512 el5T
INDIA LIMITED FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK 6-65-0017 Rev. 5
7.4 The final bed and sides of excavation must be levelled, dressed and compacted. In case of areas under
excavation for site grading, the final surface shall be levelled, dressed and consolidated by means of
sheep foot / power driven rollers to obtain maximum compaction. However, no test control is required
in such areas.
7.5 Shoring and strutting shall be adopted only with the permission of Engineer-in-charge in writing.
Such shoring and strutting shall follow the necessary specification.
7.6 Provisions for dewatering shall be governed by the relevant clauses.
7.7 Payment
Payment for Excavation shall be on the basis of volume of excavation calculated on the basis of joint
level taken as per clause 7.1 and the final finished grade levels, the volume being calculated by the
Trapezoidal rule including dewatering, if required. Intermediate payment will be on the basis of
volume calculated based on spot levels taken during the time of the billing. Reference is also invited
to clause 7.3.
8.0 EARTHWORK IN FILLING

8.1 After clearing, stripping and consolidation of areas as specified in clause 6, spot levels at intervals and
pattern as decided by Engineer-in-charge shall be taken jointly by the CONTRACTOR and Engineer-
in-Charge and filling shall commence only after the levels are signed by the CONTRACTOR as a
token of his acceptance. Approved fill Material shall be spread in uniform layers not exceeding 30
cms in loose depth.
The contractor has to make his own approach and access roads from the borrow area to the
demarcated filling areas. While the CONTRACTOR may make use of such short cuts as may be
available to him for earth movement from borrow areas to the filling areas, the OWNER does not
guarantee any passage way or right of way for the CONTRACTOR's work other than available at site.
No claim shall also be admissible to the CONTRACTOR on account of his having to take longer
leads or routes for earth movement, than envisaged by him, either due to any road cuttings, non-
availability of routes, or any other grounds whatsoever.
In case total filling required in any area consists of soil both from borrow areas and available
approved excavated material from within plant area, then joint levels, shall be taken before
commencing filling with earth from borrow area.
However, earth available from borrow areas required for filling can be used only after the available
earth from excavation within demarcated area has been utilised and clearance to this effect obtained
from the Engineer-in-charge.
8.2 All clods, lumps etc, shall be broken before compaction.
8.3 Successive layers of filling shall not be placed until the layer below has been thoroughly compacted
and tested to satisfy the requirements laid down in this specification.
8.4 Prior to rolling, the moisture content of material shall be brought to within plus or minus 2% of the
Optimum Moisture Content as described in IS: 2720 Part VII. The moisture content shall preferably
be on the wet side for potentially expansive soil.
8.5 After adjusting the Moisture Content as described in clause 8.4, the layers shall be thoroughly
compacted by either sheep foot roller or power driven roller or vibratory roller, as approved by
Engineer-in-charge, till the specified maximum laboratory dry density is obtained.
Page 2697 of 3884

$fg-ar tt154-eg
elecnterniJnertai
INDIA LIMITED
IA God of India Undertaking)
Page 7 of 12
8.6 Each layer shall be tested in field for density and accepted by Engineer-in-charge, subject to achieving
the required density, before laying the next layer. A minimum of one test per 500m2 for each layer
shall be conducted.
8.7 If the layer fails to meet the required density, it shall be reworked or the material shall be replaced and
method of construction altered as directed by Engineer-in-charge to obtain the required density.
8.8 The filling shall be finished in conformity with the alignment, levels, cross-section and dimensions as
shown in the drawing.
Earthen embankment shall be filled 300mm more on both sides, where height is more than 1M and
this extra filling shall be dressed, after compaction, in conformity with alignment, level, cross-section
and dimension as shown in the drawing, to achieve proper compaction in the slope. No extra payment
shall be made in this regard.
8.9 Extra material shall be removed and disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.10 Tolerances
General site grading, including cutting and filling in depressions, shall be carried out to within up
down tolerance of +5 cms of final lines, grades and slopes.
8.11 Earth Work in Filling in Open Lined/Unlined Wells
For earth work in filling in open lined/unlined wells, only locally available coarse sand shall be used,
in layers of 500 mm thickness. Each layer shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling water, before next
layer is filled up. Filling shall be done upto 1 m depth below NGL as above. Layers from a depth of
lm below NGL, upto NGL, shall also comprise of locally available coarse sand and compacted with
suitable Mechanical / manual means, to obtain same level of compaction as required for filling above
NGL. Filling above NGL shall be done as per Cl. 8.1 to 8.10 above.
8.12 Payment
8.12.1 Payment for filling shall be made on cubic metre of volume calculated on the basis of cross section
plotted from the levels of ground, where filling is to be carried out and the levels reached after filling
is duly consolidated, volume being calculated by Trapezoidal method.
8.12.2 In case of simultaneous cut and fill operation, wherever specified, payment shall be made on the basis
of one composite rate for cutting and filling. All other details about measurement etc. remaining
same as above.
8.12.3 Payment for filling in open wells, lined or unlined, shall be made on the basis of volume calculated on
the basis of average area mult6iplied with depth of open well
8.12.4 No extra payment shall be made towards testing.
9.0 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EARTH

9.1 Surplus earth and soil from excavation and general site grading shall be removed from the
construction areas to the area demarcated by the Engineer-in-charge.
9.2 Payment
Payment shall be made only for lead beyond initial lead from construction area. Rate shall include
loading, transportation, dumping, stacking the surplus earth and soil in the area demarcated by the
Engineer-in-charge.
Format No. 8-00-0001 -F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 2698 of 3884

~anwt?~t ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ligar INDIA LIMITED FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK 6-65-0017 Rev. 5
1.41-e'ReieceredkJeteri) IA Gov! of India Undertaking)
Page 8 of 12
Payment shall be made on cubic metre basis of the difference of measurements of the volumes of the
excavation and the measurement of the filling with the excavated earth. However, the contractor's
entitlement to payment shall be restricted to the actual quantity of earth removed. Quantity generated
due to void in back filled volume of earth shall also be removed by the contractor at no extra cost and
this disposal of earth shall not be measured and paid under any item.
10.0 EXCAVATION IN ROCK

10.1 Blasting operations shall be carried out with the prior permission and in the presence of the Engineer-
in-charge or his authorised representative and during fixed time hours of the day. Blasting operations
shall be carried out as per Indian Explosive Rules 1983, amended up to date. The contractor shall have
a valid license from Controller of Explosives to carry out blasting operations as well as for obtaining
and storing the explosives as per Indian Explosive Rules (latest). All safety precautions such as
providing safety nylon netting etc. shall be carried out as per instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.
In case the contractor is not having a valid license from Controller of Explosives to carry out blasting
operations and storing / handling explosives as per Indian Explosives Rules (latest). The contractor
may engage an agency for blasting who is having valid license required to carry out blasting
operation. Prior to start of blasting operation, contractor shall submit all the relevant licenses required
for blasting operation to Engineer-in-Charge.
10.1.1 The contractor shall ensure that all workmen and the personnel at site except those who have actually
to light the fuse are evacuated from the unsafe area to be determined by the Engineer and warned by
loud speaker in local language to safe distance, not less than 200 metres at least 15 minutes before
firing time by sounding warning siren. The area shall be encircled by red flags. The contractor shall be
responsible for any accident to workmen, public or property due to blasting operation.
10.1.2 Gunpowder, gelatin and other safe explosives only shall be used wherever possible. Explosives with
nitroglycerine shall be used only under exceptional circumstances, with prior approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
10.1.3 All fuses shall be cut to the length required, before being inserted into the holes.
10.1.4 The no. of charges to be fired and the actual no. of shots heard shall be compared and the person
responsible must satisfy himself by examination that all the charges have exploded before work
people are permitted to approach the scene. The withdrawal of a charge, which has not exploded shall
under no circumstances be permitted, such charges shall be flooded with water and the hole marked
into a distinguishing manner. The next hole to be fired shall be at a distance of about 500 mm from
the unexploded hole and fired in the usual way.
The contractor or sub contractor or any of his competent authorised person shall be in charge of the
blasting operations and shall be held responsible for strictly observing the safety rules, particularly
applicable to blasting operations, in addition to other safety rules.
10.1.5 For blasting rocks with dynamite, the following general principles shall be observed.
In general, the following diameter of drills shall be used for different depth of boreholes.
From 1-2 metres 25mm diameter

From 2-3.25 metres 37-50mm diameter
From 3.25-4.75metres 50-65mm diameter
The boreholes should generally be not more than 1.5m deep and the distance apart should be from one
and a half to twice their depth.
Page 2699 of 3884

0 el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
fdWes
tairerf ererreart
INDIA LIMITED FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK 6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 9 of 12
Cracks and fissures in the rock to be blasted shall be carefully studied to ascertain the best position for
the boreholes. The charge shall always be placed in a sound piece of rock, if possible not nearer than
300mm from the crack.
10.2 Rules for Blasting with Dynamite and other High Explosives
10.2.1 The Person-in-charge must show that he is thoroughly acquainted with the blasting operations and
that he understands the rules laid down herewith. He will be held responsible for any accident that
may occur. He must be a licenced blaster with a valid licence from DGMS.
10.2.2 Boreholes must be of such a size and uniform that the cartridges can easily pass down them.
10.2.3 The position of all holes to be drilled must be marked out with white paint and the person-in-charge
must take particular note of these positions.
10.2.4 The drilling operation after being finished, the person-in-charge must make a second inspection and
satisfy himself that the boreholes marked out by him have been drilled and cleaned properly.
10.2.5 The person-in-charge must prepare all charges necessary for boreholes.
10.2.6 Number of holes to be loaded and fired at one time shall be as per explosive rules. Boreholes must be
thoroughly cleared before a cartridge is inserted.
The loading is to be done by the person-in-charge himself and the position of the charge holes
carefully noted by him. Circular wooden tamping rods only to be used in charging holes with flat
bottom, (one cartridge at a time must be inserted) and cartridge gently pressed with the tamping rod.
10.2.7 Immediately before firing a blast, due warning must be given and the person-in-charge must see that
all the labours have retired to safety.
10.2.8 The safety fuses of the charged holes are to be lighted in the presence of the person-in-charge, who
must see that the fuses of the holes charged have properly ignited.
After the blast, the person-in-charge must carefully inspect the work and satisfy himself that all the
charges have exploded.
10.3 Misfires
10.3.1 Misfires are a source of great danger. If it is suspected that part of the blast to fire is delayed,
sufficient time shall be allowed to elapse before entering the danger zone. When fuse and blasting
caps are used, a safe time of at least an hour should be allowed.
10.3.2 None of the drillers are to work near these holes until the three following operations have been done
by the person-in-charge.
a. The Person-in-charge should very carefully extract the tamping with a wooden scrapper and withdraw
the fuse with the primer and detonator attached, after which a fresh primer and detonator with fuse
should be placed in this hole and fired; or
b. The hole may be cleared of 300mm of tamping and the direction then ascertained by placing a stick in
the hole. Another hole may then be drilled 150mm away and parallel to it: this hole to be then charged
and fired when the other charge should explode.
c. Drilling in holes not completely exploded by blasting shall not be permitted.
Frnat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved
Page 2700 of 3884

t_71 LI ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Og 0151-eg
(.7V-er 37;11,)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov) of India Undertaking)
10.4 Precautions Against Misfire
10.4.1 The safety fuse should be cut in an oblique direction with a knife.
10.4.2 All saw dust must be cleared from the inside of the detonator; this can be done by blowing down the
detonation and tapping the open end. No instrument shall be inserted into the detonator for this
purpose.
10.4.3 After inserting the fuse in the detonator, it shall be fixed by means of nippers.
10.4.4 If there is water present, or if the boreholes be damp, the junction of the fuse and detonator must be
made water tight by means of grease, white lead or tar.
10.4.5 The detonator should be inserted into the cartridge, so that about one third of the copper tube is left
exposed outside the explosives. The safety fuse outside the detonator, should be necessarily tied in
position in the cartridge. Waterproof fuse only to be used in the damp boreholes, or when water is
present in the borehole.
10.4.6 If a misfire has been found to be due to defective fuse, detonator or dynamite, the whole quantity or
box from which the detective article was used shall be rejected.
10.4.7 Storage of materials for blasting shall be as per statutory regulations / stipulations of the concerned
authorities.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to arrange for proper storage of explosives and obtain
required permissions from concerned authorities. No separate payment shall be payable for the above.
10.4.8. Cleaning of Excavation
Excavation shall be cleaned, trimmed to exact shape and all disturbed material and other debris shall
be removed. When the excavation have been taken out to the lines specified as shown on the drawings
and the surface cleaned as specified, the contractor shall notify the Engineer that the excavation is
ready for inspection and no further work shall be done with concrete or backfill until it has been
inspected and approved by the Engineer. Cost of this work is deemed to have been included in the unit
rates for excavation.
10.4.9. Use of Excavation Material
Where any material obtained from the excavation is, in the opinion of the Engineer, suitable for use in
a particular section of the work as fill or backfill, such material shall be selected and if necessary,
loaded, hauled, placed, spread and used to construct the fill or backfill with respect to the lines and
grades specified for the work. As far as possible the most suitable of the materials excavated for the
work shall be used to construct the fill and backfill embankments, roads and storage areas, where
required. The useful rock available shall be stacked at the locations as decided by the Engineer and
the cost of this work is deemed to have been included in the Unit rate of excavation.
Materials containing brush roots or other perishable materials shall not be considered suitable. The
suitability of the materials and their disposition in the work shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
10.4.10 Disposal of Surplus material
All surplus materials shall be carried away from the site and disposed at dumping sites selected by the
Engineer, up to a lead as indicated in the relevant items of the schedule of rates. The Engineer may
ask the contractor to dump the excavated materials in regular heaps, bunds, blankets, riprap with
regular slopes as directed by the Engineer and levelled so as to provide natural drainage. As a rule, all
Page 2701 of 3884

E
SZIf g INDIA LIMITED FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK 6-65-0017 Rev. 5
ow?" 7:reenr7Ovi,grol) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
softer material shall be laid along the centre of heaps, with the harder and more weather resisting
materials forming the casing on the sides and the top. Excavated rocks, which can be used in soling as
road metals or for making concrete aggregate shall be stacked separately, as directed by the Engineer.
All such works as mentioned above is deemed to have been taken into account while quoting for the
excavation and the contractor for the above works shall claim no extras.
All rock excavated from the pits shall be the property of the Owner.
10.4.11 Stock Piles
When the removal of material from excavation progresses at a faster rate or at different times than
placement in backfill is being accomplished, such excavated materials shall be stock piled at approved
locations adjacent to the work until their use is authorised.
10.4.12 Spoil Areas
Material excavated for the works, which is rejected as unsuitable or not required by the Engineer,
shall be disposed of in spoil areas as specified by the Engineer.
The spoil areas shall be left in a neat and sighty condition and sloped to drain properly as may be
directed by the Engineer.
10.5 Control Blasting
10.5.1 General
This specification lays down the requirements for control blasting for rock excavations wherever
required.
Wherever required by the Engineer, the rock blasting shall be controlled, so that vibration generated
during the blasting do not cause damage to the buildings and installation around built up areas.
Similarly the rock pieces should not fly off the pits and thus damage the buildings and installation
around. Apart from the general precautions mentioned in the preceding paragraphs, following
protective measures are suggested as guidelines. Tenderers are requested to carefully check the site
conditions and submit the details of the scheme they propose to adopt for controlling the blast.
a. Short delay blasting with light charges shall be used.
b. The blast hole shall be covered with 0.6 to 1.0 sqm. mild steel plate of minimum 6mm thickness.
c. Reinforcement rod mesh, not less than 20mm dia at 150mm centres in both directions, shall be put
over the steel plates.
d. Steel plate and reinforcements shall be inspected after every blasting operation and all twists shall be
removed before reuse, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
e. The thickness of the covering plate and the kind of dead weight shall be duly got approved from the
Engineer-in-Charge.
When blasting is necessary adjacent to partially or completely built structures, the contractor shall
take all precautions necessary to prevent flying rock from causing damage to the structures.
In no case shall blasting be allowed closer than 15m to any structure after concrete placing has started.
Page 2702 of 3884

ei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
eieqN,751eg
WWI tif5t- JPIT, INDIA LIMITED
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 12 of 12
The contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by blasting, whether permanent or
temporary structure and shall replace or repair the structures at his own cost.
10.6 Classification of soil
If soil of any classifications other than that specified in the Schedule of Rates is met during
excavation, the decision of the Engineer-in-charge as to the classification of soil, levels of the strata of
different classifications and their locations shall be binding.
In above case, the total quantity of Excavation shall be computed from the measurement of the area
excavated. The hard rock and soft rock shall be measured separately from the relevant stacks and each
shall be reduced by fifty percent for voids, and paid under the relevant items. The balance, that is the
total quantity of excavation minus the reduced (for voids) quantity of excavation for rocks shall be
paid as soil as per the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge. However, the maximum payment shall be
limited to the volume of the area excavated, as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
Page 2703 of 3884

STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS FOR No.
• evemetrshAtstrtvt)
INDIA LIMITED ROADS AND FLEXIBLE 6-65-0018 Rev. 7
IA Govt of India Undertangi
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER) Page 1 of 11
s
ti chlY9- 1-A. t
Fa1:1411 Hirictl
(seri, At. 7i. Tffib)
FOR ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
Ca r
7 24.06.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RBT RS DM
6 12.03.08 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. GAURAV RKS NK VC
5 11.04.01 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RC PCS MMK MI
4 15.11.99 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RB PCS MMK AS

Standards Standards
No by by
Approved by
Page 2704 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR No.
254-eg
1.4FR cwanc,1,10,137.1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt d India Undedaking)
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE 6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Abbreviations:
cm Centimeter
IRC Indian Road Congress
IS Indian Standard
mm Millimeter
P.1 Plasticity Index
WBM Water Bound Macadam

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. V S Chhhaya (Projects)
Page 2705 of 3884

No.
0 el ENGINEERS FOR
Ogar 1af54eg
I 4117P1 t'ic,
nte Ag JERIn 11
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoA of India Undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 REFERENCES 4
3.0 CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS SUBGRADE AND SHOULDERS 4
4.0 FILLING WITH SAND/MURRUM 6
5.0 WATER BOUND MACADAM SUB BASE/BASE COURSE 6
6.0 CONSTRUCTION OF SHOULDERS OR BERMS 10
7.0 PAYMENT 10
Page 2706 of 3884

ENGINEERS No.
t.71 el FOR
51g-ar tifleg INDIA LIMITED ROADS AND FLEXIBLE 6-65-0018 Rev. 7
IA Gov! 01 India Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the material and construction details for earthwork in filling for
embankments, filling with sand/murrum, WBM sub-base, WBM base course and shoulders for
roads and flexible pavements.
2.0 REFERENCES
2.1 Codes & Standards
IS: 460 Specifications for Test Sieves
IS 2430: Methods for sampling of aggregates for concrete
IS: 2720 Methods of Test of Soil
IRC: 19 Standard Specification and Code of Practice for Water Bound

Macadam
IRC: 36 Recommended Practice for the Construction of Earth

Embankments for Road Works
2.2 Specifications
Specifications for Road and Bridge Works — Ministry of Surface Transport (Road Wing)
NOTE: -Latest Edition of all Codes, Standards and Specifications shall be followed.
3.0 CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS SUBGRADE AND SHOULDERS
3.1 Materials
Only those materials, considered suitable by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be employed for the
construction and that considered unsuitable shall be disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge at contractor's cost and no claim for compensation will be entertained. The Contractor
shall give the samples of earth, he proposes to use for filling along with the following
characteristics of the sample to Engineer-in-Charge prior to collection and use, for approval.
i) Mechanical analysis or gain size analysis as per IS: 2720 Part IV.
ii) Liquid limit as per IS: 2720 Part V.
iii) Plastic limit as per IS: 2720 Part V.
iv) Moisture density relationship as per IS: 2720 Part VIII.
The material (soil) used for filling shall be free from boulders, lumps, tree roots, rubbish or
any organic deleterious matter.
Material (soil) having plasticity index less than 20 shall be used for filling purposes. Soil
having laboratory maximum dry density of less than 1.5gm/cc shall not be used. Care shall be
taken to see that unsuitable waste material is disposed off in such a manner that there is no
likelihood of its getting mixed with the materials proposed to be used for filling.
The work shall be so planned and e:ecuted such that the best available material (soil) is
reserved for the top portion of embankment.
Page 2707 of 3884

No.
■
_11 ENGINEERS FOR
Ogar fdWg 1.7271 eiem■
c' 3,74,1)
3.2 Filling and Compaction
3.2.1 The area where filling is to be placed must be cleared of all loose material and virgin soil
must be exposed. Such exposed surface must be consolidated properly to obtain 95% of
maximum laboratory dry density of the soil as per IS: 2720 Part VIII. All soft patches must
be worked out to remove the soft soil and selected approved earth must be filled back and
compacted.
3.2.2 Payment for the removal of loose top soil as described in clause 3.2.1 above shall be
included in the item for earthwork in filling. No separate payment for consolidation of
exposed ground surface will be made. The rate quoted for the earth fill shall be inclusive of
the cost of clearing and stripping, consolidation, including watering, testing etc. of the
exposed ground.
3.2.3 Approved fill material shall be spread in uniform layers not exceeding 20 cm in loose
depth for embankment filling. Shoulder construction shall be so organised as to keep pace
with the construction of different layers of the pavement, which may require earth fill
thickness less than 20 cm. All clods, lumps etc. shall be broken before compaction.
3.2.4 In general the soil shall be spread uniformly over the entire width of embankment or
shoulder as the case may be. For large embankments, the spreading of soil shall be as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
3.2.5 Successive layers of filling shall not be placed until the layer under construction has been
thoroughly compacted to satisfy the requirements laid down in this specification.
3.2.6 Prior to rolling, the moisture content of material shall be brought to within plus or minus
2% of the optimum moisture content as described in IS: 2720 - Part-VIII. The moisture
content shall preferably be on the wet side for potentially expensive soils.
3.2.7 After adjusting the moisture content as described in Clause 3.2.6, the layers shall be
thoroughly compacted by means of 8-10T rollers or equivalent vibratory rollers till 95% of
maximum laboratory dry density for embankment and 97% of maximum laboratory dry
density for sub-grade as per IS:2720 Part VIII is obtained.
3.2.8 Each layer shall be tested in field for density and accepted by Engineer-in-Charge subjected
to achieving the required density before laying the next layer. A minimum of one test per
500m2 area for each layer shall be conducted.
3.2.9 All type of rollers that should be employed for compaction shall be as per direction of
Engineer-in-Charge.
3.2.10 If the layer fails to meet the required density, it shall be reworked or the material shall be
replaced and method of construction altered as directed by Engineer-in-Charge to obtain the
required density.
3.2.11 The filling shall be finished in conformity with alignment, levels, cross-sections and
dimensions as shown in the drawings.
3.2.12 Extra material shall be removed and disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 2708 of 3884

7-t-iraelei ENGINEERS FOR No.
dgar feifiteg
iarrra eira(refIRJW1.(11
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govf of Ind. Undenalf(A9(
3.3 Tolerance
Embankment and shoulders for roads, units etc. shall be carried to within a tolerance of plus
minus 2.5 cm. from final lines but shall be to required grades and slopes.
4.0 FILLING WITH SAND/MURRUM
4.1 Sand having Plasticity Index 6 (Max) shall be used for filling. Sand for filling shall preferably
be locally available sand, clean and free from any chemical or other impurities. Murrum for
filling shall be clean and well graded. Sand/Murrum shall not contain any vegetation, organic,
clayey or other material and shall be obtained from a source approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.2 Murrum/Sand shall be spread in layers not exceeding 15 cm in loose thickness over the areas.
Each layer shall be uniform in density, quality of material and ' moisture content before
compaction. The moisture content shall be within two percent of the optimum moisture
content as per IS: 2720 Part VIII.
4.2.1 In case of pure sand, flooding with water is permissible.
4.3 Compaction of each layer shall be by mechanical means as per directions of Engineer-in--
Charge. Only in accessible reaches shall be worked manually. Each layer shall be uniformly
compacted to obtain 85% relative density in case of sand and 95% of maximum laboratory dry
density in case of murram. If the material fails to achieve the required density, the layer shall
be reworked with necessary alteration in compaction, so that the required compaction is
obtained. A minimum of one test per 500 m2 area for each layer shall be conducted.
4.4 Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the layer already laid has been compacted to the
required density-and approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.5 The finished surface must be dressed to required grade and slope. Excess material must be
removed from compaction site, as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0 WATER BOUND MACADAM SUB BASE/BASE COURSE
The sub-base course shall consist of one or more layers, each of 100 mm compacted
thickness.
The base course shall consist of one or more layers, each of 75 mm compacted
thickness.
5.1 Materials
5.1.1 Stone Aggregate for WBM
5.1.1.1 The coarse aggregates shall be hard, crushed or broken stone metal from quarries approved by
Engineer-in-Charge, it shall be hard durable and free from flat elongated, soft and
disintegrated particles. It shall not have excess of dirt and other objectionable matter. The
quality, size and grading of the coarse aggregate shall be conforming to IRC: 19.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — Ail rights reserved
Page 2709 of 3884

faziei ENGINEERS FOR No.
$'1g-Ii Rateg
?iV,
firednosrawii
INDIA LIMITED
a) The grading of the coarse aggregates for the sub-base course shall be as below:
Size Range Sieve % by weight

Designation passing the sieve
(IS: 460)
90mm to 45mm 125mm 100

Grade-I 90mm 90-100
63mm 25-60
45mm 0-15
22.4mm 0-5
b) The grading of the coarse aggregate for the base course shall be as below:
Size Range Sieve by weight

Designation passing the sieve
(IS: 460)
63mm to 45mm 90mm 100

Grade-2 63mm 90-100
53mm 25-75
45mm 0-15
22.4mm 0-5
c) Physical requirement of coarse aggregates for sub-base course shall be as below:
i) Los Angles Abrasion Value 60% (Maximum)

or
ii) Aggregate Impact Value 50% (Maximum)
d) Physical requirement of coarse aggregates for base course shall be as below:
i) Los Angles Abrasion Value 50% (Maximum)

or
Aggregate Impact value 40% (Maximum)
ii) Flakiness index value 15% (Maximum)
Samples of test shall be representative of the material to be used and collected as

per IS: 2430.
5.1.1.2 The aggregates shall be unloaded at the road side on firm, well drained ground, as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge. The various grades shall be placed separately and contamination by earth
and other extraneous matter shall be prevented effectively.
5.1.2 Screenings
5.1.2.1 Screening to fill voids in the course aggregates shall, as far as possible be the same material as
the course aggregates where it is decided by the Engineer-in-Charge to use other materials, the
same shall be predominantly non plastic materials such as kankar nodules gravel (other than
river-borne rounded aggregate) or murrum provided that the liquid limit and plasticity index
of such material is below 20 and 6 respectively and the fraction passing 75 micron sieve does
not exceed 10 percent.
Page 2710 of 3884

No.
ENGINEERS FOR
fg-ar 051-eg INDIA LIMITED
Grading Requirement of Screening

Size of Sieve Designation Percentage by Weight
Screening (IS: 460) Passing the Sieve
13.2mm 13.2mm 100
11.2mm 95-100
5.6mm 15-35
180micron 0-10
This grading, however, shall not be mandatory, in case either murrum or gravel is used as
screening.
For procurement of quantities for course aggregates and screenings required for 100mm and
75mm compacted thickness of WBM sub base course and base course shall be as per the
IRC- 19
5.1.3 Binding Material
Binding material, to prevent revelling of WBM, shall consist of fine grained material
possessing P.I value up to 6.
Application of binding material shall not be necessary where murrum or gravel is used as
screenings.
Binding material shall be obtained from quarries/ sources approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
5.2 Laying of WBM
5.2.1 Spreading Course Aggregates
5.2.1.1 The sub grade or sub-base to receive WBM course shall be prepared to the required grade and
camber. Before starting with WBM construction, side shoulders shall be constructed in
advance to a thickness corresponding to the compacted layer of the WBM course for lateral
confinement of aggregate. After shoulders are ready, their inside edge shall be trimmed
vertical to receive the aggregate. The practice of constructing WBM in a trench section
excavated on the embankment/formation must be avoided.
5.2.1.2 The coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly on the prepared base in required
quantities from the stacks. The aggregate shall be spread to proper profiles by using
templates across the road about 6 m apart.
5.2.1.3 The surface of the aggregate spread shall be carefully, trued up and all high or low spots
remedied by removing or adding aggregate as may be required. The surface shall be
checked from time to time, during the spreading and rolling of the coarse aggregate to
ensure a finished surface without variation greater than 12 mm, when a 3 meter long straight
edge is laid parallel to centre line of the road.
5.2.1.4 The WBM layer shall be tested by depth blocks. No segregation on large or fine particle
shall be allowed and the coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with no
pocket of fine materials.
5.2.1.5 The coarse aggregate shall not be spread in lengths more than 3 days average work in
advance of the rolling, spreading murrum and bonding of the preceding section.
5.2.2 Rolling Road Metal
5.2.2.1 Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregates, it shall be compacted to full
width by rolling with either three wheeled power roller of 8 to 10 tonne weight or equivalent
vibratory roller true to the line and camber as shown in the drawing. The course shall not
Page 2711 of 3884

No.
rezlialfaaeg ENGINEERS FOR
,114,11 ,1313,70.4) fF GoN of India Undertaking)
be rolled when the sub-grade is soft or yielding or the rolling causes a wave like motion in
the base course or sub-grade. When rolling develops irregularities that exceed 12mm when
tested with a 3 meter straight edge, the irregular surface shall be loosened and then
aggregate added to or removed from it as required and the area rolled until it gives uniform
surface conforming to the desired cross-section and grade. The surface shall also be
checked transversely by template and any irregularities corrected as above. The use of
murrum to make up depression shall not be permitted.
5.2.2.2 The rolling shall begin from edges with roller running forward and backward until the edges
have been firmly compacted. The rolling shall then progress gradually from edges to the
centre parallel to the centre line of the road lapping uniformly each preceding rear wheel
track by one half width and shall continue until the entire area of the course has been rolled
by the rear wheel. On the super elevated portions of road, the rolling shall commence from
the lower edge and progress gradually towards the upper edge of the road.
5.2.2.3 Rolling shall be discontinued when aggregate are thoroughly keyed and creating of stone
wheel of roller is no longer visible partially compacted with sufficient void space in them to
permit application of screenings. Slight sprinkling of water may be done if required.
5.2.3 Application of Screening
5.2.3 After the coarse aggregate has been rolled as described in Clause 5.2.2, screenings shall be
applied uniformly and gradually over the surface to completely fill the interstices. Dry rolling
shall be continued while the screenings are being spread so that the jarring effect of the roll
will cause them to settle into the voids of the coarse aggregates.
5.2.3.2 The screenings shall not be dumped in piles on coarse aggregate but shall be spread uniformly
in successive thin layers either by the spreading motion of hand shovels or by mechanic
spreaders.
5.2.3.3 The screenings shall be applied at a uniform and slow rate (in three or more applications so as
to ensure filling of all voids. Rolling and brooming shall continue with the spreading of the
screenings. Either mechanical brooms or hand brooms or both may be used. In no case shall
the screenings be applied so fast and thick as to form cakes or ridges on the surface
making the filling of voids difficult or preventing the direct bearings of the roller on the coarse
aggregates. The spreading, rolling and brooming of screenings shall be performed on sections
which can be completed within one day's operation and shall continue until no more
screenings can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregates. Damp and wet screening
shall not be used under any circumstances.
5.2.3.4 The quantity of screenings used shall be such as to fill all voids in the water bound
macadam courses.
5.2.4 Sprinkling and Grouting
5.2.4.1 After spreading the screening, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, swept and
rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to sweep the wet screenings into voids and to distribute
them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling shall be continued and additional
screenings applied where necessary until the coarse aggregates are well compacted and grout
of screenings and water form a wave ahead of wheels of the roller. Care shall be taken to see
that the base of the sub-grade does not get damaged due to the addition of the excessive
quantity of water during the construction.
Page 2712 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR No.
ogar temeg1.112,1 217,
7,
7F JP05111
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt of India Undertalong)
5.2.5 Application of Binding Material
5.2.5.1 After the application of screenings as described above, the binding material shall be applied at
a uniform and slow rate (in two or more successive thin layers) so as to ensure filling of all
voids.
After each application of binding material, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water
and the resulting slurry swept in with hand brooms/ mechanical brooms or both so as to fill the
voids properly. This shall be followed by rolling with a 8-10 tone roller during which water
shall be applied to the wheels to wash down the binding material that may get stuck to them.
The spreading, rolling and brooming of binding material shall be performed on sections which
can be completed within one day's operation and shall continue until no more binding material
can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregates and until the slurry of the binding
material and water forms a wave ahead of the wheels of moving roller. Damp and wet binding
material shall not be used under any circumstances.
5.2.5.2 The quantity of binding material used shall be such as to fill all voids in the water bound
macadam.
5.2.6 Setting and drying
After final compaction of the course, the layer shall be allowed to dry overnight. Next
morning, hungry spots shall be filled with screenings or binding material as directed, lightly
sprinkled with water if necessary and rolled. No traffic shall be allowed on the road until the
macadam has set.
5.2.7 Subsequent layers of WBM
Before laying the subsequent layers of WBM, the surface shall be scarified and reshaped to
the required camber and profile, and all ruts, depressions, pot holes etc. made good. The
second layer shall be laid after the surface preparation is approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
The specification and mode of measurement for subsequent layers of WBM will be similar
to that described before.
6.0 CONSTRUCTION OF SHOULDERS OR BERMS
6.1 After the WBM course is laid and compacted, the existing surface at side berms or shoulders
of the roadway must be scarified. Fresh quantity of approved earth must be spread in layers
for building up of berms upto the required level and scope.
The earth must be consolidated by at least three passes of an 8-10 tonne road roller. The edges
must be well compacted by suitable means to prevent edge slips and the work properly
trimmed and dressed.
7.0 PAYMENT
7.1 Filling in embankment, sub grade and shoulders
7.1.1 Payment for filling shall be made on cubic meter of volume calculated on the basis of cross
section plotted from the level of the ground surface prepared as described in clause 3.2
above and from where filling is to be carried out and the levels reached after filling and due
consolidation.
7.1.2 Rates for embankment, shoulder or fill formation shall include cost of breaking clods,
watering, consolidation, providing testing apparatus and testing the degree of consolidation,
providing and operating, including POL and operator charges of necessary road rollers and
other equipment, dressing and levelling of sides and top surfaces etc.
Page 2713 of 3884

No.
ENGINEERS FOR
51g-ar tlf5rdg INDIA LIMITED ROADS AND FLEXIBLE 6-65-0018 Rev. 7
1.2M eiemirl?1,
1,0151,,i) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
7.2 Filling with sand / murrum
Payment for sand/murrum filling shall be made on the basis of volume of fill, after
placement and compaction. The rate quoted shall include cost of sand/murrum, royalties,
transportation, handling, compacting, watering, testing at various stages, dressing, removal
of surplus material and any other work incidental to this.
7.3 Water Bound Macadam Sub Base/ Base Course
Paying for laying WBM shall be made on square meter basis of each layer of WBM laid,
measured after consolidation and finishing. Rate shall include supply of all materials, royalty,
taxes, handling, transportation, spreading metal in layers, including screenings,
consolidation by power roller, binding with murrum or other approved binding material,
cost of carrying the material to work for all leads and lifts, providing and running roller
etc. complete as per specifications and satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
7.4 Subsequent layers of WBM
Payment for surface preparation, rectification of damaged portions of Proceeding layers of

water bound macadam and filling in ruts and depressions shall be made in M2 or M3 as %
per schedule of items. Payment for subsequent layer of WBM shall be made on M2 basis as
per Cl. No.5.2.6.
7.5 The payment clause indicated above are not applicable in case of LSTK Jobs
Page 2714 of 3884

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
6-65-0019 Rev. 4
slg 1a5leg INDIA LIMITED FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENT
14.1,2,124R612ZOIJMIII, (A Govt of India Unt*Oolong) Page 1 of 10
*-AZ 4414a 1-111ch 1-4-44T
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
✓
4 04 07 19 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPEC SD .GS/AK RS RKT
2 20 01 05 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPEC

GG SKC VDS SKG
1 15 7 98 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPEC PCS RJAIN MMK ASONI
0 31 3 82 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RP RPB HVR RCPC

Standards Standards
No by by
Page 2715 of 3884

laia ENGINEERS
OM! latReg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-65-0019 Rev. 4
IffIETI Feemean3mem) IA GovI o Intia Undertalong)
CONCRETE PAVEMENT Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
BS .• British Standard
IRC•. Indian Road Congress
IS •. Indian Standard
MS •. Mild Steel
PCC •. Plain Cement Concrete
RCC •. Reinforced Cement Concrete
DLC -. Dry Lean Concrete

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copynght EIL — All nghts reserved
Page 2716 of 3884

ENGINEERS
Itgaliatae„g J INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-65-0019 Rev. 4
4...,?...=maw) IA GoW of In Undertal.9) CONCRETE PAVEMENT Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 REFERENCE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS 4
3.0 MATERIALS 4
4.0 GRADES, TYPE OF CONCRETE MIX, PROPORTIONING AND BATCHING 4
5.0 EQUIPMENTS 5
6.0 PREPARATION OF SUB GRADE 5
7.0 PREPARATION OF SUB BASE 5
8.0 FORMS 6
9.0 REINFORCEMENT, MIXING & PLACING OF CONCRETE 6
10.0 JOINTS 8
11.0 OPENING TO TRAFFIC 8
12.0 METHOD AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 9
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght EIL - All nghts reserved
Page 2717 of 3884

ou ENGINEERS
Slga faReg INDIA IJMITED FOR 6-65-0019 Rev. 4
101E7/ FRIER 051,4111.1, (A Govt OtIndla UnderidA.A9)
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the requirements of material, laying and finishing of concrete
pavements and roads.
2.0 REFERENCE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
IS: 456 Plain and Reinforced Concrete-Code of Practice.

IS: 1834 Specification for Hot Applied Sealing Compounds for Joints in
Concrete.
IS: 1838, Part-1 Specification for Preformed Fillers for Expansion Joints in Pavements
and Structures (Non Extruding and Resilient Type): Part 1 Bitumen
Impregnated Fibre.
IS: 2720, Part-8 Method of Test for Soils-Part 8: Determination of Water Content-Dry
Density Relation Using Heavy Compaction.
IS: 9214 Method of Determination of Modulus of Sub-grade Reaction (k
value) of Soils in the Field.
IRC: 57 Recommended practice for sealing of joints in concrete pavement
IRC-15 Standard Specifications and code of Practice for construction of
concrete roads
MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge Works of Ministry of Road
Transport and Highways
6-68-0002 Technical Specification - Civil & Structural Works - Materials.
6-68-0004 Technical Specification - Civil & Structural Works — Plain and
Reinforced Cement Concrete.
7-65-0404 RCC Pavement Details
MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge
In case of conflict between the Clauses mentioned in this Specification and those in above
Codes and Specifications, this Specification shall govern.
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 Material for Cement Concrete viz. Cement, Sand, Coarse and Fine aggregate and water,
Reinforcements Bars, Embedment, Inserts and Admixture etc. shall be as described in EIL
Specification no. 6-68-0002.
3.2 Material for DLC shall be as described Specification for Road and Bridge Works of Ministry
of Road Transport and Highways (MoRTH).
4.0 GRADES, TYPE OF CONCRETE MIX, PROPORTIONING AND HATCHING
4.1 The grades of concrete shall be as per standard / Job drawing.
4.2 Specification for Concrete mix, Mix Proportioning and Batching shall be as described in EIL
Specification no. 6-68-0004 and IS: 456.
Page 2718 of 3884

daRelef ENGINEF_RS
51g-ar 'Meg
Wen everwas,Norm,
(A GAN cot mw Undertalang)
5.0 EQUIPMENTS
All equipments like sub grade templates, hand tempers, vibrating screens, internal vibrators,
longitudinal floats, bridges, push brooms, straight edges, edging tools etc. shall be on the
worksite in first class working condition and shall have been inspected by the Engineer-in-
Charge before paving operations are permitted to start. Throughout the construction period,
the contractor shall maintain adequate equipment in first class working conditions to ensure
the proper execution of the work.
6.0 PREPARATION OF SUB GRADE
6.1 The area where concrete is to be placed must be cleared of all loose material and virgin soil
must be exposed. Such exposed surface must be consolidated properly to obtain 95% of
Maximum Laboratory Dry Density of the soil. All soft patches must be worked out to remove
the soft soil and selected approved earth must be filled back and compacted.
6.2 For areas, where pavement is to be laid on cutting / natural grade level, Sub grade shall be
thoroughly compacted to 95% of laboratory dry density as per IS: 2720 Part VIII. For filled
up areas, top 450 mm of the soil shall be compacted to 95% of laboratory dry density below
pavement in layers of 150 mm.
6.3 The difference between the sub grade levels of Type-I, Type-II, Type-III and any other type
(as per job drawing) Concrete pavements (due to difference in thickness of Type-I, Type-II,
Type-III and any other type pavements) shall be achieved by stripping the grade level and not
by filling. Hence, site-grading level below pavement shall be kept up to sub grade level of
Type-II or Type-III as the case may be, to avoid filling of smaller thickness at later stage.
6.4 The sub grade or sub base for laying of the concrete pavement shall comply with the following
requirements:
6.4.1 No soft spots shall be present in the sub grade.
6.4.2 The uniformly compacted sub grade or base course shall extend at least 300mm on either side
of the area to be concreted.
6.4.3 The sub grade shall be properly drained.
6.4.4 The minimum modules of sub grade in wet condition, reaction obtained with a Plate Bearing
Test as per IS: 9214, shall be 6.0 Kg/cm2/cm.
6.4.5 Sub grade shall be prepared to the lines and grades to match with the slope of pavement as
shown on the drawings.
7.0 PREPARATION OF SUB BASE
7.1 The construction of the Dry Lean concrete sub base for cement concrete pavement shall
conform to the requirements of section 601.0 of specification for Road and Bridge Works of
Ministry of Road Transport and Highways (MoRTH) and EIL standard Drg. No. 7-65-0404/
Job drawing.
7.2 Sub Base layer shall be prepared to the lines and grades to match with the slope of pavement
as shown on the drawings.
7.3 No concrete shall be placed around manholes or other structures until they have been brought
to required grade and alignment. All sides of manholes / pits etc. shall have same elevation.
Page 2719 of 3884

ENGINEERS
ligar taweg
1.211 eiVelfR ON.710.0
INDIA LIMITED
01 Govt of Wu Undettaiong)
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
6-65-0019 Rev. 4
Page 6 of 10
7.4 A separation membrane shall be used between the concrete slab and the sub base (DLC) which
shall conform to EIL standard Drg. No. 7-65-0404/ Job drawing. The separation membrane
shall be laid flat without creases. Before placing the separation membrane, the sub-base shall
be swept clean of all the extraneous materials using air compressor. Wherever overlap of
plastic sheets is necessary, the same shall be at least 300 mm and any damaged sheeting shall
be replaced at the Contractor's expense. The separation membrane may be nailed to the lower
layer with concrete nails.
8.0 FORMS
8.1 All side Forms shall be of mild steel unless use of wooden sections is specially permitted. The
steel forms shall be of MS channel sections and their depth shall be equal to thickness of the
pavement. The sections shall have a length of at least 3.0m except on curves, where shorter
sections may be used. These forms should be provided with ample bracing and supports to
prevent the springing of the forms under the concrete pressure or thrust of machinery
operating nearby.
8.2 The forms should be in a sufficient number and they should not be removed until concrete has
hardened sufficiently.
8.3 In case wooden forms are permitted, these shall have minimum base width of 100 mm for
150mm or lesser thick slabs and 150mm for 200mm thick slabs.
9.0 REINFORCEMENT, MIXING & PLACING OF CONCRETE

9.1 Laying of Reinforcement
All reinforcement work shall confirm to IS: 456 and as described in EIL Specification no.
6-68-0004.
9.2 Mixing
Mixing shall be as described in EIL Specification no. 6-68-0004.
9.3 Placing
9.3.1 The place where concrete is to be poured should be clean and free from all loose dirt, wooden
pieces, dust, standing water etc.
9.3.2 Walking on reinforcement layers is not permissible. Walkways of wooden planks or similar
material can be placed with removable supports and should be independent of the
reinforcement. The reinforcement position should not be disturbed nor should it sag during
carriage and placement of concrete.
9.3.3 Placing and vibration should not take totally more than 20 minutes from time of mixing.
Method of placing should be got approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Segregation during
carriage and placement should be avoided. If during carriage concrete segregates, it should be
remixed before placement.
9.3.4 Concrete should not be dropped from a height of over 1.5m.
9.3.5 To ensure bond and water tightness between old concrete surface and fresh concrete to be
placed, the surface should be cleaned and roughened by "initial green cut" by wire brushing or
chipping. The initial green may be done by wire brush after 6 hours of placing concrete in
order to facilitate the work. Chipping can be done only after 48 hours. A layer of cement
Page 2720 of 3884

III~iI ENGINEERS
gar faws INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-65-0019 Rev. 4
WWI FOR? afIJ,INPO (A Govt of Ind. I-Indedak.g) CONCRETE PAVEMENT Page 7 of 10
slurry with 1:1 mix (1 cement: 1 sand) should be poured to obtain a uniform coating on old
concrete. Immediately thereafter, the fresh concrete should be poured.
9.3.6 Concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use and shall be deposited on the
sub-grade in a single operation to the required depth and width of the pavement. Spreading
shall be as uniform as possible to avoid re-handling of concrete. Where however, a certain
amount of redistribution is necessary, it shall be done with shovels and not with rakes.
Concrete shall be vibrated with internal vibrators. Concrete shall be placed continuously until
completion of the part of the work between construction joints or as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge continuously until completion of the part of the work between construction joints or as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
9.3.7 Placing in inclement weather
All precautions shall be taken for concreting in extreme weather in accordance with the
relevant clauses of IS: 456. Due protection shall be provided to prevent cement being blown
away while proportioning and mixing during windy weather. No concreting shall be carried
out in continuous heavy rains. Necessary arrangements to cover the freshly poured concrete
shall be provided, to protect it from the direct rays of the sun and from drying winds.
9.3.8 All concreting placement should be co-coordinated with placement of conduits, inserts,
embedded parts etc. executed either by same agency or separately.
9.3.9 Concrete shall be laid in panels as shown in the standard drawing or as directed by Engineer-
in-Charge.
9.4 Compaction & Finishing
9.4.1 Compaction
The surface of the pavement shall be compacted either by means of power driven finish
machine or a vibrating hand screed. For areas where width of the pavement is very small,
hand consolidation and finishing shall be done as follows:
9.4.1.1 Concrete as soon as placed, shall be struck off uniformly and screeted to the crown and cross-
section shown on the plans and to such level above the base that when compacted and
finished, the pavement shall conform to the grade and cross-section indicated by the plans.
The entire surface shall then be tamped until a close-knit dense surface is obtained.
9.4.1.2 The Tamper shall rest on the side forms and shall be drawn ahead with a swing motion in
combination with a series of lifts and drops alternating with lateral shifts. The aim of this
operation is compaction and screeding to the approximate level required. Subsequent tamping
should advance 75 mm at a time in the direction in which the work is proceeding and in final
stages, the tamping should be closer, about 12 mm at a time, until a level and dense surface is
obtained.
9.4.1.3 If so directed by Engineer-in-charge, hand operated vibrating tamper consisting of normal type
of hand tamper attached to a pneumatic or electric vibrating unit shall be used for compaction.
9.4.1.4 Segregated particles of coarse aggregate, which collect in front of the tamper, shall be thrown
outside the forms or thoroughly mixed by hand with a mass of concrete already on the base.
9.4.1.5 Compaction by tamping shall be carried on till the mortar in the mix just works up to the
surface. The surface shall be examined after compaction correction. If needed correction
shall be made by adding or removing concrete, followed by further compaction and finishing.
Page 2721 of 3884

eiel fr3.7 ENGINEERS
,...„Eme,s
$ligeir ,,,,,
=MOM)
INDIA LJMITED
01 Gout of InOta UnOettalung)
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
6-65-0019 Rev. 4
Page 8 of 10
9.4.2 Floating
As soon as practicable, after concrete has been struck off and compacted, it shall be further
smoothened and compacted by means of a longitudinal float, 1200 mm long and 75 mm wide,
operated from a foot bridge.
9.4.3 Straight Edging
After floating is completed and excess water removed but while concrete is still plastic, the
slab surface shall be tested for trueness with a straight edge and rectified, if necessary.
9.4.4 Brooming
After belting and as soon as surplus water has risen to the surface, the pavement shall be given
a broom finish to produce corrugations of uniform appearance of not more than 1/16 inch in
depth.
9.4.5 Edging
Before the concrete has its initial set, the edges shall be carefully finished with an edger of the
radius required and pavement edge shall be left smooth and true to line.
9.5 Curing
Curing of concrete shall be as described in EIL Specification no. 6-68-0004.
10.0 JOINTS
10.1 Wherever called for on the drawings, expansion joints, construction joints and sealing joints
shall be provided as per details indicated in the drawing and as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge.
10.2 Sealing of Joints
10.2.1 After the curing, the temporary seal or other intruded materials of all expansion and
contraction joints shall be removed completely and the slots filled with approved silicone
sealant. It shall be self leveling low modulus type confirming to ASTM 5893. The sealant
shall conform to IRC 57. The filler material for Expansion and Sealing joints shall be
preformed fillers of Bitumen Impregnated Fiber, conforming to IS: 1838, Part-I.
10.2.2 The edges of the joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and a suitable primer as recommended by
sealant manufacturer shall be applied in accordance with IRC:57.
10.2.3 The application of the sealing compound shall conform to the process as specified in IRC 57.
11.0 OPENING TO TRAFFIC
11.1 Traffic shall not be allowed for a period of 28 days after laying of concrete in pavement.
11.2 Before opening the pavement to traffic, all joints shall be filled and trimmed or topped out as
required.
11.3 Sampling, testing and acceptance of concrete work for pavement / road shall be according to
IS: 456 / IRC -15 as applicable.
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright DL — All rights reserved
Page 2722 of 3884

-----. STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
l./11Re.J&
, frrd ENGINEERS
gigeZ tiOieg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-65-0019 Rev. 4
Wall egerevateNeor0 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
12.0 METHOD AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT
12.1 Plain and Reinforced Concrete
12.1.1 Payment for plane and reinforced concrete in pavements shall be made on cubic metre basis of
the volume of the actual finished work done and shall be inclusive of cost of providing Forms,
Pockets, Chamfers, Fillets, Grooves, Cement wash, Curing by normal moist curing or using
curing compound etc. as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The rates shall be deemed to include
complete cost of getting the respective mix designs approved, making and testing concrete
cubes and carrying out other tests including tests of various ingredients, as per specifications
and as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
12.1.2 No separate payment shall be made for any admixture used by the contractor for accelerating
or retarding the strength of concrete or for achieving specified workability / water tightness.
The rate quoted shall be deemed to be inclusive of all costs related to any such additive /
admixture.
12.1.3 The rate shall however be exclusive of reinforcement, metal inserts, pipe sleeves and any filler
material in expansion / sealing joints.
12.1.4 Where the strength of concrete mix (nominal or design mix) as indicated by tests, lies in
between the strengths of two grades given in Table-1 of EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004 and
it is accepted by owner/Engineer-in-charge, such concrete shall be classified as a grade
belonging to the lower of the two grades between which it lies. In case the cube strength
shows higher results than those specified for the particular grade of the concrete, it shall not be
placed in the higher grade nor shall the Contractor be entitled for any extra payment on such
account. The concrete giving lower strength than specified may be accepted at reduced rates
after satisfying the safety of the structure by checking it with tests as specified or rejected
entirely at the discretion of the Engineer-in Charge. The rejected concrete shall be dismantled
at no extra cost to the owner and no payment or extension of time shall be granted for the
concrete so rejected and the formwork and reinforcement used for the same. Cost of any
material supplied by the Owner free of cost shall be recovered from the contractor at double
the prevailing market rate. In case the concrete of lower strength can be improved by carrying
out some strengthening measures entirely at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge, then
Contractor shall carry out the said measures including all related tests at his own cost. If the
Contractor is able to make up the strength to the required grade by such improvement
measures to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge, payment shall be made for the grade
achieved. However, if the strength of concrete is not made up to the strength of required grade,
payment shall be made only for the lower strength if such concrete is accepted by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
12.1.5 Deductions for openings, pockets etc. shall be as specified in relevant Indian Standard Codes.
12.2 Reinforcement
12.2.1 Payment for plain round mild steel reinforcement bars and high strength deformed steel bars
shall be on the basis of weight of bare steel, irrespective of any coating applied, in metric tons.
The weight of the bar shall be derived from the sizes and corresponding unit weights given in
hand book of Bureau of Indian Standards. Standard hook length, chairs, spacer bars and
authorised laps only shall be included in the weight calculated. Binding wire shall not be
weighed nor otherwise measured. Measurement for weight shall not include cutting allowance
etc.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght EIL — All rights reserved
Page 2723 of 3884

FOR 6-65-0019 Rev. 4
1.11e. eliWIP =JIMA) IA Govt o Imo undertakmg)
12.2.2 Rate quoted for reinforcement shall include cost of supplying, decoiling, straightening,
cleaning, cutting, bending, placing, binding, welding if required, and providing necessary
cover blocks of concrete.
12.3 Joints
Payment for expansion joints, construction joints and sealing joints shall be made on running
metre basis. The rate shall include cleaning of joints, filler material and sealing with approved
compound, all material, labour etc. complete, as per drawing.
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 2724 of 3884

aft
w
Zga E15Ieg
'
Irm
-\WW
:
ENGINEERS
y
LJMITED
Go a of Fail umen*VOI
FOR
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS WITH
No.
6-65-0020 Rev. 3
BITUMEN PREMIX CARPET Page 1 of 9
saili crti mile Ita 71:Er th71 t

Trri-w -Wu
FOR
BITUMEN PREMIX CARPET
3 19.09.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RC

r\
VK DM
fr)"jt
KUMAR
2 14.03.08 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC GAURAV RKS NK VC
1 15.02.98 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RBB NKT MMK A SONI
0 ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RP RPB HVR AK
Standards Standards
Rev. Prepared Checked Committee CGM Bureau
Date Purpose by by Convenor Chairman
No
Approved by
Page 2725 of 3884

tg- 1T1851egire, INDIA LIMITED FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS WITH 6-65-0020 Rev. 3
a
..P2n e lane aTrir ll IA Grart of Ma Undertang)
Abbreviations:
cm/yr Centimeter per year
IRC Indian Road Congress
IS Indian Standard
Kg Kilogram
Kg/m2Kilogram per Square Meter
m Meter
mm Millimeter
MOST Ministry of Surface Transport
M3 Cubic Meter
m2 Square Meter

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. P.K. Mittal (Structural)
Mr. A.T. Dharmik (Piping)
Mr. Sushil Sadh (Environment)
Mr. M.P. Jain (Projects)
Page 2726 of 3884

ISMa g e ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
ittieW
-
INDIA LIMITED FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS WITH 6-65-0020 Rev. 3
oe. .FM17' Magarw) (A Geri of in. Unclelleonal
BITUMEN PREMIX CARPET Pane 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 REFERENCES 4
3.0 MATERIAL 4
4.0 QUANTITIES OF MATERIAL (PREMIX CARPET) 5
5.0 LAYING 6
6.0 TESTING 8
7.0 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EARTH 8
8.0 BRICK PITCHING ON EMBANKMENT SLOPES 8
9.0 PAYMENT 9
Page 2727 of 3884

51gar WiegW: INDIA LIMITED FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS WITH 6-65-0020 Rev. 3
o al q n
Wn eRaW a , 0 Govt of lotha Undettalon9)
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the material, construction requirements and procedures for the
flexible pavement with open-graded bitumen premix carpet.
2.0 REFERENCES
2.1 Codes & Standards
IS: 73 Paving bitumen
IS: 217 Cut back bitumen
IS: 269 Ordinary Portland cement, 33 grade
IS: 2116 Sand for masonry mortars
IS: 8887 Bitumen emulsion for roads
IRC : SP : 11 Handbook of quality control for construction of Roads and Runways
IRC: 37 Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements
2.2 Specifications
Specifications for Road and Bridge Works — Ministry of Surface Transport (Road Wing)
NOTE: -Latest Edition of all Codes, Standards and Specifications shall be followed.
3.0 MATERIAL
3.1 Coarse Aggregate
The aggregate shall consist of crushed stone of clean, hard, tough, durable rock of uniform
quality and shall be clean, free from excess of dust, flat or elongated pieces, soft or
disintegrated stone, clay or other deleterious matter. The size of aggregate shall be as
mentioned in the schedule of quantities. The aggregates shall conform to the physical
requirements specified in Table 500.3 of the MOST Specification except that the water
absorption shall be limited to 1% maximum.
3.2 Sand
The sand for seal coat shall consist of clean, hard, durable, uncoated, coarse dry particles and
shall be free from injurious amounts of dust, soft or flaky particles, organic matter or other
deleterious substances. The sand shall pass 2 36mm sieve and be retained on 180 micron
sieve.
3.3 Binder
For hot / moderate climate, bitumen shall be of VG — 30 Grade (Substitute of Grade 60/70
penetration as per IS : 73) used to construct extra heavy duty pavement that need to endure
substantial traffic load. For cold climate (High altitude and snow bound regions), the bitumen
shall be of VG — 10 (Substitute of Grade 80/100 penetration).
Physical and Chemical properties of Paving Bitumen shall be as per IS: 73. The bitumen shall
be collected in drums. Any leaking or damaged drum shall not be accepted.
Page 2728 of 3884

laraae? ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
Sg7 tiolegs INDIA LIMITED
IA Go' of YvAi Underkikno
6-65-0020 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 9
4.0 QUANTITIES OF MATERIAL (PREMIX CARPET)
4.1 For Premix Carpet 20mm thick
Material For Premix Carpet For seal coat

per 100m2 per 100m2
1 2 3
i) Coarse Aggregate
12mm and down size 2.75m3
Bitumen 150 Kg 68.3 Kg
iii) Coarse sand as

sealing aggregate 0.6 m3
1 2 3
Coarse Aggregate
12mm and down size 3.5m3
ii Bitumen 185 Kg 68.3 Kg
iii) Coarse sand as

sealing compound 0.6m3
1 2 3
Coarse aggregate 25mm

and down size 5.5m3 -
(For 35mm thick carpet 1 layer)

and down size (For 15mm 2.0m3
thick carpet layer)
iii) Bitumen
For 35mm thick Carpet
(1 layer) 269 kg 68.3 kg.
For 15mm thick Carpet
(H layer) 110 kg.
iv) Coarse sand as sealing

aggregate 0.6m3
Page 2729 of 3884

INPIZETMENGINEERS
Ilgar 1191Reg INDIA LIMITED
Men PROW CURF9/
w IA GOA of hclia Unclertz*.d)
No.
6-65-0020 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 9
1 2 3

and down size (For 50mm
thick, 1 layer) 8.5m3

and down size (For 25mm
thick, H layer) 3.5m3
Bitumen
a)For 50 thick I layer 375 kg 68.3 kg.
b)For 25 thick H layer 185 kg.
Coarse sand as sealing

aggregate 0.6m3
5.0 LAYING
5.1 Preparation of Road Surface
The existing surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, loose materials, caked mud and other
foreign matter with the help of wire brush, chisel, picks etc. before laying the tack course. The
cleaning shall be carried out in such a manner as to expose the stone metal to a depth of 1 to
2mm without dislodging the interlocking of the metal. All dust and other material thus
removed shall be carried away and dumped at suitable places as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
If pot holes or ruts are found on the existing road surface, these irregularities must be filled in
with premix chippings and well rammed about a week before the carpet is laid.
5.2 Tack Coat
5.2.1 The binder shall be heated to the temperature appropriate to the grade of cutback bitumen /
bituminous emulsion used and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge at the rate of 1 kg /m 2 by
means of sprayers and shall be spread uniformly. The normal range of spraying temperature
shall be 50° - 80° C for cutback of grade RC-70 / MC-70 and for bituminous emulsion 20° -
60° C.
5.2.2 The tack coat shall be applied just ahead, keeping pace with laying of premix carpet.
5.3 Preparation of Premix
5.3.1 Mechanical mixers shall be generally used for preparation of premix. Improvised hand mixing
drums may be used, if permitted by the Engineer-in-charge.
5.3.2 Stone chippings of specified size shall be thorou g hly mixed dry in the mixer at the rate
indicated above. Binder heated at a temperature 150°C-163°C and aggregates in the range of
155°C-163°C are added in the given proportions to the mixer drum and thorou g hly mixed till
the stone chips are completely coated with the binder. The discharge temperature of the mix
shall be between 130 °C and 160 °C.
Format No. 6-00.0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 2730 of 3884

safik,d a, EtsciNEERs STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
No.
sTrar tifaleg ili, WA LIMITED FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS WITH 6-65-0020 Rev. 3
.
g
uncienakm
1 1e” Fle.e .M.7RIM/ (A Gort of WSW
5.3.3 The premix mixture shall be transported from mixing plant to the worksite in a suitable tripper
vehicles.
5.4 Spreading of Premix
The mix transferred from the tipper trucks at site to the paver shall be spread immediately by
means of self-propelled mechanical paver with suitable screeds capable of spreading, tamping
and finishing the mix true to the specified lines, grades and cross sections. Mix shall not be
applied to a wet surface or during a dust storm or when weather is foggy, rainy or windy or
when the temperature in the shade or the surface on which it is to be laid is below 10°C or the
wind speed at any temperature exceeds 40 Km / hr at 2 m height.
The mix shall be spread in such a manner that after compaction, the required thickness of the
premix carpet is obtained. The camber should be checked by means of camber boards and
irregularities leveled out. .
However, in restricted locations and in narrow widths where the available paver cannot be
operated in the opinion of Engineer-in-Charge, manual laying of mix may be permitted.
5.5 Rolling
5.5.1 When the premix has been laid for a length of 15-20 meters, rolling shall be commenced with
tandem rollers (8 to 10 tonnes). Rolling should commence from edges and proceed towards
centre longitudinally except that on super elevated and unidirectional cambered portions, it
shall progress from the lower to the upper edge parallel to the centerline of the pavement. The
roller shall move at a speed not more than 5Km/hr.
5.5.2 The wheels of roller shall be continuously moistened to prevent the premix adhering to the
wheels and being picked up.
5.5.3 After the preliminary rolling and honey combing, high spot or depressions shall be rectified by
adding or removing the premix as per requirements and the surface shall be rolled again to
compaction. Camber shall be checked at every stage and any defects found shall be rectified.
Excessive rolling shall be avoided.
5.5.4 Rolling operation shall be completed in every respect before the temperature of the mix falls
below 100 °C. Roller shall not remain stationary on freshly compacted surfaces.
5.6 Seal Coat
5.6.1 Seal Coat (For low rainfall areas - under 150 cm/yr)
A premix seal coat, mix preferably in a mechanical mixer after heating the sand should be
applied immediately after laying the carpet and rolled. Materials required for this seal coat are
as per clause 4.
5.6.2 Seal Coat (For high rainfall areas- over 150 cm/yr)
The material requirement for seal coat in high rainfall areas is as under:-
Binder VG — 10 = 98 kg /100m2 of road surface

Coarse aggregates
6 3mm passing IS 10mm
Square mesh retained on

IS sieve 2.36mm = 0.9m3/100m2 of road surface.
Page 2731 of 3884

ISIffifleq a - ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
1@zfit:tattle; WA UMITED FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS WITH 6-65-0020 Rev. 3
1.1en Pleenea3aRD IA SIM of hide Undertaking)
BITUMEN PREMIX CARPET Pa e8of 9
A liquid seal coat, preferably with chippings as above (though coarse sand can also be used)
should be applied after laying the carpet. The binder after being heated to permitted
temperature, should be applied to the cleaned surface, blinded with chippings and rolled.
Traffic may be allowed on the road preferably 24 hours after providing the seal coat.
6.0 TESTING
The following field tests shall be performed during the road construction
S. NO. TEST FOR BINDER RATE OF BITUMEN

TEMPERATURE SPREAD OF CONTENT
BINDER
I Tack Coat At regular interval Two test per day -
- 1 test in every
two hour
2 Pre — Mix At regular interval One test per 500 m2 Minimum 2 test
carpet — 1 test in every area of road per day as per IRC
two hour : SP : 11
3 Seal Coat At regular interval One test per 500 m2 Minimum 2 test
— 1 test in every area of road per day as per IRC
two hour : SP : 11
7.0 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EARTH
7.1 Surplus earth and soil from excavation shall be removed from construction area to the area
demarcated by the Engineer-in-charge.
7.2 Payment shall be made only for lead beyond initial 50M from construction areas Rate shall
include loading, transportation, dumping, stacking the surplus earth and soil in the area
demarcated. Payment shall be made on cubic meter basis of the difference of measurements of
the volumes of the excavated pits and the measurements of the bacicfilling.
8.0 BRICK PITCHING ON EMBANKMENT SLOPES
8.1 Excavation
Trench shall be excavated / dressed true to line, section and grade as per drawings prior to
starting the pitching work.
8.2 Material
8.2.1 Bricks shall be locally available best bricks.
8.2.2 Cement, sand and water used shall be as per IS: 269 and 2116.
8.3 The concrete mix used for bedding shall be as per drawings and schedule of rates.
8.4 The work of pitching shall be done after the bottom concrete has been laid and sides properly
trimmed to the required grade and thoroughly compacted.
8.5 Brick pitching shall be done in 1:4 cement mortar using best quality locally available bricks.
8.6 Bricks shall be laid in herring bone pattern with their length at 45° to the length of the ditch as
shown in drawings
Page 2732 of 3884

SaRCRitEN GINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
I No.
It ar tafflegW:
g NINA LIMITED FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS WITH 6-65-0020 Rev. 3
InorA e‘wala.0.0
Govt of W.. undenaluog/
Page 9 of 9
8.7 Mortar joints shall never exceed 6mm in thickness and all bricks shall be laid with vertical
joints quite full of mortar.
8.8 Bricks shall be soaked for a period of at least 12 hours immediately before use and no broken
and damaged bricks shall be used in any part of the work except as required to close any line
of bricks.
8.9 The face of pitching shall be made even and smooth.
8.10 The brickwork shall be raked and flush pointed with cement mortar 1:3 as specified.
9.0 PAYMENT
9.1 Bitumen Premix Carpet
Payment shall be made on sq.m. basis of fmished surface including all labour & materials as
per above specifications.
9.2 Brick Pitching
Payment for brick pitching shall be made on the basis of area paved. It shall include all
operations described above, except the excavation item.
9.3 The payment clause 9.1 and 9.2 are not applicable in case of LSTK Jobs
Format No. 8-00.0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — AII rights reserved
Page 2733 of 3884

ENGINEERS
liges imegvi, INDIA LIMITED PIPE CULVERTS
6-65-0021 Rev. 4
INIEW eletr/Ili1513,1;1114, w Gout o ndta Undettalongt
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
Page 1 of 5
4I*4 reErr -awr t TV

aTri 3TR Tft -T114Tr
4i 1Ch "WU
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
4 14 03 19
SPECIFICATION
AterA
AVM AJS
4L
RS
3 23.05 11 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD SPEC AS RKS RBB DM

Standards Standards
No by by
Approved by
Page 2734 of 3884

ENGINEF_RS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
51gzu 015tegW INDIA LIMITED FOR PIPE CULVERTS
lawn ez111.1413.) (A Govt of IMO Undertaking) 6-65-0021 Rev. 4
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
ERC : Electrical Road Crossings
IRC : Instrumentation Road Crossings
IS Indian Standard
PVC : Poly Vinyl Chloride

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2735 of 3884

a ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
slaeir 02ft® INDIA LIMITED
latIETT 2liolgettvatorts0 IA Govt ol Into Undeltakm)
FOR PIPE CULVERTS 6-65-0021 Rev. 4
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIALS 4
4.0 TRANSPORTATION AND STACKING 4
5.0 LOWERING AND LAYING OF RCC PIPES 4
6.0 LOWERING AND LAYING OF PVC PIPES 5
Page 2736 of 3884

II~iel ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
og it 215Eleg
CORTI effelfle 451,10511)
INDIA UMTED
(A Govt of In*a Uncleftaiong)
FOR PIPE CULVERTS 6-65-0021 Rev. 4
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING Page 4 of 5
1.0 SCOPE
The scope of this specification covers RCC pipe culverts and ERC/ IRC crossings with RCC or PVC
pipes.
IS: 458 Precast Concrete Pipes (with and without reinforcement)
IS: 783 Code of practice for laying of RCC pipes
IS: 4985 Unplasticised PVC pipes for potable water supplies
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 All pipes must be new and perfectly sound, free from cracks, cylindrically straight and of standard
nominal diameter and length, with even texture. PVC Pipes shall be Class-I as per IS: 4985.
For pipe culverts, class of RCC pipe shall be NP3 / NP4 or as mentioned in the drawings.
3.2 The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's test certificate for acceptance of RCC/PVC pipes.
3.3 Spun yarn for pipe joints shall be of best quality. It shall be free from dust etc.
4.0 TRANSPORTATION AND STACKING
4.1 The transportation of materials to the worksite and stacking shall be done in a manner to cause
minimum inconvenience to the traffic and other construction work.
4.2 The pipe shall be protected during handling against impact, shocks and free fall to avoid cracks and
damage.
4.3 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and security of materials transported and
stacked in the field.
4.4 Earthwork
Refer standard specification No.6-68-0003 for earthwork.
5.0 LOWERING AND LAYING OF RCC PIPES
5.1 General
The laying and jointing of RCC pipes shall confirm to IS: 783.
The trench shall be checked for proper level, grade and alignment before lowering the pipes.
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght EL — All nghts reserved
Page 2737 of 3884

$ Cg
ige-il f 11511
—'
INDIA LIMITED FOR PIPE CULVERTS 6-65-0021 Rev. 4
own' eleaNt'451,10,
11) IA Govt or India Undertaking)
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
Page 5 of 5
5.2 Lowering
The RCC pipe shall be lowered cautiously to prevent disturbance to the bed and sides of the trench.
The heavy RCC pipes shall be lowered by means of proper tripods, chain pulley blocks or as directed
by Engineer-in-charge. Great care should be taken to prevent sand etc. from entering the pipes.
5.3 Laying
5.3.1 Laying of RCC pipes shall proceed up grade of slopes.
5.3.2 The error of grade shall not be rectified by packing up earth underneath the pipe. If required, concrete
shall be used for packing.
5.3.3 The end of RCC pipes shall be kept closed to keep dirt, mud and foreign materials out. Adequate
provision shall be made to prevent floating of pipes in the event of flooding of trenches.
The body of RCC pipe, for its entire length, shall rest on an even bed in the trench.
5.4 Jointing of RCC pipes.
5.4.1 Cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 sand) shall be slightly moistened and must on no account be soft or
sloppy and shall be carefully inserted by hand into the joint. The mortar shall than be punched and
caulked into the joint and more cement mortar added until the space of the joint has been filled
completely with tightly caulked mortar.
5.4.2 Any surplus mortar projecting inside the joint is to be removed and guarded against any damage. Sack
or gunny bags shall be drawn past each joint after completion.
5.5 Curing.
The Cement mortar joints in RCC pipes shall be cured at least for seven days.
5.6 Testing.
All joints in culvert pipelines shall be tested to a head of 1.5 m of water above the top of the highest
pipe, if required, by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.7 Payment
Payment shall be made on running meter basis, which includes supplying, transporting, lowering,
laying, jointing and curing, concreting around RCC pipes etc., all complete.
6.0 LOWERING AND LAYING OF PVC PIPES
6.1 Lowering and laying of PVC pipes shall be done as per IS: 4985. The jointing of the pipes shall be
done by expanding one end after heating and using solvent cement.
6.2 Payment
Payment shall be made on running meter basis of PVC pipes, which includes supplying, transporting,
lowering, laying and jointing, concreting around PVC pipes etc., all complete.
Page 2738 of 3884

ENGINEERS UNDERGROUND AND ABOVE
IA Gaut of Ind. Undertaking)
GROUND G.I. PIPELINE SYSTEM
(WATER SERVICES) Page 1 of 5
ifFrun atIK wcr{ 1°. aTrt. wirm

51 U II01 *I 7ff Wirt `NIA
FOR
UNDERGROUND & ABOVE GROUND
GI. PIPELINE SYSTEM
(WATER SERVICES)
5 06.07.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. LP R K TRIVEDI
4 10.07.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. JAI KUMAR RC RBB DM
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved by
Page 2739 of 3884

lal41--ag WA LIMITED 6-65-0027 Rev.5
1.117n eiVEN2 (AGO of Inda Undertakmg) GROUND G.I. PIPELINE SYSTEM
Abbreviations:
GI Galvanised Iron
IS Indian Standard
Kg/cm2g Kilogram per Square Centimeter Guage

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2740 of 3884

ti1fae_it'l ENGINEERS UNDERGROUND AND ABOVE
eir iVe;g INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0027 Rev.5
lartnewure .3acrw) (A Gout of Indo Undert*Ing) GROUND G.I. PIPELINE SYSTEM
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIALS 4
4.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING ETC 4
5.0 JOINTING AND ERECTION OF GI PIPING SYSTEM 4
6.0 TESTING 5
7.0 PAYMENT 5
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright E IL — All rights reserved
Page 2741 of 3884

5 ex tIPtg. INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0027 Rev.5
17111i77 MIJIMA) Govt Of Intim Undertaking) GROUND G.I. PIPELINE SYSTEM
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the fabrication and erection of GI pipeline system, both underground
and above ground, including excavation, backfilling for the pipeline and testing of completed
system.
IS: 554 Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are made on
threads.
IS: 778 Copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for water works purposes.
IS: 1239 Part I Mild steel Tubes, Tubular and other wrought steel fittings.
IS: 1239 Part II Mild steel Tubes, Tubular and other Wrought Steel fittings. Mild steel
Sockets, Tubular and other Wrought steel pipe fittings.
NOTE: -Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 MATERIALS
a) All GI. piping shall conform to IS: 1239 part I.

b) All gun metal valves shall conform to IS: 778 Class II.
c) All GI. fittings shall conform to IS: 1239 Part II.
The schedule of pipes & fittings shall be as per schedule of items under respective works.
4.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING ETC.
All earthwork for GI lines shall be governed by the provisions of EIL specification 6-65-
0006,"Earthwork for underground piping", to the extent applicable. All earthwork in
excavation, backfilling and transportation are included in the quoted rates.
5.0 JOINTING AND ERECTION OF GI PIPING SYSTEM
5.1 Screw socket Joints.
The screwed end of all GI pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a mixture of
Red and White Lead or Teflon before jointing. The joint shall be made by winding a few
threads of hemp round the ends of tubes and then screwing them into sockets to the full depth
of threads. Exposed threads shall be coated with approved anticorrosive paint. No pipe shall
be bent / offset to save fittings. The offset in GI pipes shall be made only after the permission
of the Engineer-in-Charge. If threaded end of pipe is damaged, the contractor shall cut the end
with hacksaw and shall prepare new threads conforming to IS: 554, to required length.
All fittings shall be malleable Galvanised Iron approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Fitting in
GI line shall include all couplings, elbows, tees, bends, unions, nipples, reducers, flanges with
nuts and rubber insertion and all other fittings to make a complete job.
5.2 Flanged Joints
Flanged joints shall be made by painting the faces of the flanges with red lead and bolting up
evenly on all sides with compressed asbestos gasket as per piping material specification.
5.3 Valves
Flanged or screwed valves shall be installed in locations shown on the drawings as per
specification for screwed or flanged joints.
Page 2742 of 3884

el ENGINEERS UNDERGROUND AND ABOVE
sige...251-e;g
Wren erzakE, „New)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking) GROUND G.I. PIPELINE SYSTEM
6-65-0027 Rev.5
6.0 TESTING
All completed GI piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a test pressure equal to one and a
half times the working pressure, as per job requirement (Minimum test pressure shall be
6Kg/Cm2 g) and the test pressure shall be maintained without loss for at least 30 minutes.
Pipes or fittings which are found leaking shall be replaced and joints found leaking shall be
redone, without extra payment.
7.0 PAYMENT
7.1 Payment shall be made on running meter basis of finished pipeline with fitting after testing
etc. complete. No separate payment shall be made for earthwork in trenching and backfill,
road cutting etc. Payment for valves and flanges etc. shall be made as per schedule of items on
unit rate basis. The unions shall be provided at every 50 meter, unless otherwise stated in
schedule of items / construction drawing. Rates shall include all incidental work such as
transportation of all materials from Owners stores, custody, and fabrication and laying of GI
piping system.
7.2 The payment clause 7.1 is not applicable in case of LSTK Jobs
Page 2743 of 3884

No.
ENGINEERS FOR
Igar Eleft
lawn ewer? enjorten)
INDIA LIMITED
FABRICATION AND LAYING OF 6-65-0030 Rev. 5
UNDERGROUND PIPING Page 1 of 11
prrras 1.W441 LAisic;kii aft(

*uNER -ffrw Fail4111
FOR
FABRICATION AND LAYING OF
UNDERGROUND PIPING
r Itor
a
-V
RAJA RK
5 06.07.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. LP Ve
SRIVASTAVA TRIVEDI
4 20.05.13 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RBT RKS RBB DM

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 2744 of 3884

5I ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
s`ge.JI
(win'
tifWdu
-mow)
ewcn,r
INDIA LIMITED
(A G.4 of butia Undertak.9)
FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING 6-65-0030 Rev. 5
OF UNDERGROUND PIPING
Page 2 of 11
Abbreviations:
ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
dia. DIAMETER
IS INDIAN STANDARD
Kg/cm2/minute KILOGRAME/SQUARE CENTIMETRE/MINUTE
m METRE
mm MILLIMETRE
CS CARBON STEEL

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2745 of 3884

el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
WA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING 6-65-0030 Rev. 5
I MI I IA Govt of India Undettakingj
Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 FABRICATION 4
4.0 LAYING OF UNDERGROUND PIPING 5
5.0 INSPECTION 8
6.0 TESTING 8
7.0 RECORDS 10
8.0 PAYMENT 10
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright Ell — All rights reserved
Page 2746 of 3884

ENONEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
(awn eRzwolojt.rm)
IA Govt o India Undertalong)
Page 4 of 11
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the technical requirements for the execution of Piping Fabrication,
Assembly and Laying of the underground pipe work defined here under, for water pipe lines.
i) Fabrication and erection of underground piping systems from piping materials

supplied by Owner in accordance with this specification and applicable drawings and
standards.
ii) Testing and flushing.
iii) Coating of under ground piping.
iv) Fabrication and erection of drain assemblies.
Underground piping systems shall be fabricated, installed, flushed, and tested in accordance
with this specification and applicable codes, drawings and standards. Any deviation from the
specification and drawings shall be permitted only after obtaining the written approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping.
6-65-0006 Standard specification for earth work for U/G piping.
6-44-0012 Standard specification for fabrication and erection of piping.
6-77-0001 Welding specification for the fabrication of piping
6-77-0005 Welding specification charts for piping classes
6-79-0011 Standard specification for corrosion protection tape coating for underground
steel piping
3.0 FABRICATION
3.1 The contractor shall fabricate all the pipe work in conformity with the Standard Specification
for Erection of Piping, Specification no. 6-44-0012 and requirements of relevant general
arrangement drawings. Where specific details of fabrication are not indicated on the drawings
or not specified in the specification, fabrication and erection shall be done in accordance with
ANSI B 31.3.
3.2 The contractor shall be responsible for working to the exact dimensions as shown on the
drawings, irrespective of individual tolerances permissible. Where errors and / or omissions
occur on the drawings, it shall be the contractor's responsibility to notify the Engineer-in-
Charge, prior to fabrication or erection. Dimensional tolerance for fabrication shall be as per
EIL standard.
Page 2747 of 3884

idadg INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING
..me:R.5,,011.3‘105.1) IA Govt of India undertakingl 6-65-0030 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 11
4.0 LAYING OF UNDERGROUND PIPING
4.1 Laying
4.1.1 The Contractor shall lay the underground piping in accordance with the following clauses and
as per the piping arrangement drawings issued during the course of construction. Corrosion
protection tape coating of the underground lines shall be in accordance with Standard
Specification no. 6-79-0011.
4.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for correct layout and gradient of the line. Errors, if any,
shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own cost.
4.2. Trenching
4.2.1 The trench shall be cut according to the drawing, true to the line, levelled with the help of
sight rails provided at every 30 m, at change of direction / gradient and at any suitable
distance, as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.2.2 If the trench is excavated below the required level as indicated in the drawing, the extra depth
shall be filled with concrete 1:5:10 or approved equivalent material, as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, at no extra cost to owner.
4.2.3 The trench shall be excavated so as to provide an average cover of 1000 mm or equal to the
diameter of the largest pipe to be laid in the trench, whichever is greater or as shown in
drawings. The average cover will be reckoned from top of the pipe of the largest diameter to
be laid in the trench, to the finished grade level. The width of the trench shall be sufficient to
give free working space on each side of the pipe. The free working space shall conform to
specifications. Generally it shall not be less than 150 mm on either side or 1/3 of dia of pipe,
whichever is greater.
4.2.4 No excavated material shall be deposited within 1.5 meters from the excavated trench.
4.2.5 In case of road cutting, all materials i.e. metal, bricks etc., shall be taken out carefully and kept
separately for reuse. Road work shall be redone up to the original level and profile with the
excavated road materials, after laying and testing of the pipe line, within 10 days from the date
of starting the work, at the cost of the contractor. The contractor shall provide suitable slings
and barricades to prevent accidents. He shall also provide reasonable by-pass at his own cost
when a road is cut for laying pipeline.
4.2.6 During excavation, if some obstacle is met with, the same shall be reported to the Engineer-in-
Charge and dealt with as instructed by him.
4.2.7 The contractor shall do dewatering, shoring, strutting / timbering if required or do whatever
might be required to excavate the trench, install the pipe in it and backfill the trench, in
accordance with the specifications, at no extra cost to the Owner. Dewatering shall be done in
advance of the laying of the pipe, to allow adequate inspection of padding of the bottom, if
required. Dewatering shall be continued throughout during laying of the pipe and backfilling
of the trench.
4.2.8 In muddy / slushy ground, the bed shall be provided with a layer of sand or lean concrete as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.2.9 The trench shall follow the gradient of pipeline as specified in the drawing. The contractor
shall keep the trench in good condition, until the pipe is laid and tested. No extra claim shall
be entertained due to its caving or settling down, either before or after the pipe is laid. All
Page 2748 of 3884

Riren two, ...tovvq) IA Govt ol ■ nolia Undertalung)
Page 6 of 11
materials to shore the trench, in order to prevent caving, shall be furnished and removed by the
Contractor, at no extra cost to the Owner.
4.2.10 In case pipe is lowered in caved trench and back filled before being inspected by the Engineer-
in-Charge, the Contractor shall re-excavate the trench for inspection and backfill it at his own
cost.
4.3 Lowering & Laying
4.3.1 The pipe shall be lowered by mechanical method when the trench is ready and bottom of the
trench is graded as per required pipe laying conditions and specifications.
4.3.2 By Machine
The shop coated pipe already transported to the pipe laying site in convenient length of pipe
assembly, near the trench after hydrostatic testing, shall be placed on clean square cut skids
suitably spaced, so as to keep the pipe away from touching the ground. The pipe may be
lowered down in the trench by the launcher cranes with sufficient care, to protect the coating
of the pipeline.
At tie in welds and other site fabrications, the contractor shall clean, prime, coat and wrap
manually.
Also short sections of pipelines, which are impracticable to shop-treat, may be hand treated,
but only after obtaining prior written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.3.3 By Hand
Only in unavoidable circumstances and after obtaining approval of Engineer-in-Charge, the

pipe may be lowered with the help of tripods and chain pulley blocks into the trench.
However, if in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, the temperature condition does not
allow direct lowering, then the pipes shall be set down on clean square cut skids. The skids
shall be so spaced as to keep the pipe away from touching the ground.
4.4 Method & Time of Lowering Pipe
4.4.1 Under favorable temperature conditions and using methods, which will not damage the
coating, the pipe may be lowered into the trench.
4.4.2 Pipes previously set on skids, because of unfavorable temperature conditions, shall be lowered
into the trench normally in the cool of the morning and only when the temperature of the pipes
is below the softening point of the coating materials.
4.4.3 All skid marks and other places of damage shall be thoroughly examined to ensure proper
patching where necessary, before the pipe is finally lowered into the trench.
4.5 Handling Coated Pipe
4.5.1 Coated pipe shall not be placed in trench, until cave-in plugs, hard clods, stones, skids and
welding rods etc. have been removed from there. Where the trench has a hard or jagged
bottom, sufficient fine dirt or stand shall be placed therein, before the pipe is lowered.
4.5.2 Coated pipe shall not be handled or moved by means of cable or chains or by prying with
skids or bars. It shall be tied and lowered by using belts of a standard width and design, for the
size of pipe being handled.
Page 2749 of 3884

STANDARD S PECIFICATION
q_iENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No .
51&41 acs' l INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING
IA Govt India Ondenakingi 6-65-0030 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 11
4.5.3 Coated pipe shall not be dragged along the ground or otherwise handled in a manner that will
be detrimental to the coating.
4.5.4 Despite all precautions taken during handling of coated pipes, if the coating gets damaged,
same shall be recoated by Contractor at site, at his own cost, as per directions of Engineer-in-
Charge.
4.6 Lining up & Welding
4.6.1 The ends of the pipeline shall be kept securely closed, to prevent entry of any foreign material/
moisture, after lowering into the trench.
4.6.2 Before making joints the pipe shall be laid carefully, so as to be perfectly aligned, in both plan
and profile and the end closures provided shall be removed.
4.6.3 Tie-in shall be made in the coolness of the morning or when the ambient temperature is not
exceeding 29°C or softening temperature of the coating material, whichever is less. All
bevelling, aligning and welding shall be in accordance with the welding specification given in
the tender.
4.6.4 Free access shall be provided for the welding of the circumferential joints by increasing the
width and depth of the trench at these points. There should be no obstruction to the welder
from any side, so that good welded joint is obtained.
4.7 Testing & Coating
The completed system shall then be tested as per clause 6.0 and the field welded joints coated
as per specification 6-79-0011.
4.8 Back Filling
4.8.1 After testing and inspection of the pipeline to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge,
the trench shall be back filled with the excavated material. No trench shall be back filled
without the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.8.2 Backfilling with the excavated material shall be done in layers of 200 mm, well watered and
rammed to avoid any settling afterwards.
4.8.3 The Contractor shall place soil over the trench to such a height as well as in opinion of the
Engineer-in-Charge, to provide adequately for future settlement of the trench backfill.
If due to exigencies of the work, some portion of the pipeline is backfilled without approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to order uncovering of the
pipe for examination and the cost of such uncovering shall be borne by the Contractor.
4.8.4 The backfill material shall be free from stone pieces.
4.8.5 When the trench has been dug through roads, all backfill shall be thoroughly compacted. In
certain cases, special compaction methods may be required by the Engineer-in-Charge. This
shall be done by the contractor at no extra cost to the Owner.
4.8.6 When the trench has been dug through unlined ditches, the backfill shall be thoroughly
compacted in 150 mm layers for a distance of 1.5m beyond the outside banks of the ditch on
either side. The banks of the ditch shall also be compacted in 150mm layers, at no extra cost to
the Owner.
Page 2750 of 3884

fdai
eg INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING 6-65-0030 Rev. 5
t.r1rt' eliera2451.34e.rt (A Govt d India Undertaking)
Page 8 of 11
4.8.7 After the roads have been already graded, and if they are trenched or otherwise disturbed by
the Contractor during laying of the pipe lines, the contractor shall restore the road to its
original level and condition. In the event the Contractor is required to place extra fill, gravel,
or other special materials, it shall be done by him without any extra cost to the Owner.
4.9 Clean up of Surroundings
4.9.1 As soon as the backfill is completed, the contractor shall immediately clean up the adjoining
area by removing all surplus and defective material and dispose off all refuge such as spurs,
sheet-iron and broken skids and surplus excavated earth etc., at his own cost, to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.9.2 The earth on both sides of the pipeline trench, which has been disturbed during the
construction of the pipe line, shall be smoothened and left in a condition to the entire
satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0 INSPECTION
5.1 General
5.1.1 Owner's inspector shall have free access to all places where the work is being done or any
other thing and place concerned with the work.
5.1.2 Owner is entitled to send his own inspector to field or shops, where prefabrication and
erection of pipe lines are being done, with the following functions but not limited to:
i) To check that the welding performance and welding equipment used on the job are
suitable and conform to relevant standards.
ii) To supervise welding procedure qualification.
iii) To supervise welder performance qualification.
iv) To check whether welding is conforming to relevant specification and the practice
followed is in accordance with good pipeline construction practice.
v) To check any other performance to ensure quality of work.
5.1.3 Contractor shall notify sufficiently in advance the commencement of qualification tests,
welding work and acceptance tests, to enable the Owner's Inspector to supervise the same.
5.1.4 Contractor shall provide all the facilities to Owner's Inspector, necessary for carrying out his
work, at no extra cost to the Owner.
5.1.5 Approval from the Owner's Inspector shall not relieve the contractor partially or fully of his
responsibilities and guarantees under this contract.
6.0 TESTING
6.1 General
6.1.1 The field test pressure shall not be less than the greatest of the following:
a) 1.5 times the maximum sustained operating pressure.
b) 1.5 times the maximum pipeline static pressure, and

Page 2751 of 3884

INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING
6-65-0030 Rev. 5
elierw?dojaCI.,1) IA Gavt of India lindeltalung)
Page 9 of 11
c) Sum of the maximum sustained operating pressure or the maximum pipeline static
pressure and the maximum calculated surge pressure.
The field test pressure shall, wherever possible be not less than two thirds of the work
test pressure, and shall be applied and maintained for at least four hours.
Where the field test pressure is less than two-thirds the works test pressure, the period of
test shall be increased to at least 24 hours. The test pressure shall be gradually raised at
the rate of nearly 1.0 kg/cm 2/minute.
6.1.2 The testing shall be carried out in convenient section as approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
The joints of the pipe, connecting the testing sections, shall be 100% radiographed.
If some defect is noticed during the hydrostatic testing, the same shall be brought to the notice
of Engineer-in-Charge. Joints, if leaking, shall be rectified as per the welding specifications and
instructions of Engineer-in-Charge and tested to his satisfaction, at no extra cost to the Owner.
6.1.3 The Engineer-in-Charge shall be notified in advance by contractor of all testing. The
hydrostatic testing / flushing of all the piping shall be carried out by the Contractor, at his own
cost.
6.1.4 Contractor shall make his own arrangements for flushing, at suitable points, as per the
instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge. Any extra work / modification on this account shall be
done by the Contractor at his own cost.
6.2 Test Medium
Construction water shall generally be used as the testing medium, for the hydrostatic testing of
piping system.
6.3 Cleaning
All systems shall be cleaned and flushed free of all dirt, debris or loose foreign material, after
testing.
6.4 Temporary Blinds
Open ends of piping systems, such as at pumps or wherever equipment has been removed or
disconnected prior to hydrostatic testing, or at termination point of piping branch connections,
shall be blinded off by temporary blind flange, made out of 10 mm thick CS plate.
6.5 Venting
All piping systems and equipment shall be properly vented, to remove air from system, during
filling.
6.6 Pressurizing
6.6.1 Pressure shall be applied by means of a suitable test pump, which shall not be connected to the
system until ready to test. A pressure gauge shall be provided at the pump discharge for
guidance in bringing the system to required pressure. The pump shall be attended to constantly
during the test, by an authorised operator. The pump shall be disconnected, after the pressure
test is completed.
Page 2752 of 3884

5d17=4Z:Eq ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
tiOlft
rwore al4,1011M)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India UndertakIng)
FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING
6-65-0030 Rev. 5
Page 10 of 11
6.6.2 The test pressure is to be maintained for sufficient time, to permit complete inspection of the
system under test, but in no case shall the time be less than ten minutes. Test shall be
considered complete only when approval is given by the Engineer-in-Charge.
6.7 Test Gauges
Contractor's own test gauge shall be installed as close as possible to the lowest point in the
system being tested. Prior to installation, the test gauge shall be checked against a standard
gauge or calibrated with the aid of a dead weight tester. Calibration of test gauges shall be the
responsibility of the contractor.
6.8 Draining
6.8.1 All lines and equipments shall be completely drained after the hydrostatic test of the system
has been completed. High point vents shall be open to prevent excessive vacuum and permit
complete draining.
6.8.2 If it becomes necessary to leave a system filled with the testing medium for any abnormal
length of time, suitable arrangement such as venting shall be made to provide for possible
liquid expansion with change in ambient temperatures.
7.0 RECORDS
Records in triplicate shall be made for each piping system as follows:
7.1 In case of underground piping, layouts giving actual elevations of pipeline as laid.
7.2 Test certificates containing date of test, identification of the piping system, test fluid used, test
pressure and approval of Owner's Inspector.
7.3 Certificates for flushing containing flushing medium used, identification of the piping system,
date of flushing & approval by Owner's Inspector.
8.0 PAYMENT
8.1 Payment for piping shall be based on linear measurements, calculated on the basis of the
execution drawings. The length shall be measured along the center lines of pipes, center lines
of bends and elbows, tees, reducers and flanged joints. All types of valves shall be excluded
from this measurement. Branch connections shall be measured from the outer surface of the
header.
The payment shall be made on per metre basis of piping work laid, measured to the nearest
centimeter. The unit rates for the underground piping shall be inclusive of earthwork in
excavation, backfilling, compaction, disposal of surplus earth and coating and wrapping
including supply of materials.
All piping attachments, such as couplings, nipples, thermowells etc., shall be installed by the
Contractor as part of piping work and no separate payment shall be made for such work.
However, extension on such attachments such as vents and drains will be measured and paid as
applicable for the respective size and category of piping / valves.
Fabrication of mitre bends, concentric and eccentric reducers fabricated from pipes supplied by
owner & fabrication of flanges from plates supplied by owner, will be paid at respective unit
rates. However, erection of these items will be along with piping of the respective size and no
separate payment will be made for erection.
The reducers will be measured and paid along with the piping of large diameter.
Page 2753 of 3884

Ogell 015Eleg
Imo,
INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING 6-65-0030 Rev. 5
(AGO of India Undettalungl
Page 11 of 11
No separate payment will be made for making pipe to pipe branch connection and crosses, with
or without reinforcing pads. The unit rates for piping are deemed to include all such work.
Fabrication, installation and removal of temporary spool pieces etc. to aid contractor's work
such as fabrication, erection, flushing and testing etc. will neither be measured nor paid
separately. The same is deemed to be included in the unit rates for piping. Payment for carrying
out radiographic examination shall be based on linear length of the welded joint radiographed.
Repeat radiography / additional radiography required due to contractor's faults / poor
performance of his welders and defective films etc., shall be done at contractor's own cost.
8.2 The payment clause(s) as described in the clause no. 8.1 shall not be referred / applicable for
LSTK Jobs
Page 2754 of 3884

ENGINEERS MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL &
1812--gw'INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0035 Rev. 3
IA Govt of India Undertalongt
STRUCTURAL WORKS FOR U/G
PIPING & OTHER CIVIL WORKS Page 1 of 7
r* , icsfR r
14-PETW
fqr-4e6T fur wpf,
fur chNT
f-4r-4-4rr
FOR
MISC. CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
FOR
U/G PIPING & OTHER CIVIL WORKS
3 25.06.14 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. '" 6s VM SC
2 16.04.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. GS RKS NK ND
1 30.10.97 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. SKC PCS MMK A SONI
0 31.3.82 ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RB RSG

Standards Standards
Comm ittee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 2755 of 3884

g1-11 22eg INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0035 Rev. 2
lv■Ien ~TsPOWI3OfOvI) GOvt of India Undellakino) STRUCTURAL WORKS FOR U/G
Abbreviations:
C. I. Cast Iron
ERC : Electrical Road Crossings
IRC : Instrumentation Road Crossings
IS Indian Standards
LSTK : Lump Sum Turn Key
M. S. : Mild Steel
PVC : Poly Vinyl Chloride
SCRC : Street Communication Road Crossing
U/G : Under Ground

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Page 2756 of 3884

02-e- g INDIA LIMITED
(M177 292e1Ream.3~) IA Govt o1 India Undellaking) STRUCTURAL WORKS FOR U/G
6-65-0035 Rev. 2
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 EARTHWORK & BACKFILLING 5
5.0 BRICK WORK 5
6.0 CEMENT PLASTERING 5
7.0 RUNGS 5
8.0 CHEQUERED PLATES & STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS 5
9.0 C.I. MANHOLE FRAME AND COVER 6
10.0 VENT PIPES FOR MANHOLES 6
11.0 FUNNELS, CLEAN OUTS, PLUGS 6
12.0 BRICK BAT FILL 6
13.0 PAYMENT 6
Page 2757 of 3884

x'_7-112-1t4 xj, ENGINEERS MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL &
g_ji fffilegWINDIA LIMITED 6-65-0035 Rev. 2
m3aas.)
1.11E,, 21~, IA Govt of India Undedak.g) STRUCTURAL WORKS FOR U/G
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the material and construction details for various civil works as
given below:
(a) A11 Earthwork except for Site Grading and U/G Piping.
(b) Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete work in Culverts, ERC/IRC/SCRC, Pipe-
way Bridges, Catch pits, Clean outs, Manholes, Pipe supports, Water
monitors/Hydrant pedestals, Thrust block, valve pits etc.
(c) Brick work for various structures such as Drains, Septic Tank, Soak Pit, Manholes,
Catch basins, Valve chambers, Instrument tapping chambers, Flushing chambers,
etc.
(d) Plastering for the above structures as applicable.
(e) Manhole frames, Manhole covers, Ladders, Rungs etc. for the above structures as
applicable.
(t) Miscellaneous steel structure work such as Ladders, Platforms, Chequered plate
covers, Gratings etc.
The work shall include supply of various materials as per relevant standards required for the
execution of work except for those items designated as Owner' s scope of supply in the
special conditions of contract or elsewhere in the contract documents. Contractor shall
transport material from Owner' s stores, which are a part of owner's scope of supply.
A11 materials not fully specified herein and which may be used for the completion of WORK
shall be of quality, as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Engineer-in-charge shall have the
right to determine whether all or any of the materials offered or delivered for the execution
of WORK are suitable for the purpose. CONTRACTOR shall give the samples of material
to the Engineer-in-Charge and get it approved before procurement and use.
IS: 458 Pre cast concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement)
IS: 4985 Unplasticized PVC Pipes for Potable Water Supplies
IS: 1239 Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings
IS: 1726 Cast Iron Manhole covers and frames
IS: 1786 High strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement
IS: 2062 Steel for general structural purposes
IS: 3502 Steel chequered plates
IS: 5455 Specification for Cast Iron steps and manholes.
Page 2758 of 3884

gRzit4,, ENGINEERS MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL &
2."111=1P' INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0035 Rev. 2
~IRE' M"7.1) IA Govt of Inoie undertaking) STRUCTURAL WORKS FOR U/G
3.0 EARTHWORK & BACKFILLING
Refer EIL Standard Specification No. 6-68-0003.
Refer EIL Standard Specification No.6-68-0004.
5.0 BRICK WORK
Refer EIL Standard Specification No. 6-68-0009.
6.0 CEMENT PLASTERING
6.1 Materials
The specifications for cement, sand and water shall be as given in EIL Standard Specification
No. 6-68-0002.
6.2 Cement mortar shall be of grade and thickness as specified in drawing or as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, if not specified. The surface on which plastering is to be done shall be
thoroughly cleaned from dust, dirt, oil, etc. It should be washed properly and watered for 4
hours before plastering. The joints of brickwork shall be raked out to a depth of at least 12mm
when plastering has to be done. On cement concrete surface, the surface shall be scarified by
lines with trowel when it is still green or hacked, if concrete is hard as directed by Engineer-
in-Charge.
6.3 Plaster shall not in any case, be thinner than specified. It shall have uniform specified
thickness. Any extra thickness of plaster done by contractor will not be paid for. When smooth
finishing is required, the cement plaster shall be floated over with neat cement within 15
minutes of the application of the final coat.
During the process of plastering, all corners shall be rounded to a radius of 25mm unless
otherwise specified.
6.4 The plaster shall be protected from Sun and rain by such means as per the approval of
Engineer-in-Charge. The plaster shall be cured for 7 days.
6.5 Construction joint shall be kept in plastering work at places approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
7.0 RUNGS
7.1 Materials
The rungs for valve pits / manholes shall be of Tor Steel conforming to IS: 1786 and to the
shape and size as shown in drawings. Rungs shall be coated with 2 coats of approved
bituminous paint.
8.0 CHEQUERED PLATES & STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
8.1 Materials
8.1.1 Chequered plates shall be 6mm thick (7mm or more chequered plates shall conform to IS:
3502). Steel for chequered plate shall conform to IS: 2062 and shall be clearly rolled and free
from harmful surface defects such as crack, surface flaws etc. The plate shall be cut to shape
and fixed to the bearing members as shown in relevant drawings and as directed by Engineer-
Page 2759 of 3884

!&.1t4
k3i
r-- ENGINEERS MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL &
$1g-ar 2154egW INDIA LIMITED
1.11VR 2~17013~) (A Govt of Indo Undertalmg) STRUCTURAL WORKS FOR U/G
6-65-0035 Rev. 2
in-Charge. The edges shall be made smooth, no burrs or gagged ends shall be left. The plates
may be spliced with prior consent of the Engineer-in-Charge. But in that case, care should be
taken so that there is continuity in the pattern of the plates between the portions. Lifting
arrangements shall be provided including lifting rods.
8.1.2 Grating shall be fabricated out of M.S flats, angles and rounds etc., as per drawings and as
approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Steel for grating plates shall conform to IS: 2062 of general
weldable quality and shall be clearly rolled and shall be free from harmful surface defects.
9.0 C.I. MANHOLE FRAME AND COVER
9.1 Materials
C I manhole frame and covers shall conform to IS: 1726 with size and grade as shown in
drawings.
10.0 VENT PIPES FOR MANHOLES
10.1 Materials
These shall be black steel tube conforming to IS: 1239 medium grade or as specified in
drawings/ Piping Material Specification. The pipe bends shall be embedded in 1:3:6 grade
cement concrete or as shown in drawing.
10.2 A11 pipes shall be 25mm clear of wall or column with steel holder bat clamp, as per
instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge. All holes in walls and column shall be made good by
1:2:4 grade cement concrete. All pipes and clamps shall be painted with two coats of paints of
approved make.
11.0 FUNNELS, CLEAN OUTS, PLUGS
11.1 Materials
These shall be fabricated from M.S Plates, pipes, chequered plates, rounds, angles etc., to be
supplied by the contractor and painted with 2 coats of anticorrosive paint of approved make.
The fabrication shall be in accordance with the approved drawings.
12.0 BRICK BAT FILL
12.1 Materials
The brickbats used as filling in valve pits shall be from common burnt clay building bricks
of size ranging from 27mm to 37mm. Sample of brickbats used shall be got approved from
Engineer-in-charge.
12.2 The compaction of the layer of brickbat shall be proper so that brickbat are not disturbed
and do not sink in the soil.
13.0 PAYMENT
13.1 Cement Plastering
13.1.1 Payment for plastering shall be made on basis of the area of surface plastered, measured
before plastering. A11 measurements shall be separately made for each face of walls.
Page 2760 of 3884

Ogzrr ffieg
1.1T27I C,12,1W 01~1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India undertax.ng) STRUCTURAL WORKS FOR U/G
6-65-0035 Rev. 2
13.1.2 The rate of plastering shall include cost of scaffolding, swings, cleaning the surface, raking
out joints, hacking concrete surfaces, etc. needed for carrying the work and shall cover the
extra labour for plastering the jambs, sills, and soffits or opening except for plastering bands,
cornices and skirting upto 30 cm width.
13.2 Rungs
Payment for rungs shall be made per number and the rate shall include supply and fixing,
finishing the wall etc. complete.
13.3 Chequered Plates & Structural Steel Works
Payment shall be made on the basis of weight of MS gratings / chequered plate and supporting
frame including hold fast. The rate shall include supply of all necessary steel materials
including cutting to size, fabricating, smoothening edge, if necessary, transporting and fixing
at all positions and providing lifting arrangements. Full deductions shall be made for all
openings above 30mm square and the rate shall include making of opening of all sizes and
supplying and painting 2 coats of anticorrosive paint over a coat of red oxide zinc chromate
primer. The exposed surface of grating and frame shall be painted with two thick coats of coal
tar. The rate shall include providing and laying MS grating and frame, breaking and making
good existing concrete/ brick masonry surface if necessary, finishing, painting etc. complete
with all labour and materials. Payment shall be made on number basis.
13.4 CI Manhole Frame and Cover
Payment for Manhole Frame and cover shall be made per number and rate shall include
supply and fixing etc. complete.
13.5 Vent Pipes for Manholes
Payment shall be made on running meter basis and the rate shall include supply of all
materials, cutting, edge preparation, jointing by welding, fixing in concrete block, cutting of
walls or concrete and making good the same, painting with 2 coats of anticorrosive paint of
approved make, necessary scaffolding etc. complete.
The rate shall also include excavation and backfilling if any.
13.6 Funnels, Clean Outs, Plugs
Payment for these items shall be made on weight basis and rate shall include fabrication,
erection, welding, jointing and painting etc. all complete.
13.7 Brick Bat Fill
The payment for brickbats fill shall be made on m2 basis, as shown in drawing and the rate
shall include supply, laying, compacting etc. complete, with all materials & labour.
13.8 The payment clause(s) as described in the clause no. 13.1, 13.2, 13.3, 13.4, 13.5, 13.6 & 13.7
shall not be referred / applicable for LSTK Jobs.
Page 2761 of 3884

,_ittaeit,§ ft
ri ENGINEERS FOR UNDERGROUND C.I. 6-65-0036 Rev. 4
Oges Otiftw- WA LIMITED
1.117N eieerir7M,1.11 IA Govt of Influl Untlettatott91 PIPING SYSTEM Page 1 of 8
aut.
Igiqw
FOR
UNDERGROUND C. I. PIPING
SYSTEM
RA ANJI R °
4 06.07.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. LP
SRIVASTAVA TRIVEDI
3 24.05.13 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RBT RKS RBB DM
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 2762 of 3884

_i ENGINEERS
51?e-n kitaleg
iman
INDIA UNITED FOR UNDERGROUND C.I. PIPING 6-65-0036 Rev. 4
iiewen”../AcII.I) IA GovI of Intha undertabongi
SYSTEM Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
C.I. Cast Iron
cm3 Cubic Centimeters
IS Indian Standard
Kgs Kilograms
Kg/cm2 Kilogram / Square Centimeters
mm Millimeter
M.S. Mild Steel

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2763 of 3884

afae...1t4 ENGINEERS
51?en i('Wg INDIA LIMITED FOR UNDERGROUND C.I. PIPING 6-65-0036 Rev. 4
(men z.w.rz '0 Govt of India Undertaking)
SYSTEM Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIALS 4
4.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND TRANSPORTATION 5
5.0 LOWERING, LAYING AND JOINTING 5
6.0 TESTING OF CAST IRON PIPELINES 7
7.0 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACE AND CLEANING THE SITE 7
8.0 PAYMENT 7
Page 2764 of 3884

ata_itii,ft ENGINEERS
tafiteg W INDIA LIMITED FOR UNDERGROUND C.I. PIPING 6-65-0036 Rev. 4
1411771' ele4617.,FIR.1) IA Govt of inda Um/Watling)
SYSTEM Page 4 of 8
1.0 SCOPE
This Specification covers all works involved in providing underground C.I. piping system as
per drawings and specifications. Rates quoted shall include transportation of materials from
Owner's stores to the site, in cases where the owner issues materials. All other items of work,
such as cutting, laying, jointing and testing etc., are included in the quoted rates. The work
shall also include erection of all valves and in line instruments etc., which forms part of the
system.
IS: 638 Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing.
IS: 782 Caulking lead.
IS: 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners.
IS: 1536 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS: 1537 Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for watering, gas and sewage.
IS: 1538 Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS: 3114 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes.
IS:14846 Sluice Valve for Water Works Purposes (50 to 1200 mm Size)
6-65-0006 Standard Specification for Earth Work for Under Ground Piping System.
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 Cast Iron Socket and Spigot Pipes
All centrifugally cast (spun) iron pipes shall conform to IS: 1536 class A. The pipes shall have
standard weight as specified in Indian Standard. No payment shall be made for extra weight
of the pipes, if any. The socket of pipe shall be of modified design, such that socket & spigot
shall be jointed with tyton or other similar coupling.
3.2 Cast Iron Double Flanged Pipes
All cast iron flanged pipes shall conform to IS: 1537 Class A. The pipes shall have standard
weight as specified in Indian standard. No payment shall be made for extra weight of the
pipes, if any.
All C.I. fittings shall conform to IS: 1538, medium duty.
Rubber gasket for flanged joints shall be 3mm thick, conforming to IS: 638, Type-B, Grade 2.
M.S. hexagonal bolts and nuts shall conform to IS: 1367.

All flanges shall conform to IS: 1537.
Page 2765 of 3884

laiMZE4 ENGINEERS
51g ell tReg INDIA LIMITED FOR UNDERGROUND C.I. PIPING 6-65-0036 Rev. 4
I NI7R ei72512 tIN J',107A IA Govt o In Undertak.o9)
SYSTEM Page 5 of 8
3.3 Cast Iron Sluice Valves
Cast Iron Sluice Valves are double flanged, non-rising spindle type, conforming to IS: 14846
for 50 to 1200mm dia.
Rubber gasket for flanged joints shall be 3mm thick, conforming to IS: 638. M.S. hexagonal
bolts and nuts shall conform to IS: 1367.
4.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND TRANSPORTATION
4.1 All earthwork involved in laying of cast iron pipes shall be deemed to have been included in
the quoted rates for laying of C.I. pipes.
4.2 All earth work shall be carried out as per EIL Standard specification No. 6-65-06 "Earthwork
for underground piping".
4.3 The bed of trench, if in soft or made up earth, shall be well watered and rammed before laying
the pipes and the depressions, if any, shall be properly filled with earth and consolidated in 20
cm layers.
4.4 If the trench bottom is extremely hard or rocky or loose stony soil, the trench shall be
excavated at least 150 mm below the trench grade. Rocks, stone or other hard substances from
the bottom of the trench shall be removed and the trench brought back to the required grade,
by filling with selected fine earth or sand (fine murrum, if fine sand or soil is not available)
and compacted, so as to provide a smooth bedding for the pipe.
Where excavation requires blasting operations, it shall be ensured that no pipes are stacked in
the vicinity and complete pipelines in the vicinity have already been covered before starting of
blasting operation.
4.5 The trench shall be kept free from water. Shoring and strutting / timbering shall be done,
wherever required. Excavation below water table shall be kept dry by dewatering the trenches,
if required.
4.6 After excavation of the trench is completed, hollows shall be cut at the required position to
receive the socket of the pipes and these hollows shall be of sufficient depth to ensure that the
barrels of the pipes shall rest throughout their entire length on the solid ground and that
sufficient spaces left for jointing the underside of the pipe joint. These hollows shall be
refilled with sand after jointing the pipe.
5.0 LOWERING, LAYING AND JOINTING
5.1 General
The trench shall be checked for proper level, gradient and alignment before lowering the
pipes. The contractor shall get the trench approved from Engineer-in Charge, before lowering
the pipes.
In case of flanged pipes, it shall be checked that holes of two joining flanges are concentric.
Before laying, each pipe shall be inspected carefully. Broken or cracked pipes shall be
rejected. The inside of the pipes shall be cleaned of all foreign materials.
Page 2766 of 3884

ENGINEERS
ial5ft INDIA LIMITED FOR UNDERGROUND C.I. PIPING 6-65-0036 Rev. 4
own ewgrAz IA Govt India Undertaiong)
SYSTEM Page 6 of 8
5.2 Lowering
The C.I. pipes shall be lowered cautiously to prevent disturbance to the bed and sides of the
trench. The heavy pipes shall be lowered by means of proper shear legs, chain pulley blocks or
as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.3 Laying
Laying of pipes shall proceed up grade of slope. In case of socket and spigot pipes, the pipes
shall be laid with socket ends facing up stream. The spigot shall be pushed well home to the
full depth of the socket. The collars shall be slipped on before the next pipe is laid. Pipes shall
be carefully laid over the alignment, levels and gradient as shown in the drawings. The levels
shall be checked with the help of sight rails and bonding rods and with the help of levelling
instruments, as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
No sand, earth or other matter shall enter the pipes during laying. The error of grade shall not
be rectified by packing up earth underneath the pipe. If required, concrete M-10 shall be used
for packing, at contractor's own cost.
The ends of the pipe shall be kept closed to keep dirt, mud and foreign materials out.
Adequate provision shall be made to prevent floating of pipe in the event of flooding of
trenches.
Contractor shall provide thrust blocks of concrete M-15 at all changes in direction or as shown
in drawings.
5.4 Jointing
5.4.1 C.I. Socket and Spigot Pipes (Socket & Spigot Joints)
The socket and spigot shall be jointed with tyton or other similar make instantaneous jointing
couplings. These couplings shall be used only on the manufacturer recommended brand of
pipes.
5.4.2 Double Flanged C.I. Pipes (Flanged Joints)
Flanged joints shall be made by painting the facing of the flanges with red lead and bolting up
evenly on all sides with packing of rubber insertion in between the two flanges. The packing
shall be of full diameter with proper holes to suit the flange's bolt holes.
5.4.3 Jointing Using Lead
Best blue pig lead, conforming to IS: 782 shall be used for joints.
The spigot shall be carefully centered in the socket and sufficient spun yarn shall be
thoroughly caulked to leave a specified depth for lead caulking. The minimum depth of joint
lead caulking shall be as per IS: 3114.
The depth left for joint shall be checked before running the lead, by passing a notched wooden
gauge around the pipe, the notch being held close up against the face of the socket. After
checking the alignment and levels of pipe, the space left for caulking in the socket shall be
filled in by pouring molten lead as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge. The lead shall be
rendered thoroughly fluid and each joint shall be caulked in three stages, with proper caulking
tools of increasing thickness and a hammer of 2 kgs. weight, in such a manner as to make the
joint sound and water tight.
Page 2767 of 3884

15IIPTIe ENGINEERS
$ e.11 idWg INDIA LIMITED FOR UNDERGROUND C.I. PIPING 6-65-0036 Rev. 4
elm:re...J.317M)
lawn IA Govt of Intim Undertaking)
SYSTEM Page 7 of 8
The junctions of the pipeline with the manhole / valve pit / catch basin walls shall be grouted
with 1:2 cement mortar, to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
6.0 TESTING OF CAST IRON PIPELINES
6.1 General
6.1.1 Contractor shall carry out testing of all cast iron pipe lines laid by him as a part of the quoted
rates.
6.1.2 Test manifolds, connection piping and all other necessary appurtenances for testing shall be
provided and installed by the contractor, at his own cost, at the time of test. Pumps, if
required, for filling the pipe line with water for the test shall also be provided and installed by
the contractor, at his own cost.
6.2 Testing
6.2.1 Pressure Pipelines
C.I. double flanged and socket & spigot pressure pipelines shall be tested in suitable sections
before back filling. After all lines are tested in sections, a final test shall be performed before
commissioning the system. Test pressure shall be as indicated in drawings or specifications.
6.2.2 Gravity Pipelines
Gravity Cast Iron pipes shall be tested in sections, to a pressure of 1 kg/cm 2.
6.2.2.1 Procedure
End of the pipes shall be suitably blanked and the line pressurised to 1 kg/cm 2 . After 1 hr.
repressurizing upto 1 kg/cm 2 shall be done using measured quantity of water, which shall be
less than or equal to ND/3.3 cm 3, where N is the number of joints in the pipeline and D is the
diameter of the pipeline in mm.
6.2.3 Failure of Test
In case of failure of test, contractor shall identify the reason for leakage and take action for
redoing of joints, at his own cost.
The contractor shall remove the water from the pipeline and clean it after testing, at his own
cost, without flooding the adjoining areas.
7.0 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACE AND CLEANING THE SITE
7.1 All pavements, structures, pipelines, cables, etc. removed, damaged or disturbed during the
pipe laying work shall be restored to original condition.
7.2 Surplus excavated soil or rubbish material shall be removed to a place, as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
8.0 PAYMENT
8.1 Measurement of pipeline work for the purpose of payment shall be taken in running meters of
the laid pipe measured along the centerline, inclusive of spigot and socket etc. No extra
payment shall be made for providing and laying of fittings like bends, tees, etc. (except
valves) that may be necessary for completion of work. The rate quoted shall be inclusive of
excavation, lowering, laying, jointing, connecting the pipe to Inspection Chambers etc. and
Page 2768 of 3884

ORTEqt1-± ENGINEERS
Oge.11 taiReSW INDIA LIMITED FOR UNDERGROUND C.I. PIPING 6-65-0036 Rev. 4
1.1127T 2.120R7...1,10.9 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SYSTEM Page 8 of 8
grouting to chamber walls, testing, cleaning of pipelines, backfilling and any other operation
involved in the pipeline work.
8.2 The above payment clause 8.1 is not applicable in case of LSTK Jobs.
Page 2769 of 3884

ENGINEERS FORUNDERGROUND No.
sige.11 faiRft
man e.a.re cowtoovot
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India UnOeftalons)
SEWER SYSTEM 6-65-0042 Rev. 4
PRE CAST RCC PIPES Page 1 of 7
PrITU Trff- Pigiti TRtTrff

11 0:rArriaa ireamaa tilAwd cr4ld 4N 41
fe4RT
FOR
UNDERGROUND SEWER SYSTEM
PRE CAST RCC PIPES
4 06.07.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. LP VG

SRIVASTAVA TRIVEDI
3 06.07.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. JKU RC RBB DM
Standards Standards
Date Prepared Checked
Purpose Convenor Chairman
No by by
Approved by
Page 2770 of 3884

el ENGINEERS FORUNDERGROUND No.
lelf&-g INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0042 Rev. 4
laiWneizzureemywrm) (A Govi of hOia Undertaking) SEWER SYSTEM
Abbreviations:
IS Indian Standard
Litres/km/hr/cm Liters/ Kilometer/ Hours/ Centimeter

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Mr. Charanjeet Singh(Projects)
Page 2771 of 3884

inzniR.M77..7111.1) IA Govt of India Undertaking) SEWER SYSTEM
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIALS 4
4.0 EARTHWORK 4
5.0 LOWERING & LAYING 5
6.0 JOINTING 5
7.0 TESTING 6
8.0 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACES AND CLEARING THE SITE 7
9.0 PAYMENT 7
Page 2772 of 3884

1.117M OR2517 Jail.,1 IA Govt of India Unclenalong) SEWER SYSTEM
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the supply, laying, cutting, jointing and testing of Precast RCC
pipes and related works.
IS: 458 Pre Cast Concrete Pipes (with and without reinforcement)
IS: 783 Code of practice for laying of Concrete Pipes
6-65-0006 Standard Specification for Earth Work for Under Ground Piping
System.
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 The pipes shall be centrifugal cast concrete pipes, socket and spigot type, with
reinforcement conforming to IS: 458. The class of pipes shall be as specified on drawings.
The pipes shall be accepted on the basis of Test Certificates from Manufacturers.
Additional testing shall be done, if directed by Engineer-in Charge.
3.2 The surfaces and edges of the pipes shall be well defined and their ends shall be
perpendicular to longitudinal axis
4.0 EARTHWORK
4.1 All earthwork involved in laying of RCC pipes and related works is deemed to have been
included in the quoted rates for the laying of RCC pipes.
4.2 All earthwork shall be carried out as per specification No.6-65-0006 "Earthwork for
underground piping system".
4.3 The bed of trench, if in soft or made up earth, shall be well watered and rammed before
laying the pipes and the depressions, if any, shall be properly filled with earth and
consolidated in 20 cm layers.
4.4 If the trench bottom is extremely hard or rocky or loose stony soil, the trench shall be
excavated at least 150 mm below the trench grade. Rocks, stone or other hard substances
from the bottom of the trench shall be removed and the trench brought back to the
required grade, by filling with selected fine earth or sand (fine murrum, if fine sand or soil
is not available) and compacted, so as to provide smooth bedding for the pipe.
Where excavation requires blasting operations, it shall be ensured that no pipes are
stacked in the vicinity and complete pipelines in the vicinity have already been covered
before starting of blasting operation.
4.5 The trench shall be kept free from water. Shoring and strutting / timbering shall be done,
wherever required. Excavation below water table shall be kept dry by dewatering the
trenches, if required.
4.6 After excavation of the trench is completed, hollows shall be cut at the required position
to receive the socket of the pipes and these hollows shall be of sufficient depth to ensure
that the barrels of the pipes shall rest throughout their entire length on the solid ground
and that sufficient spaces left for jointing the underside of the pipe joint. These hollows
shall be refilled with sand after jointing the pipe.
Page 2773 of 3884

afRelei ENGINEERS FORUNDERGROUND No.
0?en idOreg
ow- a zwew.,...m)
INDIA IJMITED
IA Gov( of India Undertaking) SEWER SYSTEM 6-65-0042 Rev. 4
5.0 LOWERING & LAYING
5.1 The pipes shall be lowered when the trench is ready and the bottom has been properly
graded as per drawings.
5.2 Before lowering, the pipes shall be inspected carefully. Broken or cracked pipe shall be
rejected. The inside of the pipe shall be cleaned off from sand, earth or any other matter.
5.3 The pipe shall be lowered carefully so as not to disturb the bed and sides of the trench.
Heavy pipes shall be lowered with chain pulley blocks or crane.
5.4 Pipes shall be set according to line and grade. Prior to making joints, all surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and prepared as required, for the type of joint to be made. Pipe shall be
carefully centered so that the complete sewer will have a smooth uniform invert.
5.5 In socket & spigot pipes, the socket end shall face the upstream direction.
5.6 Railway authorities or other appropriate authorities shall be consulted wherever the
pipeline crosses a railway line, canal, etc.
5.7 Connection to existing sewer shall be done through a manhole.
5.8 The ends of the pipeline shall be kept sealed to prevent entry of any foreign materials. The
seals shall be broken before / after the testing is done.
5.9 Wherever the joining material is cement, six or more lengths of pipe shall be laid in
advance of each joint before it is finished.
5.10 In cases, where the natural foundation is inadequate, the pipes shall be laid either in
concrete cradle supported on proper foundations or any other suitably designed structure.
If concrete cradle bedding is used, the depth of concrete below the bottom of pipe shall be
at least 1/4th of the internal dia of the pipe subject to the min. of 100 mm and a maximum
of 300mm, the concrete shall extend by 150 mm on each side beyond the outside diameter
of pipes. The pipes shall be laid in this concrete bedding before the concrete has set.
Pipes laid in trenches in earth shall be bedded evenly and firmly and as far as possible, up
the haunches of the pipes, so as to safely transmit the load expected from the backfill
through the pipe to the bed. This shall be done either by excavating the bottom of the
trench to fit the curve of the pipe or by compacting the earth under and around the curve
of the pipe from an even bed. Necessary provision shall be made for joints, wherever
required.
6.0 JOINTING
6.1 Joint in the pipeline shall be of socket and spigot type and conforming to relevant Indian
standards.
6.2 As per IS: 458, joints in pressure pipes shall be flexible rubber ring joints only. Contractor
shall provide pipes of socket and spigot type, meeting the above requirements.
6.3 As per clause No. 6.3 of IS: 458 — 2003, joints in pipes of Dia up to 700 mm, shall be
external flush type joint and shall be internal flush type for pipes of Dia more than 700
mm.
Page 2774 of 3884

51gell faReg WA LIMITED 6-65-0042 Rev. 4
01177r ei7E/ReamJalrA) IA Gott of Intim Undettalung) SEWER SYSTEM
6.4 The groove in between the pipe ends is to be filled with jute, impregnated with bitumen
and rolled in the form of gasket ring centrally around the pipe, to ensure uniform annular
space between the collar and the pipe.
6.5 Cement mortar of proportion 1:2 shall be used for caulking the annular space. Care shall
be taken to see that the bottom of the collar joint is also caulked properly.
6.6 The joint shall be finished at an angle of 45° and shall be kept wet for 10 days for curing.
7.0 TESTING
7.1 The pipeline shall be tested for water tightness of joints. The test shall be carried out from
manhole. Pipe ends shall be closed and filled with water so that water level is up to the top
of the manholes.
7.2 The line shall be kept full for 24 hours. Observations shall be taken at one hour interval
and if leakage is within 2.5 liters/km/hr/cm of diameter of pipeline, it shall be deemed to
have passed the test.
7.3 Engineer-in-Charge may at his own discretion, ask the subcontractor to test the laid pipe
line in sections, in which case the subcontractor will do the same, as per the procedure to
be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge, without any extra cost to Owner. The procedure
adopted in such cases, however, will be to test the pipeline according to the criteria
mentioned above.
7.4 In case joints are found to leak, they shall be repaired or redone and test shall be repeated
until the joints are approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
The work shall have deemed to be rejected, in case any visual leakage observed from any
of the joint. The contractor shall undertake repairing and testing of the jointwithout any
extra cost to the owner.
7.5 After completion of the test, all temporary seals shall be removed, the test water shall be
drained / pumped out and the line cleaned properly.
7.6 Before commissioning, the cleanliness of the pipeline shall be checked by following tests.
7.6.1 Torch & Mirror Test
In this method of testing, a torch will be held at one end of the pipeline inside a manhole
and its image through the pipeline will be reflected and seen on a mirror held at the
opposite end of the pipeline, inside the next manhole. Any obstruction / debris / major
misalignment will not give a clear image, in which case the pipeline shall again be
cleaned, rectified and the test redone.
7.6.2 Ring Test
In this method of testing, two steel / wooden rings of suitable thickness and design shall
be fixed facing each other, at a distance of 2 feet or more. The block of rings shall be
inserted from one end of the pipeline, inside manhole and pulled by a rope fixed to the
block from the other end of the pipeline, inside the next manhole. The rings shall be of
dia. 2" less than the inside dia of pipe under testing. The rope used for pulling the ring
block may be inserted in the pipeline by the sub-contractor either during construction or
afterwards by suitable means. Any obstruction/ debris/ major mis-alignment will prevent
the ring to pass through the pipeline in which case the pipeline shall again be cleaned /
rectified and the test redone.
Page 2775 of 3884

geir
1.ireR enrane
WA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking) SEWER SYSTEM 6-65-0042 Rev. 4
The ring test shall be performed for the complete network of the sewer system, before the
same is put in commission.
8.0 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACES AND CLEARING THE SITE
8.1 All pavements, structures, pipelines, cables, etc. removed, damaged or disturbed during
the pipe laying work shall be restored to original conditions.
8.2 Surplus excavated soil or rubbish material shall be removed to a place, as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge.
9.0 PAYMENT
9.1 Measurement of pipeline work for the purpose of payment shall be taken in running metre
of the laid pipe measured along centre line, inclusive of joints. The rate quoted shall be
inclusive of excavation, lowering, laying, jointing, connecting the pipe to manholes and
grouting the pipe to manhole wall, testing, cleaning of pipelines, backfilling,
commissioning and any other operation involved in the pipeline work.
9.2 The payment clause(s) as described in this standard specification shall not be referred/
applicable for LSTK Jobs.
Page 2776 of 3884

ara_i ENGINEERS
Og Rareg 14P
7- ' INDIA LIMITED FOR RANDOM RUBBLE
6-65-0050 Rev. 4
1nm etwore ...AMA IA Gaut o Mclia Untlertainto
PITCHING
Page 1 of 5
I"\S Wa 11144 tg
"
Trriw 1-4-Avr
FOR
RANDOM RUBBLE PITCHING
4 06.07.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. LP K

RS
TRIVEDI
3 27.09.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RB RKS RBB DM
Standards Standards
Date Checked
No by by
Approved by
Page 2777 of 3884

ENGINEE MRS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
*IgeJrielf5V'eg
INIZA eRWR
INDIA LIITED
A Gavt of India Undettalung) FOR RANDOM RUBBLE PITCHING 6-65-0050 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
IS Indian Standard
mm Millimeter

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2778 of 3884

5oIuo1 1Jt9 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
LJ( INDIA LIMITED
tozn &XJLICI.1) IAGaON on„.,,, FOR RANDOM RUBBLE PITCHING 6-65-0050 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 REFERENCE OF EIL SPECIFICATIONS / STANDARDS 4
4.0 MATERIALS 4
5.0 CONSTRUCTION DETAIL 4
5.0 PAYMENT 5
Page 2779 of 3884

d1R7--ie ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
0151tg
own wiwy
tw.www)
INDIA
,,, G„„ LIMITED FOR RANDOM RUBBLE PITCHING 6-65-0050 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 5
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for random rubble pitching for road side
slopes, storm water ditches, embankment slopes, reservoirs, holding pool etc.
IS: 1542 Specification for Sand for Plaster

IS: 2116 Specification for Sand for Masonry Mortars
IS: 8112 Specification for 43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement
NOTE: - Latest edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 REFERENCE OF EIL SPECIFICATIONS / STANDARDS
Following standard specification shall be enclosed as part of the job specifications.
Technical Specifications — Civil and Structural Works - Materials 6-68-0002
Technical Specifications - Civil & Structural Works - Stone Masonry 6-68-0010
4.0 MATERIALS
Refer specification No. 6-68-0002
5.0 CONSTRUCTION DETAIL
4.1 Dressing
Stone shall be hammer-dressed on the face and sides. The 'Bushing' (Projections) on the face
shall not project more than 40 mm on an exposed face and 15 mm on the face to be plastered.
4.2 Thickness of Random Rubble Stone Pitching
The thickness of Random Rubble Stone pitching shall be 225 mm (minimum) or as specified
in job drawing.
4.3 Mortar
Cement Mortar 1:6 shall be used for jointing and 1:4 for pointing.
4.4 Preparation of Sub Grade
The sub grade shall be prepared, dressed and rolled true to level and according to required
levels and cross sections to form a firm compacted bed for the pitching.
If at any point, material of prepared sub grade has been excavated beyond the required levels
of pitching, the excess excavation shall be filled with material compatible with sub grade
material and thoroughly compacted.
The sub grade shall then be uniformly soaked with water without making it slushy to ensure
that water penetrates to a depth to about 300 mm in sandy soil and about 150 mm in other
soils.
Page 2780 of 3884

e lawn ?WOW MIJP1M)
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of Intai UndertakIng) FOR RANDOM RUBBLE PITCHING 6-65-0050 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 5
4.5 Laying
The stones used shall be available from the excavated rock or quarry. The surface to be stone
pitched shall be properly dressed and rammed prior to commencement of the work and the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be obtained. Stone used shall be wetted before use.
The surface shall be properly watered before placing the stone. The stone shall be carefully
laid and hammered down with a wooden mallet in position. The bond shall be obtained by
fitting in closely the adjacent stones and properly applying the cement mortar to the joint. The
slopes as shown in the drawing shall be maintained. The required uniform thickness
perpendicular to the sloped surface shall be maintained and this can be controlled by
stretching thread between pre-measured markers installed over sub-grade at regular intervals.
4.6 Joints
Stones shall be so laid that all joints are full of mortar. Face joints shall not be more than 25
mm thick; joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. Joints shall be raked
to a depth of 20 mm during construction, in case of plastering or pointing.
4.7 Flush Pointing
Joints in the stone pitching shall be raked out at least 20 mm deep during construction. The
joints shall be brushed clean of dust with a wire brush and wetted thoroughly for 6 hours
before pointing is commenced. The raked joints shall be filled with cement mortar of
specified grade and shall be well pressed in the face of pitching or wall and rubbed smooth.
After pressing the mortar to the joints, a neat cement wash shall be given to the mortar area
only and finished smooth. The finished work shall give a clean, well worked look without
blotches or runs or mortar on stone surface.
4.8 Curing
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. Stone Pitching work shall be
kept constantly moist for a minimum period of 10 days.
5.0 PAYMENT
5.1 Rubble pitching shall be measured in square meter basis of the finished surface. The rate shall
include cost of stone, royalties, breaking and dressing the stones to required size,
transportation to place of site or place of work, dressing the surface to required slope and
shape, tamping, laying in cement mortar, flush pointing etc. and all the operations mentioned
above.
5.2 The payment clause 5.1 is not applicable in case of LSTK Jobs.
Page 2781 of 3884

tiae.tel. ft ENGINEERS
ki.i No.
W.INDIA LIMITED FOR PLUMBING AND BUILDING
6-65-0053 Rev. 4
I Miinsre tni „mom) A Govt of Inika Undertaking)
DRAINAGE
Page 1 of 8
A. RAHN' t

PLUMBING AND BUILDING
DRAINAGE
4 06.07.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RAJANJI

LP V gTRIV
K '''''....h.--------
EDI
SRIVASTAVA
3 23.08.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC JAY KUMAR RC RBB DM
Standards Standards
Date Checked
No by by
Approved by
Page 2782 of 3884

laia,eimENGINEERs STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
5igem Mieg W INDIA LIMITED
OWN eliew .51 JP: I 01 Gott al India Ondertalung)
6-65-0053 Rev. 4
DRAINAGE
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
CI Cast Iron
CM Cement Mortar
CP Chrome Plated
G.I. Galvanised Iron
HCI Heavy Cast Iron
IS Indian Standard
Kg/sq.cm Kilogram / Square Centimeter
LSTK Lump Sum Trunkey
M.S. Mild Steel
mm Millimeter
P.C.C. Plain Cement Concrete
Psi Pound Per Square Inch
R.C.C. Reinforced Cement Concrete

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2783 of 3884

jilo~eY ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
a'JI 015-eg INDIA LIMITED PLUMBING AND BUILDING
IA Govt ot Undertaktng) 6-65-0053 Rev. 4
DRAINAGE
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 H.C.I. NAHNI TRAP (FLOOR TRAP) 4
4.0 STONEWARE GULLY TRAP CHAMBER 5
5.0 VALVE CHAMBER, INSPECTION CHAMBER & MANHOLES 5
6.0 C.I. SOIL / WASTE PIPES 5
7.0 C.I. SOIL / WASTE VENT PIPES 5
8.0 GI PIPES AND FITTINGS 6
9.0 GUN METAL VALVE 6
10.0 M.S. RUNGS/ C.I. STEPS 6
11.0 SOAK PITS 7
12.0 SEPTIC TANK 7
13.0 PAYMENT 7
Page 2784 of 3884

afaeleift ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
No.
5 a lailegWINDIA LIMITED PLUMBING AND BUILDING 6-65-0053 Rev. 4
eW.7e .. ,M7.0 Govt d India Undendung ■
DRAINAGE
Page 4 of 8
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification is intended to establish and define the materials and constructional
requirements for plumbing & building drainage work.
1.2 All materials, fixtures and workmanship shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian
Standard, Specifications and Codes of practices.
IS: 269 Ordinary Portland cement, 33 grade
IS: 554 Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are made on threads
IS: 651 Salt-glazed stoneware pipes and fittings
IS: 778 Copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for water works purposes
IS: 782 Caulking lead
IS: 1239 Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings
IS: 1726 Cast iron manholes covers and frames
IS: 1729 Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and
accessories
IS: 1742 Code of practice for Building drainage
IS: 2065 Code of practice for water supply in Buildings
IS: 2470 Code of practice for installation of septic tanks
IS: 3486 Cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes
IS: 3950 Surface boxes for sluice valves
IS: 3989 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating
pipes, fittings and accessories
IS: 5455 Cast iron steps for manholes
3.0 H.C.I. NAHNI TRAP (FLOOR TRAP)
Nahni trap shall be of heavy cast iron as per IS: 3989 with 100mm inlet and 80/ 100mm outlet
with CP pressed steel grating. It shall be of self-cleaning design. Grating shall be of either
hinged or screwed down type.
It shall be fixed in cement mortar 1:2, as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 2785 of 3884

oit ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
fet151e:g
1.117rt FIRIa7 jaaral)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of end a Unclettalongt
6-65-0053 Rev. 4
DRAINAGE
Page 5 of 8
4.0 STONEWARE GULLY TRAP CHAMBER
The square mouth gully trap shall be of 100mm dia, conforming to IS: 651, of specified and/
or approved quality stoneware, complete with cast iron grating, and shall be got approved
from Engineer-in-Charge. The size of CI frame and cover shall be of 300 x 300mm. It shall be
properly fixed, as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The size of the chamber shall be 300 x 300 x 675mm (internal). It shall be constructed of brick
masonry walls, 125mm thick, in 1:4 cement mortar and M-20 concrete foundations. Inside &
outside faces of the masonry walls shall be plastered with 1:3 cement mortar. The top of the
chamber shall be provided with CI cover and frame.
5.0 VALVE CHAMBER, INSPECTION CHAMBER & MANHOLES
The size and type of construction of valve chamber, inspection chamber and manholes shall be
as specified in the drawings or items.
6.0 C.I. SOIL / WASTE PIPES
CI pipes shall be socket and spigot of standard quality conforming to IS: 1729. The supply
shall include all necessary accessories e.g. bends, Y- Junction, T- Junction, including plugs,
shoes, cowls etc. complete.
CI soil / waste pipe below ground or floor shall be encased with 50mm thick PCC M20 Grade
concrete.
The spigot of the pipe shall be placed fully resting inside the socket and hemp caulked home
to leave space for lead depth as specified. Lead conforming to IS: 782 in molten state shall
then be poured into the joint filling the same in one pouring. The lead shall be caulked by
proper tools to make it even all round. Depths of lead in the joints from the top of the socket
shall be 37mm for 150mm dia pipes, 25mm for 100 mm and 50mm dia pipes. All pipes shall
be fixed 25mm clear of the wall with MS bat clamps or as approved by the Engineer — in
Charge. All holes in walls and floors shall be made good by cement concrete M-15 grade and
should be leak proof. All soil and waste pipes shall be tested for leakage by hydraulic test.
All CI pipes shall be painted with two coats of paint of approve make and shade over a coat of
primer. Earthwork in excavation, backfilling and removal of surplus earth/ debris shall be
considered as a part of the work. No separate payment shall be made for the same..
7.0 C.I. SOIL / WASTE VENT PIPES
CI pipes shall be standard quality conforming to IS: 1729. The supply shall include all
necessary accessories e.g. bends, Y- Junction, T- Junction, including plugs, shoes, cowls etc.
complete.
Jute yarn gasket of suitable diameter shall be used as required to support the spigot of the pipe
at the proper grade and make truly concentric joints. Single piece of sufficient length shall be
used to pass around the pipe and lap at the top and shall be thoroughly saturated in bitumen.
This gasket shall be laid in the socket for lower third of the circumference of the joint and
covered with cement mortar. The spigot of the pipe thoroughly cleaned with wet brush,
inserted and carefully driven home after which a small amount of cement mortar (1:2) shall be
inserted in the annular space around the entire circumference of pipe and solidly rammed into
the joint with caulking tool. The joint shall then be completely filled with mortar and beveled
off at angle of 45 ° with outside of the pipe. Cement used to join shall conform to IS: 269.
Page 2786 of 3884

lafReit4 ft ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
OWg INDIA LIMITED PLUMBING AND BUILDING 6-65-0053 Rev. 4
•ren eizaw JIM.) Goo o India Undedalong)
V,
DRAINAGE
Page 6 of 8
All holes in walls and floors shall be made good by cement concrete M-15 grade. All soil and
waste pipes shall be tested for leakage by hydraulic test.
All CI pipes shall be painted with two coats of anticorrosive bituminous paint externally.
8.0 GI PIPES AND FITTINGS
All G.I. pipes and fittings shall conform to IS: 1239 and shall be of heavy grade for water
supply system.
All screwed tubes and sockets shall have pipe threads in accordance with the requirements
specified in IS: 554. Unless specified otherwise, pipes shall be supplied screwed with taper
threads and sockets with parallel thread.
All fittings shall be malleable galvanised iron, approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Fittings in
G.I. line shall include all couplings, elbows, tees, bends, unions, nipples, reducers, flanges
with nuts, bolts and rubber insertions, bushes and all other fittings to make a complete job.
Screwed G.I. pipes shall be jointed with screwed socket joints using screwed fittings. Care
shall be taken to remove any burr from the end of the pipes after threading. White lead with a
few strands of fine hemp shall be applied while tightening. Compounds containing red lead
shall not be used.
All pipes above ground shall be fixed with G.I. holder bat clamps, clear off the wall, at 1.2 m
centre to center. If the pipes are encased or embedded in wall, they shall be secured in position
by iron hooks at 1.2 m centre to center. All visible pipes and clamps within and outside
building shall be painted with two coats of white paint or aluminium paint as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. No extra payment shall be made for clamps, hooks, cutting holes in
walls, chasing and making good the same.
All underground pipes shall have a minimum earth cover of 600mm or as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. No extra payment shall be made for excavation in trenches, backfilling
the same and removal of surplus earth. Before any pipes are painted or covered up, they shall
be tested to a test pressure equal to one and a half times the working pressure, as per job
requirement (Minimum test pressure shall be 6Kg/Cm 2 g) and the test pressure shall be
maintained without loss for at least 30 minutes. Pipes or fittings which are found leaking shall
be replaced and joints found leaking shall be redone, without extra payment.
9.0 GUN METAL VALVE
All full way and globe valves shall be of heavy gunmetal and tested at 300 psi and shall be
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Valves shall conform to IS: 778. Size of valve chamber
shall be as per item description. Construction of valve chamber shall be carried out as per
clause 5.0 above. Valve chamber shall be provided & fixed with heavy duty C.I. surface box
conforming to IS: 3950. The surface box shall be hinged pin open type & shall be fixed in the
chamber slab. It shall have a hole for opening.
10.0 M.S. RUNGS/ C.I. STEPS

The rungs for pits, manholes and septic tanks etc. shall be made out of M.S. bars conforming
to Indian Standard and to the shape and size as shown in drawings.
CI steps for manholes, if needed shall be as per IS: 5455
M.S. rungs shall be coated with 2 coats of approved bituminous paint.
Page 2787 of 3884

5/ 4 //
laifM evewri•.,./aVa.1)
INDIA LIMITED PLUMBING AND BUILDING
6-65-0053 Rev. 4
(A GOvt 01 Ind Undettalongj
DRAINAGE
Page 7 of 8
11.0 SOAK PITS
All earthwork in excavation, brick work etc. shall conform to relevant I.S. standard.
The brickbats should preferably be slightly over burnt or thoroughly well burnt, deep red in
colour with some proportion of deep blue or black veins. Spongy or vitrified material, as a
result of excessive over burning, is useless and shall be rejected. Brickbats bigger than
specified size shall be reduced to required size (40 to 50mm) before filling in soak pit and no
extra payment shall be made for this. It shall be stacked at site as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge. Soak pit & septic tank shall be connected with required piping.
12.0 SEPTIC TANK
Septic tanks shall be provided as per drawings and directions of Engineer-in-Charge. The sizes
shall vary depending on the no. of users.
Alternatively, ready made RCC pipe septic tank, consisting of sewage receiving chamber,
inspection door, vent pipe, inlet & outlet connections, manhole cover, C.I. steps etc. shall be
used.
Design, testing & commissioning shall conform to IS: 2470 Part-I.
Access opening shall be provided for desludging & inspection.
The ventilating pipe shall be provided with pipe of at least 50mm dia extended 2 meters above
the nearest working platform level.
In case where water table is shallow and soak pits are not recommended, upflow filters, as per
drawings shall be provided.
13.0 PAYMENT
13.1 H.C.I. Nahni Trap (Floor Trap)
Payment shall be made per number basis. The rate shall include supplying and fixing Nahni
trap, including cement mortar, cutting walls and floors and making good the same, providing
and fixing chromium plated pressed steel grating etc. all complete.
13.2 Stoneware Gully Trap Chamber
Payment shall be made on per number basis. The rate shall include supplying and fixing of
stoneware gully trap, CI grating, construction of masonry chamber, providing and fixing CI
frame and cover, earthwork in excavation, foundation concrete, backfilling and removal of
surplus earth up to a lead of 30m and labour and material etc. all complete.
13.3 Valve Chamber, Inspection Chamber & Manholes
Payment shall be made as per number basis including excavation, backfilling, removal of
earth, construction of the valve chamber, inspection chamber and manhole, making
connections of pipes through the walls including grouting, cost of M.S. rungs, cover slab, cost
of CI cover and frame etc. as per specifications and directions of the Engineer-in-Charge.
The rate shall include breaking concrete or brick masonry work and making good the same
with 1:4 cement mortar if necessary, finishing, painting, etc. as per directions of Engineer-in-
Charge.
Page 2788 of 3884

ala,e ift ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
51gen 215lezW INDIA LIMITED PLUMBING AND BUILDING 6-65-0053 Rev. 4
IA Govt of Inclia Undertakovi
DRAINAGE
Page 8 of 8
13.4 C.I. Soil / Waste Pipes
The payment shall be on running meter basis of pipes laid with fittings as required on site. The
rate shall include supplying and fixing of pipes and necessary specials including cowl with
hemp and lead, jointing & testing, bat clamps, fixtures, painting, cutting of walls, floor and
making good the same and necessary scaffolding, encasing of pipes below ground or floor
with 50mm thick PCC M20 concrete earth work in excavation, backfilling & removal of
surplus earth etc. complete.
13.5 C.I. Soil / Waste Vent Pipes
The payment shall be on running meter basis of pipes laid. The rate shall include supplying
and fixing pipes, jute gaskets dipped into bitumen and cement mortar and necessary specials
including jointing with clamps, painting, cutting of walls, floor and making good the same,
necessary scaffolding etc. complete.
13.6 GI Pipes and Fittings
Payment shall be made on running meter basis of actual pipeline laid. In addition to the
sectional testing of water supply piping, the contractor shall test entire installation on
completion of the job, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. No extra payment
shall be made for testing. The contractor shall make his own arrangement for supply of water
for testing, at his own cost. The rate for this item shall include supply and laying of G.I. pipes
with necessary fittings, cutting of pipes to required lengths, threading, making holes in walls
and floors and making good the same, jointing, painting, excavation and refilling including
testing as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
13.7 Gun Metal Valve
The payment shall be made per number basis, including surface box. The rate shall include,
supplying and fixing valve & surface box in position, as per drawings and directions of
Engineer-in-Charge.
13.8 M.S. Rungs/ C.I. Steps
Payment for rungs shall be made on per number basis and the rate shall include supply, fixing,
finishing the walls, painting etc. all complete.
13.9 Soak Pits
Payment of soak pit/ up flow filter shall be made per number basis. Rate quoted shall include
brick masonry work, providing & filling brick bats, earthwork in excavation, backfilling,
making inlet connection with pipe and connecting the same to septic tank etc. complete as
shown in drawing.
13.10 Septic Tank
Payment of septic tank shall be made per number basis & rate shall include all accessories like
inlet, outlet, vent pipe, manhole cover & C.I. steps, earthwork in excavation & backfilling,
removal of surplus earth etc. all complete.
13.11 The above payment clauses are not applicable in case of LSTK Jobs
Page 2789 of 3884

el& ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
tiOteg
0„,,,E•weffean.mm) .-
mir INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt et InOia Undertionm
FOR ERECTION OF TUBE WELL 6-65-0055 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 10
3-
- cqrcri tg 4-11 ,1ch farib-r

ERECTION OF TUBE WELL
RAJANJI
4 06.07.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. LP VG
SRIVASTAVA TRIVEDI
3 23.08.12 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. JAY KUMAR RC RBB DM
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Rev. Prepared Checke
No by d by
Approved by
Page 2790 of 3884

tit51-ag
INIVN ere1.2 MI.."117.9)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt d inda Uodettak., ERECTION OF TUBE WELL 6-65-0055 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
cm Centimetre
ERW Pipes Electric Resistance Welded Pipe
IS Indian Standard
kg/cm2 Kilogram per Square Centimetre
I/min Litres per Minute
m3/min Cubic Metre per Minute
m Metre
MS Mild Steel
mm Millimetre
ppm Parts per Million
rpm Revolutions Per Minute

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2791 of 3884

eirei ft ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
51geir kfire!g W WA LIMITED 6-65-0055 Rev. 4
O.JOcom) (A Goof of Indio undettaium ERECTION OF TUBE WELL
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 TUBE WELL YIELD 4
4.0 METHOD OF DRILLING 4
5.0 TUBE WELL ASSEMBLY 4
6.0 PAINTING OF PIPES 5
7.0 LOWERING OF PIPE ASSEMBLY 5
8.0 PLUMBNESS AND ALIGNMENT 6
9.0 GRAVEL FILLING 6
10.0 DEVELOPMENT 6
11.0 FINAL TESTS 7
12.0 QUALITY OF WATER 7
13.0 SPECIFICATION FOR PUMP 8
ANNEXURE-I: INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR TO OWNER ON

COMPLETION OF TUBE WELL
Page 2792 of 3884

ENCJNEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
slge-Jr tiOleg WALIMITED 6-65-0055 Rev. 4
lawn ei•enfealijomso (A Govt al India undenaking) ERECTION OF TUBE WELL
Page 4 of 10
1.0 SCOPE
This specification defines the erection, development and testing requirement for tube well.
IS: 325 Three phase induction motors
IS: 1239 Mild steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings
IS: 1710 Specification for vertical turbine pumps for clear, cold, fresh water
IS: 2062 Steel for general structural purposes
IS: 2800 Code of practice for construction and testing of tube wells (Part-1 and 2)
IS: 4270 Steel tubes used for water wells
IS: 8024 Submersible pump set specifications
The work shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 2800, attached specification and directions
of Engineer-in-Charge at site. In case of a conflict between these, the directions of Engineer-in-
Charge shall be final.
3.0 TUBE WELL YIELD
The total yield of tube well shall be as per project requirement.
4.0 METHOD OF DRILLING
Drilling of tube well shall be carried out by using Direct/ Reverse Circulation Rotary rig method.
The bore hole of 400mm dia shall be drilled down to a depth of about 200m. The strata samples
shall be collected @ 2m or whenever there is any change in strata. In case, the desired water
bearing strata is encountered before reaching a depth of 200m, the Engineer-in-Charge shall
intimate the contractor accordingly for stopping or continuing the boring work up to the desired
depth of 200m.
5.0 TUBE WELL ASSEMBLY
5.1 Tube-well assembly shall consist of mild steel pipe conforming to IS: 4270/ IS: 1239. The ends of
the pipes shall be suitably beveled for welding and the pipe tested to a pressure as mentioned
below.
5.2 Housing pipe shall be ERW mild steel tested for 56 kg/ cm 2 pressure.
5.3 Blank pipe shall be ERW mild steel tested for 50 kg/ cm 2 pressure.
5.4 Taper reducer shall be of mild steel fabricated from steel plate conforming to IS: 2062 and having
beveled ends for welding. The smaller dia end shall be suitably ground for matching the thickness
of blank pipe.
5.5 The slotted pipes shall be of the same diameter and thickness as that of blank pipe. The slotted
pipe shall have slots of width 1.63mm with sides perpendicular to the surface of the pipe and of
length varying from 62mm to 80mm. The open area of slots shall not be less than 12%-15% of the
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EL — All rights reserved
Page 2793 of 3884

pct ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
Ogarklf5&
14.17M 7VRIRE , ...190.0
WA LIMITED
IA Govt of India undertaking) ERECTION OF TUBE WELL 6-65-0055 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 10
total surface area of the strainer pipe. Slots should be milled and not punched and shall preferably
be tapered with smaller opening of the outside of pipe. Slotting with Oxy-acetylene flame will not
be allowed. If slotted pipes are to be placed in more than one section, depending on the nature of
formation, the same shall be allowed but length of pipe less than 1.5m shall not be allowed to be
placed. The slotted pipe in a particular length of aquifer should be at least 600 mm shorter from
either end of the aquifer.
5.6 The space between the strainer material and the slotted pipe should be such that the total area of
slots of perforations results in equal velocities of flow through the slots and strainer opening. The
strainer material and the pipes should be separated by an adequate distance with steel flats or
similar contrivance.
5.7 The centralizing guides shall be of mild steel and shall be placed at every 10m interval.
5.8 Bottom most length of pipe assembly shall be plugged with a steel plate of 6.35 mm thickness
having inverted U-hook made of 20mm dia MS Rod at top and a conical bull nose attached to the
bottom.
5.9 Housing clamp shall be of Mild Steel flat 20mm to 25mm thick with necessary bolts and nuts.
5.10 Well cap shall be of mild steel threaded type or plate type, which can be spot welded or suitably
fixed with bolts or nuts for easy removal when required.
6.0 PAINTING OF PIPES
6.1 All pipes and specials shall be painted with two coats of anti-corrosive bituminous paint both
inside and outside before welding and lowering is started. The joints after welding shall also be
painted from outside before lowering.
6.2 The bituminous paint shall be of quality such as to produce a coating which, when dry, shall be
smooth, tough and tenacious and sufficiently hard not to flow on exposure to a temperature of
63 °C and shall not be brittle at 0 °C.
7.0 LOWERING OF PIPE ASSEMBLY
7.1 After completion of drilling the borehole to the required depth, the tube-well assembly, designed
on the basis of strata chart, shall be lowered in the borehole as mentioned below, after approval of
the assembly by the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.2 Bail plug with hook and bull nose shall be welded to the bottom of the well assembly i.e. with
pea-gravel packed filter pipe and or blank pipe. The bottom shall be closed to prevent the sand or
earth entering into the pipe. The length of bail plug shall not be less than 1.5m and not more than
3.0m.
7.3 Any other hooking arrangement may also be provided as desired approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge.
7.4 The centralized guides shall be welded with the well assembly at every 10.0m intervals to keep
the pipe in the center of the borehole.
7.5 Length of pea-gravel packed filter pipe may vary between 30 to 40m.
7.6 The taper reducer shall be welded to the bottom of the housing and top of the well pipes.
7.7 Housing pipe shall be above 75m long or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge depending
Page 2794 of 3884

ligar Eft&WDIA
...Flaw°
?IVOR?
LIMITED
IA God d undertawm ERECTION OF TUBE WELL 6-65-0055 Rev. 4
Page 6 of 10
upon the conditions prevailing at site and draw down permissible in the well. It shall be welded
with the taper reducer and lowered.
7.8 The housing clamp shall be fixed at the top of the tube well assembly with necessary bolts and
nuts and shall be embedded in the concrete block of the foundation as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge.
7.9 Well cap shall be fixed on the top of the completed tube well (as per direction of Engineer-in-
Charge) assembly, the housing pipe of which will be about one (1) m above ground level.
8.0 PLUMBNESS AND ALIGNMENT
8.1 The tube-well shall as far as possible, be true to the alignment from its top to bottom. It shall be
checked for its verticality in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge as per procedure mentioned in
IS: 2800.
8.2 The housing pipe shall be true to vertical and shall not deviate more than 10 cm in 30 m depth of
tube well housing and the deviation shall be in one direction and in one plane only failing which
the work shall be rejected and the Contractor shall have to re-bore the well at his own cost. The
verticality shall be checked as specified in IS: 2800.
8.3 The verticality test shall be carried out prior to commencing the gravel filling and test report duly
signed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge.
9.0 GRAVEL FILLING
9.1 All gravel shall consist of hard well-rounded particles reasonably uniform with uniformity co-
efficient of two or less and shall be of pea gravel size ranging from 12mm to 5mm.
9.2 After the tube well assembly has been placed in position, gravel shall be inserted in the annular
space between the pipe assembly and the borehole. The gravel filling should be started from
bottom up to 25 m above the top of the upper most strainer pipe, verticality of the housing pipe
tested and the defects rectified. There after, gravel filling shall be done from that point up to top/
desired level as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
9.3 Gravel shall be placed in the annular space preferably by a gravel conductor pipe and shall be fed
in such a way that no pockets are formed. If any gravel subsides while developing the well, the
required quantity shall be added to bring it to the desired level.
9.4 After gravel packing as above, a ring of 600 mm thickness of concrete M-20 with quick setting
cement shall be placed at the top of the gravel filling. The space above the concrete ring shall be
filled up to the desired level with approved material as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
9.5 Minimum thickness of gravel packing and approved material shall be 100 mm, at all points or as
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
10.0 DEVELOPMENT
10.1 The well shall be developed either by surging, including washing and agitating or by pumping
and back washing with an air lift.
10.2 The following procedures shall be strictly adhered during development.
Air washing by air compressor should be intermittent and not continuous. Air shall be supplied
for 10 minutes at a stretch followed by an equal period shut down. The compressor used for this
purpose shall have minimum capacity of 8.5m 3/ min under a pressure of 7 kg/ cm 2. The air shall
Page 2795 of 3884

ft1 ENGINEERS-
sigeji 'Meg W INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0055 Rev. 4
, MW ...34".0 Govt of India UnciettakIng) ERECTION OF TUBE WELL
Page 7 of 10
be released suddenly by quick opening of valves. The bottom of air pipe shall move up and down
along the entire depth.
10.3 Removal of silty material, turbine surging by pump shall be conducted in the same manner as in
case of air compressor, to remove all silty material.
10.4 This development process/ prolonged pumping shall be continued until the stabilization of sand
and gravel pack is completely assured, so that well is cleared of all finer materials to give
maximum yield with a minimum draw down.
10.5 The discharge of the pump during development shall correspond to a draw down 50% higher than
the normal draw down at which the tube well will be working during its normal continuous
operation. The pump shall be fixed with a depth gauge and pressure gauge.
10.6 The development shall continue till:

(i) Well ceases to absorb further gravel
(ii) A specific capacity at a given rpm becomes constant.
(iii) The water remains sand free with maximum tolerance of 10 ppm after 30 minutes
continuous running of pump.
10.7 In case, the condition mentioned in clause no. 10.6 is achieved earlier than twelve hours from
starting of pumping operation, the contractor shall continue the pumping operation for not less
than twelve hours.
10.8 The tube well shall be further pumped for at least four hours and pumping level shall be measured
by the contractor at an interval of every one hour and shall be passed on to the Engineer-in-
Charge.
10.9 After development of tube well, the contractor shall remove all material, which might have
accumulated by the side of the tube well to a place directed by the Engineer-in-Charge at no extra
cost.
11.0 FINAL TESTS
11.1 After completion of development test, the Contractor shall arrange to conduct step draw down test
at his cost to find out the performance to the tube well in regard to yield and draw down, and
further to select a suitable size and type of pump to be installed in the tube well.
12.0 QUALITY OF WATER
Water shall be collected during the test and analysed for physical, chemical and bacteriological
properties as desired by the Owner, for the following constituents:
1. Temperature
2. Odour
3. Colour
4. Turbidity
5. Characteristic showing slime and sediments
6. Total dissolved solids
7. Suspended solids
8. pH value
9. Phonopthaline alkalinity as CaCO 3
10. Methyl orange alkalinity as CaCO 3
11. Temporary hardness as CaCO 3
12. Permanent hardness as CaCO 3
13. Calcium as CaCO 3
Page 2796 of 3884

eleift ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
1?e.jr laWeg W INDIA UNITED 6-65-0055 Rev. 4
Imre elmv (A Govt oda Undettakingi ERECTION OF TUBE WELL
Page 8 of 10
14. CaSO4 as CaCO3
13.0 SPECIFICATION FOR PUMP
Depending upon the discharge and drawn down tests, the Contractor shall suggest suitable pump,
such as centrifugal, vertical turbine submersible etc. which shall be fitted on the tube well.
The supply and erection of pump and motor may be got done by the Contractor, therefore it
should be quoted as a separate item. The pumps are to be supplied by the Contractor. The vertical
turbine pump shall conform to IS: 1710 and submersible pump set specifications shall conform to
IS: 8024.
Electric motor shall conform to IS: 325.
Page 2797 of 3884

51geglafareg INDIA LIMITED 6-65-0055 Rev. 4
Goo d In Undertaking) ERECTION OF TUBE WELL
Page 9 of 10
ANNEXURE-I
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR TO OWNER ON COMPLETION OF
TUBE WELL
1. Agency constructing the tube well
2. Location and tube well number
3. Method of drilling adopted
4. Date of starting
5. Date of completion
6. Pilot hole or test hole Bit size
Bit type from to
7. Coring done Bit size Bit type
8. Hours Recovery
from to
9. Reaming Bit size Bit type
Hours
10. Total depth of the bore hole
11. Lithological log
From to
12. Electrical log
13. Assembly of production well size
Length
Type
Perforation per metre
Housing pipe
Blind pipe
Strainer
Bail plug
14. Top of tube well above/ below ground level
15. Size of gravel Quantity used before development
Page 2798 of 3884

OPzie ENIGINEERS ED STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR No.
4geir id5rdu
(.77r 2Wesr2 alorm)
INDIA LIMIT
;A Gavt d India undeitaiong) ERECTION OF TUBE WELL 6-65-0055 Rev. 4
Page 10 of 10
Quantity used during development
16. Method used for development
Testing
17. Total hours to development
Total hours of testing
18. Step draw down test: Time of test
Speed rpm Discharge
19. Aquifer performance test: Time of test
20. Speed rpm
Discharge
21. Static water level
22. Rated discharge in 1pm
23. Depression head of the production well
24. Start of the pumps
25. Sand content in ppm
26. Sand contents at 1.5 times the normal depression after 20 minutes of the start of the pump or 20%
excess rated discharge. 50% extra depression cannot be arranged.
27. Recommendation with regard to a suitable pump discharge Head
28. Furthur details appended:
a. Sample of strata neatly packed and marked

b. Chart of pipe assembly lowered
c. Results of sieve analysis of samples of strata
d. Verticality test results
e. Physical, Chemical & Bacteriological analysis of tube well water
f. Drilling, time-long indicating the time taken to drill a particular hard strata, if any.
Remarks Owner
Driller
NOTES:-
1. Samples at every two m interval or less if there is any change of strata should be collected,
neatly packed and marked as at (a) above.
2. The sieve analysis of the sample of strata is to be done by the contractor.
Page 2799 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR PORTABLE FIRE 6-66-0004 Rev. 1
tilWrez
I WTI 29RSI1E,1513%,..1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Una..lond) EXTINGUISHER Page 1 of 5
mcbR
afravrmw f4-4r
FOR
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
24.08.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. GRAVGYAS

SINGH
0-} RS RKT
0 19.08.10 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION AS RKS RBB ND

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved By
Page 2800 of 3884

t311 el ENGINEERS FOR PORTABLE FIRE 6-66-0004 Rev. 1
weg INDIA LIMITED
A Govt of Me UncleItakng) EXTINGUISHER
I WM e12,
612 0117711
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
MS MILD STEEL
IS INDIAN STANDARD
PESO PETROLEUM EXPLOSIVE SAFETY ORGANISATION

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2801 of 3884

laRge? 86
5 '11 til
eg, G
INDIMITFD
(A Got 01 Indi. Undedak.g)
FOR PORTABLE FIRE
EXTINGUISHER
6-66-0004 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION & BASIC REQUIREMENT 4
4.0 APPROVALS 4
5.0 COLOR & MARKING 4
6.0 ACCESSORIES 5
7.0 INSPECTION 5
Page 2802 of 3884

Ion el ENGINEERS FOR PORTABLE FIRE 6-66-0004 Rev.
tsar felf5teg INDIA LIMITED EXTINGUISHER
1.112T1 2.21,92 41313P47.11 Govt of India Undertaking) Page 4 of 5
1.0 SCOPE
This standard lays down requirements regarding material, shape, construction, method of
operation, performance and tests of portable fire extinguisher of Carbon Dioxide type, Dry
Chemical Powder type Fire Extinguisher.
The extinguisher shall be supplied along with respective extinguishing media duly charged.
IS: 5 Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels

IS: 2932 Enamel, synthetic, exterior; a) undercoating, b) finishing - specification
IS: 4308 Dry Chemical Powder for Fighting B and C Class Fires
IS: 4947 Specification for gas cartridges for use in fire extinguishers
IS: 14609 Dry Chemical Powder for Fighting A, B, C Class Fires
IS: 15222 Carbon dioxide as the extinguishing media for fire protection - Specification
IS: 15683 Portable Fire Extinguishers, Performance and Construction — Specification
Note: Latest Edition of all standard documents shall be followed
3.0 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION & BASIC REQUIREMENT
3.1 CARBON DIOXIDE TYPE:-
3.1.1 Extinguisher shall be portable high pressure type with capacities 2 / 4.5 Kg as per requirement.
3.1.2 Requirement of performance, construction, and test shall comply with IS: 15683.
3.1.3 Carbon dioxide of 99.5% purity used as extinguishing media shall comply with IS: 15222 with
maximum fill density shall not exceed 0.667Kg/l.
3.1.4 Extinguishers shall have concave base, material for extinguisher body shall be either steel
conforming to IS: 7285 or aluminum confirming to IS: 4947 and discharge valve shall be of hand
wheel / key / lever operated type conforming to IS: 3224
3.2 DRY CHEMICAL POWDER TYPE:
3.2.1 Extinguisher shall be portable low pressure Cartridge type with capacities 1 / 2 / 4 / 6 /per
requirement based on fire rating.
3.2.2 Requirement of performance, construction, and test shall comply with IS: 15683.
3.2.3 Dry powder conforming to IS: 14609, I.S. 4308 and Of IS: 4861 shall be used for charging the
extinguishers.
3.2.4 Material for extinguisher body shall be carbon steel conforming IS: 513 with no vertical joints on
the body. Discharge nozzle, valve assembly shall be SS-316 or brass confirming to IS: 6912.
3.2.5 Carbon di oxide gas cartridge shall be ISI marked as per IS: 4947
4.0 APPROVALS
Carbon di oxide extinguisher and valve shall have approval from PESO, Government of India,
Nagpur.
5.0 COLOR & MARKING
The color of extinguisher bodies shall be Red conforming to shade no.536 or 538 of IS: 5. Paint
shall conform to IS: 2932. Each extinguisher shall be clearly and permanently marked with the
information specified in IS: 15683, along with IS certification mark and purchaser's name.
Page 2803 of 3884

k3iia.itAi ENGINEERS FOR PORTABLE FIRE 6-66-0004 Rev. 1
fawag INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking) EXTINGUISHER Page 5 of 5
6.0 ACCESSORIES
Each extinguisher shall be supplied with MS bracket, screws and spanner as may be necessary.
The details of the bracket shall be submitted with the offer.
7.0 INSPECTION
Owner's / EIL's authorized representative shall have access at all reasonable times to vendor's
works where Extinguishers are being manufactured and/or tested. Vendor shall arrange for all
tests and inspection facilities for checking material, design and fabrication, workmanship,
finish, performance (operating performance and performance required for test fires), and testing
as per IS: 15683.
8.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED FROM VENDOR
8.1 Following information shall be furnished by the vendor along with the supply of extinguisher:
Instruction book(s) - Instruction book(s) for guidance of the user including both the
operating and normal maintenance procedures shall be supplied. The book(s) shall include
an itemized and illustrated part list/spare parts list giving reference number of all the
wearing parts.
Approval certificate from PESO as described in clause 4.
Page 2804 of 3884

lafaziel" eft,
' ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
511g-af lai5teg W1 INDIA LIMITED STAND POST TYPE FIRE HYDRANT
otre,t IA Govt of India Undertakong)
6-66-0012 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 6
"ftER 3f-WR aTPT

irocti air TERW feitr
(-cpirK TrrEr aTzgr fay trizrK

STAND POST TYPE FIRE HYDRANT
(WITH OR WITHOUT PUMPER
CONNECTION)
4 26.06.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.

Cam"
GAURAV
SINGH
,/f
GYAS RS
AN/01
RKT
3 23.05.11 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. ALOK RKS RBB DM
2 22.12.05 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. SKC NK VDS VJN
1 15.02.98 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. VEDA SM MMK ASONI
0 31.03.82 ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RB HVR RCPC

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved By
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright El L — All rights reserved
Page 2805 of 3884

ENGINEERS
5Sz1r tifkg
MT', rieamecn1J0L10:0
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt
STAND POST TYPE FIRE 6-66-0012 Rev. 4
01 India U0000010091
HYDRANT Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
ANSI American National Standards Institute
FM Factory Mutual
IS Indian Standard
MS Mild Steel
UL Underwriters Laboratories

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2806 of 3884

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED STAND POST TYPE FIRE 6-66-0012 Rev. 4
1.112A cleave ) IA Govt Al Inde Undeddlong)
HYDRANT Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIAL 4
4.0 DESCRIPTION 4
5.0 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH 4
6.0 TESTING 4
7.0 PAINTING 5
8.0 MARKING 5
9.0 INSPECTION 5
10.0 VENDOR's DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENT 5
11.0 APPROVAL 5
ANNEXURE-I (SCOPE DRAWING FOR SUPPLY OF HYDRANTS) 6
Page 2807 of 3884

ei ÊNGINEERS
iajteg •■■•./ INDIA LIMITED STAND POST TYPE FIRE 6-66-0012 Rev. 4
IA Goo of India Undeltakmg)
HYDRANT Page 4 of 6
1.0 SCOPE
This standard lays down the requirements of codes and standards, type, shape, dimensions,
material and test for vertical stand post type fire hydrant (with or without pumper connection)
to be installed on fire water main. The Hydrant shall normally be supplied without pumper
connection unless otherwise specifically mentioned in the Data sheet/ Material Requisition.
IS: 902 Suction hose couplings for fire fighting purposes.

IS: 903 Fire hose delivery couplings, branch pipe.
IS: 5290 Specification for Landing Valves.
ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
3.0 MATERIAL
All material shall be as given in Job Specific Data Sheet provided along with this specification
in the Material Requisition.
4.0 DESCRIPTION
4.1 The hydrant shall be stand post type. The vertical post shall be of 100 mm diameter with two
horizontal hydrant arms, each 75 mm diameter, on which independent Landing valve shall be
fixed. Landing valve shall comply to IS: 5290, Type A.
4.2 Outlet of the landing valve shall be provided with instantaneous female coupling with blind
cap & chain as per IS 5290
4.3 For hydrant assembly with pumper connection, the vertical post shall have 100 mm outlet as
pumper connection and provided with a blind cap. The 100mm outlet shall have round male
threads, conforming to IS: 902 and blind cap shall be provided with four fixing lugs and 500
mm long SS-chain.
4.4 All flanges for landing valve connection shall have all dimensions conforming to
ANSI.B.16.5, 150 lbs rating, Flat Face, Slip On type. Base flange of stand post shall be as per
job specific Piping Material Class as mentioned in datasheet.
4.5 Job specific requirements shall be as per Data Sheet enclosed in Bid / Requisition document.
4.6 Refer Annexure-I for scope details for supply of Hydrants
5.0 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH
All parts shall have good workmanship and finish. All warps and sharp edges shall be
removed. The waterways shall have smooth finish.
6.0 TESTING
Each hydrant assembly shall be satisfactorily tested for water tightness, hydrostatic test and
flow test as per IS 5290.
Hydrant assembly with Landing valves closed shall be satisfactorily tested and proved water
tight, under a hydraulic pressure of 21.0 kg/cm 2. The pumper connection shall be kept closed
during testing in case the same is provided on hydrant assembly.
Page 2808 of 3884

fs~t idDleg
NIVR ereElge ■751,3■IOSSO
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goo of Indo Undeitaking)
STAND POST TYPE FIRE 6-66-0012 Rev. 4
HYDRANT Page 5 of 6
7.0 PAINTING
The stand post and its arms shall be painted as specified in Job Specific Data Sheet attached
with this specification.
8.0 MARKING
Each hydrant shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following:
a) Manufacturers name or trade mark.

b) Year of Manufacture.
c) Purchaser name.
d) BIS certification marking on landing valve and couplings.
9.0 INSPECTION
Owner's / EIL's authorized representative or as mentioned in data sheet shall have access at all
reasonable times to vendor's works where Stand Post Hydrants and Landing Valves are being
manufactured and/or tested. Vendor shall arrange for all tests and inspection facilities for
checking material, design and construction, hydraulic performance, workmanship, finish and
hydrostatic testing. Any shortcoming pointed out shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the
inspectors. All consumables i.e. water etc. shall be arranged by vendor at his own cost.
10.0 VENDOR's DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENT
Vendor shall furnish drawings for review, prior to fabrication of Hydrant assembly as per
Vendor Data Requirement.
11.0 APPROVAL
Vendor shall furnish valid BIS certificate approval letter.
Page 2809 of 3884

51/Zir 16i15 INDIA LIMITED STAND POST TYPE FIRE 6-66-0012 Rev. 4
1442A e`f ,Pre 451.344541, (A Govt of India Undettakingt
HYDRANT Page 6 of 6
ANNEXURE-I
(SCOPE DRAWING FOR SUPPLY OF HYDRANTS)
CAP AS PER ASTM A-105 ..AP AS PER ASTM A -"CD
ANSI B 16.5 ANSI 3 16.5
3" FLANGE AS PER 63 MM DELIVERY CUTLETS 3" FLANGE AS PER

63 NN DEUVERY CUTLETS
ANSI 816.5 1 50 it RATING WITH INSTANTANEOLS ANSI 1316.5 150 RATING
WITH INSTANTANEOUS 5.0. FF (ASTM A-105)
COUPLING \ 5.0. FF (ASTM A-1135) COUPLING
AS PER 15:9D3 AS PER 15.903
Ai
HYDRANT VALVE
(IS:5290-T"PE-A)
S5304 CAP AND CHAIN
,
4
Ijii II
HYDRANT VALVE
(IS:5290-TYPE-A)
55304 CAP AND CHAIN,
a
1 .1 I
,
waa
Till
ppp :
' 1 04" POST

4" POST FIRE FIGHT!
FIRE FIGHT!
VENDOR'S SCOPE OF SUPPLY 11 PBS (REFER DATASHEET) VENDOR'S SCOPE CF SUPPLY 111 PM (REFER DATASHEET;
4" FLANGE AS '-'ER

BY THEIR
4" FLANGE AS PER
PINS (REFER DATASHEET)
D •• Ai, PBS (REFER DATASHEET)
04" 150 L6TION 04" ISOLATION
VA V
VALVE LIN
TYP. DETAILS TYP. DETAILS

OF HYDRANT ASSEMBLY OF HYDRANT ASSEMBLY
WITHOUT PUMPER CONNECTION WITH PUMPER CONNECTION
4" PUMPER CONNECTION
04" POST
(PBS AS PER DATASHEETr-
FIRE FIGHTI LY
VENDOR'S SCOPE OF SUPPLY
55304 CAP AND CHAIN
B SS304 CAP AND CHAIN

4" FIANCE AS PER
VAL PINS (REFER DATASHEET)
TYP. DETAILS
OF HYDRANT ASSEMBLY
WITH PUMPER CONNECTION
(VIEW C - C )
Page 2810 of 3884

1511:4-zre ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
$figzir OW-eg INDIA LIMITED STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
1.41271 IA Govt of India Undertaong)
FOR FIRST AID HOSE REEL 6-66-0018 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 4
3114f1W *men tfAh lte fry

1-4-4-4r
FOR
FIRST AID HOSE REEL
GAURAV
4 26.06.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. GYAS RS RKT
SINGH
3 23.05.11 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC ALOK RKS RBB DM
2 12.01.06 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC SKC NK VDS VJN
1 21.11.96 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC NK PCS MMK A SONI
0 31.03.82 ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RB KP HVR RCPC

Standards Standards
Rev. C
Committee Bureau
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved By
Page 2811 of 3884

150-4:Ek ENGIEERS
N STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
seal INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-66-0018 Rev. 4
,..e,,29iwt1713.40.1) IA Govt of India Uncleflakong)
FIRST AID HOSE REEL
Page 2 of 4
ABBREVIATIONS:
IS Indian Standard

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright El L — All rights reserved
Page 2812 of 3884

,31faq_Je? LIMB STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
$1gz-ir 16104GS INDIA TED FOR 6-66-0018 Rev. 4
(A Gout of India undertakm
FIRST AID HOSE REEL
Page 3 of 4
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIAL, CONSTRUCTION AND TEST 4
4.0 SIZE 4
5.0 HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE 4
6.0 MARKING 4
9.0 APPROVAL 4
Page 2813 of 3884

15151ZIEg ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Igar ElOteg INDIA LIMITED
(wen netere ne sewn) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
FOR 6-66-0018 Rev. 4
FIRST AID HOSE REEL
Page 4 of 4
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements regarding material, constructional details and test for
Floor/Wall mounted First Aid Hose Reel, intended for installation within process units / buildings as
emergency fire fighting equipment.

IS : 884 First-Aid hose reel for fire-fighting.
NOTE: Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 MATERIAL, CONSTRUCTION AND TEST

Material, Construction, tests and all other requirements shall conform to IS: 884, Type-A Hose Reel,
except as mentioned in the Data Sheet of Hose Reel attached with Bids / Requisition.
4.0 SIZE
House reel tubing length shall be 40 m with internal bore 25 mm or as specified in data sheet.
5.0 HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE

5.1 First Aid hose reel shall be capable of discharging not less than 24 Ipm at the reel inlet pressure of
7 kg/cm2 g.
5.2 The horizontal range of water jet shall not be less than 6.0 m at the reel inlet pressure of 7 kg/cm2g.
6.0 MARKING
Each hose reel shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following information along with
Purchaser's name.
a) Manufacturer's name or Trade Mark

b) Year of Manufacture
c) Length and size of tube carried on hose reel.
d) Type of Reel.
e) BIS certification mark on house reel tubing

Owner's / EIL's authorized representative as mentioned in data sheet shall have access at all
reasonable times to vendor's works where Hose Reels are being manufactured and/or tested. Vendor
shall arrange for all tests and inspection facilities for checking material, design and construction,
hydraulic performance, workmanship, finish and hydrostatic testing. Any shortcoming pointed out
shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the inspectors. All consumables i.e. water etc. shall be arranged
by vendor at his own cost.

Vendor shall furnish drawings and data for review, prior to fabrication of Hydrant assembly as per
Vendor Data Requirement.
9.0 APPROVAL
Vendor shall furnish valid BIS certificate.
Format No. 8-00-0001-Fl Rev. 0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved
Page 2814 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
fof (A Goof of India Undertaking)
WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR
SINGLE BARREL TYPE (FIXED & Page 1 of 6
VARIABLE FLOW)
4-1 wi T*7 Trifia-{

fro.
1 -111ch fdrati Pr{ 47 LiRcikolPilo
5PM
-
FOR
SINGLE BARREL TYPE (FIXED &
VARIABLE FLOW)
\i■
5 26.06.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.

GAURAV
GYAS RS
.___ I4
KT
SINGH
JAY
4 21.01.13 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RC RBB DM
KUMAR
3 30.07.07 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RKS NK VDS VC
2 12.01.06 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC SKC NK VDS VJN
1 15.03.98 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RB PCS MMK A SONI

Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved By
Page 2815 of 3884

larEZET "Ift, ENGINEERS FOR
e- gW7 INDIA LIMITED 051 6-66-0027 Rev. 5
SINGLE BARREL TYPE ( FIXED & Page 2 of 6
VARIABLE FLOW )
Abbreviations:
FM Factory Mutual
If
Inch
IS Indian Standard
kg/cm2 Kilogram per Square Centimeter
lbs Pounds
m Meter
MS Mild Steel
mm Millimeter
m3 Cubic Meter
NB Nominal Bore
PVC Poly -Vinyl Chloride
SS Stainless Steel
UL Underwriters Laboratory
VdS Verband Der Sachversicherer

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2816 of 3884

laffazieift ENGINEERS FOR
$41gal EitAtg
eleveraaaJoom)
IOWA ,
w INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking) WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR
6-66-0027 Rev. 5
VARIABLE FLOW )
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 4
4.0 MATERIAL 4
5.0 HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE 5
6.0 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH 5
7.0 ANTICORROSIVE TREATMENT AND PAINTING 5
8.0 TESTING 5
9.0 ACCESSORIES 6
10.0 MARKING 6
11.0 INSPECTION 6
12.0 APPROVAL 6
Page 2817 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
Ogar 14/12r12:12a517 0,1,
INDIA LIMITED
Govt OI India Unden*ang) WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR
6-66-0027 Rev. 5
VARIABLE FLOW )
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements regarding Material, Design and
Construction, Workmanship and Finish, Anticorrosive Treatment, Performance requirements,
Testing, Painting, Accessories, Marking and Inspection for Single Barrel, Stand Post Type
Water cum Foam Monitor.
IS: 5 Colors For Ready Mix Paints and Enamels.

IS: 291 Machining Purposes- Specification.
IS: 1239-Part 1 MS Tubes, Tubulars and Other Wrought Steel Fittings-MS Tubes.
IS: 1239-Part 2 MS Tubes, Tubulars and Other Wrought Steel Fittings- Tubulars and Other
Wrought Steel Fittings.
IS: 3203 Methods of Testing Local Thickness of Electroplated Coatings.
ANSI B16.5- Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
3.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
3.1 Design and Construction of Water cum Foam Monitor shall be single barrel type with fixed
/variable flow and shall be UL / FM / Vds approved for discharge capacity as specified in data
sheet, and shall comply with Data Sheet attached with Bids / Requisition
3.2 The Monitor shall be self-locking type and manually operated by a single person, with Non
aspirating type Aqua Fog foam Nozzle.
3.3 Foam induction shall be by aqua powered foam inductor, (Jet Ratio Controller Pump) or self-
inducting through pick up tube as specified in data sheet.
The foam induction system by aqua powered foam inductor shall be listed by UL/ FM/ Vds.
Water operated foam proportioner shall be suitable for feeding foam concentrate from distance
of 60 meters. The inlet and outlet of proportioner shall be provided with 63-mm male and
female coupling. Foam induction hose of total 60m length shall be supplied along with end
couplings of SS304. Foam solution induction hose shall be Type B delivery hose (Non-
Percolating with elastomeric outer coating applied as reinforcement conforming IS 636) of
size 63 mm long with ends couplings.
Foam inductor shall be provided behind the air intake chamber of foam maker in Foam
Monitor. A flexible pick up tube of 3. length, having strainer at the inlet, shall be provided.
A foam concentrate valve shall be capable of inducing 3% to 6% foam compound.
3.4 Near the base flange a drain connection shall be provided with a 15 mm ('/2") NB drain valve
at the end of pipe. The drain pipe shall be long enough to drain water away from the base
flange.
4.0 MATERIAL
All material for different parts of Water cum Foam Monitor shall be as approved for UL / FM
/ Vds certification and the Water cum Foam Monitor assembly shall be supplied as per data
sheet enclosed with Bid / Requisition document. Any conflict between specifications and data
sheet, Data Sheet shall govern.
4.1 Pick up tube shall be made from PVC hose reinforced with high tensile steel wire helix
manufactured as per ASTM D1785 schedule 80. Pick up tube shall be 3m long with dip Pipe
made of SS316. Foam concentrate ball valve shall be of SS316.
Page 2818 of 3884

15traTiEq ENGINEERS FOR
OfWieg INDIA LIMITED 6-66-0027 Rev. 5
INIM ?VOW? 4513,70FA) IA Govt of indo Undertaking) WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR
VARIABLE FLOW )
5.0 HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE
FOAM MONITOR SINGLE BARREL TYPE
FLOW RATE Minimum Horizontal Ranges Minimum Vertical Ranges at 7

(US GPM) at 7 kg/cm2 pressure for kg/cm2 pressure for
Water (m) Foam (m) Water (m) Foam(m)
500GPM 50 45 17 15
750 GPM 52 50 17 15
1000GPM 60 55 20 18
2000 at 2000
GPM 80 75 25 22
Tablel
Note: The minimum horizontal & vertical ranges for water and foam jets shall be as specified
in Table 1 at 7 kg/cm2 pressure, with 30° & 45° nozzle angle respectively from horizontal
plane in still weather condition except if specifically specified in the data sheet attached with
the bid document / purchase document.
Monitor shall be tested for minimum two directions at 0 degrees and second reading at
opposite direction i.e. 180 degrees apart as specified above and average reading shall be
considered as horizontal throw of the monitor.
Vendor shall furnish the projectile curve for the monitor supplied showing horizontal and
vertical throw for foam and water at angles 30, 45, 60, 75 degrees nozzle angle from
horizontal plane for records with operational pressure at monitor base flange of 7/8/9/10 kg/
cm2/
5.5 Aqueous Film Forming Foam (AFFF) shall be used for testing of foam monitor for horizontal
and vertical throws as specified.
6.0 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH
6.1 All the parts shall have good workmanship and finish. All burrs and sharp edges shall be
removed. Particularly Water Way, Foam Way and Nozzle shall have smooth finish.
6.2 None of the joints shall be connected with permanent adhesive. No adhesive shall be used to
arrest leaks or locking joint movement in threaded joints.
7.0 ANTICORROSIVE TREATMENT AND PAINTING
7.1 Monitor's steel parts shall be painted with luminous fire red colour, conforming to IS: 5, shade
no.536, over 2 coats of Red Oxide Zinc Chromate primer or single coat of Aluminum paint.
Nozzle shall be Yellow Epoxy painted. Copper Alloy parts shall be polished.
8.0 TESTING
8.1 Monitor shall be tested to fulfill hydraulic performance requirements as per clause 5.0 above
and as per Data Sheet of Water cum Foam monitor attached with Bids / Requisition.
8.2 All the monitors shall be tested as follows:

Page 2819 of 3884

Ititr4zEg FOR
t
18fWeg
21MAF 4,9,
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking) WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR
6-66-0027 Rev. 6
VARIABLE FLOW )
The entire assembly shall be subjected to hydraulic pressure of 23 kg/cm 2 and horizontal
rotation shall be carried out 5 times and then vertical rotation up and down for 5 cycles for 5
minutes. During the test there shall be no leakage observed in any of the swiveled joints.
9.0 ACCESSORIES
9.1 The accessories shall include nozzle spanner.
10.0 MARKING
10.1 Each Monitor shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following:
(a) Manufacturer's name or trademark

(b) Year of manufacture
(c) Purchaser's name.
(d) Discharge Capacity in liters / minute.
(e) FM/UL/Vds listing marks.
11.0 INSPECTION
11.1 Owner's / EIL's authorized representative shall have access at all reasonable times to vendor's
works where Monitors are being manufactured and/or tested. Vendor shall arrange for all tests
and inspection facilities for checking material, design and construction, hydraulic
performance, workmanship, finish and hydrostatic testing.
11.2 Verification of all the relevant document at shop before dispatch of the monitor.
11.3 Any shortcomings pointed out shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the inspectors. All
consumables i.e. water and foam etc. shall be arranged by vendor at his own cost.
12.0 APPROVAL
12.1 Water cum foam monitor & nozzle along with foam induction mechanism shall be UL listed/
FM / Vds approved.
12.2 Vendor shall provide certified approved drawings / documents authenticated by UL / FM /

Vds as documentary evidence along with bids.
Page 2820 of 3884

t3i ENGINEERS FOR LANDING VALVE
sigeg Rift INDIA LIMITED
(OW?! etramr051070571) IA Govt a Inda Undeltaiong)
6-66-0035 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 4
cilrq Trriw fe-ikr
FOR
LANDING VALVE
4 21.09.16 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. BP DCB RS R.NANDA
3 23.05.11 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. ALOK RKS RBB DM
2 12.01.06 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC SKC NK VDS VJN
1 15.03.98 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RB PCS MMK A SONI

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 2821 of 3884

it ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Ogeir Rift
1711V77 elemle JR-4.1)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaktng) FOR LANDING VALVE 6-66-0035 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 4
Abbreviations:
ANSI : American National Standards Institute
IS Indian Standard
Members: Mr. JK Bhagchandani

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. SK Naskar
Mr. VK Panwar
Page 2822 of 3884

O elfaeiel ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Ogeji faffleg W INDIA LIMITED
laiton clecnW os..flao.O (A Govt of India Underialoo9) FOR LANDING VALVE 6-66-0035 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 4
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIAL AND FINISH 4
4.0 MARKING 4
5.0 INSPECTION 4
6.0 DRAWINGS 4
7.0 VENDOR DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENT 4
8.0 DATA SHEET REQUIREMENT 4
9.0 APPROVAL 4
Page 2823 of 3884

k31 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
INDIA LIMITED FOR LANDING VALVE 6-66-0035 Rev. 4
(aire <wage Ana:N.) (A Govt 0( India Undettaking)
Page 4 of 4
1.0 SCOPE
This specification describes the requirements and method of sampling and test for Landing Valve.

IS: 5290 Specification For Landing Valves.
ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings.
3.0 MATERIAL AND FINISH

3.1 The landing valve shall be of either Type A (single outlet) or Type B (double head with double outlet)
as per IS: 5290, as mentioned in the Data Sheet of Landing Valve attached with Bids / Requisition.
3.2 All material shall be as given in Job Specific Data Sheet provided along with this specification in the
Material Requisition.
3.3 Finish, performance requirements and marking shall be as per IS: 5290.
4.0 MARKING
Each landing valve shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following:
a) Manufacturers name or trade mark.

b) IS: 5290 on Landing Valve.
c) Year of Manufacture.
d) Purchaser name.
5.0 INSPECTION
Owner's / EIL's authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to vendor's works
where Landing Valves are being manufactured and/or tested. Vendor shall arrange for all tests and
inspection facilities for checking material, design and construction, hydraulic performance,
workmanship, finish and hydrostatic testing as per IS: 5290. Any shortcoming pointed out shall be
rectified to the satisfaction of the inspectors. All consumables i.e. water etc. shall be arranged by
vendor at his own cost.
6.0 DRAWINGS
Refer scope drawing enclosed in Bid / Requisition document.
7.0 VENDOR DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENT

Vendor shall furnish drawings for review, prior to fabrication of Landing Valves.
8.0 DATA SHEET REQUIREMENT

Vendor shall fill the relevant data in the Data Sheet provided along with this specification in the
Material requisition.
9.0 APPROVAL
Vendor shall furnish valid BIS certificate approval letter after award of Contract.
Page 2824 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
cif INDIA LIMITED 6-66-0047 Rev. 4
I ) (A Govt of India Undertaking) HOSE CABINET Page 1 of 5
*-1-44- Hvich Far,14-kil

HOSE CABINET
4 26.06.18 GAURAV
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. GYAS RS
SINGH
3 JAY
21.01.2013 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RC RBB DM
KUMAR
2 26.12.07 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. GAURAV PPC NK VC
1 20.06.97 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. NK PCS MMK A.SONI

ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.
0 31.03.82 RB HVR
RECOMPOSED IN AUG. 95
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved By
Page 2825 of 3884

15Mad
INDIA LJMITED FOR
1g7 fit5rg, IA Govt of India UndenakIng)
HOSE CABINET
6-66-0047 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
GI Galvanised Iron
IS Indian Standard
MS Mild Steel
mm Millimeter

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2826 of 3884

ISift:Eq(ft, ENGINEERS
Ogaf Piez voi INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-66-0047 Rev. 4
1.1171 mow onJaam) IA Govt of WM Undertaking)
HOSE CABINET Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 4
4.0 MATERIAL 5
5.0 PANTING 5
6.0 MARKING 5
7.0 TESTING 5
8.0 INSPECTION 5
Page 2827 of 3884

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

17.1RR eiTa57245■ 070,71, IA Govf of India Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the general requirements regarding the Design requirement,
Material, Construction, Painting and Marking of Hose cabinet and fire fighting equipments
contained in the cabinets.
1.2 The Hose cabinet shall be supplied along with all the fire fighting equipments contained in it.
IS: 5 Colors for Ready Mix Paints and Enamels

IS: 636 Non-Percolating flexible fire fighting delivery hose
IS: 903 Fire Hose Delivery Couplings, Branch Pipe, Nozzles and Nozzle Spanner
IS: 2871 Branch pipe, universal, for fire fighting purposes
NOTE: Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Hose cabinet shall be of two types, Type-I and Type-II, to accommodate delivery hose and jet
nozzle with branch pipe or universal branch pipe.
3.2 Type I Hose Cabinet
3.2.1 It shall be suitable to accommodate one Type B firefighting delivery hose (Reinforced rubber
lined, non-Percolating with elastomeric outer coating applied as reinforcement conforming IS
636) of size 63 mm 15 meter long with ends couplings, one jet nozzle with branch pipe or one
universal branch pipe.
3.2.2 It shall be capable of being mounted on wall. Necessary hangers and bracket for hose, nozzle
and branch pipe or universal branch pipe shall be provided, with the cabinet.
3.2.3 It shall be provided with single panel glass door
3.3 Type II Hose Cabinet
3.3.1 It shall be suitable to accommodate two Type B firefighting delivery hoses (Reinforced
rubber lined, non-Percolating with elastomeric outer coating applied as reinforcement
conforming IS 636) of size 63 mm, 15 meter long with end couplings, one jet nozzles with
branch pipe and one universal branch pipes.
3.3.2 It shall be of self-supporting type, suitable for outside installation. Necessary hangers and
brackets for hose, nozzle and branch pipe or universal branch pipe shall be provided within the
cabinet.
3.3.3 It hall be provided with double panel glass door.
3.4 Both the types shall be provided with handle type lock, a small recess to keep cabinet key
under glass cover, a small hammer secured to the cabinet with a chain to break key glass
cover.
Page 2828 of 3884

el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
OgeliWeg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-66-0047 Rev. 4

011i, eV-Mr, ,151, (A Goof of India Unclettalonm
4.0 MATERIAL
4.1 Cabinet shall be made Of 18 gauge MS sheet suitably welded with single/double MS door
frame glass covered. 3mm Glass with rubber gomet shall be securely fitted to the door frame
in a standard manner.
4.2 Door shall be provided with standard handle Mortise type lock.
4.3 Hammer shall be of MS with GI chain.
4.4 Suitable size angle iron posts shall be provided to support type II cabinet.
4.5 Delivery hose shall be either of the following type
a) Type B Reinforced rubber lined hose to I.S. 636
4.6 End couplings, jet nozzle and branch pipe shall conform to I.S. 903.
4.7 Universal branch pipe shall conform to I.S. 2871.
5.0 PAINTING
The hose cabinet shall be painted with 3 coats of anticorrosive fire red paint conforming to
shade no. 536 of IS: 5 from outside and white paint from inside. The paint shall conform to IS:
2932.
6.0 MARKING
6.1 Each cabinet shall be clearly and permanently marked with following.
a) The words Hose Cabinet-Type I or II

b) Instructions for use.
6.2 Each equipment in the cabinet shall be marked with BIS certification mark and purchaser's
name.
7.0 TESTING
All equipments being supplied with Hose Cabinet shall be tested as per relevant IS test
requirements.
8.0 INSPECTION
Owner's / EIL's authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to vendor's
works where Hose Cabinets and equipments being supplied with Hose Cabinet, are being
manufactured and/or tested. Vendor shall arrange for all tests and inspection facilities for
checking material, design and construction, hydraulic performance, workmanship, finish and
hydrostatic testing. Any shortcoming pointed out shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the
inspectors.
Vendor shall furnish drawings and data as per "Vendor's drawings and Data Requirements" for
information and records.
Page 2829 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR 50KG & 75KG. CAPACITY
Igar tifWleg INDIA LIMITED 6-66-0061 Rev. 4
INKref URON2 (A Scott of Mad undertaiong)
DRY CHEMICAL POWDER
EXTINGUISHER Page 1 of 5
50 Alito n9:11 75 *R11) kiTrffT *

ttil~l~l 41351 afrffumw -41 iiirich
FOR
50 KG. & 75 KG. CAPACITY DRY
CHEMICAL POWDER EXTINGUISHER
GAURAV
4 24.08.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. GYAS RS RKT
SINGH
3 06.07.10 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. AS RKS RBB ND
2 29.04.08 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. GAURAV RKS NK VC
1 25.6.99 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RC PCS MMK AS
0 18.1.93 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RB MMK RPB RNS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved By
Page 2830 of 3884

ENGINEERS 50KG & 75KG. CAPACITY DRY
II•DIA LIMITED 6-66-0061 Rev. 4
(A Govt of India Undertaking) CHEMICAL POWDER
Abbreviations:
DCP DRY CHEMICAL POWDER
IS INDIAN STANDARD
OISD OIL INDUSTRY SAFETY DIRECTORATE
PESO PETROLEUM EXPLOSIVE SAFETY ORGANISATION

(Formerly known as CCOE)

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Page 2831 of 3884

a faRegNW glithINDIA
ENGINEERS LIMITED 50KG & 75KG. CAPACITY DRY
5 6-66-0061 Rev. 4
iwzrr evarrallasam) IA Govt Inda undertaiong) CHEMICAL POWDER
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 4
4.0 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION 4
5.0 SAFETY CLIP 4
6.0 COLOUR AND MARKING 5
7.0 TESTING INSPECTION AND APPROVALS 5
8.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED FROM VENDOR 5
Page 2832 of 3884

ENGINEERS 50KG & 75KG. CAPACITY DRY
*igen iaales INDIA UMITED 6-66-0061 Rev. 4
iifErrt 2.107617 3,
10.1) (A Govl of Inda UndertaMtng) CHEMICAL POWDER
1.0 SCOPE
This specification lays down the requirements regarding material, shape, construction,
chemical charges, anticorrosive treatment, painting, test, safety, reliability and performance
for trolley mounted dry powder fire extinguishers of capacities 50 kg and 75 kg.
IS: 16018 Specification for performance and construction of wheeled fire

Extinguisher
OISD-GDN-115 Guidelines on Fire Fighting, Equipment and Appliances in Petroleum

Industry
Note: - Latest Edition of all standard documents shall be followed.
3.1 Fire extinguisher shall be as per IS: 16018.
3.2 The method of expulsion of dry powder shall be by means of pressure produced from
compressed or liquefied gas from gas cylinder attached to the body and suitably mounted on
trolley.
3.3 Propellant for cartridge operated wheeled fire extinguisher shall be CO2 gas type and having
maximum dew point of -55°C.Gas cartridge shall conform to IS 4947 in all aspects.
3.4 Chemical content for Dry chemical powder used as extinguishing media shall cover more than
50% of Mono ammonium phosphates of total composition of the extinguishing powder,
and shall comply with IS 14609, with maximum fill density as specified in IS: 16018.
3.5 The recommended capacity with filling tolerance/ Nominal charge of the dry powder
extinguisher when filled for the various capacities shall be as under:
Nominal Size (Kg) Dry Powder content (Kg. minimum.)
50 50 ±2% by mass
75 75±2% by mass
4.0 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
4.1 The material of for construction of various parts of Fire Extinguisher shall be as per
IS: 16018.
4.2 The body shall be cylindrical made up of welded Low carbon steel (Mild steel) / stainless
Steel. The welding of cylinder shall conforming to requirements of IS 9595.
4.3 All internal and external surface of the body shall be completely coated with an anti corrosive
Material. Thickness of the coating shall be measured as per IS: 3203. Testing of anti-corrosive
Treatment shall be complying with IS: 10658.
5.0 SAFETY CLIP
Safety Clip should be provided to prevent accidental actuation of piercing mechanism.
Page 2833 of 3884

OIPP_A ENGINEERS 50KG & 75KG. CAPACITY DRY
eirS INDIA LIMITED 6-66-0061 Rev. 4
imam maw =awn) IA Govt d India Undertaking) CHEMICAL POWDER
6.0 COLOUR AND MARKING
Each extinguisher shall be painted fire red confirming to shade No. 536 of IS 5. Each
extinguisher shall be clearly and permanently marked with the information specified in IS:
16018 along with the BIS certification mark, operating instruction and purchaser's name.
7.0 TESTING INSPECTION AND APPROVALS
Each fire extinguisher shall be complying with test requirement specified in IS: 16018
Wheeled fire extinguishers intended for use on class ABC fires shall be tested for 6A and
144B fire rating system as specified in IS 15683.
A clearance/approval certificate from the PESO, Nagpur shall be submitted for each gas
cartridge supplied with the DCP extinguishers.
EIL or its authorised representatives shall have access at all reasonable times to the
manufacturer's works where the extinguishers are being manufactured or being tested.
8.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED FROM VENDOR
8.1 The vendor shall furnish the following information along with the offer and for approval prior
to fabrication.
General arrangement of trolley mounted extinguisher showing plan and elevation.

Fabrication details and plate thickness calculation for pressure vessel.
Catalogues for all bought out items with Model No. If any.
8.2 Following information shall be furnished by the vendor along with the supply of extinguisher:
- Instruction book(s) - Instruction book(s) for guidance of the user including both the
operating and normal maintenance procedures shall be supplied. The book(s) shall
include an itemized and illustrated part list/spare parts list giving reference number of
all the wearing parts.
- Duly approved final drawings listed in clause 8.1.
A clearance/approval certificate from PESO as described in clause 7.
Page 2834 of 3884

k31 ENGNEERS FOR 6-66-0074 Rev. 3
$ig-af 02-dg
' INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha Undertak,ngi
FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
Page 1 of 9
31f19' tnq 4-11.1ch "F~T

FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
3 25.06.14 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. DCB cf.RBB SC
2 19.02.10 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. ALOK SKN RBB ND
1 15.07.98 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RC PCS MMK AS
0 13.09.88 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION NK NK HVR RCPC

Standards Standards
Comm ittee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 2835 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
fda- g INDIA LIMITED 6-66-0074 Rev. 3
Nr2,1 c.
1,051.2 71, .3,7057.1, IA Go, of Undertaking) FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
BIS Bureau of Indian Standard
EOT : Electric Overhead Travelling Crane
HOT : Hand operated Overhead Travelling Crane
NB Nominal Bore
NPSH : Net Positive Suction Head
OISD : Oil Industry Safety Directorate
P&ID : Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
TAC : Tariff Advisory Committee

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Page 2836 of 3884

..i ENGINEERS FOR
gaf Wes INDIA LIMITED 6-66-0074 Rev. 3
IA Govt of Indo Undertalfing) FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 DESIGN CODES AND STANDARDS 4
3.0 FIRE WATER STORAGE 4
4.0 PUMPING SYSTEM 5
5.0 HYDRANT SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION NET WORK 7
6.0 INSTRUMENTATION WORKS 8
7.0 ELECTRICAL WORKS 8
8.0 PAINTING 8
9.0 RADIOGRAPHY 9
10.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS 9
11.0 STATUTORY APPROVALS 9
Page 2837 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
eg
$fgU f&M— INDIA LIMITED 6-66-0074 Rev. 3
co,ortanJotrot, Itt Govt of mala Undertatongt FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
Page 4 of 9
1.0 SCOPE
This standard covers the technical requirements for design, supply fabrication, erection, testing and
commissioning of fire hydrant system for protection of various facilities in the plant area.
The hydrant system shall generally consist of following facilities:
a. Fire water storage.
b. Pumping system.
c. Fire water distribution network.
d. Controls for automatic operation of the system.
2.0 DESIGN CODES AND STANDARDS

a. Fire protection manual Part II (Hydrant System) of TAC.
b. IS Codes for fire fighting appliance and accessories.
c. Hydraulic institute guide lines.
d. OISD-116, 117.
3.0 FIRE WATER STORAGE

3.1 Basic Requirements
3.1.1 The total water requirement shall be stored in any of the following manner.
a. Minimum two above ground steel storage tanks covered or uncovered as per Job Data Sheet
each meeting half the total requirements.
b. A ground level RCC uncovered reservoir with attached sump and pump house for installing
horizontal centrifugal pumps with flooded suction. The reservoir shall have two equal
compartments.
c. An underground RCC uncovered reservoir and pump sump having two equal compartments,
with sump and pump house for installing vertical pumps.
3.1.2 The tank / reservoir shall be provided with manhole vent pipes, inlet pipe scour pipe and overflow
connections. The scour/overflow pipe shall be connected to the nearest drain.
3.1.3 The tank / reservoir shall have float type level indicator with sliding pointer and scale to indicate
the water level in the tank.
3.1.4 The design, construction, erection and testing of the reservoir shall be done as per drawings, design
data and specifications enclosed.
3.1.5 The length, breadth and depth of suction sump shall be decided with following considerations.
a. Number of pumps to be connected.
b. Pump capacity.
c. Minimum holding capacity should not be less than 5 minutes.
d. Pump NPSH requirements.
e. Pump submergence requirements.
f. Piping arrangement requirements.
g. To meet hydraulic institute requirements.
Page 2838 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
5Igw faW5,,enrt ces1 ,isnol
INDIA LIMITED
in GoN of Undertafongf FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
6-66-0074 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 9
3.1.6 The general arrangement showing the relative location of fire water storage and pumping facilities
shall be as per job drawings.
4.0 PUMPING SYSTEM

4.1 Basic Requirements
4.1.1 Pumps
Horizontal or Vertical Mains/Standby/Jockey pumps shall be provided as per Job Data Sheet.
Diesel driven and electric driven pumps shall be provided as per Job Data Sheet. Jockey pumps
shall be electric driven with emergency power supply. Electric driven pumps shall be fed from
separate Sub-Station through a dedicated cable trench as per TAC requirement. The pumps shall
start sequentially with pressure drop in the network. Jockey pumps shall keep the network
pressurized. The automatic sequential operation of main pumps shall be as per job P&ID. Diesel
engine shall be provided with battery start-up system.
4.1.2 Pump House Building
i) A pump house building shall be provided near the fire water storage to house the fire water
pumps.
ii) The pump house shall be sized to accommodate pumps, drives, pipe fittings and other
accessories required for pumping system and provide adequate rain protection to the
equipment and accessories. The pump house size shown in the bid drawings shall be
considered as min. requirement and may be increased by the bidder if required.
iii) The pump house shall be covered with RCC slab at top and enclosed all side with brick wall.
iv) Suitable arrangement shall be provided for drainage to nearby drain by gravity. The floor
shall be sloped towards the drain.
v) A monorail with chain pulley block of suitable capacity or HOT/EOT crane as required shall
be provided in the pump house longitudinally for maintenance purpose. Provision shall be
made to load the equipment from the pump house directly on a truck with the help of the
monorail and chain pulley block or HOT/EOT crane.
vi) The height of the pump house shall be decided such that sufficient clearance is available
when any equipment is being carried by chain pulley block over other pumps and drives in
the pump house.
vii) RCC cable trenches (covered steel trays in case of pumps mounted on sump slab) shall be
provided for Electrical and Instrumentation cabling in the pump house.
viii) The building shall be designed, constructed, and finished as per enclosed design and
construction specification. The selection of materials shall be done as per structural design
basis.
ix) The building shall be provided with adequate lighting as per enclosed design and
construction specifications.
4.1.3 Pump House Piping
i) Pump house piping shall be done in accordance with the piping and instrumentation drawing
and specification enclosed and also with all fittings, specials.
ii) Gate valves shall be provided Inside pump house and instruments shall be provided as
required. The piping detailing and layout shall be done as per sound engineering practice and
meeting requirements of TAC.
iii) The pumps shall be spaced with adequate clearance for operation and maintenance.
iv) All equipment shall be accessible for operation and maintenance. A clear space for walk way
of minimum 1.0m wide shall be available for easy access to all equipments, controls,
Page 2839 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
22-eg
>fr2R 2422,12 .7,4AM
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go. of India UndenakIngl FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
6-66-0074 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 9
instruments for operation, maintenance and repair etc. Necessary platforms, and ladders,
stair case shall be provided for approach to equipments, instruments and controls wherever
required.
v) Necessary covers, railings etc. for personnel safety shall be provided judiciously wherever
required.
vi) The pump house piping shall be done in such a way that flooded suction is available to the
pump as per TAC requirements. The layout shall meet the NPSH requirements of the pump.
vii) Adequate submergence shall be provided to prevent vortex formation on the suction inlet.
viii) The location and orientation of the pumps and their suction and discharge connection shall
be so planned as to meet hydraulic institute guidelines.
ix) The suction piping shall be detailed in such a way that there would be no possibility of any
air being trapped. For this reason eccentric reducers with flat side at top shall be used and
vertical loops shall be avoided. The water entry to pump nozzle shall be smooth and
uniform. The bends shall be minimised in the suction piping. Any bend should not be placed
immediately before the pump nozzle. If a bend in the suction piping is unavoidable, a
straight length of atleast four times the suction pipe diameter shall be provided after the
bend. Similar straight length shall be provided in case of inline strainers, valves etc. before
the pump nozzle.
x) Expansion bellows shall be provided on suction piping of 300MM NB or higher, wherever
required, as per P&ID.
xi) The pump suction should have a bell mouth entry. The bell mouth dia. shall be 1.5 to 1.8
times the dia. of suction pipe. The bottom clearance below the bell mouth shall be about half
the diameter of the bell mouth.
xii) The discharge side piping shall be detailed such that in case of sudden start and stop of pump
water hammer generated is taken care of.
xiii) Pipe supports shall be provided such that it shall be possible to remove any component of
pump, valves, strainers etc. without disturbing the rest of piping.
xiv) No loads should be transferred to the pump nozzles. Rigid supports shall be provided close
to the pump suction and discharge nozzles.
xv) All valves of dia. 8" and above size shall be provided with separate bottom supports so that
no load is transferred to the rest of the piping.
xvi) Fire water pumps and their drives shall conform to the enclosed specs, and data sheets. The
operator philosophy shall be as per piping and instrumentation diagram drawing.
4.1.4 Operators Room and Battery Room
An operator's room shall be provided within the pump house building. The operator room shall be
sized to accommodate the following facilities.
a. Seating requirements for two operators.
b. Control panel.
The operator room size shown in the bid drawings shall be considered only as a minimum
requirement. Vendor shall increase the same if required.
A battery room of adequate size shall be provided within the pump house for storing spare
batteries. The size of the battery room shown in drawing is min. requirement and may be increased
if required by the bidder.
Page 2840 of 3884

x71IIi1J~
~ ENGINEERS FOR
5gu£;125etvotrv .7,1721.1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Incha Unclertaitogf FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
6-66-0074 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 9
i) A laboratory sink with water supply connection a battery charger unit and exhaust fan shall
be provided in the battery room. Acid proof tiles shall be provided on flooring and upto 1.0m
height on wall on all sides.
ii) Overall building design shall be such that standard grid system for structural design can be
developed. The building shall be designed as per enclosed design specs.
iii) The control room and battery room bldg. shall be constructed of Brick wall and RCC roof
and cement concrete granolithic flooring. Necessary doors and windows shall be provided so
that natural ventilation and lighting area shall not be less than one tenth of the floor area.
iv) External brick wall shall be min. 250 mm brick and intemal partition walls shall be 1/2 brick
thick.
v) The building shall be provided with dry distemper and white wash finished on inside
surfaces and weather proof snowcem wash on external surface.
vi) The plaster on intemal walls shall be minimum 12 mm thick for fair surface and 15 mm
thick for rough surface in cement mortar 1:6. Plaster on external walls shall be minimum
18mm thick in cement mortar 1:6.
vii) RCC roof slab of the building shall be treated with a six layer self finished bitumen felt
water proofing treatment over cement concrete slab in scope and finish with Pea gravel or
alternative water proofing of approved type.
viii) All windows and ventilators shall be conforming to IS: 1038 or IS: 1361 or 1081 with min
4mm thick glass.
ix) Ventilator shall be provided with bird mesh of suitable design.
x) All doors shall be min. 1.0m wide and 2.1m high with teak wood frame and panel/flush
doors shutters. Toilet doors shall be 0.75m wide and 2.1m high. The sizes of doors shall be
decided as per dimensions of critical equipment or panel.
xi) Adequate lighting shall be provided as per enclosed design and construction specifications.
The spillage from battery room shall be treated in neutralisation pit before disposal into nearest
storm water drain.
5.0 HYDRANT SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION NET WORK

5.1 System Design
5.1.1 The hydrant system has been envisaged to protect various hazardous and non hazardous facilities
as per layout drawing.
5.1.2 Hydrants shall be placed around process units/ tankages/ spheres area @30 m of perimeter.
Hydrants shall be placed @45 m c/c around utilities. Adequate coverage of equipments inside unit,
utilities, offsite shall be ensured.
5.1.3 Water cum foam monitors shall be provided around hydrocarbon storage tanks. Long range
monitors shall be provided to adequately cover the area at ground Level and higher elevations.
Isolation valves shall be provided in the network considering maintenance/isolation of network.
5.1.4 The fire water network of carbon steel as per Piping material specification shall be buried around
process units, pressurized storages and under road crossings. The network shall be above ground at
all other places on concrete sleepers. The fire water piping shall be cement lined carbon steel (As
per PMS) for sea water service.
5.1.5 The hydrant system net work sizing and pump house piping sizing shall be excluded from the
scope of bidder. This shall be based on single fire or two major fires to be fought simultaneously as
per complex requirement. This data is made available to the bidder in the Fire water layout
drawing and pump house and storage P&ID drawing. The bidder shall follow this data for
development of the piping layout for execution purpose.
Page 2841 of 3884

tll ENGINEERS FOR
$fg-ar22-eg INDIA LIMITED
Govt of Incha Underta.g) FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
6-66-0074 Rev. 3
Page 8 of 9
5.2 System Testing

The bidder shall arrange to demonstrate the availability of water as per design flow and required
pressure at the farthest end and major water consuming locations as per design requirements.
The bidder shall design the operation of the pumping system as mentioned in the drawing and
specifications. The operation of the pumps shall be demonstrated by the bidder for automatic
operation system conditions.
The system shall be deemed to be complete after the above tests are conducted to the satisfaction
of the owner by the bidder.
5.3 Construction Requirements
The fire water lines shall be generally laid above ground except around process units, road
crossings or at other places indicated in the drawings, in accordance with tender specifications.
The above ground line shall be laid on RCC pipe sleepers. The clearance between the
bottom of pipe and the finished grade level shall be kept between 300mm & 500mm. Necessary
expansion Ioops shall be provided on fire water line to take care of thermal stresses.
The underground pipes shall be provided with tape coating as per the specifications. The
excavation, backfilling, laying etc. for underground pipes shall be as per relevant specifications.
In open areas a minimum clear cover of 1.0m shall be provided above the buried line. At road
crossings a minimum of 1500mm (between road top and pipe top levels) shall be provided. NP4
class RCC pipe sleeves of one higher size than the fire water pipe shall be provided at road
crossings if required due to non-availability of required minimum cover or due to any other reason.
Fire water lines under RCC paved areas shall be laid in RCC pipe trenches filled with sand and
tape coated with removable covers. The width of the trench shall be adequate to permit
accessibility for installation and maintenance etc.
The necessary isolation valves, hydrants, monitors, and blind flanges etc. shall be provided on the
fire water lines as shown in the layout drawing. The valves and blind flanged ends of underground
water lines shall be installed in pits as per the drawing. The installation of hydrants and monitors
etc. shall also be as per the relevant drawing.
The fire water connections to various facilities as indicated in the drawings shall be provided from
the fire hydrant network.
The complete water distribution network shall be tested at hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times design
pressure for a period of at least 4 hours. The procedure and other details of testing shall be as per
the specifications.
The testing of all other items/equipment systems shall be as per relevant specifications.
6.0 INSTRUMENTATION WORKS

A11 instrumentation works for control and auto operation shall be done as shown in the piping and
instrumentation diagram and enclosed specifications for instrumentation works. Plant air and
instrument air as required shall be supplied to contractor at the battery limit.
Restricted Orifice shall be as per TAC requirement.
7.0 ELECTRICAL WORKS

All electrical works shall be done in accordance with enclosed specification for electrical works,
and inputs as per battery limit parameters.
8.0 PAINTING
The above ground fire water piping shall be painted with fire red paint conforming to shade No.
536 of IS: 5 as per job painting specification. All other equipment and structures shall be painted in
accordance with relevant specifications.
Page 2842 of 3884

ENGINEEFZS FOR
fg-ar 2fàj-g
cwcort of,afoo.
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govf of InO. UndertaM,ogj FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
6-66-0074 Rev. 3
Page 9 of 9
9.0 RADIOGRAPHY
Vendor shall perform radiographic inspection of all types of piping joints subject to following
scope including providing all necessary equipments and whatsoever else required to perform the
work as per specification and instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
At least 10% of all welded joints shall be radiographed and shall be found in order. At least 50% of
welded joints selected for radiography shall be field joints.
10.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS

The drawings enclosed with the tender document are for tender purpose only and are indicative of
general requirements and scope of work.
Contractor shall prepare detailed drawings and calculations to explain all salient features of their
design and submit along with their offer failing which the offer shall be liable for rejection.
Final construction shall be done as per approved construction drawings released during course of
execution of the work to be prepared by the contractor and approved by owner/EIL.
The cost of such design, calculation, documents and drawings to be furnished shall be included in
the price quoted for the work. The term `drawing' in the detailed specification shall imply the
drawing prepared by the contractor and approved by EIL.
Advance certified final drawings/calculation submitted by the Contractor shall be reviewed by
Owner/EIL. During such review, the Engineer-in-Charge may suggest certain comments
necessitating some modification in these documents. The contractor shall incorporate all such
modifications.
11.0 STATUTORY APPROVALS

Documents and drawings as required by TAC accredited agency complete in all respects shall be
prepared and submitted by the Contractor well ahead of time so that the actual
construction/commissioning of the work is not delayed for want of the approval/inspection by the
concerned authorities. The bidder shall give assistance and co-operation to the inspection
authorities for inspection work at various stages.
Any change/addition required to be made to meet the requirements of the statutory authorities shall
be carried out by the Contractor. The inspection and acceptance of the work by statutory
authorities shall, however, not absolve the Contractor from any of these responsibilities under this
contract.
Page 2843 of 3884

STANDARD No.
INGNIRS ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS
41411MONDIALWITED (A Govt. of India Undertaking) AND EQPT. SYMBOLS
7-65-0001 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 4
ABBREVIATIONS
ABD AMINE BLOW DOWN HP, HORSE POWER
API AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE HS HOSE STATION
ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD INSTITUTE HPP HIGH POINT OF PAVEMENT
AWWA AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION ID INSIDE DIAMETER
BC BOX CULVERT INST INSTRUMENT
BCR BEARING COOLING RETURN
INV INVERT
BE BEVEL END
IRC INSTRUMENT CABLE ROAD CROSSING
BF BLIND FLANGE
MDS MECHANICAL DATA SHEET
BL BED LEVEL MK MARK
BOP BOTTOM OF PIPE
MR MATERIAL REQUISITION
BOTT. EL BOTTOM ELEVATION(CABLE DUCT ETC
CBD CLOSE BLOW DOWN MTO MATERIAL TAKE OFF
CI CAST IRON MS MILD STEEL
C/C CENTRE TO CENTRE MH MANHOLE
CL OR c CENTRE LINE NGL NATURAL GROUND LEVEL
CONC.RED CONCENTRIC REDUCER OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER
CONC CONCRETE OHT OVERHEAD TANK
OWS OILY WATER SEWER
CPLG COUPLING PC PIPE CULVERT
CS CARBON STEEL
PDS PROCESS DATA SHEET
CONN CONNECTION PE PLAIN END
CONT CONTINUATION PR PURCHASE REQUISITION
CRWS CONTAMINATED RAIN WATER SEWER PWS PROCESS WASTE SEWER
CW CONSTRUCTION WATER/CARRIAGE WAY PWB PIPE WAY BRIDGE
CWPH COOLING WATER PUMP HOUSE RCC REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE
CWS CAUSTIC WASTE SEWER R RADIUS
COL COLUMN RF RAISED FACE
DIA DIAMETER REF REFERENCE
RW ROAD WAY
DWG DRAWING
SO SLIP ON
DISCH. DISCHARGE SOR SCHEDULE OF RATES
DS SANITARY SEWER SS STORM SEWER
ETP EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT STD STANDARD
ECC ECCENTRIC
SCRC STREET CABLE ROAD CROSSING
EL ELEVATION STN STATION
ERC ELECTRIC CABLE ROAD CROSSING SWS SANITARY WASTE SEWER
EW&SS EYE WASH & SAFETY SHOWER TEMP TEMPERATURE
FC R FOR CONTINUATION REFER TOS TOP OF SLEEPER
TYP TYPICAL
FF FLAT FACE
TWDK TEMPORARY DRINKING WATER
FGL FINISHED GROUND LEVEL
WCS COOLING WATER SUPPLY
F TO F FACE TO FACE
WCR COOLING WATER RETURN
FFL FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL
WDK DRINKING WATER
FLGD. FLANGED
WF FIRE WATER
FDN FOUNDATION
WR RAW WATER
G LV GALVANISED
WH HORTICULTURE WATER
GT GALVANISED BLACK STEEL TUBE
WT TREATED WATER
GR GROUND/GRADE WF FILTERED WATER
HC HOSE COUPLING WWS WASTE WATER SYSTEM
4 06.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD WCS f7RKS RS RKT
3 01.10.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SKP RKS/RBB NK ND
No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Convrinht Fll - All rights reserver
Page 2844 of 3884
STANDARD No.
efilif
far seENONEERS ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS
7-65-0001 Rev. 4
liae leggligreleaggin) (A Govt. of India Undertaking) AND EQPT. SYMBOLS
Page 2 of 4
LEGENDS
O NATURAL GROUND
LEVEL
• FINISHED GROUND
LEVEL
ROAD TOP LEVEL/
BOX CULVERT
REPRESENTATION
ON AREA
PAVEMENT TOP LEVEL DRAWING
FINISHED FLOOR S.NO.

LEVEL OF BUILDING TYPE
BOX CULVERT
CENTRE LINE
LAND AC QUISTION
LIMIT ERC —ELELCTRIC CABLE
3x4 ROAD CROSSING
COMPOUND WALL NO.OF PIPE IN

EACH LAYER
LAYERS
BATTERY LIMIT
MATCHING LINE
R. C .0 . CABLE
TRENCH
RO -A ROAD —A REPRESENTATION I B OTT. EL
AD ON LAYOUTS W= — — —
BURIED CABLE
ROAD —A REPRESENTATION REF.
TRENCH
IN AREA DRAWINGS LINE D =DEPTH
1W= W=WIDTH
D=
HIGHER EDGE
III II SIDE SLOPE
LOWER EDGE
TRAPEZOIDAL DITCH
iLBL 11' REPRESENTATION ON
1 1 1 1 1 1 2
AREA DRAWING S.NO. PIPEWAY BRIDGE
BL TYPE- -- RECTANGULAR DITCH PWB-1X2 0-10
REPRESENTATION ON
AREA DRAWING SPAN
TRAPEZOIDAL DITCH NO.OF SPAN
REPRESENTATION ON PIPEWAY
(\-BL BRIDGE
LAYOUT DRAWING
RECTANGULAR DITCH
—BL REPRESENTATION ON
TYPE---
LAYOUT DRG.
PIPE SLEEVES
BL BL PIPE CULVERT BOX
CULVERT REPRESENTATION
PC/BC--- ON LAYOUT DRG.
CW 2 CONSTRUCTION WATER
PIPE LINE
PIPE CULVERT WT TREATED WATER

2
REPRESENTATION PIPE LINE
ON AREA DRAWING
PC-1X350-10 TWDK TEMPORARY DRINKING
PIPE DIA. WATER PIPE LINE
SINGLE PIPE DRINKING WATER
PIPE CULVERT PIPE LINE
4 06.09.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
3 01.10.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn 8-00-0001-F4 RFIV Convrinht Fll - All rinhts resArver
Page 2845 of 3884
STANDARD No.
effikaAdik ENGINEERS ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS
dear riPC. WINDIA LIMITE) 7-65-0001 Rev. 4
IVIIMMOINIMINIAM) (A Govt. of India Undertaking) AND EQPT. SYMBOLS
Page 3 of 4
WCS COOLING WATER 3 45° BEND

SUPPLY PIPE TURNED DOWN
COOLING WATER 0 0
WCR
RETURN PIPE
WF
FIRE WATER PIPE
LINE CB-2-16
CATCH BASIN
WH HORTICULTURE WATER S.NO .
PIPE LINE
WS SERVICE WATER
PIPE LINE CATCH BASIN
0-----SS
STORM SEWER PIPE INVERT LEVEL
C) INV
00- --DS SANITARY WATER SANITARY SEWER

SEWER 0- -
r-MHS MANHOLE
0----OWS/PWS OILY WASTE SEWER/ OILY/PROCESS

PROCESS WASTE SEWER MHO/MHP SEWER MANHOLE
0-- --- CTBD COOLING. TOWER ACIDIC SEWER

BLOW DOWN MHAC MANHOLE
0-- - --ACID ALKALI SEWER

ACIDIC SEWER
MHAL MANHOLE
CTBD SEWER
ALKALI SEWER
MHBD MANHOLE
0____Cl SANITARY z SANITARY PUMPING CHEMICAL SEWER

2
PUMPING MAIN MHC MANHOLE
GATE VALVE CIRCULAR MANHOLE
GLOBE VALVE
INVERT LEV. 'A'
INF BUTTERFLY VALVE

C —150-0_ CLEAN OUT
CHECK VALVE INVT.LEV. 'A'
DIA. OF PIPE
FLOAT VALVE CLEAN OUT
PIPE WITH FLANGED <—A— — — 0— — — FUNNEL FOR STORAGE

END u\ TANK DRAIN
2 II BLIND FLANGED END RECTANGULAR SEALED

MANHOLE
(SINGLE
VALVE PIT IN
COMPARTMENT)
TYPE PIPE LINE
90° BEND
RECTANGULAR SEALED
(TURNED UP) MANHOLE
(DOUBLE
90° BEND
COMPARTMENT)
(TURNED DOWN)
45° BEND
C- (TURNED UP) C SAND TRAP
BL— —
4 06.09.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD a/tS to'RKS RS

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn 8-00-0001-F4 RAV 0 Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts ranarvar
Page 2846 of 3884
STANDARD No.
ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS
digMeNDIA LIMITED 7-65-0001 Rev. 4
(A Govt. of India Undertaking) AND EQPT. SYMBOLS
Page 4 of 4
WF WATER MONITOR FOR

a--
FOR FIRE WATER SYST.
1 a_ Ce/— SEALED MANHOLE
(CIRCULAR)
fF WF FOAM MONITOR FOR
FOR FIRE WATER SYST.
TRIPPLE VALVE PIT WF DOUBLE HEADED

(VALVE PITS OUTSIDE FIRE HYDRANT
2 TANKFARM AREA AWAY FROM HEADER
FOR DRAINAGE)
WF FIRE HOSE COUPLING

INSIDE
II--- ---
z 2
SEPTIC TANK
ST—I-10 F- EARTHEN DYKE
S.NO.
TYPE
SEPTIC TANK TOP OF DYKE
RAILWAY TRACK
111111111 REPRESENTATION ON
LAYOUT
SOAK PIT
RAILWAY TRACK
TRCK
REPRESENTATION ON
AREA DWG.
171 GULLY TRAP

GT PIPE RACK
GATE
BARBED WIRE FENCING EQPT. SYMBOLS
HC HOSE CABINET
CHAIN LINK FENCING
o❖.. TYPE R.C.C. PAVEMENT HR HOSE REEL
FP \W=1000
FOOTPATH 1000 MM DAV
DELUGE VALVE ASSEMBLY
W=WIDTH OF FOOTPATH
SLIDING SLEEPER PUMP (HORIZONTAL)
ANCHOR SLEEPER DE PUMP VERTICAL

a) ELECT. DRIVE
GUIDE SLEEPER B) DEISEL DRIVE
JUMP OVER SLEEPER
WF FIRE HYDRANT LONGRANGE WATER

SINGLE HEADED MONITOR
FIRE HYDRANT REMOTE CONTROLLED

I. WF
DOUBLE HEADED LONG RANGE WATER/
COME FOAM ON ELEVATED
PLATFORM
4 06.09.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD OVCS RKS RS RKTft,M24161
No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn R-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 ennvrinht Fll - All rinhts reserver
Page 2847 of 3884
NOTES:-
OUT OF 4mm
THK. M.S SHEET 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
OF DIA. 150 VIEW-1
[(d+30) (n ROWS)+1101 6 2x25 50 REAR 2. CONDUIT MATERIAL P.V.C. PIPES OF NOM. OUT SIDE PIPE
6 WELD DIA. 0110, 0160 OR 0210 AS PER LAYOUT PLAN.
[(d+30) (m LAYERS)+140] I 0
0 *e • " 0 3. PIPES SHALL CONFIRM TO IS:4985 CLASS-I AND EMBEDDED
150 FGL. IN PLAIN CEMENT CONCRETE.
RCC 0
0 . ij
.7 26 ELECTRICAL if) 4. BACK FILLING WITH ROAD MATERIAL SHALL BE DONE IN 150MM
CABLE 5 THICK LAYERS, WELL WATERED AND COMPACTED AS PER ROAD
ROAD CROSSING 016 BAR CI) SPECIFICATION.
REFERENCE LEVEL ERC...(NO. AS 1.61
(REF. G.C. AREA DWG.) TOP OF ERC, s( 5. IN CASE CABLE CROSSING IS REQUIRED TO CROSS THE OPEN
el LAYOUT DWG. DITCHES ON EITHER SIDE, AS SHOWN IN STD.N0.7-51-0322,
o . • CONCRETE BLOCK
• THE LENGTH AND THE LEVEL OF CABLE CROSSING SHALL BE
DECIDED CLEARING THE SERVICES ALONG ROAD SIDE.
d/2 d/2 I 1701 10r1 01000 CSC
6. CABLE CROSSING INDICATOR MADE OF 4mm THICK MILD STEEL
LEGEND:- r 30 (TYP) PLATE AS PER IS: 2062, ENAMEL PAINTED IN JADE GREEN
d - OUTER DIA OF PIPE BACKGROUND ON BOTH SIDES WITH WHITE LETTERING.
m - No. OF LAYERS SECTION Y-Y VIEW-1 DETAILS OF 7. THE SHAPE OF PVC REMOVABLE TYPE CAP AS SHOWN IS INDICATIVE.
n - No. OF ROWS (SEE NOTE-6) CABLE CROSSING INDICATOR 8. PVC PIPES WILL BE TIED WITH SUPPORTING 10 BARS AND 16 SWG
BINDING WIRE AT 0 1000C/C.
9. REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE OF GRADE Fe500 TMT BAR CONFIRMING TO IS: 1786.
REFERENCE LEVEL 'B
REFERENCE LEVEL 'A' o REFERENCE LEVEL 'B' REFERENCE LEVEL 'A' 0 GENERALLY SAME AS "A"
(REF. G.0 AREA DWG.) .,1
7 CABLE CROSSING REF. GEN. CIVIL N CASE DIFFERENT
(GENERALLY SAME AS "A"
INDICATOR IN CASE DIFFERENT AREA DWG.) 01 REFER GEN.CIVIL AllEA DWG.)
cal REFER G.0 AREA AG.) FINISHED GRADE LEVEL
200 FINISHED GRADE LEVEL >— =
CABLE TRENCH
• • ••••••• • •
PVC PIPE LAYERS PVC PIPE LAYERS

>J >-i
SECTION X-X SECTION X-X
(APPLICABLE FOR ERC & IRC) (APPLICABLE FOR SCRC)
0 0 HOLE TO BE MADE FOR

0 0 PASSING THE
ERC IRC NO. --- 1:c REF. COORDINATE SCRC NO. --- cc REF. COORDINATE GALVANISED WIRE
m LAYERS OF n CONDUITS 0 -- m LAYERS OF n CONDUITS 0 --
0 0 PVC REMOVABLE TYPE CAP
LEVEL-A LEVEL-B LEVEL-A (S
LEVEL-B (REFER NOTE-7)
1111:iAPPz
X X
REF. LINE REF. LINE

TEMPORARY GALVANISED WIRE 2.5MM
DIA.(EXTENDED ABOUT 1M)
FOR PULLING CABLES LATER.
SLEEVE END PLUGGING DETAIL

0. 0.
PLAN PLAN
(REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.) (REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.)
S
4 25.07.14 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD HV SC STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
ei 3 19.05.09 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD SK RC/RKS NK ND CABLE CROSSING UNDER ROAD
7-65-0006 Rev. 4
ligaf faRes w INDIA LIMITED
raireff eiecorea51.54sr.rO (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Rev.
Date Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
(P.V.C. PIPES)
Page 1 of 1
No. Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2848 of 3884
STANDARD No.
vallitadmi ErslarsEERs PIPE SLEEVE DETAIL 7-65-0008 Rev. 4
dear Ell5teuwINDIA UNWED
monmamvsmmm CovL of We Undwhitip)
Page 1 of 1
PIPE 0 AS ON AREA DRG

B.O.P....
rr
cv
z .
300
AS INDICATED ON AREA DRG AS INDICATED ON AREA DRG
SECTION - A A ---B.O.P---- SPEC---

0---B.O.P---- SPEC---
0---B.O.P---- SPEC--
TABLE OF SLEEVE
BARE PIPE SIZE OR OUTER
0OF INSULATION IN CASE SLEEVE PIPE
SIZE
OF INSULATED PIPE
1 1 /2" 3"
2" 4"
3" 4" PLAN
4" 6"
6" 8"
REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.
8" 10"
10" 12"
12" 14"
14" 16"
16" 18"
18" 20"
20" 22"
22" 24"
24" 30" CASE-I BARE PIPE
NO INSULATION
SLEEVE
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. GUIDE AS PER PIPING
2. MOC FOR PIPE SLEEVES SHALL BE AS PER STANDARD
APPROVED DESIGN BASIS.
3. C.S. PIPE SLEEVES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH
CORROSION PROTECTION COATING.
4. PIPE SLEEVES WITH INADEQUATE CLEAR COVER
SHALL BE ENCASED AS PER EIL STD. NO. 7-65-0213.
5. ENDS OF THE PIPE SLEEVES SHALL BE PLUGGED
WITH BITUMEN IMPREGNATED MINERAL WOOL
CASE - II INSULATED PIPE
AL
4 08.06.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD Anil •••K RS RICE
3 05.07.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD Anil RC RBB DM
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 - 00- 0001 - F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2849 of 3884

OUT OF 4mm
THK. M.S PLATE NOTES:-
OF DIA. 150 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
2x25(50)/ REAR STAGGERED COLLARS
WELD (SEE NOTE-4) A RCC PIPE CENTRE LINE 2. ALL RCC PIPES SHALL CONFORM TO IS:458 CLASS NP-2
A JOINED BY RCC COLLARS IN CEMENT MORTAR 1:2 AND
ELECTRICAL
CABLE SPAM -I EMBEDED IN PLAIN CEMENT CONC.
3. BACKFILLING WITH ROAD MATERIAL SHALL BE DONE IN
ROAD CROSSING
ERC...(NO. AS
Vikrtre .11
_irgr
L 150MM THICK LAYERS, WELL WATERED AND COMPACTED
AS PER ROAD SPECIFICATION.
TOP OF ERC, LAYOUT DWG.
CONCRETE BLOCK mit
iffieLIMS - 4. ALL CONC. PIPES SHALL BE LAID WITH STAGGERED COLLARS.
riiigiii 5. IN CASE CABLE CROSSING IS REQUIRED TO CROSS THE OPEN
DITCHES ON EITHER SIDE, AS SHOWN IN STD.N0.7-51-0321,
EMTAIM THE LENGTH AND THE LEVEL OF CABLE CROSSING SHALL BE
DECIDED CLEARING THE SERVICES ALONG ROAD SIDE.
PCC M20
6. CABLE CROSSING INDICATOR MADE OF 4mm THICK MILD STEEL
DETAILS OF VIEW-1 RCC PIPE JOINT DETAILS (TYP) PLATE SHALL BE OF GRADE E250 AS PER IS: 2062, ENAMEL
(SEE NOTE-6) PAINTED IN JADE GREEN BACKGROUND ON BOTH SIDES WITH
CABLE CROSSING INDICATOR WHITE LETTERING.
REFERENCE LEVEL 'B'
0 (GENERALLY SAME AS "A" TABLE FOR PIPE SPACING
ce
IN CASE DIFFERENT,
REF. GEN. CIVIL INSIDE PIPE DIA, Si S2 REMARKS
REFERENCE LEVEL 'A' 41 REFERENCE LEVEL 'B' REFERENCE LEVEL 'A' ce AREA DWG.)
7REF . GEN. CIVIL AREA DWG) CABLE CROSSING (REF. GEN. CIVIL
d (mm) (mm) (mm)
--(GENERALLY SAME AS "A" FGL
INDICATOR N CASE DIFFERENT AREA DWG.) 0 100 150 225 COLLAR STAGGERED
200 (TYP) REFER GEN.CIVIL AREA DWG.)
FGL FGL 150 175 275 REFER NOTE-4
FGL ° >—
=
200 200 300
CABLE TRENCH
LEGEND:
51 SPACING BETWEEN BLOCK SIDE & PIPE
RCC PIPE LAYERS RCC PIPE LAYERS S2 SPACING BETWEEN CENTRE LINE OF TWO PIPES
>4J d NOMINAL(INNER) DIA. OF PIPE
D DEPTH OF CONC. BLOCK
SECTION X—X SECTION X—X W WIDTH OF CONC. BLOCK
FGL FINISHED GRADE LEVEL
(APPLICABLE FOR ERC & IRC) (APPLICABLE FOR SCRC)
ERC NO. RCC PIPE

m LAYERS OF n PIPES 0 -- 0
REF. COORDINATE CLASS NP-2
0
LEVEL—A VE PCC M20
REF. LINE
X
111111011
•;!;!;:; MIME MI 1•1111•11W■NM MI/ ;:;!;!■1
):•.:•:t MIN= •
CAULKING SPACE
111111111i REF.GEN. CIVIL AREA DWG) TEMPORARY GALVANISED WIRE 2.5MM
DIA.(EXTENDED ABOUT 1M)
FOR PULLING CABLES LATER
INDICATED ON AREA DRG.
SEE NOTE No. 5
PLAN SECTION Y-Y(TYP.) SLEEVE END PLUGGING DETAIL

(REPRESENTATION ON AREA DWG.)
4 05.06.14 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD RB RKS B STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS 3 02.02.10 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SKP RKS RBB ND CABLE CROSSING UNDER ROAD
$1gzir faiZs
(igen eirmre 1351.540)4.0
INDIA LIMITED
Rev.
Date Purpose
Convenor Chairman (RCC PIPES)
7-65-0009 Rev. 4
No. by by Page 1 of 1
Approved by
Page 2850 of 3884

CW=5500 OR 7000
-
CW= 5500 OR 7000
CW= 5500O R 7000

CD
CD
U)
12000+CW/2 if)
II
THIS REDUCTION IS POSSIBLE I CW=5500 OR 7000

LIKEWISE FOR ANY OTHER
CARRIAGE WAY AS REQUIRED
CASE — 1
CW=4000
oX CASE — 2
0
LEGENDS:—
MM MILLIMETRE
M METRE
CW CARRIAGE WAY
/0t(
NOTES:-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM UNLESS STATED OTHER WISE.
2. GENERALLY THE RADII OF CURVES AT CROSSING SHALL BE AS GIVEN IN
THIS DRAWING AS EXPLAINED BELOW.
3. , MINIMUM RADII OF CURVES FOR ROADS WITH CW=4.OM TAKING OFF FROM
ALL OTHER ROADS SHALL BE 8M
4. MINIMUM RADII OF CURVES FOR ROADS WITH CW 4.0M AND 7.0M
I\ SHALL BE 12M AND FOR CW 10.5 & 16.0M SHALL BE 15M.
S
j
5. RADII OF CURVES FOR APPROACH ROADS TO BUILDINGS AND OTHERS AREAS
MAY BE REDUCED AS PER SERVICE REQUIREMENTS.
6. FOR ROADS CURVES WITH ACUTE ANGLE TURNINIG,THE MINIMUM RADII SHALL
cw=4000 BE 15M AND ANGLE NOT LESS THAN 50'
CASE — 3 CASE — 4 7. RADII OF CURVES AND CROSSING WHEN DIFFERENT FROM THOSE GIVEN IN
THIS STANDARD TO MEET ANY SPECIAL REQUIREMENT SHALL BE SO MARKED
IN THE AREA DRAWINGS.
10,0 ,
5 08.06.18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD Anil STANDARD No.

15iffRad ENGINEERS 4 28.05.12 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD Anil RBT/RKS RBB DM ROAD CURVES AND
7-65-0010 Rev. 5
Oge.41
Rae?,
INDIA LIMITED Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
CROSSING
E9ERVIV =ammo (A Govt. of India Undertaking) Date Purpose
Approved by
Page 2851 of 3884

LEGEND :-
00 WEARING COURSE & BINDER COURSE (T1) FINAL FINISH.
T1A — 30 mm THK. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE (WEARING COURSE)
1' • • (AS PER SECTION 507 OF MORTH SPECIFICATION) WITH SEAL COAT (PC)
T1B — 50 mm THK. BITUMINOUS MACADAM (BM)
III • 010 • (AS PER SECTION 504 OF MORTH SPECIFICATION)
FINISHED CONSTRUCTION
LEVEL OF BASE COURSE OF ROAD • BASE COURSE (T2)
FOR PHASE-1 KERB STONE — 250 mm THK. WET MIX MACADAM (WMM) (2 LAYERS OF 125 mm EACH)
TOP OF ROAD LEVEL (FINAL) (300 D x 150 W)
CONFIRMING TO IRC/MORTH SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD & BRIDGE WORKS
GIVEN ON AREA DRG.
3% 0 (SECTION 406).
2%
FINISHED GROUND LEVEL O SUB BASE COURSE (T3)
.....s.s..ss..xxxssxxxxxsxssv,
7e.7.,74,7■7.7.,:*:.:.7.!...7.707.7.7.7.70'.:.7.7.7.!*7.7.7, :e•-.57..7.7.7.570:.:*7.7.7.:..4 0... — ONE LAYER OF 200 mm THK GRANULAR SUB BASE OF GRADE II CONFIRMING
1.5 TO MORTH SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS (SECTION 401).
1
.0
® SUB GRADE 500 mm THICK
APPROVED MATERIAL (HAVING MINIMUM CBR 8%)
/
COMPACTED TO AT LEAST 97 % OF LABORATORY DRY DENSITY
0 WITH HEAVY COMPACTION AS PER IS 2720 PART (VIII)
FORMATION WIDTH (IN LAYERS NOT EXCEEDING 200 mm OF LOOSE THICKNESS)
NATURAL GROUND OR TOP OF 0 60 mm THK. INTER LOCKING PAVER BLOCKS (CATEGORY A) AS PER
CUTTING / FIWNG ACCORDING TO IRC:SP:63 OVER 20 mm THK. SAND BED (LEVELING COURSE).
THE LOCATION COMPACTED TO L.,
97% OF LABORATORY DRY DENSITY AS • IF THE ROAD HEIGHT IS MORE THAN 1M ABOVE FGL, BRICK MASONRY /
PER IS:2720 PART VIII (MINIMUM CBR OF NATURAL SOIL >3%) (REFER NOTE-6) 0 DETAIL -1 RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY ON EDGE PITCHING IN 1:6 MORTAR
(FOR PHASE-2) SHALL BE PROVIDED ON SIDE SLOPES OF EMBANKMENT.
CROSS SECTION OF ROAD T (TOTAL CRUST THICKNESS)

= T1A + T1B + T2 + T3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
EFFECTIVE CBR = 6% (REFER NOTE-5)
MILLION STANDARD AXEL = 2 msa
WEARING LOAD BEARING CRUST
DESIGN LIFE = 15 YEARS
COURSE
50 mm THK. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE (WEARING COURSE)

NOTES:-
(AS PER SECTION 507 OF MORTH SPECIFICATION) 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM, UNLESS MENTIONED OTHERWISE.
WITH SEAL COAT (PC) (DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE OF PROJECT) 2. BITUMEN GRADE SHALL BE AS PER TABLE 500-1 OF MORTH SPECIFICATION :—
LOWEST DAILY MEAN AIR HIGHEST DAILY MEAN AIR TEMPERATURE, 'C
TEMPERATURE, 'C LESS THAN 20'C 20'C TO 30'C MORE THAN 30'C
MORE THAN —10'C VG-10 VG-20 VG-30
—10'C OR LOWER VG-10 VG-10 VG-20
3. PHASE-1 ROAD SECTION SHALL BE AS PER "DETAILS (FOR PHASE-1)".

4. FOR ROAD CHANGE FROM PHASE-1 TO PHASE-2, FOLLOWING STEPS SHALL BE FOLLOWED :-
a) REMOVAL OF 50mm THK. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE (WEARING COURSE)
b) REPAIR OF DAMAGED PORTION OF WMM
c) LAYING OF 50mm THK. BITUMINOUS MACADAM
d) LAYING OF 30mm THK. PREMIX CARPET
5. THE EFFECTIVE CBR OF ROAD DESIGN HAS BEEN CONSIDERED AS 6% CONSIDERING 500mm THICK.
SUB GRADE OF 8% CBR AND SOIL BELOW SUB GRADE LEVEL OF 3% (MINIMUM) CBR.
6. IF CBR OF SOIL BELOW SUB GRADE IS LESS THAN 3%, GEOTECH RECOMMENDATION FOR SOIL
A IMPROVEMENT SHALL BE FOLLOWED FOR GROUND BELOW SUB GRADE.
7. FOR CONSTRUCTION OF ROADS MORTH SPECIFICATION FOR ROADS & BRIDGES WORKS SHALL BE FOLLOWED.
DETAIL -1 8. PRIME COAT SHALL BE APPLIED OVER WMM (GRANULAR SURFACE) 00.9kg/m 2 OVER TOP OF WMM
(FOR PHASE-1) LAYER BEFORE PLACEMENT OF BITUMINOUS LAYER AS PER SECTION 502 OF MORTH SPECIFICATION.
(FOR CONSTRUCTION PERIOD) 9. TACK COAT SHALL BE APPLIED 00.3kg/m 2 OVER PRIMED GRANULAR SURFACE OR EXISTING BITUMINOUS
SURFACE PREPARATORY TO THE SUPER IMPOSITION OF A BITUMINOUS MIX AS PER
SECTION 503 OF MORN SPECIFICATION.
REVISION '0' OF THIS STANDARD IS BASED ON MORTH SPECIFICATION FOR 10. TYPE—B SEAL COAT SHALL BE PROVIDED OVER BITUMINOUS CONCRETE (BC) AS PER
ROAD & BRIDGE WORKS (REV. 5) PUBLISHED BY IRC. SECTION 511 OF MORTH SPECIFICATION.
frit> STANDARD No.

ENGINEERS 0 27.11.2017 ISSUED AS STANDARD t NS/AK R. SRIVASTAVA RAKESH NANDA
dital
$MON:AA (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Rev.
Date Purpose
Anil
Prepared Checked Stds. Combas
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
CROSS SECTION OF ROAD 7-65-0011 Rev. 0
Approved by
Page 2852 of 3884

0'AelSA-L000-00-8 ON Ietwoj
id 150
D=300 TO 1000
1
O
3
6") rn (0Q D= 150 TO 500
0
S (7) VARIABLE 0
-CI 300
1,1
5 Z
• r— rrt
g rn
a S. X
=-1('
IT
)
REF. UNE GIVEN ON GEN.
CIVIL AREA/ LAYOUT DRGS. II
01 03
P REF. UNE GIVEN ON
GEN. CIVIL AREA / LAYOUT DRGS.
—• II
0
b .
-.-CI =co)
(7.1 0 73
o 3 114
c.o 3 70 cn U
Ni
O
-1 O
rn A
C C e
-0-0 C) r CD
y
0 0 O
> > rn
—I rn
m 71 z
0 0 re) 0
30 (-3
O
0
C
a3nssi
conssi
0
/N311331131V/A HUM)
co
O
c
O
0
SLOPE , I
v/• O
I 250
,.„k„I,
N/,
O
CINVCINV1Ssv
GeIVONVIS
O
,
1111
PCC M-20
4
o
CS
`1,8
53 ■ X
Cr cu co
••< cu -o i
BRICKSON EDGE
)# CO
,.._____■
a. 70
(WITH WATER CEMENT RATIO 0.45)

g
1
i
.
co
.7
ld,->
.1
HEIGHT=H (VARIABLE)
'
v
5 —1
,„
1
,.
.k
1 L.
"
0 REFERENCE LEVEL n
; il
70
ir
CD CCtr;
—
(REF. GEN.CIVIL AREA

6 LAG.) z
.
1 -•
L REF. UNE GIVEN
8 ON
I
.5LT;L.: %
= =cei
C..)
l r, = n
.. . ., Lzel ,21
,(52
.,- 8
o GEN. CIVIL AREA/,LAYOUT DRGS. ' C-)

gzt,
CD w
gg-
(.4
cn O
O
0
BOTTOM WIDTH=0.83H
TOP WIDTH = 2.83 X H
0 O Xl
4
•o z
•o 0 0
<
(I) 3
3
V' %-"■...:Av ,.......i.fl ..7.: • .0 ■
CD
1
1 1----
0
♦
CD
z
-
Cr 0
•.<
;
1
. GAPS TO BE FILLED UP WITH
BRICK BATS IN 1:4 CEM.MORT •
4
,
DRG.
SLOPE
CIVIL LAYOUT
AS PER GEN.
1000 (MIN)
COMPACTED EARTH
REFER NOTE-3r
U, 5fri •••
MI C) IM
0
= 0 E 0 C/ 0 Cr 0
; 2 e3
,
E 3 a -15 ,9
co —1 4 z -3 513 3.
rri 0 -0
FGL
c -c
-0
••• F,,I 2
o
-n • r-
E 0 X
ROAD
;a- m r^ v,
CI
0 .4 0 1;: xs
i
0P
o rr, •co
rn
ri ffis,...=
CO M • rn g
70 •
SNIV2:1C1HA1VMMaIS
rn !
C-D cta" 0
cc'
rn -rl N, rn 0 0
CD 0 723.
)1••
>101th3dOSNOLLODSCNVONVIS
X -I p O>
I-
-C 2
-ri ▪ =
0 ›.
30 (n g --<
mI -I
= zz m
rn0
Ho
E
cp
7. THIS STANDARD DRG. SHALL BE VALID WHERE WATER TABLE
Cr) 0 X
z 2
0 Ca
0
TI
(!) E
-13
O O C1)
M
CD X 1=1 rri
0
CD 3.-
3. X
CD •-/
rn
g
- 0N C12:1VCINVIS
3811SS3Ild 30111/H32M
)1.•
0)
pamesai sp.i6P u - 1134146pAdo0
Page 2853 of 3884

• •
- ▪
500 4000
(MIN) 500(MIN) 1 000 2000
TO (MAX.)
1000(MAX)
0•/■91:1 9J-1.000-00-8 ON leiwod

L
0
0
0
0 0 0
-1)
•-•
13NVd31383NO3
0 0 0
1 11p
0 0 0
N IV}JG1V010Z3d1/211
0 0 0
IMP=
III
500 3000
MIN) 500(MIN) 2000
820 2000
TO
1 000(MA4
8
0
z
P 8
z 0 'T.
0a
-u 0
> II O
-1 1,v4 0
Ob
71 zu
—1
• —1
m0
0
"
41
•E
r:1
310Hd33MAO1ivi3a
0
0
rn
01 r.j z
xi N 17
: co ;
'1 —1 0
= 000 0
m 0 "n
0 b 0 m, x mc
gE 70 m
• .c0
..° 2 70 3.
,Q 1,1
,„ rn M
-o m
oc c rn m
r c,
>
til p (r)
rn
co 0
rn 000 co —I
,—
0 zz° o
3E 0 70 1— to 0
r9 2 o —M
_z Z.1— ri
-aK vi=
=; V
D. D. —1 OF
mp.
(7::.26. Lc co
3£1 T1YHS 5310H
=
rm
ms
n -0 34 C
o
-0 Z r" r-4 •
.".1
X/ C )Mo ;:1
0 0 O
2 -.7 ,x1-
N c,
PI rn N.1 o '''
cn
X 0(1)
1. --)
5 ° 0 rn
V CI
TO u)
m : X/ X7
--• vx
9
t=7
°▪ -r3 =C u
7
r(f • 70 ,...,
— ....-
X 2.7C= 0
- 5
rn
rn N
G'7 m
=
—1 0 a;:ic 51
in D
01 193 110213Nna
2
ci O n
-n m = X
Da
a IT1 70
1. ALL DIMENSIONSARE IN MIWMETERS UNLESSNOTED OTHERWISE.
X il' 1:1", 1,1 xi

mz= =
2 P1 m
X
c") 7.•
CONTAMINATED SUB-SURFACE FLOW.
m rn vc
F - .71
p
3. CONCRETING ON THE SIDE SLOPES SHALL BEDONE IN PANELS OF 3.011 LENGTH.
paivesai sly 61-111V- 1134146pAdo0
Page 2854 of 3884

250 MM. THK. BRICK
LWALL IN 1:4 CEMENT MORTAR/ 250
TOP LEVEL OF ROAD
360 MM. THK. STONE MASONRY
WALL IN 1:6 CEMENT MORTAR TOP LEVEL OF ROAD
FINISHED G.L
=mm
flmmm
17 Listom —
•
FILLED WITH
LEVEL A COLLAR JOINT LEVEL B ROAD MATERIAL
PCC M20/
iii
SECTION A—A
500
EARTH FILLING
ti
LEVEL 'B' INDICATED
ON AREA DRG. • I .
LEVEL 'A' INDICATED 250 B 1 ° .I •
PCC M20
ON AREA DRG. 1 '1 •• • (SEE NOTE-4)
D+2d E 0+2d
I I
I 1 1 I PIPE CLASS NP3
PIPE CLASS N
1111="
11MMIRIIIIM 11' 441 SECTION B—B
500 4 , B
L1 L2
AS M ENTIONEDON AREADEG.
AS MENTIONED ONI AREA DRAWING
LI
PIPE DIA PIPE WALL PIPE OUTER a E B c e SAFE FLOW

IN MM THICKNESS DIA IN MM (MM) (MM) (MM) (MM) (MM) THROUGH
IN 3I CULVERT
(D) IN MM (d)
500 70 640 150 150 1730 200 175 1220
y. OF ROAD 600 75 750 150 150 1950 200 175 1800
700 85 870 200 200 2340 275 200 2520
NOTES: —
PLAN 800 95 990 200 200 2580 275 200 3365
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.

2. THIS STANDARD SHALL BE READ ALONG WITH STANDARD NO. 7-65-0213.
3. THIS STANDARD IS NOT APPLICABLE FOR BLACK COTTON SOIL/POOR SOIL (N<4).
4. DELETED
5. JOINTS IN PIPE SHALL BE EXTERNAL FLUSH JOINTS FOR PIPES OF INTERNAL DIA
UPTO 700mm AND SHALL BE INTERNAL FLUSH JOINTS FOR PIPES OF DIA MORE
THAN 700mm (REFERENCE CLAUSE 6.3 OF IS:458).
6. PIPES / SPIGOT JOINTS SHALL BE ENCASED AS PER EIL STD. 7-65-0213,
WHEREVER ADEQUATE CLEAR COVER OVER PIPE IS NOT AVAILABLE.
7. REGULAR LINED DRAIN ALONG WITH WING WALLS UPTO A DISTANCE OF 5.0M ON EITHER SIDE
OF PIPE CULVERT SHALL BE MADE BEFORE PUTTING THE CULVERT IN USE.
8. THE CONCRETE PIPE SHALL CONFORM TO IS: 458. VALID FOR DIA 500 TO 800
ISaiad ENIGNEERS
4
3
30.07.18
12.07.12
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD.
Anil
An it RC
R.SRIVASTAVA .K. TRIVEDI
RBB
P \Ps=DM
PIPE CULVERT
FOR STORM
STANDARD No.
7-65-0103 Rev. 4
015teg
twine =mom
INDIA LJMITED Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman WATER DRAINAGE
WIWI (A Govt. of India Undertaking) Date Purpose by by Page 1 of 2
No. Approved by
Page 2855 of 3884

250 MM. THK. BRICK 5 TOP LEVEL OF ROAD
WALL IN 1:4 CEMENT MORTAR/ TOP LEVEL OF ROAD
360 MM. THK. STONE MASONRY O
WALL IN 1:6 CEMENT MORTAR O
FINISHED G.L 4.0
2)22iA FILLED WITH
L z 0 ROAD MATERIAL
L4J
w
O V)
LEVEL A PCC M20 O
COLLAR JOINT LEVEL B (c.
SECTION A-A 1
EARTH FILLING
LEVEL 'A' INDICATED LEVEL 'B' INDICATED

Z
V
PCC M20
01_
.1111k
SECTION B-B
AS MEN TI ON EDON AREADRG.

OF ROAD
PLAN
NOTES: - SAFE FLOW

PIPE DIA BARREL WALL PIPE OUTER a B c e
1. FOR NOTES, REFER PAGE 1 OF 2. IN MM THICKNESS DIA IN MM (MM) (MM) (MM) (MM) THROUGH CULVERT
(D) IN MM (d) IN M3/HR.
350 75 500 150 800 200 125 235
500 70 640 150 940 200 175 610
600 75 750 150 1050 200 175 900
700 85 870 200 1270 275 200 1260
800 95 990 200 1390 275 200 1680
VALID FOR DIA 350 TO 800
4 30.07.18 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. Anil ABH R.SRIVASTAVA . TRIVEDI STANDARD No.
hAFFn
ErvaNEERs 3 12.07.12 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. Anil RC RBB DM
PIPE CULVERT
ajest
wen maw anaginfo
INDIA LI
(A Govt of India t;r:de7taldnir
Rev.
Date Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
FOR STORM
WATER DRAINAGE
7-65-0103 Rev. 4
No. Page 2 of 2
Approved by
Page 2856 of 3884

o 450 HIGH PARAPET WALL
BRICK MASONRY IN 1:4 CM/
NOTES: -
cc
345 RR MASONRY IN 1:6 CM
1. ALL DMENSIONS ARE IN MM EXCEPT LEVELS WHICH ARE IN METRES.
c_4-1 2. BOX CULVERTS ARE DESIGNED FOR CLASS 'A' & CLASS 'M' LOADING AS PER IRC-6
1 E2 WING WALL AND FOR TRACKED CRANE LOAD INTENSITY UPTO 10 T/M2.
3. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE PROJECT FOR REINFORCED
CONCRETE STRUCTURES FOR FOLLOWING :
X
a) GRADE OF CONCRETE
b) GRADE AND TYPE OF CEMENT
X' AND Y. LEVELS c) REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS
GIVEN ON AREA DRG
PCC d) CLEAR COVER IN R.C.C. WORKS.
SECTION A-A e) GRADE OF PCC.
4. BAR BENDING SHALL CONFORM TO IS:2502.
5. ALL BRICK WORK SHALL BE IN 1:4 CEMENT MORTAR AS PER IS:2212.
AS PER AREA DRG. AS PER AREA DRG.
6. RR MASONRY WORK SHALL BE IN 1:6 CEMENT MORTAR AS PER 1S:1597.
7. OVERLAP FOR BARS SHALL BE 50D AND SHALL BE STAGGERED.
8. REGULAR LINED DRAIN ALONG WITH WING WALLS UPTO A DISTANCE OF 5.0M ON
EITHER SIDE OF BOX CULVERT SHALL BE MADE BEFORE PUTTING THE CULVERT IN USE.
1000 CAR RIA E WAY 1 0
0
C
A REINFORCEMENT BENDING SCHEDULE

—41 _÷_r_QOF DRAIN
TYPE OF STEEL DIA & BENDING SCHEDULE
PARAPET WALL MARK CUT LENGTH
CULVERT SPACING A B
ASPER AREADRG
1000
MK-1 I 0616 150 C/C 1250 725 2704
Os( P
oI 1B 4-
II 0616 125 C/C 1400 850 3004
L=LENGTH ti:IF CULVERT
WING WALL III 0616 100 C/C 1500 930 3264
AS PER ilREA DWG.
450 HIGH PARAPET WALL IV 016 100 C/C 1700 1070 3744
BRICK MASONRY IN 1:4 CM MK-2 I 0616 150 C/C 2100 2100
RR MASONRY IN 1:6 CM
II 0616 125 C/C 2400 2400
OF ROAD III 0616 100 C/C 2600 2600
- ---- SCHEDULE OF CULVERT IV 0616 100 C/C 3000 3000
PLAN WIDTH & DEPTH
SAFE FLOW MK-3 I 0610 200 C/C 1250 1250
THROUGH
TYPE CULVERT II 010 200 C/C 1400 1400
0610 MK-5 (TOP & BOTTOM (BXH)
(M3/Hr) III 010 200 C/C 1500 1500
SLAB OUTER FACES)]
MK-4 IV 010 200 C/C 1700 1700
I 1700 X 850 5455
• • I • •
0 MK-4 I fl 0 200 C/C 2100 2100
016 MK-1 111 J a a II 0610 200 C/C 2400 2400
(FOR SIDE WALLS OUTER FACES) II 2000 X 1000 8400 III 0610 200 C/C 2600 2600
1510 MK-6 N.— MK-2 IV 0610 200 C/C 3000 3000
•
_1 (FOR TOP & BOTTOM SLAB)
III 2200 X 1100 10850
MK-5
MK-6
I
II
0610 200 C/C
010 100 C/C
BARS OF VARYING
0610 MK-8 LENGTH
0610 MK 7 MK-7 III 0610 100 C/C
•-•:— (FOR SIDE WALLS INNER FACES)
(FOR SIDE WALLS OUTER FACES) IV 2600 X 1300 12200 MK-8 IV 0610 200 C/C
MK i [ A ..I MARK (L-100)

FOR TOP & BOTTOM SLABS INNER FACES 1 2, 3 & 4 [ •-I
— MK 5,6,7&8
010 MK-3 • • •
(FOR SIDE WALLS INNER FACES) to
• a a • A • CN/
'.•
75 13 .4 MK-5
0610 MK-4 u)
(FOR TOP & BOTTOM SLAB)

SECTION B-B
daReleifft ENGINEERS
5 30.07.18 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. ANIL A81-7 R. SRIVASTAVA Pwiji)
R RIVEDI STANDARD No.
ogar was wINDIA LIMITED

Men tolVORFAII Govt of India Undenaiting)
Rev.
4 13.07.12
Date
Purpose
ANIL
Prepared
by
RC
Checked
by
RBB
Stds. Committee
Convenor
DM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
BOX CULVERT
TYPE-1,11,11I AND IV
7-65-0104 Rev. 5
No. Page 1 of 1
Approved by
Page 2857 of 3884

0
NOTES: —
450 HIGH PARAPET WALL
0 BRICK MASONRY IN 1:4 CM/ 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM EXCEPT LEVELS WHICH ARE IN METRES .
RR MASONRY IN 1:6 CM 2. BOX CULVERT ARE DESIGNED FOR I.R.0 CLASS 'A' & CLASS 'M' LOADING
z 0 AND FOR TRACKED CRANE LOAD INTENSITY UPTO 10 T/M2
345
cr 3. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE PROJECT FOR REINFORCED
0 CONCRETE STRUCTURES FOR FOLLOWING
WING WALL a. GRADE OF CONCRETE
0I
b. GRADE AND TYPE OF CEMENT
c. REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS
X Y d. CLEAR COVER IN R.C.C. WORKS
d. GRADE OF PCC
4. BAR BENDING SHALL CONFORM TO IS:2502
X' AND 'Y' LEVELS 0 5. ALL BRICK WORK SHALL BE IN 1:4 CEMENT MORTAR AS PER IS : 2212
0
GIVEN ON AREA DRG PCC 6. RR MASONRY WORK SHALL BE IN 1:6 CEMENT MORTAR AS PER IS:1597.
7. OVERLAP FOR BARS SHALL BE 50D AND SHALL BE STAGGERED.
SECTION — A A 8. REGULAR LINED DITCH ALONG WITH WING WALLS UP TO A DISTANCE OF
5.0M ON EITHER SIDE OF BOX CULVERT SHALL BE MADE BEFORE PUTTING
THE CULVERT IN USE.
115. 10 MK 5
tnOR TOP SLAB(OUTER FACES) SHEDULE OF CULVERTS
SAFE FLOW THROUGH
g 10 MK-4 TYPE BXH
CULVERT (M3/Hr)
V 3000X1500 16200
I'I e
MK-1
111, hiti • 11I • VI 3600X1800 23350
FOR SIDE WALLS (OUTER FACES)

AS PER AREA DRG.
PARAPET WALL • ,
• (I/ 10 MK6 MK —
•
0
ASPER'AREA DRG.
• REINFORCEMENT BENDING SCHEDULE

0
B • •=, MARK TYPE DIA & SPACING A B CUT LENGTH

_1
CE OF ROA • 4 V f 16 0 150 C/C 2000 1200 4304
IV 10 MK.6 MK-1
all'a 4980
• VI 20 @ 150 C/C 2300 1400
0 0
0 • (7) 16 © 150 C/C 3500
V 3500 —
AS PER A REA
II
0 •
10
M <-3
MK-2
oI 0
0 t VI 20 CO 150 C/C 4100 — 4100
0 o
V 10 © 200 C/C 2000 500 2470
b • • • • MK-3
VI 10 CP 200 C/C 2300 500 2770
▪ a • • • Vs • 4
WING WALL 10 © 150 C/C — 2100
V 2100
450 HIGH PARAPET WALL MK-4
BRICK MASONRY IN 1:4 M VI 10 ®150 C/C 2300 2300
—
RR MASONRY IN 1:6 CM
1 PCC V 10 @ 200 C/C BARS OF VARYING LENGTH
MK-5&6
VI 10 © 200 C/C DO
(1.10 MK-4
A V 10 CO 200 C/C DO
SECTION B—B MK-7&8
VI 10 CD 200 C/C DO
AS PER AREA DRG
PLAN
mi< < E B
AI RK
3
A MARK
2 & 4 i.
T.S2s.1
1 50d
l-e—..-1
MARK
5,6,7&8
B L 100 •-I
rit'
L
5 30.07.18 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. Anil ITABH R. SRIVASTAVA RtS761
ENCANEERS 4 17.07.12 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. Anil RC RBB DM BOX CULVERT
STANDARD No.
Ys'rai Erciles
eteturetwackm
(41E711
INDIA UMW Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau TYPE-V & VI
7-65-0106 Rev. 5
(A Govt. of India Undertaking) Date Purpose Convenor Chairman
by by Page 1 of 1
No. Approved by
Page 2858 of 3884

VALVE PIT (RCC) STANDARD No.
k92.4e-r ENGINEERS TYPE-V 7-65-0207 Rev. 3
$1g-ar INDIA LIMITED
(IfT7R rfecon' 057 J,10.1) 1,4 Govt of India Undertalungt FOR 02" TO 06" VALVE
Page 1 of 1
NOTE:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MIUMETERS UNLESS
NOTED OTHERWISE.
2. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE
2 Nos. UFTING PROJECT FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE
HOOKS STRUCTURES FOR FOLLOWING:
CHEQUERED PLATE a) GRADE OF CONCRETE
c) REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS
d) CLEAR COVER IN R.C.C. WORKS
3. THIS STD. IS APPUCABLE FOR UNIT AREA,
OFFSITE AREA AND AREA WHERE GROUND
1300
WATER TABLE IS UPTO FGL
CHEQUERED PLATE DETAIL DETAIL - 1
010 UFTING HOOK
CHEQUERED PLATE
FINISHED PAVEMENT LEVEL CHEQUERED PLATE (6mm THICK) òi
(REMOVABLE)
50X8
FINISHED GRADE LEVEL
REF. GENERAL CIVIL AREA DWG.
DETAIL - 2
•
•
1000 200 C/C
PIPE+100(SQUAR
BAR BENDING SCHEDULE:

OUTERDIAOF
1000 200 C/C

CENTRALLY PLACED BAR MARK DIA BAR SHAPE
10rtf 0 200 C/C
CENTRALLY PLACED K1 cz= I (;
® 10 V SÊ -■- L "..
BOP. REF. LEVEL
— 145A
® 10 / §ELT35.0_11
GROIMNG IN 1:2 FREE
FLOW CEMENT MORTAR TO BE 0I
• I, • •• • APPUED WITH SHUTTERING ON ® 10 ‹§C1
BOTH (TYP) 11
;%:` FACES (3)1 15001
= = PCC 1:5:10
12000200 C/C1
50150 /15)100 I-153Q 1
150 50 1
® 10 IIf t [3°C11
SECTION - A A
l /
1.1
STAGGERED RUNGS -7J
REFER STD. b
Ld
No. 7-65-0211
CARBON STEEL PIPE
r -- 2 • ..
ORIENTATION SHALL BE
AS PER LAYOUT DWG.
A 1r) A
ir•
—1 I lov—
.'
.
REF. UNE REPRESENTATION
.... -- ON AREA DRG.
1
• • • • • • i
150 1200 150

1500
PLAN
V-1,4
>Y3\
3 05.06.14 UPDATED & ISSUED AS STD. JKU RKS
2 19.05.09 UPDATED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SSM DDB/RKS NK ND

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - AII rights reserved
Page 2859 of 3884

▪
VALVE PIT (RCC) STANDARD No.

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED TYPE-VI 7-65-0208 Rev. 3
$11gU fa2e5
1.1W-Neleowcf f151,3~) IA GoN of Incha Undertakingi FOR 08" TO 016" VALVE
Page 1 of 1
NOTE:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILIMETERS UNLESS
NOTED OTHERWISE.
800 2. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE
= PROJECT FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE
2 Nos. LIFTING CHEQUERED PLATE STRUCTURES FOR FOLLOWING:
HOOKS a) GRADE OF CONCRETE
CUT OUT TO BE
PROVIDED AT SITE d) CLEAR COVER IN R.C.C. WORKS
z 50x50x6 50 LONG 3.
THIS STD. IS APPLICABLE FOR UNIT AREA,
FLAT 65x8 OFFSITE AREA AND AREA WHERE GROUND
WATER TABLE IS UPTO FGL
PLAN DETAIL - 1
CHEQUERED PLATE
(2.NOS PER VALVE PIT)
CHEQUERED PLATE (6mm THICK) 010 UFTING HOOK

INISHED PAVEMENT LEVEL— (REMOVABLE) CHEQUERED PLATE
CD
C>
REF. GENERAL CIVIL AREA DWG. 150(150) Ij''\EW__65)2
150
10 "W 0 200 C/C DETAIL - 2

10 0 200 C/C
CENTRALLY PLACED
BAR BENDING SCHEDULE:
BOP. REFERENCE LEVEL BAR
MARK DIA BAR SHAPE
L.,
GROUTING IN 1:2 FREE FLOW CV I.—
CEMENT MORTAR TO BE 0 10
C■I
. . . • • • APPUED WITH SHUTTERING x cz,

ON BOTH FACES (TYP) (D Oq
= =
OV 0 200 CL ® 10 Z
E 3
PCC 1.5.10 0,1650 i
5 150 1500
1800
150 50 010 0 0 200 C/C
CENTRALLY PLACED Cl 10 7
E 3
CD 1750
SECTION - A A 1680
W I ® 10 P' °::
STAGGERED RUNGS Ji
REF. STD. NO. u:1

7-65-0211 CC i
CARBON STEEL PIPE

ORIENTATION SHALL BE
AS PER LAYOUT DWG.
A
REF. UNE
TYPE—VI BOP....
REF. UNE
= = CUT OUT TO BE REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.

1500 PROVIDED AT SITE
PLAN
3 25.07.14 UPDATED & ISSUED AS STD. KC KS SC

2 19.05.09 UPDATED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SSM DDB/RBB NK ND
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - AII rights reserved
Page 2860 of 3884

DETAIL OF RUNGS STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS FOR MANHOLES, VALVE
5g-af 054--eg INDIA LIMITED 7-65-0211 Rev. 4
174T2R 2:172,5f2 0513021171) IA Govt of Incha Undertakingt PITS, TANKS ETC.
Page 1 of 1
MANHOLE TOP SLAB MANHOLE TOP SLAB

COVER COVER
20 RUNG
LINING IF ANY •
C, C)
C) C,
N)
O C,
U)
C•1
.Ar' AZW%
IINI'
O CL
LO U")
CLI
75 5
ft 38 TYPICAL RUNG
LINING IF ANY 1111■••■••
20 RUNG
w. oe•
•=,
BOTTOM SLAB 75 350 CLEAR BOTTOM SLAB

INSIDE
VIEW. A-A DETAIL OF TOP RUNG VIEW. B-B
(TYP.)
LINING IF ANY
(TYP.)
20 STAGGERED RUNGS
380
20 STAGGERED RUNGS
imt:3 r4 20 STAGGERED RUNGS
4:1B,
MIN.
Wif OF OPENING
ROUND MANHOLE OPENING

ROUND / RECTANGULAR MANHOLE OPENING ROUND RECTANGULAR MANHOLE OPENING
CASE -1 CASE - 2 CASE - 3

NOTE:-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MIWMETER UNLESS SPECIFIED.
2. RUNGS SHALL BE EPDXY COATED OR PAINTED AS PER SPEC. NO. 6-44-04.
3. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE PROJECT FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE
STRUCTURES FOR FOLLOWING:
d) CLEAR COVER IN R.C.C. WORKS
)).(
4 05.06.14 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD KU R SC
3 19.05.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SSM DDB/RKS NK ND
No. by by
Approved by
Page 2861 of 3884

r■A—N1-7 BAFFLE WALL
6 NOS410 BARS 5 NOS410 BARS (AT BOTTOM)
75, 75
540 /-*B
0 790
1 00
0 if) I REFER NOTE-3
I I c.) 8 NOS. 10 BARS
1 1 -
LIFTING HOOKS
(II 100150 C/C SEE NOTE-3
PLAN
DOUBLE VENT PIPE 0
• • •
r■A J
0
0 SECTION B—B
GROUNTING IN 1:2 FREE
FLOW CEM. MORTAR
I+B
REINFORCEMENT PLAN
FOR R.C.C.WALL
CC (PIPE 0>500) DETAIL OF PRECAST CONC. COVER 75 175 I 75
7A PLAN a
PRECAST CONC. COVER
DET. OF LIFTING HOOK
SINGLE VENT PIPE > >
a a GROUTING IN 1:2
04" VENT PIPE AS PER a_ EL 4,10(0 EXTRA CIRCULAR BARS
'R Z FREE FLOW CEM. MORTAR C.I. FRAME & COVER
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS 0
010 EXTRA BARS 5 NOS AT. 10 70
1— IX LL
(REFER STD. NO. 7-65-0219) 0 o TOP & BOTTOM FOR IID410 CIRCULAR 0500 CLEAR OPENING
z 0 0 130 FOR CIRCULAR 0560 CLEAR OPENING
LZ 0 Et
Li..1 MN .50 .8g
R.C.C. SLAB CL F.G.L. • ••••
I
REFER NOTE-3
.4
is • ' : C•4
• a . . •
PCC M-20 0 • 4)10(150 C/C
0 111 // '•. TOP & BOTTOM
1:1604 4 5 SLAB REINF.
0 FOR R.C.C.WALL 0
to
(PIPE 9500)
It.100150 C/C • • d ro
(REFER NOTE-3
TOP & BOTTOM •• ... •• . t a
SLAB REINF.
418 DIA. TIE BARS ©150 C/C 50 130 80 14)10 EXTRA CIRCULAR BARS
GROUNTING IN 1:2 FREE FLOW
CEM. MORTAR 90 FOR MD-10 CIRCULAR 500 CLEAR OPENING
FIXING PRECAST CONC.COVER
125 FOR HD-20, CIRCULAR 560 CLEAR OPENING
FIXING C.I. COVER
OR 150 NOTES:-
SECTION A—A 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
TYPICAL VENT DETAILS 2. IN UNIT AREA
VENT PIPES SHOULD BE LOCATED ALONG PIPE RACK COLUMNS OR BUILDING COLUMNS & SHOULD
BE TAKEN 3M ABOVE THE BUILDING PARAPET OR LAST LAYER OF PIPES OF THE UNIT.
IN OFFSITE AREA
VENT PIPE SHALL PROJECT 3.0M ABOVE FGL. AND SHALL BE SELF SUPPORTING.
3. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE PROJECT FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
FOR MASONRY WALL FOR FOLLOWING :
TYPICAL GROUTING DETAIL a) GRADE OF CONCRETE
FOR PIPE IN WALL
d) CLEAR COVER IN R.C.C. WORKS.
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. Gau av RKS SC STANDARD No.

4 05.06.14 STANDARD
ENCINEERS 3 21.01.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. Anil RC RBB DM
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS 7-65-0212 Rev. 4
ige..11 tapes
(airentmecniecel...Ncr)+1)
INDIA LIMITED
Rev.
Date Purpose
Convenor Chairman FOR MANHOLES Page 1 of 1
No. by by Approved by
Page 2862 of 3884
ROAD TOP LEVEL
PAVEMENT TOP LEVEL
TYPE - I x / 4' / TYPE -IV

a
/ AY / x 150 I
1 TYPE -IIIA
150 150
;00TO 12(
,.• •
/ 1
0 '• ° 4
4
/ ••
---- PCC M20
/
1
17/(1
/ ' / 4 /
/ 0
o i ' ,.
• ") •
/ AY (=i . - -• .•. ' . .. . . A
V •.{. •
. " At;
-
4.
. . .,....•
al . '.
d cz, A• ': . •
i
D.
.
'• t -. •.
•
•- • ' ' ' ..
. .D .
. t A . .
.. ;t... , . w
4 - -
PCC M20 / 4 /
• • SECTIONAL ELEVATION
.41 ,.
' CONCRETE CRADLE BEDDING
• . • • PCC M20
..• . 0- . • •- (FOR SEWERS - CONC. PIPE)
SECTIONAL ELEVATION BEDDING
-.^ -
(FOR C.S PIPE SEWER WHERE SUPPORT IS REQUIRED) DIMENSIONS
W
W= D+300 WHERE D IS EXTERNAL DIA OF PIPE.
SECTIONAL ELEVATION SURROUND OR ENCASING T= 000 FOR PIPES UNDER 150 (OR 6")NOMINAL 0
(FOR SEWERS UNDER ROADS) T=150 FOR PIPES OF 150 (OR 6")NOMINAL 0 AND OVER
FOR COVER >600 NOTES:-
1. BEDDING:-WHERE BEDDING IS USED, THE CONCRETE SHALL BE
ROAD TOP LEVEL BROUGHT UP TO ATLEAST TO THE INVERT LEVEL OF THE PIPE TO FORM
TYPE - II A CRADLE & TO AVOID LINE CONTACT BETWEEN THE PIPE AND BED.
PAVEMENT TOP LEVEL
150 TYPE - IIIB
2. HAUNCHING:-THE FULL WIDTH OF THE BED SHALL BE CARRIED
x TO THE LEVEL OF THE HORIZONTAL DIAMETER OF THE
i PIPE AND SPLAYS FROM THIS LEVEL CARRIED ON BOTH SIDES
o
o OF THE PIPE TO MEET THE PIPE BARREL TANGENTIALLY
,i-
---- 7"`
i.. ..
• •' o 3. SURROUND OR ENCASING TYPE- IIIA:- THE SURROUND OR
o P. ' • c. - -- • in
it- . • ' • ENCASING SHALL BE SIMILAR TO HAUNCHING UP TO THE
N Sk - .. .
'9. V .• . in HORIZONTAL DIA. OF THE PIPE & THE PORTION OVER THIS
, .
N
• SHALL BE FINISHED IN A SEMI-CIRCULAR FORM TO GIVE A
•• • •
-• ._ in UNIFORM ENCASING FOR THE TOP HALF OF THE PIPE.
•1 • N.
TYPE IIIB:- IT IS SIMILAR TO TYPE.IIIA ABOVE EXECEPT THAT
4 ,
.•••r I/ / THE TOP PORTION OVER THIS SHALL BE FINISHED RECTANGULAR
•.a .
1 AS SHOWN AND THE SECTION PROVIDED WITH REINFORCEMENT
•..
AS PER REQUIREMENTS.
. .. .••
, '• • -." . / 1 V 0 C0150c /c
.•4
.. - • - 6 4. CONCRETE CRADLE BEDDING:- IS THE METHOD OF BEDDING PIPES IN
0 • .., . WHICH THE LOWER PART OF THE PIPE EXTERIOR IS BEDDED IN A
i• ' CRADLE CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE WITH DIMENSION AS SHOWN.
• • . REFER NOTE-6 5. CONCRETE WORK SHALL BE CONFORM TO IS:456
•
.i..
/ hr / . ' 6. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE PROJECT FOR CONCRETE
0P
PCC M20 .. • ^ STRUCTURES FOR FOLLOWING :
t• V A ' a) GRADE OF CONCRETE
•
. •.• i... • b) GRADE AND TYPE OF CEMENT
.. * •- •
.—___\• c) REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS
SECTIONAL ELEVATION HAUNCHING
(FOR HDPE PIPE SEWERS)
SECTIONAL ELEVATION SURROUND OR ENCASING

(FOR SLEEVES/PIPES CULVERTS UNDER ROADS FOR COVER <600MM)
CoSo•• ..144-y. k.,1_.

5 06.06.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. CS AVM - L'v RS A2!:------- STANDARD No.
151kiadakENIGINEERS 4 05.07.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. Anil RC RBB DM CONC. BEDDING AND
Og-ar EifaftWNDIA
(A
LINTED Govt. of India Undertaking)
Rev.
Date Purpose
Prepared Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
ENCASEMENT FOR PIPES 7-65-0213 Rev.5
by
No. Approved by Page 1 of 1
rmat No. - - - ev. Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2863 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
02-eg INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertalong)
GULLY TRAP CHAMBER 7-65-0214 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
13 mm THICK PLASTER WITH

125 300 125
CEMENT MORTAR 1:3 WITH
WATER PROOFING COMPOUND
U)
cs,
tr)
r 11•111111•1
11•••••
A,
1~1.1~
c,/ BRICK MASONRY IN 1:4

CEMENT MORTAR
STANDARD C.I. GRATING

FOR GULLY TRAP PLAN LIGHT DUIY FRAME & COVER 300x300
SQUARE
CONC. M-20
FINISHED PAVEMENT LEVEL
(IN CASE CHAMBER
IS LOCATED IN PAVED
AREA)
FINISHED GROUND LEVEL
GROUT1NG
(REF. STD. NO. 7-65-0212)
1:3 CEMENT
MORTAR
REF. LEVEL OR DEPTH
360
STONE WARE SQUARE

OR ROUND MOUTH
P—TYPE GULLY TRAP100
100x100 AS PER IS: 651 G.T.
REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.
CONCRETE M20 300
SECTION "A-A"
NOTE:
2. THE BRICKS SHALL CONFIRM TO IS: 1077 (CLASS 5.0 MIN.)
3. EXACT THICHNESS OF BRICK MASONRY WALL SHALL BE AS PER
LACALLY AVAILABLE BRICKS. (HERE WALL THICKNESS HAS BEEN
GIVEN AS PER BRICK SIZE OF 250X125X75
4. UPVC GULLY TRAP MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF STONEWARE GULLY TRAP.
•
5 05.06.14 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD GA~V RS
4 20.05.09 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SKP RKS NK ND

No. by by
Approved by
Page 2864 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
$'&11- Wes
1•17U7f rleaol d31 J•sn.1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA GO,È of intha Undertak02)
INSPECTION CHAMBER 7-65-0215 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
RCC, M-30 REINFORCEMENT ALL AROUND MANHOLE

MANHOLE COVER & FRAME (IS:1726)
FINISHED PAVEMENT LEVEL COVER REF. STD. NO. 7-65-0212
MEDIUM DUTY OF GRADE MD-10
(INCASE CHAMBER IS
0750 CIRCULAR DIA 500 CLEAR OPENING
LOCATED ON PAVEMENTS)
500
SC F.G.L.
(FINISHED GROUND LEVEL)
O
1:2 CEMENT MORTAR JOINT 10 mm 0 150 C/C TOP AND

(LEVEWNG COURSE) BOTTOM (BOTHWAYS)
GROUTING BENCHING
(REF. STD. NO. 7-65-212)
INVERT LEVEL OF
PCC. m-20 INCOMING PIPE
PCC. M-20
100 250 750 250 1001 INVERT LEVEL OF
OUTGOING PIPE
SECTION-AA
REPRESENTATION
ON AREA DRAWING
REFERENCE POINT
250 750 250
13 mm THK. 1:3 CEMENT

PLASTER WITH WATER PROOFIN
COMPOUND 16 MM THK. 1:3
CEMENT PLASTER
A A
•
BRICK MASONRY IN o
CEMENT MORTAR 1:4 u,
PLAN
NOTE:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MIWMETER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
2. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE PROJECT FOR REINFORCED
CONCRETE STRUCTURES FOR FOLLOWING
a. GRADE OF CONCRETE b. GRADE AND TYPE OF CEMENT
c. REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS d. CLEAR COVER IN RCC WORKS
3. BAR BENDING SHALL CONFORM TO IS: 2502.
4. TOP SLAB SHALL BE CAST-IN-SITU AND REINFORCEMENT ON WALL
SIDE OF MANHOLE OPENING SHALL BE ADJUSTED AT SITE.
5. THE BRICKS SHALL CONFORM TO IS: 1077 (CLASS 5.0 MINIMUM).
6. EXACT THICKNESS OF BRICK MASONRY WALL SHALL BE AS PER
LOCALLY AVAILABLE BRICKS (HERE WALL THICKNESS HAS BEEN
GIVEN AS PER BRICK SIZE OF 250 X 125 X 75).
4 05.06.14 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD GAURAV RKS

3 20.05.09 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD SKP RKS NK ND
No. by by
Approved by
Page 2865 of 3884

REFERENCE POINT
REF. STD. 7-65-0211)
250 250 075 C.I. VENT PIPE
075 C.I. VENT NOTES:-
L/5 WITH COWEL (REF. NOTE-6)
PIPE WITH COWEL
BRICK MASONRY IN R.C.C. SLAB 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
1 : 4 CEMENT MORTAR (SEE NOTE-2 2. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE PROJECT FOR REINFORCED
CONCRETE STRUCTURES FOR FOLLOWING :
N
30 b) GRADE AND TYPE OF CEMENT
OUTLET d) CLEAR COVER IN R.C.C. WORKS.
0150/0250 INLET A■
3. BAR BENDING SHALL CONFORM TO IS:2502
AS GIVEN ON 150 0
4. MANHOLE FRAME & COVER, RUNGS, VENT PIPE & OTHER EXPOSED STEEL
GEN. CIVIL PCC M20 PARTS SHALL BE PAINTED WITH TWO COATS OF APPROVED ANTICORROSIVE PAINT.
AREA DRGS.
5. DESLUDGING SHALL BE DONE PERIODICALLY EVERY YEAR PREFERABLY
M
BY A PORTABLE NON CLOG. PUMP.
0150/0250 (RCC PIPE) 6. 075 C.I. VENT PIPE (AS PER IS:1729) SHALL BE 3.0M MINIMUM HEIGHT FOR SELF
STANDING VENT. INCASE SEPTIC TANK IS LOCATED WITHIN 20IA RADIUS FROM
HABITABLE BUILDING VENT PIPE SHALL BE EXTENDED FROM SIDE OF
PLAN DETAIL-1 SEPTIC TANK & TO BE BROUGHT NEAR TO THE NEAREST COLUMN/ BUILDING
(VENT ON SIDE) AND SHALL BE TAKEN AT LEAST 2.01.1 ABOVE THE HIGHTEST POINT OF
lE 10 0 150 C/C BOTHWAYS AT BOTTOM THE BUILDING/STRUCTURE. HOWEVER, THERE SHALL BE ONLY ONE
075 C.I. VENT PIPE WITH COWEL (ALT-I) 075 C.I. VENT PIPE FROM THE SEPTIC TANK, NEAR INLET PIPE.
R.C.C. SLAB / (REF. NOTE-6)
(SEE NOTE-2) MANHOLE COVER & FRAME MEDIUM DUTY AS PER IS: 1726 7. EXACT THICKNESS OF BRICK MASONRY WALL SHALL BE AS PER LOCALLY
/ OF GRADE MD-10 CIRCULAR 0500 CLEAR OPENING AVAIBLE BRICKS. HERE WALL THICKNESS HAS BEEN GIVEN AS PER BRICK
OD DETAIL-1 750 SIZE OF 250X125X75.
/ 1:2 CEMENT MORTAR JOINT 8. PROPORTION FOR NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE SHALL BE AS PER
TABLE 9 OF IS:456.
F.G.L
075 C.I. VENT PIPE
PIPE WITH COWEL (ALT-II)
71, 0500 •
(REF. NOTE-6) FOR CLEAR COVER 13 THK. CEMENT PLASTER 1:3
CCP
SEE NOTE-2
GROUTING IN 1:2 CEM. MORTAR WITH WATER PROOFING COMPOUND RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS OF SEPTIC TANKS
SIZE OF OPENINGS OUTER DIA. OUTLET LEVEL
OF PIPE + 100 (SQUARE) NO. OF USERS TYPE LENGTH BREADTH DEPTH
TO SOAK PIT L B D
0150 C.I. PIPE
INLET PIPE 10 I 2000 900 1075
0150/0250 (RCC PIPE)
8 0 150 C/C —
1E
20 II 2300 1100 1385
INLET LEVEL —71— BO HS
16 THK. CEMENT PLASTER 30 III 4000 1400 1400
(AS GIVEN ON GEN. CIVIL
AREA DRG.) 1:3 WITH WATER PROOFING COMPOUND
50 IV 4650 2000 1440
V
13 THK. CEMENT PLASTER
1:3 WITH WATER PROOFING COMPOUND
100 THK. BAFFLE CO
RCC SLAB (SEE NOTE-2) PCC M20 (SCREED)
lE 10 0 150 C/C SLOPE 1:20 FOR R.C.C. GRADE

BOTHWAYS AT BOTTOM SEE NOTE-2
N
PCC 1:5:10
ON111111111/EMENEIGIMISDNEENZEMB EICIMMEIKIIN
0 750 750 50
FOR CLEAR COVER

SEE NOTE-2
SECTION A-A
5 06.06.18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VK DCB RAJAN J1 SRNASTAVA RK TR,r-\/--EC-- STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS 4 21.01.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD Anil RC RBB DM SEPTIC TANK
51gTir fa&
Riren efeane Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
TYPE-I, II, III AND IV
0513(105TO (A Govt. of India Undertaking) Date Purpose by
by Page 1 of 1
No. Approved by
Page 2866 of 3884

EARTH FILLING(COMPACTED)
BRICK BATS FILLING 40mm 13mm THICK PLASTER IN
STRAW FILLING
NOTES:-
TO 50mm SIZE 11:3 CEMENT MORTAR
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
, .,. 100 (TYP)
2. THE FIWNG OF BRICK BATS IN SOAKPIT SHALL BE DONE SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH CONSTRUCTION OF BRICK WALL AS WORK PROGRESSES.
7 ='01=>C-1 C6 D2' .t:711> qQ7,77

iS.
' :c2;,1<,
,c3D,xV1
XDOI::7,C7,ca_q...0.P.> -==, ei■
-v
450
FROM SEPTIC TANK
4. EXACT THICKNESS OF BRICK MASONRY WALL SHALL BE AS PER LOCALLY AVAILABLE BRICKS (HERE WALL THICKNESS
HAS BEEN GIVEN AS PER BRICK SIZE OF 250 X 125 X 75).
BEND 0150/0200/0250mm Cl/HDPE PIPE 5. C.I PIPE SHALL CONFORM TO IS:3486.
7 BRICK MASONARY CHAMBER
WITH DRY JOINTS 0 6. THE TABLE FOR SOAK PIT IS "READY FOR USE", IF FOUND SUITABLE AS PER SPACE AVAILABILITY. HOWEVER DEPTH AND DIA
/ 0 LEVEL GIVEN ON
LAYOUT DRG
CAN BE SUITABLY ADJUSTED TO GIVE THE EQUIVALENT ABSORPTIVE AREA DEPENDING UPON THE SUB SOIL WATER TABLE,
cA
iD8 c1 / BUT H SHALL BE 1.0M.
thg,n
—461. GROUTING I 1:2 FREE FLOW
/ Ze'e. N 7. BOTTOM OF THE SOAK PIT SHOULD NOT BE LESS THAN 600mm ABOVE THE SUB SOIL WATER LEVEL. SUB SOIL WATER LEVEL
ati
cD
') 75
P !).14,. / CEMENT MO TAR TYP
30MMTHICK 1:2CEMM
cNo,
A
° ,;,. / MEANS HIGHEST OBSERVED SUB SOIL WATER LEVEL.
/ 8. AS PER MANUAL ON SEWERAGE AND SEWAGE TREATMENT, MINISTRY OF URBAN DEVELOPMENT, NEW DELHI, 1987,
LOCATION OF SOAK PIT SHOULD BE MORE THAN 20M AWAY FROM ANY WATER SOURCES LIKE TUBE WELL ETC. AND MINIMUM
/ / 7.0M AWAY FROM NEAREST HABITABLE BUILDING.
9. SOAK PITS ARE NOT SUITABLE FOR IMPERVIOUS SOIL SUCH AS DENSE CLAY OR ROCK. IT IS ALSO NOT SUITABLE
/_ / IF THE PERCOLATION RATE OF SOIL EXCEEDS 30 MINUTES FOR 25mm ABSORPTION AS PER APPENDIX-A OF
IS : 2470 (PART-2).
/ /
Dab00 00°'
.
v
C7 YD
qft,
/
(11()K10
,
417,07
,1( 4
iDd v
4Do
4
k.7§D
(14
'!/
pv
250 D 1250
TABLE FOR SOAK PIT
SECTION A-A DEPTH DIA AREA OF ABSORPTION
TYPE NO.OF USERS H(METRE) D(METRE) ADH+7V4 D2 (M2)
1 10 2.0 2.0 15
2 20 2.5 3.0 30
3 30 3.0 3.7 45
4 50 4.0 4.7 75
5 100 5.0 7.1 150
6 150 5.0 9.7 225
PLAN
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. Gaurav RKS Sc STANDARD No.

5 05.06.14
ENGINEERS REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD SKP RKS NK ND
Ifgar faaes
(Wen. eierPlelTSTJLICD+0
INDIA LIMITED
Rev.
No.
4 20.05.09
Date Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau
Convenor Chairman
Approved by
DETAIL OF SOAK PIT 7-65-0217 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
Page 2867 of 3884
C.I COWL
C.I COWL NOTES:-
0 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MIUMETERS.
o
o 2. MIN. SAFETY DISTANCES SHALL BE MAINTAINED AS BELOW.
" o STRUCTURE
(i) INSIDE BATTERY UMIT ATLEAST 15 M FROM FURNACE OR NAKED FLAME
COLUMN
OFFSITES :- IF VENTS ARE LESS THAN 15 M FROM NAKED
FLAME OR EDGE OF FREE CIRCULATION ROADS, THEY SHALL
BE FITTED WITH FLAME ARRESTORS AND LOCATED
04" ATLEAST 4 M FROM EDGE OF ROAD.
3. ALL VENTS SHALL BE ROUTED TO NEAREST PIPE RACK COLUMN.
CD REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.
0
0 WJ
Ln
a3 CDC,
0 0 I—Frto
U)
PCC M-20 PCC M-20

300x300x300 300x300x300
DIMENSION INDICATED ON AREA DWG. DIMENSION INDICATED ON AREA DWG.
UNPAVED AREA
PAVED AREA
VENTS IN UNIT AREA
SUP ON FLANGES
1/11111111111
611111 1r
FLAME ARRESTOR
100
1 00 R •
ELEVATION
FLAME ARRESTOR
INSTALLATION
VENT NOT SHOWN
ON AREA DRG. SANDWITCHED FLAME
ARRESTOR
A
SS304 WIRE GUAGE 18,
-'-107
77 4
8 WIRES PER SQ. INCH SUP-ON FLANGES
SS304
\mm THK. SS304 WIRE GAUGE 17,
Ys 000 8 WIRES PER SQ. INCH
BOLTS
0 1 I $
1r.
A
yS VENT PIPE
BC.D
PCC M-20
300x300x300
ASSEMBLE AND SPOT BRAZE AROUND PLAN

PAVED AREA UNPAVED AREA CIRCUMFERENCE
FIXING ARRANGEMENT OF
VENTS IN OFFSITE AREA (ISOLATED MAN HOLES) FLAME ARRESTOR DETAIL FLAME ARRESTOR
4 05.06.14 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD.

STANDARD No.
t5liae_10. ENGINEERS 3 19.05.09 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD SKP RKS/RBB NK ND
EiWs INDIA LIMITED
riecnre CM-Nina ) (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Rev.
Date Purpose
Convenor Chairman
VENT FOR MANHOLES 7-65-0219 Rev. 4
No. by by Approved by Page 1 of 1
Page 2868 of 3884

STANDARD No.
t31 ENGINEERS VALVE PIT TYPE-II
Ogar OWs INDIA LIMITED 7-65-0221 Rev. 5
FOR 04" TO 06" VALVE
INIUR JVCI■iT IA Govt ot India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 1
CHEQUERED PLATE
PCC M-20
(TYP)
REFER GENERAL CIVIL
AREA DRG.
o
9,
(
13mm THK. 1:3 CEMENT PLASTER
GROUTING
REFERENCE LEVEL
REFER GENERAL CIVIL AREA DRG.
o BRICK MASONRY IN 1:4 CEMENT MORTAR

PCC M-20
o — 250 1000 100 mm THICK GRAVEL FILLING

o
SQUARE (SIZE- 27MM TO 37MM)
SECTION - A A
L50 X 50 X 6
LE.1
tr
o
CNI
o
o
o
111■'
REF. Q
Ii I►
250 1230 250

1700
PLAN
REPRESENTATION ON
NOTE: AREA DRG.
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
2. FOR DETAILS OF CHEQUERED PLATE REFER STANDARD NO. 7-65-0224.
3. FOR DETAILS OF GROUTING REFER STANDARD NO. 7-65-0212.
4. THIS VALVE PIT IS APPLICABLE FOR OFFSITE / UNPAVED AREA ONLY.
GIVEN AS PER BRICK SIZE OF 250X125X75).
7. THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE WHERE GROUND WATER TABLE IS
UPTO BOTTOM OR BELOW THE VALVE PIT.
5 23.07.14 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD KC KS

( BB SC
4 19.05.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SKP RKS NK ND
No. by by
Approved by
Page 2869 of 3884

STANDARD No.
VALVE PIT TYPE-III
ENGINEERS 7-65-0222 Rev. 5
5ga OW5 INDIA LIMITED FOR 08" TO 016"
a.iT2R as, dvsn.) (A Govt of ind,a Undenak,^9)
Page 1 of 1
CHEQUERED PLATE
PCC M-20
(TYP)
/ REFER GENERAL CIVIL AREA DRG.
500 (MAXIMUM) o."001
ht, /
13mm THK. 1:3 CEMENT PLASTER
GROUTING
REFERENCE LEVEL
REFER GENERAL CIVIL AREA DRG.
0
0 BRICK MASONRY IN 1:4 CEMENT MORTAR
1.r)
PCC M-20
100 mm THK. GRAVEL FILLING
250 1300 (SIZE— 27MM TO 37MM)
SECTION - A A
HOLE TO BE PROVIDED AT SITE
PLAN
REPRESENTATION ON
AREA DRG.
NOTE:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILUMETERS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
2. FOR DETAILS OF CHEQUERED PLATE REFER STD. NO. 7-65-0224.
3. FOR DETAILS OF GROUTING REFER STANDARD NO. 7-65-0212.
4. THIS VALVE PIT IS APPLICABLE FOR OFFSITE / UNPAVED AREA ONLY.
GIVEN AS PER BRICK SIZE OF 250X125X75).
7. THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE WHERE GROUND WATER TABLE
IS UPTO BOTTOM OR BELOW THE VALVE PIT.
5 23.07.14 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JKU

4 19.05.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SKP RKS NK ND

No. by by
Approved by
Page 2870 of 3884

CHEQUERED PLATE DETAILS STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED (FOR MASONRY VALVE PIT TYPE-1, 7-65-0224 Rev. 2
5fgZII OWS
1.112N ~-rz astawn,11 (A Govt of Intha Undertaking)
TYPE-II, TYPE-III & TYPE-IV) Page 1 of 1
CHE UERED PLATE

6mm THICK
010 LIFITING HOOK
150
PLAN PLAN DETAIL - 2

FOR VALVE PIT TYPE-I FOR VALVE PIT TYPE-II
CHEQUERED PLATE 6mm THK.
Z.50x50x6 50 LONG
BRICK WALL
PLAN PLAN DETAIL - 1

FOR VALVE PIT TYPE-III FOR VALVE PIT TYPE-IV
(2.NOS PER VALVE PIT) (2.NOS PER VALVE PIT)
NOTE:-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILUMETERS.
2. R1 & R2 SHALL BE TO SUIT TO THE
SPINDLE SIZE.
ft;b "Àrl
5
2 05.06.14 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD ALOK KS SC
1 19.05.09 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD SKP RKS K ND
No. by by
Approved by
Page 2871 of 3884

MANHOLE TYPE-1 STANDARD No.
laStaddit ENGINEERS
lazir E1151eg Nov NDIA LIMITED (SANITARY WASTE SYSTEM) 7-65-0251 Rev. 6
ktle Undertakig)
MIEN 21701,20.3RM) te Gent of
FOR DEPTH 41M (0 4 300)
Page 1 of 1
CL OF MANHOLE COVER
REFERENCE POINT
(MANHOLE CENTRE)
•• 1250
250 MS RUNG
AS PER STD. NO.7-65-0211
750 _ 250
13 mm THK. 1:3 CEMENT PLASTER

WITH WATER PROOFING COMPOUND rIAVAP n
OUTSIDE INSIDE CEMENT PUNNING
AU/ 280
A♦
P11111
CHANNEL
BRICK MASONRY IN 7 2:
CEMENT MORTAR 1:4
MHS
PLAN
REPRESENTATION IN GC AREA DRG.
(FOR 0 < 300)
MANHOLE COVER & FRAME (IS:1726) HEAVY
DUTY GRADE DESIGNATION HD20 CIRCULAR
COVER FOR ROADS/PAVED AREA &
MEDIUM DUTY GRADE DESIGNATION MD10
CIRCULAR COVER FOR UNPAVED AREA
FINISHED PAVEMENT LEVEL
(INCASE MANHOLE IS LOCATED
ON PAVEMENTS) FINISHED GRADE LEVEL
0
0
0 10 mm (1) 0 150 C/C

TOP & BOTTOM (BOTHWAYS)
1:2 CEMENT MORTAR JOINT
(LEVELLING COURSE)
GROUTING IN PCC M-20

SIZE OF OPENING=OUTER DIA
OF PIPE + 100
(SQUARE)
PCC M-20
LEAN CONC. 1:5:10
50 SECTION-AA
NOTES:
(pio © 150 C/C BOTH
WAYS AT BOTTOM 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
2. ALL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE OF GRADE Fe500D
CONFORMING TO IS:1786.
3. THE BRICKS SHALL CONFORM TO IS:1077 (CLASS 5.0 MINIMUM).
4. EXACT THICKNESS OF BRICK MASONARY SHALL BE
ACCORDING TO SIZE OF LOCALLY AVAILABLE BRICKS.
(HERE WALL THICKNESS HAS BE GIVEN AS PER
BRICKS SIZE 250X125X75).
5. GRADE OF CONCRETE AS PER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES (MINIMUM M30).
6. BAR BENDING SHALL CONFORM TO IS:2502.
7. THIS STANDARD SHALL BE READ ALONG WIN 1TD. NO. 7-65-0212.
6 06.06.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD AVM RS

1314
5 29.05.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD Anil RKS RBB DM
Rev. Date Purpose Convenor Chairman
Page 2872 of 3884

MANHOLE TYPE-2 STANDARD No.
OWtzigift ENGINEERS (SANITARY WASTE SYSTEM) 7-65-0252 Rev. 6
Ogui Elileg Mir INDIA LIMITED
Men ratewaxmosAl IA Gov't ol Inds Undellall,g) FOR DEPTH 4 2M (0 4 500)
Page 1 of 1
10 0 150 C/C REINFORCEMENT ALL AROUND MANHOLE

COVER REF. STD. NO. 7-65-0212 MANHOLE COVER & FRAME (15:1726) HEAVY
TOP & BOTTOM DUTY GRADE DESIGNATION HD20 CIRCULAR
FINISHED PAVEMENT LEVEL 7500 FOR MD 1 COVER FOR ROADS/PAVED AREA &
\IIILR . C.0
C M30
( INCASE MANHOLE IS LOCATED 200 FOR HD 2 MEDIUM DUTY GRADE DESIGNATION M010
ON PAVEMENTS) CIRCULAR COVER FOR UNPAVED AREA
200 F.G L
30
1:2 CEMENT MORTAR JOINT
(LEVELLING COURSE)
BENCHING
0
0
0
N
V
GROUTING WITH PCC M20
SIZE OF OPENING=OUTER
DIA OF PIPE + 100 (SQUARE)
PCC M20
0
R.C.C. M30 0
I0
P.C.C. 1:5:10
50
10I0 150 C/C
BOTHWAYS AT BOTTOM
REFERENCE POINT
MANHOLE CENTER
BRICK MASONRY IN
1:4 CEM. MORTAR
13 mm THK. 1:3 CEMENT PLASTER

WITH WATER PROOFING COMPOUND
FOR STAGGERED RUNGS

REFER STD. NO. 7-65-0211
X
NOTES:
PLAN
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE. (FOR 0 < 500)
2. ALL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE OF GRADE Fe500D
CONFORMING TO IS:1786.
3. BAR BENDING SHALL CONFORM TO IS:2502. INVERT LEVEL OF INVERT LEVEL OF
INCOMING PIPE OUTGOING PIPE
LOCALLY AVAILABLE BRICKS (HERE WALL THICKNESS HAS BEEN MHS
GIVEN AS PER BRICKS SIZE 250x125x75).
6. GRADE OF CONCRETE AS PER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES (MINIMUM m3o). REPRESENTATION
7. THIS STANDARD SHALL BE READ ALONG WITH STD. NO. 7-65-0212. ON AREA DRG.
C5■
6 06.06.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD CS A RS
5 29.05.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD Anil RKS RBB DM
Page 2873 of 3884

_
_1f
fatieu
linen eVarle =MM../
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt India Undertaking)
MANHOLE TYPE-3
(SANITARY WASTE SYSTEM)
FOR DEPTHS 6M (0 4 1000)
STANDARD No.
745.0253 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 1
BRICK MASONRY IN 1:4

REFERENCE POINT
CEMENT MORTAR
(MANHOLE CENTRE)
13 mm THK. 1:3 CEMENT

PLASTER WITH WATER OF MH COVER
PROOFING COMPOUND
CHANNEL P
STAGGERED RUNGS
REFER STD NO. 7-65-0211
WS—
REPRESENTATION IN GC AREA DRG.
PLAN
CONC. M-30
10 mm 0 125 C/C TOP & BOTTOM

FINISHED PAVEMENT LEVEL 750 0 FOR IA 10
820 0 FOR H 20 MANHOLE COVER & FRAME
( INCASE MANHOLE IS LOCATED
ON PAVEMENTS) IS-1726 HEAVY DUTY GRADE
DESIGNATION HD20 CIRCULAR
COVER FOR ROADS/PAVED AREA de
• FINISHED MEDIUM DUTY GRADE DESIGNATION
Ir MD10 CIRCULAR COVER FOR
1:2 CEMENT MORTAR JOINT UNPAVED AREA
(LEVEWNG COURSE)
225
GROUTING IN PCC M-20

SIZE OF OPENING=.0UTER
DIA.OF PIPE+100(SOUAR E)
i......... _
01111111111
......•■■■= 1111111111
41111111111 AP4. 0
–1411,V, Ii
PCC M-20
CONC. M-30 a.; ■wh..■: ler! .
-§ft NOTE-6 WMIVI0100 ammiumem
M".■".■
LEAN CONC. 1:5:10 ,eUTVPtcli 347, 75
1500
2500 FOR 4000 < H <5000
2250 FOR 2000 < H <4000
10 mm 0 150 C/C BOTHWAYS

TOP & BOTTOM SECTION X-X
NOTES:
1. All DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
2. ALL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE OF GRADE Fe500D CONFORMING TO IS:1786.
3. THIS STANDARD SHALL BE READ ALONG WITH STD. NO. 7-65-0212.
4. WALL THICKNESS AT BOTTOM FOR 2000<H <4000 SHALL BE 375MM.
5. GRADE OF CONCRETE AS PER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES (MINIMUM M30).
7. EXACT THICKNESS OF BRICK IA.ASONARY SHALL BE ACCORDING
TO SIZE OF LOCALLY AVAILABLE BRICKS. (HERE WALL
THICKNESS HAS BE GNEN AS PER BRICKS SIZE 250X125X75).
8. BAR BENDING SHALL CONFORM TO IS:2502. IL.
Oftt .1 / 44.
6 06.06.18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VI< DCB RAJAN JI RIVASTAVA RK
5 29.05.12 REVISED Sc ISSUED AS STANDARD Anil RKS RBB
Page 2874 of 3884
0 10 LIFTING HOOK
ALT. BARS PLACED THUS
0 13 HOLE
0
0
25
6 THICK CHEQUERED PLATE 6 THICK CHEQUERED PLATE
NUT 150
t 10 150 C/C BOTHWAYS
(TYP.) P.C.C. 1:2:4
SECTION B—B
0 10 150
F.G. L./PAVED AREA F.G.L./PAVED AREA
DETAIL-2 veMeN
63 THICK ACID PROOF LINING
RUNGS AS/STD. NO. 7-65-0211 CONC. M30
BAFFLE WALL
w
Er"
0 80 H.D.P.E. PIPE
GROUTING IN 1:2 CLASS-1 (IS:4984)
CEM. MORTAR 0 100 R.C.C. PIPE (CLASS NP2)
(TYP.) TO S.W. DRAIN
0
0
PIT FILLED WITH LIME

(COMMERCIAL GRADE)
010 @ 150 C C BOTHWAYS

(TYP.)
75
0
0
to
N
LEAN CONCRETE 1:5:10

PLAN
SECTION—AA
0.6 0 10 LIFTING HOOK
38 THICK ACID PROOF TILE X25 CHEQUERED PLATE 6 THK.
6 THICK ACID PROOF CEMENT (BEDDING MORTAR)
945
19 THICK BITUMEN MASTIC NOTES: —
ONE COAT OF BITUMEN PRIMER 1. ALL DI EM NSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS
50x50x6-50 LONG
CONCRETE M30 2. HYD. BARS SHALL CONFORM TO IS:1786 (FE 500)
ANGLE IRON WELDED 140
6 THK. JOINTS TO CHEQUERED PLATE 3. UNDER SIDE OF THE CHEQUERED PLATE COVER, ANGLE IRON
(TYP.) AND RUNGS SHALL BE PAINTED WITH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
CURING TYPE TWO COMPONENT EPDXY PHENOLIC COATING
r)
co ME MOO 50x50x6 50 LONG
CURED WITH AMINE ADDUCT HARDENER IN THREE COATS OF
100 MICRON DFT / COAT AFTER SURFACE PREPARATION BY GRIT BLASTING.
0 (TYP.)
0 4. EXPOSED BOTTOM AND SIDES OF THE BAFFLE WALL (CONCRETE SURFACE)
SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH ONE COAT OF BITUMEN PRIMER 25 MICRON
DETAIL-1 PLAN AND TWO COATS OF EPDXY PAINT 100 MICRON EACH.
ACID PROOF LINING DETAIL CHEQUERED PLATE
; 46
DCB
kJ_
4 28.06.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. RP RS RK TRIVEDI STANDARD No.
laiiizeitikENGNERS 3 03.02.10 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SKP RKS RBB ND DETAIL OF
eftownta5lemar
eumeastawno
ism LI/Aim
Rev .
Date Purpose
Prepared Checked Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman NEUTRALISATION PIT
7-65-0310 Rev .4
No by by Page 1 of 1
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F5 Rev 0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 2875 of 3884

L 50x50x6
(L65x65x6 FOR
STRAINING POST)
DIAGONALS TO BE PROVIDED ON
GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE TYPE A-1 EITHER SIDE OF 'Y' SHAPE PROJECTION
CONFORMING TO IS:278
0
o
co
NOTES: —
2. CEMENT MORTAR FOR BRICK MASONRY AND

PLASTER SHALL BE IN 1:6 (1 CEMENT : 6 SAND).
CEMENT MORTAR.
1
1
0
0 3. PLASTER SHALL BE 13 THK. ON EVEN
40THK DPC LAYER SURFACE AND 16 THK. ON UNEVEN SURFACE.
SEE NOTE-13
4. POCKETS FOR ANGLE IRON MEMBERS SHALL BE 150x150
IN PLAN AND OF 225 IN DEPTH AND SHALL BE FILLED
WITH CONC. M20.
G.L. 5. GALVANISED BARBED WIRE SHALL CONFORM TO IS:278.
SEE NOTEl
k
NO. 12 6. STRAINING BOLT SHALL BE PROVIDED AT EVERY 90M.APPX.
cisolatesssosesm leamasseaasam
\\— EXPANSION JOINT 7. EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL PROVIDE A CONTINUOUS
VERTICAL SEPERATION THROUGH THE FULL THICKNESS
OF MASONRY WALL EXTENDING FROM TOP OF WALL
TO BASE CONCRETE.
ELEVATION SEC. A-A SEC. B-B
8. NECESSARY STEPS SHALL BE GIVEN IN THE
(ALL BARBED WIRE ROWS NOT SHOWN) HEIGHT OF THE WALL SO THAT THE HEIGHT OF WALL
IS NOT LESS THAN 3050 ABOVE F.G.L. AT ANY POINT.
9. EARTH AVAILABLE FROM THE EXCAVATION OF FOUNDATION

SHALL BE FILLED 2.5 M ON EITHER SIDE TO THE FINISHED
A B I EXPANSION JOINT
GRADE LEVEL AND COMPACTED WITH PROPER SLOPE FOR
DRAINAGE OF WATER AWAY FROM THE WALL.
REF. LINE
10. WEEP HOLES SHALL BE PROVIDED IN THE COMPOUND WALL
WHEREVER REQUIRED AT SUITABLE LOCATION DIRECTED
BY ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE.
460 460
= = ==
25 11. FOR FOUNDATION DETAILS REFER RELEVENT STRUCTURAL DRGS.
12. GRADE LEVEL (G.L.) MEANS F.G.L. OR N.G.L. ADJACENT TO

THE COMPOUND WALL ON EITHER SIDE AS APPLICABLE.
THE HEIGHT OF COMPOUND WALL (3050) SHALL BE
GOVERNED FROM THE HIGHER GRADE LEVEL AT INSIDE OR
PLAN
OUTSIDE THE COMPOUND WALL. THE LEVEL DIFFERENCE
SHALL BE TAKEN CARE BY STRUCTURAL DEPARTMENT.
GALVANISED BARBED WIRE
14 ROWS, MAX. SPACING 100 MM 13. 40MM THICK DPC LAYER SHALL BE PROVIDED AT 300MM
ABOVE GRADE LEVEL.
08 THK. 300 LONG BOLT
THREADED UP TO THE NECK
14. GRADE OF STRL. STEEL SHALL BE AS PER IS:2062 GRADE A.
HOLE 0 10 FOR
0
TYING BARBED
WIRE (TYP.)
I 65x65x6
COPING IN CONC. M20 VALID FOR
STRAINING POST
INDUSTRY CLASS-'A' AS PER...
2
BASIC WIND PRESSURE 150 Kg/M
AS PER IS:875
N CONC. M20
DETAIL OF FIXING OF STRAINING
BOLT WITH STRAINING POST
DETAIL-1
5 14.08.2014 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SKP/PDM s/ R SC STANDARD No.

lt~el ENGINEERS 4 02.02.2010 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SKP RKS RBB ND BRICK MASONRY
Igar fo Ws w INDIA LIMITED Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau COMPOUND WALL 7-65-0391 Rev. 5
Rev.
item Give re M1,14,7./1) India Undertaking)
(A Govt. of Date Purpose Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Page 2876 of 3884

LINE POST
STRAINING POST
1-4 z BARBED WIRE
NOTES:—
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
2. THE GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE Al TO IS:278 SHALL
0
U) HAVE LINE WIRE OF 0 2.5 MM. POINT WIRE OF 0 2.0MM &
1
MINIMUM WEIGHT OF COMPLETE BARBED WIRE SHALL BE
108gm/m WITH 75 MM DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO BARBS.
3. LINE POST SHALL BE PLACED AT 3.0 M C/C.
4. STRUT SHALL BE PROVIDED AT EVERY 15 TH. POST LAST
BUT ONE END POST & CORNER POST ON BOTH SIDE &
END POST ON ONE SIDE ONLY.
5. REINF. STEEL SHOWN THUS (pSHALL CONFORM TO IS:1786
LINE WIRE LATEST & REINF. STEEL SHOWN THUS 0 SHALL CONFORM
STRETCHER BAR LINE POST(sl
TO IS:432 LATEST.
4 NOS. 11 10 BARS 6. STRAINING BOLTS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE END

G.L. POST & AT PLACES AS DIRECTED BY ENGINEER—IN—CHARGE.
7. SIZE OF STRAINING POST SHALL BE SAME AS THAT OF
— --1 ..•7 LINE POST.
1 4VA 1- 1
1 I i ,'' • 1 HOLE FOR
L. 1.., 0 M-8 BOLT \- GRADE OF CONCRETE AS PER STRUCTURAL GENERAL
I '•1 1 U) 8.
L•. ti L:_•_..L LI L.:_1•_:-._:._...1 (TYP.) NOTES (MINIMUM M25).
SILL BEAM 800 500 IN SIDE OUT SIDE 9. MANUFACTURE OF CONC. POSTS SHALL CONFORM TO
(TYP.) TYP.) IS:4996.
3000 3000 3000 10. THE CHIAN LINK FABRIC SHALL CONFORM TO IS:2721.
11. STRETCHER BAR SHALL BE HOT DIP GALVANISED.
L+ A 12. SUITABLE INSERTS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON THE TOP OF
08 STIRRUPS 0 150 C/C THE SILL BEAM TO TIE THE BOTTOM LINE WIRE WITH
ELEVATION
WIRE TIES THE SILL BEAM.
/\ AAAI
G.L.
LINE WIRE B
Wtr
..•
0
FOUNDATION BLOCK (CONC.)
0
0 10 BOLT WITH (750x750x500)
NUT & WASHER
DETAIL OF
)
FLAT IRON (50x6)
DETAIL-1 'el.AMP BENT TO SHAPE SILL BEAM
4
200
SQ
BRACE OR STRUT 4 NOS. (D 10 BARS 750 15mm DIA RING MADE WITH
2.5mm DIA LINE WIRE TO BE
30 . PROVIDED AT A SPACING
08 STIRRUPS @, 150 C/C SECTION—AA
OF 750mm C/C
65x5 M.S. FLAT

G.L. \ STRAINING POST.
* 4 NOS. (D 10 BARS
12 t LUG
0 150
0
aD FOUNDATION BLOCK (CONC.)
(800x800x500(WIDTH)) DETAIL—X
0 0 6 G.I. STAPLE
EMBEDED IN THE 0 8 STIRRUPS
POST 150 C/C 150 C/C
800
DETAIL OF STRAINING POST

AND BRACE OR STRUT DETAIL —2 SECTION—BB
A 0.
Q51/YY ,74
28.06.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD RP DCB STANDARD No
4 .
$61lWiel ENGINEERS 3 02.07.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD ANIL RC RBB DM STANDARD DETAIL OF
farcio chi
INDIA LIMITED
()))0 of India. Undertaking)
Rev .
Date Purpose
Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds Bureau
Convenor Chairman
CHAIN LINK FENCING
(WITH CONC. POST)
7-65-0400 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
Format No 8-00-0001-F5 Rev. 0
Page 2877 of 3884

10 F 0 250 c/c BOTHWAYS FOR GRADE OF CONC. HDPE FILM
FILLED WITH 250 DOWEL BAR NOTES:-
EFER NOTE 2 REFER NOTE 15 75 500
COTTON WASTE 0300c/c
JOINT SEALING HDPE FILM 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
8 REFER NOTE 15
COMPOUND
■ W ■
2. THE GRADE OF CONCRETE SHALL BE AS PER ENGINEERING DESIGN
■
BASIS (MIN. GRADE OF CONCRETE SHALL BE M30).
8 •• .
•
DRY LEAN CONCRETE(DLC) 1115 \ //\* \\\ 3. DENOTES HIGH YIELD DEFORMED BARS OF GRADE Fe-500D
REFER NOTE 14 ' CONFORMING TO IS:1786 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. THE
TYPE-I
'COMPACTED SUB GRADE
(REFER NOTE 7&16) 040 G.I PIPE WITH
CAP 150mm LONG I , BOND BROKEN
BY PAINTING
20 THK. IMPREGNATED
FIBRE BOARD
4.
DOWEL BAR SHALL CONFORM TO IS:432 GRADE-1.
SIUCONE SEALANT SHALL BE USED AS A JOINT SEALING

COMPOUND IN PAVEMENT & AROUND EQUIPMENT.IT SHALL BE
(MAXIMUM PANEL SIZE 14M X 14M) DETAIL OF EXPANSION JOINT SELF LEVELING, LOW MODULUS TYPE CONFORMING TO ASTM 5893.
(FOR VEHICULAR MOVEMENT AREA) (FOR TYPE-I PAVEMENT) SUITABLE PRIMER, AS RECOMMENDED BY SEALANT MANUFACTURER,
SHALL BE APPLIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH IRC : 57.
(REFER NOTE-8)
5. EXPANSION AND SEAUNG JOINT FILLER MATERIAL SHALL BE
0 1. 0 300c/c BOTHWAYS FOR GRADE OF CONC. HDPE FILM PREFORMED FILLERS OF BITUMEN IMPREGENATED FIBRE,
JOINT SEALING
REFER NOTE 2 REFER NOTE 15 20 THK. IMPREGNATED CONFORMING TO IS:1838, PART-1.
COMPOUND
FIBRE BOARD
■ 6. CONC. PAVING SHALL BE SLOPED STEEPEST TO 1:100 UNLESS
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ OTHERWISE SHOWN IN DETAIL ENGINEERING DRAWING. SLOPE OF
• .•.
THE SUB GRADE SHALL BE PREPARED TO MATCH WITH THE SLOPE
\\\\\Y1x OF PAVEMENT.
• •d.•
DRY LEAN CONCRETE(DLC) MI5 'COMPACTED SUB GRADE wy•Avd \v/A
REFER NOTE 14 (REFER NOTE 7&16) 7. SUB GRADE BELOW PAVEMENT SHALL BE THOROUGHLY
COMPACTED TO 95X OF LAB DRY DENSITY AS PER IS:2720, PART
TYPE-II VIII OR 85X RELATIVE DENSITY AS PER AS PER IS:2720, PART
DETAIL OF EXPANSION JOINT HDPE FILM
(MAXIMUM PANEL SIZE 13M X 13M) REFER NOTE 15 XIV.
(FOR UNIT PAVEMENT) (FOR TYPE-II, III & THICKENED PAVEMENT)
8. EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL BE SPACED AT 14.0M (MAX.) FOR
TYPE—I PAVEMENTS & 13M C/C (MAX.) FOR TYPE—II PAVEMENTS.
8 0 275 c/c BOTHWAYS DRY LEAN CONCRETE(DLC) M15 9. EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL BE SPACED AT 15 M C/C &
HDPE FILM HDPE FILM
REFER NOTE 14 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL BE SPACED AT 7.5M C/C
JOINT SEAUNG COMPOUND REFER NOTE 15
REFER NOTE 15
(MAXIMUM) FOR TYPE—Ill PAVEMENTS.
10. THIS STANDARD IS NOT VALID FOR CAUSTIC HANDLING AREAS.
8 " "20
\\A\ yx\t ■ ■ ■ 11. IMITATION OF SINGLE AXLE LOAD ON RCC PAVEMENT:

FOR TYPE—I PAVEMENT : MAX. UPTO 12.0 TONNE
TYPE-III COMPACTED SUB GRADE . . , ••• FOR TYPE—II PAVEMENT : MAX. UPTO 6.0 TONNE (FOR SMALL
(MAXIMUM PANEL SIZE 7.5M X 7.5M) \v//\\A. \v/Mv VEHICLES LIKE FORK LIFT)
(REFER NOTE 7&16)
10 4' 0250 c/c (FOR OFFSITE PUMP STATION) NO CONCRETE CONTINUITY &
F.G.L NO INITIAL GAP DRY LEAN CONCRETE(DLC) 1115 12. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS MAY BE PROVIDED IN CASE PANEL SIZE IS
ci*
REFER NOTE 14 LESS THAN THE REQUIREMENT OF ELASTIC JOINT, TO SUIT SITE
ti REQUIREMENTS.
■
DETAIL OF CONSTRUCTION JOINT
\ \A
• %.4 • (SEE NOTE-13) 13. FOR PIPE SUPPORT DETAILS COMING IN THICKENED PAVEMENT AREA
0250 c REFER RELEVANT PIPING GAD / PIPING STANDARDS.
4,150 DRY LEAN CONCRETE(DLC) M15/
/
20 THK. 25 DEEP JOINT FILLED
REFER NOTE 14 14. DRY LEAN CONCRETE (DLC) OF GRADE M15 SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR
WITH SEALING COMPOUND (TYP) SUB—BASE.
TYP. EDGE DETAIL DEPENDING ON TYPE OF PAVEMENT HDPE FILM
(WITH KERB WALL) REFER N TE 15 15. 150 MICRON THICK HM HDPE (GRADE—I) FILM CONFORMING TO IS
HDPE FILM 10889 SHALL BE PROVIDED AS SEPARATION LAYER BETWEEN DLC
/ REFER NOTE 15 AND RCC.
F.G.L
■ 16. THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE FOR SUB GRADE WITH SOAKED CBR OF
4.0X AND ABOVE.
DRY LEAN CONCRETE(DLC MI5 SUBGRADE
10 0250 c/c DRY LEAN CONCRETE(DLC) A115
4,154
0 REFER NOTE 14
REFER NOTE 14 20 THK. IMPREGNATED a) GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATION SHALL BE FOLLOWED FOR
SUBGRADE PREPARATION BELOW PAVEMENTS.
FIBRE BOARD
TYP. EDGE DETAIL DEPENDING ON TYPE OF PAVEMENT b) SPECIAL CARE AS PER GEOTECH RECOMMENDATION SHALL BE TAKEN
(WITHOUT KERB WALL) IN CASE OF BLACK COTTON SOIL
HDPE FILM
10 0 300 c/c BOTHWAYS REFER NOTE 15
TYP. DETAIL OF JOINT SEALING
■
AROUND FOUNDATION
,
PAVEMENT TYPE—I/11 DRY LEAN CONCRETE(DLC) M15
AS APPLICABLE
REFER NOTE 14 COMPACTED SUB GRADE
X-SECTION OF THICKENED PAVEMENT (REFER NOTE 7&16)
4 12.07.19 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SD GS/AK RS MET STANDARD No.

OlitriddhB•CNEERS 3 23.05.11 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD AnII RKS RBB DM
RCC PAVEMENT DETAILS 7-65-0404 Rev. 4
Ogat Wieg
tow esaessesragasn)
LIMFTED (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Rev.
Date Purpose
Prepared Checked Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 2878 of 3884
▪
SA-1.000-00-8 'orsj let.woA

0 'A0):1
71
C)
0
P.
r2re 6;
0
z
(11 1\1
•o :‹
ci)
C)
1-3
0
O R)
CD
0
0
4—J
£9dS:3211 83d SV
H121V3 0313Vd1103
INTERLOCKING PAVER BLOCK(60MM THIC
(NYS NDIHJ. WW1,
O
CD
CD
150
'CJ1SSVcnnssi GNV G3SIA321

-0
'11" XI
0m
o 0
> r
Z0
p -1
m
REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED ASSTANDARD

1.71
0£—N1'3NO3JO
00
Viv
0
Z13
3NOIS 8d3NISV33Sd
Cr
0
so< 01
FD.
0_
co
ZJ
o.
!."
•-•• -c co co -1 0 *c1 tal
r- xx
E< o>rn
rn o
CA
C) C m rl Z
r- C) m co C/)
0
C C) 0 rn OO
z • E SO z ro
tm 1-3
1.1 P1
>
0 "1 0 v)
Ny 0 O
5 z
rn coZrn
N 0 co -o to
-4 0 • <
m
O < (,) 0 °
Z 5 > •• C)
O m z
0
13 co or,
0> 0
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
—I 0 W
0 cZ g
rn
0 0 ,„0
0.„
7J X 1- 0 tzi
0
<> -I0
-o Z
rn
rn V) C/a
0 0
U)
-o
C)
1 7Z)
C O
rn
0£-11'3NO3JO
-u
3NOIS 8S3N ISV338d
0
E .nal{ 90.170-99-L
.oN CIINCINVIS
Copyright EIL- Allrightsreserved
Page 2879 of 3884

NOTES:-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM AND LEVEL IN M UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
2. LOCATIONS WHERE THE ROAD TOP LEVEL AND GRADE LEVEL DIFFERENCE
IS MORE THAN 500mm, STEPS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON ROAD SIDE SLOPE,
FOR ACCESS TO THE HYDRANT.
CAP 3" FLANGE AS PER 3. IN CASE ROAD TOP LEVEL TO GRADE LEVEL DIFFERENCE IS LESS THAN
1000MM, PIPE LAYOUT SHALL BE FOLLOWED AS SHOWN.
ANSI 816.5 150 # RATING
S.O. FF (ASTM A-105) 4. WHERE ROAD TOP TO GRADE LEVEL DIFFERENCE IS MORE THAN 1000MM,
PIPE LAYOUT SHALL BE FOLLOWED AS SHOWN.
5. CLASS OF BRICK SHALL BE AS PER APPROVED PROJECT DESIGN BASIS.
6. SECTION A—A i.e. ONLINE HYDRANT SHALL BE PROVIDED ONLY IN CASE OF
HYDRANT VALVE UNAVOIDABLE SITUATIONS AS PER AREA DRAWING. 1600
(AS PER DATA SHEET)
ENDOR
4 4 04" POST (AS PER PMS)
CAP AND CHAIN URNISHED
[
4" FLANGE AS VENDOR
PER PMS CORROSSION PROTECTION FURNISHED
COATING (AS PER JOB SPEC [
04" ISOLATION VALVE
(AS PER VMS) 100 THICK M20 P.C.C. 1200x2000 MM
X
HYDRANT VALVE NEAT FINISH WITH SLOPE PLATFORM
ROAD BERM
(AS PER DATA SHEET) SECTION X-X CORROSSION PROTECTION CURB WALL
150 HIGH 1000 (ROAD BERM)
COATING (AS PER JOB SPEC
13THK PLASTER IN ROAD TOP LEVEL
VENDOR— 04" POST 1:3 CEM. MORTAR AS PER AREA DRG.
FURNISHED (AS PER PMS)
FIRE WATER HEADER SEE NOTE-4 —\
FIRE WATER HEADER OPTIONAL LOCATION
0 X
ON SLEEPERS OF HYDRANT
0
ROAD BERM WBM
600 1200x2000 MM LAYER
PLATFORM 104" BRANCH
PIPE
PCC M20 100 THK. BRICK WORK/STONE MASONARY
1:100 SLOPE F.G.L. 45*/90* ELBOW AS PER SITE IN CEM. MORTAR 1:4
F.G.L. 0 B.W./STONE MASONARY
0 ta_ to IN 1:6 CEM MORTAR DETAIL SIMILAR TO
0 SEC.—AA FOR
0 OPTIONAL LOCATION '
600 CLEAR (MIN.)
w
13 THK CEM MORTAR
1< 75
PLASTER ALL AROUND 04" BRANCH
SEE NOTE-3 I PIPE
1
PCC M20 75 THK
75
J.- A,
—7-- o'
z
NiNFIRE WATER HEADER FIRE WATER HEADER
U/G
U/G
SECTION-BB
SECTION-AA
SINGLE HEADED HYDRANT
HYDRANT ASSEMBLY POST L 1000 I 1000
CURB WALL 125 WIDE 2:

1000 A 150 HIGH
FIRE WATER TERMINAL
BRANCH E
tram
At A
1111116M.N11111 c.0
S E 4-1
S
DOUBLE HEADED Imuir
HYDRANT ASSEMBLY I 125 WIDE X 75 HIGH
CURB WALL
125 WIDEx75 HIGH
CURB WALL 5 THK 1:5:10 PCC
FIRE WATER HEADER
EA121 1_21±10.1
HYDRANT ON FIRE WATER TERMINAL BRANCH 1 100 THK PCC M20
(REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.) TYPICAL G.A. OF FIRE WATER HYDRANT ASSEMBLY
DETAIL-A I-I SECTION-EE
(REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.)
114 ,/ off
4 30.07.18 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD Anil GYAS R. SRIVASTAVA RK TRIEDI STANDARD No.
4cm el ENGINEERS 3 02.07.12 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD Anil RC RBB DM INSTALLATION DETAILS
OcgarfaWs esemie JLI +I)
INDIA LIMITED
Rev.
Date Purpose
Prepared Checked
by by
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
OF FIRE WATER HYDRANT
7-65-0420 Rev.4
No. Page 1 of 1
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F5 Rev. 0 Copyright EL - All rights reservec
Page 2880 of 3884
FIRE MONITOR
(AS PER DATA SHEET)
0 Ca
M
(n
cn VENDOR
FURNISHED 04"/06" ISOLATION VALVE
(AS PER VMS)
FIRE MONITOR 06"x04"/08"x06"

(AS PER DATA SHEET) CONC. REDUCER
2000x2000
(AS PER PMS) —O
1 ROAD BERM CARRIAGE
o co Li) WAY
PLATFORM
z 1000 1000
o N VENDOR — 04"/06" ISOLATION VALVE 100 THICK M20 P.C.0 LAID
° FURNISHED ROAD TOP LEVEL/HPP
(AS PER VMS) IN PANELS OF 400x400
'cF S PER AREA DRG.
06"x04"/08"x06"
CONC. REDUCER
(AS PER PMS) 75 THK. P.C.C. 1 :5:1 0
06" FOR 1 000 GPM FIRE MONITOR FIRE WATER HEADER 75
FIRE WATER HEADER 08" FOR 2000 GPM FIRE MONITOR ON SLEEPERS 06"/08" BRANCH
ON SLEEPERS
1 000 1000 CORROSSION PROTECTION
COATING (AS PER JOB SPEC)
in
2000 x 2000 M20 P.C.C. BLOCK
PLATFORM 1:100 SLOPE 1 :1 00 SLOPE
••I •
• • cu
F.G.L. • •• 230 COMPACTED //
230 7 •
SLEEPER COMPACTED SLEEPER \ • TYP, EARTH /NORIGINAL
EARTH TYP. \ \ • _/ SLOPE 600
r Nre 600 CLEAR (MIN.)
FIRE WATER HEADER SEE NOTE-2

1J //
U/G
Ni/r/AN PCC 1 :5:1 0
\ 06"/08" BRANCH
PIPE (AS PER PMS)
100 THICK M20 PCC LAID
IN PANELS OF 400x400 45/90' ELBOW AS PER SITE
FIRE WATER HEADER
SECTION-AA
U/G SECTION-BB
FIRE WATER HEADER
fp, NOTES:-
2. IN CASE ROAD TOP LEVEL TO GRADE LEVEL DIFFERENCE IS LESS THAN
1000MM, PIPE LAYOUT SHALL BE FOLLOWED AS SHOWN.
3. WHERE ROAD TOP TO GRADE LEVEL DIFFERENCE IS 1000MM OR MORE
PIPE LAYOUT SHALL BE FOLLOWED AS SHOWN.
4. SECTION B-B SHALL BE PREFERRED LAYOUT. SECTION A-A SHALL BE
FIRE MONITOR ON FIRE WATER HEADER
TYPICAL GA OF FIRE MONITOR ASSEMBLY USED ONLY IN UNAVOIDABLE SITUATIONS.
co/
3 30.07.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. Anil GYAS R. SRIVASTAVA K TRIEDI STANDARD No.
INSTALLATION DETAILS OF
ENGINEERS 2 02.07.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. Anil RC RBB DM
WATER OR WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR, 7-65-0421 Rev.3
ski fo INDIA LIMITED Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau
Convenor Chairman LONG RANGE FOAM / WATER MONITOR
riernit, M1,3,10)44) (A Govt of India Undertaking) Date Purpose
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F5 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL - All rights reservec
Page 2881 of 3884
STANDARD No.
BsIGINBERS CONCRETE SLIDING SLEEPER
PRECAST TYPE-1 B 7-65-0428 Rev. 3
OtatM-OMIA LIMITED
my.. y.0 (A Govt. of Indio Undertaking)
Page 1 of 1
M.S. FLAT 65X8 FOR FULL LENGTH

+5MM PROJECTION ON EACH SIDE
100 t
12T LUG e 250 C/C L SHAPE

FGL 0
AIL
040 HOLE FOR ERECTION PURPOSE
FOUNDING LVL
CJ
CV
MIN OR
>AK 300 IN CASE OF EXPANSIVE SOIL
WELL COMPACTED SAND (6+6)10T
(T&B) WELL COMPACTED
SUB—GRADE
SECTION A-A
.__
250
,
—...
• • MS FLAT65X8
A...
DET. AT SLEEPER JOINT
11
1..
LENGTH V
• ,„_ •
PLAN
NOTES:-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES. 5. THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE FOR BEARING
CAPACITY OF SOIL 5.0T/M 2 OR MORE.
2. REINFORCING BARS SHALL BE OF GRADE IN CASE BEARING CAPACITY OF SOIL IS LESS THAN
Fe 500D, CONFORMING TO I.S: 1786.
5.0T/M 2 GEOTECH RECOMMENDATIONS SHALL BE
3. COVERS TO MAIN REINFORCEMENT OBTAINED AND JOB DRAWING SHALL BE APPLICABLE.
SHALL BE 45MM IN PEDESTAL AND 50MM
IN BOTTOM SLAB. 6. LOCATION, LENGTH AND TOP OF SLEEPER LEVEL
SHALL BE AS PER RELEVANT PIPING GAD.
4. GRADE OF CONCRETE AS PER STRUCTURAL GENERAL
NOTES (MINIMUM M25).
3 20.10.16 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD SONU R.K. HARMA R. SRIVASTAVA RAKESH NANDA
2 30.05.11 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD Anil RKS RBB DM

Format Nn 8-00-0001-F4 RAW 0 Convrinht Fll - All rinhts reserver
Page 2882 of 3884

STANDARD No.
arge(Ainarm ) CONCRETE SLIDING SLEEPER

PRECAST TYPE-2B
7-65-0429 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 1
1 I 1'300
100
'
M.S. FLAT 65X8 FOR FULL LENGTH
1 /45MM PROJECTION ON BOTH SIDE
✓
25
,9131j,)1,_
4r'"....6 6V
• 12T LUGO 250 C/C L SHAPE
F.G.L.
V
• •
AMIL •
• 10 410175 C/C
101/ 0225C/C
040 HOLE FOR
!,,,VEREC. PURPOSE
10 TO175C/C
150/(ALRO)1ND)
(TYP) FOUNDING LVL.
00(MIN) OR 300 IN CASE OF

EXPANSIVE SOIL
WELL COMPACTED SAND
WELL COMPACTED
(64-6)1041 SUB-GRADE
(racB)
SECTION A-A
1000
300
41.1■■•
=WM%
• •

LENGTHVARIABLE
ti
0■_ •
PLAN
NOTES:-
CAPACITY OF SOIL 5.0T/M2 OR MORE.
5.0T/M2 GEOTECH RECOMMENDATIONS SHALL BE
4. GRADE OF CONCRETE AS PER STRUCTURAL GENERAL SHALL BE AS PER RELEVANT PIPING GAD.
sir%
3 20.10.16 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD SONU R.K. HARMA R. SRIVASTAVA RAKESH NANDA
Fnrmat Nn R-00-0001-F4 ROW n Cnnvrinht FII - All rinhtA ragarvarl
Page 2883 of 3884

STANDARD No.
CONCRETE SLIDING SLEEPER
h d)
dlilarme(rAsp,„i 2v,i1tEp PRECAST TYPE-3B 7-65-0430 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 1
300
MS FLAT 65X8 FOR FULL LENGTH
004 +5MM PROJECTION ON EACH SIDE
,
25 ii100 t
1241 LUG@ 250 C/C L SHAPE
51
0 10 41 0225 C/C
0
0
1O 0150 C/C
u) L61 040 HOLE FOR ERECTION PURPOSE
CO 10410150 CLC
>.•
•
a ah--... 11, 1 504,( 1-RO UND) FOUNDING LYL
• • (TY P)
WELL COMPACTED SAND (10+10)100

1 100(MIN.)
(m) WELL COMPACTED

SUB—GRADE
SECTION A-A
e I JJll
/
300
.
• •

LENGTH V
21A
II
• kr..-
._.-•
PLAN
NOTES:-
CAPACITY OF SOIL 5.0T/M2 OR MORE.
0."--
3 20.10.16 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD SONU R.K. SV/
RMA R. SRIVASTAVA RAKESH NANDA

Format Nn R - 00 -0001 - F4 Rev 0 ennvrinht Fit - All rinhts reserver
Page 2884 of 3884

STANDARD No.
6sIGINIEB6 CONCRETE SLIDING SLEEPER
liarmeism LIMITED
IIINITMIPINVINS•110 (A Govt. of Indio UndertokM0
PRECAST TYPE-4B 7-65-0431 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 1
300
MS FLAT 65X8 FOR FULL LENGTH
1)(210 +5MM PROJECTION ON EACH SIDE
100
25 ,
6V1211 LUGO 250 C/C L SHAPE
0
0 10416)225 C/C < -.111 40
rr)
•
0
0
101 0175 C/C
u)
Lai 10 41O175 C/C 040 HOLE FOR ERECTION PURPOSE
-I
•
CC
to 150 (ALROUND)
CNI
M
• • • (TYP) 47FOUNDING LVL
4..
100(MIN.) OR
300 IN CASE OF EXPANSIVE SOI
WELL COMPACTED SAND (6+6) 101/
(T&B) WELL COMPACTED
SUB—GRADE
SECTION A-A
1650
4, 300 4,
LENGTH VARIABLE
• •

--/V--
PLAN
NOTES:-
CAPACITY OF SOIL 5.0T/M 2 OR MORE.
6
t05,7
3 20.10.16 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD SONU R.KfARNA R. SRIVASTAVA RAKESH NANDA
Format Nn it-no-non1-F4 RAV 0 ennvrinht Fll - All rinhts rps.Arvikr
Page 2885 of 3884

NOTES:-
SCOPE LIMIT 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MIWMETRE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
BED LEVEL OF DRAIN (U/S) WELL CAP 2. 'H' SHALL BE AS PER GEOTECH RECOMMENDATION.
CONCRETE/BRICK MASONRY/ STONE MASONRY LINING (BOTH SIDE) 3 FILLET WELD 3. INLET TOWARDS RECHARGE TRENCH MAY BE ONE OR TWO NUMBERS.
FGL WELL CAP BED LEVEL OF DRAIN (D/S); 5 THICK M.S. PLATE 4. LOCATION & LEVELS OF INLET & OUTLET RCC PIPE SHALL BE
PAM
300 300 000 PCC ON TOP W/7/./YZ//7.677/Z4%Z.WW.W. ,, AS PER RELEVANT LAYOUT DRAWING(S).
BRICK/ STONE MASONRY 5. THIS STANDARD IS DEVELOPED CONSIDERING BRICK SIZE 250X125X75.
-..., -----
PI SI OPE
PA/ CA (
500 25X3 M.S. FLAT
SHAPE
BRICK SIZE 230X115X75 SHALL ALSO APPLICABLE IF THE ABOVE
SIZE IS NOT LOCALLY AVAILABLE.
6. MILD STEEL BLANK PIPE INCLUDING SLOTTED PORTION SHALL CONFORM
S COARSE SAND 1.5 TO 2 MM;
L -.s
P 600
150 THICK PCC (M20)
TO IS:1239 PART-1.
7. THIS DRG. SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE SPEC. NO.
GRAVEL 5 TO 10 MM SIZE I
',',",
c'
6-65-0055 (ERECTION OF TUBE WELLS.)
,....,...
DETAIL OF WELL CAP
cg BOULDER 5 TO 20 CM SIZE
i 8. THIS DWG. IS APPLICABLE FOR RECHARGING OF GROUND WATER TABLE
-... I Mill IVINIMIXIMINISEDW
BY UNCONTAMINATED RAIN WATER (ROOF TOP RAIN WATER AND RUN—OFF
BRICK STONE MASONRY
MILD STEEL SLOTTED PORTION OF STORM WATER DRAIN ONLY).
(C.M.1:6)
(3 mm WIDE OF EACH SLOT) 150 THICK 9. THE LENGTH OF 3 MM WIDE SLOT SHALL BE 80 MM WITH CENTRE TO
(SEE NOTE NO. 9) PCC (M20) CENTRE SPACING OF 15MM.
10. THE LENGTH OF 1.63 MM WIDE SLOT SHALL BE 80 MM WITH CENTRE TO
SCOPE LIMIT 11. 300 DIA BORE CENTRE SPACING OF 9 MM.
GAP TO BE FILLED WELL CAP

WELL
THICKNESS SHALL BE AS PER DESIGN (TYP)
WITH GRAVEL 3-6 mm FGL
CONCRETE/BRICK MASONRY/ STONE
MASONRY UNING (TYP)
100 DIA. MILD STEEL BLANK PIPES
GROUND WATER TABLE
BRICK/ STONE MASONRY IN CM 1:6 (TYP)
300 IN)
Irr —
BED LEVEL OF DRAIN
1
116 MILD STEEL SLOTTED PORTION (1.63 mm WIDE OF EACH SLOT)
(SEE NOTE NO. 10)
BAIL PLUG
1000
150 THICK PCC (M20)
SECTION -AA
SECTION-BB
FGL
STORM WATER DRAIN
BRICK STONE MASONRY CM 1:6 TYP

STORM WATER DRAIN (U/S)0, TRENCH No.STORM WATER DRAIN (D/S) \■■ =1111111MMIII1/4C
&i
(BUND)
pall u mmou
11. Co
441 ; -41m Co
==.
00
I ►
A 111M = MIIIM
11111= = W421111
1 101= ■ IMIll
I BED LEVEL OF DRAIN
2 NOS. 100 DIA. MILD STEEL BLANK PIPES
1
150 THICK PCC M20
-■ B BRICK/ STONE MASONRY BUND 800 HIGH
2000 6000 2000
00Q\ SECTION-CC
SCOPE LIMIT
SCOPE LIMIT
PLAN
3 20.06.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD MK RS STANDARD No.

kril(aelei ENGINEERS 2 24.06.13 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD KC RKS R88 DU DETAIL FOR RAIN WATER HARVESTING
7-65-0445 Rev. 3
Ifgar 01 w INDIA LIMITED Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau
Convenor Chairman
(CATCHMENT AREA N 5 HA)
I eiemre ds1.3q;lfA t fA Govt of India Undertaking) Date Purpose
by Page 1 of 1
No. by Approved by
Page 2886 of 3884

0150 C.I. PIPE LIFTING HOOK
FROM SEPTIC TANK
PRECAST COVER SLAB M-30 620X620X100 THK. PRECAST COVER SLAB M-30 EACH 1120X400X100 THK. MAX
WITH 18 0150 C/C REINFORCEMENT BOTHWAYS WITH A8 0150 C C REINFORCEMENT BOTHWAYS
0
N NOTES:
N FGL DETAIL-B DETAIL-B 0
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MIWMETRES.
BOTTOM OF
0
PIPE 2. FOR INLET AND OUTLET PIPE INVERT LEVELS REFER
AS PER GEN. LAYOUT DRAWINGS.
CIVIL AREA DWG.)
In
=NM 15
3. H.C.I. PIPE SHALL CONFORM TO I.S. 3489.
N ANIREMMEEITIME 0150 RCC
LOCALLY AVAILABLE BRICKS. HERE WALL THICKNESS
0150 C.I. TO SURFACE DRAIN
FROM SEPTIC TANK GROUTING IN 1:2 FREE FLOW HAS BEEN GIVEN AS PER BRICK SIZE OF 250X125X75.
0100 C.I. CEMENT MORTAR (TYP) 5. NO. OF PRECAST COVER SLAB SHALL BE AS PER SIZE OF THE TANK.
0-
0 6. THIS IS SUITABLE AT LOCATION WITH DENSE SOIL CONDITION, HIGH
1111111111• 116 RUNGS
STAGGERED AS PER
WATER TABLE AND UNITED AVAIUBIUTY OF OPEN LAND AND WHERE
STD. 7-65-0211 THE PERCOLATION RATE OF SOIL IS MORE THAN 30 MINUTES.
7. THE TABLE FOR UPFLOW ANAEROBIC FILTER IS "READY FOR USE", IF
DESLUDGING CHAMBER
FOUND SUITABLE AS PER SPACE AVAILABILITY. HOWEVER L, B, AND D
CAN BE SUITABLY ADJUSTED TO GIVE THE "EQUIVALENT MIN. VOLUME
OF FILTER MEDIA" TO MEET THE REQUIREMENT.
250 BRICK MASONRY IN 1:4 8. THE DEPTH (D) OF FILTER MEDIA SHOULD BE IN BETWEEN 0.6M TO 1.2M.
11501 1500 1. 250
0250 RCC PIPE ETAIL- CEMENT MORTAR 9. REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE OF GRADE FE 500(D) CONFORMING TO IS: 1786.
TO SURFACE DRAIN
0
PLAN 15
10 •
TABLE FOR UPFLOW ANAEROBIC FILTER.
110 0 150 C/C BOTHWAYS(TYP.)
NO OF O
M FIN. VOLUME ACTUAL VOL BREADTH(B) LENGTH ( L) DEPTH OF
FINISHED GROUND LEVEL SECTION-AA OF FILTER IN METRE IN METRE FILTER MEDIA (D)
USERS FILTER MEDIA MEDIA
(FG) IN METRE
REQUIRED PROVIDED
75 75 110 0 150 C/C BOTH WAYS
0
0 f /1
t
0 O0 O 0
012 HOLES (TYP)
0
10 O. 4M3 0.6M3 1.0 1.0 0.60
20 0.8M3 0.8M3 1.0 1.0 0.80

0 O0 O 0 O 0
0 O0 O0 O0 30 1.2M3 1.2M3 1.0 1.2 1.00
0 O0 O 0 O0
13THK. CEMENT PLASTER WITH
150 150 / 150
WATER PROOFING COMPOUND (TYP) C 50 2.0M3 2.0M3 1.0 1.7 1.20
C
PRECAST SLAB EACH 9 20X47 OX1 0 0
RUNGS WITH REINF. 1E10 0 150C/C BOTHWAYS, HOLES
012 0 7 5C/C & HOLE FOR 0150 DOWN PIPE 100 4.0M3 4.01,43 1.0 3.350 1.20
AS PER SITE REQUIREMENT
0
0 DETAIL-A 150 6.0M3 6.0M3 1.0 5.0 1.20
I.
CEMENT MORTAR 400/620
J 0
r.
PCC M-20 0
0
0 150 BOTHWAYS(TYP.
RCC M-30 IY2
DETAIL-B
PCC 1:5:10
BRICK MASONRY IN
-ms*.1.4 CEMENT MORTAR
16
0
0
110 0 150 C/C BOTHWAYS(TYP.

TOP AND BOTTOM 75j, 1004, 751
SECTION-BB
TIaNG HOOK
DETAlic 7,,LI5/(
3 20.06.18 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD UK STANDARD No.

ENGINEERS 2 24.06.13 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD KC RKS RBB DM UPFLOW ANAEROBIC FILTER
og-arfamg
(1117R eriecnic, 0101041)
INDIA LIMITED
fA Govt of India Undertaking)
Rev.
Date Purpose
Convenor Chairman
7-65-0448 Rev. 3
Approved by
Page 2887 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
JOB SPECIFICATION FOR
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
Page 1 of 21
NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED (NRL)
INDIA BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP PIPELINE PROJECT
JOB SPECIFICATION FOR
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
TENDER Nos. - B185-000-83-41-MK-T-9540
1 26.08.2019 RE-ISSUED FOR TENDER AR AR VG
0 02.05.2019 ISSUED FOR TENDER AR AR VG

Date Purpose
No by by by
Page 2888 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 2 of 21
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................ 4
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS ................................................................................................ 5
3.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 6
4.0 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................. 14
5.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING ............................................................................................ 14
6.0 BIDDER DATA REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 14
7.0 MANDATORY SPARES .................................................................................................... 15
8.0 RECOMMENDED SPARES .............................................................................................. 15
9.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY ......................................................................................................... 15
ANNEXURE - I ........................................................................................................................... 16
ANNEXURE - II .......................................................................................................................... 21
Page 2889 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 3 of 21
Abbreviations:
AC Alternate Current.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
CRCA Cold Rolled Cold Annealed
CS Carbon Steel
DC Direct Current
F&G Fire and Gas.
FM Factory Mutual
GA General Arrangement
IP Ingress Protection
IS Indian Standard
LED Light Emitting Diode
LOAEL Lowest Observable Adverse Effect Level
LPC Loss Prevention Council
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NOAEL No Observable Adverse Effect Level
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
P&ID Piping & Instrumentation Diagram
PESO Petroleum Explosive Safety Organization
(Formerly known as CCOE)
PFD Process Flow Diagram
PMS Piping Material Specification
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride
SRR Satellite Rack Room
SMPV Static and Mobile Pressure Vessels
TAC Tariff Advisory Committee
UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
V Volts.
Vds Verband Der Sachversicherer
Page 2890 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 4 of 21
1.0 SCOPE
The scope of work envisaged the Clean Agent system protection for Parbatipur-RT Control
Room under India-Bangladesh Friendship Pipeline Project, as per specifications, drawings,
codes, standards and good engineering practice etc. complete. The contractor shall be
responsible to complete the entire work in all respects and any other work necessary to
complete the job whether specifically mentioned or not in the scope of work.
Contractor’s scope shall include design, supply of all materials, installation, fabrication,
testing and Commissioning, puff test, performance guaranteeing of total flooding (below
false floor + main room + above false ceiling) centralised total flooding Clean Agent Fire
Extinguishing System as per this specification & NFPA-2001(latest addition). Clean Agents
to be considered are IG-541, IG-100, IG-55 and IG-01 as per NFPA-2001 for Fire Protection
of various risks. Main Control Room for which the Clean agent system to be provided along
with the risks as listed below:-
I. RT CONTROL ROOM (PARBATIPUR)
RISK
S. VOLUME
RISK DESCRIPTION
No. (MINIMUM)
(cum)
1 RISK -1 Rack room (Main room + False ceiling + False floor) 245.5
2 RISK -2 Console room (Main room + False ceiling+ False floor) 245.5
3 RISK -3 UPS room (Main room + False ceiling+ False floor) 205.8
4 RISK -4 Battery room (Main room + False ceiling) 180.6
Clean agent shall also be provided in the cable trenches. Volume of clean agent
required for cable trenches shall be added to the risk volume as mentioned above.
The actual net volume of the risk shall be calculated based on the Architectural,
Structural & Electrical drawings of the building by the bidder. However, the risk
volume given in Clause 1.0 shall be considered as minimum (i.e. Equivalent number
of main and stand-by cylinders shall be provided as minimum).
1.1 BIDDER shall design the system to meet the minimum requirements of total flooding fire
extinguishing Clean Agent system as per NFPA-2001 and having design concentration as
specified at 70ºF (21ºC) for the single largest risk area of the control room to be protected.
1.2 The system design shall be total flooding and Clean Agent requirement shall correspond
to the single largest risk area of Control Room to be protected.
1.3 No deviation from specification will be acceptable.
Page 2891 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 5 of 21
1.4 System supplied and software for design calculation shall be approved by
UL/FM/Vds/LPC. All the equipment’s shall be approved by UL/FM/Vds/LPC. Cylinders
along with cylinder valve assemblies shall also be PESO approved in addition to
UL/FM/Vds/LPC approval.
1.5 Clean Agent system to be provided shall meet the requirements of NFPA-2001 (Latest).
Hence anything specified as “Mandatory” in NFPA-2001, although not specifically
mentioned in this specification, shall form part of this specification.
1.6 The system shall be designed based on the single largest risk area of the Control Room
to be protected. However, the grouping of cylinders shall be made in such a way that
discharge takes place corresponding to the volume of the risk under fire.
1.7 The system shall include electrically actuated automatic Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing
System complete with filled up Clean Agent cylinders, cylinder rack, manifolds, pressure
reducing devices, cylinder valves, directional valves, pipes, discharge nozzles, bracket
supports, hangers and such other fittings as necessary for complete installation of the
system, including chipping of existing RCC / brick walls / cutting of steel plates etc. or
removal & re-fixing of false ceiling and false floor of risk areas, fixing fasteners and other
activities required to install the system.
1.8 The system shall also comprise of the different modes of operation, actuation and
cancellation facility etc. with necessary local control panel as per specification.
1.9 Operating devices and Local control panel shall be provided as per Clause 3.7 and Clause
3.8 respectively.
1.10 The bidders shall provide 100% Clean Agent filled standby cylinders. (i.e. A reserve bank
of Clean Agent filled cylinders with manifold, directional valves and automatic change over
to any of the two banks after actuation of main cylinders to be provided in each risk area
i.e. 100% reserve.)
1.11 The bidder shall very clearly mention in his offer that he has considered total flooding
centralised system with directional valves and have also offered 100% standby cylinders.
1.12 The design requirements as given in Clause 3.0 shall be met.
1.13 The material of construction shall be as per Clause. 4.0.
1.14 Bidder shall furnish valid collaboration certificate with OEM (if applicable) in his bid.
1.15 Bidder shall submit valid certificates of agencies who have approved/ listed the system
design , design concentration, equipment’s/ components offered.

The latest editions of the following codes, specification and regulations has been used for
the detailed design and specification of Clean Agent system
a. NFPA 2001: National Fire Protection Association, (Latest)
(Standard on Clean Agent fire extinguishing system)
Page 2892 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 6 of 21
b. Clean Agent manufacturer’s recommendations

c. SMPV Rules, PESO Nagpur (For Storage cylinders)
3.1 System Design

Design requirement shall be as given below.
3.1.1 System
The centralised system shall be designed to protect the single largest risk area (volume
wise) of all the three portions simultaneously i.e. main room + above false ceiling + below
false floor/ in trenches. Volume for main room, above false ceiling and below false floor/
trenches shall be calculated based on the relevant Architectural , Structural and Electrical
drawings.
3.1.2 System Operation
The system shall comprise of the following mode of operation and actuation and
cancellation facility etc. with necessary control panel:
System operation shall be possible by the following means:

a. Automatically due to fire detection in the protected area.
b. Operation of manual release push button located adjacent to protected risk.
c. By operating manual lever provided on electrical/ manual control head on pilot
cylinder
d. By push button actuation at Clean Agent control panel, in manual mode for each
risk.
Automatic/ manual mode selection shall be provided for all risks individually from clean
agent control panel.
The Clean Agent shall be discharged / actuated automatically after an adjustable time delay
based on the detection signal received. The delay shall be minimum 30 seconds; however
it shall be adjustable from 30 to 120 seconds. In the local control panel of Clean Agent
system, there shall be one hooter, which shall operate once the gas is released. During
time delay, there shall be a pre-discharge alarm (audio + visual). Hooter shall follow the
alarm once the gas is discharged.
3.1.3 Clean Agent Gas & its grouping/distribution

The quantity of Clean Agent gas provided shall be sufficient to protect the single largest risk
with 100% standby. The system for every individual risk shall have its own distribution
piping, nozzles, alarm and actuation system, etc.
Suitable combination of cylinders shall be made to cater to all the risk areas individually.
Page 2893 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 7 of 21
Both main and standby cylinders shall be permanently connected to the distribution piping
through manifold and arranged for easy and auto changeover.
Since the system is designed for the largest risk and there are several risk areas varying in
size in a particular building, the system shall permit the use of required no. of cylinders for
any individual risk involved so that the concentration of gas in that risk area does not
exceed the NOAEL specified.
3.5.1 Gas properties & its discharge characteristics

Physical properties of Inert Gas Agents shall meet the requirements of NFPA-2001.
FOLLOWING PROPERTIES OF AGENTS SHALL BE USED AS FIRE EXTINGUISHING

AGENTS (Shall be as per NFPA-2001 latest edition)
AGENT
AGENT
CONTAINE
NAME OF GAS
CONTAINER
R
CHARGING DESIGN
FORMULA CHARGING
PRESSURE CONCENTRATION
PRESSURE
NOAEL%
AT 700F (210
AT 1300F
C)
(550 C)
N2 (50%)
IG-55 43 4350 psig 5222 psig (*) Design
AR (50%)
Concentration for
N2 (52%) type of clean agent
IG-541 AR (40%) 43 4503 psig 5359 psig selected shall be in
CO2 (8%) accordance to
IG-100 N2 (100 %) 43 4061 psig 4754 psig approval taken from
UL/ FM/ Vds/ LPC
IG-01 AR (99.9%) 43 4510 psig 5402 psig (Follow NFPA clause

no. 5.4)
(*) Or higher % /quantity of volume as specified by Clean Agent manufacturer for

Clean Agent system. However the maximum discharge concentration shall not
exceed No Adverse Effect Level (NOAEL).
The agent discharge shall be substantially completed within a time period as per clause no.
5.7.1.1 of NFPA-2001 for IG-541, IG-55, IG-100 and IG-01. For inert gases the measured
Page 2894 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 8 of 21
discharge time is considered to be the time when the measuring device starts to record
reduction of oxygen until the design oxygen reduction level is achieved.
The minimum oxygen concentration shall be as per NFPA-2001 for NOAEL.
3.2 System Flow Calculations

System flow calculations shall be performed using A CALCULATION METHOD LISTED OR
APPROVED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (i.e. UL/FM/Vds/LPC). The
system design shall be within the manufacturers listed limitations.
BIDDER shall also provide sufficient measure/ (like properly designed fire rated louvers
etc.) facilities in the risk areas to dissipate over pressurisation due to release of Clean Agent
and also provide calculation in support of same for each protected area.
Approval certificate of software from the UL/FM/Vds/LPC etc. shall be submitted

along with the offer.
3.3 Clean Agent Quantity

Minimum design concentration of Clean Agent gas shall be based on greater of the design
concentration as specified in NFPA-2001 or the design concentration for which the vendors
clean agent system is listed/ approved, for Class “C” fire as per cl. No. 5.4.2 of NFPA-
2001 at 700 F by volume for Clean Agent fire extinguishing system based on approved /
listed flow calculation method.
Clean Agent concentration requirement and quantity shall be computed as per NFPA-2001
considering the volume of the hazard as specified.
3.4 Clean Agent Storage Cylinders

The Clean Agent storage cylinders shall be designed as per ASME code for boiler &
pressure vessels section-VIII OR as per IS 7285 Part 2 to hold Clean Agent at ambient
temperatures. Cylinder shall be of approved type and freshly imported/ manufactured.
Minimum design level pressure of storage cylinder shall be as per Clause 4.1.4 and Table
A-4.1.4.1 of Annexure-A to NFPA-2001.
The design pressure for cylinder shall be suitable for the maximum pressure developed at
1300 F (550 C).
The cylinders shall be charged to a fill density or super pressurisation (super pressurisation
means the addition of a gas to fire suppression agent cylinder necessary to achieve the
pressure required for proper system operation) within the range specified in the
manufacturers listed manual.
Page 2895 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 9 of 21
BIDDER shall select the capacity of cylinder based on the storage space available and for
better replacement and inter changeability. The BIDDER shall preferably select the capacity
of cylinder keeping in view the filling ratio as per NFPA 2001.
The cylinder shall be seamless, brand new (date of manufacturing of cylinders shall not be
older than 1 year from the date of bid opening) never retested and month & year of
manufacture shall be latest (or as specified in the requisition).
Each cylinder shall have a permanent name plate, specifying the agent, tare and gross
weight in addition to the pressurisation level, nominal agent volume.
Cylinder shall bear the mark of manufacturer, serial number, test certificate issued by
authority having jurisdiction and shall be duly approved by competent authority
providing approval of the system i.e. UL/ FM/ Vds/ LPC. A reliable means of indication
shall be provided to determine the pressure in refillable cylinders. PESO Approval of the
cylinders along with cylinder valve is a must irrespective of the country of Origin.
Cylinder shall conform to the requirement of NFPA 2001 and shall be compatible with the
engineered system being provided along with design analysis. Cylinders without approval
shall not be accepted.
Each cylinder shall have pressure relief valve to protect the cylinders against excess
pressure conditions.
Pressure gauges with isolation valves on manifold shall be provided.
Automatic means such as check valve shall be provided to prevent agent loss if the system
is operated when any cylinders are removed for maintenance.
Layout of Cylinders:
Clean Agent cylinders shall be arranged in the following manner:
i) In a battery of cylinders manifold together, leading to distribution piping and discharge

nozzles for the risk to be protected, including below false floor and above false ceiling
spaces, along with a reserve battery of Clean Agent filled cylinders with manifold and
directional valves, including arrangement for automatic change over to any of the two banks
after actuation of main cylinders to be provided in each risk area i.e. 100% reserve.
ii) The cylinder storage racks shall be provided for main as well as for reserve cylinders.
iii) The manifold cylinders referred above shall be securely mounted on the floor and suitably
supported in a rack with provision for convenient individual servicing, according to the
manufacturers installation manual. Such servicing shall be possible without shutting down
the system.
Page 2896 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 10 of 21
A space marked as cylinder location on the drawing will be made available to the Contractor
for placing Clean Agent Cylinders and Piping Manifold. Contractor shall accommodate the
storage of Gas Cylinders and Manifold Piping in the space provided and confirm the
adequacy of space (along with technical bid).
3.5 Piping, Fittings and Discharge Nozzles
3.5.1 Piping & Fittings
3.5.1.1 Seamless CS pipe as per ASTM A106 GR. B shall be provided as per the requirements
specified in clause 4.2.1 of NFPA-2001. Pipe thickness calculation shall be as per ASME
B31.1 power piping code. Normally welded joints shall be provided. Threaded pipes, if
used, shall have threads in joints and fittings conforming to ANSI B1.20.1.
3.5.1.2 Pipe fittings shall be provided as per clause no. 4.2.3 of NFPA-2001.
3.5.1.3 All CS Studs, Bolts and Nuts shall be Hot Dip Galvanised as per ANSI A153 for corrosion
resistance.
3.5.1.4 The Pressure Reduction device shall be easily identifiable.
3.5.1.5 The Clean Agent piping layout shall be such that the pipes of one risk shall not pass through
that of another risk.
3.5.1.6 All Valves shall be approved for intended use. The Gaskets, O-Rings and other Valve
material shall be compatible to the Clean Agent.
3.5.1.7 The Clean Agent piping and nozzles shall have to be planned clearing following facilities
coming on its route, in the areas where protection is being envisaged.
a. The beams and ribs which criss-cross the ceiling. The Clean Agent piping shall be
routed considering clearing structural beams / columns or any other facilities coming in
the areas where Clean Agent system is being envisaged. All necessary civil works
including taking support from Structural steel members, blast resistant RCC walls or
breaking brick walls for routing the piping and making them good, shall be in the scope
of work of bidder.
b. Path of AC ducts.
c. Cabling in false flooring.
d. Light fittings, detectors etc.
3.5.1.8 If required, the exposed piping works shall be camouflaged to match with the interior of the
protected room.
3.5.2 Discharge Nozzles
Discharge nozzles shall conform to Cl.4.2.5 of NFPA 2001 and shall be of Brass and shall
be FM/UL approved. Discharge nozzles used in the system shall be listed for the use
intended for discharge characteristics. The selection of nozzle orifice shall be such
Page 2897 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 11 of 21
discharge time required to achieve 95% of the minimum design concentration for flame
extinguishment as per clause no. 5.7.1.1 of NFPA-2001. Each nozzle shall be permanently
marked to identify the manufacturer as well as type and size of the orifice along with tag /
part number, orifice code, or other suitable marking as specified by the authority having
jurisdiction.
3.6 Painting
Painting and colour scheme of pipelines, Clean Agent storage cylinders, supports etc. shall
be as specified in the Specification for attached with the Bid.
3.7 Operating Devices
a. Operating devices shall include Clean Agent releasing devices or valves, discharge controls
and shut down equipment necessary for successful performance of the system.
b. Electric Supply: The purchaser shall supply 240 V ± 6%, 50 Hz ± 3% single phase power
supply at a convenient point. Converter if required to convert to any other operating voltage
shall be in bidder’s scope.
c. The automatic Clean Agent system shall be of robust design and shall not be readily
rendered inoperative easily. The Clean Agent system shall be designed to function properly
for the temperature range specified in NFPA-2001.
d. The Clean Agent cylinders shall be mounted on front and firmly supported in brackets in a
manner that they will not be easily subjected to mechanical, chemical or other damage,
which would render the system inoperative.
e. In addition to Automatic actuation, there shall be a normal manual control for actuation,
which shall be located so as to be conveniently and easily accessible at all times including
the time of fire. This control shall cause the complete system to operate in its normal
fashion.
f. Manual controls shall not require a pull of more than 40 lb nor a movement of more than 14
inches to secure operation. Each remote manual control for activation shall be located not
more than 4 feet above the floor.
g. Weight of Clean Agent shall be monitored by Pressure Transmitter/ Pressure Switch
along with local pressure indicator for each cylinder. All local pressure indicators in a bank
of cylinders (main / stand by) shall be connected in a signal loop and shall give a common
indication/signal of loss of pressure in that particular bank in the Control Panel for Clean
Agent system located inside Control Room. Contractor's scope of supply includes complete
system, interconnecting cables and installation of all equipments and accessories.
Page 2898 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 12 of 21
h. Contractor shall also provide sufficient measure (like properly designed fire rated louvers
etc.) facilities in the risk areas to dissipate over pressurisation due to release of clean agent
and also provide calculation in support of the same for each protected area.
3.8 Local Control Panel for Clean Agent System
3.8.1 The local control panel shall be free standing, floor mounted type and shall be suitable for
both auto and manual operation. The panel shall be made out of minimum 16 gauge CRCA
sheets. Doors and covers shall be made out of 14 gauge CRCA sheets. The panel shall be
naturally ventilated, totally enclosed, dust and vermin proof, with IP-41 enclosure as a
minimum.
The Clean Agent system shall be actuated automatically by the signal received from the fire
alarm & detection system and shall provide feedback to the fire alarm & detection system
for actuation of clean agent system for respective protected area / zone. Fire alarm &
detection system shall be separate system from clean agent system and Main Fire alarm
panel shall be a separate panel from clean agent Control Panel. Fire alarm & detection
system, after detecting the fire in the protected area/ zone, shall provide an actuating signal
to Clean Agent control panel, which in turn shall energise the solenoid valve to trigger the
dumping operation in the respective protected area / zone. Necessary control / interlock
cabling between Fire Alarm & Detection system and Clean Agent system panel, for each
protected area / zone for command & feeder using multi-core 2.5mm2, Cu conductor XLPE
insulated flame retardant low smoke (FRLS) cable, shall be provided by the Clean Agent
Vendor. The interface point with fire alarm & detection system shall be located in room
where the control panel for clean agent system is to be installed.
The control panel shall be located either just outside the entry/ exit gate of main control
room or in cylinder room or any other place as decided by owner at the time of detailed
engineering.
However, control panel shall be equipped with adequate rating battery charger and VRLA
battery with 24 hour back up, for efficient operation of the system during mains power
failure. Battery sizing shall be done considering end cell voltage as 1.8V.
3.8.2 Control panel shall be provided with all alarms, indicators, caution/sign board and relays/
control switches meeting all the requirements of NFPA-2001 and shall include but not be
limited to the following:
a) i) Two alarms and one fault indicator lamp for each zone to be protected.
ii) Combination of alarm silence and alarm off switch.
iii) Combination of fault silence and trouble lamp switches.
iv) Alarm test switch
Page 2899 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 13 of 21
v) Alarm re-set switch.

b) The system shall have a positive warning device by sounding alarm to alert
personnel of the impending discharge and also a positive indication to show that the
system has actuated. Two numbers potential free contacts shall be provided for
owner’s use, one contact for indication of start of dumping operation and other
contact for indication of end of dumping operation.
c) Alarm indicating failure of supervised devices of equipment shall give prompt and
positive indication of any failure and shall be distinctive from alarm indicating
operation of hazardous conditions.
d) One number potential free contact for owner’s use shall be provided for each
protected area/zone for indicating the actuation of dumping operation in the
respective area.
e) Provision for receiving auto actuation command through potential free contacts from
owner’s fire alarm & detection system shall be provided for each protected
area/zone for imitating dumping operation in the respective protected area/ zone.
f) All indication lamps shall be LED type with minimum size of 10 mm.
g) Following alarms (through contacts) are required to be provided to purchaser RTU
system for centralized monitoring purpose:
a) System Actuation alarm
b) System Inhibit/Fault Alarm
c) Clean agent Cylinder Weight loss alarm
3.8.3 Warning and instruction signs at entrance to and inside protection areas shall be provided.
3.8.4 A Control Box shall be provided for manual control at the exit doors of each risk area,
comprising of abort switch and Auto/Manual Push buttons for Clean Agent release.
3.8.5 Automatic/ manual mode selection shall be provided for all risks individually from clean agent
control panel. Selector switches for selection of Main/Reserve cylinders shall be provided
for all risks individually from clean agent control panel.
3.8.6 Potential free contacts shall be provided from the Clean Agent Control Panel to shut off the
fire dampers / louvers and Air Conditioning System.
3.8.7 Supervision of automatic systems shall be provided and shall include electrical supervision
of the actuating device and the wiring connecting the actuation device and the detection
system.
3.8.8 Operating instructions shall be displayed on a name plate fitted permanently on the Clean
Agent skid.
3.8.9 Clean Agent extinguishing system shall incorporate a pre-discharge alarm with a time delay,
sufficient to allow personnel evacuation prior to discharge. The delay shall be minimum 30
seconds. However it shall be adjustable from 30 to 120 seconds.
Page 2900 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 14 of 21
4.0 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

The material of construction shall be as per this specification for the items specified. For
other items, the materials of construction used in the system shall be in accordance with
NFPA-2001 or as specified by the equipment manufacturer for the intended use (if the same
is not specified in NFPA-2001). The material of construction shall be UL/FM/Vds/LPC
approved. The approval of the same shall be submitted at the time of bid submission.
Approval of Installation
Only listed or approved equipment and devices shall be used in the systems i.e. all
equipments & devices shall be approved by UL/FM/Vds/LPC. The complete system shall
be tested to meet the approval of Owner.
In order to determine that the system has been properly installed and will function as
specified, the following tests shall be performed:
The approval of installation shall be subject to satisfying the requirements of Clause
7 of NFPA-2001.
a. A thorough visual inspection of the installed system and hazard area. The piping,
operational equipment and discharge nozzles shall be inspected for proper size and
location. The locations of alarms and manual emergency releases shall be confirmed.
The hazard area shall be inspected closely for un-closable openings and sources of
agent loss. The supplier shall furnish the composition certificate of Clean Agent
satisfying the requirements of Table 4.1.2(b) for IG Agent Quality requirements of
NFPA-2001. Filling certificate should be provided specifying from which original Clean
Agent drum the gas has been taken and which cylinder is filled.
b. A check of labeling of devices for proper designations and instructions. Name plate
data on the storage cylinders shall adhere to specifications.
c. A test for mechanical tightness of the piping shall be conducted as per NFPA-2001
d. The cylinder along with cylinder valve assembly shall be PESO, Nagpur approved
in addition to listing/ approval by UL/FM/Vds/LPC.
e. A flow test (puff test) using nitrogen shall be performed on the piping network to verify
that flow is continuous and that the piping and nozzles are unobstructed as per NFPA-
2001.
6.0 BIDDER DATA REQUIREMENTS
Refer VDR documents attached with the bid.
Page 2901 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 15 of 21
7.0 MANDATORY SPARES

The bid must include in the quoted price for the following mandatory spares to be supplied
with the Clean Agent system:
1. Clean Agent Cylinders Minimum one or 5% of total cylinder (i.e. main cylinders
+ 100% standby cylinders), whichever is more, shall be
supplied with filled in Clean Agent gas. These are in
addition to 100% standby filled up cylinder
2. Automatic and Manual One of each type/ size used in the
release system system supplied
3. Cylinder Valve with One of each type / size used in the systems supplied.
safety pressure relief
device
4. Clean Agent Nozzles 10% of total nozzles used in each size / type with
minimum drill holes.
5. Clean Agent Release 10% of total used of each type etc.
Push Buttons
Spares for two years AMC shall be separately quoted in a separate envelope.
8.0 RECOMMENDED SPARES

In addition to above mandatory spares, BIDDER must recommend list of spares required
for 2 years trouble free operation, with unit rates and quantity, along with the offer.
9.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
9.1 OWNER'S SCOPE OF SUPPLY

Nil
9.2 CONTRACTOR'S SCOPE OF SUPPLY
All items required for completing the job as per Bid requirement including all materials, tools,
tackles, and labors etc. including mandatory spares.
Page 2902 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 16 of 21
ANNEXURE - I
TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS DETAILS TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER ALONG

WITH THE OFFER
(Data sheets shall be filled in separately for each clean agent as per NFPA-2001)
Legend V: Vendor to furnish data/details
1.0 Type of system : V

Total flooding centralised system
(Mention name of agent & manufacturer)
Formulation of gas : V
Normal Charging Pressure (psig) : V
2.0 Design code/standard to which design/

manufacture/ testing conforms. : NFPA-2001- (Latest)
3.0 System designed to protect the largest

or total risk in the building as specified. : Largest risk
3.1 Risk name/volume / Agent Container : Refer scope of work/job spec.

Charging Pressure
3.2 Design Concentration (Refer Clause 3.1.4) : V
3.2.1 Amount of gas required. (Attach separate

sheet, if required).(List out gas supplied,
number of cylinders etc. for working and
standby requirements, risk wise.) : V
3.3 Clean agent Cylinder Details (Seamless)

a) Manufacturer : V
b) Design Code : NFPA-2001
c) Capacity : V
Page 2903 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 17 of 21
d) Gas Holding Capacity (Kg) : V
e) Total Number supplied (main + stand by) : V
f) Approving Agency : FM/UL/LPC/Vds/PESO
g) Approval by PESO (YES/NO) : V
h) Working pressure (kg/cm2g) : V
i) Design Pressure (kg/cm2g) : V
3.4 Pipes, valves and fittings.

a) Material for Construction
i. Pipes : As per spec
ii. Fittings : As per spec
iii. Valves : As per spec

b) Design Code
i. Pipes : As per NFPA
ii. Fittings : As per NFPA
iii. Valves : As per NFPA
iv. Type of joints : As per NFPA

c) Hydraulic test Pressure of
manifold/ supply lines(kg/cm2g) : As per NFPA
d) Directional Valve
i. Test Pressure (kg/cm2) : V
ii. Approved by FM/UL/Vds/

LPC (Yes/No) : V
e) Discharge Nozzles
i. Number Supplies : V

LPC (Yes/No) : V
f) Pressure Gauge
i. Make : V
ii. Pressure Range : V
iii. Approved by FM/UL/Vds/

LPC (Yes/No) : V
g) Pressure Reducer
i. Approved by FM/UL/Vds/
Page 2904 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 18 of 21
LPC (Yes/No) : V
h) Cylinder along with cylinder valve
i. Make : V

LPC (Yes/No) : V
iii. PESO Approval (Yes/No) : V
k) Cylinder valve actuator

i. Approved by FM/UL/Vds/
LPC (Yes/No) : V
3.5 Painting and colouring of pipeline, nozzles,

Cylinder supports included : V
3.6 Operating Devices

3.6.1 Signal from the Clean Agent Control
Panel for shuttering off the air handling
unit and damper closing. : V
3.6.2 Push Button Station

i. Type : V
ii. Manufacturer : V
iii. Model, numbers offered : V
iv. Overall dimensions : V
3.6.3 Control Cables

i. Manufacturer : V
ii. Code/ Standard : V
iii. Type : V
iv. Size : V
v. Rating : V
3.7 Main Control Panel

i. Manufacturer : V
ii. Mounting Detail : V

Page 2905 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 19 of 21
iii. Number of entries : V
iv. Sheet Thickness : V
v. Cable Entry : V
vi. Total heat load predicted for air

conditioning. : V
vii. No. of AC/DC feeders and their

rating. : V
3.7.1 Additional Requirements for Control Panel

a) Whether housing all the necessary
printed card circuits, board cards,
relays indicating lamps, push buttons,
switches, etc. for the efficient
operation of the system,
(Yes/No). : V
b) Input power supply requirement for

operation of panel. (AC/DC Volts) : V
c) Panel Signal Voltage (AC/DC Volts) : V
d) Type of battery and AH of the battery : V
e) Charger rating : V
f) Interconnecting cabling between

battery and panel. : V
g) Power supply unit incorporated in

the panel. (Yes/No). : V
h) Audio visual alarm on panel provided

for Battery low conditions (Yes/ no) : V
i) Change over from AC Main supply

to standby power supply fully
automatic in either direction (Yes/No). : V
j) Following push buttons provided

i) Alarm : V
ii) Reset : V
iii) Test (Yes/ No) : V
k) Audio visual indication for AC
Page 2906 of 3884

FOR B185-000-81-41-SP-8160 Rev.1
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Page 20 of 21
supply failure provided (Yes/No). : V
l) Pilot lamp for system supply

failure provided (Yes/No). : V
m) Dual tone hooter for fire/fault alarm

Provided & range of the same : V
n) Painting (External/Internal) : V
4.0 Material of Construction selected in

accordance with NFPA-2001 (Yes/No) : V
5.0 Inspection and Testing

a) Visual inspection of installed : V
system & hazard area.
b) Check of labelling of devices. : V
c) Check for mechanical tightness of

piping & associated equipments : V
d) Non-destructive operational tests for all

devices included. : V
e) Test with N2 gas for all risks (YES/No) : V
6.0 Confirmation regarding the available space

For cylinders (main+ standby) (YES/No) : V
7.0 Confirmation that Main, Standby and : V

Mandatory Spare Cylinders shall be
supplied full of gas.
Page 2907 of 3884

ANNEXURE-II
Suppliers List for Indo-Bangla P/L B185 Date :26/08/2019 11:09:28
Page 1 of 1
Sr No Supplier Supplier Name Country Holiday Description

Code
Item Code : 05AC Description : CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
Approved Suppliers
1 V072 VIMAL FIRE CONTROLS PVT LTD INDIA
2 3702 ADN FIRE SAFETY PVT LTD INDIA
3 M719 MINIMAX GmbH & Co.KG GERMANY
4 3639 CHETAN CORPORATION INDIA
5 N539 NOHMI BOSAI LTD JAPAN
6 C356 CHETAN ENGINEERS INDIA
7 T206 TYCO FIRE & SECURITY INDIA PVT. LTD INDIA
8 S003 SIEMENS LIMITED INDIA
9 N075 NEW FIRE ENGINEERS (P) LTD INDIA
10 U095 NOHMI BOSAI (INDIA) PRIVATE LIMITED INDIA
On Holiday
1 N052 NITIN FIRE PROTECTION INDUSTRIES LTD INDIA Ground-13 (Negative networth or
Financial constraints)
2 M275 MX SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL PVT. LTD. INDIA Ground-13 (Negative networth or
Financial constraints)
066057049054
Copyrights EIL - All rights reserved

066057049054
Page 2908 of 3884

Document No.
FOR Rev. A
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM Page 1 of 3

FOR
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
A 01-MAY-2019 ISSUED FOR TENDER -AR- -AR- -VG-

Rev. Date Purpose Prepared by Checked by Approved by
No.
Page 2909 of 3884

Document No.
FOR Rev. A
The following drawings/documents marked " " shall be furnished by the bidder.
POST ORDER
S. WITH WITH
BID
(FINAL)
1. Indian/International standards to which the
offered system/equipment conform.
2. DCI including all the documents
3. Catalogues/Brochures giving technical
particulars and details of operation/
maintenance of the offered elements/ system.
4. Certificates of agencies who have accorded
approval for the system design, design
concentration, software elements/components
offered.
5. Collaboration certificate with OEM (if
applicable )
6. Protected room/area layouts as reconfirmation
regarding the area being provided with Clean
Agent system).
7. Confirmation regarding the available space for
cylinders as given in the bid drawing.
8. Calculation of clean Agent Quantity / cylinders
offered for various areas as per specification
9. Availability of gas, spare parts, refilling facilities
in India
10. List of Mandatory and Recommended spares
as per B035-001-81-41-SP-8106, REV-A
11. Hydraulic Calculation
12. PFD, P&ID and GA Drawing
13. Testing and inspection procedure
14. Data sheet of cylinder and other components
15. System description and write-up
16. Battery and charger sizing calculations
17. GA and schematic design of Control Panel
18. Functional write up of control panel including
battery charger
19. Operating and maintenance manual
20. GA and design calculation for pressure release
vent / louvers
21. Testing and inspection schedule and procedure
according to NFPA 2001
22. Battery and charger sizing calculations
23. GA and schematic designs of Control Panel
Page 2910 of 3884

Document No.
FOR Rev. A
POST ORDER
S. WITH WITH
BID
(FINAL)
24. Piping GA Drawing
25. Filled-in Technical Data Sheet as per attached
Specificatiosn B185-010-81-41-SP-8160, REV-
0
Notes :
1. "TICK" denotes applicability.
2. Post order, drawing / document review shall commence only after approval of Document Control Index (DCI).
3. All post order documents shall be submitted / approved through EIL eDMS portal.
4. Final documentation shall be submitted in hard copy (Six prints) and soft ( two CDs/DVDs ) in addition to
submission through EIL eDMS.
5. Refer - 6-78-0001: Specification for quality management system from Bidders.
6. Refer - 6-78-0002: Specification for documentation requirements from Contractors.
7. Refer - 6-78-0003: Specification for documentation requirement from Suppliers.
8. All drawings & documents shall be submitted in A4 or A3 paper sizes. Documents in higher paper size shall
be submitted in exceptional circumstances or as indicated in the MR/Tender.
9. Post order- The schedule of drawing / data submission shall be mutually agreed between EIL & the bidder /
contractor / supplier during finalization of Document Control Index (DCI).
10. "@" indicates submission of documents to Inspection Agency.
11. Bill of Material shall form part of the respective drawing.
Page 2911 of 3884

pamesai s}116!J IIV— 1134116pAdo3 0'Aohl Ld- L 000-00-8 '0N 1.euuod
Page 2912 of 3884

Aq peAcuddv
03
uop.maweidw! 101. panssi
G)
7
0
ZOOZ170'0£
panss!-ed pue pes!neu
G)
7
LOOZ'60'8Z
penss!eu pue pewed Z LOZ •90'6Z
4/-
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
• •
▪ •
<,, 0
1 ':i' .-,1 Ell 'a-5 (--:.; ;, 5 ,'.:1 x x s-ii '-'1 til c) () (-) c) to tii >.
2 o
e ..3 (..) c.) (-, .,, (.,,, ,H 5,-; Q ,_9 -i ,-,1 tri 2 rri c.) c7 ›. v)
=m .. r. ... -- rl
-ri r-' up
<1,cr o -,-.
O rii
z" 1 7zi (I) trl
c) '-r1
CA n >
suo9uptaiciqv
=z, o
0. rri
..1r:l,
••
r)
0ikad L3- 1000-00-8 '0N iewiod

o
2 r" ': 5" 5 5" 'o" E '() CD n CDn nto> r-1- '-
e1 —,
o ,>
444 ■-• cn crg cn `-C ENF
-
2• '..6 A.)
P4 ,.,. -4. Er
• •„.,• .-, _. 5 5- a' : ,(4> ,..0 -- 0- '7D. • CD" 5 ..--■
.t -11 o ..-s Ci.; ■-•.) p,D 0 cn '-.<
L
~ cy C o C) ...t.) `(i)) ° cp9 .,_i
4 ef)• P7i o CD ,. (") 2) CD go'=• • C ,1?-• 'a' n o (:, (/) 3, C >"' C/)
ro
A) CD a '-o ••■ cp C C ,..r. -- — p,,
`-< " CD (?) "• ADO'"CO° >
8 ,_ ,....4 ..C) '4.• = ~'.
CD .ti eD
• O " Zi) 5
n Crl ,,,,B 2 r_. (z CD- 1 )- ~t •-o •-•
,,,,• —•
:=,, CA
. ,...r. cp A) ."' 0 5-' . ._3 _-
o-1.) 9, -,a c, -r,-; ,-'•
2_ O cl O
a")t •(4) rri " .."),, Ct.
L-. A) CrQ -5- = CD "•« <
92. El -. •-6-
FD' 2 -rr n .., CD •-• • rD ,̀4 n.' AD
C °
CD cn 0 c.„ 5* rD'ci'
--
., 0
.( .-•CfCi 0
■
-t („D
H F•D+ •--r
,-t °
e) ,..,
•-t Cl. CA
CD C ,-r, crq 1,'„' ,4-h.,,,,•tri ,-1-
.,..,10 rD
•cn 0C"' 0 0cn •-r- 4) $?-• .
~• ,Q
1
crq <-7 r)
g- --,
-. o '"<co".
O 5-' °- a
cp . ,-, .i.,
n ()• CrCi ,'14 t-, o
,-t
O A) 74- AD :<
CD
= o-
:-,
4 :-4, (-)
o cr) 5, (7
c)
,-3 '-.. 5 O' gs
IDD
,..... '.- 'F)..
AD 2,) ci 2. l
<1:cn,`j t'. AD
cn co to.
< til
--' o•-• cp
c,, .a.
,
AD
5.
'-1-1
r>
E
EAD
Cr
4 CD
. .
CD••••' •
CD
Sw
crQ
C) (Ê•• „c) cip n
'13
-o
›-
,-, $-L -c, ,-,z ,-, z z

O (D._=, o ..,- Q. ;_, ;•• (.4• Cll •-1'-',
,.-- •-• 0 •-,
,..,
(1).-tC AD p o
•
c, o. CL. o.. co PD ot., •
e's o-' co ° O-' o ..°'
e) -- 0 " o' ,..z) (") »4' < 'c
o - '
- • rD cn :., =,.. (7 r. -- (::i
cn ■-■ A) a) od
r- • cfc? -, s
n, '-': s).) '' -'-F' '-)." ,9- rz■-; o `.-. 4 a= rrl ri-,
CD •-t 0 (D '-'1 '.C-) `''' (D
r - IC t-rl a , cp (-) onm
cp CL• CD 12 i::'•• »t:, O E)" ["/") . ■-• • C7 " CrCi
ris
41
C7' C n) CD
c) "'
c•L, '..-
■-• ,.."
',74. o •--■ •
■oo
-t ,Cfc) •-r-
C CD :=t• .r,) -. n) O. o t),) c , co
ell o CD •-+. (,) uop
,.o-„c)'.z.t
, -,o 0 O g 0 C4 o 5.
c)• ("D >. .,=■-à o $:,) o CfCi gaH
C r-t,'" '1")') •-■., p
--'
-.'
CD .-- • c) o r)
,' :n o ,.c) r1 ) E
c) -,-
-. ;--0t 0
,_t
C) "'' ag cp
A) ,-t
cn
8'. C
.nall9L01-18-9
C >
N"
pamaseJ sw 6P IIV— 113440doo
AD
,--r• cn
8« o
o r.
(-)-.
o
o
Page 2913 of 3884

•
IN)
.l`,.> It.)
.
7 V) O
1.0
'-' C::, 0
s-0
-•
ej C-' cp C4 !:1., Cr GL. r'-' • c/3
n k .-- • ,. ,-.
•-• C/3 CD eD CD s,)
c:' '7'. crt' r
'. ' -' < -' cr r'
1dOJS o•I
i1)-) '" c)
c-) g• .., (2, (6
1)) - ' -C i ) "
0 - . , i - ~:J-' C3' - '.,1V:4) .."
r'
=,-D • • C")
‘• `C, ›-, ,Y) '..0 (c) cra
o CD i-ri '' > o"
Procedures
•trl
r..-!.-., p,D „
—• Pz ,--,. .-3 (;, ,•:,.
;,,, AD '•
N CD CD A)
.-
Au ..-,
cn
co CD
C/D CD 0 =1.• 94 (-D
5 w 1:Q cit', ,_ p o 5 0 5 ") '4 .
0Aed Ld- 1000-00-8'oN

•INV Komadsmo.£
-,- - •-■- — '-o
, ,?..).
cr -: c) -- CD H
ro
Material Inspection
,.... g-
,__,
p v) -: o- — ,_q
-. ;v ,-, .-T1 y) CD
'0 .,-.1. ,,CD ,..,
..-•- ,'-.4 ,,; •
o - cr v, ,.. (I) 0 s-G
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
,..s r4. .. AD '-'. ."'= • u, CD
AD
o
■
-t
st
cp
simawaffinÒ
CD
CD
"
CD
'.:; •
'
CD
PO/PR/ Standardsreferredthere in/Job specifications/Approved documents.
CHARACTERISTICS
Statutory bodycertification,MakeofItems,etc.
Matchingof detectorswith givenspecifications,
AD
a.
Visual, Dimensional,Operationalchecksasapplicable,
ràD
.--,
CD cD
1
C) a
c:D
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
C/3 ch `cJ
CD
'ZS Cr
cn
-o .. n 9
<-
oo -,rt'- ,,.)...,-FL
.2., 0 o
',7,; . -9
..-1 g
CD
c/D cn' "
o3
,-r
cra
o.
co
CD
1
CD
1
SUB
o
"
SUPPLIER
i CD
i co
paniesei sp.16p ily —113 41160doo
Gra
SUPPLIER
CD
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
1
1
EIL/TPIA
Page 2914 of 3884

:i• ....._ (..à.) (#à Z C/)
'-' 01157 ,-. = • 0
,-->oN,,-.v) (...)
o
.o
cL) 9 ,D, ro <
g g
r) ,._,--.
cl--o o
Components
'cn-' CD .-- • $'')
'10
CD 1.
'-'• '-r1
Final Inspection
AD
0.Aed L3- 1.000-00-8 'oN W WJOd

'—' • ,—, Ilg CD
o (-) >
CD .--
■
=1. !,, Inprocess Inspection
CD •-t
AD
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
PCBsand otherElectronic
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
cD ,-t •-• ,-1- .0 , cp .

II CD et, CD " CO AD '-'' n) CD 0 o_
, r., :,) 0.0 ,-,- <1) 9_,
. ) . (.--,-- F4, --
r:D l, = "
) "r-, `4 ,..-
--'• ■
c)
- b P"" b
- 4. '
5 + H.
" . 1D ,a
,-,«
0 :,)
,-+ ~h ,
(1) ■-,;
p,-r-
c, ,--,• »i
cp ,--/- ~'"
= 0 .ri <Z1.. 5 E ' )' ,..$:22,. = o
0 .-• = po " 2.crc, '''-'
,..
0 AD .-.
■• ) v) :) -',
0• ■
= ~0 - o AD .-4., .--t• '=.'.:
,.. " (•D
o ''cs s:).) 1=1. . , CD OF
-.r),D--' oo-''
CD = 0 cn 0 $'' o'', r) ,:-,/r1 o••, 0 -: ,-s ;-, (-) „CD
CD 0 ,., • ,-, »-t .- •
0 -1') ::_"',. Po :,.),-P) CD o r, , ,:-.; „r'D rD ,-I-) o
f=0 —. ::--',.• ;--1- P)
— 0 -' 0 o• c, R- r.,) ot. o Q., o .--
'EP po = ,
t;d5,i, ›.. ■
-b cn 7, ,-I IDD cr o r.)) c.) 94 •— c'-'
o CD :S)." '"t ,-, (7C? 0
CD .~..•,
■-■
CI:i ,1 AD CD
cn ?,-. ) <• -, r arta o ,
co --- CD CD ■-r., ,.., 4 0 C=
AD, rn A) 3:0
--, c, >
CfCD CD CD <D .-'
CD AD
<:L. " r-'2
. 0 :y `•
■
-t AD 5 cl.. c) ..., ,-,-. — r, ,
AD AD AD ....
cn
C4 o.. 5" cl., ,,ro AD),) ;.., `' - ,..
f0... CD
.„ CD tr,
,-0- (0. 5 crq
$2 ..-•
V) li r-r-• ,.. s'• ,,,, .-cs
u) po -. <Drp CT) . 4 o „,,_«,
CD
CHARACTERISTICS
:0
6) -•
__ -• o C4 AD
- ,-. CrCi ''' ..0 AD '5' . CfQ
- o ■-, 'o
Burn-In Testof PCBs for 96 hrsat50 deg C
,-.., -
.-tr-1- • c'--;• (1) Cfc:i
CD
AD
5 .c; ,-C • cp CD ,--, •
'-cn c).• - '-'
_, cn 5 ..cf)
o el) rDc). -•
■-•») ."0 k:; ' 0 '-c)
Ö AD •-■., ,-- •
cr o ro,—h cn o ;)).
CD P-■-
o :" srD
"'"" ("I' . Sr CD
r-t- ,--.. ,-■• '-G ■
-1,
Cil
rri °
17; 'ro . ,==' c>

•-cj cr C1., ~t
C) p,, C"
cl.,
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
CD ,... • -io r)
...
C)1 C9 ■-r
e) O
Records
Supplier' s Test
, 1
SUB
SUPPLIER
£'Aall 9L01-18-9
pamasei s;LI BP IIV— 113411 60doo

SUPPLIER
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
x
EIL/TPIA
Page 2915 of 3884

i...) 0
C/3 :
,...t c..) ■-• ''-.
1
'.Z.:; o ...
CD '-11 2)t
>
,-r- > -'• —
;
.9 '"C7 ct% P-1' oO
•._, —
g , :,-,•
,-1 -08- ; -•
• so.. ci) ),) 7. c -.
o t-.-* CD
' 11 co r-'-
0•A9d Ld- 1000-00-8'0N 4eLUJOd

AD co ■CI o .9
;:o :,) ■--h s w
•
'-r1 $=, $'' n>
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
co CD
~_, •--r-
.4
• • • • • • • • • • • •
(-) o rp. () 1.1 >cl) 'Ê ',-; o -- (-)o-',,,--P'-oo rzi
(--, CD ,--.. -,••-. .no
< co .0• '''eD ""-' $:.— CDE-) vp$:,D c<
7, •
> 4 '$' CD CD 0.• •-•-■ ■-1- .. ,.,, CD CD •-• CD ."' -- " '-'
.--. r) ...... AD ,-, •.-
c„, 0 ,.4 c=■/).) . . "
s't crt ,•,
~ • ,.: A)
t-t -to -. o .-
p) ott, '-)7
t; o CD 9 (--) h., o., ■cp-b ,
) ,9_,. .-
c)
". ;') c)., ,-,)
,,, t-t ,- w)
o l 1, ,,,, ,5 • (/) . ""
0 »ti o f-f
o ''O' ' ':J 1"> m
c-) , 2 o „„ (.,,
''' ._
r) u)
»(5 '--P> o. .ct - • P ,-,, • r
• o o n,
cn ■-s.) -.. CD 0
-= (.,o.. ,.... 1.0-,•,,,,,_. '." o cp
"
o r) ''''' rb."' 5 CD (I) A-D. CL __,
- ,7--t. P go CD n 8
È-3 CD <"4 cn r9-
CD CA o ■-• o O ,-t ~-
'<.--,• &
c g. (. 9 't-5' • — ,. cp cp P-- .-+) '.--- ò-') cp
.- ..,,a p g
.-$
,; ,,, ... ■
-t 0
r•-h AD
a5' ci)- ;;;Grc) .— ocrzo:-, °7 '-'
AD cp N p., g .0 0-:
,v) vD co
[''' 6° .Z.: " ''"?, c. c, Cr o rf' ,,, cfc?
rn" cn CD .-s ''' '-'
CD '-,) co Cf] 2.
0 ° co ci) •-t- CD $2
.1 C) 0 tl. et, • ...t .
5,
'"'-•
ho (--) cr
5 'c-5- o
AD '''' <-..)
co ..-• • (-D Cl.• O (D r° --'
)
"
AD
•-t- '0..' •fD.D
-s- _•-t- '-•
0 cn pD • ,..<
-, •-t 01., — ,....
co o.. :,) r4 P, ''' CD
< o ■
-t cn ;.., '"CJ .(2 . ■-r- o
PO C/' CD cl • ,_,_ •■., A-s-
D 0 (
switches,Shortcircuit/fault isolator
2 eD o (., -----,
-,, 7.C? 94
„,,•,..., ,
CHARACTERISTICS
'-,co-. 5. o., o Er 2)
cfp CD --t
•rD
(2 '"0 '"-i =" 0 CD.. $?D $,) C) R" .-0 ,,, ,L"' 1.,7
0 ■-t ■-1-> .-b 1=1 •CD rl CD .
<•jj CD o'q
■--1.) CD 0 -t- ■-■ • -, o .. ,.. c) ‹-t-
o gt, -t -t -• CD crQ r,, -t, cn •-- • ,...i.
•-• • 10
ag o cp `-° t),) Po F;
c) a., Sn ,<1) Cr CD ,7-t.• ■-• • rn
co 1:$ AD rw f'D co o 0 s•
a SW AD
,...,. - CD
~ • o ,......., cr ,.
CD ES ,.cn ,C2,., o
2,, c,.. .
Signs, Beacon Lamps, Siren, Releaseand inhibit
Operationcheck onapplicableaccessories likeExit
-t -, ... ,-,, ,--, CD

Provisionof cableglandsand earthing
ril °
(,
) -t
■
H . 6 '' 7D"
O.
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
c,
CD .•-• • ''Cf n
(-) ,--, CD
0 o
...t CD •-r-. 0
SUB
SUPPLIER
.nall9L0I-18-9
pamesai sA 6P IIV— 11341160doo
Z
SUPPLIER
t'l
l
~
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
I
-
CJ
Page 2916 of 3884

z z
o o
c.)
111
-nau 9L0I-18-9
z
CrJ
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
0 r°
z C4
QUANTUM
0
r)
STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS
Z
OF CHECK SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
Changing Addressof detectors
Verificationof Batterytypeand Capacity
Calibration Check with standardcalibrator,validityof
calibratorcheck (if applicable)
Operationcheck onapplicableaccessories likeExit
Signs, BeaconLamps, Siren, Releaseand inhibit
switches,Shortcircuit/fault isolator
Certificate fromtestingagencylike ATEX, CIMFR
BASEEFA, FM/UL, PTBetc. forsuitabilityin
■-s-
E
specified hazardousarea
e()' CA a) :'L
cp ■-+ -,
, 7P,
Submissionofcertificates
C/D
(.1) 4-zi
5
o
o"
AD
--,
W
-c: -•
AvalidBIS license for indigenoussupply
,.n
x
n
C)
,.',i rc, .
I
/documents
Statutoryapproval certificates from CCE/PESO for
c)
use inspecified hazardousarea.
r2,)
Cn
De:_reeof .rotectioncertificateasa p plicable.
0
—, fil
Painting •• •
∎
t..n
Paintingand Packing
•■
Visual.
i
••• • • •• • ••
Suitableprotectiontoprevententryof foreign
C)
C:)
o
material.
—■
Testrecords
■
Properpackingtopreventany damage during
transportation.
p
CN
Documentationand IC
Reviewof Internal TestReportsandMTCs. Supplier'sTest

IC issuance Records /
.--,
CN
DocumentationandIC Inspection
1
Certificate
(IC)
Page 2917 of 3884

0'ned L3- 1000-00-9 'oN
pamesai s;(.161-1 11V — 1134460doo
0'Aed Ld- 1000-00-9oN iewi cu
AIIAII3VtaDvis
uolss!uicins i.uotunooci teulj
co
A> ttg
CD
,-■
c)-
-. ro
< •-c .
r-r- C)
F•D •
• cn
c6.).
.-1
A> CD
cr' -..
cc) -I
CD
A>
cn
`t:S co
CD ■-r.
.-t cn
`t1
0 >>
--......
`-.
AD
CL.
C4 CL.
■
-o.
AD ..,
<-r-.
0
Cl.,
AD
.-t DL>
1:DL
cn C«-Li
•cn
-t
•CD 0
.-s
.....
CD
CL, cn
st li
CD
c)
-s -.
co 0
• cn
c)
c.. o
o -c)
cr co
cn -.
'-ct
co cn
r>
-. 'cf
rit o n) xz
c) ...
Po
-i- 'Z'A
-. cp
o t::.,
c.)
....›..,
c)
o
-c)
'i,c -c
o t:N)
c)
o -,
a■ t:..
0
cl.,
Q.. c)
o
o 5
co
n) C4
Cf) CI)
F=0
,--,
AD
cii•
0 O
Cr
CD
AD
li O
li
£'Aall 9L0I-18-9
lt:,)
pamaseJ sp.I N iiv — -113 ;1160doo
cs-
llarlddaS
O
Page 2918 of 3884

LIST OF ATTACHMENT (ELECTRICAL) DOCUMENT No.
PROJECT: INDIA BANGLADESH
B185-000-16-50-LL-9540
FRIENDSHIP P/L
Rev. B
CLIENT : NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED
TENDER-2 (PART- C) Page 1 of 6
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
P/L Laying & Terminal Works for IBFPL
(ELECTRICAL)
TENDER-2 (PART- C)
PROJECT INDIA BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP P/L

CLIENT NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED
CONSULTANT ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
EIL JOB No. B185
B 10.09.2019 REVISED AND RE ISSUED WITH TENDER JM RKS ANPS
A 26.08.2019 ISSUED WITH TENDER JM RKS ANPS

Date Purpose
No by by by
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1 0900020084ee1d99_A4.docx Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2919 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-LL-9540
FRIENDSHIP P/L
Rev. B
CLIENT : NUMALIGARH REFINERYLIMITED
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
CONTRACTOR shall carry out all works strictly in accordance with the
drawings/documents/specifications indicated in subsequent paragraphs.
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK & JOB SPECIFICATIONS& ELECTRICAL DESIGN BASIS
Sl
Specification No. Rev. Title
No.
B185-000-16-50-SOW- Scope of work (Electrical) P/L Laying &
1. A
9540 Terminal Works for IBFPL Tender-2(Part-C)
Job Specification (Electrical) for P/L Laying
2. B185-000-16-50-SP-9540 A
& Terminal Works for IBFPL
3. B185-000-16-50-CPS-01 2 Scope of Work(CP System) Part-C
4. B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001 B Engineering Design Basis (Electrical)
2.0 DATA SHEETS
Sl
No.
1. B185-000-16-50-DS-9540 A MV Power and Control Cable
Data sheet – Flameproof Lighting and Power
2. B185-000-16-50-DS-9541 A
Panel
3. B185-000-16-50-DS-9542 A Communication and Fire Alarm cables
4. B185-000-16-50-DS-9543 A Plant communication System
5. B185-000-16-50-DS-9544 A Tube Well Motor Data Sheet
6. B185-000-16-50-DS-9545 A MV Switchboard Components Data-sheet
7. B185-000-16-50-DS-9546 A Data Sheet for Lighting Fixture Schedule
8. B185-000-16-50-DS-9547 A MV Power and Control Cable(Fire Survival)
9. B185-000-16-50-DS-9548 A Fire Alarm System
3.0 MISCELLANEAOUS DOCUMENTS
Sl
Document No. Rev. Title
No.
Vendor Data Requirement for P/L Laying &
1. B185-000-16-50-VR-9540 A
Terminal Works for IBFPL Tender-2(Part-C)
Vendor List P/L Laying & Terminal
2. B185-000-16-50-OD-9540 A
Works(Electrical ) for IBFPL
4.0 STANDARD SPECIFICATION
Sl
No.
Specification for flameproof lighting and power
1. 6-51-0008 5
panels
Page 2920 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-LL-9540
FRIENDSHIP P/L
Rev. B
Sl
No.
2. 6-51-0014 5 Specification for industrial type control stations
Specification for flameproof plugs, sockets & hand
3. 6-51-0021 5
lamps
Specification for Medium and High Voltage Cables
4. 6-51-0051 8
& Accessories
Specification for Communication and fire alarm
5. 6-51-0052 6
cables
Specification for hazardous area lighting fixtures
6. 6-51-0061 5
and junction boxes
Specification for energy efficient medium voltage
7. 6-51-0064 1
induction motors
8. 6-51-0072 5 Specification for plant communication system
9. 6-51-0076 5 Specification for fire detection and alarm system
10. 6-51-0081 4 Specification for electrical equipment installation
11. 6-51-0082 5 Specification for cable installation
12. 6-51-0083 5 Specification for lighting installation
13. 6-51-0084 5 Specification for earthing installation
14. 6-51-0086 3 Specification for construction power system

Specification for field inspection, testing and
15. 6-51-0087 3
commissioning of electrical installations
Specification for electrical works as part of paving
16. 6-51-0088 3
works
17. 6-51-0099 6 Design philosophy for electrical facilities
Specification for quality management system
18. 6-78-0001 1
requirements from bidders
Specification for documentation requirements from
19. 6-78-0002 1
contractors
Specification for documentation requirements from
20. 6-78-0003 1
suppliers
5.0 INSPECTION & TEST PLANS
Sl
No.
Inspection & test plan for flameproof lighting and
1. 6-81-1008 2
power panels
Inspection & test plan for industrial type control
2. 6-81-1014 3
stations
Inspection & test plan for flameproof plugs, sockets
3. 6-81-1021 2
and hand lamps
4. 6-81-1032 5 Inspection & test plan for MV motors
Inspection & test plan for MV & HV cables &
5. 6-81-1051 3
accessories
Page 2921 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-LL-9540
FRIENDSHIP P/L
Rev. B
Sl
No.
Inspection & test plan for communication & fire
6. 6-81-1052 3
alarm cables
Inspection & test plan for hazardous area lighting
7. 6-81-1061 3
fixture & junction boxes
Inspection and test plan for energy efficient medium
8. 6-81-1064 0
voltage motors
Inspection & test plan for plant communication
9. 6-81-1072 3
system
Inspection & test plan for fire detection & alarm
10. 6-81-1076 3
system
Inspection & test plan for electrical motor operated
11. 6-81-1091 2
valve actuators
6.0 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
Sl
Standard No. Rev. Title
No.
1. 7-51-0101 5 Typ. earth electrode for earthing system
2. 7-51-0102 7 Typ. earth electrode in test pit
3. 7-51-0103 6 Typical earth plate and fixing details.
4. 7-51-0104 5 Typ. arrangement for earthing of motors
5. 7-51-0105 6 Typ. Arrangement for earthing of transformer
6. 7-51-0106 5 Typ. earth connection for push button station
7. 7-51-0107 5 Typ. earth connection for street lighting pole
8. 7-51-0108 6 Earthing of tanks, vessels and spheres

Typical arrangement for earthing of overhead cable tray
9. 7-51-0109 5
and electric motor.
10. 7-51-0111 5 Typical earthing arrangement for process equipment
11. 7-51-0112 5 Earthing/bonding of pipes and pipe racks
12. 7-51-0115 5 Fence and Gate Earthing(Transformer Yard)
13. 7-51-0116 7 Equipment earthing schedule
14. 7-51-0117 5 Typ. details of directly buried earth electrode
15. 7-51-0201 5 Typ. installation of lighting fixture at ground level
16. 7-51-0202 5 Typical installation of lighting fixture on platform
17. 7-51-0203 5 Typ. open area flood light mounted on wall or column
Typical installation of flood light fixtures (two) mounted
18. 7-51-0205 5
on pole
19. 7-51-0207 5 Typical installation of street lighting fixture
20. 7-51-0208 6 Typical marshalling box details for lighting poles
Page 2922 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-LL-9540
FRIENDSHIP P/L
Rev. B
Sl
No.
21. 7-51-0209 5 General arrangement for flood light mast
22. 7-51-0210 5 Post top lantern installed at ground level.
23. 7-51-0211 5 Post top lantern installed on gate

Typ. installation of fluorescent fixture mounting in
24. 7-51-0212 5
exposed wiring system
25. 7-51-0213 5 Typ. installation of recessed mounted fluorescent fixture
Typ. installation of recessed mounted or below false
26. 7-51-0214 5
ceiling mounted fluorescent fixture
27. 7-51-0216 5 Typical installation of high bay lighting fixture
28. 7-51-0217 5 Typical installation of well glass lighting fixture
29. 7-51-0218 5 Typical installation of bulkhead lighting fixture
30. 7-51-0220 5 Typical installation of aviation obstruction light.
31. 7-51-0221 5 Typical installation Div.2/FLP well glass lighting fixture
32. 7-51-0222 5 Typical Installation of hazardous area bulk-head fixture
33. 7-51-0223 5 Typical installation of hazardous area flood light fixture
34. 7-51-0224 5 Typical installation of weather proof light fixture
35. 7-51-0225 5 Typical installation of flameproof lighting panel

Typical installation of lighting/ power panel wall (surface
36. 7-51-0226 5
mounted)
Typ. installation details of lighting fixture mounting in
37. 7-51-0229 5
concealed conduit system
38. 7-51-0230 5 Typ. installation of lighting/ power panel flush mounted
39. 7-51-0232 4 Typ. installation of Met-sec channel
40. 7-51-0301 5 Marking of trenches for electric cables
41. 7-51-0302 5 Typical section of cable trench in unpaved areas
42. 7-51-0303 5 Typical section of RCC cable trench

Installation details for Control station on Structural
43. 7-51-0306 5
Channel in paved area
Installation details for Control Station on Concrete /
44. 7-51-0307 5
Steel Column in paved area
Installation details for control station on structural
45. 7-51-0308 5
channel in unpaved areas
Connection details for vertical motor & control station
46. 7-51-0311 5
(cable below ground)
Connection details for Horizontal Motor & Control
47. 7-51-0312 5
Station (Cable below ground)
Connection details for Horizontal Motor (Cable below
48. 7-51-0313 5
ground)
Connection details for motor and control station –
49. 7-51-0314 5
(cable in tray)
Page 2923 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-LL-9540
FRIENDSHIP P/L
Rev. B
Sl
No.
Installation details for Socket / Receptacle mounted on
50. 7-51-0315 5
wall/ column (Cable below ground)
Installation details for Socket / Receptacle mounted on
51. 7-51-0316 5
column (Cable in tray)
Installation details for socket / receptacle / control
52. 7-51-0317 5
station mounted on handrail
53. 7-51-0322 4 Details of ERC below grade level
Cable termination for motors (Cable dropping from
54. 7-51-0323 4
overhead trays)
Cable termination for motors (Cable dropping along
55. 7-51-0324 4
column)
56. 7-51-0325 4 Cable termination for motors (Cable laid in trench)
57. 7-51-0326 4 Cable termination for motors (Cable laid in trench)
Safety measures for electrical installations during
58. 7-51-0332 3
construction
59. 7-51-0333 3 Details for hot dip galvanized ladder type cable trays
Typ. installation details of electrical panels on false
60. 7-51-0335 3
flooring
Typ. installation details of electrical panels on cable
61. 7-51-0336 3
trench
Limiting dimensions for distribution transformer upto
62. 7-51-0337 1
2500 kVA
Notes, legend and details for area classification
63. 7-51-0701 2
(Onshore Oil/ Gas installations
7.0 DRAWINGS
Sl. Drawing No. Description No. of

Rev.
Sheet
No.
No. S. No. s
ELECTRICAL
1. Single Line diagram-SV B 2
B185-020-16-50-01001
Stations(SV-1 to SV-5 )
2. Single Line diagram-BPC RT B 1
B185-030-16-50-00001
Terminal
Page 2924 of 3884

SCOPE OF WORK (ELECTRICAL) DOCUMENT No.
PIPELINE LAYING ANDTERMINAL WORKS
B185-000-16-50-SOW-9540
PROJECT: INDIA-BANGLADESH
FRIENDSHIP P/L
Rev. A
CLIENT : NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED Page 1 of 8
TENDER-2 (PART- C)
SCOPE OF WORK AND SUPPLY

IBFPL
(ELECTRICAL)
TENDER-2 (PART-C)
PROJECT : INDIA-BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP P/L
CLIENT : M/S NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED
CONSULTANT : ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
EIL JOB No. : B185

Date Purpose
No by by by
Page 2925 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING ANDTERMINAL WORKS
B185-000-16-50-SOW-9540
PROJECT: INDIA-BANGLADESH
FRIENDSHIP P/L
Rev. A
CLIENT : NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED Page 2 of 8
TENDER-2 (PART- C)
1.0 INTRODUCTION
M/s NRL intends to install approx. 130.361 km long transnational pipeline from the
Siliguri marketing Terminal (SMT) of the Numaligarh Refinery Limited (NRL) in India to
the Parbatipur depot of the Bangladesh Petroleum Corporation (BPC) in Bangladesh
for transportation of Gasoil (HSD).
Out of the 130.361km of pipeline approx. 5.46 km length of pipeline alignment is
aligned within the territory of India. The remaining approx. 124.89 km of the pipeline
alignment is aligned in the territory of Bangladesh.
The complete work of the IBFPL project has been divided into two parts Tender-1(
subdivided into Part-A and B and Tender-2, (Part-C) as indicated below.
Tender-1 (Part-A):
Part-A consists of works at the following stations.
a)SMT Dispatch Terminal (Siliguri, India)

Tender-1(Part-B) :
Part-B consists of works at the following stations.
a) Sectionalizing valve station SV-1 CUM CTM (Custody transfer metering).
b) Sectionalizing valve station SV-2,SV-3.(Bangladesh)
Tender-2 Part-C :
Part-C consists of works at the following station.
a) Sectionalizing valve stations SV-4 & SV-5 CUM Tap off station, Bangladesh.
b) Parbatipur Receipt Terminal, Bangladesh.

Refer schematic arrangement of pipeline facility attached elsewhere in this tender for
better clarity.
This document covers details of work tendered, scope of work, and scope of supply
pertaining to electrical portion of pipeline and station facilities and other requirements
for fabrication and installation of pipeline and station facilities for Tender-2 Part-C.
1.1 Details of associated civil, structural, architectural, mechanical, instrumentation,

telecom and cathodic protection works etc. are covered elsewhere in the Bid document.
1.2 STANDARDS
a) The work shall be performed in conformity with these specifications and code of practices of
the Bureau of Indian Standards. In case of any conflict, the most stringent one shall be
followed and Owners/ EIL decision in this regard shall be final and binding. It is contractor’s
responsibility to bring the same to the notification of EIL.
b) In addition, the work shall also conform to the requirements of the following:
- The Indian Electricity Act/ CEA guidelines and rules framed there under.
-
- The fire insurance Regulations.
- Indian Petroleum Rules/Bangladesh Petroleum Rules
Page 2926 of 3884

PIPELINE LAYING ANDTERMINAL WORKS B185 -000-16-50-SOW-9540
PROJECT: INDO-BANGLA FRIENDSHIP P/L
Rev. A
Page 3 of 8
- The regulations laid down by Electrical Inspectorate (CEA)/ Electrical Inspectorate of

Bangladesh .
- The regulations laid down by the Factory Inspector.
- The regulations laid down by the Chief Controller of Explosives.
- The regulations laid down by Oil Industries Safety Directorate (OISD).
- Any other regulations laid down by the Central, State or Local Authorities from time
to time during the execution of this contract.
1.3 GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee the installation for satisfactory operation against any defects of
workmanship and materials (supplied by the contractor) for a period as specified elsewhere.
Any damage or defect connected with the erection of materials, equipments or fittings supplied
by the contractor that may be discovered at the time of issue of the completion certificate, or
arise or come to light thereafter, shall be rectified or replaced by the contractor at his own
expense as deemed necessary and as per the instruction of Owner or Engineer-in-Charge
within the time limit specified by the Owner or Engineer-in-Charge.
1.4 SITE CONDITION
Maximum/ Minimum Ambient
1.1 34 °C/ 10 °C
Temperature
1.2 Equipment design temperature (IS-9676) 40 °C
1.3 Soil Resistivity As per Soil investigation report
1.4 Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000m above msl
1.5 Seismic Zone As per IS-1893
1.6 Humidity 87%
Dusty, Tropical and Corrosive as
1.7 Environment
found in Hydrocarbon Industry
1.5 UTILIZATION VOLTAGE

Refer Engineering Design Basis (Electrical) document number B185-999-16-50-EDB-
1001 attached with Tender.
For stations(SV-4 to SV-5 and BPC RT Station) located in Bangladesh territory
included in Tender-2 Part-C Three phase voltage level shall be 400V AC TPN ± 6 %
and 230 V AC SPN ± 6 %.
SCOPE OF WORK (ELECTRICAL)

Part-C (SV-4 & SV-5 CUM Tap off station, Parbatipur Receipt Terminal, Bangladesh)
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK (ELECTRICAL)

2.1 Supply, laying & termination of all MV power cables, control cables, FA cables,Plant
communication cables, LAN cables in concrete-lined trenches,buried trench,cable
trays, pipes, road crossings, pipe-racks etc.
2.2 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of flameproof as well as safe area type
electrical items viz. push-button control stations, junction boxes, welding receptacles,
etc.
2.3 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of lighting system equipment/ material
such as street light, flood light, process area light for outdoor facilities.
Page 2927 of 3884

Rev. A
Page 4 of 8
2.4 Installation, testing and commissioning of MV switchboards (400V, 630A, 50 kA (1

sec.), TPN, double front, draw out Switchboard) in BPC RT terminal Parbatipur. Testing
and commissioning of numerical relays is not in contractor’s scope.
2.5 Installation, testing and commissioning of MV switchboards (400V/230V, 200 A, 50 kA
(1 sec.)/ 9 kA (1 sec.), TPN, double front, draw out Switchboard) in SV-4 to SV-5.
2.6 Testing and commissioning MV motors and local control stations as required.
2.7 Testing and commissioning of motor operated valves actuators with their control
panels.
2.8 Installation of 230 V,50kVA (approx )AC UPS system along with ACDB panel and
battery.
2.9 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of micro processor based analogue
addressable system fire alarm system consisting of Data Gathering Fire Alarm
panel(DGFAP), multi-sensor detector, heat detector,response Indicator hooter and
hooter acknowledge box , siren & starter, exit signs, MCP (Safe and FLP type), FA
junction boxes ,unarmoured /armoured fire alarm cable (2PX1.5 sqm outer sheath
red)along with any other associated equipment required for the completion of FA
system, and necessary cabling. Integrating of the new Fire Alarm System at BPC RT to
the existing system at BPC-RT at Parbatipur is required. Information of existing Fire
Alarm system regarding BPC -RT at Parbatipur shall be provided to the successful
bidder during detailed engineering stage based on the availability of the same.
Contractor shall develop all necessary engineering documents /drawings such as
Detailed FA block diagram, FA Layouts for buildings and Overall FA layout. All
necessary hardwires /software changes, cabling as required for integration with
Owners existing system shall be provided. Successful Bidder post order, shall carry out
site survey for integration with Owners Fire Alarm system for the exact Fire Alarm
System details. Earthing work as well as civil works pertaining to this system are also
included in contractor’s scope of work.
2.10 Preparation of buried cable trench, including excavation, back filling, fixing of cable
markers and other associated works as per the tender.
2.11 Fabrication and supply of MS frames, canopies and brackets for miscellaneous
electrical equipments, including welding, supply of bolts, nuts etc. for mounting, and
other necessary supplies, all inclusive of painting as specified and supply of MS
chequered plates for covering unused openings of cable trenches, supports.
2.12 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of flameproof lighting fixtures along with
the brackets for mounting of fixtures, all necessary hardwares as per SOR, layout
drawings, specifications of this tender.
2.13 Supply & installation of all electrics for tube well motor envisaged at each SV
station(SV-4,SV-5). Detailed scope of work for this activity along with list of supply
items are mentioned at elsewhere of the tender. Local DOL starter panel for tube well
shall have MCCB, contactor (AC-23) & bi-metallic relay. Selection of these items shall
be done by contractor as per motor full load current & ‘Type-2’co-ordination chart.
Ingress protection of enclosure shall be IP-65. Canopy shall be provided. Enclosure
shall be made of 2 mm. thick CRCA sheet steel. This panel shall be installed near the
pump so, hardware required for field installation shall also be supplied & erected at site
by contractor. Owner shall provide single point power supply shall be provided upto the
Local starter panel from their switchboard.
Components shall be selected as per attached MV switchboard component data sheet,
B185-000-16-50-DS-9545.
Page 2928 of 3884

Rev. A
Page 5 of 8
2.14 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of LAN system as defined elsewhere in
tender.
2.15 Supply and installation of Safety Equipment.
2.16 Unloading the material from truck/trailer, transportation to owner’s designated stores,
material handling, stacking in the stores of free-Issue materials such as transformers
MV switchboard, DC System, UPS, motors etc.
2.17 Quantities given in SOR are tentative. Unit rates quoted against each SOR item
shall be applicable for any addition and deletion. Contractor to take EIL/site-in
charger’s approval before ordering.
2.18 Wherever separate SOR items do not cover above activities, these shall be
deemed to be included in contractor’s scope without any time and cost
implication.
2.19 Work shall be carried out with best workmanship in conformity to the tender
specifications, approved drawings and instructions, from time to time, of owner or its
authorized representative/Engineer-in-charge.
2.20 All the associated accessories, special tools/tackles and commissioning spares and
services for the equipments covered in above clauses shall be included in the scope of
2.21 Design, Engineering, Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Plant
communication system. Integration is required in BPC RT with the existing plant
communication system with the new plant communication system.All works for plant
communication system shall be done in coordination with OEM.
Contractor shall develop all necessary engineering documents /drawings such as
Detailed PA block diagram, Speech Diagram , Overall PA Layouts for buildings and
Overall PA layout. All necessary hardwares /software/graphic changes in existing
system, cabling as required for integration with Owners existing plant communication
system shall be provided. Successful Bidder post order, shall carry out site survey for
integration with Owners plant communication system for the exact plant communication
System details. Earthing work as well as minor civil works pertaining to this system are
also included in contractor’s scope of work
3.0 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS

3.0 Engineering & preparation of specifications & drawings for electrical equipment
installation, wherever applicable/required by Owner/ Engineer-in-charge & submitting
the same to Owner/ Engineer in charge for review/comments.
3.1 Coordination between various agencies/ equipment vendors/ other contractors working
at site and providing all assistance and interface connections as per drawings to enable
others to take up testing and commissioning activities of their equipment/ systems.
3.2 Obtaining clearance for energizing the complete electrical facilities covered under this
tender, and approval of installation and drawings from the Chief Electrical
Inspectorate/CEA or State Electrical Inspectorate General(CEIG)/Electrical Inspectorate
of Bangladesh. This includes equipments installed or commissioned by others within
the battery limit.Contractor to note that no extra payment shall be made to Contractor
for this activity and he is supposed to take care the same/quote unit rates for various
items of tender accordingly.
3.3 Supply and installation of "Illuminated type Electrical single Line Diagrams" for the all
stations (covered under Part-C ) including frame, power supply hardware, LED fittings,
sockets, glass, etc. as per approved drawings, specification of this tender and
Page 2929 of 3884

Rev. A
Page 6 of 8
Technical particulars of illuminated SLD are as given below:
 Quantity 1 no. for each voltage level.(11kV,400V)
 Size – 8 x 6 feet for each SLD.
 Construction – SLD shall be provided mounted on powder coated aluminum or GI

box. Depth of the box shall be as required sufficient to mount backlite lamps.
 Material – SLD shall be screen printed or itched on the Acrylic board.
 Illumination – Backlite illuminated by adequate quantity of LED lamps.
 Details/description – SLD shall have complete details of voltage, current, fault level,
bus no., component rating, motor KW rating etc. as per approved and final As built
SLD.
 Typical SLD shall be shown for each 11kV Isolating breaker panel , 400V PMCC,
ASB separately and outgoing feeders of each PMCC/ASB shall be included in the
tabular form along with respective switchboard typical SLD.
 Colour scheme for different voltage levels – The colour code for various voltages in
the SLDs shall be as per IS: 11954 which is detailed below -
Voltage level SLD colour Shade as per IS: 5

11 KV As per IS: 11954 As per IS: 11954
415V/400V Dark violet 796
3.4 The scope of work under this contract shall be inclusive of breaking of walls and floors,
and chipping of concrete foundations necessary for the installation of equipment,
materials, facilitating cable entry and making good of the same.
3.5 The job includes repairing of all civil works damaged during installation of electrical
facilities, sealing of openings made in walls/ floors, firewalls for cables, cable trays, Gin
pipes etc., using acceptable practices and standards to the satisfaction of Owner/
Engineer in charge.
3.6 Preparation of field testing and commissioning procedures.
3.7 Minor modifications, wherever needed, for the free-issued material/ equipment/ devices
to enable cable entry/ termination, wiring changes etc.
3.8 Other activities listed in data sheets/ vendor data requirement formats.
3.9 Supply and installation of all other items not specifically mentioned herein, as required
for the completeness and satisfactory operation of the complete electrical system/
facilities within the specified battery limits of the contractor’s scope.
4.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
6.1 Makes of electrical materials/ components/ equipments shall be selected out of the
vendor list (B185-000-16-50-OD-9540 )attached in the tender. All electrical equipment
shall be brand new with state of the art technology and proven record. No prototype
shall be offered. The make and type of equipment, if not specified in this tender shall be
subject to OWNER / EIL approval.
6.2 Contractor shall coordinate with manufacturer of other equipment wherever required
and shall freely and readily supply all technical information for this purpose as and
when called for.
Page 2930 of 3884

Rev. A
Page 7 of 8
6.3 All equipments supplied by the contractor shall be supplied with nickel plated brass
cable glands (where required) and tinned copper crimping type lugs and accordingly the
quoted rates for the items in SOR shall be deemed to include the cost of these cable
glands and lugs. The cable glands shall be single compression type for indoor, double
compression type for outdoor and FLP type for flameproof equipments.
6.4 Contractor to note that all cabling (including supply & laying between various
equipments of the packages envisaged) & other electrics for the packages (if any ) shall
be supplied along with the package and no separate payment shall be admissible for
the same. Owner shall provide only single point power supply for each of these
packages.
5.0 SCOPE OF DESIGN & ENGINEERING

5.0 Preparation of specification for procurement of equipments to be supplied by
Contractor is in contractor's scope. It shall also include submission of electrical
equipment drawing to the Engineer-in-charge for their review, preparation of site
engineering drawings and details for installation work wherever applicable or required
by the Engineer-in-charge, and submit to the Engineer-in-charge for approval and
comments.
5.1 Correction, updating and submission of all Owners’ drawings/layouts/documents (such
as Single line diagrams, cable schedules, interconnections, all the AFC layouts such as
overall cable/lighting /earthing/,Substation/control room equipment, cable, layout, etc)
after modifying to as-built status.
5.2 Preparation of lighting and power panel schedules.
5.3 Preparation of cable schedule and interconnection diagram of complete
package(supplied by the Contractor) such as any package or system, which contains
various equipments that are to be interconnected for the completion of the package.
5.4 Compilation of bills of material for cabling, lighting, earthing, and for miscellaneous
items based on layout drawings issued to contractor.
5.5 Vendor and sub-vendor drawings.
6.0 EXCLUSIONS:
Supply of following equipments are not in scope of contractor and shall be free issued
by Owner
1. Emergency DG set.( SV stations and BPC RT)
2. MV Switchboard.( SV stations and BPC RT)
3. UPS system (BPC RT)
4. DC system.( SV stations and BPC RT)
Page 2931 of 3884

Rev. A
Page 8 of 8

For List of attachment, refer document no. B185-000-16-50-LL-9540 attached in this
tender document.
NOTES:
1. Contractor to note that the exact cable routing shall be decided at site based
on actual site conditions. As such Contractor to note that cable schedules to
be issued by EIL/Owner shall be with estimated cable quantities. Exact cable
quantities shall be based on actual measured route lengths at site by
Contractor in coordination with Engineer-in-Charge/Client. Contractor shall
ensure that there is no surplus or shortage of cables at site and procure
cables accordingly. Contractor shall note that payment for supply of cables
shall be made as per actual laid cables at site.
2. Contractor to note that all cabling (including supply & laying) & other electrics
for the packages (Clean Agent system etc ) shall be supplied along with the
package and no separate payment shall be admissible for the same. Owner
shall provide only single point power supply for the same.
3. Contractor to note that cable, lighting, equipment and earthing layouts will be
supplied by owner to the contractor.
4. Contractor to note that all cable glands and lugs shall be supplied along with
equipment to be supplied by contractor. No separate payment shall be
admissible for same. Further contractor to note that weatherproof double
compression nickel plated brass cable glands shall be provided for equipment
located in safe area, whereas for hazardous area equipments flameproof and
weatherproof double compression nickel plated brass cable glands. For
equipments located in indoor safe area, single compression type nickel plated
brass cable glands shall be provided.
5. Contractor shall note that procurement of items shall be carried out only after
obtaining prior approval from owner/engineer-in-charge.
Page 2932 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
(CP SYSTEM) B185-000-16-50-CPS-01 Rev.2
Page 1 of 23
SCOPE OF WORK
(CP SYSTEM)
(PART-C)
PROJECT : INDIA BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP PIPELINE PROJECT
OWNER : M/s NRL
PMC : ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
JOB NO. : B185
2 10.09.19 Revised and Issued for Tender Joydeep NSB NSB
1 27.08.19 Revised and Issued for Tender Joydeep NSB NSB
0 10.05.19 Issued for Tender Joydeep NSB NSB
Rev.
No
Page 2933 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 2 of 23
INDEX OF CONTENTS
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK FOR CP SYSTEM
2.1 SCOPE OF WORK FOR TEMPORARY CP SYSTEM (TCP)
2.2 SCOPE OF WORK FOR PERMANENT CP SYSTEM (PCP)
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
4.0 AS BUILT DRAWING & DOCUMENT
5.0 OWNER’S SCOPE OF SUPPLY
ANNEXURE-I: IDENTIFICATION OF DIFFERENT CABLES
ANNEXURE-II: QUALITY ASSURANCE PLANS/ PROCEDURE
ANNEXURE-III: COATING CONDUCTANCE TEST
ANNEXURE-IV: PIPELINE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM REFER DRG.NO. B185-020-83-41-3001,

REV.K
ANNEXURE-V : SPECIFICATION FOR CORROSION SURVEY (RIVER / WATER LOGGING

SECTION)
Page 2934 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 3 of 23
ABBREVIATIONS
AC : Alternating Current
A/G : Above Ground
ACDB : Alternating Current Distribution Board
AJB : Anode Junction Board
CP : Cathodic Protection
CPTR : Cathodic Protection Transformer Rectifier
CTSU : Computerized Test Station
CJB : Cathode Junction Box
CPL : Close Potential Logging
CAT : Current Attenuation Test
DCVG : Direct Current Voltage Gradient
DCDB : Direct Current Distribution Board
DC : Direct Current
DT : Dispatch Terminal
ER : Electrical Resistance
GCC : General Condition of Contract
GSM : Global System for Mobile communications
HV : High Voltage
HVDC : High Voltage Direct Current
HDPE : High Density Polyethylene
HMWPE : High Molecular Weight Polyethylene
IPS : Intermediate Pigging Station
MMO : Mixed Metallic Oxide
PCP : Permanent Cathodic Protection
PE : Polyethylene
RFP : Request For Purchase
ROU : Right of use
RT : Receipt Terminal
RTU : Remote Transmission Unit
SCC : Special Conditions of Contract
SCADA : Supervisory control and Data Acquisition
SV : Sectionalizing Valve
TCP : Temporary Cathodic Protection
Page 2935 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 4 of 23
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 M/s NRL intends to install approx. 130.361 km long transnational pipeline from the Siliguri
marketing Terminal (SMT) of the Numaligarh Refinery Limited (NRL) in India to the Parbatipur
depot of the Bangladesh Petroleum Corporation (BPC) in Bangladesh for transportation of
Gasoil (HSD). Out of the 130.361km of pipeline approx. 5.46 km length of pipeline alignment
is aligned within the territory of India. The remaining approx. 124.89 km of the pipeline
alignment is aligned in the territory of Bangladesh.
1.2 The scope of work pertaining to this bid document for Part C and is described as under:
Installation of pipeline of size 10.75 inch OD (approx. length 50.361 km) from Chainage
80.000km to Parbatipur receipt station of Bangladesh Petroleum Corporation in Bangladesh
(Chainage 130.361km) including works at Parbatipur receipt station, sectionalizing valve
stations (SVs) enroute and related associated facilities as detailed subsequently.
The complete work is denoted as (Part-C). Refer Schematic arrangement of pipeline facilities
drawing no. B185-020-83-41-30001, Rev.K
Part-C:
10.75” dia. pipeline approx. 50.361 km long from chainage 80.000 km upto Parbatipur
Receipt Terminal, Bangladesh (Ch. 130.361 km), installation of Sectionalizing valve stations
SV-4 & SV-5 CUM Tap off station, terminal works at Parbatipur Receipt Terminal,
Bangladesh and other associated pipeline facilities as detailed subsequently.
Pipeline at following canal crossings shall be installed by HDD method.*
Chainage Canal Approx. Part/

Canal ROW
Sr.No. Canal (km)- width HDD length
width (m) Location
Centerline (m) (m)
C/
Dinajpur
1 108+323.73 25.27 52.28 250 Banglad
Tista Canal
esh
Following river crossings have been identified as large water bodies and line pipe shall be
installed through HDD method.
Chainage Bank Approx.

Sr.No. River (km)- width HDD length Part/ Location
Centerline (m) (m)
1 Koratoya River 82+292.44 389.77 600 C/ Bangladesh
1 Icchamati River 106+302.84 28.80 200 C/ Bangladesh
* The above data is indicative only.
Page 2936 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 5 of 23
1.3 This document covers details of work tendered, scope of work, and scope of supply
pertaining to pipeline and station facilities and other requirements for fabrication and
installation of pipeline and station facilities for Part-C. All works and clauses of this document
shall be applicable to Part-C unless specifically mentioned otherwise.
1.4 This document shall be read in conjunction with Schedule of Rates, List of Attachments,
Specifications, Standards, Drawings and other Documents/ Drawings forming part of Tender
Document.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK FOR CP SYSTM
Work tendered as a part of this Bid document consists of supply (as per scope of supply),
installation, testing and commissioning of pipeline system and terminal facilities as detailed
below:
Part-C:
i) The CP System contractor engaged by pipeline contractor shall be Owner/ Consultant

approved contractor who shall carryout the complete Temporary and Permanent Cathodic
Protection strictly as per the scope of work defined in this document and Quality Assurance
Plans/ Procedure as per ANNEXURE –II of this document while the pipeline laying works are
going on.
The CP system contractor shall carryout the design, engineering, procurement, supply,
installation, testing, commissioning and survey of TCP and PCP system for pipeline.
ii) The EPC Contractor for PART-C, shall be responsible for the PART-C, CP System work .
The CP system contractor shall also include the services of Owner/ Consultant approved
agency (if CP contractor does not possess any required experience in executing the AC/ DC
Interference and mitigation measure) for carrying out interference survey and implementing
mitigation measures against DC, AC interference on pipeline due to proximity of foreign DC
source, AC source/ HV line, etc. Contractor shall follow the standard “BS EN 15280:2013 -
Evaluation of A.C. corrosion likelihood of buried pipelines applicable to cathodically protected
pipelines”. Interference and NACE SP0177-2014 (Mitigation of AC and Lighting effect on
metallic structure)
Interference Specialist shall do the AC/ DC interference survey for entire pipeline and AC/
DC modeling to be done in normal as well as fault condition. Accordingly the Specialist
agency shall provide mitigation measure to proper operation of pipeline.
The pipeline runs parallel and crosses the HT lines along 20-30% of the total route, and
presence of multiple utilities are there like underground Power cables/ Potable Water /
Sewerage CI Pipelines , CP contractor to ensure proper mitigation measures for AC/DC
Interference including required effective grounding arrangements by providing sacrificial type
anodes (zn ribbon, zinc anode), grounding cells, MITIGATOR or equivalent, linear
anodes, bonding diodes station etc. Necessary steps to be taken for separation of CP
utilities of existing pipelines from proposed Cathodic protected pipeline if required.
Page 2937 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 6 of 23
The make of the equipment / materials shall be strictly as per the EIL approved vendor list.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply and installation of the Solid state type
Surge Diverters across all the IJs in that PART.
Contractors shall be responsible for coordination with the respective PART contractor to
ensure the following:
 The works related to TCP/ PCP such as connection of cables to the pipeline, installation of
sacrificial anodes, laying of polarization coupons, reference cells, CTSU etc. and laying of
HDPE sheets between the pipeline under the scope of work and other foreign pipelines at the
crossing locations for providing electrical isolation for minimizing the pickup and discharge of
the CP System current between the pipelines shall be completed before backfilling of the
trench.
 The CP contractor shall carryout the CIPL survey of pipeline including Trailing Wire method
for river/ water logging area as applicable, CAT with „A‟ frame & DCVG survey and (for
onshore/ land only) identify the chainage locations of coating defects / holidays. The
physically verification of the coating defects and repairing of the same shall be done by the
pipeline contractor at no extra cost to the Company.
 The pipeline material required for fabrication of polarization coupons shall be arranged by the
pipeline contractor/ OWNER.
 CP contractor shall submit the TCP design document immediately after award of contract and
shift the required material as per reviewed/ approved design document as per project
schedule.
 The work shall be performed in conformity with the scope and specifications for CP System
mentioned in this tender document. In case of any conflict, the following shall be the priority:-
a) Scope of work
b) Design basis
c) Data sheets
d) Job specification/ codes/ standards
 “In case of any contradiction between various referred standards/ specifications/ data sheet
and statutory regulations the most stringent requirement shall govern and decision of owner in
this regard shall be final & binding.”
 Protection current densities for both TCP & PCP for pipeline shall be considered as follows:
Minimum Protection Current Density

Permanent CP for 30-
Temporary CP
Year Design Life
(µ A/m2)
(µ A/m2)
30 300-500
Page 2938 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 7 of 23
The above current density values for temporary CP system are applicable for CP system
design life up to two years.
For 30 years design life at Marshy area , current density values for TCP/ PCP system
to be considered as 10-20 mA/ m2 .
 Wherever operating temperatures of U/G pipeline is above 30 deg.C, protection Current

Density shall be increased in minimum by 25% for every 10 °C rise in temperature over 30 °C
up to a temperature of 60 deg.C.
2.1 SCOPE OF WORK FOR TEMPORARY CP SYSTEM (TCP)
a) Corrosion survey, Design, detailed engineering, Supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of the temporary cathodic protection system using galvanic anodes (Mg
anodes/ Zn anodes of Onshore potions of the pipeline and Galvalum III for Marshy/ Saline
portions of the pipeline) to protect the external surface of the pipelines mentioned in item (1)
above against corrosion for minimum 24 months or till commissioning of permanent CP
system whichever is later.
b) Within 60 days of lowering of each continuous segment of pipe, it should be protected at

minimum -950mV potential level by sacrificial type anode as part of TCP.
c) Where soil resistivity is 150 ohm-m or more, achievement of -950mV potential level shall not
be mandatory. However, minimum acceptable shift of potential level over and above natural
potential at such locations (where soil resistivity is 150 ohm-m or more) shall be decided by
Consultant/ Owner on the case to case basis. For the soil resistivity profile for the Trunk line
& Spur line (if any) attached elsewhere in the tender, at locations where soil resistivity is
more than 100 ohm-m, those locations shall be treated as high soil resistivity areas.
d) Laying of HDPE sheets/ Lean PCC between the OWNER‟s pipeline and the other foreign
pipelines at the crossing locations for providing electrical isolation for minimizing the pickup
and discharge of the CP System current between the pipelines.
e) Measurement of soil resistivity along the ROU at TCP anode bed locations, collection of
cathodic protection related data along ROU as per specifications.
f) AC & DC interference detection using data logger and mitigation of the same due to
proximity of foreign AC & DC source, CP protected foreign pipelines, etc.
g) Installation of independent sacrificial type CP System considering suitable number of

Magnesium anode (20 Kg net each) at all River crossings/ Creek/ Road/ Railway/ Nallah
crossing (in addition to the ICCP system, each 20 Kg Pre packed Magnesium anode shall be
designed for five years design life considering ICCP System is not existing).
h) Providing test stations along the pipeline route as per the specifications. The test stations
provided along the common ROU shall have provision for electrical resistance bonding of
other foreign pipelines.
Page 2939 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 8 of 23
i) Maintaining and safe keeping of test stations and monthly monitoring of the temporary
cathodic protection system including monitoring of AC and DC voltages till commissioning of
the permanent cathodic protection system.
j) All work shall be carried out conforming to the Scope of work, Design Basis, Data Sheets,
specifications, standards, drawings, etc., as per the list of attachments for the CP System
documents provided elsewhere in the tender document and provisions of GCC, SCC.
2.1.1 The following particular requirements shall be considered as additional points in

specification no. 6-45-0027 and 6-45-0028
a) At saline soil Ag/ AgCl reference electrode shall be used and not Zinc electrode.
b) For protection of carrier pipe inside the externally / internally coated casing pipe , petroleum
jelly or equivalent filling e.g Vapour phase Corrosion Inhibitor (VpCI) at the annular space
between casing and carrier instead of Zn ribbon . At cased crossings where casing will
have coating on its external surface, it shall be protected by sacrificial anode installations
provided at both ends of casing. The anode installation shall be sized based on the
permanent CP design parameters and design life of permanent CP system. For protection of
the carrier pipe inside casing pipe having external or internal coated, Petroleum Jelly /
Vapour phase Corrosion Inhibitor (VpCI) to be filled at the annular space between casing
and carrier. The casing filler shall be a specially formulated Petroleum wax-based / Visco-
elastic based compound / specially formulated VCI which is pumped in the annulus space
as per required volume calculation inside the annulus space and shall be supplied with
associated filler materials (as applicable ) and end seals. A trained team to be engaged for
filling up the annulus space as per manufacturer standard procedure for application of
Petroleum Jelly/ VCI.
c) In case of VCI application, Electrical Resistance corrosion rate monitoring probes should be
utilized to monitor the effectiveness of the corrosion inhibitor and identify any need for
replenishment of the inhibitor. The casing vents should be capped
d) Wherever discrete Magnesium anode shall be considered for the temporary cathodic
protection, average separation distance between each consecutive anode location along the
pipeline route shall be 1Km.
e) Sacrificial Zinc Ribbon anode of approx size 15mm X 22mm laid in backfill of Gypsum,
Bentonite & Sodium sulphate minimum 100mm on all the sides of anodes, shall be provided
for grounding at HV line crossings/ parallel run at the high soil resistivity areas, where as for
grounding at HV line crossings/ parallel run at the low resistivity areas discrete 20 Kg
Sacrifical Zinc anode with backfill of Gypsum, Bentonite & Sodium sulphate shall be
considered.
f) Number of anodes and length of each type of anode shall be decided as per soil resistivity
values to limit the grounding resistance to 5 ohms max. at each installation.
Page 2940 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 9 of 23
g) Test station shall be installed at one side of the road crossing where casing pipe is not
considered for the crossing. In case more than one such road crossing occurs within 1Km,
then only one such road crossing shall be provided with test station.
h) All TCP cables shall be HMWPE insulated and HMWPE sheathed in place of PVC.
i) Cable from AJB to TR unit shall be laid in HDPE duct only and for acquisition of ROU for
cable route shall be made as per M/S NRL sale deed agreement.
j) As the pipeline route involves the City terrain, contractor to install Concrete TLP instead of
Steel TLPs since Steel TLPs are vulnerable to thefts.
2.2 SCOPE OF WORK FOR PERMANENT CP SYSTEM (PCP)
i) Corrosion survey, design, detailed engineering, supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of the permanent cathodic protection system by impressed current method
to protect the external surface of the pipelines mentioned in item (1) above against corrosion
for minimum for 35 years.
ii) The scope shall include complete permanent cathodic protection system, including cathodic
protection related data collection along the ROU, carrying out the soil resistivity
measurement for anode ground beds.
iii) Design of anode ground beds considering size / rating of anode bed not less than the
minimum requirements specified.
iv) Providing new CP stations for the pipeline at locations as indicated in data sheet for
impressed current CP system No. B185-000-16-50-CDS-02, and bonding provision with the
existing foreign pipeline,
v) Detection using data logger and mitigation of DC, AC interference due to proximity of foreign
DC source, HV transmission lines, cables, AC ground current, etc. Both AC & DC
interference survey including mitigation to be done for proposed new pipeline and existing
old pipeline along the ROU (if any)
vi) Pipelines installed parallel to / near cathodically protected existing foreign pipeline,
overhead AC electric transmission line or DC Rail traction or adjacent to a switching yard
shall be protected against induced stray current. Protective measures such as metallic
bonding, increased protection current, supplementary coating, electrical isolation, galvanic
anodes, De-coupling devices such as Polarization cell or any other suitable method may be
adopted for such interference mitigation.
Safety devices in line with NACE-SP-0177 , OISD shall be installed to prevent damage to
the pipeline cathodic protection system due to lightning or fault currents when the pipeline is
installed near electric transmission tower footings, ground cables etc.
vii) Pipeline when laid parallel to along or near existing underground HT power cable
underground pipes should maintain a horizontal clearance of 5 m. Wherever this distance
Page 2941 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 10 of 23
cannot be met, suitable provision shall be made between cable and pipe as a measure of
prevention, in any case this horizontal distance shall not be less than 3m.
viii) Close interval potential logging survey for entire lines with GPS Synchronize and additional
survey of CAT (at every 50 meter interval) with „A‟ frame survey with GPS data logging at
selected locations decided from the abnormally and under protected areas noticed during
close interval potential logging survey, DCVG with GPS Synchronize survey shall be
conducted to identify coating defects/ holiday at the probable defective areas indicated by
CAT survey. Casing & Carrier short surveys shall also be carried out during post
commissioning surveys.
ix) Interference detection carried out during TCP & mitigation shall be provided during PCP
Stage and it should be done by third party Interference agency.
x) Conducting coating resistance/ conductance test & current measurement test at selected
locations (at CP Stations and midway between CP stations) of pipeline provided with current
measurement test stations as per procedure given vide Annexure-III of this document,
xi) Preparation of commissioning report and as built drawings etc. All work shall be carried out
conforming to the Scope of work, Design Basis, Data Sheets, specifications, standards,
drawings, etc., as per the list of attachments for the CP System documents provided
elsewhere in the tender document and provisions of GCC, SCC. Also the entire work shall
be executed through approved Contractors only.
xii) The scope shall include acquisition of land in the name of M/S NRL by CP system
contractor for anode ground bed & anode junction box. Acquisition of land in the
name of M/S NRL for 45 years for anode ground bed & anode junction box, right to
use of laying of cables from anode ground bed to CP station and transfer the title of
the same to M/S NRL shall be done by CP Contractor. Additionally the relocation of
others / foreign anode bed causing interference to M/S NRL Pipeline (if required) with
the approval of foreign pipeline Owner shall be done by CP system contractor
xiii) The scope shall also include:
 Disconnection of all the sacrificial anodes before PCP commissioning. After PCP
commissioning TCP may be reconnected, if required at some locations in the event of
detection of localized areas of inadequate protection (hot spot).This will be only as a
temporary measure, till the permanent measures are implemented by the Contractor to
increase the CP potential level at hot spot areas.
 Supply, laying , termination of all the cables of CP System, including all incoming and
outgoing cables from CPTR units, permanent reference cables, measurement cables,
computerized test stations cables, etc as require.
 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of CPTR units at the CP stations as

indicated in the Design basis No. B185-000-16-50-CDB-01, etc.
Page 2942 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 11 of 23
xiv) Provisions for direct/ resistance bonding between the pipelines in the common ROU, where
applicable, shall be provided in the test stations along the pipeline route at an average
interval 1Km and at additional locations wherever required for interference mitigation.
xv) At all possible locations, the test stations for new pipeline need to be installed matching
with the test station of existing pipeline, for bonding purpose.
xvi) AC230 V cum DC 48 V operated CP Units with Serial Interface(Rs485) to be installed

shall be provided with facilities for sending and receiving digital and analogue input/
output signals for remote SCADA/ RTU monitoring/ controlling system. Supply,
installation and termination of copper conductor PVC insulated screened cable for sending
analogue signals and copper conductor YFY cable for sending digital signals between
CPTR & SCADA system I/O rack shall be in the contractor‟s scope.
xvii) Facility for hardware communication (RS 485) for CPTR/ CPPSM data to SCADA shall
be provided by CP Contractor at CPTR/ CPPSM unit.
xviii) The CP system contractor shall include the services of Owner/ Consultant approved
agency for carrying out interference survey and implementing mitigation measures against
DC, AC interference on pipeline due to proximity of foreign DC source, AC source/ HV line,
etc. If any portion of pipeline is under protected due to interference , CP contractor should
consider providing additional linear anode to overcome the under protected area including
using of existing TRU or providing new TRU of anode capacity without any extra cost to
owner.
xix) It shall be CP system contractors‟ responsibility to verify and ascertain the types of power
supply available at site at CP station location during detail engineering stage. No change in
the quoted price due to change in the types of power supply unit / location of anode bed
during the execution of the project shall be admissible.
Proposed total no. of CP stations/ anode ground beds: 03
 Proposed location of new CP stations/ anode ground beds for each PART of the Pipelines is
as following:
PART-C:
Rating of
Automatic
Proposed Controlled AC/
Rating of Type of
CP Proposed location of DC Operated
anode installation
station location of CP CP station Rectifier Unit
ground bed Indoor/out
No. station Chainage (A)
The Rectifier unit
door
(km) 240V, 1Ph AC
supply as well as
48V DC supply.
Page 2943 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 12 of 23
By 50 V/ 25A Indoor
SV-4,
1 88.931 Contractor
CHANDIPUR
SV-5 CUM By 50 V/ 25A Indoor

TAPP OFF Contractor
2 117.395
STATION,
SAIDPUR
BPC By 50 V/ 25A Indoor
STAORAGE Contractor
3 DEPOT, 130.361
PARTIPUR,
BANGLADESH
xx) Where soil resistivity is lower at higher depth, deep well type anode ground beds shall be
provided. The soil resistivity values taken both by soil box method and using Wenner's 4-pin
method at 2M interval up to the proposed deep well depth (or upto 50m whichever is higher)
shall be furnished for deep well type anode ground beds. For each deep well anode bed
minimum 10 Nos. MMO tubular anode (each of 25mm dia. X 1000mm long) shall be
provided. Minimum depth of deep well anode bed shall be 50M & diameter of deep well
shall be 250/ 150mm. Adequate length of top portion of the anode bed shall be made
inactive to achieve remoteness of ground bed to pipeline. In case design calculations based
on soil resistivity at the anode bed or the life of anode bed or ground bed current output
works out to be of higher depth or higher No. of anodes than the minimum requirement
specified, the higher requirements shall be provided. The unarmored anode tail cables shall
be laid in PE conduits.
xxi) Where soil resistivity is lower at shallow depth, there horizontal type anode ground bed shall
be preferred. Irrespective of the life of anode bed or anode bed resistance worked out by the
design calculations, each anode bed shall contain minimum 10 Nos. MMO tubular anode
(each of 25mm dia. X 1000mm long). In case the design calculations based on soil
resistivity at the anode bed or the life of anode bed or anode bed current rating works out to
be of higher no. of anodes than the minimum requirement specified, the higher requirements
shall be provided. Continuous coke breeze backfill shall be provided for the entire length of
anode bed trench of cross-section 300mm x 300mm. Chain link fencing shall be provided
around the ground bed for all types of anode bed. For deep well anode bed minimum cross
section 5mx 5m x 2m chain link fencing to be provide.
xxii) Three plots shall be identified for each anode bed and investigated individually and best one
of these shall be selected based on the observations/ data. Ground water depth data shall
be collected from Geographic survey of India to ensure that the anode bed location is
appropriate and is in perennially moist environment. The anode ground bed loop resistance
shall be restricted to 1 ohm (max) as specified in spec.6-45-0028. However, in case of very
high soil resistivity at anode ground bed location, the upper acceptance limit of anode bed
resistance may be increased at the sole discretion of Consultant/ Owner. Any combination
of the following alternative measures may be adopted to limit anode bed loop resistance
within 1 ohm limit.
In high resistivity areas:
Page 2944 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 13 of 23
 Anode ground bed length may be increased for horizontal type ground beds and depth
of the deep well may be increased in case of deep well type ground bed.
 Number of MMO Tubular anodes may be 10 No. of 1000mm x 25mm (8A), or 16 No. of
1000mmx16mm (5A), or 20 No. of 500mmx25mm (4A), or 32 No. of 500mmx16mm
(2.5A).
xxiii) The anode tail cable up to AJB shall be Halar/ KYNER type with HMWPE sheathed and
PVDF 1100 volt grade insulated, 7 strands, 10mm2 copper conductor, single core,
unarmored type. This shall be in place of 1x 10 sq.mm PVC insulated and sheathed cable
mentioned in spec.6-45-0029. The unarmored anode tail cables shall be laid in PE conduits.
xxiv) In addition to the requirement of Current measurement test station mentioned elsewhere in
the specifications, it shall be installed at all the SV cum CP Station for measurement of the
upstream and downstream pipeline current as well as coating resistance.
xxv) In case anode ground bed for foreign pipeline is existing within 100M of the proposed
pipeline ROU and cause interference to proposed pipeline, the ground bed shall be
relocated by the contractor with the consent of the OWNER of the foreign pipeline.
xxvi) Each ACDC CP units shall have GPS synchronized current interrupter with 0-99.9 second
programmable timer and antenna for synchronized current interruption.
xxvii) For observing various parameters/ indications without opening the door, a transparent glass
cover shall be provided at each CPTR units.
xxviii) The polarization cells shall be of solid state type (DC- Decoupler) and surge diverter across
I J.
xxix) Minimum distance between the anode ground bed and the pipeline shall be considered as
100m. In case design calculations based on soil resistivity of the anode bed and anode bed
current indicates that remoteness of the anode bed shall be achieved at a distance more
than 100M, the same shall be provided within maximum limit up to 500M. Where land
availability for horizontal ground bed with clear distance of min 100M from pipeline is
restricted, deep well type ground bed with suitable active and inactive lengths may be
provided.
xxx) Supply and installation of the AC / DC power supply cable from the outgoing terminals of the
feeder in the MCC / ACDB/ DCDB of the Electrical substation/ Electrical room/ control room
to CPTR at each CP stations shall be included in CP system contractor‟s scope.
xxxi) Computerized test station unit (CTSU) shall have the following feature:
 Simultaneous recording of 3 No. analogue channels.

 Shall be able to generate +ve & -ve sign for recorded PSP values.
 Portable Laptop readers shall be supplied with CTSU for Field downloading of Data.
 Spare Battery Pack shall be supplied.
 The CTSU shall provide Battery Low alarm.
Page 2945 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 14 of 23
 Interval for data acquisition and storing shall be once in every 1 hour (and shall
be programmable)
The CTSU shall be housed in a PVC enclosure of dimensions 130mm X 130mm
xxxii) At saline soil Ag/ AgCl reference electrode should be used and not Zinc electrode.
xxxiii) All CP System cables for PCP except anode lead cables & SCADA signal cables shall be
HMWPE insulated and HMWPE sheathed.
xxxiv) The reference cell and measurement cables between test station and reference cell,
pipeline shall be PVC insulated, aluminium backed by mylar/ polyster tape shielded, PVC
sheathed, armored. Minimum Two Permanent Refrence cell will be provided in each CP
Station with encasing in perforated PVC Pipe,with pit arrangement.
xxxv) The layout of switchgear/ control room indicating CPTR units/ CPPSMs and layout of cables
inside the switchgear/ control room and inside the SV station/ terminal station areas shall be
furnished as part of detailed engineering document.
xxxvi) Identification scheme need to be provided for the CP System cables as mentioned vide
ANNEXURE-I.
xxxvii) For local monitoring of PSP at the CPTR units, Permanent Ref. cell & measurement cables
HMWPE insulated,, aluminium backed by mylar/ polyster tape shielded, HMWPE sheathed,
armoured need to be supplied and installed from CJB to CPTR units.
xxxviii) Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of CTSU shall be Contractor scope. Location
shall be decided in consultation with OWNER/ CONSULTANT during detail engineering.
CTSU shall be provided preferably across DC traction, AC Traction Railway Crossings and
vulnerable location.
xxxix) CP system contractor shall provide current measurement provision along with PSP
measurement at all SV station (where CP station is not available). Also required Converter
for PSP and current output for SCADA connectivity along with cable to be provided by
contractor.
xl) MOV Earthing at SV station shall be done through Zn Anode & SSPC .
xli) For each IP,SV,DT/RT stations, insulating joint (IJ) With Surge diverter and Sacrificial Zn
Anode earthing as per OISD Rules 10.1.9 shall be provided by EPC contractor for isolating
the incoming Trunk line / Spurline, outgoing Trunk line / Spurline, including Compressor
stations, existing consumer tapping (whichever is applicable) from the station piping,
earthing grids/ pits etc.
The scope of design and engineering shall include preparation and submission for review of
CP system design & detailed engineering package, specification for procurement of CP
System equipment/ materials, equipment drawing/ document, preparation of site engineering
Page 2946 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 15 of 23
drawings and details for installation work wherever applicable or required by the Owner/
Consultant, and submit to the Owner/ Consultant for approval.
3. 0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
All the equipment and materials required for both the temporary and permanent CP system
shall be in the CP system contractor‟s scope of supply. All equipment and materials including
cables as required for both Temporary & Permanent cathodic protection of the pipeline shall
be in line with the specifications (specification no. 6-45-0026, 6-45-0027, 6-45-0029,
standard specification, design basis and data sheets.) of the tender.
4.0 AS BUILT DRAWING & DOCUMENT
After completion of work CP system contractor shall prepare commissioning report as well as
hard and soft copy of as built drawings & documents both for TCP & PCP. Six copies of the
commissioning report and as built drawings & documents shall be submitted to Owner and
one copy to Consultant for record.
5.0 OWNER’S SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all the equipment covered in this package
are included in the scope of the contractor. No equipment will be free issued
by the owner to the contractor .
A. OTHER MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
5.1 Preparation of buried cable trenches including excavation, back filling, compacting, providing
of brick protection by second-class bricks, spreading of fine river sand, including all supplies
5.2 The job includes repairing of all civil works damaged during installation of electrical facilities.
5.3 The scope of work under this contract shall be inclusive of breaking of walls and floors, and
chipping of concrete foundations necessary for the installation of equipment, materials, and
making good of the same.
5.4 Minor modifications wherever required to be done in the owner free supplied equipments or
devices to enable cable entry, termination, etc.
5.5 Sealing of openings made in the walls / floors for cable trays, cables, bus ducts, etc. suitably
using acceptable practice and standards.
5.6 Supply and installation of all other accessories not specifically mentioned herein, but
nevertheless necessary for completion of the job.
5.7 Miscellaneous works (civil works, co-ordination, etc.): All related civil works shall be included
in the scope of the contractor
B. OPTIONAL ITEMS
Page 2947 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 16 of 23
The rates for the following optional item need to be furnished by the bidder along with the
bid. The rate for the optional item shall not form the part of the evaluation or the lump sum
price. OWNER as per need may take any part or all optional item from the CP
CONTRACTOR:
 02 Year O&M CP Spares/ Tool / Tackles for CP system like Multimeter, Clamp meter, ER
Meter, Portable reference cell, UT meter, Tool box Complete for each maintenance base
etc.
 02 Year O&M CP Spares for TR /CPPSM unit
 Provision for new TS if existing TS are not available.
 Provision of plates & terminals/ doors, Cable laying & connections in existing TS, in case
the same is missing or broken.
Page 2948 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 17 of 23
For List of attachment, refer technical section: Attachments/ CP System in this tender
document.
Sl no Document no. Rev. Title
B185-000-06-45-CDB-01
1 2 Engineering design basis (pipeline CP system)
Sl.
Data Sheet No. Rev. Title
No.
B185-000-16-50-CDS-01 Data sheet Sacrificial anode cathodic
1. 0
protection system for pipelines
B185-000-16-50-CDS-02 Data sheet Impressed current cathodic
2. 0
protection system for pipelines
B185-000-16-50-CDS-05 0 Data sheet computerized Test Station unit
3.
(CTSU)
B185-000-16-50-CDS-06 0 Specification and Data sheet for Automatic
4.
AC-DC operated CP TR unit
B185-000- 16-50-CVN-01 CP System Vendor List
5. 0
Sl.
Standard Spec. no. Rev. Title
No.
6-45-0026 0 Specification for corrosion survey.
1.
6-45-0027 Specification for sacrificial anode cathodic
2.
1 protection system for pipelines.
6-45-0028 Specification for impressed current cathodic

3.
0 protection system for pipelines.
6-45-0029 Specification for eqpt. /material for cathodic

4.
0 protection system for pipelines
Sl. No. Drawing No. Rev. Title
7-45-0601 Pre packed zinc anode

1. 0
7-45-0602 0 Pre packed magnesium anode

2.
7-45-0604 0 Test station with foundation details
3.
7-45-0605 0 Test station connection schemes
4.
7-45-0606 0 Galvanic anode installation.
5.
Page 2949 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 18 of 23
Sl. No. Drawing No. Rev. Title

7-45-0612 0 Shallow anode ground bed (PCP)
6.
7-45-0613 0 Anode lead junction box.
7.
NOTES:
1. CP system contractor shall note that the exact cable routing shall be decided at site based on
actual site conditions. Exact cable sizes/ quantities shall be based on electrical load and
actual measured route lengths at site which shall be finalized by CP system contractor in
coordination with Engineer-in-Charge/ OWNER. CP system contractor shall ensure that there
is no shortage of cables at site and procure cables accordingly and avoid cable straight
through joints.
2. CP system contractor shall furnish total bill of materials for both TCP and PCP system during
detail engineering stage for our review and record.
Page 2950 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 19 of 23
ANNEXURE-I
IDENTIFICATION OF DIFFERENT CABLES
Alphabetic & numeric PVC ferrules and following colour cable sleeve need to be considered
at termination for identification of different cables terminated inside Test Station, AJB, CJB,
TR/ CPPSM unit:
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION COLOUR
1. Anode tail and anode cable (Positive header cable) Red
2. Cathode cable, Drainage cable & Negative header Blue

cable
3. PSP measurement cable from pipe Green
4. Reference cell cable Yellow
5. All cable from foreign pipeline (Bonding or PSP Pink

Measurement cable)
6. Grounding cell cable Brown
7. Balance all cable Black
Page 2951 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 20 of 23
ANNEXURE-II
Quality Assurance Plans/ Procedure:
1.1 The CP system contractor shall establish document and maintain an effective Quality
Assurance system as outlined in recognized codes etc. and Quality Assurance Plans included
in Specifications etc. to ensure that the work is performed in a planned, systematic manner to
the best quality standards and properly documented to provide confidence that materials
supplied and/ or work executed and services performed by him conform to the applicable
specifications and all the requirements of contract document and work executed by him shall
perform satisfactorily over the entire period of its life.
The Quality Assurance Systems Plans/ Procedures of the CP system contractor shall
generally cover the following aspects/ details, which shall be furnished by CP system
contractor along with, his detail-engineering package.
i) A Quality Assurance Organogram with curriculum vitae of key personnel responsible for
the Quality Assurance at site and design office.
ii) Complete details pertaining to the responsibility authority and accountability of the
Quality Assurance Organization of the CP system contractor at site.
iii) Equipments, material, Erection, Installation, Testing and commissioning control plans for
quality testing/ inspection etc.
iv) Quality Control of processes such as Pin brazing, anode to cable jointing etc.
v) Control Procedures/ Plans for calibration and safe up-keep of instruments, gauges and
similar testing equipments etc.
vi) Quality audit & Maintenance/ records/ procedures etc.
vii) Other relevant details.
1.2 Quality Assurance System Plans/ Procedures of the CP system contractor shall be furnished
in the form of a QA manual. CP system contractor shall be required to provide explanation
pertaining to the details furnished by him in accordance with provisions contained in this
clause and any further details, as sought for by OWNER/ CONSULTANT. In addition, all the
Quality Assurance Programs/ Plans as per specifications enclosed with the Contract shall be
fully complied with by the contractor.
- Precautionary measures to be taken to prevent fire hazard during Pin Brazing to pipeline
for the purpose of cable to pipeline joint as well as during installation, operation &
maintenance of CP System.
- All other information as required in individual job specifications shall be furnished by the
CP system contractor in his detail-engineering package.
Page 2952 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 21 of 23
ANNEXURE-III
Coating conductance test:
1. Post commissioning of the PCP system, Coating conductance survey shall be done as
per procedure given below:
For evaluation of the electrical strength of the coating, after one month of commissioning of
the CP system, Coating Conductance Surveys shall be conducted, to serve as reference for
future comparison. Although the same coating specifications are used throughout the length
of the pipeline, effective electrical strength thereby its ability to resist flow of current would
reasonably vary on account of terrain, construction defects, soil resistivity along the pipeline
length.
For conducting Coating Conductance Surveys, potential (∆V) & current (∆I) shall be measured
at two consecutive current measurement type test stations w.r.t remote earth, both with
current interrupter „on „ & „off” at each measurement point.
The difference of the two (∆I) will be the CP current being collected by this section of the
pipeline. The difference of two (∆V) will be the average change in pipeline potential within the
test section owing the current received from CP system.
The above procedure shall be repeated for all current measurement type test stations for
evaluating coating conductance value for different sections along the pipeline. All the data
obtained shall be handed over to the CONSULTANT/ OWNER & will form part of technical
documentation for commissioning report.
ANNEXURE-IV
PIPELINE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM: REFER DRG. NO. B185-020-83-41-30001, Rev.K
Page 2953 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 22 of 23
ANNEXURE-V
SPECIFICATION FOR CORROSION SURVEY (RIVER / WATER LOGGING SECTION)
1.0 Close Interval Potential Survey (CIPS) without lateral gradient:
Before starting the potential survey, it shall be confirmed that all major components of system
i.e. T/R units, anode bed, reference electrodes test stations and insulating joints are
functioning properly. Observations and data gathered during this system check shall be
recorded.
Over the line close interval potential survey (CIPS) by Trailing wire method shall be carried
out at interval not exceeding 5.0 M between two successive point of measurement by either
of the following methods or a combination of both as given below. However, if difference
between pipe to soil potential (PSP) at two consecutive spots exceeds by 50 mV then PSP
shall be logged at 1.0M interval between the these spots. CIPS shall be carried out directly
over the new 42” line whose potential is being measured and for this the Pipeline should be
accurately located by using a suitable pipe locator.
Continuous pipe to water potential survey shall be carried out for the river/ submerged
lengths of the pipelines. Continuous pipe to electrolyte potential measurement shall be
carried out by towed fish/ trailing wire technique. All potential measurements during the
survey shall be undertaken by experienced corrosion Engineers. Connection to the pipeline
shall be maintained at shore on board of vessel using a wire dispenser.
Survey shall be carried out after confirming that all major components of the system i.e. T/R
units, anode bed, reference cell electrodes, test stations and insulating joints are functioning
properly and the operating data should be recorded. During this activity, all the normal
operating C.P. parameters .e.g. D.C. output at rectifier stations, individual pipeline, drainage
current, drain point, pipe potentials and potentials at intermediate test points shall be noted
and recorded.
Potential survey shall be carried out keeping the individual pipeline potentials at all test points
and draining points same as in normal operating conditions which was recorded prior to
survey.
The vessel speed shall not exceed 5 knots (2.5 m/s) continuous measurement of potential
shall be done by using strip chart recorder or computerised data logger.
Downline position of vessel as it travels along pipeline shall be determined by combination of

DGPS and side scan sonar while positional fixes of the vessel relative to the pipeline shall be
provided by as surveyed X-Y coordinates of the pipeline in conjunction with radio positioning
system
The side scan profile shall be continuously recorded during the survey to determine:
- Pipeline position, any pipeline crossing, depth of burial.
- Altitude above sea bed.
- Continuous vertical and lateral displacement of towed/fish relative to pipeline surveyed.
Page 2954 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 23 of 23
- Once pipeline is located and identified the vessels speed and course shall be adjusted to
maintain the towed fish within the specified distance of maximum 15M from pipeline
For the intertidal zones where it will not be possible for vessel to go right upto landfall point
due to very shallow water and extensive mud flats, the potential measurement shall be done
by placing the reference electrode at landfall point and manually pulling it over the pipeline
from the survey vessel towards it. During pulling it shall be ensured that electrodes are within
specified distance from the pipeline. All potential recording shall be done on board while the
electrode is being pulled.
Prior to start of survey all the T/R units at the Rectifier stations shall be put in manual mode.
Continuous potential measurement shall be made in ON and OFF mode by placing current
interrupters in D.C. leg of all Rectifiers. Typical cycle for the ON & OFF duration shall be
same as for onshore survey with a "ON" to "OFF" time ratio of 4:1 with "OFF" duration not
exceeding 3 secs which corresponding to a "ON" duration of 12 secs (4 cycles/minute).
Adequate no. of interrupter shall be placed and synchronized.
In event of trailing wire break, entire survey will be repeated in the same direction unless
otherwise agreed between Company/ Consultant to perform survey in reverse direction for
the section that could not be completed due to wire break.
Cell-to-Cell technique will not be allowed to carry out survey for the section that could not be
completed due to wire break. Only towed fish/ trailing wire method shall be employed.
The entire offshore survey shall be done by specialist agency along with proven equipment
and proper track record. The CP contractor shall take the approval for such agency before
proceeding the survey.
1.1 ACCURACY OF EQUIPMENT
a) The accuracy of the positioning system shall be as below:
Accuracy : +/- 1 metre per range
Repeatability +/- 2 metres
b) The silver/silver chloride or Cu/CuSO4 reference electrodes shall be accurate to +/- 4mV.
c) Corrosion voltmeter and Electronic circuitry shall be accurate to +/- 1 pV (Pic volt)
1.2 ERRORS
Contractor in final report shall give analysis of errors and their various sources and determine
the error ranges due to IR drop in electrolyte due to separation of reference electrode from
pipeline, IR drop in pipeline due to long line currents and those due to electrical interference
or telluric currents. The magnitude of various errors and the net error shall be estimated and
recorded for each pipeline in the report. In any case, maximum possible error irrespective of
method of survey shall not exceed 50 mV and the potential data should have accuracy of this
order.
Page 2955 of 3884

Page 2956 of 3884

NEW DELHI
CANAL
PART-A
CH. 1+484km
NH-31D
CH. 5+174km CH. 1+529 km
BORDER FENCE (INDIA-BANGLADESH)

INDIA
CR. CH. 5+199.28

MAHANANDA RIVER INTERNATIONAL BORDER
CH. 5+462 km
CH. 5+462.00 km
N-5
CH. 6+911 km
JOB NO : B185
BANGLADESH
LIMITED
SV-1 CUM CTM STATION, BANGLABANDHA
CH. 6+961 km
PIPELINE PROJECT
ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED CLIENT : NUMALIGARH REFINERY
DAUK NADI
CH. 14+626 km
PROJECT: INDIA BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP
I
J
K
H
KORATOYA RIVER
REV.
CH. 24+334 km
N-5
CH. 25+702 km
DATE
22.04.2019
20.06.2019
27.06.2019
19.08.2019
SV-2, SHEKHGACHH
CH. 30+201 km
PART-B KORATOYA RIVER

CH. 40+075 km
REVISION
REVISED & RE-ISSUED
REVISED & RE-ISSUED
REVISED & RE-ISSUED
REVISED & RE-ISSUED
N-5
CH. 49+943 km
BY
PN
PN
PN
PN
SV-3, KANTAMANI
CH. 60+426 km
NOTES:
10" NB GASOIL (HSD) PIPELINE
CHK
GDS
GDS
GDS
GDS
DESIGN PRESSURE : 70.0 Kg/cm 2 g
CH. 80+000km
MSG
MSG
MSG
MSG
APPROVED
KORATOYA RIVER
CH. 82+292 km
SV-4, CHANDIPUR
CH. 88+931km
WALL THICKNESS : 9.3mm (FOR PIPELINE), 10.2mm (FOR LR BENDS)
MATERIAL : API 5L GR. X 60 PSL 2, HFW, CORROSION ALLOWANCE : 0.5mm
CORROSION COATING : 3 LAYER POLYETHYLENE (3LPE), 2.5mm THICKNESS

INDIA BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP PIPELINE (IBFPL) PROJECT
ICHAMATI NADI
CH. 106+302 km
TISTA CANAL
CH. 108+323 km
PART-C
SV-5 CUM TAP OFF STATION (SAIDPUR) (0.2 MMTPA FOR DIESEL BASED POWER PLANT)
PIPELINE FACILITIES
CH. 117+395km, SONAPUKUR

N-5
CH. 117+447 km
SCHEMATIC ARRANGEMENT OF
DRAWING NO.
B185-020-83-41-30001
K
REV.
1-1641-0503 REV.0 A3-420x297

DOCUMENT NO.
ENGINEERING DESIGN BASIS B185-000-06-45-CDB-01
(PIPELINE CP SYSTEM) Rev.2
Page 1 of 11
ENGINEERING DESIGN BASIS
FOR PIPELINE CP SYSTEM
PROJECT : INDO BANGLA FRIENDSHIP PIPELINE PROJECT
OWNER : M/s NRL& BANGLADESH PETROLEUM CORPORATION
JOB NO. : B185
(NRL) (EIL)
2 10.09.2019 Revised and Issued for Tender JOYDEEP NSB NSB
1 10.05.2019 Revised and Issued for Tender JOYDEEP NSB NSB
0 05.04.2019 Issued for Tender JOYDEEP NSB NSB

Rev.
No
Page 2957 of 3884

DOCUMENT NO.
Page 2 of 11
CONTENTS
SL NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 TEMPORARY CP SYSTEM (TCP)
1.2 PERMANENT CP SYSTEM (PCP)
2.0 CP STATIONS AND THEIR MONITORING SYSTEM
2.1 SPECIAL REQUIREMENT FOR SCADA SYSTEM
Page 2958 of 3884

DOCUMENT NO.
Page 3 of 11
1.0 Introduction:
M/s NRL intends to install approx. 130.361 km long transnational pipeline from the Siliguri
marketing Terminal (SMT) of the Numaligarh Refinery Limited (NRL) in India to the Parbatipur
depot of the Bangladesh Petroleum Corporation (BPC) in Bangladesh for transportation of Gasoil
(HSD).
Out of the 130.361km of pipeline approx. 5.46 km length of pipeline alignment is aligned within
the territory of India. The remaining approx. 124.89 km of the pipeline alignment is aligned in the
territory of Bangladesh
Numaligarh Refinery Limited (NRL) has entrusted Engineers India Limited (EIL) for Engineering,
Procurement & Construction Management (EPCM) services to lay a new transnational pipeline
carrying Gas Oil (HSD) from Siliguri Marketing Terminal (SMT) in West Bengal state, India to
Parbatipur in Dinajpur District in Bangladesh .
The Pipeline will have one dispatch station at Siliguri and one receiving terminal at Parbatipur
including en-route SV and CP stations
This design basis defines the CP System Design requirements applicable for this project in
addition to the specification for sacrificial anode cathodic protection system 6-45-0027,
specification for impressed current cathodic protection system 6-45-0028. NACE SP-0169- 2007
& NACE SP-0177- 2007, ISO 15589-1& 2, DNV-RP-B401, DNV-RP-F103, BS EN 13174 ,BS
EN12473, AWWA, OISD, IEC including latest Petroleum Act and all applicable country
regulations. In case of conflict, the requirements mentioned in this document or stringent shall
be considered.
a. Site Conditions:
Sr No Description Site Data/ information

1 Equipment Design temperature IS 9676 50 Deg.C
2 Soil resistivity Based on the survey report
3 Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000M above
4 Weather Dry, dust storms in summer,
humid / heavy rain fall during
monsoon
b. Utilizing Voltage & operating philosophy: Supply to PCP system shall be through
transformer rectifier unit fed from UPS. However, for SV cum CP stations, IP cum CP stations,
Cathodic protection Panel of dual Input 48 V DC as well as 230 V AC ,input will be provided with
solar & battery and SEB power as power source.
For 48V DC input mode (earthed through anode ground bed) along with (-) 48 V DC to 48 V DC
converter for galvanic isolation shall be installed.
Page 2959 of 3884

DOCUMENT NO.
Page 4 of 11
1.1 Temporary cathodic protection (TCP) :
Within 60 days of lowering of each continuous segment of pipe, it should be protected at

minimum 850mV potential level by Mg anode as part of TCP. Where soil resistivity is 150
ohm-m or more, achievement of -850mV potential level shall not be mandatory. However,
minimum acceptable shift of potential level over and above natural potential at such locations
(where soil resistivity is 150 ohm-m or more) shall be decided by EIL/ OWNER on the case
to case basis.At locations where soil resistivity is more than 100 ohm-m, those locations
shall be treated as high soil resistivity areas.
A. Type : Sacrificial
B. Design life : 2 Years or till commissioning of PCP
Whichever is later
C. Pipeline coating : External :Three Layer Polyethylene
D. Minimum Protective current Density at 300C
 Temporary CP (µ A/m2) : 30
 Permanent CP for 25-Year design Life, (µ A/m2) : 300-500
The above current density values for temporary CP system are applicable for CP
system design life up to two years. For marshy area current density to be considered
as PCP system.
Soil resistivity survey data to be measured along the ROU and same to be considered
during designing and installation of TCP system.
Where operating temperatures of U/G pipeline is above 30 deg. C, such as CP Stations

located near Compressor stations, protection Current Density shall be increased in minimum
by 25% for every 10 °C rise in temperature over 30 °C up to a temperature of 60 deg.C.
E. Anode material (for sacrificial CP system): Zinc (1.1 V) / low potential Magnesium (1.55 V)/
F. Polarisation coupons : Shall be provided as per Spec 6-45-0027

Polarization coupons with Magnetic Reed / Toggle
switch and shunt facility should be installed at
vulnerable locations like susceptible areas for
interference, pipeline crossings, parallel pipelines,
Galvanically protected pipelines as per OISD.
a. Size of exposed area of : 10mm x 10mm

coupon
b. No. of coupons : 2 nos.. Location in consultation with OWNER/

EIL or Locations mentioned above
c. No. of magnet devices for : -DO-
Page 2960 of 3884

DOCUMENT NO.
Page 5 of 11
operation of magnetic reed switch
G. DC Decoupling Device : Solid state type
H. HT crossings & MOV Earthing at SV station : Zinc anode and SSPC as per OISD for HT
xing
For DC/AC supply operated MOV double

earthing from two different points on MOV
actuator through sacrificial Zn grounding
cells along with Solid State DC
Decoupling devices via a dedicated TLP
near the MOV.
I CPL survey : Shall not be conducted during TCP,
J DC interference & AC induced

voltage survey : Shall be conducted during TCP stage for DC
interference areas and HT crossings (11 kV and
above), reading shall be taken for 24 hrs at 60
seconds interval.
K. Test stations : Test stations shall be provided at an average

distance of 1Km interval along the pipeline ROU for
monitoring the performance of the cathodic
protection system. The TEST stations installed to
be encased in concrete to avoid the theft. The
following locations shall also be considered for Test
stations:
a) At the locations of TCP anodes.
b) At both ends of HDD crossings
All HDD River Crossing sections to be provided

with B type TLP for current measurement and
coating resistance monitoring for the HDD River
crossings
c) At both sides of metalled road crossings where
cased crossing is considered for the crossing. At
one side of the road crossing where casing pipe
is not considered for the crossing. In case more
than one such uncased road crossing occurs
within 1Km, then only one such uncased road
crossing shall be provided with test station
within 1Km.
Page 2961 of 3884

DOCUMENT NO.
Page 6 of 11
d) At all insulating joints.
e) At locations of reference cells, surge diverters,

polarisation coupons, pipeline grounding
through polarisation cells, zinc and magnesium
anodes.
f) At both sides of railway line crossings & both
sides of Canal in case width greater than 50
meter.
g) At both sides of major river crossings.
h) At EHV/ HV AC/ DC overhead line crossings

and along routes where EHV/ HV overhead line
are running in parallel.
i)
Installation of integrated coupon test stations (2
DC coupons & 1 AC coupon) at the point of
intersection of HT lines that shall do 7
measurements -AC and DC current density, AC
and DC pipe to soil, DC Pipe to soil instant off,
Native pipe to soil and current drain.
The TLP erection for the Overhead HT line
crossings and parallel scenario shall have pipe
to cable connection at the crossings but the TLP
location shall be preferably 80-100m away to
avoid any electric shock due to induction
phenomenon while monitoring the TLP readings
below the HT lines.
j) In the vicinity of DC networks or grounding
systems and HVDC grounding systems where
interference problems are suspected.
k) At crossings of other pipelines/ structures.
l) Locations where interference is expected.
m) At locations of (SV/ IP/ DT/ RT) stations.
n) Current measurement test station for each leg of
each SV cum CP stations and at both ends of
HDD crossings.
o) At any other locations considered necessary by
OWNER/ OWNER's representative.
p) Test station to be provided at the close vicinity of
foreign pipeline anode bed.
Page 2962 of 3884

DOCUMENT NO.
Page 7 of 11
q) All CP station location to be provided with CJB

TLP
L. Additional tests to evaluate the : Shall not be conducted during TCP

Coating defects
1.2. Permanent Cathodic Protection System (PCP)
A. Type : Impressed current type
B. Design life of protection : 30 Years
C. Pipeline coating : Three Layer Polyethylene
D. Design protection current density

at 30 degree centigrade for 30 years design life : Refer item D of TCP
E. Current drainage & coating

Resistance measurement survey : Shall be carried out including HDD section.
F. Type of Anodes for anode ground : Tubular Mixed Metal Oxide (MMO) Titanium
or Hi-Si-Cr cast Iron anodes based on soil
resistivity preferably Horizontal
G. Computerised test stations (CTSU) : Shall be provided at vulnerable/ typical

locations
a. No. of computerised test stn : One for part A, 2 nos for part B and 2 nos
for PART A. Location of CTSU in
consultation with OWNER/ EIL by CP
Contractor, CTSU shall be provided at all
vulnerable location viz. Remote locations,
critical interference locations
b. No. of computerised test : Do.

station readers/ portable data
collection& storage
instruments.
c. Interval for data acquisition/ : Once every day

Storing
H Polarisation coupons : Refer item F of TCP
Page 2963 of 3884

DOCUMENT NO.
Page 8 of 11
I Polarisation cell : Solid State Type
J. Acquisition of land for : By Owner

Anode ground bed in the name of Owner
Including installation of anode junction
boxes (AJB) and ROU for anode ground
Bed cable laying between AJB & TRU
K. Chain link fencing around the ground: Shall be provided as per anode ground bed size.
bed
L. Close interval potential logging survey : Shall be carried out by CP contractor
M. Additional tests to be conducted for : CAT survey followed by DCVG

identifying pipe coating defects/
N. Proposed location of Anode Ground

bed (For impressed current CP System)
at proposed CP stations/ : To be decided by CP system contractor
based on detailed engineering, EIL specification and
at availability of power source & land. At each CP
Station location soil resistivity shall be measured up
to 50m depth for 3 plots, for selection of the anode
bed for the lowest resistivity plot. Horizontal shallow
depth anode bed shall be considered where soil
resistivity up to 2m depth is lower compared to
higher than 2m depth, deep well anode bed shall be
considered where soil resistivity at higher than 2m
depth is lower compared to surface soil resistivity up
to 2m depth.
O. Proposed location of :To be decided by CP contractor during detail

Computerised test stations/ engineering based Polarisation Coupons on EIL
specifications and in Consultation with the Client.
P. CP stations/ anode ground bed for Impressed current system:-

a) CP stations shall be located coinciding with SV/ IP/ DT/ RT stations, as far as
possible. All the CP Units to be provided with hour meter arrangement for monitoring
of power availability at the panels in line with OISD, integration with SCADA.
b) At dispatch terminals & Receipt Terminal, SV cum CP stations, IP cum CP stations,
power supply to PCP system shall be through transformer rectifier unit fed from UPS.
However, for locations where grid power is not available, cathodic protection power
supply module (CPPSM) will be provided with solar & battery as power source or as
per project philosophy.
Page 2964 of 3884

DOCUMENT NO.
Page 9 of 11
Q. Additional requirements (if any):
i) For each IP,SV,DT/RT stations, insulating joint (IJ) shall be provided by EPC contractor
for isolating the incoming Trunk line / Spurline, outgoing Trunk line / Spurline, including
Pumping/ Compressor stations, existing consumer tapping (whichever is applicable) from
the station piping, earthing grids/ pits etc.In each insulating joint surge diverter with
required length of cable without any joint to be provided by CP contractor.
ii) Insulation shall be provided at the supports for PT/ TT for Piping isolation from supports.
iii) Insulating joints shall be protected by using electrical earthing through sacrificial Zn
grounding cells along with Solid State DC Decoupling devices on protected side and
surge Diverter. The Unprotected side shall be provided with earthing only.
iv) The permanent Buried Reference Cell shall be placed in dedicated chambers and pits
shall be properly marked for identification.
v) For protection of the carrier pipe inside casing pipe, Petroleum jelly filling (either hot or
cold as per casing length ) or Vapour phase Corrosion Inhibitor (VpCI) at the annular
space between casing and carrier shall be provided as per NACE Std. Any one of the
following options shall be considered by the pipeline CP system contractor. The selection
of any of the alternative options shall be as per sole discretion of EIL/ OWNER
 The casing filler shall be a specially formulated Petroleum wax-based / visco-elastic

based compound or Vapour phase Corrosion (VpCI) Inhibitor which is pumped in the
annulus space and shall be supplied with associated filler material and end seals.
 The casing filler shall be cold or hot type based on the size / length of the casing as per
table below and designed to prevent corrosion in existing or new cased crossings and
reduce current drainage through the shorted casings (to prevent electrolytic circuit and/
or physical contact between the casing and carrier pipe) The casing filler shall be
designed to displace water and oxygen in the annulus space and prevent water from re-
entering thereby mitigating any further corrosion.
 The casing filler shall meet the requirements of NACE SP-0200-2014.
Casing Size Length Casing Filler (Hot or Cold)
Upto 12.75” Max. 200 feet Hot or Cold
>12.75” Any length Hot
2. Average distance between consecutive CP Stations and their monitoring

system:
Page 2965 of 3884

DOCUMENT NO.
Page 10 of 11
Average distance between consecutive CP Stations shall be considered as per the site
condition and types of crossing, vicinity of ROU details, coating degradation, pipeline OD
etc. for the entire CP System design life as per project requirement. All CP Stations &
CTSU shall be centrally monitored and control from pipeline SCADA system.
2.1. Special requirements for SCADA input for CPTRU:
SL. DESCRIPTION MONITORIN DIGITAL (D) NO. OF

No. G (M) / SIGNALS TAG NO.
/CONTROL ANALOGUE
(C) (A)
CPTR OUT PUT VOLTAGE AI CPTR-V

1 M 1
CPTR OUT PUT CURRENT AI CPTR-A

2 M 1
PIPELINE OVER PROTECTED DI PL-OV

3 M 1
PIPELINE UNDER
4 PROTECTED M DI 1 PL-UV
ALL REFERENCE CELLS

DI REFC-F
5 FAILED M 1
REFERENCE CELL-1
AI REFC1-V
6 VOLTAGE M 1
REFERENCE CELL-2
AI REFC2-V
7 VOLTAGE M 1
CPTR IN AUTO MODE DI CPTR-AU

8 M 1
9
CPTR IN MANUAL MODE DI CPPSM-MAN
M 1
CURRENT INTERRUPTER
DO CI-ST
10 START C 1
CURRENT INTERRUPTER
DO CI-STP
11 STOP C 1
CURRENT INTERRUPTER
DO CI-RST
12 RESET C 1
Legend:
1 AI :Analogue monitoring signal from Equipment to PLC/ Telemetry interface

cabinet (TIC)
2 AO: Analogue control signal from PLC/ (TIC) to Equipment
3 DI: Digital Monitoring signal from Equipment to PLC/ (TIC)
4 DO: Digital control signal from PLC/ (TIC) to Equipment
Page 2966 of 3884

DOCUMENT NO.
Page 11 of 11
Notes:
1. For any control signal the signal shall be available from SCADA for less than 2 seconds
only.
2. The rating of the potential free contact for digital input and output signals from Equipment/
PLC/ RTU shall be 24 V DC, 1.5 A DC. Analogue signals shall be 4-20 mA, galvanically
isolated.
3. Provision for minimum two nos analogue and two nos of digital input signal to SCADA
System shall be available for future use.
.
4. At every SV station, current measurement provision along with PSP measurement to be
provided. Converter for PSP and current output for SCADA connectivity along with cable
to be provided by CP contractor
5. RS485 (Soft wire) port to be consider for SCADA communication and interface .
6. Provision for monitoring:
a).PSP measurement value to be configured in addition in SCADA as Analog through

Converter.
b). Converter module to be provided for DC O/O Voltage, DC O/ P Current, PSP,
Reference 1 & 2.
c) All the converter modules shall be AC/ DC Operated for CP Units.
d) GPS based data logger Multimeter for PSP monitoring to be considered in spares (1
no.)
Page 2967 of 3884

DATA SHEET FOR DOCUMENT No.
SACRIFICIAL ANODE CATHODIC A185-000-16-50-CDS-01 R0
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR PIPELINES Page 1 of 8
DATASHEET FOR
SACRIFICIAL ANODE CATHODIC PROTECTION
SYSTEM FOR PIPELINES
(CP SYSTEM)
OWNER : M/s NRL & BANGLADESH PETROLEUM CORPORATION
JOB NO. : B185
0 10.05.19 ISSUED FOR TENDER JOYDEEP NSB NSB
Rev.
No
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1 B185-000- 16-50-CDS-01 R0.doc Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2968 of 3884

SACRIFICIAL ANODE CATHODIC
A185-000-16-50-CDS-01 R0
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
PIPELINES Page 2 of 8
DATA SHEET
SACRIFICIAL ANODE CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR PIPELINES

PART I
(PURCHASER SPECIFIED DATA)
1. Type of coating for the pipelines : 3 Layer Polyethylene/ Coal tar enamel with 3 coat,
2 wrap / fibre bonded epoxy /
(liquid epoxy internal lining)
2. Type of CP system : Permanent / Temporary using sacrificial anodes
3. Design life of protection :
- Temporary CP system : 2 years or till commissioning of PCP, whichever
is later
4. Design protection current density : Refer scope of work/ specification
5. Corrosion survey data : Enclosed / Corrosion survey shall be conducted by
contractor
6. Type of sacrificial anode : Zinc / Magnesium low potential type (-1.55V) /
magnesium high potential type (1.75V)
7. Electrical Resistance Probes : N/A Shall be provided for marshy areas and water
logged areas / Not required.
7.1 Quantity of E/R Probes : N/A (Please refer to Design Basis for CP system No.
A185-060-16-50-CDB-01)
7.2 No. of E/R probe reading : N/A (Please refer to Design Basis for CP system No.
instrument A185-060-16-50-CDB-01)
8. Polarisation coupons : Shall be provided
8.1 Size of exposed area of coupon : Please refer to Design Basis for CP system No.
A185-000-16-50-CDB-01 (also see note No. vi.
below)
8.2 No. of coupons : -Do-
8.3 No. of magnets for operation : -Do-
9.0 Close interval ‘ON’/‘OFF’ potential : Shall not be carried out / not to be carried
Survey out during TCP
At DC interference prone areas and high induced voltage areas at EHV/ HV transmission
lines (11 KV & above) crossing/ running in parallel / foreign pipeline either crossing
readings shall be taken using data logger for 24 hours at 1 minute interval or as required).
10.0 Additional tests to be conducted : Pearson survey / CAT with ‘A’ frame or
for identifying pipe coating DCVG survey / Not required
defects / holidays during TCP
11.0 Indicative Design data for sacrificial anodes ground bed (see note ‘v’ below)
Page 2969 of 3884

A185-000-16-50-CDS-01 R0
11.1 To be filled by CP contractor
Chainage Pipeline Pipeline Type of Anode material Anode type Anode ground No. of
S.No Dia Wall coating Zinc / Solid/ Ribbon bed spacing anodes per
From To thickness Magnesium (clear) from ground bed
KM KM M mm pipeline Nos.
11.2 Details of anodes (By CP Contractor)
- Type : Zinc Magnesium
- Net weight : _ _ _ Kg _ _ _ Kg
- Size :
- Bare : _ _ x _ _ x _ _ mm. __ x __ x __ mm.
min. Min.
- Prepacked : _ _ x _ _ x _ _ mm. __ x __ x __ mm.
min. Min.
11.3 Type of anode installation : Horizontal / Vertical
11.4 Clear distance between individual anodes: ___M
11.5 Clear distance between edge of : 5000 mm min for magnesium anodes / 2000
Pipeline and prepacked anode mm min. for zinc anodes
11.6 Clear distance between edge of : 5M min

Pipeline and Zinc ribbon anode at
HV OH line crossings/ parallel running
Notes:
i. Where sacrificial anode system is specified as temporary cathodic protection system,
unless otherwise specified, monitoring of the sacrificial anode cathodic protection system
till the commissioning of permanent CP system shall be carried out by TCP contractor.
ii. In cases where sacrificial anode CP system is specified as temporary and where both
temporary, permanent cathodic protection works are being executed by the same agency,
activities of permanent CP system which are common to temporary CP system shall be
completed as part of temporary CP system. In cases where temporary and permanent
cathodic protection works are being executed by different agencies, the contractual scope
of work shall be referred for further details.
iii. All civil works associated with the complete cathodic protection system are included in the
scope of Contractor. This shall include providing cable trenches and foundations for all
equipment, all test stations, etc.
Page 2970 of 3884

A185-000-16-50-CDS-01 R0
iv. The design data for anode ground beds and anodes shall be decided by TCP contractor
depending on the protection current requirement of the pipeline as laid.
v. Contractor shall fill up all the data asked for in the ‘Data sheet sacrificial anode cathodic
protection system for pipelines, part-II (to be filled in by the contractor)’ and submit the
same for EIL’s review.
vi. Location of Polarization coupons shall be decided by CP sub contractor as per

specification requirement and in consultation with Owner/ EIL during detailed engineering.
vii. Contractor shall supply necessary instruments, tools and tackles necessary for proper
operation and maintenance of complete cathodic protection system and associated
equipment as specified in the document.
Page 2971 of 3884

A185-000-16-50-CDS-01 R0
DATA SHEET
SACRIFICIAL ANODE CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR PIPELINES
PART-II
(TO BE FILLED IN BY THE VENDOR)
1.0 E/R probes

1.1 Make and model no. of E/R probes :N/A
1.2 Material of E/R probes :N/A
1.3 size of the exposed area of the probe :N/A
1.4 Make and model no. of E/R probe :N/A

reading instrument
2.0 Permanent reference electrodes

2.1 Type :
2.2 Make & model no. :
2.3 Design life of electrode under burial : _ _ _ Years

Condition
3.0 Polarisation cells

3.1 Type :
3.3 Maximum DC leakage current at

400 C at
- 1V DC across the Polarisation cell : _ _ _ mA
- 1.5V DC across the Polarisation cell : _ _ _ mA
3.4 50 Hz AC current rating at 400 C

- Continuous : ___A
- Short time : _ _ _ KA for _ _ _ Sec
3.5 No. of operations over life time
under maximum ratings : _ _ _ Nos.
4.0 Polarisation Coupons
4.1 Exposed size of metal :
4.2 Metal type :
4.3 Make and model no. of reed switch :

operator magnet
4.5 Rating of reed switch

4.5.1 Continuous current rating : _ _ _ A DC, at _ _ _ V DC
4.5.2 Breaking current : _ _ _ A DC, at _ _ _ V DC
Page 2972 of 3884

A185-000-16-50-CDS-01 R0
5.0 Surge Diverters

5.1 Type :
5.2 Ratings :
5.2.1 Current, 8/20 micro second wave :
5.2.2 AC spark over voltage

-50 Hz AC :
-Impulse (1.2/50 micro second) :
5.3 Make :
6.0 Cables
6.1 Type :
6.2 Voltage grade :
6.3 Make :
7.0 Cable to pipe connection

-For charged pipeline :
- For non charged pipeline :
7.1 Make and model number of

- CAD weld Material :
- Pin brazing equipment :
8.0 Details of anodes
8.1 Prepacked type
- Anode material : Zinc Magnesium
- Net weight : _ _ _ Kg min. _ _ _ Kg min.

- Size :
- Bare : _ _ x _ _ x _ _ mm. min. __ x _ _ x _ _ mm. Min.
- Prepacked : _ _ x _ _ x _ _ mm. min. __ x _ _ x _ _ mm. Min.
- Make : ___ ___
8.2 Ribbon type
- Anode material : Zinc Magnesium
-Net weight : _ _ _ Kg min per metre _ _ _ Kg min per metre

- Size : _ _ x _ _ x _ _ mm. min _ _ x _ _ x _ _ mm. min
- Make : ___ ___
9.0 Makes
9.1 Test stations:
9.2 Special Backfill for sacrificial anodes :
Page 2973 of 3884

Page 2974 of 3884
FORM-IA
DETAILS OF SPECIFIC EXPERIENCE OF BIDDER* / HIS NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTOR FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE CP SYSTEM
(SEPARATE SHEETS SHALL BE FILLED UP FOR EACH JOB/PROJECT HANDELED)
Name of CP sub contractor:
EXPERIENCE DETAILS OF HYDROCARBON HANDLING CROSS COUNTRY PIPELINES
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1

SL. DESCRIPTION LENG- DIAM TYPE TYPE OF NO. OF NAME OF WORK DATE OF DATE OF NAME OF EXPERIENCE
NO. (For Sacrificial TH OF ETER OF PIPE ANODES ANODE PROJECT ORDER COMMEN- COMPL- BACK-UP OF BACK-UP
PIPE OF COAT- GROUND AND NO. (**) CEMENT ETION AGENCY AGENCY
anode CP LINE PIPE ING BEDS FOR OWNER OF WORK OF
System) CONSIDER
LINE THE WORK.
PIPELINE ED
(**)
1 Design and
engineering
experience
PIPELINES
2 Supply of CP
DATA SHEET FOR
equipment/mat
erial
3 Installation of
CP system
4 Testing and
commissioning
Page 7 of 8
DOCUMENT No.
Copyright EIL – All rights reserved

* Strike out which ever is not applicable
A185-000-16-50-CDS-01 R0
** Copy of the work order and completion certificate shall be attached

Page 2975 of 3884
FORM-II
*
DETAILS OF SPECIFIC EXPERIENCE OF BIDDER / HIS NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTOR FOR CP SYSTEM/ BACK UP AGENCY FOR
INTERFERENCE DETECTION AND MITIGATION (SEPARATE SHEET SHALL BE FILLED FOR EACH JOB/PROJECT HANDELED)
NAME OF THE SUB-CONTRACTOR FOR CP SYSTEM:

NAME OF THE BACKUP AGENCY FOR INTERFERENCE DETECTION & MITIGATION:
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1

EXPERIENCE DETAILS OF HYDROCARBON HANDLING CROSS COUNTRY PIPELINES
SL. CAUSE OF LENG- DIAM- TYPE NO. OF CP NAME OF WORK DATE DATE OF DETAILS OF BACK-UP AGENCY, IF
NO. INTERFERENCE TH OF ETER OF STATIONS PROJECT ORDER OF COMPL- HIRED FOR CP INTERFERENCE/
PIPE OF PIPELI- FOR THE AND NO. (**) COMM- ETION MITIGATON
NE OWNER OF
LINE PIPE PIPELINE ENCEM-
COATI- WORK NAME OF EXPERIENCE OF
LINE NG ENT OF
(**) AGENCY BACK UP
WORK AGENCY(***)
1 Cathodically protected
foreign pipelines
crossing/ parallel
running
PIPELINES
2 Cathodically
unprotected foreign
DATA SHEET FOR
pipelines/ structures
crossing/ parallel
running
3 High voltage line

AC/DC (66KV and
above) crossing &
parallel running
4 AC/DC electrified
traction
Page 8 of 8
5
DOCUMENT No.
Copyright EIL – All rights reserved

* STRIKE OUT WHICH EVER IS NOT APPLICABLE
A185-000-16-50-CDS-01 R0
** COPY OF WORK ORDER AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE SHALL BE ATTACHED

*** LIST OF INTEREFERENCE DETECTION, MITIGATION JOBS DONE ALONG WITH WORK ORDER AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE SHALL BE ATTACHED
IMPRESSED CURRENT CATHODIC B185-000-16-50-CDS-02 R0
PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 1 of 8
DATASHEET FOR
IMPRESSED CURRENT CATHODIC PROTECTION
SYSTEM FOR PIPELINES
(CP SYSTEM)
JOB NO : B185
0 10.05.19 ISSUED FOR TENDER JOYDEEP NB NB
Rev.
No
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1 B185-000-16-50-CDS-02 R0.docx Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2976 of 3884

IMPRESSED CURRENT CATHODIC
B185-000-16-50-CDS-02 R 0
PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 2 of 8
DATA SHEET
IMPRESSED CURRENT CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR PIPELINES
PART-I
(PURCHASER SPECIFIED DATA)
1. Pipeline coating : 3 layer Polyethylene coating (Liquid Epoxy

internal)
2. Type of CP system : Permanent / Temporary
3. Design life of protection : 30 Yrs
4. Design protection current density : Refer design basis B185-000-16-50-CDB-01
5. Current drainage & coating : Shall be conducted after PCP commissioning
resistance measurement where current measurement type test stations
are provided along pipeline.
6. Corrosion survey data : Enclosed / Corrosion survey shall be conducted
by CP system contractor
7. Integration of permanent CP with : In the scope of the CP system contractor / Not in
the Temporary & existing CP
(if applicable) scope of the contractor.
8. Type of Anodes for anode ground : MMO coated Tubular titanium anode,
bed canistered with petroleum coke breeze
9.0 Computerized test stations : Required
9.1 No. of computerized test stations : Ref to Design Basis doc No. B185-000-16-50-CDB-01
9.2 Data collection interval : -Do-
9.3 No. of computerized test station : -Do-
readers/ Data retrieval computer of
portable type for data collection.
10. Polarization coupons : Required / Not required shall be provided as
part of TCP activity
11. Surge diverter across insulation joints: Shall be provided as part of TCP activity
12. Grounding with galvanic anodes : Shall be provided at each 66 KV & above HV
through Polarization cells line crossings and at regular intervals of
maximum 1km where EHV/ HV transmission
lines run parallel with the pipeline and at
locations where the AC induced voltage
of 15V or more is observed
(in case of 33 KV or 11 KV).
13. Acquisition for right of use of land for : By Client
anode ground bed, anode junction
boxes and anode ground bed cable
laying
14. Chain link fencing around the ground : Shall be provided
bed.
15. Close interval potential logging survey : Shall be carried out
Page 2977 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-CDS-02 R 0
PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 3 of 8
16. Additional tests to be conducted for : Shall be carried out (Also refer Note (xiv)
identifying pipe coating defects/ holidays below)
17. Interference detection & mitigation : Shall be done by CP system contractor along
with specialist agency (if applicable)
18. Proposed location of new CP stations : As per. B185-000-16-50-CPS-01, R0
NB: The proposed location of CP stations shall be confirmed by CP system contractor

during bidding stage.
19. Output of the Existing impressed : As applicable

current CP stations which shall be
connected/ extended to the new spur
pipelines by bonding with the respective
existing pipelines.
Notes:
i) Unless otherwise specified in project specifications/ data sheet, integration of the
permanent impressed current CP system with the sacrificial anode temporary CP
system (whether provided by a different contractor or included along with the
impressed current CP system) shall be the responsibility of the impressed current CP
system contractor whose scope shall include disconnection of sacrificial anodes
wherever required.
ii) The permanent CP system includes certain activities, which are common with the
temporary cathodic protection facilities. In cases where temporary and permanent
cathodic protection works are being executed by the same agency, the common
activities of temporary and permanent cathodic protection system shall be completed
as part of temporary cathodic protection system. In cases where temporary and
permanent cathodic protection works are being executed by different agencies, the
contractual scope of work shall be referred for further details.
iii) Obtaining approval certificate from electrical inspectorate for electrical installation and
carrying out any modifications as per the requirement of electrical inspectorate shall
be included in CP system contractor scope.
iv) All civil works associated with the complete cathodic protection system are included in
scope of CP system contractor. This shall include providing cable trenches and
foundations for all equipment, kiosks, anode lead junction boxes, all test stations,
deep well ground beds, etc.
v) CP system contractor shall supply necessary instruments, tools and tackles
necessary for proper operation and maintenance of complete cathodic protection
system and associated equipment as per Cl. 21.0 below.
vi) Contractor shall clearly bring out during bidding stage, the requirement of additional
CP stations / higher rated ground bed, if any, over and above those specified in the
CP design input.
vii) Vendor shall fill up all the data asked for in the ‘Data sheet Impressed current
cathodic protection system for pipelines, part II (to be filled in by the vendor)’ and
submit the same for EIL’s review.
Page 2978 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-CDS-02 R 0
PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 4 of 8
viii) Necessary coordination with pipeline laying contractor shall also be in the scope of
CP system contractor.
ix) Reference cell and measurement signal cables between test stations and TR units
shall be laid in a separate cable trench other than for power/ anode/ cathode cables.
x) The make of equipment, materials shall be as per EIL approved/ recommended
vendor list only.
xii) For specific requirements, refer Design Basis document no. B185-000-16-50-CDB-01
xiii) Anode Ground Bed shall preferably be horizontal type, however type of anode ground
bed finally selected shall be as per soil resistivity data by CP system contractor.
xiv) CAT and DCVG survey shall be carried out along the route of pipeline where under
protection is found during CPL survey, to identify coating defects/ holidays and
complete report shall be submitted to Owner/ EIL. All the identified coating defects
shall be rectified by the pipeline laying contractor.
20. LIST OF ATTACHMENTS

For List of attachment, refer document no B185-000-16-50-CP-LL-01 attached elsewhere in
this tender document
21. O&M CP Spares:

21.1 O&M CP Spares for each TR unit:
Sl. No Description Unit Qty

1. DC Voltmeter Nos. 1
2. DC Ammeter Nos. 1
3. AC Voltmeter Nos. 1
4. AC Ammeter Nos. 1
5. Diodes Nos. 2
6. SCR’s Nos. 2
7. DC Fuses for output side Nos. 6
8. HRC fuse for Diodes Nos. 6
9. AC fuses for input side Nos. 6
10. DC Lightening arrestor Nos. 1
11. AC Circuit breaker(MCB/MCCB) Nos. 1
12. Electronic Control Cards each type Nos. 1
13. Filter circuit capacitor Nos. 2
14. Signal light assembly for annunciation Nos. 2
15. RC Surge Diverter Nos. 1
16. Control transformer Nos. 1
17. voltage control switch Nos. 2
18. current control switch Nos. 2
19. Auto Manual Mode selector switch Nos. 1
20. Toggle switches Nos. 1
21. Assorted Glass cartridge fuses Nos. 12
Page 2979 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-CDS-02 R 0
PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 5 of 8
21.2 O&M CP Spares/ Tool / Tackles for CP system :
Sl. No Description Qty

1 4½ Digital multimeter (Fluke make/approved 4 no.
equivalent)
2 Portable Cu CuSO4 ref cells (Mc miller/approved 4 no.
equivalent)
3 AC/DC Clamp ON meter 02 no.
Page 2980 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-CDS-02 R 0
PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 6 of 8
DATA SHEET
IMPRESSED CURRENT CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR PIPELINES
PART-II
(TO BE FILLED IN BY THE VENDOR)

1.2 Design life of electrode under burial : _ _ _ Years

condition.
2.0 Polarisation cells

2.1 Type :
2.3 Maximum DC leakage current at 400 C at

- 1V DC across the Polarisation cell : _ _ _ mA
2.4 50 Hz AC current rating at 400 C

- Contnuous : ___A
- Short time : _ _ _ KA for _ _ _ sec
2.5 Rated no. of operations over life time

under maximum ratings : _ _ _ Nos.

3.1 Exposed area of metal :
3.2 Metal type :

operator magnet
3.5 Rating of reed switch :

-Continuous current rating : _ _ _ A DC, at _ _ _ V DC
Page 2981 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-CDS-02 R 0
PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 7 of 8
-breaking current : _ _ _ A DC, at _ _ _ V DC
4.0 Surge Diverters
4.1 Type :
4.2 Ratings :
4.2.1 Current, 8/20 micro second wave :

4.2.2 AC spark over voltage
-50 Hz AC :
-Impulse (1.2/50 micro second) :
4.3 Make :
5.0 Cables
5.1 Type and voltage grade
-For anode tail cables : ___ /___V
-For other CP cables : ___ /___V
5.2 Make
-For anode tail cables :
-For other CP cables :
6.0 Cable to pipe connection
- For charged pipeline :
- For non charged pipeline :
6.1 Make and model number of
- Cad weld Material :
- Pin brazing equipment :

7.0 Anode type and make
7.1 Impressed current anodes
- Type :
- Make :
7.2. Sacrificial anodes make

-Zinc anodes :
-Zinc ribbon anodes :
8.0 Make of
Page 2982 of 3884

B185-000-16-50-CDS-02 R 0
PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 8 of 8
8.1 CPTR unit :
8.2 CPPSM :
8.3 Test stations :
8.4 Anode junction box :
8.5 Cathode junction box :
8.6 Calcined petroleum coke breeze :

-CuCuSO4 type :
-AgAgCl type :
8.8 Special Backfill for sacrificial anodes :
Page 2983 of 3884

COMPUTERIZED TEST STATION B185-000-16-50-CDS-05 R0
UNIT (CTSU) Page 1 of 3
DATASHEET FOR
COMPUTERIZED TEST STATION UNIT
(CP SYSTEM)
JOB NO. : B185
Rev.
No
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1 B185-000-16-50-CDS-05, R0.docx Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2984 of 3884

COMPUTERIZED TEST STATION B185-000-16-50-CP-DS-05 R0
UNIT (CTSU) age 2 of 3
DATA SHEET
COMPUTERIZED TEST STATION UNIT (CTSU)
(TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER)
Unit : Micro controller based intelligent CP Test Station Data

Monitoring Logger.
Analog Inputs : Logger will have 4 Nos High accuracy, High Input Impedance,
16- bit resolution Analog channels with high common mode
rejection ratio (CMRR), as under:
CH-1 : -4V to +4V DC (for DC PSP)
CH-2 : 0V to 25 V AC (for AC PSP Interference Monitoring)
CH-3 : 0A to 100A DC (for Pipeline Current Monitoring)
CH-4 : Battery Level ( For Internal Battery Monitoring)
The typical accuracy of each channel should be ± 1.0% of
F.S.±1 digit.
The PSP Input channels should have Input Impedance of 10
Meg Ohm minimum.
Isolation : All the four channels of the Data Logger should be fully Isolated
from each other.
Local Display : The CTSU Data Logger will have a 2 Line 16 x 2 LCD display for
entering local settings and viewing Test Station parameters
locally.
The LCD Display will display the following Parameters
 DC Reference Potential (PSP)
 AC Reference Potential (AC PSP)
 Pipeline Current
 Battery Level
Following Local settings should be done using the Laptop:
Setting Date/ Time
Setting Start Time for logging .
Setting Periodic logging Interval
Setting field ID of the Data Logger
Programmable : The Periodic Data Logging interval should be programmable

Logging Interval from 1 data sample per Hour to 1 data sample per day. The
logger should log the readings of all four channels
simultaneously.
Page 2985 of 3884

COMPUTERIZED TEST STATION B185-000-16-50-CP-DS-05 R0
UNIT (CTSU) age 3 of 3
Data Storage : The CTSU Data Logger should have built-in Non volatile memory
for local storage of Data. It should be possible to store about
250,000 Data readings for each channel i.e. a Total One Million
readings for all four channels in the Local memory of the Data
Logger. Locally stored data should be retained up to 10 years
without any external power.
The locally store data could be downloaded on a field Laptop

reader using the USB communication port provided on Data
Logger. The Data Logger will be supplied with Data downloading
software. The logger software should download the Data in
standard MS Excel sheet
Time Stamping : The Data Logger unit should have a precise and accurate Real
Time Clock (RTC) for exact time stamping of data.
Protection : The Input channels of Data Logger should have full protection
against high voltage surges and continuous over voltages of up
to 500V AC & DC.
Power Supply : The CTSU Data Logger will be a battery operated device and
will have built-in Internal rechargeable Lithium Battery.
Battery Life : The CTSU Data Logger will be capable of functioning for
minimum One Year at the logging rate of one log per day on the
Internal Battery, without any need of changing/ re-charging the
battery.
A Discharged battery should be fully recharged in 2-4 hours by
means of the rapid charger to be supplied with the CTSU.
Enclosure : The CTSU Data Logger unit should be housed in a compact &
study non corroding enclosure.
Overall dimensions : 130mm x 130mm x 75mm (Maximum)
Mounting : Wall mounting inside C.P. Test Station
Cable Entry : From Bottom
The above indicated Enclosure Size is including the Internal
Battery.
It should be possible to install the Data Logger inside the
existing Test Station at site.
Operating Temp : -10 degree C to 70 degree C and humidity of 95% (RH)
Data Download : The internally stored data should be downloadable on a Field

Laptop computer through a USB port provided in the logger unit
using the software provided with the logger. The logger software
will display and store this data in the Laptop in the standard MS
EXCEL sheet, which can be used for generating reports for
further analysis of the structure under protection.
Page 2986 of 3884

SPECIFICATION AND DATA SHEET DOCUMENT No.
FOR B185-000-16-50-CDS-06 R0
AUTOMATIC AC-DC OPERATED
Page 1 of 10
CP T/R UNIT
SPECIFICATION &DATASHEET FOR
AUTOMATIC AC-DC OPERATED CP T/R UNIT

(CP SYSTEM)
JOB NO. : B185
Rev.
No
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1 B185-000-16-50-CDS-06-R0-50V,25A.docx Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2987 of 3884

AUTOMATIC AC-DC OPERATED B185-000-16-50-CP-DS-06 R0
CP T/R UNIT age 2 of 10
1.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This specification covers the requirements of design, manufacture, inspection, testing and supply
of Automatic Controlled AC/ DC Operated Rectifier Unit for Cathodic Protection of underground
pipelines. Reliability of equipment and ease of maintenance is of utmost importance. The
workmanship shall be of highest grade and entire design and construction in accordance with the
best modern practice. The C.P. Units shall be capable of continuous trouble free operation at full
load rating specified. The protection devices and control components shall be of standard design
and carefully chosen to meet the requirements of the sets.
All similar materials and parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable with each other.
Special care shall be exercised in the design and manufacture for aging effects, low input
voltage, A.C. voltage fluctuations, high forward current through the rectifying elements and high
temperature conditions during operation.
Apart from the derating for site conditions an additional derating of 20% shall be considered for
the specific use. The components of the units shall be designed for maximum operating
efficiency. The C.P. Units shall be provided with all the necessary protections required as
detailed in the following pages. The C.P. Units shall have Automatic/Manual control and shall be
metal clad, compact, indoor installation type, air natural cooled, dust and vermin proof systems
exactly confirming to the following specifications and no deviations shall be allowed.
2.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
2.1 The AC/DC operated Rectifier Units’ scheme for protection, monitoring, control, metering and
indication shall be designed to meet requirements of this specifications. The control shall be
achieved using thyristor/transistor and fully solid state logic only.
2.2 The working of the unit will be as under:
The Rectifier unit will be capable of working on 230V 1Ph AC supply as well as 48V DC supply.
The DC supply will be provided by the suitably sized battery bank.
The AC/DC operated Rectifier Unit will consist of a Automatic rectifier stage of suitable capacity
working on the available A.C. supply and a DC operated Inverter/Converter power stage working
on Battery supply. A common electronic logic unit will control both the A.C. operated T/R stage &
DC operated power converter stage. The output from either of the stages will be routed through a
common output stage to the pipe & anode.
In the presence of A.C. supply the transformer/rectifier stage will deliver controlled DC output to
the structure and the DC power converter module will be in standby state.
On failure of A.C. supply, the DC power module in the AC/DC Rectifier unit will draw power from
the battery and deliver controlled DC output to the structure under protection. The common logic
control will ensure automatic changeover between the two stages. The common logic will also
ensure that all the functions and performance requirements indicated in the specifications/Data
sheets will be available in both the modes (i.e. AC & DC) of operation. On return of the AC
supply the DC converter will again go back in standby state & the A.C. T/R stage will deliver
power to anodes.
2.3 There will be complete galvanic Isolation between Input & output in all the modes of operation in
AC as well as DC Mode of operation.
Page 2988 of 3884

2.4 The AC/DC operated T/R unit shall be provided with two modes of working as under.
A mode selector switch shall be provided to select the desired mode of operation. Both the
modes shall be completely independent of each other and failure of the unit in one mode shall
not affect working of the unit in other modes. A brief description of these modes is given below.
The two modes of operation will be available in AC as well as DC operation.
A) Auto Ref. Mode :
The unit will be generally working in this mode. The operation of the unit in this mode shall be
controlled by a reference signal. The output D.C. voltage of the unit in this mode shall vary right
from 0V to rated voltage and form 0A to rated current to maintain the reference signal or P.S.P.
within ± 20 mV of the set value under all operating conditions. The response of the unit shall be
instantaneous to suppress fast changing external stray currents. The typical reference regulation
in this mode shall be within ± 20 mV under all conditions.
Fully solid state Automatic Reference Selector logic shall be provided to select the lowest of the
three Reference Inputs automatically. Facility shall also be provided for Manual selection of any
one out of the three reference inputs for control. Suitable metering arrangement shall also be
provided to monitor all the three external reference signals as well as the internal reference
signals independently.
In the event of failure of all the reference signals, the unit will provide alarm - " All Reference
Fail" and the output voltage of the unit shall get adjusted to a preset value which will be operator
adjustable from 0V to rated voltage.
Independent ultra fast acting electronic current limit circuit shall be provided to limit the output
current of the unit in Auto mode to any value from 0 A to rated current as desired by the operator.
B) Automatic Voltage-Current Control mode (AVCC mode)
This will be the second mode of operation. The working of this mode shall be totally independent
of the Auto mode and failure of the unit in Auto mode shall not affect operation in this mode.
The output voltage of the T/R unit shall be adjustable to any value from 0V to rated voltage by
means of a stepless voltage setter. The set voltage shall be maintained constant at the set value
for change in AC or DC input voltage within specified limits and change in load from 0A to full
load.
The output current of the T/R unitshall be adjustable to any value from 0A to rated current by
means of a stepless current setter. The current shall be regulated at the set value irrespective of
change in AC or DC input voltage within specified limits and change in load from zero to the rated
value. The response of both current controller and voltage controller shall be ultra fast,
instantaneous type and there will be no change in output voltage and current even for a step
change in load and input.
2.5 Reliability and Factor of Safety:
Due to very harsh conditions under which the units are going to operate, prime importance shall
be given to ensure reliability and trouble-free operation. To take care of high transient voltages
and high peak current demands adequate factor of safety shall be provided in choosing all the
components. Minimum factor of safety to be provided for critical components are as under.
Page 2989 of 3884

S/N Components Factor of Safety
a) All wound components : 20% additional capacity
b) Thyristor , Diodes, Transistors : PIV : 1200V

Vcc : 500V
Iav : At least 3 times actual max. average
current at full load
c) Passive components like switches, : 50% safety margin in current rating.

resistors
d) Overall system : The unit shall be capable of delivering 125%

rated current output at rated voltage for 1 hour.
e) Electronic Control : The entire electronic circuitry shall be

assembled on plug-in type glass epoxy PCBs.
The control circuit shall be designed using the
latest advanced ICs to minimize the component
count. Status indicator LEDs shall be provided
on each control card to indicate functioning of
the card. All the control cards shall be
completely sealed using epoxy-potting
compound.
The control circuit shall be capable of operating
at elevated temperatures of upto70 C without
any degradation in performance or life
expectancy.
2.6 The AC/DC operated Rectifier Unit shall be designed for a working life of minimum 25 years.
3.0 DATA SHEET FOR AC/ DC OPERATED AUTOMATIC CP RECTIFIER UNIT
The T/R unit will be dual supply type and will be capable of operating on AC supply as well as
Battery Supply
A) Input Supply Voltage : 230V+ 10%, 1Ph., A.C.

OR
44V to 65V DC –(For 48V Nominal DC operation)
B) Input Current : AC Operation:

Less than 10A at 230V Input &50V, 25A output
48V DC operation:
Less than 35A at 48V DC Input and 50V, 25A
output
C) DC Power Output : 1250W
Page 2990 of 3884

D) DC Output Voltage : AC Operation : 0 to 50V

48V DC Operation : 0 to 50V
E) DC Output Current : 0 to 25A
F) Galvanic Isolation : There will be complete galvanic Isolation

between Input& output in All the modes of
operation in AC as well as DC Mode of
operation.
 For 48V DC input mode (earthed through

anode ground bed) along with (-) 48 V DC to
48 V DC converter for galvanic isolation
shall be installed
G) Derating factor for diodes / SCRs : Voltage - At least 300% factor of Safety
/Transistors PIV - 1200V Minimum
Vcc - 500V Minimum
Current - 300% to 500% factor of safety
H) Full load efficiency of Complete : More than 75% in AC as well as DC operation

Unit
I) Full Load Power Factor for AC : Not less than 0.8 lagging
operation
J) Insulation Level : 2 KV for 1 minute
K) Peak Inverse Voltage :

- Diode 1200V (Min)
- SCR 1200V (Min)
- Transistor 500V (Min)
L) Cable entry : A.C. input, DC Input, DC output and Reference Cell

&Remote contacts.
Through bottom plate of the unit through suitable
cable glands.
M) Filtering circuit : L.C. Filter
N) Ripple & Hum at rated output : Less than 5% RMS in AC & DC modes
O) Surge Diverters for diodes : Metal oxide varistors/capacitors/R-C Networks.

/SCRs/Transistors
P) Lightning Arrestor : At Input & output side of the T/R unit

RMS voltage rating 500V
Impulses dischargecurrent 5.0 KA.
Q) Protection/Isolation : - 2 pole MCB in AC Input for overload protection &

isolation.
- 2 pole MCB in DC Input for overload protection &
Page 2991 of 3884

isolation.
- 2 pole MCB in DC Output.
- HRC fuses in input & output.
- Glass cartridge fuses in the live line of all lamps,
auxiliary power lines to control circuit and AC
voltmeter.
- Battery Deep discharge protection.
In the event of battery voltage falling below the
minimum recommended level, the unit will
automatically shutdown and provide battery low
indication.
- All Ref. Fail indication and automatic setting of DC
voltage to the preset value.
- Built in overcurrent & short ckt. protection feature.
Current limit adjustable from 0 to rated value.
R) Reference Electrode : Cu/CuSO4

Automatic Reference Selector Logic shall be
provided to automatically select the lowest (least
protected) reference signal out of three reference
signals fed to the unit simultaneously.
Facility shall also be provided to select one out of
three ref. Electrodes by means of a Manually
operated Reference Selector switch.
In case of failure of all the three Ref. Electrodes,
the DC output voltage will automatically get
adjusted to a programmable preset value.
S) Control element : The DC output will be controlled using latest solid

state thyristors (SCRs) & Transistors.
These SCRs & Transistors will be controlled by the
commands from the electronic circuits.
All the electronic circuits will be assembled on plug-
in type, glass epoxy control cards.
T) Modes of operation : Following modes of control shall be provided.

a) Auto Ref. Mode:
Fully automatic operation with reference
electrode feedback. The output voltage and
current of the unit will vary over the entire range
to maintain the pipe soil potential constant at the
set value. Automatic reference selector logic will
be used to sense voltage from three electrodes
simultaneously and select the least protective
electrode for feedback control.
b) AVCC Mode:
This will be the second mode of operation. In this
mode the unit can be operated in either constant
voltage mode or constant current mode.
The DC voltage will be adjustable from 0 to rated
value by means of a stepless voltage setter
potentiometer.
The DC current will be adjustable from 0 to rated
value by means of a stepless current setter
potentiometer.
Page 2992 of 3884

Page 2993 of 3884

U) Ref. (P.S.P.) Voltage setting in : -0.80V to -2.5V

Auto ref. Mode
V) Ref. (P.S.P.) Voltage Regulation in : Batter than ± 20mV

Auto Ref. Mode
W) DC Voltage Setting Range in : 0 to 50V

AVCC Mode
X) DC Voltage Regulation in AVCC : ± 0.50V

Mode
Y) DC Current Setting Range in Auto : 0 to 25A

Mode & AVCC Mode
Z) DC Current Regulation in Auto : ± 0.5A

Mode & AVCC Mode
AA) Indications/Annunciations : a) Mains ON

b) Operation on AC Supply
c) Operation on DC Supply
d) Unit in Auto Ref. Mode
e) Unit in AVCC Mode
f) Underprotection
g) Overprotection
h) Reference 1 fail
i) Reference 2 fail
j) Reference 3 fail
k) All Reference fail
l) Reference 1 lowest
m) Reference 2 lowest
n) Reference 3 lowest
o) Unit in current limit
p) Battery Voltage Low
AB) Meters/instruments : 48 X 96mm Digital meters for the following:

AC Voltage : 0 to 700V AC
AC Current : 0 to 20A AC with C. T.
Battery Voltage : 0 to 199.9V DC
Battery Current : 0 to 40A DC with shunt
DC O/P Voltage : 0 to 199.9V DC
DC O/P Current : 0 to 30A DC with shunt
P.S.P. : 0 to ± 19.99V DC
AC) SCADA Monitoring Facility : Following signals/contacts shall be provided

a) Isolated 4-20mA Analog signal for the following:
i) P.S.P.
ii) DC O/P Voltage
iii) DC O/P Current
b) Potential free digital contacts for the following

C.P. faults:
i) Pipeline underprotected
ii) Pipeline overprotected
iii) All ref fail
iv) Unit working in AUTO REF Mode
Page 2994 of 3884

v) Unit working in AVCC Mode
vi) AC supply Fail
AD) Current Interruption Facility : Current interruption facility will be provided by

means of a built-in contactor & microprocessor
based synchronisable digital timer with real time
clock & ON/OFF time display. The timer will have
facility for adjusting the ON time & OFF time from 0
to 999 sec. by means of digital setting facility. Timer
will have START, STOP, RESET facility thru local
keypad and through remote potential free contacts.
The timer will have facility for Synchronisation to
Master Timer or similar Timer in another unit.
The Timer will also have GPS Sync feature for
accurate Synchronisation between several T/R
units.
AE) Auto Switching facility : Automatic switching logic to select AC input from
Mains or DC input from batteries shall be provided.
The unit will work on AC supply priority and switch
over to DC supply only in the event of failure of AC
supply.
AF) Enclosure/Construction : Floor mounted Indoor type.

Confirming to IP42 degree of protection. Panel will
be fabricated from 2.0 mm M.S. sheet steel.
Lockable doors shall be provided in the front and
back.
AG) Cooling : Natural air cooled (AN)
AH) Painting : Baked Powder coating of shade Siemens Grey

(RAL 7032) with proper pre-treatment as per
standard industrial practice.
Total DFT of paint will be about 100 Microns.
AI) Earthing : 2 Nos. suitably sized earthing bolts and 1 No. nickel
plated copper earthing bus bar shall be provided.
AJ) Environments :
Max AmbientTemp 55 C
Relative Humidity Upto 99%
5.0 MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL EXPERTISE & EXPERIENCE IN THE FIELD OF CATHODIC

PROTECTION RECTIFIERS
The manufacturer should be a reputed and established manufacturer of CP Rectifier Units and
should have experience in manufacturing of AC/DC operated C.P. rectifiers of similar
specifications.
6.0 TESTING AND INSPECTION
The manufacturer/contractor shall provide all the necessary facilities to carry out full performance
tests on the AC/DC operated C.P. Rectifier Units at his works.
Page 2995 of 3884

7.0 GUARANTEE
The contractor will have to guarantee the successful working of the units for a period of 12
months from date of Installation & commissioning.
Page 2996 of 3884

VENDOR LIST
DOCUMENT No.
FOR
CP SYSTEM B185-000-16-50-CVN-01, Rev. 0
Page 1 of 7
VENDOR LIST
(CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM)
JOB NO. : B185
0 10.05.19 Issued for Tender JOYDEEP NSB NSB
Rev.
No
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1 B185-000- 16-50-CVN-01 PIPELINE.docx Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 2997 of 3884

VENDOR LIST
DOCUMENT No.
FOR
Page 2 of 7
A). EIL APPROVED VENDORS FOR ANODES
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME Remark

1 M/S CATHODIC CONTROL COMPANY PVT LTD. Zinc and Magnesium alloy
2 M/S DE NORA INDIA LTD. Mixed Metal Oxide coated Titanium Anode,
3 M/s ELECTRO PROTECTION SERVICES, INDIA Zinc and Magnesium Aluminium
4 M/S EMIRATES TECHNO CASTING LLC Zinc and Magnesium Aluminium
Application: Offshore platform jacket legs
5 M/S PSL LTD, INDIA Aluminium
Application: Offshore
6 M/S SCIENTIFIC METAL , INDIA Zinc and Magnesium
B). EIL APPROVED VENDORS FOR TRANSFORMER RECTIFIER UNIT (CPTRU/ CPPSM)
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/S CATHODIC CONTROL COMPANY PVT LTD.
2 M/S RAYCHEM RPG LTD(CANARA ELECTRIC), INDIA
3 M/S KRISTON SYSTEM , INDIA
C). EIL APPROVED VENDORS FOR JUNCTION BOXES (CLASSIFIED TYPE):
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1. FCG POWER INDUSTRIES PVT LTD, VAPI, INDIA
2. BALIGA LIGHTING EQUIPMENTS (P) LIMITED, CHENNAI , INDIA
3. FLEXPRO ELECTRICALS, NAVSARI, GUJARAT, INDIA
4. FLAME PROOF EQUIPMENT PVT. LTD., MUMBAI . INDIA
5. FCG FLAME PROOF CONTROL GEARS. P. LTD. DAMAN, INDIA
6. PEPPERL & FUCHS MANUFACTURING (INDIA) PVT. LTD., KANCHIPURAM, INDIA
7. KAYSONS TECHNO EQUIPMENTS PVT. LTD.
8. R STAHL PVT LTD, KANCHIPURAM, INDIA
9. SUDHIR SWITCHGEARS PVT.LTD., THANE, INDIA
D). CABLES
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1. M/S VICTOR CABLES , INDIA
2. M/S FORT GLOSTER CABLES , INDIA
3. M/S UNIVERSAL CABLES , INDIA
4. M/S NETCO CABLES, INDIA
5. M/S FINOLEX CABLES , INDIA
6. M/S ASIAN CABLES , INDIA
7. M/S RADIANT CABLES, INDIA
8. M/S CCI CABLES
9. M/S GEMSCAB, INDIA
10. M/S KEI, INDIA
NOTE:
Page 2998 of 3884

VENDOR LIST
DOCUMENT No.
FOR
Page 3 of 7
Vendor may procure material from any of the EIL approved/enlisted vendors mentioned above.
However current validity and range of approval as per EIL enlistment letter, workload and solvency
shall be verified by the vendor before placement of order.
1. For items/equipments, for which vendor list is not given, contractor will prepare the vendors list
along with PTR for Oil & Gas sector /Hydrocarbon industry and test certificates, which will be
accepted subject to review by Client/EIL post order.
However, the following are the vendors whose makes of respective equipments have been used in past
EIL projects for CP system. Accordingly, the same are also acceptable for the present project also.
a) MMO WIRE ANODES (WITH FACTORY PRE-PACKED COKE BREEZE):
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/S MATCOR (USA)
2 BERRY PLASTICS (USA) – (SEAL FOR LIFE INDUSTRIES)
b) MMO WIRE ANODES (WITHOUT FACTORY PRE-PACKED COKE BREEZE):
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/S GROUPPO DENORA, GOA, INDIA
2 M/S CERANODE TECHNOLOGIES, USA
3 M/S TELPRO, USA
c) MMO TUBULAR/ STRIP/ RIBBON ANODES:
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/S GROUPPO DENORA, GOA, INDIA
2 M/S ORANZIO DE NORA, ITALY
3 M/S MAGNETOCHEMIE, HOLLAND
4 M/S ACTEL LTD., U.K.
5 M/S ELTECH SYSTEMS CORPORATION, USA
6 M/S CERANODE TECHNOLOGIES, USA
7 M/S MATCOR (USA)
d) PERMANENT REFERANCE ELECTRODES
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/S PERMACELL/ HARCO (USA)
2 M/S BORIN MANUFACTURER, USA
3 M/S M.C.MILLER, USA
4 M/S CORRTECH (ZULU), INDIA
5 M/S TINKER RASOR, USA
6 M/s SILVION, UK
Page 2999 of 3884

VENDOR LIST
DOCUMENT No.
FOR
Page 4 of 7
e) HEAT SHRINK CAP FOR ANODE TO CABLE JOINT
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/S RAYCHEM, USA
2 M/S MATCOR (USA)
f) ANODE BACKFILL MATERIAL
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/S LORESCO, USA
2 M/S GOA CARBON (GOA), INDIA
3 M/S INDIA CARBON (CALCUTTA) , INDIA
4 M/S PETROCARBON & CHEMICAL COMPANY (HALDIA) ,INDIA
g) PIN BRAZING
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/s. SAFETRACK , SWEDEN
2 M/s BAC, UK
h) THERMITWELD
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/S. ERICO, USA
2 M/S THERMOWELD, USA
3 M/S. ERICO, EUROPE
i) SURGE DIVERTORS – EXD
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/s DEHN GmbH, GERMANY
2 M/S OBO , BETTERMANN, GERMANY
j) SOLID STATE POLARIZATION CELLS
SL. NO. VENDOR NAME

1 M/s DAIRYLAND ELECTRICAL INDUSTRIES , USA
2 M/s METRICORR, DENMARK
3 M/S RUSTROL, USA/ CANADA
k) MAGNESIUM & ZINC ANODES

SL. NO. VENDOR NAME
1 M/S CORRPRO INTERNATIONAL , SARJAH
Page 3000 of 3884

VENDOR LIST
DOCUMENT No.
FOR
Page 5 of 7
2 M/S NAKABOHTEC, JAPAN

3 M/S NIPPON CORROSION, JAPAN
4 M/S AFIC, KSA
5 M/S WILSON TAYLOR ASIA PACIFIC, SINGAPORE
6 M/S XIANG METAL, CHINA
7 M/S SHUNRUI, CHINA
8 M/S PLATT BROS. AND COMPANY, USA
9 M/S YUXI, CHINA
10 M/S SCIENTIFIC METAL , INDIA
11 M/s CATHODIC CONTROL CO., BANGALORE, INDIA
12 M/s ELECTRO PROTECTION SERVICES, INDIA
13 CTS, SARJAH, UAE
l) HI-SI-CR CAST IRON ANODE

SL. NO. VENDOR NAME
1 M/s DURICHLOR 51 SOLID ROD CAT IRON ANODE, USA
2 M/s SCIENTIFIC METALS, INDIA
3 M/s METAL FOUNDERS, INDIA
4 M/s CATHODIC CONTROL CO, BANGALORE, INDIA
Page 3001 of 3884

VENDOR LIST
DOCUMENT No.
FOR
Page 6 of 7
CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM
a) SUGGESTED LIST OF CONTRACTORS FOR ON-SHORE CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM SURVEY,

DESIGN, ENGINEERING, SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING WORKS:
1. M/S CORROSION CONTROL SERVICES (BOMBAY) PVT. LTD.,

405, Arun Chambers, Tardeo Road,
Bombay-400034.
Fax: 91-22-4934570
Attn: Mr.V.G. Kulkarni, Managing Director
( T.No. 4974593/4974564 )
2. M/S CORRTECH INTERNATIONAL PVT. LTD.

22, Dhara Centre, Vijay Char Rasta,
Navrangpura, Ahmedabad-380009.
Fax : (079) 26431615,
Attn: Mr. Amit Mittal, Director
Ph. No.(079) 26563443, 26568639(Off)
3. M/S RAYCHEM RPG LIMITED

Sun Magnetica
A- Wing, 3rd Floor,Unit No.301-303.,
Near LIC Building, Eastern Express Highway,
Thane (W) – 400 604.
Ph No.-022 - 64577800 - 831
Fax No - 022- 25826041
Attn: Mr.Prashant Naik
E-mail: pnaik@raychemrpg.com
4. M/S CORROSION TECHNOLOGY SERVICES INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED
E-110, 1St Floor, “Crystal Plaza” New Link Road,

Andheri (W), Mumbai – 400053. India
Ph No.: 022-26733421/26732966/65
Fax No.: 022-26733420
Attn: Mr Anand V. Nadkarni
Email: avnadkarni@cts-middleeast.com
5. M/SARK EPC Projects pvt. Ltd
307-Apollo Arcade, R.C. Technical Road,

Off S. G. Highway-Ghatlodiya,
Ahmadabad-380061,
Phone: 079-27774147
E-Mail: sweta@sarkprojects.com
Web: www.sarkprojects.com
6. M/s JSW Infrastructure Pvt.Ltd

4, Astt Mitre Estate,
Nr.Vadilal Factory, Dudheshwar Road,
Gandhinagar, Ahmadabad-380004
Gujrat, tel no. 079-23971327,
08164004158, 09825377791
7.0 M/s CORR-RAD ENGINEERING AND MARKETING

Page 3002 of 3884

VENDOR LIST
DOCUMENT No.
FOR
Page 7 of 7
Gita 92, Near Sion Circle adjacent to HP Petrol Bunk, Sion East, Mumbai, Maharashtra 400022
Tel no. 91-22-24010308. 91-22-24017336, email: ho@corr-rad.com
b) SUGGESTED LIST OF SPECIALIST AGENCIES FOR DOING THE INTERFERENCE SURVEY AND
IMPLEMENTING MITIGATION MEASURES AGAINST INTERFERENCE FOR CP SYSTEM OF HIGH INDUCED
VOLTAGE IN PIPELINE DUE TO PROXIMITY OF HT LINES NEAR PIPELINE.
 M/S VANDERVELDE, HOLLAND

 M/S SSS GERMANY
 M/S BALSLEV (Denmark)
 M/s SAFE ENGINEERING SERVICES & TECHNOLOGIES LTD., Canada
 MATCOR, USA
 ELSYCA, BELGIUM
 JEF TECHNO SOLUTION PVT LTD, BANGALORE
Page 3003 of 3884

SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
ENGINEERS FOR
INDIA LIMITED 6-45-0026 REV. 0
rItrrAl JWITA Govt of inoia Undeftakng) CORROSION SURVEY Page 1 of 7
wur ~fr fq-Nkr
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CORROSION SURVEY
tfk Nt".
ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
0 17.07.14 NSB RC PPL g SC
(OLD DOC. NO.: 6-51-0026, REV. 3)
Standards Standards
Date Purpose by Convenor Chairman
No by
Approved by
Page 3004 of 3884

r= ENGINEERS
O FOR
INDIA LIMITED 6-45-0026 REV. 0
IA Go. of Inthe undertalong)
CORROSION SURVEY Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
AC Alternating Current
CP Cathodic Protection
DC Direct Current
EHV Extra High Voltage
HV High Voltage
HVDC High Voltage Direct current
NACE National Association for Corrosion Engineers
ROU Right of Use
SMMS Standards Committee
Convenor: Mr. P.P. Lahiri
Members: Mr. R. Chaudhury

Ms. N.S. Bhattacharya
Mr. R. Muthu Ramalingam (Inspection)
Mr. Amit Prakash (HMTD)
Mr. Raj Kishore (Pipeline)
Mr. A.R. Purushottam (POSD)
Mr. B.R. Bhogal (Electrical)
Mr. Ratan Lal Kanaujia (Project)
Mr. R. Nanda (Piping)
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — AII rights reserved
Page 3005 of 3884

ENQNEERS
5sZII 22eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-45-0026 REV. 0
.177/ ,I,cnre,D7 3W/,
A/ IA Govt ol Indol Undertaiong)
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 GENERAL 4
4.0 SOIL RESISTIVITY SURVEY 4
5.0 TESTS ON SOIL SAMPLES 5
6.0 ADDITIONAL DATA COLLECTION 5
7.0 REPORT 7
Page 3006 of 3884

-

E.3 ENQNEERS
C.
24[22-eg INDIA LIMITED
IA Go. of InOia Urulellak,ng)
FOR 6-45-0026 REV. 0
1.0 SCOPE
The specification covers the requirements for corrosion survey including measurement of soil
resistivity, chemical analysis of soil/ water and collection of other cathodic protection related
data along ROU of the pipelines.
Equipment and measurement techniques shall unless otherwise specified, conform to the
requirement of latest revisions of following applicable standards:
BIS specifications
BS specifications and codes of practice
NACE publications
The work shall be carried out in compliance with all applicable local laws and regulations.
In case of any contradiction between various referred standards/ specifications/ data sheet and
statutory regulations the following order of priority shall govern:
Statutory Regulations
Data Sheets
Job Specification
This Specification
Codes and Standards
3.0 GENERAL
This specification defines the basic guidelines for carrying out the corrosion survey. Contractor
shall be responsible for providing necessary data interpretation based on corrosion survey
measurements, which is intended to form a basis for design of cathodic protection system for
the pipeline.
4.0 SOIL RESISTIVITY SURVEY
4.1 Unless otherwise specified the soil resistivity measurements shall be carried out at intervals of
approximately 1000 m along the ROU. Where soil resistivity is less than 100 ohm-m and two
successive readings differ by more than 2:1 then additional soil resistivity readings in between
the two locations shall be taken.
4.2 To carryout the soil resistivity measurement, Wenner's 4 pin method or approved equal shall be
used. The depth of resistivity measurement at each location shall be at around 1 m and at the
burial depth of the pipeline accounting for the cuttings/ fillings or 2 m approximately which
ever is higher. At locations where multi layer soil with large variation in resistivity/
corrosiveness is expected and/or locations specifically advised by OWNER or his
representative, resistivity measurements at additional depth of up to 3 m (approx.) or more shall
be taken. In general the resistivity of soil, which shall be surrounding the pipe, shall be
measured. Hence the depth of measurement/ electrode spacing may vary depending on
topography and strata at the area.
Page 3007 of 3884

k31 ENGINEERS
$igu OfM- g INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-45-0026 REV. 0
,rrerrween.yrars0 IA Go. ol heba Unden.kM)
4.3 At places where ROU has not yet been cleared, measurements shall be made right over the
centre line of pipeline route surveyed accounting for the cuttings/ fillings also.
4.4 Observations shall be made enclosing the soils adjoining the trench wherever pipeline trenching
has already been done.
4.5 The observations shall be made enclosing the soil immediately surrounding the pipeline route
where ROU has been cleared but trenching has not been done.
4.6 All measurements shall be taken at right angles to the ROU unless otherwise asked by OWNER
or his representative at site.
4.7 At places in ROU where other pipelines are already existing care shall be taken to precisely
locate such pipes line and take such precautions that observations are not adversely affected by
presence of such pipelines.
4.8 Care shall also be taken that the observations are not influenced by presence of other earth
currents in the area especially in the vicinity of EHV/HV lines and plants using earth return in
their source of power etc.
4.9 Wherever possible/ advised by OWNER or his representative, depth of water table shall be
determined by resistivity observations.
4.10 All measurements shall be made and recorded in metric units. While recording the data
reference to the nearest intersecting point shall be made. To provide visual representation of
variations in the resistivity along ROU, values shall be plotted on semi log graph sheets. The
resistivity graph shall also indicate the resistivity at additional depths measured at various
locations and depth of water table.
5.0 TESTS ON SOIL SAMPLES
Soil/ water samples shall be collected along the ROU for analysis. Samples shall be collected on
an average at one location for every 10 km along ROU with minimum at approximate two
equidistant locations. Exact locations shall be decided at site depending on the type of soil, soil
resistivity and in consultation with OWNER or his representative. At each location the soil
samples shall be collected at 1 m, 2 m depth and at scheduled/ designed depth of pipeline if it is
more than 2 m at the location.
The collected soil/ water samples shall be analysed to determine presence and percentage of
corrosive compounds including carbonates, bicarbonates, nitrates, chlorides, oxygen activity,
moisture content and pH value.
6.0 ADDITIONAL DATA COLLECTION
The following data shall be collected with a view to generate design data for evaluation of
cathodic protection interaction possibilities due to presence of other services in ROU and its
vicinity:
6.1 Following information regarding foreign service/ pipeline in or around the ROU (for existing
and those, which are likely to come up during contract execution):
Page 3008 of 3884

ENGINEERS
f812Cg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-45-0026 REV. 0
1.17,1 ‘4,151.1 451,1053:11 (A GoN ol Intha uncien"ng)
6.1.1 Types of service/ pipeline and year of laying
6.1.2 Diameter and pipeline coating in case of pipeline
6.1.3 Parallel running/ crossing
6.1.4 Year of laying/ commissioning
6.1.5 Depth of laying
6.1.6 Type of existing cathodic protection systems (impressed current / sacrificial)
6.1.7 Location and type (Deep well / surface) of anode ground bed
6.1.8 Rating of impressed current type of anode ground bed
6.1.9 Location of existing CP power supply units and their output voltage, current, pipe to soil
potential readings
6.1.10 Location of existing test stations
6.1.11 Remedial measures existing on foreign service/ pipeline to prevent interactions
6.1.12 Graphical representation of existing structure/ pipe to soil potential records
6.1.13 Possibility of integration/isolation of CP system of the foreign service/ pipeline with that of the
proposed pipeline, which may involve negotiations with owner's of foreign services
6.1.14 Where pipeline is likely to pass close to any existing ground bed (with in 100 m approx), anode-
bed potential gradient survey shall be carried out to verify possible interference with the CP
system of the pipeline covered under this project.
6.2 Voltage rating, phases and sheathing details of cables running parallel or crossing the ROU.
6.3 Existing and proposed DC/AC power sources and systems using earth return path such as
HVDC substations/ earthing stations, fabrication yards with electric welding etc. in the vicinity
of the entire pipeline route.
6.4 Crossing and parallel running of electrified and non-electrified traction (along with information
regarding, operating voltage, AC/DC type etc.) as well as abandoned tracks near ROU having
electrical continuity with the tracks in use.
6.5 Crossing or parallel running of any existing or proposed EHV/HV AC/DC overhead power lines
along with details of voltage, AC/DC type etc.
6.6 Voltage rating, phases, sheathing details of underground power cables along ROU or in its
vicinity.
6.7 Any other relevant information that may be needed in designing and implementing of proper
cathodic protection scheme for the proposed pipeline.
Page 3009 of 3884

t.71 , ENGINEER.S
laWg INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India Undert~g)
FOR 6-45-0026 REV. 0
7.0 REPORT
On completion of all the field and laboratory work an interim report incorporating results
generated from surveys, additional data collected, results of test carried out etc. shall be
submitted for comments/ approval. The report shall also highlight any adverse impact on
performance of sacrificial anodes due to the percentage of corrosive compounds including
carbonates, bicarbonates, nitrates, chlorides present in the soil and pH value of the soil noticed
during the survey. The final report incorporating comments/ missing data shall be furnished for
records. The report along with various drawings, graphs etc. prepared in connection with the
work shall be submitted along with six prints by the contractor.
Page 3010 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE
INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 6-45-0027 REV. 1
Go. of Indta Unelerlaog)
FOR PIPELINES Page 1 of 18
rehrt4licti
mulicen fffq "Nr-44T
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PROTECTION SYSTEM
FOR PIPELINES
1 17.07.14 REVISED AND REISSUED
SPECIFICATION NO. 6-51-0027 REVISED,

0 21.05.12 RENUMBERED AND ISSUED AS GSH BC PPL DM
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked Committee Bureau
by by
Approved by
Page 3011 of 3884

IND1A LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 6-45-0027 REV. 1
IA Govt of Intha Undertakog)
Abbreviations:-
AC : Alternating Current
CMRI : Central Mining Research Institute
CPPSM : Cathodic Protection Power Supply Module
CTE : Coal Tar Enamel
DC : Direct Current
EHV : Extra High Voltage
FBE : Fusion bonding Epoxy
HDD : Horizontal Directional Drilling
HV : High Voltage
HVDC : High Voltage Direct Current
IS : Indian Standards
MOV : Motor Operated Valve
j, A/mm2 : Micro-Ampere per square millimeter
NACE : National Association of Corrosion Engineers
PE : Polyethylene
ROU : Right of Use
SV : Sectionalizing Valve

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copydght EIL — All rights reserved
Page 3012 of 3884

Og-a l
wan .3v0,1)
INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM
IA GoN of Ind. Uncleeta.g)
6-45-0027 REV. 1
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE 4
2. APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS 4
3. SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION 5
4. CORROSION SURVEY 5
5. CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN PARAMETERS 6
6. CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA 8
7. SYSTEM DETAILS 8
8. INSTALLATION 14
9. FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 15
10. INTERFERENCE MITIGATION 17
11. SYSTEM MONITORING 17
12. CLOSE INTERVAL POTENTIAL LOGGING SURVEY 18
Page 3013 of 3884

kil 'i ENGINEERS FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE
Og-af la2eg INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 6-45-0027 REV. 1
4.117/1 eYrcrxe,■171.3POSTO IÀ GoN of India Undettabong)
1. SCOPE
1.1 This specification defines the requirements of design, engineering, installation, testing and
commissioning of sacrificial anodes cathodic protection system for external surface of cross
country onshore underground pipelines/ structures including supplementing of corrosion
survey, investigation for interference/ interaction problems and mitigation of the same.
1.2 This specification defines the basic guidelines to develop a suitable sacrificial anode cathodic
protection system for the pipelines/ structures required to be protected. All data required in
this regard shall be taken into consideration to develop an acceptable design and for proper
engineering of the system.
1.3 Compliance with these specifications and/or approval of any of the contractor's documents
shall in no case relieve the contractor of his contractual obligations.
2. APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1 The system design, performance and materials to be supplied shall conform to the
requirements of the latest revision of following standards as a minimum:
- NACE Standard SP0169 : Control of External Corrosion on Underground or

Submerged Metallic Piping Systems
- NACE Standard SP0177 : Mitigation of Alternating Current and Lightning

Effects on Metallic Structures and Corrosion
Control Systems
- NACE Standard SP0207 : Performing Close-Interval Potential Surveys and

DC Surface Potential Gradient Surveys on Buried or
Submerged Metallic Pipelines
- NACE Standard SP0286 : The Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected

Pipelines
- BS 7361, Part I : Cathodic Protection- Code of Practice for Land and

Marine Applications
- VDE 0150 : Protection against Corrosion due to Stray Current

from DC Installations
- IS 8062 : Code of Practice for Cathodic Protection of Buried

Pipeline/ Structure for Transportation of Natural
Gas, Oil and Liquids
- IS 1554, Part I : PVC Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables: For

Working Voltages up to and Including 1100V
- IS/ IEC: 60079 : Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmosphere
- IS/ IEC: 60529 : Classification of Degree of Protection Provided by

Enclosures
2.2 In case of imported equipments standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable lndian Standards.
Page 3014 of 3884

-

gelflafjles INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM
GoN of InCia Undertak.ng)
6-45-0027 REV. 1
2.3 The equipment shall also conform to the provisions of Indian Electricity rules and other
statutory regulations currently in force in the country.
2.4 In case of any contradiction between various referred standards/ specifications/ data sheet
and statutory regulations the following order of priority shall govern:
- Data Sheets
Job Specification
- This Specification
- Codes and Standards
3. SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION
All work to be performed and supplies to be effected as a part of contract shall require
specific review by Owner or his authorised representative. Major activities requiring review
shall include but not be limited to the following:
a) Corrosion survey data interpretation report and design basis for CP system
b) CP system design package
c) Detailed engineering package
d) Field testing and commissioning procedure
e) Procedures for interference testing and mitigation
f) Close interval potential logging survey procedure and report
g) CAT/ DCVG survey procedure and report
h) System monitoring procedures
i) As built documentation
4. CORROSION SURVEY
4.1 The details of corrosion survey including soil resistivity data along ROU and other data
required for CP design if available with the Owner shall be included as part of project
specification/ data sheet. However, verification of its veracity and adequacy shall be the
entire responsibility of the contractor. In addition, contractor shall collect additional data as
per clause 4.2 below required for proper implementation of the protection system. Contractor
shall also carry out soil resistivity survey at sacrificial anode ground bed locations for proper
design of ground beds. Wenner's 4-pin method or approved equal shall be used for such
measurements. Survey instruments shall have maximum AC and DC ground current rejection
feature.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the resistivity observations are not influenced by the
presence of foreign pipelines/ structures, and earth currents in the vicinity of EHV/HV lines
and installations using earth return in their power system etc.
Where specified in the project specification/ data sheet, the contractor shall carry out
corrosion survey along the ROU of the pipeline conforming to the specifications included in
the tender document.
4.2 Additional Data to be Collected
The following data shall be collected to generate design data for evaluation of interaction/
interference possibilities due to presence of other services in ROU/ vicinity. Owner shall
provide assistance for liaison work to the extent possible:
Page 3015 of 3884

ENQNEERS FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE
51g-ar 02&-g
1.71271,,,m1,01.3421,-.11
IA Gos1 of India Underta.g)
6-45-0027 REV. 1
i) Route and types of foreign service/ pipeline in and around or crossing the right of use
(including those existing and those which are likely to come up during contract
execution).
ii) Diameter, wall thickness, pressure, soil cover, and coating scheme used, type of
cathodic protection system provided, if any, and year of laying/ commissioning in case
of foreign pipelines.
Details of the existing cathodic protection systems protecting the services i.e. type of
protection system, location (distance from the proposed pipeline), type, rating of anode
beds, test station locations and their connection schemes. Present output current and
voltage readings of the CP power supply units.
iii) Remedial measures existing on foreign pipelines/ services to prevent interaction.
iv) Graphical representation of existing structure/ pipe-to-soil potential records.
v) Possibility of integration/ isolation of CP systems, which may involve negotiations

with owners of other services.
vi) Crossing and parallel running of electrified and non-electrified traction (along with
information regarding, operating voltage, AC/DC type etc.) as well as abandoned
tracks near ROU having electrical continuity with the tracks in use.
vii) Information on existing and proposed DC/AC power sources and systems using earth
return path such as HVDC substations/ earthing stations, fabrication yards with electric
welding etc. in the vicinity of the entire pipeline route.
viii) Crossing or parallel running of any existing or proposed 11 KV and above AC/DC
overhead power lines along with details of voltage, AC/ DC type etc.
ix) Voltage rating, phases, sheathing details of underground power cables running along
ROU or in its vicinity.
x) Any other relevant information that may be needed in designing and implementing
proper protection scheme for the proposed pipeline.
Contractor shall conduct necessary potential gradient surveys for any existing anode ground
beds that may interfere with the CP system of the pipelines covered under this project.
4.3 Report
On completion of all fieldwork, a report incorporating all the results generated from surveys
and details of additional data collected shall be prepared. The report shall also contain soil
resistivity data and detailed interpretation of survey results, probable interference prone areas
etc. to form design basis for the cathodic protection system. This report shall also include
various drawings prepared in connection with the above work. The soil resistivity values
shall be plotted on semi-log graph sheets.
5. CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN PARAMETERS
Unless otherwise specified in the data sheet, following parameters shall be used for design of
cathodic protection system.
Where the cathodic protection system is specified for temporary protection, those parts of
sacrificial anode cathodic protection system which will be integrated with the permanent CP
system shall be designed based on permanent CP parameters.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL All rights reserved
Page 3016 of 3884

$}g-arRfcg INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM
IAGovt of Ind. Undertakingt
6-45-0027 REV. 1
5.1 Protection Current Density
i) Pipe lines having Coal Tar Enamel (CTE) coating with two/ three layers of
reinforcement:
Minimum Protection Current Density*
Permanent CP for 30-Year

Temporary CP
Design Life
0.1 A/m2)
(1.1 A/m2)
40 500
ii) Pipe lines having Dual Layer Fusion Bonded Epoxy (DLFBE) coating or 3-Layer
Polyethylene (3LPE) coating:

Temporary CP
Design Life
(p. A/m2) (3. Ahn2)
25 250
*Actual current density to be adopted shall be decided based upon soil and other
environmental conditions, current drainage survey data (where included in contractor's
scope), proximity of foreign pipe lines/ structures and other interference areas affecting the
installation. Where considered necessary for satisfactory protection of pipeline the current
density shall be suitably increased by contractor.
5.2 The pipe protection Current Density indicated in the clause 5.1 above shall be applicable
where the temperature of the fluid transported by the pipeline/ the surface temperature of the
buried portion of the pipeline does not exceed 30 °C. Where this temperature exceeds 30 °C,
the protection Current Density shall be increased in minimum by 25% for every 10 °C rise in
temperature over 30 °C.
5.3 For all pipeline sections which are having intermediate HDD (Horizontal Directional
Drilling) crossings, the nearby T/R units should have adequate provision of D.C. output
current to cater to the extra protection current demand at the HDD crossings.
5.4 Safety factor for current density 1.3
5.5 Anode utilisation factor 0.85 for solid anodes

• 0.6 for ribbon anodes
5.6 Pipeline natural potential (-) 0.45V
5.7 Unless otherwise specified in data sheet the design life for temporary CP system shall be one
year and that for permanent CP system shall be 30 years.
5.8 Unless otherwise specified in the project specification/ data sheet, temporary CP for the
pipeline may not be provided along the ROU where soil resistivity is higher than 150 Ohm-m.
Page 3017 of 3884

k31 ENGINEERS FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE
zat Wieg INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 6-45-0027 REV. 1
1.17-rt ..-lemr1an IAGo vt o1 I ncha
undenaking)
6. CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA
Cathodic protection system shall be designed to meet the following criteria:
6.1 The pipe to soil potential measurements shall be between (-) 0.95 V (ON) and (-) 1.5 V (ON)
for polyethylene coated pipe lines, between (-) 0.95 V (ON) and (-) 1.7 V (ON) for fusion
bonded epoxy/coal tar coated pipe lines with respect to a copper/copper sulphate reference
electrode.
Where polarisation coupons are provided along the pipeline the coupon to soil potential
measurements shall be between (-) 0.9V (OFF) and (-) 1.18V (OFF) with respect to a
copper/copper sulphate reference electrode.
6.2 A positive potential swing of 100 milli volts or more shall be considered sufficient to indicate
the presence of an interaction/ interference situation requiring investigation and incorporation
of mitigation measures by the Contractor.
7. SYSTEM DETAILS
The system shall include the following major equipment/ sub-systems unless otherwise
specified in project specifications.
Sacrificial anodes and anode ground beds

- CP system at cased crossings
Test stations
- Polarisation coupons
- Surge diverter and polarisation cell
Permanent reference cells
Interconnecting cables
- Cables to pipe connections
All equipment shall be new and procured from approved manufacturers. Equipment offered
shall be field proven. Equipment requiring specialised maintenance or operation shall be
avoided as far as possible. Prototype equipment shall not be accepted.
Equipments shall conform to the relevant specifications enclosed with the tender document.
All equipment including test stations, etc. shall be located in safe non-hazardous areas.
Where it is essential to install electrical and electronic instrument enclosures and its
accessories in hazardous area, such equipment shall be flame proof type and shall meet the
requirements as per IS/ IEC: 60079 and shall be weather proof to IP-65 also as per
IS/IEC:60529.
A copy of approval from local statutory authority, as applicable such as Petroleum &
Explosives Safety Organization (PESO)/ Chief Controller of Explosives (CCE), Nagpur or
Director General of Mines Safety (DGMS) in India, for the electronic instruments installed in
electrically hazardous area along with:
i) Test certificate from recognized test house like Central Institute of Mining and Fuel
Research (CIMFR)/ Electronics Regional Testing Laboratory (ERTL) etc. for
flameproof enclosure/ intrinsic safety, as specified in the data sheet, as per relevant
standard for all Indian manufactured equipments or for items requiring Director General
of Mines Safety (DGMS) approval.
Page 3018 of 3884

IND1A LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 6-45-0027 REV. 1
1.7?1,-Iroxlas,347.0 in co. of Incha Undertaking)
ii) Certificate of conformity from agencies like Laboratorie Central Des Industries
Electriques (LCIE), British Approval Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable
Atmospheres (BASEEFA), Factory Mutual (FM), Physikalisch-Technische
Bundesanstalt (PTB), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) etc. for compliance to ATEX directives or other equivalent standards
for all equipments manufactured outside India.
7.1 Anode Ground Beds
Along ROU, where soil resistivity is within 10 Ohm-m and pH value is within 9, either Zinc
anodes or Magnesium anodes shall be provided.
In case of Zinc anodes, anode of type I as per ASTM B418 standard shall be used for
seawater, brackish water having resistivity not exceeding 10 Ohm-m and for grounding/
earthing of pipelines. Anode of type II as per ASTM B418 standard shall be used for ribbon
anodes for protection of carrier pipes inside casing or for application in saline soil having
resistivity less than 10 Ohm-m.
7.1.1 Along ROU, where soil resistivity exceeds 10 Ohm-m, Magnesium anodes shall be provided.
7.1.2 Anodes shall be installed along the pipeline at suitable intervals as per pipeline protection
voltage attenuation calculations and ground bed resistance/ current output of anode
installations. At high resistivity area the Magnesium ribbon anodes shall be installed all along
the pipeline by the side of the pipeline in the pipeline trench.
7.1.3 Suitability for proper operation of the selected type of sacrificial anodes for the soil
conditions with particular attention to carbonates, bicarbonates, phosphates and nitrates shall
be checked by the contractor. The anodes shall be laid in proper type of back fill, such that
the effect of soil is minimum on the anode performance and life. Suitable safe guards against
anode passivation in prevailing soil shall be taken by the contractor.
7.1.4 Each electrically continuous section of pipeline shall be protected totally by single type of
anode to avoid inter-anode circulation currents.
7.1.5 The anodes shall be installed at sufficient depth to reach moist soil and shall be separated
from the pipeline by at least 5 m and 2 m for Magnesium and Zinc anodes respectively. The
Magnesium ribbon anode shall be separated from the pipeline by at least half a meter. The
anode connections to pipe line shall be routed through test stations.
7.1.6 At the temporary CP anode ground bed, the leads of all the anodes shall be joined together in
a junction box filled with epoxy and buried. A single cable shall be routed from the junction
box to test station.
7.1.7 For sacrificial anode ground bed which is intended for permanent CP system and/or which is
to be integrated with permanent CP system, the leads of all the anodes shall be brought up to
the test station and shall be terminated individually.
7.1.8 The number of anodes at each ground bed shall be sufficient for providing the specified pipe
protection current density taking into consideration the ground bed resistance, cable
resistance etc. For permanent cathodic protection system, contractor shall prepare a table for
number of anodes required at different soil resistivity to produce the specified protection
current for the specified designed life. For temporary cathodic protection system, an
indicative design data for sacrificial anodes ground bed in tabular form is given in data sheet.
The number of anodes at each anode ground bed, spacing of anode ground beds based on the
applicable soil resistivity, size of pipeline, type of coating for the pipeline shall be chosen
from the table after necessary verification by the CP contractor.
Page 3019 of 3884

Of51- g
,wenr1M1.37-tn-fil
inGoN of India Undertakong)
6-45-0027 REV. 1
For temporary protection of pipelines, Magnesium anodes shall be installed at 1 Km interval
along the pipeline. At each location suitable number of anodes shall be installed in parallel,
so as to achieve the desired current output for the given soil resistivity and pipeline
protection current density or coating resistivity. Minimum separation of the nearest anode
from the pipeline shall be 5 m. The group of anodes at each location shall be laid in a single
row perpendicular to the pipeline. Each anode shall be of minimum 2.5 Kg. net weight
(excluding backfill). Anode cable from each anode shall be terminated inside the test station.
Individual cable ends at the test station shall be linked through a Copper bus bar. Above 150
Ohm-m soil resistivity, the installation of sacrificial anodes may not be required for
temporary protection of the pipeline unless otherwise specified in the project specification/
data sheet.
7.1.9 For the portion of the pipeline for which the CP system has been specified based on the
permanent CP system parameters, the contractor shall ascertain the requirement of the
cathodic protection current density indicated in clause 5.1 above. Where specified in the
project specification/ data sheet the requisite current requirement/ drainage survey shall be
conducted by the contractor to establish the adequacy of CP current requirement and number
of anode ground beds.
7.2 Test Stations
7.2.1 Test stations shall be provided along the pipeline ROU for monitoring the performance of the
cathodic protection system at the following locations. Test stations shall be provided at
additional locations, if required, so that distance between any two adjacent test stations does
not exceed 1000 meters in inhabited areas and 2000 meters in uninhabited areas like
forest/deserts:
a) At the locations of anode ground beds.
b) At both sides of metalled road crossings where cased crossing is considered for the
crossing. At one side of the road crossing where casing pipe is not considered for the
crossing. In case more than one such uncased road crossing occurs within lKm, then
only one such uncased road crossing shall be provided with test station within 1Km.
c) At all insulating joints.
d) At vulnerable locations with drastic changes in soil resistivity.
e) At locations of reference cells, surge diverters, polarisation coupons, pipeline grounding

through polarisation cells, Zinc and Magnesium anodes.
f) At railway line crossings and at selected locations along railway lines running parallel to
the pipeline.
g) At both sides of major river crossings.
h) At EHV/HV cable crossings or along routes where EHV/HV cables are running in
parallel.
i) At EHV/HV AC/DC overhead line crossings and along routes where EHV/HV
overhead line are running in parallel.
j) In the vicinity of DC networks or grounding systems and HVDC grounding systems

where interference problems are suspected.
k) At crossings of other pipelines/ structures.
1) Locations where interference is expected.

Page 3020 of 3884

-

(
rriz ENGINEERS
Th INDIA FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE
$ifg-
ar iffleg LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 6-45-0027 REV. 1
1.41, 370r. IA Govtof Indla Undeltakfng)
m) At locations of Sectionalising Valve (SV) stations.
n) At any other locations considered necessary by Owner/ Owner's representative.
7.2.2 Test stations used for sacrificial anodes shall have shunt for measurement of anode current,
provision for resistance insertion to limit the anode current output and anode-disconnecting
link.
7.2.3 Test stations for bonding shall be provided with a link and shunt, resistor as a means to
monitor and control current flow between the pipeline and foreign pipelines or structures that
may exist in common ROU.
7.2.4 Unless otherwise specified in the project specification/data sheet, Test station with current
measuring facility shall be provided at interference prone areas, on both sides of major river
crossings, and minimum one for every 10 km max. along the pipeline and at SV, IP, RT, DT
locations where CP Stations shall be considered.
7.2.5 The test stations shall be installed with the face of the test station facing the pipeline. The
nameplate of test stations shall carry the following minimum information:
Chainage in km.
Test station connection scheme
Distance from pipeline in metres.
Direction of product flow.
7.2.6 Terminals and different schemes of wiring shall be provided as per the test station connection
scheme. Minimum twenty percent spare terminals shall be provided in each test station.
7.2.7 Minimum two cables shall be provided from the pipeline at any test station.
7.2.8 The location of all the test stations shall be marked with their connection schemes and other
relevant information on alignment sheets. A detailed test-station schedule shall be prepared.
7.3 Polarization Coupons
7.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the project specification/data sheet steel coupons of pipeline
material shall be provided along the pipeline to monitor the adequacy of the CP system to
polarize/protect coating holidays. Coupon shall be installed at permanent CP station drainage
points, predicted cathodic protection mid points along the pipeline, at locations where the
pipeline is bonded to foreign pipeline/structures, interference prone areas, marshy areas, At
every 10 km approximate along the pipe line etc.
7.3.2 Coupons shall be installed at bottom 1/3rd portion of the pipeline and 200 mm approx away
from the pipe surface.
7.3.3 The coupons shall be constructed from the pipeline material and shall have one side uncoated
surface area of 100 mm x 100 mm exposed to soil. Two cables one for connection to pipeline
for coupon protection and other for coupon potential measurement shall be provided for each
coupon. The coupon protection cable shall be connected through a vacuum sealed magnetic
reed switch inside the test station to enable measurement of coupon ÒFF' potential.
7.3.4 A permanent reference electrode shall be installed adjacent to the coupon in a manner so as
to measure the representative potential of the coupon.
7.3.5 Magnets for operation of reed switch shall be provided as specified in the project
specification/data sheet.
Page 3021 of 3884

ENQNEERS FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE
Og-ar fafJleg
rwcm,
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN of Ind. Urbertakrtgl CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 6-45-0027 REV. 1
7.4 Permanent Reference Cells
7.4.1 High purity copper-copper sulphate permanent reference cells with proven high reliability
shall be provided for stable coupon to soil potential measurement at the locations of
polarisation coupons.
7.4.2 The reference cells shall be of silver/silver chloride type in place of copper/copper sulphate
cells, at locations where chloride ion concentration is more than 300 ppm.
7.4.3 The life of reference cells shall be minimum 8 years under burial conditions.
7.4.4 The test station connection scheme inside the test station shall clearly indicate the type of
reference cell (Cu CuSO4/ Ag AgC1).
7.5 Surge Diverter
7.5.1 Explosion proof solid state surge diverter shall be connected across each insulating joint to
protect it from high voltage surges.
7.5.2 The total system including surge diverters, cables, cable termination, etc shall be suitable for
the anticipated fault current at the location of installation.
7.5.3 The surge diverter shall be suitable for the design life of permanent CP system.
7.6 Polarisation Cell
7.6.1 Wherever the pipeline is either crossing or running in parallel with overhead EHV/HV
transmission lines of voltage grade 66kV and above, it is mandatory that the pipeline shall be
grounded to discharge any accumulated potential/ surge that may appear in case of
transmission line faults, as per below:
The pipeline shall be grounded through polarization cell with Zinc galvanic anodes of
either block anode or ribbon type. Sizing and quantity of anode shall be decided so as to
achieve maximum total earth resistance of 5 Ohm for each location where pipeline
crosses EHV/HV transmission lines.
The pipeline shall be grounded at regular intervals of maximum lkm where EHV/HV
transmission lines run parallel within 25m of the pipeline. Also, where EHV/HV
transmission lines run parallel beyond 25 m of the pipeline and it is expected from
calculations/ software simulations that surge would appear in case of transmission line
faults or any abnormal operating conditions.
7.6.2 Locations along pipeline where continuous induced over-voltage due to overhead
transmission lines/ underground cables is expected or observed by calculation/ software
simulations or observed during commissioning, the pipeline shall be grounded through
polarisation cell to the earth system of the transmission tower causing the voltage induction
or to a separate earthing system of Zinc anodes through polarisation cell.
7.6.3 The solid state type polarization cell shall be installed inside test station.
7.6.4 Areas where soil resistivity is higher than 50 Ohm-m Zinc ribbon anodes installed in
carbonaceous backfill instead of 20kg net prepacked Zinc solid anodes may be provided for
grounding.
7.6.5 The total system including cable, cable termination, polarisation cells and anodes shall be
suitable for the anticipated fault current at the location of its installation.
Page 3022 of 3884

~-it4 ENGINEERS FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE
OgZif laf51ft. INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 6-45-0027 REV. 1
INT,,,oronlOTI,AffrAl IA GoN ol Ind. UndertaMing)
7.6.6 The polarisation cell and anode system shall be suitable for the design life of permanent CP
system. The grounding system shall have minimum resistance to earth to restrict the pipeline
voltage as per NACE/ VDE criteria but shall not exceed 5 Ohms.
7.6.7 The anodes shall be pre packed with special backfill adequately so that the performance of
the anode is not affected by the carbonates, bicarbonates, nitrates, etc, present in the soil. In
any case, the thickness of back fill shall not be less than 50mm on all the sides of the anode.
7.7 Motor operated valves where located on the cathodically protected portion of the pipeline
shall be grounded by a Zinc or Magnesium anode of 20 kg net where the type of anode
provided for the CP system of the pipeline is Zinc or Magnesium respectively. The MOV
power supply cable armour shall be insulated (by cutting and taping with insulation tape) at
MOV end to avoid armour carrying CP current.
7.8 The above ground cathodically unprotected pipeline at intermediate SV stations, pigging
stations, etc. and terminals shall be earthed with GI earth electrodes. The resistance to earth
of grounding shall be limited to 5 Ohms max.
7.9 CP at cased crossing
7.9.1 At cased crossings where casing will have coating on its external surface, it shall be protected
by sacrificial anode installations provided at both ends of casing. The anode installation shall
be sized based on the permanent CP design parameters and design life of permanent CP
system.
7.9.2 The carrier pipe inside the externally coated casing shall be protected by Zinc ribbon anodes
piggy backed longitudinally on the carrier pipe between 4 and 8 O'clock position. Anode
shall be tied with carrier pipe using Nylon rope at close intervals and weld connected at the
ends. The quantity/ no. of ribbon anodes shall be based on the permanent CP design
parameters for marshy area and design life of permanent CP system.
7.10 Reference Cell Access Points
Reference cell access points shall be provided over the pipe near insulating joint locations
and at SV stations, where the ground is paved, for measurement of pipe to soil potentials. A
perforated PVC pipe filled with native soil and buried at the location shall be provided for the
purpose. The length of the PVC pipe shall be adequate to reach the native soil below the
paving.
7.11 Cables
7.11.1 Cables shall be with annealed high conductivity, stranded copper conductor, HMWPE
insulated, 650/1100V grade, armoured, HMWPE sheathed. The size of the copper conductor
shall be 6 sq.mm. for anode tail cable from anode to buried junction box, 10 sq.mm. from
buried junction box to test station and 10 sq.mm. from test station to pipeline. The size of
cable for bonding, polarisation cell, grounding anodes and surge diverter connections shall be
suitable for the maximum fault current subject to minimum 25 sq.mm. The length of anode
tail cable shall be sufficient for routing from anode to buried junction box or test station for
anodes for temporary CP or permanent CP respectively.
7.11.2 The cables for reference cells, pipeline potential measurements and polarisation coupon
potential measurements shall be of 4 sq.mm copper conductor, HMWPE insulated,
Aluminium backed by mylar/ polyester tape shielded, HMWPE sheathed, armoured,
HMWPE over all sheathed type.
Page 3023 of 3884

fg2:11 fdifeg
i
1.17-01,,,cm10,34-41,
+11
(A Govt ol Ind. Undertakng)
6-45-0027 REV. 1
8. INSTALLATION
8.1 Cable Laying
8.1.1 Cables shall be laid in accordance with the layout drawings to be prepared by the contractor.
No straight through joint shall be permitted. Cable route shall be carefully measured and
cables cut to required length. Minimum half metre cable slack shall be provided near anodes,
pipeline and test stations to account for any settling.
8.1.2 All cables inside station/ plant area shall be laid at a depth of 0.75 M. Cables outside
station/plant area shall be laid at a depth of minimum 1.5 m. Cables shall be laid in sand
under brick cover and back filled with normal soil. For cables laid outside the station/plant
area, polyethylene warning mats shall placed at a depth of 0.9 m from the finished grade, to
mark the route. Inside plant area cable routes shall be marked by means of cable markers
located at maximum intervals of 30 M and at locations of changes in direction of cable route.
8.1.3 In case of above ground cable, all unarmoured cables shall be laid in GI conduits of
sufficiently large size, up to accessible height for protecting against the mechanical damage.
8.1.4 All underground unarmoured cables including anode tail cables shall run through PE sleeves.
The cables routed along the pipeline shall be carried at the top of the carrier pipe by securely
strapping it at intervals with adhesive tape or equivalent as required.
8.1.5 PVC pipes of proper size shall be provided for all underground cables for road crossings.
8.1.6 Cables shall be neatly arranged in trenches in such a manner that crisscrossing is avoided and
final take-off to equipment is facilitated.
8.1.7 The cables for reference cells and pipeline potential measurement shall be routed in a
separate trench other than the trench provided for the rest of the CP system cables, AC/DC
power supply cables for CPTR units/ CPPSM etc.
8.1.8 The armour of all the cables from pipeline to test station (potential measurement, current
measurement, reference cell cables, cathode cables, bonding cables, grounding cables, etc)
and test station to ground bed (anode cable) shall be earthed only at test station end of the
cable to avoid armour carrying CP current. The armour of the bonding cables between test
stations shall be earthed at any one end of the cable only. The cable armour shall be insulated
by cutting and taping with insulation tape.
The permanent reference cells shall be installed with special backfill material and as per the
recommendations of the cell manufacturer. Installations in highly acidic/ alkaline soil and
soil contaminated by hydrocarbons shall be avoided.
8.3 Cable to Pipe Connections
All cable connections of other than cathode drainage cables to the new pipeline shall be made
by an approved exothermic process or by pin brazing. However, cable connection to charged
pipelines shall be made by pin brazing. Approved exothermic welding may be adopted for
pipelines carrying water. Coating shall be repaired after connection of cable conductor to
pipeline. The coating repair material shall be compatible with the original coating and shall
prevent ingress of water along the cable surface and at the interface of coating repair with the
original pipe coating.
Page 3024 of 3884

--1 ENGINEERS FOR SACRIFICIAL DE
$1g-ar g INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTIONANOYSTEM
S 6-45-0027 REV. 1
IA Govt of Inda Undeltak.ng)
8.4 Ground Bed Fencing
Where specified in project specifications/ data sheet chain link fencing shall be provided
around the location of each ground bed designed based on the permanent CP design
parameters.
9. FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
9.1 System Testing at Site
9.1.1 Field tests as per the reviewed field testing and commissioning procedures prepared by the
Contractor shall be carried out on the equipment/systems before these are put into service.
Acceptance of the complete installation shall be contingent upon inspection and test results.
9.1.2 Before the CP system facilities are put into operation, necessary tests shall be carried out to
establish that all equipment, devices, wiring and connection have been correctly installed,
connected and are in good working condition as required for the intended operation.
Owner/Owner's representative may witness all tests. Intimation shall be given at least one
week before commencing the tests.
9.1.3 A11 tools, equipment and instruments required for testing shall be provided by Contractor.
9.1.4 Generally, the following minimum tests shall be carried out and recorded.
a) Visual Inspection : Comparison with drawings, specifications, detailed

physical inspection.
b) Testing : Simulation tests of equipment to determine its

operational fitness.
i) Cables
- Cable No.
- Voltage grade.
- Conductor cross section.
Continuity check.
- Voltage test.
- Insulation resistance values between each core & earth, between cores.
A11 cables shall be tested by 500 V megger.
ii) Insulating Joint
Location.
- Pipe to soil potential of both protected and non-protected sides of the insulating
joint before and after energisation of CP system.
iii) Surge Diverter
- Location/identification number.
Rating
- Type
- Explosion proof enclosure.
Check for healthiness.
- Check for proper connection.
iv) Polarisation Cell
- Location/Identification number.
Page 3025 of 3884

~'i71n~ILl~ ENGINEERS FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE
$1g-ar 02eg
1.177,(....ficorl 4171 Joorsil
of InOa Unctertak,o9)
IA Govt
6-45-0027 REV. 1
- Type.
Ratings.
Check for wiring.
- Check standby current drain after CP system energisation.
- Details of grounding provided for the polarisation cell.
v) Polarisation Coupon
- Location/Identification number.
- Exposed area/size of coupon.
- Depth and distance from pipeline of coupon
- Type of reference cell
- Distance of reference cell from coupon
- Magnetic reed switch rating
- Operation of magnetic reed switch with magnet
- Check for wiring.
- Coupon On and OFF potentials.
vi) Reference Cell
Location
- Type of cell
- Depth and distance from pipeline of reference cell
- Potential reading
vii) Anode Ground Bed
- Location/ Station
- Horizontal/ Vertical
Check for actual layout and compliance with drawings.
- Current output of ground bed.
- Current output of each anode (in case of permanent CP anode ground beds)
9.2 Commissioning
9.2.1 Natural pipe to soil potential for the complete pipeline and casing pipelines at the locations of
cased crossings shall be measured at all the test station locations and recorded prior to
connecting anodes to pipe line and casing pipelines.
9.2.2 The anodes shall be connected to pipeline in the test station and the pipe to soil potential
observation shall be made after allowing sufficient time for polarisation. The current output
of each anode at permanent CP anode ground bed or the total current output of anode bed at
temporary CP anode ground bed shall also be measured to ensure that it does not exceed the
output current capacity of the anodes. In case the anode output current exceeds the rated
capacity, it shall be controlled by insertion of resistance element in the anode circuit inside
test station and the pipe to soil potential shall be rechecked for adequacy of protection. At
locations of polarisation coupons the coupon ÒFF' potential shall be measured by switching
off the reed switch. Additional anodes shall be provided where required to achieve desired
Level of protection and to keep the anode output current within the rated value. In case pipe to
soil potential exceeds the specified value, suitable resistance shall be inserted in the anode
circuit to limit the potential.
9.2.3 Anode installation shall become individually operational as above.
9.2.4 At the locations of cased crossings where anode installations are provided for the protection
of the casing pipe, these anode installations shall be commissioned as per the procedure
detailed in ciause 9.2.2 above.
Page 3026 of 3884

(31 ENGINEERS FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE
tg"-at t&f5l&g INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 6-45-0027 REV. 1
(AGo. of India Underta.9)
9.2.5 After connecting all the anode ground beds to the pipe line, measurement of pipe to soil
potentials shall be taken at each of the test stations to ensure conformity to protection criteria.
9.2.6 In case of insufficient protection as per the CP design criteria, on any portion of the pipeline/
casing pipeline (at cased crossings where casing is cathodically protected) Contractor shall
carry out necessary additions/modifications to the provided protection in consultation with
the Owner/ Owner's representative.
9.2.7 Healthiness of the insulating joints provided on the pipeline shall be checked by measuring
the pipe to soil potentials on both protected and non protected sides of the IJs.
10. INTERFERENCE MITIGATION
10.1 Investigations shall be made for stray current electrolysis of the pipeline, mutual interference
between the pipeline and foreign pipelines/ structures, interference on foreign
pipelines/structures due to the CP of the pipeline and ground bed, AC induction on pipeline
due to 11 KV and above overhead HV/EHV line, interference due to high voltage DC line,
HVDC groundings, electric traction, DC mining, DC welding operations, impressed current
anode ground beds on other pipelines, etc.
10.2 Where transmission lines cross the pipeline or run in parallel within 25m from the pipeline,
AC voltage measurements shall also be made on the pipeline to find out continuous induction
of voltage. In case of induced voltage being beyond safe limits, the pipeline shall be
grounded in line with clause no.7.6 above. Where transmission lines run in parallel more than
25m from the pipeline, however, continuous induced AC of voltage beyond safe limits are
noticed on the pipeline the same shall be mitigated by grounding the pipeline in line with
clause no.7.6 above.
10.3 Measurements including pipe/ structure to soil potential and pipeline/ structure current etc. on
the pipeline/ structure being CP protected and on foreign pipelines/ structures shall be made
to investigate the current discharge and pickup locations. In case of fluctuating stray current,
investigations shall be made continuously over a period of time and if required
simultaneously at different locations to find out the stray current source(s). For measurements
over longer durations, recorders shall be used.
10.4 Where foreign pipelines (unprotected or protected by independent CP system) run in parallel
to the pipeline in same trench or very near to the pipeline, and are not bonded to the pipeline
then investigation shall be made for current discharge points on both the pipelines.
10.5 Mitigation measures shall be provided depending on type of stray current electrolysis/
interference. These shall include installation of bond with variable resistor, diodes,
installation of galvanic anodes for auxiliary drainage of current, adjustment/ relocation (if
possible) of offending interference source, provision of electrical shield etc. depending on the
type of interference.
10.6 Bonding with foreign pipeline/ structure, as a mitigation measure shall be provided where the
owner of the foreign pipeline/structure have no objection, otherwise alternative mitigation
measure shall be provided. Where bonding is provided for mitigation, the bonding resistor
shall be adjusted for optimum value for minimum/no interference. Galvanic anodes installed
as a mitigation measure shall be sized for the design life specified for permanent CP system.
11. SYSTEM MONITORING
Where the CP system provided is temporary, the CP system shall be monitored at all test
stations once in a month for healthiness/ adequacy of protection till commissioning of
permanent CP system or for design life of temporary CP system specified, whichever is less.
Page 3027 of 3884

Ir ENGINEERS FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE
laW'g INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 6-45-0027 REV. 1
1.1271 an 051 3,
1,157,11 in G. of lntha Undeefa.9)
During this period if any deficiency/ interference in protection system is noticed, the same
shall be rectified/ augmented by providing additional anodes as required. The monitoring
report shall be submitted regularly to owner for his review/ information.
12. CLOSE INTERVAL POTENTIAL LOGGING SURVEY
Where specified in project specification/data sheet, contractor shall carry out a close interval
potential survey over the entire length of pipeline by computerised potential logging method
and identify the under protected/ over protected area, any major coating damage on the
pipeline, after the back-filling has been consolidated sufficiently and CP system has
stabilized. Contractor shall provide required mitigation measures and rectify the
under/overprotected zones, identify if any, the major pipeline coating defects required to be
repaired. During the survey the reference cell shall be calibrated minimum once in 24 hours.
Where specified in the project specification/ data sheet, additional tests for detailed
identification of coating defects shall be conducted by the contractor.
Page 3028 of 3884

SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
ENGINEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
5szu &g INDIA LIMITED
22-2131.3(.71) CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0028 REV. 0
10171 IA Go. of Indm Unde/talong)
SYSTEM FOR PIPELINES Page 1 of 22
41q9(1144 et;k1-
#-(vErr wiji(41 fffq fqr-4-4-r
SPECIFICATION
FOR
IMPRESSED CURRENT
FOR PIPELINES

0 17.07.14 NSB RC PPL ■ SfNM SC
(OLD DOC. NO.: 6-51-0028, REV. 2)
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked Committee Bureau
by by
Approved by
Page 3029 of 3884

ENGINEEFZS IMPRESSED CURRENT
INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0028 REV. 0
rIrcr, asr3crom, (A Govt ol Incha Undertaking)
Abbreviations:
CMRI Central Mining Research Institute
CPPSM Cathodic Protection Power Supply Module
CPTR Cathodic Protection Transformer Rectifier
CTE Coal tar enamel
DC Direct Current
FBE Fusion Bonding Epoxy
HDD Horizontal Directional Drilling
HV High Voltage
HVDC High Voltage Direct Current
IS Indian Standards
A/mm2 Micro-ampere per square millimeter
MMO Mixed Metal Oxide
MOV Motor Operated Valve
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
PE Polyethylene
ROU Right of Use
SV Sectionalizing Valve

Page 3030 of 3884

IA Govt ol Intlia Undertalfing)
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS . 4
3.0 SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION 5
4.0 CORROSION SURVEY 5
5.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN PARAMETERS .7
6.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA 9
7.0 SYSTEM DETAILS 9
8.0 INSTALLATION 16
9.0 FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 17
10.0 INTERFERENCE MITIGATION 21
11.0 CLOSE INTERVAL POTENTIAL SURVEY 22
Page 3031 of 3884

(c= ENGINEERS
j INDIA IMPRESSED CURRENT
Idf56
wr,of Fiari anyiprall
LIMITED
IA Go. ol Inclia Unclenal.ng)
CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0028 REV. 0
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification defines the requirements of system design, engineering, installation, testing
and commissioning of an Impressed Current Cathodic Protection System for cross-country
onshore underground pipelines/ structures including supplementing of corrosion survey, close
interval potential logging survey, investigations for interaction/interference problems and
mitigation of the same.
1.2 This specification provides the basic parameters to develop a suitable impressed current
cathodic protection system for the pipelines/ structures requiring protection. All data required
in this context shall be taken into consideration to develop an acceptable design and for
proper engineering of the system.
1.3 Compliance with these specifications, and/or approval of any documents submitted by
contractor shall in no case relieve the contractor of his contractual obligations.
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
i) NACE Standard SP0169 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or

ii) NACE Standard TM0497 Measurement Techniques Related to Criteria for

Cathodic Protection on Underground or
iii) NACE Standard SP0177 Mitigation of Alternating Current and Lightning

Effects on Metallic Structures and Corrosion
Control Systems
iv) NACE Standard SP0286 Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected

Pipelines
v) NACE Publication No. 54276: Cathodic Protection Monitoring for Buried

Pipelines
vi) NACE Standard SP0572 Design, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of

Impressed Current Deep Ground beds
vii) IS 8062 Recommended Practice- ICCP for Underground

Piping
viii) BS 7361 Part I Cathodic Protection- Code of Practice for Land

and Marine Applications
ix) VDE 0150 Protection against Corrosion due to Stray Current

from DC Installations
x) IS 1554 Part I PVC Insulated (Heavy Duty) Cables
xi) IS/ IEC: 60079 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmosphere
Page 3032 of 3884

■
31 ENGINEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
Og-ar .3.79.11
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha Uncleetakug)
xii) IS/ IEC: 60529 Classification of Degree of Protection Provided by

Enclosures
standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable Indian standards.
2.4 In case of any contradiction between various referred standards/ specifications/ data sheet and
Data Sheets
- Job Specification
- This Specification
Codes and Standards
3.0 SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION
All work to be performed and supplies to be effected as a part of contract shall require
specific review by Owner or his authorised representative. Major activities requiring review
shall include but not be limited to the following:
i) Corrosion survey data interpretation report and plot plans for land acquisition
ii) Conceptual system design
iii) Basic engineering package
iv) Detailed engineering package
v) Field testing and commissioning procedures
vi) Procedures for interference testing and mitigation
vii) Close interval potential logging survey procedure
viii) As built documentation
4.0 CORROSION SURVEY
4.1 General
4.1.1 The details of corrosion survey including soil resistivity data along ROU and other data
required for C.P design if available with the Owner shall be included as part of project
specification/ data sheet. However, verification of its veracity and adequacy shall be the entire
responsibility of the contractor. In addition, contractor shall have to generate/ collect
additional data as per clause 4.4 below required for completeness of the job.
Contractor shall carry out soil resistivity survey at anode ground bed locations for design of
ground bed. Where specified in the data sheet, Contractor shall carry out corrosion survey
along the ROU of the pipeline conforming to the specifications included in the tender
document.
Page 3033 of 3884

(-51- ENGINEERS
Irg.J IMPRESSED CURRENT
$1g-zir laa&g
1711,1 ,wes,r1,
T51.3.7".
INDIA LIMITED
Govl of intha undeetak.g)
4.1.2 To carry out soil resistivity measurement Wenner's 4-pin method or an equivalent method
approved by Owner/ Owner's representative shall be used. Survey instruments shall have
maximum AC and DC ground current rejection feature.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the resistivity observations are not influenced by the
presence of foreign pipelines/ structures, and earth currents in the vicinity of EHV/ HV lines
and installations using earth return in their power system etc.
4.2 Soil Resistivity Survey at Impressed Current Anode Ground Bed Plot
4.2.1 Each selected anode bed plot shall be sub-divided into sub-plots. Sizes of sub-plots shall
depend upon the expected depth for soil resistivity investigations. Each of these sub-plots
shall be investigated for resistivity data individually. Sufficient observations shall be taken at
each of these sub-plots as required and desired by Owner/ Owner's representative to obtain
sufficient information about sub-soil stratification and, wherever possible, to establish the
depth of water table. The number of subplots at each ground bed plot shall be decided at site
in consultation with Owner/ Owner's representative.
4.2.2 Number, location, demarcation and size of sub-plots and number of sets of resistivity
observations required for each sub-plot shall be individually decided for each ground bed plot
location.
4.2.3 One or more ground bed plots may be required to be selected and surveyed at each CP station
to form a suitable ground bed.
4.3 Topographic Surveys
Cathodic protection stations consisting of anode ground bed, CP station etc. as applicable,
along with all associated cabling up to pipeline and any other related equipment and
accessories for CP station shall be demarcated on the ground. Ground plots so demarcated
shall be surveyed for all other topographical and cadastral features and topo-sheets shall be
developed by the CONTRACTOR, which shall be suitable for use in land acquisition etc.
4.4 Additional Data to be collected
The following data shall be collected to generate design data for evaluation of
interaction/interference possibilities due to presence of other services in ROU or in its
vicinity. OWNER shall provide assistance for liaison work to the extent possible.
i) Route and types of foreign service/ pipeline in and around or crossing the right of use
(including those existing and those which are likely to come up during contract execution).
ii) Diameter, wall thickness, pressure, soil cover, and coating scheme used, type of cathodic
protection system provided, if any, year of laying/ commissioning in case of foreign pipelines.
iii) Details of the existing cathodic protection systems protecting the services i.e. type of
protection, location, type, rating of anode beds, test station locations and their connection
schemes. Present output current and voltage readings of the CP power supply units.
iv) Remedial measures existing on foreign pipelines/ services to prevent interaction.
v) Graphical representation of existing structure/ pipe-to-soil potential records.
vi) Possibility of integration/ isolation of CP systems, which may involve negotiations with
owners of other services.
Page 3034 of 3884

t.71 ENGINEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
latMeg INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0028 REV. 0
1.1277 2,45r2 an,Fiml (A Govt ol Intha undenakng)
vii) Existing and proposed DC/AC power sources and systems using earth return path such as
HVDC substations/ earthing stations, fabrication yards with electric welding etc. in the
vicinity of the entire pipeline route.
viii) Crossing and parallel running of electrified and non-electrified traction (alongwith
information regarding, operating voltage, AC/DC type etc.) as well as abandoned tracks near
ROU having electrical continuity with the tracks in use.
ix) Crossing or parallel running of any existing or proposed EHV/HV AC/DC overhead power
lines along with details of voltage, AC/DC type etc.
x) Voltage rating, phases, sheathing details of underground power cables along ROU or in its
vicinity.
xi) Any other relevant information that may be needed in designing and implementing proper
cathodic protection scheme for the proposed pipeline.
Contractor shall conduct necessary potential gradient surveys for any existing anode ground
beds that may interfere with the CP system of the pipelines covered under this project.
4.5 Report
On completion of all field work, a report incorporating all the results generated from surveys
and details of additional data collected shall be prepared. The report shall also contain
detailed interpretation of survey results and resistivity data, probable interference prone areas,
selected locations for anode ground beds etc., to form a design basis for the scheme of
cathodic protection. This report shall also include various drawings prepared in connection
with the above work. Soil resistivity values shall be plotted on semi-log graph sheets.
5.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN PARAMETERS
A distinctly independent impressed current cathodic protection system shall be provided to

protect the external surfaces of the complete pipeline/ structure installation as specified.
Unless otherwise stated in the data sheets, the following parameters shall be used for design
of permanent cathodic protection system:
5.1 Protection Current Density Range
i) Pipe lines having Coal Tar Enamel (CTE) coating with two/ three layers of
reinforcement.

Temporary CP Design Life
(i_t A/m2) (i.t A/m2)
40 500
Page 3035 of 3884

k31
'--12-.1t4 ENGINEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
1.11-
,n erlasrearIJO-prA, IA Go. of Ind. Undertalong)
ii) Pipe lines having Dual Layer Fusion Bonded Epoxy (DLFBE) coating or 3-Layer
Polyethylene (3LPE) coating:

Temporary CP
(p. A/m2) Design Life
(i A/m2)
25 250
*Actual current density to be adopted shall be decided based upon soil and other
environmental conditions, current drainage survey data, proximity of foreign
pipelines/structures and other interference areas affecting the installation. Where considered
necessary for satisfactory protection of pipeline the current density shall be suitably increased
by contractor. Also refer to clause 7.1 (iv) below.
For all pipeline sections which are having intermediate HDD (Horizontal Directional Drilling)
crossings, the nearby T/R units should have adequate provision of D.C. output current to cater
to the extra protection current demand at the HDD crossings.
5.2 The pipe protection Current Density indicated in the clause 5.1 above shall be applicable
where the temperature of the fluid transported by the pipeline/ the surface temperature of the
buried portion of the pipeline does not exceed 30 °C. Where this temperature exceeds 30 °C,
the protection Current Density shall be increased in minimum by 25% for every 10 °C rise in
temperature over 30 °C.
5.3 Safety factor for current density 1.3
5.4 Anode utilisation factor

(For High Silicon Cast Iron Anode) 0.85 for centre connected anode
0.6 for end connected anode
5.5 Anode surface current density

(For High Silicon Cast Iron Anode 15 Amp./sq.m for shallow anode for ground
continuous operation) bed
10 Amp./sq.m for deep well anode ground
bed
(For MMO Coated Titanium Anode 70 Amp./sq.m in coke backfill

for continuous operation) 30 Amp./sq.m in soil without coke backfill
5.6 Anode consumption rate
(For High Silicon Cast Iron Anode) 0.2 kg./Amp-yr

(For MMO Coated Titanium Anode) 2.0 mg./Amp-yr (In Coke Backfill)
5.7 Pipeline natural potential (-) G.45 V
Page 3036 of 3884

5gar 02eg
rwmr, MI.3,74:1173,
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go. ot Incka Undettabung)
5.8 Design life of CP system 30 years, unless specified otherwise in

the data sheet
5.9 Anode ground bed loop resistance 1 Ohm (max.)

including anode to ground resistance,
anode and cathode cable resistances
(The output voltage rating of the CPTR unit/ CPPSM shall in minimum be adequate to drive
the specified end of life cathodic protection current with safety factor, considering the total
anode ground bed loop resistance as the sum of the resistance specified in this clause and pipe
to earth resistance).
6.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA
i) The pipe to soil potential measurements shall be between (-) 0.9V (OFF) and (-) 1.18V
(OFF) with respect to a copper/copper sulphate reference electrode.
ii) In rare circumstances, a minimum polarization Shift of (-) 100 millivolts may be accepted as
an adequate level of cathodic protection for the pipeline with the approval of Owner.
iii) A positive potential swing of 100 millivolts or more shall be considered sufficient to indicate
of mitigation measures by the Contractor.
7.0 SYSTEM DETAILS
The system shall include the following major equipment/ sub-systems unless otherwise
specified in project specifications:
- CP stations
- CPTR units/ cathodic protection power supply modules (CPPSM).
Anode ground beds and anodes
Anode junction box
Cathode junction box
Test stations
Permanent reference cells
Polarisation cell and surge diverter
- Polarisation coupons
CP system at cased crossing
- Bond Stations
Cables
A11 equipment shall be new and procured from EIL approved manufacturers. Equipment
offered shall be field proven. Equipment requiring specialized maintenance or operation shall
be avoided as far as possible. Prototype equipment shall not be accepted.
Page 3037 of 3884

laWg INDIA LIMITED
(A GoN of India Undertakmg)
A11 equipment/ materials shall conform to the relevant specifications included in the tender
document.
All equipment including CPTR unit, CPPSM, test stations, anode lead junction boxes etc.
shall be located in safe non-hazardous areas.
Where it is essential to install electrical and electronic instrument enclosures and its
accessories in hazardous area, such equipment shall be flame proof type and shall meet the
requirements as per IS/ IEC: 60079 and shall be weather proof to IP-65 also as per
IS/IEC:60529.
Director General of Mines Safety (DGMS) in India, for the electronic instruments installed
in electrically hazardous area along with:
Research (CIMFR)/ Electronics Regional Testing Laboratory (ERTL) etc. for
flameproof enclosure/ intrinsic safety, as specified in the data sheet, as per relevant
standard for all Indian manufactured equipments or for items requiring Director General
of Mines Safety (DGMS) approval.
Atmospheres (BASEEFA), Factory Mutual (FM), Physikalisch-Technische
Bundesanstalt (PTB), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) etc. for compliance to ATEX directives or other equivalent standards
for all equipments manufactured outside India.
7.1 Cathodic Protection Stations
The number and exact locations of CP stations shall be worked out based on the corrosion
survey data collected. In addition, the following guidelines shall be followed for selecting the
locations:
i) Number of CP stations and their selected locations shall ensure that these remain valid and are
adequate for the full design life of the system after considering all foreseeable factors.
ii) As far as possible, the availability of nearby low resistivity areas for location of associated
ground beds must be ensured while selecting the locations of CP stations.
iii) As far as possible, locations of intermediate CP stations shall coincide with the locations of
SV stations.
iv) The proposed locations of CP stations and anode ground bed current ratings are detailed in
project specifications/ data sheets. The same shall be verified for adequacy by the contractor.
The requisite current drainage tests/ survey shall be conducted by the contractor to establish
the adequacy of CP current requirement indicated in clause 5.0 above and adequacy of
number, ratings of CP stations for permanent CP system indicated in the data sheet. The
minimum end of life pipe protection current requirement shall be considered as the current
requirement indicated in the clause 5.0 above or 3 times the current density value measured
by the current drainage survey for polyethylene coated pipeline and 4 times the current
density value measured by the current drainage survey for fusion bonded epoxy, coal tar
enamel with reinforcement coated pipeline, whichever is maximum.
Page 3038 of 3884

ENGNEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
2.1r1Mffleg. INDIA LIMITED
IA Go. of Incha unaena.9)
7.2 CP Transformer Rectifier Unit/ CPPSM
If specified in project specifications/ data sheet, the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of cathodic protection power supply module (CPPSM)/ indoor type Cathodic
Protection Transformer Rectifier Unit (CPTR unit)/ outdoor type CPTR unit installed in kiosk
along with kiosk shall be included in contractor's scope. The CP TR units shall be provided at
CP stations where reliable AC power supply is available. CPPSM shall be provided at other
CP stations where reliable DC power supply instead of reliable AC power supply is available.
The CPTR unit/ CPPSM shall be installed in non-hazardous (safe) area as specified in data
sheets.
7.3 Anode Ground Beds
i) Each CP station shall have an independent anode ground bed, which may be of shallow or
deep well construction depending upon the data collected by the contractor. Deep well ground
beds may also be used in the congested locations where availability of suitable land for spread
out ground beds is restricted.
ii) Ground bed shall be located electrically remote from the pipeline and foreign pipeline/ other
buried metallic structures. Nearest part of the anode bed shall at least be 100 meters away
from the pipeline and foreign pipeline/ other buried metallic structures. The anodes installed
in the ground shall be located in perennially moist strata, wherever possible. Horizontal
ground beds shall be at right angles to the pipeline, as far as possible.
The location of ground bed shall be checked and ensured for remoteness from the pipeline
and other buried foreign pipelines/ structures, building foundations, switchyards, electrical
earthing systems, etc.
iii) Unless otherwise agreed, anodes shall be of high silicon cast iron type or mixed metal oxide
coated titanium anodes.
iv) Sheet steel anode canisters of adequate size shall be provided for each anode. Anode canisters
shall be filled with petroleum coke breeze. In case of deep well ground beds non-canistered
anodes with petroleum coke breeze in the well surrounding the anodes shall be provided.
v) Each shallow anode-bed shall contain anodes with canisters positioned horizontally or
vertically in the soil with suitable backfill. The depth of anodes (depth of top of anode in case
of vertically laid anodes) shall not be less than 2 meter from grade level.
vi) Layout of anode installation in anode bed shall be detailed out in drawings showing anode
installation details, anode grouping, anode wiring, anode cable routing, etc. The deep well
anode ground bed details shall include the details of anodes, deep well casing, anode
positioning, anode cable supporting, deep well gas venting, active, passive portions of the
ground bed etc.
vii) Anodes shall be supplied complete with tail cables, which shall be long enough for
termination on their associated anode lead junction boxes without intermediate joints. Exact
lengths and termination details shall be indicated in construction drawings.
viii) Potential gradient around the anode bed shall be within safety requirements with regard to
interference on foreign structures and its effective boundary shall be defined.
ix) In case of two parallel pipelines running in the same ROU, the anode ground beds of the
respective pipelines shall be located on the respective sides of the pipelines.
Page 3039 of 3884

r= ENGINEERS
(O IMPRESSED CURRENT
02e
— g INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0028 REV. 0
imrtn ,-1,:xtan.yros.0 Go. of InEia Undertaking,
7.4 Anode Junction Box
Depending on the size and configuration of anode ground beds, one or more anode junction
boxes shall be provided at each ground bed. All cable tails from individual anodes shall be
terminated onto the respective anode junction boxes, which shall be further connected to the
main anode junction box (where applicable). The main anode junction box shall be connected
to the cable coming from CP power source. Each outgoing circuit in main junction box
(where applicable) and each anode circuit in junction shall have provision for measurement
and control of individual circuit/anode current.
7.5 Cathode Junction Box
Where output of the CP power supply unit is connected to multiple pipelines a cathode
junction box shall be provided near the pipelines at the location of connection of the negative
drainage cable to the pipelines.
The negative of the CP power source shall be connected to the incoming circuit of the cathode
junction box. The junction box shall have separate out gong circuit one for each pipeline to
collect the negative drainage currents from each of the parallel pipelines.
The incoming circuit shall have a current measurement facility. Each out going circuits shall
have provision for measurement and control of current.
7.6 Test Stations
7.6.1 Test stations shall be provided along the pipeline ROU for monitoring the performance of the
cathodic protection system at the following locations. Test stations shall be provided at
additional locations, if required, so that distance between any two adjacent test stations does
not exceed 1000 meters in inhabited areas and 2000 meters in uninhabited areas like
forest/deserts:
i) At all insulating joints
ii) At both sides of metalled road crossings
iii) At vulnerable locations with drastic changes in soil resistivity
iv) At locations of surge diverters, pipeline grounding through polarisation cells, Zinc
and Magnesium anodes
v) At EHV/HV AC/DC overhead line crossings and selected locations where EHV/HV
overhead line is in the vicinity of the pipeline
vi) At railway line crossings and at selected locations along lines running parallel to the
pipeline
vii) At both sides of major river crossings
viii) At EHV/HV cable crossings or along routes where EHV/HV cables are running in
parallel
ix) In the vicinity of DC networks or grounding systems and HVDC grounding systems
where interference problems are suspected
Page 3040 of 3884

-

lair1P17:f7x1Wen.340., (A Go. of India unaenalony t
x) At crossings of other pipelines/ structures
xi) At the locations of reference cell and polarization coupon installation
xii) At both sides of cased crossings
xiii) Locations where interference is expected
xiv) At locations of sectionalizing valve (SV) stations
xv) At any other locations considered necessary by Owner/ Owner's representative
7.6.2 Test stations for bonding shall be provided with shunt and resistor as a means to monitor and
control current flow between the pipeline and foreign pipelines or structures that may exist in
common ROU.
7.6.3 Test stations with current measuring facility shall be provided at each CP station drainage
point (to measure pipeline current on any one side of pipeline from drainage point at
intermediate CP station and towards protected side of the pipeline at starting, end point CP
stations), at interference prone areas, on both sides of major river crossings, near marshy areas
and minimum one for every 10 km max. along the pipeline.
7.6.4 Test stations shall be installed with the face of the test station facing the pipeline. The
nameplate of test stations shall carry the following minimum information:
Chainage in km.
Test station connection scheme
Distance from pipeline in meter.
Direction of product flow.
7.6.5 Number of terminals and different schemes of wiring shall be as per the test station
connection scheme. Minimum twenty percent spare terminals shall be provided in each test
station.
7.6.6 Minimum two cables from the pipeline shall be provided at any test station.
7.6.7 The location of all the test stations shall be marked with their connection schemes and other
relevant information on alignment sheets. A detailed test-station schedule shall be prepared.
7.7.1 High purity copper/copper sulphate reference cells with proven high reliability shall be
provided for stable pipe to soil potential measurement at CP stations and polarization coupons
along ROU.
7.7.2 Silver/Silver Chloride reference cells in place of copper/copper sulphate cells shall be
provided at marshy area locations, where water table is high and chloride concentration is
more than 300 ppm. For marshy area in saline soil, high purity Zinc may be considered as an
alternative to silver/silver chloride. The test station connection scheme shall clearly indicate
the type of the reference electrode (Cu CuSO4/Ag AgC1) at these locations.
7.7.3 The life of the reference cells shall be minimum 8 years under the installed conditions.
Page 3041 of 3884

zit4 ENGINEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
Offleg
c9renrlan,crils.
I. Go,of Ind. Und..k.9)
7.7.4 The cable from reference cells shall be provided up to CP power source at CP stations and up
to test stations at the locations of polarization coupons. The cable up to CP power source shall
be routed through test stations near pipeline.
7.8 Polarisation Cell and Surge Diverter
7.8.1 Polarisation Cell
i) Wherever the pipeline is either crossing or running in parallel with overhead EHV/HV
transmission lines of voltage grade 66kV and above, it is mandatory that the pipeline shall be
grounded to discharge any accumulated potential/ surge that may appear in case of
transmission line faults, as per below:
The pipeline shall be grounded through polarization cell with Zinc galvanic anodes of
either block anode or ribbon type. Sizing and quantity of anode shall be decided so as to
achieve maximum total earth resistance of 5 Ohm for each location where pipeline
crosses EHV/HV transmission lines.
The pipeline shall be grounded at regular intervals of maximum 1 km where EHV/HV

transmission lines run parallel within 25m of the pipeline. Also, where EHV/HV
transmission lines run parallel beyond 25 m of the pipeline and it is expected from
calculations/ software simulations that surge would appear in case of transmission line
faults or any abnormal operating conditions.
ii) Locations along pipeline where continuous induced over-voltage due to other overhead
transmission lines/ underground cables of voltage grade below 66kV is expected or observed
during commissioning, the pipeline shall be grounded through polarisation cell to the earth
system of the EHV/HV tower causing the voltage induction or to a separate earthing system
of Zinc anodes through polarisation cell.
iii) Polarisation cell shall be installed inside test station of suitable size.
iv) Type of polarization cell shall be as specified in data sheet.
7.8.2 Surge Diverter
Explosion proof spark gap surge diverter shall be provided across each insulating joint to
protect it from high voltage surges. Surge diverters shall be suitable for installation in
classified areas.
7.8.2 The total system including cables, cable termination, anodes/ surge diverters, polarisation cell
shall be suitable for the anticipated fault current at the location of installation.
7.8.3 The surge diverter and polarisation cell system shall be suitable for the design life of
permanent CP system. The grounding system shall have minimum resistance to earth to
restrict the pipeline voltage as per NACE/VDE criteria but shall not exceed 5 Ohms.
7.8.4 The anodes shall be pre packed with special backfill adequately so that the performance of the
anode is not affected by the carbonates, bicarbonates, nitrates, etc, present in the soil. In any
case, the thickness of back fill shall not be less than 50mm on all the sides of the anode.
7.9 Motor operated valves where located on the cathodically protected portion of the pipeline shall
be grounded by a Zinc anode of 20 kg. net Magnesium anodes grounding, if any, provided
during temporary CP system shall be disconnected. The MOV power supply cable armour shall
Page 3042 of 3884

ENGINEER.S IMPRESSED CURRENT
O&IIIM141eg
-'
I Nr271 7,12,512 7331,7,11,4
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN of InUla Undertaking)
be insulated (by cutting and taping with insulation tape) at MOV end to avoid armour carrying
CP current.
7.10 The above ground cathodically unprotected pipeline at terminals, intermediate SV stations,
pigging stations etc. shall be earthed with GI earth electrodes. The resistance to earth of
grounding shall be limited to 5 Ohms (Max.).
Where specified in the project specification/data sheet steel coupons of pipeline material shall
be provided along the pipeline to monitor the adequacy of the CP system to polarize/ protect
coating holidays. Coupon shall be installed at CP station drainage points, predicted cathodic
protection mid points along the pipeline, at locations where the pipeline is bonded to foreign
pipeline/ structures, interference prone areas, marshy areas and at other locations as specified in
the project specification/ data sheet, along the pipe line.
Coupons shall be installed at bottom 1/3rd portion of the pipeline and 250 mm away from the
pipe surface.
The coupons shall be constructed from the pipeline material and shall have one side uncoated
surface of 100 mm x 100 mm exposed to soil. Two cables one for connection to pipeline for
protection and other for potential measurement shall be provided for each coupon. The
protection cable shall be connected through a magnetic reed switch inside the test station to
enable measurement of coupon ÒFF' potential.
A permanent reference electrode shall be installed adjacent to the coupon in a manner so as to

measure the representative potential of the coupon.
Magnets for operation of reed switch shall be provided as specified in the project
specification/data sheet.
7.12 CP at Cased Crossing
7.12.1 At cased crossings where casing will have coating on its external surface, it shall be protected
by sacrificial anode installations provided at both ends of casing. The anode installation shall be
sized based on the permanent CP design parameters and design life of permanent CP system.
7.12.2 The carrier pipe inside the externally coated casing shall be protected by Zinc ribbon anodes
piggy backed longitudinally on the carrier pipe between 4 and 8 O'clock position. Anode shall
be tied with carrier pipe using Nylon rope at close intervals and weld connected at the ends. The
quantity/ no. of ribbon anodes shall be based on the permanent CP design parameters for
marshy area and design life of permanent CP system.
7.13 Reference Cell Access Points
Reference cell access points shall be provided near insulating joint locations and at SV stations,
where the ground is paved, for measurement of pipe to soil potentials. A perforated PVC pipe
filled with native soil and buried at the location shall be provided for the purpose. The length of
the PVC pipe shall be adequate to reach the native soil below the paving.
7.14 Cables
7.14.1 Cables shall be with annealed high conductivity stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated,
650/1100 V grade, armoured, PVC sheathed conforming to IS 1554 part-I, except for the cables
Page 3043 of 3884

6M ENGINEERS
0 IMPRESSED CURRENT
Ogz;1122- 5 INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0028 REV. 0
44<r",” evamwonao".0 in Govt of Incha Underlaiong)
for anode tail, reference cells and pipeline for potential measurements. The size of the copper
conductor shall be minimum 35 sq. mm. for anode and cathode cables, 6 sq.mm. for current
measurement, 10 sq.mm. for anode tail cables and polarization coupon protection cables. The
size of cable for bonding, polarization cell, grounding anodes and surge diverter connections
shall be suitable for the maximum fault current subject to minimum 25 sq mm.
7.14.2 The anode tail cables shall be PE insulated, 650V grade, unarmoured, PVC sheathed and length
shall be sufficient for termination on anode lead junction box without any joint in between.
7.14.3 The cables for reference cells, coupon and pipeline potential measurements shall be of 4 sq.mm
copper conductor, PVC insulated, Aluminium backed by mylar/ polyster tape shielded, PVC
sheathed, armoured, PVC over all sheathed type.
7.14.4 The CPTR unit incomer cable shall be minimum 4 sq.mm. Copper conductor, 650/1100 V
grade, PVC insulated, armoured, PVC sheathed. The cable shall be of 3 core type for single
phase CPTR units and of 4 core type for 3 phase CPTR units.
7.14.5 The cables for connecting various transducers from CPTR unit/CPPSM to telemetry interface
junction box shall be twisted pair with individual pair shielded and overall shielded with
aluminium backed by mylar/ polyster tape, PVC sheathed, armoured, PVC over all sheathed
type.
8.0 INSTALLATION
8.1 Cable Laying
i) Cables shall be laid in accordance with layout drawings to be prepared by the contractor. No
straight through joint shall be permitted. Cable route shall be carefully measured and cables
cut to required length. Minimum half metre cable slack shall be provided near anodes, anode
junction box, pipeline and test stations to account for any settling.
ii) All cables inside station/plant area shall be laid at a depth of 0.75 metre. Cables outside
station/ plant area shall be laid at a depth of minimum 1.5 metres. Cables shall be laid in sand
under brick cover and back filled with normal soil. For cables laid outside the station/plant
area, polyethylene warning mats shall be placed at a depth of 0.9 metre from the finished
grade, to mark the route.
iii) In case of above ground cables, all unarmoured CP cables shall be laid in GI conduits of
sufficiently large size, up to accessible height for protecting against the mechanical damage.
iv) All underground unarmoured cables including anode tail cables shall run through PE sleeves.
Distant measurement cables and permanent reference cell cables routed along the pipeline
shall be carried at the top of the carrier pipe by securely strapping it at intervals with adhesive
tape or equivalent as required.
v) PVC pipes of proper size shall be provided for all underground cables for road crossings.
vi) Cables shall be neatly arranged in trenches in such a manner that crisscrossing is avoided and
final take-off to equipment is facilitated.
vii) The cables for reference cells and pipeline potential measurement shall be routed in a separate
trench other than the trench provided for the rest of the CP system cables, AC cables for
CPTR Units etc.
Page 3044 of 3884

k3i
`- 12«.1L4 ENGINEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
Ogzx INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0028 REV. 0
laff-rn rwer»,a573qpn.0 IA Go. of Ineka Undertak.g)
viii) The armour of the cables from CP station to test station (potential measurement, reference cell
& drainage cables etc.), CP station to ground bed (anode cable) and test station to pipeline
shall be earthed only at CP station end and test station end respectively of the cables. The
cable armour shall be insulated (by taping with insulation tape) to avoid armour carrying CP
current.
The permanent reference cells shall be installed in natural soil conditions as per the
recommendations of the cell manufacturer. Installations in highly acidic/ alkaline soil and soil
contaminated by hydrocarbons shall be avoided.
8.3 Cable to Pipe Connections
All cable connections of other than cathode drainage cables to the new pipeline shall be made
by an approved exothermic process or by pin brazing. However, cable connection to charged
pipelines shall be made by pin brazing. Exothermic welding shall be adopted for water
pipelines. The resistance of the cable to pipe at the pin brazing connection point shall not
exceed 0.1 Ohm.
The cathode drainage cable shall be connected to a bolt welded to a metal plate, which is weld
connected to the pipeline. The material of the plate shall be same as that of the material of the
pipeline.
Pipe coating shall be repaired after connection of cable to pipeline. At cathode drainage point
the cable joint including the bolt, metal plate and the exposed portion of the pipeline shall be
covered by the coating repair material against ingress of water/moisture. The coating repair
material shall be compatible with the original coating and shall prevent ingress of water along
the cable surface and at the interface of coating repair with the original pipe coating.
8.4 Ground Bed Fencing
Where specified in project specifications/data sheet chain link fencing shall be provided
around the location of each ground bed/anode lead junction box.
9.0 FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
9.1 System Testing at Site
Field tests as per the reviewed field testing and commissioning procedures prepared by the
Contractor shall be carried out on the equipment/ systems before these are put into service.
Acceptance of the complete installation shall be contingent upon inspection and test results.
Field testing shall include but not be limited to the following:
i) Contractor shall carry out pre-commissioning operations after completion of installation of

the system including all pre-commissioning checks, setting of all equipment, control and
protective devices. A11 site tests, reliability and performance tests shall be carried out by
Contractor.
ii) Before the electrical facilities are put into operation, necessary tests shall be carried out to
establish that all equipment and devices have been correctly installed, connected and are in
good working condition as required for the intended operation. Owner/Owners representative
may witness all tests. At least one week's intimation notice shall be given before commencing
the tests.
Page 3045 of 3884

it ENGINEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
eaes
u<rrov swan1on,ross“
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Incha undertak.g)
iii) All tools, equipment and instruments required for testing shall be provided by Contractor.
iv) Generally, the following minimum tests must be carried out and results shall be recorded:
- Visual Inspection Comparison with drawings, specifications, detailed physical

inspection and, if necessary, by taking apart the component
parts.
- Testing Simulation tests of equipment to determine its operational

fitness.
a) Cables
Cable No.
- Voltage grade.
- Conductor cross section
Continuity check
Voltage test.
Insulation resistance values between each core & earth, between cores (between
core and earth for single core cable). All cables shall be tested by 500 V megger.
b) Reference Cell
- Location
Type of cell
Potential reading
- Installed on top/ bottom level of pipeline
c) Insulating Joint
- Location
Pipe to soil potential of both protected and non-protected sides of the insulating
joint before and after energisation of CP system
d) Surge Diverter
- Location/ Identification Number

Rating
Type
- Check for healthiness.
e) Polarisation Cell
- Location/ Identification Number

- Rating
- Check for wiring
- Check standby current drain after CP system energisation (Current drain with
respect to voltage across the cell shall be recorded)
Page 3046 of 3884

k31 ENGINEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
Ogzir fa~ INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undedakng)
- Details of grounding provided for the polarisation cell.
f) Anode Ground Bed
Location/ Station
- Check for actual layout and compliance with drawings
- Resistance of each individual anode
- Current dissipation by each individual anode
Total resistance of complete anode bed
- Mutual interference
g) Polarisation Coupons
- Location
- Exposed area/ size of coupon
- Coupon to soil ÒN' and ÒFF' potentials
- Type of reference cell
- Magnetic reed switch rating
- Operation of magnetic reed switch with magnet
9.2 CP Commissioning Procedure
A model commissioning procedure for a three stations CP system of a pipeline is given below
for general guidance. Contractor shall develop detailed commissioning procedure as per this
guideline.
i) On completion of installation of anode beds and other systems as envisaged in this

specification, they shall be individually checked, tested and compared against the agreed
specifications and procedure.
ii) Electrical continuity of the entire pipeline shall be verified in conformity with design.
iii) Input resistance of the pipeline at all the drainage points shall be checked and recorded.
iv) All current measuring test stations shall be calibrated and recorded using portable battery,
variable resistances, voltmeters, ammeters, etc. as required.
v) Temporary protection facilities provided (if any) which do not form part of permanent CP
shall be disconnected from the system & removed unless agreed otherwise.
vi) Anodes provided for grounding at the MOVs on cathodically protected portion of the pipeline
shall be disconnected. Sacrificial anode where provided for the protection of the casing pipe
at cased crossings shall be disconnected.
vii) The pipeline shall be allowed to depolarize for at least 72 hours after switching ÒFF' the
protection (if any) of all other pipelines in the common ROU.
viii) Before the pipelines are put on charge by switching ÒN' any of the CP stations, natural
pipeline to soil, casing pipe to soil and coupon to soil potential values at all the test stations of
Page 3047 of 3884

(.31 ENGINEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
Og-ar IMeg INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0028 REV. 0
1ff, rwax,..3.mszo in ~oH Of .tha Unde...n9)
the system (coupon to soil potential at the locations of the coupon installations) shall be
measured with respect to Copper/Copper Sulphate half cell.
ix) CP station no.1 shall be energised with out put potential adjusted to achieve a maximum pipe
to soil potential (PSP) as specified, at the test station nearest to the drainage point.
Observations on either spread of protected portion of pipeline and coupons under this CP
station shall be taken for PSP 'ON' and PSP 'OFF' values at each of the installed test stations
(coupon to soil potential at the locations of the coupon installations). The typical switching
cycle of current interrupter shall be 12 seconds 'ON' and 3 seconds 'OFF'. The pipeline
current values across the cross section of the pipeline shall also be determined at all the
intended test stations influenced by this station.
x) CP station no.1 shall now be switched ÒFF', CP station no. 3 shall be switched 'ON' and
measurement procedure as detailed in clause ix) above shall be repeated.
xi) Similarly CP station no. 1 and 3 shall now be switched ÒFF', CP station no.2 shall be
switched ÒN' and measurement procedure as detailed in clause ix) above shall be repeated.
xii) All the CP stations of the system shall be switched 'OFF' and the pipelines shall be allowed to
depolarize. All the three CP stations in the system shall then be simultaneously switched 'ON'
and PSP values at the drainage points of pipeline shall be brought to a value of maximum PSP
as specified and a complete set of observations shall be taken.
Another complete set of pipe to soil and coupon to soil observations shall be taken after lines
have stayed on charge for 48 hours. If there are appreciable differences in these observations
as compared to those of earlier set, a third set of observations shall be taken after 72 hours.
Maximum drainage point protective potentials shall not be allowed to go beyond the
maximum PSP values as specified, in any case.
Coupon to soil ÒFF' potential shall be measured at all locations of coupon installations by
operation of magnetic reed switch in the test station. The PSP of the coupons shall be within
the PSP range specified in clause 6 of this document.
The output of CP stations shall then be so adjusted that the sites of occurrence of least
negative protective potentials are not less negative than (-) 0.95V (OFF) and sites of
occurrence of the most negative protective potential are not more negative than (-) 1.18V
(OFF). A full set of pipe to soil, coupon to soil observations shall again be taken 72 hours
after the adjustment of potentials and the protection system shall be left in this state of
operation.
xiii) Care shall be exercised to ensure that power supply remains uninterrupted during the period
of commissioning. In case of an interruption, the test in progress shall be repeated after
allowing time for polarisation. More sets of observations shall be taken in any of the steps
specified above, if advised by the Owner/Owner's representative.
xiv) The Zinc anodes for grounding of MOVs at the locations of MOVs on cathodically protected
portion of the pipeline shall be reconnected to the MOVs.
xv) At cased crossings where casing is protected, sacrificial anodes provided for the casing shall
be connected to the casing pipe. The casing to soil potential and anode out put current shall be
measured and recorded. Where casing pipe protection is inadequate or the out put current of
the anode is more than the designed current, then additional anodes shall be provided as
required.
Page 3048 of 3884

Og-a[21-kg
iaar ,9,cnr1L111.3.70.71
INDIA LJMITED
1A Go. of Intha Unclertaiong)
xvi) PSP values at each of the test stations of the existing pipelines shall be measured, plotted,
where existing pipelines run in parallel to the new pipeline, mutual interference situations
between the pipelines shall be identified and necessary mitigation measures shall be provided.
Interference situations shall also be identified and mitigated by comparing different sets of
readings taken at same test stations at different intervals of time under identical conditions
where positive potential swing is 100 mV or more.
xvii) Current readings at all the current measuring test stations shall be measured and recorded.
xviii) Final records of testing and commissioning including graphical representation of final pipe to
soil potential readings shall be compiled with interpretation in consultation with
Owner/Owner's representative and submitted.
xix) If any deficiencies are found in the system, the same shall be rectified by the contractor, at no
extra cost or time schedule impact, to the complete satisfaction of Owner/ Owner's
representative. Such deficiencies shall include mitigation of stray current electrolysis and
interference problems that may be found existing in the course of testing and commissioning.
A set of PSP observations shall also be taken during the peak of the first dry season after
commissioning the system into regular operation. Any deficiency found in the protection of
the pipeline shall be rectified by the contractor at his own cost.
xx) If it is found during commissioning that the sites of occurrence of least negative or most
negative protective potentials are less negative than (-) 0.95V (OFF) or more negative than (-)
1.18V (OFF) respectively even after 72 hours of operation, then the drainage point potentials
shall be adjusted depending upon anode ground bed currents in consultation with
Owner/Owner's representative. In any case, the protective 'OFF' potential values of pipeline
and polarization coupons shall not exceed the PSP value range specified in clause 6 of this
document, at any location on the pipeline.
xxi) The reference cell shall be calibrated minimum once in 24 hours during the commissioning.
xxii) The current dissipated by individual anodes shall be measured from the anode lead junction
box and corrected for equal dissipation to the extent possible keeping the total ground bed
current same.
10.0 INTERFERENCE MITIGATION
10.1 Investigations shall be made for stray current electrolysis of the pipeline, mutual interference
between the pipeline and foreign pipelines/ structures, interference on foreign
pipelines/structures due to the CP of the pipeline and ground bed, interference on metallic
structures which lie in between pipeline and ground bed or near to ground bed, AC induction
on pipeline due to overhead EHV/HV lines, interference due to high voltage DC lines, HVDC
earthing system, electric traction etc.
10.2 Measurements including pipe/ structure to soil potentials and pipe/ structure currents etc. on
the pipeline/ structure being CP protected and on foreign pipelines/ structures, and ground
potential gradient etc. shall be made to investigate the current discharge and pickup locations.
In case of fluctuating stray currents, investigations shall be made continuously over a period
of time and if required simultaneously at different locations to find out the stray current
source(s). Recorders shall preferably be used for long time measurements.
10.3 Wherever foreign pipelines which may or may not be protected by an independent CP system
run in parallel to the protected pipeline, either in the same trench or very near to the protected
pipeline and are not bonded to it, investigations shall be performed for current discharge
points on both the pipelines.
Page 3049 of 3884

oi
`72_Jt4 10
f ■ ENGINEERS IMPRESSED CURRENT
IM~
i ,+aftraxlonJ.7,5-41 i
INDIA LIMITED
I Go. of India Undertalong)
10.4 Mitigative measures shall be provided depending upon the type of stray current
electrolysis/interference. These shall include installation of bond with variable resistor,
diodes, installation of galvanic anodes for auxiliary drainage of current, adjustment/
relocation (if possible) of offending interference source, provision of electrical shield etc.
depending on the type of interference.
10.5 Bonding with foreign pipelines/ structures as a mitigation measure shall be provided where
the owners of the foreign pipelines/ structures have no objection. Otherwise alternative
mitigation measures shall be provided. Wherever bonding is provided for mitigation, the
bonding resistor shall be adjusted for optimum value for minimum/ no interference. Galvanic
anodes installed as a mitigation measure shall be adequately sized for the life specified for
permanent CP system.
10.6 Where overhead EHV/HV transmission lines/underground electric cables cross the pipeline or
run in parallel with in or more than 25m from the pipeline, A.C. Voltage measurements shall
also be made on the pipeline to find out continuous induction of voltage. In case of the
induced voltage being beyond the safe limits, the pipeline shall be grounded in line with
clause no.7.8 above.
11.0 CLOSE INTERVAL POTENTIAL SURVEY
Where specified, contractor shall carry out a close interval `01\17ÒFF' potential survey over
the entire length of pipeline by computerised potential logging method and identify the under
protected/ over protected area, any major coating damage on the pipeline, after the backfilling
has been consolidated sufficiently and CP system has stabilized. Contractor shall provide
required mitigation measures and rectify the under/ over protected zones, identify if any, the
major pipeline coating defects, required to be repaired. During the survey the reference cell
shall be calibrated minimum once in 24 hours. Detailed procedures for running this survey
shall be submitted for review.
Additional tests for detailed identification of coating defects shall be conducted by the
contractor, if specified in the project specification/ data sheets.
Page 3050 of 3884

(E7,-4 ENGINEERS EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
6-45-0029 REV. 0
$.1g--arl~ INDIA LIMITED
evran, a513qar. (A Goot of incha Uncfortaiong)
CATHODIC PROTECTION
.4frXW 'WkciT ul
4R4Kvi fffqfq?"4-47
SPECIFICATION
FOR
EQUIPMENT / MATERIAL FOR
FOR PIPELINES
r-4
AI
0 17.07.14 NSB RC PPLATCtii SC
(OLD DOC. NO.: 6-51-0029, REV. 1)
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 3051 of 3884

5g-ar 22- g O INDIA LIMITED
kwcWas.3o,...1
rl; ENGINEERS
IA Govt of Indha Undettalonw
EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
Abbreviations:
CMRI : Central Mining Research Institute
CPPSM: Cathodic Protection Power Supply Module
DC : Direct Current
HV High Voltage
IS : Indian Standards
MMO : Mixed Metallic Oxide
MOV : Motor Operated Valves
NACE : National Association of Corrosion Engineers
PE : Polyethylene
ROU : Right of Use

Page 3052 of 3884

ENQNEERS EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
g-ar fM2C'g
0,3W1.11
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN of Inda Undertalung)
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE 4
2. CODES AND STANDARDS 4
3. SITE CONDITIONS 5
4. EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 5
5. EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSIFIED AREAS 14
6. TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE 14
7. PACKING AND DESPATCH 17
Page 3053 of 3884

ENGINEERS EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
$ifgzu fal51- g INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0029 REV. 0
1441, 2taX2+1,3,
10,A, IA Gov1 of India Undeftalung)
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements for the design, manufacture, supply and testing of
various equipment and materials for Cathodic Protection System for underground
pipelines/structures.
These equipment and materials shall broadly include:

Sacrificial Anodes
- Test Stations
- Anodes for impressed current CP system
Anode junction boxes
- Cathode junction boxes
- Permanent reference cells
Polarisation cells and surge diverters/grounding cells
Polarisation coupons
Cables
Requirement of cathodic protection TR units (CPTR unit) and cathodic protection power
supply modules (CPPSM) are covered in separate specifications.
2.1 All equipment and material covered in this specification shall conform to the requirements of
the latest revision of following standards:
IS 3043 Code of Practice for Earthing
NACE standard SP0169 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged

Metallic Piping Systems
BS 7361, Part-I Cathodic Protection- Code of Practice for Land and Marine
Applications
ASTM A518 M Corrosion Resistant High Silicon Iron Castings ASTM B418
Cast and Wrought Galvanic Zinc Anodes
ASTM B338 Specification for Seamless and Welded Titanium and

Titanium Alloy Tubes for Condensers and Heat Exchangers
ASTM B843 Magnesium Alloy Anodes for Cathodic Protection
IS 1554, Part-I PVC Insulated (Heavy Duty) Cables
IS/ IEC: 60079 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmosphere
IS/ IEC: 60529 Classification of Degree of Protection Provided by

Enclosures
Page 3054 of 3884

5gar ffleg INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0029 REV. 0
o■rcort,friJOOM, IA GoN of India undenak.g)
Data Sheets
- Job Specification
This Specification
- Codes and Standards
3.0 SITE CONDITIONS
The equipment and materials shall be suitable for installation in locations having generally
corrosive, warm and humid or dusty atmosphere. Service conditions shall be as specified in
the project specification/ data sheet. If not specifically mentioned therein, a design ambient
temperature 40°C and an altitude not exceeding 1000 M above mean sea level shall be
considered.
4.0 EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
All equipments/ materials shall be brand new with state of art technology and proven field
track record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
Make and construction of all equipments/ materials shall be subject to approval by

Owner/Owner's representative.
4.1 Sacrificial Anodes
4.1.1 Magnesium Anode
The anode shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B843 standard. The anode shall be of
high manganese, Magnesium alloy packed with special back fill. The metallurgical
composition, potential and capacity of anode shall be as below:
i) Composition
Element Weight
Manganese 0.15 - 0.7%
Copper 0.02% max.
Silicon 0.1% max.
Zinc 2.5% - 3.5%
Aluminium 5.3% - 6.7%
Iron 0.003% max.
Nickel 0.002% max.
Calcium
Other metallic elements (Total) 0.3% max
Magnesium Balance
Page 3055 of 3884

056
13W7, rwon, CIRJWIM,
INDIA LJMITED
(A co. of India undenak.g) CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0029 REV. 0
ii) Anode open circuit Potential 1.55 volts

(Cu/CuSO4 Reference)
iii) Anode Capacity 1050 - 1200 AH/Kg.
4.1.2 Zinc Anode
The anode shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B418 standard. The metallurgical
composition of anode, potential and capacity of anodes shall be as below. Anode of type I shall
be used for seawater, brackish water having resistivity not exceeding 10 Ohm-m and for
grounding/ earthing of pipelines. Anode of type II shall be used for ribbon anodes for
protection of carrier pipes inside casing or for application in saline soil having resistivity less
than 10 Ohm-m. The anode (other than ribbon anode) shall be packaged with special backfill.
i) Composition:
Element Weight Weight

(Type I) (Type II)
Aluminium 0.1% to 0.5% 0.005% max.
Cadmium 0.025-0.07% 0.003% max.
Copper 0.005% max. 0.002% max.
Iron 0.005% max. 0.0014% max.
Lead 0.006% max. 0.003% max.
Others (Total) 0.1% max.
Zinc Remainder Remainder
ii) Anode open circuit Potential -1.1 volts -1.1 volts

(Cu/CuSO4 Reference)
iii) Anode Capacity 790 - 810 AH/Kg. 790 - 810 AH/Kg.
4.1.3 The anodes shall be provided with cable tail of sufficient length to reach test station/ buried
junction box, as applicable without any intermediate joint in the cable and with minimum of
0.5m cable slack provided at each anode and test station ends.
4.1.4 The anodes for grounding/ earthing or for saline soil application shall be pre packed with
special backfill adequately so that the performance of the anode is not affected by the
carbonates, bicarbonates, nitrates, etc, present in the soil. In any case, the thickness of back fill
shall not be less than 50mm on all the sides of the anode or minimum 20 Kg. net, whichever is
higher.
4.1.5 The other details of anodes shall be as shown in the applicable EIL standard drawings.
4.1.6 The anodes for grounding of cathodically protected above ground pipelines at intermediate SV
stations, pigging stations etc., grounding of motor operated valves on cathodically protected
portion of the pipeline, grounding of pipeline through polarisation cell at EHV/HV line
crossings or running in parallel etc., shall be either of block anode or ribbon type. Sizing and
quantity of anode shall be decided so as to achieve maximum total earth resistance of 5 Ohm
Page 3056 of 3884

g1-110156 INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0029 REV. 0
iaams rwem, am,yrasR, f A Govt of Ind. Underte/ong)
for each location. The anode and cable terminations shall be suitable for the anticipated fault
current at the location of installation.
4.1.7 Special Backfill
The composition of special back fill for anodes shall be as below:
Gypsum (Commercial Purity) 75%

Bentonite (Commercial Purity) 20%
Sodium Sulphate (Commercial Purity) : 5%
4.2 Test Stations
Test stations shall be provided along the pipeline ROU for monitoring the performance of the
cathodic protection system.
i) Test station enclosure shall be made of sheet steel of at least 3 mm thickness and shall
be suitable for GI pipe post mounting. Test stations shall have weather proof enclosure
having degree of protection IP-55 and hinged lockable shutter. The inner and outer
surfaces of test stations shall be Epoxy painted.
ii) The resistors for control of current provided in the test stations, anode/ cathode
junction box etc. shall be of variable, grid coil type. The resistors shall be suitable for
operation over the design life for the permanent CP system specified in the project
specification/ data sheet.
iii) Number of terminals and different schemes of wiring shall be as per the applicable
EIL standard drawing. Minimum twenty percent spare terminals shall be provided in
each test station.
iv) At locations where solid state polarisation cells are provided, the test station size shall
be suitable for mounting the polarisation cell inside the test station.
v) A nameplate of Anodised Aluminium with black back ground and white letters shall
be fixed to the inner side of the test station. The nameplate shall carry the following
minimum information:
- Chainage in km
- Test station connection scheme
Distance form pipeline in metres
Direction of product flow
vi) The constructional features of test stations shall be as per the applicable EIL standard
drawings.
4.3 Anodes for Impressed Current CP System
4.3.1 High Silicon Cast Iron Anodes
i) High silicon cast iron type anodes shall be center-connected hollow type or end
connected solid type. Cable to anode joint shall be reliable and long lasting for total
Page 3057 of 3884

(5-1
1 ENGINEERS EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
5gar 18tW'g INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0029 REV. 0
lattOPt vtrovet 41573OOttt I A Govt of Intha UndettakIng)
design life of anode. Composition of anodes shall be as below and shall also conform
to ASTM A518 M-86 Gr. III.
Element Weight
Silicon 14.2 - 14.75 %
Manganese 1.5% max.
Carbon 0.7% - 1.1 %
Chromium 3.25 - 5.0 %
Copper 0.5% max.
Molybdenum 0.2% max.
Iron Remainder
ii) Surface current density rating of the anode for continuous operation shall be
15 Amp./sq.m for shallow anode ground bed and 10 Amp./sq.m for deep well anode
ground beds.
iii) Anode consumption rate shall not be more than 0.2 kg./Amp-Yr
iv) The design life of anode under burial condition, at the design operating current shall
be in minimum the design life of the CP system specified in the project
specifications/data sheet.
v) For shallow anode ground bed sheet steel anode canisters of adequate size shall be
provided for each anode. Anode canisters shall be filled with petroleum coke breeze
with following specification conforming to IS: 8502, Grade-A type.
a) Chemical Composition
- Fixed carbon content by mass 99% min.

- Ash by mass 0.5% max.
- Moisture by mass 0.1% max.
Volatile matters by mass 0.5% max.
b) Bulk density 800 kg./M3 to 1200 kg./M3

c) Real density 2.03 kg/litre (min.)
d) Particle size 1 mm max, dust free
e) Resistivity 0.1 ohm cm max at 150 PSI
vi) For deep well ground beds, anodes shall be non canistered type. Calcined petroleum
coke breeze slurry conforming to clause 4.3.1 v) above shall be supplied along with
the anodes.
4.3.2 Mixed Metal Oxide Coated Titanium Anode
i) Mixed metal oxide coated titanium anodes shall be of pure titanium having substrate
composition of titanium of ASTM B-338, Grade I/ Grade II, over laid with mixed
oxide of noble metals (MMO coated). These anodes shall be dimensionally stable. The
anodes shall be centre connected sealed tubular type. The design life of anode under
burial condition, at the design operating current in minimum be the design life of the
CP system specified in the project specifications/ data sheet.
Page 3058 of 3884

‘31
(fErj- ENGINEERS EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
OgL
ar Of5leg INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0029 REV. 0
14,,71 e-wern, a>t3VVWl IA Go. of Inclw undertak.g)
Maximum allowable anode current 100 A/m2 (in coke backfill)

density 50 A/m2 (soil without backfill)
100 A/m2 (Fresh Water)
Allowable anode current density 70 A/m2 (in coke backfill)

for continuous operation 30 A/m2 (soil without backfill)
70 A/m2 (Fresh Water)
Maximum coating consumption 2 mg./A-Yr in coke backfill

(wear) rate at maximum anode 6 mg./A-Yr in fresh water
current density
The guaranteed design parameters of anode regarding current density, consumption

rate, design life, rated current output, dimensions, shape, noble metal oxide coating
thickness (gm./square meter), their physical and mechanical properties shall be
substantiated by manufacturer's published catalogues and backed up by type test
reports. Each anode shall be supplied with anode lead cable connected to it.
ii) The anodes shall be provided with sheet steel canisters and coke breeze as per clause
No. 4.3.1 (v) & (vi) above.
4.3.3 Each anode shall be supplied with anode tail cable connected to it, which shall be long enough
for termination on their associated anode lead junction box without intermediate joint. Anode
cable tail shall be connected/ jointed to the anode and the joint insulated at the anode
manufacturer's shop before despatch of anode.
4.3.4 For deep well ground beds steel pipe casing for active portion of the ground bed and non
metallic pipe casing for the top inactive portion of the ground bed shall be provided. The top
non metallic casing and the lower metallic pipe casing shall have threads for jointing each
other. Anode supporting pipe, anode centralisers and gas venting pipes shall be provided for
the ground bed.
Depending on the size and configuration of anode ground beds, requisite main and sub anode
junction boxes (where required) shall be supplied for each ground bed.
i) Each junction box shall have provision of termination of cable tails from individual
anodes of the ground bed and provision of connection of anode cable coming form
main anode junction box (in case of sectionalised ground bed) or from CP station
power source.
ii) Junction boxes shall have sheet steel enclosure of minimum 3 mm thickness and hinged
lockable shutters. Junction boxes shall be weather proof with degree of protection IP-
55. It shall be epoxy painted on inside and outside surface. Junction boxes shall have
anode bus of copper with nickel/ silver plated or tinned. Provision shall be made for
measurement and control of individual out going circuit/ anode current by providing
suitable shunt and resistors of grid coil type. Disconnecting links shall be provided for
each out going/ anode circuit. 30% spare out going circuits shall be provided in each
anode junction box. Terminals shall be of anti loosening type and provided with
Page 3059 of 3884

©
f=t1 ENGINEERS EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
yrs1.27, on,3,ram,
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertalongt
identification labels. Each outgoing circuit shall be labelled clearly to indicate the
circuit/ sub anode junction box to which it is connected.
iii) The constructional features of junction boxes shall be as per the applicable EIL
standard drawing enclosed with the data sheet for impressed current cathodic protection
system for pipelines.
iv) A nameplate of anodised aluminium with black back ground and white letters shall be
fixed to the inner side of the junction box. The nameplate shall carry the following
- Ground bed current rating

- Ground bed resistance
- Connection scheme
- Distance form pipeline in metres
- Distance form CP station in metres
Where output of the CP power supply unit is connected to multiple pipelines a cathode
junction box shall be supplied for providing near the pipelines at the location of connection of
the negative drainage cable to the pipelines.
i) The junction box shall have a bus bar with an incoming circuit for connecting to
negative of the CP power source and separate out going circuits for collection of
negative drainage current from each of the pipelines.
ii) The incoming circuit shall have a current measurement shunt. Each out going circuits
shall have isolation link, variable resistance of grid coil type and a current measurement
shunt. One number spare outgoing circuit shall be provided.
iii) Junction box shall have sheet steel enclosure of minimum 3 mm thickness and hinged
lockable shutters. Junction box shall be weatherproof with degree of protection IP-55.
The inside and outside surfaces of the junction box shall be epoxy painted. The
terminals shall be of anti loosening type. Proper identification labelling shall be
provided for each terminal. Each outgoing circuit label shall clearly indicate the size
and identification of the pipeline to which it is connected.
iv) A nameplate of anodised aluminium with black back ground and white letters shall be
fixed to the inner side of the junction box. The nameplate shall carry the following
- Chainage in km
Connection scheme
Distance form the nearest pipeline in metres
- Direction of product flow
4.6 GI Earth Electrodes
For earthing of above ground cathodically unprotected pipelines at intermediate SV stations,

pigging stations etc. and at terminals GI earth electrodes shall be supplied. Earth electrodes
shall be 100 mm dia, 3000 mm long and 13 mm thick conforming to IS 3043.
Page 3060 of 3884

ENGINEERS
k311 EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
$'2e4~ INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0029 REV. 0
Govt of Intha unclen..9)
High purity copper/copper sulphate reference cells as specified in project specification/data

sheets, with proven high reliability shall be supplied for providing stable pipe to soil potential
measurement reference at CP stations and at locations of polarisation coupons along ROU.
Silver/Silver Chloride/Saturated Potassium Chloride type reference cells shall be supplied for
marshy area/ brackish water/ saline soil locations where water table is high and chloride ion
content is more than 300 ppm.
i) The reference cells shall have high accuracy and stability and maintain the same over
its design life.
ii) The permanent reference cells shall have a minimum design life of 8 years under
installed/ buried condition.
iii) The reference cell for high resistivity areas shall be suitable for the prevailing dry soil
conditions to give maximum service life.
iv) The reference cells shall be provided with cable tail long enough for connection to test
station without any joint in between.
4.8 Polarisation Cell and Surge Diverter
4.8.1 Polarisation Cell
Polarisation cell shall be a electrolytic type or solid state device as specified in project
specification/ data sheets, designed to simultaneously provide isolation for DC current and low
resistance path for AC current. The device shall require minimum maintenance. The solid state
device shall have weather proof enclosure and shall be suitable for mounting inside a test
station.
Unless other wise specified in project specification/ data sheet the DC blocking voltage shall
not be less than 1.2 volts. The DC leakage current at 1.2 volt shall not be more than 0.5 mA.
The device shall be suitable for continuously conducting maximum AC steady state current
and short time AC short circuit current expected to flow through the pipeline under the normal
operating condition/ any kind of fault on the EHV/HV line at respective sites, subject to
minimum ratings as indicated in clause 4.9.3 below.
4.8.2 Surge Diverter
The surge diverter when connected in parallel across the insulating joints shall protect the
insulating joint against surges coming across it due to lightening strikes, electrical faults, etc,
on the above ground portion of the pipeline. The surge diverter shall be of spark gap type. The
device shall have weatherproof enclosure suitable for out door mounting. The surge diverters
shall be of explosion proof type.
4.8.3 The minimum ratings of polarisation cells and surge diverters shall be as below unless
otherwise specified in the project specification/ data sheet.
Page 3061 of 3884

~_Je? 0" ENGINEERS
=1 EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
fa2- g
rwcr»,«Jotrfso
INDIA LIMITED
CA Govt of meia underta.,9) CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0029 REV. 0
i) Polarisation Cell
a) Type Solid state type/Electrolytic type

b) Description Rating
- Minimum rated 50 Hz steady : 30A min at 28° C and min 2V DC
state current (RMS symmetrical)
- AC fault current 5 kA min for 1 cycle
(RMS symmetrical)
- Ac voltage under maximum
rated AC fault current Less than 10 V peak to peak
ii) Surge Diverter
a) Type Spark gap, explosion proof type

b) Current, 8/20 micro Second wave: 100 Kilo Amp
c) Spark - over AC voltage
-50 Hz 1 KV
-Impulse (1.2/50 micro Second): 2.2 KV
iii) The polarisation cells, surge diverters, anodes, connecting cables, cable joints, etc,
shall be adequately sized and suitable for the design life of permanent CP system. The
anodes shall be pre packed with special backfill adequately so that the performance of
the anode is not affected by the carbonates, bicarbonates, nitrates, etc, present in the
soil. In any case, the thickness of back fill shall not be less than 50mm on all the sides
of the anode.
The Polarisation Coupons shall be made from the material of the pipeline. The coupon shall
have one side exposed area of 100 mm x 100 mm unless other wise specified in project
specification/ data sheet. Cable connection of 10 mm2 and 4 mm2 shall be provided to the
coupon for connecting it to pipeline for cathodic protection and potential measurements
respectively.
Connection of coupon to pipeline shall be through a vacuum sealed magnetic reed switch
housed inside the test station. The magnetic reed switch shall be rated to carry and break
minimum 50 mA at 50 V DC.
Magnet for operation of reed switches shall be provided as specified in project

specificationidata sheet.
4.10 Miscellaneous Requirements
i) The sheet steel used for fabrication shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased to
remove mill scale, rust, grease and dirt. Fabricated structures shall be pickled and then
rinsed to remove any trace of acid. The under surface shall be prepared by applying a
coat of phosphate paint and a coat of yellow zinc chromate primer. The under surface
shall be free from all imperfections before undertaking the finishing coat. After
Page 3062 of 3884

(r, ENGINEERS
'INDIA EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
Q'Q III G LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0029 REV. 0
.1.771 rwcrr, 7:157 co. of Intha Unclenmong)
preparation of the under surface, final spray painting with two coats of epoxy based
paint shall be done. Panel finish shall be free from imperfections like pinholes, orange
peels, runoff paint etc.
ii) All unpainted steel parts shall suitably treated to prevent rust formation. Copper bus
bars, interconnection copper link shall be tinned or nickel/silver coated.
iii) Test station/ junction box cabling

Adequate space shall be provided inside the test station/junction box for termination of
cables. Termination shall be performed using crimped lugs. The lugs shall be of tinned
copper. Requisite cable lugs shall be supplied.
4.11 Cables
4.11.1 Cables shall be of annealed high conductivity stranded copper conductor, 650/1100V grade
PVC insulated, armoured, PVC sheathed conforming to IS-1554 part-I, except for reference
cell, potential measurement and impressed current CP anode tail cables. The size of the copper
conductor of the cables shall be as below:
i) Minimum 4 mm2 for potential measurement, reference cells, 6 mm2 for current
measurement and 25 mm2 for bonding/grounding.
ii) For sacrificial anode CP system the cable size shall be minimum 6 mm2 copper for
anode tail cable from anode to buried junction box and 10 mm2 copper from buried
junction box to test station in case of temporary CP anodes. In case of sacrificial anodes
for permanent CP system the size of anode tail cable from anode to test station shall be
minimum 6 mm2 copper.
iii) For impressed current CP system the size of conductor of cables shall be based on the
current to be carried, ground bed loop resistance and shall be minimum 35mm2 copper
for positive, negative drainage cables and 10 mm2 copper for anode tail cables. The size
of CPTR unit AC incomer cables shall be of minimum 4mm2 copper conductor.
4.11.2 Impressed current CP anode tail cables shall be of minimum 10 mm2, annealed high
conductivity stranded copper conductor, single core, 650 voltage grade PE insulated,
unarmoured, PVC sheathed. Contractor may suggest cables with alternative
insulation/sheathing having proven track record for impressed current anode ground bed
application, for Owner's approval.
4.11.3 The cables for reference cells and pipeline potential measurements shall be of 4 mm2 copper
conductor, PVC insulated, Aluminium backed by mylar/ polyster tape shielded, PVC sheathed,
armoured, PVC over all sheathed type. The tape shield shall be helically applied with metallic
side down, with either side 25% overlap and 100% coverage. The minimum shield thickness
shall be 0.05 mm.
4.11.4 Cables for connecting various transducers from CPTR Unit/CPPSM to telemetry interface
junction box shall be copper conductor, PVC insulated, twisted pair with individual pair
shielded and overall shielded with Aluminium backed by mylar/ polyster tape, PVC sheathed,
armoured, PVC over all sheathed type.
Page 3063 of 3884

Og-ar faf51-dg InJnir.
1.4,1rwanc,
INDIA LIMITED
Govt o, Ind. Undertakng)
4.11.5 Cable conductor sizes indicated above are minimum only and where necessary for proper
operation of the CP system higher sized cables shall be provided.
4.11.6 Length of anode tail cables shall be sufficient for routing and terminating the cable inside
anode junction box/buried junction box/test station as applicable without any intermediate
joint.
5.0 EQUIPMENT FOR CLASSIFIED AREAS
All electrical and electronic instrument enclosures and its accessories for hazardous area shall
be flame proof type.
The flame proof equipment shall meet the requirements as per IS/ IEC: 60079 and shall be
weather proof to IP-65 also as per IS/IEC:60529.
Director General of Mines Safety (DGMS) in India, for the electronic instruments installed in
electrically hazardous area along with:
Research (CIMFR)/ Electronics Regional Testing Laboratory (ERTL) etc. for flameproof
enclosure/ intrinsic safety, as specified in the data sheet, as per relevant standard for all
Indian manufactured equipments or for items requiring Director General of Mines Safety
(DGMS) approval.
Atmospheres (BASEEFA), Factory Mutual (FM), Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt
(PTB), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL) etc. for
compliance to ATEX directives or other equivalent standards for all equipments
manufactured outside India.
6.0 TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE
6.1 Unless other wise agreed by the Engineer-in-Charge, all the equipment/ material shall be
subject to inspection by Owner/ EIL or by an agency authorised by the Owner/ EIL. A11
necessary information concerning the supply shall be furnished to EIL/ Owner's inspector.
Two weeks notice shall be given to Owner/ EIL for witnessing the final testing.
6.2 Routine tests and final acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufacturer's works under his
care and expense. Instruments and equipment required for testing shall be arranged by the
manufacturer. Final acceptance shall be subject to successful testing. Type test certificates
instead of conducting the tests may be accepted where specified in the project specifications.
6.3 Sacrificial Anodes
i) Inspection
a) Visual inspection shall be carried out on all the anodes regarding surface finish
excessive shrinkage, cracks, cable joint to anode cone, etc.
Page 3064 of 3884

$11gzir fafai-eg
1.12PIrwoWan..3froff,0
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Intha Undertalung)
b) Minimum 10% of number of anodes from each heat for conformity to

dimensions and weight.
c) The anode surface shall be free from cracks, which may reduce the performance
of the anode.
Any cracks which follow the longitudinal direction of elongated anodes shall
not be acceptable.
Small cracks in the transverse direction of elongated anodes and in anodes of

other shapes may be accepted provided the cracks would not cause any
mechanical failure during service of the anode considering that the combination
of cracks and lack of bond to the anode core is detrimental.
For transverse cracks the acceptable limits shall be furnished by the bidders
along with the offer.
d) The anode shall be free from excessive shrinkage. The following limits shall be
used:
Maximum 10% of the depth of anode or 50% of the depth of the anode core
whichever is less. The depression may be measured for the edges of one side.
The surface of the anodes shall be free from coatings and slag/ dross inclusions
etc.
The maximum deviation from straightness shall not exceed 2%.
The weight tolerance of individual anode may be taken as + 5%. The total
weight of the anodes shall not have negative tolerance.
Recommended dimensional tolerance shall be as follows:
Length + 2.5%
Width/thickness + 5%
ii) One anode per heat shall be subjected to radiographic test completely to evaluate
cracks, voids, slag inclusion etc.
iii) Destructive Testing
At least one anode per heat shall be subject to close inspection by destructive testing
for slag inclusions, bond between the anode material and steel inserts. If the anode
fails the test, two more anodes shall be tested. If the second lot of anodes also fails the
test, all the anodes of the heat shall be rejected.
iv) Chemical Analysis
One anode sample per heat shall be subject to chemical analysis by spectrography.
Sample shall be taken in the beginning for first heat, at the end for the second heat, at
the beginning for the 3rd heat and so on.
Page 3065 of 3884

k31 ENGINEERS EQUIPMENT/ MATERIAL FOR
$1@zu INDIA LIMITED CATHODIC PROTECTION 6-45-0029 REV. 0
I.Vrt rwern, ori,ran,) (A Go. ot Ind. Und.nak,n9)
In case the chemical compositions of the tested anode do not meet the requirements of
this specification, all the anodes of the heat shall be rejected. Vendor shall indicate
specific method of spectrography for each element (e.g. atomic absorption/ emission/
photometrics etc.).
v) Electrochemical Tests
- Open circuit potential, closed circuit potential and anode capacity test shall be
carried out for one anode per heat for a duration of 96 hours as per DNV-RP-
B401 in the synthetic sea water conforming to ASTM D1144
- Consumption rate by weight loss method
Visual examination of corrosion pattern (uneven consumption, inter granular
attack etc.)
The anode open circuit potential shall lie within (+) 10 MV and (-) 50 MV of the
guaranteed value. The anode consumption rate shall not be less than the specified
value. In case of anode closed circuit potential and/or the anode consumption rate do
not meet the acceptance criteria, all the anodes of the heat shall be rejected.
vi) Manufacturer's test reports regarding reference cell calibration shall be furnished. The
report shall also indicate the month and year of manufacture of reference cell.
6.4 Impressed Current Anodes
6.4.1 High silicon Cast Iron anode
i) Visual inspection
Visual inspection regarding surface finish, surface cracks & craters, shrinkage, cable
joint, measurements of dimension, weight, radiographic tests etc. shall be conducted
as Yer clause 6.3 i) above. The anode acceptance criteria shall be as specified in the
clause except that no crack in the anode shall be acceptable unless the cracks are only
superficial.
ii) Destructive testing

Destructive testing and acceptance criteria shall be as per clause 6.3 iii) above.
iii) Chemical analysis

Chemical analysis test and acceptance criteria shall be as per clause 6.3 iv) above.
iv) Electrochemical tests

Electrochemical tests for anode consumption, visual examination of corrosion pattern
and the anode acceptance criteria shall be as per clause 6.3 v) above.
v) Spectrographic analysis
The anodes from each heat shall be tested for chemical composition by spectrographic
analysis and for homogeneity, dross inclusion, voids etc. by radiography. Destructive
tests shall be carried out where asked by owner based on the radiographic test results.
Page 3066 of 3884

fa51- g
1.17N r1,15■ C
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN of Incha Undeltakmg)
6.4.2 Mixed Metal Oxide Coated Titanium Anode
Contractor shall furnish list/ details of the tests that will be conducted by manufacturer of
anode and their acceptance criteria.
6.4.3 Petroleum coke breeze and special back fill
The petroleum coke breeze material shall be tested for chemical composition, bulk density,
real density, particle size and resistivity and test certificate shall be furnished.
The special back fill material for the sacrificial anodes shall be tested for composition and test
reports shall be submitted.
7.0 PACKING AND DESPATCH
All equipment/ material for CP system along with one set of final drawings shall be
dispatched to site packed in wooden crates.
All the equipment shall be divided in to several sections for protection and ease of handling
during transportation. The equipment shall be properly packed for transportation by ship/ rail
or trailer. The equipment shall be wrapped in polyethylene sheets before being placed in
crates/ cases to prevent damages to finish. Crates/ cases shall have skid bottom for handling.
Special notations such as `Fragile', `This side up', `Centre of gravity', Weighe, Òwners
particulars', `PO nos.' etc. shall be clearly marked on the package together with other details
as per purchase order.
The equipment may be stored out doors for long periods before installation. The package
shall be completely suitable for out door storage in areas with heavy rain/ high ambient
temperature unless otherwise agreed.
Page 3067 of 3884

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS PREPACKED ZINC
7-45-0601 Rev. 1
IIAI«11111111113•11~ (A Govt. of Indio Undertoking)
ANODE
c D(0)
SILVER SOLDERJNUT & BOLT CONNECTION

COTTON BAG MS CORE ZINC ANODE
SEE DETAIL—X BACK FILL

ANODE TAIL CABLE
ELEVATION
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF ANODE (% WEIGHT):—
CHEMICALS TYPE—I TYPE—II

Al :0.1%-0.5% 0.005%MAX
MS CORE Cd :0.025%-0.07% 0.003%MAX
Cu :0.005%MAX 0.002%MAX
_L_ Fe
Pb
:0.005%MAX
:0.006%MAX
0.0014%MAX
0.003%MAX
OTHERS :0.1%MAX
Zn :REMAINDER REMAINDER
SECTION-AA ARMOUR
(SHALL NOT HAVE BACK FILL COMPOSITION
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
EPDXY TO ANODE) GYPSUM :75%
COMPOUND —MS CORE BENTONITE :20%
SODIUM SULPHATE :5%
ZINC
ANODE
ANODE TAIL
CABLE SILVER SOLDER CONNECTION
PVC INSULATION
DETAIL-X
NOTES: —
1. ANODE COMPOSITION, NET WEIGHT, GROSS WEIGHT, PREPACKED ANODE WEIGHT AND DIMENSIONS
(A,B,C,D,E & F) SHALL BE FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR.
2. ANODE TAIL CABLE SHALL BE HIGH CONDUCTIVITY, STRANDED, COPPER CONDUCTOR, 650V GRADE, PVC
INSULATED, PVC SHEATHED & ARMOURED.
1 17.07.14 REVISED AND REISSUED NSB RC • PPL SC
0 14.03.13 ISSUED AS STANDARD NSB RC PPL DM

(OLD DOC. NO. 7-51-0601 Rev. 3)
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - AII rights reserved
Page 3068 of 3884

S VANDARD No.
eiii ENGINEERS PREPACKED MAGNESIUM
Ogzir fameg
I 74Fen eTed5i7 251 340 )
INDIA LIMITED ANODE
7-45-0602 Rev. 1
( A Govt of India UndeftakIngt
Page 1 of 1
c D(0)
SILVER SOLDER/NUT & BOLT CONNECTION

MS CORE ANODE
COTTON BAG
SEE DETAIL—X BACK FILL
ANODE TAIL CABLE (SEE NOTE-3
ELEVATION
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF ANODE (%WEIGHT): —

ELEMENT LOW POTENTIAL TYPE
MS CORE Al 5.3-6.7(max)
F Mn 0.15-0.7
Cu 0.02(max)
Fe 0.003(max)
Ni 0.002(max)
Zn 2.5-3.5
SECTION-AA Si 0.1(max)
ARMOUR (SHALL NOT HAVE Ca
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
EPDXY
COMPOUND TO ANODE) OTHER METALLIC ELEMENTS
—EACH 0.05(max)
—TOTAL 0.3(max) 0.3(max)
MS CORE Mg BALANCE BALANCE
ANODE TAIL BACK FILL COMPOSITION

CABLE SILVER SOLDER CONNECTION
GYPSUM :75%
MAGNESIUM
ANODE BENTONITE : 20%
PVC INSULATION
DETAIL-X SODIUM SULPHATE : 5%
NOTES:-
1. ANODE COMPOSITION, NET WEIGHT, GROSS WEIGHT, PREPACKED ANODE WEIGHT AND DIMENSIONS
(A,B,C,D,E & F) SHALL BE FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR.
2. ANODE TAIL CABLE SHALL BE HIGH CONDUCTIVITY, STRANDED, COPPER CONDUCTOR, 650V GRADE, PVC
INSULATED, PVC SHEATHED & ARMOURED.
3. THICKNESS OF BACK FILL SHALL BE ADEQUATE TO SAFEGUARD THE ANODES AGAINST EFFECT OF
CARBONATES, BICARBONATES, NITRATES etc. IN SOIL. ANODES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH MIN. 50mm.
THICK BACK FILL ON ALL THE SIDES OF THE ANODE OR ,MINI ~ 20kg. NET , WHICHEVER IS HIGHER.
kA4,k
1 28.07.17 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD :'IR KD NSB BRB RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 3069 of 3884
TEST STATION STANDARD No.
0 el ENGINEERS WITH
I eIVCD11 ,151.3,1,1.1) (A Govt of India Undertalong)
FOUNDATION DETAILS
Page 1 of 1
25 25
CANOPY WITH
15' (APPRX.)
SLOPE ANGLE
TERMINAL
PLATE SHUTTER WITH
CONCEALED H NEOPRENE GASKET
LOCK
FRONT
100 MM 0,4.5MM THICK MS PIPE

0 (EPDXY PAINTED)
0 w
0 w
FOUNDATION
FOUNDATION PLATE BOLT (TIP.)
WITH STIFFENER
(6 THICK)
4, •
4 0
GRADE LVL.
PCC (M-15) /A\
4 • .:1‘.;
FOUNDATION ,•4 a .. •
• g•t . •
‘1•,-4%
• • g 600
1.• : • .a.
g THE ENTRY
50 • - .• !6 : T25 SHALL BE SEALED
(TYP.)11 WITH BITUMEN
1.. COMPOUND AFTER
5 LAYING CABLE TO
50-T PREVENT WATER
CONCRETE 600 ENTRY.
600
FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION
NOTES :-
1. THE SHUTTER SHALL BE HINGED TYPE WITH CONCEALED LOCK & SHALL HAVE DOOR GASKET TO
MAKE THE TEST STATION WEATHER PROOF (IP:55)
2. THE INNER & OUTER SURFACE OF THE TEST STATION SHALL BE EPDXY PAINTED OR Zn/AI COATED
IN COASTAL AREA.
3. THE NAME PLATE SHALL BE OF ANODISED ALUMINIUM WITH BLACK BACKGROUND & WHITE LETTERS
& SHALL BE FIXED TO THE INNER SIDE OF SHUTTER.
4. TEST STATION SHALL BE ERECTED WITH THEIR SHUTTERS PARALLEL TO THE LINE OF AXIS & FACING
THE PIPE LINE.
5. THE CHAINAGE OF TEST STATION SHALL BE WRITTEN WITH BLACK PAINT ON THE OUTER SIDE OF
THE FRONT SHUTTER.
6. HEIGHT OF THE TEST STATION SHOWN ABOVE GROUND LEVEL IS MINIMUM ONLY. THE
ACTUAL HEIGHT SHALL BE DECIDED BASED ON LOCAL FLOOD LEVELS TO BE ASCERTAINED.
7. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL THE DIMENSIONS OF THE TEST STATION.
8. ALL THE DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
1\311V,6Lk
1 28.07.17 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD PTR/AKD NSB BRB

No. by by
Approved by
Page 3070 of 3884
STANDARD No .
el ENGINEERS TEST STATION

Ifta fdPeg INDIA LIMITED 7-45-0605 Rev. 1
a9e.teavo44.1 (A Govt of India Undeftalong) CONNECTION SCHEMES
Page 1 of 4
TEST STATION
(TYP.)
TERMINALS
(TYP.)
2
6MM CABLE
4MM 2 CABLE
PIN BRAZING
(TYP.) 4MM2 CABLE
CARRIER
POTENTIAL MEASUREMENT CURRENT MEASUREMENT CASED CROSSING WITH
(CONNECTION SCHEME-A) (CONNECTION SCHEME-B) UNCOATED/UNPAINTED CASING
(CONNECTION SCHEME-C)
VARIABLE LINK
RESISTOR
VARIABLE
RESI TOR
SHUNT
01
2
25MM
4MM 2 CABLE CABLE
FOREIGN 4MM2 INSULATING
25MM 2 CABLE
PIPELINE JOINT
■
ZINC GALVANIC
ANODE 25MM2 SURGE
CARRIER CASING
CABLE DIVERTER
CASED CROSSING WITH FOREIGN PIPELINE SD
COATED CASING CROSSING INSULATING JOINT

(CONNECTION SCHEME-D)
(CONNECTION SCHEME-E) (CONNECTION SCHEME-F)
35MM 2(MIN.) CABLE

TO CPTR UNIT/CPPSM
TO CPTR UNIT/CPPSM
7 08 o9o
'10 0 9 —010 011 012 013 014
02 03 04 05 03 ?4 5 06
OM _ _J 25MM2
CABLE
4MM2CABLE
8012k=
6MM2CABLE INSULATING
35MM 2(MIN.) CABLE
JOINT U
Alk III Ili
gz
a_
z
REFERENCE CELL (TYP.)
FOR AUTO PSP CONTROL
rum
BOLT CONNECTION TO I SD
25MM 2CABLE
PLATE WELDED TO CATHODICALLY
INTERMEDIATE CP STATION (WITHOUT PIPELINE (TYP.) PROTECTED SIDE
SURGE DIVERTER
IJ ON PIPE LINE AT THE STATION) TERMINAL STATION IMPRESSED

IMPRESSED CURRENT DRAINAGE POINT CURRENT DRAINAGE POINT
(CONNECTION SCHEME-G) (CONNECTION ME-H)
\-‘
1 to■Ksia, N," •
1 28.07.17 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD PTR/AKD NSB BRB RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 3071 of 3884
STANDARD No.
k31II ENGINEERS TEST STATION
015leg INDIA LIMITED 7-45-0605 Rev. 1
INIFR ,f2d3rF en1,3.1.1) IA Govt of India Undettakvvg) CONNECTION SCHEMES
Page 2 of 4
TEST STATION 1-1 TEST STATION 1-2
{ TO CPTR UNIT/CPPSM
TO CPTR UNIT/CPPSM
LINK VARIABLE
VARIABLE 35MM 2 (MIN.) CABLE RESISTOR
RESISTOR LINK
8 9 •11
0
12 13 _14 SHUNT
35MM 2(MIN.) CABLE TO STN.
TO STATION 03 EARTHING
01 06 07
-
EARTHING SYSTEM SYSTEM
25MM2CABLE
UNPROTECTED SIDE 2C
25MM ABLE
25MM2 CABLE
N 4MM 2 CABLE
LJ
ri SURGE DIVERTER
m
N
—INSULATING JOINT
6MM 2 CABLE
2
35 MM (MIN.)
25MM2 CABLE CABLE
2w PIN BRAZING (TYP.)
m
N •ct
I
M O

Rev.
No. by by
Approved by
Page 3072 of 3884
STANDARD No .
ENGINEERS TEST STATION

f=g-ar 215leg INDIA LIMITED CONNECTION SCHEMES
7-45-0605 Rev. 1
14iFen 2Vdrire a”.3,74.0 (A Govt of Ina. Undellakingl
Page 3 of 4
CATHODE JUNCTION BOX TEST STATION

VARIABLE SHUNT LINK 35mm 2 (MIN.) CABLE
RESISTOR (TYP.) (TYP.) (TYP.) TO CPPSM/ 1
CPTR UNIT J
13 14 15 16 0( 18
PINBRAZING (TYP. )
co I 0 0 0 7 0— Lal
—J
CO
N 0
-01=1:0-cm-0=0— 09 10 1 0 12
E
E N
E
E
TO CPPSM/CPTR UNIT
S
BOLT CONNECTION TO PLATE 60M (TYP.)
WELDED TO PIPE LINE (TYP.) AIM Ilk Ilk
S
INTERMEDIATE CP STATION MULTIPLE PIPELINES (TYP. FOR TWO PIPE LINES)
IMPRESSED CURRENT DRAINAGE POINT (WITHOUT IJs ON LINE PIPES AT THE STATION)
(CONNECTION SCHEME—J)
TEST STATION
2 TO CPPSM/CPTR UNIT
2 6mm CABLE
35mm (MIN.)
CABLE — 4mm 2 CABLE
CATHODE JUNCTION BOX
VARIABLE SHUNT UNK
RESISTOR (TYP.) (TYP.) (TYP.) 02 1 22 2
025
0 0
16 X7 18 19 020
0 0 0
11 /12 13 14 015
/ 07 /010
2
25mm
0 1 2 03— 04 °5 CABLE
SURGE
BOM (TYP.) DIVERTER(TYP.) 25mm2
CABLE(TYP.)
AIL
O
S
INSULATING
JOINT(TYP.) UNPROTECTED TERMINAL SIDE
REFERENCE CELL (TYP.)
FOR AUTO PSP CONTROL
TERMINAL STATION MULTIPLE PIPELINES (TYP. FOR TWO PIPELINES)

IMPRESSED CURRENT DRAINAGE POINT.
(CONNECTION S HEME—K)
1 28.07.17 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD PTR/ KD NSB BRB RN

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 3073 of 3884
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS TEST STATION
fgar 015teg INDIA LIMITED 7-45-0605 Rev. 1
1.7reer 21TMTV ,I51 3LAWA (A Goof of India Undertaking) CONNECTION SCHEMES
Page 4 of 4
LINK SHUNT
/8
5 6o o
VARIABLE
L23.13=04 RESISTOR
10MM2 CABLE
C GALVANIC ANODES
4MM2 CABLE
BURIED JUNCTION BOX (SEE NOTE-3)
TCP GALVANIC ANODE INSTALLATION

(CONNECTION SCHEME—L)
25MM2 (MIN.) PVC

INSULATED
ZINC GALVANIC PVC SHEATHED
ANODES (TYP.)
(EACH 20KG NET) ARMOURED
CABLE
UNK
(TYP.) 1
(i3 9
SOUD STATE
POLARISATION CELL
Fs
4MM 2 PVC INSULATED PVC
TEST STATION °2 °3 SHEATHED ARMOURED CABLE
2
25MM (MIN.) PVC INSULATED
SHUNT
PVC SHEATHED ARMOURED CABLE
PIPE LINE
PIPELINE GROUNDING THROUGH POLARISATION CELL AND GALVANIC ANODE

CONNECTION SCHEME—M
NOTES:—
1. NUMBER OF TERMINALS FOR TEST STATION OF DIFFERENT CONNECTION SCHEME SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON
THE RESPECTIVE SCHEME DRAWING. TEST STATION FOR ANY OTHER SCHEME SHALL PREFERABLY BE
SIMILAR TO ANY OF THE ABOVE TYPES.
2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE CLEANED TO BRIGHT SURFACE & TIGHTENED WITH NON—OXIDE GREASE
APPLIED ON MECHANICALLY MATED SURFACE.
3. FOR SACRIFICIAL ANODE GROUND BED WHICH IS INTENDED FOR PERMANENT CP SYSTEM AND/OR TO BE
INTEGRATED WITH PERMANENT CP SYSTEM, THE LEADS OF ALL ANODES SHALL BE BROUGHT UP TO THE
TEST STATION AND SHALL BE TERMINATED INDIVIDUALLY. ACCORDINGLY, THE NUMBER OF TERMINALS FOR
TEST STATION SHALL BE DECIDED BASED ON NUMBER OF ANODES.
4. WHERE INSULATING JOINT (IJ) ON THE PIPELINE IS BURIED, THE SURGE DIVERTER MOUNTED ACROSS THE
IJ SHALL BE HOUSED SUITABLY SO THAT OPERATION OF THE SAME IS NOT AFFECTED.
5. THE DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO SUCCESSIVE PIN BRAZING POINTS SHALL BE MIN. 300MM.
6. CATHODE DRAINAGE CABLE SHALL BE CONNECTED TO A BOLT WELDED TO A METAL PLATE WHICH IS WELD
CONNECTED TO PIPE LINE. THE MATERIAL OF THE PLATE SHALL BE SAME AS THAT OF THE MATERIAL OF
THE PIPE LINE.
%.* ■
t Nksak,
1 28.07.17 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD PTR/AKD NSB BRB RN

Page 3074 of 3884
STANDARD No .
ENGINEERS GALVANIC ANODE

0 et 7-45-0606 Rev. 1
$tita fa5reg
IMP?! efecniecleatif
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govi of India Undertaking) INSTALLATION
Page 1 of 1
TEST STATION ' 41— FRONT
PIPE LINE
BURIED JUNCTION BOX
FOR CABLE JOINT
(EPDXY FILLED)
(SEE NOTE-5)
ANODE TAIL CABLE
ELEVATION
PREPACKED GALVANIC
ANODE (SEE NOTE-2) 10MM2CABLE PVC INSULATED
TEST STATION ARMOURED
(SEE NOTE-5)
PIPELINE
—ANODE TAIL CABLE
BURIED JUNCTION BOX 6MM2 PVC INSULATED
(SEE NOTE-5) ARMOURED
TO TEST
STATION
2
4MM PVC INSULATED
PLAN ARMOURED
5000 MM MIN. FOR

MAGNESIUM ANODE
2000 MM MIN. FOR
NOTES:- ZINC ANODE
1. THE PREPACKED GALVANIC ANODE SHALL BE INSTALLED AT A MINIMUM DEPTH, EQUAL TO BOTTOM
LEVEL OF THE PIPELINE.
2. THE ANODES ARE SHOWN HORIZONTALLY LAID. ALTERNATIVELY THE ANODES MAY BE VERTICALLY
INSTALLED WITH TOP OF THE ANODE AT A MINIMUM DEPTH EQUAL TO BOTTOM LEVEL OF THE PIPE LINE.
3. ALL NATIVE BACKFILL SOIL SHALL BE FREE OF ROCKS, GARBAGE, PAPERS, PLASTICS ETC.
4. CABLE SHALL BE LAID WITH ENOUGH SLACKNESS TO AVOID DAMAGE TO CABLES DURING BACK
FILLING ETC.
5. THIS DRAWING SHOWS TYPICAL ANODE INSTALLATION ARRANGEMENT FOR TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM. ANODES FOR PERMANENT CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM SHALL BE INSTALLED
IN A SIMILAR MANNER, BUT ANODE TAIL CABLES OF EACH ANODE SHALL BE BROUGHT INDIVIDUALLY
UPTO TEST STATION & TERMINATED. NO BURIED JUNCTION BOX SHALL BE USED FOR PERMANENT
CP SYSTEM.
6. ANODE TAIL CABLE SHALL NOT BE USED FOR LIFTING THE ANODE. ROPE SLINGS SHALL BE USED
FOR LIFTING THE ANODE DURING INSTALLATION INT0j0 D BED.
Mrs.
tt)7
1 28.07.17 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD PTR AKD NSB BRB RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 3075 of 3884
STANDARD No.
lil el ENGINEERS SHALLOW ANODE
taf5itg INDIA LIMITED 7-45-0612 Rev. 1
arm 2-77,1577 2151,1Y,J4) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
GROUND BED (PCP)
Page 1 of 1
ALL OPENINGS SHALL BE SEALED

WITH BITUMEN COMPOUND AFTER
LAYING OF CABLE
GRADE LEVEL A
/// ///\\\
ANODE TAIL CABLE 0
0
a. 0
•-■
›-
POLYETHYLENE CABLE
>-
0
0
0
N
0
0
co
/ WARNING MAT
/—BRICK COVER
P IPE L INE
ELEVATION CABLE LAID IN A

SAND BED (TYP.)
CANISTERED ANODE PIPE LINE
(LAID HORIZONTALLY
SEE NOTE-7) ANODE LEAD JUNCTION BOX
T
0:
7-
O
O
tr)
3000 (MIN.) 100 MTR. MIN

PLAN (SEE NOTE-1)
NATIVE • —
0 CABLE WARNING MAT
a: 0 1:1-
)— CO›- BRICK COVER
500(MIN.)
0 100(TYP.)
0
0
N CABLE LAID
IN SAND BED 0
0
0
0 - F tr)
In
SAND BED
NATIVE CONCRETE
00
BACKFILL 1 5 CANISTERED ANODE
SOIL kMIN.) I
500
NOTES:- SECTION-AA ANODE BED MARKER POST

1. THE ANODE GROUND BED FILLED WITH COKE BREEZE SHALL BE LOCATED ELECTRICALLY REMOTE FROM
THE PIPE LINE WITH MINIMUM 100 MTR. AWAY FROM THE NEAREST POINT ON THE PIPE LINE.
2. NO SPLICING SHALL BE ALLOWED FOR THE CABLES.
3. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH THE DIMENSIONED DRAWING SHOWING ACTUAL QUANTITY OF ANODES FOR
EACH GROUND BED.
4. ALL UNARMOURED CABLES SHALL BE RUN THROUGH PE SLEEVES.
5. ANODE BED MARKER SHALL BE FIXED ON BOTH SIDES OF GROUND BEDS.
6. NATIVE BACKFILL SOIL SHALL BE MOIST, FREE OF ROCKS, GARBAGE, PAPERS, PLASTICS ETC.
7. ANODES MAY BE LAID VERTICALLY IN CASE OF VERTICAL SHALLOW ANODE GROUND BED DESIGN.
8. ALL THE DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
1 28.07.17 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD .:PTIR AKD NSB BRB RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 3076 of 3884
STANDARD No.
401 ENGINEERS
Offeg INDIA LIMITED ANODE LEAD JUNCTION BOX 7-45-0613 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 1
TO ANODE W
150 MM STEEL C—CHANNEL
(TYP.) II II WELDED TO VERTICAL
II II C—CHANNEL FOR MOUNTING
1 JUNCTION BOX (TYP.)
5A, VARIABLE RESISTOR (TYP.)
410 • 111111.• • mr• MIMI
i■ • ■ • •• ■ ••
• • ∎ •• • • • :s4• 1111•1 ••
•• ■ •• •■ ■•
N SHUNT (TYP.)
REMOVABLE LINK (TYP.)
ANODE LEAD JUNCTION BOX
(SHEET STEEL OF MIN. 3MM THICK)
• • N.= COPPER BUS BAR
• BAKELITE BOARD
FROM POSITIVE OF RECTIFIER
0 01 150 MM STEEL C—CHANNEL

DOOR L_ (JUNCTION BOX SUPPORT)
0
0
0 G.I STEEL CONDUIT FOR
CABLE ROUTING
200
PCC FOUNDATION (M15 GRADE)
GRADE LEVEL 600(W)(MIN.)X600(L)(MIN.)
•
•
X800(H)(MIN.)
• r
f • THE ENTRY SHALL BE

—re
SEALED WITH BITUMEN
600 COMPOUND AFTER
4 .4 I LAYING CABLE TO
• PREVENT WATER ENTRY
•• ..
•
125 a— — •
— • .,
• :. • • • •
• . 4•
• .• • • •
4
•
. .
OI
I
50
NOTES:- 600
1. SHUTTER SHALL BE HINGED TYPE WITH CONCEALED LOCK. THE DOOR SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH GASKET TO MAKE THE BOX WEATHER PROOF (IP:55)
2. INSIDE & OUTSIDE OF THE BOX SHALL BE 125 iu GALVANIZED AND 300 'u EPDXY TOP COATED
OR Zn/AI COATED IN COASTAL AREA.
3. THE HEIGHT OF THE JUNCTION BOX ABOVE GROUND LEVEL, INDICATED IN THIS STANDARD IS
MINIMUM. THE ACTUAL HEIGHT SHALL BE DECIDED BASED ON LOCAL FLOOD LEVELS.
4. NUMBER OF ANODE CIRCUITS SHOWN IN THIS STANDARD ARE INDICATIVE ONLY. CONTRACTOR
SHALL FURNISH DRAWING WITH ACTUAL DIMENSIONS & NUMBER OF ANODE CIRCUITS.
5. THE SIZE OF THE CONCRETE FOOTING SHOWN IS MINIMUM ONLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE
ADEQUATELY SIZED FOUNDATION BASED ON SOIL CONDITION AND DIMENSIONS OF ANODE LEAD
JUNCTION BOX.
6. ALL THE DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM. 1•1
V111,,4,141
1 28.07.17 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD PTR/AKD NSB BRB If>RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 3077 of 3884
SPECIFICATION FOR B185-000-16-50-SP-0004
CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR UG VESSEL Rev.0
Page 1 of 105
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
FOR
UG VESSEL
PROJECT : INDIA BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP PIPELINE PROJECT
OWNER : M/s NRL
JOB NO. : B185
0 10.09.19 Issued for Tender Joydeep NSB NSB
Rev.
No
Page 3078 of 3884

Page 2 of 105
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Scope of Work
2.0 Design Basis/ Philosophy for CP System
3.0 Specification for CP System Equipment and Materials
4.0 Mandatory Spares For Cathodic Protection System
Annexure-1
1) Standard Specification for Cathodic Protection System for Underground Vessels , 6-45-0032,Rev.0
Page 3079 of 3884

Page 3 of 105
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK
Page 3080 of 3884

Page 4 of 105
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK FOR CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (CP SYSTEM)
The work to be performed by the EIL/ OWNER Recommended/ Approved CP contractor shall
comprise of Survey, design, detailed engineering, supply, installation, testing and commissioning
of Impressed Current Cathodic Protection (CP) System for soil/ sand side corrosion prevention of
UG Vessel inside the concrete pit filled with sand within the battery limit of BPC STAORAGE
DEPOT, PARTIPUR, BANGLADESH under the subject project.
The tentative schedule of the UG Vessel to be protected shall be as follows:
TABLE-1
TL-TL (mm) Max.

Sl. Qty. ID
Item No. Service Design
No. (No’s) (mm)
Temp.
( °C )
1 030-TT-00-101 HSD 1 2200 65

6600
Contractor to consider the final dimensions and quantity , maximum design/ operating temperature etc
during detail engg. stage along with foundation details for effective performance of CP system.
This document is not intended to be all-inclusive and the use of the guidelines set forth here do not
relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility of providing adequate CP System, which shall be
proved performing to the entire satisfaction of the OWNER/ EIL.
CP System Contractor shall be responsible for the entire CP System works as per the list of
Contractor/ Vendor furnished elsewhere in the tender or CP contractor having proven track record for
minimum 7 years of successful performance of such CP system for UG Vessel corrosion protection
, for any hydrocarbon plant need to be furnished by the CP System contractor, this minimum seven
years performance certificate need to be furnished from the end user or the plant owner.
The contractor need to supply all materials, consumables in his scope of supply and provide all
construction tools, tackles, equipment and personnel necessary for the work and prepare detailed
engineering package including construction drawings before starting of the work. After
commissioning of the system commissioning report along with as built drawings including soft copies
in latest version of AutoCAD and operating manuals to be prepared.
The Contractor needs to keep vigilance and take all precautionary measures to prevent fire
hazards during execution of job.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK FOR CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1.2.1 Item wise works envisaged under this Contract will comprise of the following:
Preparation and submission of Detail Engineering package as per Design basis and job
specifications enclosed in this document. The detail engineering package shall include, as a
minimum, design calculations, Bill of quantities, layout drawings of all materials/ equipments of
CP System, Connection schemes and wiring diagrams, Installation procedures, name of
equipment suppliers, shop/ field testing & inspection plan for equipment, necessary technical
Page 3081 of 3884

Page 5 of 105
information/ datasheets, fabrication/ construction drawings, testing and commissioning

procedures and formats, Quality control/ Quality assurance documents etc. & obtain approval
from OWNER/ EIL before execution of work. CONTRACTOR needs to obtain approval on all
layout drawings of cathodic protection materials/ equipment at site from OWNER/ EIL before
starting the installation work.
1.2.2 Carry out Soil Resistivity test, detailed engineering, Supply all materials, equipment and perform all
erection and installation work as per approved detail-engineering package. Provision of
service connection to T/R units shall be in CONTRACTOR's scope of work.
1.2.3 Shop testing of all major contractor supplied CP equipment (T/R, Anode, Cables, Junction Boxes,
and RTU etc.) and submission to EIL of Test results/ certificates for approval before delivery
of equipment.
1.2.4 Field-testing of individual components of CP System as per approved detail engineering package.
Final commissioning of installed system as per approved procedure and submission to EIL of
results thereof.
1.2.5 Liaison with other agencies, seek and obtain all permission related and obligatory to his part of the
work.
1.2.6 Preparation and submission of 1 set of soft copy and 6 sets of hard copies to client and one set
each soft and hard copy to EIL for records for all as built CP System package comprising of
operation and maintenance manual for equipment, as-built drawings, Material specifications and
Pre-commissioning/ Commissioning results.
1.2.7 After Commissioning of the CP System, if it is found that structure to electrolyte potential achieved
at some location is in the range which is below acceptable limit as per code, then a
supplementary CP System need to be installed to bring the potential level at such locations within
acceptable limit as mentioned vide section 2.0 for "Design Basis/ Philosophy for CP System".
1.2.8 CONTRACTOR shall give performance guarantee for CP System for external surface of UG vessel
as per design basis and job specifications and operation guarantee of the material and
equipment supplied by him as well as guarantee against defective workmanship for installation
work carried out by him.
1.3 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
1.3.1 Site Particulars
It shall be the bidder's responsibility to have a thorough understanding of the reference

documents, site conditions and specification included therein. The intending bidders shall be
deemed to have visited the site and have studied the conditions before submitting the Bids. Non-
familiarity with the site conditions will not be considered a reason either for extra claims or for
not carrying out the work in strict conformity with the drawings and specifications.
1.3.2 Every item of work and supply by CONTRACTOR shall be subject to Engineer-In-Charge scrutiny,
supervision and approval. Any work carried out or supplies affected without such approval
shall stand automatically rejected and his claim for compensation for such unauthorized work
Page 3082 of 3884

Page 6 of 105
shall be null and void.
1.4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CP SYSTEM WORKS
1.4.1 General
Clauses given under specific requirements for CP System works shall be read in conjunction
with General conditions of contract and in case of any conflict, the provisions of specific
requirements for CP System works will override the provision of general conditions of contract.
1.4.2 EIL/ OWNER shall have the right to inspect the following:
- Workshop & production facilities available with CONTRACTOR or its tie up agency.
- Fabrication/ testing of material/ equipment to be supplied by CONTRACTOR or its tie up
agency for CP system.
1.4.3 It shall be Bidder's responsibility to arrange access for EIL/ OWNER Personnel for such visits. All
costs related with travel, boarding, lodging for EIL/ OWNER personnel for such visits (if any) shall
be borne by EIL/ OWNER.
1.4.4 Materials
1.4.4.1 Material Supplied By Owner
No material for CP System shall be supplied by owner.
1.4.4.2 Material Supplied By Contractor
The Contractor shall procure, supply all materials, equipment and consumables required for the
work in his scope. Technical specifications of major items are given in section 3.0 for "Job
specification for CP System", of this document. Supply of all balance materials, consumables not
covered in section 3.0 for "Job specification for CP System", but required for completion of work as
per this specification shall be entirely Contractor's responsibility. The rates quoted for the execution of
the Contract shall be inclusive of all Contractor supplied material and equipment.
1.4.5 Warranty
Contractor needs to provide design guarantee for the system as per codes and standards & the
protection criteria mentioned in the section Design basis/ Philosophy of this document also shall
replace/ repair or reinstall free of cost any material/ equipment supplied or installed by him in case it
fails to operate due to defective material or workmanship as per requirements of this specification
within 12 (Twelve) months from the date of issue of completion certificate and acceptance of the
CP System by Owner. Contractor shall replace at his own cost if any item found defective or
missed before handing over the system to owner.
1.4.6 Construction Aids, Equipment, Tools and Tackles
Contractor shall be solely responsible for making available for executing the work, all requisite
construction equipment, special Aids, tools, tackles and testing equipment and appliances, all
instruments including automatic Programmable current interrupters required for commissioning and
interference testing of the system. Such construction equipment shall be in first class operating
Page 3083 of 3884

Page 7 of 105
condition. Any discrepancies pointed out by Owner/ EIL shall be immediately got rectified, repaired or
the equipment replaced all together by Contractor. Owner/ EIL shall not in any way be
responsible for providing any such equipment, machinery tools and tackles etc. The Owner/ EIL
reserves the right to re-arrange such deployment depending upon the progress and priority of work in
various sections at no extra cost to Owner.
1.4.7 Transportation, Packing and Handling
Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of all equipment/ materials required for
CP system work and unload the same at allotted area at site.
1.4.7.1 To protect all the material during period of dispatch, storage and erection against corrosion,
incidental damage due to vermin, sunlight, rain, high temperature, humid atmosphere, rough
handling in transit and storage in open during monsoon including delays in transit. Bidder shall be
responsible for any damage to equipment/ material due to above reasons.
1.4.7.2 Bidder to refer Section 2.0 for "Design Basis/ Philosophy for CP System", Section 3.0 for
"Specification for CP System material & equipment", Section 4.0 for “Mandatory Spares for
Cathodic Protection System”,
Page 3084 of 3884

Page 8 of 105
2.0 DESIGN BASIS/ PHILOSOPHY FOR CP SYSTEM
Page 3085 of 3884

Page 9 of 105
2.1 Introduction : This design basis defines the CP System Design requirements applicable for this
project in addition to the Specification for Cathodic Protection System for Specification for Cathodic
Protection System for Underground Vessels , 6-45-0032,Rev.0, NACE SP-0169 & NACE 0285, SP-
0177, RP-0286, DN EN 50162 VDE 015 ,BS EN12954, OISD-STD-150, IS/ IEC 60079/ 60529 and
applicable country regulations. In case of conflict, the requirements mentioned in this document or
stringent shall be considered.
2.2 Scheme for Cathodic Protection (CP) System
a) U/G vessels:
RCC pit shall be provided for the U/G vessel, Anodes string employed for C.P. System of U/g vessels
shall be located within the RCC pit. Specific installation requirements of String Anode shall be as
follows:
- Anode strings shall be installed in the sand cushion surrounding the vessel at a distance of
500 mm from the vessel.
- Separation distance between consecutive String anode loop shall be uniform.
- Length of each longer side of the loop string anode shall be same as the length of the
vessel + 0.6m.
- Minimum 4 No. of strings should be considered for each vessel
Free ends of each anode string should be connected to AJB located at each end of the vessel. Thus
2 No. of anode lead cables from each anode string shall be terminated to AJB.
2.2.1 Computerized central monitoring of all T/R units and the permanent reference cells shall be done
with the help of microprocessor based CP System remote terminal unit (RTU) for UG Vessel. The
central control and monitoring unit shall be located at near by Electrical substation and shall
communicate with all the RTU as master slave system.
2.2.2 Contractor shall carryout detailed engineering, procurement, installation, testing and
commissioning of the following major materials/ equipment as per the above-mentioned basic
scheme for Cathodic Protection System for the UG Vessel.
All Cable laying should be done on existing overhead cable trays/ cable trenches wherever
possible. Underground Cable laying in paved/ unpaved areas should be done wherever overhead
cable trays/ cable trenches are not available. Connection of drainage cables and measurement
cables to the UG Vessel shall be done by Thermit welding.
T/R unit shall be oil cooled, outdoor plinth mounted type and shall be installed at non classified
locations. Individual TRU shall be provided for structure . The enclosure of T/R units shall be IP-55
as per relevant IEC/ NEC/ IS/ ISFF codes. All T/R units shall be installed under a sun/ rain shed.
Approach steps to be provided for all outdoor type oil cooled T/R units coming in low-lying areas.
Outdoor type, oil cooled T/R units shall be as per enclosed Section 3.0.
For monitoring purpose, all reference cell cable and measurement cables from the UG Vessel need
to be extended up to the respective TR Unit. Structure to soil potential for all reference cells shall be
measured through the corrosion voltmeter located at TR Unit with the help of selector switch.
The T/R units shall have programmable current interruption facility according to a schedule defined
by the user. Interruption ON/ OFF cycle should be programmable in the time ratio selectable from 0 to
9999 seconds in increments of 1 second. The interruption device shall be solid state type without any
Page 3086 of 3884

Page 10 of 105
mechanical moving parts and shall have arrangement for bypass. Each T/R Unit shall accept set
point signals for DC Voltage and DC Current from Remote Monitoring & Controlling Panel and
accordingly shall control its output from 0 to 100%.
The CP System sub-contractor need to execute the work as per the detailed engineering
package to be prepared by them and approved by EIL/ OWNER during execution stage. Data
collection for soil/ sand resistivity to be done as per scope of work & enclosed Specification given
in Section 3.0.
- A trained cable jointer need perform the anode lead cable to anode string joints, at
factory or at field.
- Sand resistivity need to be considered for the UG Vessel CP System design as
200 ohm-m.
- The vessel shall have suitable paint for the soil side corrosion protection.
The CP System Sub-contractor needs to execute the work as per design to be approved by
EIL during the detailed engineering stage.
Minimum quantity of CP System materials and T/R Unit ratings as mentioned in this document
need to be offered by all bidders. During detailed engineering stage, if bidders offer more than the
minimum quantity of materials or rating of T/R Units mentioned that should be acceptable but lower
than the minimum quantity of materials or rating of T/R Units mentioned here shall not be acceptable.
2.3 Design basis for CP System:
a) No Insulating joints shall be installed to isolate any incidental structures from CP System
within Battery limit. Hence the structures intended to be cathodically protected shall be in
electrical continuity with many foreign structures within the plant complex such as RCC
pavements, RCC foundations, earthing grids, other U/G structures, which are not intended to
be protected. The CP current requirement therefore shall be governed by following factors:
- Surface area and coating quality of structures to be protected.

- Surface area and surface condition of nearby foreign structures.
- Relative position of anode between foreign structure and structure
intended to be protected.
To take care of such situation CP System shall be designed & installed in two stages
by providing one preliminary design and another supplementary design as follows:
Preliminary design: A preliminary design shall be made based on the scheme mentioned in
section 2.2 above. The quantities required for T/R units, Power Distribution Boards, anode beds of
various configurations, Junction boxes (AJB, CJB, MJB, etc.), Cables of various sizes, Thermit
weld connections, and any other materials as required shall be calculated by CONTRACTOR. The
locations of T/R units, Distribution Boards, anode beds of various configurations, Junction boxes
(AJB, CJB, MJB, etc.), Cables of various sizes, Thermit weld connections, shall be marked by
Page 3087 of 3884

Page 11 of 105
CONTRACTOR in appropriate layout drawings and shall be submitted along with Detail
engineering package to OWNER/ EIL for approval. The T/R Units, PDB, and MJB shall be
installed at one location under a common sun/rain shed in non- classified area near the vessel. The
power supply for the T/R Unit/PDB shall be drawn from the identified cubical of the electrical
substation nearest to the structure. The locations for installation of all CP system materials/
equipment shall be verified at site by OWNER/ EIL to check the practical feasibility of installation
as well as its suitability for optimum/ effective performance as envisaged in the design.
CONTRACTOR shall start installation work of CP System only after site verification and approval
of locations by OWNER/ EIL at site. Detailed Engineering works to be performed by
CONTRACTOR are mentioned in Section 2.4. After completion of installation work,
CONTRACTOR shall carry out testing/ commissioning activities in presence of OWNER/ EIL
Supplementary design: After energizing CP System as per preliminary design, the unprotected/
under protected and over protected areas shall be identified and a supplementary design is to be
made to bring all structures intended to be protected within acceptable potential limits. For
identification of under protected/ over-protected areas, at first natural Str. to soil potential is to be
taken at all test points in presence of OWNER/ EIL. Then the system as per preliminary design
shall be energized at different current levels. For each current level, protection potential and
protection span of cathode structure nearest to as well as remotest to each anode bed shall be
observed until predetermined current limits of Anodes or T/R units are reached or desired
protection potential levels are achieved. These observations shall be recorded in a tabular form or
graphically plotted and to be submitted to OWNER/ EIL for review. OWNER/ EIL after
review/ interpretation of the instant commissioning results or within 6 months of the polarization
period of the CP System, shall decide whether any additional anode bed or additional T/R unit is
required to be installed or whether there is requirement for disconnection of some anodes/anode
beds or any other remedial measures and the contractor shall update the CP System accordingly
at no additional cost and within a specified time acceptable to EIL/ OW NER. In case it is decided to
install additional anodes then 6A capacity MMO tubular anodes vide Section 3.0 need to be
installed at the suitable locations as decided by EIL.
The following criteria shall be followed to determine the protection levels:
- Maximum allowable structure to soil potential with respect to Cu/ CuSO4 ref.
Cell: –2.3 V (ON) or –1.10V (Instant OFF) for impressed current system.
- Minimum allowable structure to soil potential with respect to Cu/ CuSO4 ref.
Cell: –0.850 V (OFF) or –100mV polarization shift (OFF).
Discretion to use any of the criteria shall solely rest with Owner/ Owner's Representative.
- Interference Criteria: +100mVpositive shift.
b) Design life of Anode = 25 years (minimum)
c) Separate classified type CJB cum test station need to be installed at near the structures
for potential monitoring, to ensure adequate potential level intended to be protected.
Page 3088 of 3884

Page 12 of 105
d) While deciding number of modular type 75V/50A or 50V/25A capacity T/R units,
considerations must be given to see no T/R unit is loaded more than 75% of its rated
output voltage & current capacity throughout design life while feeding load to a single or
group of anode beds.
e) While making preliminary design contractor should make the entire endeavor to ensure
the adequacy of the design so that the requirement of supplementary design is bare
minimum.
f) For continuous string/ wire anode the anode current capacity shall be considered as 30mA/m.
g) Identification and mitigation of interference between structures to be protected as well

as between the structures to be protected and foreign structures need to be carried out by
contractor as per the requirements of the codes mentioned in this document.
h) Earthing of all T/R Units, PDB and Junction Boxes need to be done by connecting the
same with plant earthing grids, wherever plant earthing grids are not available nearby, a
separate earth pit approved by OWNER/ EIL may be considered by contractor.
i) To avoid cable damage in the long run, all cables are to be laid at the cable trays
wherever possible; underground cable laying should be considered only when no cable
trays are available nearby. All CP System cables need to be laid at power cable trays, all
multi core- monitoring cables may be laid in either electrical or instrumentation cable trays
whichever is available.
j) For road crossing of CP System cables, suitable RCC duct or PVC PIPE duct embedded
in concrete at proper depth need to be prepared by Contractor. Contractor should get the
construction drawing approved by OWNER/ EIL before execution of the work.
k) The type of coating and operating temperature of each UG Vessel should be taken
into consideration for all detail-engineering calculations.
l) Wherever specific guidelines are not furnished for cathode structure current density or
separation distance of anode from cathode structure and spacing between consecutive
2
anodes, a current density shall be considered for vessel: 10.0 mA/m and for bare
cathode / incidental structures: 25 mA/m2 and RCC incidental structure shall be
considered 5.0 mA/m2
o
m) If design temperatures of vessel exceed 25 C, protective current density shall be
2
corrected @ 0.5mA/m /deg. C.
n) Classified type local AJB/CJB need to be provided near the UG Vessel for termination
anode/ cathode/ reference cell/ measurement cable connections.
2.4 Detailed Engineering Works to be performed by Contractor for CP System:
Following detailed engineering works are to be performed by contractor based on

scheme given vide item no. 2.2 and design basis given vide item no. 2.3 of this
document for CP System of vessel external surface:
Page 3089 of 3884

Page 13 of 105
- List of materials/ equipments to be procured from Indian market/ foreign market.

- Item wise list of vendors with their reference lists for supply of materials/ equipment.
- Calculation and Preparation of Bill of Quantities for all CP system materials and
equipment required.
Bill of quantity along with detailed calculations and preparation of specifications, installation
work procedures & fabrication/ construction drawings for following items:
- CP System power distribution board (PDB): Total quantity and connection scheme
showing group of T/R units to be connected with each CP System PDB and connection
details between owner's switch board and each CP System PDB.
- T/R unit: Total quantity, detailed circuit diagrams and their installation drawings.
- AJB/ CJB/ MJB: Total quantity and connection Scheme showing how group of
anodes, anode beds and vessel are to be connected with each AJB/ CJB/ MJB. Also,
fabrication drawing & schematic drawing for internal terminal arrangements and
installation drawings for a typical AJB/ CJB/ MJB.
- Anodes: Total nos. of Anode strings and anode string to anode lead cable joint details
for entire CP System and their layout arrangement drawings showing no. of anode
strings in each vessel. Construction drawings and work procedures for anode to cable
jointing and also for installation of anode strings.
Design calculations showing:
- Cables: Total quantity of cables and their layout drawing for each CP Station as well as
for entire CP System for +ve header cables, -ve header cables, anode lead cables,
earthing cables, drainage cables, power supply cables and multi-core monitoring cables.
- Cable to vessel joint: Total quantity of joints and details of a typical joint.
- T/R unit wise CP System layout drawing showing how each T/R unit is connected with
group of anode strings to vessel through AJB/ CJB/ MJB.
- Test points: All reference cells and anode strings should be marked in a single
layout drawing.
- Overall CP System layout drawing including all test points, anodes, anode beds, AJB,
CJB, MJB, cable routes on a plot plan. All CP System materials/ equipment shall be
marked properly for easy identification on all appropriate drawings as well as on site.
- Preparation of testing & commissioning procedure for CP System.
- Preparation of construction drawings with soft copies before starting of

installation/ procurement work, Preparation of Soft & hard copies of as built drawings
after completion of CP System work, shall also be furnished.
Page 3090 of 3884

Page 14 of 105
- Quantified list of the major construction equipment, tools, tackles etc. including
Diesel engine pump set for dewatering at cable/ pipe trench the BIDDER proposes to
use for execution of the work.
- Details & list of vehicles proposed to be used by the CONTRACTOR during the
entire construction & commissioning period for transportation of material, equipments,
as well as movement of personnel within the plant area.
- Bar chart giving details how BIDDER plans to execute the work within the
specified time schedule.
- Quality Assurance Plans/ Procedure
The CONTRACTOR shall establish document and maintain an effective Quality Assurance
system as outlined in recognized codes etc. and Quality Assurance Plans included in
Specifications etc. to ensure that the work is performed in a planned, systematic manner to the
best quality standards and properly documented to provide confidence that materials supplied
and/ or work executed and services performed by him conform to the applicable specifications
and all the requirements of contract document and work executed by him shall perform
satisfactorily over the entire period of its life.
The Quality Assurance Systems Plans/ Procedures of the CONTRACTOR shall generally
cover the following aspects/ details, which shall be furnished by BIDDER along with, his detail-
engineering package.
i) A Quality Assurance Organogram with curriculum vitae of key personnel responsible

for the Quality Assurance at site.
ii) Complete details pertaining to the responsibility authority and accountability of the Quality
Assurance Organization of the CONTRACTOR at site.
iii) Equipments, material, Erection, Installation, Testing and commissioning control

plans for quality testing/ inspection etc.
iv) Quality Control of processes such as Thermit welding, anode to cable jointing etc.
v) Control Procedures/ Plans for calibration and safe up-keep of instruments,

gauges and similar testing equipments etc.
vi) Quality audit & Maintenance/ records/ procedures etc.
vii) Other relevant details.
Quality Assurance System Plans/ Procedures of the CONTRACTOR shall be furnished in the
form of a QA manual. BIDDER shall be required to provide explanation pertaining to the details
furnished by him in accordance with provisions contained in this clause and any further details,
as sought for by OWNER/ EIL. In addition, all the Quality Assurance Programs/ Plans as per
specifications enclosed with the Contract shall be fully complied with by the Contractor.
Page 3091 of 3884

Page 15 of 105
- Precautionary measures to be taken to prevent fire hazard during Thermit welding and
Pin Brazing of vessel for the purpose of cable to vessel joint as well as during
installation, operation & maintenance of CP System.
- All other information as required in individual job specifications shall be furnished by

CONTRACTOR in his detail-engineering package.
Page 3092 of 3884

Page 16 of 105
3.0 SPECIFICATION FOR CP SYSTEM EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
Page 3093 of 3884

Page 17 of 105
CONTENTS
SECTION DESCRIPTION
3.1 SPECIFICATION FOR NATURAL OIL COOLED TRANSFORMER/

RECTIFIER UNIT
3.2 CP SYSTEM POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD (PDB)
3.3 MIXED METAL OXIDE COATED TITANIUM TUBULAR ANODE
3.4 PERMANENT REFERENCE CELL
3.5 SPECIFICATION FOR MIXED METAL OXIDE TITANIUM W IRE ANODE

FOR CP SYSTEM
3.6 ANODE, CATHODE & MONITORING JUNCTION BOXES
3.7 CABLES
3.8 CALCINED PETROLEUM COKE BREEZE
3.9 THERMIT WELDING
3.10 MATERIALS/ EQUIPMENT FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
3.11 SPECIFICATION FOR PAINTING CORROSION PROTECTION FOR

JUNCTION BOXES, PDB, CABLE MARKERS AND JUNCTION BOXES
SUPPORT STRUCTURES
3.12 SPECIFICATION FOR CENTRAL MONITORING SYSTEM
3.13 SPECIFICATION FOR SOIL RESISTIVITY TEST
Page 3094 of 3884

Page 18 of 105
3.1 SPECIFICATION
FOR OIL COOLED TRANSFORMER/ RECTIFIER UNIT
Page 3095 of 3884

Page 19 of 105
SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTING OF OIL COOLED TRANSFORMER RECTIFIER UNITS
The specifications and testing procedure of transformer units are given as follows:
3.1 TRANSFORMER RECTIFIER UNITS (T/R UNITS)
The transformer rectifier units shall be a standard product of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in production of cathodic protection power supplies. The units shall be supplied
in accordance with the following specifications and data sheets.
3.1.1 CODES AND STANDARDS
In general the T/R Unit covered by this specification shall unless otherwise specified, be in line with
the requirements of any of the latest applicable standard of:
a) Indian Standards Institution (ISI)
b) International Electrotechnical commission (IEC)
c) American Standards Institution (ANSI)
d) British Standards Institution (BS)
Wherever the requirements in this specification are in conflict with any of the above standards, the
requirements under this specification shall be binding.
3.1.2 TRANSFORMER
The main transformer will be the isolation type having separate primary and secondary windings.
An electrostatic shield, composed of heavy copper foil, shall be placed between the two windings
and grounded to the rectifier cabinet, for this purpose a visible lead should be brought out from the
copper foil which shall be connected to any of the mounting stud of the transformer core.
Transformer winding wire insulation, winding interlayer insulation, core to winding insulation shall
be class F type. The transformer core and winding will be dipped in thermosetting varnish and
baked. Transformer varnish will meet the standards for 155 degree C operation. The transformer
winding shall withstand 2,000 volt (RMS at 50 hertz) applied for one minute between the windings
and between each winding and the transformer core. Maximum temperature of transformer oil will
not exceed 85 Deg.C and air temperature inside the upper cabinet will not exceed 65 Deg.C at full
load current at ambient temperature of up to 45 deg.C. Transformer full load efficiency will not be
less than 95%.The auto transformer shall be similar to main transformer except it will have single
winding and tapping for manual mode of control.
3.1.3 RECTIFYING ELEMENTS
The power rectification shall be done by Silicon diodes mounted on heat sinks of sufficient size to
o
prevent the diode case temperature from exceeding 100 C at ambient temperature as per data
sheet. The peak inverse voltage rating and current ratings of the diodes shall be as per data sheet.
The diodes shall be connected in Bridge circuitory for full wave rectification. Each diode in the
bridge circuit shall be protected by a HRC fuse.
Page 3096 of 3884

Page 20 of 105
3.1.4 A.C. INPUT
The transformer rectifier units shall be designed to operate on 240 volts (+10%) AC single phase,
50 Hz power supply. Inrush current limiting reactor of suitable rating to be provided at input line of
the main transformer to avoid possibility of abnormal tripping of MCB while closing circuit using
MCB.
3.1.5 D.C OUTPUT

The transformer rectifier shall be designed to operate continuously at 100% rated output current
and 100% rated output voltage at input supply voltage 240v (+10%) without exceeding specified
hot spot temperature limit and without damaging any components.
3.1.6 D.C OUTPUT ADJUSTMENTS
The DC output control shall be available in any of the following modes, with the help of a selector
switch.
3.1.6.1 MANUAL MODE
Output voltage at 23 equal steps up to 100% rated voltage shall be available by means of coarse
and fine tap changing switches for rated input supply voltage and 100% rated output current.
Tapping for output voltage control shall be taken from a separate auto transformer. The controlled
output voltage of the auto transformer shall be fed to main transformer input. The output of the
main transformer shall be rectified for DC load supply.
3.1.6.2 AUTO MODE
Unit shall have CONSTANT OUTPUT CURRENT/ VOLTAGE CONTROL (AVCC MODE) in AUTO
MODE as per Data Sheet.
CONSTANT CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CONTROL (AVCC MODE)
Constant current control feature shall be achieved by automatically adjusting T/R unit output
voltage between 0 to 100% rated voltage through close loop control using T/R unit output current
as feedback taken from the shunt inside the T/R unit so that T/R unit output current of any value
between 0 to 100% rated current does not vary more than +1.0A of set value when there is a
change input supply voltage of +10% or change in load resistance over a specified range decided
by the ratio of output voltage & current rating of the T/R unit.
3.1.7 DC OUTPUT RIPPLE
The filter circuit shall be designed in such a manner that ripple factor does not exceed 5% at rated
load both in Auto and manual mode.
Page 3097 of 3884

Page 21 of 105
3.1.8 INPUT OVERLOAD PROTECTION
Protection from overloads on the input will be provided by Miniature circuit breakers of suitable
rating on the input side. The trip point will be unaffected by ambient temperature. The trip handles
of individual poles of circuit breaker will be mechanically linked so that all lines are opened when
an overload occurs. In addition to above MCB, HRC fuse of suitable rating should be connected
before MCB so that AC .input current is limited to max. 10% excess rated input current as per data
sheet.
3.1.9 OUTPUT OVERLOAD PROTECTION
Protection from overload on the output in auto mode for T/R unit having either constant current
control or constant pipe to soil potential control will be provided by another close loop SCR control
circuitry giving automatic constant current control same as mentioned vide 3.1.6.2(i) except that it
will act as back up control to main auto mode control. Separate PCB shall be used for main auto
mode control and the backup control. The current limit for backup control is to be set by two limit
switches marked "coarse" and "fine". The limits of the two switches shall be algebraically additive
and shall give equal steps of 3A each up to 110% rated current. One scale calibrated in Ampere
shall be provided with each limit switches so that current limit can be set by operator at any desired
value in 3A step. In any circumstances even in case of short circuit the T/R unit output current
should not exceed the current limit set by the backup control.
In addition to above electronic current limiting feature HRC fuse of suitable ratings to be used at
positive and negative terminals as well as one double pole MCB of suitable rating to be connected
after HRC fuse at the output to disconnect T/R unit quickly in case of over loads in the output
circuit or for ease of isolating T/R Unit from the circuit when it is desired to keep the T/R Unit in
standby mode.
3.1.10 VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTION
Each silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) and Diodes shall be protected from voltage surges by means
of R-C circuitry. This R-C circuitry will be rated as recommended by the manufacturer of the SCR/
Diodes so that they will conduct heavily before the peak inverse voltage ratings of the SCR/ Diodes
are reached. In addition, lighting arrestors and zener Barrier type or MOV type surge Diverters
shall be provided in the AC input and DC output circuit of the Transformer rectifier as per data
sheet.
3.1.11 COOLING
The transformer/ rectifier will be oil cooled completely enclosed IP55 construction. The
O
temperature of the oil measured at the top layer shall not be more than 85 C and maximum air
O
temperature of the upper cabinet should not be more than 75 C for ambient temperature of up to
O
45 C.
3.1.12 INPUT AND OUTPUT TERMINALS
Page 3098 of 3884

Page 22 of 105
DC terminals made of tinned plated copper shall be located convenient to the cable entrance. The
terminals shall be suitable for cable sizes as per data sheet. Three negative and three positive
output terminals shall be provided.
AC terminals shall be insulated to withstand 2000 volts 50Hz to the enclosure, shall be shielded to
prevent accidental contact and shall be sized to take cable sizes as per data sheet.
3.1.13 METERS
The transformer rectifier units shall be equipped with separate continuous reading voltmeter and
ammeter for the DC output and the A.C. input voltage, current and Structure to electrolyte Potential
measurement meter with selector switch for selection of different Structure to electrolyte Potential
measurement meter. All meters shall be electronic digital type with LED display arrangement and
should be able to indicate the current and voltage ranges as per data sheet up to a resolution of
one decimal place for DC Ammeter & Voltmeter and 3 decimal places for PSP meter. Digit size
should be 12.5mm (minimum). All meters shall be rectangular in shape and accurate to within 2%
at full load at ambient temp. as per data sheet. They shall be temperature compensated to vary no
more than 1% per 10% temperature changes.
All AC&DC voltmeters shall be provided with separate fuse and toggle switch where as all
Ammeters shall be provided with only toggle switch.
3.1.14 ANNUNCIATION
Each transformer rectifier shall be supplied with a continuous signal light which will go out at loss of
AC input. In addition to this each T/R unit should give annunciation for Auto and manual mode of
operation by continuous signal light. T/R unit should also indicate the failure of each fuse in bridge
rectifier and two DC output fuses by an independent LED for each.
3.1.15 ENCLOSURES
"The enclosure of T/R unit shall be plinth mounted type having two compartments. Lower
compartment shall contain main transformer, Auto-transformer, DC choke and the compartment
should be filled with Transformer oil to IEC 296. The upper compartment shall contain the SCRs,
Diodes, indicating meters, Protective devices, Electronic control circuits/ control cords etc. and
shall be provided with a plexi glass viewing window. Both the compartments shall be completely
enclosed type having IP55 construction.
The enclosure shall have a frame work made of minimum 50mmx 50mm x 3mm angle iron, the
upper cabinet body shall be made of minimum 12SWG(2.5mm) W.T. sheet steel, lower cabinet
shall be 10 SWG(3.0mm) W.T sheet steel and bottom plate of lower and upper compartment shall
be 8mm(min.) thick steel plate. Size of enclosure shall be minimum 1700(H)x 700(W)x550mm(D)
or higher size than this. Necessary fins for the cooling purpose shall be provided at lower
compartment. A detachable sun/ rain shade to be provided of suitable size.
The transformer rectifier shall be provided with the following accessories.
Page 3099 of 3884

Page 23 of 105
• Steel channel under the base for plinth mounting.

• Lifting lugs of size suitable for lifting complete transformer rectifier unit when full of oil to
be welded at the 8mm thick bottom plate of upper cabinet.
• Sunshade/ rain shade.
• Oil filing hole with screw cap and drain plug.
• An oil sight gauge comprising a flat toughened glass window through which the oil is
viewed. The viewing window shall have a white background.
• Silica gel breather suitable for 10KVA transformer to be located inside the upper cabinet of
T/R unit.
• A removable dial type thermometer graduated in degrees Celsius with a red mark on the
scale at the maximum oil temperature.
• Thermometer pocket
• Locatable control cabinet with viewing window to IP55 as a minimum.
Accessibility shall be provided by hinged and removable front and back shutters. A plexi glass
viewing window shall be provided at the front shutter to allow the meters to be read without
opening the front shutter. One drawing pocket shall be made at inner side of the front shutter.
One holder for 60 watt filament lamp connection shall be provided at a strategic point inside the
cabinet to facilitate proper illumination during operation and maintenance. The enclosure shall be
supplied with an engraved warning level with the words "DANGER". Two junction boxes shall be
provided at both sides of the upper compartment, one of them A.C. cable entries and other for D.C.
cable entries. Gland plate should be provided against each junction box for fixing single
compression cable glands for A.C DC control/monitoring cables. One 240V, 5A Socket shall be
provided at a strategic point inside the cabinet to facilitate connection of soldering iron during
maintenance. After fabrication the entire enclosure shall be sand blasted to a SA 2 1/2 surface
2surface or chemically treated with Industry Standard 7 Tank treatment process. An inorganic zinc
primer shall then be sprayed to a total thickness of 3 mils. The finish coat shall be a dark grey
shade of polyamide cured epoxy in three coats to achieve total thickness of 10 mils. Alternatively
Powder coating of total thickness 100-125 Microns is also acceptable.
3.1.16 ENCLOSURE EARTHING
All normally dead metallic parts shall be electrically continuous, earthing terminals shall be suitable
for 35mm square cable connection, one earthing terminal shall be made for earthing connection to
power supply earthing and two earthing terminals shall be made for earthing connection to the local
earthing pits.
The earth connection points shall be protected against corrosion. It shall not be necessary to
scrape the paint away in order to make an effective earth connection. Provision shall also be made
adjacent to each gland plate for cable gland earthing connection.
3.1.16.1 Cable Terminations
i) Cable glanding and terminating facilities and terminals shall be suitable for the specified cable
type and conductor size. Consideration and provision shall be taken by the manufacturer on
the equipment design for the use of cables with aluminium conductors. Cable glands &
cable lugs shall be in the scope of supply for CP system installation contractor.
Page 3100 of 3884

Page 24 of 105
i) Terminal blocks shall be arranged and positioned to afford easy access for carrying out external
cable termination, testing, inspection and maintenance. There shall be ample clear space
allowed between the terminal block and the gland plate for the spreading and termination of
external conductors.
iii) All terminal blocks shall be shrouded or provided with transparent covers. Pinch screw type
terminals are not acceptable.
iv) Three positive and three negative post type DC output terminals shall be provided for the T/R
Unit. Each post shall be fitted with double nuts and washers.
v) Terminals for different voltages shall be separated by partitions.
vi) A terminal box or chamber with undrilled gland plate or entry panel of sufficient dimensions to
terminate the specified incoming and outgoing cables shall be provided. Direction of cable entry
shall be from below.
vii) Termination of single core cables shall be through a non-magnetic metal panel or gland plate
and provision made for bonding and earthing any armour and/ or concentric ground conductors.
viii) Cable terminal arrangements for power and control cables may be integrated provided that a
barrier separates the two.
ix) Auxiliary wiring shall have copper conductors of the manufacturer's standard sizing (subject to
Buyer’s approval).
x) Suitable terminals for two nos. ref. cell cables, one no. measurement cables and a selector
switch for permanent ref. cell to be provided for T/R unit panel for connection to PSP meter. Wiring
shall be crimped using self-insulated compression type terminal blocks which shall be suitably
identified. Conductors shall be fitted with sleeve ferrules bearing the same identification as the
terminal to which they are connected. Minimum conductor size shall be 1.0mm2 (current
2
density shall not be more than 3A/mm for copper conductor).
3.1.17 NAME PLATE
A permanently stamped stainless steel metal plate shall be attached to outside of the case with the
following information.
a. Manufacturer's name
b. AC input voltage and current rating
c. AC frequency
d. Phase
e. Output DC volts and Amps. rating
f. Weight in Kg of T/R unit
g. Model number
h. Serial number
i. Year of Manufacture
Page 3101 of 3884

Page 25 of 105
3.1.18 SPECIFICATION OF 75V, 50A T/R UNIT
A. AC input voltage : 240 Volts +10% 50 Hz single phase

B. AC input Current : 30A (Max.)
C. DC power output : 3.75 KW (Max.)
D. KVA rating of transformer : 7.5KVA
E. DC output voltage : 75V
F. DC output current : 50A
G. Current rating
- Diodes: 100A(Max. Average forward current)
- SCR : 85A(Average on state current), 133A (RMS on state current)
H. Full load efficiency
- Transformer alone : More than 95%
- Transformer Rectifier Assembly : More than 75%
I. Full load power factor : 0.8 lagging
J. Insulation level : 2KV
K. Peak Inverse Voltage
- Diodes/SCR's : 1500V(PIV)
L. Filtering circuit : L.C.filter

M. Ripple and Hum at rated output :Not more than 5%
N. Surge Diverters
i) For diodes/SCR's : R-C circuitry of rating as advised by manufacturer of SCR/ Diodes or
MOV
ii) For input of T/R unit : 2 nos. Zener Diodes of voltage rating 300V RMS, spark over voltage
1000V(Peak), RIR Type A6 FMR 100 BB or equivalent MOV type surge diverters.
iii) For output of T/R : 2 nos. Zener Diodes of voltage unit rating 300V RMS, Spark over voltage
800V(Peak), RIR Type A6 FMR 80 or equivalent MOV type surge diverters.
O. Lightening arrestor: 2 nos. each at the input and output of the T/R unit of voltage rating 500V
RMS, Max. 1.2/50 micro Seconds impulse spark over voltage 2.5KV(Peak), Max. discharge
residual voltage at 5KA, 8/20 micro second impulse current wave 2.5KV @1.5KA, Max. impulse
current discharge capacity 4/10 micro second impulse current wave 10KA(Peak), LAMCO PL01
L.T-2.8 or equivalent make.
P. Protection : MCB suitable for motor load having thermal over load and magnetic short circuit
Protection for input current in addition to separate HRC fuse protection for each Diode, HRC fuse
at out put and input terminals, glass cartridge fuse, in the live line of all lamps, auxiliary power lines
to control circuit and voltmeter circuits.
Q. Construction : Plinth mounted outdoor type.
R. Cooling : Oil cooled
S. Meters/ Instruments: As per Sec.3.1.13.
Page 3102 of 3884

Page 26 of 105
1No.DC voltmeter 0-200V,

1No.DC Ammeter 0-60A
1No.AC voltmeter 0-300V
1No. AC Ammeter 0-30A
1No.Corrosionvoltmeter,0-19.99V,10Mohm input resistance.
Other accessories:
a) Silica Gel Breather

b) Dial type thermometer 8 Dial 2 1/2" graduate in degree celsius with one red mark
on the scale at the maximum oil temperature.
c) Thermometer Pocket
d) Oil filling screw cap and drain plug.
e) An oil sight gauge comprising a flat long head glass window with white back-
ground through which oil is viewed.
f) Sun shade/rain shade.
T. Enclosure: Per sec. 3.1.15
U. Cable Entry: Through Double compression Aluminium gland of following sizes of cables.
Gland plates are to be provided at the junction boxes located at both side of upper
compartment:
2 2
+ve and -ve header : 95mm / 50mm 1-core, 4nos.
2
Power supply cable : 25mm , 3-core, 1 No.
2
Monitoring cable : 6mm , 1-core, 3 nos
(Monitoring cable to be used in case permanent ref.cell is used for monitoring pipe/
structure to soil potential )
V. Enclosure painting : As per sec. 3.1.15

W. Fabrication, Schematic: Supplier to furnish for EIL approval schematic wiring diagram and
fabrication drawing prior to fabrication of T/R units.
X. Spare parts & Additional features : Supply as per Sec.3.1.18.
Y. Ambient temp. : 45 deg.C
Z. Type of control required in Auto mode: Constant current control and constant voltage
control (AVCC MODE)
3.1.19 DATA SHEET OF 50V, 25A T/R UNIT
A. AC input voltage single phase : 240volts+10%50HZ B.

B. AC input current : 10A(max.)
C. DC power output : 1.25KW(max.)
D. KVA rating of transformer : 2.5 KVA
E. DC output voltage : 50V
F. DC output current : 25A
G. CurrentratingSCR:50A(Averageonstatecurrent),75A(RMSonstatecurrent)
Page 3103 of 3884

Page 27 of 105
Restsameas3.1.18exceptin item(s) where meter rating shall be as under
1No.DC voltmeter0-60V,
1No.DCAmmeter0-30A
1No.AC voltmeter0-300V
1No. AC Ammeter0-10A
1No.Corrosionvoltmeter,0-19.99V,10Mohm input resistance.
3.1.20 Testing of T/R units
All T/R units shall be tested by contractor and inspected by EIL/Owner before despatch, testing
shall be conducted in accordance with codes and standards enclosed in this document, as per
routine tests done by manufacturer and additional tests as mentioned below:
3.1.20.1 Efficiency test of Transformer Rectifier Assembly at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% rated
output current both in Auto and manual mode of operation. Efficiency test of Transformer alone
after isolating rectifier at 100% rated output current.
3.1.20.2 No load output voltage test in Manual mode for each voltage setting using coarse and
fine tap switches at rated input voltage of 240V AC.
3.1.20.3 Output voltage and current test in Manual mode for each voltage setting using coarse
and fine tap switches for the following conditions.
i) Input voltage 240V AC,load resistance1.5 ohm for 50A T/ R& 2.0ohm for 25AT/R
ii) Input voltage 264V AC,load resistance1.5 ohm for 50A T/R & 2.0ohm for 25AT/R
iii) Input voltage 216V AC,load resistance1.5 ohm for 50A T/R& 2.0ohm for 25AT/R.
3.1.20.4 Output voltage test at rated output current setting in Auto mode for the following conditions.
i) Input voltage 240V AC,load resistance:1.5ohm for 50A T/R & 2.0ohm for 25AT/R
ii) Input voltage 264V AC,load resistance:1.5ohm for 50A T/R & 2.0 ohm for 25AT/R
iii) Input voltage 264V AC,load resistance 0 ohm (short circuit across +ve and-ve terminal of T/R
unit). Set back up control 50A & 25A for 50 A & 25A T/R unit respectively.
iv) Input voltage 216V AC,load resistance:1.50 ohm for 50A T/R & 2.0 ohm for 25A T/R
Output current and voltage shall be recorded for each of above conditions (i) to (iv).
3.1.20.5Heat run test for max. Temp rise to be conducted for main transformer, Autotransformer,
filter choke, Diodes and SCR's, at 50A output current for 50A T/R Unit & 25A current for 25A T/R
unit for 24hours continuous operation . Number of T/R units to be considered for Heat run tests
and actual duration for which test to be conducted up to 24 hours (max.) shall be decided by EIL
and owner. Thermocouple instrument shall be used for measurement of temperature. The sensors
shall be clamped at different locations inside the closed T/R unit cubical and the cable of the
sensors shall be connected to temperature indicator through a selector switch outside the T/R unit
cubical during heat run test.
Page 3104 of 3884

Page 28 of 105
3.1.20.6 Insulation resistance test using 500V megger for Auto transformer and Main
transformer between primary and secondary, primary and earth, secondary and earth.
3.1.20.7 Dielectric strength test using 2KV for 1 min. duration for Auto transformer, main
transformer between Primary and secondary, primary and earth, secondary and earth.
3.1.20.8 Polarity test in Auto and manual mode of operation of T/R unit.
3.1.20.9 Calibration test for all Ammeters and volt meters.
3.1.20.10 Auto mode over load protection test:
Set back up control at 50 Amp. and increase current from zero to max. Possible using main Auto
control for T/R Unit having constant current control. In case of Auto PSP control T/R unit ref.
feed back signal to be varied from min. to max. set potential of T/R unit using battery & rheostat
in place of ref. half cell signal, current during the test should not exceed more than 50A in both
cases.
3.1.20.10.1 Constant Current Test
i) D.C Current Regulation against variation in AC Input
Put the unit in constant current mode and set the output current at 50 A by the help of current
setting potentiometer and observe the variation in, if any, of output current with variation of AC
input voltage at the steps keeping the output load constant: 216V, 240 V, 264 V.
ii) D.C Current Regulation against variation in Load Voltage
Keeping the AC input voltage at 240 V constant , set the output D.C current at 50 A and observe
for any variation of DC current with variation of output load voltage at three different values
ensuring that at each output load voltage, taking care voltage limit set value is not exceeded.
Repeat the above at 50A and finally at 25A set output current.
3.1.20.11 Constant voltage test for control circuitory. Supply voltage of T/R unit to be applied 240V
216V and 264V.
For each input supply voltage the reference voltage, +ve DC and -ve DC voltages of Auto mode
control circuit to be checked whether they are constant.
3.1.20.11.1 D.C Voltage Regulation against variation in Load Current
Keeping the AC input Voltage at 240 V constant, set the output D.C voltage at 75 V and observe
for any variation of D.C Voltage with variation of output load current at three different values
ensuring that each output load current, current limit set value is not exceeded .
Repeat the above at 24 V and finally at 12 V set output Voltage.
Page 3105 of 3884

Page 29 of 105
3.1.20.12 Ripple factor test
T/R unit shall be operated at full load both in Auto and Manual mode. In each case ripple voltage
to be checked on a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO). Peak to Peak ripple wave from shall be
limited within 10.5 volt in CRO screen for7 5 volt TR unit & 7.0 volt for 50 volt TR unit.
3.1.20.13 Annunciation check:
Annunciation check to be done for power on, manual mode operation and auto mode operation.
3.1.20.14 Auto mode constant PSP operation test:
Connect one battery with variable rheostat in place of reference cell feed back signal and conduct
the following test:
i) Make both T/R unit set potential & feed back signal from battery 1.0V, Switch on T/R unit & note
T/R out put current. Increase feed back signal from 1.0V to 1.5V and again bring back to 1.0V.
Note change in the T/R output current.
ii) Conduct similar test as item (i) above with decrease of feed back signed from 1.0V to 0.5V and
again back to 1.0V. Note change in the T/R output current.
of choke at 50A T/R unit output current =
3.1.20.15 Test certificate/ documents in 6 copies are to be furnished by vendor before

despatch of T/R unit to site. The test certificate shall contain results for the tests from 3.1.20.1 to
3.1.20.14 given above in addition the following observations:
- Sl. No. of T/R unit

- D.C. output rating of T/R unit
- External dimensions of T/R unit
- Weight of T/R unit
- Thickness of M.S .sheet steel used for T/R unit enclosure.
- Painting details of enclosure.
- Visual inspection details of T/R unit stating:
a) All components of T/R unit are as per specification
b) All items are labeled properly for identification purpose.
c) Number used in ferrules of cable leads are matching with schematic/ wiring diagram of T/R
unit furnished.
3.1.22 DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTS
Following drawings/ documents shall be furnished by vendor within 15 days from award of contract
Page 3106 of 3884

Page 30 of 105
for approval of the same by EIL/ OWNER before starting of fabrication. Approved drawings after
incorporation of comments (if any from EIL/ OWNER shall be furnished in 6 copies alongwith
reproducible during the delivery of T/R units:
3.1.22.1 Fabrication drawings and data sheet of T/R unit giving dimensions, rating, weight,
including installation/ foundation arrangement details.
3.1.22.2 Front view and typical sections of T/R unit panel with arrangement of equipment,
control, protection and metering.
3.1.22.3 Data sheet of all accessories and circuit element of T/R unit including ratings.
3.1.22.4 Schematic and wiring diagram of T/R unit circuitory giving Auto/ Manual Mode of
control including circuit details of all control cards.
3.1.23 INSTRUCTION BOOK
3.1.23.1 The instruction book in 10 copies shall be presented in such manner as to enable it to be
used by personnel who are unfamiliar with the operation and maintenance of the T/R unit. The
instruction book to be furnished along with supply of T/R unit.
3.1.23.2 CONTENTS
The instruction book shall contain
- A description of the T/R unit.
- Instruction for the installation, testing commissioning and safe operation and maintenance.
The information shall be presented as follows:
1. Index of contents
2. General description giving brief description of the T/R and its use.
Detailed description of T/R unit
This description shall include the technical characteristics, physical and mechanical limitations, and
item wise the components, accessories and spare parts.
4. Description of the operation of the T/R unit. This description shall be clear, concise and in
a logical sequence, using schematic diagram, wiring diagram and fabrication drawing.
5. Procedures for testing and adjusting the T/R unit:
Page 3107 of 3884

Page 31 of 105
The complete procedure for testing and adjusting the T/R unit during plant operation, periodic
maintenance and overhaul shall be covered.
6. Maintenance Instructions:
This section shall be divided into two parts:
a) Preventive maintenance which shall indicate the periodic inspection required the inspection
procedure and cleaning procedures.
b) Break down maintenance which shall include instruction for trouble shooting of the electrical
circuits. The procedure for the removal and replacement of all parts listed as spares shall be
given.
7. Spare parts
The instruction books shall give all the necessary details so as to procure all the spare parts from
the manufacture or from open market.
8. Each instruction book shall be accompanied with one set of final approved Drawing/
documents as listed vide item 3.1.21.
- COVERING OF THE INSTRUCTION BOOKS: The instruction book shall be presented in a

stiff covered binder with the following information printed on the cover:
- the client’s name
- the location of the installation
- the name of the installation
- the title of the instruction book.
3.1.24 Following additional features are to be provided with T/R Unit
i) T/R UNIT INTERRUPTION
The T/R units shall have programmable current interruption facility according to a schedule
defined by the user. Interruption ON / OFF cycle should be programmable in the time ratio
selectable from 0 to 9999 seconds in increments of 1 second. The interruption device shall
be solid state type without any mechanical moving parts and shall have arrangement for
bypass.
The interrupter clock of TR Unit should accept external time synchronization signal from the
central monitoring system having GPS synchronized current interrupter for measurement
and recording of interrupted OFF potential recording in synchronization with other T/R units.
ii) ANNUNCIATION FOR FUSE FAIL
T/R unit should be provided with Electronic Fuse fail Indicator. The Fuse fail indicator should
sense signals from each Fuse in series with diode in the rectifier circuit as well as each fuse in DC
Page 3108 of 3884

Page 32 of 105
output circuit and on its failure, it should identify the fuse failed with the help of an independent
LED for each fuse for local visual alarm.
iii) MANDATORY SPARE PARTS
One set of Mandatory spare parts as mentioned at Section 4.0 in this document need to be
supplied common for all the T/R Units.
IV) T/R UNIT REMOTE MONITORING
T/R Units should be provided with transducers for providing 4-20 mA output signals or direct
signals as required for remote monitoring unit (RMU) interface for remote monitoring of T/R Unit
output voltage and current.
Necessary terminals are to be provided at suitable locations of the T/R unit panel for easy
termination of onward wiring by others for remote monitoring purpose.
Each T/R Unit shall accept set point signals for DC Voltage and DC Current from Remote
Monitoring & Controlling Panel and accordingly shall control its output from 0 to 100%.
Page 3109 of 3884

Page 33 of 105
3.2 SPECIFICATION FOR CP SYSTEM POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD (PDB)
Page 3110 of 3884

Page 34 of 105
3.2 Power Distribution Board (PDB):
The Power distribution board (PDB) shall be plinth mounted outdoor type and shall be
installed at non-classified locations near a single or group of T/R Unit under a sun/ rain shed.
The enclosure of shall be IP-55 as per relevant IEC/ NEC/ IS codes.
The Power distribution board (PDB) shall be composed of one no.3 phase, 4-wire 250A/
63A, incoming MCCB and 12/3 no. 1 phase, 63A outgoing MCB for input power supply to
TR Unit as well as 6No.6A outgoing MCB for central monitoring system power supply. The
incoming switch shall be 3-pole and outgoing switches shall be 2-pole. 4 Nos. of 25x 5mm
tinned copper bus bar shall be used which should be taped by PVC tape of red, yellow and
blue colours for dentification of the three phases and black colour for neutral. Wiring inside
2
PDB shall be done using 50mm , 1-core, copper conductor, PVC insulated, unarmored
cable between TPN switch neutral and neutral bus whereas rest of the wiring shall be
2
done by 25mm , 1-core, copper conductor, PVC insulated unarmored cable. All single
core cables shall be used red, yellow and blue coloured for phase connections and black
coloured for neutral connection. All cables terminations shall be through Tinned copper
cable lugs of matching cable size. All cable entries to the PDB panel shall be
2 2
through Aluminium double compression gland. One gland for 300mm / 50mm , 3-phase,
4-core incoming cable connection shall be provided at left side bottom of the panel, 12/3/6
glands to be provided at right side bottom of the panel for outgoing cable connections for
2
63A PDB. The outgoing cables shall be 25mm , 1-phase, 3-core Aluminum conductor cables
for TRU power input and 16mm 2, 1-phase, 3-core Aluminum conductor cables for central
monitoring system power supply. Size of the PDB Panel enclosure shall be adequate to
accommodate all components easily and shall be made of 12 SWG sheet steel. Two nos.
hinged front shutters shall be provided. The shutters shall be screwed to the panel
enclosure structure at the centre in addition it shall have lockable handles. Painting details
of inside and outside surfaces of the PDB panel shall be as follows: After fabrications the
entire enclosure shall be sand blasted to a SA2½ surface. An inorganic zinc primer shall
then be sprayed to a total thickness of 3 mils. The finish coat shall be of polyamide cured
epoxy in three coats to achieve total thickness of 15 mils. The finish coat shall be a dark grey
or yellow shade as per choice of EIL/ OW NER.
Page 3111 of 3884

Page 35 of 105
3.3 SPECIFICATION FOR MIXED METAL OXIDE COATED TITANIUM TUBULAR

ANODE FOR CP SYSTEM
Page 3112 of 3884

Page 36 of 105
3.3.1.0 Scope
3.3.1.1 Anodes
Mixed Metal oxide coated Titanium tube anodes shall be dimensionally stable and will be supplied with
anode lead cable connected to it.
3.3.1.2 ANODE DATA SHEET
Sl.No. Description Details
1. Anode Type Dimensionally stable Anode (DSA)
2. Anode Shape & Dimension Hollow Tubular 750mm long x 25.4mm

OD, 0.7-0.9mm W.T
3. Anode weight 0.41 kg + 5%
4. Anode Material Titanium seamless tube of Grade 1/2,

ASTM B 338 overlayed with mixed
oxide of noble metals.
5. Anode design life 30 years
2
6. Anode consumption rate (Kg/A-yr) at 100 A/m 2 mg/A-yr.
Current density
2 2 2
7. Metal Oxide coating thickness weight (gm/M ) 6 gms/m (at 100 A/m for 30 years
design life)
8. Optimum Recommended anode current density
2
(A/m )
2
i) With Carbonaceous backfill in soil 100A/M
ii) Without backfill in soil Vendor to furnish
iii) Fresh water Vendor to furnish
9. Rated current output 8 Amps
10. Anode Centralizer for 8" NB casing pipe 1 Nos. per anode. Vendor to furnish
details.
11. Mechanical & Physical Properties:
-5
i) Electrical Resistivity (ohm Cm) of Metal Oxide 10 Ohm Cm
ii) Contact resistance of anode to cable 0.9 milli ohms (max.)
iii) Pull out strength 200 kg(min) or breaking strength of
cable
iv) Anode fabrication Vendor to furnish details
v) Anode to cable connection details Vendor to furnish details
vi) Anode to cable joint insulation details Vendor to furnish details
12. Dead Weight for Anode Each anode to be supplied with a dead
weight. Details of the same to be
furnished by vendor
Note: All information to be furnished by vendor as per data sheet shall be furnished with his offer.
Page 3113 of 3884

Page 37 of 105
3.3.1.3 Anode Lead Cable
2
Anode lead cables to be connected between each anode and AJB shall be 7 strands, 10mm
stranded copper conductor, single core, unarmored, with a double insulation system. The primary
insulation shall be 0.20 inch thick cross-linked polyvinylidene floride (PVDF) 1100 Volt grade. The
secondary insulation shall be 0.065 inch thick high molecular weight polyethelene (HMWPE)
sheathing jacket over the primary insulation.
Anode to Lead cable jointing and insulation shall be done by using straight through jointing kit which is
to be provided by anode manufacturer. Anode to Lead cable jointing and insulation shall be done at
manufacturer’s work shop or at field by a trained cable jointer.
3.3.1.3.1 Anode to Cable connection
Anode lead cable conductor shall be crimped with tubular anode at the center of anode or at the ends
and shall be sealed to prevent ingress of water at the joint. Fabrication details of the joint including
sealing arrangement and test procedure of the joint shall be furnished by vendor for EIL's approval
before making the joints.
Page 3114 of 3884

Page 38 of 105
3.4 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PERMANENT REFERENCE CELL
Page 3115 of 3884

Page 39 of 105
3.4 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PERMANENT REFERENCE HALF CELL
3.4.1 For monitoring of soil side potential:
a. Type of ref. half cell : Cu/ CuSO4 type.
b. Backfill material: (as per manufacturer recommendation)
Gypsum powder : 75%

Bentonite powder : 20%
Sodium Sulphate : 05%
c. Body : Impact resistance PVC Sch. 80, 2" dia. x 16" long
d. Each reference shall be supplied in cotton bag of chemical backfill having overall size 8"
dia x 16" long and complete with 25 M (minimum) cable as per specification. However,
contractor to measure the actual length of measurement cable required at site during
detailed engineering stage and cut the required length from cable drum so as to avoid
cable-to-cable joint.
e. Location of half cell : 150 mm from structure
f. Design life : 25 years
g. Stability : ±10 mv with 3 Micro- A load.
h. Make : Shall be suitable for 15-40 deg.C temperature application in sand.
2
i. Measurement Cable: 4 - 6mm , stranded Cu conductor, Single core, screened/ armoured,
PVC insulated and sheathed , 1000 V grade .
2
k. Reference Cell Cable: 4- 6mm , stranded Cu conductor, Single core, screened/
armoured, PVC insulated and sheathed, 1000 V grade .
Contractor shall get the electrodes approved before placement of order. Necessary test
certificates from manufacturer giving calibration test, results, date of manufacture shall be
furnished during delivery. Any delivery effected without prior approval of owner will be at
suppliers risk & cost.
Page 3116 of 3884

Page 40 of 105
3.5 SPECIFICATION FOR MIXED METAL OXIDE TITANIUM WIRE ANODE

FOR CP SYSTEM
Page 3117 of 3884

Page 41 of 105
3.5.1.0 MIXED METAL OXIDE TITANIUM WIRE ANODE
Factory coke backfilled fabric jacketed Mixed Metal Oxide coated Titanium wire anodes shall be
a standard product of the manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such anodes for
use in impressed current Cathodic Protection system. The make / model of MMO wire anode to
be supplied shall be from EIL approved vendor list only. The equivalent anode in case
proposed by CP System contractor shall be subject to acceptance as per sole discretion of
EIL / OWNER. To establish the equivalency, the anode manufacturer should have minimum 7
years of manufacturing experience for the similar type pre-packed with coke-breeze MMO Wire
anodes, also proven track record for minimum five years of successful performance of such
anode for UG Vessels protection, for any hydrocarbon plant need to be furnished by the CP
System contractor, this minimum five years performance certificate need to be furnished from
the end user or the plant owner.
3.5.1.1 Anodes
Mixed Metal oxide anodes shall be dimensionally stable. Each wire anode shall be supplied with
anode lead cable piggy back connected to it i.e there will be connection between the Primary
anode and the internal header cable at a every 3m (max) distance. The connection shall be multi-
step and water proof.
Anode Data Sheet:
a. Anode Type Dimensionally stable Anode (DSA)
b. Anode Shape & Dimension 1.5 mm± 0.10mm (minimum)
c. Anode weight Vendor to furnish
d. Anode Material Commercially pure solid Titanium wire,

grade 1/2, ASTM B 863, over laid with
mixed oxide of noble metals suitable for
soil application
e. Anode design life 30 years
f. i) Anode consumption rate i) 2 mg/A-yr.

(Kg/A-yr.) at 100 A/M2 C.
density.
ii) Overall OD of anode string with ii) 35mm (min.)
calcined petroleum coke breeze
and its fabric jacket enclosure
g. 6gms/m2(min.)
Metal Oxide coating thickness
weight (gm/M2)
Page 3118 of 3884

Page 42 of 105
h. Optimum Recommended anode

current density (A/M2)
i) With Carbonaceous backfill i) 100A/m2

in soil ii) Vendor to furnish
ii) Without backfill in soil iii) Vendor to furnish
iii) Fresh water
i) Minimum rated current output in 50mA/m

soil/ sand
j) Mechanical & Physical

Properties
i) Electrical Resistivity (ohm Cm) 10-5 Ohm Cm

of Metal Oxide
k) Contact resistance of anode to 0.9 milli ohms (max.)

cable
l) Pull out strength Vendor to furnish
m) Anode fabrication Vendor to furnish details
n) Anode to cable connection Vendor to furnish

details
o) Anode to cable joint insulation Vendor to furnish

details
p) Allowable attenuation of 1% for dry sand of resistivity 20,000

potential along anode ohm-cm
10% for wet sand of resistivity 500

ohm-cum.
q) Spacing between consecutive Vendor to furnish along with

anode to cable joints supporting calculation details.
r) Coke breeze backfill Loresco, USA make SC-3 backfill/

Equivalent
Following Insulation specification to be followed for supplie for anode internal header and anode
lead cable. Laboratory testing to be done in national/ international reputed laboratory at anode
manufacturing country.
Page 3119 of 3884

Page 43 of 105
Note: All information is required to be furnished by vendor as per data sheet and shall be
furnished with his detail engineering package.
3.5.1.3 ANODE HEADER AND LEAD CABLE
Anode internal header cable and anode lead cable in between each anode string and AJB shall be
2
insulated, 7 strands, 10mm stranded copper conductor, single core, unarmoured, with a double
insulation system. The primary insulation shall be 0.04 inch thick cross-linked polyvinylidene floride
(PVDF) 1100 Volt grade. The secondary insulation shall be 0.065 inch thick high molecular weight
polyethelene (HMW PE) sheathing jacket over the primary insulation.
Jointing of anode lead cable with internal anode header cable and its insulation shall be done by
using standard jointing kit which is to be provided by anode manufacturer. However, preference will
be given for direct termination of the anode header cable to AJB without any joint in between with
internal anode header cable and anode lead cable. Anode lead cable to anode header cable jointing,
shall be done at site by a trained cable jointer in case of unavoidable site/ project situation.
3.6.1.3.1 Anode to Cable connection
Vendor should submit procedure and sealing arrangement drawing of the joint and get the Anode
lead cable to anode internal piggyback cable joint approved by EIL/ OWNER.
3.5.1.4 QA/ QC for Anodes
Following tests are to be conducted by anode manufacturer. Anodes with cables shall be delivered
to site only after EIL/Owner's approval of the test results, which are to be furnished by anode
manufacturer for each anode. Detailed procedure for conducting the following tests shall be
furnished by manufacturer for EIL/ Owner's approval before commencing tests. All the tests should
be conducted in presence of EIL/ OWNER/ TPI (as applicable) .
3.5.1.4.1 Visual Inspection Test –
The anode assembly shall be visually inspected for proper compaction of coke breeze and
centralization of MMO wire and cable .
Page 3120 of 3884

Page 44 of 105
3.5.1.4.2 Dimensional check
- Dimensional check of MMO wire anode and OD of complete anode assembly

- Dimensional Check of Anode internal piggyback cable
- Thickness of primary cable insulation
- Thickness of secondary cable insulation
3.5.1.4.3 MMO Wire Anode (Type Test)
- MMO coating loading/ thickness
- Accelerated Life Test
- MMO coating resistivity
3.5.1.4.4 Coke Breeze (Type Test)
- Coke Breeze Resistivity
- Weight of coke breeze per meter of anode
3.5.1.4.5 Anode Fabric (Type Test)
- Acid Immersion Test for 6months (5N HCl Solution)
3.5.1.4.6 Anode Lead cables (Routine tests)
Routine & type test certificates of cable manufacturer to be furnished for anode lead cable as
per IEC std. Cable length and identification tag to be verified by measurement.
3.5.1.4.7 Anode to Cable joint test (Routine tests)
Each anode to cable joint shall be tested for its electrical contact resistance & its value in ohms
shall be recorded.
3.5.1.4.8 Prototype Test
First anode string shall be subjected to destructive test to determine pull out strength of cable to
anode joint as well as effectiveness of the joint insulation and coke breeze backfilling to be
performed at manufacturer’s factory or at site (as applicable).
3.5.1.4.9 Test Reports
After conducting each test, reports showing test results should be submitted to EIL/ Owner for
approval. Anode/ cable identification No./ batch No. shall be mentioned in test results against each
test result. Any delivery made to site before getting EIL/ Owner's approval of test reports shall be at
manufacturer risk & cost.
3.5.1.4.10 Anode Fabrication
Manufacturers/ supplier shall furnish detailed dimensioned fabrication drawing of anode as well as
details of cable connection and its insulation sealing to EIL/ Owner for approval. Vendor (Anode
Manufacturer/ supplier) shall furnish following information for approval before commencement of
Anode to cable joint.
- Name of Manufacturer of Epoxy Resin & hardener along with its grade & properties in case resin
splicing kit is used for joint insulation.
- Type and make of Heat shrink cap and dielectric sealing compound along with its grade and
properties in case the same is used.
- Procedure for making the entire joint.

- Procedure for accelerated ageing test of the string anode.
Page 3121 of 3884

Page 45 of 105
3.6 JOB SPECIFICATION FOR ANODE, CATHODE & MONITORING JUNCTION

BOXES FOR CP SYSTEM
Page 3122 of 3884

Page 46 of 105
3.6.1 Specifications for Anode & Cathode Junction Boxes
3.6.1.1 Anode Junction Boxes and Cathode Junction Box cum test station shall be suitable for
Classified Area applications
An anode lead junction box (AJB) will be provided to feed T/R Unit output current to anode strings. These
junction boxes will have provision for independent current measurement of each anode output. This will be
accomplished by means of individual shunts for each anode circuit.
Drainage cable, reference cell cables and measurement cables from each vessel shall terminate in its
respective cathode junction box cum test station. All the above-mentioned reference cell cables and
measurement cables from each CJB shall be terminated into a single Monitoring junction box (MJB). Each
CJB shall be connected to the negative terminal of the each T/R unit through loop in loop out arrangement
for return of drainage current from UG Vessel to the T/R unit.
The enclosure of CJB shall be structure/ wall mounted type. Shutter should be provided with closed cell
neoprene sealing gaskets. The terminal board shall be of 10mm WT Phenolic laminated sheet on which all
terminals and shunts are to be mounted. The terminals shall be made of cadmium plated steel or stainless
steel stud nut and washers of M-10 size for termination of anode and cathode lead cables and M-4 size for
termination of reference cell and measurement cables. All cable entries shall be through Aluminium double
comprehension glands. The external bolt, nuts and clamps to be used for mounting the junction box with
back plate/structures shall be MS electro-galvanised or Cadmium plated.
For classified areas, Junction box enclosure shall be of type "Exd" protection Zone 2/Group IIA/IIB
application, Temp. Class: T-6, as per IS 5571,5572,2148 & 8289 and relevant IEC/NEC/IS standards.
The cable glands shall be FLP double compression type made of Aluminium. Enclosure need to be
certified by CMRI. The shutter of the junction box shall be screwed to the body of junction box by using MS
electro galvanised/ Cadmium plated nut, bolt and washers. The enclosure of the junction box shall be
made of cast aluminium. One earthing terminal shall be provided for earthing the junction box.
3.6.1.2 Monitoring Junction Boxes for non Classified Areas:
Monitoring junction boxes (MJB) will be installed near the T/R Unit and shall be required for monitoring
potentials of UG Vessel. The enclosure for the MJB shall be of IP-55 construction made of 12SWG (2.67)
W.T. sheet steel.
The enclosure shall be structure/ wall mounted type having removable hinged front shutter with one handle
and flush type locking arrangement. Shutter should be provided with closed cell neoprene sealing gaskets.
The terminal board shall be of 8mm thick Phenolic laminated sheet on which all terminals shall be made of
stainless steel stud, nut and double spring washers of M-4 size for reference cell/ measurement cables.
The terminal arrangement shall be such that bottom row is utilised for termination of measurement cables
from each vessel and upper rows one each is allotted for the reference cell cable termination from each
vessel, hence total number of rows shall be one more than the total number of vessel (as applicable) . All
cable entries shall be through Aluminum double compression glands. The external bolt, nuts and clamps to
be used for mounting the junction box with back plate/ structures shall be MS electro-galvanised or
Cadmium, plated. Shutter should be provided with closed cell neoprene sealing gaskets.
Page 3123 of 3884

Page 47 of 105
3.6.1.3 Proper fitting of cables at cable glands
It is essential that all cables should fit tight at cable glands. For this purpose vendor need to make
openings for glands at junction box or cast/procure cable glands as per cable samples to be procured for
CP System.
3.6.1.4 Painting
Enclosures of all non classified type anode and Cathode junction boxes shall be surface finished with paint
as per guidelines outlined in Section 3.12.
3.6.1.5 Inspection & Testing
Fabrication drawing showing internal terminal arrangement of each type of junction box to be submitted by
vendor to OWNER/ PMC to obtain approval for a Prototype construction. After inspection and approval of
prototype the mass production shall be started. Calibration test for shunts for each junction box to be
inspected by OWNER/ PMC before dispatch.
Page 3124 of 3884

Page 48 of 105
3.7 SPECIFICATION FOR CABLES FOR CP SYSTEM
Page 3125 of 3884

Page 49 of 105
3.7.1.0 SCOPE
3.7.1.1 CODES AND STANDARDS
In general the cables covered by this specification shall unless otherwise specified be in the line with the
requirements of any of the latest applicable standard of IS, IEC, BS and Relevant NEC/ JIS/ JEC standards.
Wherever the requirements in this specification are in conflict with any of the above standard, the
requirements under this specification shall be binding.
3.7.1.2 ANODE LEAD CABLE
2
Anode lead cables shall be 7 strands, 10mm stranded copper conductor, single core, unarmoured,
with a double insulation system. The primary insulation shall be 0.04 inch thick cross-linked polyvinylidene
floride (PVDF) 1000 Volt grade. The secondary insulation shall be 0.065 inch thick high molecular weight
polyethylene (HMW PE) sheathing jacket over the primary insulation.
3.7.1.3 +VE, -VE HEADER CABLE
+ve header and -ve header cables shall be 95mm2, stranded Aluminium conductor, single core,
Aluminium wire armoured, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed 1000V grade cable.
3.7.1.4 DRAINAGE CABLE
Drainage cables shall be 50mm2, stranded Copper conductor, single core, Aluminium wire
armoured, PVC insulated and sheathed 1000V grade cable.
3.7.1.5 POWER SUPPLY CABLE (Between PDB & T/R Unit)
Power supply cable between Power source or CP System DB and T/R unit shall be 25mm2,
stranded Aluminium conductor, 3-core, Aluminium wire armoured, PVC insulated and sheathed
1000V grade cable.
Page 3126 of 3884

Page 50 of 105
3.7.1.6 POWER SUPPLY CABLE (between Power Source & PDB).
Power supply cable between Power source & CP System DB shall be 300mm2 / 50mm2, stranded
Aluminium conductor, 4-core, Aluminium wire armoured, PVC insulated & sheathed 1000 V grade
cable.
3.7.1.7 EARTHING CABLE
Earthing cable shall be 35mm2 , stranded Aluminium conductor, 1-core unarmoured, PVC
insulated and sheathed 1000V grade cable.
3.7.1.8 REFERENCE CELL / MEASUREMENT CABLE BETWEEN REFERENCE CELL UG Vessel

TO CJB CUM TEST STATION
2
Instrumentation cable, 4mm , 1-core, stranded copper conductor, PE/PVC insulated and PVC
sheathed, screened and armoured cable, PE/PVC insulation of each core shall be Numbered or
colour coded for easy identification of each core.
3.7.1.9 REFERENCE CELL / MEASUREMENT CABLE BETWEEN CJB TO MJB & MJB TO TRU
Instrumentation cable, 2.5mm2, 10-core, stranded copper conductor, PE/PVC insulated and PVC
3.7.1.10 REFERENCE CELL / MEASUREMENT CABLE BETWEEN MJB & RTU
3.7.1.11 REFERENCE CELL / MEASUREMENT CABLE BETWEEN TRU & RTU
3.7.1.13 POWER SUPPLY CABLE BETWEEN PDB TO RTU FOR CENTRAL MONITORING
Power supply cable between PDB to RTU for central monitoring shall be 16mm2, stranded
Aluminum conductor, 3-core, Aluminium wire armoured, PVC insulated and sheathed 1000V
grade cable.
3.7.1.14 CABLE DRUMS
All cables to be supplied in wooden drums. Cable lengths in each cable drum shall be 600m (min.)
wherever cable lengths are more than 600m.
Page 3127 of 3884

Page 51 of 105
3.7.1.15 INSPECTION
All cables along with manufacturer's test certificate as per IS standards shall be inspected by
OWNER/EIL at the vendor's shop before dispatch. Minimum 15 days advance notice to be
furnished by vendor for this purpose. In case of any doubt OWNER/EIL may insist vendor to
conduct the tests as per IS standards in presence of OWNER/ EIL at vendor’s work shop or some
third party reputed laboratory approved by OWNER/ EIL at no extra cost.
3.7.1.16 CABLE IDENTIFICATION
For easy identification of cable, the over sheath of the cable should have yellow colour and "CP
SYSTEM CABLES" should be printed using black colour at one meter interval throughout the
length of the cable.
Page 3128 of 3884

Page 52 of 105
3.8 JOB SPECIFICATION FOR CALCINED PETROLEUM COKE BREEZE

FOR CP SYSTEM
Page 3129 of 3884

Page 53 of 105
3.8 SPECIFICATION FOR CALCINED PETROLEUM COKE BREEZE
Calcined Petroleum Coke Breeze shall conform to the following specifications as per latest NACE-
SP 0572 std .
A Chemical Composition:
Moisture (on Dry Basis) < 0.1 (% by mass)
Fixed Carbon Minimum 99.0 (% by mass)
B Bulk density 1000 Kg/m3 to 1200 Kg/m3
C Real density 2.03 gm/cc
D Particle Size 1.00mm (max.), Dust free
E Resistivity 0.1 ohm-cm. at 150 PSI.
3.8.1 Test Certificates
Test Certificate shall be furnished for the following:
1. Make of coke breeze

2. Batch no.
3. Chemical composition
4. Bulk density and Real density
5. Particle size analysis
6. Resistivity( ohm-Cm.) at 150 psi compaction
Any delivery effected without prior approval of test certificate by EIL/ Owner will be at
suppliers risk & cost.
Above mentioned specification for coke breeze shall be considered for MMO tubular anodes incase
required for supplementary design, the coke breeze to be considered for MMO wire anode may be
of make as per the anode manufacturer’s choice meeting the requirements of the specifications
mentioned above.
Page 3130 of 3884

Page 54 of 105
3.9 JOB SPECIFICATION FOR THERMIT WELDING FOR CP SYSTEM
Page 3131 of 3884

Page 55 of 105
3.9.1 Thermit Weld Connection:
All cable-to-pipe connections shall be made utilizing the exothermic weld process. All
thermit weld connections shall be encapsulated with thermit weld cap and flood coating
of coal tar enamel. Each thermit weld connection will basically require the following
equipment of ERICO make:
- Thermit weld mold vertical/ horizontal

- Thermit weld metal
- Thermit weld cap Steel disc.
- Copper sleeve
- Flint Igniter
- Mold Cleaner
- Mold Packing
- Coal tar enamel/ two part epoxy resin for encapsulation of the joint.
Page 3132 of 3884

Page 56 of 105
3.10 MATERIALS/ EQUIPMENT FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF CP

SYSTEM
Page 3133 of 3884

Page 57 of 105
3.10 Materials/ Equipment for Operation and Maintenance of CP System
Following materials/ equipment shall be supplied by the CP System Contractor for operation and
maintenance of CP system.
S.No. Quantity Description
1.0 1 No. Digital Multimeter having minimum input resistance 10 Mohm,

complete with leads and leather case (BECKMANN, FLUKE,
MOTWANE or equivalent make.
2.0 10 Nos. Reference electrodes: Portable Copper/ Copper sulphate type

having PVC SCH 40 body with transparent window and
threaded ceramic porous plug of MC Miller/ Tinker Rasor/ BORIN
(USA)/ PERMACELL/ HARCO (USA) or equivalent make
suitable for 15-40 deg.C temperature application in sand.
3.0 1 No. DC Clipon ammeter in milliamp. / micro amp. range current

measurement of Megger (USA) make.
Page 3134 of 3884

Page 58 of 105
3.11 SPECIFICATION FOR PAINTING CORROSION PROTECTION FOR JUNCTION

BOXES, PDB, CABLE MARKERS AND JUNCTION BOXES
SUPPORT STRUCTURES
Page 3135 of 3884

Page 59 of 105
3.11.1.0 Corrosion Protection for Junction boxes, PDB, Cable markers and junction Boxes support
structures
All junction Boxes in Non-classified area, PDB and their support structures, MS channels for T/R mounting
if any, cable marker Posts shall be galvanized & painted in following manner.
i) Surface preparation
Grit/shot Blasted to SA2 1/2 as per Swedish standard SIS 055900
ii) Galvanizing
Hot dip or spray galvanized to achieve a minimum zinc thickness of 150μm.
iii) Primer Application
Etch Primer with 10 μ DFT based on Polyvinyl Butyral resin + 1 coat of epoxy zinc phosphate primer @40 μ
DFT/coat
iv) Paint Application
1 Coat of 2 Pack high build epoxy with Polyamide hardener cure @100 μ DFT/coat followed by 1 Top coat
of Acrylic Polyurethane finish paint @40 μ DFT/coat.
Primer & Paint application procedure shall be standard airless spray and as per paint manufacturer's
procedure. Name of Paint manufacturer and product should be approved by EIL prior to application. Colour
of top coat shall be yellow or grey as per choice of EIL/ OWNER.
3.11.1.1 MS covers for shallow vertical Beds shall be painted with 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint of
Asian Paint/Berger or equivalent make. Colour of paint shall be yellow.
Page 3136 of 3884

Page 60 of 105
3.12 CENTRAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 3137 of 3884

Page 61 of 105
CENTRAL MONITORING & CONTROL SYSTEM (RMC)
3.12.1 Computerized Central Monitoring and Control is required for the CP System for each unit/ item
to be protected. For this purpose, the T/R unit & permanent reference cells should be connected
to Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) consisting of microprocessor based CPS controller with alpha-
numeric LCD display, memory, real time clock, keypad, battery backup and communication ports
or equivalent PLC-SCADA system.
 RTU/PLC system shall be capable to process minimum 8 analogue input signals (including
one each for TR Unit output current & voltage), 4 digital input signals, 2 analogue output
signals and 1no. digital output signal for monitoring performance of each TR Unit which
shall be considered for structure/ equipment protection
 In addition to this some digital and analog (input ) signal should also be kept as 20 % spare
capacity.
 Single or multiple RTU/PLC system may be provided for monitoring and control of all
TR unit output and monitoring of potential for structures.
Thus considering few spares minimum analogue inputs, digital inputs, digital outputs and analogue
outputs to be processed by each RTU/ PLC system is to be designed by vendor for review /
approval by EIL/ OWNER. The system should also have inbuilt mechanisms to reduce / nullify
induced AC interference voltages.
The RTU/ PLC Unit shall also be provided with 1 No. digital output for switching operation for TR
Unit. This output shall be used to turn the rectifier OFF and ON for depolarised and instant "OFF"
readings. The rectifier shall have in-built facility to accept these signals and interrupt its output
supply. The digital input/ output channels shall be optically isolated. The RTU/PLC should include a
GPS based time synchronization unit for measurement of true OFF potential readings.
Further, RTU/ PLC shall be provided with 1 or 2 analogue output that can be used for controlling the
various modes of the TR unit for remote control.
The RTU/ PLC should be capable of generating alarms when the parameter limits are violated and
it should communicate the alarm data in real time and should not wait for the monitoring software
query. The field RTU/PLC units will have capability to control & monitor the T/R unit Voltage/
Current/ PSP & Current interruption by means of commands from the Central Monitoring
Panel(CMP). The operator will be in a position to set all the parameters of T/R unit like DC
Voltage, DC current, T/R unit current interruption timings/ schedules from the Central Monitoring
Panel (CMP).
All CP System parameters shall be monitored and controlled from central control room using
suitable software. The communication link between the RTU /PLC and Central monitoring and
Control station should be cost effective GSM based wireless technology or RS485 fiberoptic/
Copper communication, whichever is decided by EIL/ OWNER as the communication network. CP
System Sub-contractor should design, procure and install the requisite communication system and
the cables required for this purpose.
Page 3138 of 3884

Page 62 of 105
Central monitoring and Control station computer to be provided by the CP System sub- contractor
shall consist of standalone computer suitable for CP monitoring application with following minimum
specifications:
 Intel Core 2, I-7 (seven) processor

 Genuine Windows latest operating system with License
 8 GBRAM
 500 GB HDD
 24in Flat Panel LCD Color Monitor
 DVD Rom
 Intel Integrated 100/ 1000 Ethernet Network Card
 1 Serial, 4 USB Ports

 MS SQL Server Latest
 A3 Laser jet printer (HPmake)
 Inbuilt UPS system which can operate up to 30 minutes on full load in case of power failure
 Other standard accessories
CP System sub-contractor shall also provide necessary Software for Remote Monitoring & Control
as well as for printing of CP reports. The software should be compatible to Windows format and
MS SQL Server or Oracle database (10g) with proper License should be used.
3.12.2 Remote Monitoring & Controlling Central Control System
The software and hardware for the proposed SCADA system shall have a proven track record of
minimum three years of successful operation in the field of CP monitoring and shall be procured
from the existing system supplier M/S CIMCON Software (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Ahmadabad) or M/S
Raychem RPG Ltd., Mumbai, Siemens, Allen-Bradley, SIEMENS, SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC,
KRISTRON SYSTEMS MUMBAI or equivalent make subject to approval by EIL/ OWNER.
The Remote Monitoring & Control Panel (RMCP) shall have a Data Acquisition and
Control Hardware operating in Real Time on PC having minimum specification mentioned in item
3.12.1
A Front End Communication Module (FEC) is also required that will be responsible for managing
the entire communication traffic between the RMCP and RTU/ PLC.
The T/R Unit Output DC Voltage, DC Current, Reference Electrode Voltages, Alarms are to be
extended to RMCP Panel through RTU/PLC units by any of the cost effective communication
network such as GSM based wireless technology/ RS485/ fibreoptic/ copper communication
whichever is decided by EIL/ OWNER as the communication network for data downloading and
remote monitoring & control from master control room.
Each T/R Unit shall accept set point signals for DC Voltage and DC Current from Remote
Monitoring & Controlling Panel and accordingly shall control its output from 0 to 100%.
Page 3139 of 3884

Page 63 of 105
 REMOTE MONITORING SYSTEM - SOFTWARE:
The Remote Monitoring and Control System shall monitor and control various process parameters
of Cathodic protection system. The Monitoring software shall be user friendly, Windows compatible,
and should allow easy data transfer to other windows based applications or custom
applications having ODBC compliant database. The Software shall have built-in graphic
package to display graphical representation of the process on-screen with embedded buttons
for switching ON/ OFF TR units. Data security should be ensured through three different
types of Access Levels namely Expert, Supervisory and Operator. It should have provisions to
accommodate future need of addition of new TRs for equipments & piping as may be required from
time to time.
The software shall be compatible for interfacing of the available CP System monitoring data on
LAN at 10 No. nodes for management information system for access and reporting for the
management. The monitoring software should be capable of generating notification & visual alarm,
as and when signals go outside programmed set points and during RTU/PLC failure and TR Unit
input power failure. It should generate customized reports as decided by EIL/ OWNER. The
software shall allow configuration of emails of OWNERS employees who are responsible for
maintenance.
 Remote Terminal Unit – specifications:
Sl Parameter Specifications
No
1 Model As per manufacturer
2 Local display & Local Keypad The RTU shall consist of a 3 x 6 matrix membrane
keypad and a 16 x 2 LCD Display with back-lighting for
entering local settings and viewing TR parameters
locally.
Following Local settings can be done using the Key Pad

& Display :
Setting Date/ Time

Setting Periodic Logging Interval
Setting of Scaling factor for DC shunt rating
Setting levels for various Alarm notifications
Setting Field ID.
Page 3140 of 3884

Page 64 of 105
The LCD will normally display
 TR Voltage
 TR Current
 Reference Potential
 AC supply Voltage

The RTU/ PLC should be able to be remotely configured for
most of the above parameters from the central station.
3 Programmable Periodic Interval The Periodic Logging & Broadcast interval is

programmable from 1 reading per 5 Minutes to 1 reading in
24 hours.
4 CPU
Micro controller based latest generation design.
Built-in Real Time Clock ( +/- 1 minute accuracy over one
month)
Watch dog timer which provides a reset signal to the CPU
if not toggled due to any hardware or software failure to
ensure fail safe operation.
5 Local Memory The RTU/ PLC will have sufficient local NVRAM memory
to store the monitored data locally. Logged Data shall also be
stored in the internal non-volatile Memory of RTU.
About 30,000 total Data readings should be able to be

stored without downloading.
The locally stored data should be retained for upto10 years

without external power to RTU/PLC.
It will be possible to download the locally stored RTU data on a

field Laptop reader through the local communication port in the
RTU/ PLC whenever desired.
6 Analog Inputs for each TR Unit- Fully differential Inputs, 12bit /16-bit resolution
( 8 T/R Unit parameters viz Should nullify the effect of AC interferences.
 DC Voltage High accuracy, High Impedance, with high common mode
 DC Current rejection ratio CMRR.
 Ref. Cell Potential (5 No.)
 AC supply Voltage CH-1: 0 – 100V DC (For DC Output Voltage)
+ spare )
CH-2: 0 - 100mV DC (For DC Output Current through
T/R shunt)
CH-3 to 7: -5.0V to +5.0 V DC (For 5 No. Reference

potential)
CH-8: 0 - 300V AC (For AC supply Voltage Monitoring)
Page 3141 of 3884

Page 65 of 105
7 Digital Inputs for Alarm generation. 24/12 VDC operated.

As required by design Local LED indication.
shall also continuously scan and check for Alarm conditions
listed below
Following Alarms will be generated using Digital Inputs :
 Diode/Output Fuse Fail

 Unit Working in Remote Mode
 Unit working in Local Mode
Following Additional alarms will be generated by Software :
 Input AC Supply Fail

 Under Protection for Each Ref Electrode
 Over Protection for Each Ref Electrode
 Reference Fail for Each Ref Electrode
The set parameters for the above alarm conditions can be

programmed remotely through the central PC
8 Analog Control Outputs for T/R 4-20mA / 0-5VDC / 0-10 VDC with isolation of 2500Vrms.
unit control Resolution – 12 Bit
As required by design
9 Digital Output – 1 No. SSR outputs relay
2500 V RMS optical Isolation.
For T/R unit Current Interruption Contact rating 2A@ 240 V AC/ 1A @200 V DC On /
off delay times 3 msec.
Local LED status
10 Communication Through GSM based wireless technology or fibre optic./ Fibre

Optics network for broadcasting data to the Central Station at
the programmed periodic interval. E-mail message facility for
abnormal condition notification.
11 GPS Interface Each RTU/ PLC will have built-in GPS module to synchronise the
RTC to GPS time. This will ensure uniform
real time for all the RTU/ PLCs.
12 Power Supply 230V + 20%AC, 50 Hz

 20V to 70V DC
 12 VDC
(Any one type as required by design)
13 Battery Backup Battery Back-up for up to 2 Hrs of un-interrupted operation
including E-mail transmission, in the event of failure of AC
supply.
14 Communication Ports As required by design
15 Protection Short Circuit Protection

Surge Protection using MOV.
Over Voltage protection
EMI / EMC protection
Page 3142 of 3884

Page 66 of 105
16 Mounting Preferably inside TR Unit if not possible then Wall / Pole

mounting
17 Operating Temperature range 0 to 55 deg C
18 Humidity 95% condensing
19 Time Stamping The RTU/ PLC shall have precise, accurate Real Time
Clock (RTC) for exact time stamping of data.
20 Enclosure The RTU/ PLC shall be housed in a compact & sturdy non
corroding enclosure suitable for installation inside
the shed common for all TR units. ABS / M.S. With IP 55 degree of
protection
Mounting : Either mounting inside each TR unit or

common for all TR unit located under
a single shed with Plinth mounting
arrangement.
Cable Entry : From Bottom

21 Data DownloadPort The RTU/ PLC Unit shall have USB port through which the
logged data can be downloaded onto the laptop.
22 Centralised Monitoring The RTU/ PLC shall have built-in fibre optic modem to
communicate with the central station Through RS485 over
Fibre Optics Communication network.
The RTU / PLC shall send the TR Data with exact time stamp
directly to the Master Computer at central station at the
programmed Periodic Interval. At the central end a PC shall
be installed with a fibre optic Front End Communication (FEC)
module and centralized monitoring software.
The RTU shall also send alarm information with exact time
stamp to the central station Periodic Interval.
The PC software shall accept the data received from the RTU/
PLC, display it in graphical and analytical formats and store it
in database like MS ACCESS or SQL to generate Reports
and Graphs.
It shall also possible to remotely program the Field RTU/ PLC

Unit through the Central PC for configuration details like
Setting Date/Time, Setting/ changing Periodic Interval . PC

software should be able to monitor and receive data from
up to 50 field RTU/ PLC at a time.
23 Compliance Relevant BIS/ IEC EMI/ EMC standards
Page 3143 of 3884

Page 67 of 105
3.12.3 Reports
The software should generate reports, which can be viewed as well as printed as listed
below:
i) A monthly report showing readings from every system. The reports shall highlight
readings outside limits and systems, which did not call.
ii) A single page report yearly report for each remote monitoring. This shall be used to show
the monthly readings for each site.
iii) Alarm Reports: This particular report shall give all information about the alarms, which
occurred in any abnormal conditions.
iv) Report information shall be compatible with standard spread sheet programs.
v) All above reports of different type should be available in graphical
presentation, on screen and printer.
vi) Scaling and calibration of analogue channel can be done by use of supplier Editor
Software.
3.12.4 DATA BASE SECURITY
Database shall be in the form of SQL Server. The version of SQL shall be latest with
proven track. Following security features shall be provided in the server software:
 Roles
 Fixed Server Roles
 Fixed Database Roles
 User-Defined Roles
 Application Roles
 Granting and Denying Permissions to Users and Roles
 Ownership Chains
 Cross-database ownership chaining
 Use of Security Identifiers
 Object Level Security Implementation
 Several levels of auditing of both events and states
 Support for SSL implementation
 Remote Administration - Secured Terminal Services
Over and above the above features, the software supplied by the vendor shall broadly
have following essential features to access the database as applicable.
 Group Creation
 UserCreation
 User Group Allocation
 Password Aging Period
 Maximum Failure Attempts
 Failure Notifications
 Enable - Disable Account Status
Page 3144 of 3884

Page 68 of 105
 Template Based security settings

 e-Signature
 Audit Trail
 Access Level Based on the operation
 Access Security Based on Object / User
 Roles and Reasons
 Audit Trail Query Builder
 Password Masking
 Automatic Application Lock out
3.12.5 DESIGN REVIEW:
CP System sub-contractor should prepare detailed engineering package for central monitoring
and control system along with schematic drawings and equipment/ materials list including
make/ model of the same and get the same approved by EIL/ OWNER before procurement/
execution.
3.12.6 INSPECTION
The prototype inspection along with simulation tests shall be done at specialist agency's office /
workshop by EIL/ OWNER before the dispatch of the equipment and materials at site. For this
purpose CP System sub-contractor should furnish notice to EIL/ OWNER minimum 15 days
before the date of inspection.
.
Page 3145 of 3884

Page 69 of 105
3.13 SPECIFICATION FOR SOIL RESISTIVITY TEST
Page 3146 of 3884

Page 70 of 105
3.13.1 SCOPE
The scope of this standard is to conduct the following tests within a plant complex:
 Soil/ sand resistivity up to 10m depth to be measured using W enner's 4-pin method in UG
Vessel pit.
3.13.2 OBJECTIVE
The objective of the tests given by Para 1.0 is to assess the corrosiveness of the soil/ sand & to
decide suitable locations for anode beds for CP System for prevention of external
corrosion of UG Vessel within a plant complex.
3.13.3 SOIL RESISTIVITY TEST
In general soil resistivity tests covered by this specification shall unless otherwise specified, be in
line with the requirements of BS CP 1021. W herever the requirements in this specification are in
conflict with the above standard, the requirements under this specification shall be binding.
3.13.3.1 SOIL RESISTIVITY TEST BY WENNER 4-PIN METHOD
Soil resistivity by W enner 4-Pin method to be conducted at 4 anode bed locations as per
instructions of EIL, at each location soil resistivity readings to be taken for 2m, 4m, 6m &10m
depth for distributed anode beds.
ρ= 2πAR
Where, ρ = Soil resistivity in ohm-cm
A = Inter electrode spacing in cm
R = Resistance observed from soil resistivity meter in ohm.
While inserting electrodes in soil for taking soil resistivity care should be taken to make good
contact of electrodes with the soil, for this purpose limited watering may be required at the
electrode penetration points wherever soil is dry or less compact. The depth of penetration of
electrodes should not exceed 1/10th of the electrode spacing.
3.13.3.2 CALIBRATION OF SOIL RESISTIVITY METER
Soil resistivity meter should be calibrated at a reputed laboratory before use. The calibration
certificate must be furnished to ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE for approval of the meter before use of
the same for soil resistivity test at site.
3.13.4.0 REPORT PREPARATION
All soil resistivity readings shall be typed and presented in a tabular form giving co-ordinates and
other location reference of each test locations & depth of each reading. The soil resistivity is to be
expressed in ohm-cm.
Six copies each of soil resistivity report to be furnished to OWNER/ EIL for record.
Page 3147 of 3884

Page 71 of 105
4.0 MANDATORY SPARES FOR CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 3148 of 3884

Page 72 of 105
4.0 The Bidder shall supply the following spares for all T/R unit:
- D.C. Voltmeter Nos. 1

- D.C. Ameter Nos. 1
- A.C. Voltmeter Nos. 1
- A.C. Ammeter Nos. 1
- Diodes Nos. 5
- SCR's Nos. 5
- D.C. Fuses for output side Nos. 10
- HRC fuse for Diodes Nos. 10
- A.C. fuses for input side Nos. 10
- D.C. Lightening arrestor Nos. 5
- A.C. Circuit breaker (MCB) Nos. 5
- Electronic Control Cards each type Nos. 5
- Filter circuit capacitor Nos. 5
- Signal light assembly for annunciation Nos. 5
- R.C. Surge Diverter Nos. 5
- Control transformer Nos. 5
- Coarse voltage control switch Nos. 5
- Coarse current control switch Nos. 5
- Fine voltage control switch Nos. 5
- Fine current control switch Nos. 5
- Auto Manual Mode selector switch Nos. 5
- Toggle switches Nos. 5
- Assorted Glass cartridge fuses set. 15
Page 3149 of 3884

Page 73 of 105
Annexure-1
Page 3150 of 3884

Page 3151 of 3884
SPECIFICATION FOR CATHODIC STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR 6-45-0032 REV. 0
UNDERGROUND VESSELS Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
AJB Anode Junction Box
CEA Central Electricity Authority
CIMFR Central Institute of Mines and Fuel Research
CJB Cathode Junction Box
CPPSM Cathodic Protection Power Supply Module
CPTR Cathodic Protection Transformer Rectifier
CTE Coal tar enamel
Cu/CuSO4 Copper/Copper Sulphate
DC Direct Current
ERTL Electronics Regional Testing Laboratory
FBE Fusion Bonding Epoxy
HV High Voltage
HMWPE High Molecular Weight Poly Ethelene
IS Indian Standards
µA/mm2 Micro-ampere per square millimeter
mA/mm2 Milli-ampere per square millimeter
MMO Mixed Metal Oxide
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
PDB Power Distribution Board
PE Polyethylene
RMU Remote Monitoring Unit
VDR Vendor Data Requirement
VSP Vessel to Sand Potential
Electrical Standards Committee
Convenor: Mr. BR Bhogal
Members: Ms. Sumita Anand

Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. MK Sahu
Ms. NS Bhattacharya
Ms. NP Guha (Projects)
Mr. Saeed Akhtar (Inspection)
Page 3152 of 3884

CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS 4
3.0 SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION 4
4.0 CORROSION SURVEY 5
5.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN PARAMETERS 5
6.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA 7
7.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION EQUIPMENTS 8
Page 3153 of 3884

1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the philosophy to be adopted for the design and engineering of the
cathodic protection system for the underground Vessels (external surface) including corrosion
survey of the electrolyte (sand).
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
i) NACE : SP-0285 Corrosion Control of Underground Storage

Tank Systems by Cathodic Protection
ii) BS : EN 13636:2004, Cathodic Protection of Buried

Metallic Tanks and Related Piping
iii) VDE : 0150, protection against corrosion due to stray

currents from DC installations.
iv) IS/ IEC: 60079 : Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmosphere
v) IS/ IEC: 60529 : Classification of Degree of Protection Provided by

Enclosures
vi) OISD-GDN-180 : Lightning Protection
2.2 The equipment shall also confirm the provisions of CEA regulations and other statutory
regulations currently in force in the country.
2.3 In case of imported equipments, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
statutory regulations, the most stringent requirement shall prevail and Owner’s/EIL’s decision
in this regard shall be final and binding.
3.0 SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION
All work to be performed and supplies to be effected as a part of CP system shall require
specific review by Owner or his authorized representative. Major activities requiring review
shall include but not be limited to those mentioned in vendor data requirement (VDR) form
attached with MR/Tender.
Page 3154 of 3884

4.0 CORROSION SURVEY
4.1 General
4.1.1 The corrosion survey includes the measurement of sand resistivity survey and chemical
analysis for design of CP system which shall be carried out by Contractor. The corrosion
survey shall also include collection of additional data as required for completeness of the job.
4.1.2 To carry out sand resistivity measurement, Wenner’s 4-pin method or an equivalent soil/sand
box method approved by Owner/ Owner’s representative shall be used. Survey instruments
shall have maximum AC and DC ground current rejection feature.
4.1.3 Care shall be taken to ensure that the resistivity readings are not influenced by the presence of
foreign structures/piping, and earth currents (if any) etc.
4.2 Report
On completion of all field work, a report incorporating all the results generated from surveys
and details of additional data collected (e.g. nearby structures, details of hazardous area
classification, location proposed for CPTR units, power source details etc.) shall be prepared.
The report shall also contain detailed interpretation of survey results and resistivity data, to
form a design basis for cathodic protection. This report shall also include various drawings
prepared in connection with the above work. Soil resistivity values shall be plotted on semi-
log graph sheets.
5.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN PARAMETERS
A distinctly independent impressed current cathodic protection system shall be provided to

protect the external surfaces the underground Vessel as specified.
Unless otherwise stated in the data sheets, the following parameters shall be used for design of
permanent cathodic protection system:
5.1 Protection Current Density Range : 10-30 mA/m2

(at 25 0C operating temperature)
5.2 If operating temperatures of Bullet exceed 25 deg. C, protective current density shall be
corrected @ 0.5mA/ m2/ deg. C.
5.3 Sand resistivity : 200 Ohm-m
5.4 Vessel natural potential : (-) 0.45 V (w.r.t. Cu/CuSO4 ref. cell)
5.5 Anode : MMO wire anode
5.6 Current capacity of anode : 30 mA/m
5.7 Design life of CP system : 30 years, unless specified elsewhere
Page 3155 of 3884

5.8 Anode ground bed loop resistance : 1 Ohm (max.)

including anode to ground resistance,
anode and cathode cable resistances
5.9 Scheme for Cathodic Protection System of a Vessel
5.9.1 Each Vessel’s CP system shall be independent and exclusive. The scheme defined below shall
be applicable.
5.9.2 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection (CP) System shall be provided for sand side corrosion
prevention of Vessel external surface.
5.9.3 Anodes employed for CP System of vessels shall be mixed metal oxide coated on titanium
wire anode, piggyback connected with anode lead cable, factory pre-packed with coke breeze.
5.9.4 The anode strings shall be located around the Vessel. Specific installation requirements of
String Anode shall be as follows:
 Anode strings shall be distributed in loops and shall be installed in the sand cushion
surrounding the Vessel at a separation distance of 1000mm from the Vessel surface.
 Separation distance between consecutive String anode loops (vertical separation) shall be
uniform and shall be limited to maximum 1000 mm.
 Two consecutive anode loops shall be connected to different AJBs located opposite-along
the Vessel centreline.
 The above anode distribution is based on the assumption that temperature of the sand in
pit at 1000mm distance from Vessel surface shall be below 75 deg.C
5.9.5 Highest of number/length of anodes calculated as per design parameters defined under clause
5.1 to 5.8 and that worked out as per clause 5.9.4 shall be provided.
5.9.6 Free ends of each string anode shall be terminated to AJB through loop connection.
5.9.7 Cathodic Protection Transformer-Rectifier unit (CPTR Unit) of suitable rating (25V/25A or
50V/50A or 75V/75A) shall be installed to energize the anode strings for Vessels.
5.9.8 CPTR Unit shall have two outgoing positive header cables, which shall be terminated to 2 nos.
AJBs to be installed on opposite sides of the Vessel along its Centerline (TL-TL).
5.9.9 CPTR Unit shall have one out going negative header cable, which shall be connected to
cathode junction box (CJB) located near Vessel for the drainage connection and potential
measurement.
5.9.10 Two drainage cables and two measurement cables from each vessel shall be terminated to its
CJB.
Page 3156 of 3884

5.9.11 Minimum 5 no.s Cu/CuSO4 Permanent Reference cells shall be provided for each vessel
which shall be able to measure the complete potential profile of the Vessel.
5.9.12 Power supply for the CPTR Unit shall be drawn from the nearest Substation.
5.9.13 The reference cell cables and the measurement cables from each Vessel shall be routed
through the respective Monitoring Junction Box (MJB).
5.9.14 If required, a MJB may be integrated with CJB and a single/composite Cathode junction box
cum Reference cell junction box (CRJB) may be provided.
5.9.15 The CPTR unit shall preferably have the built-in RMU module. In case RMU is not integral
part of CPTR unit, then a separate RMU panel may be provided and both the equipments
(CPTR Unit and RMU) shall be connected with communication cables for status monitoring
and control purpose.
5.9.16 For monitoring of Vessel to sand potentials, monitoring cables of reference cells shall be laid
between MJB and CPTR unit & RMU. For CPTR unit at least three reference cells shall be
connected and for RMU all the Reference cell cables shall be connected.
5.9.17 All Cable laying shall be done on existing cable route which shall be overhead cable trays/
cable trenches wherever possible. Underground Cable laying in paved/ unpaved areas shall be
done through RCC trench/directly buried trenches respectively, wherever overhead cable
trays/ cable trenches are not available.
5.9.18 Connection of drainage cables and measurement cables to the Vessel shall be done by Thermit
welding.
5.9.19 Minimum 3 no’s of perforated HDPE pipes surrounding the Vessel shall be installed for
measuring potential using portable reference cells. The HDPE pipe shall be covered with
geotextile cloth and shall be of 75mm diameter, slotted of 50 mm (2 inch) in length 0.15 mm
width, 4 kg/cm2 pressure rating, sealed at one end.
6.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA
6.1 The Vessel to sand potential (VSP) measurements shall be between (-) 0.85V (OFF) and
(-) 1.20V (OFF) with respect to a Cu/CuSO4 reference electrode.
6.2 A minimum polarization shift of (-) 100 millivolts can be accepted as an adequate level of
cathodic protection for the Vessel with the approval of Owner in exceptional cases. Discretion
to use any of the criteria shall solely rest with owner/owner’s representative.
6.3 A positive potential swing of 50 millivolts or more shall be considered sufficient to indicate
of mitigation measures.
Page 3157 of 3884

7.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION EQUIPMENTS
7.1 The system shall include the following major equipment/ sub-systems unless otherwise
specified in project specifications:
- Power Distribution Board

- CPTR units.
- Remote monitoring unit
- MMO Anodes
- Anode junction box
- Cathode junction box
- Measurement Junction box
- Permanent reference cells
- Cables
7.2 All equipment shall be new and procured from EIL approved manufacturers. Equipment
offered shall be field proven. Equipment requiring specialized maintenance or operation shall
be avoided as far as possible. Prototype equipment shall not be accepted.
7.3 All equipment/ materials shall conform to the relevant specifications included in the tender
document.
7.4 The CPTR unit and RMU etc. shall be located in safe non-hazardous areas. However all
junction boxes shall be flame proof, Temperature class T3 (min.) & suitable for Gas Group
specified in datasheet.
7.5 The electrical and electronic equipments installed in hazardous area shall be flame proof type
and shall meet the requirements as per IS/ IEC: 60079 and shall be weather proof IP-65 as per
IS/IEC:60529.
7.6 Hazardous area certificate from CIMFR or equivalent test house of country of origin,
applicable PESO approval certificate, BIS license and original drawings referred in type test
certificate shall be shown to the Inspection agency during inspection. The Certificate and BIS
license must be valid at the time of dispatch.
7.7 Power Distribution Board
Power Distribution board (PDB) shall be provided incase multiple CPTR units are envisaged.
PDB shall be fed through 1 no. 415V±10%, 50Hz±3% TPN feeder from Owner’s substation
and shall have required no. of outgoing feeder rated for 240V, SPN or 415V, TPN feeders.
7.8 CP Transformer Rectifier Unit
The Cathodic Protection Transformer Rectifier Unit (CPTR unit) shall confirm to the
requirements mentioned in datasheet and shall be installed in non-hazardous area as specified
in data sheets.
Page 3158 of 3884

7.9 Anode Beds/Loops
Anodes shall be supplied complete with tail cables, which shall be long enough for
termination on their associated anode lead junction boxes without intermediate joints. Exact
lengths and termination details shall be indicated in construction drawings.
Potential gradient around the anodes shall be within safety requirements with regard to
interference on foreign structures and its effective boundary shall be defined.
7.10 MMO Anodes
Anodes shall be mixed metal oxide coated titanium wire anodes. The MMO wire anodes shall
be piggyback connected with anode lead cable, factory pre-packed with coke breeze. The
detail specification shall be as mentioned in data sheet.
All cable tails from individual anodes shall be terminated onto the respective anode junction
boxes, which shall be further connected to the positive cable coming from CP power source.
Each anode circuit in junction shall have provision for measurement and control of individual
circuit/anode current through variable resistors, shunts and links of suitable ratings.
Cathode junction box shall be provided near the Vessel for connection of the negative
drainage cables to the Vessel. The negative of the CP power source shall be connected to the
incoming circuit of the cathode junction box.
The incoming circuit and each out going circuits shall have provision for measurement and
control of current through variable resistors, shunts and links of suitable ratings.
7.13 Monitoring Junction Box
All the reference cells provided around the Vessel shall be connected to monitoring junction
boxes. Measurement and control cables from monitoring junction box shall be connected to
CPTR unit and RMU unit.
Unless otherwise agreed, High purity copper/copper sulphate reference cells with proven high
reliability shall be provided for stable Vessel to sand potential measurement.
7.15 Cables
7.15.1. All the Power Cables i.e. Cables from Power feeder to PDB, PDB to CPTR Unit, PDB to
RMU unit, and Positive/Negative Header cables shall be with annealed high conductivity
stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated, 650/1100 V grade, armoured, PVC sheathed
conforming to IS 1554 part-I.
Page 3159 of 3884

7.15.2. Anode lead cable shall be of 1CX16mm2 stranded copper conductor, 7 strands, insulated
(Refer Sr. no. 1 or Sr. no. 2 of Table-1), unarmoured, with a double insulation system. The
primary insulation shall be 0.04 inch thick irradiated cross-linked polyvinylidene floride
(PVDF) or Ethylene Chlorotrifloroethylene (ECTFE) 1100 Volt grade. The secondary
insulation shall be 0.065 inch thick HMWPE (Refer Sr. no. 3 of Table-1) sheathing jacket over
the primary insulation.
Table-1
Sr no. Insulation type Insulation Specification*
Tensile Break Streangth 4500 PSI (min)
polyvinylidene floride Break Elongation 50%
1. (PVDF) Irradiation cross Flexural Strength 8600 PSI (min)
linked Resistivity 2X1014 (min)
Dielectric Constant 8 (min) at 100Hz
Tensile Break Streangth 6500 PSI (min)
Ethylene
Break Elongation 100%
2. Chlorotrifloroethylene
Resistivity 1X1015 (min)
(ECTFE)
Dielectric Constant 2.5 (min) at 1MHz
Color Black
High Density Molecular Density 0.941 gm/cm3
3. Weight Polyethylene ASTM D1248, Type 3, Class C, Category 5 or IEC
(HMWPE) 60502-1
Temperature rating 90oC
* Standard Test Method ASTM D638 shall be used to determine the tensile strength, Flexural
Strength and Break Elongation. For the resistivity and dielectric contant tests, standard test
methods ASTM D257and ASTM D150 shall be utilized.
7.15.3. The cables for reference cells, potential measurements shall be of copper conductor, HMWPE
insulated, Aluminium backed by mylar/ polyster tape shielded, HMWPE sheathed, armoured,
HMWPE over all sheathed type.
Page 3160 of 3884

JOB SPECIFICATION (ELECTRICAL) DOCUMENT No.
FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
CLIENT : NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED Rev. A
JOB SPECIFICATION (ELECTRICAL)
P/L Laying & Terminal Works for IBFPL

(ELECTRICAL)
(TENDER-2 (PART-C)
PROJECT INDIA BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP P/L
CLIENT NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED
CONSULTANT ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
EIL JOB No. B185
Rev.
No
Page 3161 of 3884

FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
3.0 AREA CLASSIFICATION
4.0 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
5.0 STATUTORY APPROVAL OF WORKS
6.0 MAKES OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
7.0 ENGINEERING DRAWINGS, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND

INSTALLATION STANDARDS
8.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Page 3162 of 3884

FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
1.0 GENERAL
Introduction
The intent of this specification is to define the requirements for design, supply, erection,
testing and commissioning of the electrical system , viz. lighting, cabling, earthing,
lightning protection system, etc. for following stations for India Bangladesh Friendship
Pipeline Project which is a 130.361 km long transnational pipeline from the Siliguri
marketing Terminal (SMT) of the Numaligarh Refinery Limited (NRL) in India to the
Parbatipur depot of the Bangladesh Petroleum Corporation (BPC) in Bangladesh for
transportation of Gasoil (HSD).
The complete work of the IBFPL project has been divided into two parts Tender-1(
subdivided into Part-A and B) and Tender-2, (Part-C) as indicated below.
Tender-1 (Part-A):
Part-A consists of works at the following stations.
a)SMT Dispatch Terminal (Siliguri, India)

Tender-1(Part-B) :
Part-B consists of works at the following stations.
a) Sectionalizing valve station SV-1 CUM CTM (Custody transfer metering).
b) Sectionalizing valve station SV-2,SV-3.(Bangladesh)
Tender-2 (Part-C) :
Part-C consists of works at the following station.
a) Sectionalizing valve stations SV-4 & SV-5 CUM Tap off station, Bangladesh.
b) Parbatipur Receipt Terminal, Bangladesh.

Refer schematic arrangement of pipeline facility attached elsewhere in this tender for
better clarity.
1.1.1 The electrical portion for composite works as covered in this specification
includes design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
electrical system pipeline and station facilities for Tender-2 Part-C as per
description given in this document and other associated documents enclosed
with this tender, taking statutory approvals and energizing the system.
1.1.2 The work shall be carried out to the best workmanship like manner, in
conformity with these specifications, approved drawings/ construction
drawings and the instructions of the owner or Engineer-in-Charge from time to
time.
1.1.3 The contract shall include clearing of temporary constructions, waste materials
and loose earth, which might get collected in and nearby the work site during
execution of work and after final completion.
Page 3163 of 3884

FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
1.2 Standards
1.2.1 The work shall be performed in conformity with these specifications and code
of practices of the Bureau of Indian Standards. In case of any conflict, the
following shall be the priority:-
Data sheet
This specification
Standard specification/standard
1.2.2 In addition, the work shall also conform to the requirements of the following:
a) The Indian Electricity Act and rules framed there under.
b) The fire insurance Regulations.
c) The regulations laid down by the Factory Inspector.
d) The regulations laid down by the Chief Controller of Explosives.
e) The regulations laid down by Oil Industries Safety Directorate (OISD).
f) Any other regulations laid down by the Central, State or Local Authorities
from time to time during the execution of this contract.
g) The petroleum Rule Bangladesh 2018
1.3 Guarantee
The contractor shall guarantee the installation for satisfactory operation against any
defects of workmanship and materials (supplied by the contractor) for a period as
specified elsewhere. Any damage or defect connected with the erection of materials,
equipments or fittings supplied by the contractor that may be discovered at the time of
issue of the completion certificate, or arise or come to light thereafter, shall be
rectified or replaced by the contractor at his own expense as deemed necessary and
as per the instruction of owner or Engineer-in-Charge within the time limit specified by
the owner or Engineer-in-Charge.
1.4 Site Condition

The equipment offered and the installation shall be suitable for continuous operation
under the site conditions mentioned in scope of work.
1.5 Utilisation voltage

The utilization voltages shall be as per scope of work.
1.6 SCOPE
The detailed scope of work consisting of scope of supply, scope of work, scope of
design & engineering and other miscellaneous services for the terminals have been
identified elsewhere in the tender document.
2.0 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Power Distribution Scheme for SV Stations(SV-4 & SV-5) Part-C
Refer Key Single line Diagram, Drg. No. B185-020-16-50-01001(Sheet1&2).

Power shall be received at each SV station through double pole mounted
100KVA(min), 11/0.400kV oil filled transformer. One (1) no. MV switchboard has
been envisaged in each SV stations which shall have both 400V TPN bus & 230 V
SPN bus. This grid incomer shall be connected with 400V bus.
Page 3164 of 3884

FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
One no. of 11 kV feeder from State Grid which stepped down to 0.4KV through
11KV/0.4 KV step down transformer (pole mounted). This complete set up shall be
made available by Owner at the battery limit of SV stations to meet the power
requirement at the SV Stations.
400V Incoming feeder through auto healthy phase selector switch and static voltage
regulator shall serve as incomer to 230V Single phase distribution board with single
phase outgoing feeders. Other incomer to Single phase distribution board shall be
from an single phase Emergency DG set. Both the incomer of single phase
distribution board shall be interconnected through auto mains fail changeover (AMF)
scheme.
All 3-phase loads such as tube well motor, welding receptacle, client’s load etc. shall
be connected with 400V bus.
To operate the single phase loads such as normal indoor/outdoor lighting, convenient
outlets, fire alarm/CO2 flooding system, battery charger, DG auxiliary power, client’s
load etc. 230 V bus section has been envisaged in the same switchboard. One no.
‘AUTO HEALTHY PHASE SELECTOR DEVICE WITH STATIC VOLTAGE
REGULATOR’ has been envisaged. This device shall be connected with 400V bus at
its input side & out put shall be connected with 230 V bus. Function of this device is to
select the healthy phase of R, Y or B (based on 400 V ± 6 % value) & its selection.
This 230 V bus shall also have the incomer from 230 V, 1-phase DG set. Min.
Capacity of this DG set has been calculated as 25KVA (continuous power) at site
condition.
48V / 24V DC system shall be provided for, SCADA, Telecom, Cathodic Protection
loads etc.
Power Distribution Scheme for Receipt Terminal Parbatipur Part-C

Refer Key Single line Diagram, Drg. No. B185-030-16-50-00001. One no. of 400V
feeder from Parbatipur 11 KV Substation shall be made available by Owner at
Parbatipur 11 KV Substation. Cable shall be laid from this Parbatipur 11 KV
Substation till Parbatipur RT substation (approx. 650 meter) and shall be utilized as
incoming feeder for MV switch board. The power shall be made available by M/s BPC
to MV switchboard.
The MV Switchboard shall have two bus sections.

Right Bus
The right bus section (fed from DG) of MV switchboard shall feed downstream
emergency loads such as Air conditioning for control room, UPS, emergency Lighting
loads, fire alarm system, PA system .other loads requiring emergency power.
Left Bus
The left bus section of MV switchboard shall feed downstream normal loads such as
sump pump , air conditioning for Control room , normal lighting/power, welding
receptacles etc.
One no. UPS (230V,AC) of 50 KVA rating (approx.) shall be provided to meet UPS
power requirements of Telecom/SCADA/Instrumentation, CP panel, critical lighting
etc. at receipt terminal.
Page 3165 of 3884

FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
Separate DC system is not envisaged in BPC RT station. Internal DC power pack

shall be provided in panel for any DC supply requirement.
Sub-station, control room, repeater building at all stations shall be located in safe
area. All the electrical equipments, which are located in hazardous area (Zone-1 /
Zone 2, Gas Group IIA/ IIB and Temp. class T3), shall be based on area classification
as per IS 5572, and as shown in the respective equipment specification/ particular
specification.
4.0 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

A. EOT CRANE
All Electrical equipment for hazardous area EOT Cranes shall be flameproof type
(Zone-2 Ex‘d’, T3) conforming to IEC-60079-1 / IEC-60079-0 suitable for gas group
IIA/IIB.
Only single point 415 V, 50Hz, TPN power supply feeder shall be made available for
EOT crane. Further distribution of power for motors, controls, interlocks, safety
devices, lighting etc. shall be included in bidder’s scope of work.
Bidder shall be solely responsible for selection and sizing of various electrical
devices. Selection, sizing and suitability of all components shall be bidder’s
responsibility and specified ratings shall be increased, if required, during detailed
engineering without any cost implication.
Bidder scope shall include all commissioning spares as required for commissioning of
complete electrical system of EOT package in his scope. Price of the commissioning
spares shall be included in the quoted prices of the crane.
Bidder shall furnish the list of recommended spares for two years of normal operation
and maintenance with unit price of such spares for each tag separately.
Recommended list of O&M spares for two years operation shall include the following
as a minimum for motors. Bidder shall ensure to quote for the same.
If the offered electrical equipment requires any special tools for maintenance, bidder
shall include all such tools for complete electric system for EOT Cranes. Price of
these special tools shall be included in the base price of the bidder.
Following document, for the flameproof equipment shall be furnished after order:
 Type test certificates from CIMFR (for indigenous equipment) or from
BASEFFA / PTB / CENELEC / LCIE / UL / FM (for imported equipment)
 Statutory Approval certificate from PESO
 Copy of valid BIS license for indigenous FLP equipment
For all imported electrical hazardous equipment, package bidder shall be required to
submit the approval of Indian Statutory Authority: - PESO, towards equipment
suitability for hazardous area application. All activities for obtaining such approval are
in bidder’s scope. The bidder shall submit these certificate post order.
Page 3166 of 3884

FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
Motors for EOT Crane
Motors shall comply with the attached EIL specification 6-51-0064 & 6-51-0094. All
motors shall be three-phase, squirrel cage, heavy-duty, reversible crane service type,
and TEFC induction motors.
Duty of motor shall be S4.
Bidder shall submit completely filled in motor data sheets separately for each motor.
MV motors (up to 415V) shall conform to EIL Specification 6-51-0064 and motor data
sheets attached with tender.
Bidder to note that, if there is any requirement of emergency electrical power for the
auxiliary equipments supplied with the main motor/pump, same shall be highlighted at
the bid stage only
Following clause-wise modifications / additions to standard specifications shall

applicable:
a) Specification for electrics of EOT Crane (EIL spec. no. 6-51-0094 Rev. 4):
i.Clause no. 6.5.1
ii. Modification: IP-51 shall be read as IP-55 (minimum)
b) Standard MR Specification for EOT Crane (EIL spec. no. 6-48-0301 Rev. 1):
i.Clause no. 6.0 Scope of Work (Page-10 of 20): S.No.1 (Bidder Scope), Sub
Clause no. 9
ii.Modification: High bay type lighting below the crane shall be read as LED type
flameproof lighting.
B. FLAMEPROOF MOV PDB
MOV PDB (415V, 125A, 50kA (1 sec) flame proof,shall be provided with 2 no.s of
incomers.
Bidder to note that MOV DB shall be installed at outdoor location near MOV’s.
Suitability of the DB from the point of view of installation, termination of cable etc.
shall be ensured by the bidder.
All the unused entries of MOV DBs and MOV junction boxes shall be as sealed with
flameproof nickel plated brass sealing plugs. Price of these shall be included in the
main price of the MOV PDB/junction boxes itself.
C. HV and MV cables
HV cables shall be Dry cured XLPE insulated, extruded PVC sheathed, armoured
type UE grade.
Single line to ground fault current [applicable for HV cables 11kV (UE) grade ] for
sizing of insulation screening shall be 0.6kA for 1 sec.
MV Cables shall be XLPE insulated, extruded PVC sheathed, armoured type.
Following outer sheath colour philosophy shall be followed for various type of cables:-
Page 3167 of 3884

FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
MV:
HV:
For Power & Control Cable:
Outer Sheath Colour For 3 Core: Yellow
Black
For Earthing: Green
D. LED Lighting Requirement

i. All lighting fixtures shall be supplied complete with associated LED lamp and
driver.
ii. LED Driver shall be suitable for surge protection upto 2 kV surges.
iii. LED lamps and Drivers shall be provided with min. 5 years warranty period.
iv. Minimum efficacy for all type of LED fixture shall be 100 lm/W.
v. All LED fixture life time (L70) shall be > 50000 hrs. at ambient temp of 40 deg C
vi. Flameproof LED type lighting fixtures shall fulfill the following requirements:
a) Power factor shall be >= 0.95.
b) For FIXTURE luminous efficacy shall be minimum 100 lumen per watt.
c) LED lamps and Drivers shall be provided with min. 5 years warranty period. Driver
shall have valid BIS certification and the same shall be furnished during drawing
review stage.
d) The LED light fixtures should be tested for luminous lux level as per IES-LM-79.
Type test certificates shall be furnished in compliance to same.
e) The LED’s used in the lighting fixtures should be tested for the service life as per
IES-LM-80. Type test certificates shall be furnished in compliance to same.
f) The LED Driver shall comply with the requirement of IEC 61347-2-13.
g) All fixtures shall be suitable for installation in Zone-1/Zone-2 areas. Flameproof
LED lighting fixtures shall comply with the requirement of IEC 60079-1 & 0.
h) Fixture life time (L70) shall be > 50000 hrs. at ambient temp of 40 deg C.
i) LED fixtures shall be complete with internal reflectors. No external reflector is
envisaged for LED.
j) LED Lighting fixture beam angle shall be 120 deg/ 90 deg depending upon fixture
location and mounting height.
k) Vendor shall indicate the following parameters as a minimum in fixture drawings:
- Offered Fixture Wattage and LED Wattage
- Actual Consumption of Fixture
- Driver Consumption
- Fixture Life time
- Luminous Efficacy of fixture
- Lumen Output of Fixture
- Tolerance for Voltage and wattage rating
- Power factor of Fixture
- Beam Angle of Lighting Fixture
- Weight of Fixture
- LED LAMP and Driver Warranty Period
- Driver Surge Protection
- Compliance to IEC-61347-2-13 for LED Driver
- BIS Certification no. for Driver
- Driver Make and Model No.
Page 3168 of 3884

FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
- LED Make and Model no.

- LED type i.e. COB (Chip on Board) or Multichip etc.
- Quantity of Fixtures
- No. of Cable entries for Fixture along with quantity of FLP Cable glands and FLP
Stopper plug.
- PESO/CIMFR/BIS License certificates numbers along with dates.
- Filled up Table -1 below
TABLE-1
FLP LED Safe Area LED

Fixture Fixture
Offered Model No.
Voltage Rating
Lumens output (Lumens)
Fixture
LED
Luminous efficacy (Lm/watt)
Fixture
LED
Wattage
Fixture
LED
L70 life at 40 deg C
Fixture
LED
Overall Power factor
Type test certificate
availability
E. MANDATORY SPARES
Mandatory spares for electrical equipment for each Station kindly refer Engineering
Design Basis (Electrical ) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001 attached with tender:
5.0 STATUTORY APPROVAL OF WORKS

5.1 The application on behalf of the Owner for submission to Electrical Inspector along
with copies of required certificates complete in all respects, shall be prepared by the
contractor and submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for onward transmission well
ahead of time so that the actual commissioning of equipment are not delayed for want
of inspection by the Electrical Inspectorate/ Central Electricity Authority. The actual
inspection of work by the Electrical Inspector shall be arranged by the Contractor and
necessary coordination and liaison work in this respect shall be the responsibility of
the contractor. However, any fee paid to the electrical Inspectorate in this regards
shall be reimbursed by the Owner on submission of bills along with documentary
evidence.
5.2 Contractor to note that no extra payment shall be made to Contrator for this activity
and he is supposed to take care the same/quote unit rates for various items of tender
accordingly.
5.3 Contractor shall also coordinate with other package vendors who are supplying MV
system and composite approval of same i.e. including equipment installed by other
contractors shall also be in the scope of Contractor.
Page 3169 of 3884

FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
5.4 The Inspection and acceptance of the work as above shall not absolve the Contractor
from any of his responsibilities under this contract.
6.0 MAKES OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
6.1 All makes of materials and components shall be as per approved vendor list (B185-
000-16-50-OD-9540) attached with tender. Makes of items not covered in this list
shall be subject to approval by EIL/NRL/BPC. For items for which an MOU exists
between vendor and EIL/NRL/BPC, the requirement and acceptability as per MOU
shall be ensured.
6.2 Vendor/ contractor may procure material from any of the EIL/owner approved
vendors. However, current validity and range of approval as per EIL enlistment,
workload, stability and solvency need to be verified by the contractor before
placement of order. In any case, the contractor shall inform EIL before placement of
any order for contractor supplied equipment and materials.
6.3 Contractor can offer component of makes other than specified in the tender, during
order execution. The alternate make of components will be evaluated post order,
based on the satisfactory track record and test certificates to be furnished by the
contractor. In case alternate makes are not found acceptable, components shall be
strictly as per above vendor list.
6.4 All the offered equipments shall be brand new with state-of-the-art technology and
field proven. No prototype equipment shall be offered. Vendor shall ensure spare and
maintenance support services for the offered equipment for at least 15 years from the
date of supply. Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user and EIL
before phasing out the product/ spares to enable the end user for placement of order
for spares and services.
7.0 ENGINEERING DRAWINGS, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION

STANDARDS
7.1 Refer List of attachments (Electrical) document no. B185-000-16-50-LL-9540
enclosed in this tender document for the list of standard specifications, installation
standards, engineering drawings ,data sheet, Vendor data requirement ,schedule of
Rates (SOR) etc forming a part of tender document.
7.2 The equipments/materials to be supplied by the contractor shall conform to the
requirements of the applicable standard specifications. Also the installation of various
material/equipment shall also conform to the installation standards.
7.3 After the job completion, contractor shall prepare 'AS-BUILT' drawings for all
drawings/layouts/documents (such as cable schedules, interconnections, single line
diagrams, various electrical layouts,block diagrams etc.) prepared by EIL. Final
certified as built drawings shall be submitted by the contractor to owner in bound
volume with one set of reproducible original sepia plus five sets of prints.
7.4 In addition, the above documents shall also be submitted in electronic media i.e. CD
ROM diskettes/Pendrives. Software used for the presentation of these documents
shall be as follows:
Type of document Software
a) Reports/ schedules MS Office (Word / Excel)

b) Drawings AutoCAD
Page 3170 of 3884

FRIENDSHIP P/L
B185-000-16-50-SP-9540
7.5 For the purpose of preparation of as-built drawings, Contractor shall update the
"Issued for Construction" drawings issued by the EIL and update all drawings/other
engineering documents generated by the contractor himself. It shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to convert the drawings issued by the Owner in hard copy
into CAD drawings including scanning, digitizing and converting the drawings in to a
suitable format compatible with the AutoCAD. As-built drawings shall be prepared
only on AutoCAD.
8.0 INSPECTION & TESTING AT MANUFACTURER’S WORK
8.1 All major electrical equipment and material shall be subject to inspection by Owner/
PMC or authorized representative at manufacturers’ works. Contractor/ Vendor/ Sub-
Vendor shall furnish all necessary information concerning the supply to Owner/ PMC.
8.2 During fabrication, all the equipment shall be subject to inspection by Owner/ PMC or
by an agency authorized by the Owner to assess the progress of work as well as to
ascertain that only quality raw material is used.
8.3 Contractor shall ensure that the hazardous area equipment provided shall have the
necessary test certificates and valid PESO/ CCE approval certificates.
9.1 All the equipment shall be tested and commissioned as per contract requirements.
9.2 Any work not conforming to the execution drawings, specifications, or codes shall be
rejected forthwith and the contractor shall carry out modifications at his own cost.
9.3 All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the owner/engineer-in-charge or his
authorized representative unless he waives this requirement in writing. The contractor
shall arrange all testing equipment necessary to carry out the tests. The tests shall be
recorded on approved pro-format and certified records of the tests shall be submitted
to the owner/ engineer-in-charge.
9.4 All test certificates and the contractor shall submit field test reports after completion of
work in bound volumes (6 sets).
Page 3171 of 3884

Engineering Design Basi s Document No.
(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 1 of 44
ENGINEERING DESIGN BASIS

ELECTRICAL
JOB NO: B185
PROJECT: EPCM for IBFPL Project in Bangladesh
CLIENT: NRL - NUMALIGARH REFINERY
EIL SIGNATURE:
CLIENT SIGNATURE:
Revised Incorporating Clients Comments & MULLICK SAHA RAJIV SINGH ARVIND
B 12/Apr/2019
Re Issued For Engineering JOYDEEP KUMAR N P (MS)
MULLICK SAHA RAJIV SINGH ARVIND
A 06/Sep/2018 Issued For Client Comments
JOYDEEP KUMAR N P (MS)
Rev.
Date Purpose Prepared by Reviewed by Approved by
No.
Legend:Bold italic te xt denotes change with respect to previous revision.
Page 3172 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 2 of 44
Table ofContents
1.0 SCOPE .................................................. 5
2.0 ABBREVIATIONS, CODES & STANDARDS / PUBLICATIONS ........... 5
2.1 ABBREVIATIONS ......................................... 5
2.2 CODES & STANDARDS / PUBLICATIONS ....................... 6
3.0 GENERAL / DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ......................... 8
4.0 SPECIFIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............................ 9
5.0 OWNER / CLIENT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS ..................... 9
5.1 SITE CONDITIONS ........................................ 9
5.2 POWER SOURCE DETAILS ................................. 9
5.3 POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ..................... 13
5.3.1 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY VARIATION ................. 13
5.3.2 UTILISATION VOLTAGE .............................. 13
5.3.3 UTILISATION VOLTAGE FOR CRITICAL SUPPLIES .......... 14
5.3.4 OPERATING PHILOSOPHY ............................ 15
5.4 CONTROL-PROTECTION - METERING ........................ 15
5.4.1 CONTROL PHILOSOPHY ............................. 16
5.4.2 POWER ISOLATION FOR TRANSFORMERS LOCATED REMOTELY
AWAY FROM HV SUBSTATION ............................. 17
5.4.3 RELAY PROTECTION SYSTEM ......................... 18
5.4.3.1 PROTECTION DEVICES FOR POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
................................................... 18
5.4.3.2 POWER GENERATION AND EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY .. 19
5.4.3.3 RELAY PROTECTION PHILOSOPHY .................. 21
5.4.4 METERING ........................................ 22
5.4.4.1 METERING DEVICES IN EHV, HV AND MV SWITCHBOARDS 22
5.4.4.2 METERING FOR GENERATOR AND GENERATOR
TRANSFORMER ...................................... 25
5.5 SUBSTATION DESIGN .................................... 25
5.5.1 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM .................... 25
5.5.2 EHV SWITCHYARD .................................. 26
5.5.3 SUBSTATION FEATURES ............................. 26
5.5.4 SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS ..................... 26
5.6 EQUIPMENT DESIGN..................................... 27
5.6.1 EHV DESIGN ...................................... 27
5.6.1.1 EHV OUTDOOR SWITCHYARD ...................... 27
5.6.1.2 EHV SWITCHBOARD ............................. 28
5.6.2 HV SWITCHBOARD ................................. 28
5.6.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMER (CT)/POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT)
Page 3173 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 3 of 44
.................................................... 28
5.6.4 TRANSFORMERS (POWER/DISTRIBUTION) ............... 28
5.6.5 MV SWITCHBOARD ................................. 29
5.6.6 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTER TYPE ............... 29
5.6.7 MEDIUM VOLTAGE OUTGOING FEEDER TYPE ............. 30
5.6.8 MOTOR CONTROLS (AS PER PROCESS PACKAGE & OPERATING
PHILOSOPHY) ......................................... 30
5.6.9 CONTROL SUPPLY VOLTAGE .......................... 30
5.6.10 MOTORS ........................................ 31
5.6.11 UPS SYSTEM ..................................... 31
5.6.12 COMMUNICATION SYS TEM .......................... 32
5.6.13 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM ................. 32
5.6.14 DC SYSTEM ...................................... 33
5.6.15 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE ........................ 34
5.6.16 CABLE SIZES ..................................... 34
5.7 CABLING SYSTEM ....................................... 35
5.7.1 CABLE DETAILS .................................... 35
5.7.2 CABLE LAYING PHILOSOPHY .......................... 36
5.8 EARTHING SYSTEM ..................................... 36
5.9 LIGHTING SYSTEM ...................................... 36
5.9.1 SUPPLY SYSTEM ................................... 36
5.9.2 CONTROL PHILOSOPHY ............................. 37
5.9.3 AC EMERGENCY LIGHTING ........................... 37
5.9.4 DC CRITICAL LIGHTING FOR ESCAPE ................... 38
5.9.5 WIRING TYPE...................................... 38
5.9.6 SPECIFIC LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS ................... 38
5.10 ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING SYSTEM ........................ 39
5.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR HAZARDOUS AREAS ............ 39
5.11.1 NOTES .......................................... 39
5.12 ELECTRICAL CONTROL SYSTEM-ECS ....................... 40
6.0 SPARE PARTS ........................................... 41
6.1 MANDATORY SPARES.................................... 41
6.2 COMMISSIONING SPARES ................................ 43
6.3 RECOMMENDED SPARE FOR NORMAL OPERATION & MAINTAINENCE 43
6.4 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES ............................ 43
7.0 VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENT .............................. 44
Page 3174 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 4 of 44
Page 3175 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 5 of 44
1.0 SCOPE
This electrical design basis defines the design requirements agreed by owner/clients in
addition to EIL standard design philosophy for electrical facilities no. 6-51-0099 Rev no. 6 as
applicable.In case of any conflict between statutory requirements, this design basis and
standard design philosophy, the most stringent requirement shall govern.
2.0 ABBREVIATIONS, CODES & STANDARDS / PUBLICATIONS
2.1 ABBREVIATIONS
Code Description
ACB Air Circuit Breaker
ASB Auxiliary Service Board
CBCT Core Balance Current Transformer
CT Current Transformer
DC Direct Current
DCP Data Concentrator Panel
DG Diesel Generator
DGMS Director General Mines Safety
DOL Direct On Line
ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
EPC Emergency Power Control Center
EPMCC Emergency Power cum Motor Control Center
FRLS Flame Retardent Low Smoke
GI Galvanised Iron
GTG Gas Turbine Generator
HMI Human Machine Interface
HSR High Availability Seamless Redundancy
HV High Voltage
IEC International Electro-Technical Commission
LDB Lighting Distribution Board
LV Low Voltage
MCC Motor Control Centre
MCCB Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
MOV Motor Operated Valve
MV Medium Voltage
NGR Neutral Grounding Resistor
OLTC On Load Tap Changer
PCC Power Control Centre
PESO Petroleum & Explosive Safety Organisation
PLC Programmable Logic Control
PMCC Power Cum Motor Control Centre
PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol
PT Potential Transformer
PTB Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt
RCC Reinforce Cement Concrete
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
SFU Switch Fuse Unit
Page 3176 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 6 of 44
Code Description
SPN Single Phase & Neutral
STG Steam Turbine Generator
TP Three Phase
TPN Three Phase & Neutral
UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
XLPE Cross Link Poly Ethylene
DT Dispatch Terminal
RT Receipt Terminal
SV Sectionalizing Valve Station
2.2 CODES & STANDARDS / PUBLICATIONS
The main codes and standards, considered as minimum requirements, as applicable, are as
follows -
S.No. Description Standards / Codes Edition

1 Code of practice for the fire IS-1646 /Equivalent IEC Latest
safety of buildings - Electrical
Installations.
2 Code of practice for selection: IS-2189/Equivalent IEC Latest
installation and maintenance of
automatic fire detection and
alarm system.
3 Code of practice for the IS-2309/Equivalent IEC Latest
protection of buildings and allied
structures against lightning.
4 Code of practice for fire safety of IS-3034/Equivalent IEC Latest
industrial buildings - Electrical
generating and distributing
stations.
5 Code of practice for Earthing. IS-3043/Equivalent IEC Latest
6 Code of practice for Interior IS-3646/Equivalent IEC Latest
Illumination.
7 Application guide for Insulation IS-3716/Equivalent IEC Latest
Coordination.
8 Code of practice for installation IS-4051/Equivalent IEC Latest
and maintenance of electrical
equipment in mines
9 Guide for safety procedures and IS-5216/Equivalent IEC Latest
practices in electrical work
10 Guide for selection of electrical IS-16724:2018/ IEC 60079- Latest
equipment for hazardous areas. 14:2013
11 Classification of hazardous IS-5572/Equivalent IEC Latest
areas(other than mines) having
flammable gases and vapours
for electrical installations.
12 Code of practice for Industrial IS-6665/Equivalent IEC Latest
Lighting.
13 Guide for Control of undesirable IS-7689/Equivalent IEC Latest
static electricity.
14 Guide for improvement of power IS-7752/Equivalent IEC Latest
factor - consumer''s installations.
Page 3177 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 7 of 44

15 Application guide for on load tap IS-8478/Equivalent IEC Latest
changers.
16 Reference ambient temperature IS-9676/Equivalent IEC Latest
for electrical equipment
17 Code of practice for selection, IS-10028/Equivalent IEC Latest
installation and maintenance of
transformer.
18 Code of practice for selection, IS-10118/Equivalent IEC Latest
installation and maintenance for
switchgear and control gear.
19 Application guide for Power IS-10561/Equivalent IEC Latest
Transformer.
20 Voltage bands for electrical IS-12360/Equivalent IEC Latest
installations including preferred
voltages and frequencies.
21 Guide for short circuit IS-13234/Equivalent IEC Latest
calculations in three phase AC
systems.
22 Code of practice for the IS-13408(Part- Latest
selection, installation and 1)/Equivalent IEC
maintenance of electrical
apparatus for use in potentially
explosive atmospheres.
23 Guide to the use of electrical IS- 15142/Equivalent IEC Latest
apparatus for potentially
explosive atmospheres in the
presence of combustible dusts
24 National Electrical Code (NEC) - SP-30 Latest
BIS Publication.
25 Recommended practices on OISD-STD-110 Latest
static electricity
26 Classification of Area for OISD STD-113 Latest
electrical installation at
Hydrocarbon Processing and
handling facilities
27 Inspection and safe practices OISD-STD-147 Latest
during electrical installation
28 Design aspects for safety in OISD STD-149 Latest
electrical systems
29 Fire Protection System for OISD STD 173 Latest
Electrical Installations
30 Lightning Protection OISD STD-180 Latest
31 Electrical apparatus for IS/IEC 60079-0 Latest
explosive gas atmospheres -
General requirements.
32 Equipment protection flameproof IS/IEC 60079-1 Latest
enclosures "d"
33 Electrical apparatus for IS 5780/IEC 60079-11 Latest
Intrinsic safety 'l'
34 Electrical apparatus for IS-6381/IEC 60079-7 Latest
explosive gas atmospheres
Increased safety type "e"
Page 3178 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 8 of 44

35 Electrical apparatus for IS 7693/IEC 60079-6 Latest
explosive gas atmospheres - Oil
immersion "o"
36 Electrical Apparatus for IS 7724/IEC 60079-5 Latest
Powder filling 'q'
37 Classification of flammable IS 9570/IEC 60079-12 Latest
gases or vapours with air with
air according to their maximum
experimental safe gaps and
minimum igniting currents
38 Electrical apparatus for IS/IEC 60079-15 Latest
explosive gas atmosphere -Part-
15 Construction, test and
marking of type of protection "n"
electrical apparatus
39 Explosive atmospheres- IEC: 60079-14:2013 Latest
Electrical Installation
Design,Selection and Erection
Note:- The petrolium Rule Bangladesh 2018 shall be applicable for facilities loacated
in Bangladesh for Electrical facilities as applicable.
3.0 GENERAL / DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
S.No. Project Philosophy

1 For SV-1,SV-2,SV-3,SV-4, SV-5 cum Tap off station and BPC''s RT stations
located at Bangladesh territory the 3 phase voltage level is at 440V (Open
Circuit 460V ) and single phase voltage level is at 255V.(Refer Note-1)
2 LV - Low Voltage. The voltage which does not normally exceed 250 V.
3 MV - Medium Voltage. The voltage which normally exceeds 250 V and does not
exceed 650 V.
4 HV - High Voltage. The voltage which normally exceeds 650 V but does not exceed
33 kV.
5 EHV - Extra High Voltage. The voltage which exceeds 33 kV under normal condition.
6 Canopy shall be provided for all outdoor equipments except transformers and
Capacitor Banks.
Before carrying out actual system design, it is recommended that the following
minimum
information/data may be obtained from the power supply authorities of Bangladesh.
a) Incoming grid voltage and frequency, actual variation limits, guaranteed power
availability.
b) System fault level (Minimum/maximum)
c) Location of feeding sub-station and routing of supply lines/feeder and the reliability
of
power supply.
d) Size of conductor and its current carrying capacity.
e) Supply system neutral earthing.

Page 3179 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 9 of 44
f) Details of protection relays at sending end and their settings.
g) Required metering arrangements at receiving end.
h) Details of protection relays recommended by power supply authority at receiving

end.
4.0 SPECIFIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1
5.0 OWNER / CLIENT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
5.1 SITE CONDITIONS
S.No. Description Selected Option Available Options

1 Equipment design 40 DEG C a)40 DEG C
temperature (IS-9676) b)45 DEG C
c)50 DEG C
d)Any other
2 Relative humidity 87 As per site conditions
defined elsewhere.
3 Soil Resistivity As per soil investigation (*)
report
4 Minimum temperature. for 10 DEG C a)10 DEG C
battery sizing b)20 DEG C
c)Any other
5 Altitude above mean sea Less than 1000m above a)Less than 1000m
level MSL above MSL
b)Any Other
6 Maximum temp DEG C 34
7 Minimum temp DEG C 10
8 Siesmic Zone Refer General Civil Design
Basis
(Data marked ‘* ’ shall be furnished/ confirmed by client).
5.2 POWER SOURCE DETAILS
Page 3180 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 10 of 44

1 Power System At SMT Dispatch Terminal: a)Independent
Independent SEB supply at 11 system
KV voltage level with Isolator b)Existing system
Breaker VCB & 2/4 pole
structure in SMT DT.
Medium voltage(415V)
Switchboard fed from two no
11kV /0.433kV new
transformers and one no 415V
AC Emergency Diesel
Generator set and Solar Power.
Receipt Terminal of BPC
parbatipur :
1 no. of 440 V AC, 50Hz, TPN
feeders (400 A) from existing
1000A, 440V Switchboard
housed in Substation of
existing depot. In addition one
no. 440 V AC Emergency Diesel
Generator set(in case required)
and Solar Power.
Sectionalizing Valve station:
On grid Solar power based
AC/DC power supply system,
with backup of SEB ( 11kV) grid
power supply from SEB source
and one no 415V AC
Emergency Diesel Generator.
2 Grid Supply Yes. a)Yes
11kV Grid supply for DT station b)No (Below Clause
and SV station. is not applicable)
2.1 Name of sub station 11/0.433 KV New SUBTATION
AT SMT
2.2 Number of feeders 1 (R-Y-B)
[For SMT]
2.3 Length of feeder For SMT DT, the scope of
procurement/laying of cable
/OH Line up to the 4-pole
structure shall be with West
Bengal State Electricity
Authorities.
For SV Stations located in
Bangladesh and BPC RT at
Parbatipur ,Bangladesh scope
of procurement/laying of cable
/OH Line up to the 4-pole
structure shall be with Owner
M/s BPC.
Page 3181 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 11 of 44

2.4 Type /size of conductor/ 3CX185 sqmm XLPE cable [For
cable size SMT DT]
For SV Stations Located in
Bangladesh and BPC''''''''S RT
type/size of conductor /cable
size to be decided during
Detailed Engineering Phase
based on estimated / actual
loads.
2.5 Voltage 11 kV ±10 % Voltage level along
[for SMT] with variation for
facilities in
Bangladesh(SV
Stations and RT at
Parbatipur) to be
provided by M/s
BPC
2.6 Frequency 50 Hz ± % Frequency for
Bangladesh to be
provided by M/s
BPC
2.7 Maximum fault level 16kA(for 3 sec )as
in the existing
system.
2.7.1 3 Phase fault 17.39 K.A(331 MVA)for 1Sec
[For SMT]
2.7.2 1 Phase fault 5.81 KA for 1 sec
[For SMT]
2.7.3 X/R Ratio To be provided by
NRL/BPC.
2.8 Minimum fault level kA, sec. To be provided by
NRL/BPC.
2.9 Design fault level 25kA for 1 Sec
2.10 Basic Insulation Level 75 KV for 11 KV Grade
[For SMT]
2.11 System neutral Earthing Resistance earthed through
Neutral Grounding
Resistor(6.35kV)
[For SMT]
2.12 Minimum power factor 0.95 a)0.9
b)0.95
c)Any other
2.13 Parallel operation of NO a)YES
incomers b)NO
2.14 PLCC requirement No a)YES
b)NO
3 CPP and its CPP Not Applicable
configuration for this Project.
3.1 Type of Generator Not Applicable a)STG
b)GTG
3.1.1 Number of Generator Not Applicable.
3.1.2 Rating of Not Applicable.
Generator/Voltage/P.f
Page 3182 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 12 of 44

3.1.3 Requirement of NA. a)YES
Generator Circuit b)NO
Breaker
3.2 Parallel operation with NO a)YES
grid b)NO
3.3 Type of Neutral Earthing NA.
for Generators
3.4 Black Start DG NA. a)YES
Envisaged b)NO
4 Emergency generator Centralised (REFER NOTE-2) a)Centralised
b)Distributed
4.1 Generator Voltage 255V a)6.6KV
(See Note 2) b)415V
c)Any Other
4.2 Parallel operation with Momentary Paralleling a)Momentary
other sources Paralleling
b)Continuously
Paralleling
4.3 Auto Starting Yes a)YES
b)NO
4.4 Type of Emergency Diesel a)Diesel
Generator b)Gas
5 Solar Power System Considered for SMT-DT, SV-1
to SV-5 and BPC RT stations.
5.1 Solar PV System Considered for SMT-DT, SV-1 a)Provided
to SV-5 and BPC RT stations. b)Not provided
5.2 Buildings on which solar To be decided during detailed
power system to be Engineering in
mounted consulatation/feedback from
client.
5.3 Technology Cristaline(Mono/Poly/Thin film)
5.4 Battery
5.5 Connectivity Local Switchboard
5.6 Monitoring System Provided a)Provided
b)Not provided
5.7 Location of Inverter Outdoor a)Outdoor
b)Indoor
Note-1:
Incoming Grid power supply at 11kV from State Grid shall be made available by M/s
NRL and M/s BPC at station battery limit at SMT DT & SV stations.Locations of the
same shall be marked in the plot plan and communicated to us.
440V supply from Parbatipur 11kV Substation shall be made available by Owner at
Receipt Terminal at Parbatipur.
Note-2:
The rating and Qty of Single phase Emergency DG sets for SV stations (SV-1 ,SV-
2,SV-3, SV-4, SV-5 )shall be finalized during detailed engineering based on final load.
For DT station at NRL's Siliguri Marketing Terminal and for RT station at Parbatipur
Emergency power supply shall be from new 3 phase Emergency DG set.
Note-3:
Two pole / Four pole mounted outdoor grid equipment and associated incoming OH
conductor (ACSR)/ power / control cables upto transformer primary for receiving
Page 3183 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 13 of 44
11kV supply from SEB/ Power supply company shall be arranged by Owner
(NRL/BPC) near battery Limit of SV stations. Grid Supply details along with exact
location of the pole structure installation shall be furnushed /marked by Owner
(NRL/BPC) during detailed engineering phase in consulatation with SEB / concerned
authority.
For SMT DT , the scope of procurement / laying of cable / OH Line (ACSR ) up to the
4-pole structure shall be with West Bengal State Electricity Authorities. For BPC's RT
station scope of procurement and laying shall be by Owner M/s BPC.
Note-4:
Maximum fault level16kA (for 3 sec.) as in the existing system in SMT DT. For SV
stations and BPC RT the data/ information is pending from M/s BPC of Bangladesh.
5.3 POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
5.3.1 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY VARIATION

1 AC System
1.1 Voltage 11kV/6.6kV/415V/ a)11kV/6.6kV/415V ± 6%
440V/255V ± 6% b)33kV/6.6kV/415V ± 6%
1.2 Frequency 50 Hz ± 3% a)50 Hz ± 3%
b)60 Hz ± 3%
2 DC System
2.1 Electrical protection and 110V ± 10% a)220V ± 10%
Control system b)110V ± 10%
2.2 DC critical Lighting 110V ± 10% a)220V ± 10%

system b)110V ± 10%
2.3 Instrumentation Power Refer Instrumentation

Supplies Design Basis
Note:
Refer section 5.6.10 of this document for design voltage/frequency variation for motors.
5.3.2 UTILISATION VOLTAGE

1 Primary EHV/HV 11kV a)33kV
distribution voltage b)66kV
c)Any other
2 Secondary HV distribution Not applicable a)11kV
voltage b)6.6kV
c)3.3kV
d)Any Other
3 Primary EHV/HV Solidly Earthed a)Solidly Earthed
distribution system b)NGR
neutral Earthing c)Unearthed
4 Secondary HV distribution NA
system Neutral Earthing
Page 3184 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 14 of 44

5 HV motor voltage for DOL 6.6kV (For motors No HT motor at 6.6kV is
rating > 160kW) envisaged in this project.
We will fed the Main Line
Pump motor (290 kW) from
MV Switchboard through
VFD/SoftStarteas
applicable.
6 MV motor voltage 415V /440 V AC
(except VFD motor)
(For motors rating
0.18<=kW<=160)
7 AC Motors 240V /255V AC (except
MOVs) (For motors
rating < 0.18kW)
8 DC Motor As per equipment
supplier standard
9 Motor operated valves 415V AC TP For SMT DT 415V and 230V
230V SP Applicable
440V AC,TP FOR SV''s and BPC RT
255V AC SP 440V AC,TP & 255V AC SP
Applicable.
10 Battery chargers 415V/440V AC,TPN
incoming power supply
11 UPS System incoming 415V/440V AC,TPN
power supply
12 AC Lighting/Power 415V/440V AC,TPN
Panels
13 Auxiliary Boards incoming 415V/440V AC,TPN
power supply
14 Welding Receptacles 415V/440V AC,TPN
15 Bulk loads like Process 415V/440V AC,TPN
Heaters etc
16 Normal 240V/255V AC,SPN
Lighting/Emergency
Lighting
17 LAN UPS 240V/255V AC,SPN
Note:-
1. 440V AC,TPN is applicable for for SV station and RT station located in in Bangladesh.
2. 255V AC,SPN is applicable for for SV station and RT station located in in Bangladesh.
5.3.3 UTILISATION VOLTAGE FOR CRITICAL SUPPLIES

1 Switchgear protection 110V DC a)220V DC
control power supply b)110V DC
2 Critical lighting power 110V DC at SMT DT and a)220V DC
supply BPC RT b)110V DC
48V DC at SV Stations. c)48V DC
3 Input power supply for Plant Plant Communication a)240V AC SPN (With
communication system system not applicable for Dedicated battery back
this Project up)
b)110V AC UPS
Page 3185 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 15 of 44

4 Input power supply Fire 240V AC SPN (With
alarm system power supply Dedicated battery backup)
5 Power supply for electrical Not applicable for this a)220V DC
annunciation panel Project. b)110V DC
6 Normal Instrumentation Refer Instrumentation
power supply design basis
7 Critical instrumentation Refer Instrumentation
power supply design basis
8 Instrumentation Shut-down Refer Instrumentation
system power supply design basis
5.3.4 OPERATING PHILOSOPHY

1 Auto/Manual transfer at No a)YES
primary distribution voltage bus b)NO
with momentary paralleling
2 Auto/Manual transfer at Yes a)YES
secondary distribution voltage b)NO
bus with momentary paralleling
3 Auto /Manual transfer at MV
with momentary paralleling
3.1 At PCC/EPC/EPMCC Level Yes a)YES
b)NO
3.2 At MCC/ASB/LDB Level No. a)YES
b)NO
4 Continuous Parallel operation
of Incomers
4.1 Primary EHV/HV voltage NO a)YES
b)NO
4.2 Secondary HV voltage No a)YES
b)NO
4.3 PCC/PMCC No a)YES
b)NO
5 Power Factor Correction Required
5.1 Power factor improvement 415V bus a)6.6kV bus
capacitors- location b)415V
c)Both 6.6kV & 415V
d)Any other
5.2 Minimum P.F. to be maintained 0.98(*)
at Transformer Primary
5.3 Monitoring at Transformer Yes a)YES
Primary b)NO
6 Load shedding No a)YES
b)NO
6.1 Voltage level for Load Not applicable for this a)33kV
Shedding Project. b)11kv
c)6.6kV
d)0.415kV
e)Any Other
5.4 CONTROL-PROTECTION - METERING
Page 3186 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 16 of 44
5.4.1 CONTROL PHILOSOPHY

1 Location of Relays for DG Control Panel
Generator
2 Location of Relays for Outdoor Not Applicable for this
Switchyard Project.
3 Location of Protection relays for
EHV/HV switchgear
3.1 Primary voltage EHV/HV switch On switchgear a)On switchgear
gear b)Separate relay and
control panel
3.2 Secondary Voltage HV Not applicable. a)On switchgear
switchgear b)Separate relay and
control panel
4 EHV/HV Switchgear control
4.1 Generator Not Applicable
4.2 Outdoor Switchyard Not Applicable
4.3 Primary voltage EHV/HV switch On switchgear a)On switchgear
gear b)Separate relay and
control panel
4.4 Secondary Voltage HV Not Applicable. a)On switchgear
switchgear b)Separate relay and
control panel
c)ECS
5 Numerical Protection/Monitoring
system for
5.1 EHV system Not Applicable. a)YES
b)NO
5.2 HV Switchboard Yes a)YES
b)NO
5.3 PMCC/PCC Yes a)YES
b)NO
5.4 MCC No a)YES
b)NO
6 Control and logic through Yes(Refer Note-2) a)YES
numerical relays b)NO
7 Hardwired synchronization Not Applicable a)YES
control panel-SCAP b)NO
7.1 Synchronizing trolley required a)YES
b)NO
7.2 Type of Panel a)Mosaic
b)Simplex
7.3 Extent of Coverage on SCAP
8 Type of annunciation panel * a)HMI
b)Part of SCAP
9 Load shedding panel Not Applicable a)Part of ECS
b)Separate PLC
c)Hardwired
10 Method of motor starting
10.1 HV Motors Direct on line (Up to
motor KW)
(Later)
Page 3187 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 17 of 44

10.2 HV Motors Note 1 a)Auto transformer
b)Soft starter
c)VFD
d)Dedicated transformer
2 MW and above
10.3 MV Motors DOL up to motor 160
kW rating
11 Starting MVA limitation
conditions for Motors
11.1 HV Motors Starting current shall
be 500% subject to
IS/IEC tolerance for
motors up to 1000 kW.
11.2 MV Motors To be decided during
detailed engg.
Notes:
1. Soft starters/Auto transformer/Dedicated transformer/ V/F controlled soft starter shall be
considered for starting large HV motors if essential/unavoidable as per system design
requirement/equipment design limitation.[Applicable if HV motors are present in this Project]
5.4.2 POWER ISOLATION FOR TRANSFORMERS LOCATED REMOTELY AWAY

FROM HV SUBSTATION

1 Push button in transformer YES a)YES
bay for tripping remote b)NO
breaker
2 Local power isolating device Yes a)YES
b)NO
3 Type Breaker in panel
4 Protection relay required No
Page 3188 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 18 of 44
5.4.3 RELAY PROTECTION SYSTEM
5.4.3.1 PROTECTION DEVICES FOR POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Protection devices for power distribution system shall be as indicated below -

(Figure inside bracket refers to note below)
(YES - Applicable)
S.No. Relay Relay HV HV HV Outgoing Outgoing Incomer - Incomer -

Description No. Transformer Transformer Motor Breaker Breaker EHV/HV MV
Feeder - Sec. Feeder - Sec. Feeder Feeder - Feeder - MV PCC/PMCC
Winding Winding HV Plant PCC/PMCC
Volt=>3.3kv Volt<=0.433kv Feeder
1 IDMTL over- 51 NA YES - NA YES YES (1) YES
current relay
2 IDMTL earth- 51N NA YES - NA YES YES (1) YES
fault relay
3 51G backup 51G(11) NA YES(23) - - - - -
earth-fault relay
(Earthed neutral)
4 Motor protection 99 - - YES(3) - YES(3) - -
relay with
(50, 50N,46, 49,
50L/R,86,95 )
5 Instantaneous 64R(11) - - - - - YES(24) YES
restricted earth-
fault relay
(Earthed side)
6 Instantaneous 50 NA YES - - - - -
over-current
relay
7 Instantaneous 50N NA YES - - - - -
earth-fault relay
8 Differential 87 NA - NA NA - - -
protection relay
Page 3189 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 19 of 44
S.No. Relay Relay HV HV HV Outgoing Outgoing Incomer - Incomer -

Description No. Transformer Transformer Motor Breaker Breaker EHV/HV MV
Feeder - Sec. Feeder - Sec. Feeder Feeder - Feeder - MV PCC/PMCC
Winding Winding HV Plant PCC/PMCC
Volt=>3.3kv Volt<=0.433kv Feeder
9 High speed 86(20) NA YES YES NA YES YES YES
tripping relay
10 Trip circuit 95(20) NA YES YES NA YES YES YES
supervision relay
11 Transformer 63 A YES - - - - -
auxiliary relay
12 Under-voltage 27/2 - - YES - - NA YES(9)
relay with timer
13 Check 25 - - - - - YES(10) YES(10)
synchronisation
relay
5.4.3.2 POWER GENERATION AND EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY
Minimum protection relays for Synchronous generator (GTG/STG), generator transformer Grid power supply incomer and Synchronous motors
shall be as follows:
(YES - Applicable)
NOT APPLICABLE FOR THIS PROJECT
S.No. Relay Description NEMA Code Generator Generator EHV Incomer EHV Transformer Syn. Motor
Transformer
1 Distance protection 21 NA.
2 Synchronous check 25 NA. NA. NA.
3 Under voltage with 27 NA. NA. NA.
timer
4 Reverse power 32 NA. NA.
5 Low power flow 37 NA.
6 Loss of excitation 40 NA. NA.
7 Negative sequence 46 NA. NA.
8 Over current 50 YES YES
Page 3190 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 20 of 44
Transformer
9 Earth fault relay 50N YES YES
10 Over current 51 NA. NA.
11 Voltage restrained 51V NA. NA.
12 Earth Fault back up 51G NA. NA. NA.
13 Over current E/F 51N NA. NA. NA.
14 Over voltage with 59 NA. NA. NA.
timer
15 VT failure 60 NA. NA.
16 Auxiliary relay for 63TX NA. NA.
transformer
17 Transformer 64R NA. NA. NA.
Restricted Earth
Fault
18 Stator back up earth 64G NA.
fault
19 Generator Rotor 64R NA. NA.
Earth fault
20 Directional O/C 67 NA
21 Directional E/F 67N NA
22 Under 81 NA NA NA
frequency/df/dt
23 Tripping relay 86 NA NA NA NA NA
24 Gen differential 87G NA
25 Gen and 87GT NA
Transformer
differential
26 Transformer 87T NA NA
differential
27 Feeder differential 87F NA
28 Bus bar differential 87B/ NA
and check 87CH
29 Trip circuit 95 NA NA NA NA
supervision
Page 3191 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 21 of 44
Transformer
30 Dead bus charging 98 NA NA NA
relay
31 Over fluxing 99 NA NA
32 Out of step 78 NA NA
5.4.3.3 RELAY PROTECTION PHILOSOPHY

1 In case of HV switchboards with continuous parallel operation of incomers, following additional relays shall be provided:
a. One set of 87B (Bus differential) and 95 B (Bus wire supervision) for each bus section.
b. 67 and 67N (Directional IDMTL over current and earth fault) relays for the incomers.
2 Instantaneous earth fault (50N) shall be provided only for transformer with delta primary.
3 For breaker fed motor feeders. Relay 50 shall not be provided for contactor controlled feeders.
4 Directional IDMTL earth fault (67N) shall be provided for transformer with star primary.
5 For transformers rated 5 MVA and above.
6 For motors rated 1500 kW and above, excluding VFD fed motors.
7 For critical/long feeders and plant feeders connected to main power generation and distribution bus. A plant feeder implies outgoing
feeders from one switchboard to another switchboard of same voltage level.
8 Trip circuit supervision relay 95 shall be provided as part of the numerical relay for HV/ MV feeders wherever numerical relays are
provided.
9 Wherever auto-transfer feature is provided
10 For switchgears where continuous or momentary paralleling of Incomers is envisaged, check synchronising relay shall be provided.
11 51G and 64R relays for input transformer of VFD system shall be decided by VFD Manufacturer.
12 The bus tie feeders in HV switchboards shall be provided with 51, 51N, 86 and 95 relays.
13 HV capacitor bank feeders shall be provided with 51, 51N, 59 (over voltage), 60 (Neutral displacement), 86 and 95 relays.
Page 3192 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 22 of 44

14 The following feeders shall be provided with timers for delayed tripping on bus under voltage while the under voltage relay shall be
common for the bus
a. HV and MV capacitor feeders
b. HV and MV breaker controlled motor feeders
c. Contactor controlled motor feeders with DC control supply.
Numerical relays where ever provided for motor and capacitor feeders shall use in built under voltage relay and timer for delayed
tripping on bus under voltage.
15 One no. DC supply supervision relay (80) shall be provided for each incoming DC supply to the switchboard.
16 One set of bus differential relays (87B) and bus wire supervision relay (95 B) for each bus section shall be provided for HV
switchboards connected directly to generation buses.
17 In case of numerical relays, all relays shall be comprehensive units including all protection, metering and control.
18 Under voltage and over voltage function along with associated timer shall be part of the numerical relays.
19 Auto changeover logic between Incomers and bus coupler shall be built in the numerical relay.
20 Tripping relays (86) & Trip Circuit supervision relay (95) shall be part of numerical relay.
21 2 Nos. of 86 relays shall be considered for HV and MV breaker fed motors for ease of differentiating between process & electric trip.
Process trip relay shall be electromechanical, self reset type.
22 Breaker control switch shall be hardwired type.
23 Stand by earth fault relay 51G shall be provided in the incomer of switchboard fed from transformers where transformer & switchboard
both are located remotely from HV substation.
24 Restricted earth fault relay 64R shall be provided for transformer rating >= 2.5 MVA in the incomer of switchboard fed from
transformers having secondary voltage greater than 3.3KV and secondary winding is star connected.
25 Relay 51V voltage controlled over current relay shall be provided on specific requirement considering the rating of the outgo ing feeders
with respect to the Incomer rating. Generally this relay shall be provided wherever CT primary current of outgoing feeders is exceeding
40% of the CT primary current of the Incomer.
26 415V DG set shall be provided with protection but not limited to 51V,51G,40,46,86,95,80,64R etc for generator rated above 500KVA
and Generator rated less than 500KVA shall have 51V,51G,40,46,86,95,80 unless otherwise agreed with the owner.
27 For directly connected generator.
28 For large transformer as per manufacturer's standard.
29 Relay 87 and 64R shall be seperate numerical relay. Hence shall not be part of main comprehensive numerical relay.CT for 87 and
64R can be clubbed, as two core of single CT.
5.4.4 METERING
5.4.4.1 METERING DEVICES IN EHV, HV AND MV SWITCHBOARDS
Page 3193 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 23 of 44
The metering devices in HV and MV switchboards shall be as below:

Type of metering : Analogue/As part of the Numerical relay
(Figure inside bracket refers to note below) (YES - Applicable)
S.No. Feeder Type A V Hz PF MW MWH HM MVAR MVAH MVA

1 Grid Incomers YES YES YES YES YES(2) YES - YES(2) YES(2) YES(1,2)
2 Grid Bus Tie YES
3 Grid YES YES YES
Transformer
4 Grid Bus P.T. YES
5 HV Incomer YES YES YES YES YES YES - YES YES YES
6 HV Bus Tie YES - - - - - - - - -
7 HV YES - - - YES YES - - - -
Transformer
8 HV Bus P.T. - YES - - - - - - - -
9 HV Plant YES - - - - YES - - - -
Feeder
10 HV Motor YES - - - - YES(kWh) YES - - -
11 HV Capacitor YES YES - - - - - YES - -
12 PCC/PMCC YES YES - YES - YES(kWH) - - - -
Incomer
13 PCC/PMCC YES - - - - - - - - -
Bus Tie
14 PCC Bus P.T. - YES - - - - - - - -
15 ACB Outgoing YES - - - - YES(kWh) - - - -
( Non motor)
16 MV Motor YES - - - - - - - - -
(>55kW)
17 MCC/ASB YES YES - - - - - - - -
Incomer
18 MCCB/SFU YES - - - - YES(kWh) - - - -
O/G(250A)
19 LDB Incomer YES YES - - - YES(kWh) - - - -
20 DG Set-MV YES YES YES YES YES(kW) YES(kWh) YES - - -
Page 3194 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 24 of 44
Notes:
1. MVA meter in EHV external power supply Incomers shall include maximum demand indication also.
2. Separate MW, MVAR, MVA and MVAH meters shall be provided for EHV external power supply Incomers only.
3. Seperate 3 nos. voltmeter and 3 nos. ammeter shall be provided for EHV external power supply incomers.
Page 3195 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 25 of 44
5.4.4.2 METERING FOR GENERATOR AND GENERATOR TRANSFORMER
5.4.4.2 METERING FOR GENERATOR (HV) AND GENERATOR TRANSFORMER not

applicable for this Project.
New three phase 415 V / 440 V Emergency DG is envisaged for SMT DT SV
stations(SV-1 , SV-2, SV-3, SV-4, SV-5 cum Tap off Point etc). Capacity of Emergency
DG to be finalised during Detailed Engineering based on emergency load information
from all concerned departments. For BPC's RT at Parbatipur matter is being taken up
with BPC by M/s NRL final desicion for which is still awaited.
5.5 SUBSTATION DESIGN
5.5.1 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM

1 Substation Automation Required.
System (SAS)
2 Communication protocol for IEC 61850 a)IEC 61850
relay network b)open protocol
3 System architecture IEC 61850 RSTP a)IEC 61850 RSTP

b)IEC 61850 PRP
c)IEC 61850 HSR
d)Redundant architecture
for other open protocols
4 Data concentrator for SAS Required a)not required
b)common for HV & MV
c)seperate for HV & MV
5 Communication with other
devices
5.1 Communication with ECS NA
5.1.1 Protocol for communication IEC 61850 a)IEC 61850
with ECS b)Modbus
5.2 Communication with DCS During Detail a)part of data
Engineering concentrator
b)part of ECS RTU
5.2.1 Protocol for communication Modbus TCP/IP
with DCS
5.3 Communication with VFD & During Detail a)part of data
UPS Engineering. concentrator
b)part of ECS RTU
5.3.1 Protocol for communication Modbus TCP/IP
with VFD & UPS
6 HMI for SAS Operator Cum a)not required
Engineering Workstation b)operator cum
engineering workstation
c)1 operator & 1
engineering workstation
7 Laptop Common for HV & MV a)not required
systems for each b)common for HV & MV
substation for each substation
c)seperate for HV & MV
for each substation
Page 3196 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 26 of 44

8 Local storage of data part of HMI a)not required (part of
ECS)
b)part of HMI
c)part of data
concentrator
9 Relay parameterization SAS HMI a)SAS HMI
b)ECS HMI
5.5.2 EHV SWITCHYARD

1 Type NA.
2 Type of bus NA. a)String bus
b)Tubular bus
3 Structure for outdoor NA. a)Galvanised
b)Painted
c)Not applicable
4 Bus material NA. a)Aluminium
b)Copper
5.5.3 SUBSTATION FEATURES
S.No. Description EHV HV MV MCC/Elec. Room

1 Elevated with trays NA NA NO NO
in cable cellar
2 Raised with internal NO YES YES YES
trenches
3 All top cable entry NO NO NO NO
with trays below
ceiling
4 Pressurisation NA NA NA NA
against ingress of
dust
5 Air-conditioned room NA YES
for operator
6 Roof slab for
6.1 Power transformer NO NO NA
6.2 Distribution NA NA YES
transformer
7 Air conditioning of NA * * *
switchgear hall
8 EOT crane in sub- NA NA NA NA
station
Column HV is defined below :-

1. Substation having full fledged HV Switchboard.
2. (*) To be decided by NRL/BPC.
5.5.4 SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS
Page 3197 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 27 of 44

1 Batteries in substation Separate room
and control Rooms
2 Battery charger in Air conditioned room a)Air conditioned room
substation b)Non air conditioned
room
3 Battery charger in Air conditioned room a)Air conditioned room
control room b)Non air conditioned
room
4 Variable speed drive Air-conditioned room in a)Air-conditioned room in
panels substation substation
b)SRR
5 Thyristor controlled Air-conditioned room in a)Air-conditioned room in
panels substation substation
b)SRR
6 UPS System Air conditioned room in
control room/VFD
Room/Switchgear room.
7 Lead-Acid and Nickel- Separate room a)Separate room
Cadmium b)Common room
8 Location of VRLA battery Air conditioned Room.
9 Annunciation panel NA as part of HMI.
10 Energy saver panel with NA.
Lighting transformers
11 GIS Hall NA. a)Air Conditioned
b)Pressurised
1. Battery room shall be preferably located in corner side at switchgear floor of the
substation building.
2. Battery charger for Instrumentation shall be placed in air-conditioned UPS room in control
room.
3. Electrical equipment installed in battery room such as exhaust fan, lighting, battery circuit
breakers, receptacles shall be of frameproof and corrosion proof construction and certified
for gas group II-C classified locations. Heat detectors installed in battery room shall be of
intrinsically safe type.
5.6 EQUIPMENT DESIGN
5.6.1 EHV DESIGN
5.6.1.1 EHV OUTDOOR SWITCHYARD

1 Bus bar system NA. a)Single
b)Double
2 Circuit breaker type NA.
3 Isolator type NA. a)Pantograph
b)Semi Pantograph
c)Centre rotating
d)Centre break
EHV OUTDOOR SWITCHYARD (5.6.1.1) Not applicable for this Project.
Page 3198 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 28 of 44
5.6.1.2 EHV SWITCHBOARD

1 Execution NA.
2 Type of Switchgear NA.
3 Busbar NA. a)Double
b)Single
4 Circuit Breaker Type NA.
5.6.1.2 EHV SWITCHBOARD Not applicable for this Project.
5.6.2 HV SWITCHBOARD

1 Execution Drawout a)Drawout
b)Fixed
2 Type of switchgear Air Insulated a)Air insulated
b)Gas insulated
3 Bus bar Single bus a)Single bus
b)Double bus
4 Circuit breaker type VCB a)SF6
b)VCB
5 Motor Control Breaker a)Breaker
b)Vacuum contactor
HV Switchboard (11kV VCB Isolation Panel) applicable for DT Station Siliguri.
5.6.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMER (CT)/POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT)

1 CT Secondary
1.1 General Protection 1A
1.2 Special protection(87,64R 1A
,51G etc)
1.3 Metering 1A for conventional and
remote metering
2 PT Secondary 110V AC
5.6.4 TRANSFORMERS (POWER/DISTRIBUTION)
S.No. Transformer Voltage Ratio Vector Tap Changer Cooling

Group
5 Distribution 11/0.433kV Dyn 11 Off-circuit ONAN
transformer (<=
2500 KVA)
Note:
1) Provision of Oil Soak Pit & Oil Collection Pit for transformers shall be as follows:
a) Oil quantity <= 2000L: Not Required
b) 2000L < Oil Quantity <= 9000L: Soak Pit
c) Oil Quantity > 9000L: Soak Pit + Collection Pit
2)Fire fighting system for transformers above 10MVA or oil greater than 2000 Litres.
Page 3199 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 29 of 44
3)Distribution transformers shall be low loss star-1 rated energy efficiency level-2 as per IS-
1180(Part-1 ,2014)
5.6.5 MV SWITCHBOARD

1 PCC / PMCC
1.1 Breaker panels Drawout Single front
1.2 Contactor feeders Drawout Double front a)Drawout Single Front
b)Drawout Double front
c)Fixed Single front
2 MCC Drawout Double front a)Drawout Single Front
3 ASB Drawout Double front a)Drawout Single Front
4 LDB Drawout Double front a)Drawout Single Front
5 Motors
5.1 PMCC Up to 160 kW
5.2 MCC Not applicable for this
Project.
All loads shall be fed from
PCC/PMCC.
6 Type of switchboard Compartmentalised Fixed a)Compartmentalised Fixed
for small package type type
(AC system, b)Non Compartmentalised
Pressurisation system Fixed type
,Bagging plant etc)
5.6.6 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTER TYPE

1 Contactor and switch fuse NA.
with overload relay
2 Contactor, switch fuse and NA. Not applicable for this
overload relay with CBCT Project.
for earth fault protection
3 Contactor and switch fuse NA. Not applicable for this
with motor protection relay Project.
4 Air circuit breaker with Above 55kW up to Refer Note:2
motor protection relay 160KW
5 Contactor and MCCB with up to 22 KW Refer Note:1,2
overload relay
6 Contactor, MCCB and Above 22kW up to 55 Refer Note:1,2
overload relay with CBCT KW
for earth fault protection
Note:1
MCCB (SC, OL, E/F microprocessor based with shunt trip) shall be provided.Type II co-
ordination shall be ensured among all components of motor feeder.
Page 3200 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 30 of 44
Note:2
Electronic type motor protection relay shall be provided instead of Overload relay.
5.6.7 MEDIUM VOLTAGE OUTGOING FEEDER TYPE

1 Switch fuse NA.
2 Switch fuse with Contactor NA.
and CBCT for earth fault
protection
3 MCCB with Contactor and 100A and up to 400A a)___A and up to ___A
CBCT for earth fault (Refer Note-1,2) b)Not Applicable
protection
4 MCCB Below 100A. a)___A and up to ___A
b)Not Applicable
1. Earth leakage relay shall be hand reset type.

2. MCCB shall be provided with shunt trip coil.
5.6.8 MOTOR CONTROLS (AS PER PROCESS PACKAGE & OPERATING

PHILOSOPHY)

1 Auto/OFF/Manual switch Control room a)Near motor
b)Switchgear
c)Control room
2 Local/OFF/Remote switch Near motor a)Near motor
b)Switchgear
c)Control room
3 Process interlock PLC a)PLC
b)Switchgear
4 Reacceleration equipment Switchgear a)PLC
b)Switchgear
5.6.9 CONTROL SUPPLY VOLTAGE

1 Breaker control 110V DC a)220V DC
b)110V DC
2 Breaker spring charging 110V DC a)240V AC
b)220V DC
c)110V DC
3 Contactor feeder 240V AC
4 Control supply for earth 110V DC a)24V DC
fault relay in contactor b)220V DC
feeder(Note 1) c)110V DC
d)240V AC
5 Control supply for Control Transformer a)Control Transformer
contactor motor starter b)Tapping P-N of
Respective Feeder
c)Control Transformer in
individual DOL Starter
Page 3201 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 31 of 44

6 Control transformer for No a)YES
each feeder b)NO
c)Not Applicable
Notes:
1) DC control supply to PMCC is applicable where DC power supply is available.
5.6.10 MOTORS
S.No. Motors High voltage 415 volts

1 Enclosure
1.1 Indoor IP55 IP55
1.2 Outdoor IP55 IP55
2 Insulation class F (Temp. Rise limited to B / F
B) (Temp. Rise limited to B)
3 Anti-condensation heater Yes 30 kW and Above
4 Additional canopy Yes Yes
(outdoor motors)
5 Design voltage variation ±6% ±6%
6 Design frequency variation ±3% ±3%
7 Combined voltage / ±10 % ±10 %
frequency variation Any combination of above Any combination of above
(Design)
1. Motors for MOV actuator shall have F class of insulation with temperature rise
limited to class-B.
2.All MV motors for use in hazardous area shall be minimum Energy efficient IE2
type.
3.All safe area MV motors shall be minimum IE3 type
5.6.11 UPS SYSTEM

1 Redundancy 100% a)50%
b)100%
2 Type of redundancy Parallel redundant a)Parallel redundant
b)Hot standby
3 Back-up time 1.For SMT -DT and BPC - a)30 minutes
RT :30 minutes. b)60 minutes
2.For SV Station 24 c)120 minutes
hours.
4 Bypass transfer control Auto a)Auto
b)Manual
5 Separate fault diagnostic Yes a)YES
unit (Note 1) b)NO
6 Battery type c) VRLA ( In 2X50% a)Lead acid
configuration ) b)Ni-Cd
c)VRLA(in 2x50%
configuration)
7 Type of UPS IGBT a)IGBT
b)Transistorised
8 UPS Output Supply Single Phase a)Single Phase
b)Triple Phase
Page 3202 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 32 of 44

9 UPS Output Voltage 230 V AC (Final voltage
shall be as per
Instrumentation Design
Basis)
1. Seperate Fault Diagnostic Unit(FDU) is not required in case UPS system is serial
connected to SCADA and fault diagnostic can be done from HMI.
2. VRLA batteries are concidered as they are more preferable due to its maintenance
free characteristics. Such batteries may be installed in air conditioned room or
separate rooms with proper exhaust facility.
3. Back up time for UPS considered as 30 minutes & 24 hours for SMT DT and BPC -
RT and SV stations respectively in line with Instrumentation Design Basis
requirements.
5.6.12 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

1 Plant Communication YES.(REFER NOTE:1) a)YES
System b)NO
2 Telephone System Yes a)YES
(Refer Note:2) b)NO
c)Separate
3 Telephone system and NA. a)Separate
plant Communication b)Integrated
system
4 Interface of Communication
system
4.1 With fire alarm system NA. a)YES
b)NO
4.2 With telephone system NA. a)YES
b)NO
Note:1
Integration required at DT station at SMT .
SYSTEM TYPE :INTRON-D-SYSTEM (INDUSTRONIC MAKE)
SYSTEM NAME: INTRON-D
SYSTEM NO : 501-703-300
Note:2
Telephone sockets/wiring and Telephone Junction Box shall be provided. For details
of telephone system refer Instrumentation Design Basis.
5.6.13 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

1 Type Analogue addressable a)Conventional
b)Analogue addressable
2 Name of buildings to be Control room, sub-station,
provided with Detectors Administration
building/office, other
buildings as required.
3 Detection System Break Glass, Multi sensor
detection
Page 3203 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 33 of 44

4 Type of manual call Without call back facility a)With call back facility
point b)Without call back facility
5 Qty of Siren and During detail engineering
location
6 Power supply for Siren 230V AC UPS a)415V AC
b)230V AC UPS
c)48V DC
7 Siren range 5 Km(Diametrically)
8 Response indicator for Yes. a)YES
rooms and concealed b)NO
area for Addressable c)Not Applicable
Fire alarm system
Note:1
Type of Main fire alarm panel shall be Microprocessor based at SMT DT at Siliguri
and BPC RT at Parbatipur, Bangladesh. However at all SV stations (SV-1 cum CTM
station ,SV-2 ,SV-3 ,SV-4 ,SV-5 Cum Tap off), all fire alarm equipment are part of
respective fire protection system associated with CO2 Flooding System & Fire Alarm
System as defined in General Civil scope.
Repater panel to be provided at Main Fire station at DT SMT.
Note:2
Integrating of the new Fire Alarm System to the existing system at SMT DT is
required. Details of existing Fire Alarm system is given below. Information Regarding
BPC -RT at Parbatipur is awaited.
Details of existing Fire alarm panel at SMT DT is as given below:-
Make: New fire engg pvt limited

Model: 10+2/MIMC/ENGG
Sl.no: 463/01/08
5.6.14 DC SYSTEM

1 Battery type
1.1 Switchgear Protection c)VRLA a)Lead acid
Control and critical lighting b)Ni-Cd
c)VRLA
1.2 Instrumentation System c)VRLA a)Lead acid
b)Ni-Cd
c)VRLA
1.3 Diesel Engine Starting VRLA
1.4 DC Motors Not applicable for this a)Lead acid
Project. b)Ni-Cd
c)VRLA
1.5 Fire alarm system VRLA
1.6 Telephone system VRLA
1.7 End Cell Voltage
1.7.1 Lead Acid Battery 1.85 VOLT
1.7.2 VRLA Battery 1.75 VOLT
1.7.3 Ni-Cd Battery 1.0 VOLT
2 Battery backup time
Page 3204 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 34 of 44

2.1 Switchgear Protection and 120 minutes a)30 minutes
Control b)60 minutes
c)120 minutes
2.2 DC Critical lighting 120 minutes a)30 minutes
b)60 minutes
c)120 minutes
2.3 Instrumentation 30 minutes. a)30 minutes
b)60 minutes
c)120 minutes
2.4 Diesel Engine Starting 10 starts (FW pumps) & 6
starts (others)
2.5 DC Motors As per equipment
manufacturer's
recommendation
3 Battery Configuration 2X50% a)2X50%
b)1X100%
Note:1
Battery back-up for DC System has been considered as 30 minutes at SMT DT Station
and BPC -RT station. Battery back-up fat SV stations for DC systems has been
considered as 24 hrs in line with Instrumentation Design Basis Requirements.
5.6.15 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

1 By pass feature required As per Process a)YES
requirements. (Note-1) b)NO
2 VFD rated output voltage
2.1 MV Inverter i) Motor kW rating less than Applicable for MAIN
315kW at 415V , LINE PUMPS 010-PA-
CF-102 A/B. Approx kW
rating is 290kW.
2.2 HV Inverter Motor rating more than Not Applicable for this
700kW Project.
Notes:
1. Bypass for VFD shall be provided as a standard practice unless not recommended
from Process or driven equipment operation point of view.
2.Variable speed motor is required for Main Line pums 010-PA-CF-102 A/B for
Dispatch Station at Siliguri (SMT).
5.6.16 CABLE SIZES
The power and control cables shall have the following minimum cross sectional areas

1 Medium voltage power Refer Note 4 a)Above 16 sqmm
cable (Aluminium)
b)2.5 sqmm to 16 sqmm
(Copper)
Page 3205 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 35 of 44

2 Control cables 1.5 sqmm (Copper)
(Note-5)
3 Lighting 2.5 sqmm (Copper)
4 Communication system 0.9 mm dia. (Copper)
5 Telephone System 0.63 mm dia.(Copper)
6 Fire alarm system 1.5 sqmm (Copper)
Notes:
1. For lighting inside the building, minimum 1.5 sqmm copper conductor, PVC Insulated wire
shall be used in conduit system (for circuit and point wiring), with proper colour coding.
2. Cable sizes are indicative only and these shall be finalised as per the recommendations
of the equipment manufacturer.
3. Special cable type and size shall be decided on specific requirement.
4. All power cables 2.5 sqmm to 16 sqmm shall be with copper conductor and above 16
sqmm shall be aluminium conductor.
5. Control cable shall be twisted pair overall shielded type.
6. Outer PVC sheath of all cables shall be flame retardent type. Cables shall have low
smoke properties i.e. FRLS type with 60% (Max) smoke density.
5.7 CABLING SYSTEM
5.7.1 CABLE DETAILS
S.No. Design Criteria EHV HV 415 volts

1 Loads located NA. Cable Cable
beyond 1 km
2 Loads located 200- NA. 1-core cable/ 3-core cable 1-core / 3 1/2-
1000 m core cable
3 Loads located upto NA. Cable Cable
200 m
4 Loads beyond 1000A NA. Bus duct /1 core cable Bus duct /1 core
rating and located cable
near the transformer.
5 Recommended NA. 300 300
limiting size of multi-
core cable (sqmm)
6 Short-circuit NA. 1.Incomer from Not Applicable
withstand time transformer:1
(seconds) 2.Incomer from other
switchboard:0.6
3.Plant feeder:0.6
4.Motor/Transformer
feeder:0.2
7 Insulation voltage NA. Unearthed Earthed
grade
8 Type of cable NA. XLPE XLPE
insulation
9 Fire survival - - Yes
(Resistant) cable for
Fire proof MOV
10 Power Cable for - 3 core 3 core
Motors/MOV
11 Cable Conductor NA. Aluminium Refer Note-4 of
Cl. 5.6.16
Page 3206 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 36 of 44
S.No. Design Criteria EHV HV 415 volts

12 Power & Earthing NA. Armoured Armoured
cable
Cable details for EHV is not applicable for this Project.
5.7.2 CABLE LAYING PHILOSOPHY

1 Process area RCC trench a)Overhead cable tray
b)RCC trench
2 Offsite paved area RCC trench a)Above Ground cable
tray on sleeper
b)Overhead rack
c)RCC trench
3 Offsite unpaved area Above Ground cable a)Above Ground cable
tray/Directly buried tray
b)Directly buried
4 Type of cable trays Galvanized prefabricated a)Galvanized
Ladder type prefabricated.
b)Site fabricated and
painted
c)FRP type
5 Road Crossings for PVC Pipes/Cable Culvert. a)PVC Pipes
underground cables b)Cable culvert
6 Road Crossings for Overhead cable a)Overhead cable bridge
Above ground cables bridge/Culvert b)Culvert
1. Plant communication, fire alarm and telephone cables shall be laid in instrumentation
overhead cable duct / instrumentation trenches as far possible. In case these are not
available, cable shall be laid in electrical routes along berm of the roads.
5.8 EARTHING SYSTEM

1 Earth electrode GI pipe
2 Main earth loop material GI strip
3 Substation earth loop GI strip
4 EHV switchyard earth grid NA. Not Applicable in this
Project.
5.9 LIGHTING SYSTEM
5.9.1 SUPPLY SYSTEM

1 Centralised with Lighting YES. a)YES
distribution board-LDB b)NO
2 LDB at each substation YES. a)YES
b)NO
3 Lighting transformer YES. a)YES
required b)NO
Page 3207 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 37 of 44

4 100% Standby transformer NO a)YES
for normal lighting system b)NO
5 100% Standby transformer NO a)YES
for emergency lighting b)NO
system
6 Lighting transformer 415V/415V a)415V/415V
voltage ratio
5.9.2 CONTROL PHILOSOPHY

1 Outdoor yard Auto a)Auto
b)Manual
c)Centralised
d)Local
2 Street lighting Auto a)Auto
b)Manual
c)Centralised
d)Local
3 Outdoor process area Auto a)Auto
b)Manual
c)Centralised
d)Local
4 Process building Auto a)Auto
b)Manual
c)Centralised
d)Local
5 Auto control Synchronous timer a)Synchronous timer
b)Photocell
c)ECS
6 Lamp type for outdoor 1. Process Area:
general lighting Flameproof LED
2. Offsite Hazardous
Area: Flameproof LED
3. Offsite Safe Area:
LED.
4. Street Lighting: LED
/Self powered Solar lamp
7 Lamp wattage for outdoor During Detailed Engg
lighting (Normal)
8 Lamp type for emergency LED a)CFL
AC lighting b)LED
9 ELCB at Incomer of Yes a)YES
Lighting / Power Panels b)NO
10 Switch ON/OFF push Yes a)YES
button at substation entry b)NO
5.9.3 AC EMERGENCY LIGHTING

1 Name of process plants All process areas (as per
operation requirement)
Page 3208 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 38 of 44

2 Name of buildings Substation, Control room,
Admin Building, Lab,Other
Buildings.
3 Power supply source Diesel generator
5.9.4 DC CRITICAL LIGHTING FOR ESCAPE

1 Name of process units As per specific project
requirement
2 Name of building Substation, control room,
SRR, Administration
building/office, FWPH, Fire
Station, Compressor House.
3 Power supply 110V DC a)220V DC
b)110V DC
4 DC lighting for remote For SV Stations Lighting
buildings Feeder from DCDB of 48V
DC.
5.9.5 WIRING TYPE

1 Process plant / Building / Armoured cable
Shed
2 Large service building Surface conduit
3 Buildings with false Surface conduit above false a)Surface conduit above
ceiling ceiling false ceiling
b)Cables
4 Substation (Switchgear Concealed conduit,Metsec a)METSEC channel
Room) Channel b)Concealed conduit
5 Substation (Cable Cellar) Cable Cellar not applicable a)Surface Conduit
for this Project. b)Armoured cable
6 Other buildings in safe Surface cable (armoured)
area
5.9.6 SPECIFIC LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS

1 Aviation lighting Yes a)YES
b)NO
2 Security lighting for Yes
peripheral road boundary
wall
3 Type of control gear for Not applicable as LED a)Separate
HPMV/HPSV lamps lighting Fixtures are b)Integral
envisaged.
4 Control gear box location Not Applicable.
5 Type of high mast flood 30 meters Telescopic a)30 meters Telescopic
light tubular tubular
With LED Lighting b)Lattice structural mast
Fixture.
Page 3209 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 39 of 44
5.10 ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING SYSTEM

1 System Design Basis Product Classification a)Product Classification
approach b)System approach
5.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR HAZARDOUS AREAS
The electrical equipment for hazardous areas shall be selected as per IS-16274:2018 / IEC
60079-14:2013 and petroleum rules & Gas group shall be selected based on the hazardous
area classification. The minimum requirement is summarised below:
S.No. Equipment Zone-1 Zone-2

1 MV Motors Ex-de Ex-n (Note-2.9, 2.10 &
2.11)
2 HV Motors Ex-de / Ex-p (Refer note- Ex-n/Ex-de/Ex-p (Note-
2.8) 2.9, 2.10 & 2.11)
3 Push Button Station Ex-de Ex-de
4 Motor Starters Ex-de Ex-de
5 Plug & Socket Ex-de Ex-de
6 Welding Receptacle Ex-de Ex-de
7 Lighting fitting Ex-de Ex-nR
8 Control Gear Box Ex-de Ex-nR/Ex-de
9 Junction Boxes Ex-de Ex-n
10 Transformer Unit Ex-de Ex-de
11 Plug & Socket Ex-de Ex-de
12 Break Glass Unit Ex-de Ex-de
(Fire Alarm System)
13 Lighting Panel/Power Ex-de Ex-de
Panel
14 Transformers Hermetically sealed with Hermetically sealed with
surface temperature not surface temperature not
exceeding 200 DEG C exceeding 200 DEG C
For additional Hazardous Area requirements, refer notes below -
5.11.1 NOTES
S.No. Notes
1 The electrical equipment for hazardous areas shall generally be suitable for gas
group IIB and temp classification T3 as applicable to the selected type of explosion
protection. In case of hydrogen or hydrocarbon mixtures having more than 30%
hydrogen, the gas group to be considered shall be IIC.
2 As additional safety features, the following requirements for electrical equipment
shall be followed.
2.1 All electric motors for agitators/mixers and metering pumps handling flammable
material shall be flameproof type irrespective of the area being classified as zone 2
or zone 1.
2.2 All electric motors for vertical sump pumps handling flammable material shall be
flameproof type. (Ex-de)
2.3 Irrespective of the area classification (whether zone 1 or zone 2), all lighting fixtures
within the storage areas shall be flameproof type. (Ex-de)
Page 3210 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 40 of 44
S.No. Notes
2.4 Irrespective of the area classification (whether zone 1 or zone 2), all motors and
lighting fittings within the pump house/pump station/compressed house associated
with offsite tank farm and within the loading/unloading gantries shall be of flameproof
type. (Ex-de)
2.5 All emergency/critical lighting fixtures and associated junction boxes in hazardous
areas (whether zone-1 and zone-2) shall be flameproof type. (Ex-de)
2.6 Even though fired heaters in process units are not considered for area classification,
all electrical equipments associated with fired heaters in process units shall as a
minimum be suitable for installation in Zone-2 area.
2.7 Building such as Compressor sheds inside the process area shall be designed to
allow adequate ventilation to allow area classification as Zone-2. Lighting equipment,
EOT crane etc. in the shed shall be flameproof type. All other electrical equipment
shall be suitable for Zone-1 or Zone-2 area depending on extent of hazard.
2.8 All motors for hazardous area Zone-1 shall preferably be Ex-de type. Pressurised
motors may be provided in exceptional cases, when Ex-de motors are not available.
2.9 Ex-n motors shall be used unless any other type is specified by process licensor,
except for following cases:
(i) HV motors in Zone-2 area for centrifugal compressors shall be Ex-de type.
(ii)Ex-de motors shall be used in zone-2 areas having frequent start-stop
requirements such as EOT cranes, elevators, MOV actuators, etc.
2.10 For zone-2 areas, motors with rating above 100kW having average starting
frequency of more than 1 per week, Ex-de or Ex-p motors shall be used.
2.11 Ex-p motors shall be used for higher rated motors where Ex-n motors are not
available.
3 Statutory Approval
1. Statutory Authority for Electrical Installation: State Electrical Inspectorate/CEA
2. Statutory authority for hazardous area:
PESO:For area other than mines
5.12 ELECTRICAL CONTROL SYSTEM-ECS

1 Extent of coverage NA.
1.1 No of substations NA.
1.2 Monitoring
1.2.1 EHV/HV switchboard NA. a)YES
b)NO
1.2.2 415V switchboard (I/C, B/C & NA. a)YES
outgoing breaker feeders) b)NO
1.2.3 Emergency DG set NA. a)YES
b)NO
1.3 Control
1.3.1 EHV/HV switchboard NA. a)YES
b)NO
1.3.2 415V switchboard (I/C, B/C & NA. a)YES
outgoing breaker feeders) b)NO
1.3.3 Emergency DG set NA. a)YES
b)NO
2 Base ECS functionalities
2.1 Breaker control in CPP & NA.
Switchyard
2.2 Breaker control in other NA.
substations
Page 3211 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 41 of 44

2.3 Area lighting NA.
2.4 Electrical plant data NA. a)YES
acquisition and display b)NO
2.5 Routine log report generation NA. a)YES
and energy balance report b)NO
2.6 Detection and reporting of NA. a)YES
alarms b)NO
2.7 Sequence of event recording NA. a)YES
b)NO
3 Advanced ECS functionalities
3.1 Load shedding including NA. a)YES
maximum demand limit b)NO
control
3.2 Synchronization NA. a)YES
b)NO
3.3 Capacitor feeder control for NA. a)YES
power factor improvement b)NO
3.4 Active & Reactive power NA. a)YES
control b)NO
3.5 Frequency & load control of NA. a)YES
all generators except DG b)NO
3.6 Excitation control of NA. a)YES
synchronous motors b)NO
3.7 Grid transformer OLTC NA. a)YES
control b)NO
4 Communication with other NA.
systems
5.12 ELECTRICAL CONTROL SYSTEM-ECS is not applicable for this Project.
6.0 SPARE PARTS
6.1 MANDATORY SPARES
Mandatory spares shall be procured along with the main equipment. Such spares for each
equipment shall be as per the below table. These spares include only those spares, which
are critical for equipment.
S.No. Part Description Description

1 Generator one set of spare for each rating of
Generator
1.1 Generator relay 1 set of each type & make
1.2 DVR - all control card 1 No. each type
1.3 Control fuses / MCB 10 Nos. of each rating & type
1.4 Exciter Diodes and fuses 1 set
1.5 Control and Selector switches 1 No. of each type and make
1.6 Aux. contactors 20% of each type and make OR 1
No.(min) of each type and make,
whichever is more
4 Distribution Transformer one set of spare for each transformer
4.1 Complete set of gaskets 1 set
4.2 Sealing / Gauge glass of Conservator 2 Nos. of each rating & type.
Page 3212 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 42 of 44

4.3 Control fuses / MCB for MB cubicles 20% for each rating OR 1 No. (min.) of
each rating, whichever is more
5 11kV Air Insulated Switchboard (AIS) one set of spare for each switchboard
(Refer Note-7)
5.1 Closing coil 1 No. of each rating & type
5.2 Shunt trip coil 1 No. of each rating & type
5.4 Indicating lamps covers 5 Nos. of each colour
5.5 Indicating lamps 20% or 3 Nos. (min.), whichever is
more
6 415V PCC/PMCC/EPCC or MV one set of spare for each switchboard
Switchboard
6.1 Closing coil 1 No. of each rating & type
6.2 Shunt trip coil 1 No. of each rating & type
6.3 Control fuses / MCB 10 Nos. each rating & type
6.5 Indicating lamps 20% or 3 Nos. (min.), whichever is
more
7 Variable Frequency Drive one set of spare for each VFD
7.1 Transistors / IGBT / IGCT 1 No of each rating & type
7.2 Control cards 1 No of each type
7.3 Power supply cards 1 No of each rating & type
7.4 Power fuses 20% for each rating OR 1 no. (min.) of
7.6 Contactors 10% of each type OR 1 no. (min) of
each type, whichever is more
7.7 Indicating lamps 20% OR 1 nos. (min.), whichever is
more
7.8 Indicating lamps covers 2 nos of each colour
7.9 Blocker Diode 2 nos. of each rating & type
9 Relays for Switchboard / Relay control one set of spare for each Switchboard
Panel (Refer Note-8)/ Relay control Panel
9.1 Protection Relays 1 No. of each type
9.2 Auxiliary Relays 1 No. of each type
10 UPS System one set of spare for each UPS system
10.1 Power Thyristors / Transistors / IGBT / 1 No. of each rating & type
IGCT
10.2 Control cards 1 No. of each type
10.3 Power supply cards 1 No. of each rating and type
10.4 Power fuses 20% for each rating OR 1 no. (min.)of
more
10.8 Blocker Diode 2 Nos. of each rating & type
11 DC System one set of spare for each DC System
11.1 Power Thyristors / Transistors / IGBT / 1 No. of each rating & type
IGCT
11.2 Control cards 1 No. of each type
11.3 Power supply cards 1 No. of each rating and type
Page 3213 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 43 of 44

more
11.8 Blocker Diode 2 Nos. of each rating & type
13 HV induction motors one set of spare for each rating & type
13.1 Bearing ( DE & NDE ) 1 set
13.2 Terminal studs/bushing assembly 1 set each
14 MV induction motors 37 kW & above one set of spare for each rating & type
14.1 Bearing ( DE & NDE ) 1 set
14.2 Terminal studs/bushing assembly 1 set each
15 Fire alarm system
15.1 All cards 1 No. of each type
15.4 Terminal blocks 20 Nos
15.5 Fire Detectors 1% of total installed capacity of each
type OR 1 no.(min.) of each type,
whichever is more
15.6 Glass for Break Glass Boxes/ Manual call 5 % of each type OR 1 No. (min.) of
point each type, whichever is more
NOTES:
1. The word ‘TYPE’ means the Make, Model no., Type, Range, Size/ Length, Rating,
Material as applicable.
2. Wherever % age is identified, Contractor shall supply next rounded figure.
3. The terminology used under ‘Part Description’ is the commonly used name of the part
and may vary from manufacturer to manufacturer.
4. Mandatory spares as indicated above do not cover commissioning spares.
5. Mandatory spares as indicated above do not cover two year O&M spares.
6. Mandatory spares shall be applicable for electrical items of motors / sub-packages as
per mandatory spares philosophy specified elsewhere in the bid document.
7. For Isolation breaker panel (GIS or AIS) one set of "Tripping Coil (1 No.), Closing coil (1
No.) and Control fuse/MCB (10 Nos. of each rating and type)" shall be considered as
mandatory spares for each Isolation breaker panel (GIS or AIS).
8. For Isolation breaker panel (GIS or AIS) one set of "Auxiliary relays (1 no. of each type)"
shall be considered as mandatory spares for Relays for Isolation breaker panel (GIS or AIS).
6.2 COMMISSIONING SPARES
Commissioning Spare Parts shall be procured along with the main equipment as per
equipment manufacturer's recommendations. The list of such recommended spares shall be
obtained along with the offer.
6.3 RECOMMENDED SPARE FOR NORMAL OPERATION & MAINTAINENCE
Quotation for two-years spares for normal operation and maintenance (over and above
mandatory spares) along with unit price shall be obtained with the proposal for Client to
order the same separately.
6.4 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES
Required Special Tools and Tackles shall be procured along with the main equipment as per
Page 3214 of 3884

(Electrical) B185-999-16-50-EDB-1001
Rev No. B
Page 44 of 44
equipment manufacturer's recommendations. The list of such recommended special

tools/tackles shall be obtained along with the offer.
7.0 VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENT
Vendor Data Requirement as indicated in the respective equipment Material Requisitions

shall be followed.
Page 3215 of 3884

Document No.
HV / MV Cable B185-000-16-50-DS-9540
DATA SHEET Rev. No. A
Page 1 of 2
Project EPCM for IBFPL Project in Bangladesh Client NRL - NUMALIGARH REFINERY
Unit General Location Job No. B185 Unit No. 000
PURCHASER'S DATA
A. Site Conditions
1. Maximum Ambient Temperature °C 34
2. Minimum Ambient Temperature °C 10
3. Design Ambient Temperature °C 40
4. Relative Humidity % 87
5. Altitude Above MSL mm Less than 1000m above MSL
6. Environment Tropical, Humid & saline
B. Technical particulars
1. System Voltage
Nominal 415 V
Highest 500 V
Voltage grade 650/1100V
2. Frequency Hz 50 +/- 3 %
3. Conductor material
HV Power cable MV POWER AND CONTROL CABLE
MV Power cable Copper & Aluminium
MV control cable Copper & Aluminium

4. Installation under DGMS jurisdiction (See Note) No
5. Applicable spec. 6-51-0051 REV-8
6. Insulation XLPE
7. PVC compound type As per 6-51-0051 Rev 8
8. Type of conductor As per 6-51-0051 Rev 8
9. Conductor class Class-1/2 for fixed installation
10. Types of cable Flame retardant low smoke
11. Armour
Type As per 6-51-0051 Rev 8
Size of armour As per Table -3 of IS 1554
12. Type of drum Steel
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
A. Technical particulars
1. Name of manufacturer
2. MR/PR item no.
3. Cable type/ code
5 Conductor semiconducting screen (HV cables)
Material
Thickness mm
6. Insulation
Type of compound
Thickness mm
7. Insulation semiconducting screen (HV cables)

Material
A 30-AUG-2019 ISSUED WITH TENDER MULLICK JOYDEEP SAHA RAJIV KUMAR SINGH ARVIND N P (MS)
Rev. No. Date Purpose Prepared By Reviewed By Approved By
Format No: EIL 1650-3054 Rev.2 Generated through Electrical Datasheet system (Copyrights EIL - All rights reserved)
Page 3216 of 3884

Document No.
HV / MV Cable B185-000-16-50-DS-9540
Page 2 of 2
Thickness mm
8. Copper tape
Thickness mm
9. Inner sheath
Type of compound
Thickness mm
10. Nominal dia under armour mm
11. Calculated dia under armour mm
12. Armour
Material
Type
Size
13. Nominal dia under outersheath mm
14. Calculated dia under outersheath mm
15. Outersheath
Type of compound
Thickness mm
16. Nominal outer dia of cable mm
17. Tolerance on outer dia %

18. Weight of cable per km kg
19. Maximum drum length mtr.
20. Maximum DC resistance of conductor at 20 °C
21. AC resistance at 90 °C
22. Reactance of cable at 50 Hz
23. Capacitance of cable
24. Zero sequence impedance of cable
25. Capacitive charging current per km
Notes
1
Page 3217 of 3884

Document No.
FLAMEPROOF LIGHTING/ B185-000-16-50-DS-9541
POWER PANELS DATASHEET Rev. No. A
Page 1 of 2
PURCHASER'S DATA
A. Site Conditions

1. Area classification Zone 2
2. Type of panel enclosure Flameproof (Ex-de)
3. Gas group II A/II B
4. Surface temperature T3
5. Degree of ingress protection IP 55
6. Cable entry Bottom
7. Panel Mounting Wall
8. Exterior painting Shade 632 of IS-5
9. Interior painting Shade 632 of IS-5
10. Earthing Terminals 10mm¿ stud (External-2nos,Internal-1no.)
11. Incoming supply 415 V, 50 Hz, TPN
12. Outgoing supply 240 V, 50 Hz, SPN
13. Incomer feeder rating 4 pole, 40A MCB
14. Outgoing feeder rating 2 pole, 6A MCB
15. Short Circuit capacity-MCB/ELCB 9 kA (M9 Category)
16. Applicable standard EIL std. 6-51-0008
17. Type test Required
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
LP LP LP PP PP PP PP PP
Equipment.
---ways ---ways ---ways ---ways ---ways ---ways ---ways ---ways
1. MR item no.
2. Explosion protection class

3. Tag no.
4. Type reference no.
Ref. No. & date of CIMFR/ other test
5.
certificates of recognised test authority
Ref. No. & date of CCE/PESO approval
6.
certificates
7. Ref. No. & date of DGFASLI approval

certificates
8. Ref. No. & date of DGMS approval

certificates
9. BIS license no. date
10. Dimension L x D x H (mm)

11. Weight (kg)
Page 3218 of 3884

Document No.
FLAMEPROOF LIGHTING/ B185-000-16-50-DS-9541
POWER PANELS DATASHEET Rev. No. A
Page 2 of 2
Eil Notes
1
Page 3219 of 3884

Document No.
COMMUNICATION & FIRE ALARM
B185-000-16-50-DS-9542
CABLES
Rev. No. A
DATA SHEET
Page 1 of 2
PURCHASER'S DATA
A. Site Conditions
5. Altitude Above MSL m Less than 1000m above MSL
1. Cable Type/Code FA/ Plant Comm/ Telephone
2. Embossing Details Sequential marking/ mtr
3. Details of Color Coding Refer Notes.
4. Details of Pairing As per 6-51-0052 REV-6
5. Standard Drum Length As per 6-51-0052 REV-6
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
A. Twisted Pair Unshielded Cables
1. Name of Manufacturer
2. Material Specifications
Conductor dia. mm
Insulation Thickness mm
Inner Sheath Thickness mm
Outer Sheath Thickness mm
3. Performance Data
Rated Voltage V
Max. Resistance at 20°C ohms
Max. Core-Core Capacitance nF
Max. Inductance mH
Nominal Impedance ohms
4. Technical Particulars
Approx. overall diameter mm
Approx. dia. over armour mm
Approx. dia. under armour mm
Armour Galvanised Steel wire thickness
Minimum outer sheath thickness mm
B. Twisted Pair Shielded Cables
1. Name of Manufacturer
2. Material Specifications
Conductor dia. mm
Insulation Thickness mm
Inner Sheath Thickness mm
Outer Sheath Thickness mm
3. Performance Data
Rated Voltage V
Max. Resistance at 20°C ohms
Max. Core-Core Capacitance nF
A 30-AUG-2019 ISSUED WITH MR MULLICK JOYDEEP SAHA RAJIV KUMAR SINGH ARVIND N P (MS)
Page 3220 of 3884

Document No.
COMMUNICATION & FIRE ALARM
B185-000-16-50-DS-9542
CABLES
Rev. No. A
DATA SHEET
Page 2 of 2

Max. Core-Screen Capacitance nF
Maximum Inductance mH
Nominal Impedance ohms
4. Shielding Data
Material of Shielding
Minimum Thickness mm
Coverage and Overlap
5. Drain Wire for Overall Sheath
Drain Wire Material
Area of Cross Section mm sq
No. of Strands
Diameter mm
6. Technical Particulars
Conductor Size mm sq
Approx. overall diameter mm
Approx. dia. over armour mm
Approx. dia. under armour mm
Armour Galvanised Steel wire thickness
Minimum outer sheath thickness mm
Eil Notes
1 The outer sheath shall be red in colour for cables to be used for fire alarm system, grey in colour for cables to be used for plant communication and telephone system.
A 30-AUG-2019 ISSUED WITH MR MULLICK JOYDEEP SAHA RAJIV KUMAR SINGH ARVIND N P (MS)
Page 3221 of 3884

Document No.
PLANT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM B185-000-16-50-DS-9543
DATA SHEET
Rev. No. A
Page 1 of 4
PURCHASER'S DATA
A. Site Conditions
5. Altitude Above MSL m Less than 1000m above MSL
B. Area classification
1. Buildings Safe Area
2. Plant units(ISBL)
Zone Zone 2
Gas Group II A/II B

Temp. class T3
C. Power Supply
Incoming power supply from purchaser's mains supply at one point for each
Central Exchange
1. Voltage 230V AC SPN UPS POWER SUPPLY
2. Frequency 50
3. Type UPS
D. Central Exchange
1. Type Digital Intelligent Microprocessor based
2. Ingress protection IP 55
3. Capacity For 50 Nos. FCS
4. Material of construction of wall or pedestal-mounted, explosion or weather
LM-6/ Glass fibre reinforced polyester
proof type FCS and other Field Communication Equipment
5. Ingress protection for field equipment IP 55
E. Plant Communication facilities required
Paging(all call in voice mode) of the entire plant over loud speakers Yes
1.
from the master station(as per the enclosed speech diagram)
2. Selective call from the Master Station to any of the Field Call stations and Yes
call back by Field Call Stations(as per the enclosed speech diagram)
3. Communication between Master Call Stations Yes
Initiation of call from any of the Field Call Stations to the Master Yes
4.
Station(as per the enclosed Speech Diagram)
5. Communication between any two Field Stations without interferance Yes

of the Master Call Station(as per the enclosed Speech Diagram)
Communication between any two Field Call Stations only at the
Yes
6. discretion of the Master Call Station, except for the dedicated speech
connection shown in the enclosed Speech Diagram
7. Conference call between multiple field call station at the discretion of the Yes
master call station
8. Communication between different Exchanges, if provided within the plant Yes
9. Operating an alarm call from the Master Call Station over all the loud
Yes
speakers(through the 5 tone alarm generator)
10. Monitoring the health of the system Yes
A MULLICK JOYDEEP
Format No:EIL 1650-2003 Rev.2 Generated through Electrical Datasheet system (Copyrights EIL - All rights reserved)
Page 3222 of 3884

Document No.
DATA SHEET
Rev. No. A
Page 2 of 4
11. Muting facility for silencing the loud speaker connected to the FCS/ Yes
Booster amplifier
12. Field programming facility for flexible speech diagram at site Yes
13. Integration with Telephone Exchange (EPABX) Yes
14. Integration with Fire Alarm System Yes
15. Facility for recording conversation among MCS, FCS etc. Yes
16. Digital audio recorder module Yes
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
A. Utilisation Voltage
1. Field Call Stations with built in speaker/ amplifier
2. Master Call Stations
3. 25 W Booster amplifier and loud speaker
4. Central Exchange
B. Total power requirement of the syst (list separately for each exchange)
1. Total AC power(in KVA)
2. Phase/ Voltage/ Frequency
3. Type
C. Recommended type and size, no. of cores, conductor dia. of cable
to be used for the following
1. Central Exchange to Central Exchange (if any)
2. Between Distributed intelligent Nodes
3. Between Central Exchange & Intelligent nodes
4. Central Exchange to Master Call Station
5. Central Exchange to Field Call Station
6. Field Call Station to paging Loud speaker
7. Field Call Station to Field Call Station(if any)
8. Field Call Station to Flashing Beacon
9. Central Exchange to Telephone/FA System interface
D. Distance limitation(if any)

1. From Central Exchange to Central Exchange
2. Between Distributed intelligent Nodes
3. Between Central Exchange & Intelligent nodes
4. Central Exchange/Intelligent nodes to Master Call Station
5. Central Exchange/Intelligent nodes to Field Call Station
6. From Field Call Station to Paging Loud speaker
7. From Field Call Station to Field Call Station
8. From Field Call Station to Flashing Beacon
9. From Central Exchange to Telephone/ FA System interface
E. Details of Equipment certification/ approval for Hazardous area application
Field Call Station Field Call Station Booster
External 25 W
Equipment without Booster with Booster amplifier(if Flashing Beacon
Loud speaker
amplifier amplifier provided
separately)
1. MR item No.
A MULLICK JOYDEEP
Page 3223 of 3884

Document No.
DATA SHEET
Rev. No. A
Page 3 of 4
Type Reference
2.
no./ model no.
Hazardous area
3. protection
class/designation
Ref. no. & date of
4. CIMFR/ other test
certificates of
recognised test
authority
Ref. No. & date of
5.
CCoE approval
certificate
6. BIS License no. &

date
F. Technical Particulars of Plant Communication Equipments

Hazardou
s area Material
Make/ Dimensio
MR item protectio Weight of
Equipment Country Model Rating Type n (LxDxH) (Kg)
No. n Construc
of Origin no.
mm
class/des tion
ignation(a
s
Field Call Stations,
applicable
1. with/without Booster
)
amplifier
1W(hazardous area)
amplifier 4W(weather
proof)
amplifier 4W(desk-top
type)
Booster
4. amplifier(outdoor,haz
ardous area)
25W,124db(A)
Booster
amplifier(weather
5.
proof)
25W,124db(A)
Loud
6. speaker(outdoor,ha
zardous area)
25W,124db(A)
Loud
speaker(weather
7.
proof)
25W,124db(A)
Box type speaker
8.
6W(min.)
9. Flashing Beacon
A MULLICK JOYDEEP
Page 3224 of 3884

Document No.
DATA SHEET
Rev. No. A
Page 4 of 4
10. Accoustic Hood
11. Master Call Station
12. Central Exchange
13. Intelligent Nodes
14. Programme Unit
Fault Diagnostic/
15.
monitoring Unit
G. Technical Particulars of Plant Communication Equipments

1. Lamp Type, wattage and color of Flashing Beacon
2. FCS type
3. Total No. of Keys in the following
MCS
FCS(weather proof/ explosion proof)
Desk-top FCS
4. Canopy for outdoor equipment
5. Heat loss of Central Exchange(for sizing Air conditioning package)
6. Types of alarm tones(5 nos.)
Notes
1
A MULLICK JOYDEEP
Page 3225 of 3884

Document No.
Medium Voltage Squirrel Cage
B185-000-16-50-DS-9544
Induction Motor
Rev. No. A
Datasheet
Page Page 1 of 3
PURCHASER'S DATA
A. Site Conditions
1. Maximum Ambient Temperature °C34
2. Minimum Ambient Temperature °C10
5. Altitude mm Less than 1000m above MSL
6. Environment: Tropical, Humid & saline
1. Motor Tag no.:
2. Driven Equipment name: Tube Well Pump
3. Voltage: V 400 +/- 6 %
4. Phase: Three
5. Frequency: Hz 50 +/- 3 %
6. Fault level: kA N.A.
7. Method of starting: D.O.L
8. Winding Connection: Delta
9. No of Terminals: 3
10. Cable size: mm² During Detail Engg
11. Cable type: AYFY
12. Temperature rise: °C 80
13. Cooling: IC411
14. Insulation class: B
15. Temperature rise Limited to insulation class B
16. Hazardous area classification: SAFE AREA
17. Dust classification
18. Gas group: SAFE
19. SAFE
Dust Group
20. Type of explosion protection: NOT APPLICABLE
21. Prestart purging for Ex(n) motor Not Required
22. Type of ingress protection: IP 55
23. Color shade: 632 as per IS 5
24. Thermisters: Required
25. RTD: Required
26. BTD: Required
27. RTD/BTD monitoring device: Required
28. Applicable specification: EIL spec. 6-51-0032

29. Efficiency: IE 3
DRIVEN EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER's DATA
1. Suggested motor rating: kW
2. Manufacturer:
3. BkW at Full load: kW
4. kW:at end of Curve kW
Page 3226 of 3884

Document No.
B185-000-16-50-DS-9544
Induction Motor
Rev. No. A
Datasheet
Page Page 2 of 3
5. Speed: RPM
6. Rotation of eqpt. from coupling end:
7. Driven equipment:
8. Coupling type:
9. Torque required starting mkg
Torque required Maximum mkg
10. GD2 of eqpt including flywheel kgm²
excluding flywheel: kgm²

11. thrust Up: kg
thrust Down: kg
12. Starting condition:
MOTOR MANUFACTURER's DATA

1. Rating: kW
2. Manufacturer:
3. No. of poles:
4. Frame designation:
5. Full load speed: RPM
6. Mounting:
7. Full load torque (FLT): mkg
8. Starting torque: % of FLT
9. Break down or pull out torque: % of FLT
10. Full load current (FLC): A
11. Starting current at 100% voltage: % of FLC
12. Rotation viewed from coupling end:
13. Starting time at 75% voltage: sec.
100% voltage: sec.
14. Locked rotor withstand time (cold/hot) at,
75% voltage sec.
100% voltage: sec.
15. Time (Te) for Increased Safety Motor at 100% Voltag sec.
16. Heating/Cooling Time Const. (min.) min
17. Space heater - voltage & power:
18. Efficiency at 75% Load: %
100% Load: voltage: %
19. Power factor at 75%/ Load:
100% Load:
starting
20. Moment of inertia, GD2: kgm²
21. NDE bearing type & no
22. DE bearing type & no.:
23. Type of lubrication:

24. Weight of motor: kg
Page 3227 of 3884

Document No.
B185-000-16-50-DS-9544
Induction Motor
Rev. No. A
Datasheet
Page Page 3 of 3
25. Thermisters, quantity no.

make: type:
26. RTD, quantity: no.
make: type:
27. BTD, quantity no.

make: type:
28. Shaft voltage: V

29. Critical speed, 1st/2nd stage: RPM
30. Canopy:
Notes
Page 3228 of 3884

Datasheet No.
DATA SHEET
B185-000-16-50-DS-9545
FOR
Rev.No. A
MV SWITCHBOARD COMPONENTS
Page 1 of 1
COMPONENT RATING (A)

FEEDER MOTOR MAX. CABLE
TYPE RATING KW SIZE
HEAVY DUTY CONTACTOR
MCCB/BMR MCCB/BMR CT RATIO
SWITCH (AC3)
FVNR-15 6/0.8-1.2 10/2-3.3

FVR - 15 10/2.5-4 16/4.5-7.5
≤5.5 4*16 15/1 32 15
FVNR - 15HD 16/5.5-8 20-06-2010
32/11-16 32/9-15
FVNR-30
FVR - 30 32/11-16 32/9-15
5.5 < KW≤11 3.5*35 30/1 63 30
FVNR - 30HD 63/30-45 63/14-23
FVNR-60
FVR - 60 63/25-40 63/20-33 60/1
11< KW ≤22 3.5*70 125 60
FVNR - 60HD 80/30-45 100/30-50 (See note-1)
FVNR-100 125/38-63 125/45-75

FVR - 100 160/50-90 150/45-75 100/1
22< KW≤45 3.5*150 250 100
FVNR - 100HD 200/70-110 200/66-110 (See note-1)
FVNR-150
FVR - 150 150/1
45< KW≤55 3.5*185 200/70-110 200/66-110 400 150
FVNR - 150HD (See note-1)
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY

ACB F
Feeder
d 55<
55 KW £160 2*3.5*185
2*3 5*185 ACB
(46,50,49,50N & 51LR)
MCCB-32 _ 3.5*50 32 32 _ 32 _
MCCB-63 _ 3.5*50 63 63 _ 63 _
MCCB-100 _ 3.5*120 100 100 _ 100 _
MCCB-125 _ 2*3.5*120 125 125 _ 125 _
MCCBC-63 _ 3.5*50 63 63 _ 63 _
MCCBC-125 _ 2*3.5*120 125 125 _ 125 _
MCCBC-250 _ 2*3.5*300 250 250 250/1 250 _
MCCB-160 MCCB 2*3.5*185 160 160 _ 160 _
250A MCCB WITH O/C, S/C & E/F

MCCB-250 MCCB 2*3.5*300 250/1 _ _
RELEASES
400A MCCB WITH O/C, S/C & E/F
MCCB-400 MCCB 3*3.5*300 400/1 _ _
RELEASES
NOTES:
1. Major components are shown above, all other items as specified in equipment data sheet and EIL specification shall also be
in vendor’s scope.
2. Typical MCCB rating and bimetal relay ranges are specified above. Final MCCB rating and bimetal range shall be selected
by the manufacturer meeting type-2 co-ordination as per IS-13947.
A 30-08-2019 ISSUED WITH TENDER JM RKS ANPS

Rev. Date Purpose Prepared Checked Approved
Format No. EIL-MVSWCDS REV 0 Copyrights EIL - All rights reserved
Page 3229 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
DATASHEET FOR LIGHTING B185-000-16-50-DS-9546
FIXTURE SCHEDULE Rev. A
Page 1 of 10
DATASHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE

SCHEDULE
PROJECT : INDIA -BANGLADESH FRIENDSHIP P/L
OWNER : M/S NUMALIGARH REFINERY LIMITED
CONSULTANT: M/s ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
JOB NO. : B185

Rev.
No
Page 3230 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
Page 2 of 10
LED TYPE FIXTURES
FIXTURE DESCRIPTION WATTAGE MANUFACTURER TYPE

TYPE DESIGNATION
INDOOR LED FIXTURES

LEDIND1 Mounting rail type fixture suitable for 1x18/22 1 x 18/22 W Philips-Master-LED-tube
W LED lamp made of stove enamel finish MS Surya-SLE TL
sheet steel housing.
LEDIND2 Same as INDLED1 but suitable for 2`x18/22 2 x 18/22 W Philips-Master-LED-tube

W LED lamp Surya-SLE TL
LEDIND3 Industrial type fixture suitable for 1x18/22W 1 x 18/22 W Philips-Master-LED-tube

fluorescent lamp made of stove enamel finish Surya-SLE TL
MS sheet steel housing and vitreous
enameled white reflector.
LEDIND4 Same as INDLED3 but suitable for 2x18/22 W 2 x 18/22 W Philips-Master-LED-tube

LED lamp Surya-SLE TL
LED 1 Decorative circular (200 mm dia approx.) 28/30W Philips- BBS498

down lighter, recess mounted type with LED Crompton-LCDLH-30CDL
light source having high glossy mirror, matt
reflector including suitable integrated
independent driver box
LED 2 Recess type square (600 mm x 600 mm 50/55 W Philips-QUADRA II

approx) fixture 50 W with LED light source Crompton-LCTLR-50-FO-
having high efficiency low glare optics with CDL or Equivalent
integrated independent driver box
LED3 Recess type square (300 mm x 300 mm 18 W Crompton-LCDRP81 or

approx) fixture 18 W with LED light source Equivalent
having high efficiency low glare optics with
integrated independent driver box
LED4 Under water lighting fixture 7 W with LED light 7 W Crompton-AQUA(LUWH2-
source with all controllers, drivers as required. 07-T) or Equivalent
LED5 Similar to LED2, but with 36 W LED Fixture 36 W Crompton-LCTLR-36-CDL

complete with LED Lamp, driver, including or equivalent
other materials as applicable for installation.
LED6 Similar to LED2, but SURFACE type with 36 36 W Crompton-LCTLS-36-CDL
W LED Fixture complete LED Lamp, driver, or equivalent
including other materials as applicable for
installation.
LED7 Bollard type fixture, 10 W with LED light 10 W Philips BR840
source having high efficiency soft glare free Crompton LBLS1-10-CDL,
light with LED Lamp, driver, including other LBLS3-10-T or equivalent
materials as applicable for installation.
Page 3231 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
Page 3 of 10

TYPE DESIGNATION
LED8 LED Fixture TUBE Type complete with LED 18 W Crompton IPFC111LT8-16
Lamp, driver, including other materials as or equivalent
applicable for installation.
LED9 Similar to LED 8 above but Weatherproof 42W Philips WT550C LED355
(min. IP-65) suitable for conduit / pipe/ surface CW PSU S1 PC or equivalent
mounting with LED Lamp, driver, including
LED10 Decorative circular down lighter, surface/ wall 18W/24W Philips WL120V Round or
mounted type, Weatherproof (min. IP-65) with equivalent
LED Lamp, driver, including other materials as
LED-11 Decorative circular (200 mm dia approx.) 1x9W Crompton LCD SLW-10C
dowlighter, surface mounted type with LED or equivalent
Module, aluminium satin finished reflector,
polycarbonate lenses including suitable
integrated independent driver box.
LED-12 Decorative circular (200 mm dia approx.) 1x9W Crompton LCD RLW-15C
dowlighter, recess mounted type with LED or equivalent
Module, aluminium satin finished reflector,
polycarbonate lenses including suitable
integrated independent driver box.
LED13 LED Fixture suitable for DC Voltage complete 18 W Not Available
with LED Lamp, driver, including other
LED14 LED Chemical resistance Fixtures complete Upto 50W Philips WT461C
with LED Lamp, driver, including other or equivalent
LED15 LED Low Bay Fixtures complete with LED Upto 90W Crompton LHBV-40-CDL
LED16 LED Medium Bay Fixtures complete with LED Upto 125W Crompton LHBB-90-CDL- MB or equivalent
Lamp, driver, including other materials as
LED17 LED High Bay Fixtures complete with LED Upto 250W Philips BY460P (2-pod version)
Lamp, driver, including other materials as Crompton LHBBx-150-CDL
applicable for installation. or equivalent
LED18 LED High Bay Fixtures complete with LED Upto 400W Philips BY461P (4-pod
Lamp, driver, including other materials as version), Crompton LHBBx-180-CDL or
applicable for installation. equivalent
LED-RSD-10: LED Fixture suitable for 110V/220V DC Pyrotech (PB-13-P-L-WXOA/18W)

complete with 18W LED Lamp, driver, including
other materials as applicable for installation Or Equivalent Models.
(Recess mounted)
LED-SFD-12: LED Fixture suitable for 110V/220V DC Pyrotech (PB-13-P-L-WXOB/18W)
complete with 18W LED Lamp, driver, including
other materials as applicable for installation Or Equivalent Models.
(Surface mounted)
Page 3232 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
Page 4 of 10
LED -LB–1: Indoor Industrial Low Bay LED Luminaries - Bajaj : Duranto Highbay
with high pressure die-cast aluminum housing, Luminaire 100 Watts{BGHB
mirror / lens optics (heat- resistant) for 100W LED GV};
symmetric light distribution and high system Crompton : SURROUND -II
efficacy for a rating of 80 Watts up to 100 Watts LHB11-70-CDL/60 - 70Watts;
– complete with integral electronic LED drivers, Philips : GreenPerform
heat sinks for efficient heat dissipation & all Highbay G2 – 80
mounting accessories. Watts{BY689P LED 90/NW
PSU S-NB};
Pyrotech: PD-17-D-L-
WXOA/90W
LED –HB1: Indoor Industrial Medium Bay LED Luminaries -  Bajaj : Duranto Highbay
with high pressure die-cast aluminum housing, Luminaire 150 Watts{BGHB
mirror / lens optics (heat- resistant) for 150W LED};
symmetric light distribution and high system  Crompton : : SURROND-II
efficacy for a rating of 120 Watts up to 150 {LHB11-110-CDL/60 -110
Watts – complete with integral electronic LED Watts};
drivers, heat sinks for efficient heat dissipation  Philips : GreenPerform
& all mounting accessories. Highbay G2 – 130
Watts{BY688P LED 140/NW
PSR S-NB};
 Pyrotech: PD-17-D-L-
WXOA/150W
Or Equivalent Models.
LED –HB2: Indoor Industrial High Bay LED Luminaries - Bajaj : Duranto Highbay
with high pressure die-cast aluminum housing, Luminaire 150 Watts{BGHB 150W
mirror / lens optics (heat- resistant) for LED};
symmetric light distribution and high system Crompton : : SURROND-II
efficacy for a rating above 180 Watts – {LHB11-110-CDL/60 -110 Watts};
complete with integral electronic LED drivers, Philips : GreenPerform
heat sinks for efficient heat dissipation & all Highbay G2 – 130 Watts{BY688P
mounting accessories. LED 140/NW PSR S-NB};
Pyrotech: PD-17-D-L-
WXOA/150W
OUTDOOR TYPE FIXTURES
LEDFD1 LED Flood Light Fixtures complete with LED 90W Crompton LFBx11-90-CDL
LEDFD2 LED Flood Light Fixtures complete with LED 150W Crompton LFBxK-150-CDL
LEDFD3 LED Flood Light Fixtures complete with LED 180W Crompton LFBxK-180-CDL
Page 3233 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
Page 5 of 10
LED FD-9: LED Flood-Light Fixtures with COB or SMD Crompton: MAGPIE+ LFLPI-
Type LEDs and high system efficacy for a 400-CDL/60
rating of 400 Watt & above – complete with Bajaj: BJFL 400W LED IP66
integral electronic LED drivers, heat sinks for Philips: Tango G3 BVP383
efficient heat dissipation & all mounting LED450/CW 400W 220-240V SWB
accessories – suitable for outdoor installation & IN;
having a minimum IP 65 ingress protection. The Pyrotech: PD-17-D-L-
Flood-Light fixtures shall have powder-coated WXOA/500W
pressure die-cast & Aluminum Body &
toughened glass front cover. Or Equivalent Models
LED BL-1: Integral decorative LED Bollard Luminaries with Bajaj : Tetris LED Bollard
opal acrylic diffusers of minimum 8 Watts rating {BGBOS 600 9W LED};
& suitable for landscape lighting with IP-65 Crompton : Maya-III COB LED
Ingress Protection and anti-corrosive powder- Bollard {LBLA3-10- CDL};
coated die-cast aluminum housing – complete Philips : City Cube Series LED
with all mounting accessories (anchor bolts / Bollard - 8.5 Watts{BCP400 LED04
base-plates) U CW PSU GR S1};
Pyrotech: PD-15-D-L-WXOA
Page 3234 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
Page 6 of 10

TYPE DESIGNATION
LED19 Weatherproof (min. IP-65) well glass lighting 60W SUDHIR WG/182 or
fixture for use in safe areas with LED Lamp, equivalent
driver, including other materials as applicable
for installation.
LEDST1 Street lighting with LED fixtures with LED 30W Philips BRP320,
Lamp, driver, including other materials as Crompton LSTO-30-/CDL
applicable for installation. or equivalent
LEDST2 Similar to ST1, but with 45W LED Fixtures 45W Crompton LSTO-45-CDL
or equivalent
LEDST3 Similar to ST1, but with 60W LED Fixtures 60W Philips BY200P LED 27S
CW PSU SI PC,
Crompton LSTO30-60/CDL
or equivalent
CW PSU SI PC,
Crompton LSTO 72-72/CDL
or equivalent
CW PSU SI PC,
Crompton LSTO 90-90/CDL
or equivalent
LED ST-10 : LED Street Light Fixtures with Leaf / Sleek Crompton: LSTP120 CDL
Type design & SMD or COB Type LEDs for Bajaj:- BRTFG 120W LED
high system efficacy & rating of 120 Watts
having powder coated Pressure Die-Cast Or Equivalent Models.
Aluminum Body & toughened glass visor fitted
in a frame & completely integral – with all
mounting accessories. The fixture enclosure
shall have minimum IP 65 ingress protection.
LED ST-11 : LED Street Light Fixtures with Leaf / Sleek Bajaj : Edge Streetlight – 150
Type design & SMD or COB Type LEDs for Watts {BRTFG 135W LED};
high system efficacy & rating of 120 Watts to Crompton : 135 Watts
150 Watts – having powder coated Pressure {LSTP-135- CDL};;
Die-Cast Philips : Greenline Extra
Aluminum Body & toughened glass visor fitted BRP322 LED 122 CW HE
in a frame & completely integral – with all MR PC S3 XT;
mounting accessories. The fixture enclosure Pyrotech: PE-11-D-L-
shall have minimum IP 65 ingress protection. WXOA/150W
LEDBK1 Weatherproof (min. IP-65) lighting fixture 10 W Philips WT202W LED6S

(ceiling mounted and wall mounted) for use in CW PSU S1 PC or
safe areas with LED Lamp, driver, including equivalent
LEDBK2 Weatherproof (min. IP-65) lighting fixture 60 W SUDHIR WG/182
(ceiling mounted and wall mounted) for use in or equivalent
safe areas with LED Lamp, driver, including
Page 3235 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
Page 7 of 10
LEDBK3 Bulk head fitting with cast aluminum alloy body 1x100 W Crompton IBH-1110BC
having stove enameled finish (silver grey Bajaj BJDB-100
outside, white inside) and complete with
prismatic front glass, wire guard, tropicalised Philips FXC 101 or
gasket and BC lamp holder suitable for 100W equivalent
GLS lamp.
LEDBK4 Similar to LEDBK1 but with pressed 1x100 W Philips-FXC-101

aluminum body, finished stove enameled grey
Crompton IBH-1110BC
outside white inside with frosted front glass
fitted with tropicalised gasket and without wire or equivalent
guard.
LEDPT1 Post top lantern suitable for 25W LED light with 25W Bajaj BLPTSP 25W NW LED
spherical shed polycarbonate diffuser and IP65 (Globe) or equivalent
protection
LEDPT2 Decorative Post top lantern suitable for 45W 40W Crompton LPTO-40-CDL or
LED light with die cast housing and clear equivalent
acrylic and spun aluminium reflector, IP65
protection
FLAMEPROOF / DIV. 2
LIGHTING FIXTURE (ZONE-1 AND 2)
FLP LED-1 Flameproof well glass/linear LED Upto 30 W BALIGA 22W-FLPW-1245,

lighting fixture suitable for use in zone-1/2 or 30W-FLPW-1245
& gas group IIA/IIB classified areas 40-45W KAYSONS KWL-A20,
complete with LED lamp, LED driver, or equivalent
reflectors, mounting hardwares, clamps &
brackets etc.
(Light Output i.e. LUMENS of fixture
FLP LED-2 Flameproof well glass/linear LED 70W
lighting fixture suitable for use in zone-
1/2 & gas group IIA/IIB classified
areas complete with LED lamp, LED
driver, reflectors, mounting hardwares,
clamps & brackets etc.
FLP LED-4 Same as FLP-1 Upto 65 W
(Light Output i.e. LUMENS equivalent
to 125W HPMV lamp)
LED DC IIA/IIB Flameproof well glass/linear LED lighting 45W

fixture suitable for use in zone-1/2 & gas
group IIA/IIB classified areas complete
with LED lamp, LED driver, reflectors,
mounting hardwares, clamps & brackets etc.
4000 to 4500 LM and min. 100
LM/Watt.)
Page 3236 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
Page 8 of 10
LEDFLP- Flameproof well glass LED lighting fixture Upto 50 W BALIGA 36W-FLPW-1245
4A- WG suitable for use in zone-1/2 & gas FEPL FLP-WF-13
group FLEXPRO MFWLED/3001
IIA/IIB classified areas complete with LED KAYSONS KWL-A21
lamp, LED driver, reflectors, mounting or equivalent
hardwares, clamps & brackets etc.
LEDFLP-4A- Flameproof linear LED lighting fixture Upto 50 W
LNR suitable for use in zone-1/2 & gas
group IIA/IIB
classified areas complete with LED lamp,
LED
driver, reflectors, mounting hardwares,
clamps
LEDFLP-5a Flameproof well glass LED lighting 120 to 250 W BALIGA 72W-FLPW-1095
fixture suitable for use in zone-1/2 & FLEXPRO
gas group IIA/IIB classified areas MFWLED/3001
completewithLEDlamp,LEDdriver,reflectors, KAYSONS KWL-A22
mounting hardwares, clamps & brackets etc. or equivalent
15000 to 16000 LM and min. 100 LM/Watt.)
LEDFLP-5b Flameproof & WP Well glass lighting 60 W to 150 W BALIGA 100W-FLPW-
fixture suitable for use in zone-1/2 & 2595L
gas group IIA/IIB classified areas with 60W FLEXPRO MFWLED/3001
to 150W LED Lamp, driver, including other KAYSONS KWL-A23
materials as applicable for installation. (Light or equivalent
Output i.e. LUMENS equivalent to 400W
HPMV lamp)
LEDFLP-7 Flameproof flood light LED lighting Upto FEPL FLP-RH-IL-01
fixture suitable for use in zone-1/2 & 160 W FLEXPRO MFFLED/4001
gas group IIA/IIB classified areas complete or equivalent
with LED lamp, LED driver, reflectors,
LEDFLP-9 Flameproof and weatherproof flood 120 W to FEPL FLP-RH-IL-02

lighting 250 W FLEXPRO MFFLED/4001
fixture with 120W to 250W LED Lamp, driver, or equivalent
including other materials as applicable for
installation..
FLP-12 Flameproof and weatherproof LED Upto 60 W
cluster (Medium
based aviation obstruction light suitable Intensity)
for use in zone-1/2 & gas group IIA/IIB
classified areas complete with LEDs (Twin
type) with LED Lamp, driver, including other
LEDFLP IIC- Flameproof LED lighting fixture suitable for 1x20W Baliga EXFLO-240 or
1xT8 use in zone-1/2 & gas equivalent
group IIC classified areas complete with 1
no LED tube-light, LED driver, reflectors,
LEDFLP IIC- Flameproof LED lighting fixture suitable for 2x20W Baliga EXFLO-240 or
2xT8 use in zone-1/2 & gas equivalent
group IIC classified areas complete with 2
nos LED tube-light,, LED driver, reflectors,
Page 3237 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
Page 9 of 10
LEDFLP IIC- Flameproof well glass/linear LED lighting Upto 55 W FEPL FLP-RH-IL-01
1 fixture suitable for use in zone-1/2 & KAYSONS KWL-A20
gas group IIC classified areas complete with or equivalent
LED lamp, LED driver, reflectors, mounting
LEDFLP IIC- Flameproof & WP Well glass lighting Upto 65 W
3 fixture with LED Lamp, driver,including
other materials as applicable for
installation for use in IIC classified areas.
to 125W HPMV lamp)
LEDFLP IIC- Flameproof & WP Well glass lighting Upto 100 W

4 fixture with LED Lamp, driver, including other
materials as applicable for installation for
use in IIC classified areas.
to 250W HPMV lamp)
LEDFLP-IIC- Flameproof well glass LED lighting Upto 50 W

4A-WG fixture suitable for use in zone-1/2 & gas
group IIC classified areas complete with LED
lamp, LED driver, reflectors, mounting
LEDFLP-IIC- Flameproof linear LED lighting fixture Upto 50 W
4A-LNR suitable
for use in zone-1/2 & gas group IIA/IIB
classified areas complete with LED lamp,
Page 3238 of 3884

DOCUMENT No.
Page 10 of 10
& brackets etc.

(Light Output i.e. LUMENS of fixture 4000
to 4500 LM and min. 100 LM/Watt.)
LEDFLP-IIC- Flameproof flood light LED lighting fixture Upto 160 W
7 suitable for use in zone-1/2 & gas group IIC
classified areas complete with LED lamp, LED
driver, reflectors, mounting hardwares, clamps
& brackets etc.
(Light Output i.e. LUMENS of fixture 15000
to 16000 LM and min. 100 LM/Watt.)
LEDFLP-IIC- Flameproof and weatherproof flashing LED Up to 60 W
12 cluster based aviation obstruction light (Medium
complete with LEDs (Twin type) with LED Intensity)
Lamp, driver, including other materials as
applicable for installation for use in zone 1/2 &
gas group IIC classified area.
LEDExn’R’-1 Weatherproof well glass non sparking Upto 30 W
restricted breathing type lighting fixture for use Or
in zone-2 classified areas with LED lamp with 40-45 W
LED driver.
(Light Output i.e. LUMENS equivalent to
100/200W incandescent lamp)
LEDExn’R’-4 Weatherproof well glass non sparking Upto 65 W
restricted breathing type lighting fixture for use Or
in zone-2 classified areas but with LED lamp 40-45 W
with LED driver and separate control gear.
125W HPMV lamp)
LEDExn’R’-5 Same as Exn’R-1but with separate control Upto
gear. 100 W
(Light Output i.e. LUMENS equivalent to Or
250W HPMV lamp) 60-100 W
LEDExn’R’-6 Non sparking restricted breathing & WP Well 60 W to 100W BALIGA 100W-FLPW-
glass lighting fixture for use in zone-2 2595L
classified areas with 60W to 100W LED lamp KAYSONS KWL-A23
with LED driver. or equivalent
400W HPMV lamp)
LEDExn’R’-7 Non sparking restricted breathing & WP Upto 72 W BALIGA 72W-FLPW-1095
lighting fixture with LED lamp with LED KAYSONS KWL-A22
driversuitable for use in zone-2 classified or equivalent
areas.
250W HPMV lamp)
NOTES:
1. All fixtures shall be latest energy efficient type.

2. All fixtures shall be complete with lamps.
3. All fixtures shall be high power factor (Min. 0.9) type.
4. All mirror optics luminaries should be epoxy powder coated.
5. Make of fixtures shall be embossed on the body of the lighting fixtures.
6. 2 nos cable entrie shall be provided for loop in & loop out with internal wiring for driver & lamp for
all LED FLP/Exn’R’ fixtures.
Page 3239 of 3884

Document No.
HV / MV Cable B185-000-16-50-DS-9547
Page 1 of 2
PURCHASER'S DATA
A. Site Conditions
1. System Voltage
Nominal 415 V
Highest 500 V
Voltage grade 650/1100V
2. Frequency Hz 50 +/- 3 %
HV Power cable MV POWER AND CONTROL CABLE
MV Power cable Copper & Aluminium
MV control cable Copper & Aluminium

4. Installation under DGMS jurisdiction (See Note) No
5. Applicable spec. 6-51-0051 REV-8
6. Insulation XLPE
7. PVC compound type As per 6-51-0051 Rev 8
8. Type of conductor As per 6-51-0051 Rev 8
9. Conductor class Class-1/2 for fixed installation
10. Types of cable Fire survival
11. Armour
Type As per 6-51-0051 Rev 8
Size of armour As per Table -3 of IS 1554
12. Type of drum Steel
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
A. Technical particulars
1. Name of manufacturer
2. MR/PR item no.
3. Cable type/ code
5 Conductor semiconducting screen (HV cables)
Material
Thickness mm
6. Insulation
Type of compound
Thickness mm
7. Insulation semiconducting screen (HV cables)

Material
Page 3240 of 3884

Document No.
HV / MV Cable B185-000-16-50-DS-9547
Page 2 of 2
Thickness mm
8. Copper tape
Thickness mm
9. Inner sheath
Type of compound
Thickness mm
10. Nominal dia under armour mm
11. Calculated dia under armour mm
12. Armour
Material
Type
Size
13. Nominal dia under outersheath mm
14. Calculated dia under outersheath mm
15. Outersheath
Type of compound
Thickness mm
16. Nominal outer dia of cable mm
17. Tolerance on outer dia %

18. Weight of cable per km kg
19. Maximum drum length mtr.
20. Maximum DC resistance of conductor at 20 °C
21. AC resistance at 90 °C
22. Reactance of cable at 50 Hz
23. Capacitance of cable
24. Zero sequence impedance of cable
25. Capacitive charging current per km
Notes
1 1 Fire survival (Resistant) cable applicable for Fire proof MOV.
Page 3241 of 3884

Document No.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DATA B185-000-16-50-DS-9548
SHEET Rev. No. A
Page 1 of 5
Unit General Location Bangladesh & India Job No. B185 Unit No. 000
PURCHASER'S DATA
A. Site Conditions
B. Area classification
1. Buildings Safe Area
2. Plant units Zone-1/2, IIA/IIB
C. General Data
1. Max. Distance from Fire Alarm Panel to the farthest field device 400 m
2 Cable entries for Break Glass units Bottom

3.. Cable entries for Fire alarm Panel Bottom
4. Cable entries for Repeater Panel Bottom
5 Integration with Existing Fire Alarm System Required
6. Integration with following Plant Systems:
a. Public Alarm system Required
b. F&G PLC system Required
c. ISDN telephone exchange Required
d. Fire Suppression System Required
e. Plant Data Network Required
f. Plant security system Required
7. Ingress protection for indoor panels IP 42
D. Power supply
1. Input power (Voltage/Frequency) 230V±10%, 50Hz±5%, SPN UPS
2. VRLA
Battery type
3. Duration for battery sizing (*Clause 5.2) As per Standard Spec
4. Temperature for battery sizing °C 10
5. Ageing factor .8
6. Maintenance factor 1.1
E. Type of fire alarm system Microprocessor based analogue addressable
F. Specific requirements for Fire Suppression
1. Status signals, alarms contacts Type
(potential free) shutdown signal requirements
a. Clean agent/CO2 system Required
b. Deluge valve activation Required
c. Fire water pump shutdown signal Required
d. HVAC/ Pressurisation system (AHU) Required
e. Fire water pump running ind'ns Required
f. Fire water pump start push buttons Required
G. Miscellaneous
1. Laptop for FA system Not Required
2. Detecor config from FA panel Not Required

MANUFACTURER'S DATA
A. Make, type and model no. of following items Make Type/Model No. Dimensions
1. Heat detectors
Page 3242 of 3884

Document No.
SHEET Rev. No. A
Page 2 of 5
a. Intrinsically Safe area
b. Safe area
2. Multi sensor smoke detectors
a. Safe area
3. Linear beam smoke detectors
a. Safe area
b. Hazardous area
4. Break Glass Units
a. Safe area
b. Hazardous area
5. Ultra-voilet Flame detectors
a. Safe area
b. Hazardous area
6. I/R detectors
a. Safe area
b. Hazardous area
7. Heat Sensing Cables
8. Response Indicators
9. Fault Isolators
10. Exit Signs
11. Hooters
a. Hooter acknowledge boxes
12. Blinking lights
13. Halon/ CO2 release/ Inhibit Halon/ CO2 release/ Inhibit switches
14. Siren
B. Genaral Data
1. Exit Signs
2 Max. Distance from Fire Alarm Panel to Detector/ BGU
3. Siren
a. Siren
b. Output
c. Voltage V
d. Phase
e. Range
f. Frequency Hz
g. Siren Actuation
h. Power Supply
C Conventional Fire Alarm System
1. Central fire alarm panel
a. Make & model no.
b. No. of zones
c. Operating voltage & power consumption

d. Dimensions (LXDXH)mm
e. Mimic
f. LEDs arrangement
Page 3243 of 3884

Document No.
SHEET Rev. No. A
Page 3 of 5
2. Mimic panel (if non-integral)
a. Make & model no.
b. Operating voltage & power consumption
c. Mounting
3. Zonal fire alarm panel
a. Make & model no.
c. Mounting
e. No. of zones
f. Max. No. of devices per zone
4. Repeat alarm panel
a. Make & model no.
c. Mounting
e. LEDs arranged in a matrix
f. LEDs arranged on graphic mimic
D. Microprocessor Based Fire Alarm System

1. Central fire alarm panel (CFAP)
a. Make & model no.
(*Include consumption of all devices powered from this panel)
c. Software used
d. Scan frequency for devices
e. Redundancy (*Clause 8.1.5)
f. Dimensions (LXDXH)
2. Monitor
a. Make & model no.
3. Printer
a. Make & model no.
b. Type
c. Speed & size
4. Data gathering cum fire alarm panel (DGFAP)
a. Make & model no.

b. Max.and min.number of loops
c. Number of devices in each loop
d. Event history storage processing

e. Number of programmable outputs
f. Scan frequency for devices
g. Operating voltage & power consumption
h. Integration with Existing Fire Alarm System
5. Repeat alarm panel
a. Make & model no.
Page 3244 of 3884

Document No.
SHEET Rev. No. A
Page 4 of 5

c. Display
E. Devices
1. BGU
a. Monitoring Module
b. Fault isolator(in build) Power consumed
2. Hooter
a. Addressing component
3. Linear Beam Detector
a. Addressing module
b. For Hazardous area type
4. Multisensor Detector and Heat Detector
a. Fault isolator(in build)
5. No. of Detectors in 1 Zener barrier unit No.
F. Battery bank & charger details
1. Battery DGFAP CFAP
a. Make
b. Type/model no.
c. AH Rating
d. No. of cells
e. Voltage per cell
f. End cell voltage
g. Dimensions (LXDXH)mm
2. Charger/ UPS Charger UPS
a. Make
b. Type/model no.
c. Rating Amp KVA
G. Communication Protocol
H. Protocol for Integration with F&G PLC
1. Type of serial ports
I. Cables
1. Recommended cable / wire size & Type Conventional based Microprocessor based
a. Between DGFAP & detectors

b. Between CFAP & DGFAP
c. Between CFAP & Repeat alarm panel

d. Between DGFAP & Repeat alarm panel
e. Data Highway
2. Cable resistance (Max.per loop)
3. Cable capacitance (Max.per loop)

J Details of equipment certification/approval
for hazardous area application
Equipment MCP Heat detector Multisensor Others
detector
MR item no.
Page 3245 of 3884

Document No.
SHEET Rev. No. A
Page 5 of 5
Explosion protection class (as applicable)
Type reference no.
Reference no.& date of other test

certificates of recognised test authority
Reference no.& date of approval certificate
BIS License no. & date
Eil Notes
1
Page 3246 of 3884

SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS FOR
Ogeir2151eg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0008 Rev. 5
INTEW2ferreASIJWIM/ (A Govt of India Undedaiong)
FLAMEPROOF LIGHTING
AND POWER PANELS Page 1 of 7
afT9tqw
Wu
-
SPECIFICATION
FOR
FLAMEPROOF LIGHTING AND
POWER PANELS

5 24.02.16 NNB/AK ANP BRB
SPECIFICATION
4 11.04.11 PS ANPS UAP DM
SPECIFICATION
3 24.08.07 ANPS UAP JMS VC
SPECIFICATION
2 30.01.02 UAP AAN VPS GRR
SPECIFICATION
1 26.06.98 GR NS VPS AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Date Checked
No by by
Approved by
Page 3247 of 3884

01 NGINEERS FOR
51gar 16Vieg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0008 Rev. 5
1.11V71eircalAAJWAI, (A GOA of (d. UndedWAN) FLAMEPROOF LIGHTING
Abbreviations:
CIMFR Central Institute of Mines and Fuel Research (formerly CMRI)
DGMS Directorate General of Mines Safety
ERTL Electronics Regional Test Laboratory
FM Factory Mutual Research Corporation
GI Galvanised Iron
IEC International Electro-technical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IS Indian Standards
LCIE Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques
LED Light Emitting Diodes
LV Low Voltage
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
PESO Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation
SPN Single Phase and Neutral
SWG Standard Wire Gauge
TPN Three Phases and Neutral
VDE Verband Der Electrotechnik, Elecktronik and Information Stechnik
Convenor: Mr. B. R. Bhogal

Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. M. K. Sahu
Ms. N. S. Bhattacharya
Ms. N. P. Guha (Projects)
Page 3248 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
Ogen 161f5leg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0008 Rev. 5
(A Govt of Ind. UnOettakingt FLAMEPROOF LIGHTING
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS .4
3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4
4.0 SITE CONDITIONS 4
5.0 POWER SUPPLY 5
6.0 CERTIFICATION 5
8.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 7
9.0 PACKING AND DESPATCH .7
Page 3249 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
fal51-egW INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0008 Rev, 5
CA Govt of India Undettaiontg) FLAMEPROOF LIGHTING
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of design, manufacture, testing, packing and supply
of flameproof Lighting and Power panels/ accessories suitable for installation in locations
handling flammable liquids and gases / vapours.

2.1 The equipment shall comply with the requirements of latest revision of the following
standards issued by BIS:
IS-5 Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels.

IS-1248 Direct acting indicating analogue measuring
instruments and their accessories.
IS / IEC 60898 Electrical Accessories - circuit breakers for
over protection for household and similar installations.
IS-12640 Residual current operated circuit breakers.
IS / IEC 60079-0 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
(General requirements).
(Equipment Protection by Flameproof Enclosures
.4d").
(Equipment Protection by Increased Safety "e").
IS / IEC 60529 Degree of protection provided by enclosures
(IP Code).
IS / IEC 60947 LV switchgear and control gear.
2.2 In case of imported equipment, standards followed in the country of origin shall be applicable,
if these standards are equivalent or more stringent than the applicable Indian Standards.
2.3 The Equipment shall also confirm to the provisions of CEA Regulations with latest
amendments and other statutory regulations currently in force in the country.
2.4 In case Indian standards are not available for any equipment, standards issued by IEC/ BS/
VDE/ IEEE/ NEMA or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
2.5 In case of any conflict between requirements specified in various applicable documents for the
project, the most stringent requirement shall govern. However, Owner's/ EIL's decision in this
regard will be final and binding.
3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1 The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of art technology and having proven field
3.2 Vendor shall ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for the
offered equipment for at least 10 years from the date of supply.
4.0 SITE CONDITIONS

The equipment shall be suitable for installation and satisfactory operation in classified
hazardous locations in tropical, humid and corrosive atmosphere as prevalent in refineries,
petrochemical and fertilizer plants. The lighting and power panels shall be designed to operate
under site conditions as specified in the data sheet. If not specifically mentioned therein, a
design ambient temperature of 40° C and an altitude not exceeding 1000m above mean sea
level shall be considered.
Page 3250 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
cigar taf5tC'g
I 41127f ele,73r7 .170,70
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gov, of India Undertaking) FLAMEPROOF LIGHTING
6-51-0008 Rev. 5
5.0 POWER SUPPLY

5.1 Lighting and power panels shall be suitable for 415V, 50Hz, TPN incoming supply and
outgoing circuits for 240V, SPN supply. DC lighting junction boxes along with outgoing
circuits shall be suitable for 220V or 110V DC supply.
5.2 For projects falling under the jurisdiction of DGMS, the following additional requirements
shall apply:
5.2.1 The phase-to-phase voltage shall not exceed 125V (where electric lighting is used in
underground mine)/ 250V (where electric lighting is used in open cast mine or surface of a
mine), with the neutral or the mid-point of the lighting system connected with earth.
5.2.2 The panels shall have three phase, 3-wire system, without neutral.
5.2.3 Outgoing circuits shall be controlled by 2-pole MCBs. Earth leakage protection shall be
provided for all outgoing circuits, which shall isolate both poles.
6.0 CERTIFICATION
The equipment shall have test certificates issued by recognised independent test house
(CIMFR/ ERTL/ Baseefa/ LCIE/ UL/ FM or equivalent). All equipment (indigenous &
imported) shall also have valid statutory approvals as applicable for the specified location. All
indigenous flameproof equipment shall have valid BIS license and marking as required by
statutory authorities.

7.1 Construction
7.1.1 The enclosures of the lighting and power panels shall be made of cast light metal alloy.
7.1.2 The panels shall be suitable for use in outdoor open locations and shall have IP-55 degree of
protection. They shall preferably be provided with integral canopy. However, where the
enclosure has been certified without integral canopy, a separate canopy can be accepted. The
separate canopy shall be made of at least 14 SWG (2mm) galvanized sheet steel. The canopy
shall be suitable for providing protection against rain from top and two sides.
7.1.3 The lighting and power panels shall be provided with gaskets made of non-inflammable and
self-extinguishing material.
7.1.4 All metal surfaces shall undergo manufacturer's standard cleaning/ painting cycle. After
preparation of under surface, the panels shall be painted with two coats of epoxy based final
paint with colour shade as below:
Flame proof (Gas group IIA/IIB) : Dark admiralty grey shade 632 of IS-5/
RAL 7031
Flame proof (Gas group IIC) : Light yellow shade 355 of IS-5 / RAL 1012
All unpainted steel parts shall be suitably treated to prevent rust formation. If these parts are
moving elements, then these shall be greased.
7.1.5 A warning inscription "DO NOT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED" shall be provided on each
enclosure. The warning inscription shall be embossed on the enclosure or a separate warning
plate with above inscription shall be fixed to the enclosure with screws. The warning plate
shall be of nickel plated brass or stainless steel.
7.1.6 All accessories like nuts, bolts, washers etc. shall be made of stainless steel SS-304.
7.1.7 All the non-current carrying metallic parts of the panel shall be inherently bonded together.
Each lighting and power panel shall be provided with two earthing studs with lugs on the
exterior of the panel enclosure suitable for termination of 10 mm dia GI wire rope.
7.1.8 Each outgoing feeder shall be provided with distinct terminals for phase, neutral and earth.
The terminal block enclosures shall be adequately sized to properly terminate the cables by
Page 3251 of 3884

15iIPTA ENGINEERS FOR
1.110. 2VEISI2 451,3411,71, Gov! Of Ind. Uncferfakmg) FLAMEPROOF LIGHTING
taking into account the required bending radii of cable cores and shall have the following
minimum gland to terminal distances:
2 Above 2.5 mm2 & Above 10 mm 2 & Above 35 mm2 &
Conductor Size Up to 2.5 mm
Up to 10 mm2 Up to 35 mm2 Up to 95 mm2
Gland to
40 mm 60 mm 100 mm 150 mm
terminal distance
7.1.9 The panels shall be provided with suitably sized cable entries at the bottom/ sides, for
incoming and outgoing cables. Panels shall be complete with double compression type nickel
plated brass flameproof cable glands. Flameproof nickel plated brass sealing plugs shall be
supplied, for plugging the unused cable entries. The quantity of sealing plugs shall be equal to
20% of the total number of outgoing cable entries.
7.1.10 The panels shall have external fixing lugs for mounting on wall or column. The holes provided
on these lugs shall be of oblong type.
7.1.11 A nameplate indicating Tag Number shall be provided on each panel. Nameplates shall also
be provided for each incoming and outgoing feeder. Separate nameplate shall also be provided
to indicate the details of testing agency (CIMFR or equivalent), test certificate reference,
statutory approval agency (PESO/ DGMS) and reference, BIS license number, applicable gas
group etc. The nameplates shall be engraved type and permanently fixed on the equipment. In
case the standard details given above are embossed on the enclosures, the same need not be
repeated on the name plate.
7.2 Component Specification
7.2.1 Bus bars in the lighting and power panels shall be made of high conductivity copper, and shall
be supported by non-hygroscopic insulators. Bus bars shall be colour coded for identification
of phases and neutral. .
7.2.2 The incomer shall have one no. 4 pole MCB isolator (without overload and short-circuit
release) and one no. 4 pole ELCB (if specified in the MR). ELCBs shall have a maximum
sensitivity of 30mA.
7.2.3 The outgoing feeders shall be provided with double pole MCBs having overload and short-
circuit releases.
7.2.4 All MCBs (except isolators) and ELCBs shall be with 9kA (M9 category) interrupting
capacity.
7.2.5 The ELCB shall be hand reset type. One no. door mounted reset push button shall be
provided.
7.2.6 The operating knobs (ON/ OFF/ RESET) shall be provided with a suitable rack and pinion
arrangement or cam type operating mechanism for operating them smoothly from outside.
7.3 Terminals & Wiring
7.3.1 The panels shall be provided with sufficient number of terminals. More than 2 wires per
terminal shall not be permitted. If required, additional terminal with shorting link may be
used. Tinned copper lugs shall be provided for cable termination. Incoming and outgoing
terminals shall be suitably segregated.
7.3.2 All internal wiring in lighting and power panels shall employ adequately sized, 660V grade,
FR type, PVC insulated copper conductor wires, colour coded for phase, neutral and earth,
with minimum conductor sizes as below:
Incomer 16 mm2
Outgoing 2.5 mm2
7.3.3 For flameproof equipments, terminal box can be provided in Èxe' or Èxd' execution.
Page 3252 of 3884

ffa-ZIEq ENGINEERS FOR
e_JI 254es
(awn 2Y2¢4i asla000l)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undeflafong) FLAMEPROOF LIGHTING
6-51-0008 Rev. 5
8.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

8.1 During fabrication, the equipment shall be subjected to inspection by EEL/ Owner or by an
agency authorised by the Owner, if specified/ agreed in Inspection Test Plan. Manufacturer
shall furnish all necessary information concerning the supply to EIL/ Owner's inspector. All
routine/ acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufacturer's works under his care and
expense.
8.2 Type test certificates from CIMFR or equivalent test house, applicable PESO/ DGMS
approval certificates, BIS license and original drawings referred in type test certificates shall
be shown to the inspection agency on demand during inspection. The certificates and BIS
license must be valid at the time of despatch.
8.3 Test certificates of bought out components shall be shown to the inspection agency on demand
during inspection.
8.4 All equipments shall be subjected to various routine / acceptance tests as per Inspection &
Test plan no. 6-81-1008.

All the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of handling
during transportation. The equipment shall be properly packed for the selected mode of
transportation, i.e. by ship/ rail or trailer and shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before being
placed in crates/ cases to prevent damage to finish. The crates/ cases shall have skid bottom
for handling. Special notations such as 'Fragile', 'This side up', 'Center of gravity', 'Weight',
Òwner's particulars', 'PO no.' etc., shall be clearly marked on the packages together with
other details as per purchase order.
The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The packing
should be suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains and high ambient temperature
unless otherwise agreed. A set of instruction manuals for installation, testing and
commissioning, a set of operation & maintenance manuals and a set of final drawing shall be
enclosed in a waterproof cover along with the shipment.
Page 3253 of 3884

(-aei 4
ENGINEERS FOR
5fgar kiPegW" INDIA LIMITED
RAM IA Govt 01 Inge Undertalung)
INDUSTRIAL TYPE
6-51-0014 Rev. 5
CONTROL STATIONS Page 1 of 6
3fre-Trw f-*-7:14 faiffur

RY.R fq-1-4-Tr
SPECIFICATION
FOR
INDUSTRIAL TYPE CONTROL
STATIONS

5 11.03.16
SPECIFICATION
REVISDANU STDAR
4 11.04.11 JM ANPS UAP DM
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
1 26.12.96 AP VPS SG AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved by
Page 3254 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
r Rift INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0014 Rev. 5
a-traw oRual, IA Gov, 04 Ind. Undertaking) INDUSTRIAL TYPE
Abbreviations:
BIS Bureau of Indian standards
DC Direct Current
FRP Fibre Reinforced Plastic
GI Galvanised Iron
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IS Indian Standard s
LV Low Voltage
NC Normally Closed
NO Normally Open
SS Stainless Steel
SWG Standard Wire Gauge
VDE Verband Der Electrotechnik, Elecktronik and Information Stechnik
Convenor: Mr. BR Bhogal
Members: Ms. S. Anand

Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. M.K. Sahu
Ms. N.P. Guha (Projects)
Page 3255 of 3884

6-11 ENGINEERS FOR
twat,' (A Govt of India Undertaking) INDUSTRIAL TYPE
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
7.0 PACKING AND DESPATCH 6
Page 3256 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
laelf Wieleg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0014 Rev. 5
Ia+12R avrane 051,RM, IA Govt of Ind. Undertakmg) INDUSTRIAL TYPE
1.0 SCOPE
of industrial type control stations and accessories suitable for installation in non-hazardous/
safe outdoor areas.

2.1 The equipment shall comply with the requirements of latest revision of following standards
issued by BIS:
IS: 5 Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels.

IS: 1248 (Parts 1 & 2) : Direct acting indicating analogue measuring instruments and their
accessories.
IS / IEC: 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code).
2.2 In case of imported equipment, standards followed in the country of origin shall be applicable
if these standards are equivalent or more stringent than the applicable Indian Standards.
2.3 The equipment shall also conform to the provisions of CEA Regulations and other statutory
regulations with latest amendments currently in force in the country.
project, the most stringent requirement shall govern. However, Owner's/EIL's decision in this

The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of art technology and having proven field
4.0 SITE CONDITIONS

The equipment shall be suitable for installation and satisfactory operation in tropical, humid
and corrosive atmosphere as prevalent in refineries, petrochemical and fertilizer plants. Unless
otherwise specified, a design ambient temperature of 40° C and an altitude not exceeding 1000
m above mean sea level shall be considered.

5.1 Construction
5.1.1 The enclosures of the control stations shall be made of sheet steel.
5.1.2 The control stations shall be suitable for use in outdoor open locations and shall have
minimum IP-55 degree of protection. Suitable canopy shall be provided for protection against
rain from top and two sides. The separate canopy shall be made of at least 14 SWG (2mm)
galvanised sheet steel.
5.1.3 All control stations shall be suitable for 240V AC as well as for 110V/220V DC control
supply.
5.1.4 The control stations shall be provided with neoprene gaskets.
Page 3257 of 3884

ENGINEERS
$1gell acs O INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeltaiong)
FOR
INDUSTRIAL TYPE
6-51-0014 Rev. 5
preparation of under surface, the equipment shall be painted with two coats of epoxy based
final paint with colour shade as dark admiralty grey, shade 632 of IS-5/ RAL 7031. All
unpainted steel parts shall be suitably treated to prevent rust formation. If these parts are
moving elements, then they shall be greased.
5.1.6 All accessories like nuts, bolts, washers etc and operating shaft of pushbuttons and switches
etc. shall be made of stainless steel SS-304.
5.1.7 The control stations shall be provided with two earthing studs with lugs on the external
surface of the enclosures suitable for termination of 8 SWG GI wire.
5.1.8 The control stations shall be provided with undrilled gland plate. However, double
compression nickel-plated brass cable gland shall be supplied loose to suit the specified cable
sizes.
5.1.9 The control stations shall have external fixing lugs for mounting on wall or column. The holes
provided on these lugs shall be of oblong type.
5.1.10 Engraved nameplate indicating Tag Number shall be permanently fixed on each control
station.
5.2 Component Specification
5.2.1 Push buttons for START and STOP shall be of GREEN and RED colour respectively. Each
push button shall have two NO and two NC contacts. The STOP push button shall be
mushroom type with stay put feature and lockable in pressed position.
5.2.2 All control switches shall be provided with a pistol grip handle. Circuit breaker control switch,
wherever specified, shall have three positions (START - NEUTRAL - STOP) with spring
return to neutral from START position and stay put in STOP position. All selector switches
shall have minimum two poles for each position. Each position of switch shall be indelibly
marked on the control station. Exact configuration of selector switch (LOCAL-OFF-
REMOTE or AUTO-OFF-MANUAL) shall be as per datasheet / MR requirement.
5.2.3 All ammeters shall be of moving iron type having an accuracy class of 3 and suitable for
lAmpere CT secondary. Unless otherwise specified, min. size of ammeter shall either be 72
mm x 72 mm or min. 65 mm dia., 80% of the scale length shall cover 100% of the CT primary
current uniformly and the balance 20% of the scale shall cover 100-800% of the CT primary.
A red mark corresponding to the full load current of the motor shall be provided on the
ammeter dial. The ammeter front glass shall be toughened.
5.2.4 Indicating lamp(s), wherever provided, shall be clustered LED type with minimum 3 numbers
LEDs, preferably connected in parallel, mounted inside an enclosure of minimum diameter of
15mm.

5.3.1 The control stations shall be provided with sufficient number of terminals. More than 2 wires
per terminal shall not be permitted. If required, additional terminal with shorting link may be
used. Each terminal for external cable connection shall be suitable for termination of 2.5 mm 2
solidcpernut.Tdcoperlgshabvidforcletmnawhvr
applicable.
5.3.2 All internal wiring shall employ 1.5 mm 2 , 660V grade, FR type PVC insulated copper
conductor wires.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright DL — All rights reserved
Page 3258 of 3884

SPECIFICATION
a
ENGINEERS FOR
Et jeg
INIRN tier3,1, elS1.301171
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goof of India IlnOeffabong) INDUSTRIAL TYPE
6-51-0014 Rev. 5

6.1 During fabrication, the equipment shall be subjected to inspection by EIL/ Owner or by an
expense.
6.2 For testing requirements refer inspection and test plan no. 6-81-1014.

transportation, i.e. by ship/ rail or trailer, and shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before
being placed in crates/ cases to prevent damage to finish. The crates/ cases shall have skid
bottom for handling. Special notations such as 'Fragile', 'This side up', 'Center of gravity',
`Weight', 'Owner's particulars', 'PO no.' etc., shall be clearly marked on the packages
together with other details as per purchase order.
The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The packing shall
be completely suitable for outdoor storage, in areas with heavy rains/ high ambient
temperature. A set of instruction manuals for installation, testing and commissioning, a set of
operation & maintenance manuals and a set of final drawing shall be enclosed in a waterproof
cover along with the shipment.
Page 3259 of 3884

el ENGINEERS FOR
Ogeli iaWreg
larfed ewasre .T:0.11
INDIA LIMITED
CA Govt of India Undertaking) FLAMEPROOF PLUGS, 6-51-0021 Rev. 5
SOCKETS AND HAND LAMPS Page 1 of 7
al-r-r4rsw 7m1,A-al err tz-44

fq
SPECIFICATION
FOR
FLAMEPROOF PLUGS, SOCKETS
AND HAND LAMPS
5 24.02.16 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION PS ANPS UAP DM

SPECIFICATION ANPS UAP JMS VC
SPECIFICATION UAP AAN VPS GRR
SPECIFICATION AP VPS SG AS
Standards Standards
Date Purpose
No by by Convenor Chairman
Approved by

Page 3260 of 3884
afaelei. ENGINEERS
O1 ii faia4eg
1.17/1 ewaar7CIA.,
INDIA UMITED
(A Govt of India UndertalonM
FOR
FLAMEPROOF PLUGS,
6-51-0021 Rev. 5
Abbreviations:

BS British Standard
ES Edison Screw
GI Galvanised Iron
HRC High Rupturing Capacity
IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
IS Indian Standard
LV Low Voltage
SPN Single Phase Neutral
TPN Three Phase Neutral
VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik and Information stechnik

Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. M. K. Sahu
Page 3261 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
5fgar kili5Veu
(Wen e(ri(Mre ,ArsM1A1(
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gov( Al (Atha Undertaking( FLAMEPROOF PLUGS,
6-51-0021 Rev. 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
5.0 CERTIFICATION 4
8.0 PACKING AND DESPATCH .7
Page 3262 of 3884

(..ItilC„,
(-
411 t ENGINEERS FOR
$•fgzir f6154eg ' INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0021 Rev. 5
WWI 2.103SAI, A13(70.1( (A Govt of India Undertaking) FLAMEPROOF PLUGS,
1.0 SCOPE
of flameproof plugs, sockets, transformers, hand lamps and accessories suitable for installation
in locations handling flammable liquids and gases / vapours.

IS-1248 Direct acting indicating analogue measuring instruments and
their accessories.
(General Requirements).
(Equipment Protection by Flameproof Enclosures "d").
IS / IEC 60079-7 : Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
IS / IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
2.2 In case of imported equipment, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
standards are equivalent or more stringent than the applicable Indian standards.
2.3 The equipment shall also confirm to the provisions of CEA Regulations with latest
amendments and other statutory regulations currently in force in the country.
project, the most stringent requirement shall govern. However, Owner's/ EIL's decision in this

4.0 SITE CONDITIONS

petrochemical and fertilizer plants. Unless otherwise specified, a design ambient temperature
of 40° C and an altitude not exceeding 1000 m above mean sea level shall be considered.
5.0 CERTIFICATION
Page 3263 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
Ogeir laajeg
,ailen2:12LINZAAJWITA,
(A Govt Of InOta UnOeftakong) FLAMEPROOF PLUGS,

6.1 Construction
6.1.1 The enclosures of the plugs, sockets, transformers and hand lamps shall be made of cast light
metal alloy.
6.1.2 The equipment shall be suitable for use in outdoor open locations and shall have IP-55 degree
of protection. The sockets for fixed installation, i.e. 415 V three phase sockets and 240 V
single phase sockets, shall preferably be provided with integral canopy. However, where the
enclosure has been certified without integral canopy, a separate canopy can be accepted. The
separate canopy shall be made of at least 14 SWG (2mm) galvanized sheet steel. The canopy
shall be suitable for providing protection against rain from top and two sides.
6.1.3 The enclosures shall be provided with gaskets made of non inflammable and self
extinguishing material.
final paint with colour shade as below:
Flame proof (Gas group IIA/ IIB) : Dark admiralty grey shade 632 of IS-5/
RAL 7031
Flame proof (Gas group IIC) : Light yellow shade 355 of IS-5/ RAL 1012
moving elements then these shall be greased.
6.1.7 All the non current carrying metallic parts of the equipment shall be inherently bonded
together. The TPN sockets shall be provided with two earthing studs, with lugs on the exterior
of the enclosure, suitable for termination of 10 mm dia. GI wire rope. Internal earth terminals
shall be provided in each enclosure for all single phase plugs and sockets for connecting the
earth core of the cables.
6.1.8 The terminal block enclosures shall be adequately sized to properly terminate the cables by
taking into account the required bending radii of cable cores and shall have the following
minimum gland to terminal distances:
Above 2.5 mm 2 Above 10 mm 2 & Above 35 mm22&
Conductor Size Up to 2.5 mm2 2 Upto10m Up to 35 mm2 Up to 70 mm2
Gland to
40 mm 60 mm 100 mm 150 mm
terminal distance
6.1.9 The sockets shall be provided with 2 nos. suitably sized cable entries at the bottom for
specified cable sizes and complete with 2 nos. flameproof double compression type nickel
plated brass flameproof cable glands. The plugs shall be supplied with 1 no. suitably sized
cable entry for specified cable size and complete with 1 no. double compression type nickel
plated brass flameproof cable gland. Each socket shall be supplied with 1 no. flameproof
nickel plated brass sealing plug, for plugging the unused cable entry.
6.1.10 The sockets shall have external fixing lugs for mounting on wall or column. The holes
provided on these lugs shall be of oblong type.
Page 3264 of 3884

.31fa_.1 ENGINEERS
*igen vtigieg
(agent eligkerelatireali
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
FLAMEPROOF PLUGS,
6-51-0021 Rev. 5
6.1.11 A nameplate indicating Tag Number shall be provided on each socket. Separate nameplate
shall also be provided to indicate the details of testing agency (CIMFR or equivalent), test
certificate reference, statutory approval agency (PESO/ DGMS) and reference, BIS license
number, applicable gas group etc. The nameplates shall be engraved type and permanently
fixed on the equipment. In case the standard details given above are embossed on the
enclosures, the same need not be repeated on the nameplate.
6.2 Socket Outlets & Plugs

6.2.1 The sockets shall be provided with a switch and a mechanical interlock so as to break the
electrical circuit before the plug is completely withdrawn and make the circuit after the plug is
fully inserted.
6.2.2 In order to prevent accidental removal of plug from socket, the engagement and
disengagement shall be by two separate and distinct movement and positions.
6.2.3 415V, 63A three phase flameproof plugs and socket meant for welding receptacle/ any other
three phase auxiliary load, shall be provided with 4 pins (3P+E).
6.2.4 4 pin socket shall be provided with 63A, three pole heavy duty switch; whereas, 5 pin socket
shall be provided with four pole (TPN) heavy duty switch.
6.2.5 Both 24V and 240V, 15A single phase flameproof plug and socket shall be provided with 3
pins (2P+E).
6.2.6 Provision shall be made so that it shall not be possible to insert 24V plug on to a 240V socket.
6.2.7 The sockets shall be provided with either a spring loaded hinged cover, or with a cap
connected through metallic chain, to close the same when not in service.
6.2.8 Scraping earth connection shall be provided between the plug and socket. Earth pin of plug
shall first engage with earth pin of switch socket.
6.2.9 The plug assembly shall be mechanically rugged, light and shall not unduly stress the socket
or its own pins when fitted on to the socket. The diameter of the earth pin of the plug and
socket shall be at least 1.1 times the diameter of the phase pins.
6.3 240V/ 24V Portable Transformer units
6.3.1 The 240V/ 24V portable transformer unit shall be supplied complete with 240V/ 24V
transformer having a 24V socket on the secondary side and 5 meter length of 3x1.5 mm 2
coperndut,PVCislaembrdfxilcae,uytrmndih
transformer primary at one end and having 240V plug on the other end. The socket outlets and
plugs shall meet the requirements of clause 6.2 above.
6.3.2 The 240V/ 24V transformer shall be designed for 100VA rating on continuous basis. HRC
fuses shall be provided on primary and secondary side of the transformer. The transformer
shall have an earthed screen between primary and secondary winding.
6.3.3 Suitable handle for carrying the transformer unit shall be provided.
6.4 24V Hand Lamp units
6.4.1 Each hand lamp unit shall be supplied complete with 15 meter length of 3x1.5 mm 2 copper
conductor, PVC insulated, metal braided flexible cable, duly terminated in the hand lamp at
one end and having 24V plug on the other end. The plug shall meet the requirements of clause
6.2 above.
6.4.2 The well glass provided shall be clear and toughened type.
6.4.3 Hand lamp shall be provided with either galvanised steel or epoxy powder coated mild steel
protective wire cage using minimum 5mm welded steel construction and having mesh
dimension not exceeding 50mm x 70mm.
Page 3265 of 3884

if tzi ~ ENGINEERS FOR
Ogen201-ez INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0021 Rev. 5
WWI 217,1rAY MarliNA) (A Govt of India Undeflakong) FLAMEPROOF PLUGS,
6.4.4 The lamp holder of the hand lamp shall be suitable for 60W, 24V, 50Hz lamp with ES cap
unless otherwise specified in the MR.
6.4.5 Suitable handle for carrying the hand lamp unit and a stand type guard suspension hook shall
be provided.
6.5.1 All equipments shall be provided with sufficient number of terminals. More than 2 wires per
terminal shall not be permitted. If required, additional terminal with shorting link may be
used. The terminals shall be suitable for termination of solid conductors upto 6 mm 2 and
stranded conductors above 6 mm 2 . Tinned copper lugs shall be provided for cable termination.
6.5.2 All internal wiring shall employ adequately sized, 660V grade, FR type, PVC insulated
Copper conductor wires, colour coded for phase, neutral and earth, with minimum conductor
sizes as below:
TPN Plugs and sockets: 16 mm2
SPN Plugs and sockets: 2.5 mm2
6.5.3 For flameproof equipments, terminal box can be provided in Èxe' or Èxd' execution.
routine/ acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufacturer's works, under his care and
expense.
during inspection.
7.4 All equipments shall be subjected to various routine / acceptance tests as per Inspection &
Test plan no. 6-81-1021.

`Weight', 'Owner's particularsVP0 no.' etc., shall be clearly marked on the packages
Page 3266 of 3884

SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
1151-adft ENGINEERS COMMUNICATION AND 6-51-0052 Rev. 6
5g7 Raitg W INDIA LIMITED
A CON nos unoenoingi FIRE ALARM CABLES Page 1 of 10
Tiwg at{ afT9. clam

* -Wu
SPECIFICATION
FOR
COMMUNICATION AND
FIRE ALARM CABLES
taL
6 01/04/16 RG MKS BRB RN
SPECIFICATION
5 27/04/11 PS ANPS UAP DM
SPECIFICATION
4 25/04/08 ANPS UAP JMS VC
SPECIFICATION
3 21/03/03 UAP AAN VPS SKG
SPECIFICATION
2 05/05/97 NS VPS SG AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Prepared Checked
by by
Approved by
Page 3267 of 3884

ENGINEERS
fanINDIA LIMITED COMMUNICATION AND 6-51-0052 Rev. 6
0417, E9701701J(10.9) co.. OI ima UndertaltrIgl
FIRE ALARM CABLES Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:

BS British Standard
DOT Department of Telecommunications (Government of India)
FR Flame Retardant
FRLS Flame Retardant Low Smoke
FS Fire Survival
HR PVC : Heat Resistant Polyvinyl Chloride
IEC International Electro technical Commission
IS Indian Standards
LF Low Frequency
NEMA : National Electrical Manufacturers Association
PE Polyethelene
PO Purchase Order
UV Ultra Violet
VDE Verband Deutscher Elecktrotechniker
Convener: Mr. B.R. Bhogal

Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. M. K. Sahu
Ms. N.P. Guha (Projects)
Page 3268 of 3884

E NGINEERS
sgar INDIA LIMITED COMMUNICATION AND 6-51-0052 Rev. 6
IA Govt of India Underlakim FIRE ALARM CABLES Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
4.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NON JELLY FILLED CABLES 5
5.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR JELLY FILLED CABLES 7
Page 3269 of 3884

arae.1 SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGNEERS
ar INDIA LIMITED COMMUNICATION AND 6-51-0052 Rev. 6
(A Go.t of Incla Undertalong)
1.0 SCOPE
The intent of this specification is to define the requirements for design, manufacture and
supply of Flame Retardant Low Smoke type and Fire Survival type PVC sheathed cables for
use in plant communication and fire alarm systems and jelly filled telecommunication cables.
The equipment shall comply with the requirements of the latest revision of the following
standards:
2.1 BIS and other Standards
ASTM D-883 Standard terminology relating to plastics.

ASTM-D-2863 Measurement of minimum oxygen concentration to support
candle like combustion of plastics
ASTM-G-154 Standard practice for operating fluorescent light apparatus for
UV exposure of non-metallic materials.
IEC: 60331-21 Tests for electric cables under fire conditions circuit integrity —
Procedures and requirements — Cables of rated voltage up and
including 0.6/1.0kV.
ASTM D-924 Standard test method for dissipation factor (or power factor)
and relative permittivity (dielectric constant) of electric
insulating liquids.
BS-6234 Specification for polythene insulation and sheath of electric
cables.
IS-694 PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including
1100V.
IS-1554 (Part 1) PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables (Part-1 for working
voltages up to and including 1100V).
IS-5831 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cable.
IS-8130 Conductors for insulated cables and flexible cords.
IS-9938 Recommended colour for PVC insulation for LF wires and
cables.
IS-10418 Drums for electric cables.
IS-10462 (Part 1) Fictitious calculation method for determination of dimensions
of protective coverings of cables (Part-1: Elastomeric and
thermoplastic insulated cables).
IS-10810 (Part 58) Methods of test for cables (Part 58: Oxygen index test).
IS-10810 (Part 61) Methods of test for cables (Part 61: Flame retardant test)
IS-10810 (Part 62) Methods of test for cables (Part 62: Fire resistance test for
bunched cables).
IS-12444 Continuously cast and rolled electrolytic copper wire rods for
electrical conductors.
2.2 DOT Standards
GR/WIR-06/03 Specification for cable - switchboard (Screened and

Unscreened) - Generic requirements.
GR/CUG-01/03 Specification for solid polythene insulated fully filled,
polythene sheathed underground telecom cables.
2.3 In case of imported cables, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable, if these
standards are equivalent to or stringent than the applicable Indian standards.
2.4 The cables shall also conform to the provisions of the CEA Regulations and other statutory
Page 3270 of 3884

Itilfazre ENGINEERS
COMMUNICATION AND
sig-(41EMeg, INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0052 Rev. 6
IP Govl of India Undeptakingi
2.5 In case Indian standards are not available for any material, standards issued by IEC/ BS/ VDE/
IEEE/ NEMA or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
project, the most stringent one shall prevail. However, Owner's decision in this regard will be
final and binding.
3.0 SITE CONDITIONS
Cables shall be suitable for installation in following conditions:
i. Above ground in open-air locations (trays/ ducts) in tropical, humid and corrosive
atmosphere prevalent in refineries/ petrochemical plants with severe weathering and
exposure to solar radiation.
ii. Directly buried in underground trenches, conduits with uncontrolled back-fill and
possibility of flooding by water and chemicals.
iii. Design ambient air temperature of 40°C/ ground temperature of 30°C.
4.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NON JELLY FILLED CABLES
4.1 Non jelly filled communication and fire alarm cables shall in general conform to the
requirements of DOT specification GR/WIR-06/03.
4.2 Conductors
4.2.1 The size of conductor shall be as per job requirement.
4.2.2 The conductors shall consist of annealed, high conductivity solid copper wire, smoothly
drawn, circular in cross-section, uniform in quality, free from defects and uniformly coated
with pure tin and shall conform to Cl. 3.0 of DOT specification GR/WIR-06/03.
4.3 Insulation
4.3.1 The core insulation shall be with PVC compound applied over the conductor by extrusion.
4.3.2 PVC insulation shall meet the following requirements:
Conductor Diameter Thickness of Insulation

Type of Insulation
(Area) (Minimum)
Up to 0.5mm (0.2mm 2) 0.18 mm
Above 0.5mm (0.2mm2) &
0.26 mm
up to 0.71mm (0.4mm 2)
Above 0.71mm (0.4mm 2) &
0.31 mm
up to 0.9mm (0.63mm2)
Above 0.9mm (0.63mm 2) & Type-A or B as per IS-5831
0.39 mm
up to 1.12mm (1mm 2)
Above 1.12mm (1mm2) &
0.58 mm
up to 1.38mm (1.5mm2)
1.78mm (2.5mm2) 0.71 mm
2.26mm (4mm2) 0.80 mm
4.3.3 The colours used for insulation shall conform as nearly as practicable to the standard colours
as per IS-9938. The wire insulation shall have colours in accordance with Table-2 of DOT
specification GR/WIR-06/03. The applied colour shall neither have deleterious effect on the
electrical, mechanical or ageing properties of basic insulation nor shall get damaged by any
friction etc.
4.3.4 For single pair cables, the colour shall be incorporated in the insulation.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL -All rights reserved
Page 3271 of 3884

lata_Jes,;,
ENGINEERS
COMMUNICATION AND
411447IT Rift W INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0052 Rev. 6
IA Goo of ham Ur,*ltakingi
4.3.5 For multi pair cables, cores shall have uniform pattern of continuous spiral (Pitch not
exceeding 25mm) to facilitate easy identification. This may be done by the application of one
or more coloured strips on a base colour or by direct extrusion.
4.3.6 Alternately, colouring may consist of concentric coloured rings or dots or dashes on the base
colour. The coloured rings, dots or dashes shall have a width of not less than 1.0mm and shall
be repeated along the length of the insulation at an interval not less than 15mm and not more
than 25mm.
4.3.7 The dots or dashes shall be applied on diametrically opposite sides of the insulation, so that all
colours are visible when the insulation is viewed from any side.
4.4 Twisting
The two insulated conductors of a pair shall be uniformly twisted with a suitable right hand
lay, which shall not exceed 80mm.
4.5 Core Formation
The core formation shall conform to Cl. 6.0 of DOT specification no. GR/WIR-06/03.
4.6 Screen
4.6.1 The cables shall be provided with overall screen. The screen shall be of aluminium tape with
minimum thickness of 0.04mm. The overlap shall be minimum 3mm for cables up to 50 pair &
minimum 6mm for cables above 50 Pair. The screen shall be backed by an outer protective
layer of 0.13mm PVC tape or other non-hygroscopic material lapped applied longitudinally or
helically with overlap.
4.6.2 The cables shall be provided with a drain wire. Drain wire shall have a minimum cross-section
of 0.5mm2, shall be composed of multistrand bare tinned annealed copper conductor. The drain
wire shall be in continuous contact with the aluminium side of the overall screen. The drain
wire resistance including screen shall not exceed 30 ohm/km.
4.7 Ripcord
A non-metallic ripcord of suitable quality shall be laid longitudinally under the inner sheath &
screen. The ripcord when pulled shall cut through the sheath and strip the core.
4.8 Inner Sheath
4.8.1 An extruded inner sheath of type ST2 PVC, as per IS-5831, with minimum thickness as per
Table-4 of IS-1554 (Part-1) shall be applied over the laid up core, by extrusion to fit closely on
it.
4.8.2 The inner sheath shall be as circular as possible. It shall be possible to remove the inner sheath
without damage to the insulation.
4.8.3 When one or more layers of non-hygroscopic tape is helically applied over the laid up cores, as
a binder, the thickness of such tape(s) shall not be construed as a part of the inner sheath.
4.9 Armour
4.9.1 The cables shall be provided with armouring, made of hot dip galvanised steel wire /strip over
the inner sheath.
4.9.2 The armour shall be by means of 1.4mm thick round wires for cables with under armour
diameter upto 13mm. For cables with an under armour diameter above 13mm, the armour shall
either be of steel strip or round wire with thickness as per IS-1554 (Part-1).
4.10 Outer Sheath
4.10.1 The cables shall be provided with an extruded PVC sheath for external protection. The PVC
shall be type ST2 PVC, as per IS-5831.
Page 3272 of 3884

OPZIET ENGINEERS
$igirr Weg INDIA LIMITED COMMUNICATION AND 6-51-0052 Rev. 6
IA Own al India Urvierlaking)
4.10.2 All cables covered in this specification shall be flame retardant low smoke (FRLS). The other
sheath shall be with oxygen index 29% at 27+2 °C and possess flame retardant low smoke
properties meeting the requirements of IS 10810 Part-62 category - AF. In addition, suitable
chemicals shall be added to the PVC compound of the outer sheath to protect the cable against
rodent and termite attack.
4.10.3 The thickness of outer sheath shall be as per IS-1554 (Part 1).
4.10.4 The outer sheath shall fit tightly on the armour and shall be applied in such a manner that no
undue residual strain is left in the material.
4.10.5 The outer sheath shall be red in colour for cables to be used for fire alarm system, grey in
colour for cables to be used for telephone & communication system and black in colour for all
other functions.
4.10.6 Sequential marking of the length of the cable, in meters, shall be provided on the outer sheath
at every one meter. The marking shall be legible and indelible by suitable method.
4.10.7 The overall diameter of the cables shall be strictly as per the values declared in the data sheet,
subject to a maximum tolerance of +2mm.
4.11 The fire survival cables (if specified in data sheet) shall meet the following additional
requirements:
i) The insulation shall be of EPR or equivalent material with glass mica tape below or above
insulation.
ii) The cables shall meet requirement of circuit integrity test for a minimum period of 3
hours at maximum temperature of 950 ° C.
iii) Vendor shall have the test certificate for circuit integrity test as per IEC: 60331-21.
4.12 Cable Capacitance
4.12.1 The core to core capacitance of the cables shall not exceed 100nF/km at I kHz.
4.12.2 The core to screen capacitance for the screened cables shall not exceed 250nF/km at IkHz.
5.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR JELLY FILLED CABLES
5.1 Jelly filled telecom cables shall in general conform to the requirements of DOT specification
GR/CUG-01/03.
5.2 Conductors
5.2.1 The conductors shall consist of annealed, high conductivity solid copper wire, smoothly
drawn, circular in cross-section, uniform in quality, free from defects and uniformly coated
with pure tin and shall conform to Cl. 3.0 of DOT specification GR/CUG-01/03.
5.3 Insulation
5.3.1 Each conductor shall be insulated with insulating grade PE conforming to Cl. 4.0 of DOT
specification GR/CUG-01/03.
5.4 Twisting
The two insulated conductors of a pair shall be uniformly twisted with a suitable right hand
lay, which shall not exceed 150mm.
5.5 Core Formation
The core formation shall conform to Cl. 6.0 of DOT specification GR/CUG-01/03.
5.6 Filling Compound
5.6.1 The cable core shall be filled with a suitable stable water resistant compound, which shall be
compatible with the insulation, binders and tapes used in the cable.
Page 3273 of 3884

151M2Te? ENGINEERS
$€-L it INDIA COMMUNICATION AND 6-51-0052 Rev. 6
W IA Cal of India undertaking)
5.6.2 It shall be homogeneous and uniformly mixed material containing an anti-oxidant.

5.6.3 The compound shall not obscure the identification of the colour of the insulation of the
conductors.
5.6.4 It shall not contain dirt, metallic particles or other foreign matter.
5.6.5 The compound shall be readily removable from the insulated conductors by wiping.
5.6.6 It shall be free from any unpleasant odour and shall have no toxic or dermatic hazards.
5.6.7 The flash point of the compound shall not be less than 200°C.
5.6.8 The volume resistivity measured at 100°C shall not be less than 10 1° ohm-cm.
5.6.9 The permittivity at 1 MHz tested as per ASTM D-924 shall not be greater than 2.3 at 20°C.
5.7 Core Wrapping
At least one closed helical or longitudinal application of a nonhygroscopic and nonwicking
polyester tape or tape of any other suitable material shall be provided over the cable core.
5.8 Screen
5.8.1 The cables used for telephone system shall be provided with overall screen. The screen shall
be of aluminium tape with minimum thickness of 0.2mm. The overlap shall be minimum 3mm
for cables having maximum diameter over inner sheath < 30mm & minimum 6mm for cables
having maximum diameter over inner sheath 30mm. The screen shall be coated with 0.05
mm nominal thickness polythene/copolymer on both sides. The thickness of the composite
tape shall be 0.3mm ± 15%.
5.8.2 The aluminium tape shall be electrically continuous through out the length of the cable.
5.9 Inner Sheath
5.9.1 The inner sheath shall be as circular as possible and free from pinholes and other defects. It
shall be possible to remove the inner sheath without damage to the insulation.
5.9.2 The inner sheath shall be of polythene conforming to type 03C or HO3C of BS 6234 and shall
contain a suitable antioxidant system. The material shall be virgin as per ASTM D-883 and
meet the requirements of Cl. 10.1 of DOT specification no. GR/CUG-01/03.
5.9.3 The thickness of inner sheath shall conform to Table-6 of DOT specification no. GR/CUG-
01/03.
5.9.4 The maximum diameter over inner sheath shall conform to Table-7 of DOT specification no.
GR/CUG-01/03.
5.10 Armour
5.10.1 The cables shall be provided with bedding and armour over the inner sheath.
5.10.2 The bedding shall consist of two close helical lappings of polythene or polypropylene tape.
Each tape shall be applied with a minimum of 5% overlap.
5.10.3 The armour shall be made of hot dip galvanised steel tape of thickness as per Table-8 of DOT
specification GR/CUG-01/03 .
5.11 Outer Sheath
5.11.1 The external protection shall consist of a polythene sheath conforming to the material
specification defined in Clause 5.9 above.
5.11.2 The thickness of outer sheath shall conform to Table-9 of DOT specification GR/CUG-01/03.
5.11.3 The outer sheath shall be as circular as possible and free from pinholes and other defects.
5.11.4 Colour of outer sheath shall be grey.
Page 3274 of 3884

ENGINEERS
51g2:8 Eiareg VW INDIA LIMITED COMMUNICATION AND 6-51-0052 Rev. 6
5.11.5 The maximum diameter over outer sheath shall conform to Table-7 of DOT specification
GR/CUG-01/03.
5.12 Cable Capacitance
The average mutual capacitance of the pairs measured at 800 to 1000Hz shall be 52 ± 3 nF/km.
However, the mutual capacitance of individual pairs shall be within the limits of 52 ± 4.5
nF/km.
6.1 The cables shall be tested and examined at the manufacturer's works. All the materials
employed in the manufacture of the cable shall be subjected to examination, testing and
approval by EIL/ Owner. Manufacturer shall furnish all necessary information concerning the
supply to EIL/ Owner's inspectors. The inspector shall have free access to the manufacturer's
works for the purpose of inspecting the process of manufacture in all its stages and will have
the power to reject any material, which appears to be of unsuitable description or of
unsatisfactory quality.
6.2 The following acceptance tests shall be conducted on the completed jelly filled cables as per
the test procedures given in DOT specification GR/CUG-01/03 and this specification:
i. Measurement of diameter of conductor, over inner sheath & over outer sheath.
ii. Measurement of thickness of insulation, inner sheath, screen, armour & outer sheath.
iii. Measurement of resistance of conductor.
iv. Measurement of resistance unbalance.
v. Continuity check & measurement of resistance of Poly-al tape.
vi. Colour coding.
vii. Conductor continuity test.
viii. Mutual capacitance test.
ix. Capacitance unbalance test.
x. Cross talk test.
xi. Attenuation test.
xii. Insulation resistance test.
xiii. Dielectric strength test.
xiv. Drip test.
xv. Armour galvanisation test.
xvi. Conductor annealing test.
xvii. Measurement of drum length.
6.3 Following tests shall be carried out to prove FRLS property of the cable.
a. Critical oxygen index as per ASTM-D-2863 i.e. Determination of % of oxygen required

for combustion at room temperature of FRLS sheath which shall remain as 29% (min.)
b. Temperature index as per ASTM-D-2863 i.e. To determine at what temperature normal

oxygen content of 29% in air will support combustion of FRLS sheath which shall remain
as 250°C.
c. Halogen acid gas emission as per IEC-60754 Part 1 i.e. To determine the % of release of
hydrochloric acid gas from the FRLS sheath under fire which shall be 20% (max.)
d. Smoke Density Test shall be as per ASTM D - 2843 and Smoke Density Rating of FRLS
Sheath shall be 60% (max.).
6.4 The test for circuit integrity for fire survival cables shall be carried out as per IEC-60331 (Part-
21).
6.5 The following tests shall be conducted on the completed non jelly filled cables as per the test
procedures given in DOT specification GR/WIR-06/03 and this specification:
Page 3275 of 3884

$.reel ENGINEERS
S'frar EI9e6 INDIA LJMITED COMMUNICATION AND 6-51-0052 Rev. 6
Gori of hula Undenaking)
6.5.1 Acceptance tests
i. Measurement of diameter of conductor, over inner sheath & over outer sheath.
ii. Measurement of thickness of insulation, inner sheath, screen, armour & outer sheath.
iii. Measurement of resistance of conductor.
iv. Colour coding.
v. Conductor continuity test.
vi. Mutual capacitance test.
vii. Capacitance unbalance test.
viii. Insulation resistance test.
ix. High voltage test.
x. Armour galvanisation test.
xi. Conductor annealing test.
xii. Measurement of drum length.
6.5.2 Special Tests
The non jelly filled cables shall also be subjected to following special tests.
i. Oxygen index test as per IS-10810 (Part 58).

ii. Flammability test on finished cable as per IS-10810 (Part 61 & 62).
The special test shall be conducted on one sample from each lot. The sample will be selected
by the inspector.
7.1 Cables shall be dispatched in non-returnable steel drums of suitable barrel diameter, securely
packed, with the take-off end fully protected against mechanical damage.
7.2 On the flange of the drum, necessary information such as project title, manufacturer's name,
type, size, length of cable in meters, drum no., cable code, BIS certification mark, gross
weight, 'Owner's particulars', 'P.O. numbers' etc., shall be printed. An arrow shall be printed
on the drum with suitable instructions to show the direction of rotation of the drum.
7.3 The drum lengths for cables shall be as below:
Upto 50 pairs 1000 meters

Above 50 pairs & upto 100 pairs 500 meters
Above 100 pairs As per job requirement (subject to max.
length of 500 meters)
7.4 A tolerance of ± 5% shall be permissible for each drum. However overall tolerance on each
size of cable shall be limited to ± 2%.
7.5 For non jelly filled cable, PVC/ rubber end caps shall be supplied free of cost for each drum
with a minimum of eight per thousand meter length. In addition, ends of the cables shall be
properly sealed, with caps, to avoid ingress of moisture/ water during transit and storage.
7.6 For jelly filled telephone cables, the ends of the cable shall be sealed by thermo shrinkable end
caps of adequate wall thickness. Alternately ends may be sealed by enclosing them in rubber
or PVC caps of wall thickness not less than 1.8mm. The caps shall be secured to the outer
sheath with hose clips or ties or black adhesive tape or heat shrinkable sleeves.
7.7 The cables may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The packing shall be
completely suitable for outdoor storage, in areas with heavy rains and high ambient
temperature.
Page 3276 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
Ogell 215reg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0061 Rev. 5
1.11 262,1R2 ,751.3.10.1) IA GoN of India UndertalonM
HAZARDOUS AREA LIGHT
FIXTURES AND JUNCTION Page 1 of 7
BOXES
FZR (11rd.4 1 ritIct*PcR1
■Ticrkll tsictki
faF~T
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HAZARDOUS AREA LIGHT FIXTURES
AND JUNCTION BOXES
411 ft
5 24.02.16 NNB/AK NP BRB SC
SPECIFICATION
4 11.04.11 PS ANPS UAP DM
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
1 23.12.96 RKM VPS SG AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved by
Page 3277 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
effidfaregVIOP INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0061 Rev. 5
Wien (A Govf Of India Undertaking) HAZARDOUS AREA LIGHT
BOXES
Abbreviations:

BS British Standard
ES Edison Screw
GI Galvanised Iron
HRC High Rupturing Capacity
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organisation
IS Indian Standard
LV Low Voltage
SPN Single Phase Neutral
TPN Three Phase Neutral
VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik and Information stechnik

Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. M. K. Sahu
Page 3278 of 3884

101 ENGINEERS
eJ
FOR
$'1g7 0151eg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0061 Rev. 5
(A Govt of Ind. Undertaking) HAZARDOUS AREA LIGHT
BOXES
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
5.0 POWER SUPPLY 4
6.0 CERTIFICATION 5
Page 3279 of 3884

.311 ENGINEERS FOR
$1geZiEifiteg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0061 Rev. 5
WWI ?IMRE 4,4,10.1) (A Govt of India Undertaking) HAZARDOUS AREA LIGHT
BOXES
1.0 SCOPE
of lighting fixtures, control gearboxes, junction boxes and accessories suitable for installation
in locations handling flammable liquids and gases / vapours.

(General requirements).
(Equipment Protection by Flameproof Enclosures "d").
Construction, test & marking of type of protection "n"
IS / IEC 60529 : Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
IEC 61347-2-13 : Lamp Controlgear — Part 2 -13: Particular Requirement for
D.C. and A.C. supplied electronic control gear for LED
models
2.2 In case of imported equipment, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
standards are equivalent or more stringent than the applicable Indian standards.
2.3 The equipment shall also confirm to the provisions of CEA Regulations with latest
amendments and statutory regulations currently in force in the country.
project, the most stringent requirement shall govern. However, Owner's / EIL's decision in
this regard will be final and binding.

4.0 SITE CONDITIONS
petrochemical and fertilizer plants. Unless otherwise specified, a design ambient temperature
of 40° C and an altitude not exceeding 1000 m above mean sea level shall be considered.
5.0 POWER SUPPLY

All AC lighting fixtures/ control gear boxes/ junction boxes shall be suitable for 220 — 250V,
SPN, 50Hz ± 3% power supply and all DC lighting fixtures/ junction boxes shall be suitable
for 110/ 220 ±10% V power supply.
Page 3280 of 3884

eiENGINEERS
ogel, fame-, INDIA LIMITED
IvoRvt eiRoor?OvJOinvit IA Govt of India Undertaking)
FOR
HAZARDOUS AREA LIGHT
6-51-0061 Rev. 5
BOXES
6.0 CERTIFICATION

7.1 Construction
7.1.1 The enclosures of the lighting fixtures, control gear box and junction boxes shall be of cast
light metal alloy.
7.1.2 All equipment shall be suitable for use in outdoor open locations and shall have IP-55 degree
of protection.
7.1.3 The enclosures shall be provided with gaskets made of non-inflammable and self-
extinguishing material.
final paint with colour shade as below:
- Flame proof (Gas group IIA/IIB) and AC supply : Dark admiralty grey shade 632 of IS-5/
RAL 7031
- Flame proof (Gas group IIC) and AC Supply : Light yellow shade 355 of IS-5 / RAL
1012
- Zone-2/ Increased safety and AC Supply : Dark admiralty grey shade 632 of IS-5/
RAL 7031
- DC lighting fixtures : Bright red shade 538 of IS-5 / RAL
3003
moving elements then these shall be greased.
7.1.7 All equipments on single phase supply shall be provided with an independent earth terminal
with lug inside the enclosure for terminating the third (earth) core of the cable and shall have
facility for looping.
7.1.8 A nameplate shall be provided to indicate the details of testing agency (CIMFR or equivalent),
test certificate reference, statutory approval agency (PESO/ DGMS) and reference, BIS license
number, applicable gas group etc. The nameplates shall be engraved type and permanently
fixed on the equipment. In case the standard details given above are embossed on the
enclosures, the same need not be repeated on the nameplate.
7.2 Lighting Fixtures
7.2.1 Glass used for lighting fixture shall be clear and suitable for use under conditions involving
exceptional risk of mechanical damage.
7.2.2 All well glass fixtures shall be provided with either galvanised steel or epoxy powder coated
mild steel protective wire cage using minimum 5mm welded steel construction and having
mesh dimension not exceeding 50mm x 70mm. The mounting bolts of mild steel required for
Page 3281 of 3884

e_ ENGINEERS FOR
tfiWieg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0061 Rev. 5
1.1Eq, 212M? MR OgleFI) (A Govt of India undertaking) HAZARDOUS AREA LIGHT
BOXES
physically connecting the hazardous area well glass lighting fixtures (bracket / ceiling
mounted type) to the respective mounting bracket shall be supplied by Vendor along with the
fixtures.
7.2.3 The fixing parts of the enclosure, which are to be opened for replacement of bulb, shall be so
fastened that they can be unfastened only with special tools.
7.2.4 The lighting fixtures in Zone-2 area shall be Ex nR type. Lamp holder shall be Edison screw
type.
7.2.5 The lighting fixtures having integral control gear box / driver or to be used with incandescent
lamps shall be provided with 2 nos. threaded entries and 2 nos. double compression nickel
plated brass cable glands. All other lighting fixtures shall be provided with 1 no. threaded
entry and 1 no. double compression nickel plated brass cable gland. The glands shall be
suitable for the specified cable size. 20% of the fixtures having double cable entry shall be
supplied with 1 no. nickel plated brass plug for sealing the unused entry.
7.2.6 The top of all well glass lighting fixtures shall be identically drilled/ threaded to facilitate
installation on pole/ column or ceiling.
7.2.7 The flood lighting fixtures shall be supplied with adjustable mounting arrangement both in
horizontal and vertical plane.
7.2.8 The lighting fixtures for aviation purpose shall have cluster LED lamps of medium intensity
(as per ICAO regulations) and of red colour, with toughened glass.
7.2.9 All lighting fixtures shall be provided with suitable mirror-polished aluminum internal
reflector of suitable thickness to ensure adequate mechanical strength. Additionally, all well
glass fixtures except LED type shall be provided with an anodized mirror-polished aluminum
external reflector of minimum thickness 1.2mm and parabolic in design.
7.2.10 External reflectors, for use with well glass fixtures with lamps rated up to 150W, shall have a
height not less than 60% of the length of the well glass in use. Height of the external
reflectors, for use with well glass fixtures with lamps rated above 150W, shall extend at least
10mm below the full length of the well glass in use.
7.2.11 For LED type fixture, all fixture shall be supplied complete with associated lamp and driver.
LED driver shall be suitable for surge protection of minimum 2 kV surge. LED driver shall
comply with the requirement of IEC 61347-2-13. Fixture lifetime (L70) shall be greater than
50000 hours at ambient temperature of 40°C. Warranty period of LED fixture and driver shall
be as specified elsewhere in the MR.
7.3 Control Gear Box
7.3.1 Lighting fixtures suitable for discharge lamps shall be provided with power factor correction
capacitor, choke starter etc., housed in separate control gear box. The choke shall be copper
wound. The complete control gear shall have power factor not less than 0.9.
7.3.2 The control gear boxes shall be provided with 3 nos. entries and 3 nos. double compression
nickel plated brass cable glands. The glands shall be suitable for the specified cable size. 20%
of the control gear boxes shall be supplied with 1 no. nickel plated brass plug for sealing the
unused entry.
7.3.3 Control gear box for flame proof fixtures shall be flameproof type and for Ex nR type fixtures
shall be increased safety type, except that the control gear boxes having a fuse inside the
enclosure shall be necessarily of flameproof type. The fuses shall be HRC type. Requirement
of fuse shall be as specified in data sheet/ job specification.
7.4 Junction Boxes
The junction boxes shall be of flameproof or non-sparking type construction as mentioned in
the MR / Datasheet. All junction boxes for looping of single phase lighting circuits using
cables up to 6mm2 shall be minimum 125mm diameter in size. Each junction box shall be
Page 3282 of 3884

tll ieiENGINEERS
~
51g-zir Ofieg INDIA LIMITED FOR

6-51-0061 Rev. 5
tallE71 eirant, an Oraff.if Govt of India find. "ng HAZARDOUS AREA LIGHT
BOXES
complete with requisite number of cable entries and double compression flameproof nickel
plated brass cable glands to suit the specified cable size.

7.5.1 The fixtures and junction boxes shall be provided with sufficient number of terminals. More
than 2 wires per terminal shall not be permitted. If required, additional terminal with shorting
link may be used. The terminals for external cable termination shall be suitable for 2.5mm'
solid copper conductor. Tinned copper lugs shall be provided for cable termination wherever
applicable.
7.5.2 All internal wiring shall employ 1.5mm 2 , 660 V grade, FR type, PVC insulated copper
conductor wires, colour coded for phase, neutral and earth.
7.5.3 For flameproof equipments, terminal box can be provided in 'Exe' or 'Exd' execution.
expense.
during inspection.
8.4 All equipments shall be subjected to various acceptance tests as per Inspection and Test Plan
no. 6-81-1061.
`Weight',' Owner's particulars', 'PO nos.' etc., shall be clearly marked on the packages
Page 3283 of 3884

, k31 ENGINEERS FOR
$iga fèiffl-
eg INDIA LIMITED ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
1.12M ~I, 4,1 JvA,N, IA Govt of Ind,a Underlaking)
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS Page 1 of 12
d»71E. -gurg
Wf"kil 11
fqw
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT
MEDIUM VOLTAGE
INDUCTION MOTORS

SS/SHIRALI KJ BRB SC
1 12.08.14 SPECIFICATION
0 20.04.09 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SD BRB JMS ND

Standards Standards
Rev. Checked Committee Bureau
Date Purpose Prepared by Convenor Chairman
No by
Approved by
Page 3284 of 3884

■
31 ENGINEERS FOR
fa;1W5 w INDIA LIMITED
1.177T s'1,,
,q51.7~1) ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Abbreviations:
AL Aluminium
BASEEFA British Approvals Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres
CIMFR Central Institute of Mines and Fuel Research
CPRI Central power research institute
CU Copper
DOL Direct On Line
EIL Engineers India Limited
ERTL Electronics Regional test laboratory
FM Factory Mutual
FRP Fiber Reinforced Plastic
IEC International Electro-technical Commission
IS Indian Standard
JEC Japanese Electro-technical Committee
KLPL Karandikar laboratories Pvt. Ltd.
PESO Petroleum and Explosive Safety Organisation
PO Purchase Order
RPM Revolutions per Minute
UL Underwriter's Laboratories
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker
Convenor: Mr. B.R. Bhogal

Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. M.K. Sahu
Mr. A.K. Chaudhary (Inspection)
Ms. N.P. Guha (Project)
Page 3285 of 3884

--1 ENGINEERS FOR
gzx Wes
i
INWR 290O 2151JY4M,
w INDIA LIMITED
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
4.0 OPERATING CONDITIONS 5
5.0 PERFORMANCE 6
6.0 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS 7
7.0 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 10
8.0 CRITICAL SPEEDS 10
9.0 PAINTING 10
11.0 CERTIFICATION 11
Page 3286 of 3884

‘31 ENGINEERS FOR
02-'
eg
2.1~,151~11
INDIA LIMITED
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, packing and supply of energy
efficient-High efficiency (IE2) three phase medium voltage squirrel cage induction motors.
2.1 The squirrel cage induction motors and their components shall comply with the latest editions of
following standards issued by BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) unless otherwise specified:
IS - 5 Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels.

IS - 325 Three phase induction motors.
IS - 1076 Preferred numbers.
IS - 1231 Dimensions of three phase foot mounted induction motors.
IS - 1271 Electrical insulation- Thermal evaluation and designation.
IS - 2223 Dimensions of flange mounted AC Induction motors.
IS - 2253 Designation for types of construction and mounting arrangement of
rotating electrical machines.
IS - 2254 Dimensions of vertical shaft motors for pumps.
IS - 2968 Dimensions of slide rails electric motors.
IS - 4029 Guide for testing three phase induction motors.
IS - 4889 Method of determination of efficiency of rotating electrical machines.
IS - 6362 Designation of methods of cooling of rotating electrical machines.
IS - 7816 Guide for testing insulation resistance of rotating machines.
IS - 8223 Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines.
IS - 8789 Values of performance characteristics for three phase induction
motors.
IS - 9283 Motors for submersible pump sets.
IS - 12065 Permissible limits of noise level for rotating electrical machines.
IS - 12075 Mechanical vibration of rotating Electrical Machines with shaft
heights 56 mm and higher - measurement, evaluation and limits of
vibration severity.
IS — 12615 Energy Efficient induction motors - Three phase squirrel cage.
IS - 12824 Type of duty and classes of rating assigned to rotating electrical
machines.
IS - 13529 Guide on effects of unbalanced voltages on the performance of three
phase cage induction motors.
IS - 13555 Guide for selection and application of three phase induction motors
for different types of driven equipment.
IS - 14568 Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines, frame
numbers 355 to 1000 and flange numbers 1180 to 2360.
IS / IEC60079-0: Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres (General
requirements)
IS/IEC-60079-1: Explosive atmospheres-Equipment protection by flame proof
enclosures "d".
IS/IEC60079-2 : Explosive protection by pressurized enclosure "p".
IS/IEC60079-7 : Explosive atmospheres-Equipment protection by increased safety —
IS/IEC-60079-15: Construction, test & marking of type of protection "n" electrical

apparatus.
IS/ IEC: 60529 : Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IS/IEC 60034-1 : Rotating electrical machines:-Rating & Performance
IS/IEC-60034-5: Degrees of protection provided by the internal design of rotating

electrical machines.
Page 3287 of 3884

k31 --1 ENGINEERS FOR
5g-u f&IJeg INDIA LIMITED
1.7E,, c-1,cnr1,711.3~11 ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
IS/IEC 60034-8: Rotating electrical machines-Terminal marking and direction of rotation

IS/IEC 61241: Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust
2.2 In case of imported motors, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable Indian Standards.
2.3 The motors shall also conform to the provisions of CEA regulations and other statutory
2.4 In case Indian Standards are not available, standards issued by IEC/ BS/ VDE/ IEEE/
JEC/NEMA or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
2.5 In case of any conflict between requirements specified in various applicable documents, the
most stringent one shall prevail. However, owner's decision in this regard shall be final and
binding.
3.1 The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of the art technology and proven field track
record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
3.2 Vendor shall ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for the offered
equipment at least for 10 years from the date of supply.
3.3 Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment and EIL before
phasing out the product/spares to ensure the end user for placement of order for spares and
services.
4.0 OPERATING CONDITIONS
4.1 Ambient Conditions
Motors shall be suitable for operating satisfactorily in humid and corrosive atmosphere found in
refineries, petrochemical, fertilizer and metallurgical plants. Service conditions shall be as
specified in the motor data sheet. If not specifically mentioned therein, a design ambient
temperature of 40 ° C and an altitude not exceeding 1000 meters above mean sea Level shall be
taken into consideration.
4.2 Frequency and Voltage Variations
Unless otherwise agreed, motors shall be designed for continuous operation at rated output
under the following conditions:
a) The terminal voltage differing from its rated value by not more than + 6 % or
b) The frequency differing from its rated value by not more the + 3 % or
c) Any combination of (a) and (b)
4.3 Starting
a) Motors shall be designed for direct-on-line starting or other method of starting as

specified in datasheet.
b) Motors shall be designed for re-acceleration under full load after a momentary loss of
voltage with the residual voltage being 100% and is in phase opposition to the applied
voltage.
c) Minimum locked rotor thermal withstand time at rated voltage shall be 10 seconds
under cold conditions and 8 seconds under hot conditions. In addition, Locked Rotor
Page 3288 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
$'fg-ar fafai
e5
two,/, ‘151,19M,
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertaking) ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
withstand time under hot conditions at 75% & 100% voltages, shall be minimum 1.4
times the starting time at the corresponding voltage.
d) Unless otherwise specified, all motors shall be suitable for starting under specified load
conditions with 75 % of the rated voltage at the motor terminals.
e) Motors shall be designed to allow the minimum number of consecutive starts indicated
in Table below:
Starts Min. no. of consecutive starts

No. of consecutive start-ups with initial temp. of the
3
motor at ambient level (cold)
No. of consecutive start-ups with initial temp. of the
2
motor at full load operating level (hot).
4.4 Direction of Rotation
Motors shall be suitable for either direction of rotation. In case unidirectional fan is provided for
motors, direction of rotation for which the motor is designed shall be permanently indicated by
means of an arrow. Directional arrow should be manufactured from corrosion resistant material.
When a motor is provided with bi-directional fans, a double-headed arrow should be provided.
Normally, clockwise rotation is desired as observed from the driving (coupling) end, when the
terminals UVW are connected to a power supply giving a terminal phase sequence in the order
UVW. Counter-clockwise rotation of the motor shall be obtained by connecting the power
supply to terminals so that the phase sequence corresponds to the reversed alphabetical
sequence of the terminal letters. Ample space shall be provided at the terminal box for
interchanging any two external leads for obtaining the reverse phase sequence.
5.0 PERFORMANCE
5.1 Motors shall be rated for continuous duty (Si), unless otherwise specified.
5.2 Unless specified, the starting current (as % rated current) shall be limited to maximum 600-
700% (based on number of poles and KW rating) as per IS 12615:2011, subject to IS tolerance
5.3 In particular cases, when the starting current is to be limited, care shall be taken such that the
design values of torque meets the load requirement while at the same time complying to clause
4.3 above of this specification. Unless otherwise specified the minimum pull-up torque of
motors, at rated voltage & frequency shall be minimum 50% of the rated full load torque.
5.4 In particular cases, when the starting with reduced voltage is specified, care shall be taken such
that the design values of torque meets the load requirement while at the same time complying to
clause 4.3 above of this specification.
5.5 Starting torque and minimum torque of the motor shall be compatible with the speed torque
curve of the driven equipment under specified starting and operating conditions.
In case where characteristics of driven equipment are not available while selecting the motor,
minimum starting torque shall be 110% of rated value for motors up to 75 kW and shall be 90%
of rated value for motors above 75 kW.
5.6 The breakdown torque at the rated voltage shall be not less than 175% of the rated load torque
with no negative tolerance. Unless otherwise agreed, the breakdown torque shall not exceed
300% of the rated load torque.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL -All rights reserved
Page 3289 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
IA GoN oi Unde■tak.91 ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
In case of motors driving equipment with pulsating loads (e.g. reciprocating compressors,
crushers, ball mills) the minimum value of pull out torque at 75% of the rated voltage shall be
more than the peak value of pulsating torque and the current pulsation shall be limited to 40%.
5.7 Motors fed by variable frequency drive shall additionally meet the following requirements.
5.7.1 The motors shall be suitable for the current wave forms produced by the power supply including
harmonics generated by the drive. The necessary coordination by motor manufacturers with
drive manufacturers regarding harmonics generated by VFD shall be taken care and
incorporated in motor design suitably.
5.7.2 The motors shall be designed to operate continuously at any speed over the range as per process
requirement with minimum range as 10-100% of rated speed or as specified in data sheet. The
characteristics shall be baked on the application — in terms of constant torque / variable torque as
per the driven equipment. Additional cooling fan shall be provided if required to limit the
temperature rise to specified limits, alternatively option of applying suitable de-rating may be
considered.
5.7.3 The motors shall withstand torque pulsation resulting from harmonics generated by the solid
state power supply.
5.7.4 The motors required to be transferred to DOL bypass mode shall be rated for specified
variations in line voltage and frequency.
5.8 The minimum values for performance characteristics of these motors shall be as given in the
tables 1, 2 & 3 of IS 12615-2011 for 1E2 motors, subjected to tolerance as per IS/IEC. Motor
meant for application with VFD, the efficiency value can be one class lower as per IS.
6.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS
6.1 Windings
6.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be provided with class 'B' insulation as a minimum. In
case of motors with class 'F' insulation, the permissible temperature rise above the specified
ambient temperature shall be limited to those specified in the applicable Indian standards for
class 'B' insulation.
6.1.2 The winding shall be tropicalised. The windings shall preferably be vacuum impregnated.
Alternately the windings shall be suitably varnished, baked and treated with epoxy gel for
operating satisfactorily in humid and corrosive atmospheres.
6.1.3 Windings shall be adequately braced to prevent any relative movement during operation. In this
respect, particular care shall be taken for the stator windings for direct-on-line starting squirrel
cage motors. Insulation shall be provided between coils of different phases that lie together.
Core laminations must be capable of withstanding burnout for rewind at 350 °C without damage
or loosening.
6.1.4 In case of motors driving equipment with pulsating loads, special care shall be taken for the
joints of rotor bars and end rings to avoid premature failures due to induced fatigue stresses.
6.1.5 The windings shall be connected in delta. However, for motors rated 2.2 kW and below, star
connection may be accepted. In case of motors with star-delta starting, the motor windings shall
be fully insulated for delta connection.
Page 3290 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
5Igur fdaeg
--
--,,,,,,aw,ansmsn.
INDIA LIMITED
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
6.1.6 The ends of the windings shall be brought out into a terminal box. These shall be terminated by
means of terminals mounted on an insulating base made of non-hygroscopic and non-flammable
material.
6.1.7 All motors shall be provided with six terminals and suitable links to connect them in star or in
delta except for motors rated up to and including 2.2 kW which may be accepted with three
terminals.
6.2 Terminal Box and Cable Entries
6.2.1 Unless otherwise agreed, the terminal box shall be located on the right hand side as viewed from
the driving (coupling) end. The terminal box shall have side cable entry from non-driving end.
However, as a special case, terminal box located on top may also be accepted, particularly for
hazardous area motors, in case manufacturer has only top mounted terminal box design which is
duly tested/certified by CIMFR and approved by PESO for installation in hazardous area. The
terminal box design shall allow rotation in steps of 90 ° C to facilitate cable entry from any
direction at site.
6.2.2 Terminal box cover shall be provided with handles to facilitate easy removal. However, for
terminal box covers weighing less than 5 kg., terminal box covers without handles can be
accepted.
6.2.3 The terminal box shall be provided entries for suitable cable glands corresponding to the size of
the specified cable. Crimp type tinned Copper lugs and nickel-plated brass (or aluminum if
specifically required), double compression type cable glands shall be supplied along with the
motors for the specified cable sizes for power and space heater cables.
6.2.4 For flameproof motors, terminal box can be provided in increased safety Èxe' execution.
6.2.5 The terminals, cable lugs, terminal box, cable entries and cable glands shall be suitable for the
maximum cables sizes as specified below for 2 pole, 4 pole or 6 pole motors:
Motor rating up to and including Size of phase conductor (mm2)

2.2 kW and below 2.5 cu
3.7 kW 6 cu
5.5 kW 10 cu
7.5 kW 16 cu
9.3 kW 16 cu
11.0 kW 16 cu
15.0 kW 50 Al.
18.5 kW 70 Al
22.0 kW 70 Al
30.0 kW 95 Al
37.0 kW 120 Al
45.0 kW 150 Al
55.0 kW 240 Al
75.0 kW 2x95 Al
90.0 kW 2x120 Al
110.0 kW 2x240 Al
125.0 kW/132 kW 2x240 Al
160.0 kW 2x240 Al
6.2.6 Cable sizes for motors having synchronous speeds 750 RPM and below shall be as agreed
between the purchaser and manufacturer.
Page 3291 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
rr fa2es
1.12,f elvostVO51,~11
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertalong) ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
6.3 Motor Casing and Type of Enclosure
6.3.1 The minimum degree of motor enclosures including terminal boxes and bearing housing shall
be IP-55 as per IS.
6.3.2 Motors for outdoor use shall be suitable for installation and satisfactory operation without any
protective shelter or canopy. Motor casing shall be provided with a suitable drain for removal of
condensed moisture except in case of flameproof motors (Type Ex d/Exde).
6.3.3 A11 internal and external metallic parts, which may come into contact with cooling air, shall be
of corrosion resistant material or appropriately treated to resist the corrosive agents, which may
be present in the atmosphere. Screws and bolts shall be of rust proof material or protected
against corrosion.
6.3.4 Unless otherwise agreed, motors shall have standard frame sizes (min.) for various output
ratings as stipulated in IS.
6.4 Bearing and Lubrication
6.4.1 Motors shall have grease lubricated ball or roller bearings. In all cases, the bearings shall be
chosen to provide a minimum L-10 rating life of 5 years, (40, 000 hours) at rated operating
conditions
(The L-10 rating life is the number of hours at constant speed that 90% of a group of identical
bearings will complete or exceed before the first evidence of failure).
6.4.2 The bearings shall be adequate to absorb axial thrust produced by the motor itself or due to shaft
expansion. Motors designed to handle external thrust from the driven equipment shall be
supplied with a thrust bearing at the non-driving end.
6.4.3 In cases such as pumps for hot liquids where the driven equipment operates at high
temperatures, bearings shall be cooled by a shaft-mounted fan. This shall ensure efficient
ventilation of the bearing and disperse the heat transmitted from the driven equipment by
conduction or convection.
6.4.4 Bearings shall be capable of grease injection from outside without removal of covers with
motors in the running conditions. The bearing boxes shall be provided with necessary features
to prevent Loss of grease or entry of dust / moisture e.g. labyrinth seal/ oil seal/ V seal. Where
grease nipples are provided, these shall be associated, where necessary, with appropriately
located relief devices, which ensure passage of grease through the bearings.
6.4.5 Pre-lubricated sealed bearings may be considered provided a full guarantee is given for 4 to 5
years of trouble-free service without the necessity of re-lubrication.
6.5 Cooling System
All motors shall be self ventilated, fan cooled. Fans shall be corrosion resistant or appropriately
protected. They shall be suitable for motor rotation in either direction without affecting the
performance of the motor. If this is not possible for large outputs, it shall be possible to reverse
the fan without affecting the balancing of the motor.
For motors operating in hazardous area, the fans shall be of an anti-static non-sparking material.
Page 3292 of 3884

ENG1NEERS FOR
Ogzrr
Mt c-lecnrc' 411
w INDIA LIMITED ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
6.6 Rotor
The rotor shall be of squirrel cage type, dynamically balanced to provide a low vibration Level
and long service life for the bearings. Die cast aluminum rotors for motors in hazardous areas
may be accepted provided the same are type tested and approved by competent authorities.
6.7 Shaft Extension
Motors shall be provided with a single shaft extension with key-way and full key. Motor shaft
shall be sized to withstand 10 times the rated design torque.
6.8 Lifting Hooks
A11 motors weighing more than 30 kg. shall be provided with lifting hooks of adequate capacity.
6.9 Earth Terminals
Two earth terminals located preferably on diametrically opposite sides shall be provided for
each motor. Necessary nuts and spring washers shall be provided for earth connection.
7.0 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
7.1 Anti-Condensation Heaters
All motors rated 30 kW and above shall be provided with 240 V anti-condensation heaters,
sized and located so as to prevent condensation of moisture during shutdown periods.
For motors with heaters installed in hazardous atmospheres (Zone - 1 or Zone - 2), such heaters
shall conform to the provisions of applicable Indian Standards and temperature classification
specified in the motor data sheet.
The heater leads shall be brought out, preferably, to a separate terminal box which shall be of
the same specification and grade of protection as the main terminal box.
A warning label with indelible red inscription shall be provided on the motor to indicate that the
heater supply shall be isolated before carrying out any work on the motor.
7.2 Name Plates
In addition to the motor rating plate, a separate number plate for motor tag number shall be
fixed in a readily visible position. This number shall be as per the motor data sheets.
8.0 CRITICAL SPEEDS
The first actual critical speed of stiff rotors shall not be lower than 120 % of the synchronous
speed. For flexible rotors this shall be between 60 % and 80 % of the synchronous speed; the
second actual critical speed shall be above 120 % of the synchronous speed.
9.0 PAINTING
A11 metal surfaces shall undergo manufacturer's standard cleaning /painting cycle. After
preparation of the under surface, the equipment shall be painted with two coats of epoxy based
final paint. Color shade of final paint shall be 632 of IS: 5/ RAL-7035. All unpainted steel parts
shall be suitably treated to prevent rust formation. If these parts are moving elements, then these
shall be greased.
Page 3293 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
f laZ5 la INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Govt o7 Indo Undertaking) ENERGY EFFIC1ENT MEDIUM
10.1 All tests shall be carried out at manufacturer's shop under his care and expense.
10.2 The manufacturer shall submit all internal test records of the tests carried out by him on the
bought-out items, motor sub-assembly and complete motor assembly.
10.3 The manufacturer shall carry out the following routine and acceptance tests as per applicable
Standards/ITP on all the motors.
a) Visual check (Nameplate, terminal box location, terminal type, clearance, size, entries,
space adequacy & gland size, direction of rotation etc.)
b) Dimension check (shaft height etc.)
c) Cable glands, cable lugs size and no. of entries in terminal box.
d) Winding resistance
e) No load test & measurement of voltage, speed, current, power input
f) Measurement of starting torque, starting current, full load torque, breakdown torque
g) Reduced voltage starting & running
h) Insulation resistance before and after high voltage test
i) High voltage
i) Vibration
10.4 The manufacturer shall submit the following type test certificates (one sample from each
type/rating):
a) Full load test & measurement of voltage, current, power slip, power factor, bearing,
noise
b) Efficiency & pf at 100%, 75% and 50% load
c) Temperature rise test
d) Momentary overload test
e) Vibration
f) Noise Level
g) Over speed
h) Measurement of starting torque, starting current, full load torque.
10.5 For VFD fed motors, all tests as specified in the VFD specification shall be followed in addition
to the above.
11.0 CERTIFICATION
The motors and associated equipment shall have test certificates issued by recognised
independent test house (CIMFR/ CPRI/ ERTL/ BASEEFA/ LCIE/ UL/ FM/ KLPL or
equivalent). All indigenous motors shall conform to Indian standards and shall be certified by
recognised testing agencies. A11 motors (indigenous & imported) shall also have valid statutory
approvals (e.g. PESO, DGMS etc). as applicable for the specified location. All indigenous
fiameproof motors shall have valid BIS license and marking as required by statutory authorities.
A11 the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of handling
during transportation. The equipment shall be properly packed for transportation by ship/rail or
trailer. The equipment shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before being placed in crates/cases
to prevent damage to the finish. Crates/cases shall have skid bottom for handling. Special
notations such as `Fragile', `This nide up', `Center of gravity', Weighe, Òwner's particulars',
`PO Nos.' etc. shall be clearly marked on the package together with other details as per purchase
order.
Page 3294 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
fg".2x w INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0064 Rev. 1
13~1)
elvOrt'4, (A Govt ot InOla Undertahmg) ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The packing shall
be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains/high ambient temperature,
unless otherwise agreed.
Page 3295 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR 6-51-0072 Rev. 5
Ogg
tififi
li ft INDIA LIMITED
I 44T-e1 erreZ1312 t751,1-05111 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
PLANT COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM Page 1 of 10
• • •
k.V-1,1 -1-1R 31Tir-01'
* rCil facer
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PLANT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD \I

Ltal
5 01 03 19 VB RS BRB RKT
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD
4 02 07 14 RS PG BRB SC
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VC
3 25 02 09 SV PG JMS
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD
2 12 03 03 RCS AAN VPS SKG
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD AS
1 05 05 97 NS VPS SG
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 3296 of 3884

Z..11
- el ENGINEERS FOR
tiliteg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0072 Rev. 5
retreat eitetereadJrietrer Govt of India (Undertaking) PLANT COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
AC Alternating Current IP
Ingress Protection
SEEFA IP based Internet Protocol based
British Approvals Service
for Electrical Equipment for
Flammable Atmospheres
BIS Bureau of Indian Standards TTU-R International
Telecommunication Union-
Radio
BS ITU-T International
British Standard
Telecommunication Union-
Telecommunication
CCITR LAN Local Area Network
Consultative Committee of
International Telephony &
Radio Communication
CCITT Consultative Committee of LCD Liquid Crystal Display
International Telephony &
Telegraphy
CEA Central Electricity Authority LCIE Laboratoire Central des
Industries Electriques
CIMFR Central Institute of Mines and LED Light Emitting Diode
Fuel Research
db Decibel MCS Master Control Station
DGMS Director General of Mines NEMA National Electrical
Safety Manufacturers Association
EIL Engineers India Limited PC
Personal Computer
EPABX Electronic Private Automatic PESO Petroleum & Explosives
Branch Exchange Safety Organization
FCS SAT Site Acceptance Test
Field Call Station
FM Factory Mutual Research UL Underwriters Laboratories
Corporation
GUI Graphical User Interface
rEc International Electrotechnical UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
Commission
VDE Verband Deutscher
Institute of Electrical and
IEEE Elecktrotechniker
Electronics Engineers


Mr. Parag Gupta
Ms N.S Bhattacharya
Mr. M.K. Sahu
Ms. N P Guha (Projects)

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0
Page 3297 of 3884

(31fazitil ENGINEERS FOR
fatife'gW INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0072 Rev. 5
RINTI 12¢151V,
1,
13705.11 IA Govt of lode Undertalong) PLANT COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
4.0 S11E CONDITIONS 4
5.0 AREA CLASSIFICATION 5
6.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 5
7.0 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS 8
9.0 APPROVAL CERTIFICATES 10
10.0 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING 10
11.0 TRAINING 10
Page 3298 of 3884

0 ei ENGINEERS FOR
$ge:11lif l
i-
1.1,e1 2.12ERIV 4513PCIMI to Govt of inde Undertaking) PLANT COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM Page 4 of 10
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The intent of this specification is to define the functional and design requirements for an
independent communication system meant for communication between various process
units and offsite areas of an industrial plant and its central control room. This specification
covers the requirements for selection, design, engineering, manufacture, testing at
manufacturer's works/ site and commissioning of the system.
2.1 - The equipment shall comply with the requirements of latest revision of ITU-T and ITU-R
(CCITT and CCITR) and relevant BIS and other Indian/ International standards as
applicable.
2.2 In case of imported equipments, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if
these standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable Indian standards.
2.3 The equipment shall also conform to the provisions of CEA regulations and other statutory
2.4 In case Indian standards are not available for any equipment, standards issued by
IEC/BS/VDE/IEEE/NEMA or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
2.5 In case of any contradiction between various referred standards/specifications/data sheet
and statutory regulations, the most stringent requirement shall govern and decision of
owner/EIL in this regard shall be final & binding.
3.1 The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of art technology and proven field
offered equipment at least for 10 years from the date of supply.
phasing out the product/spares to enable the end user for placement of order for spares and
services.
3.4 The vendor shall be responsible for design, engineering and manufacturing of the complete
system to fully meet the intent and requirement of this specification and attached
datasheets.
4.0 SITE CONDITIONS
4.1 All the equipments shall be suitable for the site conditions specified in the enquiry
document/ data sheets If not specifically mentioned therein, a design ambient of 40 deg C
and an altitude not exceeding 1000m above mean sea level, shall be considered.
4.2 The UPS power supply shall be made available by the purchaser at one point at the central
exchange / distributed intelligent nodes. Further distribution shall be in the vendor's scope
Unless otherwise specified, the equipment/ system shall be designed for the following
input power supply conditions
a) Supply voltage 240 / 110V A.0 ±6%, 1-phase (field selectable)
b) Supply frequency • 50 Hz ± 3%
Page 3299 of 3884

drae_ieq
tei- ENGINEERS FOR
*igeg tapeg
.enewvorem NOW
INDIA UMTED
IA Govt of tnclot Unclottatongt PLANT COMMUNICATION
6-51-0072 Rev. 5
SYSTEM Page 5 of 10
5.1 The equipments shall be suitable for installation in safe, non-hazardous area or hazardous
area as specified in the enquiry documents.
In general the central exchange / intelligent nodes, master call stations, desktop call stations
etc., shall be located in non-hazardous safe area. However, the field call stations, paging
loudspeakers, flashing beacons etc., may be installed in safe area or hazardous area as
specified in the enquiry document/ data sheets. The equipment for hazardous area shall be
suitable for installation in areas classified as zone-1 and/or zone-2, with gas group IIB
and/or IIC as specified in the material requisition/ data sheet/ bid package.
5.2 The equipment located in hazardous area shall have test certificates issued by recognized
independent test house (CIMFR/BASEEFA/LCIE/UL/FM or equivalent). All indigenous
equipment shall conform to Indian standards and shall be certified by Indian testing
agencies. All equipment (indigenous & imported) intended for installation in hazardous
area shall also have valid statutory approvals (e.g. PESO, DGMS etc.) as applicable for the
specified location. All indigenous flameproof equipment shall have valid BIS license and
marking as required by statutory authorities.
6.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
6.1 The system shall comprise one or more microprocessor based central exchange(s) and /or
decentralized distributed network with intelligent nodes consisting of system control
hardware, one or more master control station(s) located in control room(s) as applicable,
field call stations, paging loud speakers, flashing beacon etc.
Alternatively, the exchange based on IP technology and with highly reliable
communication system is also acceptable provided vendor has successful proven track
record (PTR) for the same.
6.2 Central Exchange/ Distributed Intelligent nodes
6.2.1 The Central Exchange and distributed intelligent nodes shall control the devices connected
to them. The central exchange may be provided for distributed intelligent network system if
required. The failure of none of the components in central exchange/intelligent nodes shall
cause a complete system shutdown. In case of communication failure between distributed
intelligent nodes, each intelligent node shall operate in standalone mode controlling devices
connected to them with all functionalities.
6.2.2 The central exchange/intelligent nodes shall be intelligent microprocessor controlled freely
programmable type. Alternatively, the exchange based on IP technology and being highly
reliable communication system can also be considered subject to vendor having successful
proven track record (PTR) for the same. Programming shall be by means of user-friendly
menu driven software. The cabinets shall be single front type, fabricated out of minimum
1.5 mm thick sheet steel, naturally ventilated, dust and vermin proof with IP-41 enclosure
as a minimum. The panels shall be with swing out/fixed assembly of plug-in-card rack. The
system shall be distributed amplifier type with power supply only at the cabinets. It shall be
possible to locate faults by monitoring from the cabinets.
6.2.3 The central exchange/ intelligent nodes for Digital and IP based Plant Communication
System shall have redundant processor boards or switches for control of the system. The
server/ exchanges / nodes shall be connected to distributed Ethernet switches. Each node
will have its own processor controlling its digital and IP ports. In an event of a failure of
one node/ Ethernet switch, rest of the nodes/ Ethernet switches shall be operational on their
own. The exchange/intelligent nodes/ Ethernet switches shall have a completely non-
blocking type switching system and associated circuitry for call recognition and
acknowledgement. The speech diagram and other features, such as all call, group call,
Page 3300 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
ligar Raft W'
} INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0072 Rev. 5
I .112,, R-0712
anJvmAi PLANT COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM Page 6 of 10
alarm call, priority call, conferencing etc., shall be resident in the processor module as a
software program which shall be re-programmable at site using laptop PCs and/or remote
PC connected via LAN with user friendly menu structure Distinct Push buttons shall be
provided for various tones and their re-setting.
6.2.4 The exchange/intelligent nodes/ ethernet switches shall house call station modules/
interface module/ provision for software, each of which shall be able to control multiple
call stations, and their corresponding power amplifiers.
6.2.5 The exchange/intelligent nodes/ ethernet switches shall house connection modules/interface
module/ provision for software, each of which shall be able to switch a multiple of audio-
frequency channels/connections.
6.2.6 The exchange/intelligent nodes/ ethernet switches shall also house all-call module/interface
module/ provision for software, alarm tone generator module, timer switch module etc.
6 2.7 The offered system shall be flexible and modular in construction with the possibility of
expanding to a bigger system in the future. The construction of the panel shall be designed
to allow for at least 10% expansion for future additions without involving any major
modifications in the system. The exchange/intelligent nodes shall be fully wired for
connecting the future field call stations shown in the speech diagram.
6.2.8 The central exchange / distributed intelligent nodes shall have built-in fault diagnostic unit
using test and monitoring modules. It shall be possible to locate faults by visual signaling/
LED displays and monitoring by means of test plugs from the cabinet Detailed fault
diagnosis should be possible with the help of Laptop PC and/or remote PC connected via
user LAN. All hardware necessary for fault isolation and troubleshooting shall be supplied
as a part of the cabinet.
6.2.9 It shall be possible to program / re-program the central exchange / distributed intelligent
nodes through external lap-top PC and/or remote PC connected via LAN, using text editor,
via RS 232, Ethernet port or other suitable interface. This shall enable the user to carry out
the following operations without any additional software.
a) Creation of speech communication diagrams.
b) Alteration of existing speech communication diagrams by means of programming
without any hardware alterations.
c) Alteration of existing speech communication diagrams parallel to the functional
process and without interrupting the system
d) Alteration of priorities, addition of audio-frequency lines/ channels, redefinition of
communication path/links.
6 2.10 The laptop PC and/or remote PC connected via user LAN when interfaced shall be able to
down load software or system information for editing/ report generation
6.2.11 For IP based system, following shall be considered:

- Monitoring of all the devices used in System to have GUI based Monitoring feature so
that immediate action can be taken to restore the faulty portion of the system.
- Geographical Redundancy of the Controller/Server should be provided which will
ensure 100% switch-over from Primary to Backup.
6.3 Master Control Station
Master Control Station(s) shall be desktop mounted type/flush mounted in console, as

specified in the material requisition and shall consist of a goose-neck type microphone, 1
watt (minimum) loud speaker, necessary control keys and indication lamps to meet the
operational requirements. Alternately the master control station shall have full keypad
Page 3301 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
2el]
t.„, taResotecortanatrostit
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undettalongt PLANT COMMUNICATION
6-51-0072 Rev. 5
SYSTEM Page 7 of 10
along with different function keys for making calls to different call stations by means of
single-digit/ multi-digit dialing. The keypad along with the function keys shall also be used
for invoking different features like paging, all call, group call, alarm tone etc. The master
control station shall have LCD display for alphanumeric user-friendly message during call
initiation, call recognition, alarms etc. All these messages shall be programmable by means
of user-friendly menu driven software. Wherein separate key is provided per function, LED
for indicating caller may be provided instead of LCD Display. The master control station
shall have a communication interface with the central exchange / distributed intelligent
nodes.
6.4 Field Call Station

Field call stations shall consist of wall / desktop mounted type communication units
6.4.1 Field call stations (Hazardous and Safe area) shall be complete with mouthpiece /
microphone, 1 watt (minimum) built-in loudspeaker & amplifier and necessary keys &
LED indicators to meet the operational requirements. Field call station shall also house 25
watts booster amplifier for external paging loudspeaker connected to field call station as
required For lP based field call stations in hazardous area, 25W booster amplifier shall be
located in safe area (SRR/ Control Room/ Substation, etc) in case the same cannot be
located as part of field call station. Along with intrinsically safe FCS, a separate flameproof
junction box shall be provided for providing communication signal to FCS and power
supply to loudspeaker & flashing beacon, if provided. No separate cabling from booster
amplifier to field call station loudspeaker shall be acceptable. Standard cabling philosophy
using paired cables as per MR shall be used.
The field call stations shall be weatherproof, with 1P-65 (Ingress Protection), as a
minimum. Microphones of wall/pedestal mounting type field call stations shall be provided
with protection grid. Field call stations to be installed in hazardous area, if specified in the
material requisition, shall have required statutory approval e.g. PESO as applicable for
installation in Zone-1 hazardous area specified.
All outdoor equipment, such as field call stations, shall be provided with additional canopy
for protection against direct rain.
The cable from the field station to the central exchange shall be monitored. In case of any
failure this will be reported to a pre-designated Master and/or stations. Alternatively,
device monitoring through LED indication/ LCD display at Master Call Station/ Central
Exchange is also acceptable.
6.4 2 Desktop mounted call stations shall be suitable for indoor location and shall be provided
with luminous push button key strips, a gooseneck microphone, a 1-watt (minimum) loud
speaker & built-in amplifier.
6.4.3 Desk top/field call stations shall have necessary keys as specified in the material
requisition/ datasheet/ bid package. Alternatively the desk top/field call stations (Hazardous
and Safe area) shall have full keypad along with function keys for making calls to any other
stations by means of single/multi-digit dialing. The desktop call station shall have LCD
display for alphanumeric user-friendly message during call initiation, call recognition etc
All these messages shall be programmable by means of user-friendly menu driven
software LED for Caller identification may be provided instead of LCD display in desktop
call station
6.4 4 Controls for microphone sensitivity and volume shall be provided and shall be easily
accessible after opening the call station cover.
6 4.5 Field call stations in high noise areas, as specified in the material requisition/ data sheets,
shall be provided with noise absorbing acoustic hoods to enable normal communication
Page 3302 of 3884

ei ,@ ENGINEERS FOR
Oge..ii Of51-
lavtpt, cotton,' Am J‘10.7.1, IA Govt of India Undertaking) PLANT COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM Page 8 of 10
with the background noise and separate flashing beacons. Ambient noise level in such
cases shall be considered as 85 db (A), unless otherwise specified in the material
requisition/ data sheet/ bid package.
6.5 Paging Loudspeakers
6.5.1 The flame proof paging loudspeaker & weather proof paging loudspeaker shall generate
minimum 119 db (A) and 124 db (A) output respectively at 1 meter distance. The
loudspeaker shall have suitable bracket for mounting on wall / steel structure and it shall be
possible to orient the loud speaker in any direction. Suitable tapping shall be provided to
select the output of 12 or 25 watts. Muting device shall be provided in the concerned
amplifiers where required. The loudspeakers for hazardous areas shall be flame proof type
with suitable enclosure. The degree of ingress Protection shall be 1P-65 (minimum) for
flame proof and weather proof loudspeakers.
6.5 2 The paging loudspeakers in indoor building areas shall be box type of 6 watt (minimum)
output, if specified in Material Requisition/Data sheets/ Bid package.
6.6 Flashing Beacons
Flashing beacon shall be provided for noisy areas to visually indicate incoming calls at
field call station. The flashing beacon shall start to flash as soon as field call station
receives a call. The signaling shall stop as soon as incoming call has been accepted or the
pre programmed time has elapsed. The flashing beacon for hazardous areas shall be flame
proof type with suitable enclosure. The degree of ingress Protection shall be IP-65
(minimum) for flame proof and weather proof beacons. Flashing Beacon shall be equipped
with sturdy metal housing and impact proof/ protected lens according to degree of
protection.
6.7 Power Supply System
Single phase AC UPS power supply having battery back up shall be provided at the central
exchange / distributed intelligent nodes for the entire plant communication system. The
central exchange/intelligent nodes shall be complete with rectifier, components and
switching devices for distributing power supply.
Power supply shall have display module to show the parameters like voltage, current and
faults. Any failure of power supply shall be reported to MCS.
The power supply modules shall be provided in N+1 configuration for addressing the
redundancy requirements.
6.8 Any other equipment / module required for the safe and satisfactory operation, control,
protection, monitoring, testing and maintenance of the system shall be included in vendor
scope of supply, even if not specifically mentioned herein.
6.9 All the equipment shall be supplied complete with copper lugs and Nickel-plated brass
cable glands suitable for type and size of cables recommended by the vendor and for the
hazardous area classification as per material requisition
7.0 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
7.1 The plant communication system shall provide, as a minimum, the following paging and
communication facilities:
a) Paging(in voice mode) of the entire plant or a group of call stations over loudspeakers
from the master control station(s) located in the process control room(s).
b) Call back from any of the field call stations to the master control station(s)
Page 3303 of 3884

0 eiENGINEERS FOR
ig .11 215reg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0072 Rev. 5
IA Govt of Inca Undertaking) PLANT COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM Page 9 of 10
c) Communication between master call stations.

d) Initiation of call from any of the field calls stations to master control station(s).
e) Communication between any two pre-defined field call stations without interference
of the operator manning the master control station(s) i.e. any field call station can talk
to any of the other field call stations by dialing single/multi-digit buttons of respective
field call station without the help of the operator.
f) Communication between any two-field call stations only at the discretion of the master
call station, except for call stations with a dedicated speech path as per speech
diagram.
g) Conference call between multiple field call stations at the discretion of the master call
station.
h) Operating an Alarm call from master control station(s) over all the loudspeakers
during an emergency. (An alarm tone generator with 5 tones shall be included for this
purpose).
i) Communication between different exchanges, if provided, within the plant.
j) Monitoring the health of the system.
k) Muting facility for silencing the loudspeaker connected to the booster amplifier
I) Field programming facility for flexible speech diagram at site.
m) Any other requirement specified in the data sheets.
7.2 While paging or talking from any communication station, whether master control station or
field call station, the loudspeaker associated with the talking station shall be muted
automatically.
7.3 Where more than one master control station has been specified, priority communication
between the master control stations shall be possible Provision shall be made to page all
the field call stations from any of the master control stations. Also communication from
predefined field call station to multiple Master call stations shall be possible.
7.4 Plant communication system shall be compatible for interfacing with owner's telephone
exchange (EPABX) for providing access to paging system through preselected telephone
sets and also for announcing emergency conditions through pre-defined tones.
7.5 Plant communication system shall be compatible for interfacing with owner's Fire alarm
system through potential free contacts for automatic & manual generation of alarm tones
and announcements over all loudspeakers or group of loudspeakers.
7.6 The central exchange/intelligent nodes shall have digital audio recorder soft module which
shall be capable of automatic & manual relaying of pre recorded announcement/messages
and recording of announcement/messages. Further if specified in the material requisition/
data sheet/ bid package, facilities and software shall be provided in the central
exchange/intelligent nodes for recording conversations among MCS, FCS etc.
77 A network of systems shall be either by using an IP network or a paired control cable/fiber
optical interconnection among the systems. In order to ensure the network reliability all
network related hardware (Ethernet Switches, media converters, LAN Extenders and
network power supplies) shall be Managed type.
8.1 During fabrication, panel shall be subject to inspection by EIL / Owner or by an agency
authorized by the Owner, to assess the progress of work The manufacturer shall furnish all
necessary information concerning the supply to EIL / Owner's representative. ELL /
Owner's representative shall be given free access in the manufacturer's works form time to
time to inspect the progress of the work. Three weeks' notice shall be given by the vendor
to Em / Owner for witnessing the final routine tests of complete assembly to ensure
satisfactory working of all components.
Page 3304 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
Ogar fe&-g INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0072 Rev. 5
laile-derearre =Judo. IA Goof of Infra Undertaking) PLANT COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM Page 10 of 10
8.2 All routine tests as specified by the applicable codes and standards shall be carried out at
the manufacturer's work under his care and expense.
8.3 All equipment shall be type tested as per relevant standards. Type test certificates, from a
recognized testing organization and Type test certificates for hazardous area equipment
shall be furnished as per vendor data requirement attached with material requisition/ bid
package.
8.4 Panels shall be tested for functional adequacy, at manufacturer's works by simulation of
speech diagram. Minimum testing shall be as per the standards prevalent in the country of
origin.
8.5 If specified in the enquiry document/data sheets, vendor shall conduct tests at site, after the
entire plant communication system is installed and interconnected by cables. These tests
shall establish the operational correctness of the system. The SAT procedure shall be
submitted and got approved from owner well in advance.
9.0 APPROVAL CERTIFICATES
The manufacturer shall furnish type test certificates and applicable approval certificates
from certifying authorities. Test certificate for bought out equipment shall be shown to
inspection agency on demand.
10.0 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

Where installation of the system is included in the scope of the vendor, vendor shall
arrange all necessary manpower and equipment required for the same. Commissioning of
the complete system is to be carried out by vendor in all cases irrespective of whether the
installation is performed by vendor or not. All tools, test equipment etc. for the successful
commissioning of the system shall be arranged by the vendor.
11.0 TRAINING
The vendor shall provide comprehensive training on various operation and maintenance
aspects at the manufacturer's works as agreed during ordering.
The vendor shall also provide training on various operation and maintenance aspects to
owner's engineers at site.
12.1 All the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of handling
transportation i.e. by ship/rail or trailer. The panels shall be wrapped in polythene sheets
before being placed in crates to prevent damage to finish. Crates shall have skid bottom for
handling. Special notations such as 'Fragile', 'This side up', Center of gravity', 'Weight',
Owner's particulars, Purchase order number etc , shall be clearly marked on the package
together with other details as per Purchase order.
12.2 The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The packing
shall be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains/high ambient
temperature. In order to prevent movement of equipment within the crates, proper packing
supports shall be provided. A set of instruction manuals for erection, testing and
commissioning, a set of operation & maintenance manuals and a set of final drawing shall
be enclosed in a waterproof cover and supplied along with the shipment.
Page 3305 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
faffi-6 INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0076 Rev. 5
1.1771,i2ON, 451,1sa-1, (A Govi of Indo Undertakm)
FIRE DETECTION AND
ALARM SYSTEM Page 1 of 26
31-F-9 (iJA
~aia1-11 varr Fri
'trrcr9-r
SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIRE DETECTION
AND
ALARM SYSTEM
154'1/41
1‘‘
5 24.09.2014 REVISED & ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION S\41
4 14.05.2009 REVISED & ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION MKS AKS JMS ND
3 24.12.2003 REVISED & ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION AKS/RCS AAN VPS SKG

2 24.04.1997 NS VPS SG ASONI
SPECIFICATION
1 12.03.1991 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RR VPS SG
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 3306 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
1if612-eg
NT7R c731,1,7■ M)
INDIA LIMITED
in Govl of India Undeftak.q, FIRE DETECTION AND
6-51-0076 Rev. 5
Abbreviations
IS Indian Standard
BIS Bureau of Indian Standards ITU-T International
BASEEFA British Approvals Service for Telecommunication
Electrical Equipment in Union- (Telecom)
Flammable Atmosphere LCD Liquid Crystal Display
BGU Break glass unit LED Light Emitting Diode
CCE Chief Controller of Explosives LPC Loss Prevention Council
CFAP Central Fire Alarm Panel LIFO Last In First Out
CIMFK Central Institute of Mines and MCP Manual call point
Fuel Research (formerly MR Material Requisition
known as CMRI) Ni-Cd Nickel Cadmium (battery)
CPU Central Processing Unit NFPA National Fire Protection
CRCA Cold Rolled Cold Annealed Association
DGFAP Data Gathering cum Fire NEMA National Electrical
Alarm Panel Manufacturers Association
EEPROM Electrically Erasable PCB Printed Circuit Board
Programmable Read Only PESO Petroleum and Explosive
Memory safety organization
ERTL Electronic Regional Test PO Purchase Order
Laboratory RF Radio Frequency
FAT Factory Acceptance Tests SAT Site Acceptance Tests
FDD Floppy Disk Drive SOE Sequence Of Event
FM Factory Mutual SMF Sealed Maintenance Free
FRP Fibre Reinforced Plastic SPN Single phase and neutral
FO Fibre Optic TPN Three phase and neutral
GUI Graphic User Interface TAC Tariff Advisory Committee
HDD Hard Disk Drive UL Under Writers Laboratory
HMI Human Machine Interface UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
HVAC Heating Ventilation Air VRLA Valve Regulated Lead Acid
Conditioning (battery)
IEC International Electro-technical VdS Verband der Sachversicherer
Commission e.V.
IEEE Institute of Electrical and WP Weather Proof
Electronics Engineers ZFAP Zonal Fire Alarm Panel
ISDN Integrated Service Digital
Network

Mr. P. Gupta
Mr. M.K. Sahu
Mr. A.K. Chaudhary (Inspection)
Ms. N.P.Guha (Projects)
Page 3307 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
IND1A LIMITED 6-51-0076 Rev. 5
• INIP9 ,I,O,■11151,7,141501, IA Govt ot lnrha Undertaking) FIRE DETECTION AND
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
4.0 DEFINITIONS 5
5.0 SYSTEM AND SITE CONDITIONS 6
6.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 8
7.0 CONVENTIONAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 9
8.0 MICROPROCESSOR BASED FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 11
9.0 INTEGRATION WITH VARIOUS PLANT SYSTEMS 15
10.0 PANEL CONSTRUCTION (CFAP, DGFAP, ZFAP, REPEATER) 16
11.0 CABLE AND CABLE ACCESSORIES 17
12.0 AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTORS AND ACCESSORIES 18
13.0 FIELD DEVICES FOR HAZARDOUS AREA 23
14.0 ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS 24
17.0 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING 25
18.0 TRAINING 26
Page 3308 of 3884

, ■31 ENGINEERS FOR
$g-ar INDIA LIMITED
fA GoN of lndN UnciertakoN) FIRE DETECTION AND
6-51-0076 Rev. 5
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The intent of this specification is to define the functional and design requirements for an
Integrated Fire Alarm System for industrial plants and buildings. This specification covers the
requirements for selection, design and engineering, manufacture, testing at vendor's works,
supply and installation, testing at site and commissioning unless otherwise stated.
1.2 The Integrated Fire Alarm System shall be conventional or micro processor based analogue
addressable system comprising BGUs, detectors; conventional or microprocessor based Fire
Alarm panels and associated equipment detailed hereunder and in Project data sheets/
drawings.
2.1 The fire alarm system and the components used shall conform to the latest edition of the
following Codes/Standards, other relevant Indian Standards and International Standards as
applicable.
IS -5 Colours for ready Mixed Paint & Enamels.

IS — 513 Specification for cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips
IS — 1646 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (general): Electrical
Installations
IS — 2175 Specification for heat sensitive fire detectors for use in automatic fire
alarm system
IS — 2189 Code of practice for selection; installation and maintenance of automatic
fire detection and alarm system.
IS — 3034 Code of practice for fire safety of Industrial buildings: Electrical
generating and distributing stations.
IS — 5469 Code of practice for the use of semi-conductor junction devices
(Applicable parts)
IS — 12459 Code of practice for fire safety in cable runs
IS/IEC 60079-0 General requirements for electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmosphere
IS/IEC 60079-11 Specification for Intrinsically safe electrical apparatus and circuits
IS/IEC 61241-14 Electrical apparatus with protection of enclosure for use in the presence
of combustible dust
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm code
LPC Loss prevention council recommendations.
BS — 5839 Specifications for manual call points. Part — 2
BS-EN 50081-1/2 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility test)
BS-EN 50082-1/2 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility test)
2.2 Standards of country of origin shall be applicable if these standards are equivalent or more
stringent than the applicable Indian Standards in case of imported equipment.
2.3 Equipment shall also conform to the provisions of CEA regulations and other statutory
2.4 In case Indian standards are not available for any equipment, standards issued by
IEC/BS/VDE/IEEE/NEMA/UL/FM/VdS or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
Page 3309 of 3884

$blll , -i ENGINEERS FOR
Og-ar IM2- g
I èfiWY 2.12,W M1 .ffl.1 I
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Inda Undeftak,ogt FIRE DETECTION AND
6-51-0076 Rev. 5
2.5 In case of any contradiction between various referred standards/specifications/data sheet and
statutory regulations, the most stringent requirement shall govern and decision of owner in
this regard shall be final.
3.1 Offered equipment shall be brand new with established state of the art technology and having
proven field track record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
offered equipment for at least 10 years from the date of supply. The spares shall be available
ex-stock with the vendor.
phasing out the product/spares to enable the end user to place order for spares and services.
3.4 Vendor shall be responsible for design & engineering and manufacturing of the complete
system and equipment to fully meet the intent and requirements of this specification and
attached data sheets.
3.5 All equipment and accessories required for completeness of the system, whether specifically
mentioned or not but considered essential for satisfactory performance, shall be included by
the vendor as part of the offered system.
3.6 The system integrator shall coordinate with the manufacturers of various bought-out items
associated with the system as required, and shall freely and readily supply all technical
information as and when asked for.
3.7 All equipment required to be located in hazardous areas shall have test certificates issued by
recognized independent test house such as CIMFR, ERTL, BASEEFA, UL, FM or equivalent.
Indigenous equipment shall conform to Indian standards and shall be certified by Indian
testing agencies. Equipment (indigenous & imported) shall also have valid statutory approvals
e.g. PESO, DGMS as applicable for the specified location. Indigenous flameproof equipment
shall also have valid BIS license and marking as required by statutory authority.
4.0 DEFINITIONS
4.1 CFAP
It is the main or central fire alarm panel located in fire station or in disaster management
control room, which receives inputs from automatic and manual Fire alarm devices and
supplies power to detection and notification devices along with sub-systems where applicable.
CFAP provides interface with telephone exchange, plant' s public address system etc. and has
features, such as provision to activate plant-wide sirens. CFAP is supported by mimic/
graphical display for geographical depiction of alarms either on panel or HMI.
4.2 DGFAP
It is a Microprocessor based fire alarm panel, designed for use with addressable fire alarm
system. It has alphanumeric LCD displays along with LED displays for fire/ fault
conditions. It also includes loop cards (for field devices), I/O (input/ output) cards for
interface with other equipment e.g. exit signs and hooters. It functions as fire alarm panel
located centrally to population of fire detectors distributed over an area for optimizing and
limiting the loop lengths.
Page 3310 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
$1gzu fd2-
(A GoN ol india Underla(fing) FIRE DETECTION AND
4.3 ZFAP
It is a fire alarm panel for conventional fire alarm system. This is functionality similar to
what is provided for DGFAP. This has LEDs for fire/ fault annunciations.
4.4 Repeater Panel
It is similar to distributed fire alarm panels (DGFAP/ ZFAP) but will not have Zone card/
Loop card for field devices. These are provided at manned locations and are configured to
acquire information about the fire/ fault of selected zones from DGFAP/ ZFAP and
annunciate.
4.5 Integrated Fire Alarm System
It signifies a comprehensive fire alarm system comprising all the distributed fire alarm panels
(DGFAP, ZFAP, repeater panels etc) having integration with CFAP for fire/ fault monitoring
of total plant/ buildings. It provides audio/ visual alarm building/plant-wide having provisions
for connectivity with telephone exchange and public address system. It shall provide
interfaces with fire protection system and other systems like pressurization systems, air
conditioning, clean agent system, water spray system, Fire & Gas detection system etc. via
potential free contacts.
4.6 System Architecture
System architecture is line diagram defining the connectivity of DGFAPs, repeater and
CFAP. This also specifies various system requirements such as redundancy, communication
protocol, communication hardware, cable requirement, work station and programming tools.
4.7 Data High Way
This term is meant to define the communication path between DGFAPs, CFAP and other
network components in microprocessor based fire alarm system. Physical media for Data
highway can be FO cable or twisted pair copper conductor, screened cable.
4.8 Field Devices
Devices such as detectors, BGUs, exit Signs, hooters, siren etc. are termed as field devices.
4.9 Hazardous Area
An area in which an explosive gas/ dust atmosphere is present, or likely to be present in
quantities such as to require special protection for the construction, installation and use of
electrical apparatus.
4.10 Signal Loop (Signaling Circuit)/Signaling Line Circuit
A circuit or path between any combination of circuit interfaces, control units, or transmitters
over which multiple system input signals or output signals, or both are carried.
4.11 Notification Appliance Circuit
A circuit or path directly connected to notification appliances (eg. Bell, horn, speaker, strobe,
printer etc.)
4.12 Zone
A defined area within protected premises. A zone may define an area from which a signal
can be received, an area to which a signal can be sent or an area in which a form of control
can be executed.
5.0 SYSTEM AND SITE CONDITIONS

A11 equipment shall be designed to operate with power supply and site conditions as specified
below:
5.1 Site Conditions

The offered equipment shall be capable of operating continuously and maintaining its
guaranteed performance at the site ambient conditions indicated in data sheet.
Page 3311 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
IA Govt ol Indra Undertatong) FIRE DETECTION AND
Unless specified otherwise, fire alarm panels along with associated hardware shall be suitable
for installation and operation in a closed building/ room with restricted ventilation. Unless
otherwise defined, a design ambient temperature of 40°C and an altitude not exceeding
1000M above mean sea Level shall be considered for all equipment. For battery sizing,
minimum ambient temperature shall be considered as 10°C.
5.2 Input Power Supply
5.2.1 Primary power supply will be provided by Owner at 240V, 50Hz, SPN at one point to each
Fire Alarm Panel. Suitable power distribution to various signaling and notification devices
shall be included in the vendor' s scope. For microprocessor based system, 240V, 50Hz, SPN
power supply to remotely located Repeater panel and sub-system, if any, shall be provided by
the Owner on the basis of actual system configuration and requirements. For conventional
Fire Alarm system, power supply to ZFAP, repeater panel and remotely located strobe etc.
shall be planned and provided by the vendor.
5.2.2 For siren, power supply shall be made available by Owner preferably at 110/230V AC supply.
5.2.3 Unless otherwise specified, secondary power supply for fire alarm panels shall be through
battery provided by the vendor. This shall have sufficient capacity to operate the fire alarm
system under quiescent load (system operating in a non-alarm condition) i.e. to operate a local
central station or proprietary Fire alarm system for a minimum of 24 hours. At the end of that
period, this shall be capable of operating all alarm notification devices used for evacuation
and to direct aid to the location of emergency for 5 minutes.
The secondary power supply for in-building fire emergency voice/alarm communication
service shall be capable of operating the system under quiescent load for a minimum of 24
hours and then be capable of operating the system during a fire and other emergency
conditions for 15 minutes at maximum connected load.
The secondary power supply capacity required shall include all power supply loads that are
not automatically disconnected upon the transfer to secondary power supply.
Battery sizing shall consider the maximum quantity of detector/equipment that can be
connected in the loops, as well as 5 hooters and 5 exit signs per loop in DGFAP. Battery
sizing calculations shall be reviewed during detailed engineering and there shall be no
cost/time implication for providing adequately sized batteries and chargers of approved rating
during the order execution. Separate battery charger shall be provided incase battery charger
part of the DGFAP cannot cater to the boost charging requirement of battery.
An overall ageing factor of 0.8 and a temperature correction factor corresponding to

minimum temperature of 10°C shall be considered for battery sizing.The battery calculations
shall include a 10 percent safety margin to the calculated amp-hour rating.
Operation on secondary power shall not affect the required performance of a fire alarm
system or supervising station facility. The system shall produce the same alarm, supervisory
and trouble signals and indications.
Page 3312 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
ia2e5 INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0076 Rev. 5
IA Govl at Intlia Undertahngi FIRE DETECTION AND
The switch-over from primary source to secondary source, in the event of mains failure, shall
be automatic. Battery shall be Ni-Cd/VRLA/ SMF type as specified in the datasheet. Suitable
adequately rated battery charger shall be supplied as a part of secondary power source. Quick
charging of the battery from fully discharged state shall be attainable in 10-14 hours except
VRLA batteries, which shall follow the charging cycle according to supplier's
recommendations.
6.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
6.1 General
Fire alarm system, under this specification, is envisaged to provide fire monitoring in
industrial plants and buildings. The system shall be designed to detect incipient fires, smoky
fires and flaming fires and generate audio/ visual alarm on detection of smoke or fire.
The system shall consist of automatic fire detectors and break glass units. Automatic fire
detectors shall work on the principle of sensing of smoke, heat or infrared / ultraviolet rays.
Depending on type of smoke, optical or ionization type detectors shall be used. Detectors
shall generally be provided in plant/ buildings. BGUs shall be provided at exit doors of the
buildings, exit routes of industrial plants and along service roads surrounding protected areas.
Number of detectors and break glass units shall be decided as per guidelines given in
applicable codes and standards.
For conventional FA system, Plant/ building shall be divided into fire monitoring zones. In
defining zones, care shall be taken to ensure that location of fire can be easily identified. No
two buildings shall be combined to form one zone. Detectors and BGUs at these buildings
and plants shall be connected to CFAP, ZFAP. These panels shall continuously monitor the
state of these devices. On sensing fire condition, an audio/ visual alarm shall be initiated
identifying the zone where fire is detected. Panels shall continuously monitor the health of the
cabling and in case of short circuit or open circuit fault alarm shall be activated. Fire alarm
panels shall also have powered outputs for switching on exit signs and hooters as specified in
data sheet/ drawings. Further, panels shall provide required output for interfacing with the
Owner's systems such as air conditioning system or pressurization system or fire protection
systems.
Alarms, if specified, shall be relayed to repeater panel provided in buildings like control
rooms/ administrative buildings to provide zone wise annunciation. In addition facility shall
be provided to actuate siren/ hooter.
For integrated fire alarm system where plant-wide large numbers of fire alarm panels are
envisaged, these panels shall be integrated to CFAP, which shall be located in fire station,
disaster management control room or in administrative control room of the building as per the
job requirements. The connectivity shall be achieved using data high way or dedicated cable
connection from each fire alarm panel to CFAP. In conventional system Mimic at CFAP shall
be provided for fire/ fault annunciation depicting geographical location in addition to the text/
LED on the CFAP. This will be in the form of graphics available at HMI in microprocessor
based system. If defined, CFAP shall have provision for automatic and manual actuation of
plant-wide siren as per operator's choice. Interface with other systems such as telephone
exchange/ plant's public address system shall be provided for communication required for
disaster management.
6.2 Conventional / Addressable fire alarm systems
6.2.1 Fire alarm system shall be conventional fire alarm system or addressable microprocessor
based fire alarm system as specified in data sheet. Conventional fire alarm system shall have
Page 3313 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
$'Igz:1[015/kg INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0076 Rev. 5
It-oWt eKmrl ,151,7-4,
41) (A Govt ot Ind. UneettakIng) FIRE DETECTION AND
conventional field devices/ equipment and microprocessor based system shall have
addressable type field devices.
Conventional fire alarm system shall generally comprise but not be limited to the following
equipment used in conjunction with conventional automatic fire alarm detectors and BGUs as
a minimum.
• CFAP with/ without mimic (as per data sheet)

• ZFAPs
• Repeater Fire Alarm Panel
• Sirens and starters/Siren control panels
• Hooters & exit sign in buildings
• Interface with Owner' s systems
• Any other hardware as required to render system complete
6.2.2 Microprocessor based fire alarm system shall generally comprise but not be limited to the
following equipment used in conjunction with addressable automatic detectors and
addressable BGUs as a minimum.
• CFAP consisting of computer based graphic work station and engineering station.
• Multi loop DGFAPs
• Sirens and starters/siren control panels
• Hooters & exit sign
• Interface with Owner' s systems
• Data Highway
[Copper/ FO cable data highway complete with redundant architecture for
communication, hardware including communication port, switches, processor and power
supply.]
• Any other hardware/ Software required for rendering system complete.
6.2.3 As specified in data sheet, the system shall be provided with siren/s to be located at a suitable
location/s in the plant and it shall be actuated manually and automatically as selected by
operator from CFAP/ DGFAP located at fire station/ other buildings.
7.0 CONVENTIONAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
7.1 Design Features
7.1.1 System shall be modular and facilitate future extension / modification. Panel design and
component selections shall be done for future extension up to 10% of specified zones or one
zone whichever is maximum in each panel. 10% spare zone cards subject to minimum of 1
shall be provided. The design of common facility and hardware shall be provided for
required future extension of zones.
7.1.2 PCBs shall have watchdog feature for self-diagnostic. Each PCB shall have LED for
annunciating card failure. Following self-diagnostic features may be considered as minimum.
• Open circuit detection
• Short circuit detection
• Earth fault detection
• Power supply failure e.g. low battery voltage, main incoming supply fail
• System faults (PCB failure)
Page 3314 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
$`2Z[1214-
.1,-172M esi-t-T-r, GoN of rtmla Unde,taking) FIRE DETECTION AND
7.1.3 Logic of operation shall be built on "Fail safe" feature i.e. NC contact of field devices shall be
considered as healthy condition and NO as fire condition. 1 NO+ 1 NC contact of output
relays shall be wired to terminal block for interface with Owner' s other equipment.
7.1.4 It shall be possible to test lamps, hooters, flasher circuit, and carry out functional tests etc
through common "Test" push button.
7.1.5 The circuit shall be so designed that silencing of the current alarm by ACCEPT push button
shall not prevent annunciation of subsequent fire alarm received from any other location.
7.1.6 Signal-to noise ratio shall be high to avoid spurious actuation due to noise induced in the field
wiring because of proximity with power cables. Cables for field devices shall be multicore
copper conductor, unscreened, armoured, copper conductor FRLS cable. If required noise
filters shall be provided at fire alarm panel.
7.1.7 Detectors and BGUs shall be wired through 1.5 mm2 multi-core, Copper conductors, PVC
insulated, armoured FRLS cable. Limiting distance from fire alarm panel to last
detector/BGU shall not be less than 2 km or as specified in data sheet whichever is
maximum.
7.1.8 LEDs shall be provided for fire/ fault visual annunciation on the panel front. LED shall also
be provided for Power supply healthy, Battery backup ON, Battery/ Charger status.
7.1.9 If zone is protected with clean agent/ CO2 system, the detectors and BGUs of the zone shall be
wired in cross-zones by providing minimum two signaling circuits in a zone. The last device
in each circuit shall be provided with end of line resistor of suitable value as per circuit design
to facilitate cable open circuit and short circuit detection.
7.1.10 Scheme for FIRE/ FAULT annunciation for CFAP/DGFAP, Zonal Fire Alarm Panel, Repeat
Alarm Panel shall be as per the following.
System condition AUDIO VISUAL
NORMAL OFF OFF

FIRE ON (tone 1) Flasher ON, Fire LED Steady ON
Accept OFF Flasher steady, Fire LED steady ON
Reset OFF Flasher OFF, Fault LED OFF
FAULT ON (tone 2) Flasher OFF, Fault LED Steady ON
Accept OFF Flasher OFF, Fault LED Steady ON
Reset OFF Flasher OFF, Fault LED OFF
7.1.11 Fire alarm panels including repeater panels and CFAP shall be certified/ approved by
applicable approving agency of country of origin as required.
7.2 Zonal Fire Alarm Panel
7.2.1 ZFAP shall consist of number of zones as specified in data sheet. Detectors/ BGUs/ heat
sensing cables etc shall be connected zone wise in signaling circuits. It shall monitor fire/
fault condition of the zone. ZFAP shall be located indoor in safe area.
7.2.2 ZFAP shall be free-standing, floor mounting vertical panel consisting of audio/visual
annunciation with Alarm Accept, Test and Reset Push Buttons, Auto/Manual control of
hooters provided in buildings. Provision to actuate siren shall be provided if specified in data
sheet. Circuit shall be designed to provide annunciation if any detector in a zone senses fire.
7.2.3 Audio/ Visual indication and annunciation shall be as per clause 7.1.8.
Page 3315 of 3884

ENGINEEFZS FOR
Ogzrr Offl- g K1Sii,
Mvem ,frortmJ,
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl of Incha Underlakog) FIRE DETECTION AND
6-51-0076 Rev. 5
7.2.4 ZFAP shall have required interface hardware where integration with CFAP/ repeater panel is
envisaged as per data sheet.
7.2.5 Output contacts (1NO+1NC) shall be provided for interface with Owner' s systems as per
clause 9.0 of this specification.
7.2.6 Input power supply and battery backup for ZFAP shall be as per data sheet and as per clause
5.2 of this specification.
7.3 Repeat Alarm Panel-Conventional
7.3.1 Repeat fire alarm panel shall be provided for repetition of fire/fault annunciation of
CFAP/ZFAP. Depending on the size Repeat Fire Alarm panel may be floor mounting type or
wall mounting type. The display shall be similar to CFAP/ZFAP.
7.3.2 Where required, input power supply from Owner shall either be 240V or 110V, 1 phase,
50Hz. It shall be possible to select supply either 240V or 110V at site without modifying or
adding additional equipment in the panel.
7.4 Central Fire Alarm Panel
7.4.1 CFAP shall receive inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices and supply power to
detection, notification and communication devices. Fire and fault annunciation for each Zone
or group of zones at ZFAP shall be repeated at CFAP.
7.4.2 CFAP shall be in vertical panel construction or desk type construction as per datasheet having
controls such as Accept, Test and Reset Push Buttons, Auto/Manual control of siren etc.
7.4.3 Unless otherwise specified in the data sheet, CFAP shall have mimic to display geographical
location of fire. Mimic shall form an integral part of the CFAP and shall be located at the top
of the panel. When separate mimic panel is specified, it shall either be wall mounting or
freestanding floor mounted type. Two LEDs shall be provided for each zone on mimic panel
for display of fire alarm. Mimic panel shall be powered by CFAP. Mimic made out of plastic
stickers shall not be acceptable.
7.4.4 Input supply and battery backup for CFAP and MIMIC shall be as per data sheet and as per
clause 5.2 of this specification.
7.4.5 Battery charger provided in the CFAP/ ZFAP shall be modular mounted on a draw out
chassis. Charger module shall be located on the front allowing withdrawal with the help of
handle bars for maintenance.
8.0 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
8.1 Design Feature
8.1.1 Unless otherwise specified Microprocessor based FA system shall be analog addressable type.
The system shall be integrated as per `system architecture' indicated in data sheets/ drawings.
8.1.2 Fire alarm system shall be designed consistent with state of the art technology. A11 fire alarm
panels including repeater panel shall be networked through data high way. The system
supplied shall not pose any limitation for future expansion by way of networking of fire alarm
panels, data transfer, parameterization of addressable field devices, graphic displays etc.
8.1.3 The system shall be modular and shall facilitate future extension/ modification. Panel design
and component selections shall be done for future extension up to 10% of specified number of
loops or one loop whichever is maximum in each panel. The design of common facility and
hardware shall be provided for required future extension.
Page 3316 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
1:?-2:[[ 112-&g
NIV, 2,12 ■751,05.71
INDIA LIMITED
in GoN oi India lindettahmg) FIRE DETECTION AND
6-51-0076 Rev. 5
8.1.4 PCBs shall have watchdog feature for self-diagnostic. Each PCB shall have LED for
annunciating card failure. Following self-diagnostic features shall be considered as minimum
for the system.
i) Open loop detection
ii) Short circuit detection
iii) Earth fault detection
iv) Power supply failure e.g. low battery voltage, main incoming supply fail
v) System faults (PCB failure)
8.1.5 Unless specified otherwise in data sheet, system architecture shall have minimum redundancy
indicated below at DGFAP & CFAP, however not limited to the same.
i) Redundant at processor level (communication processor and I/O card processor)
ii) Redundant communication port
iii) Redundant data highway cable. (For data highway ring topology will be
preferred)
iv) Redundant microprocessor
v) Redundant work station/ HMI (engineering station+ operator' s station)
vi) Redundant power supply card at all fire alarm panels (but with non-redundant
battery backup)
8.1.6 Data highway shall be using Fibre optic or twisted pair shielded copper cable as specified in
data sheets. Whether specified or not, data highway shall include all necessary hardware such
as modem, repeaters, network switches/ hubs etc including power supply system as required
to suit the length of data highway.
8.1.7 The communication shall be peer to peer between various DGFAPs, repeater Panels, CFAP
and other system components connected on fire alarm system data highway.
8.1.8 Any fault in Analogue detector addressable loop (signaling loop/ circuit), notification
appliance circuit and data highway shall not impair communication, i.e. Communication/ flow
of analogue signal shall be possible from either end.
8.1.9 The loop cabling for wiring detectors and BGUs shall be class A, fault tolerant type as per
NFPA 72.
8.1.10 Fire alarm logic shall be programmable type. The logic for zone protected with clean agent
system/ CO2, shall be programmed to provide output for actuation after ensuring that there is
no false alarm using alarm verification feature. Similarly logic to switch ON sounders.
Beacon and hooters shall be programmable type. Exit sign shall remain ON all the time.
8.1.11 The logic shall be so programmed that it will ensure silencing of the current alarm by
ACCEPT push button & shall not prevent annunciation of subsequent fire alarm received
from any other location.
8.1.12 Signal-to noise ratio shall be high to avoid spurious actuation due to noise induced in the field
wiring because of proximity with power cables. Unless other wise specified, fire alarm cables
laid in buildings shall be twisted pair, screened and unarmoured and shall be laid in conduits
while cable laid outdoor in plant shall be twisted pair, screened and armoured. If required
noise filters shall be provided at fire alarm panel.
8.1.13 Unless specified otherwise in data sheet, the minimum number of detectors/ BGUs/
addressable devices in a signal loop shall be 120.
Page 3317 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
fgar 22e5
(~1 C1,7,1, 0,13,10.11
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertakingt FIRE DETECTION AND
6-51-0076 Rev. 5
8.1.14 Unless specified otherwise in data sheet, conductor size of loop cable shall be 1.5sqmm
copper. The allowable signal loop length shall not be less than 2 km.
8.1.15 DGFAP and repeater panel shall have backlit alphanumeric LCD display to provide addresses
and status of each field device. In addition LEDs shall be provided for fire/ fault visual
annunciation. LED shall also be provided for Power supply healthy, Battery backup ON,
Battery/ Charger status.
8.1.16 Fire station shall be provided with redundant PC(s) with monitors for operator's work
station and for engineering station. Any of the two should be possible to configure as
engineering station for programming off line. After Programming, the engineering station
will be connected to network as online operator's workstation. Programming shall also
allow activating Siren from the keyboard in manual mode as per operator's choice.
8.1.17 All field devices such as detectors and BGUs shall be addressable type. If available in
vendor' s design, hooters and exit signs may also be connected in addressable loop. Fault
isolators shall be provided to minimize outage of number of detectors/ BGUs in case of loop
cable fault. For hazardous area flame proof equipment shall be used. As far as possible, the
use of intrinsically safe field devices in hazardous area should be avoided. If unavoidable, due
care shall be taken care in design to avoid signal distortion and thus the mal-operation due to
cable capacitance and inductance.
8.1.18 System shall provide adequate EEPROM size to store minimum of 200 events fire/ fault. The
event shall be stored in LIFO structure. All events shall be time stamped. DGFAP shall have
real time clock for event time stamping.
8.1.19 Software access for either Zone programming or access to plant/ building graphic on monitor
shall be password protected. For viewing status of various field devices e.g. fire and fault
status password protection shall not be given.
8.1.20 All Fire alarm panels including repeater panels and CFAP shall be certifieci/ approved by an
international approving agency/ approving agency of country of origin as applicable.
8.2 Data Gathering Cum Fire Alarm Panel (DGFAP)
8.2.1 DGFAP shall have basic design features as per clause 8.1 above. Number of signal loops in
each DGFAP shall be as defined in the data sheet/ drawings/ MR. Number of loops shall be
basic part of main PCB and should not be extended by providing external electronic devices.
LCD display and annunciation scheme shall be as per clause 7.1.10.
8.2.2 It shall be possible to change the reference value of detector sensitivity either manually or
automatically as required during the operation to avoid false alarms prior to detector
maintenance.
8.2.3 DGFAP shall have serial port for communication to data highway. It should be possible to
communicate all the information to CFAP/ FA system work station located with fire marshal.
The protocol of communication shall preferably be open protocol.
8.2.4 In the event of non-availability of data highway, DGFAP shall work as stand alone intelligent
panel monitoring fire in the zones connected to it.
8.2.5 It shall be possible to configure DGFAP to access data of any other DGFAP and display as
per the operation requirement to be finalized during engineering/ commissioning.
Page 3318 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
rii 2W5 INDIA LIMITED
IA ol Indo Undertakmq) FIRE DETECTION AND
6-51-0076 Rev. 5
8.2.6 Where specified in MR/ data sheet, it shall be possible to interface with existing fire alarm
system consisting of conventional zone detectors and BGUs with end of line resistor as a part
of retrofitting.
8.2.7 DGFAPs shall have output relays to provide interface with Owner' s system defined in
clause 9.0 as minimum.
8.3 Repeat Alarm Panel
Repeat fire alarm panel shall be provided for repetition of fire/fault annunciation of
CFAP/DGFAP. Depending on the size repeat Fire Alarm panel may be floor mounting type or
wall mounting type. The display shall be similar to CFAP/ZFAP.
These panels shall be without loop cards and shall be connected to data highway through
serial communication. Panels shall have programming facility to inhibit the display of
information that is not required in a particular repeater panel.
8.4 CFAP with PC Based Monitoring Station or Work station
8.4.1 Vendor shall supply CFAP similar to DGFAP along with PC based work stations. Application
software shall be installed in PC as Graphic User Interface. The graphic shall include
geographical display of locations of various plant areas including locations of
addressable detectors and BGUs. The navigation between various graphic pages shall be user
friendly. Screen shall have defined area to display the latest fire or fault alarm and shall also
have facility to pop up the graphic displaying the location of fire event.
Where specifically indicated CFAP shall include network PC based monitoring station based
on vendor' s system design directly connected to data highway with other peripherals such as
network switches/ controller (HUB).
8.4.2 Unless stated otherwise, CFAP shall have all the features and facilities of the DGFAPs. It
shall monitor the status of each addressable field device indirectly from the DGFAPs
connected on data highway.
8.4.3 Engineering workstation shall be used for programming off-line. After programming, the
changed parameters shall be down loaded to other PC to work in synchronism as normal
operation. This station shall also have one laser printers connected to PCs working as
engineering printer.
8.4.4 The monitoring station/work station shall be equipped to display the overall plot plan showing
all MCPs along the unit roads. The display shall have three levels of penetration, which
permits zooming on to any process unit/area or any building. Further one may zoom into
specific rooms of the building and view the detectors below the false floor, above the false
ceiling or in the room cavity. The CFAP shall also display the location of fire/ fault when
such an event occurs.
8.4.5 Unless specified otherwise, adequately rated UPS with bypass shall be provided for the
workstations and printers of CFAP. Battery backup shall be sized as per criteria given under
5.2. Only normal supply shall be made available at one point by Owner at the location of
central fire alarm panel. Where both CFAP and PC based work stations are provided the
battery back up time for the UPS shall be 30 min. Battery back-up to CFAP shall be as per
clause 5.2.
8.4.6 It shall be possible to actuate plant-wide siren in auto/ manual mode. Unless other wise
specified, manual actuation shall be done from keyboard of workstation. Auto actuation shall
be through software logic, which shall be finalized with end user during implementation.
Page 3319 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
1. gz-JE INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0076 Rev. 5
~~~,~ )
M3.747.1 IA GoA o Unctertatong) FIRE DETECTION AND
Auto/Manual selection shall be provided at operator's work station. The actuation signal
under manual mode selection shall be communicated serially to DGFAP to which siren starter
is connected. Siren starters shall be hardwired to DGFAP.
8.4.7 The minimum requirements for the PC and other peripherals shall be as stated below:
* Industrial type Latest generation PC
* DVD-RW
* Mouse and keyboard
* 29 Inch coloured LED monitor
* Engineering laserjet coloured printer with 8 PPM
*Application software supporting graphics with no limitation on number of graphics, events,

alarms, number of field devices as required for any large plant like refinery, petrochemical
complex or large multistory building.
8.4.8 It shall be possible to provide multilevel access of fire alarm system. Read only access shall
not require password protection. Access for programming and access for controls from
keyboard shall be password protected. The levels of password protection shall be agreed with
plant operators at the time of commissioning of system.
8.4.9 Printer
Printer options shall include graphic laser printer. Printer used in the system shall provide real
time records of the system events and provide system reports on demand, and shall be
microprocessor controlled, high speed, read only (RO).
9.0 INTEGRATION WITH VARIOUS PLANT SYSTEMS
9.1 Fire Alarm System shall have required hardware to have interface with following plant
systems as specified in data Sheet via potential free contacts.
i) Public Alarm Announcement system
ii) Paging and plant communication systems
iii) Plant data network
iv) ISDN telephone exchange
v) Fire suppression system
vi) Clean agent system
vii) Fire & Gas detection system
9.2 Where ZFAP is required to carry out fire suppression functions, it shall be provided with the
following interfaces with fire suppression system unless specified otherwise.
i) Automatic signal for release of clean agent/CO2 release for protected area and
RELEASE audio/ Visual alarm for evacuation.
ii) Selector switches for primary or secondary clean agent/CO2 supply for each protected
area.
iii) Manual push button for discharge of clean agentlCO2 in each protected area. The
actual release of clean agent/ CO2 shall however be delayed by 30sec after the alarm.
iv) Clean agent/CO2 Discharge inhibit push button for each protected area.
v) Deluge valve activation push buttons, deluge valve test push buttons and deluge valve
activated status lamps.
vi) Firewater pumps start push buttons.
vii) Firewater pumps running indications.
Page 3320 of 3884

ENGINEERS FOR
fülf54-
in Govt of Inda Unclerlaking) FIRE DETECTION AND
viii) Shutdown signals to various air-handling units/Pressurization system relative to the

zone of fire.
10.0 PANEL CONSTRUCTION (CFAP, DGFAP, ZFAP, REPEATER)
10.1 All fire alarm Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type unless specified otherwise
and shall be fabricated out of minimum 2mm thick CRCA sheets and doors shall be
fabricated out of minimum 1.6mm CRCA sheets. The panel shall be naturally ventilated in
IP-41 enclosure protection as minimum.
The colour shade of final paint shall be 536 as per IS: 5, unless otherwise specified.
10.2 Equipment Mounting
10.2.1 All apparatus, display screen, instruments and indicating lamps mounted on the panel front
shall be flush mounting type. The external cabling shall not be terminated directly on the base
connector of PCBs but shall be terminated on separate terminal block. Further connection to
PCBs shall be as per manufacturer's standard. Routine calibration, adjustments, programming
and operation shall be accessible from the front of the panel without opening the door.
External cabling shall preferably be done from the rear.
10.2.2 Power supply system including VRLA battery bank shall be mounted inside the panel.
10.2.3 Doors shall be provided with pistol grip handle with lock. Lamps shall be provided inside the
panel to provide adequate light for maintenance of equipment.
10.2.4 Cable entry shall be from bottom unless otherwise specified in the data sheet. Terminal strip
shall be provided for incoming / outgoing cables.
10.3 Wiring and Terminals
10.3.1 Wiring within the panel shall be harnessed in slotted plastic raceways enclosed with cover.
Control connections shall be done with 660V grade PVC insulated wires having stranded
copper conductors. 1.5mm2 size of wire shall normally be used for circuits with control fuse
rating of 10A or less. Control wiring for electronic circuits shall be through ribbon cable or
through copper wire minimum of 0.5mm dia. Panels shall be supplied completely pre-wired,
such that only field termination shall be required at site before it is energized.
10.3.2 PCBs for identical functions shall be interchangeable. PCBs shall be plug in type having
pin/edge connectors. PCBs shall be suitable for use in tropical, humid and dusty environment.
These shall be protected with anti fungus treatment.
10.3.3 Cables shall be terminated on terminal blocks. Clamp type terminals shall be of spring-
loaded, stacking type, mounted on rails. Terminals shall be sized to accept, as a minimum
2.5mm2 cross section conductors. Not more than one conductor shall be terminated on the
outgoing nide of each terminal. At least 20 % spare terminals shall be provided in each panel
for termination of spare cores of cables.
10.4 Earthing
A common earth bar of minimum 25 mm x 3 mm. copper or equivalent aluminum shall be

provided throughout the length of the panel. All non-current carrying metallic parts of the
panel-mounted equipment shall be earthed. Flexible jumpers shall connect all doors and
movable parts to the earth bus. Two numbers earth lugs shall be provided outside the panel.
Page 3321 of 3884

, ENGINEERS FOR
$1g2-122--e-g INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0076 Rev. 5
1~1,i,c7›,..14-4.3, (A Govt of Intha Untle,tOk(o9) FIRE DETECTION AND
10.5 Name Plates / Warning plates
10.5.1 All nameplates for panel shall be engraved out of 3 ply (black-white- black) lamicoid sheets
or anodized aluminum. Back-engraved Perspex sheet nameplates will also be acceptable.
Engraving shall be done with square groove cutters. Hard paper or self-adhesive plastic tape
nameplates shall not be acceptable.
10.5.2 Labels shall be provided for every component on the cards, connecting wires as well as for
the terminals in the terminal strip inside the panel. Wiring diagram shall be pasted inside the
panel door as required for termination and maintenance.
10.5.3 Special warning plates shall be provided on all removable covers or doors giving access to
energized metallic parts above 24 volts.
10.6 Painting
10.6.1 All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased to remove mill scale, rust,
grease and dirt. Fabricated structures shall be pickled and then rinsed to remove any trace of
acid. The undersurface shall be made free from all imperfections before undertaking the
finishing coat.
10.6.2 After preparation of the undersurface, the panel shall be powder coated. The colour shade of
final paint shall be as approved by the Owner. The finished panels shall be dried in dust free
atmosphere. Panel finish shall be free from imperfections like pinholes, orange peels, run-off
paint etc.
10.6.3 All unpainted steel parts shall be zinc passivated or suitably treated to prevent rust-corrosion.
Moving elements shall be greased.
11.0 CABLE AND CABLE ACCESSORIES
11.1 Supply and laying of FA cables shall be as per the requirement specified in the MR/data
sheet. Vendor shall provide JBs for detectors, BGUs, exit signs, hooters etc.
11.2 Where supply and installation of field cabling is excluded from vendor' s scope, terminations
of all cables (supplied by both vendor/ Owner) at both ends shall be in vendor' s scope.
11.3 Bidder, as a part of integration and selection of fire alarm equipment, shall furnish detailed
specifications for loop/zone cables, data highway cables, cables for hooter/exit signs etc
giving details such as type of cables, number of pais, size of cable, inductance and
capacitance data, number of fibres/ connectors etc.
11.4 Data Highway Cables
11.4.1 Unless specified otherwise, vendor shall supply Copper cable/ FO type data highway cable to
suit system design and equipment specification. Copper cables, if supplied, shall be of
adequate size, twisted pair, PVC insulated, overall screened, PVC inner sheathed, armoured,
FRLS type PVC outer sheathed as the minimum requirement. Fibre Optic cables, if supplied,
shall be armoured, overall FRLS PVC outer sheathed and shall be as per ITU-T
recommendation as a minimum.
11.4.2 Vendor shall supply and install all hardware and cabling accessories as per data high way
design including modems, repeaters etc as part of the Fire Alarm system. Modems/ repeaters
shall be powered by the supply provided for DGFAPs / CFAP.
Page 3322 of 3884

k-71 ENGINEERS FOR
$'2-al OW5 INDIA LIMITED 6-51-0076 Rev. 5
>31,
- IA GoN of Indo undertakng) FIRE DETECTION AND
11.5 Cable Glands / Accessories
11.5.1 A11 cable glands/ lugs/ connectors as required for the equipment shall be included in vendor's
scope and shall be supplied along with the system, irrespective of whether installation is to be
performed by vendor or not.
11.5.2 All the cable glands for outdoor application shall be weatherproof, nickel-plated brass and
double compression type, whereas those for indoor application shall be single
compression type.
11.5.3 Cable glands for hazardous area equipments shall be flameproof, weatherproof and nickel-
plated brass double compression type.
12.0 AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
12.1 General Specifications
12.1.1 Detectors for conventional fire alarm system shall be conventional type. End of line resistor
shall be provided at the last detector in the zone. Detectors for microprocessor based
Analogue addressable FA system shall be addressable type. Detectors shall be plug-in type
and shall have twist lock action fitting. Multi-colour LEDs provided on the detectors shall
indicate Normal and Alarm state. Essential features of detectors are indicated as below.
12.1.2 Detectors shall be supplied with mounting bases. Mounting base shall be identical for all type
of detectors except special application detectors such as linear beam detectors etc. for
installation as well as cable connection. Detector housing (body and cover) shall be made up
of damage resistant, fire resistant polycarbonate and shall be suitable for either surface or
recess mounting. Detector base shall be mounted on Junction boxes having terminals

TECHNICALPart 6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

TECHNICALPart 6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICALPart 6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SCOPE OF WORK (ARCHITECTURAL)

OF PIPELINE LAYING & TERMINAL Document No.

PENNAR ENGINEERED BUILDING SYSTEM

K PHENIX CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGIES AHMEDABAD

PKM METAL BUILDINGS COMPANY PRIVATE

M SAXENA MARINE TECH (P) LTD NOIDA

N SUPER DISCO ISPAT PVT LTD NEW DELHI

O SUPERTECH (INDIA) PVT LTD NOIDA

15.0 ALUMINIUM COMPOSITE PANEL

A 3A COMPOSITES INDIA PVT LTD MUMBAI ALUCOBOND

B ALUBOND DACS INDIA PVT LTD MUMBAI ALUBOND

C EURO PANEL PRODUCTS PVT LTD MUMBAI EUROBOND

D SONIA PLASTICS PVT LTD NEW DELHI HYNADECOR

E VIVA COMPOSITE PANEL (P) LTD MEMBAI VIVA

5.5 Schedule of Rates for Architectural works

Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev. 1 Copyrights EIL – All rights reserved

Page 2400 of 3884

REF. DWG. NO. REFERENCE DRAWING TITLE

GROOVES UNDERNEATH ALL ALONG THE PERIPHERIES.

1 2 B A 10. ALL DOORS, GATES ETC. SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH FACILITY OF

FRL: FINISH ROAD LEVEL/

GUARD FALSE CEILING

+0.30 LVL. +0.30 LVL. SCHEDULE OF DOOR & WINDOWS

+3.00 LVL. +3.00 LVL.

+0.30 LVL. +0.30 LVL.

REV. DATE REVISIONS BY CHKD APPD PEM/PC

uqekyhx< fjQkbZujh fyfeVsM] vLkke

Page 2401 of 3884

REF. DWG. NO. REFERENCE DRAWING TITLE

A B C (b) 6MM THK WATER PROOF CEMENT PLASTER UNDERNEATH PROJECTION OF

UNDERDECK INSULATION FALSE CEILING

SCHEDULE OF DOOR & WINDOWS

RACK CONSOLE UPS BATTERY

1 2 3 4 5 6 REV. DATE REVISIONS BY CHKD APPD PEM/PC

uqekyhx< fjQkbZujh fyfeVsM] vLkke

Page 2402 of 3884

REF. DWG. NO. REFERENCE DRAWING TITLE

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES & LEVELS IN METRES.

A 3. ±0.00 INDICATES FINISHED APPROACH ROAD LEVEL NEAR THE

C A B C 6MM THK PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER SHALL BE PROVIDED ON R.C.C.

GROOVES UNDERNEATH ALL ALONG THE PERIPHERIES.

FRL: FINISH ROAD LEVEL/

TELECOM & SCADA SCHEDULE OF DOOR & WINDOWS

GROUND FLOOR PLAN

REV. DATE REVISIONS BY CHKD APPD PEM/PC

A uqekyhx< fjQkbZujh fyfeVsM] vLkke

Page 2403 of 3884

-11.1-111-1 I du-I I ulll

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 2404 of 3884

ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials

Structural Standards Committee

Convener: Mr. Rajan ji Srivastava

Members: Mr. J.K. Bhagchandani

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 2405 of 3884

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 2406 of 3884